PDF compression, OCR, web optimization using a watermarked ...

M.Phil (Mathematics) Annual System 

1. MPH-601 Research Methodology (Compulsory Paper) 

10(1) 

Time : 3 hours 

Theory : 80 marks 

Int. Assessment: 20 marks 

Optional Papers: A student will opt two papers either from Stream– A or from Stream– B. 

Stream-A Stream-B 

MPH-602(A) MPH-602(B) 

(ii) Continuum Mechanics and (ii) Advanced Functional Analysis 

Seismology 

MPH-603(A) MPH-603(B) 

(iii) Advanced Mathematical Methods (iii) Theory of Groups and 

Homological Algebra 

Teaching : 

(i) Four hour per week per paper. 

Note : 

(i) There will be four sections in each paper (compulsory as well as optional paper). 

NOTE :- Each paper of M.Phil. Mathematics will be of 100 marks. Theory of 80 marks and 

Internal Assessment of 20 marks in each paper. 

There will be eight questions for each paper and course contents of each paper will be divided into 

four sections. 

The paper-setter will set 8 questions for each paper with details as given in the respective syllabi. 

The examinees will be required to attempt 5 questions in all selecting at least one question from 

each section. 

PDF compression, OCR, web optimization using a watermarked evaluation copy of CVISION PDFCompressor

Each student will be required to give two seminars each of 50 marks on a topic to be chosen by a 

student in consultation of his/her M.Phil. Supervisor (who will be assigned to the student by the 

department). 

Note :- Duration of each paper will be 3 Hours. 

Pass Percentage : Internal Assessment 50% 

Theory 50% 

Seminars 50% 

Total 50% 

10(2) 


MPH-601 (Research Methodology) (Compulsory Paper) 

Note: Question paper consists of eight questions divided over four sections of the syllabus. 

The candidates are required to attempt five questions selecting at least one question from 

each section. 

Section – I (2 Questions) 

10(3) 

Time : 3 Hours 

Theory : 80 Marks 

Int. Assessment : 20 

Introduction of Research Methodology: Meaning of research, objectives of research, types of 

research, significance of research, research and scientific method, research process. 

Research Problem: Definition, necessity and techniques of defining research problem. 

Formulation of research problem. Objectives of research problem. 

Research Design: Meaning, need and features of good research design. Types of Research 

Designs. Synopsis design for research topic. 

Scientific Communications: Publishing Research Papers: 

a) Preliminaries, Format, Choosing Journal, Study of General guidelines for 

authors 

b) Title, Running Title 

c) Authors: Single and Multi authorship 

d) Writing Abstract 

e) Introduction section 

f) Formulation of problem, method of solution/Analytical proofs 

g) Result Section 

h) Figures; Design Principles, Legends, Table components, Graphs; Types, Style. 

i) Discussion Section: Format, Grammar Style, Content 

j) Acknowledgements 

k) References: Citation and styles of listing 

l) Selecting Keywords 

m) Submission of manuscript: Communication with the Editor, Handling Referees’ 

Comments, Galey Proofs 

Writing Review Articles, 

Section-II (Two Questions) 

Web Search: Internet Basics, Internal Protocols, Pre-requisites, Search Engines, Searching 

Hints, Using advanced search techniques 

Presentation: Poster and Oral. Presentation tools: Introduction to presentation tool, features and 

functions, creating presentation, customizing presentation, showing presentation. 

Study of Mathematical & Scientific Websites & Databases 

Writing of thesis: Format of a thesis; Review of literature, formulation; Writing methods, 

results; preparation of Tables, figures; writing discussion; writing conclusion; writing 

summary and synopsis; Reference citing and listing/Bibliography. 

Avoiding Plagiarism. 


Plan for an innovative project; plan for project proposal, compilation of proposal, selection 

of funding agency, submission of proposal, Report generation: significance, steps of report 

writing and its types. 

Section – III (2 Questions) 

Computer Applications: Introduction, operating System 

MS Office 2007: Word Basics, Mail Merge, Macros, Math Type, Equation Editor. 

MS Excel 2007: Excel Basics, Data Sort, Functions. 

MS Power Point: Power Point Basics, Animations 

LaTex 

Introduction: Input file structure; commands. 

Document preparation: class, type-size, type-style, footnote, section, bibliography, appendix, 

indexing. 

Mathematical text: subscript, superscript, symbols, formulae, equations, arrays & tables, figures 

(pictures, graphs). 

Presentation: fonts, environments, sizes, slides, output files (dvi, ps and pdf). 

Section – IV (2 Questions) 

MATLAB 

Using Command window: Input, output; edit of command lines; recalls from command history. 

Functions: User-defined functions: editing/saving codes (m files), arguments, compilation and 

execution, output/results, input, display. 

Familiarity with keywords (default names), defining built-in functions, 

Programming features and graphic characteristics. 

Expressions: constants, variables, operators, precedence, expressions, functions. 

Vectors, matrices & arrays: arithmetic and linear algebra. 

Programming: Flow control (branching): logical expressions; Loops: for, while; data structures; 

evaluation; debugging. 

Graphics: Plotting overview; editing plots; using plotting tools; basic plotting functions; mesh 

and surface plots; multiple plots, printing/exporting graphs. 

Files: Saving-in, opening, reading-from, writing-in, closing 

Interaction with MATLAB 7: practice through simple user-defined codes for common problems 

and developing programming skills. 

Project: To write code for a published research problem involving the use of numerical 

methods. 

10(4) 


Reference Books: 

1. Hunt, B.R Lipsman, R.L and Rosenberg, J.M (2003), A Guide to MATLAB, CUP 

2. Otto, S.R and Denier, J.P (2005), An Introduction to Programming and Numerical Methods 

in MATLAB; Springer 

3. Lamport, L. (1994) LaTeX, User’s Guide & Reference Manual, Addison-Wesley 

4. Mittelbach, F. et al. (2004) The LaTeX Companion, Addison-Wesley 

5. Gurumani, N. (2010), Scientific Thesis Writing and Paper Presentation, MJP Publishers 

6. Kothari, C.R. (2010), Research Methodology (Methods and Techniques), New Age 

International Publishers. 

7. Dahlberg, L. and McCaig, C. (2010), Practical Research and Evaluation, SAGE 

Publications India Pvt. Ltd. 

8. Saxena, S. (2010), A first course in Computers, Vikas Publishing house Pvt. Ltd. 

10(5) 


M.Phil. (Mathematics) 

MPH 602-A : Continuum Mechanics and Seismology 

10(6) 


Theory Marks : 80 

Internal Assessment : 20 

Note : Question paper will consist of eight questions divided into four sections as indicated in 

the syllabus. The candidates are required to attempt five questions selecting, at least one 

question from each section. 

Section – I (Two Questions) 

Solution of Elasticity problems by potential : The Homogenous Equations of Elasticity and the 

particular solutions. The Scalar and vector potential. Lame’s strain potential. The Galerkin Vector. 

Love’s Strain Function. Kelvin and Cerruate’s problems. The Neuber-Papkovich Representation. 

Boussinseq’s problem. 

Thick Cylinder and Spheres : Hollow Cylinder with Internal and External Pressures with Free and 

Fixed Ends. Hollow Spheres subjected to Internal and External Pressures. Thermal Stresses in Long 

Cylinders: The Cylinder is not free to deform longitudinally in case of Solid and Hollow Cylinder. 

Thermal Stresses for a Solid and Hollow Sphere. 

Section – II (Two Questions) 

Straight Simple Beams: The elementary theory of Beams, Pure Bending of Prismatical Bars, 

Bending of a Narrow Rectangular Centilever by an end load, Bending of a narrow rectangular 

Beam by a Uniform load, Centilever Prismatic Bar of irregular cross section subjected to a 

Transverse end force, curved Beams: 

Uniform Pressure Distributed over a Circular Area on the Surface of a Semi-Infinite Solid. Uniform 

Pressure Distributed over a Rectangular Area. Uniformly Distributed Vertical Pressure on Part of 

the Boundary of a Semi-Infinite Elastic Medium. Uniformly Distributed Vertical Pressure on Part 

of the Boundary of a Semi-Infinite Elastic Plate 

Section – III (Two Questions) 

Refraction seismology; Flat layer method, Dipping layer method, crusted structure. Reflection 

Seismology; Travel Time curves for reflections, intercept-slowness formulation for travel times, 

multichannel data geometry. 

Seismic waves in spherical earth, Ray paths and travel times, velocity distributions, travel time 

curve inversion, Body wave travel time studies, body wave phases, core phases. 

Anisotropic earth structure; Transverse isotropy & azimuthal anisotropy, anisotropy of minerals & 

rocks, anisotropy of composite structures, anisotropy in the lithosphere and the asthenosphere, 

anisotropy in mantle and core. 

Attenuation and anelasticity; wave attenuation, geometric spreading, multipathing, scattering, 

intrinsic attenuation, quality factor (Q), physical diffusion due to anelasticity, physical models for 

anelasticity. Density & temperature within earth, composition of mantle & core. 


Section – IV (Two Questions) 

Seismic Sources: Faulting sources, Equivalent Body forces, Elastostatics: Static displacement field 

due to a single force, static displacement field due to a force couple Static displacement field due to 

a double couple. 

Elastodynamics, Seismic moment tensor, Determination of faulting orientation: Stereographic 

projections, Focal mechanisms from surface waves. 

(Articles 8.1 to 8.6 from the book ‘Modern Global Seismology’ By T.Lay and T.C. Wallace). 

Recommended Books: 

1. A.S. Saada, Elasticity Theory and Applications. Pergamon Press. Inc. 1974, Relevant 

portion of Chpater IX and X, XII & XIII. 

2. Y.C. Fung, Foundations of Solid Mechanics, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 

1969. 

3. T.M. Atanackovic and A.Guran. Theory of Elasticity for Scientists and Engineers, 

Birkhauser, Boston, 1999. 

4. An Introduction to Seismology, Earthquakes and Earth Structure, Seth Stein and Michael 

Wysession. Blackwell Publishing Ltd., 2003. 

5. Modern Gobal Seismology, Thorne Lay and Torey C. Wallace, Academic Press, 1995. 

6. Introduction to Seismology, Peter M. Shearer, Cambridge University Press, 1999. 

10(7) 


MPH 603-A : Advanced Mathematical Methods 


10(8) 




Note: - Question paper consists of eight questions divided over four sections of the syllabus. 

The candidates are required to attempt five questions selecting at least one question from 

each section. 

Section-I (Two questions) 

Bessel functions review, Hankel’s function, modified Bessal functions, Ber and Bei functions, 

Kelvin functions, spherical Bessel functions, modified spherical Bessel functions. 

Legendre’s associated differential equations. Legendre’s associated functions Pn m (x) and Qn m (x), 

relations between Pn(x) and Pn m (x), recurrence relations and integral expression for associated 

Legendre functions. 

Dirac-delta function δ(x): various definitions and simple properties; 

Discontinuous functions related to delta function: unit step function, Heaviside unit step functions, 

signum function, boxcar function, impulse function. 

Section-II (Two questions) 

Solving non-homogeneous BVPs: Eigen-functions approach, Green’s functions: one-dimensional, 

GFs in higher dimensions, generalized functions, problems in unbounded regions. 

Solving nonlinear BVPs: Asympotic expansions; asymptopic sequences, expansions and series; 

method of matched expansions; method of multiple scales; perturbation, singularity, boundary 

layer, transition points. 

Section-III (Two questions) 

Classification of differential equations; Finite difference methods and approximations: Simple 

methods, general methods, higher order derivatives, multi-dimensional finite difference formulae; 

Basic concepts of finite difference theory: formulation, strategies,; Mixed derivatives, non-uniform 

mesh, higher order accuracy schemes for first & second order derivatives; 

Solution methods of finite difference equations: Elliptic equations, parabolic equations, hyperbolic 

equations and Burger’s equation. 

Section-IV (Two questions) 

Variational formulation and approximation of Boundary and initial value problems,;variational 

methods of approximation : Ritz method, method of weighted residuals, Galerkin method, the leastsquare 

method, the collocation method, the courant method; 

Finite element analysis of one dimensional problems : steady flow in a channel, problem of 

Couette flow, heat conduction problem. One dimensional fourth-order equation. Finite element 

analysis of two-domensional problems, using interpolation functions for the three-node triangular 

problems, two-dimensional finite elements and interpolation functions. 



1. E.D.Rainville, Special Functions 

2. J.W.Dettman (1962) Mathematical Methods in Physics and Engineering, McGraw Hill 

Book Company. 

3. J.D.Murray (1984) Asymptotic Analysis, Springer Verlag 

4. A.H.Nayfeh (1973) Perturbation Methods, Wiley, New York. 

5. J.D.(Cole (1968) ) Perturbation Methods in Applied Mathematics, Blaisdell Waltham, 

Mass. 

6. An Introduction to the finite element method, J.N.Reddy Mc Graw Hill International 

Editions –1985. 

7. Computational Fluid Dynamics, T.J.Chung, Cambrige University Press. 

8. Principles of Computational Fluid Dynamics; P.Wesseling, Springer-Verlag, 2000. 

10(9) 


M.Phil (Mathematics) 

MPH-602 (B) Advanced Functional Analysis 




Section-I (Two Questions) 

Completely continuous operators, finite dimensional operators, a transformation that is bounded but 

not completely continuous, a type of transformation that is always completely continuous, further 

properties of completely continuous transformations (scope as in sections 17.5, 17.6 of the book by 

Bachman and Narici) 

Spectral Notions: spectra and the resolvent set, the spectra of two particular transformations, 

approximate proper values (scope as in Chapter 18 of the book by Bachman and Narici ) 

Section -II (Two Questions) 

Introduction to Banach Algebras: Analytic vector-valued functions, Normed and Banach 

algebras, Banach algebras with identity, compactness of the spectrum, an analytic function –the 

resolvent operator, spectral radius and the spectral mapping theorem for polynomials, the Gelfand 

theory, weak topologies and the Gelfand topology ,topological vector spaces and operator 

topologies (scope as in Chapter 19 of the book by Bachman and Narici) 

Section-III (Two Questions) 

Adjoints and sesquilinear functionals: the Adjoint operator, Adjoints and closures, Adjoints of 

bounded linear transformations in Hilbert spaces, the Cayley transform, sesquilinear functionals, 

bounded sesquilinear functionals (scope as in Chapter 20 of the book by Bachman and Narici) 

Some spectral results for normal and completely continuous operators: A new expression for the 

norm of A�L(X,X),normal transformations, some spectral results for completely continuous 

operators, numerical range, the Fredhlom alternative theorem and the spectrum of a completely 

continuous transformation (scope as in Chapter 21 and Appendix to Chapter 21 of the book by 


Orthogonal Projections and Positive Definite operators: properties of Orthogonal Projections, 

product of Projections, Positive operators, sums and differences of Orthogonal Projections, the 

product of positive operators (scope as in Chapter 22 of the book by Bachman and Narici) 

Section-IV (Two Questions) 

Square root and Spectral Decomposition theorem: Square root of Positive operators, Spectral 

theorem for bounded, normal, finite dimensional operators(scope as in chapter 23 of the book by 


Spectral Decomposition theorem for Completely continuous normal operators ,Spectral theorem for 

bounded self –adjoint operators, Spectral theorem for bounded normal operators, , Spectral 

theorem for unbounded self –adjoint operators (scope as in relevant parts of Chapters 24,25,28 and 

29 of the book by Bachman and Narici) 

Recommended text: 

Bachman,G. and Narici,L. : Functional Analysis, Academic Press,1966 

References: 

1. Kreyszig,E.: Introductory Functional Analysis with Applications,John Wiley And Sons,New York 

1978 

2. Simmons,G.F . : Introduction to Topology and Modern Analysis, McGraw Hill Book Co., New 

York, 1963 

3. Maddox, I.J. : Elements of Functional Analysis, Cambridge University Press, Second Edition, 1988 

4. Taylor, A.E. : Introduction to Functional Analysis, John Wiley & Sons, 1958 

10(10) 



MPH-603 (B) Theory of Groups and Homological Algebra 

10(11) 




Section-I (2/10) 

Linear groups. Degree of a linear group. Reducible and irreducible linear groups. 

Decomposable and indecomposable linear groups. Equivalent linear groups. Masche’s 

Theorem. The ring of linear transformations. Schur’s Lemma. Representation of groups. 

Character of a representation. Equivalent and inequivalent representations. Irreducible 

characters. The degree of an irreducible character. Orthoginality of irreducible characters. The 

number of irreducible characters. The centre of a group algebra of a finite group G. 

Section-II (2/10) 

Hall subgroups. Schur-splitting Theorem. Huppert Theorem. Sylow basis of a finite solvable 

group. Normalizer of a Sylow basis. The p i q j theorem. Representations of direct sums. Induced 

representations. Frobenius Reciprocity Theorem. Generalized induced characters. Character 

tables of finite groups. 

Section-III (3/10) 

Direct sums and direct products and their universal property. Free modules. Exact sequences. 

Commutative diagrams of R-module homomorphism. Five Lemma for commutative diagrams. 

Modules of the homomorphisms. Tensor product of modules. Additive and Abelian categories. 

Functors. Covariant and contravariant funtors. Additive functors. Left exact, right exact and 

exact functors. The functor Hom and Tensor. Projective modules and projective basis theorem. 

Injective modules. Baer’s criterion for an R-module to be injective. Divisible R-modules. 

Imbedding of an R-module into an injective R-module. 

Section-IV (3/10) 

Ker-coker sequences. Homology of the complexes. Snake’s Lemma. Connecting 

homomorphisms. Homotopy and chain maps. Projective and injective resolutions and 

comparison Theorem. Derived functors. Horse-shoe Lemma for projective and injective 

resolutions. Torsion and extension functors. 


1. W. R. Scott. Group Theory 

2. L.R. Vermani An Elementary approach to Homological Algebra 

Reference Books : 

1. I.D. Macdonald The Theory of Groups 

2. P.J. Hilton and U. Stammbach A course in Homological Algebra 

3. D.G. Northcott An introduction to Homological Algebra 


STATISTICS 

Scheme of Examination of B.A/B. Sc three year degree course w.e.f. 2012-2013 

There will be two theory papers of Statistics and Practical in B.A / B. Sc three year degree 

course Part-I, II & III consisting of two semesters each. Practical examinations will be held 

annually (based on the constituent semesters). 

B.A /B. Sc Part-I 

(Semester-I) 

Marks 

Paper Code/Time Nomenclature B.A B. Sc 

I ST-101/3 hours Statistical Methods-I 28+7* 40+10* 

II ST-102/3 hours Probability Theory 28+7* 40+10* 

__ __ Practical __ 

__ 

(Semester-II) 

I ST-201/3 hours Statistical Methods-II 28+7* 40+10* 

II ST-202/3 hours Probability Distributions 28+7* 40+10* 

III ST-203/3 hours Practical 60** 100** 

B.A /B. Sc Part-II 

(Semester-III) 

I ST-301/3 hours Elementary Inference 28+7* 40+10* 

II ST-302/3 hours Sample Surveys 28+7* 40+10* 

__ __ Practical __ __ 

(Semester-IV) 

I ST-401 Parametric and Non- 

3 hours parametric Tests 28+7* 40+10* 

II ST-402 Design of Experiments 28+7* 40+10* 

3 hours 

III ST-403 Practical 60** 100** 

3 hours 

10(12) 


B.A /B. Sc Part-III 

(Semester-V) 

I ST-501/ 3 hours Applied Statistics 28+7* 40+10* 

II ST-502/3 hours Numerical Methods and 

Fundamentals of Computers 28+7* 40+10* 

__ __ Practical __ __ 

(Semester-VI) 

I ST-601 Statistical Quality Control 28+7* 40+10* 

3 hours 

II ST-602 Operations Research 28+7* 40+10* 

3 hours 

III ST-603 Practical 60** 100** 

3 hours 

* Marks of Internal Assessment will be based on the following criteria: 

(i) Two Handwritten Assignments : 10% 

(1 st Assignment after one month & 

2 nd Assignment after two months) 

(ii) One Class Test : 5% 

(One period duration) 

(iii) Attendance : 5% 

Marks for attendance will be given as under: 

(1) 91% onwards : 5 Marks 

(2) 81% to 90% : 4 Marks 

(3) 75% to 80% : 3 Marks 

(4) 70% to 75% : 2 Marks*** 

(5) 65% to 70% : 1 Mark*** 

**Practical Examinations will be held annually in the even semesters i.e. IInd, IVth & VIth 

semesters. The distribution of marks will be as under: 

B.A B. Sc 

Practical : 48 80 

Class Record : 06 10 

Viva-Voce : 06 10 

***For students engaged in co-curricular activities of the colleges and on authenticated 

medical grounds duly approved by the concerned Principal. 

10(13) 


B.A/B. Sc-I Semester-I 

10(14) 

Paper-I (ST-101) 

Time: 3 Hours M.M.:B. Sc: 40+10* 

B.A: 28+7* 

*Internal Assessment 

Statistical Methods-I 

Note: There will be nine questions in all. Question No.1 will be compulsory 

covering whole of the syllabus and comprising 5 to 8 short answer t ype questions. 

Rest of the eight questions will be set from the four units uniformly i.e. two from 

each unit. The candidate will be required to attempt five questions in all selecting 

one question from each unit and the compulsory one. All the questions will carry 

equal marks except the compulsory question, the distribution of marks for which 

will be as follows:- 

B.Sc.8 marks and B.A. 6 marks. 

UNIT-I 

Introduction of Statistics: Origin, development, definition, scope, uses and 

limitations. 

Types of Data: Qualitative and quantitative data, nominal and ordinal data, time 

series data, discrete and continuous data, frequency and non-frequency data. 

Collection and Scrutiny of Data: Collection of primary and secondar y data- its 

major sources including some government publications, scrutiny of data for 

internal consistency and detectio n of errors of recording, classification and 

tabulation of data. 

UNIT-II 

Presentation of Data: Frequenc y distribution and cumulative frequenc y 

distribution, diagrammatic and graphical presentation of data, construction of bar, 

pie diagrams, histograms, frequency polygon, frequency curve and ogives. 

Measures of Central Tendency and Location: Arithmetic mean, median, mode, 

geometric mean, harmonic mean; partition values-quartiles, deciles, percentiles 

and their graphical location along with their properties, applications, merits and 

demerits. 

UNIT-III 

Measures of Dispersion: Concept of dispersion, characteristics for an ideal 

measure of dispersio n. Absolute and relative measures based on: range, inter 

quartile range, quartile deviation, coefficient of quartile deviation, Mean 

deviation, coefficient of mean deviation, standard deviation ( �), coefficient of 

variation and properties of these measures. 


Moments, Skewness and Kurtosis: Moments about mean and about any point and 

derivation of their relationships, effect of change of origin and scale on moments, 

Sheppard’s correction for moments (without derivation), Charlier’s checks; 

Coefficients of Skewness and Kurtosis with their interpretations. 

UNIT-IV 

Theory of Attributes: S ymbolic notations, dichotomy of data, class frequencies, 

order of class frequencies, consistenc y of data, independence and association of 

attributes, Yule’s coefficient of association and coefficient of colligatio n. 

Books recommended 

S. No. Title of Book Name of author Publisher 

Applied Statistics Neter J., Wasserman W., Allyn & Bacon, 

& Whitmore G.A. Inc. 

2. Applied General Croxton F.E., Cowden Prentice Hall 

Statistics D.J. & Kelin S. 

3. Fundamental of Goon A.M., Gupta M.K., World Press, 

Statistics Vol. I Dasgupta B. Calcutta 

4. Statistics Johnson R. Wiley Publishers 

5. Basic Statistics Aggarwal B.L. New Age 

International 

6. Fundamentals of Gupta S.C.& Sultan Chand & 

Mathematical Kapoor V.K. Sons 

Statistics 

7. Programmed Aggarwal B.L. New Age 

Statistics International 

An Introduction To G. Udny, Kendal M.G Charles Griffin 

Theory of Statistics and co. 

10(15) 


B.A/B. Sc-I Semester-I 

10(16) 

Paper-II (ST-102) 


B.A: 28+7* 

* Internal Ass essment 

Probability Theory 









UNIT-I 

Concepts in Probability: Random experiment, trial, sample point, sample space, 

operation of events, exhaustive, equally likely and independent events; Definitio n 

of probabilit y-classical, relative frequency, statistical and axiomatic app roach. 

UNIT-II 

Conditional probabilit y. Addition and multiplication laws of probabilit y and their 

extension to n events. Boole’s inequality; Ba ye’s theorem and its applications. 

UNIT-III 

Random Variable and Probability Functions: Definition of random variable, 

discrete and continuous random variable, probab ilit y function, probabilit y mass 

function and probability densit y functions, distribution function and its properties, 

functions of random variables, joint, marginal and conditional probability 

distribution function. 

Mathematical Expectation: Definition and its properties-moments, addition and 

multiplication theorem of expectation. Conditional expectation and conditional 

variance. 

UNIT-IV 

Generating Functions: Moments generating function, cumulant generating 

function, probabilit y generating function alo ng with their properties. 




1. Fundamentals of Gupta S.C.& Sultan Chand 

Mathematical Kapoor V.K. & Sons 

Statistics 

2. Probability for Edward P.J., Ford J.S. Prentice Hall 

Statistical Decision and Lin 

Making 

3. Elementary David S. Oxford Press 

Probability 

4. Introduction to Hoel P.G. Asia Pub. House 

Mathematical 

Statistics 

5. New Mathematical Bansi Lal & Satya Prakashan 

Statistics Arora S. 

6. Introduction to Hogg and Craig Prentice Hall 

Mathematical Statistics 

10(17) 


B.A/B. Sc-I Semester-II 

10(18) 



B.A: 28+7* 

* Internal Assessment 

Statistical Methods-II 









UNIT-I 

Correlation: Concept and types of correlation, methods of finding correlation - 

scatter diagram, Karl Pearson’s Coefficient of correlation (r), its properties, 

coefficient of correlation for a bivariate frequency d istribution. Rank correlatio n 

with its derivatio n, its merits and demerits, limits of rank correlation coefficient, 

tied or repeated ranks. 

UNIT-II 

Curve Fitting: Principle of least squares, fitting of straight line, second degree 

parabola, power curves of the t ype Y=aX b , exponential curves of the t ypes Y=ab X 

and Y=ae b X . 

UNIT-III 

Linear Regression: Two lines of regression, regression coefficients, properties of 

regression coefficients, angle between two regression lines, standard error of 

estimate obtained from regression line, correlation coefficient between observed 

and estimated values, distinction between correlation and regression. 

UNIT-IV 

Multiple Regressions for Three variables: Plane of regression, properties of residuals, 

variance of the residual. Multiple and partial correlation coefficients: coefficient 

of multiple correlation and its properties, coefficient of partial correlation and its 

properties, multiple correlation in terms of total and partial correlations 

coefficient of determination. 




1. Introduction to Mood A.M., Grayb ill McGraw Hill 

Theory of F.A. & Boes D.C. 

Statistics 



3. Basic Statistical Cooke, Cramar & Clarke Chapman & Hall 

Computing 

4. Statistical Methods Snedecor G.W. & Lowa State Uni. 

Cochran W.G. Press 

5. Fundamentals of Gupta S.C.& Sultan Chand & 

Mathematical Kapoor V.K. Sons 

Statistics 

10(19) 


B.A/B. Sc-I Semester-II 

10(20) 



B.A: 28+7* 


Probability Distributions 









UNIT-I 

Bernoulli distribution and its moments, Binominal distribution: Moments, 

recurrence relation for the moments, mean deviation about mean, mode, moment 

generating function (m.g.f), additive property and recurrence relation for the 

probabilities of Binominal distribution. 

UNIT-II 

Poisson distribution: Poisson distribution as a limiting case of Binomial 

distribution, moments, mode, recurrence relation for moments, m.g.f., additive 

property of independent Poisso n variates. Negative Binominal distribution: m.g.f. , 

deduction of moments of negative binominal distribution from those of binominal 

distribution. Geometric distribution: moments and m.g.f. 

UNIT-III 

Continuous uniform distribution: Moments, m.g.f., and mean deviation. Gamma 

distribution: m.g.f., and additive property. Exponential distribution: m.g.f., 

moments and lack of memory. 

UNIT-IV 

Normal distribution as a limiting form of binominal distribution, chief 

characteristics of Normal distribution; mode, median, m.g.f. and moments of 

Normal Distribution, A linear combination of independent normal variates, points 

of inflexion, mean deviation about mean, area property of Normal distribution, 

importance and fitting of normal distribution. 




Statistics:A Bhat B.R., New Age 

Beginner’s Srivenkatramana T. & International 

Text Vol. II Rao Madhava K.S. 

2. Fundamentals of Gupta S.C. & Sultan chand 


Statistics 

3. Introduction to Kapoor & Sexena. Schand 

Mathematical 

Statistics 

4. Statistics Johnson R. Wiley 

Publishers 

5. Mathematical Freund’s J.E. Prentice Hall 

Statistics With 

Applications 

10(21) 


B.A/B. Sc-I 

10(22) 

Paper-III (Practical ST-203) 

Time: 3 Hours Max. Marks: B. Sc: 100 

Practical 

Note: Five questions will be set. The candidate will be required to attempt 

any three. 

B.A: 60 

1. To construct frequency distributions using exclusive and inclusive methods 

2. Representation of data using Bar and pie diagrams 

3. Representation of data using Histogram, Frequency Polygo n, Frequenc y 

Curve and Ogives. 

4. To toss a coin at least 100 times and plot a graph of heads with respect to 

number of tosses. 

5. To compute various measures of central tendency and dispersion. 

6 To obtain first four moments for the given grouped frequency distribution. 

7 To apply Charlier’s checks while computing the moments for a given 

frequency distribution. 

8. To obtain moments applying Sheppard’s correction. 

9. To obtain various coefficients of skewness and kurtosis. 

10. To discuss the association of attributes for a 2x2 contingency table using 

Yule’s coefficient of association and colligation. 

11. To compute Karl Pearson’s coefficient of correlation for given bivariate 

frequency distribution. 

12. To find Spearman’s rank correlation coefficient for given data. 

13. To fit the straight line for the given data on pairs of observations. 

14. To fit the second degree curve for the given data. 

15. 

b 

To fit the curve of the t ype Y � aX for the given data on pairs of 

observations. 

16. To obtain the regression lines for given data. 

19 To compute partial and multiple correlation coefficients for the given 

trivariate data. 

20. To obtain plain of regression for the given trivariate data. 

21. To fit binomial distribution to given data. 

22. To fit Poisson distribution to given data. 

23. To fit normal distribution to given distribution using area under the 

normal curve. 

24. To fit normal distribution to given distribution using method of ordinates. 

Distribution of marks: 

B. Sc. B.A 

Class Record: 10 06 

Viva Voce: 10 06 

Practical: 80 48 


B.A/B. Sc-II Semester-III 

10(23) 



B.A: 28+7* 

* Internal As sessment 

Elementary Inference 









UNIT-I 

Statistical Estimation: Parameter and statistic, Basic concept of sampling 

distribution. Point and interval estimate of a parameter, concept of bias and 

standard error of an estimate. Standard errors of sample mean, sample proportion, 

standard deviation, Properties of a good estimator: Unbiasedness, Efficiency, 

Consistency and Sufficiency (definition and illustrations). 

UNIT-II 

Methods of Estimation: Method of moments, method of maximum likelihood and 

its properties (without proof). Estimation of parameters of Binomial, Poisson and 

Normal distributions 

UNIT-III 

Testing of Hypotheses: Null and alternative hypotheses. Simple and composite 

hypotheses, critical region, level of significance, one tailed and two tailed testing, 

Types of errors, BCR, Neyman-Pearson Lemma, Test of simple hypothesis against 

a simple alternative in case of Binomial, Poisson and Normal distributions. 

UNIT-IV 

Large Sample Tests: Testing of a single mean, single proportion, difference of 

two means and two proportions. Fisher’s Z transformation. Determination of 

confidence interval for mean, variance and proportion. 




Statistics:A Hughes A. & Addision Wesley 

Foundation For Grawoig D. 

Analysis 

A First Course on Kale B.K. Narosa 

Parametric 

Inference 

3. Introduction to Mood A.M., Grayb ill McGraw Hill 

Theory of Statistics F.A. & Boes D.C. 

4. Introduction to Hoel P.G. Asia Pub. House 

Mathematical 

Statistics 

5. Mathematical Freund’s J.E. Prentice Hall 

Statistics With 

Applications 

6. Introduction to Hogg and Craig Prentice Hall 

Mathematical 

Statistics 

10(24) 


B.A/B. Sc-II Semester-III 

10(25) 



B.A: 28+7* 


Sample Surveys 









UNIT-I 

Concepts of census and sample survey, basic concepts in sampling. Sampling and 

Non-sampling errors. Principal steps invo lved in a sample survey; bias, precisio n 

and accuracy, advantages of sampling over complete census, limit ations of 

sampling, different methods of data collection. 

UNIT-II 

Basic sampling methods: Simple random sampling (SRS) with and without 

replacement, use of random number tables, estimation of mean and variance in 

case of SRS. Simple random sampling of attributes, size of simple random sample. 

UNIT-III 

Stratified random sampling, estimation of populatio n mean, variance of the 

estimate of population mean in stratified random sampling, allocation of sample 

size, proportional allocation, optimum allocation. Comparison of Stratified 

random sampling with SRS. 

UNIT-IV 

Systematic random sampling, estimation of mean and variance. Comparison of 

Systematic random sampling with SRS and Stratified random sampling. 



1. Sampling Cochran W.G. Wiley Publishers 

Techniques 

2. Sampling Theory Des Raj and Chandok Narosa 


Sample Theory of Sukhatme et. all Lowa State Uni. 

Surve ys with Press & IARS 

Applications 

4. Surve y Sampling Mukhopadhya y P. Narosa 

Publishing 

Societ y 

5. Sampling Daroga Singh & New age 

Techniques Chaudhry, F.S International 

10(26) 


B.A/B. Sc-II Semester-IV 

10(27) 



B.A: 28+7* 


Parametric and Non-parametric tests 









UNIT-I 

Chi-square distribution: Definition, derivation, moment generating function, 

cumulant generating function, mean, mode, skewness, additive property, 

conditions for the validit y, chi-square test for goodness of fit. Contingenc y table, 

coefficient of co ntingency, test of independence of attributes in a contingenc y 

table. 

UNIT-II 

Student’s ‘t’ and Snedecor's 'F' statistics: Definition and derivation of 

Student’s ‘t’, constants of t-distribution, limiting form of t-distribution. 

Definition & derivation of Snedcor’s F-distribution, constants of F-distribution, 

mode of F-distribution. Relationship between t, f and chi-square distribution. 

UNIT-III 

Testing for the mean and variance of univariate normal distribution, testing of 

equalit y of two means and testing of equalit y of two variances of two univariate 

normal distributions. Testing for the significance of sample correlation coefficient 

in sampling from bivariate normal distribution. 

UNIT-IV 

Nonparametric Tests: Definition of order statistics. Sign test for univariate and 

bivariate distribution, run test, median test, Kolmogorov-Smirnov one sample test, 

Kolmogorov-Smirnov two sample test, Mann Whitney U-test (only applications 

without derivation). 




1. Introduction to Feller W. Wiley Publisher 

Probability and 

Its Application 

2. Fundamentals of Goon A.M., Gupta M.K. World Press 

Statistics, Vol. I & Dasgupta B. Calcutta 

3. Random Variable Cramer H. Cambridge Uni. 

and Probability Press 

Distribution 

4. Fundamentals of Gupta S.C. & Sultan Chand 


Statistics 

5. Practical W.J. Conover Wiley Publisher 

Nonparametric 

10(28) 


B.A/B. Sc-II Semester-IV 

10(29) 



B.A: 28+7* 


Design of Experiments 









UNIT-I 

Analysis of variance (ANOVA): Definition and assumptions for ANOVA. 

Analysis of variance for one-way classification and two-way classifications for 

fixed effect models with one observation per cell. 

UNIT-II 

Introduction to design of experiments, terminology: experiment, treatment, 

experimental unit, blocks, experimental error, replication, precision, efficienc y of 

a design, need for design of experiments, size and shape of plots and blocks. 

Fundamental principles of design: randomization, replication and local control. 

UNIT-III 

Completely randomized design (CRD), Randomized Block Design (RBD), their 

layout, statistical analysis, applications, advantages and disadvantages. Efficiency 

of RBD relative to CRD. 

UNIT-IV 

Latin square design (LSD): Layout, statistical analysis, applications, merits and 

de-merits of LSD. Factorial designs: Definition, advantages and disadvantages. 




1. Design and Analysis Das M.N. & Giri Springer Verlage 

Of Experiments 

2. Linear Models Searle S.R. John Wiley & 

Sons 

3. Linear Estimation Joshi D.D. Wiley Eastern 

And Design of 

Experiments 

4. Fundamentals of Gupta S.C. &. Sultan Chand 

Applied Statistics Kapoor V.K. & Sons 

10(30) 


B.A/B. Sc-II 

10(31) 



Practical 


any three. 

B.A: 60 

1. To apply large sample test of significance for single proportion and 

difference of two proportions and obtained their confidence intervals. 

2. To apply large sample test of significance for single mean and to obtained 

confidence interval. 

3. To apply large sample test of significance for difference between two 

means and standard deviations. 

4. To apply t-test for testing single mean and difference between means and to 

obtain their confidence intervals. 

5. To apply paired t-test for difference between two means. 

6 To apply Chi-square test for goodness of fit. 

7 To apply Chi-square test for independence of attributes. 

8. To apply test of significance of sample correlation coefficient. 

9. To apply F-test for testing difference of two variances. 

10. To apply sign test for given data. 

11. To apply Run test for given data. 

12. To apply Median test for given data. 

13. To apply Mann Whitne y U-test for given data. 

14. To find standard error of estimate of population mean in case of SRSWR & 

SRSWOR and comparison of these estimates. 

15. To find standard error of estimate of population mean in case of stratified 

random sampling. 

16. To find standard error of estimate of population mean in case of 

systematic sampling. 

19 To perform ANOVA in case of CRD and test whether the 

treatments/varieties are equally effective. 

20. To perform ANOVA for an RBD. 

21. To perform ANOVA for an LSD. 


B. Sc. B.A 





Time: 3 Hours 

B.A/B. Sc-III Semester-V 

Applied Statistics 

10(32) 


M.M.:B. Sc: 40+10* 

B.A: 28+7* 










UNIT-I 

Index Number: Definition, problems involved in the construction of index 

numbers, calculation of index numbers-simple aggregate method, weighted 

aggregates method, simple average of price relatives, weighted average of price 

relatives, link relatives, chain indices, value index numbers, price and quantity 

index numbers. 

UNIT-II 

Laspeyre’s, Paasche’s, Marshall-Edgeworth and Fisher’s index numbers, time and 

factor reversal tests of index numbers, consumer price index number and its uses. 

Base shifting, splicing and deflating of index numbers. 

UNIT-III 

Time Series Analysis: Definitio n, components of time series-trend, seasonal 

variations, c yclic variations, irregular component, illustrations, additive and 

multiplicative models, determination of trend: graphic method, semi-averages 

method, method of curve fitting b y principle of least squares, moving average 

method. Analysis of seasonal fluctuations, construction of seasonal indices using 

method of simple averages, ratio to trend method and ratio to moving average 

method. 

UNIT-IV 

Demographic methods: Sources of demographic data-census, register, adhoc 

survey, hospital records, measurement of mortalit y, crude death rate, specific 

death rate, standardized death rates, complete life tables and its main features, 

assumptions, descriptions and construction of life tables, uses of life table s, 

stationary and stable population, measurement of fertilit y-crude birth rate, general 

fertility rate, specific fertilit y rate, total fertilit y rate, measurement of populatio n 

growth, gross reproduction rate, net reproduction rate. 






2. Demography Cox P.R. Cambridge Uni. 

Press 

3. Technical Ramakumar R. New Age 

Demography International 



10(33) 


B.A/B. Sc-III Semester-V 

10(34) 



B.A: 28+7* 


Numerical Methods and Fundamentals of Computers 









UNIT-I 

Numerical Methods: Concept of interpolation and extrapolatio n, difference 

tables, methods of interpolation, Newton’s formula for forward and backward 

interpolation with equal intervals, Lagrange’s method of interpolation, Divided 

differences. 

UNIT-II 

Numerical integration, General quadrature formula for equidistant ordinates, 

Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 

UNIT-III 

rd 

1/3 and 

th 

3/8 formulae. 

Basics of Computer: Introduction, origin, development, uses and limitation of 

computers. Types of computers, computer structure, input-unit, CPU, output unit, 

secondary storage, High Level and low level languages, compiler and interpreter. 

Computer Arithmetic: Floating point representation of numbers, arithmetic 

operations with normalized floating point numbers. Number systems- Binary, 

decimal, octal and hexadecimal number systems and their conversions into each 

other. Binary arithmetic’s, (Addition, subtraction, multiplication & division). 

UNIT-IV 

Flow charts and Algorithms: Concepts of flow chart, algorithm and programming. 

Flow charts and algorithms for the following: Mean, Standard Deviatio n, 

Coefficient of Correlation, Straight line fitting. Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 

and 3/8 t h rules. 




1. Computer Sinha P.K. BPB Publication 

Fundamentals 

2. Introductory Sastr y S.S. Prentice Hall 

Methods of 

Numerical 

Analysis 

3. Computer Based Krishnamurthy E.V. Affiliated East 

Numerical & Sen S.K. West Press 

Algorithms 

4. Computer Oriented Rajaraman V. Prentice Hall 

Numerical Methods 

10(35) 


B.A/B. Sc-III Semester-VI 

10(36) 


Time: 3 Hours M.M.:B.Sc: 40+10* 

B.A: 28+7* 


Statistical Quality Control 









UNIT-I 

Statistical Quality Control: Meaning and uses of SQC, causes of variations in 

quality, product and process control, control charts, 3-� control limits, control 

chart for variables- X and R chart, criteria for detection of lack of control in X & 

R Charts, Interpretation of X & R charts. 

UNIT-II 

Control chart for standard deviation (� chart), control charts for attributes: ‘p’ 

chart and ‘c’ chart, Concept of 6- � limits. 

UNIT-III 

Acceptance sampling : Problem of lot acceptance, stipulation of good and bad 

lots, producer’s and consumers risks, single and double sampling plans, their OC 

functions, concepts of AQL, LTPD, AOQL, average amount of inspection and ASN 

function. 

UNIT-IV 

Demand Analysis : Laws of demand and supply, price elasticit y of demand, 

demand function with constant price elasticity, partial and cross elasticities of 

demand, types of data required for estimating elasticities: family budget data, time 

series data- Leontief’s and Pigous’s methods to estimate demand functions. 

Engel’s law of income and expenditure, Pareto’s Law of income distribution, 

curves of concentration, Lorenz curve and Gini’s coefficient. 




1. Statistical Qualit y Grant E.L. McGraw Hill 

Control 

2. Statistical Methods Cowden D.J. Asia Pub. 

in Qualit y Control Societ y 

3. Statistical Theory Brownlee K.A. John Wiley & 

and Methodology Sons 

in Science & 

Engineering 

4. Engineering Bowker H.A. & Prentice Hall 

Statistics Liberman G.T. 



6. Fundamentals of Goon A.M., Gupta M.K. World Press 

Statistics, Vol. II & Dasgupta B. Calcutta 

10(37) 


Time: 3 Hours 

B.A/B. Sc-III Semester-VI 

Operations Research 

10(38) 


M.M.:B. Sc: 40+10* 

B.A: 28+7* 





each unit. The candidate will be required to attempt five questions in all selectin g 





UNIT-I 

Objective of O.R., nature and definitions of O.R., Scope of O.R., Meaning and 

necessit y of O.R. models, classification of O.R. models, Advantages & 

disadvantages of O.R. models. Steps in model formulation, principles of modeling. 

Characteristics of a good model, Allocation problems. 

UNIT-II 

Linear programming problem (LPP): Definition, objective function, constraints, 

graphical solution of L.P.P., limitations of graphical method, Simplex method to 

solve L.P.P., concept of initial basic feasible solution, computation procedure for 

Simplex method. 

UNIT-III 

Artificial variable techniques: Big-M method, Two -phase method. Duality in 

Linear Programming; Concept of dualit y, Fundamental properties of dualit y. 

UNIT-IV 

Transportation Problem (T.P.): Formulation, Basic feasible solution. Different 

methods to find initial feasible solution: North-West corner rule, Row minima 

method, column minima method, Matrix minima method (Least cost entry method), 

Vogel’s Approximation method (or Unit cost penalt y method). UV-method (Modi's 

method) for finding the optimum solution of T.P. 




1. Operations Hillier F.S. & Tata McGraw 

Research Lieberman G.J. Hill 

2. Linear Hadley G. Narosa 

Programming 

3. Operations Taha H.A. Macmillan Pub. 

Research: An Co. 

Introduction 

4. Operations Goel B.S. & Mittal S.K. Pragati 

Research Prakashan 

5. Operations Sharma S.D. KedarNath & 

Research Co. 

6. Operations Sharma J.K. Macmillan Pub. 

Research 

10(39) 


B.A/B. Sc-III 

10(40) 



Practical 

B.A: 60 


any three. 

1. To construct X and R-chart, and comment on the state of control of the 

process. 

2. To construct p-chart and d-chart, and comment on the state of control of the 

process. 

3. To obtain control limits for number of defects and comment on the state of 

control plotting the appropriate chart. 

4. To calculate price and quantit y index numbers using the formulae given by 

Laspyre, Paasche, Marshal-Edgeworth and Fisher. 

5. To obtain cost of living index numbers for the given data using 

(i)Aggregate Expenditure Method. (ii) Family Budget Method 

6 To test the given data whether the formulae given by Laspyre, Paasche, 

Marshal-Edgeworth and Fisher, satisfy reversal tests. 

7 To work out trends using curve fitting method for given data. 

8. To work out trends using moving average method for given data. 

9. To obtain seasonal variation indices using simple average method. 

10. To obtain seasonal variation indices using ratio to moving average method. 

11. To calculate the crude and standardized death rates of the population 

using Direct Method and Indirect Method regarding one of the populations 

as standard population. 

12. To calculate the following for the given data 

CDR, CBR, Sex/Age SDR, GFR, TFR, GRR, NRR. 

13. To complete the given incomplete life table by computing various 

elements of life table. 

14. To interpolate the required value for the given data using Newton’s 

Forward/backward interpolation formula for equal intervals. 

15. To interpolate the required value for the given data of using Newton’s 

divided difference and Lagrange’s interpolatio n formula. 

16. To evaluate the integral of the t ype � f(x) dx using 

(i) Trapezoidal rule, (ii) Simpson’s one-third rule 

(iii) Simpson’s three-eight rule 

17 Fitting of Paretos curve to income data. 

18. Estimation of price-elasticit y from time series data. 


B. Sc. B.A 




PDF compression, OCR, web optimization using a watermarked evaluation copy of CVISION PDFCompressor 

b 

a

Semester-III 

KURUKSHETRA UNIVERSITY 

KURUKSHETRA 

w.e.f. 2012-13 

SYLLABUS B.A. II – HOME-SCIENCE 

Course No. Title Exam. 

Max. marks 

duration 

B.Sc./B.A 

201 Physiology 

3 Hrs 50 (40+10*) 

Semester-IV 

Lab-I 3 hrs 50 


Max. marks 

duration 

B.Sc./B.A 

202 Clothing and Textile 

3 Hrs 50 (40+10*) 


Lab- II 3 hrs 50 

Instructions for the Examiner: The examiner will set nine questions in all, 

selecting four question from each section/unit and one compulsory objective type 

question. 

Instructions for the Candidate : The candidate will attempt five questions in all, 

selecting at least one question from each unit as well as compulsory question. 

10(41) 


Course No.: 201 

B.A. II (Home Science) 

Semester–III 

Physiology 

10(42) 

M. Marks – 40 

Int. Assessment -10 

Time: – 3 Hrs 

Note: Examiners will set nine questions in all, four questions from each unit and 

one multiple choice compulsory question covering the whole syllabus. 

Students will attempt five questions in all, selecting not more than two from 

each unit and one multiple choice compulsory question. 

Unit–I 

Animal cell structure, composition and division in brief (Mitosis and meiosis) 

Skeletal system- Function of skeletal system names of the bones and joints. 

Digestive system-Organs of Digestive system, Digestion and absorption of 

food. 

Circulatory system- Blood, composition and functions and coagulation. 

Heart-structure and working. 

Blood pressure. 

Normal values of Hemoglobin cholesterol, urea, uric acid and glucose in 

blood. 

Unit–II 

Excretory system functions of kidney, skin and lungs. 

Reproductive system – organs and functioning of male and female sex glands, 

menstruation, and fertilization. 

Endocrine Glands-Functions of different glands, pituitary, thyroid, adrenal, islets 

of langerhans in pancreas. 

Nervous system: Parts (Brain and spinal cord) functions and reflex action. 


Practical 

Lab - I 

10(43) 

M. Marks: 50 

Duration of Exam: 3Hrs 

A. Study of different parts of sewing machine its care defect and remedies. 

B. Preparation of samples (15 samples) 

Basic stitches – tucking, running stitches, hemming, and button hole stitch. 

Seams-plain seam, run and fill seam. 

Processes-gathers into a band 

Darts (Knife and box) 

Placket opening (continues, wrap and two piece placket) 

Pen tucks and cross tucks 

C. Embroidery – One article of fancy embroidery using at least four stitches. 

D. Knitting- Following of knitting instructions preparation of two samples of 

knitting with different designs. 

E. Tie and Dye (one article) 

5 samples using different methods. 



B.A. II (Home Science) 

Semester–IV 

Clothing and Textile 

10(44) 


Int. Assessment -10 






Unit–I 

A. Introduction to traditional textiles of India with names and origin. 

B. Definition and classification of fiber. 

C. Manufacture and properties of different fibers: Cotton, Silk, Polyester, Rayon 

D. Soaps and detergents starches, blues and bleaches. 

Unit–II 

A. Meaning and objectives of application of finishes. 

B. Different types of finishes- calendaring bleaching, sizing, mercerizing, pre- 

shrieking crease resistant, dyeing and printing. 

C. Basic weaves- Plain, Twill, Satin and their variations. 

D. Laundry and reagents, acids alkalis solvents and absorbents. 

E. Stain removal-Classification of stains, methods of removing different types of 

stain. 


Practical 

A. Taking body measurements. 

B. Drafting the following: 

Lab – II 

1. Child’s bodice block and its adaptation to a gathered frock. 

10(45) 

M. Marks: 50 

Duration of Exam: 3Hrs 

2. Adult’s bodice block and its adaptation to their choice garments 

3. Drafting of salwar or petticoat, blouse/nighty and kameez. 

C. Drafting and stitching of following garments: 

1. Frock gathered with sleeves (3 to 8 years old) 

2. Salwar or Petticoat (any one) 

3. Kameez or Nighty/Blouse (any one) 


SEMESTER – III 

Sr. 

No. 

KURUKSHETRA UNIVERSITY, KURUKSHETRA 

SYLLABUS FOR THE B.SC. HOME SCIENCE (SECOND YEAR) 

w.e.f. 2012-13 

Course 

No. 

1. 201 Nutrition in Life 

Cycle 

2 202 

Lab** 

Introduction to 

Clothing 

Construction 

3. 203 

Lab** 

Family Dynamics 

4 204 House Hold 

Equipments & 

Consumer 

Protection 

5 205 

Lab** 

Community 

Development & 

Extension 

Education-I 

Paper Title Exam 

Duration 

Environment 

Science* 

Computer 

Applications* 

10(46) 

3 hrs. 40 

3 hrs 40 

3 Hrs. 40 

3 Hrs. 

Max. 

Marks 

External Internal 

40 

3 Hrs. 40 

10 

10 

Total 

50 

50 

10 50 

10 50 

10 50 

Note: * The student will study this course along with B.Sc. students of Medical and Non 

Medical students as per the University rules. 

**The Practical examination will be held in IV semester 


250

B.SC. II (HOME SCIENCE) 

SEMESTER - III 

Nutrition in Life Cycle 

Course No. : 201 Duration of Exam: 3 hrs. 

10(47) 

MM: 40 + 10 = 50 

Instructions for the Examiner : The examiner will set nine questions in all, selecting four 

question from each section/unit and one compulsory objective type question. 

Instructions for the Candidate : The candidate will attempt five questions in all, selecting 

at least one question from each unit as well as compulsory question. 

Unit –I 

A. Basic principles of meal planning and factors affecting meal planning. 

B. Nutrition in infancy, advantages of breast feeding over artificial feeding with 

reference to nutritional and anti bacterial qualities of human milk only. Formula 

feeding, Weaning, Supplementary feeding. 

C. Nutrition for preschoolers, school going children and adolescents – requirement for 

different food groups and nutrients; problems; considerations for planning the diet. 

Unit-II 

D. Nutrition for adults: Definition of Reference adult man and woman, requirement for 

different food groups and nutrients; consideration for planning the diet, 

for sedentary, moderate and heavy male and female worker 

LAB - 

E. Pregnancy and lactation : Physiological changes, problems, requirement for 

foods and nutrients, and consideration for planning the diet 

F Nutrition during old age: Physiological changes, problems, requirement for 

foods and nutrients, and consideration for planning the diet 

Foods and Nutrition 

Planning, calculation and preparation of diets for various age groups and 

conditions as mentioned in theory. 




INTRODUCTION TO CLOTHING CONSTRUCTION 

Course No. - 202 Duration of exam: 3 hrs 

M.M: 40 +10 = 50 

Instructions for the examiner: The examiner will set nine questions in all, selecting four 

questions from each unit and one compulsory short type question, 

Instructions for the candidates: The candidates will attempt five questions in all, 

selecting two questions from each unit and one compulsory question. 

Lab- 

UNIT-I 

� Basic Terminology used for clothing e.g. Fiber, Yarn etc. 

� Equipments and supplies used in clothing construction, their maintenance, 

problems faced with specific reference to sewing machine. 

� Parts of sewing machine and their functioning 

� (a) Defects in sewing machine and how to overcome them. 

� (b) Care of sewing machine. 

. 

UNIT-II 

� Meaning and importance of clothing 

� General principles of clothing construction 

� Methods of developing design :- 

1. Drafting - tools required, advantages, and disadvantages of drafting 

2. Paper pattern – terminology, advantages and disadvantages of paper 

pattern. 

� Calculating material for different garments 

� Preparation of fabric for garment making, laying out of patterns, cutting & 

Marking 

� Parts of sewing machine and its care 

� Use and care of equipments and their supplies used in clothing construction 

� Taking body measurements for different types of garments and care to be taken 

while taking body measurement 

� Drafting of basic child’s bodice block, sleeve block, jangia block. 

� Cutting and stitching of simple garments- Napkin, Jhabla, Bib, Jangia 

10(48) 


References: 

1. Tanous, Helen Nicol: Designing Dress Patterns, Illinois, Chas A. Bennettco 

2. Bane, A./ (1974): Tailoring, Mc graw Hill 

3. Bray Nathalie (1978): Dress Pattern Designing, London, Crossby Lockwood and 

Staples 

4. Goldsworthy, M. (1980); Simple dressmaking, London, Mills and Boon Ltd. 

5. Goldsworth, M. (1980): Sample Dressmaking, Mills and boon Ltd. 

6. Tate and Grissom: Family clothing 

7. Sushma Gupta, Neeru Garg and Renu SainiTest book of clothing and textiles 

and laundry – Kalyani Pub. 

10(49) 


Course No. : 203 

B.SC. III (HOME SCIENCE) 

SEMESTER -III 

Family Dynamics 

10(50) 

Duration of Exam: 3 hrs. 

MM: 40 + 10 = 50 




two questions from each unit as well as compulsory question. 

Unit-I 

A. (i)Family : meaning, types, functions, stages (ii) Role of family in community 

B. Marriage : Meaning, definition, functions and criteria for mate selection 

C. The changing face of the Indian family, moving from joint to nuclear, single 

parenting as a consequence of temporary occupation related separation, legal 

separation, divorce, death and working women. 

D. Influence of national level decisions in human development 

� Child and women’s right 

� New economic policy, liberalization 

� Media boom 

E Specific needs for intervention in the Indian context; reaching out to lower 

economic groups for community help and caring of aged. 

Unit-II 

F Family planning-methods, importance and factors affecting it: The effect of 

industrialization, urbanization, employment of women and socio economic status. 

Family planning programmes in India. 

G. Demography and population dynamics in developed and developing countries, 

Indian population policy 

H. Population education - Role of national, international and non governmental 

agencies. Population statistics with special reference to children and women 

infant mortality and morbidity. 

I. Reproductive and child health programmes. Reproductive rights of women. 


References: 

1. Augustine, J.N. (Ed.) (1982): The Family in Transition ,New Delhi: Vikas publishing 

House. 

2. Coleman,J.C.(1986): Intimate Relationships, Marriage and the Family, Chicago: 

Macmillan publishing Co. 

3. Coser,Rose (1975): The Family: its Structure and Functions,New York: Macmillan 

Publishing Co. 

4. Guppy. G. R. (1976): Family and social Change in Modern India, New Delhi: Vikas 

Publishing Co. 

5. Gore,M.S.(1968): Urbanization and family Change IN India Bombay: popular 

prakashan. 

6. Hutter,Mark (1981): The Changing family :comparative, new York: john Wiley& 

sons. 

7. Srinivasan,K.and Mukerji,S.(Eds) (1987): Dynamics of Population and family 

Welfare ,Bombay: Himalayas publishing House . 

8. Tiss(1994): Enhancing the Role of the Family as an Agency for Social and 

Economic Development,Bombay:TISS. 

9. Augustine,J.S.(Ed)(1982): The Indian Family in Transition,NewDelhi:Vikas 

publishing house, 

10. Chauhan,S.S (1993): Psychology of Adolescence New Delhi:Allied publishers. 

11. Chowdhary,Paul D (1988): Youth Participation and development, New 

Delhi,Atmaram and sons . 

12. Devadas T.S. (1979): Hindu Family and Marriage, Madras: University of Bombay. 

13. M Desai,K.G.(Ed) (1989): ageing in India ,Bombay:tata Institute of Social Science . 

14. Desai, N.and krishanraj,M.(1987): Women and Society in India ,Delhi: Ajanta publications, 

15. Ehta, P. (1977): The Indian Youth ,Emerging Problem and issues, Bombay: Somalia Publications 

16. NIPCCD (1994): Child in India: A Statistical Profile, New Delhi: NIPCCD 

17. Randhawa, M.S. (1991): The Rural and Urban Aged, New Delhi: National Book Organization, 

18. Saraswathi, S. (1991): Youth in India, New Delhi: ICSSR, Govt. of India 

19. Sati, P.N. (1988): Retired and Ageing People, Delhi: Mittal publishers, 

20. Sinha, J.M.P. (1989): Problems of Ageing, New Delhi: Classical Publishing Company. 

21. TISS (1991): Research in Families with Problems in India, Volume I and II. Bombay: TISS. 

22. TISS (1994): Enhancing the Role of Family as Agency for Social and Economic Development, 

Bombay: TISS. 

23. UNICEF (1945): children and women in India: A Situation Analysis 

24. Veeraraghavan, V. (1987): Rape: Victims of Rape, New Delhi: Northern Book Centre. 

10(51) 




House Hold Equipment & Consumer Protection 


10(52) 

MM: 40 + 10 = 50 





Unit - I 

A. Difference between equipments and tools. Factors affecting requirement of house 

hold equipments 

B. Equipments’ design and their effect on work and body postures 

A. Use, care, and storage of household equipments 

� Kitchen tools and equipments 

� Hand operated and electrical equipments 

� Equipments for personal care and recreation 

C. Equipments related to cleaning, washing 

Unit-II 

D Consumer- Definition, rights, responsibilities and problems 

E Consumer Protection – Laws, standards and agencies. 

F Buying and paying for goods and services 

� Cash buying, Credit buying and Approval buying 

� Contracts and Installment sales contract 

� Guarantees 

� Warrantees 

� Legal Problems 

Lab 

1 List of equipment and tools as mentioned in unit -I 

2 Use, care and maintenance of tools and equipment as mentioned in unit -I 

3 Survey to know different brands, comparison of cost, guarantee and after sale 

service as mentioned in unit -I 


Course No 205 



Community Development and Extension Education - I 

10(53) 

Duration of Exam: 3hrs. 

MM: 40 + 10 =50 

Instructions for the examiner : The examiner will set nine questions in all, selecting four 

questions from each unit and one compulsory objective type question. 

Instructions for the candidate: The candidates will attempt five questions in all, selecting 


Unit-I 

A. Social structure and systems: 

� Meaning and elements of organization and social structure 

� Social system – its characteristics and relation with social structure 

� Types of society 

B. Analysis of family as a social unit 

Family – its meaning, characteristics, types on the basis of size, marriage, authority 

and nature of relation. 

C. Communication- meaning, importance, functions and factors influencing effective 

communication, key elements in the communication process. 

Unit-II 

D. Poverty analysis; Definition, effects of poverty, measurement, causes of poverty, 

programmes for poverty alleviation 

E. Planning, controlling and evaluation of development programmes for women and 

children – DWACRA, TRYSEM, ICDS, ANP, SNP, midday meal programme (aim, 

objective and beneficiaries in brief) 

F. National agencies – NREGA, DRDA, PMRY 

References: 

1. Duran, J.(1978): Communication for rural Development ,London ,U.K, British 

Council. 

2. Kuppuswani, B.(1989): Communication and Social Development in India,Bombay, 

Media Promoters and publisher Private Ltd. 

3. Dahama,O.P. and Bhatnager, O.P.(1988): Education and Communication for 

Development,NewDelhi,Oxford and IBH publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd. 

4. Malaviya, seema (1991): Communication for Rural Women, New Delhi,Monak 

Publications Pvt Ltd. 

5. Saunders, Denys (1979): Visual Communications Handbook,U.K,Lutterworth. 

6. UNICEF (1975): Communication with Pictures,monograph,Nepal,UNICEF. 

7. Mcpherson,A.and Timms,H.(1988): The Audio –Visual 

Handbook,London,U.K.,Pelham Books. 


8. Peace Corps (1982): Audio-Visual communications Teaching-Aids-Resoures 

Pack,USA,Peace Corps Information,Collection and Exchange. 

9. Research and reference Division (1984): Ministry of Information and Boardcasting. 

Mass Media in India, Govt. of India,Publication Division. 

10. Srinivasan,Lyra (1945):Tool for Communication Participation – A Manual for 

Training Trainers In Participatory Techniques,New York, PROWWESS/UNDP 

Technical Series Pack Inc. 

11. Reddy,A.(1987): Extension Education,Baptla,Sree Lakshmi Press. 

12. Rogers,Alan (1989): Teaching Methods in Extension Education for development, 

Westwood Row,Tilehurst,READING RG 31,5LT,England,Woodmans. 

13. Upadhyaya,H.C.(1991): Modernization and Rural Development, New Delhi,Anmol 

Publication. 

14. Desai, Vasanth,(1988): Rural Development programme and Strategies- Volumes I 

to VI, Bombay Himalaya Publication House. 

15. Kelbagh,Chetna,(1991): Women and Development,New Delhi,Discovery publishing 

House. 

16. Mohsion Nadeen, (1985): Rural Development through Government 

Programmes,New Delhi,Mittal Publications. 

17. Ghosh Bahanisikha,(1945): The Indian Population Problem, Madras, Sage 

publication. 

10(54) 


SEMESTER - IV 

Sr. 

No. 


SYLLABUS FOR THE B.SC. HOME SCIENCE (SECOND YEAR) 

Course 

No. 

W.E.F. 2012-13 

Paper Title Exam 

Duration 

1. 211 Applied & Community 

Nutrition 

2 212 

Lab 

Apparel Designing & 

Selection 

3 213 

Lab 

Childhood and 

Adolescent 

Development. 

Lab 

4 214 Family Resource 

Management 

5 215 Community 

Development 

Extension Education- 

II 

6 216 

Lab 

Introductory Physics 

* As per university rules 

10(55) 

3 hrs. 

3 hrs 

3 hrs. 

3 hrs 

3 Hrs. 

3 hrs 

3 Hrs. 

3 hrs 

3 hrs 

3 hrs 

Max. 

Marks 

External Internal 

40 

50 

40 

50 

40 

50 

40 

40 

50 

40 

10 

- 

10 

- 

10 

- 

10 

10 

- 

10 

Total 

Lab 

3 hrs 50 - 50 

Total 550 

Computer 

Applications* 


50 

50 

50 

50 

50 

50 

50 

50 

50 

50

B.SC. III (HOME SCIENCE) 

SEMESTER - IV 

Applied & Community Nutrition 


10(56) 

MM: 40 + 10 = 50 

Instructions for the Examiner: The examiner will set nine questions in all, selecting four 


Instructions for the Candidate: The candidate will attempt five questions in all, selecting 


Unit –I 

A Assessment of nutritional status of community 

� Dietary 

� Anthropometrics 

B. Major nutritional problems in India, their causes, symptoms and prevention. 

i) PEM 

ii) Anemia 

iii) Vitamin .A 

C Microorganisms; types and beneficial and harmful effects on food 

Unit-II 

D. Food spoilage- causes, general principles of food storage. 

E. Food Preservation- importance for community, principles and methods (drying, 

dehydration, radiation, canning, preservation by using low and high temperature, 

salt and sugar and pickling). 

F. Food adulteration; definition, common adulterants in cereals, pulses, milk, ghee 

and species and their identification 

Lab 

M.M: 50 

Duration of Exam: 3 hrs 

� Assessment of nutritional status of one family by using dietary and 

anthropometric methods 

� Preparation of any 10 preserved products 

� Preparation of 5 low cost nutritious recipes by using germination, 

supplementation and fermentation. 


Paper – 212 

B Sc II(Home Science ) 

SEMESTER – IV 

APPAREL DESIGNING & SELECTION 

10(57) 

Duration of exam: 3 hrs 

M.M: 40 +10 = 50 

Instructions for the examiner: The examiner will set nine questions in all, selecting four 

questions from each unit and one compulsory objective type question, 

Instructions for the candidates: The candidates will attempt five questions in all, 

selecting two questions from each unit as well as compulsory question. 

UNIT-I 

� Definition, comparison of the following: -Home made / tailor made / readymade 

garments 

� Meaning and importance of clothing 

� Factors affecting selection of clothing for different age groups 

� Clothing requirements in different age groups and different physiological conditions. 

� Care of clothing 

(a) Mending (b) Renovation (c) Storage 

UNIT-II 

Aesthetics in Dress: - 

� Design -Principles, balance, harmony, rhythm, proportion and emphasis. 

� Elements –Color, its dimensions, harmony and effect, its use in relation to 

Season, occasion, size, figure and complexion. 

� Texture analysis and its use in relation to size, figure, occasion, season 

� Line and shape analysis and its appropriate use. 

References: 

1. Tate and Grissom: Family clothing 

2. Bray Nathalie (1978): Dress Pattern Designing, London, Crossby Lockwood 

and Staples 

3. Goldsworthy, M. (1980); Simple dressmaking, London, Mills and Boon Ltd. 

4. Teery Brackenbury: Knitted Clothing Teachnology,Blackwell Science 

Ltd.,London. 

5. Gupta Sushma (2005) Text Book of Clothing Textiles and Laundry, Kalyani 

Publishers New Delhi. 

6. Sushma Gupta, Neeru Garg and Renu Saini: Text book of Clothing, Taxtile 

& Laundry, Kalyani Pub. 


Lab 

10(58) 

M.M: 50 


A Drafting of sleeves and collars 

� Sleeves: Puff, umbrella raglan, Magyar, leg-o- mutton, ruffle, dolmen, kimono. 

� Collars: baby, shawl, sailors, and Chinese band Flat peter pan, raised peter pan, 

cape. 

B Construction of Children Garments (with drafting and layouts):- 

(a) Frock (any one) – A line/ gathered/ party 

(b) Night suit 

C – Drafting Cutting and stitching of Blouse and Petticoat, 

D – Darning – hole, edge and tear 

Patching 

Quilting 


B.SC. II (HOME SCIENCE 

SEMESTER -IV 

Childhood and Adolescent Development 


10(59) 

MM: 40 + 10 = 50 





A. Physical and Motor Development: 

Unit-I 

� Physical and motor development in preschool age, childhood and adolscences 

it continues through infancy, end of infancy, preschool, childhood, adolescent 

� Puberty growth spurt (including primary and secondary sexual characteristics. 

� Motor development: reflexes in infancy, major milestones through end of 

infancy, preschool years, middle and late childhood. 

B. Basic emotional reactions: (joy, fear, jealousy, anger, sadness, aggression). 

Milestones of emotional development through infancy to adolescence. 

C. Cognitive development across the life span: a brief introduction to Piaget’s 

theory (introduce stages without much elaboration: sensory-motor stage, 

preoperational, concrete operational and formal operations). 

D. Moral development: Kohlberg’s Stages of Moral development 

Unit-II 

E. Language Development: Language as form of communication, pre speech forms 

of communication ,early vocalization, beginning to use language, one or two word 

utterances, early sentences, and telegraphic speech. 

F. Play – Meaning, Importance/ Value & types (indoor and outdoor) and theories of 

play 

G. Common behaviour problems and their remedies: - bed wetting, thumb sucking, 

nail biting, temper tantrums 

H. Socialization: Meaning of socialization, functions of the family and community in 

the socialization of the child. 


Lab M.M: 50 

10(60) 


1. Observing children in various settings (a) Home setting (b) Preschool setting (c) Out of 

Home 

2 Recording all round development of children below 12 years (physical, motor, social, 

emotional, cognitive and language development) by using any five following tests / any 

other equivalent tests or anecdote : 

� General Mental Ability Test for Children. 

� The Parent Child Relationship Scale (PCRD). 

� Emotional Stability Test for Children (ESTC). 

� High School Personality Questionnaire (HSPQ). 

� Adjustment Inventory. 

� Reactions to Frustration Scale (RFS). 

� Children’s Approval Seeking Test (CAST). 

� Language Creativity Tests in English and Hindi (LCT). 

3 Visit to a day care center for children to study their programmes and functions. 

4 Demonstration of activities for new born babies 

� Changing the diaper 

� Baby bath 

� Baby massage 

5 Preparation of baby bed sheet, diaper, mobile and two different types of toys for new 

born babies. 

References: 

1 Ambron. S.R. (1975): Child Development, Rinchart press San Francisco. 

2 Sinha, D. (1981): Socialization of the Indian Child. New Delhi 

3 Rao, P. and Rao, V.N. (1982): Marriage, the family and women in India, New Delhi: 

Vikas Publications. 

4. Augustine, J.N. (Ed.) (1982): The family in transition, New Delhi: Vikas Publishing 

House 

5. Lerner Hultsch (1983): Human Development: a life-span perspective, New York, Mc. 

Graw Hill Book Co. 

6. Coleman, J.C. (1986): Intimate relationships, marriage and the family, Chicago, 

Macmillan publishing co. 

7. Saraswathi, T.S. & Kaur, B. (1993): The development of children. New York: 

Scientific American books. 

8. Cole, M.P. Cole, S. (1993): The development of children. New York: Scientific 

American books. 

9. Gordon, I.J. (1975): Human Development New York: Harper & Row 

10. Mussen, P., Conger, J.J. Kagan, J & Huston, A.C. (1945): Child Development and 

Personality, New York: Harper and Row 

11. Srivastav, A.K. (1993): Child and adolescent Psychology: seminar readings New 

Delhi 

12. Mangal SK (1988) General Psychology. Sterling Pub. Co New Delhi 


Family Resource Management 


SEMESTER - IV 


10(61) 

MM: 40 + 10 = 50 





Time Management 

Unit –I 

� Time as a resource 

� Time demand during various stages of family life cycle 

� Characters to consider in making time and utility plan. 

� Steps in making daily and weekly time plan 

� Control of time plan 

� Evaluation of time plan 

Energy Management 

Relation of energy to the stages of the family life cycle 

Household tasks classified by energy costs 

Types of efforts 

Types of fatigue and the various ways to overcome fatigue 

Management of energy (Planning, Controlling and Evaluating) 

Work simplification 

Techniques of work simplification 

Money Management 

Unit –II 

� Money as a resource 

� Sources of money – wages, salaries, rent, profits, interests, transfer of payment 

� Regular and irregular income 

� Types of expenditure and factors affecting family expenditure 

� Budget – definition and types 

� Savings and investments – meaning, objectives and types. 

A. Marketing – definition and concept. 

B. Factors affecting consumer decision in the market, good buy man ship. 


References: 

1. Consumer Education Series (1992): Safety in House hold Electrical Appliances, 

CERC Ahmedabad, . 

2. Sarkar, A. (1989): Problems of consumers in Modern India, Discovery Publishing 

House, Delhi 

3. Ghosh, A. (1992): The theory of consumer behaviour and welfare in classical 

paradigm, Bombay: Himalya Publishing House. 

4. Agarwal, V.K. (1989): consumer protection in India with special reference to unfair 

trade practices, New Delhi: Deep and Deep Publishers. 

5. Agarwal, Anju, D. (1989): A Practical handbook for Consumers, Bombay, India 

Book House 

6. Singh Gurbax (comp.) (1945): Law of consumer protection, Jaipur: Bharat Law 

Publishers 

7. The Consumer Protection Act 1986 (1987): Bhubaneshwar, Capital Law House. 

8. Ruth E. Deacon, francie ;M. Firebaugh (1975): Family Resource Management 

Principle and application. Roy Houghton, Miffin Company Irma. H. Cross. Elizabeth 

Crandall, Maryoris M. Knall (1973): Management for 

9. modern families, Prentice Hall, Inc. Englewood Cliff, New Jersey 

10. Gordon/Lee (1977): Economics for consumers, 7th Edn., D’Van Nostrand 

Company. 

11. Gross. Crandall and Knoli (1980): Management for modern families, 3rd Edn., 

Prentice ;Hall Inc., New Delhi. 

12. Nickell, P. and Dorsey, J. (1986): Management in family living, 4th Edn., Wiley 

Eastern Ltd., New Delhi. 

13. Kewal Krishan Dewey and Adarsh Chand (1981): Modern Economic Theory, 12th 

Edn. Shyamlal Charitable Trust. 

14. Vidya Bhushan Sachdeva (1991): Introduction to Sociology, Kitab Mahal. 

10(62) 



SEMESTER - IV 

Community Development and Extension Education -II 

Course No 215 

Duration of Exam: 3hrs. 

MM: 40 + 10 =50 

Instructions for the examiner : The examiner will set nine questions in all, selecting four 


Instructions for the candidate: The candidates will attempt five questions in all, selecting 


Unit-I 

Community Development: 

A. Definition, purpose and goals, process of development 

B Community development programmes in India, its objectives and critical analysis 

C Audio visual aids – definition, classification, importance, Use of projected and 

none projected aids (in brief) 

Extension Education 

Unit-II 

A. Philosophy, principles, objectives, concepts and scope of extension education. 

B. Qualities of a good extension worker 

C. Home-Science- its meaning, history in India, role of Home Scientists in 

community development. 

D Programme Planning – meaning, importance and steps. 

Lab 

10(63) 

M.M: 50 


1. Field visit to get the field experience of family status (with special reference to women 

living in village/urban slum area) 

2. To see participation of the women in different activities i.e. household, agriculture etc. 

(Urban and Rural one each) 

3. Preparation of various visual aids (leaflet, folders, pamphlets, charts, posters, power 

point presentation etc) which can be used for educating in villages /urban slum areas 

(Any three) 

4. To plan the educational programmes for uplifting their standard and to educate them 

by using visual aids 


References: 

1. Desrochers, John (1980): Caste in India Today, Bangalore, India, Center for 

Social Action 

2. Thingalaya, N.K. (1986): Rural India – Real India, Bombay, Himalaya Publishing 

House 

3. Alvinyso (1990): Social Change and Development, Madras Sage Publications 

Pvt. Ltd. 

4 Subramaniya, K.N. (1988): Economic Development and Planning in India. New 

Delhi, Deep and Deep publication 

5. Desai, Vasant (1990): A Study of Rural Economics- Systems Approach, New 

Delhi, Himalaya Publishing House 

6. Agarwal, A.N. (1994): Indian Economy, Problems of Development and Planning. 

Madras, Wiley Eastern Ltd. 


SEMESTER - IV 

Introductory Physics. 


10(64) 

MM: 40 + 10 = 50 





Unit-I 

Introduction to properties of matter 

(a) Properties of Solids: (a) Density, specific gravity, elasticity, hardness, malleability, 

ductility. 

(b) Properties of liquids: Surface Tension, capillary action, Archimedes Principle, 

Specific gravity of liquids, fluid pressure, Pascal’s law and its applications (Hydraulic Lift) 

(c) Properties of gases: Elasticity, compressibility, Atmospheric Pressure, Simple 

Barometer, Commercial Barometer. 

Mechanics 

(a) Units and Measurements: Concepts of measurements and units of length, mass and 

time in CGS, MKS and British systems and their interrelationship 

(b) Simple machines: Lever (Definition & Types), Equipment working on the principle of 

lever (Pulley, Scissors, Egg Beater, Nut Cutter). 


(c) Friction: Friction Advantages and disadvantages, concepts of ball bearing, sewing 

floor, scrubbing machines. 

(d) Centripetal and centrifugal forces: spin dryer in washing machine. 

Unit- II 

Heat 

(a) Introduction to heat: Unit of Heat, Sources and properties of heat, heat and 

temperature, heat transfer, humidity, relative humidity and dew point. 

(b) Application of heat transfer: Household thermometers, pressure cooker, vacuum 

coffee maker. 

(c) Refrigeration: structure of refrigerator and its working. 

Sound 

(a) Production and propagation of sound: Wave length, frequency, amplitude phase, 

velocity of sound in air, solids and liquids. 

(b) Reflection of sound: Echo, reverberation, sound in auditorium. 

Household Electricity (a) Elementary Knowledge of Electricity: Electric Current (AC & 

DC), Ohm’s Law, Resistance, Sources of electricity (AC Generator & DC Generator, Dry 

Cell, Thermocouples) 

(b) Household electric wiring - Electric meter, household electric wiring and safety 

features (Fuse, MCB, Earthing). 

• Light equipment in the home - incandescent lamp, fluorescent tube lighting, C. F. L, 

• Concept of energy conservation. 

Lab 

10(65) 

M.M.: 50 

Duration of exam: 3 hrs 

Section (A) 

1. To find out the volume of a given cylindrical body using vernier calipers. 

2. To find out the diameter of wire using screw gauge. 

3. To verify ohm's law 

4. To verify law of friction 

5. To repair the given heater, iron, cord and fuse 

6. Two way lighting circuits. 

7. To study variation of surface tension with various factors by capillary rise methods. 

8. To compare the insulating efficiency of various materials. 

Section (B) Demonstration of the following equipments :( Any Eight) 

Pressure Cookers, Refrigerator, Mixer, Washing Machine, water Heater, Doorbell, 

Eggbeater, Nut Cutter, scrubbing machines, incandescent lamp, fluorescent tube lighting, 

C. F. L 


Section (C) Make any one Project 

1. Project on House hold wiring. 

2. Project on working of Kaleidoscope. 

3. Project on Calculation of electricity bill for an average household for a month. 

4. Project on the Use and Care of various household equipments. 

References 

1. C.H.Brechner, Household Physics, Norwood Press, USA 

2. Peet, L.J. Picket, M.S. and Arnold M.G. (1960) : Household Equipment, John Wiley 

and Sons inc. 

3. Peet, L.J., Picket, M.S. (1975 and (1979) : Household Equipment, 7 th and 8th Edn. 

John Wiley and Sons Inc., New York 

4. Fundamental Physics, Pradeep Publications. 

5. Gupta and Kumar, 1995, Practical Physics, Pragati Prakashan. 

10(66) 


SEMESTER-III 

KURUKSHETRA UNIVERSITY KURUKSHETRA 

BACHELOR OF FASHION AND APPAREL DESIGN (BFAD) 

w.e.f. 2012-13 

Code No. Subject Marks Time 

BFAD-201 Apparel Production 

Technology-I 

120+30* 3 hrs. 

BFAD-202 Fundamentals of Fabric 

Production 

120+30* 3 hrs. 

BFAD-203 Applied Maths 120+30* 3 hrs. 

Practical / Lab based Courses 

BFAD-251 Pattern Making-II 50 3 hrs. 

BFAD-252 Fabric Production 

Techniques 

50 3 hrs. 

BFAD-253 Women’s Clothing 50 3 hrs. 

BFAD-254 CAD-I 50 3 hrs. 

BFAD-255 

Fashion Illustration 50 3 hrs. 

TOTAL 700 


10(67) 




SEMESTER-III 

APPAREL PRODUCTION TECHNOLOGY-I 

(THEORY) 

Course Code: BFAD-201 Duration of exam: 3 hrs 

M.M.: 150 

Theory Exam: 120 

Int. Assesment: 30 

� Examiner will set nine questions in all 

� All the questions will carry equal marks 

� Question No. 1 will be compulsory consisting of 5-10 short type questions 

and spread over the entire syllabus 

� The remaining eight questions will be set from unit 1 and 2, four questions 

from each unit 

� The candidates are required to attempt five questions. Q.No. 1 will be 

compulsory and remaining four questions will be attempted selecting two 

questions from each unit. 

Unit-I 

� Back ground to the Clothing Industry, Its contribution to economy of country; 

The Products; Types of cloth factories. 

� The organization of a clothing factory:-Planning and control. 

� The Stores: - The material in stores, Quality checking and Storage of 

material. 

� Cutting:- Maker planning & reproducing; Maximizing maker utilization; 

Methods of maker planning; Lay Planning; Requirements for Spreading 

process; Ply direction & lay stability. 

� Elimination of Fabric faults; Methods of spreading; Types of fabric 

packages, 

� Cutting the Fabric – objectives of cutting; Methods of cutting:- Hand shears, 

Straight knife, Round knife, Band knife, Computer controller cutting knife, Die 

cutting, Laser cutting, Plasma cutting, Water jet cutting, Ultrasonic cutting, 

Notches, Drill & thread maker. 

Unit-II 

� Preparation of cut work for the sewing room:- Bundling, Shade separation 

control, Indication of right side of Fabrics, Work ticking 

� Sewing – seams types,Class-1- superimposed,Class-2- lapped seam,Class- 

3- Bound seam, Class-4- Flat seam, Class-5- Decorative stitching, Class-6- 

Edge neatening. 

� Visit to cutting department in a garment Industry 

� Assignment Literature survey about garment Industry in India. 

10(68) 


REFERENCES 

� Carr & Latham. (IV ED.). Technology of Clothing Manufacture. 

� Gerry Conklin. (II ED.). Introduction to Clothing Manufacture. 



SEMESTER-III 

FUNDAMENTALS OF FABRIC PRODUCTION 

(THEORY) 


M.M.: 150 


Int. Assessment: 30 










Unit-I 

Fabric formation:- 

� Different methods of fabric formation and terminologies. 

� Weaving: - Parts of loom and their functions, main operations in weaving 

shuttle less looms. 

� Graphical representation of weaves: - drafting plan, lifting plan and repeat of 

the weave. 

� Basic weaves: - Plain, Twill, Satin and their variations. 

� Fancy weaves: - Dobby weave, jacquard weave, leno, extra yarn figuring, 

pile weave and its variations, double cloth. 

� Non-woven’s:- Classifications, production techniques and end uses. 

Unit –II 

Knitting:- 

� Introduction to knitting technology, difference between knits and woven, 

terms used in knitting. 

� Comparison of warp and weft knitting. 

10(69) 


� Basic weft knit stitches: single jersey, rib, purl, interlock, float, and tuck 

stitches. 

� Basic warp knit stitches: under-lap, overlap, closed-lap, open-lap. 

� Knitting machines: flat, circular, jacquard, warp and weft knitting machines. 

� Defects in knitted fabrics. 

� Knitwear industry: origin, history, growth and development. 

REFERENCES 

Text books: 

� Marks A.T.C & Robinson. Principles of weaving. 

� Watson. Textile Color & Design. 

� Banerjee, N.N. Weaving. 

� Corbmen. Fibre to Fabric. 

� Hollen, N. and Saddler, J. 1968. Textiles. New York, Macmilan Company. 



SEMESTER-III 

APPLIED MATHS 

(THEORY) 


M.M.: 150 












Unit-I 

� Length, Breadth measurements, Area measurements. 

� Rectangular Co- Ordinate, Distance Formula 

� Number System, Linear Programming. 

� Statistics- Mean, median, mode, combined mean and computation, linear 

programming. 

10(70) 


� Definition of population, Variable, Attribute, Census survey, Sample survey, 

simple random sample, raw statistical data, collection, classification, 

frequency distribution, class limits and boundary, class width, midpoint, 

histogram, frequency polygon, frequency curve. 

� Probability- Random-experiment, sample space, event, types of events, 

Venn diagram, definition, law of probability and examples. 

Unit--II 

� Sampling: types of sampling, selection of sample, benefits of sampling, 

evaluation of sample. 

� Correlation – Karl Pearson’s co-efficient of correlation, coefficient of 

correlation and its interpretation, rank correlation, regression equations and 

predictions. 

10(71) 




SEMESTER-III 

PATTERN MAKING-II 

(PRACTICAL) 


M.M.: 50 

Practical Exam: 50 

� Rules and Darts :- 

Principle 1- Dart manipulation by:- Slash & Spread technique, Pivotal 

transfer technique 

1. Single dart series. 

2. Two dart series. 

Designing with Darts, Tucks, Pleats, and Gathers. 

Style lines: - Classic princess lines, Armhole princess lines, Panel style lines. 

Built-up necklines, Inset Bands. 

Principle 2- Added fullness:- 3 types of added fullness. 

Principle 3- Contouring patterns:- off-shoulder, halters, cowl. 

� Skirts :- 

4 skirts foundation-: 

1. Basic – straight, rectangular. 

2. A line. 

3. Pegged / inverted triangular. 

4. Bell shaped. 

High & low waist skirt; Flared, skirt with gathers, tier, pleated, godets, gored- 

skirt, wrap and uneven skirt. 

� The sheath dress (fitted silhouette one piece dress). 

REFERENCES 

Text book: 

� Aldrich Winifred, Metric Pattern Cutting, Om book service. 1997. 

� Armstrong H.J, Pattern Making for Fashion Design, Longman. 2003. 

� Bray Natalia, More Dress Pattern Designing, Blackwell Science. 1999. 

� Cooklin Gery. Pattern Cutting for Women’s outer Wear, Blackwell Science. 

2001. 

� Cooklin Gery, Garment Technology for Fashion Designers, Blackwell 

Science,1997 

� Kapoor Bela, Pattern Drafting and Making , Phoenix Publishing House 

Pvt.Ltd 1997 

10(72) 


Magazines/Journals: 

� Apparel online.com 

� Apparel views 



SEMESTER-III 

FABRIC PRODUCTION TECHNIQUES 

(PRACTICAL) 


M.M.: 50 


� Preparation of graphic representation of weaves. 

� Making basic weave samples. 

� Weaving of any two fancy weave samples. 

� Preparation of woven article using more than one weaves. 

� Development of fabric glossary 

� Visit to Textile industry and knit wear industry in India. 

REFERENCES 

� Marks, A.T.C & Robinson. Principles of Weaving. 

� Watson. Textile Color & Design. 

� N.N.Banerjee. Weaving. 

� Bernard P. Corbman. Fibre to Fabric. 

� Hollen, N. and Saddler, J. 1968. Textiles. New York, Macmilan Company. 

10(73) 




SEMESTER-III 

WOMEN’S CLOTHING 

(PRACTICAL) 


M.M.: 50 


� Drafting and construction of:- 

(1) Blouse and its variation; 

� Katori cut 

� Choli cut 

� Princes line 

(2) 6 – Gore saree peticot. 

(3) Salwar – Kameez: Simple & Chudidar. 

(4) Night wear. 

(5) The sheath (one piece dress). 

REFERENCES 

Text books: 

� Carr and Lather. The technology of clothing manufacture. 

� Bains, S. and Hutton, J. Singer Sewing Book. 

� Gioello and Brake. Figure types and size ranges. 

� Aldrich Winifred. Metric pattern cutting. Om book services.1997. 

� Armstrong II. J. Pattern making for fashion design. Longman. 2003. 

� Bray Natalia. More dress pattern designing. Blackwell science. 2001. 

� Cooklin Grey. Pattern making for women’s outer wear. Blackwell 

sciences,1997 

Magazines and journals: 

� Apparel online.com 

10(74) 




SEMESTER-III 

CAD-I 

(PRACTICAL) 


M.M.: 50 


� Introduction to Adobe Illustrator. 

� Study about tools of Adobe Illustrator. 

� Color and motif: - traditional, floral and geometric. 

� Figure and profile: profile of male and female silhouettes. 

� Accessories: party, casual and formal. 

� Project board:- logo, label, brochure and window display 

REFERENCES 

Text books: 

� Bina Abling. Fashion Sketch Book. Fairchild Publications. 1994. 

� Druid Elisabeth and Pace Tiziana. Figure Drawing for Fashion Design. Peplin 

Press.2004 

� Ireland Patrick John. Fashion Design Drawing and Presentation. Batsford. 

2005. 

� Mckelvy Kathrynanad Munslow Janine. Illustrating Fashion. Blackwell 

Publishing. 2004. 

� Books on Adobe Illustrator Software. 

10(75) 




SEMESTER-III 

FASHION ILLUSTRATION 

(PRACTICAL) 


M.M.: 50 


� Basic tools required for sketching:- Understanding fashion figure, Road map 

grid, 8 head croquie, 10 head croquie (male/female) 

� Figure analysis:- Front profile, ¾ turned view, Understanding style lines in 

fashion figure 

� Analysis of features:- Eyes, Nose, Lips. 

� Analysis of different hairstyles. 

� Analysis of hands:- Front, Profile, ¾ turned view. 

� Analysis of feet: - Front, Profile, ¾ turned view. 

� Analysis of face: - Front, Profile, ¾ turned view. 

� Basic free hand drawing. 

� Pencil shading technique. 

REFERENCES 

Text books: 

� Bina Abling. Fashion Sketch Book. Fairchild Publications.1994. 


Press.2004 

� Ireland Patrick John. Fashion Design Drawing and Presentation. Batsford. 

2005. 

� Mckelvy Kathrynanad Munslow Janine. Illustrating Fashion, Blackwell 

Publishing. 2004. 

� Ray Smith. Drawing Figures. Dorling Kindersley. 1994. 

10(76) 


SEMESTER-IV 



w.e.f. 2012-13 

Code No. Subject Marks Time 

BFAD-221 Fashion Marketing & 

Merchandising 

120+30* 3 hrs. 

BFAD-222 Textile Dyeing & Printing 120+30* 3 hrs. 

Practical / Lab based Courses 

BFAD-271 Fashion Illustration & 

Stylization 

50 3 hrs. 

BFAD-272 Pattern Making-III 50 3 hrs. 

BFAD-273 Men’s Clothing 50 3 hrs. 

BFAD-274 Dyeing & Printing 50 3 hrs. 

BFAD-275 

Draping 50 3 hrs. 

TOTAL 550 

* Internal Assesment 

10(77) 




SEMESTER-IV 

FASHION MARKETING AND MERCHANDISING 

(THEORY) 


M.M.: 150 












10(78) 

Unit-I 

PART 1 

Introduction to fashion 

� Fashion terminology 

� Sources of fashion 

� Fashion cycles and seasons 

� Factors favouring and retarding fashion 

� Fashion theories:- Traditional fashion adoption (Trickle-Down theory), 

Reverse adoption (Trickle-Up or Bottom-Up theories), Mass dissemination 

(Trickle-Across theory) 

� Fashion forecasting. 

PART 2 

� Marketing: Definition, concepts and functions. 

� Marketing plan and process, market terminology, 

� Fashion market and marketing environment, fashion marketing planning, 

Market research, User’s buying behavior, market communication. 

� Channels of distribution 

� Advertising, sales promotion techniques, exhibitions and sales. 

� Care labels and brands 


Unit-II 

� Merchandising-“Introduction, role of merchandiser, types of merchandiser, 

types of merchandising”. 

� Importance of textile industry in Indian economy. 

� Export documentation:-Export marketing, global scenario and WTO. 

� Export and textile policies. 

REFERENCES 

Text books: 

� Blythe Jim. Marketing Communication, Pearson Education. 2000. 

� Costabtino Maria. Fashion Marketing and PR. Bt Batsford Ltd. 1998. 

� Koiter. Marketing Management. Pearson Education. 2003. 

� Mike Easey. Fashion Marketing. Blackwell Science. 2002. 



SEMESTER-IV 

TEXTILE DYEING AND PRINTING 

(THEORY) 


M.M.: 150 












Unit-I 

� Introduction to Fabric finishes:- 

1. Process of removing impurities from fabrics; Scouring, desizing, 

degumming, carbonizing. 

2. Basic finishes that alter hand or texture; Felting, singeing, stiffening, 

decatizing. 

10(79) 


3. Surface finishes:- Bleaching, delustering, calandering, beettling, 

napping, flocking, burn out design, acid design, plisse design, tentering 

shearing and brushing. 

4. Functional finishes:- Waterproof and water repellent finishes, shrinkage 

control, wrinkle resistance, durable press and flame retardant finish. 

� Dyeing:- Introduction, classification and selection of dyes. 

1. Types of dyes; direct, acid, reactive, basic, vat, azoic, sulphur, disperse 

and mordant dyes. 

2. Methods of dyeing. 

3. Identifying dyeing defects. 

4. Colorfastness: fastness to washing, light, perspiration, crocking and 

gas-fading. 

Unit –II 

� Introduction to printing, difference between dyeing and printing. 

� Methods of printing:- Direct, Discharge and Resist printings. 

� Applications of Printing:-Block, Roller, Duplex, Stencil, Screen printing 

(Flat screen, Rotary screen printing), Transfer (Dry heat and Wet heat 

transfer), Blotch, Jet spray (Polychromatic dyeing, Microjet), Electrostatic, 

Photo, Warp, Batik and Tie – Dyeing. 

REFERENCES 

Text books: 

� Clarke. W. 1974. An Introduction to Textile Printing. London, Newness Butter 

Worth. 

� Anderson, F. 1974. Tie-dyeing and Batik. London, Octupus Editorial 

Production by Berkeley Publishers Ltd. 

� Smith, J.L. Textile Proccessing: Printing, Finishing, Dyeing. 

� H.Panda. Modern Technology of Textile: Dyes & Pigments. 

10(80) 




SEMESTER-IV 

FASHION ILLUSTRATION AND STYLIZATION 

(PRACTICAL) 


M.M.: 50 


Unit-1 

� Creation of 12 head croquies (male/female) 

� Creation of stick figures and fleshing out figures. (male/female) 

� Different body poses (male/female) 

� Drawing with color mediums directly (without the use of pencil) 

1. Water color 

2. Steadlers 

3. Crayons 

Unit-II 

� Exploring Collage 

� Composition of figures. ( male/ female) 

� Sketching Accessories 

1. Hats, Caps 

2. Scarves 

3. Bags, Belts 

� Stylized figures (male/female) 

� Age wise figure development of children 

REFERENCES 

Text books: 

� Borelli Laird. Fashion Illustration Now. Thomas and Hudson Publishers. 2003. 


Press. 2004. 

� Ireland Patrick John. Fashion Design Drawing and Presentation. Bats ford. 

2005. 

� Seaman Julian. Foundation in Fashion Designing and Illustration. BT. Bats ford. 

2004. 

Magazines/ Journals: 

� Global Apparel 

10(81) 


� Image Business of Fashion. 

� INDIA Vogue/INTERNATIONAL VOGUE 

� Fashion ELLE 

� In touch with fashion 

� Gladrags 

� Hi-blitz 



SEMESTER-IV 

PATTERN MAKING- III 

(PRACTICAL) 


M.M.: 50 


� Making paper patterns of:- 

1. Shirts. 

2. Jackets. 

3. Coats 

4. Pants/ Trousers. 

5. Capes and Hoods 

6. Preparation of commercial paper pattern of :- 

� Kids wear. 

� Women’s wear. 

� Men’s wear 

REFERENCES 

Text books: 

� Aldrich Winifred. Metric Pattern Cutting (Men’s), Om Book Services. 1997. 

� Armstrong H.J. Pattern Making for Fashion Design. Longman. 2003. 

� Bray Natalia. More Dress Pattern Designing. Blackwell Science. 1999. 

� Cooklin Gery. Pattern Cutting for Women’s Outer wear. Blackwell Science. 

2001. 

� Cooklin Gery. Garment Technology for Fashion Designers. Blackwell. 1997. 

� Kapoor Bela. Pattern Drafting and Making UP, Phoenix Publishing House Pvt 

Ltd. 1997. 

10(82) 




SEMESTER-IV 

MEN’S CLOTHING 

(PRACTICAL) 


M.M.: 50 


� Development of design and style features for men’s dress:- 

1. Shorts 

2. Shirts 

3. Trousers (casual/formal) 

4. Suits (casual/formal) 

� Construction of following garments:- 

1. Kurta Pyjama 

2. Shirt with and without yoke 

3. Jacket 

REFERENCES 

Text books: 

� Bowers Lewis and Kettunen. Clothing Construction and Wardrobe Planning. 

� Carr and Lather. The Technology of Clothing Manufacture. 

� S. Baines and J.Hutton. Singer Sewing Book. 

� Gioello and Brake. Figure Types and Size Ranges. 

� Aldrich Winifred. Metric Pattern Cutting. Om Book Services. 1997. 



� Cooklin Grey. Pattern Cutting for Women’s Outer wear. Blackwell Science. 

2001. 

10(83) 




SEMESTER-IV 

DYEING AND PRINTING 

(PRACTICAL) 


M.M.: 50 


� Dyeing of yarn and fabrics with different dyes. 

� Creating designs on fabrics through various dyeing process.:-Tie and dye, 

Batik 

� Preparation of printing samples:-Stencil, block, screen and hand painting 

on:- cotton, silk ,wool, cotton-wool, cotton-silk, cotton-polyester with 

different dye classes. 

� Making one article each of:- Block, Stencil, Screen, Tie and Dye and Batik. 

� Visit to a printing unit. 

REFERENCES 

Text books: 

� Bernard P. Corbman. Fibre to Fabric. 

� Clarke. W. 1974. An Introduction to Textile Printing. London, Newness Butter 

Worth. 

� Anderson, F. 1974. Tie-dyeing and Batik. London, Octupus Editorial 

Production by Berkeley Publishers Ltd. 

� Smith, J.L. Textile Proccessing: Printing, Finishing, Dyeing. 

� H.Panda. Modern Technology of Textile: Dyes & Pigments. 

10(84) 




SEMESTER-IV 

DRAPING 

(PRACTICAL) 


M.M.: 50 


� Draping:- definition, terminology, principles of draping, preparation and uses, 

measurement and tools used in draping. 

� Basic Draping techniques: - front & back bodice, front & back skirt. 

� Dart location and manipulation. 

� Designing the garment using the following construction features :- 

1. Gathers. 

2. Pleats. 

3. Cowl & fancy neacklines. 

4. Collars. 

� Designing and construction of following garments using different 

construction and decorative features :- 

1. Shirt/ Top ( female / male ) 

2. Skirt. 

3. Gown. 

� Preparation of one dress using draping techniques 

REFERENCES 

Text books: 

� Bowers Lewis and Kettunen. Clothing Construction and Wardrobe Planning. 

� Carr and Lather. The Technology of Clothing Manufacture. 

� Baines, S. and Hutton, J. Singer Sewing Book. 

� Gioello and Brake, Figure Types and Size Ranges. 

� Aldrich Winifred. Metric Pattern Cutting. Om Book Services.1997. 



10(85) 


Semester – III 


Syllabus for B.Sc. Fashion Designing IInd Year 

w.e.f. 2012-13 

Sr. Paper Paper Title 

Marks 

Exam 

No 

Exam Int. Total Duration 

Ass Marks 

1 201 Needle craft (Practical) 100 100 3 hrs 

2 202 Pattern Making –I 

Practical 

50 

50 3hrs 

3 203 Computer (Practical) 50 50 3 hrs 

4 204 Knitting Technology 

10(86) 

40 

10 

50 

3 hrs 

Practical 

50 

50 3 hrs 

5 205 Sanskrit* 40 10 50 2 hrs 

G. Total 

*Common syllabi for all B.Sc. courses 


40 

10 

50 

400 

3 hrs

Semester-IV 

Sr. 

No 

Paper Paper Title 


Syllabus of B.Sc Fashion Designing IInd Year 

w.e.f. 2012-13 

1 206 Textile Chemistry-II 

2 207 

Practical 

Fashion design & 

Illustration (Practical) 

3 208 History of Indian 

costumes 

4 209 Pattern Making-II 

(Practical) 

5 210 Garment Construction-II 

(Practical) 

10(87) 

Exam 

Marks 

Int. Total 

Ass Marks 

40 10 50 

Exam 

Duration 

3Hrs 

50 

50 3 Hrs 

100 100 3Hrs 

40 10 50 3Hrs 

100 100 3Hrs 

100 100 3Hrs 

6 211 Sanskrit* 40 10 50 2 Hrs 

G. Total 

*Common syllabi for all B.Sc. courses 


500

NEEDLE CRAFT (PRACTICAL) 

PAPER NO 201 

Total marks: 100 


Preparation of samples with the following techniques: 

� Patch work and quilting: Introduction, tools, material and techniques. 

� Embroidery – Introduction, tools, material, and types of Embrioidery: 

Hand Embroidery, Stitches, Machine Embroidery, Cutwork, Glass 

Work and Drawn Thread work. 

� Applique – Introduction, Tools, Material and Techniques. 

� Knitting: Introduction terminology, hand Knitting tools, material, 

techniques, basic textures, ribs, laces, cables, multi-colored knitting. 

� Crochet – Introduction, tools material, techniques and types – 

single, double 

� Special techniques – smocking, ribbon work, beads and sequins 

work. 

Project : 

� Develop one product based on any one technique of needle craft. 

� Develop one product based on knitting/crocheting. 

References: 

� Naik Shailaja, “Traditional Embroideries of India”, APH Publication, New 

Delhi, 1996. 

� Snook Barbara, “Creative Art of Embroidery”, Numbly Pub. Group Ltd., 

London 1972. 

� Mathew Anne, “Vogue Dictionary of Crochet Stitches”, David and Charles, 

London, 1989. 

� S. Pandit, “Embroideries of India”. 

10(88) 


PAPER NO 202 

PATTERN MAKING – I (THEORY) 

10(89) 

Total marks: 50 (40 +10*) 


Instruction for the Paper Setter 

� Examiner will set seven questions in all. All the questions will carry equal 

marks. 

� Question No. 1 will be compulsory consisting of 5-10 short type questions and 

spread over the entire syllabus. The remaining six questions will be set from 

Section A & B, Three questions from each section. The candidates are 

required to attempt five questions. Question No. – 1 will be compulsory, 

remaining four questions will be attempted by selecting two questions from 

each unit section. 

Section – A 

� Terminology used in pattern making : Pattern drafting, flat pattern making, 

template, working pattern, production pattern, design specification sheet, 

pattern chart, cost sheet, grain, drafting, dart intake, trueing and blending, 

plumb line, vertical lines, horizontal lines, perpendicular lines, symmetric and 

asymmetric lines, style number pattern size, pivotal point and pattern 

manipulation. 

� Fitting – principles of good fit 

� Basics of commercial paper pattern 

� Pattern Envelop 

� Pattern Making 

� Pattern Layout 

Section – B 

� Fabric estimation and its important 

� Patten making tools 

� Style reading 

PRACTICAL 



� Drafting of adult bodice block and sleeve block 

� Developing of patterns for 

� Collars – peter pan, sailors, cape, shawl, mandarin, stand and fall, 

convertible and roll. 

� sleeves – set-in (puff, bell, leg-o-mutton, lantern, tulip), extension of 

bodice (Magyar and Kimono) part of bodice (raglan and saddle) 

� Yokes – straight, round, V shape in seam, torso, simulated. 


References: 

� Armstrong Joseph Helen, “Pattern Making for Fashion Design”. 

� Hillhouse and Mansfield, “Dress Design, Draping and Flat Pattern Making”, 

Houghton Miffic Company, 1975. 

� Mullick, Prem Lata, Garment Construction Skills”, Kalyani Publishers, New 

Delhi. 

� “Complete Guide to Sewing”, Reader Digest. 

� Bane Allyne, “Flat Pattern Design”, McGraw Hill Pub. USA. 

� Martin M. Shoben, “Pattern Cutting Making Up”, CBS Publishers, New Delhi. 

PAPER NO 203 

COMPUTER (PRACTICAL) 

� Croquie Drawing with variations : 

1. Single dart 

2. Multiple dart 

3. Princess line 

4. Yoke 

5. Fullness (gathering, tusk, pleats) 

6. Contouring patterns (Wrap, off sholder, halter) 

� Preparation of basic block – children, men, women. 

REFERENCES: 

10(90) 



� Ireland Patrick John, "Fashion Design Drawing & presentation", B.T. Batsford 

London, 1996. 

� Allen and Scaman, “Fashion Drawing – The Basic Principles", B.T. Batsford, 

London. 

� Ritu, “Fashion Design & Illustrations", Indica publishers. 

� Beasley Alison, "Computer Aided Pattern Design an Products Development", 

Blackwell Science U.K. 


PAPER NO 204 

KNITTING TECHNOLOGY (THOERY) 

10(91) 

Total marks: 50 (40 +10*) 

Duration of Exam: 3 hrs. 

Instruction for the Examiners: Examiner will set seven questions in all. All the 

questions will carry equal marks. Question No. 1 will be compulsory consisting of 5- 

10 short type question & spread over the entire syllabus. The remaining six 

questions will be set from Unit – I and II. Three questions from each unit will be set. 

The candidates are required to attempt five questions in all. Question No. 1 will be 

compulsory remaining four questions will be attempted by selecting two questions 

from each unit. 

Unit – I 

� Introduction to knitting technology, difference between knits & woven. 

� Terns used in knitting. 

� Indian knitting industry – past, present & future. 

� Knitting needles. 

� Hand knitting & Machine knitting 

Unit - II 

� Knitted fabric defects. 

� Comparison of warp and weft knitting. 

� Basic weft knit stitches – single jersey, rib, purl, interlock, float & tuck stitches. 

� Basic warp knit stitches – Under lap, closed lap, open lap. 

� Knitting machines – weft & warp 

PRACTICAL 



� Preparation of knitting samples- single jersey, rib, purl & inter lock, float, tuck 

stitches. 

� A visit to a Knitting Unit and Report-writing of the same. 

REFERENCES 

� Prof. Ajgaonkar D.B., "Knitting Technology", University Publishing Co. 

Mumbai. 

� Brackenbury Terry, "Knitting clothing Technology", Blackwell Science, U.K. 

� Spances David J.," Knitting Technology", Pregoman Press, U.K. 


PAPER NO 205 

SANSKRIT 

10(92) 


PAPER NO 206 

SEMESTER-IV 

TEXTILE CHEMISTRY – II (THEORY) 

10(93) 

Total marks: 50 (40 +10*) 


Instruction for the Examiners : Examiner will set seven questions in all. All the 

questions will carry equal marks. Question No. 1 will be compulsory consisting of 5- 

10 short type question & spread over the entire syllabus. The remaining six 

questions will be set from Unit – I and II. Three questions from each unit will be set. 

The candidates are required to attempt five questions in all. Question No. 1 will be 

compulsory remaining four questions will be attempted by selecting two questions 


SECTION - A 

� Classification of dyes 

� Theories of dyeing 

� Stages of dyeing 

� Color fastness 

� Fabric finishing 

� Preparatory processes (Singeing, desizing, scouring, bleaching, 

heat-setting). 

� Routine finishes – beetling, calendaring, carbonization, 

permanent setting, mercerization, sizing, softening, anti-shrink, 

weighting, milling 

� Special purpose finishes-flame retardant, water-repellent, 

durable-press, moth-proofing, soil-repellent, anti-static. 

SECTION - B 

� Dyeing defects 

� Auxiliaries 

� Techniques of decorative dyeing 

� Styles and methods of printing 

� Basic Bleaching processes and classification of bleaches. 


PRACTICAL 

� Desizing and bleaching of cotton fabric. 

� Dyeing of cotton with direct dyes (preparation of shade card). 

� Dyeing of cotton and silk with acid and basic dyes. 

� Dyeing with azo dyes. 

� Different styles of printing (block, screen). 

10(94) 

Total Marks: 50 


References : 

� Vilencky “Textile Science”, CBS Publishers, New Delhi. 

� Mishra S.P., “A Text Book of Fiber Science & Technology”, Delhi. 

� Pizzoto’s J.J. ‘Fabric Science”, Four Child Publication, New York 

PAPER NO 207 

FASHION DESIGN AND ILLUSTRATION (PRACTICAL) 

FLAT SKETCHING AND FIGURE DRAWING 



� Sketching of various fashion details – Necklines, collars, sleeves, cuffs, 

pockets, frills, flounces, bows, skirts, trousers. 

� Sketching of accessories. 

� Rendering texture of fabrics in dresses – lace, leather, fur, satin, denim, and 

wool & knitted. 

� Designing of casual & formal wear for children, women & men. 

THEMATIC PORT FOLIO DEVELOPMENT 

CAD 

� Croquie drawing. 

� Drawing of various fashion details. 

o Collar = Flat, Stand, rolled. 

o Sleeves = set-in-sleeves, extension of bodice, part of bodice. 

o Pockets = Patch, inseam. 


o Skirts = Flared, gathered, gored, pegged, tiered & skirt with yokes. 

o Silhoutte = tubular, bell & bouffant. 

o Trousers. 

� Designing of casual & formal wear for children & women. 

REFERENCES 

� Ireland Patrick John, "Fashion Design Drawing & presentation", B.T. Batsford 

London, 1996. 

� Allen and Scaman, “Fashion Drawing – The Basic Principles", B.T. Batsford, 

London. 

� Ritu, “Fashion Design & Illustrations", Indica publishers. 

� Beasley Alison, "Computer Aided Pattern Design an Products Development", 

Blackwell Science U.K. 

10(95) 


PAPER NO 208 

HISTORY OF INDIAN COSTUMES (THEORY) 

10(96) 

Total marks: 50 (40 +10*) 


Instruction for the Paper Setter 

� Examiner will set seven questions in all. All the questions will carry equal 

marks. 

� Question No. 1 will be compulsory consisting of 5-10 short type questions and 

spread over the entire syllabus. The remaining six questions will be set from 

Section A & B, Three questions from each section. The candidates are 

required to attempt five questions. Question No. – 1 will be compulsory, 

remaining four questions will be attempted by selecting two questions from 

each unit section. 

Section – A 

� Study of Indian Costumes during following periods. 

� Indus Valley Period 

� Vedic Period 

� Mauryan & Sunga Period 

� Satvahana Period 

� Kushan Period 

Section –B 

� Gupta Period 

� Mughal Period 

� British Period 

Project Report: a) Presentation of different periods. 

b) Visit to museums. 

c) Screening of period films. 


PATTERN MAKING-II (PRACTICAL) 

PAPER NO 209 



Section-A 

1. Drafting of basic skirt block and trouser. 

2. Preparation of pattern (drafting method) of different types of skirts: A-line, 

Godet, gored, Full circular, Pegged. 

3. Preparation of commercial paper pattern of basic skirts and trouser 

Section-B 

4. Draping of basic bodice block-Front and Back 

5. Draping of basic skirt block – Front and Back 

6. Draping of top with princess line and cowl neck 

7. Draping of skirt with flare and skirt with cowl 

Section -C 

8. Grading of : 

� Basic bodice and sleeve block 

� Basic skirt 

� Trousers 

References: 

� Jaffe Hilde and Relis Nurie, “Draping for Fashion Design”, Prentice Hall 

� Crawford Amaden, “The Art of Fashion Draping”, Fairchild Publishers 

� Goulbourn Margartha “Introducing Pattern Cutting, Grading and Modelling”, 

Bastsford Pub. UK. 

� Shoben Martin, “Grading”, Batsford Pub. UK. 

� Price Jeanne and Zamkoff Bernard”, Grading techniques for Modern 

Design”, Fairchild Pub. 

10(97) 


PAPER NO. 210 

� Drafting and construction of : 

� Kalidar kurta 

� Salwar kameez 

� Petticoat 

� Blouse 

� Pyzami 

References: 

GARMENT CONSTRUCTION - II. (PRACTICAL) 

10(98) 



� Thomas Anna Jacob, “The art of Sewing”, USB Publishers, New Delhi. 

� Readers Digest Sewing Book 

� Verma G., “Cutting and Tailoring Theory” Asian Publishers, Delhi. 


PAPER NO. 211 

SANSKRIT 

10(99) 




B.A. II – Early Childhood Care and Education 

w.e.f. 2012-13 

Course Title Exam. Max. marks 

No. 

duration 

Paper-I Guiding Young Children: Principles, 

Practices & Programme 

3 Hrs. 50 (40+10*) 

Lab – I 50 

Semester – IV 


No. 

duration 

Paper-II Early Childhood Care and Education 3 Hrs. 50 (40+10*) 

Lab – II 3 Hrs. 50 



selecting two question from each section/unit and one compulsory objective type 

question. 

Instructions for the Candidate: The candidate will attempt five questions in all, 

selecting at least one question from each unit as well as the compulsory question. 

Note: After the theory exams, students will be required to undergo “on the job 

training” for duration of 4 weeks during summer vacations and submit the report by 

the end of autumn break. Viva-voce for ‘on the job Training Report will be held 

along with the practical exam of BA Part –II by the same practical examiner and the 

internal examiner. 

10(100) 


Paper-I 


Guiding Young Children: Principles, Practices & Programme 

10(101) 

M.Marks – 40 

Int. Assessment - 10 


Note: Nine questions to be set in all, at least two from each unit Students will be 

required to attempt five questions selecting at least one from each unit and 

one compulsory question. 

Unit – I 

Role of the family in children guidance: A parent’s role, siblings role, common do’s 

and don’ts, parental control and regulation during infancy, 3-5 yrs., adult-child 

interaction. 

Unit – II 

Community settings and communication: The urban slum, remote area, village as a 

community needs of middle class parents. 

Communication through group meetings, draw and dialogue open ended stories, 

role, play puppet theatre, use of audio-visuals. 

Unit – III 

Stimulation and guiding children with behavioral difficulties: Physical motor, 

language, social economic areas from infancy to 5 yrs. Dealing with children 

exhibiting normal behavior problems (nail biting, bed wetting) developmental delay, 

children’ at risk: diagnosing through examination, tests, observation, significance of 

early identification, prevention of disabilities through referral, special and 

educational institutes. 

Unit – IV 

Policy and programmes: Social welfare-Historical development: UN, SAARC, 

National plan for action for children; policy-making and role of National and 

international bodies-Legislation for children; Governmental and non-governmental 

programmes, schemes and services and preventive, developmental and 

rehabilitative services such as mobile crèches anganwadies, ICDS day-cares, well 

baby clinic, Balbhawan and hobby centers. 


LAB-I 

Practical Experiences: 

10(102) 

M. Marks: 50 

Duration of Exam: 3 Hrs 

1. Visit to any government and non-government programmes. 

2. To collect articles, photographs and media materials on selected topics and 

arrange exhibitions. 

3. Doing profiles on selected agency and organization along given guidelines. 

4. Visit to child guidance clinic. Develop play materials. 

Note: Any two experiences may be given per student and evaluated. 


Paper-II 


Early Childhood Care and Education 

10(103) 

Marks – 40 



Note: Nine questions to be set in all, at least two from each unit Students will 

be required to attempt five questions selecting at least one from each 

unit and one compulsory question. 

Unit – I 

History, goals, and objectives and important of early childhood care Education, 

Learning among young children: definition principles, methods of it, how to make 

learning effective, and role of teacher in promoting it. 

Play and its characteristics, theory of play, types, role of play in development. 

Unit – II 

Curricula and institutions of Early Childhood Care and Education: 

A. Day-Care centers, crèches, pre-school, play centers, non-formal pre-school 

education. 

B. What is developmentally appropriate curriculum and guidelines for it and 

teacher-child interaction. 

Unit – III 

Importance, planning, implementing and evaluation the programme, developmental 

assessment of young children. Children with special needs: Teacher’s role in 

helping, working with parents and guiding through parent education programmes. 

Unit – IV 

Organization and management of early childhood care and education centres. 

Philosophy and goals in management of ECCE. 

- Setting up and running the centre: locality, building, furniture, equipment, 

material, organizing indoors and outdoors spaces; personal: Qualification 

responsibilities, skill and competencies of supervisor/teacher. 

- Day care worker, supportive staff, experts and administrative personal. 

- Records and reports of children, staff and office. 

- Management of resources viz. finance, time and referral and support 

services. 

- Supervisory programmes: Applications, quality control, team analysis for 

identifying strength and weakness, Legislation concerning programmes for 

young children. 


LAB-II 

Practical: 

10(104) 

M. Marks: 50 


1. Prepare a blue-print of indoor/outdoor space utilization for a day care centre. 

2. Observing programme, children, and personal in local centres. 

3. Orientation to various records and reports, identifying gaps and proposing 

recommendations. 

4. Assessment of student (Self-appraisal) 

5. Reports of various institutions, discussions on projects and presentations of 

case studies. 


SEMESTER –III 

SYLLABUS FOR 

B.Sc. CLINICAL NUTRITION AND DIETETICS 

w.e.f 2012-13 

Sr. Course No Paper Title Exam Maximum Marks 

No. 

Duration Ext. Int. Total 

1 201 Food Science 3Hrs 40 10* 50 

2 202 Microbiology 3Hrs 40 10* 50 

3 203 Lab. – I 3Hrs 50 50 


S. Course No Paper Title Exam Maximum Marks 

No 

Duration Ext. Int. Total 

1 204 Food Service Management 3Hrs 40 10* 50 

2 205 Dietetics - I 3Hrs 40 10* 50 

3 206 Lab. – II 3Hrs 50 50 


10(105) 


Course No. 201 

CLINICAL NUTRITION & DIETETICS 

SEMESER – III 

FOOD SCIENCE PAPER –I 

10(106) 

Duration of Exam – 3 Hrs. 

M.M 50 (40 + 10*) 

Instruction for the examiner – The examiner will set nine questions in all, selecting for 


Instruction for the Candidates – The Candidate will attempt five questions in all, selecting 

two questions from each unit and one Compulsory question. 

UNIT – I 

1. Cereals and Millets - Composition and nutritive value, cereal products, Breakfast 

cereals rule of cereals in cookery. 

2. Pulses and Legumes - Nutritive value of pulses and legumes, Storage of pulses 

use of pulses. 

3. Milk & Milk Products – Composition and Nutritive value, types of milk products role 

of milk & milk products in cookery. 

4. Vegetables and Fruits – Classification, Composition & Nutritive value, storage & 

Use. 

UNIT II 

5. EGGS – Nutritive aspect, quality of egg preservative and use of egg. 

6. Flesh Food – Composition & nutritive value of meat, fish & poultry. Presentive 

storage uses of flesh food. 

7. Sugar & Sugar Products – Nutritive value sugar related products storage & uses. 

8. Fats & Oils – Nutritional importance composition, specific fats role of fats / oils in 

cookery. 





MICROBIOLOGY (PAPER II) 

10(107) 

DURATION OF EXAM =3Hrs 

M.M 50 (40+10*) 

Instruction for the examiner – The examiner will set nine questions in all , selecting for 


Instruction for the Candidates – The Candidate will attempt five questions in all , selecting 

two question from each unit and one Compalsory question. 

UNIT – I 

1. Introduction to microbiology and its relevance to every day life. General morphology 

of micro-organisms, general characteristics of lacterio, fungus virus, protozoo, 

algae. 

2. Control of micro-organisms, growth curve effect of environmental factors growth of 

micro-organisms PH, water activity ,orygen availability temp & other. 

3. Environmental microbiology , water , air, sort & sewage 

4. Relevance of micobiologystandaeds for food safety. 

UNIT - II 

5. The relation ship of micro-organisms to sanitation effects of micro-organisms 

(Bacteria, viruses, moulds, yeasts and parasites ) or food degradation and food 

borne diseases. 

6. Importance of personal hygienic of food handle habits, clothes and illness, 

education of food handles in handling & serving food. 

7. Cleaning methods = Stertisation and disinfection products & methods use of 

detergents, heat chemicals tests for sansitiser strength 

8. Sanitation – Kitchen design equipment & System structure & layout of food 

premises maintaining clean environment, selecting and installing equipment 

cleaning equipment 

9. Waste product handling, planning of waste disposal, solid wastes & liquid wastes 



10(108) 

LAB – I 

DURATION OF EXAM = 3Hrs 

M.Marks: 50 

1. Wheat preraration – Chapati , Prontha , Plain & Sruffed , Puris, Bhaturas 

2. Rice Preparation – Plain & fried rice, pulao , veg , bieryani 

3. Pulse preparation – Punjabi dal , Alu- chhole, masala rajmah sambar sprouted 

pubes 

4. Vegetable preparation – Alu matar palak paneer, veg kofta , dum alu veg korma 

5. Snacks – Varity of sandwiches , fried snacks 




SEMESTER –IV 

FOOD SERVICE MANAGEMENT (PAPER – I) 

10(109) 


M.M 50(40+10*) 

Instruction for the examiner – The examiner will set nine questions in all , selecting for 


Instruction for the Candidates – The Candidate will attempt five questions in all , selecting 

two question from each unit and one Compalsory question. 

UNIT – I 

1. Aims and objectives of different food service out lets ( I ) Insititutional ( II ) Hospitals 

2. Equiments – Classification of equipments, selection & purchase of equipments 

3. Equipments – Design Installation and operation, care & maintenance of 

equipments. 

4. Planning for cooking & service unit – Layout of kitchens , storage and maintenance 

of kitchens. Planing storage spaces Planning service areas , 

decoration of service & dining area. 

UNIT – II 

5. Menu Planning – Types of menu , writing menus , construction of menus, menu 

display 

6. Food Service – Different styles of service presentation & display of food. 

7. Staff organization of different outlets manager , hostess , Supervisior , steward , 

waiter. 

8. Laws governing food service establishments. 




SEMESTER –IV 

DIETETICS - I (PAPER II) 

10(110) 


M.M 50(40+10*) 

Instruction for the examiner – The examiner will set nine questions in all, selecting for 


Instruction for the Candidates – The Candidate will attempt five questions in all, selecting 

two questions from each unit and one Compalsory question. 

UNIT I 

1. Introduction of meal management – Balanced diet basic principals of meal 

planning, objectives and steps in meal planning. 

2. Nutrition during infancy – Nutritional requirements, advantages of breast feeding 

introduction of supplementary food. 

3. Nutrition during early childhood (Tudoler / Pre School) growth and nutrient needs, 

nutrition related problems. 

4. Nutrition of school children – Nutritional requirements , school lunch programmes 

` UNIT II 

5. Nutrition during adolescence – Nutritional requirments, food choices and eating 

habits. 

6. Nutrition in pregnancy – Nutritional requirements complications of pregnancy. 

7. Nutrition during lactation – Physiology of lactation, nutritional requirements. 

8. Geriatric nutrition – Nutritional requirements, nutrition related problems. 



LAB – II 

1. Planning and preparation of a balanced diet for a pregnant women 

2. Planning and preparation of a balanced diet for a nursing mother. 

3. Preparation of weaning food. 

4. Planning and preparation of a diet for pre schoolers. 

5. Planning and preparation of a diet for pre school going child. 

6. Planning and preparation of a balanced diet for a adolescence. 

10(111) 

DURATION OF EXAM = 3Hrs 

M.Marks: 50 


Semester-III 

DEPARTMENT OF HOME SCIENCE, 


w.e.f. 2012-13 

B.A. II – Fashion Designing 


duration 

Max. marks 

201 Fashion Designing 3 hrs 50 (40 + 10*) 

Semester-IV 

Lab-I 3 hrs 50 


duration 

Max. marks 

202 Fashion Designing 3 hrs 50 (40 + 10*) 


Lab-II` 3 hrs 50 

Instructions for the Examiner : The examiner will set nine questions in all, 


question. 



10(112) 


Course No: 201 

THEORY: 

Semester –III 

Fashion Designing 

10(113) 

Max. Marks: 40 


Exam: 3 hrs 

1. Study of costumes through ages in relation to art and fabric, footwear, head 

dresses and other accessories during the following periods. 

2. Indusvally, Vedic Period, Mourgan & Sunga Period, Satavahana Period, 

Kushan Period, Gupta Period, Mughal Period, British Period, Contemporary 

Period. 

3. Elements and principles of design with special emphasis on colour, colour 

scheme 

and optical illusion. 

4. Role of designer in garment industry. 

(a) Interpreting fabric – silhouette, texture and scale of design. 

(b) 


Lab – I 

PRACTICAL: 

1. Drafting, cutting and stitching of Apron and Blouse, Petticoat 

10(114) 

Maximum Marks – 50 

Exam: 3 hrs 

2. Preparation of samples using various fabric enrichment techniques – Tie & 

Dye, 

Batik, Block Printing and Stencil Painting. 


Course No: 202 

THEORY: 

Semester –IV 

Fashion Designing 

10(115) 

Max. Marks. 40 


Exam: 3 hrs 

1. Details – Open necklines, fasteners, coordination of design and fabric, 

Silhouette 

and basic structural features, Design feature and utilization. 

2. Developing fasion line – Scope of line. 

3. Flat pattern design. 

(i) Half scale design and pattern – dress without waistline, emphasis on 

sleeves. 

(ii) Tailored dresses – Emphasis on decorative details – binding pockets, 

collars. 

(iii) Formal Wear. 

4. Layout and fabric requirement estimate. 

5. Basic draping principles and techniques. 

(i) Blouse design – Basics and variations of sleeves, neckline and collars. 

(ii) Skirt design. 

6. An introduction of computer software with special reference to designing and 

weave design, figure illustration and visualization. 


Lab – II 

PRACTICAL: 

10(116) 


Exam: 3 hrs 

1. Drafting, Cutting and Stitching of adult garments – Kameez, Salwar and 

Churidar, 

Kurta Pyjama, Nightie. 

2. Computer Application – Introduction to computers, Basic Drawings, 

Paintbrush, 

Powerpoint, Photoshop and Corel Draw. 


Scheme of Examinations for M.Sc. (Statistics) w.e.f. 2012-2013 

The duration of the course leading to the degree of Master of Science (M.Sc.) Statistics shall be 

of two academic years. The course will be run under semester system. The examination of 

Semester –I and Semester- II will ordinarily be held in the month of December and that of 

Semester-II and Semester-IV in the month of May on the dates to be notified by the controller 

of examinations. 

There will be five papers in each semester, four theory and one practical. In Semester-I & II all 

the papers will be compulsory. In Semester –III and IV out of four theory papers, two papers 

will be compulsory and the other two will be optional ones. The optional papers will be offered 

from the list given in the scheme provided the staff is available to teach them. 

Each student will be required to give one test /seminar for each paper. and one class test for the 

purpose of internal assessment. 

The details of the scheme of examination: 

Semester-I 

Sr.No. Nomenclature of Paper Max. Marks. Time 

Paper-1 Measure and Probability 80+20* 3 hrs. 

Paper-II Statistical Methods and Distribution Theory 80+20* 3 hrs. 

Paper-III Inference –I 80+20* 3 hrs. 

Paper-IV Applied Statistics 80+20* 3 hrs. 

__ Practical (Calculator and SPSS based) __ __ 

Semester –II 

Paper-1 Demography 80+20* 3 hrs. 

Paper-II Operations Research 80+20* 3 hrs. 

Paper-III Inference -II 80+20* 3 hrs. 

Paper-IV FORTRAN and C 80+20* 3 hrs. 

__ Practical (Computer based) __ __ 

Paper-V Practical 

(A) First Sitting 

Practical for the first sitting will be on 80**+20* 4hrs. 

Calculator and SPSS based 

(B) Second Sitting 

Practical for the second sitting will be 80**+20* 4hrs. 

on computer 

Semester-III 

Paper-I Sampling Theory 80+20* 3 hrs. 

Paper-II C++ and JAVA 80+20* 3 hrs. 

Paper-III &IV 80+20* 3 hrs. 

Any two of the following options: 

Option (i) Theory of Queues 

10(117) 


Option(ii) Linear Programming 

Option(iii) Stochastic Processes 

Option(iv) Bio- Statistics 

Option (v) Statistical Methods in Epidemiology 

Option (vi) Statistical Ecology 

__ Practical (Computer based) __ __ 

Semester -IV 

Paper-I Multivariate Analysis 80+20* 3 hrs. 

Paper-II Linear Estimation & 80+20* 3 hrs. 

Design of Experiments 

Paper –III & IV 80+20* 3 hrs. 

Any two of the following options: 

Option(i) Reliability and Renewal Theory 

Option(ii) Non- Linear and Dynamic Programming 

Option (iii) Information Theory 

Option (iv) Game Theory 

Option (v) Econometrics 

Option (vi) Acturial Statistics 

__ Practical (Calculator and SPSS based) __ __ 

Paper-V Practical 

(A) First Sitting 

Practical for the first sitting will be on 80**+20* 4hrs. 

Computer 

(B) Second Sitting 

Practical for the second sitting will be 80**+20* 4hrs. 

on Calculator and SPSS based 

** The division of Max. Marks for Practical papers is as follows: 

Practical : 60 marks 

Class Record : 10 marks 

Viva-Voce : 10 marks 

*The marks of internal assessment will be based on the following criteria:- 

For Theory Papers: 

(i) One test/ Seminar for each paper : 50% 



(iii) Attendance ** : 25% 

For Practicals: 

(i) One Seminar/Test/ Viva/ Sessional : 50% 

for each paper 



(iii) Attendance*** : 25% 

*** Marks for attendance will be given as under: 

(1) 91% onwards: 5 marks (2) 81% to 90%: 4 marks 

(3) 75% to 80%: 3marks (4) 70% to 74%: 2 Marks 

(5) 65% to 69%: 1 Mark 

10(118) 


M.Sc. Statistics Semester - I 

Paper – I Measure and Probability Max Marks: 80+20* 


Time: 3 hrs. 

Unit –I 

Unit –II 

Unit –III 

Note: There will be nine questions in all. Question No.1 will be compulsory covering 

whole of the syllabus and comprising short answer type questions. Rest of the eight 

questions will be set from the four units uniformly i.e. two from each unit. The candidate 

will be required to attempt five questions in all selecting one from each unit and the 

compulsory one. The weightage of all the questions will be the same. 

Fields; sigma field, sigma-field generated by a class of subsets, Borel fields. Sequence of 

sets, limsup and liminf of sequence of sets, random variables, distribution function. 

Measure, probability measure, properties of a measure, Concept of outer measures, inner 

measures, lebesgue measures Lebesgue-Stieltjes measure on R. 

Measurable functions, sequence of measurable functions; their convergence of various 

types. Integration of measurable function. Monotone convergence theorem. Fatou's 

Lemma. Dominated convergence theorem, Product measure, Fubin’s Theorem. 

Borel-Contelli Lemma, Tchebycheff's and Kolmogorov's inequalities, various modes of 

convergence: in probability, almost sure, in distribution and in mean square and their interrelationship. 

Unit –IV 

Laws of large numbers for i.i.d. Sequences. Characteristic function its uniqueness, 

continuity and inversion formula. Applications of characteristic functions. Central limit 

theorems: De Moivre’s-Laplace, Liapounov, Lindeberg-Levy and their applications 

References: 

1. Kingman, J. F. C. & Taylor, : Introduction to Measure and Probability, Cambridge 

S.J. (1966). University Press. 

2. Bhat, B.R. : Modern Probability Theory, Wiley Eastern Limited 

3. Taylor, J. C. : An Introduction to Measure and Probability, Springer. 

4. Royden, H.L. : Real Analysis, Pearson Prentice Hall. 

5. Billingsley, P. (1986). : Probability and Measure, Wiley. 

6. Halmos, P.R. : Measure Theory, Springer 

7. Basu,A.K. : Measure Theory and Probability,PHI Learning(Pt.Lim.) 

10(119) 



Paper-II Statistical Methods and Distribution Theory Max Marks: 80+20* 


Time: 3 hrs. 




will be required to attempt five questions in all one from each unit and the compulsory one. 

The weightage of all the questions will be the same. 

Unit-I 

Basic concepts of probability: Random variable, sample space, events, different definitions 

of probability, notations, distribution functions. Additive law of probability, theorem 

of total probability, theorem of compound probability and Baye’s theorem. Concept of 

bivariate, marginal and conditional distributions. 

Unit-II 

Mathematical Expectation : Expectation and moments, expectation of sum of variates, 

expectation of product of independent variates, moment generating function. 

Tchebycheff's, Markov , Jensen and Holder and Minkowski inequalities, Covariance, 

correlation coefficient , rank correlation, regression lines partial correlation coefficient, 

multiple correlation coefficient . Relation between characteristic function and moments. 

Unit – III 

Binomial, Poisson, Geometric, Negative binomial, Hypergeometric and 

Multinomial, Normal and log normal distributions. 

Unit –IV 

Uniform, Exponential, Cauchy, Beta, Gamma distribution, Sampling distributions: Student 

- t distributions, F- distribution, Fisher’s z – distribution and Chi-square distribution. Inter 

relations, asymptotic derivations. Simple tests based on t, F, chi square and normal variate 

z. 

References: 

1. Feller, W. : Introduction to probability and its applications, Vol.I, Wiley 

2. Parzen, E. : Modern Probability Theory and its Applications, 

Wiley Interscience 

3. Meyer, P.L. : Introductory Probability and Statistical Applications, 

Addison wesely. 

4. Cramer, H. : Random variable and Probability Distribution, 

Cambridge University Press. 

5. Kapur, J.N. Sexena, : Mathematical Statistics & S.Chand & Co. 

H.C. 

10(120) 



Paper – III Inference -I Max Marks: 80+20* 


Time: 3 hrs. 



questions will be set from the four units uniformly i.e. two from each unit. The candidate will 

be required to attempt five questions in all one from each unit and the compulsory one. The 

weightage of all the questions will be the same. 

Unit – I 

Elements of Statistical Inference. Concept of likelihood function. Point estimation. 

Concept of consistency, unbiased estimators, correction for bias, minimum variance 

estimator, Cramer - Rao inequality, Minimum Variance-Bound (M.V.B.) estimator, 

Bhattacharya Bounds, Uniqueness of minimum variance estimators, efficiency, Minimummean-square 

estimation. 

Unit – II 

Sufficient statistic , sufficiency and minimum variance. Rao- Blackwell theorem. 

Distributions possessing sufficient statistics. Sufficiency when range depends on the 

parameter. Least squares method of estimation and its properties. 

Unit – III 

Unit – IV 

Methods of estimation : one or more parameters. Method of moments, Method of 

minimum chi-square, Method of maximum likelihood estimators and their properties, 

sufficiency, consistency of ML estimators. Hazurbazar’s theorem, unique, consistent 

ML estimators, efficiency and asymptotic normality of ML estimators. 

Interval estimation : Confidence intervals, confidence statements , central and non-central 

intervals , confidence intervals, Most selective intervals , Fiducial intervals : Fiducial 

inference in student’s distribution , Problem of two means and its fiducial solution . Exact 

confidence intervals based on student’s distribution, Approximate confidence- intervals 

solutions. Ideas of subjective probability, prior and posterior distribution, Bayesian 

intervals, Discussion of the methods of interval estimation. 

References: 

1. Kendall and Stuart : Advanced Theory of Statistics Vol.-II, Charles 

Griffin Co .Ltd London. 

2. Rohtagi,V.K. : Introduction to probability Theory and 

Mathematical Statistics (for Numerical and 

Theoretical Applications), John Wiley and Sons. 

3. Wald, A: : Sequential Analysis, Dover publications, INC, New York. 

4. Rao, C.R. : Advanced Statistical Methods in Biometric 

Research. John Wiley &Sons, INC, New York. 

10(121) 



Paper IV Applied Statistics Max Marks: 80+20* 


Time: 3 hrs. 






Unit- I 

Unit- II 

Unit- III 

Unit- IV 

Analysis of time Series, Trend measurement ; use of polynomial, logistic, Gompertz and 

lognormal functions . Moving average method, Spencer's formulae; variate difference 

method, its use for estimation of variance of the random component. Measurement of 

seasonal fluctuations, measurement of cyclical movement. 

Periodogram analysis. Concept of stationary time series, correlogram analysis, correlogram 

of an autoregressive scheme, a moving average scheme and a Harmonic series. Statistical 

quality control and its purposes; 3 sigma control limits, control charts for variables (mean 

and range, mean and standard deviation) Control chart for fraction defective, control chart 

for the number of defects per unit. 

Natural tolerance limits and specification limits; Modified control limits. Sampling 

Inspection Plan : Concepts of Acceptance quality level (A.Q.L) ,Lot tolerance proportion 

defective ( LTPD)and indifference quality. The single and double sampling plans, and their 

four curves viz, AOQ, Operating characteristic (OC), Average Sample Numper (ASN) and 

Average Total Inspection (ATI) curves. 

Sequential sampling plan and its AOQ, OC, ASN and ATI. The choice of sampling plans 

by attributes and by variables. Acceptance Sampling plan by variables, single and sequential 

Sampling Plans, acceptance sampling by variables (known and unknown sigma cases.) 

10(122) 


References: 

1. Kendall, M.G. : Time Series,Griffin London 

2. Gupta, S.C. & Kapoor, V.K. : Fundamentals of Applied Statistics, Sultan 

Chand and Sons. 

3. Ekambaram, S.K. : The Statistical Basis of Acceptance 

Sampling, Asia Publishing House. 

4. Goon, A.M., Gupta, : Fundamentals of Statistics, Vol. II, ed. VI, 

M.K. & Dasgupta, B. Word Press Calcutta 1988 

5. Cooray, T.M.J.A. : Applied Time Series –Analysis and 

10(123) 

Forecasting, Narosa Publishing House 

6. Hansen, B.L. & Ghare, P.M. : Quality Control and Application, PHI. 1987. 

7. Montgomery, D.C. : Introduction to Statistical Quality Control, J. 

Wiley. 1985 

11. Gowden, D.J. : Statistical Methods in Quality Control, 

Prentice Hall. 

12. Grant, E.L. : Statistical Quality Control, Wiley Eastern. 

13. Duncan, A.C : Quality Control and Industrial Statistics, 

Richard O.Irwin, Homewood.IL 


M.Sc. Statistics Semester – I 

Paper-V Practical (Calculator and SPSS based) Max Marks : 80**+20* 

(A) First Sitting ** Practical : 60 

Class Record : 10 

Viva-Vice : 10 


Time: 4 hrs. 

Note: There will be 4 questions, candidates will be required to attempt any 3 questions. 

List of Practicals: 

1. Testes of significance based on t distribution. 

(i) Testing the significance of the mean of a random sample from a normal population. 

(ii) Testing the significance of difference between two sample means, 

(iii) Testing the significance of an observed correlation coefficient. 

(iv) Testing the significance of an observed partial correlation coefficient. 

(v) Testing the significance of an observed regression coefficient. 

2. Tests based on F distribution. 

(i) Testing the significance of the ratio of two independent estimates of the population 

variance. 

(ii) Testing the homogeneity of means (Analysis of variance). 

3. Testing the significance of the difference between two independent correlation coefficients. 

4. Testing the significance for 

(i) A single proportion 

(ii) Difference of proportions for large samples. 

5. Obtaining confidence or fiducial limits for unknown mean. 

6. Testing the significance of the difference between means of two large samples. 

7. Testing the significance of difference between standard deviations of two large samples. 

8. Estimation of parameters of Distributions by 

i. Method of moments. 

ii. Method of least squares. 

iii. Method of Modified minimum χ 2 . 

iv. Maximum likelihood estimators. 

9. Fitting of the 

(i) Binomial distribution 

(ii) Poisson 

(iii) Normal distribution 

and their test of goodness of fit using χ 2 test. 

10. Correlation and regression 

(i) Pearson’s coefficient of correlation 

(ii) Spearman’s rank correlation coefficient (with ties and without ties). 

(iii) Fitting of the lines of regression. 

10(124) 


11. Multiple and partial correlations 

(i) Multiple correlation coefficients 

(ii) Partial correlation coefficients 

(iii) Fitting of regression plane for three variates 

12. Time series and SQC 

a. To obtain trends by using 

(i) Method of Semi-Averages 

(ii) Method of curve fitting 

(iii) Method of moving average. 

(iv) Spencer’s 15 - point and 21 point - formulas. 

b. To obtain seasonal variation indices by using 

(i) Ratio to trend method. 

(ii) Ratio to moving average method. 

(iii) Link relative method. 

c. To construct 

__ 

(i) X and R–chart (ii) p–chart (iii) c–chart 

and comment on the State of control of the process. 

10(125) 


M.Sc. Statistics Semester - II 

Paper –I Demography Max Marks: 80+20* 


Time: 3 hrs. 

Unit –I 

Unit –II 

Unit –III 

Unit –IV 






Methods of obtaining demographic data, Rates and ratios, measurement of population at a 

given time , measurement of mortality : crude death rate , specific rates ,infant mortality rate 

, prenatal mortality rate , standard death rates .Life tables : Construction of a complete life 

table and its uses. 

Abridged life tables : Kings method , Reed and Merrell’s method, Greville’s method, 

Keyfitz and Frauenhal’s method and Chiang’s method . Measurement of fertility : Crude 

birth rate , general fertility rate , age specific fertility rate , total fertility rate , gross 

reproduction rate and net reproduction rate . 

Structure of populations: Stable and quasi-stable population, Fundamental equation of stable 

population theory , intrinsic rate of growth , intrinsic birth and death rates , intrinsic age 

distribution , Leslie’s model of population growth . 

Population Projection : Projected values & estimates, method of Projection , population 

size , population composition , survival rates : UN model life table ,model life tables of 

Coale and Demeny, Ledermann’s model life tables, Brass model. 

References: 

1. Ramakumar, R. : Technical Demography, Wiley, Eastern Limited. 

2. Gupta, S.C. & Kapoor, V.K. : Fundamental of applied Statistics, 1990. Sultan 

Chand and Sons, Ch. 9 only. 

3. Benjamin,B. (1969) : Demographic Analysis, George, Allen and Unwin. 

4. Cox, P.R. (1970). : Demography, Cambridge University Press. 

5. Keyfitz, N (1977). : Applied Mathematical Demography; Springer 

Verlag. 

6. Spiegelman, M. (1969). : Introduction to Demographic Analysis; Harvard 

University 

10(126) 


M.Sc. Statistics Semester-II 

Paper-II Operations Research Max Marks: 80+20* 


Time: 3 hrs. 

Unit –I 

Unit –II 

Unit-III 

Unit – IV 






Linear Programming : Basic concepts convex sets, Linear Programming problem 

(LPP), Examples of LPP, Hyperplane, Open and Closed half spaces. Feasible, basic 

feasible and optimal solutions, Extreme points and graphical method. Simplex method. 

Duality in linear programming 

Transportation and Assignment problems. (Computational Techniques only). 

Decision Theory : Algorithm for decision based problems, Types of decision making, 

Decision making under uncertainty : Criterion of optimism , Criterion of pessimism 

and Hurwicz criterion . Decision making under risks: EVM, EOL and decision tree 

techniques. 

Game Theory : Terminology , two person zero sun game; game of pure strategy , game of 

mixed strategy , reducing game by dominance, linear programming method. 

Replacement models: replacement of items whose efficiency deteriorates with time 

and (i) The value of the money remains same during the period (ii) The value of 

the money also changes with time. Criterion of present value for comparing 

replacement alternatives. 

Inventory models: Deterministic inventory models ( D.I.M ) with no shortages: Basic EOQ 

model , EOQ with several runs of unequal lengths , EOQ with finite replenishment 

D.I.M. with shortages : E O Q with instantaneous production and variable (fixed) order 

cycle time., EOQ with finite production EOQ with price breaks : E.O.Q with one price 

break. Simple Multi-item deterministic inventory model, model with limitation on space, 

model with limitation on investment. Queueing models : Introduction of queueing models, 

steady state solution of M/M/1 , M/M/1/N , M/M/C and M/M/C/N and their measures of 

effectiveness. CPM (Critical path method) to solve the network problems and PERT. 

10(127) 


References: 

1. Hadley, G. : Linear Programming, Narosa Publications House. 

2. Churchman, C.W.. : Introduction to Operations Research John Wiley& Sons 

New York. 

3. Goel, B.S. & Mittal, S.K.: Operations Research, Pragater Prekshlen, John & Sons. 

4. Gross, D. & : Fundamentals of Queuing Theory Wiley. 

Harris, C.M. 

5. Allen, A.O : Probability Statistics & Queuing Theory With Computer 

Science Applications (Academic Press) INC. Elsevier Direct. 

10(128) 



Paper – III Inference -II Max Marks: 80+20* 


Time: 3 hrs. 

Note: There will be nine questions in all. Question No.1 will be compulsory covering whole of 

the syllabus and comprising short answer type questions. Rest of the eight questions will be set 

from the four units uniformly i.e. two from each unit. The candidate will be required to attempt 

five questions in all one from each unit and the compulsory one. The weightage of all the questions 

will be the same. 

Unit – I 

Elements of Statistical decision theory. Neyman - Pearson lemma (with emphasis on the 

motivation of theory of testing of hypothesis) BCR and sufficient statistics. Testing 

a simple hypothesis against a class of alternatives. Uniformly most powerful test and sufficient 

statistics, power function. One and two sided tests. 

Unit –II 

Likelihood ratio test and its applications, asymptotic distribution of LR statistic and 

asymptotic power of LR tests. An optimum property of sufficient statistics. Similar regions, 

Elementary ideas of complete statistics, Completeness of sufficient statistics. Sequential 

Analysis. Concept of ASN and OC functions. Wald's sequential probability ratio test and its 

OC and ASN functions. 

Unit –III 

Unit –IV 

Non - parametric tests and their applications. Tests of randomness, One-sample and Pairedsample 

techniques: The Sign test and Signed-rank test. Goodness of fit problem: Chi-square 

and Kolmogrov- Smirnov tests, Independence in Bivariate sample: Kendall’s Tau coefficient 

and Spearman’s rank correlation. 

Generalized two-sample problem: The Wald-Wolfowitz Runs test, Kolmogrov-Smirnov two 

sample Test, Median Test, Mann-Whitney U Test, Linear Ranked tests for the Location and 

Scale problem: Wilcoxon Test, Mood Test, Siegel-Tukey Test, Klotz Normal-scores Test, 

Sukhatme Test. 

References: 

1. Kendall and Stuart : Advanced Theory of Statistics Vol.-II, Charles Griffin & 

Co. Ltd, London 

2. Rohtagi,V.K. : Introduction to probability Theory and Mathematical 

Statistics(for Numerical and Theoretical Applications). 

3. Wald, A : Sequential Analysis Dover Publications, INC. New York. 

4. Gibbons, Jean Dickinson : Nonparametric Statistical Inference ( For Unit - IV only ). 

McGraw – Hill Book Co. New York. 

5. Rao, C.R. : Advanced Statistical Methods in Biometric 

Research, John Wiley& Sons, INC, New York. 

10(129) 



Paper –IV FORTRAN and C Max Marks: 80+20* 


Time: 3 hrs. 






Unit-I 

Computer Fundamentals: characteristics & classification of computers, Algorithmic 

Development: Techniques of problem solving, Flowcharting, Structured programming 

concepts. 

Elements of Fortran : Fortran character set, identifiers and keywords, Constants and 

variables, Data types: declaration and definition. Operators and expressions: Arithmetic, 

relational and logical along with their precedence and applications. Statements: Assignment, 

Input-output statements with and without formatting, Executable and non-executable 

statements. Control statements: Various types of If and Goto statement; Repetition: various 

types of do loops. 

Unit -II 

Subscripted Variables: Subscript notation, arrays, dimension statements. 

Subprograms: Subroutine and function subprogram and their applications, Library 

Functions. File Processing: File characteristics, opening and closing files, using files. 

Additional features: Common & Equivalence Statements, pause statement. 

Unit -III 

Elements of C: The strusture of a C program, C character set, identifiers and keywords, 

Data types: declaration and definition, Numeric constants and variables 

Operators: Arithmetic, relational, logical, bitwise, unary, assignment and conditional 

operators and their hierarchy & associativity. Data input/output, Arithmetic & logical 

expression.Control statements: Sequencing, Selection: if and switch statement; alternation, 

Repetition: for, while, and do-while loop; break, continue, goto. 

Unit-IV 

Functions: Definition, prototype, passing parameters, recursion. Arrays : Declaration, 

various operations on one-dimentional, multidimentional arrays, Structure, Union. Pointers: 

Declaration, operations on pointers, use of pointers.Storage class specifiers, String 

handling. 

REFERENCES: 

1. Kumar, Ram. : Programming with Fortran77, Tata McGraw Hill 

2. Kanetker,Yashwant. : Let us C, BPB Publications. 

3. Gottfried : Programming with C, Tata McGraw Hill. 

4. Sinha, P.K. : Computer Fundamentals, P.K.Sinha, BPB Publications. 

5. Rajaraman, V. : Programming with Fortran, 77, Prentice Hall 

6. Schuam Series : Programming with Fortran, McGraw-Hill 

10(130) 


M.Sc. Statistics Semester – II 

Paper-V Practical (Computer based) Max Marks : 80**+20* 

(B) Second Sitting ** Practical : 60 

Class Record : 10 



Time: 4 hrs. 


List of Practicals based FORTRAN and C 

1. Finding the mean and standard deviation for discrete and continuous data. 

2. Computation of Moments, Skewness and Kurtosis of given data. 

3. Computation of Karl Pearson’s, partial & multiple correlation coefficient and Spearman’s 

rank correlation coefficient. 

4. Curve fitting, fitting of lines of regression. 

5. Fitting of distribution: Binomial, Poisson and Normal. 

6. Addition, subtraction, multiplication, transpose and inverse of matrices. 

7. Computation of Eigen values and Eigen vectors. 

8. Solution of a system of simultaneous linear equations. 

9. Solutions of linear programming problems by simplex method. 

10(131) 


M.Sc. Statistics Semester - III 

Paper –I Sampling Theory Max Marks: 80+20* 


Time: 3 hrs. 






Unit -I 

Basic finite population sampling techniques: Simple random sampling with replacement, 

Simple random sampling without replacement, Stratified sampling, Systematic sampling 

and related results on estimation of population mean/total, Relative precision of different 

sampling techniques, Allocation problem in stratified sampling. 

Unit –II 

Use of supplementary information: Ratio estimation, bias and mean square error, estimation 

of variance, comparison with SRS, ratio estimator in stratified sampling, unbiased ratio-type 

estimators, regression and difference estimators, comparison of regression estimator with 

SRS and ratio estimator, Two-stage sampling. 

Unit –III 

Sampling and sub-sampling of clusters. Single stage cluster sampling. Estimation of 

proportions, estimation of efficiency of clustering, Multistage sampling, Stratified multi 

stage sampling. Double Sampling: for difference estimation, for unbiased ratio estimation, 

for regression estimation, for stratification. 

Unit –IV 

Repetitive surveys: Sampling over two occasions, sampling over more than two 

occasions, probability proportionate to sampling (PPS) with replacement and without 

replacement methods [Cumulative total and Lahiri’s method] and related estimators of a 

finite population mean[ Horvitz Thompson estimator, Yates and Grundy estimator, Desraj 

estimators for a general sample size and Murthy’s estimator for a sample of size two]. 

References: 

1. Chaudhuri A and Mukerjee R.(1988) : Randomized Response, Theory and 

Techniques, New York : Marcel; Dekker Inc. 

2. Cochran W.G. : Sampling Techniques (3rd Edition, 1977), 

Wiley. 

3. Des Raj and Chandak ( 1998) : Sampling Theory, Narosa Publications House. 

4. Murthy.M.N (1977) : Sampling Theory & Statistical Methods 

Publishing Society, Calcutta. 

5. Sukhatme et atl (1984). : Sample Theory of Surveys with 

Applications. lowa State University Press & 

IARS. 

10(132) 



Paper –II C++ and JAVA Max Marks: 80+20* 


Time: 3 hrs. 


whole of the syllabus and comprising short answer type questions. Rest of the eight questions will 

be set from the four units uniformly i.e. two from each unit. The candidate will be required to 

attempt five questions in all one from each unit and the compulsory one. The weightage of all the 

questions will be the same. 

Unit-I 

Object-Oriented Programming: Principles of OOP, Structure of C++ Program, Identifier and 

key-words, Data Types, variables, Operators in C++, Functions in C++. 

Classes & Objects : Classes, member function, inline member function, objects, access 

specifiers, Static class members, friend function, Constructor & destructor : Constructor, 

parameterized constructor, copy constructor, destructor. 

Operator overloading: Function overloading, operator overloading. 

Unit-II 

Inheritence : types of inheritence, container classes, virtual base class, abstract class, 

constructor in derived classes. 

Pointers, Virtual functions and polymorphism : polmorphism, early binding, polymorphism 

with pointers, virtual functions, late binding, pure virtual functions. 

File processing: classes for file stream operations, opening and closing a file, file modes, file 

pointers & their manipulation, sequential files, random files. 

Unit-III 

JAVA and The Internet : The JAVA programming language and its characteristics; Java 

run- time environment; Java compiler; Java developers kit; running Java applications and Java 

applets. 

JAVA programming: Elements of Java: Data types, operators & expressions, control 

structures. Class, objects & methods, constructors, finalizer, access qualifiers, array, string & 

vectors. 

Unit-IV 

Inheritance: Various types of inheritance in Java, Interfaces: Declaration & definition of 

interface use of interface in multiple inheritance, Packages: Built-in Packages, user-defined 

packages, Multithreading, 

Applet: Life-cycle, programming. Graphics in Java 

Exception Handling- Defining and throwing exceptions, creating your own exceptions, various 

types of exceptions. 

References: 

1. Stroustrup, B. : The C++ Programming Language, Addison-Wesley, 1993 

2. Lippman : C++ Primer, 3/e, Addison-Wesley 

3. Balaguruswami, E. : Object Oriented Programming In C++, Tata McGraw-Hill. 

4. Schildt, Herbert. : C++: The Complete Reference, 2/e, Tata McGraw-Hill, 

5. Balaguruswami, E : Programming with Java – E, Second Edition, TMH-1998. 

6. Herbert Schildt : The Complete Reference Java 2 - Fourth edition 

10(133) 



Paper –III & IV Opt. (i) Theory Of Queues Max Marks: 80+20* 


Time: 3 hrs. 






Unit-I 

Queueing system. Components of a queueing system, measures of effectiveness, 

notations, exponential distribution and its various properties, stochastic processes, 

definition and examples, Poisson process and its some important properties related to 

queues. Markov chains and its properties (without proof). Concepts of steady state and 

transient state, K-Erlang distribution. Birth and death process. 

Unit-II 

M/M/1 queueing system steady state and time dependent solutions. measures of effectiveness, 

busy period distribution, 'waiting time distribution, Little’s formula. State probability 

generating function for M/M/1/N queueing system and its steady state probabilities measures of 

effectiveness, Time dependent solutions of M/M/� queuing system and M/M/� queueing 

system with time dependent input parameter, measures of effectiveness, M/M/1 queueing system 

with phase type service, busy period time distribution, waiting time distribution. 

Unit-III 

Non-primitive M/M/1/� queueing system with two priority classes. Mu1tiple channel 

queueing system with Poisson input and constant service time (M/D/C), Measures of 

effectiveness. Erlang service model M/Ek/1, Erlang arrival model Ek/M/1. 

Unit-IV 

Departure point steady state system size probabilities for M/G/1 queueing system, special 

cases M/Ek/1 and M/D/1 Pollaczek-Khintchine formula, waiting time, busy period analysis. 

Arrival point steady state system size probabilities for GI/ M/1 queueing system. Machine 

interference Model 

References: 

1. Gross, D. & : Fundamental. of queuing theory, John Wiley and Son.. 

Harris C.M 

2. Saaty, T.L. : Elements of queueing theory with app 

lications. McGraw Hill Book Company Inc. 

3. Allen, A.O. : Probability, Statistics and Queuing Theory with 

Computer Science Applications, Academic Press 

4. Kashyap, B.R.K & : An Introduction to Queueing Theory, AARKAY Publications, 

Chaudhary, M.L. Calcutts. 

10(134) 



Paper –III & IV Opt. (ii) Linear Programming Max Marks: 80+20* 


Time: 3 hrs. 






Unit-I 

Introduction : Theory of simplex method; Slack and surplus variables, Reduction 

of any feasible solution, Unbounded solutions, Optimal conditions, Extreme points 

and basic feasible solutions, Computational aspects of the simplex method :Selection of 

the vector to enter the basis , Degeneracy and breaking the ties, Transformation 

formulas,Artificial Variables, Inconsistency and Redundancy, Tableau format. The two 

phase method for artificial variables, Unrestricted variables. 

Unit-II 

Resolution of degeneracy problem: Charne's perturbation method, use of 

perturbation technique and simplex tableau format. The generalized linear 

programming problems, Generalized simplex method. The revised simplex method: 

Standard from I and II. Computational procedure for standard from I and II. 

Comparison of Simplex and revised Simplex method. 

Unit-III 

Duality theory : Dual linear programming problem, Fundamental properties of 

dual problems, complementary Slackness, Unbounded solution in the primal , 

Dual algorithm , Alternative derivation of dual complex algorithm, Initial solution 

for dual simplex algorithm, a primal dual algorithm. 

Unit –IV 

Transportation problem, simplex method and transportation problem, 

transportation problem tableau, the stepping stone algorithm , Degeneracy and 

the transportation tableau, Determination of an initial basic feasible solution, 

Generalised transportation problems and their solutions. Applications of linear 

programming to industrial problems. Production allocation and transportation, 

Machine assignment problem , Regular time and over time production , optimal 

product mix and activity levels, Petroleum - refinery operations, Blending problems. 

References: 

1. Hadley, G. : Linear programming, Narosa Publications House. 

2. Vejda, S. : Mathematical Programming, Dover Publications. 

3. Saul E.Gauss. : Linear programming Methods and Applications, Dover 

Publications. 

4. Kambo, N. S. : Mathematical Programming Techniques, East –West Press Pvt. 

Ltd. 

5. Mittal, K.V. : Optimization Methods, New Age International (P) Ltd. 

10(135) 



Paper –III & IV Opt. (iii) Stochastic Processes Max Marks: 80+20* 


Time: 3 hrs. 






. 

Unit-I 

Introduction to Stochastic processes, Classification of Stochastic processes according to state, 

space and time domain. Generating function, Convolutions, Compound distribution, Partial 

fraction expansion of generating functions. 

Unit-II 

Recurrent events, recurrence time distribution: necessary and sufficient condition for 

persistent and transient recurrent events & its illustrations and Notion of delayed recurrent 

event. Random walk models : absorbing, reflecting and elastic barriers, Gambler's ruin 

problem, probability distribution of ruin at nth trial. 

Unit-III 

Markov chains: transition probabilities, classification of states and chains, evaluation of the 

n th power of its transition probability matrix. Discrete branching processes, chance of 

extinction, means and variance of the n th generation. 

Unit-IV 

Notions of Markov processes in continuous time and Chapman-Kolmogorov equations. The 

Poisson process: The simple birth process, the simple death processes. The simple birth and 

death process: The effect of immigration on birth and death process. The Polya Processes: 

Simple non-homogeneous birth and death processes. 

References: 

1. Bailey, N.T : The Elements of Stochastic Processes.(1964 Ed.) 

2. Medhi , J. : Stochastic Processes, New Age International (P) Limited 

3. Karlin , S. : Introduction to Stochastic Processing, Vol. I, Academic 

Press. 

4. Karlin, S. : Introduction to Stochastic Modeling, Academic Press. 

5. Basu, A.K. : Introduction to Stochastic Process, Narosa Publishing House. 

10(136) 



Paper –III & IV Opt. (iv) Bio-Statistics Max Marks: 80+20* 


Time: 3 hrs. 






. 

Unit-I 

Bioassays : Quantitative and quantal response, dose response relation. estimation of median 

effective dose, estimation of unknown concentration or potency, probit and logit 

transformations, Parallel line and slope ratio assays , potency, ratio, Feller's theorem. Tests for 

non-validity, symmetric and asymmetric : assays, Toxic action of mixtures. 

Unit-II 

Types of mating: Random mating, Hardy-Weinberg equilibrium, Random mating in finite 

population. Inbreeding (Generation Matrix Approach) Segregation and linkage. Estimation of 

segregation and linkage parameters 

Unit-III 

Concept of gen frequencies. Estimation of gene frequencies Quantitative 

inheritance, Genetic parameters heritability, genetic correlation and repeatability 

methods of estimation. Selection and its effect, Selection Index, dialled and partially 

dialled Crosses. 

Unit-IV 

Genotype environment interactions. Components of variance and Genotypic variance, 

Components of Covariance, Correlations between relatives, Genetic parameters; Heritability, 

Repeatability 

References: 

1. Kempthorne, O : An Introduction to Genetical Statistics, Wiley Eastern 

2 Jain, l.R. (1982) : Statistical techniques in quantitative genetics. 

Tata-McGraw Hill 

3. Poti, S.J. (1983) : Quantitative study in life sciences, Vikas Publishing Ltd. 

4. Prem Narain; Bhatia : Handbook of Statistical Genetics, V.K. and Malhotra, 

I.A.S.R.I.P.K. (1979) 

5. Daniell, W.W : Bio Statistics – A foundation for analysis in health 

sciences , 3 rd ed. John wiley 

6 Falconer, D.S. : Introduction to quantitative Genetics (Longman Group Ltd.) 

10(137) 


M.Sc. Statistics Semester – III 

Paper –III & IV Opt. (v) Statistical Methods in Epidemiology Max Marks: 80+20* 


Time: 3 hrs. 






Unit-I 

Measures of disease frequency: Mortality/Morbidity rates, incidence, rates, 

prevalence rates. Sources of mortality/Morbidity statistics-hospital records, vital 

statistics records. Measures of accuracy or validity, sensitivity index, specificity index. 

Unit-II 

Epidemiologic concepts of diseases, Factors which determine the occurrence of 

diseases, models of transmission of infection, incubation period, disease spectrum 

and herd immunity. 

Observational studies in Epidemiology: Retrospective and prospective studies. Measures of 

association :Relative risk, odds ratio, attributable risk. 

Unit-III 

Statistic techniques used in analysis: Cornfield and Garts’ method, Mantel.Haenszel method. 

Analysis of data from matched samples, logistic regression approach. 

Experimental Epidemiology: clinical and community trials. Statistical Techniques: 

Methods for comparison of the two treatments. Crossover design with Garts and 

Mcnemars test. Randomization in a clinical trial, sequential methods in clinical trials. 

Clinical life tables, 

Unit-IV 

Assessment of survivability in clinical trials. Mathematical Modelling in Epidemiology: 

simple epidemic model, Generalized epidemic models, Reed First and Green wood 

models, models for carrier borne and host vector diseases. 

References: 

1. Lilienfeld and LiJenfeld : Foundations of Epidemiology, Oxford University Press. 

2. Lanchaster, H.O. : An Introduction to Medical Statistics, John Wiley & Sons 

Inc. 

3. FIeiss, J.L. : Statistical Methods for Rates and Proportions, Wiley 

Inter Science. 

4. Armitage : Sequential Medical Trials, Second Edition,Wiley 

Blackwell. 

5. Bailey, N.T.J. : The mathematical theory of infectious disease and 

Applications, Griffin. 

10(138) 



Paper –III & IV Opt. (vi) Statistical Ecology Max Marks: 80+20* 


Time: 3 hrs. 






Unit-I 

Population Dynamics: Single species -exponential logistic and Gompertz models, two species 

competition and competitive exclusion, Predator-pray interaction, Lotka- Volteria equations. 

Unit-II 

Estimation of Abundance: Capture-recapture method, Line transect methods, nearest 

neighbour and nearest individual distance methods. 

Unit-III 

Analysis of bird ring recovery data, open and closed populations. Survivorship Models: 

Discrete case-life table, Leslie matrix. Continuous case survivorship curve, hazard rate, life 

distribution with monotone and non-monotone hazard rates. 

Unit-IV 

Ecological community: Species abundance curve, broken stick model. Diversity and 

its measures. Renewable Resources': Maximum sustainable yield, maximum 

economic yield, optimal harvesting strategy. 

References: 

1. Begin M, and Mortiner, M. : Population Ecology, Blackwell Science. 

2. Clark, C.W : Bioeconomic Modelling and Fisheries Management 

3. Hallan, T.G. and Levin, S.A. : Mathematical Ecology, Springer 

4. Kapur, J.N : Mathematical Models in Biology and Medicine, Affiliated 

East-West Press 

5. Pielou, E.C : Mathematical Ecology, John Wiley & Sons Inc. 

6. Clark, C.W. : Mathematical Bioeconomics--the Optimal Management of 

Renewable Resources, Wiley-Inter Science. 

7. Seber, G.A.F. : The Estimation of Animal,Abundance; The Blackburn 

Press. 

10(139) 


M.Sc. Statistics Semester – III 

Paper-V Practical (Computer based) Max Marks : 80**+20* 

(A) First Sitting **Practical : 60 

Class Record: 10 



Time: 4 hrs. 



1. Estimation of population mean, total, confidence limits and variance of estimator under 

simple random sampling. 

2. Estimation of population total, population mean and variance of estimator under stratified 


3. Calculation of optimum, proportional allocation. 

4. Comparison of stratified sampling with different types of allocation with unstratified simple 


5. Comparison of systematic sampling with simple random and stratified random sampling. 

6. Problem of allocation with more than one item in same survey. 

7. Estimation of proportions and percentages, Variance of the estimators. 

8. Estimation of variance in double sampling for stratification. 

9. Estimation of gain in precision due to stratification from the results of stratified sample. 

10. Ratio estimator for mean and total of population, variance of the estimators. 

11. Comparison of ratio estimator with mean per unit estimator under simple random sampling. 

12. Comparison of separate and combined ratio estimators under stratified random sampling 

with mean per unit estimate or under random sampling. 

13. Comparison of different types of allocation for ratio estimator under stratified random 

sampling. 

14. Comparison of two ratios. 

15. Comparison of regression, ratio and mean per unit estimates from a simple random sample. 

10(140) 


M.Sc. Statistics Semester - IV 

Paper –I Multivariate Analysis Max Marks: 80+20* 


Time: 3 hrs. 

Unit-I 

Unit-II 






Notion of multivariate distribution, multivariate normal distribution of linear 

combination of normal variates, Marginal and Conditional distributions, Multiple and 

partial correlation coefficients. Characteristic function of a random vector, 

characteristic function when the random vector is normally distributed. Moments 

and semi-invariants of multivariate normal distribution. Estimation of the mean 

vector and covariance matrix, maximum likelihood estimator of the parameters 

of multivariate normal distribution. 

The distribution of the sample mean vector and sample dispersion matrix. Sample 

correlation coefficient, maximum likelihood estimators of total, partial and 

multiple correlation coefficients; sampling distribution of simple, partial and multipal 

correlation coefficients when the corresponding population correlation coefficients are 

zero. Testing hypotheses of significance of these distributions. 

Unit-III 

Hotteling’s T 2 and Mahalanobis D 2 -Statistic; Justification , distribution and uses . The 

multivariate Behren’s Fisher Problem and its solution. Classification Problem : Standards of 

good classification, Baye’s and minimax regions for classification into one of two known 

multivariate normal populations when the parameters are known and unknown. Fisher’s 

linear discriminator, Anderson’s discriminator. 

Unit-IV 

Wishart Distribution : Definition, Character function and properties. Sample generalized 

variance, asymptotic distribution of sample generalized variances. Principal components in 

the population, Canonical correlation in the population. 

References: 

1. Anderson, T.W.(1983), : An Introduction to Multivariate Statistical analysis, 

Second Edition John Wiley. 

2. Narayan, C. Giri : Multivariate Statistical analysis, Marcel Dekker. 

3. Srivastava, M.S.& : An introduction to Multivariate Statistics, North 

Khatri C.G.(1979), Holland. 

4. Kshirsagar, A.M.(1972) : Multivariate Analysis, Marcell-Dekher 

5. Johnson, R.A : Applied Multivariate Statistical Analysis,PHI Learning 

& Wichern,D.W 

6. Bhuyan, K.C : Multivariate Analysis and its applications, New Central 

Book Agency(P) Ltd. 

10(141) 



Paper – II Linear Estimation & Design of Experiments Max Marks: 80+20* 


Time: 3 hrs. 



questions will be set from the four unit uniformly i.e. two from each unit. The candidate 


The weightage of all the questions will be the same 

Unit –I 

Linear estimation : Standard Gauss- Markov models, estimability of parameters, best 

linear unbiased estimators (BLUE) , Method of least squares and Gauss Markov theorem; 

Variance- covariance matrix of BLUES . Tests of Linear hypothesis, one-way and two 

way classifications Fixed, random and mixed effects Models (two - way classification) 

Unit –II 

Basic principles of experimental design. General block design and its information 

matrix, criteria of connectedness, balance and orthogonality. Construction and 

analysis of completely randomised, randomised blocks and Latin-square designs. 

Factorial experiments: Symmetrical factorials. Factorial experiments: 2 2 -experiment, 2 3 - 

experiment and 2 n -experiment in 2 k blocks per replicate. 

Unit – III 

Confounding, Fractional factorials, Split-plot design. Incomplete Block Design. 

Balanced incomplete block design, construction and analysis with and without recovery 

of intrablock information. 

Unit – IV 

Partially balanced incomplete block design: Construction and analysis with and 

without recovery of intrablock information. Optimality of design. Orthogonal Latin 

squares. 

References: 

1. Kshirsagar, A.M.(1972) : Linear Models, Marcell-Dekhar 

2. Searle, S.R.(1971) : Linear Models , John Wiley & sons New York. 

3. Aloke Dey, : Theory of Block Designs , Wiley Eastern Ltd. 

(Chapter First ) 

4. Chakrabarti, M.C.(1962) : Mathematics of Design and Analysis 

of Experiments, Asia Publishing House,(First 

Chapter.) 

5. Joshi, D.D (1990) : Linear Estimation and Design of 

Experiments , Wiley Eastern Ltd. ( Chapter Fourth) 

6. Angela Dean and Daniel : Design and Analysis of Experiments, 

Voss (1999) Springer. 

10(142) 


7. Das, M.N.and Giri, N (1979) : Design and Analysis of Experiments, 

Wiley Eastern. 

8. Giri, N.(1986) : Analysis of Variance, South Asian Publishers. 

9. John, P.W.M.(1971) : Statistical Design and Analysis of Experiments, 

Machmillan. 

10. Montogomery, C.D.(1976) : Design and Analysis of Expertiments, 

Wiley, New York. 

11. Meyers, R.H.(1971) : Response Surface Methodology, 

Allyn & Bacon. 

12. Pearce, S.C.(1984) : Design of Experiments, Wiley, New York. 

13. Rao, C.R.and Kleffe, J (1988) : Estimation of Variance 

Components and applications, North Holland. 

14. Searle, S.R.,Casella, G. and : Variance Components, Willey. 

McCulloch, C.E.(1992): 

10(143) 



Paper-III & IVth Opt. (i) Reliability and Renewal Theory Max Marks: 80+20* 


Time: 3 hrs. 



questions will be set from the four units uniformly i.e. two from each unit. The candidate will 

be required to attempt five questions in all one from each unit and the compulsory one. The 

weightage of all the questions will be the same 

Unit-I 

Concept of reliability , early age failures, wearout failures and chance failures. 

Derivation of general reliability function failure rate, failure density function and 

mean time between failures ( MTBF). System reliability evaluation: series 

system, parallel system, partially redundant system, standby system with perfect 

switching / imperfect switching. Effect of spare components (identical / non- identical) on 

the system reliability. 

Unit-II 

Wearout and Component reliability, Combined effect of wearout and chance failures.Reliability 

of a two component system with single repair facility. Reliability evaluation Techniques : 

Conditional probability approach , cut set method, approximation evaluation, Deducing the 

minimal cut sets. Tie set method , connection matrix technique. 

Unit-III 

General Introduction. The distribution of the number of renewals: The asymptotic distribution 

of N. The asymptotic normality of Nt with mean t/� and variance t/�3 The number of renewals 

in a random time, the renewal function , the asymptotic form of the renewal function. The 

renewal density, variance of the number of renewals. 

Unit-IV 

Backward and forward recurrence times. Limiting distribution of recurrence times. Pooled 

output of p renewal processes when p is small and its general properties. The mean time upto 

the renewal. The interval between successive renewals, study of the pooled output of p 

renewal processes when p is large. 

References: 

1. Cox D.R. & Miller H.D. : Theory of Stochastic Processes, Chapman and Hall Ltd. 

2. Billinton, R. : Reliability Evaluation of Engineering systems 

: Concepts and Techniques Plemum Press New York 

London. 

3. Cox, D.R. : Renewal Theory, Methuen & Co. Ltd. 

4. Medhi,J. : Stochastic Processes New Age International (P) Limited. 

5. Igor Bazovsky : Reliability Theory and Practice, 2 nd ed. Prentice Hall. 

10(144) 



Paper –III & IV Opt. (ii) Non –Linear and Dynamic Programming Max Marks: 80+20* 


Time: 3 hrs. 


the syllabus and comprising short answer type questions. Rest of the eight questions will be 

set from the four unit uniformly i.e. two from each unit. The candidate will be required to 

attempt five questions in all one from each unit and the compulsory one. The weightage of 

all the questions will be the same 

Unit – I 

Introduction:Classical optimization methods, maxima and minima in the absence of 

constraints, constrained maxima and minima, treatment of non-negative variables and 

inequality constraints. Convex and concave functions and their maxima and minima.Khun- 

Tucker theory : Necessary and sufficient conditions for saddle points, the Khun- 

Tucker theorem, Khun-Tucker's derivation of the necessary conditions. 

Unit – II 

Quadratic programming- Wolfe’s approach for treating the parametric objective function, 

Wolfe technique, Beale's Technique, Duality in quadratic programming. Separable 

programming and its reduction to LPP. Separable programming Algorithm, Fractional 

programming and computational procedure of fractional Algorithm. 

Unit – III 

Integer linear programming, Global optimum for the �-form and �-form of the 

approximating problem by conversion of fixed charge problem to an integer 

programming problem. Formulation of sequencing problems as integer linear 

programming problems, project planning and man-power scheduling, the traveling 

sales man problem , Capital budgeting in a firm. Solution of integer programming 

problems, Gomory's algorithm for the all integer problem. 

Unit – IV 

Dynamic Programming: Principle of optimality , Cargo Loading problem, Inventory 

Problem, Computational Technique , Dimensionality Problem , Approximation by 

piecewise linear functions, Optimal path Problem, Sequencing Problem, Control Problem, 

Optimal page allocation Problem , Serial Multi Stage system , Comparison of Linear & 

Dynamic Programming. 

References: 

1. Hadley, G. : Non linear and Dynamic programming. 

2. Vejda,S. : Mathematical Programming, Dover Publications. 

3. Kambo, N. S. : Mathematical Programming Techniques, East-West Press Ltd. 

4. Mittal, K.V. : Optimization Methods, New Age International Pvt. 

Ltd.Publisher. 

10(145) 



Paper –III & IV Opt. (iii) Information theory Max Marks: 80+20* 


Time: 3 hrs. 





will be the same 

Unit-I 

Introduction : communication process, communication system, measure of information, unit of 

information. Memoryless finite scheme: Measure of uncertainty and its properties, sources and 

binary sources. Measure of information for two dimensional discrete finite probability scheme: 

conditional entropies, Noise characteristics of a channel, Relations among different entropies 

Unit-II 

Measure of Mutual information, Shanan's fundamental inequalities, Redundancy, Efficiency 

and channel capacity, capacity of channel with symmetric noise structures, BSC and BEC, 

capacity of binary channels, Binary pulse width communication channel, Uniqueness of entropy 

function 

Unit-III 

Elements of enconding : separable binary codes, Shannon-Fano encoding, Necessary 

and sufficient conditions for noiseless coding. Theorem .of decodibility, Average length 

.of encoded messages; Shannon's Binary Encoding. 

Unit-IV 

Fundamental theorem. of discrete noiseless encoding, Huffman's minimum 

redundancy code, Gilbert-Moore encoding. Error detecting and Error correcting codes, 

Geometry of binary codes, Hammings single error correcting code 

References: 

1. Reza, F.M. : An Introduction to Information Theory, Mc Graw Hill 

Book:Company Inc. 

2. Feinstein, A. (I) : Foundations of Information Theory, McGraw Hill Book 

Company Ioc. 

3. Kullback, S. (I) : Information Theory and Statistic., John Wiley and Sons. 

4. Middleton, D. : An Introduction to Statistical Communication Theory, 

Mc Graw Hill Company. 

10(146) 



Paper –III & IV Opt. (iv) Game Theory Max Marks: 80+20* 


Time: 3 hrs. 





will be the same 

Unit-I 

Rectangu1ar games, rectangular games with saddle points. Fundamental theorem of 

rectangular games: Mixed strategies, Geometrical background, Proof of the fundamental 

theorem for arbitrary rectangular games. 

Unit-II 

Properties of optimal strategies. Relations of dominance.A graphical method of solution. 

Applications of linear programming. The solution of a rectangular game . A method of 

approximating the value of a game. 

Unit-III 

Game in extensive form.Normal form and extensive form. Graphical representation 

information sets. Chance moves. Games with more than two players. Re3trictions on 

information sets. General theory of games in extensive form. 

Unit-IV 

General definition of finite games with perfect information equilibrium points. Games with 

perfect recall and behaviour strategies. Games with infinitely many strategies. The 

fundamental theorem for continuous games. 

References: 

Mackinsey, J.G.C. : Introduction to the theory of games McGraw Hill Book Company. 

Inc.. New Delhi, Toronto and London. 

10(147) 



Paper –III & IV Opt. (v) Econometrics Max Marks: 80+20* 


Time: 3 hrs. 






. 

Unit-I 

Aitken's generalized least square (G.L.S) estimator, Heteroscedasticity, auto-correlation, test of 

auto-correlation. Multicollinearity, tools for handling multicollinearity, .idea of ridge 

regression and properties of ridge regression. Lagged variables end distributed lag models : 

Meaning. Avarage lag, Koyak lag model, Alen lag model, partial adjustment model, Adaptive 

expectation model. 

Unit-II 

Simultaneous equation system : structure and models, typology of economic relations, 

structural form, reduced form and final form of an economic ,model. Problem of identification 

under linear homogeneous and Covariance restrictions. Rank and Order conditions of 

Identification, Restrictions on structural parameters. 

Unit-III 

Methods of estimation: Limited information models, indirect least squares. Two stage least 

squares, limited information maximum likelihood (LIML), fuIl information methods. Three 

stage least square (3SLS) and full information maximum likelihood (FIML). 

Unit-IV 

Estimation of demand common functional forms for estimation demand, estimation of demand 

from household budget and market data. Aggregated "problem, pooling of time series and 

cross section data. Estimation of production and cost function. Estimation of cabb-Dauglas, 

SMAC and translog production function estimation of cost curves and cost functions. 

References: 

1. Johnston, J. : Economic Models, McGraw Hills 

2. Jan Kmenta : Elements of Econometrics, University of Michigan Press 

3. Intriligatore,M.D. : Economic models -techniques and applications, Prentice Hall 

4. Maddala, G.S. : Econometrics, North Holland 

5. Klein, L.R. : Applied Economics, Taylor and Francis 

6. Koytsoyiannis,A. : Theory of Econometrics, Barnes and Noble Books 

10(148) 



Paper –III & IV Opt. (vi) Acturial Statistics Max Marks: 80+20* 


Time: 3 hrs. 



from the four unit uniformly i.e. two from each unit. The candidate will be required to attempt five 

questions in all one from each unit and the compulsory one. The weightage of all the questions will 

be the same. 

Unit-I 

Concepts of mortality rates and other indices, construction of mortality table from graduated 

data, determination and use of the functions in mortality table, graph of force of mortality, 

laws of mortality, mortality funds, Sources and collection of data for the continuous mortality 

investigation. 

Unit-II 

Models of population dynamics: Lotka' theory. Relationship between the number of births and 

the number of women in the population. Population with unvarying age distribution. Nature 

of reserve, prospective and retrospective reserves, fractional premiums and fractional 

durations, modified reserves, (continuous reserves, surrender values and paid up policies, 

Industrial assurance; children's. deffered assurances, Joint life and last survivorship. 

Unit-III 

Pure endowments, Life Annuities; Single payment, continuous life annuities, discrete life 

annuities, life annuities with monthly payments, commutation functions, varying annuities, 

recursions, complete annuities-immediate and apportion able annuities-due. Accumulations, 

Assurances, family income benefits, capital sums on retirement and death. 

Unit-IV 

Widows pensions, Sickness benefits, disability benefits. Orphan's benefits, Benefits 

dependent on marriage. Contingent probabilities, contingent assurances, reversionary 

annuities, multiple-decrement table, forces of decrement, construction of multiple decrement 

table. 

References: 

1. King, G. : Institute of acutries text book of part II second edu. Charles and 

Edwin Layton London. 

2. Jordan, C.W. Jr : Life Contingencies, second edition, Chicago Society of 

Actuaries. 

3. Neil1, A. (1977) : Life Contingencies, Heinemann, London 

4. Donald DWA (1970) : Compound interest and annuities. Heinemann London 

10(149) 


M.Sc. Statistics Semester – IV 

Paper-V Practical (Calculator and SPSS based) Max Marks : 80**+20* 

(B) Second Sitting **Practical : 60 

Class Record: 10 



Time: 4 hrs. 



1. Estimating parameters of multinormal distribution. 

2. Calculation of multiple and partial correlation coefficients. 

3. Estimating the parameters of conditional distribution. 

4. Test based on total, partial and multiple correlations. 

5. Test based on Hotelling - T 2 and Mahalanobis - D 2 Statistics. 

6. Fisher’s linear discriminate function. 

7. Calculation of principal components. 

8. Analysis of three basic designs- Basic analysis and splitting of treatment S. S. for different 

contrasts. 

9. Analysis of 2 2 – factorial experiment. 

10. Analysis of 2 3 – factorial experiment. 

11. Analysis of completely confounded factorial experiment. 

12. Analysis of partially confounded factorial experiment. 

13. Analysis of split plot design. 

14. Analysis of BIB Design. 

15. Analysis of P.B.I.B. Design. 

10(150) 


Semester – I 

Scheme of Examination for M.Sc. Zoology (SEMESTER SYSTEM) 

to be implemented from the session 2012-2013 

Paper Paper Name 

Ext. Marks Int. Marks Max. Marks Time 

Hours 

ZOO-I Cell Biology 75 15 90 3 

ZOO-II Biochemistry, Tools &Techniques 75 15 90 3 

ZOO-III Biosystematics & Quantitative Biology 75 15 90 3 

ZOO-IV Structure and Functions of Invertebrates 75 15 90 3 

ZOO-V Practical (Based on Papers ZOO-I & ZOO-II) Examination to be held annually along with paper 

XI 

4 

ZOO-VI Practical (Based on Papers ZOO-III & ZOO-IV) Examination to be held annually along with paper 

XII 

4 

Seminar / Test (Based on Papers ZOO-I to ZOO-IV) - 40 40 1 

Total 

Semester – II 

300 100 400 - 

ZOO-VII Population and Community Ecology 75 15 90 3 

ZOO-VIII Comparative Physiology 75 15 90 3 

ZOO-IX Population Genetics & Evolution 75 15 90 3 

ZOO-X Structure & Functions of Vertebrates 75 15 90 3 

ZOO-XI Practical (Based on Papers ZOO-V, ZOO-VII & 

ZOO-VIII) 

80 20 100 4 

ZOO-XII Practical (Based on Papers ZOO-VI, ZOO-IX & 

ZOO-X) 

80 20 100 4 

Innovation Report/Model/Seminar/Test (Based on papers 

ZOO-VII to ZOO-X) 

- 40 40 1 

Total 


460 140 600 

ZOO-XIII Molecular Biology 75 15 90 3 

ZOO-XIV Molecular Endocrinology 75 15 90 3 

ZOO-XV Parasitology 75 15 90 3 

ZOO-XVI (i) Molecular Cytogenetics – I 

75 15 90 3 

(ii) Reproduction and Aging-I 

(iii) Animal Behaviour & Wildlife Conservation – I 

(iv) Fish and Fisheries – I 

(v) Insect Morphology and Physiology – I* 

(vi) Proteins and Nucleic Acids– I* 

ZOO- Practical (Based on Papers ZOO-XIII, ZOO-XIV & Examination to be held annually along with paper 4 

XVII ZOO-XV) 

XXIII 

ZOO- Practical [Based on papers ZOO-XVI (i/ii/iii/iv/v/vi)] Examination to be held annually along with 4 

XVIII 

paper XXIV 

Seminar/Test (Based on Papers ZOO-XIII to ZOO- 

XVI) 

- 40 40 1 

Total 


300 100 400 - 

ZOO-XIX Developmental Biology 75 15 90 3 

ZOO-XX Vertebrate Immunology 75 15 90 3 

ZOO-XXI Environmental Toxicology 75 15 90 3 

ZOO- (i) Molecular Cytogenetics – II 

75 15 90 3 

XXII (ii) Reproduction and Aging – II 

(iii) Animal Behaviour & Wildlife Conservation – II 

(iv) Fish and Fisheries – II 

(v) Insect Morphology and Physiology – II 

(vi) Proteins and Nucleic Acids – II 

ZOO- Practical (Based on Paper s ZOO-XVII, ZOO-XIX, ZOO-XX 80 20 100 4 

XXIII and ZOO-XXI) 

ZOO- Practical [Based on papers ZOO-XVIII & ZOO- 80 20 100 4 

XXIV XXII(i/ii/iii/iv/v/vi)] 

Field / Project Report & Seminar/ Test (Based on papers ZOO- 

XIX to ZOO-XXII) 

- 40 40 1 

Total 460 140 600 

* Kept in abeyance due to shortage of faculty. 

10(151) 


Paper : ZOO-I Semester – I 

Cell Biology 

Total Marks : 90 

Theory Examination : 75 


Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 

1. Nine questions will be set in all. 

2. Question No. 1, which will be objective/short answer type cover the entire syllabus, will be 

compulsory. The remaining eight questions will be set section wise selecting four questions 

from each section (I & II). The candidate will be required to attempt question No. 1 and four 

more selecting two questions from each section. 

3. As far as possible the questions should be divided into sub-parts and marks indicated part wise. 

Section – A 

1.0 Biomembranes 

1.1 Molecular composition and arrangement, functional consequences. 

1.2 Transport across cell membrane-Diffusion, active transport and pumps, uniports, 

symports and antiports. 

1.3 Membrance potential 

1.4 Co-transport by symporters or anti porters 

1.5 Transport across epthelia 

2.0 Cytoskeleton 

2.1 Microfilaments and microtubules-structure and dynamics 

2.2 Microtubulus and mistosis 

2.3 Cell movements-intracellular transport, role of kinesin and dynein, signal, 

transduction mechanisms. 

3.0 Cillia and Flagella 

4.0 Cell-Cell signaling 

4.1 Cell surface receptors 

4.2 Second messenger system 

4.3 MOP kinase pathways 

4.4 Signaling from plasma membrane to nucleus 

5.0 Cell-Cell adhesion and communication 

5.1 Ca++ dependent homophilic cell-cell adhension 

5.2 Ca++ independent homophilic cell-cell adhension 

5.3 Gap junction and connexins 

6.0 Cell matrix adhesion 

6.1 Integrins 

6.2 Collagen 

6.3 Non-collagen components 

6.4 Auxin & Cell expansion 

6.5 Cellulose fibril synthesis and orientation 

Section – B 

7.0 Cell cycle 

7.1 Cyclines and cycline dependent kinases 

7.2 Regulation of CDK-cycline activity. 

10(152) 


8.0 Genome organization 

8.1 Chromosomal organization of genes and non-coding DNA 

8.2 Mobile DNA 

8.3 Morphological and functional elements of eukaryotic chromosomes 

9.0 Intracellar protein traffic. 

9.1 Protein Uptake into ER 

9.2 Membrane proteins, Golgi sorting, post-translational modifications. 

9.3 Biogenesis of mitochondria, and nuclei 

9.4 Trafficking mechanisms. 

10.0 Biology of cancer 

11.0 Biology of aging 

12.0 Apoptosis-definition, mechanism and significance 

Suggested Reading Material 

1. Molecular Cell, Biology, J. Darnell, H. Lodish and D. Baltimore Scientific American 

Book, Inc., USA. 

2. Molecular Biology of the Cell, B. Alberts, D. Bray, J. Lewis, M. Raff, K. Roberts and J.D. 

Watson. Garland Publishing Inc., New York. 

10(153) 


Paper : ZOO-II Semester – I 

Biochemistry, Tools and Techniques 



Internal Assessment: 15 

Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 







Section – A 

1.0 Glycolysis, citric acid cycles its regulation and role as metabolic hub. 

2.0 Hexose monophosphate pathway its regulation and significance. 

3.0 Cholesterol biosynthesis, its metabolism steroid genesis, Bile acids and their metabolism 

derrayed cholesterol level. 

4.0 Saturated and unsaturated fatty acid and their metabolism. 

5.0 Primary, Second, tertiary and quaternary structure of proteins (Domain, Reverse turn of 

Ramachandran plot). 

6.0 DNA, RNA, structure and functions, DNA choreography. 

7.0 Antisense RNA and DNA technology and their application. 

8.0 Ribozymes their structure and functions 

9.0 Nanotechnology, its application in life sciences. 

Section – B 

10.0 Chemical and Biological assays (in vitro and in vivo assays) 

11.0 Principles and uses of analytical instruments: Spectrophotometers, ultra centrifuge, 

spectrophotometers, NMR spectrophotometer, Microscopes. 

12.0 Microbiological Techniques: 

12.1 Media preparation and sterilization. 

12.2 Inoculation and growth monitoring. 

13.0 Cell culture techniques: 

13.1 Design and functioning of tissue culture laboratory. 

13.2 Cell proliferation measurements. 

13.3 Cell viability testing. 

13.4 Culture media preparation and cell harvesting methods. 

14.0 Cryotechniques : 

14.1 Cryopreservation for cells, tissue, organisms. 

14.2 Cryotechniques for microscopy. 

10(154) 


15.0 Separation techniques in biology. 

15.1 Molecular separations by chromatography, electrophoresis, precipitation etc. 

15.2 Organelle separation by centrifugation. 

15.3 Cell separation by flow cytometery, density gradient centrifugation, unit gravity 

centrifugation, affinity adsorption, anchorage based techniques etc. 

16.0 Radioisotope and mass isotope techniques in biology : 

16.1 Sample preparation for radioactive counting. 

16.2 Autoradiography. 

16.3 Metabolic labeling. 

16.4 Magnetic resonance Imaging 

17.0 Immunological techniques based on antigen-antibody reactions. 

18.0 Biosensors. 

Suggested Reading Materials: 

1. Animal Cell Culture – A practical approach, Ed. John R.W. Masters, IRL Press. 

2. Introduction to Instrumental analysis, Robert Braun, McGraw Hill International editions 

3. A Biologists guide to Principles and Techniques of Practical Biochemistry, K. Wilson and 

K.H. Goulding, ELBS Edn. 

10(155) 


Paper : ZOO-III Semester – I 

Biosystematics and Quantitative Biology 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 







Section – A 

1.0 Definition and basic concepts of biosystematics and taxonomy. 

1.1 Historical resume, Importance and applications of systematics in biology. 

2.0 Trends in biosystematics – concepts of different conventional and newer aspects 

2.1 Chemotaxonomy 

2.2 Cyotaxonomy 

2.3 Molecular taxonomy 

3.0 Dimensions of speciation and taxonomic characters 

3.1 Species concepts – species category, different species concepts; sub-species and 

other intra-specific categories. 

3.2 Theories of biological classification, hierarchy of categories. 

3.3 Taxonomic characters – different kinds, Weighing of characters 

4.0 Methodology 

4.1 Taxonomic collections, preservation, curetting process and identification. 

4.2 Taxonomic keys-different kinds of taxonomic keys, their merits and demerits. 

4.3 Systematic publications – different kinds of publications. 

4.4 International code of Zoological Nomenclature (ICZN) – its operative principles and 

interpretation of the following : 

Stability, Priority, Concept of availability, formation of names, synonymy, 

homonymy, the type method, kinds of type specimen, type-designation. 

5.0 Evaluation of biodiversity indices 

5.1 Shannon-Weiner index, dominance index 

5.2 Similarity and dissimilarity index 

5.3 Association index 

Section – B 

6.0 Measures of central value 

Arithmetic mean, mode and median Definition, calculation and its properties. 

7.0 Measures of Dispersion: 

7.1 Range, Interquartile range, Quartile deviation. 

7.2 Mean deviation and standard deviation. 

10(156) 


8.0 Correlation: 

Methods studying correlation – Scatter diagram method, Graphic method, Karl Pearson 

coefficient of correlation, Rank correlation. 

9.0 Regression analysis (Regression lines and regression equation.) 

10.0 Concept of sampling and sampling methods: 

Definition and law of sampling, judgment sampling, Random sampling, stratified sampling, 

systematic sampling, multi-stages sampling and quota sampling. 

11.0 Test of significance for large samples and small samples. 

12.0 Chi-square analysis 

13.0 Analysis of variance 

14.0 Probability and law of probability, Theoretical probability distribution: Binomial 

distribution, Poison distribution, Normal distribution. 

15.0 Computer in Biometrics 

15.1 Components of computers 

15.2 Use of Microsoft Excel for statistical calculation and graphical representation of 

data. 

Suggested Reading Material : 

1. M. Kato. The Biology of Biodiversity, Springer. 

2. E.O. Wilson, Biodiversity, Academic Press, Washington. 

3. G.G. Simpson, Principle of animal taxonomy, Oxford ISH Publishing Company. 

4. E. Mayer, Elements of Taxonomy. 

5. E.O. Wilson, The Diversity of Life (The College Edition), W.W. Northerm & Co. 

6. S.K. Tikadar, Threatened Animals of India, ZSI Publication, Calcutta. 

7. Batschelet, E. Introduction to mathematics for life scientists, Springer-Verlag, 

Berling. 

8. Jorgensen, S.E. Fundamentals of ecological modeling. Elsevier, New York. 

9. Swartzman, G.L. and S.P.O. Kaluzny. Ecological simulation primer, Macmillan, 

New York. 

10. Lendren, D. Modeling in behavioral ecology. Chapman and Hal, London, UK. 

11. Sokal, R.R. and F.J. Rohlf. Biometry. Freeman, San Francisco. 

12. Snedecor, G.W. and W.G. Cochran, Statistical methods. Affiliated East-West Pres, 

New Delhi (Indian ed.). 

13. Murray, J.D. Mathematical biology. Springer-Verlag, Berlin. 

14. Pielou, E.C. the Interpretation of ecological data:A primer on classification and 

ordination. 

10(157) 


Paper: ZOO-IV Semester – I 

Structure and Functions of Invertebrates 


Theory Examination: 75 


Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 







Section - A 

1.0 Classification of Invertebrates up to order level 

2.0 Organization of coelom 

2.1 Pseudocoelomates 

2.2 Coelomates: Protostomia and Deuterostomia 

3.0 Metamerism in Annelida 

4.0 Locomotion 

4.1 Flagella and ciliary movement in Protozoa 

4.2 Hydrostatic movement in Coelenterata, Annelida and Echinodermata 

5.0 Nutrition and Digestion 

5.1 Patterns of feeding and digestion in lower metazoa 

5.2 Filter-feeding in Polychaeta, Mollusca and Echinodermata 

6.0 Respiration 

6.1 Organs of respiration : Gills, lungs and trachea 

6.2 Respiratory pigments 

6.3 Mechanism of respiration 

7.0 Minor Phyla 

7.1 Concept and significance 

7.2 Organization and general characters 

Section – B 

8.0 Excretion 

8.1 Organs of excretion: Coelom, coelomoducts, Nephridia and Malpighian tubules. 

8.2 Mechanism of excretion 

8.3 Excretion and osmoregulation 

9.0 Nervous system 

9.1 Primitive nervous system: Coelenterata and Echinodermata 

9.2 Advanced nervous system: Annelida, Arthropoda (Crustacea and Insecta) and 

Mollusca (Cephalopoda). 

9.3 Trends in neural evolution. 

10(158) 


10.0 Mouthparts of Insects 

11.0 Metamorphosis in insects 

12.0 Social life in insects 

13.0 Integrated pest management 

14.0 Invertebrate larvae 

14.1 Larval forms of free living invertebrates 

14.2 Larval forms of parasites 

14.3 Strategies and Evolutionary significance of larval forms 


1. Hyman, L.H. The invertebrates, Vol. I. Protozoa through Ctenophora, McGraw Hill Co., 

New York. 

2. Barrington, E.J.W. Invertebrate structure and function. Thomas Nelson and Sons Ltr J. 

London. 

3. Jagerstein, G. Evolution of Metazoan life cycle, Academic Press, New York & London. 

4. Hyman, L.H. The Invertebrates. Vol.2. McGraw Hill Co., New York. 

5. Hyman, L.H. The Invertebrates. Vol.8. McGraw Hill. Co., New York. 

6. Barnes, R.D. Invertebrate Zoology, IIIrd edition. W.B. Saundrs Co., Philadelphia. 

7. Russel-Hunter, W.D. A Biology of higher invertebrates, the Macmillin Co. Ltd. London. 

8. Hyman, L.H. the Invertebrates smaller coelomate groups, Vol. V. McGraw Hill Co., New 

York 

9. Read, C.P. Animal Parasitism. Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey. 

10. Sedgwick, A.A. Student text book of Zoology. Vol. I, II and III Central Book Depot, 

Allahabad 

11. Parker, T.J., Haswell, W.A. Text book of Zoology, McMillan Co., London. 

10(159) 


Paper: ZOO-V Semester – I 

Practical (Based on Papers ZOO-I & ZOO-II) 

(Examination to be held annually along with Paper: ZOO-XI) 

1. Preparation of mitotic and meiotic chromosomes. 

2. Calculation of morphometric data and preparation of idiogram. 

3. Determination of chiasma frequency and terminalization coefficient. 

4. Preparation of polytene chromosomes and mapping. 

5. Colorimetery and spectrophotometry, pH and buffers, isolation of sub-cellular 

organelles (Principles). 

6. Proteins: Isolectric point in protein (Casein): Quantative estimation of proteins by 

Biuret Method and Lowry’s method. 

7. Carbohydrates: Quantitative estimation of total carbohydrates and glucose, glucose 

tolerance test, different tests of urine glucose. 

8. Lipids: Iodine number, saponification Value, Extraction of lipids quantitative 

estimation of total lipids, total and free cholesterol phospholipids, triglycerides, and 

glycolipids. 

9. Nucleic acids: Extraction of nucleic acids, estimation of DNA & RNA. 

10. Paper chromatography: Amino acids and carbohydrates. 

11. Thin layer chromatography: Neutral and Phospholipids. 

12. Tools: Demonstration of parts and working of the following tools: PCR, GLC, 

Spectrophotometers, fluorimeter, Various Kinds of microscopes, pH meter, 

Electrophoresis, Centrifuges, Tissue culture unit, Balance and distillation units, 

incubators, Photographic equipment. 

10(160) 


Paper : ZOO-VI Semester – I 

Practical (Based on Papers ZOO-III & ZOO-IV) 

(Examination to be held annually along with Paper ZOO-XII) 

1. Determination of mean and standard deviation coefficient of correlation, graphics. 

2. Study of mouth parts of different insects. 

3. Use of computers Microsoft word and Microsoft office excel, graphs statistics. 

4. Dissection of Loligo, Ak-hopper, Prawn, Cockroach to expose various systems. 

5. Mounting: Trachea, Crustacean Larvae, (Cyclops, Nauplius), Daphnia, Zoea, Mysis, 

Cercaria. 

6. Museum specimens of Virgularia, Spongodus, Zoanthus, Favia, Eunicc, Chloea Flava, 

Polynoe, Terebella, Eurythoe, Balanus, Lepas, Palinurus, Uca, Pyna, Hippa, Gongylus, 

Belostoma, Limulus, Squilla, Eupagurus 

Mollusca : Museum specimens of Dolobella, Pteria, Nertie, Sanguinolaria Chicoreus, 

Ficus, Lambis, Tridaona, Onchidium, Olcia, Murex, Turritella, Bulla, Cardium, Area. 

Echinodermata : Museum specimen of Linekia, Echinodiscus, Holotharia, Antedon. 

7. Study of Slides of Bugula, Plumatella, Cristella, Pectinella 

8. Study of Permanent mounts of : 

(a) PROTOZOA: Gregarines, Monocystis, Ceratium, Euplotes, Didinium, 

Noctiluca, Radiolaria, Stentor, Opalina. 

(b) PORIFERA: Sectional view of Sycon (T.S., L.S.), Grantia (T.S.) 

(c) CNIDARIA: Slides of Obelia polyp and Medusa, Pennaria, Aurelia- 

Tentaculocysts. 

(d) HELMINTHES – Slides of Ozobranchus, Glossiphonia 

(e) ARTHROPODA - Slides of Cyclops, Daphnia, Chelifer, section of Peripatus. 

10(161) 


Paper: ZOO-VII Semester – II 

Population and Community Ecology 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 







Section - A 

1.0 Basic Concepts: Definition, Scope and Significance of Ecology, Concept of biosphere, 

atmosphere, litho sphere and hydrosphere. 

2.0 Ecological aspects of abiotic, biotic and edaphic factors. 

3.0 Ecosystem: Concept, Kinds and components. 

4.0 Ecological energetic and energy flow: Food chains, food webs, trophic structure; concept of 

productivity primary, secondary, gross and net’ Energy flow models. 

5.0 Population characteristics 

5.1 Population density, methods of population density measurement 

5.2 Growth rate and growth forms 

5.3 Natality, mortality, survivorship curves and life tables 

5.4 Biotic potential – Generation time, net reproductive rate reproductive values 

5.5 Population and distribution. 

5.6 Population dispersion 

Section – B 

6.0 Population regulation 

6.1 Extrinsic and intrinsic mechanisms 

6.2 Concept of density dependent and density independent factors in population 

regulation. 

7.0 Population Interactions 

7.1 Concept of intra specific and inter specific population interactions 

7.2 Protocooperation, mutualism and commensalisms 

8.0 Competition and niche theory. 

8.1 Intraspecific and inter specific interactions 

8.2 History of niche concepts 

9.0 Predation 

9.1 Model of prey – predatory dynamics 

9.2 Role of predation in nature 

9.3 Parasitism 

10(162) 


10.0 Community characteristics 

10.1 Species diversity 

10.2 Ecological Succession 

10.3 Ecological dominance 

10.4 Ecotones and Edge effect 

Suggested Reading Materials 

1. Understanding Evolution by Earl. D. Hanson, Oxford University Press, Oxford, New York. 

2. Oxford Surveys in Evolutionary Biology Vol. I – Vol. VI, Oxford University Press, Walton, 

Street, Oxford. 

3. Evolution by Theodose H. Eaton (Jr.) Thomes – Nolson & Sona Limited, London. 

4. Evolutionary Theory: (The unfinished synthesis) by Robert G.B. Reid: Croom Helm: 

London & Sydney. 

5. Dobzhansky, Th. Genetics and Origin of species. Columbia University Press. 

10(163) 


Paper : ZOO-VIII Semester – II 

Comparative Physiology 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 







Section - A 

1.0 Feeding mechanisms and regulation. 

1.1 Comparative physiology of digestion 

2.0 Respiration : organs and respiratory pigments through different phylogetic groups 

3.0 Patterns of nitrogen excretion among different animal groups 

4.0 Osmoregulation in different animal groups 

5.0 Thermoregulation 

5.1 Homeothermic animals 

5.2 Poikilotherms 

5.3 Hibernation 

6.0 Circulation of body fluids and their regulation among different animal groups 

7.0 Receptor physiology – a comparative study 

7.1 Mechanoreception 

7.2 Photoreception 

7.3 Chemoreception 

7.4 Equilibrium reception 

8.0 Contractile elements, cells and tissues among different phylogenie groups 

8.1 Muscle structure and function-correlation 

8.2 Specialised organs (eg: electric organs and tissues) 

Section – B 

9.0 Heterogamy in eukaryotes 

10.0 Biology of sex determination and sex differentiation a comparative account 

11.0 Comparative account of differentiation of gonads in vertebrates 

12.0 Comparative testicular physiology in animals 

12.1 Morphology 

12.2 Differentiation 

12.3 Function and its regulation 

10(164) 


13.0 Comparative ovarian physiology and differentiation in vertebrates 

13.1 Morphology 

13.2 Endocrinolgy 

13.3 Oogensis vitellogensis 

14.0 Fertilization 

14.1 Pre-fertilization events 

14.2 Biochemistry of fertilization 

14.3 Post fertilization events 

15.0 Multiple ovulation and embryo transfer technology (MOFT) 

15.1 In vitro oocyte maturation 

15.2 Superovulation 

15.3 In vitro fertilization 

16.0 Collection and cryopreservation of gametes and embryos 

17.0 Assisted reproduction technologies 

17.1 Embryo sexing and cloning 

17.2 Screening for genetic disorders 

17.3 ICSI, GIFT etc. 

17.4 Cloning of animals by nuclear transfer 


1. C.L. Prosser. Comparative Animal Physiology. W.B. Saunders & Company. 

2. R.Eckert. Animal Physiology: Mechanisms and Adaptation. W.H. Freeman & Company. 

3. W.S. Hoar. General and Comparative Animal Physiology 

4. Schiemdt-Nielsen. Animal Physiology: Adaptation and Environment. Cambridge. 

5. C.L. Prosser. Environment and Metabolic Physiology. Wiley-Liss, New York. 

10(165) 


Paper: ZOO-IX Semester – II 

Population Genetics and Evolution 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 







Section – A 

1.0 Concepts of evolution and theories of organic evolution with an emphasis on Darwinism. 

2.0 Neo Darwinism 

2.1 Hardy-Weinberg law of genetic equilibrium 

2.2 A detailed account of destabilizing forces: 

(i) Natural selection 

(ii) Mutation 

(iii) Genetic drift 

(iv) Migration 

(v) Meiotic drive 

3.0 Quantifying genetic variability 

3.1 Genetic structure of natural populations 

3.2 Phenotypic variation 

3.3 Models explaining changes in genetic structure of populations 

3.4 Factors affecting human disease frequency 

4.0 Molecular population genetics 

4.1 Patterns of change in nucleotide and amino acid sequences 

4.2 Ecological significance of molecular variations 

4.3 Emergence of Noe-Darwinism-Neutral Hypothesis 

5.0 Genetics of quantitative traits in populations 

5.1 Analysis of quantitative traits 

5.2 Estimation of heritability 

5.3 Genotype-environment interactions 

5.4 Inbreeding depression and heterosis 

5.5 Molecular analysis of quantitative traits 

5.6 Phenotypic plasticity 

6.0 Genetics of speciation 

Section – B 

6.1 Phylogenetic and biological concept of species 

6.2 Patterns and mechanisms of reproductive isolation 

6.3 Modes of speciation (Allopatric, sympatric, parapatric) 

10(166) 


7.0 Molecular Evolution 

7.1 Gene Evolution 

7.2 Evolution of gene families, Molecular drive 

7.3 Assessment of molecular variation 

8.0 Origin of higher categories 

8.1 Phylogenetic gradualism and punctuated equilibrium 

8.2 Major trends in 'the origin of higher categories 

8.3 Micro-and Macro-evolution 

9.0 Molecular phylogenetics 

9.1 How to construct phylogenetic trees? 

10.0 Population genetics and ecology 

10.1 Metapopulations 

10.2 Monitoring Natural Population 

10.3 Why small populations become extinct? 

10.4 Loss of genetic variations 

10.5 Conservation of genetic resources in diverse texa 


1. Dobzhansky, Th. Genetics and Origin of Species. Columbia University Press. Dobzhansky, 

Th., F.J. Ayala, G.L. Stebbines and J.M. Valentine. Evolution. Surjeet Publication, Delhi. 

2. Futuyama, D.J. Evolutinary Biology, Suinuaer Associates, INC Publishers, Dunderland. 

3. Hartl, D.L. A Primer of Population Genetics. Sinauer Associates, Inc, Massachusetts. 

4. Jha, A.P. Genes and Evolution. John Publication, New Delhi. 

5. King, M. Species Evolution-The role of chromosomal change. The Cambridge University 

Press, Cambridge. 

6. Merrel, D.J. Evolution and Genetics. Holt, Rinehart and Winston, Inc. 

7. Smith, J.M. Evolutinary Gentics. Oxford University Press, New York. 

8. Strikberger, M.W. Evolution. Jones and Bartett Publishers, Boston London. 

10(167) 


Paper: ZOO-X Semester – II 

Structure and Functions of Vertebrates 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 







Section – A 

1.0 Origin of Chordata 

1.1 Concept of Protochordata 

1.2 Origin and classification of vertebrates 

2.0 Vertebrate integument and its derivatives 

2.1 Development, general structure and functions of skin and its derivatives 

2.2 Glands, scales, horns, claws, nails, hoofs, feathers and hairs 

3.0 Skeletal system 

3.1 Form, function, body size and skeletal elements of the body 

3.2 Comparative account of jaw suspensorium, Vertebral column 

3.3 Limbs and girdles 

4.0 Digestive system: Dentition, Stomach, Digestive Glands 

5.0 Respiratory system 

5.1 Characters of respiratory tissue 

5.2 Internal and External Respiration 

5.3 Comparative account of respiratory organs 

Section – B 

6.0 General plan of circulation in various groups 

6.1 Blood 

6.2 Evolution of heart 

6.3 Evolution of aortic arches, and Portal systems 

7.0 Evolution of Urinogenital system in vertebrate series 

8.0 Nervous system 

8.1 Comparative anatomy of the brain in relation to its functions 

8.2 Comparative anatomy of spinal cord 

8.3 Nerves-Cranial, Peripheral and Autonomous nervous systems 

9.0 Sense organs 

9.1 Simple receptors 

9.2 Organs of Olfaction and taste 

9.3 Lateral line system 

9.4 Electroreception 

10(168) 


10.0 Adaptations: Levels of morphological adaptation and significance of body size 


1. Barrington, E.J.W. The Biology of Hemichordata and Protochordata. Oliver and Boyd, 

Edinbourgh. 

2. Bourne, G.H. The structure and functions of nervous tissue. Academic Press, New York. 

3. Carter, G.S. Structure and habit in vertebrate evolution - Sedgwick and Jackson, London. 4. 

Kingsley, J.S. Outlines of Comparative Autonomy of Vertebrates. Central Book Depot, 

Allahabad. 

5. Kent, C.G. Comparative anatomy of vertebrates. 

6. Milton Hilderbrand. Analysis of vertebrate structure. IV. Ed. John Wiley and Sons Inc., 

New York. 

7. Sedgwick, A. A Students Text Book of Zoology, Vol. II. 

8. Torrey, T.W. Morphogenesis of vertebrates. John Wiley and Sons Inc., New York and 

London. 

9. Walters, H.E. and Sayles, L.D. Biology of vertebrates. MacMillan & Co., New York. 

10. Weichert, C.K. and Presch, W. Elements of chordate anatomy, 4th Edn. McGraw Hall 

Book Co., New York. 

11. Messers, H.M. An introduction of vertebrates anatomy. 

12. Montagna, W. Comparative anatomy. John Wiley and Sons Inc. 

13 Andrews, S.M. Problems in vertebrate evolution. Academic Press, New York. 

10(169) 


Paper : ZOO-XI Semester – II 

Practical (Based on Papers ZOO-V, ZOO-VII & ZOO-VIII) 

(Examination of Papers ZOO-V & ZOO-XI) 

1. Histochemistry: Methods of fixation of different tissues. 

2. Preparation of tissues for microtomy and cryostat. 

3. Histochemical test: 

(a) Haemotoxylin-eosin 

(b) Toluidine Blue 

(c) Sudan Block-B 

(d) Mercury bromophenol blue 

(e) Methyl green-pyronin-Y 

(f) Periodic acid Schiff’s 

(g) Acid phosphatase 

(h) Alkaline phosphatase 

4. Demonstration of live gametes and their staining procedure. 

10(170) 


Practical Examination : 80 


Time: 4 Hours 

5. Effect of insulin and epinephrine on blood and urine sugar levels of rat. 

6. Determination of optimum pH, temperature and concentration of amylase, trypsin 

and Lipase enzyme. 

7. DLC of Fish, Frog, Bird and Mammal. 

8. Determination of Blood Groups. 

9. Study of Endocrine glands of vertebrates. 

10. Qualitative test of vitamins. 

11. Quantification of vitamin A and C. 

12. Effect of T4 on tadpole larva. 


Paper: ZOO-XII Semester – II 

Practical (Based on Papers ZOO-VI, ZOO-IX & ZOO-X) 

(Examinations of Papers ZOO-VI & ZOO-XII) 

VERTEBRATE 

10(171) 


Practical Examination: 80 


Time: 4 Hours 

1. Dissections: Rat/ Lab Mice /Fish. Digestive, Reproductive, Arterial, Venous, 

systems, Cranial nerves. 

2. Museum specimens and slides : 

Protochordates – Salpa sexual, Salpa-sexual, Botryllus, Herdmania. 

Fishes - Rhinobatus, Chimaera, Acipenser, Amia, Periopthalmus, Tricanthus, 

Notopterus notopterus, Scatophagus, Aargus, Trichurus, Mastacembalus armatus, 

Exocoetus (flying fish), Diodon hyterix, Echeneis, Neucrates. 

Amphibians –Necturus, Siren, Ichthyophis, Geganophis, Rhacophorus, Rana 

tigrina, Amblystoma uraetyphlus, Cryptobranchus, Axolotl Larvae, Salamander, 

Amphiuma, Trilon. 

Reptiles – Sirana, Chameleon, Phrynosoma, Chelone mydas. 

Birds – Indian Oriole, Indian Koel (male), India koel (female), Indian tailor birds, 

Kite, jungle fowl. 

Mammals – Indian otter, Marmoset, Loris, Bat (Megaderma lyra), Pangolin, 

Echidna, Ornithorhynchus, Hedgehog, Scaly-ant eater, Porcupine, Mongoose. 

3. Skull and lower jaw of Chelonia, Crocodile, Bird, Carnivore-mammal (dog), 

Herbivore mammal (horse). 

4. Types of vertebrae of Procoelous, Opisthocoelous, Amphicoelous, Amphiplatian, 

Heterocoelous, Axis and atlas vertebrae. 

5. Comparative Osteology of Vertebrates : Vertebrate, Girdles, Limb-bones 


Paper : ZOO-XIII Semester – III 

Molecular Biology 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 







Section – A 

1.0 History and Scope of Molecular Biology 

2.0 DNA replication 

2.1 Prokaryotic and eukaryotic DNA replication 

2.2 Mechanics of DNA replication 

2.3 Enzymes and accessory proteins involved in DNA replication 

3.0 Transcription 

3.1 Prokaryotic transcription 

3.2 Eukaryotic transcription 

3.3 RNA polymerases 

3.4 General and specific transcription factors 

3.5 Regulatory elements and mechanisms of transcription regulation 

3.6 Transcriptional and post-transcriptional gene silencing. 

4.0 Post-transcriptional Modifications in RNA 

4.1 5'-Cap formation 

4.2 Transcription termination 

4.3 3'-end processing and polyadenylation 

4.4 Splicing, Editing 

4.5 Nuclear export of mRNA 

4.6 mRNA stability 

Section – B 

5.0 Translation 

5.1 Genetic code 

5.2 Prokaryotic and eukaryotic translation 

5.3 The translational machinery 

5.4 Mechanisms of initiation, elongation and termination 

5.5 Regulation of translation 

5.6 Co- and post-translational modifications of proteins 

6.0 Antisense and Ribozyme technology 

6.1 Molecular mechanisms of antisense molecules 

6.2 Inhibition of splicing, polyadenylation and translation 

6.3 Disruption of RNA structure and capping 

6.4 Biochemistry of ribozyme; hammerhead, hairpin and other ribozymes 

6.5 Strategies for designing ribozymes 

6.6 Application of antisense and ribozyme technologies 

10(172) 


7.0 Recombination and repair 

7.1 Holiday junction, gene targeting, gene disruption 

7.2 Cre/lox recombination 

7.3 RecA and other recombinases 

7.4 DNA repair mechanisms 

8.0 Molecular mapping of genome 

8.1 Genetic and physical maps 

8.2 Physical mapping and map-based cloning 

8.3 Southern and fluorescence in situ hybridization for genome analysis 

8.4 Chromosome micro-dissection and micro-cloning 

8.5 Molecular markers in genome analysis RFLP, RAPD and AFLP analysis. 

8.6 Molecular markers linked to disease resistance genes 

8.7 Application of RFLP in forensic, disease prognosis, genetic counseling, pedigree, 

etc. analysis, Animal trafficking and poaching; germplasm maintenance and 

taxonomy. 


1. Molecular Biology of the Gene, J.D. Watson, N.H. Hopkins, J.W. Roberts, J.A Steitz and 

A.M. Weiner. The Benjamin/Cummings Pub. Co., Inc., California. 

2. Molecular Cell Biology, J. Darnell, H. Lodish and D. Baltimore Scientific American Books, 

Inc., USA 

3. Molecular Biology of the Cell, B. Alberts, D. Bray, J. Lewis, M. Raff, K. Roberts and J,D. 

Watson. Garland Publishing Inc., New York. 

4. Gene VI, Benjamin Lewin, Oxford University Press, U.K. 

5. Molecular Biology and Biotechnology. A comprehensive desk reference, R.A Meyers (Ed.), 

VCH Publishers, Inc., New York. 

6. Molecular Cloning: a Laboratory Manual, J. Sambrook, E.F. Fritsch and T. Maniatis, Cold 

Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, New York. 

7. Introduction to Practical Molecular Biology, P.D. Dabre, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., New 

York. 

8. Molecular Biology LabFax, T.A Brown (Ed.), Bios Scientific Publishers Ltd., Oxford. 

10(173) 


Paper: ZOO-XIV Semester – III 

Molecular Endocrinology 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 







Section – A 

1.0 Basic concept of endocrinology, its scope and role in molecular biology. 

2.0 Chemical nature of hormones; 

2.1 Amino-acid derived hormones 

2.2 Peptide hormones 

2.3 Glyco-protein hormones, 

2.4 Steroid hormones and 

2.5 Prostaglandin 

3.0 Biosynthesis of peptide hormones, transcriptional and post-transcriptional modifications 

4.0 Network of extra-cellular and intracellular signals. Role of cell structure in intracellular 

communication. 

5.0 Prostaglandin structure, type, synthesis and biological activities. 

6.0 Mechanism of action of peptide hormones; concept of second messengers, cAMP, cGMP, Ca ++ , 

calmoduline, IP3, DAG, NO, signal transduction mechanism, G-proteins. 

7.0 Mechanism of action of steroid hormones; Nuclear receptors, orphan genes and receptors and their 

role in metabolism and development. Cross talk concept, phosphorylation, Heat shock proteins. 

8.0 Hormonal regulation of: 

8.1 Carbohydrate metabolism 

8.2 Lipid metabolism 

8.3 Protein metabolism 

8.4 Nucleic acid metabolism 

9.0 Genetic basis of hormonal disorders. 

Section – B 

10.0 Sequence-specific DNA binding proteins, DNA binding receptor proteins and their role in gene 

transcription, cell differentiation and cell proliferation. 

11.0 Nutrient-induced insulin secretion, pH and DNA synthesis. 

12.0 Interaction between pathways i.e. cAMP, Ca ++ pathway, parallel pathway. 

10(174) 


13.0 Genomic and non-genomic action of hormones (peptides and steroid). 


1. Benjamin Lewin, Genes VII, Oxford University Press. 

2. Lodish et al. Molecular Cell Biology. 

3. Ethan Bier. The Coiled Spring, Cold Spring Harbor Press. 

4. L.P. Freedman. Molecular Biology of Steroid and Nuclear Hormone Receptors, 

Birkhauser. 

5. G. Litwack. Biochemical Actions of Hormones, Academic Press. 

10(175) 


Paper: ZOO-XV Semester – III 

Parasitology 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 







Section – A 

1.0 Parasites, Types of parasites: Ecto and endoparasites, facultative, obligatory 

semiparasites and permanent parasite and hyper parasitism. 

2.0 Hosts; host types, regular, irregular hosts, Intermediate hosts; Carriers; Vectors, series Hosts 

main; subsidiaries; Primary Secondary, Reservoir hosts. 

3.0 Parasitic Adaptations; Structural adaptation Trivial to extreme morphological 

adaptations. 

4.0 Physiological adaptations in Protozoa, Helminths, Nematodes, Arthropods. 

5.0 Protozoon diseases in Humans. 

6.0 Host Cell Reaction, Blood Cells, Host, Tissues reaction, some physiological and 

biochemical responses, hormones stress and parasitism. 

Section – B 

7.0 Distribution and Zoogeography; Micro-distribution site selection, Host migration, 

Distribution of arthropods by Commercial Vehicles; parasites as clues to host affinities 

and evaluation. 

8.0 Host parasite specificity; Isolation of Parasite populations, Kinds of specificity, infection 

and Growth Vectors, flies mosquitoes, fleas, Ticks, mites lice, etc. 

9.0 Evolution of Parasitism : Fahrenholz Rule; Szidat Rule, Eichler rule; Parasite-Host coevolution 

Adaptation of pre adaptations; Physiological races. Origin of parasitism; 

Progressive and retrogressive evolution; Origin of groups, Protozoa, Trematodes, Cestodes, 

Nematodes, and Arthropods 

10.0 Zoonosis. 

10.1 Viral: Rabies, Japanese encephalitis. 

10.2 Bacterial: Brucellosis, Plague 

10.3 Richeltsial: Ricketisial Zoonosis, Q fever, Scrub typhus 

10.4 Parasitic: Hydatid disease 

11.0 Helminth, Nematode and Artlisopod diseases in man. 

10(176) 



1. Asa C. Chandler, Clark P. Read, Introduction to Parasitology, John wiley and Sons., Inc., 

New York. 

2. Thomas W.M. Cameron, Parasites and Parasitism, Billing and Sons ltd. London, 

3. Elmer R. Noble, Glenn A. Noble; Parasitology: The Biology of Animal Parasites, Lea and 

Febiger, Washington. 

4. R.P. Hall, Protozoology, Prentice-Hall, Inc. Engtewood diffs. N.J. Charles E. Tuttle 

Company, Tokya. 

5. J.L. Soulsby, Biology of Parasites, Academic Press, New York. 

10(177) 


Paper: ZOO-XVI (i) Semester – III 

Molecular Cytogenetics – I 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 







Section – A 

1.0 Biology of Chromosomes: 

1.1 Molecular anatomy of eukaryotic chromosomes. 

1.2 Metaphase chromosomes: Centromere, Kinetochore, Nucleolus organizers and rRNA 

genes. 

1.3 Telomere: Functions, Telomeric DNA structure, telomere synthesis, telomerase cycle, 

telomere shortening in cell senescence and immortalization. 

1.4 Heterochromatin and euchromatin. 

2.0 Giant Chromosomes: 

2.1 Polytene Chromosomes 

2.2 Lampbrush Chromosomes 

3.0 Sex Chromosomes: 

3.1 Sex determination and the Y Chromosome 

3.2 Dosage compensation in C. elegans, Drosophila and Humans. 

3.3 X inactivation in Mice and Mules. 

3.4 The role of the second X Chromosome 

3.5 Molecular basis of inactivation. 

4.0 Genomic Imprinting: 

4.1 Uniparental disomy 

4.2 Imprinting disorders 

4.3 Ovarian teratomas and hydatiform moles. 

4.4 Nature and mechanism of genomic imprinting 

4.5 X- inactivation and imprinting 

4.6 Sex specific imprinting 

Section – B 

5.0 Somatic Cell Genetics: 

5.1 Cell fusion and somatic cell hybrids – agents and mechanism of fusion. 

5.2 Heterokaryon – Cell lines and selection systems and chromosome segregation. 

5.3 Radiation hybrid mapping. 

5.4 Gene mapping with somatic cell hybrids 

5.6 Hybrid mapping panels. 

6.0 Genes in Pedigrees: 

6.1 Mendelian pedigree pattern. 

6.2 Heritable diseases in human. 

6.3 Inheritance of mitochondrial diseases 

10(178) 


6.4 Complications to the basic pedigree patterns 

6.5 Non-Mendelian traits. 

7.0 Gene Mutations : 

7.1 Spontaneous mutations – Base pair substitution and frame shift mutations 

7.2 Induced mutations – Radiation, chemical and environmental 

7.3 In –vitro site specific mutagenesis. 

7.4 Detection of mutagens – The Ames test and sister chromatid exchanges. 

8.0 Genetics of Cell Cycle: 

8.1 Genetic regulation of cell division in yeast and eukaryotes. 

8.2 Molecular basis of cellular check points. 

8.3 Molecular basis of neoplasia. 

Suggested Reading Material: 

1. Atherly, A.C., J.R. Girton and J.F. McDonald. The Science of Genetics. Sauders 

College Publishing, Harcort Brace College Publishers, NY. 

2. Brooker, R.J. Genetics : Analysis and Principles. Benjamin/Cummings, Longman 

Inc. 

3. Fairbanks, D.J. and W.R. Anderson. Genetics – The Continuity of Life. Brook/Cole 

Publishing Company ITP, NY, Toronto. 

4. Gardner, E.J., M.J. Simmons and D.P. Snustad. Principles of Genetics. John Wiley 

and Sons. Inc., NY. 

5. Griffiths, A.J.F., J.H. Miller, D.T. Suzuki, R.C. Lewontin and W.M. Gelbart. An 

introduction to genetic analysis. W.H. Freeman and company, NY. 

6. Lewin, B. Genes. VI. Oxford University Press, Oxford, New York, Tokyo. 

7. Snustad, D.P. and M.J. Simmons. Principles of Genetics. John Wiley and Sons. 

Inc., NY. 

8. Watson, J.D., N.H. Hopkins, J.W. Roberts, J.A. Steitz and A.M. Weiner. Molecular 

Biology of Genes. The Benjamin/Cummings Publishing Company Inc., Tokyo. 

9. Tom Strachan & Read, A.P. Human Molecular Genetics 3 rd edition, Garland 

Publishing 2004, London. 

10(179) 


Paper: ZOO-XVI (ii) Semester – III 

Reproduction and Aging – I 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 







Section – A 

1.0 Central nervous system, Hypothalamus-pituitary axis:- Hypothalamus nuclei (anatomy) , 

Vascularity, endocrine functions, Neurosecretions, Neurohormones and Hormones, 

Pituitary and non-pituitary gonadotrophins and their biological significance. 

2.0 Germline-soma interactions during early development. 

3.0 Sertoli cell-germ cell interactions and regulation of testicular activity both in vivo and in 

vitro. 

4.0 Physiology, biochemistry and molecular biology of follicular growth. 

5.0 Induced and spontaneous ovulators; Theories of ovulation. 

6.0 Follicular atresia; causes, regulation and significance with special reference to fertility 

regulation. 

Section – B 

7.0 Molecular, cellular and functional changes during ageing, life span, chronological and 

biological age, Relationship between reproduction and ageing. Importance of diet, 

diseases, exercise, stress and yoga. 

8.0 Chromatin changes; structural and functional impairment; Acetylatylation, methylation, 

changes in histones and packing proteins during ageing. 

9.0 Enzyme changes during ageing; Isoenzyme patterns, induction of enzymes and molecular 

properties. 

10.0 Collagen changes during ageing; structure, types and cross linking groups and functional 

changes. 

11.0 Hormonal changes during ageing; age-reversal effects of hormones and growth factors. 

12.0 Theories of ageing: somatic mutation theory; error theory; codon restriction theory; gene 

regulation theory; free radical theory ; telomerase theory. 

10(180) 



1. Guraya S.S. (1998). Cellular and Molecular Biology of General development and 

Maturation in mammals Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi. 

2. Hafez E.S.E.(1994). “Reproduction in farm animals”. Lea Febighiese. 

3. Mc Donald L.E. (1988). Veterinary Endocrinology & Reproduction. Varghese Co., 

Bombay 

4. Degrodt L.I.(1995). Endocrinology Vol. I, II, III Saunders. 

5. Gurays S.S. (2000). Comparative Cellular and Molecular Biology of Ovary in 

mammals. I.B.H., New Delhi. 

10(181) 


Paper: ZOO-XVI (iii) Semester – III 

Animal Behaviour and Wildlife Conservation – I 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 







Section – A 

1. Concept of Animal behaviour; Mile-Stones in the history of animal behaviour and scope. 

2. Anthropomorphism and subjectivity vs. Ethology : Various methods to overcome these 

problems in the study of animal behaviour. 

3. Stereotyped and acquired behaviour patterns : Tropisms, Taxes, Reflexes, Instincts, learning 

& reasoning; Change in major modes of adaptive behaviour in phylogeny. 

4. Perception of the environment : Mechanical, Electrical, chemical, olfactory, auditory, visual 

5. Biological rhythms and concept of biological clock. 

6. Motivation: Introduction, goal oriented behaviour, biological drives – Primary and 

Secondary drives. 

7. Concept of learning: law of learning, types of learning – Habitation, trial & error learning, 

latent learning, Insight, Imprinting, Classical conditioning & Instrumental learning. 

Section – B 

8. Wildlife: Definition, significance and wildlife zones of the world and India, Wildlife Map of 

the world, Wildlife map of India; 

9. Protected Area Systems: Concept, Historical background, categories and management 

objectives of protected areas, world growth of protected areas, Present status of National 

PA-Systems. 

10. Theory and Practice of Biosphere Reserves of the world: Biosphere Reserves of India, 

Natural Heritage Sites of the world, Natural Heritage sites in India. 

11. Wildlife and livelihood; Wildlife and illegal trade & control; 

12. Wildlife conservation techniques, role of WWF, IUCN, UNEP, Red Data Book; Categories 

of Endangered Wildlife Species. 

13. A brief analysis of Avian and Mammalian fauna of the world, Indian Subcontinent. 

14. A brief analysis of wild mammalian fauna of the world Indian Subcontinent. 

10(182) 



1. Techniques for wildlife Census in India by W.A. Rogers (A field manual); Wildlife Institute 

of India, Dehradun. 

2. Wildlife Wealth of India by T.C. Majupuria; Tecpress Services, L.P., 487/42-SOL- 

Wattenslip, Pratunam Bangkok, 10400, Thailand 

3. Ali, S. Ripley S.D. Handbook of Birds of India, Pakistan 10-Vols. Oxford University Press, 

Bombay. 

4. The Book of Indian Animals by S.H. Prater, BNHS-Publication, Bombay. 

5. Wildlife in India by V.B. Saharia Natraj Publishers, Dehradun. 

6. E.P. Gee, The Wildlife of India. 

10(183) 


Paper: ZOO-XVI (iv) Semester – III 

Fish and Fisheries – I 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 







Section – A 

1.0 Definition of Fish, Fisheries and aquaculture. 

2.0 Classification of fishes with distinguishing characters and examples of each group. 

3.0 Indian fisheries production, utilization and demand. 

4.0 Estuarine and brackish water fishes of India – characteristic species and their 

exploitation. 

5.0 Culture fisheries – Design and construction of culture ponds 

6.0 Prerequisites of a fish suitable for culture. 

7.0 Ecology of fish pond ecosystem 

7.1 Physico chemical conditions of ponds water and soil 

7.2 Biological conditions of waters 

7.3 Weeds and their control 

7.4 Productivity of fish pond 

7.5 Classification of water bodies on the basis of productivity. 

8.0 Estuarine, marine and wet land fisheries 

9.0 Water pollution its causes and remedy 

10.0 Biological basis of rational fishery 

11.0 

Section – B 

Fish integument : Exoskeleton and colouration 

12.0 Fins : origin, types and functions 

13.0 Food and feeding habits of fishes, Digestion in fishes 

14.0 Respiratory system Gill structure and functions, Accessory respiratory organs swim 

bladder and webberian ossicles 

15.0 Osmoregulation in fishes 

10(184) 


16.0 Receptors in fishes 

16.1 Chemoreceptors 

16.2 Lateral line organs 

16.3 Eye Ear 

16.4 Pineal organ 

17.0 Hormones and reproduction : Induced breeding in carps and catfishes. 

18.0 Identification of different maturity stages of fishes. 

19.0 Migration in fishes 

20.0 Fish diseases and their control 

21.0 Age and growth studies 

10(185) 


Paper: ZOO-XVI (v) Semester – III 

Insect Morphology and Physiology – I 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 






3. As far as possible the questions should be divided into sub-parts and marks indicated part 

wise. 

Section – A 

1.0 Classification and diagnostic features of insects. 

2.0 Distinctive characters and interrelationship of various insect orders. 

3.0 Classification of Orthoptera, Hemiptera and Coleoptera up to families (important ones only) 

4.0 Evolution of wings. 

5.0 Insect and Plants 

a) Phytophagy 

b) Pollination and Myrmacochory 

6.0 Insect Predation and parasitism 

7.0 Insect societies: Subsociality in insect; Eusociality in insect (Colony and Castes in Hymenoptera and 

Isoptera); Evolution of eusociality. 

8.0 Insect defense. 

Section – B 

9.0 Integument, its derivatives, and colour production. 

10.0 Segmentation and tagmosis. 

11.0 Head and its appendages. 

12.0 Thorax and its appendages. 

13.0 Wings and its variation. 

14.0 Abdomen and is appendages. 

15.0 External Genitalia and its modifications. 

16.0 Metamorphosis. 

17.0 Diapause. 

18.0 Mounting. 

Suggested reading material 

1. The Insect-Structure and Function. - by R.F. Chapman. 

2. Imm’s General Text Book of Entomology –by O.W. Richards and R.G. Davies. 

3. The Insect an outline of Entomology- by P.G. Gullan and P.S. Cranston. 

10(186) 


Paper: ZOO-XVI (vi) Semester – III 

Proteins and Nucleic Acids – I 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 



compulsory. The remaining eight questions will be set section wise selecting four questions from 

each section (I & II). The candidate will be required to attempt question No. 1 and four more 

selecting two questions from each section. 


wise. 

Section – A 

1.0 Covalent properties of proteins. 

1.1 Structure and chemistry of amino acids. 

1.2 Protein sequencing 

1.3 Peptide synthesis 

1.4 Covalent modification 

1.5 Protein size and composition 

1.6 Protein splicing 

2.0 Protein secondary structure 

2.1 Protein tertiary structure and folding patterns 

2.2 Common tertiary structural motifs 

2.3 Role of packing constraints in tertiary structure patterns 

2.4 Divergent vs. convergent evolution of similar structural motifs 

3.0 Globular and Fibrous Proteins 

3.1 Water and the hydrophobic effect 

3.2 Tertiary and quaternary effect 

3.3 Motifs in globular proteins 

3.4 Properties of protein interiors and surfaces 

3.5 Fibrous proteins 

3.6 Structure of bone 

4.0 Protein folding and thermodynamics 

4.1 Protein folding and dyamics 

4.2 Folding overview: the Levinthal paradox 

4.3 Condensation and molten globules 

4.4 Ramachandran plots and amino acid propensities 

4.5 Catalysis and assistance 

4.6 Amino acid sequence variation and membrane protein folding 

4.7 Chaperonin-assisted protein folding 

Section-B 

5.0 Large macromolecular assemblies 

5.1 Principles of protein-protein interaction 

5.2 Control of assembly 

5.3 Viruses, 

5.4 Muscle assemblies 

10(187) 


6.0 Use of sequence comparisons of study evolution. 

7.0 Allostery (Hemoglobin), Myoglobin structure and oxygen binding 

7.1 Hemoglobin subunits cooperativity, the Hill coefficient 

7.2 Quaternary structure changes Sickle cell and other molecular diseases 

8.0 Methods of Study Protein-Protein purification and analysis, Electrophoresis, Dialysis, 

Column chromatography, Ultracentrifugation, Mass spectrometry, Affinity 

chromatography, Optical spectroscopy, X-ray crystallography, NMR, High resolution 

electron microscopy. Peptide chemistry-sequencing and synthesis. 


1. G.M. Blacburn and M. Gait. Nucleic Acids in Chemistry and Biology. Oxford University 

Press. 

2. W. Saenger. Principles of Nucleic Acid Structure. Springer Verlage, New York. 

3. T.E. Creighton. Proteins: Structure and Molecular Properties. W.H. Freeman, New York. 

10(188) 


Paper: ZOO-XVII Semester – III 

Practical (Based on Papers ZOO-XIII, ZOO-XIV & ZOO-XV) 

(Examination to be held annually along with paper XXIII) 

1. Preparation of microscopic slide with specific staining – Blood smears – for detection of any 

Parasitic forms intra cellular (e.g. malarial parasite) or extra cellular (Trypanosomes). Avian 

blood could be tried, Fish blood. 

2. Raising of larval stages – again in respect of mosquitoes: - Culex; Anopheles, Aedes, 

marking out the basic structural differences at larval level. 

3. Preparation of permanent mounts of Culex and Aedes and Anopheles adults – highlight 

differences, if any, between basic these important vectors. 

4. Preparation of stained mounts of Dicrocoelrim dendrilicim (as are example of Trematode 

Parasite) from sheep liver, Acetocarmine stain. 

5. Study of Nematodes in glycerin. The material could be had from frogs cloacal region of the 

frog and lizards. 

6. Making acetocarmine squashes of nematode eggs for their chromosomal pattern. 

7. Scanning of frog cloacal scrappings in glycerin on a glass slide for sharing any evidence of 

monogenetic trematodes like Diplozoon or Polystoarella. 

8. Study of parasitic load in a host species in different region : no. of parasites per host 

specimen or region of the specimen. 

9. Non-protein nitrogenous substances: qualitative estimation of serum Bilirabin serum and 

urine creatintine. 

10. Estimation of Acid and alkaline phosphates. 

11. Demonstration of SDS and non-SDS electrophoresis 

12. Microbiological media preparation, sterilization, dilution, inoculation and standard plant 

count. 

10(189) 


Paper: ZOO-XVIII (i) Semester – III 

Practical [Based on Paper ZOO-XVI(i)] 

[Examination to be held annually along with paper ZOO-XXIV(i)] 

1. Making karyological preparations from testicular material of suitable insects by 

squash and air drying techniques to study the structure and behaviour of 

chromosomes during mitosis and meiosis. 

2. Study of chiasma frequency and terminalisation co-efficient. 

3. Study of mitosis from hepatic ceacae of suitable insects and preparation of karyotype and 

idiogram. 

4. Demonstration of banding techniques (C, G and T). 

5. Study of NORs in insect chromosomes. 

6. Making preparations from salivary glands of Chironomus larvae / Drosophila larvae to 

study polytene chromosomes. 

7. Effect of temperature on polytene chromosomes. 

8. Preparation of human buccal smear to study sex chromatin. 

9. Nuclear sexing from polymorphonuclear leucocytes. 

10. Identification of meiotic and mitotic stages from permanent slides. 

11. Gel electrophoresis : Practical demonstration. 

12. Isolation of genomic DNA. 

13. PCR : Introduction and practical demonstration. 

10(190) 


Paper: ZOO-XVIII (ii) Semester – III 

Practical [Based on Paper ZOO-XVI(ii)] 

[Examination to be held annually along with paper ZOO-XXIV(ii)] 

1. Dissection of brain, spinal cord and associated nerves and male and female reproductive 

systems of earthworm, cockroach, grass hopper, and rat. 

2. Perfusion techniques and fixation method for histological studies. 

3. Processing of nervous and reproductive tissues for microanatomy and histochemistry. 

4. Study of permanent slides on mammalian reproductive and nervous tissues. 

5. Study of folliculogenesis and atresia in rat ovary. 

6. Study of apoptosis in nervous tissues and gonads. 

7. Extraction and estimation of macromolecules such as proteins, carbohydrates, lipids, and 

nucleic acids. 

8. Histochemical and biochemical analysis of age pigments. 

9. Study of vitellogensis in different animals. 

10. Oocyte collection; aspiration and slicing method. 

11. Oocyte maturation in vitro. 

12. Sperm morphology, capacitation, sperm count, and sperm motility. 

13. In vitro fertilization. 

10(191) 


Paper : ZOO-XVIII (iii) Semester – III 

Practical ([Based on Paper ZOO-XVI(iii)] 

[Examination to be held annually along with paper ZOO-XXIV(iii)] 

1. Designing of experiments, observations, techniques of data analysis, presentation of results 

and writing of laboratory report. 

2 To demonstrate locomotive, explorative withdrawal and habituation behaviours in 

earthworm. 

3 To demonstrate response of earthworm to light. 

4 To demonstrate antennal grooming behaviour in cockroach. 

5 Demonstration of food preferences in Tribolium/ Rhizopertha/ Callosbruchus. 

6 Investigation of habituation of diving response of mosquito larvae. 

7 To study the effect of temperature on heartbeat of cockroach. 

8 Field study of nesting behaviour of common available avian fauna of the region. 

9 To prepare charts of wildlife zones of India and the world 

10 (a) Estimation of insect-population using sweep net method. 

(b) Estimation of population of soil arthropods by transect method. 

11 To study mobbing response of birds. 

10(192) 


Paper : ZOO-XVIII (iv) Semester – III 

Practical [Based on Paper ZOO-XVI(iv)] 

[Examination to be held annually along with paper ZOO-XXIV(iv)] 

1. Study of Anatomy and Morphology of important group of fishes. 

2. Taxonomic study of common families, genera and species of fishes 

3. Study of fishes of Haryana 

4. Survey of fish fauna of a specific fishing spot by each student 

5. Examination of skeleton of cartilaginous and bony fishes 

6. Study of histological and microscopic structure in fishes 

7. Analysis of physical and chemical properties of water 

8. Qualitative and quantitative examination of phyto- and Zooplankton in a water body. 

9. Study of Aquatic weeds and aquatic insects 

10(193) 


Paper: ZOO-XVIII (v) Semester – III 

Practical [Based on Paper ZOO-XVI(v)] 

[Examination to be held annually along with paper ZOO-XXIV(v)] 

1. Dissection of the below mentioned insects (to show their stomatogastric sympathetic 

nervous system and central nervous system, alimentary canal and reproductive organs): 

mylabris, Cockroach, Ak-hopper, Gryllus, wasp. 

2. Permanent slide preparation of whole mounts and various modifications of different 

morphological parts of insect (antennae, legs, wings, mouthparts, genitalia etc.). 

3. Fixation, section cutting and staining (double) of suitable insect tissues. 

4. Insect collection and preservation. 

10(194) 


Paper : ZOO-XVIII (vi) Semester – III 

Practical [Based on Paper ZOO-XVI(vi)] 

[Examination to be held annually along with paper ZOO-XXIV(vi)] 

1. Separation of macromolecules by Chromatographic techniques. 

2. Isolation of genome DNA. 

3. Southern blotting 

4. RFLP analysis. 

5. Isolation of RNA 

10(195) 


Paper: ZOO-XIX Semester – IV 

Developmental Biology 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 







wise. 

Section – A 

1.0 Introduction to animal development 

1.1 Problems of developmental biology 

1.2 Developmental patterns in metazoans 

1.3 Development in unicellular eukaryotes 

2.0 Creating multicellularity 

2.1 Cleavage types 

2.2 Comparative account of gastrulation 

3.0 Early vertebrate development 

3.1 Neurulation and ectoderm 

3.2 Mesoderm and endoderm 

4.0 Cytoplasmic determinants and autonomous cell specification 

4.1 Cell commitment and differentiation 

4.2 Cell specification in nematodes 

4.3 Germ cell determinants 

4.4 Germ cell migration 

4.5 Progressive cell - Cell interaction and cell specification fate 

5.0 Body Axes 

5.1 Establishment of Body axes in mammals and birds 

5.2 Proximate tissue interactions 

5.3 Genetics of axis specification in Drosophila 

6.0 Homeobox concept in different phylogenetic groups 

Section – B 

7.0 Tetrapod limb development 

8.0 Hormones as mediators of development 

8.1 Amphibian metamorphosis 

8.2 Insect metamorphosis 

8.3 Ovarian luteinization and mammary gland differentiation. 

9.0 Environmental evolution and animal development 

9.1 Environmental cues and effects 

9.2 Malformations and disruptions 

9.3 Changing evolution through development modularity 

10(196) 


9.4 Developmental constraints 

9.5 Creating new cell types - basic evolutionary mystery 

10.0 Biology of sex determination 

10.1 Chromosomal sex determination - mammals and Drosophila 

10.2 Testis determining genes 

10.3 Ovarian development 

10.4 Secondary sex determination in mammals 

10.5 Environmental sex determination. 

11.0 Cell diversification in early animal embryo 

11.1 Xenopus blastomeres 

11.2 Morphogen gradients 

11.3 Totipotency & Pleuripotency 

11.4 Embryonic stem cells 

11.5 Renewal by stem cells - epidermis 

11.6 Skeletal muscle regeneration 

11.7 Connective tissue cell family 

12.0 Hemopoietic stem cells 

12.1 Stem cell disorders 

12.2 Blood cells formation 

12.3 Bone marrow transplants 

12.4 Gene therapy 


1. S.F. Gilbert. Developmental Biology. Sinauer Associates Inc., Massachusetts. 

2. Ethan Bier. ‘The Cold Spring'. Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, New York. 

10(197) 


Paper : ZOO-XX Semester – IV 

Vertebrate Immunology 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 







wise. 

Section – A 

1.0 Innate and Acquired Immunity 

2.0 Phylogeny and Ontogeny of immune system 

2.1 Organization and structure of lymphoid organs 

2.2 Cells of the immune system and their differentiation 

2.3 Lymphocyte traffic 

3.0 Nature of immune response 

4.0 Nature of antigens and superantigens 

4.1 Antigenicity and immunogenicity 

4.2 Factors influencing immunogenicity 

4.3 Epitopes and haptens 

5.0 Structure and Functions of Antibodies 

5.1 Classes and subclasses 

5.2 Gross and Fine structure 

5.3 Antibody mediated effector functions 

6.0 Antigen-Ab interactions in vitro and in vivo. 

7.0 Complement System 

8.0 Major Histocompatibility Complex in mouse and HLA system in human 

8.1 MHC haplotypes 

8.2 Class I and class II molecules 

8.3 Cellular distribution 

8.4 Peptide binding 

8.5 Expression and diversity 

8.6 Disease susceptibility and MHC/HLA 

Section – B 

9.0 Organization and expression of Ig genes 

9.1 Models for Ig gene structure 

9.2 Multigene organization of Ig genes 

9.3 DNA rearrangements and mechanisms 

9.4 Generation of antibody diversity 

9.5 Differential expression of Ig genes. 

10(198) 


10.0 T-cell receptors 

10.1 Isolation, molecular components and structure 

10.2 T-cell maturation and thymus 

10.3 T H-cell activation mechanism 10.4 T-cell differentiation 

10.4 Cell death and T-cell population 

11.0 B-cell generation, activation and differentiation 

11.1 B-cell receptors 

11.2 Selection of immature self-reactive B-cells 

11.3 B-cell activation and proliferation 

11.4 T H-B-Cell interactions 

11.5 Humoral immune response-kinetics 

12.0 Cytokines 

12.1 Structures and functions 

12.2 Cytokine receptors 

12.3 Cytokines and Immune response 

13.0 Cell-mediated effector functions 

13.1 Cell adhesion molecules 

13.2 Effector cells and molecules 

13.3 CTL and NK cells-mechanisms of action 

13.4 Delayed type hypersensitivity 

14.0 Immunological tolerance and Anti-immunity 

15.0 Hypersensitivity and immune responses to infection agents especially intracellular 

parasites. 


1. Kuby. Immunology, W.H. Freeman, USA. 

2. W. Paul. Fundamentals of Immunology. 

3. I.M. Roitt. Essential Immunology, ELBS Edition. 

10(199) 


Paper : ZOO-XXI Semester – IV 

Environmental Toxicology 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 







wise. 

Section – A 

1.0 Environmental Policy: Economic environmental policy, social environmental policy, 

legal environmental policy at global and national level. 

2.0 Environment Impact Assessment: Definition, Introduction, Different phases, 

significance. 

3.0 Concepts of sustainable development: Utility and significance. 

4.0 Environmental pollution: Definition, types of pollution; air, water land, noise, plastic and 

marine; Principal pollutants; Significance, consequences and possible management 

strategies. Green House effect: Definition, global warming, consequences and 

significance. Ozone layer: Ozone as a friends and a foe; phenomenon, reasons and 

possible effects on plants, animal and man; Measures to check depletion of ozone layer. 

Section – B 

5.0 Introduction to Toxicology: Definition, classification of toxicants. 

6.0 Xenobiotics: Definition, types and significance. 

7.0 Toxic agents & mode of action: Pesticides, metals, solvents Radiation, carcinogens, 

poisons, Bio-toxins, petrochemicals. 

8.0 Solid waste management: Primary waste products-Solid waste, toxic biological and 

hospital landfills, incineration, source reduction and recycling. 

9.0 Environmental Toxicology: Food additives, air, water and soil pollutants. 

10.0 Principles and significance of systematic toxicology: Definition, introduction and 

discussion of Genotoxicology, applications of toxicology anthropogenic activities and 

environment, Human toxicology and medicinal ethics. 

Suggested Reading Material: 

1. Concepts of Ecology by Edward J.Kormondy; Prentice Hall of India (Pvt.) Ltd. 

2. Fundamentals of Ecology by W.B. Odum, E.P. Saunders, Toppan Co. Ltd., Tokyo, Japan. 

3. Ecology by Paul Colin Vacx: John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 

4. Environmental Pollution by H.M Dix., John Wiley Publications, New York. 

10(200) 


5. Handbook of Solid Waste Management by Wilson, Van Nostrand, Reinhold. 

6. Environmental Studies by D.B. Botkin, & E.A. Keller, Martill Publising Co., Columbs, 

Toronto, London, 1987 

7. Ecology of Natural Resources, Francoid remade, John Wiley & Sons, New York, Singapore. 

8. Ecology by Paul Colinvaux; John Wiley & Sons, New York, Chichester, Brisbane, Toronto, 

Singapore. 

10(201) 


Paper : ZOO-XXII (i) Semester – IV 

Molecular Cytogenetics – II 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 







wise. 

Section – A 

1.0 Human Cytogenetics: 

1.1 Human karyotype. 

1.2 Nomenclature for normal chromosomes (ISCN) 

1.3 Variable chromosome features 

1.4 Nomenclature for acquired chromosome aberrations 

1.5 Nomenclature for meiotic chromosomes 

1.6 Species codes. 

2.0 Chromosome Banding Techniques and their Applications: 

2.1 Q-banding 

2.2 C-banding 

2.3 G-banding and R-banding 

2.4 T-banding 

2.5 High-Resolution and Replication banding 

2.6 Nuclease banding 

2.7 Molecular correlates of chromosome bands. 

2.8 Functional significance of chromosome bands. 

3.0 Numerical and Structural Abnormalities of Human Chromosomes –Syndromes: 

3.1 Autosomal syndromes – cat-cry syndrome, Wolf-Hirchhorn syndrome, Trisomy 

13, Trisomy 18, Trisomy 21. 

3.2 Sex chromosomal syndromes – Turner syndrome, Klinefelter syndrome, XYY, True 

and Pseudohermaphroditism. 

3.3 Chromosomal abnormalities and dermatoglyphics. 

3.4 Fragile sites and fragile X syndrome. 

4.0 Cytogenetic Implications and Consequences of Structural Changes and Numerical 

Alterations of Chromosomes: 

4.1 Aberrations of chromosome number – Polyploidy, aneuploidy 

4.2 Aberrations of chromosome structures – Duplications, deletions, inversions, 

translocations. 

Section – B 

5.0 rDNA Technology: 

5.1 Gene-cloning 

5.2 Vectors 

5.3 cDNA and genomic liberaries 

5.4 Blotting techniques 

5.5 Chromosome walking 

5.6 Application of rDNA technology 

10(202) 


6.0 Molecular Cytogenetic Techniques: 

6.1 FISH 

6.2 Chromosome painting 

6.3 Automated karyotyping 

6.4 Flow cytometery 

6.5 DNA fingerprinting 

7.0 Molecular Markers in Genome Analysis: 

7.1 RFLP 

7.2 RAPD 

7.3 AFLP 

7.4 PCR and its applications in genome analysis 

7.5 Microarrays – bases expression analysis. 

8.0 Genome Projects: 

8.1 Human genome project – history, organization, goals and value of the project. 

8.2 Genetic mapping of the human genome 

8.3 Physical mapping of the human genome 

8.4 Human genome diversity project 

8.5 Model organisms and other genome projects. 

8.6 Life in the post genomic era. 


1. Atherly, A.C., J.R. Girton and J.F. McDonald. The Science of Genetics. Sauders 

College Publishing, Harcort Brace College Publishers, NY. 

2. Brooker, R.J. Genetics : Analysis and Principles. Benjamin/Cummings, Longman 

Inc. 

3. Fairbanks, D.J. and W.R. Anderson. Genetics – The Continuity of Life. Brook/Cole 

Publishing Company ITP, NY, Toronto. 

4. Gardner, E.J., M.J. Simmons and D.P. Snustad. Principles of Genetics. John Wiley 

and Sons. Inc., NY. 

5. Griffiths, A.J.F., J.H. Miller, D.T. Suzuki, R.C. Lewontin and W.M. Gelbart. An 

introduction to genetic analysis. W.H. Freeman and company, NY. 

6. Lewin, B. Genes. VI. Oxford University Press, Oxford, New York, Tokyo. 

7. Snustad, D.P. and M.J. Simmons. Principles of Genetics. John Wiley and Sons. 

Inc., NY. 

8. Watson, J.D., N.H. Hopkins, J.W. Roberts, J.A. Steitz and A.M. Weiner. Molecular 

Biology of Genes. The Benjamin/Cummings Publishing Company Inc., Tokyo. 

9. Tom Strachan & Read, A.P. Human Molecular Genetics 3 rd edition, Garland Publishing 

2004, London 

10(203) 


Paper : ZOO-XXII (ii) Semester – IV 

Reproduction and Aging – II 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 







wise. 

Section – A 

1.0 Biology of oocyte maturation in vivo and in vitro 

2.0 Molecular basis of fertilization; Capacitation, Acrosome reaction, Cortical granules 

exocytosis & egg activation. In vitro and in vivo fertilization, sexing, stem cells, cloning and 

future prospectives. 

3.0 Corpus luteum, structure and functions. Control of luteal functions including luteolytic & 

luteotrophic factors, Pseudopregnancy and gestation periods. 

4.0 Hormonal regulation of implantation, pregnancy, parturition, placenta and its hormones. 

Artificial wombs, Immunocontraception; Mammary glands and physiology of lactation. 

5.0 In vitro fertilization and embryo transfer technology with special reference to wildlife 

conservation. 

6.0 Environmental factors influencing Reproduction; Pheromones and Reproduction. 

7.0 Influence of age on reproductive performance. 

Section – B 

8.0 Structure and classification of neurons and glial cells. Neuronal elements, basis of circuit, 

synaptic action, dendritic properties and functional operation of spinal cord, membrane 

conductance, Brain stem, Autonomic nervous system. 

9.0 Principles of synaptic transmission; Ca2+ and transmitter release; post synaptic 

transmission mechanism; diversity of neurotransmitters: acetylcholine, catecholamine, 

serotonin, GABA, glycine, histamine, peptides, NO, and opiods. 

10.0 Denervation and regeneration of synaptic connections in vertebrate central nervous system 

11.0 Apoptosis its molecular mechanism regulation, and significance. 

12.0 Neurophychiatric disorders; Neuropathy, Diseases involving myelin; Ischemia and 

hypoxia; Epileptic seizers; Alzheimer disease; Prion disease; Progeria, Parkinson’s 

disease. 

13.0 Dietary requirements of the aged, psychological and social problems of the aged. 

10(204) 



1. Guraya S.S. (1998). Cellular and Molecular Biology of General development and 

Maturation in mammals Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi. 

2. Hafez E.S.E.(1994).”Reproduction in farm animals”. Lea Febighiese. 

3. Mc Donald L.E. (1988). Veterinary Endocrinology & Reproduction. Varghese Co., 

Bombay 

4. Degrodt L.I.(1995). Endocrinology Vol. I,II,III Saunders. 

5. Gurays S.S. (2000). Comparative Cellular and Molecular Biology of Ovary in 

mammals. I.B.H., New Delhi. 

10(205) 


Paper : ZOO-XXII (iii) Semester – IV 

Animal Behaviour and Wildlife Conservation – II 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 







wise. 

Section – A 

1.0 Social behaviour: 

1.1 Aggregations and society; 

1.2 Advantages of group living; 

1.3 Types of social organization in animals 

1.4 Group selection, kin selection, altruism, reciprocal altruism. 

1.5 Territoriality and parental care. 

2.0 Social behaviour of termites, ants and primates. 

3.0 Various means of communication in animals: Chemical, Visual, auditory, touch etc. 

4.0 Hormones and animal Behaviour: Hormones important to behavioural regulation; 

5.0 Aggressive behaviour; sexual attraction and sexual behaviour. 

6.0 Pheromones and animal behaviour: types of pheromones, role of pheromones in animal 

behaviour; pheromones of social insects. 

Section – B 

7.0 Wildlife Census: Planning a wildlife census, understanding sample counts, Block counts, 

Road side counts, Dung counts, Pugmark census, Water-hole census, Presentation of India. 

Identify industrial animals. 

8.0 Wildlife Damage, its nature and definition, electric fences for wildlife damage control, 

Basic electric fence design. 

Trench design, line trapping, Mist netting, Rocket netting Chemical capture: Equipment, 

Drugs, Plan of operation, Chemical capture of ungulates, Elephant, Rhinoceros, Large 

carnivores. 

9.0 Wildlife Tourism: Definition scope and range; Popular Wildlife Tourist Sports of the world, 

Popular Wildlife spots in India, Sustainable use of wildlife spots, Education methods. 

10.0 Poaching: Its definition and implications, conducting anti-poaching operations, Evidence in 

poaching cases. 

11.0 National Projects: Project Tiger, Project elephant, Project Rhinoceros, Project Crocodiles, 

Project Hangul, Manipur Brow Antlered Deer. 

10(206) 



1. Techniques for wildlife Census in India by W.A. Rogers (A field mannual); Wildlife 

Institute of India, Dehradun. 

2. Wildlife Wealth of India by T.C. Majupuria; Tecpress Services, L.P., 487/42-SOL- 

Wattenslip, Pratunam Bangkok, 10400, Thailand 

3. Ali, S. Ripley S.D. Handbook of Birds of India, Pakistan 10-Vols. Oxford University Press, 

Bombay. 

4. The Book of Indian Animals by S.H. Prater, BNHS-Publication, Bombay. 

5. Wildlife in India by V.B. Saharia Natraj Publishers, Dehradun. 

6. E.P. Gee, The Wildlife of India. 

10(207) 


Paper : ZOO-XXII (iv) Semester – IV 

Fish and Fisheries – II 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 







wise. 

Section – A 

1.0 Introduction to fish biotechnology 

2.0 Fish stock improvement through genetic improvement. 

3.0 Androgenesis and Gynogenesis – natural and induced 

4.0 Polyploidy induced 

5.0 Sex reversal and sterility 

6.0 Transgenesis, transgenes and application 

7.0 Cryopreservation of gametes and embryo 

8.0 Fish-by products 

9.0 Fish preservation process 

10.0 Nutritive aspect of fish meat and oil. 

Section – B 

11.0 Current concept of culturable fin fishes and shell fishes 

12.0 Cultivable organisms for aquaculture and criteria for their selection 

13.0 Different systems for aquaculture: Pond culture, cage culture and aquaculture ranching etc. 

14.0 Nutrition in Aquaculture 

14.1 Nutrient and non-nutrient diet components 

14.2 Preparation and processing of feed, feed formulae, 

14.3 Natural and supplementary feed and their utilization 

15.0 Integrated Aquaculture and waste water aquaculture 

16.0 Pearl Culture 

17.0 Frog culture 

18.0 Prawn culture-Fresh and brackish water 

19.0 Impact of Aquaculture on Environment 

20.0 Methods of Fishing 

20.1 Crafts and gear technology 

10(208) 


Paper : ZOO-XXII (v) Semester – IV 

Insect Morphology and Physiology – II 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 




each section (I & II). The candidate will be required to attempt question No. 1 and four more 



wise. 

Section – A 

1.0 Digestive system: Alimentary canal: Digestion (Including unusual food materials); 

Absorption; Nutrition. 

2.0 Circulatory system: Circulatory organs; Haemolymph; circulation of blood; Immune system 

3.0 Respiratory system: Tracheal system, Spiracles; Gaseous exchange; Respiration in 

aquatic and endoparasitic insects. 

4.0 Excretory system: Malpighian tubules; Nitrogenous excretion; Urine production; fat body 

and other haemocoelic tissues. 

Section – B 

5.0 Reproductive system : male and female reproductive organs; Spermatozoa and sperm 

transfer; ovulation and fertilization; types of reproduction. 

6.0 Nervous system: Central nervous system (brain in brief); sympathetic nervous system; 

Controlling behaviour. 

7.0 Endocrine system: Endocrine glands; Major hormones; Regulation of hormone titer; Mode 

of action of hormones. 

8.0 Sensory system and behaviour: Mechanical stimuli; Sound reception and sound 

production; Chemical stimuli; Semichemicals-Pheromones, Kairomones allomones and 

synomones: Insect vision. 

Suggested reading material 

1. The Insect-Structure and Function. - by R.F. Chapman. 

2. Imm’s General Text Book of Entomology –by O.W. Richards and R.G. Davies. 

3. The Insect an outline of Entomology- by P.G. Gullan and P.S. Cranston. 

10(209) 


Paper : ZOO-XXII (vi) Semester – IV 

Proteins and Nucleic Acids – II 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 







wise. 

Section – A 

1.0 Covalent properties of nucleic acids 

1.1 Modified nucleosides. 

1.2 Properties of polynucleotides. 

1.3 Secondary and tertiary structure. 

2.0 Chemistry of nucleic acid polymerization. Enzymatic and acid phase methods. 

3.0 Nucleic acid structure I. Duplex stability, hybridization. RNA structure, hairpin and 

pseudoknot structures, tRNA. 

4.0 Nucleic acid structure II. DNA and RNA helical geometries (A-Z), bending, deformation, 

triplexes, quadruplexes. Chromatin structure. Structure of the nucleosome core; 

organization of nucleosomes into solenoids; topological consideration. 

5.0 Nucleic acid analysis. DNA and RNA sequencing, determination of modified 

nucleotides, analysis of nucleic acid secondary structure. 

6.0 Interactions of nucleic acids with small molecules. 

7.0 Proteins-nucleic acid interactions I. 

8.0 Proteins-nucleic acid interactions II. 

9.0 Principles of enzyme catalysis. 

10.0 RNA catalysis 

Section – B 

10.1 Chemistry and structure of ribozymes 

10.2 Evolutionary implications 

10.3 RNA splicing 

10.4 RNA-and spliceosome-mediated reactions 

11.0 Nucleoside analogs. Incorporation of analogs into DNA/RNA and properties of 

polynucleotides (thionucleotides, fluorophores, biotinylated nucleosides). 

12.0 Enzyme mechanisms. Proteases, polymerases, other examples. 

10(210) 


13.0 Gene and genome analysis 

13.1 Bioinformatics 

13.2 Genome maps 

13.3 Microarray-bases expression analysis 

13.4 Genomics-based drug discovery. 

14.0 Extremophiles 

14.1 Life at 105 0 C or pH 1 or at 5M KCl 

14.2 Protein stability 

14.3 Protein-nucleic acid interactions. 


1. G.M. Blacburn and M.Gait. Nucleic Acids in Chemistry and Biology. Oxford University Press. 

2. W. Saenger. Principles of Nucleic Acid Structure. Springer Verlage, New York. 

3. T.E. Creighton. Proteins: Structure and Molecular Properties. W.H. Freeman, New York. 

10(211) 


Paper : ZOO-XXIII Semester – IV 

Practical [Based on Papers ZOO-XVII, ZOO-XIX & ZOO-XX & ZOO-XXI] 

(Examination of Papers ZOO-XVII & ZOO-XXIII) 

General 

1. Antigen-antibody interaction in vitro. 

2. ELISA. 

3. Isolation of B-lymphocytes. 

4. Phagocytosis in vitro. 

5. Blood film preparation and identification of cells. 

6. Histology of lymphoid organs. 

7. Immunological diagnosis of pregnancy/infection/cancer. 

8. Studies on vaginal smears during different stages of estrous cycle. 

9. Studies of different types of eggs with reference to their yolk contents. 

10(212) 




Time: 4 Hours 

10. Studies of normal development with reference to normal tables of developmental stages of 

frog/toad chick. 

11. Preparation of whole mounts of embryo and larvae when present. 

Toxicology 

12. Bioassay to demonstrate toxicological effect. 

13. Study of various components of pond ecosystem. 

14. Determination of Water quality characteristics viz: Dissolved oxygen, pH, free carbon 

dioxide, Salinity, transparency, alkalinity and hardness. 

15. Determination of phosphate, ammonia and nitrate in water. 

16. Determination of sediment chemistry 

� Moisture 

� Carbonate 

� Nitrate 

� pH 

� Phosphate 

� Texture 

� Organic Carbon 


Paper : ZOO-XXIV (i) Semester – IV 

Practical [Based on Paper ZOO-XVIII & ZOO-XXII(i)] 

[Examination of Papers ZOO-XVIII(i) & ZOO-XXIV(i)] 




Time: 4 Hours 

1. Making karyological preparations from bone marrow of a rodent for making somatic 

karyotypes. 

2. Making karyological preparations from bone marrow and other tissues of 

fishes/amphibians/birds for making karyotypes. 

3. Study of meiosis in testicular material of suitable vertebrates. 

4. Short term lymphocyte culture of human peripheral blood for preparing karyotype. 

5. Banding techniques in the chromosomes of vertebrates/human. 

6. Nucleolus organizer regions in the chromosomes of Human/Rat/Mice/Bird/Fish. 

7. Sister chromatid differential staining of chromosomes. 

8. A survey for the study of : 

(i) ABO and Rh blood groups 

(ii) Some morphogenetic and behavioural traits. 

(iii) Some biochemical traits. 

9. Preparation of pedigrees and pedigree analysis. 

10. Submission of a Survey/Project report. 

10(213) 


Paper : ZOO-XXIV (ii) Semester – IV 

Practical [Based on Paper ZOO-XVIII & ZOO-XXII(ii)] 

[Examination of Papers ZOO-XVIII(ii) & ZOO-XXIV(ii)] 

1. Effects of pesticides, drugs, and xenobiotics on granulosa cells in vitro. 

10(214) 




Time: 4 Hours 

2. Effects of pesticides, oxidants, and free radicals on testicular tissue in vitro. 

3. Morphological charges during spermeogensis. 

4. Localization of steroidogenic enzymes. 

5. Estimation of catalase from nervous and reproductive tissue 

6. Determination of Glutathione peroxides, glutathione redirects during aging. 

7. Lipid peroxidation by MDA method. 

8. Impact of Vitamin C & F on lipid peroxidation in vitro. 

9. Fluorescence studies on age pigment. 

10. Age related changes in sperm characteristics. 


Paper : ZOO-XXIV (iii) Semester – IV 

Practical [Based on Paper ZOO-XVIII & ZOO-XXII(iii)] 

[Examination of Papers ZOO-XVIII(iii) & ZOO-XXIV(iii)] 

1 To study the effect of temperature on gill movement in fishes. 

2 Laboratory study of mechanism of flight in grasshopper. 

3 Study of response of flour beetle (Triblium sp.) to angles of substrate. 

10(215) 




Time: 4 Hours 

4 To study nesting behaviour of squirrels in different habitats vis., urban environment, grain- 

market-area, roadside plantations, orchards gardens etc. 

5 Field study of burrowing behaviour of common available rodent fauna of the region. 

6 Preparation of field diary on the basis of observations regarding habitat, habits of common 

available avian and rodent fauna of the region. 

7 Study of morphological changes in common avian species during breeding season. 

8 Demonstration of different stages of reproductive cycle in rat/mouse. 

9 Field visit to a zoo or wildlife part/sanctuary and preparation of field report. 

10 Preparation of charts of endangered amphibians, reptiles and mammals with ecological 

remarks. 

11 Animal behaviour patterns using Photostat sheets. 

12 Analysis of standard pug marks of large sized wild mammals. 


Paper : ZOO-XXIV (iv) Semester – IV 

Practical [Based on Paper ZOO-XVIII & ZOO-XXII(iv) 

[Examination of Papers ZOO-XVIII(iv) & ZOO-XXIV(iv)] 

1. Fish Feed formulation and processing. 

10(216) 




Time: 4 Hours 

2. Proximate analysis of fish feed (Determination of moisture, protein, fat, ash carbohydrate, 

fiber and energy). 

3. Taking out of pituitary gland, preservation and preparation of extract. 

4. Determination of length weight relationship. 

5. Determination of age of fish using hard parts 

6. Analysis of fecundity, Gonado somatic index (GSI), Hepatosomatic index (HIS) in some 

fishes. 

7. Study of crafts and gear and method of operation 

8. Visit to fish farm 

9. Visit to fish market 

10. Project Report 


Paper : ZOO-XXIV (v) Semester – IV 

Practical [Based on Paper ZOO-XVIII & ZOO-XXII(v)] 

[Examination of Papers ZOO-XVIII(v) & ZOO-XXIV(v)] 

10(217) 




Time: 4 Hours 

1. Identification upto families, by following suitable keys, of the specimens belonging to 

any of the following orders: Coleoptera, Orthoptera, Odonata, Hemiptera, Hymenoptera. 

2. To study amino acids of insect blood by paper chromatography, or any other suitable 

exercise in insect physiology. 

3. Identification and classification of common insects (museum specimens). 

4. Studies of whole mounts and other permanent slides. 


Paper : ZOO-XXIV (vi) Semester – IV 

Practical [Based on Paper ZOO-XVIII & ZOO-XXII(vi)] 

[Examination of Papers ZOO-XVIII(vi) & ZOO-XXIV(vi)] 

1. Northern blotting 

2. Restriction digestion of DNA 

3. PCR 

4. Agarose gel electrophoresis. 

5. Elucidation of structure of biomolecules by spectrophotometry. 

10(218) 




Time: 4 Hours 


SCHEME OF EXAMINATION OF M. SC. GENOMICS SEMESTER SYSTEM TO BE 

IMPLEMENTED FROM 2012-13 


Ext. Int. Max. Time 

Marks Marks Marks Hours 

Semester - I 

GEN-I CELL BIOLOGY 75 15 90 3 

GEN-II BIOMOLECULES 75 15 90 3 

GEN-III INTRODUCTION 

PROTEOMICS 

TO GENOMICS AND 75 15 90 3 

GEN-IV INTRODUCTION TO BASIC BIOPHYSICAL AND 

BIOCHEMICAL TECHNIQUES 

75 15 90 3 

GEN-V PRACTICALS BASED ON PAPERS GEN-I AND Examination to be held annually along 

GEN-II 

with paper XI 

GEN-VI PRACTICALS BASED ON PAPERS GEN-III AND Examination to be held annually along 

GEN-IV 

with paper XII 

Seminar / Test - 40 40 1 

Total 300 100 400 - 


GEN- 

VII 

MOLECULAR BIOLOGY 75 15 90 3 

GEN- 

VIII 

BIOINFORMATICS 75 15 90 3 

GEN-IX MOLECULAR 

TECHNIQUES 

BIOLOGY TOOLS AND 75 15 90 3 

GEN-X PRINCIPLES 

TECHNIQUES 

OF GENETIC ENGINEERING AND 75 15 90 3 

GEN-XI PRACTICALS BASED ON PAPERS GEN-V, GEN- 

VII AND GEN-VIII 

80 20 100 4 

GEN- PRACTICALS BASED ON PAPERS GEN-VI, GEN- 80 20 100 4 

XII IX AND GEN-X 

Seminar / Test - 40 40 1 

Total 


460 140 600 

GEN- 

XIII 

STRUCTURAL AND FUNCTIONAL GENOMICS 75 15 90 3 

GEN- 

XIV 

BACTERIAL AND EUKARYOTIC GENOMICS 75 15 90 3 

GEN- 

XV 

HUMAN GENETICS 75 15 90 3 

GEN- 

XVI 

IMMUNOGENETICS 75 15 90 3 

GEN- PRACTICALS BASED ON PAPERS GEN-XIII AND Examination to be held annually in Semester 

XVII GEN-XIV 

- IV 

GEN- PRACTICALS BASED ON PAPERS GEN-XV AND Examination to be held annually in 

XVIII GEN-XVI 

Semester - IV 

Seminar/Test - 40 40 1 

Total 300 100 400 - 


GEN- 

XIX 

TRAINING-CUM-DISSERTATION 300 100 400 - 

DISSERTATION EVALUATION AND VIVA 50 -- 50 - 

PRACTICAL EXAMINATION OF PAPER GEN-XVII 60 15 75 4 

PRACTICALS EXAMINATION OF PAPER GEN- 

XVIII 

60 15 75 4 

Total 470 130 600 - 

10(219) 


PAPER : GEN-I CELL BIOLOGY 

SEMESTER – I 


Theory Exam. Marks : 75 



Note: 




each section (A & B). The candidate will be required to attempt question No. 1 and four more 



SECTION – A 

1. Biomembranes 

1.1. Molecular composition and arrangement functional consequences. 

Transport across cell membrane-Diffusion, active transport and pumps, uniports, symports and 

antiports. 

Membrance potential 

Co-transport by symporters or anti porters 

Transport across epthelia 

2. Cytoskeleton 

2.1. Microfilaments and microtubulus-structure and dynamics 

2.2. Microtubulus and mistosis 

2.3. Cell movements-intracellular transport, role and kinesin and dynein, signal, transduction 

mechanisms. 

3. Cillia and Flagella 

4. Cell-Cell signaling 

4.1. Cell surface receptors 

4.2. Second messenger system 

4.3. MOP kinase pathways 

4.4. Signaling from plasma membrane to nucleus 

5. Cell-Cell adhesion and communication 

5.1. Ca++ dependent homophilic cell-cell adhension 

5.2. Ca++ independent homophilic cell-cell adhension 

5.3. Gap junction and connexins 

6. Cell matrix adhesion 

6.1. Integrins 

6.2. Collagen 

6.3. Non-collagen components 

6.4. Auxin & Cell expansion 

6.5. Celluslose fibril synthesis and orientation 

10(220) 


SECTION – B 

7. Cell cycle 

7.1. Cyclines and cyclin dependent kinases 

7.2. Regulation of CDK-cycline activity. 

8. Genome organization 

8.1. Chromosomal organization of genes and non-coding DNA 

8.2. Mobile DNA 

8.3. Morphological and functional elements of eukaryotic chromosomes 

9. Intracellar protein traffic. 

9.1. Protein uptake into ER 

9.2. Protein Membrane proteins, Golgi sorting, post-translational modifications. 

9.3. Biogenesis of mitochondria, and nuclei 

9.4. Trafficking mechanisms. 

Recommended Books 

1. Alberts et al. Essential Cell Biology Garland 1998 

2. Alberts et al. Molecular Biology of the Cell Garland 2002 

3. Cooper The Cell : A molecular Approach ASM Press 2000 

4. Gilbert Developmental Biology Saunders 2003 

5. Jeremy et al. Biochemistry Freeman 2002 

6. Karp Cell and Molecular Biology John Wiley 2002 

7. Lewin Genes VIII Pearson 2004 

8. Lodish et al. Molecular Cell Biology Freeman 2004 

9. Pollard & Earnshaw Cell Biology Saunders 2002 

10. Tobin & Morcel Asking about Cells Saunders 1997 

11. Wilson & Hunt The Cell : A Problems Approach Garland 2002 

10(221) 


PAPER: GEN-II BIOMOLECULES 





Note: 


2. Question No. 1, which will be objective/short answer type cover the entire syllabus, will be compulsory. 

The remaining eight questions will be set section wise selecting four questions from each section (A & 

B). The candidate will be required to attempt question No. 1 and four more selecting two questions from 

each section. 


1. Carbohydrates 

SECTION-A 

1.1. Mucopolysaccharides and related disorders 

1.2. Glycolysis 

1.3. Krebs cycle 

1.4. Gluconeogenesis 

2. Glycogenesis and glycogenolysis 

2.1. Disorders of glycogen metabolism 

3. Amino acids and peptides 

3.1. Essential and non-essential amino acids 

3.2. Amino acids related disorders 

3.3. Small peptides and their biomedical importance 

4. Proteins 

4.1. Protein degradation 

5. Enzymes 

5.1. General properties 

5.2. Kinetics: derivation of Michaelis-Menten equation, L-B plot 

5.3. Enzyme inhibition 

5.4. Mechanism of action 

5.5. Regulation of enzyme activity 

6. Lipids 

SECTION-B 

7. Fatty acids: synthesis and oxidation of fatty acids 

8. Prostaglandins: structure and function 

9. Bioenergetics 

10(222) 


9.1. High energy compounds 

10. Hormones : Types and chemistry and biological functions 

11. Nucleic Acids: structure and functions 

11.1. DNA replication 

11.1.1 Prokaryotic and eukaryotic DNA replication 

11.2. Enzymes and accessory proteins involved in DNA replication 

11.3. Prokaryotic and Eukaryotic transcription 

11.3.1. RNA polymerases 

11.3.2. General and specific transcription factors 

11.3.3. Regulatory elements and mechanisms of transcription regulation 

11.3.4. Transcriptional and post-transcriptional gene silencing. 

12. Post-transcriptional Modifications in RNA 

12.1. 5'-Cap formation 

12.2. Transcription termination 

12.3. 3'-end processing and polyadenylation 

12.4. Splicing, Editing 

12.5. Nuclear export of mRNA 

12.6. mRNA stability 


1. Berg et al. Biochemistry Freeman 2002 

2. Bhagwan Medical Biochemistry AP 2004 

3. Devlin Biochemistry : with clinical correlations Wiley 2002 

4. Higgins et al. Biochemistry for the Molecular Sciences Longman 1994 

5. Murray et al. Harpers Illustrated Biochemistry Prentice Hall 2003 

6. Nelson et al. Lehninger’s Principles of Biochemistry McMillan 2000 

7. Voet & Voet Biochemistry Vol. 1 and 2 Wiley 2004 

8. Zubay et al. Principles of Biochemistry WCB 1995 

9. Ausubel et al. Short Protocols in Molecular Biology Wiley 2002 

10. Brown Essential Molecular Biology Vol. I & II AP 2000 

11. Brown Gene Cloning – An Introduction Stanley 

Thornes 

1995 

12. Glick & Pasternak Molecular Biotechnology ASM Press 1998 

13. Kracher Molecular Biology – A Practical 

Approach 

14. Krenzer & Massey Recombinant DNA and Biotechnology ASM 2000 

10(223) 


PAPER:GEN-III INTRODUCTION TO GENOMICS AND PROTEOMICS 





Note: 





each section. 


1. Outline for Structural genomics 

SECTION-A 

1.1. Foot-printing analysis of macromolecules, principles of covalent labeling for DNA, RNA, 

and proteins biophysical analysis (kinetics and thermodynamics), structural analysis of 

DNA and proteins by mass spectrometry 

2. Outline of structure, function and modeling; 

Structure and function by fold comparison and by functional site comparison, 

Homology modeling 

3. P-am (protein families) 5000 strategy and targetDB (targetdb.pdb.org). 

3.1 Protein preparation. 

3.2 Structure determination by NMR and X-ray crystallography: crystallization, 

3.3 Data collection (using synchrotron radiation source), structure solution. 

3.4 Structure dissemination: structure deposition in PDB and publication. 

3.5 Outlook: reducing cost and function annotation. 

4. Introduction to Proteomics 

4.1 Current Proteomics 

4.2 Tools to study proteome 

5. Protein-protein interaction networks 

5.1 Topology 

5.2 Network motifs 

SECTION-B 

6. Fundamentals of Protein/Peptide Separation Technique 

7. Two-dimensional gel electrophoresis (2D-PAGE) 

7.1 Property of proteins 

7.2 2D electrophoresis 

10(224) 


7.3 Protein detection 

7.4 2D DIGE 

8. High-Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC) 

8.1 Fundamentals of high-performance liquid chromatography 

8.2 Reverse-phase chromatography 

8.3 Strong cation exchange chromatography 

8.4 Multidimensional HPLC 

9. Quantitative Proteomics and Protein Modification Proteomics 

10. 2D-PAGE based method 

11. Mass spectrometry based method 

12. Absolute quantification method 

13. Post-translational modification proteomics 


1. Brown Genomes Bios 2002 

2. Coleman & Tsongalis Molecular Diagnosis Humana 1997 

3. Dale & Schartz From Genes to Genomes Wiley 2003 

4. Hawley and Mori The Human Genome Academic 1999 

5. Lewis Human Genetics WCB 1999 

6. Liebler Introduction to Proteomics Humana 2002 

10(225) 


PAPER : GEN-IV INTRODUCTION TO BASIC BIOPHYSICAL AND BIOCHEMICAL 

TECHNIQUES 





Note: 





each section. 


SECTION – A 

1. Chemical and Biological assays (in vitro and in vivo assays) 

2. Principles and uses of analytical instruments : Spectrophotometers, ultra centrifuge, 

spectrophotometers, NMR spectrophotometer, Microscopes. 

3. Microbiological Techniques: 

3.1. Media preparation and sterilization. 

3.2. Inoculation and growth monitoring. 

4. Cell culture techniques: 

4.1. Design and functioning of tissue culture laboratory. 

4.2. Cell proliferation measurements. 

4.3. Cell viability testing. 

4.4. Culture media preparation and cell harvesting methods. 

5. Cryotechniques : 

SECTION – B 

5.1. Cryopreservation for cells, tissue, organisms. 

5.2. Cryotechniques for microscopy. 

6. Separation techniques in biology: 

6.1. Molecular separations by chromatography, electrophoresis, precipitation etc. 

6.2. Organelle separation by centrifugation. 

6.3. Cell separation by flowcytometery, density gradient centrifugation, unit gravity 

centrifugation, affinity adsorption, anchorage based techniques etc. 

7. Radioisotope and mass isotope techniques in biology : 

10(226) 


7.1. Sample preparation for radioactive counting. 

7.2. Autoradiography. 

7.3. Metabolic labeling. 

7.4. Magnetic resonance Imaging 

8. Immunological techniques based on antigen-antibody reactions. 

9. Biosensors. 


1. Alberts et al. Essential Cell Biology Garland 1998 

2. Alberts et al. Molecular Biology of The Cell Garland 2002 

3. Boney Cell Biology Level II Macdonald & 

Evans 

1982 

4. Boyer Modern Experimental 

Benjamin 1993 

Biochemistry 

5. Clark & Switzer Experimental Biochemistry Freeman 2000 

6. Freifelder Physical Biochemistry Freeman 1987 

7. Karp Cell and Molecular Biology John Wiley 2002 

8. Locquin & Langeron Handbook of Microscopy Butterwaths 1983 

PAPER: GEN-V PRACTICALS BASED ON THEORY PAPERS GEN-I AND GEN-II 

(Examination to be held annually along with Paper XI) 

PAPER: GEN-VI PRACTICALS BASED ON THEORY PAPERS GEN-III AND GEN-IV 

(Examination to be held annually along with Paper XII) 

10(227) 


SEMESTER-II 

PAPER: GEN-VII MOLECULAR BIOLOGY 





Note: 





each section. 


SECTION-A 

1. Properties of genetic material, flow of genetic information 

2. Organization of viral and bacterial genomes 

3. Eukaryotic genome 

4. Biology of Chromosomes : 

4.1. Molecular anatomy of eukaryotic chromosomes. 

4.2. Metaphase chromosomes : Centromere, Kinetochore, Nucleolus organizers and rRNA 

genes. 

4.3. Telomere : Functions, Telomeric DNA structure, telomere synthesis, telomerase cycle, 

telomere shortening in cell senescence and immortalisation. 

4.4. Heterochromatin and euthromatin. 

5. C-value paradox 

6. Repetitive DNA 

7. General concept of a gene 

8. Gene families 

8.1. Non-coding genes 

9. Replication in bacterial and eukaryotic chromosomes 

10. DNA polymerases 

11. Replicons, origin and termination 

12. Genes controlling replication 

13. Transcription 

13.1. Prokaryotic RNA polymerase, sigma factors, initiation and termination 

13.2. Eukaryotic RNA polymerases and their promoters 

13.3. Processing of transcripts 

10(228) 


14. Translation 

14.1 General mechanism 

14.2 Role of rRNA in translation 

15. Regulation of gene expression 

16. Regulation of transcription initiation 

17. Operon and regulon 

18. Positive and negative regulation 

19. Enhancers and promoters 

SECTION-B 

20. Transcription factors: types, DNA binding motifs 

21. Post transcriptional regulation 

22. Alternative splicing 

23. Transport and targeting of RNA 

24. Post-transcriptional gene silencing 

25. Translational control and targeting of proteins 


1. Atherley et al. The Science of Genetics Saunders 1999 

2. Benjamin Genetics : A Conceptual Approach Freeman 2003 

3. Berg & Singer Genes and Genome 1998 

4. Black Microbiology : Principles & 

Explorations 

10(229) 

Wiley 2002 

5. Dale & Schartz From genes to Genome Wiley & Sons 2003 

6. Griffiths et al. Modern Genetic Analysis Freeman 2002 

7. Griffiths et al. An Introduction to Genetic Analysis Freeman 2004 

8. Hartl et al. Essential Genetics Wiley & Sons 2002 

9. Klug & Cummings Essentials of Genetics Prentice Hall 2003 

10. Latchman Gene Regulations Chapman 1995 

11. Lewin Genes VIII Pearson 2004 


PAPER: GEN-VIII BIOINFORMATICS 





Note: 





each section. 


1. Basics of computers and operating systems 

2. Introduction and scope of Bioinformatics 

3. Computer networking 

4. Internet and E-mail 

5. Concept of home pages and web-sites 

SECTION-A 

6. World Wide Web, Uniform Resource Locators 

7. Archiving and retrieval of information 

8. Search engines 

9. Data bases & data mining 

10. Introduction to molecular Modeling 

11. Nucleic acid sequences 

12. Genomes 

13. Protein sequence and structures 

SECTION-B 

14. Bibliogaphic Access to molecular biology data bases 

15. Entrez 

16. Sequence retrieval system (SRS) 

17. Protein identification resource (PIR) 

18. Sequence alignments and phylogenetic trees 

10(230) 



1. Attwood & Party- 

Smith 

Introduction to Bioinformatics Pearson 2002 

2. Barnes & Gray (ed) Bioinformatics for Geneticists Wiley 2003 

3. Lesk Introduction to Bioinformatics Oxford 2003 

4. Mount Bioinformatics : Sequence and Genome 

Analysis 

CBS 2003 

5. Rashidi & Buchler Bioinformatics Basics CRC Press 2000 

6. Rastogi et al. Bioinformatics : Concepts, Skills and 

Applications 

CBS 2003 

7. Westhead et al. Bioinformatics Instant Notes Viva Books 2003 

10(231) 


PAPER: GEN-IX MOLECULAR BIOLOGY TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES 





Note: 





each section. 


1. DNA sequencing 

SECTION-A 

2. Polymerase Chain Reaction and its applications 

3. Microarray technology 

4. ELISA, western and south-western blotting 

5. Promoter characterization: promoter analysis through reporter genes, electrophoretic mobility 

shift assay, DNA foot-printing 

6. DNA fingerprinting 

7. Mutagenesis 

8. Site directed mutagenesis 

9. Transposon mutagenesis 

10. Construction of knock-out mutants 

11. Gene transfer techniques 

12. Electroporation and microinjection 

13. Transfection of cells: Principles and methods 

SECTION-B 

14. Germ line transformation in Drosophila and transgenic mice: Strategies and methods 

15. Applications of Recombinant DNA Technology 

15.1. Crop and live-stock improvement 

16. Molecular genetic analysis of human diseases 

17. Gene therapy: somatic and germ line gene therapy 

18. DNA drugs and vaccines 

10(232) 



1. Ausubel et al. Short Protocols in Molecular Biology Wiley 2002 

2. Brown Essential Molecular Biology Vol. I AP 2000 

3. Brown Essential Molecular Biology Vol. II AP 2000 

4. Brown Gene Cloning – An Introduction Stanley 

10(233) 

Thornas 

1995 

5. Glick & Pasternak Molecular Biotechnology ASM Press 1998 

6. Kracher Molecular Biology – A Practical 

Approach 


8. Micklos & Freyer DNA Science CSHL 1990 

9. Primrose Molecular Biotechnology Panima 2001 

10. Reishcal Molecular Diagnosis of Infectious 

Diseases 

Humana 1998 

11. Robertson et al. Manipulation & Expression of 

Recombinant DNA 

AP 1997 

12. Sambrook et al. Molecular Cloning Vol. 1, 2, 3 CSHL 2001 


PAPER: GEN-X PRINCIPLES OF GENETIC ENGINEERING AND TECHNIQUES 





Note: 





each section. 


1. Enzym Techniques used in DNA technology 

1.1. Restriction and modification enzymes 

1.2. Other nucleases 

1.3. Polymerases 

1.4. Ligase, kinases and phosphatases 

2. Nucleic acids 

SECTION-A 

2.1. Isolation and purification of DNA (genomic and plasmid) and RNA 

2.2. Gel electrophoresis of nucleic acids (denaturing and native) 

2.3. Pulse-field gel electrophoresis of DNA 

3. Cloning vectors 

3.1. Plasmids 

3.2. Phages 

3.3. Cosmids 

3.4. Artificial chromosomes 

3.5. Shuttle vectors 

3.6. Expression vectors 

4. Cloning techniques 

5. Construction of genomic and cDNA libraries 

6. Positional cloning: RFLP mapping, chromosome walking and jumping 

7. Screening and characterization of clones 

SECTION-B 

7.1. Preparation of probes, Expression based screening 

7.2. Interaction based screening: yeast two-hybrid system 

8. Restriction mapping 

10(234) 


9. Principles of hybridizations and hybridization based techniques (colony, plaque, Southern, 

Northern and in situ hybridizations) 

10. Advantages of the following organisms commonly used in genetic studies 

T4 phages, Neurospora, E.coli, Saccharomyces cerevisea and Schizosaccharomyces pombe, 

Caenorhabditis, Drosophila, Mus musculus 


1. Maloy & Freifelder Microbial Genetics 

2. Meesfeld Applied Molecular Genetics 



10(235) 

AP 1997 

4. Sambrook et al. Molecular Cloning Vol. 1, 2, 3 CSHL 2001 

5. Twyman Advanced Molecular Biology Viva 1999 

6. Watson et al. Recombinant DNA Freeman 1992 


8. Micklos & Freyer DNA Science CSHL 1990 

9. Primrose Molecular Biotechnology Panima 2001 

10. Reischel Molecular Diagnosis of Infectious Humana 1998 

Diseases 



AP 1997 

PAPER: GEN-XI PRACTICALS BASED ON PAPER GEN-VII AND GEN-VIII 

(Examination of Papers V & XI) 





PAPER: GEN-XII PRACTICALS BASED ON PAPER GEN-IX AND GEN-X 

(Examination of Papers VI & XII) 






SEMESTER-III 

PAPER: GEN-XIII STRUCTURAL AND FUNCTIONAL GENOMICS 





Note: 





each section. 


1. Comparative Genomics 

SECTION-A 

2. Overview of prokaryotic and eukaryotic genomes 

3. C-value, number of genes and complexity of genomes 

4. Conservation and diversity of genomes 

5. Comparative genomics as an aid to gene mapping and study of human disease genes 

6. Global study of Genome activity 

7. Transcriptome and its analysis 

8. Proteome and Proteomics 

9. Mitochondrial genome 

10. Gross base composition of nuclear genome 

11. Gene density 

12. CpG islands 

13. The Genome project 

SECTION-B 

13.1. History, organization and goals of human genome project 

13.2. Mapping strategies, current status of various maps; DNA segment nomenclature 

13.3. Human genome diversity 

10(236) 


14. Organization of human genome 

15. RNA-encoding genes 

16. Functionally identical/similar genes 

17. Diversity in size and organization of genes, Gene families 

18. Multigene families – Classical gene families, families with large conserved domains, families 

with small conserved domains 

19. Gene superfamilies 

20. Gene families in clusters, Origin of gene families 

21. Pseudogenes 

22. Repetitive DNA 


1. Liebler Introduction to Proteomics 

2. Pasternak An Introduction to Molecular Human Genetics 

3. Primrose & Twyman Principles of Genome Analysis & Genomics 

4. Strachan and Read Human Molecular Genetics 

5. Sudbery Human Molecular Genetics 

6. G. Grandi. 2003 Genomics, proteomics and Vaccines 

7. S.B. Primrose, 2004 Genomics : Applications in Human Biology 

8. J. Zhou, D.K. Thompson, 

Y. Xu, J.M. Tiedge, 2004 

Microbial functional Genomics, Proteomics & 

Bioinformatics 

10(237) 


PAPER : GEN-XIV BACTERIAL AND EUKARYOTIC GENOMICS 





Note: 





each section. 


1. Gene mapping in bacteria 

2. Transformation 

3. Conjugation 

4. Transduction 

5. Sexduction 

SECTION-A 

6. Transposons and transposition mechanisms 

7. Types of mutations and nomenclature 

8. Detection and isolation of mutations 

9. Mutagenesis & DNA repair 

SECTION-B 

10. Endogenous and exogenous origins of DNA damage 

11. Types of DNA damage 

12. DNA repair pathways 

13. Error-prone repair and mutagenesis 

14. Damage signaling and checkpoint arrest 

15. Recombination 

16. Homologous recombination: models and molecular mechanisms 

17. Gene conversion: molecular mechanisms 

18. Site specific recombination 

10(238) 



1. Pasternak An Introduction to Molecular Human Genetics 

2. Strachan and Read Human Molecular Genetics 

3. Sudbery Human Molecular Genetics 

4. G. Grandi. 2003 Genomics, proteomics and Vaccines 

5. S.B. Primrose, 2004 Genomics : Applications in Human Biology 

6. J. Zhou, D.K. Thompson, 

T. Xu, J.M. Tiedge, 2004 

Microbial functional Genomics, Proteomics & 

Bioinformatics 

10(239) 


PAPER: GEN-XV HUMAN GENETICS 





Note: 





each section. 


SECTION-A 

1. Genetic mapping of Mendelian traits 

2. Identifying recombinants and nonrecombinants in pedigrees 

3. Numerical and Structural Abnormalities of Human Chromosomes –Syndromes : Autosomal 

syndromes – cat-cry syndrome, Wolf-Hirchhorn syndrome, Trisomy 13, Trisomy 18, 

Trisomy 21. 

4. Sex chromosomal syndromes – Turner's syndrome, Klinefelte's syndrome, XYY, True and 

Pseudohermaphroditism. 

5. Chromosomal abnormalities and dermatoglyphics. 

6. Fragile sites and fragile X syndrome. 

7. Cytogenetic Implications and Consequences of Structural Changes and 

Numerical Alterations of Chromosomes. 

8. Aberrations of chromosome number – Polyploidy, aneuploidy 

9. Aberrations of chromosome structures – Duplications, deletions, inversions, translocations. 

10. Multipoint mapping 

10.1 Homozygosity mapping, Genetic mapping of complex traits, Difficulties in 

mapping complex traits 

11. Allelic association, Linkage disequilibrium mapping 

12. Physical mapping methods 

13. Low resolution mapping- Cell hybrids, mini- and microcells, synteny of genes, Radiation 

hybrid mapping 

14. Identifying genes in cloned DNA 

10(240) 


15. Integration of Cytogenetic, genetic and physical maps 

16. Identifying human disease genes 

16.1 Principles and strategies 

SECTION-B 

17. Position-independent and positional cloning. 

18. Confirming a candidate gene- mutation screening, testing in animal models 

19. Molecular pathology 

20. Nomenclature of mutations and their databases 

21. Loss-of-function and gain-of-function mutations in diseases 

22. Instability of the human genome: Pathogenicity associated with repeat sequences 

23. DNA testing 

23.1 Direct testing 

23.2 Screening for unknown mutations 

23.3 Detection of known mutations 

23.4 Indirect testing – gene tracking 

24. DNA profiling: establishing identity and relationships 

25. Population screening - ethics, organization and advantages 


1. Davies Human Genetic Disease Analysis IRL 1993 

2. Haines & Pericak Approaches to Gene Mapping in 

Complex Human Diseases 

Wiley 1998 

3. Nussbaum et al. Genetics in Medicine Saunders 2001 

4. Pasternak An Introduction to Molecular Human 

Genetics 

Fritzgerald 2000 

5. Rimoin et al. Principles & Practice of Medical 

Genetics, Vol. I-III 

Churchill 2002 

6. Strachan & Read Human Molecular Genetics Wiley 1999 

7. Sudbery Human Molecular Genetics Prentice-Hall 2002 

10(241) 


PAPER: GEN-XVI IMMUNOGENETICS 





Note: 





each section. 


1. Innate and Acquired Immunity 

SECTION-A 

2. Phylogeny and Ontogeny of immune system 

2.1. Organization and structure of lymphoid organs 

2.2. Cells of the immune system and their differentiation 

2.3. Lymphocyte traffic 

3. Nature of immune response 

4. Nature of antigens and superantigens 

4.1. Antigenicity and immunogenicity 

4.2. Factors influencing immunogenicity 

4.3. Epitopes and haptens 

5. Structure and Functions of Antibodies 

5.1. Classes and subclasses 

5.2. Gross and Fine structure 

5.3. Antibody mediated effector functions 

6. Antigen-Ab interactions in vitro and in vivo. 

7. Complement System 

8. Major Histocompatibility Complex in mouse and HLA system in human 

8.1. MHC haplotypes 

8.2. Class I and class II molecules 

8.3. Cellular distribution 

8.4. Peptide binding 

8.5. Expression and diversity 

8.6. Disease susceptibility and MHC/HLA 

10(242) 


9. Organization and expression of Ig genes 

9.1. Models for Ig gene structure 

9.2. Multigene brganization of Ig genes 

9.3. DNA rearrangements and mechanisms 

9.4. Generation of antibody diversity 

9.5. Differential expression of Ig genes. 

SECTION – B 

10. T-cell receptors 

10.1. Isolation, molecular components and structure 

10.2. T-cell maturation and thymus 

10.3. T H-cell activation mechanism 10.4 T-cell differentiation 

10.4. Cell death and T-cell population 

11. B-cell generation, activation and differentiation 

11.1. B-cell receptors 

11.2. Selection of immature self-reactive B-cells 

11.3. B-cell activation and proliferation 

11.4. T H-B-Cell interactions 

11.5. Humoral immune response-kinetics 

12. Cytokines 

12.1. Structures and functions 

12.2. Cytokine receptors 

12.3. Cytokines and Immune response 

13. Cell-mediated effector functions 

13.1. Cell adhesion molecules 

13.2. Effector cells and molecules 

13.3. CTL and NK cells-mechanisms of action 

13.4. Delayed type hypersensitivity 

14. Immunological tolerance and Anti-immunity 

15. Hypersensitivity and immune responses to infection agents especially intracellular 

parasites. 


1. Abbas et al. Cellular and Molecular Immunology Saunders 2001 

2. Barrett Text Book of Immunology Mosloy 1988 

3. Benjamin et al. Immunology – A Short Course Wiley-Liss 2000 

4. Kuby Immunology Freeman 2003 

5. Roitt Essential Immunology Blackwell 2003 

6. Roitt et al. Immunology Mosloy 2000 

PAPER-GEN-XVII PRACTICALS BASED ON PAPERS GEN-XIII AND GEN-XIV 

(Examinations to be held annually in Semester – IV) 

PAPER-GEN-XVIII PRACTICALS BASED ON PAPERS GEN-XV AND GEN-XVI 

(Examinations to be held annually in Semester – IV) 

10(243) 


SEMESTER-IV 


Ext. Int. Marks Max. Time 

Marks 

Marks Hours 

GEN-XIX TRAINING-CUM-DISSERTATION 300 100 400 - 

DISSERTATION EVALUATION AND VIVA 50 -- 50 - 

PRACTICAL EXAMINATION OF PAPER 

GEN-XVII 

60 15 75 4 

PRACTICALS EXAMINATION OF PAPER 

GEN-XVIII 

60 15 75 4 

Total 470 130 600 - 

10(244) 


THEORY: 

SYLLABUS OF M.Sc. HOME SCIENCE 

(Clothing & Textiles) Session w.e.f. 2012-13 


Paper 

Title of the Paper 

No. 

Max. Marks 

Exam 

Duration 

XV Textile Testing and Quality Control 75 (60+15*) 3 hrs 

XVI Apparel & Textile Designing 50 (40+10*) 3 hrs 

XVII Dyeing in Textiles 75 (60+15*) 3 hrs 

XVIII Fashion marketing 75 (60+15*) 3 hrs 

XIX 

Social & Psychological aspects of 

Clothing 

75 (60+15*) 

Total - 350 

3 hrs 

PRACTICAL: 

Paper 

No. 

Title of the Paper Max. Marks Exam Duration 

XX Textile testing and quality control 50 3 hrs 

XXI Dyeing in Textiles 60 3 hrs 

XXII Apparel & Textile Designing 40 3 hrs 


Total - 150 

Grant Total 350 + 150 = 500 

10(245) 


SEMESTER-III 

Paper-XV 

Textile Testing and Quality Control 





NOTE: 



� Question No. -1 will be compulsory consisting of 5-10 short type questions 


� The remaining eight questions will be set from units I & II, four questions 

from each units. 

� The candidates are required to attempt five questions. Question No -1 will be 

compulsory, remaining four questions will be attempted by selecting two 


UNIT – I 

I. Objectives & importance of textile testing. Importance of standards, 

different types of standards, Introduction to internal bodies such as ISI, 

ASTM, BIS etc 

- Quality control of textile products. 

- Quality standards as applicable to various types of textiles (Garments 

yardage, knits, woven, carpets, processing, dyeing) 

II. Fiber Testing: Definition, objectives & method of testing staple length, 

mean length, short fiber percentage, fineness, evenness, maturity, tensile 

strength, elongation at break, interpretation of results. 

III. Yarn Testing: Definition, Objective and methods of testing count, Denier 

twist, diameter, crimp, tensile strength, elongation at break, stress-strain 

curve, elastic recovery, yarn appearance & evenness, clothcover, 

interpretation of results. 

UNIT – II 

IV. Fabric Testing : 

a) Definition, objectives & methods of testing length, width, bow & 

skewness, thread count, ends & picks, weight, thickness, breaking 

strength, tear strength, bursting strength, abrasion, resistance, 

stiffness, drapability, pilling, crease recovery, handle, flammability & 

10(246) 


REFERENCES: 

interpretations of results. 

b) Thermal properties of textile fibers. 

- Porosity and air & water permeability of fabrics, thermal conductivity. 

- Serviceability of fabrics-Service, wear abrasion, method of 

assessment. 

- Garment finishing – color fastness, shrinkage. 

- Concept of fabric faults as related to stages of manufacture & their 

remedies. 

1. Booth, J.E.: Principles of Textile Testing – Newness Butter Worth, London. 

2. Billie, J. Collier and Heler H. Epps – Textile Testing and Analysis – Prentice 

Hall, New Jersey. 

3. John, H. Skinkle – Textile Testing – Brooklyn, New York. 

4. Grover and Hareby – Hand book of Textile Testing and Quality Control, 

Wiles. 

5. ISI Specifications, BIS specifications. 

6. ASTMStandards. 

SEMESTER-III 

Paper-XVI 

Apparel and Textile Designing 

10(247) 





NOTE: 











UNIT – I 

I. Apparel designing: 

- Definition 

- Tools and equipments used 

- Principles & elements of design 

- Structural and applied designs 

- Use of trimmings and decorative features 

II. Factors influencing selection of fabric 

III. Introduction to leading Indian and foreign dress designers 

UNIT – II 

IV. Textile designing: 

- Meaning & importance 

- Different techniques/methods of textile designing 

V. Types of motifs and design repeats: geometrical, naturalised, stylised etc. 

VI. Glossary of fabric terms: chiffon, georgette, faille etc. 

References: 

� Gioello and Berke : Figure Type And Size Ramnge, Fairchild Publications, New York. 

� Allen Anne Seaman Julian Fashion Drawing The Basic Principles B.T. Batsford Ltd. 

London. 

� Grociki, Z.J.: Textiles Design and Colour, London, Longmans Green and Co. Ltd. 

� William Watson: Advanced Textiles Design, London, Longmans Green and Co. Bombay. 

� Nisbet, H : Grammar of Textile Design, Tarapoprewale Sons and Co. Bomaby 

SEMESTER-III 

Paper-XVII 

Dyeing in Textiles 

10(248) 





NOTE: 











UNIT – I 

I. Preparation of fabric for dyeing and printing 

- Scouring, bleaching, desizing 

- Reagents used and their application 

- Specific preparatory steps for cotton, wool, silk and man-made fibres. 

- Equipments used at cottage and industrial level for yarn, fabric and price 

goods. 

II. Dyes 

- Classification, definition, components. 

- Colour and chemical constitution of dyes. 

- Dyeing with chemical dyes. 

- Direct, reactive, vat, sulphur, azo (for cellulosic). 

- Acid, metal complex, chromeomordant (for proteins). 

- Basic, disperse (for man-made). 

III. Dyeing auxiliaries 

UNIT – II 

IV. Dyeing with Natural dyes 

- Use of pigments 

- Dyeing machines for fiber, yarn and fibers. 

- Industrial dyeing practices. 

- Dyeing auxiliaries practices. 

- Dyeing of blends. 

V. Textile design through dyeing 

- Tie and Dye 

- Batik 

- Level & Cross dyeing 

VI. Dyeing defects and remedies. 

VII. Advances in dyes& dyeing technology 

REFERENCES: 

1. Shenai (1987), Chemistry of Dyes and Principles of Dyeing Sevak Prakashan, 

Mumbai. 

2. H. A. Lubs, Robert E. The Chemistry of Synthetic Dyes and pigments, Krieger 

Publishing Company, New York. 

3. V. A. Shenai (1999), Azo Dyes – Facts and Figures – Sevak Prakashan, 

Mumbai. 

4. R. S. Prayag, Technology Textile Printing – Noyes Data Corporation. 

5. V.A. Shenai (1977), Technology of Printing – Technology of Textile Processing, 

Vol. IV, Sevak Publication. 

6. M.L. Gulrajani and Deepti Gupta (1990), Natural dyes and their Application to 

10(249) 


Textiles”, ed. I.T.I. Delhi Publications. 

7. John and Margarot Cannow (1994), Dye Plants and Dyeing, The Herbert Press 

(UK). 

8. ASTM and ISI Standards. 

9. K. Venkatrama (1970), Chemistry of Synthetic Dyes, Part I and II. 

SEMESTER-III 

Paper-XVIII 

Fashion Marketing 

10(250) 





NOTE: 










. UNIT – I 

I. The Dynamics of fashion 

Fashion terminology, fashion cycle, fashion adoption theories, fashion 

forecast, the role of designers in merchandising. 

II. fashion marketing 

fashion marketing terms, activities involved in marketing distribution 

channels, supply chain- horizontal & vertical integration marketing strategystrategy 

for pricing , distribution, promotion, branding etc. The Concept of 

Retailing Definitions, history, Types of Retailing & retail stores . 

III. Recruitment and Management of sales force, Personal selling as a means of 

promotion. 

IV. Sales promotion Techniques: - 

(a) Advertising 

(b) Publicity 

(c) Personal Selling 

UNIT – II 


Method of sales promotion 

i) Brand ii) Standard iii) Labelling 

iv) Fashion show v) Exhibition vi) Display 

V. Visual merchandising 

- Plans and schedule: Seasons, Holiday promotions, sales, themes / ideas. 

- Types of displays – windows display, interior displays. 

- Elements of display – The merchandise, the backdrop walls and shelves, 

mannequins and forms signage lightning – illuminance levels relations to 

colour. 

VI. Planning and budgeting for a retail store. 

Maintenance and ordering of stocks, preparation of sales reports. 

VII. Apparel brands 

VIII. Advances in fashion marketing 

REFERENCES: 

1. Dhake. Spoons. (1992): Greenworld Retail Fashion Promotion and 

Advertising, Mac Millian Publication. 

2. Joamow. J. A. Judelie, B. and Guerreiro, M. (1981) : Inside the Fashion 

Business, John Wiley & sons, NY, Toranto, Bribane. 

3. Frings G. S. (1982): Fashion from concept to consumer, Prentice Hall Inc., 

Englewood cliffs, New Jersey. 

4. Easey, M. (1995): Fashion Marketing, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. 

5. Majare, S. (1995): The Essence of Marketing, Prentice Hall of India, New 

Delhi. 

6. Chuter, A. J. (1995) : Introduction of clothing Production Management, 

Blackwell science Ltd., 

7. Stone, E. and Samples, J. A. (1985): Fashion Merchandising an Introduction, 

Mc. Graw Hill Book Company. 

10(251) 


SEMESTER-III 

Paper-XIX 

Social and Psychological Aspects of Clothing 





NOTE: 










UNIT – I 

I. Origin of Clothing 

II. Theories of clothing – theory of modesty, immodesty, protections, 

adornment, combined need theory, other theories in fashion. 

III. Relation between clothing and other disciplines. 

(a) Physical Health (b) Mental Health 

Clothing and first impressions. 

UNIT – II 

IV. Relation between clothing and the wearer 

(i) Personality and self concept. 

(ii) Motivation in clothing choices. 

Individual values, interests and attitudes related to clothing. 

V. Behaviour and clothing choices, practices and effect and clothing on the 

individual. 

VI. Clothing and Society. 

Clothing and social behavior 

Clothing influenced by religion and culture. 

Clothes and conformity 

Clothes and occupation 

Uniforms in schools and college. 

Clothes and colour and impact of colour. 

10(252) 


REFERENCES: 

1. Avis, M. Dry (1961): The Psychology of Jung, Methuen & Co., London. 

2. Horn, Marilyu J. (1968): The Second Skin, Houghton Miffin Co., USA. 

3. Flugel, J.C. (1950): The psycho – analytical study of the family, The Hograth 

Press & the Institute of Psycho Analysis, London. 

4. Richard Wollhein (1985): Frend, Fontana Press, London. 

5. Vincent Brome (1978): Jung, Granada Publishing, London, Toronto Sydney, 

New York. 

TEXTILE TESTING AND QUALITY CONTROL 

(Practical) 


Paper – XX 

I. Yarn Tests 

(a) Count (b) Breaking strength (c) twist (d) Crimp 

II. Fabric Analysis 

(a) Thread count (b) Weight (c) Thickness (d) Abrasion 

(e) Strength (Tensile, Tear, Bursting) (f) Crease Recovery 

(g) Dimensional changes in laundering (h) Stiffness 

III. Color Partners to 

(a) Laundering (b) Crocking (c) Pressing Dry and Wet 

(d) Perspiration – Acid and Alkaline. 

DYEING IN TEXTILES 

(Practical) 


Paper – XXI 

10(253) 


Duration of Exam: 3 Hrs. 



I. Preparation of fabric for dyeing and printing: 

� Scouring 

� Bleaching 

� Desizing, at cottage level for different and fiber blends. 

II. Dyeing of yarns and fabrics with different fiber and fiber blend, shade 

matching. 

III. Creating designs on fabrics through various dyeing process 

� Tie & Dye 


� Batik 

� Observation of working of dyeing unit for 1 week and submission 

report. 

APPAREL AND TEXTILE DESIGNING 

(Practical) 


Paper – XXII 



I. Geometrical, naturalized, stylized and traditional design development 

- enlarging, reducing and placement for allover pattern. 

II. Collection of fabric samples showing different textile designing techniques: 

printing, dyeing, weaving, fancy yarns, trimmings (sequins, beads etc.), 

embroidery, combinations (eg. printing + embroidery etc), finishes (glazing, 

napping, crepe, parchmentising etc.) 

III. Scrap book of dress designs for different figure, occasion, season, age, 

occupation, activity 

IV. Market survey of dress trimmings & collection of trimming samples 

10(254) 


SYLLABUS OF MSC. (CLOTHING & TEXTILES) 

Session w.e.f. 2012-13 


THEORY: 

Paper No. Title of the Paper Max. Marks Exam Duration 

XXIII Garment Production Technology 70 (55+15*) 3 hrs 

XXIV Printing in Textiles 70 (55+15*) 3 hrs 

XXV Entrepreneurship Management 50 (40+10*) 3 hrs 

XXVI Fashion Communication 70 (55+15*) 

Total - 260 

3 hrs 

PRACTICAL: 

Paper No. Title of the Paper Max. Marks Exam Duration 

XXVII 

Computer Aided Designing 

Or Dissertation *** 

80 3 hrs 

XXVIII Pattern Making and Grading 70 4 hrs 

XXIX Printing in Textiles 70 4 hrs 

Seminar ** 20** 

Total - 240 

Grand Total 260 + 240 = 500 


** A committee of three teachers will evaluate the seminar of each student and 

marks will be awarded based on subject matter, presentation and ability to answer 

questions. 

*** In the place of paper XXVI computer Aided Designing students may opt for 

dissertation in M.Sc. II subject to the condition; that the students has obtained 70 or 

more marks after II semester (M.Sc.- I year) 

10(255) 


SEMESTER-IV 

Paper-XXIII 

Garment Production Technology 





NOTE: 










UNIT – I 

I. Introduction to the background and structure of the garment / creating 

Industry. 

II. The organization of garment factory 

1. Principles of Management. 

2. Various Departments like: 

(i) Design Departments 

(ii) Marketing Departments 

Finance Departments 

Purchasing Departments 

Production Departments 

Operations Departments 

UNIT – II 

III. Manufacturing Technology 

A) Cutting & Cutting Room 

(i) Market planning 

(ii) Efficiency, Method & use of worker plan. 

Methods of spreading of fabric and requirements of the spreading process. 

Cutting the fabric – objectives and methods of cutting fabric. 

Fusing Technology. 

Sewing Technology 

Sewing – properties, types 

Stitch – types 

10(256) 


Sewing Machines – Feed machines machines Needles. 

Sewing threads – types of fiber, construction and furnish, thread size, 

thread package thread costs, thread properties and seam performance. 

Sewing problems; Stitch formation, damage along the seam live puckering. 

Testing for sewability and tailor ability. 

Sewing machinery. 

Use of components and Trims 

Alternative Methods of forming materials 

Fusing 

Welding and adhesives 

Moulding 

Pressing Technology 

Production Technology 

Ware Housing 

IV. Engineering & Quality Control 

Production Engineering 

Principles of Quality Control. 

REFERENCES: 

1. Gerry Cooklin – Introduction to Clothing Manufacture, Black Well Sciences. 

2. Harold Carr & Barbara Lathare – The Technology of Clothing Manufacture – 

Blackwell Science. 

3. A.J. Chuter – Introduction to Clothing Production Management Blackwell 

Science. 

4. D. J. Tyles – Materials Management in Clothing production – Blackwell Science. 

5. Harold Carr & Barbara Lathan (1992): Fashion Design and Product Development 

– Blackwell Science. 

6. Mike Easey – Fashion Marketing. Blackwell Science. 

7. Stylios, G. (1991): Textiles objective Measurement and Automation in Garment 

Manufacture, Ellis Horword Ltd., New York, London, Singapore. 

10(257) 


SEMESTER-IV 

Paper-XXIV 

Printing in Textiles 

10(258) 





NOTE: 










UNIT – I 

I. Introduction to printing – difference between dyeing and printing. 

II. Methods of printing: 

� Historical development of printing methods – block, stencil, screen roller 

and rotary screens used at cottage and industrial level. 

III. Printing pastes – thickening agents and auxiliaries for printing and their 

suitability to various classes of dyes and fibers. Preparation of printing pastes 

for different dyes and different fibers. 

UNIT – II 

IV. Styles of Printing 

� Direct style, resist or resource style, discharge style and raised style. 

� Styles and methods of printing traditionally used in India. 

V. Special Printing Procedures : 

� Polychromatic dyeing, transfer printing, carpet printing, flock printing. 

VI. Finishing and after treatment of printed goods at cottage and industrial level. 

VII. Advances in printing technology 


REFERENCES: 

1. A. Shenai (1987), Chemistry of Dyes and Principles of Dyeing Sevak 

Prakashan, Mumbai. 

2. H. A. Lubs, Robert E. The Chemistry of Synthetic Dyes and pigments, 

Krieger Publishing Company, New York. 

3. V. A. Shenai (1999), Azo Dyes – Facts and Figures – Sevak Prakashan, 

Mumbai. 

4. R. S. Prayag, Technology Textile Printing – Noyes Data Corporation. 

5. V.A. Shenai (1977), Technology of Printing – Technology of Textile 

Processing, Vol. IV, Sevak Publication. 

6. M.L. Gulrajani and Deepti Gupta (1990), Natural dyes and their Application to 

Textiles”, ed. I.T.I. Delhi Publications. 

7. John and Margarot Cannow (1994), Dye Plants and Dyeing, The Herbert 

Press (UK). 

8. ASTM and ISI Standards. 

9. K. Venkatrama (1970), Chemistry of Synthetic Dyes, Part I and II. 

SEMESTER-IV 

Paper-XXV 

Entrepreneurship Management 

10(259) 





NOTE: 










UNIT – I 

I. Entrepreneurship – Definition, characteristics, employment promotion, efforts 

to reduce. 

II. Business environment for the entrepreneur Government of India’s policy 

towards promotion of entrepreneurship, reservations and sanctions for small 

scale sector. 


III. Agencies for development of entrepreneurship – role of SSI, procedure and 

formalities for setting up SSI, Role of MIDC in Industrial development, role of 

NSIC – supply of machinery and equipment on like purchase, voluntary 

organization, Bank loan. 

UNIT – II 

IV. Personal effectiveness; Factors affecting entrepreneurs role, effective 

communication skills, achievement motivation, goal orientation, 

psychological barriers to self employment, creativity, assert assertiveness, 

quick response. 

V. Technical communication – Importance of Business communication, 

Principles, Procedures, Formulation of project proposal, budget estimate and 

Feasibility of report. 

VI. Establishing an enterprise – problems, information, source / schemes of 

assistance etc. 

VII. Management techniques: - Planning, organizing, appointing staffs, executing, 

controlling and review. 

Financial management, working capital, Bank Funding, Calculating 

calculating risks, personal management, product management, purchase 

techniques, costing, marketing management, sales promotion, labour law 

application. 

References: 

1. Kanitkar, A. (1995) Grassroots, Entrepreneurship; Entrepreneurs and Micro – 

Enterprises in Rural India, New Age International, New Delhi. 

2. S.K.G. – Sundaram: Entrepreneurship: A Hand Book for Beginners, S.N.D.T. 

Women’s University, Mumbai. 

3. G. R. Jain and Debnuni Gupta, New Initiatives in Entrepreneurship Education 

and Training, ed. 

4. W. Harrell (1995) For Entrepreneurs Only, New Jersey, Career. 

5. Sarabhai Vikram (1974): Management for Development, Vikas Publishing House 

Pvt. Ltd., 

6. Michael Armotrong (1986): A Handbook of Management Techniques, Kogar 

Page Limited. 

7. K. Sadgrove (1997), the complete Guide to Business Risk Management, Jaice 

Publishing House, Mumbai. 

8. Colin Melver : Case Studies in Marketing, Advertising and Public Relations, 

Heinemann, London. 

10(260) 


SEMESTER-IV 

Paper-XXVI 

Fashion Communication 

10(261) 





NOTE: 










UNIT – I 

I. Fashion and the communication process: What is Fashion? 

The Theories of fashion adoption need for promotion of fashion, need for the 

communication process, and communication through different media. 

II. Written Communication: 

Fashion writing, creative writing reporting features, editing and printing 

techniques, image management and advertising, public relations, press laws 

and media ethics. 

UNIT – II 

III. Visual Communication: 

Visual merchandising and display, fashion photographs, fashion shows and 

multimedia. 

IV. Communication in practice 

Scripting shows, conducting interviews, reporting events, fashion critics, 

planning PR campaigns, formulating case studies, desgning cataloves and 

brochures, layouts for stands in exhibition. Visualisation of décor and 

ambience, preparing short films and audiovisuals, choreography of fashion 

event. 


REFERENCES: 

� Farbey, A.D.: How to Produce Successful Advertising, Kogan Page India Pvt. 

Ltd. 

� Jethwaney, J.N. (1999): Advertising, Phoenix Publishing House Pvt. Ltd. 

� Roundy, N. and Mair, D. (1985): Strategies for Technical Communication, 

Little Brown and Company, Boston, Toranto. 


COMPUTER AIDED DESIGNING (Practical) 

Paper – XXVII 



I. Basic Awareness of Coral Draw, Adobe Photoshop and Adobe Illustrator. 

II. Creation of pattern related to textile designing using different types of yarn, 

weaves and knits. Making designs and its graph. Specification of packs and 

ends, yarn count for meaning on the computer. 

- Dobby, jacquard pile, carpet and knits. The innumerable styles of weaves, 

plain as well as design weave. Making punch cards from the graphs. 

Stimulation of various yarns like novelty, fancy and weaving them on the 

monitor to get different fabrics with specified end use. Colours and setting 

designs in different repeats and colour combination. Fitting the repeat 

according to the method and application of printing – roller, screen, block etc. 

Scanning the already printed fabric, reducing the color manually or by 

automatic color reduction. 

III. Module I : 

Use of sketching software for development circles. Squares and triangle to 

study elements of design. Drawing basic silhouettes of design. Drawing basic 

silhouettes and proportions of the fashion figures construct styles and 

designs. Conversion of vector based images in to a bitmap based and their 

application using various effects and filters to create different designs. 

Module II: 

Introduction and use of scanning systems and its software’s. Learning of 

draping software. Application and change of texture print and colour in the 

scanned photograph. Creating color ways, new designs and textures by 

using available effects like embossing, Blurring, Transparent, Translucent 

and other such looks on the garments. 

Module III: 

Introduction of pattern making software, knowledge of hardware and pattern 

making programme. Use of computer for pattern making, grading and 

marking. Making of specific sheets and drafting out patterns for different age 

groups. Putting darts, seam allowances and making the layout. Plotting and 

printing the pattern. 

10(262) 


REFERENCES: 

1. Viesinet, D. D. (1987): Computer – aided drafting and design: Concept and 

application. 

2. Fujii D: Colour with style, Grpahic-sha Publishing Company Ltd. 

3. Winifred, A. (1990): Metric Pattern Cutting for Mens wear: Including Unisex 

Casual clothes and computer – Aided Design, BSP professional Books, Drford. 

4. Corklin, P. G. (1990): Pattern Grading for Women’s Clothes, the Technology 

of Sizing, BSP Professional Books. Oxford. 

5. Aldrich, W. (1994): CAD in clothing and Textiles, Blackwell Science Ltd. 

6. Computers in the World of Textiles – Papers Presented at the Annual World 

Conference, September 26-29 1984, Hongkong. 


PATTERN MAKING AND GRADING (Practical) 

Paper – XXVIII 

Max. Marks : 70 

Duration of Exam : 4 Hrs. 

I. Categories of patterns – body types and Measurements, Infants, toddlers 

children, preteen, pre-teen, junior misses, woman, half size. 

II. Style reading 

III. Pattern Making : 

(a) Essential symbols and terms, Piece identification, grain line, Notches, 

dart, centre front, centre back, fold line, long lengthen / shorten. 

(b) Helpful markings, cutting line, stitching line, stitching direction, ease, 

gathers, pleats, tucks, hem width edge – finishes, clip, lap line. 

IV. Developing drafts for mens garments 

� Gents shirts – formal / Casual 

� Gents Trousers / shorts. 

� Gents jackets 

V. Introduction to grading 

� Terminology 

� Methodology Track or stack Method. 

� Procedure for grading blocks to various sizes. 

� Children – bodice blocks, screen block skirt and shorts block. 

� Women – Bodice block, Sleeve block skirt and shorts block. 

VI. Preparation of Port folio: 

(a) Grading standard size block to different size. 

(b) Preparing to patterns with 

10(263) 


Reference: 

1. Garment Technology for Fashion Designers, Gerry Cooklin, Blackwell 

Science Ltd. 

2. Patrick John Ireland, Fashion Design Illustration: Men. 

3. Pattern grading for Children’s / Women’s / men’s clothes technology of sizing. 

Gerry Coklin. Oxford B.S.P. Professional Books London. 


PRINTING IN TEXTILES (Practical) 

Paper – XXIX 


Training Marks: 20 


I. Developing designs for block, stencil, screen printing and hand painting. 

� Sources of design, sequel arrangements of unit, center line design, spot 

design border design and eve all design (Sheet work). 

II. Printing – preparation of screens and stencils for printing. 

� Making samples with stencil, block, screen printings and hand painting 

on cotton, silk, wool, cotton cool, cotton silk and cotton polyester with 

different dye classes. 

� Make one article each of block, stencil, screen and hand painting. 

10(264) 


SYLLABUS 

M-Sc. HUMAN DEVELOPMENT (HOME SCIENCE) 

Session w.e.f 2012-13 


THEORY: 

Paper 

Theory 

Name 

Max. Marks 

Exam 

Duration 

XVI Communication 

Technologies 

75 (60+15*) 3 hrs 

XVII Principles of Guidance & 

Counseling 

75 (60+15*) 3 hrs 

XVIII Advanced Study of Human 75 (60+15*) 3 hrs 

Development-II 

XIX Women Studies 75 (60+15*) 3 hrs 

XX Care of the Elderly 75 (60+15*) 3 hrs 

PRACTICAL: 

Paper Name Max. Marks Exam 

Practical 

Duration 

XXI Principles of Guidance & 

Counseling 

60 4 hrs 

XXII Care of the Elderly 65 4 hrs 


10(265) 



Paper XVI 

Communication Technologies 

10(266) 





NOTE: 










Unit-I 

1. Concept of communication. Scope of communication, communication process, 

approaches to communication. 

2. Different media, their characteristics and use. 

3. Use of video projector, slide/filmstrip projector computers. 

Unit-II 

4. Introduction to new communication technologies. 

- Satellite distribution and broadcast networking. 

- Close circuit television package on (cc TV) topics. 

- Incorporating the use of video films in presentation i.e. the selected clippings. 

- Slides" Making use of slides with audio commentaries for presentations. 

- Development and use of transparencies. 

- Digital method of communication. 

- Computer Graphic Designing. 

5. Preparation of graphics for research reports/seminars/other presentation. 

6. Designing-leaflets/pamphlets/booklets/cover pages/posters. 

7. Presentations using power points. 


REFERENCES: 

1. Curran, J.et al (1977): Mass Communication and Society, London. 

2. Banerjee (eds) (1985): Culture and Communication, Paroit Publishers, Delhi. 

3. Ruloof, M.E. and Miller, G.R. (eds) (1987): Interpersonal Process: New 

Directions in Communication Research, Sage, USA. 

4. Chatterjee, P.C. (1988): Broadcasting in India, New Delhi, Sage Publications. 

5. Berger, C.R. and Chaffee, S. (eds) (1987): Handbook of Communication 

Science, Sage Publications, New Delhi. 

6. Brown J., Lewis, R and Harcleroad, F. (1985): All instruction: Technology 

Media and Methods, McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

7. Ellington, H. (1985): A Handbook of Educational Technology, Kogan Page, 

London. 

Semester - III 

Paper XVII 

Principles of Guidance and Counselling 





NOTE: 










Unit -I 

1. Meaning, Nature, need and principles of guidance. 

2. Area of guidance-educational, vocational and personal guidance. 

3. Group guidance-Techniques of group guidance. 

4. Organisation of guidance services. 

10(267) 


Unit -II 

5. Psychotherapy and Playtherapy 

6. Counselling : meaning, need, aims and principles 

7. Approaches to Counselling 

8. Special areas in Counselling. 

9. Counselling children with special concerns Child abuse, children with divorce, 

children in step families, children in single parent families, children in alcoholic 

families. 

10. Counselling with exceptional children; gifted children, children with emotional 

and behaviour disorders, learning disabled child, attention deficit hyperactivity 

disorder, mentally retarded children, children with physical disability. 

REFERENCES: 

1. Bumard, P. (1999). Counselling skills training. New Delhi: Viva Books. 

2. Manthel, R. (1997), Counselling: The skills of finding solutions to problems. 

London: Routledge. 

3. Nicolson, D & Ayers, H. (1995). Individual Counselling: Therapy and practice: 

London: David Fulton. 

Semester - III 

Paper XVIII 

Advanced Study in Human Development-II 





NOTE: 










10(268) 


Unit –I 

1. Youth/Young adulthood (20-35 years) 

- Physical Development 

-Developmental tasks. 

-Sexuality, marriage, marital adjustment, parenthood. 

2. Middle adulthood (35-50 years) 

- Physical continuity and changes. 

- Adult Intelligence. 

- Personality development 

- Role in family -Maintaining family relationships. 

-Friendships 

-Menopause in women. Adult sexuality, Vocational Development. 

Unit -II 

3. Late Adulthood (50-65 years) 

- Continuity and change in personality 

-The family life cycle. 

-Social relationships. 

-Grand parenthood-intergenerational relations. 

-Retirement from formal work. 

-Health and disease 

4. Old age (65+ years) 

- Physical aspects of aging. 

-Change in cognitive abilities and creativity. 

-Psychosocial development. 

-Changes in family life cycle. Health and disease. 

-Death, dying and bereavement. 

REFERENCES: 

1. Rice, F.P. (1992). Human development: A life span approach. New Jersey: 


2. Schiamberg, L.B. & Smith, K.U. (1982). Human Development. New York: 

Macmillan. 

3. Santrock, J.W. (1997). Life span development. Brown and Benchmark. 

4. Lefrancois, G.R. (1996). The life span. New York: Wadsworth publishing. 

5. Deals, S.M. & Lenker, L.T. (Eds.) (1999). Aging and identity. London: 

Praeger. 

10(269) 



Paper XIX 

Women Studies 





NOTE: 










Unit I 

1. The rationale for Women's Studies. 

- Meaning and significance 

- Growth of women's studies in India and other countries. 

- The women's movement in India 

2. Theoretical perspectives in women's studies. 

- Consequences of gender differences 

3. Status of Women in India. 

Unit – II 

4. Understanding concepts related to gender differences from societal and 

developmental perspective. 

- Patriarchy 

- Caste, class culture and gender interface 

- Gender and education 

- Economic empowerment and gender 

- Development processes and programmes from women's perspective. 

5. Problems and issues related to women in India 

- Child marriage 

- Female foeticide, infanticide 

10(270) 


- Female mortality 

- Discrimination in nutrition and health care 

- Socialization of girl child 

- Dowry 

- Violence 

- Women's identity 

- Educational opportunities and sex based education 

- Employment 

- Women in Politics 

- Legal status of women 

REFERENCES: 

1. Astana. P. (1974) Women's movement in India. Vikas, Delhi. 

2. Antony, M.L. (1985). Women's Rights: Dialogue, New Delhi. 

3. Baker. H.A. Bertheide. G.W. and Others (Eds)(1980). Women Today: A multi 

disciplinary approach to Women's Studies. Brooks/ Cole Publication. 

4. Baral. J.K. and Patnaik. K. (1990). Gender Politics. New Delhi: Discovery. 

5. Dak. T.M. (1988) Women and Work in Indian Society: Discovery, New Delhi. 

6. Desai. N. (1988). A decade of Women's Movement in India: Himalaya, Bombay. 

7. Desai. N & Patel. V. Indian Women: Change and Challenges in the International 

Decade: Popular Prakashan Bombay. 

8. Gunew. A.R.(1990) Feminist Knowledge Critic and Constituent: Routledge, 

London. 

9. Gupta, N.K. & Sudan I.K.(1990) Women at work in developing economy: Amol, 

New Delhi. 

10. Joseph. A & Sharma K.(Eds)(1994). Whose News? The media and Women's 

Issues: Sage. New Delhi. 

11. Kalia. N.N. (1979). Sexism in Indian Education Vikas. New Delhi. 

12. Jain, D & Banerjee. N.(1985). The Tyranny of House Hold: Investigative essays 

on women and work: Vikas, New Delhi. 

13. Okin, S.M. (1989), Justice, gender and family: Basic Books.N.Y. 

14. Pant, N (1995) Status of girl child and women in India. Delhi: APH 

15. Parashar, A. (1992). Women and Family law reforms in India: Uniform civil code 

and gender equity: Sage. New Delhi. 

10(271) 



Paper XX 

Care of the Elderly 





NOTE: 










Unit -I 

1. Introduction 

- Emergence and scope of gerontology and elderly care. 

- Concept of aging and problems: Social, medical, psychological 

problems, occupational etc. 

2. Theoretical perspectives 

- Theories: Disengagement theory, Activity theory, Human development 

theory, Age stratification theory. 

3. Aging Process 

- Biological and physiological aspects; Psychological aspects; Social 

aspect: Social Status, retired status, single status, economic status, 

security, social adjustment and recognition; 

- Spiritual aspects: Karma theory and religion; 

- Economic aspects 

Unit -II 

4. Adjustment Patterns and Changing Lifestyles in Old Age 

- Family patterns in later life: Changing roles and the aging family; 

Conjugal: Husband - Wife Relations in old age; Sexual adjustment. 

- Retirement years and marital adjustment. 

- Intergenerational family relations; Grand parenthood; Widowhood/ 

Singlehood; Alternative lifestyle; Second marriage in the later life. 

5. Work, leisure and retirement patterns 

10(272) 


- Work - Meaning of work, individual motivation; Leisure; Retirement - 

benefits, freedom of retirees, change in personal and social life, 

problems like - sense of loss, women retirees. 

- Attitude towards retirement: Poverty, poor health, retirement and 

suicide, abandonment, liberation and diachronic solidarity. 

6. Death Dying and Bereavement 

- Impact of death on society; Attitude towards death; Denial and 

thoughts of death; bereavement, grief and social setting. 

7. Services and programs for the Aged 

- Categories of services: Housing, health, leisure time activities; 

institution for the aged, day care centres; economic programmes; Reengagement 

(after retirement). 

REFERENCES: 

1. Aiken, L.R. (1978). The psychology of later life, Philadelphia: WB Saunders Company. 

2. Bergmann, Klaus (1972). Aged: Their understanding and care, London: Wolfe Pub. 

3. Binstock, R.H. and E. Shanes (eds) (1986). Handbook of aging and social sciences. New York 

: V.N. Reinhold Co. 

4. Blau, Zana Smith (1983). Old age in a changing society, New York, New View Prints. 

5. Bose, A.B. and K.D. Gangrade (1988). Aging in India: Problems and Potentialities. New Delhi : 

Abhinav Pub. 

6. Chowdhry Paul D. (1992). Aging and the aged. New Delhi : Inter India Pub. 

7. Cook Alicia Skinner (1983). Contemporary Perspectives on Adult Development & Aging. New 

York : Macmillan. 

8. Cox Harold (1984). Later life: The reality of aging. New Jersy : Prentice Hall Inc. 

9. Desai, K.G. (1985). Problems of the retired people in greater Bombay, Bombay: TISS, Series 

No. 27. 

10. Ghosh, B. (1988). Contemporary Social Problem in India, Bombay: Himalaya Pub. 

11. Homban, D. (1978). Social Challenge of Aging. London: Groom Helm. 

12. Johnson Elizabeth (1982). Growing old : Social problems of Aging. New York: Holt Rinehart 

and Winston. 

13. Kennedy Carroll (1988). Human Development. New York: Macmillan. 

14. Kimmel Douglas (1974). Adulthood and Aging. New York: Wiley. 

15. Mishra Saraswati (1987). Social Adjustment of Old Age. Delhi: B.R. Pub. Corp. 

16. Pinkston, P.H. and N.K. Linsk (1984) . Care of the Elderly: A family approach . New York : 

Pergamon Perss. 

17. Schiamberg Lawrence, B. (1985). Human Development, New York : Macmillan. 

18. Sharma, M.L. & T.M. Dak (1987). Aging in India: Challenge for the Society. Delhi: Janta Pub. 

10(273) 


Practical 


Paper: XXI 

Principles of Guidance and Counseling (Practical) 

10(274) 

Max Marks: 60 


� Interaction with practicing counsellers and therapists through visit to school, 

clinics, women centers and hospitals etc. 

� Organizing parent education programs based on parents needs. 

� A case study 

� Reports and resource files to be maintained by students. 

Practical 


Paper: XXII 

Care of the Elderly (Practical) 

Max Marks: 65 


� Visit to and report of old age centers / homes. 

� Organize recreational activities in homes for the aged. 

� Prepare case studies on any two inmates. 

� Arranging special service / counseling activities for the aged with the 

help of resource person, if necessary e.g. Yoga, Lectures etc. 


THEORY: 

SYLLABUS 

M.Sc. Human Development (Home Science) 

Scheme of Examination, Session w.e.f. 2012-2013 


Paper 

Theory Name 

Max. Marks Exam. 

Duraion 

XXIII Mental Health in Developmental 

Perspective 

75 (60+15*) 3 hrs 

XXIV Parent and community Education 75 (60+15*) 3 hrs 

XXV Child & Human Rights 75 (60+15*) 3 hrs 

XXVI Development of the Self ** 75 (60+15*) 3 hrs 

XXVII Persons with Disabilities 75 (60+15*) 3 hrs 

PRACTICAL 

Paper 

Practical 

Name Max. Marks Exam. 

Duration 

XXVIII Parent and Community Education 40 4 hrs 

XXIX Persons with Disabilities 40 4 hrs 

Seminar 20 

Internship 25 

� Internal Assessment 

Note: **In the place of Paper XXVI (Development of the Self) students may opt for 

Dissertation in MSc-II, subject to the condition that the students has obtained 70% 

or more marks after II semester (M.Sc-I year) 

10(275) 


SEMESTER - IV 

Paper XXIII 

Mental Health in Developmental Perspective 





NOTE: 










Unit - I 

1. Mental Health 

� Definition, concept and importance of mental health, holistic health, well 

being and happiness. 

� National Mental Health Program of India (1982) 

� Community mental health needs and programmes. 

2. Infancy 

� Implication of attachment and bonding for mental health, Maternal 

Deprivation Syndrome. 

� Intervention with families and professionals from allied fields. 

3. Early Childhood Years 

Signs, Causes, Prevention and Management of 

� feeding problem, aggression, 

� withdrawal, problems related to early schooling 

4. Middle Childhood 


� truancy, school phobia 

� Conduct disorder 

� Childhood Depression , Child abuse (including child sexual abuse) 

10(276) 


Unit II 

5. Adolescence 


� Problem related to sexuality, Academic Problems 

� Aggression and Substance Abuse 

� Depression and Suicide 

6. Adulthood 

Mental health problems in the community: 

� Life events that cause stress e.g. separation due to death, migration etc. 

� Substances abuse and addiction. 

� Violence and sexual abuse 

� Management of stress: counseling, training in relaxation, yoga, meditation. 

REFERENCES: 

1. Barry, P.D. (1990), Mental Health and Mental Illness (4th ed) Philadelphia: J.B. 

Lippincott Co. 

2. Bono, E.de(1991) handbook for the Positive Revolution, London: Penguin 

Publications 

3. Carler, F. & Cheesman, P(1988). Anxiety in childhood & adolescence- encouraging 

self-help through relaxation training London: Croom Helm. 

4. Goleman, D (1996) Emotional Intelligence. N.Y. : Bantam Books 

5. Gopalkrishanan. N. (1994) Mental health and ou, Mumbai: Popular Prakashan. 

6. Govt. of India. Ministry of Health & Family Welfare (1982). National Mental health 

program for India. 

7. Grahamm, P.J., Jegede, R.O., Kapur, M. Minde, C., Nikapota. A.P. & Sell, H.L. 

(1983). A manual on child mental health and psychosocial development Part II, for 

primary health workers, New Delhi WHO 

8. Kapur, M. (1995), Mental Health of Indian Children, New Delhi: Sage Publications. 

10(277) 


Semester - IV 

Paper: XXIV 

Parent and Community Education 





NOTE: 










Unit I 

1. Parenthood: meaning and different theoretical views: 

- Tasks of 'Parenting' and being a competent parent 

- Changing concept of parenthood and childhood. 

2. Parent and community Education: 

- Concept, principles, objectives and need 

3. Parent involvement: 

- In decision and policy development and other activities. 

4. Involvement of fathers; need and role of fathers in child development 

5. Techniques of Parent and community Education: 

- Informal meeting, group and individual meetings. 

- Parent and toy library 

- Parent's corner and workshop/ demonstration centers 

- Open house 

- Written and printed materials 

Unit II 

6. Content of Parent and Community Education 

- Development, problems, needs and rights of children 

- Child rearing and disciplinary techniques, socialization and parental 

beliefs in various socio-cultural settings. 

- Importance of nutrition, hygiene, health and play for children 

- Family planning: importance and methods 

7. Formulating curricula for parent and community education. 

10(278) 


- Parent initiated curricula - need and assessment techniques. 

- Expert oriented curricula- guidance and action oriented. 

8. Contribution of different agencies and community centres in parent and 

community education. 

9. Contribution of different agencies and community centers in parent and 

community education. 

- Family planning centers 

- Hospitals 

- Maternity and child welfare centers 

- Schools 

- PTA 

- ICDS 

10. Contribution of different professionals in parent and community education. 

11 Training programmes for young parents: content and need 

12 Evaluation of parent and community education programmes. 

REFERENCES: 

1. Bigner.J(1979); Parent child relations: An introduction to parenting. N.Y.: 

McMillan Pub. 

2. Brim, Haman (1980): Learning to be parents, principles, programmes and 

methods. Saga Pub. 

3. Fine Marwin (1980): Handbooks on parent education, New York: Academic 

Press Inc. 

4. Goldolein, J.C. (Ed)(1994), toys, Child Development, Cambridge: Cambridge 

University Press. 

5. Gordon. Thomas (1975): Parent effectiveness training, New York: New 

American Library. 

6. Gillian, Pugh (1984): The needs of parents, practice and policy in parent 

education, Macmillan 

7. Gupte (1991); Speaking of Child Care, Everything You Wanted to Know: 

(2nd Ed.) New Delhi: Sterling. 

8. Lidhop. M (1987): Child rearing and Psycho-social Development New Delhi: 

Ashish Publications. 

9. Kulkarni, Sudha (1988): Parent Education, Jaipur: Rawat Pub. 

10. Naidu, U.S. and Nakhate. V.S. (1985). Child Development Studies in India. 

Bombay: Tata Institute of Social Sciences. 

11. Wagh, Anutai (1984): Parent and Community Participation in the Preschool 

Programme, New Delhi : NCERT. 

10(279) 


SEMESTER - IV 

Paper: XXV 

CHILD AND HUMAN RIGHTS 





NOTE: 










Unit -I 

1. Definition and Evolution of Rights. 

- Human rights 

- Child rights 

- Women's rights 

-Convention 

2. Status of Indian Children and their rights 

- Gender disparities (infanticide, foeticide, girl child) 

- Children in difficult circumstances (Children of prostitutes, child prostitutes, 

Child labour, street children and refugee children) 

- Children with special needs. 

Unit –II 

3. Status of Women and their Rights 

-Forms of violation of women's rights 

-Violence against women in home, workplaces and society. 

-Health and nutrition based deprivations 

-Crime against women: Sexual harassment, rape 

-Political discrimination 

4. Classification of Human Rights 

- Civil rights 

- Political rights 

- Economic rights 

- Educational rights 

10(280) 


- Legal rights 

- Social rights 

- Cultural rights 

- International rights 

- Environmental and developmental rights. 

5. Child Adoption and its Laws 

REFERENCES: 

1. Butteworth, D. and Fulmer, A. (1993). Conflict, Control Power, Perth : Child and Family 

Consultants. 

2. Bruner, T. (1986). Actual minds-possible words. London : Havard University Press. 

3. Digumarti, B.R., Digurmarti, P.L. (1998). International Encyclopedia of Women (Vol.1). New 

Delhi: Discovery. 

4. D'Souza, C. and Menon, J. Understanding Human Rights (Series 1-4). Bombay: Research and 

Documentation Centre, St. Plus College. 

5. Dreze, Jean and Sen, Amartya (1989). Hunger and Public Action, U.K. Oxford University 

Press. 

6. Government of India (1992b). National Plan of Action: A commitment to the Child, Department 

of Women and child Development, New Delhi. 

7. Government of India (1993c). Education for All : The India Scene, Department of Education, 

New Delhi. 

8. Government of India (1993d), Ministry of Finance, Economic Survey 1992-93, New Delhi. 

9. Government of India (1994), Ministry of Finance, Economic Survey 199394 New Delhi. 

10. Government of Tamil Nadu (1993). Dr. J. Jayalalita 15 point Programme for Child Welfare, 

Department of Social Welfare and Nutrious Meal Programme, Madras. 

11. Kudchedkar, S. (Ed) (1998). Violence against Women : Women agaisnt violence. Delhi 

Pencraft International. 

12. National Institute of Nutrition (1993) : Nutrition Trends in India, National Institute of Nutrition, 

Indian Council of Medical Research, Hyderabad. 

13. National Institute of Public Corporation and Child Development (1993). A Statistics on Children 

in India Packet Book 1993, New Delhi. 

14. National Institute of Urban Affairs (1993. Urban Child : Issues and Strategies, in collaboration 

with Planning Commission, Ministry of Urban Development and UNICEF, New Delhi. 

15. National Law School of India University and United National Children's Fund (1991). Report of 

a Seminar on the Rights of the Child, National Law School of India University, Bangalore. 

16. National Commission for Women (2001). A Decade of endeavour (1990-2000). New Delhi: 

National Commission for Women. 

17. Sachar, R.K., Verma, J., Dahawan, S., Prakash, Ved, Chopra, A and Adlaka, R. (1990). Sex 

bias in health and medical care allocation, Indian Journal of Material and Child Health, 1(2) 63- 

65.' 

18. UNICEF (1992), Rights of the Child : World Declaration and Plan of Action from the World 

Summit for Children and the Convention on the Rights of the Child, New Delhi. 

19. UNICEF (1990). Children and Women in India : A Situation Analysis; 1990, New Delhi. 

20. UNICEF India (1993). Annual Report on Country Situation : 1990, New Delhi. 

21. UNICEF (1993). Annex to the Annual Report on Goals and Indicators, New Delhi. 

22. UNICEF (1993). Policy on Child Labour, New Delhi. 

23. Weiner, Myron (1991). The Child and the State in India, U.K : Oxford University Press. 

10(281) 


SEMESTER - IV 

Paper: XXVI 

Development of the Self 





NOTE: 










Unit I 

1. Definitions of Development and Self 

- Linking the individual and the group; self-concept and self esteem. 

2. Approaches to self 

- Enquiry and introspection. Memories of childhood and their influence. 

3. The self in the life span 

- Significance of birth, role of childhood experiences: changing roles and 

responsibilities. 

- With age; the sense of self at adolescence 

- Influence of family, peers and school on the development of self esteem 

- Community and culture in relation to the development of self. 

Unit II 

4. Gender Identity and the self 

- Biological, psychological and cultural aspects of being male and female, 

stereotypes, beliefs and gender discrimination. 

- Cultural and sub cultural differences. 

5. Role of spirituality and religion in the development of the self. 

Experiences, values, beliefs and attitudes in society. 

6. Self 

- Improvement techniques 

10(282) 


REFERENCES: 

1. Kakar, S. (1978). The inner world. New Delhi: Oxford University Press 

2. Gandhi, M.K. (1927). An autobiography or the story of my experiments with 

truth. Ahmedabad: Navajivan Trust. 

3. Liewellyn-Jones, D. (1971). Every girl. London. Faber & Faber 

4. Liewellyn-Jones. D. (1971). Every women. London. Faber and Faber 

5. Mead. M.(1976). Male and Female UK. Penguin. 

6. Bee.H.(1989). The developing child. New York:Harper & Row. 

SEMESTER - IV 

Paper: XXVII 

Persons with Disabilities 





NOTE: 










Unit I 

1. Definition and classification of exceptionality. 

-philanthropic, medical, legal and the social. 

2. Different types of impairments, causes and effects on individuals. 

-Physical- cerebral palsy, epilepsy spina bifidia and spinal injuries. 

-Mental retardation, gifted and learning disabilities. 

-Emotional 

-Sensory (visually and auditory impaired) 

3. Techniques of identification, its assessment and educational modification and 

intervention programme. 

Unit-II 

4. Attitude of people, family and community towards disability. 

10(283) 


5. Physical and social barriers in the development of persons with disabilities, 

modification of physical and social environment, enabling participation of 

persons with disabilities as a contributing member of society. 

6. Needs of exceptional children. 

7. Examples of programmes and policies for persons with disabilities. 

REFERENCES: 

1. Baquer.A (1994). Disabled, Disablement, Disablism, New Delhi Voluntary 

Health Association of India. 

2. Council for advancement of people's action and rural technology (CAPART) 

(1996), Disability: A strategy to promote the participation of people with 

disabilities in programmes for rural development. New Delhi CAPART. 

3. Kanga.F.(1990). Heaven on wheels. New Delhi: Penguin Books. 

4. Narasimhan.M.C. & Mukherjee. A.K. (1986). Disability a continuing challenge. 

New Delhi. Wiley Eastern Limited. 

5. Oliver.M. (1996). Understanding Disability: From theory to practice. London: 

Macmillan Press. 

6. P. Immanuel. C. Koenig & S. Tesri (ds). Listening to sounds and signs: Trends 

in deal education and communication (pp.1-4) Bangalore, India: Chridtoffel- 

Blindenmission & Books for Change. 

7. Pandey, R.S.& Advani.L. (1996). Perspectives in disability and rehabilitation, 

New Delhi. Vikas Publishing House Private Limited. 

Practicals 

Paper: XXVIII 

Parent and Community Education (Practical) 

� Conducting home visits and interviewing/talking to parents. 

� Arranging workshops for parents. 

� Organizing parent education programs based on parents needs. 

� Conducting parent - teacher meetings. 

� Reports and resource files to be maintained by students. 

10(284) 

Max Marks: 40 



Practicals 

Paper: XXIX 

Persons with Disabilities (Practical) 

10(285) 

Max Marks: 40 


� Planning and working with children and parents. 

� Case study of persons with disability - a child and an adult. 

� Case study of an organisation with particular reference to its physical and 

social environment. 


SYLLABUS (SEMESTER SYSTEM) W.E.F. 2012-13 

M.Sc. (Foods & Nutrition) 

Semester -III 

THEORY: 

Paper Name Max. Marks Exam. 

Theory 

Duration 

501 Community Nutrition-I 

60 (45 + 15*) 3 hrs 

502 Institutional Management-I 60 (45 + 15*) 3 hrs 

503 Food Science-I 60 (45 + 15*) 3 hrs 

504 Food Safety & Quality Control 100 (80 + 20*) 3 hrs 

505 Food Microbiology 60 (45 + 15*) 

Total - 340 

3 hrs 

PRACTICAL: 

Paper Name Max. Marks Exam. 

Practical 

Duration 

506 Community Nutrition-I 

40 3 hrs 

507 Institutional Management-I 40 3 hrs 

508 Food Science-I 40 3 hrs 

509 Food Microbiology 40 3 hrs 

Total 160 

Grand Total 500 


10(286) 



Paper No. 501 

Community Nutrition -I 

10(287) 





NOTE: 










Unit-I 

Prevalence, etiology, biochemical and clinical manifestation and preventive 

measures for: 

a Protein calories Malnutrition 

b Vitamin A deficiency 

c Iron deficiency 

d Iodine deficiency 

e Fluorine Deficiency and Toxicity 

Unit-II 

Prevalence, etiology, biochemical and clinical manifestation and preventive 

measures for 

a Rickets, 

b Osteomalacia 

c Osteoporosis 

d Beri-beri 

e Pellagra 

f Scurvy 


Books Recommended: 

1 Nutritional evaluation of food processing, Roberts Haris John willy & Sons, 

N.Y. London. 

2 Nutrition and Physical Fitness: Bogrert, L.J. 

3 Nutrition in India: V.N. 

4 Human Nutrition- M.C. Durtt, Maxine 

5 Applied Nutrition- Rajalakshmi-R. 

6 Biology of nutrition – Elements 1972, Platinum Press 

7 Nutritional Evaluation of Food 

SEMESTER-III 

Paper- 502 

Institutional Management -I 





NOTE: 










Unit-I 

a. Introduction to Food Service Systems: 

- Evolution of the food service industry 

- Broad categories of catering services; commercial and Institutional 

- Characteristics of the various types of food service units – Canteens, 

Hostels, Hospitals and Restaurants. 

b. Principles of Institutional food Management 

- Management functions 

- Management tools: Tangible, Intangible tools 

10(288) 


c. Personnel Management 

- Manpower planning 

- Recruitment, selection and orientation 

- Training and motivation 

d. Legal Aspects 

- Labour Laws 

- Welfare policies and schemes for employees 

Unit II 

e. Space Organisation 

- Space requirements for kitchen and service areas 

-Types of Kitchens 

-Layout of service areas 

f. Equipment 

-Types of equipment 

- Selection of equipment 

- Maintenance of equipment 

g. Time and Energy Management 

- Importance of time and energy management 

- Types of energy – Human and fuel energy. 

- Measures for utilization and conservation 

h. Management of Finance 

- Sources of finance 

- Budgets 

i. Cost accounting/analysis: 

- Food cost analysis 

- Labour cost analysis 

- Cost Control Techniques 

BOOKS RECOMMENDED: 

1 Food Service in Institutions – Wood 

2 Food Service in Institutions – West, Bessin, Brooks. 

3 Handbook of Food Preparations – A.M. Home Economics Association. 

4 Food Selection and Preparations – Sweetman, M.D., 4, Mackeller. 

5 School Lunch Room Service – Oliver B. Watson. 

6 Food service Planning: layout Equipment – Lender H. Ketshevar and Marget E. 

Terrel. 

7 Human Nutrition and Dietetics – Davidson and Passmore 

10(289) 


SEMESTER-III 

Paper –503 

Food Science-I 





NOTE: 










10(290) 

Unit-I 

I. Relation of cookery to colloidal chemistry: 

Definition of colloidal system altering degree of dispersion, Hydrophilic and 

Hydrophobic colloids, stabilization of colloidal systems, properties i.e. surface 

tension, adorption, foam formation, rheology, gel. Formation and emulsions. 

II. Beverages: Synthetic and natural, alcoholic and non-alcoholic, carbonated 

and non-carbonated, coffee, tea, cocoa, Malted drinks. 

III. Nuts and Oilseeds: Composition, Oil extraction and by-products. 

IV. Fats and Oils: Sources of edible fats and oils. Characteristics of fats and oils. 

Physical; and chemical properties, changes in fats during storage and 

cooking uses of fats 

Unit-II 

V. Spices and Condiments: Composition, flavouring extracts – natural and 

synthetic. 

VI. Fermentation technology, enrichment and fortification technology. 


VII. Sugar Cookery: Sources, uses and properties of crystallization of sugar, 

stages of sugar cookery fondant, fudge, caramel and brittles. 

VIII. Starch Cookery: 

a Sources and uses of starch, gelatinisation. 

b Flours- Composition and baking qualities. Batters and doughs 

(chappaties and puries), Leavening agents. 

c Cooking and parboiling of rice. 


1 Experimental Cookery: Low Bells. 

2 Food Selection and Preparation: Sweetman, M.D. 

3 Handbook of Food Preparation: A.N. Hime Ec. Asso. 

4 Our Food: Swaminathan, M, and Bhagiam, R.K. 

5 Experimental Foods: Swaminathan 

6 Food Science and Application: L Paul, C. Pauling. 

7 Food Science: Mudami, S.R. & Rao, S.M. 1994, Wiley Eastern Ltd. New 

Delhi 

8 Food Facts & Principles: Maney N. S. & Shudarshan Swamy M. 1966. New 

Age International Pub. N. Delhi 


Paper- 504 

Food Safety & Quality Control 

10(291) 





NOTE: 











Unit-I 

Introduction to food safety: definition, food safety issues, factors affecting food 

safety, importance of safe foods. 

Shelf life of Food Products: factors affecting shelf life and methods to check the 

shelf life 

Food additives and contaminants: meaning, various kinds of additives- food 

colour. Preservatives, antioxidants, antimicrobial substances, artificial sweetners, 

flavouring, emulsifying, stabilizing agents, 

Food contaminants of natural origin- seafood toxins, toxic aminoacids and 

lathyrism, goitrogens,Haemagglutinins, phytates, cyanogenic glycosides, indirect 

additives,pesticides, contaminants and adulterants, pesticide residues, metallic 

conminanta, radionuclides, adultrants. 

Recent concerns on food safety: genetically modified foods. 

Unit-II 

Food processing: types of processing methods, effect of processing treatments – 

processing of application of heat, processing by removal of heat, ambient 

temperature processing. Minimal processing. 

Food laws and regulations: national food legislation, other food legislations/ 

authorities and their role- essential commodities act, 1955, standard of weight and 

measures act, 1976, export( quality control and inspection) act, 1963, voluntary 

based product certifications (ISI mark of BIS and agmark), international 

organization and agreements-food and agricultureal organization (FAO), world 

health organization(WHO), codex alimentarius, codex India, joint FAO/WHO expert 

committee on food additives(JECFA), world trade organization(WTO), sanitary and 

phytosanitary measures(SPS) and technical barriers to trade(TBT), international 

organization for standardization(ISO) 

Food safety and quality management systems: general principle of food safety 

risk management, hazard analysis critical control point system (HACCP), quality 

management system, 

Food Packaging: Need, material used and labeling. 

10(292) 


REFERENCES: 

WHO, 1998 world health report life in the 21 st centuries. Report of the director 

generol who Geneva. 

FAO food and nutrition paper manual of food quality control – part 14/1 (1979), to 

14/8 (1986) FAO of the United Nations. 

Curricula on food safety. Directorate general of health services. Ministry of health 

and family welfare. Government of India. Nirman Bhavan, New Delhi. 

Graham, H.D. 1980: the safety of foods, AVI publishing company Inc. Westport. 


Paper- 505 

Food Microbiology 





NOTE: 










Unit I 

Scope of Microbiology. Important groups of microorganisms and their practical 

significance 

Microflora of air, water, and soil. 

Microbial growth and methods of measurement of growth. 

Nutritional requirements, nutritional types, culture media and its types, physical 

conditions during cultivation. 

Methods of isolation and detection of microorganisms or their products in foods, 

conventional methods, repid methods, immunological methods – fluorescent 

10(293) 


antibody, Radio immunoassay, ELISA etc., chemical methods – ATP measurement 

and PCR (only principles in brief ). 

Sterlization by dry heat, moist heat, filtration and chemicals. 

Introduction to historical development in food preservation, spoilage, infections and 

legislation. 

Sources of contamination and microbial spoilage of milk and milk products, eggs 

and poultry, fish and other sea foods, Cereal and cereal products , meat and meat 

products, Vegetables and fruits, canned foods. 

Factors affecting the growth of microorganisms in food – intrinsic (nutrient content, 

pH and buffering capacity, redox potential, antimicrobial constituents, water 

activity), extrinsic (relative humidity, temperature, gaseous atmosphere). 

Unit-II 

Microorganisms as food: single cell proteins, Mushrooms. 

Role of microorganisms in fermented foods: bread, vinegar, yoghurt, cheese 

fermented milks, bear, wine and genetically modified foods. 

Normal Micro flora of Human body – Skin, Eye, Nasal Cavities, Mouth, Instestinal 

tract (brief introduction). 

Food borne diseases - symptoms and methods of prevention and control of 

following food born diseases: 

Bractical agents: Salmonella, Staphylococcus, Clostridium,, E. coli, Vibrio 

Fungal agents: Aspergillus, Fusarium, penicillium. 

Viruses Polio, Hepatitis. 

Protozoa: Giardia, Entamoeba 

Morphology, cultural and biochemical characteristics of Salmonella, Staphylococus, 

Clostridiun, E. coli, Vibrio cholerae, Streptococus lactis, Lactobacillus, 

Saccharmyces cerevisiae. 

Microbiological criteria for food testing and Quality control. The HACCP system 

and food safety used in controlling microbiological hazards. 

Food sanitation – Microbiology of food plant sanitation, water and milk testing 


1 General Microbiology – Powar 

2 Good Microbiology – Frazier and Westhoff 

3 Microbiology – Prescott, Harley, Klein 

4 Food Microbiology – Adams 

5 An Introduction of Microbiology _ P. Tauro 

6 General Microbiology - Stanier 

7 Food Microbiology – James M. H Jay 

8 Food Hygiene, microbiology & HACCP – 3 rd edition – S.J. Forsythe & P.R. 

Hayes 

10(294) 


SEMESTER -III 

Paper-506 

Community Nutrition-I (Practical) 

10(295) 

Max. Marks 40 

Duration of Exam 3 hrs 

Development of Low cost recipes based on substitute food and better quality. 


Paper No 507 

Institutional Management -I (Practical) 

� Market survey of Food service equipment. 

� Layout analysis of Kitchens of different food service Institutions. 

� Standardising recipes for 100 servings/ persons 

� Cost analysis of menus in 

� -College canteen 

� -Hostel mess 

� -Hospitals (private, charitable, govt.) 

Max. Marks 40 




Paper No 508 

Food Science -I (Practical) 

10(296) 

Max. Marks 40 


Practical’s related to Theory i.e. effect of different treatments on the foods 

mentioned in the syllabi 


Paper 509 

Food Microbiology (Practical) 

Max. Marks 40 


a) Instrumentation in Microbiology laboratory and their function (Microscope, 

Autoclave, Hot air oven) 

b) Preparation of Culture media 

c) Pure culture techniques (spread plate, streak plate and pour plate methods) 

d) Staining techniques-simple and differential. 

e) Microbiological evaluation of milk and milk products. 

f) Determination of Proteolytic, anylotytic and lipolytie activities of microorganisms. 

g) Microbiological analysis of water and air 

h) Normal microflora of human skin and mouth 

i) Isolation of spoilage organisms from different food commodities. 

j) Production of fermented foods (saurkrauth wine) 

k) Techniques of growth measurement 

l) Factors affecting growth. 


THEORY: 

Paper 

Theory 

SYLLABUS (SEMESTER SYSTEM) W.E.F. 2012-13 

M.Sc. (Foods & Nutrition) 



Duration 

511 Community Nutrition-II 

10(297) 

75 ( 60 + 15*) 3 hrs 

512 Institutional Management-II 75 ( 60 + 15*) 3 hrs 

513 Food Science-II 75 ( 60 + 15*) 3 hrs 

514 Physical Fitness & Sports Nutrition 

or Dissertation 

75 ( 60 + 15*) 

Total - 300 

3 hrs 

PRACTICAL: 

Paper 

Practical 


Duration 

515 Community Nutrition-II 

50 3 hrs 

516 Institutional Management-II 50 3 hrs 

517 Food Science-II 30 + 20** 3 hrs 

518 Physical Fitness & Sports 

Nutrition***/Dissertation 

50 3 hrs 

Total 200 



** Viva-voce of the Training of one month food processing unit and its report 

*** In the place of Paper XXVIII(Physical Fitness & Sports Nutrition) students 

may opt for Dissertation in M.Sc.-II, subject to the condition that the student has 

obtained 70% or more marks after II semester (M.Sc.-I year) 


SEMESTER - IV 

Paper- 511 

Community Nutrition-II 





NOTE: 










Unit I 

I. Factors affecting food production & conservation- Per capita food availability 

and consumption, poverty, family planning, social & cultural values, 

education. 

II. Nutrition surveillance and planning 

III. National nutrition Policy. 

Unit II 

IV. Assessment of Nutritional status of the Community 

a. Clinical, 

b. Biochemical 

c. Anthroponetric measurements 

d. Dietary surveys 

V. Nutritional Programmes for improvement of Nutritional status : 

VI. Nutrition Education: 

a Methods 

b Planning and execution 

c Evaluation and follow up 


1 Nutritional evaluation of food processing, Roberts Haris John willy & Sons, N.Y. London. 

2 Nutrition and Physical Fitness: Bogrert, L.J. 

3 Nutrition in India: V.N. 

4 Human Nutrition- M.C. Durtt, Maxine 

5 Applied Nutrition- Rajalakshmi-R. 

6 Biology of nutrition – Elements 1972, Platinum Press 

7 Nutritional Evaluation of Food 

10(298) 


Paper- 512 

SEMESTER - IV 

Institutional Management-II 





NOTE: 










Unit-I 

a. Menu Planning 

-Types of menus 

- Considerations in menu planning 

- Steps in Menu planning 

- Planning menus for canteens, cafeterias, boarding school, hostel mess 

and old age homes 

b. Food Service 

-Styles of food service in restaurants 

-Food service in hospitals 

-Food service in institutions 

c. Food management 

-Purchasing: principles, purchasing process and methods 

-Receiving: receiving process delivery methods and procedure 

- Issuing process, 

d. Food Storage 

-Layout of stores 

-Storage procedure 

-Inventory management 

-Store Records 

Unit-II 

10(299) 


e. Food Production Management 

-Food production process 

-Large quantity cooking techniques 

-Holding food 

f Hygiene, Sanitation and food standards 

-Sources of Food Contamination 

-Food handling practices 

- Food standards 

-Personal Hygiene 

-Waste disposal 

g. Safety: 

-General safety rules 

-Types of accidents 

-Accident prevention 

-Review of first aid 


1 Food Service in Institutions – Wood 

2 Food Service in Institutions – West, Bessin, Brooks. 

3 Handbook of Food Preparations – A.M. Home Economics Association. 

4 Food Selection and Preparations – Sweetman, M.D., 4, Mackeller. 

5 School Lunch Room Service – Oliver B. Watson. 

6 Food service Planning: layout Equipment – Lender H. Ketshevar and Marget 

E. Terrel. 

8 Human Nutrition and Dietetics – Davidson and Passmore 

. 

10(300) 



Paper – 513 

Food Science-II 





NOTE: 










Unit-I 

I. Vegetables and fruits: Structure, texture, pigments and acids in vegetables 

and fruits, Browning reaction. 

Pectic substances: Characteristics, uses, theory of pectic gel formation, 

testing of pectin, factors affecting jelly formation. 

II. Eggs: Structure, composition and selection. Coagulation of eggs protein. 

Eggs cooked in shells, poached eggs, omelets 

Meat: Structure, constituents of meat, post-mortem changes, Methods of 

cooking and changes in meat during cooking. Tenderness and juiciness. 

Unit-II 

III. Fish and sea food- Types and composition, Storage and changes during 

storages. Changes during processing. By products and newer products. 

IV. Milk and Milk products: Composition and constituents of milk. Coagulation of 

milk protein. Setting of curds, Creaming butter, different types of cheese. 

V. Grams and Dhals: Composition, methods of processing and cooking, Effect 

of processing such as roasting, parching, soaking, germination and 

fermentation. 

10(301) 



1 Experimental Cookery: Low Bells. 

2 Food Selection and Preparation: Sweetman, M.D. 

3 Handbook of Food Preparation: A.N. Hime Ec. Asso. 

4 Our Food: Swaminathan, M,. and Bhagiam, R.K. 

5 Experimental Foods: Swaminathan 

6 Food Science and Application: L Paul, C. Pauling. 

7 Food Science: Mudami, S.R. & Rao, S.M. 1994, Wiley Eastern Ltd. New 

Delhi 

8 Food Facts & Principles: Maney N. S. & Shudarshan Swamy M. 1966. New 

Age International Pub. N. Delhi 

10(302) 


Semester - IV 

Paper- 514 

Physical Fitness & Sports Nutrition 





NOTE: 










Unit-I 

a Physical Fitness and health status: meaning, concept, assessment criteria and 

management 

b Healthy life style: Strategies, factors that promote life style changes, self 

management skills. 

c Body composition in exercise and sport 

d Physical Activity: need, principles of physical activity 

e Energy input and output: Different energy systems for endurance and power 

activity, Fuels and nutrients to support physical activity. 

Unit-II 

a Nutrition in Sports: Sports specific requirement,. Diet manipulation, Pre-game, 

during and post-game meals. Diets for athletes with high energy requirements, 

stress, fracture and injury. 

b Water and electrolyte balance: Losses and their replenishment during exercise 

and sports events, effect of dehydration, sports drinks. 

c Special Nutrition considerations for female, older and disabled athletes. 

d Nutrition of athletes in hot, cold and high altitude environments. 

e Nutrition education of athletes and coaches. 


1 Ira Walinaky, (1998) Nutrition in Exercise and sport 

2 Charles B. Corbin, Ruth Lindsey and grey walk (2000) Concepts of fitness 

and wellness 

3 Robert A. Robergers and Scott O. Roberts (2000) exercise physiology. 

10(303) 


SEMESTER - IV 

Paper 515 Community Nutrition-II (Practical) 

10(304) 



1. Assessment of nutritional status of community by using dietary, 

anthropometric measurement. (Report to be submitted in the practical exam). 

2. Preparation and effective use of aids for nutrition education. 

Paper-516 

SEMESTER - IV 

Institutional Management-II (Practical) 

(To be evaluated internally on the basis of regular Practical Classes) 



In plant training in Cafeteria – Running cafeteria based on the recipes standardized 

in III semester 


Paper-517 

SEMESTER - IV 

Food Science-II 

10(305) 

Max. Marks: 30+20** 


1. Practical related to theory papers i.e: Effect of various treatments on the 

foods mentioned in syllabi 

2 One month implant training in any food processing unit 

Paper – 518 

SEMESTER - IV 

Physical Fitness & Sports Nutrition (Practical) 



1. Survey of dietary intake of athletes, nutrition knowledge of athletes and 

coaches. 

2. Evaluating cardiovascular fitness (heart rate, radial pulse, walking test, step 

test, 12 minute run and bicycle test). 

3. Evaluating flexibility (sit and reach, zipper test, hamstring and hip-flexor 

flexibility). 

4. Evaluating muscle strength (I RM and grip strength). 

5. Evaluating muscle endurance (curls up, 90 degree push up and flexed arm 

support). 

6. Anthropometric measurements. 


Semester-III 

(B.A. VOCATIONAL) TOURISM & TRAVEL MANAGEMENT 

PAPER-V GEOGRAPHY OF TOURISM 

Internal Marks 20 

External Marks 80 

Duration : 3 Hours 

Objectives: 

Geography of Tourism studies the phenomena of tourism over the global space with ‘spatial’ 

attention on the place of origin, place of destination & routes through which the travel & tourism 

takes place. It provides a thorough knowledge about the characteristics of tourist markets, 

attractions of destinations & the accessibility of the world with a focus on a few selected countries 

of world. This course has been simplified with very few case studies & broad information about 

the continents, so that in next semesters the BTM students can know more specific countries & 

destinations. 

Mode of Paper Setting : 

The examiner shall set ten questions selecting two questions from each unit. The students shall be 

required to attempt five questions in all selecting one question from each unit. 

Unit-I Brief introduction of continents & oceans. Map reading. Greenwich mean time. 

International date line. Elements of weather & climate. Climatic zones of the 

world. Natural vegetation of the world. Main tourist activities in different climatic 

zones. 

Unit-II Asia: General geographical features; physiography, climate, vegetation main 

countries, capitals & their tourist attractions. A Case study of Japan, Singapore, Sri 

Lanka, Saudi Arabia. 

Unit-III Europe: General geographical features; physiography, climate, vegetation. Main 

countries, capitals & their tourist attractions. A Case study of France, United 

Kingdom, Switzerland, Netherlands 

Unit-IV Americans: General geographical features of North & South Americas; 

physiography, climate, vegetation, main countries, capitals & their tourist 

attractions. A Case study of the U.S.A. (only 5 destinations), Canada, Brazil, Cuba. 

Unit-V Other countries: General geographical features of given countries with information 

about physiography, climate, vegetation & tourist attractions of South Africa, Egypt, 

Australia, New Zeeland. 

10(306) 


REFERENCES: 

- Badawi, Cherine: Footprint Egypt, Footprint Travel Guides, 2004. 

- Bickersteth, Jane & Eliot, Joshua: Singapore handbook: the travel guide, Footprint 

Travel Guides, 2001. 

- Blore, Shawn; Davidson, Hilary; Karr, Paul; Livesey, Herbert Bailey & McRae, Bill: 

Frommer's Canada, John Wiley and Sons, 2004. 

- Boniface, Brian G. & Cooper, Chris: Worldwide destinations casebook: the geography 

of travel and tourism, Butterworth-Heinemann, London, 2005. 

- Campbell , Jeff ; Chilcoat, Loretta; Derby, Susan ; Greenfield, Beth; Heller, Carolyn B. ; 

Martin, Sam ; Miller, Debra ; Morris, Bob; Peevers , Andrea Schultze ; Wolff, Kurt & 

Zimmerman, Karla : USA , Lonely Planet, 2004 . 

- Williams, Stephen: Tourism geography, Routledge, 1998. 

- Taylor, Chris; Rowthorn, Chris; Ashburne, John; Benson, Sara & Florence, Mason: 

Japan, Lonely Planet, University of California, 2000. 

- Mente, Boye De: Passport's Japan Almanac, Passport Books, University of 

Michigan,1987. 

- Lewis, Mark: Singapore, Rough Guides, 2003. 

- Ellis, Royston: Sri Lanka: The Bradt Travel Guide, Bradt Travel Guides, 2005. 

- Plunkett, Richard; Ellemor, Brigitte & Campbell, Verity: Sri Lanka, Lonely Planet, 2003. 

- Else, David: England, Lonely Planet, 2007. 

- Europe on a Shoestring, Lonely Planet, 2003. 

- Prosser, Robert: France, Evans Brothers, 2005. 

- Williams, Nicola; Berry, Oliver; Fallon, Steve & Nevez, Catherine Le: France, Lonely 

Planet, 2007. 

- Simonis, Damien; Johnstone, Sarah & Williams, Nicola: Switzerland, Lonely Planet, 

2006. 

- Steves, Rick: Rick Steves' Switzerland, Avalon Travel Publishing, 2006. 

- Louis, Regis St.; Chandler, Gary Prado & Draffen, Andrew: Brazil, Lonely Planet, 2005. 

- Peevers, Andrea Schulte & Burgess, Kerryn: Canada, Lonely Planet, 2005. 

- Lonely Planet Staff: USA and Canada on a Shoestring 2, Lonely Planet, 1900. 

- Fitzpatrick, Mary; Blond, Becca; Pitcher, Gemma; Richmond, Simon; & Warren, Matt: 

South Africa, Lesotho & Swaziland, Lonely Planet, 2004. 

- O’Hagan, Tim: Travel South Africa, Southern Book Publishers, 2000. 

- Firestone, Matthew D.; O'Neill, Zora; Sattin, Anthony & Wlodarski, Rafael: Egypt, 

10(307) 


Lonely Planet, 2008. 

- McPhee, Margaret: Australia's Top Tourist Destinations, Universal Publishers, 2003. 

- Smitz, Paul; Bain, Carolyn; Bao, Sandra & Farfor, Susannah: Australia, Lonely 

- Planet, 2005. 

10(308) 


Semester-III 


PAPER NO.- VI Major Destinations of India 




Course Objectives 

India is one of the emerging economic powers of India. In tourism too India is one of few choicest 

destinations of the world. India has a great variety of natural and cultural tourist attractions, that’s 

why it is said that India is for all reasons and all seasons. In this course few important and popular 

tourist destinations are mentioned , so that the students can know about main tourist attractions of 

given places. 




Teaching Practice 

Class room teaching, assignment writing, case discussion, glossary of terms students should be 

familiar with the glossary pertaining to above mentioned topics. 

Mode of Paper-Setting 

The number of questions to be set will be ten in a manner that there are two questions from each 

unit. The students will be required to attempt five questions in all, selecting one question from each 

unit. 

Internal Evaluation 

The performance of the students will be evaluated on the basis of class participation, class test, 

regularity and assignment writing carries 20% of the credit. 

Unit-I- Religious and cultural destinations- Kedarnath, Puri, Dwarka, Rameshwaram 

Unit- II- Historical and Architectural destinations- Delhi, Agra, Ajanta, Khajuraho 

Unit III- Coastal destinations and Islands- Mumbai, Kolkata, Goa, Andaman and Nicobar 

Unit- IV- Hill Stations- Shimla, Darjeeling, Ooty, Mussourie 

Unit-V- Wild life Destinations- Jim Corbett, Gir, Manas, Sariska 

REFERENCES 

Same as in Paper No. 104, 203 & 403 

10(309) 


(Semester- IV) 


PAPER NO.-VII TRANSPORT MANAGEMENT 




Objective: Transport is most importmant element of travel & tourism business. One can not think 

of tourism industry without any mode of transportation. There are several modes of transportation 

which are relevant in different conditions. The course focuses on different modes of transport and 

their role in tourism. 




Teaching Practices: Class room lectures, Assignments, Cases, Discussions and Seminars. 

Course Contents 

Unit-I 

Transportation as important part of tourism industry. History of different modes of transportation. 

The Physiographic & socio- economic factors affecting development of different modes of 

transportation. 

Unit-II 

Airlines & Tourism, History of Airlines in India. IATA,ICAO, AAI: Organizational structures and 

functions. Air India and Private Airlines Role in tourism promotion. 

Unit-III 

Surface transport & Tourism : Importance of surface transportation. Coaches, Car rental system in 

India. Roads system in India : National and State Highways, Role of surface transport in tourism. 

Unit-IV 

Railway & tourism- History & present status of Indian railway, Special trains for tourists. Different 

packages & facilities given by Railway. Problems of Indian Railway. Role of Railway in tourism. 

10(310) 


Unit-V 

Water transport- History & present status of water transport. Limitation & scope of water transport 

in India. Cruise ships. The role of water transport in tourism. 

References 

Aggarwal Surinder: ‘Travel Agency Management’, Communication India, New Delhi 

Hannel Christine, Robert Harshman & Grahan Draper- ‘Travel & Tourism : A world Regional 

geography, John Wiley & Sons, New York 

Hurst, Elist, ‘Transporation Geography’ McGraw Hill, New York 

Mohinder Chand, Travel Agency Management – An Introductory Text. Anmol Publications, New 

Delhi. 2006 

OAG, Airlines time table 

OAG, Cruise lines time table 

Indian Railway Time table 

Other references as in BTM 104, 203 and 30 

10(311) 




PAPER NO.-VIII IMPACT SOF TOURISM 




Course objectives: 

The development has its own impacts and so in case of tourism. The students shall be given 

exposure of the patterns of development in tourism mainly in reference to the developed and 

developing countries. The study of the positive as well as the negative impacts of tourism becomes 

essential to understand the benefits and lose of tourism development. 




APPROACHES 

Lectures, Group Discussion, Presentation,, Case studies. 

MODE OF PAPER SETTING 

There shall be ten questions to be set by the examiner selecting two questions from each unit. The 

candidate shall be required to attempt five questions selecting one question from each unit. All the 

questions shall carry equal marks. The questions shall be set in a manner that evaluates the 

theoretical and applied knowledge of the students. 

UNIT – I 

Patterns of tourism development in the developed and the developing countries – a comparative 

analysis in terms of volume of tourist arrivals and earnings from tourism 

Tourism Development in the regions – Europe, Americas, Asia-Pacific region, Middle East and 

Africa in terms of volume of tourist arrivals and earnings from tourism 

Characteristics of mass tourism 

UNIT – II 

Economic significance of tourism 

Direct, Indirect and Induced Economic Impacts of tourism 

Negative Economic Impacts of Tourism 

Economic Impact Analysis 

UNIT – III 

Socio-cultural dimensions of tourism 

Positive Social & cultural Impacts of Tourism 

Negative Social &Cultural Impacts of Tourism 

Social Change and growth of tourism 

UNIT – IV 

Environmental significance of tourism 

10(312) 


Major Impact Areas – Natural Resources, Pollution and physical impacts 

Tourism development in relation to global warming, Climate Change, natural resource 

exploitation& Biodiversity loss 

Environmental Impact Assessment 

UNIT – V 

Sustainable Development of Tourism – the policy & planning issues 

Sustainability in cultural tourism 

Community empowerment through tourism 

REFERENCES 

Bartelmus, P. (1994). Environment, Growth and Development: TheConcepts and Strategies of 

Sustainability. London, Routledge. 

Burns, P. and Holden, A. (1995).Tourism: A New Perspective.London, Prentice Hall. 

Butler, R. W. (1991). Tourism, environment and sustainabledevelopment.Environmental 

Conservation, 18, 201–9. 

Cater, E. (1994). Introduction. In Ecotourism: A Sustainable Option?(E. Cater and G. Lowman, 

eds). London, John Wiley and Sons. 

Cooper, C., Fletcher, J., Gilbert, D. and Wanhill, S. (1998). Tourism:Principles and Practice. 

London, Longman. 

Davison, R. (1996). The impacts of tourism. In Tourism Destinations(R. Davison and Maitland, 

eds), pp. 18–45. London, Hodder andStoughton 

Peter Mason,2009, Tourism Impacts, Planning and Management, Butterworth Publication, NEW 

YORK 

10(313) 


Semester-V 


PAPER NO.-IX TRAVEL AGENCY AND TOUR OPERATIONS BUSINESS 

10(314) 




Objectives: The study includes the functions, Regulations for Recognition of Travel Agents, Tour 

Operators and Excursion Agents. The Role of Sectors like Airline, different Railways Transports is 

also covered. The learner will also be familiarised with the contribution of important Association 

in these sectors. 




Paper Setting: The number of questions to be set will be ten in a manner that there are two 

questions from each unit. The students shall be required to attempt five questions in all, selecting 

one question from each unit. 

Teaching Practices: Class room lectures, Assignments, Cases, Discussions and Seminars. 


Unit-I Travel Agency/Tour Operations – meaning, definition, types, significance and 

growth over the years. 

Unit-II Functions of Travel Agencies and tour operators. Linkages and integrations in tour 

operation business. 

Unit-III Travel Agency Organisation Structure – Meaning and significance, Procedure for 

recognitions of Travel Agency and tour operations from Ministry of tourism, Govt. 

of India. 

Unit-IV Tour Packaging – Concept, meaning, types. Role and contribution of Air Carriers in 

India and Indian Railways in promotion of tour package business. 

Unit-V Role and contribution of Tourism Trade Associations in the healthy growth and 

development of tour operation business – IATO, TAAI, IATA, PATA. 


References 

1. Foster, D., the Business of Travel Agency, Pitman, 1990. 

3. Aggarwal, Surrender, Travel Agency Management (Communication India, 1983). 

4. Geo, Chack, Professional Travel Agency Management: (Prentice Hall, London, 1990). 

5. Mohinder Chand , Travel Agency Management – An Introductory Text, Anmol 

Publications, New Delhi, 2006 

6. IATA, IATO, TAAI manual./ 

7. Jag Mohan, Negi, Travel Agency and tour operation, Kanishka Publication New Delhi, 

1990. 

10(315) 


Semester-V 


PAPER NO.-X COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 




Course Objectives 

The course introduces learners to the basic communication skills and personality traits requisite in 

tourism and hospitality industry jobs. The theoretical inputs are designed to be used with practical 

exercises in the class rooms and daily behavioural corrections. 




Teaching Practices 

Lectures, Assignments, Cases, Discussions, Presentations 

Course contents 

Unit I Understanding Communication- Concept, Process and Barriers to Communication. 

Qualities of Effective Communication. Ways of making communication effective 

and overcoming barriers. 

Types of Communication-Verbal, Non-verbal, Upward, Downward, Internal and 

External. 

Unit II Business Communication (Written) - Principles of correct use of language for 

words, sentences and paragraphs. Letter; Types, Format and features of a good 

letter. Email writing, Bio-Data, Resume and Curriculum Vitae, General Guidelines 

for Preparing Personal Profile, Preparing Cover Letter, Cover Envelope, Statement 

of Purpose 

Unit III Business Communication (Non-verbal) - Non-Verbal Communication and Body 

Language, Body Language and Verbal Communication, Importance of Body 

Language, Types of Body Language, Types of Body Movements/Gestures, Reading 

Body Language, Important Body Parts and Signal used in Communication, 

Important Body Language for Business 

UNIT III Business Communication (Oral)- Art of Good Conversation, Intelligent Listening, 

Group Communication and Discussion, Team Behaviour , Effective Conduct in 

Group Discussions, Group Discussion in Induction, Group Discussion Process, 

Topics in Group Discussion, Tips for Group Discussion, Clarity of Thoughts and 

Expression, Interviews: Purpose of Interviews, Types of Interviews, Preparation for 

Interviews, Public Speaking: Need for Public Speaking Skills, Essentials of Public 

Speaking, Planning Presentation, Delivering Presentation, Basic Qualities in a 

Public Speaker 

10(316) 


UNIT IV Personality Development- Concept of Personality, Elements of Personality, 

Determinants of Personality, Personality Analysis- Myers-Briggs Type Indicator 

(MBTI) Assessment 

UNIT V Personality(Grooming and Social Skills)- Grooming and Personal Hygiene, Basic 

Concepts of Grooming, Personal Grooming and Corporate Grooming, Dining 

Etiquettes, Corporate Etiquettes for Dining, Cross-Cultural Dining Etiquettes, 

Interpersonal Skills: Developing Interpersonal Skills, Role Playing for Interpersonal 

Relations, Importance of Role Playing, Process of Role Playing 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Asher Mark (1999). Body Language, Carlton Books Limited. 

Barker Alan (2007). Improve Your Communication Skills, Kogan Page, New Delhi. 

Chaturvedi, P. C. and Chaturvedi, M.(2005). Business Communication, Pearson Education. 

Colman. J. C. (1988). Abnormal Psychology & Modern Life, Scott Foresman & Company. 

Covey Stephen R. (1990). The Seven Habits of Highly Effective People, NY: Fireside/ 

Simon & Schuster. 

George. B. & Chatterjee S. (2008). Food & Beverage Service & Management, Jaico 

Publishing House, Mumbai, India. 

Fry Ron (2003). Your First Resume, Pearson Education. 

Fuller J. and Currie. A. J. (2002). The Waiter, Sterling Book House. Mumbai, India. 

Marden Orison Swett (2003). The Power of Personality, Kessinger Publishing. 

Michael A. (2007). Best Impression in Hospitality, Delmar. Thomson Learning. 

Morris Desmond(2002). People Watching, Vintage. 

Pease Allan(2000). Body Language, Sudha Publications. 

Sharma Vinay Mohan(2000). Body Language, Pustak Mahal. 

Thorpe Edger and Thorpe Showick (2004). Winning at Interviews, Pearson Education. 

Taylor Shirley (2008). Communication for Business, Pearson Education. 

Websites: www.myersbriggs.org 

10(317) 


Semester-VI 


PAPER NO.-XI HARYANA TOURISM 


10(318) 






Unit – I 

Geographical and historical background of Haryana and their importance for tourism 

Religious & cultural tourism potential in Haryana including dance, music, fair & festivals 

UNIT – II 

Socio-economic development in Haryana with special reference to agriculture, industries, 

education, health and service sector 

Haryana’s positionin agriculture, industries, education, health and service sector at national level 

UNIT – III 

Tourist Resources of Haryana: 

- Monuments of touristic significance and museums 

- Religious & pilgrimage centres of Haryana 

- Music, dance, fairs & festivals in Haryana 

UNIT – IV 

Tourism Infrastructure in Haryana 

- Transportation and accommodation sector in Haryana 

- Recreational and entertainment facilities at the tourism complexes/resorts in Haryana 

- Tourism organization in Haryana 

- Haryana Tourism Policy - 2008 

UNIT – V 

Tourism Trends in Haryana 

Major types of tourism in Haryana 

Major tourist destinations of Haryana 


Semester-VI 

PAPER NO.-XII (B.A. VOCATIONAL) TOURISM & TRAVEL MANAGEMENT 

ENVIRONMENT AND TOURISM 




OBJECTIVES- Tourism and environment are closely inter related. Tourism cannot flourish in 

polluted environment. The global warming has threatened existence of several destinations. While 

planning tourism project the environment considerations and impact assessment are very 

important. The tourism students should know about recent environmental issues of India and world. 

This course deals several terms and definitions related with environment and ecology. 




Unit- I- Definitions of environment, ecology, eco-tourism etc. Natural vegetation and wild life of 

India. Atmosphere, Ozone layer. Deforestation and extinction of flora and fauna. 

Unit- II- Contemporary environmental problems; air, water, land, noise pollution, global warming, 

Green house effects, Controlling measures. 

Unit- III- Impact of pollutions on tourism with examples from India and world. 

Unit- IV- Eco tourism resources in India; existing tourism and potential tourism in those areas. 

Unit- V-Eco tourism policy of Government of India and United Nations Environment Programme 

(UNEP), Application of eco-friendly steps by tourism and hotel industry. 

References; 

-Eco Tourism In India, Policy & Guidelines 1998, Ministry of tourism, Government of India 

-Eco tourism; Principals, Practices & Policies, 2008, Megan Epler wood, UNEP( United Nations 

Environment Programme), New York. 

Environmental problems, NCERT publications 

10(319) 


SEMESTER – V 


B.A. III – Early Childhood Care and Education 

w.e.f. 2012-13 


No. 

Duration 

Paper-I Activities for Young Children 

3 Hrs. 50 (45+5*) 

SEMESTER – VI 

Lab – I 3 Hrs. 50 


No. 

Duration 

Paper-II Placement of ECCE Institutions and 

Block Placements. 

3 Hrs. 50 (45+5*) 

Lab – II 3 Hrs. 50 



selecting two question from each section/unit and one compulsory objective type 

question. 

Instructions for the Candidate: The candidate will attempt five questions in all, 

selecting at least one question from each unit as well as the compulsory question. 

Note: After the theory exams, students will be required to undergo “on the job 

training” for duration of 4 weeks during summer vacations and submit the report by 

the end of autumn break. Viva-voce for ‘on the job Training Report will be held 

along with the practical exam of BA Part –II by the same practical examiner and the 

internal examiner. 

10(320) 


Paper-1 

SEMESTER-V 

Activities for Young Children 

10(321) 


Int. Assessment – 5 






Unit-I 

Need and importance of activities, type of equipment and material required to 

promote physical and motor-skills, games and activities for promoting sensory, 

social, emotional development. 

� Language Development: 

Stages of language development, role of reinforcement and limitation of 

language skills- listening, speaking, reading and writing, speech defects, 

preventive action, role of play and teachers in language development. Type of 

equipment required to promote language development. 

� Cognitive Development: 

Pattern of cognitive development, stages of cognitive development, fostering 

development of cognitive skills, memory, thinking, reasoning and problem 

solving, sense stimulation and its importance for cognitive development. 

Influence of organismic and environment factors of the cognitive development. 

Unit-II 

� Meaning of Concept, characteristics of a concept and formation of a concept, 

development of scientific temper and creativity, definition of creativity, creative 

and art activities: Music, Drama, Puppetry, Creative expression in young 

children. 

� Activities for children aged 6-8 years, Organized Games or Sports, Drama and 

its importance, Science project and language games. 

� Science Activities: Science and Maths, Science experiences, Importance of 

block water and sand play. 

� Literature for Children: Definition, types of literature such as pictures, story 

books, criteria for selection of books for young and importance of story-telling 

and its technique. 


LAB-I 


10(322) 

M. Marks: 50 


Practical (Activities for Young Children) 

1. Demonstration of Arts, Language, Math, Science and Music Activities. 

2. Preparation of language kits, a resource file – collecting pictures, locally 

available material and articles related to the field of ECCE. 

3. Preparation for kits for story telling, flesh cards, sequence cards. 

4. Listing games to promote various developments. 

Paper II 

SEMESTER-VI 

Placement of ECCE Institutions and Block Placements. 








Unit-I 

� Introduction to field work, its goal and objectives. 

� Need, Content and Methods of planning a programme, preparation for 

implementing the programme. 

� Uses of programme evaluation and role of teachers and supervisors in it. 

� Process, Components of planning a context based programme, professional 

ethics and code of conduct, guidelines for maintaing effective human 

relations, evaluation of children’s programme, learning process and 

outcomes. 

Organizing Child Care Services. 

� Child care services in India. 

� Planning the Curriculum. 

� Setting up and Running the Centre. 

� Involving the family and the Community. 


Unit-II 

Managing Children’s Programmes: Some Perspectives. 

� The bases of Management. 

� Obtaining Funds and Formulating a Budget. 

� A case study- ICDS Programme. 

� A case study- Mobile Creches. 

Community with Parents and Community 

� Concept of Communication. 

� Methods of Communication. 

� Strategies in Communication. 

� Some Communication Aids: Audio, Visuals, Posters, Charts, Flesh 

Cards, Flannel graphs, Pictures, Models, Audio-Visuals. 

� Themes and Messages in ECCE. 

LAB-II 

Practical: 


10(323) 

M. Marks: 50 


� Training Programme. 

� Placement in Block and E.C.C.E Institutions, Viva Voce & ‘Report’ along 

with Practical exam by the external and internal examiners. 


Semester-V 


KURUKSHETRA 

w.e.f. 2012-13 

B.A. III – SYLLABUS HOME-SCIENCE 


Max. marks 

duration 

B.Sc./B.A 

301 Foods and Nutrition 

3 Hrs 50 (45+5*) 

Semester-VI 

Lab-I 3 Hrs 50 


Max. marks 

duration 

B.Sc./B.A 

302 Human Development 3 Hrs 50 (45+5*) 


Lab- II 3 hrs 50 

Instructions for the Examiner : The examiner will set nine questions in all, 


question. 



10(324) 


Course No.:301 

B.A. III (Home Science) 

Semester–V 

Foods and Nutrition 

10(325) 








Unit–I 

A. Food: functions of food and classification 

B. Essential food constituents: Carbohydrates, Protein, Fats. 

C. Food source: Functions daily allowances, deficiency and excess intake of 

followings: 

- Vitamins: A,D,E,K,B1,B2,B3,C,B12. Folic acid. 

- Minerals- Calcium, Iron, Iodine, Sodium, Potassium. 

D. Water functions in the body. 

E. Role of dietary fiber in human nutrition. 

F. Principles and methods of cooking. Advantages of cooking of the food. Effect 

of cooking on different nutrients. 

- Moist heat - Boiling, stewing, steaming 

- Dry heat - Roasting grilling baking 

- Frying - Shallow and deep 

- Radiation - Solar and microwave 

G. Methods of enhancing nutritive value of food stuff. 

- Importance of enhancing nutritive value of food stuffs. 

- Method of enhancing nutritive value of food stuffs, Sprouting fermentation 

combination and supplementation. 

Unit–II 

A. Meal planning 

B. Concept of balanced diet 

C. Principles of meal planning, factors affecting it 

D. Principles of meal planning for- children 3 to 5 years old school going child 

adolescents adults. 

E. Pregnant women and lactating mother 

F. Introduction to therapeutic Nutrition, therapeutic adaptation of the normal diet 

soft and fluid diet, planning of diet in following conditions. 

- Typhoid fever 


- Diarrhea. 

- Constipation 

- Diabetes 

- High Blood Pressure 

G. Food Preservation: 

- Importance of Food Preservation 

- Causes of food spoilage 

- Principles of food preservation 

- Methods of food preservation with special emphasis on household 

methods. 

Lab - I 

Semester – V 

1. Planning and Preparation of meals for: 

a) Pre-school and school going child. 

b) Adolescents boys and girls. 

c) Adult belonging to low, middle and high income group. 

d) Pregnant and lactating mother. 

10(326) 

M.M. – 50 

Time – 3 Hrs. 

2. Planning and preparation of invalid diets for the patients suffering from: 

a) Typhoid fever. 

b) Diarrhea. 

c) Constipation. 

d) Diabetes. 

e) High blood pressure. 



B.A. III (Home Science) 

Semester–VI 

Human Development 

10(327) 

Marks – 45 







Unit–I 

A. Child Psychology: Definition, aims, subject matter, objectives of studying. 

B. Learning: Meaning, importance, method of learning, factors effecting 

learning. 

C. Intelligence: Definition, Measurement of intelligence. 

D. Personality Development: Definitions, types and factors affecting the 

development of personality. 

E. Play: Definition, features and types of play. Difference between work and 

play. Importance of play in childhood. 

Unit–II 

A. Stages of the development of the child , characteristics of : 

- Infancy 

- Childhood 

- Adolescence-Problem of an adolescent child, role of parents and teacher 

in solving them. 

B. The Expectant mother: 

- Sign of pregnancy 

- Discomforts of pregnancy 

- Care of the expectant mother in brief 

- All effects of an early marriage. 

C. Care of newborn infants- Bathing, clothing and hygiene during infancy. 

Feeding of an infant: Breast feeding verses Artificial feeding. 

Weaning: meaning and importance, methods of weaning 

D. Common ailments of childhood: 

1. Cold, cough, fever. 

2. Digestive disturbances-Diarrhea. Constipation and Vomiting. 

E. Skin infection-prickly heat, allergy. 

F. Convulsions. 


Lab - II 

Semester – VI 

Practical 

10(328) 

M.M. – 50 

Time – 3 Hrs. 

A. Preparation of various dishes under following heads using different method 

of cooking. 

- Desserts 

- Snacks - Using the methods of baking, frying, grilling 

B. Preparation of various dishes under following heads using different method 

of cooking. 

- Salad and salad dressing - Indian and continental 

- Packed lunch and picnic lunch. 

C. Food preservation – Pickle, Chutney, Jam, Squash, Morrbba (at least 2 

each) 

D. Party Dishes and their presentation with table setting. 

E. Micro wave cookery. 



REVISED SCHEME OF EXAMS. & SYLLABI FOR B.SC. II 

(3 RD AND 4 TH SEM) 

EFFECTIVE FROM SESSION 2012-2013 

Scheme of Examination: 

Semester Paper code and nomenclature of the 

papers 

3 rd 

4 th 

* Internal Assessment. 

PH -301 Computer Programming and 

Thermodynamics 

10(329) 

Marks Theory Time 

40+10* =50 3 Hours 

PH- 302 Wave and Optics -I 40+10* =50 3 Hours 

PH - 401 Statistical Physics 40+10* =50 3 Hours 

PH - 402 Wave and Optics II 40+10* =50 3 Hours 

Practical 50+50=100 3 + 3 Hours 

Total Marks 300 


B.Sc.-II(Physics) 

Semester-III 

Physics- PH-301 

Paper V: Computer Programming and Thermodynamics 

10(330) 



Time: 3 Hours 

Note: 

1. The syllabus is divided into 4 units. 9 questions will be set. 

2. Question no 1 will be compulsory, it contains 6 parts (form all the four units) and answer 

should be brief but not in yes / no. 

3. Four more questions are to be attempted, selecting one question from each unit. Questions 2-9 

may contain two or more parts. All questions carry equal marks 

4. 20% numerical problems are to be set. 

5. Use of scientific (non-programmable) calculator is allowed. 

UNIT-1: Computer Programming 

Computer organization, Binary representation, Algorithm development, Flow charts and their 

interpretation. FORTRAN Preliminaries: Integer and floating point arithmetic expression, built in 

functions, executable and non-executable statements, input and output statements, Formats, IF, DO 

and GO TO statements, Dimension arrays, statement function and function subprogram. 

UNIT –2: Applications of FORTRAN programming 

Algorithm, Flow Chart and Programming for Print out of natural numbers, Range of the set of 

given numbers, Ascending and descending order, Mean and standard deviation, Least square fitting 

of curve, Roots of quadratic equation, Product of two matrices, Numerical integration (Trapezoidal 

rule and Simpson 1/3 rule) 

UNIT-3: Thermodynamics-I 

Thermodynamic system and Zeroth law of thermodynamics. First law of thermodynamics and its 

limitations, reversible and irreversible process. Second law of thermodynamics and its significance, 

Carnot theorem, Absolute scale of temperature, Absolute Zero and magnitude of each division on 

work scale and perfect gas scale, Joule’s free expansion, , Joule Thomson effect, Joule-Thomson 

(Porous plug) experiment, conclusions and explanation, analytical treatment of Joule Thomson 

effect. Entropy, calculations of entropy of reversible and irreversible process , T-S diagram, entropy 

of a perfect gas, Nernst heat law(third law of thermodynamics), Liquefaction of gases, (oxygen, air, 


hydrogen and helium), Solidification of He below 4K, Cooling by adiabatic demagnetization. 

UNIT-4: Thermodynamics-II 

Derivation of Clausius-Clapeyron and Clausius latent heat equation and their significance,specific heat 

of saturated vapours,phase diagrame and triple point of a substance, development of Maxwell 

thermodynamical relations. Thermodynamical functions: Internal energy (U), Helmholtz function (F), 

Enthalpy (H), Gibbs function (G) and the relations between them, derivation of Maxwell 

thermodynamical relations from thermodynamical functions,Application of Maxwell relations: relations 

between two specific heats of gas, Derivation of Clausius-Clapeyron and Clausius equation,variation of 

intrinsic energy with volume for (i) perfect gas (ii)Vanderwall gas (iii)solids and liquids , derivation of 

Stefans law, adiabatic compression and expention of gas & deduction of theory of Joule Thomson 

effect. 

References: 

1 Ian C and Malcon C, Interactive FORTRAN 77, Affiliated East West Press Pvt Ltd, New 

Delhi 

2 Rajaraman V, Computer Programming in FORTRAN 77, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt Ltd, New 

Delhi. 

3 Suresh C, Computer Applications in Physics, Narosa ublishing House, New Delhi 4 Roy S K, 

Thermal Physics and Statistical Mechanics, New Age International 

Publishers, New Delhi 

5 Sharma J K and Sarkar K K, Thermodynamics and Statistical Physics, Himalaya 

Publishing House, Bambay 

6 Stowe Keith, Introduction to Thermodynamics and its Applications, University press (India) 

Pvt Ltd, Hyderabad 

7 Infelta Pierre P. Introductory Thermodynamics Publisher: BrownWalker Press 

8 Johnson J. K, Fundamentals of Thermodynamics University of Pittsburgh 2009 

9 Jefferson Tester, Michael Modell, Thermodynamics and Its Applications 3rd Edition 10 Thomas Engel, 

Philip Reid, Thermodynamics, Statistical Thermodynamics, & 

Kinetics 2nd Edition 

10(331) 


B.Sc. –II (Physics) 

Semester-III 


Paper VI: Wave and optics I Max. Marks: 40 

Iternal Assessment: 10 

Time: 3 hours 

Note: 





may contain two or more parts .All questions carry equal marks. 



Unit-1: Interference I 

Interference by Division of Wave front: Young’s double slit experiment, Coherence, Conditions of 

interference, Fresnel's biprism and its applications to determine the wavelength of sodium light and 

thickness of a mica sheet, Lloyd's mirror, Difference between Bi-prism and Llyod mirror fringes, phase 

change on reflection. 

Unit 2: Interference II 

Interference by Division of Amplitude: Plane parallel thin film, production of colors in thin films, 

classification of fringes in films, Interference due to transmitted light and reflected light, wedge 

shaped film, Newton's rings, Interferometer: Michelson's interferometer and its applications to (i) 

Standardization of a meter (ii) determination of wavelength. 

Unit- 3: Diffraction I 

Fresnel’s diffraction: Fresnel’s assumptions and half period zones, rectilinear propagation of light, 

zone plate, diffraction at a straight edge, rectangular slit and circular aperture, diffraction due to a 

narrow slit and wire. 

Unit -4: Diffraction II 

Fraunhoffer diffraction: single-slit diffraction, double-slit diffraction, N-slit diffraction, plane 

transmission granting spectrum, dispersive power of grating, limit of resolution, Rayleigh's 

criterion, resolving power of telescope and a grating. Differences between prism and grating 

spectra. 

References 

10(332) 


1 Hecht, Optics, Pearson Education, New Delhi 

2 Brooker G, Modern Classical Optics, Ane Books Pvt Ltd, New Delhi 

3 Chaudhuri R N, Waves and Oscillations, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi 4 Khandelwal D 

P, Text Book of Optics and Atomic Physics, Himalaya Publishing 

House, Bombay 

5 Subrahmanyam N, Lal B, Avadhanulu M N, A Text Book of Optics, S Chand & Co, New 

Delhi 

6 Barton A w, atext Book on Light, Longmans Green & Co London. 

7 Longhurst R S, Geometrical and Physical Optics, University Press India Pvt.Ltd. Hyd. 

B.Sc.- II (Physics) 

Semester-IV 

Paper VII: Statistical Physics 


10(333) 

Max.Marks:40 

Internal assessment:10 

Time:3 Hours 

Note: 




3. Four more questions are to be attempted, selecting one question from each unit. 

4. Questions 2-9 may contain two or more parts. All questions carry equal marks. 



Unit –I: Statistical Physics I 

Microscopic and Macroscopic systems, events-mutually exclusive, dependent and independent. Probability, 

statistical probability, A- priori Probability and relation between them, probability theorems, some 

probability considerations, combinations possessing maximum probability, combination possessing 

minimum probability, Tossing of 2,3 and any number of Coins, Permutations and combinations, 

distributions of N (for N= 2,3,4) distinguishable and indistinguishable particles in two boxes of equal size, 

Micro and Macro states, Thermodynamical probability, Constraints and Accessible states, Statistical 

fluctuations, general distribution of distinguishable particles in compartments of different sizes, Condition of 

equilibrium between two systems in thermal contact-- β parameter, Entropy and Probability (Boltzman's 

relation). 

Unit –II: Statistical Physics II 

Postulates of statistical physics, Phase space, Division of Phase space into cells, three kinds of 

statistics, basic approach in three statistics. M. B. statistics applied to an ideal gas in equilibrium- 

energy distribution law (including evaluation of ơ and β ) , speed distribution law & velocity 

distribution law. Expression for average speed, r.m.s. speed, average velocity, r. m. s. velocity, 

most probable energy & mean energy for Maxwellian distribution. 

Unit-III: Quantum Statistics 


Need for Quantum Statistics: Bose-Einstein energy distribution law, Application of B.E. statistics to 

Planck's radiation law B.E. gas, Degeneracy and B.E. Condensation, Fermi-Dirac energy distribution 

law, F.D. gas and Degeneracy, Fermi energy and Fermi temperature, Fermi Dirac energy distribution 

law, Fermi Dirac gas and degeneracy, Fermi energy and Fermi temperature, Fermi Dirac energy 

distribution law for electron gas in metals, Zero point energy, Zero point pressure and average speed (at 

0 K) of electron gas, Specific heat anomaly of metals and its solution. M.B. distribution as a limiting 

case of B.E. and F.D. distributions, Comparison of three statistics. 

Unit-IV: Theory of Specific Heat of Solids 

Dulong and Petit law. Derivation of Dulong and Petit law from classical physics. Specific heat at 

low temperature, Einstein theory of specific heat, Criticism of Einstein theory, Debye model of 

specific heat of solids, success and shortcomings of Debye theory, comparison of Einstein and 

Debye theories. 

References: 

1. Prakash S and Agarwal J P, Statistical Mechanics, Kedar Nath Ram Nath & co, Meerur 

2. ReifF. statistical Physics, Berleley Physics Course Volume 5, Mc Graw Hill Book Co Ltd, New 

Delhi 

3. Mc Quarrie D A. Statistical Mechanics, Viva Books Pvt Ltd, New Delhi. 

4. Ashley Cmter (August 1999), Classical and Statistical Thermodynamics . 

5.Richard Fitzpatrick, Thermodynamics and Statistical Mechanics: An intermediate level course 

Lulu.com,2007 

10(334) 


B.Sc.-II 

Semester-IV 

Paper VIII: Wave and Optics II 

Note: 

Physics-PH- 402 

10(335) 

Max. Marks:40 


Time: 3 Hours 





may contain two or more parts. All questions carry equal marks. 



Unit-1: Polarization 

Polarization: Polarisation by reflection, refraction and scattering, Malus Law, Phenomenon of double 

refraction, Huygen's wave theory of double refraction (Normal and oblique incidence), Analysis of 

polarized Light. Nicol prism, Quarter wave plate and half wave plate, production and detection of (i) 

Plane polarized light (ii) Circularly polarized light and (iii) Elliptically polarized light. Optical activity, 

Fresnel's theory of optical rotation, Specific rotation, Polarimeters (half shade and Biquartz). 

Unit-II: Fourier analysis 

Fourier theorem and Fourier series, evaluation of Fourier coefficient, importance and limitations of 

Fourier theorem, even and odd functions, Fourier series of functions f(x) between (i) 0 to 2pi, (ii) – 

pi to pi, (iii) 0 to pi, (iv) –L to L, complex form of Fourier series, Application of Fourier theorem 

for analysis of complex waves: solution of triangular and rectangular waves , half and full wave 

rectifier outputs, Parseval identity for Fourier Series, Fourier integrals. 

Unit III: Fourier transforms 

Fourier transforms and its properties, Application of Fourier transform (i) for evaluation of 

integrals, (ii) for solution of ordinary differential equations, (iii) to the following functions: 

1. f(x)= e- x2/2 

2 . f(x) = 

1 |X|a 

Geometrical Optics I 

Matrix methods in paraxial optics, effects of translation and refraction, derivation of thin lens and 

thick lens formulae, unit plane, nodal planes, system of thin lenses. 


Unit-IV: Geometrical Optics II 

Chromatic, spherical, coma, astigmatism and distortion aberrations and their remedies. 

Fiber Optics 

Optical fiber, Critical angle of propagation, Mode of Propagation, Acceptance angle, Fractional 

refractive index change, Numerical aperture, Types of optics fiber, Normalized frequency, Pulse 

dispersion, Attenuation, Applications, Fiber optic Communication, Advantages. 

References 

1 Born M and Wolf E, Principles of Optics, Pergaman Press 

2 Jenkins and white, Fundamentals of Optics, McGraw Hill Book Co Ltd, New Delhi 3 Moller 

K D, Optics, University Science Books, Mill ally California 

4 Tolansky, An Introduction to Interferometery, John Wiley & Sons, New Delhi 

5 Shurcliff, Polarized Light Production and Use, Harward University Press, Cambridge, M A 

(USA) 

6 Arora C L, Refresher Course in Physics Vol II, S Chand and Co, New Delhi. 

10(336) 


B.Sc.-II 

Physics Practicals 

Paper- (Physics lab Practicals) 

Max. Marks: 100 Time: 3 + 3 Hours (in two days) 

SPECIAL NOTES 

1. Do any eight experiments from each Section. 

2. The students are required to calculate the error involved in a particular experiment. 

Note:- 

1 The Practical examination will be held in two sessions of 3 hours each (first session in the evening 

of first day and the second session in the morning of the next day). 

2. Distribution of Marks: 

Experiments (2): 25 + 25 = 50 

Viva-voce 15 + 15 = 30 

Lab. Record 10 + 10 = 20 

Total = 100 

For giving marks under Lab. Record, each college will maintain practical assessment record by 

using the following procedure:- 

I. Each student has to perform a minimum number of experiments prescribed in the syllabus. 

II. After the completion of a practical, the teacher concerned will check the note-book and 

conduct the viva-voce of each student to find out how much concepts related to the 

theoretical and experimental part of the experiment he/she has understood. According to 

his/her performance marks will be recorded on their practical note-book. These marks 

will constitute the Lab. Record. 

III. To complete the final marks for Lab. Record a separate register for each class of B.Sc. will 

be maintained. The student will be assigned a separate page on this register. On this 

page the marks obtained by the student in different practicals will be recorded. While 

taking the final average, the total marks obtained will be divided by the total number of 

required practicals, instead of the number of practicals performed by the student. This 

record will be signed by the concerned teacher. 

IV. The Lab. record register will be presented to the external practical examiners for lab. 

record marks. The external examiners will verify the record randomly. 

10(337) 


Section-A 

1. To measure the (a) area of a window 

(b) height of an inaccessible object. 

2. Refractive index and dispersive power of a prism material by spectrometer. 

3. To draw a graph between wave length and minimum deviation for various lines from a 

Mercury discharge source. 

4. Determination of wave length of Na light and the number of lines per centimeter using a 

diffraction grating. 

5. Wave length by Newton's Rings. 

6. Resolving power of a telescope. 

7. Comparison of Illuminating Powers by a Photometer. 

8. Measurement of (a) Specific rotation (b) concentration of sugar solution using 

polarimeter. 

9. Ordinary and extra ordinary refractive indices for calcite or quartz. 

10. To find the equivalent focal length of a lens system by nodal slide assembly. 

Section -B 

It will contain two parts (i) Electronics and (ii) Computer experiment. Students have to 

perform a minimum of four experiments from each part. 

(i) Electronics. 

11.To draw common base and common emitter characteristics of a transistor and calculate 

transistor characteristics parameters. 

12. To study the ripple factor in a d.c. power supply. 

13. Study of Hartley oscillator (calibration of gang condenser). 

14. To find out the frequency of a tuning fork by Melde's experiment. 

15. Study of series and parallel resonance circuits. 

16. Electronic Voltmeter measurement of peak, average & R.M.S. value of signal. 

17. Study of voltage doubler and trippler circuits. 

(ii) Computer Experiments. 

18. To print out all natural (even/odd) numbers between given limits using computer. 

19. To find maximum, minimum and range of a given set of numbers using computer. 

20 To evaluate sum of finite series. 

21. Find the roots of a quadratic equation. 

22. To find integration of a definite integral by trapezoidal rule. 

23. To find the area of a triangle, sphere and cylinder. 

24. Given values for a, b, c and d and a set of values for the variable x evaluate the 

function defined by. 

f(x) = ax2 + bx + c if x < d 

f(x) = 0 if x = d 

f(x) = ax2 + bx - c if x> d 

For each value of x and print the value of x and f(x). Write a program for an arbitrary 

number of x values. 

References: 

1 Worshnop and Flint, Advanced Practical Physics 

2 Nelkon M and Ogborn, Advanced Level Practical Physics, Heinemann Education Bookd Ltd, 

New Delhi 

3 Srivastava S S and Gupta M K, Experiments in Electronics, Atma Ran & Sons, Delhi 4 Gupta S L 

and Kumar V, Practical Physics, Pragati Prakashan, Meerut 

10(338) 


Scheme and Courses of Reading for Bachelor of Commerce (B.Com) under Semester 

System w.e.f. 2011-2012. 

COURSE STRUCTURE 

Note: Paper setter will set nine questions in all. Question number one will be compulsory which 

will be from the entire syllabus. It will contain six short type questions. Students are required to 

attempt four questions from the remaining eight questions. All questions will carry equal marks. 

B.Com. Ist Semester 

Course Code Course Title External Internal Total Marks 

BC 101 Business Communication - I 80 20 100 

BC 102 Business Mathematics - I 80 20 100 

BC 103 Financial Accounting - I 80 20 100 

BC 104 Business Management - I 80 20 100 

BC 105 Business Economics - I 80 20 100 

BC 106 Basics of Computer (Theory Paper) 40 10 100 

B.Com. IInd Semester 


BC 201 Business Communication - II 80 20 100 

BC 202 Business Mathematics - II 80 20 100 

BC 203 Financial Accounting - II 80 20 100 

BC 204 Business Management - II 80 20 100 

BC 205 Business Economics - II 80 20 100 

BC 206 Basics of Computer (Practical) 50 100 

Environmental Studies (Qualifying paper)* - - 100 

B.Com. IIIrd Semester 


BC 301 Business Regulatory Framework - I 80 20 100 

BC 302 Corporate Accounting - I 80 20 100 

BC 303 Company Law 80 20 100 

BC 304 Business Statistics - I 80 20 100 

BC 305 Principles of Marketing - I 80 20 100 

Any one of the following: - 

BC 306 (i) Information Technology and its 40 10 100 

Applications in Business (Theory Paper) 

BC 306 (ii) Indian Financial System - I 80 20 100 

BC 306 (iii) Fundamentals of Insurance - I 80 20 100 

BC 306 (iv) Human Resource Management – I 80 20 100 

10(339) 


B.Com. IVth Semester 


BC 401 Business Regulatory Framework-II 80 20 100 

BC 402 Corporate Accounting - II 80 20 100 

BC 403 Auditing 80 20 100 

BC 404 Business Statistics - II 80 20 100 

BC 405 Principles of Marketing - II 80 20 100 

Any one of the following: - 

BC 406 (i) Information Technology and its 50 - 100 

Applications in Business (Practical) 

BC 406 (ii) Indian Financial System - II 80 20 100 

BC 406 (iii) Fundamentals of Insurance - II 80 20 100 

BC 406 (iv) Human Resource Management - II 80 20 100 

B.Com. Vth Semester 


BC 501 Income Tax - I 80 20 100 

BC 502 Cost Accounting - I 80 20 100 

BC 503 Management Accounting and 80 20 100 

Financial Management - I 

BC 504 Business Environment - I 80 20 100 

Any two of the following :- 

BC 505 (i) Financial Market Operations - I 80 20 100 

BC 505 (ii) International Marketing-I 80 20 100 

BC 505 (iii) Investment Management-I 80 20 100 

BC 505 (iv) Indirect Taxes – I 80 20 100 

BC 505 (v) Advertising and Sales Management – I 80 20 100 

BC 505 (vi) Essentials of E-Commerce – I 80 20 100 

B.Com. VIth Semester 


BC 601 Income Tax - II 80 20 100 

BC 602 Cost Accounting – II 80 20 100 

BC 603 Management Accounting and 80 20 100 

Financial Management - II 

BC 604 Business Environment - II 80 20 100 

Any two of the following :- 

BC 605 (i) Financial Market Operations - II 80 20 100 

BC 605 (ii) International Marketing-II 80 20 100 

BC 605 (iii) Investment Management-II 80 20 100 

BC 605 (iv) Indirect Taxes – II 80 20 100 

BC 605 (v) Advertising and Sales Management – II 80 20 100 

BC 605 (vi) Essentials of E-Commerce – II 80 20 100 

Note: The duration of each paper will be 3 hours. 

*The Qualifying paper-Environmental Studies I and II shall be taught in the Ist and IInd Semester. 

However, the examination will be conducted along with IInd Semester. 

10(340) 


BC-101 

Business Communication - I 

10(341) 

External Marks: 80 

Internal Marks: 20 


Note: Paper setter will set nine questions in all. Question number one will be compulsory 

which will be from the entire syllabus. It will contain six short type questions. Students are 

required to attempt four questions from the remaining eight questions. All questions will carry 

equal marks. 

Business Communication: Meaning, Basic forms of communicating, Communication models and 

processes, Effective communication, Theories of Communication; Audience Analysis. 

Self-Development and Communication: Development of positive personal attitudes; SWOT 

analysis; Votes model of independence, Whole communication; Body Language: Kinesics, 

Proxemics, Para language. Effective listening: Principles of effective listening, Factors affecting 

listening exercise, Oral, written and video sessions. 

Corporate communication: Formal and informal communication network, Business 

Miscommunication (Barriers); Improving communication, Practices in business communication; 

Group discussion; Mock interviews; Seminars; Effective listening exercises, Individual and group 

presentation; Report writing and its contents. 

Modern Forms of Communicating: Fax, E-mail, Video Conferencing, etc. 

Suggested Readings: 

1. Bovee and Thill : Business Communication Today, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

2. Ronald E. Dulek and John S. Fielder,: Principles of Business Communication; Macmillan 

Publishing Company, London. 

3. Randall E. Magors :Business Communication; Harper and Row, New York. 

4. Webster's Guide to Effective Letter Writing, Harper and Row, New York. 

5. Balasubramanyam : Business Communications; Vikas Publishing House, Delhi. 

6. Kaul : Business Communication; Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 

7. Kaul : Effective Business Communication :Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 

8. Patri V.R. : Essentials of Communication; Greenspan Publications, New Delhi. 

9. Senguin J : Business Communication; The Real World and Your Career, Allied Publishers, New 

Delhi. 

10. Robinson, Netrakanti and Shintre: Communicative Competence in Business English; Orient 

Lognman, Hyderabad. 


BC-102 

Business-Mathematics - I 

10(342) 







equal marks. 

Calculus (Problem and theorems involving trigonometrical ratios are not to be done). 

Differentiation: Partial derivatives up to second order, Homogeneity of functions and Eu1er's 

theorem; Total differentials; Differentiation of implicit function with the help of total differentials. 

Maxima and Minima; Cases of one variable involving second or higher order derivatives; Cases of 

two variables involving not more than one constraint. 

Integration: Integration as anti-derivative process; Standard forms; Methods of integration-by 

substitution, by parts, and by use of partial fractions; Definite integration; Finding areas in 

simple cases; Consumers’ and producers’ surplus; Nature of commodities Learning Curve; 

Leontiff Input-Output model. 

Matrices and Determinants: Definition of a matrix. Types of matrices; Algebra of matrices; 

Properties of determinants; Calculation of values of determinants upto third order, Adjoint of a 

matrix, elementary row or column operations; Finding inverse of a matrix through adjoint and 

elementary row or column operations. Solution of a system of linear equations having unique 

solution and involving not more than three variables. 

Suggested Readings 

1. Allen R.G.D. : Basic Mathematics; Macmillan, New Delhi. 

2. Dowling E.T.: Mathematics for Economics; Sihaum Series, McGraw Hill, London. 

3. Loomba Paul: Linear Programming; Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

4. Vohra, N.D. : Quantitative Techniques in Management; Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

5. Soni, R.S. : Business Mathematics; Pitamber Publishing House. 

6. Kapoor, V.K. : Business Mathematics; Sultan Chand & Sons, Delhi. 

7. Holden: Mathematics for Business and Economics; Macmillan India, New Delhi. 


BC-103 

Financial Accounting - I 

10(343) 







equal marks. 

Meaning and Scope of Accounting: Need development, and definition of accounting; Bookkeeping 

and accounting; Persons interested in accounting; Disclosures; Branches of accounting ; 

Objectives of accounting. 

Accounting Principles : International accounting standards (only outlines); Accounting 

principles; Accounting standards in India (only outlines). 

Accounting Transactions: Accounting Cycle; Journal; Ru1es of debit and credit; Compound 

journal entry; Opening entry; Sub-division of journal; Relationship between journal and ledger; 

Rules regarding posting; Trial balance. 

Capital and Revenue: Classification of Income; Classification of expenditure; Classification of 

receipts. 

Accounting concept of income: Accounting concepts and income measurement; Expired cost and 

income measurement. 

Final Accounts: Manufacturing account; Trading account; Profit and Loss account; Balance Sheet; 

Adjustment entries. 

Rectification of Errors: Classification of errors; Location of errors; Rectification of errors; Suspense 

account; Effect on profit. 

Depreciation Provisions and Reserves: Concept of depreciation, causes of Depreciation, depletion, 

amortization and dilapidation; Depreciation accounting; Methods of recording depreciation; 

Methods for providing depreciation; Depreciation of different assets; Depreciation of replacement 

cost; Depreciation policy as per Accounting Standard: Depreciation accounting; Provision and 

reserves. 

Accounts of Non- Trading institutions. 


1. Anthony, R.N. and Reece, J.S. : Accounting Principle: Richard Irwin Inc. 

2. Gupta RK. and Radhaswamy, M. : Financial Accounting; Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi. 

3. Monga J.R, Ahuja Girish, and Sehgal Ashok: Financial Accounting; Mayur Paper Back, Noida. 

4. Shukla, M.C. Grewal T.S. and Gupta, S.C. : Advanced Accounts; S. Chand & Co., (New Delhi). 

5. Compendium of Statement of Standards of Accounting: The Institute of Chartered Accountants of 

India, New Delhi. 


BC-104 

Business Management - I 

10(344) 







equal marks. 

Introduction: Concept, nature, process, and significance of management; Managerial roles 

(Minitzberg); An overview of functional areas of management; Development of management 

thought; Classical and neoclassical systems; contingency approaches. 

Planning: Concept, process, and types; Decision making: concept and process. 

Bounded rationality, Management by objectives; corporate planning; Environment analysis and 

diagnosis; strategy formulation. 

Organizing: Concept, nature, process, and significance; Authority and responsibility relationship; 

Centralization and decentralization; Departmentation; Organization structure: forms and 

contingency factors. 

Time management and stress management: meaning, causes and techniques. 

Suggested Reading: 

1. Drucker, Peter F: Management Challenges for the 21 st Century; Butterworth Heinemann, 

Oxford. 

2. Weihric and Koontz, et al: Essentials of Management, Tata McGraw Hill, new Delhi. 

3. Fred Luthans : Organizational Behaviour; McGraw Hill, New York. 

4. Louis A. Allen: Management and Organization; McGraw Hill, Tokyo. 

5. Ansoff H.I. : Corporate Strategy; McGraw Hill, New York. 

6. Hampton, David R.: Modern Management; McGraw Hill, New York. 

7. Stoner and Freeman: Management; Prentice-Hall, New Delhi. 

8. Maslow Abraham: Motivation and Personality; Harper & Row, New York, 1954. 

9. Hersey Pual and Balnchard Kenneth: Management of Organizational Behaviour-Utilizing the 

Human Resources; Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. 

10. Ibancevish J.M. and Matleson M.T.: Organizational Behaviour & Management; Irwin 

Homewood, Illinois. 


BC-105 

Business Economics - I 

10(345) 







equal marks. 

Introduction: Basic problems of an economy; Working of price mechanism. 

Elasticity of Demand : Concept and measurement of elasticity of demand; Price, income and cross 

elasticities; Average revenues, marginal revenue, and elasticity of demand; Determinants of 

elasticities of demand; Importance of elasticity of demand. 

Production Function: Law of variable proportions; Iso-quants; Economic regions and optimum 

factor combination; Expansion path; Returns to scale; Internal and external economies and 

diseconomies, Ridge lines. 

Theory of Costs : Short-run and long-run cost curves traditional and modern approaches. 


1. John P. Gould. Jr. and Edward P. Lazear: Macroeconomic Theory, All India Traveller, Delhi. 

2. Browining Edger K. and Browining Jacquenlence M: Microeconomic Theory and Applications, 

Kalyani, New Delhi. 

3. Watson Donalds and Getz Moloclm : Price Theory an Its user; Khasla Publishing House, 

New Delhi. 

4. Koutsoyianni A. : Modern Microeconomics; Macmillan New Delhi. 

5. Richard G. Lipsey: An Introduction to Positive Economics; ELBS, Oxford. 

6. Singler G. : The Theory of Price; Prentice Hall of India. 

7. Nellis & Parker: The Essence of Business Economics; Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 

8. Ferguson P.R. and Rothschil R. and Ferguson G.J.: Business Economics; Macmillan, 

Hampshire. 

9. Ahuja H.L. : Business Economics; S. Chand & Co., New Delhi. 


BC-106 


BASICS OF COMPUTER-I 

(Ist Semester) 

10(346) 

Theory Paper Max Marks-40 Marks 

Practical Paper Max Mark-50 Marks 

Internal Assessment- 10 Marks 

Time: 3 Hours 

Note: The Examiner shall set eight questions in all covering the whole syllabus out of 

which five questions are required to be attempted by the students. 

Introduction to Computers: Definition of Computer; Components of Computer; Characteristics of 

Computers; History evolution of Computers; 

Generation of computers; Classification of Computers- According to Purpose, According to 

Technology, According to Size and Storage Capacity; Human being VS Computer; Difference 

between Computer and Calculator. 

Input Devices; Mouse, Keyboard, Light pen, Track Ball, Joystick, MICR, Optical Mark reader and 

Optical Character reader. Scanners, Voice system, Web, Camera. 

Output Devices: Hard Copy Output Devices; Line Printers, Character Printers, Chain Printers, Dotmatrix 

Printers, Daisy Wheel Printer, Laser Printers, Ink jet Printers, Plotters, Soft Copy device- 

Monitor, Sound card and speakers. 

Memory and Mass Storage Devices; Characteristics of Memory Systems; 

Memory Hierarchy; Types of Primary Memory; RAM and ROM; Secondary and Back-up; Magnetic 

Disks, Characteristics and classification of Magnetic Disk, Optical Disk, Magnetic Tape. 

MS-Word: Fundamentals of MS-Word, Features of MS-Word, Menus, Formatting and Standard 

Toolbars, Ruler, Scroll Bar, Creating Editing, Saving, export and import files, inserting and copying 

the files, Working with frames, Paragraph formatting, Columns, Pictures, Tables, Macros and Mail 

Merge. 


BC-201 

Business Communication-II 

10(347) 







equal marks. 

Principles of Effective Communication 

Writing Skills: Planning business messages, Rewriting and editing; The first draft; Reconstructing 

the final draft; Business letters and memo formats; Appearance request letters; Good news and 

bad news letters; Persuasive letters; Sales letters; Collection letters; Office memorandum. 

Report Writing: Introduction to a proposal, short report and formal report, report preparation. 

Oral Presentation: Principles of oral presentation, factors affecting presentation, sales presentation, 

training presentation, conducting surveys, speeches to motivates effective presentation skills. 

Non- Verbal Aspects of Communicating. 

Interview Skills: Appearing in interviews; Conducting interviews; Writing resume and letter of 

application. 

International Communication: Cultural sensitiveness and cultural context; Writing and presenting 

in International situations; Inter-cultural factors in interactions; Adapting to global business. 


1. Bovee and Thill : Business Communication Today, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

2. Ronald E. Dulek and John S. Fielder,: Principles of Business Communication; Macmillan 

Publishing Company, London. 

3. Randall E. Magors :Business Communication; Harper and Row, New York. 

4. Webster's Guide to Effective Letter Writing, Harper and Row, New York. 

5. Balasubramanyam : Business Communications; Vikas Publishing House, Delhi. 

6. Kaul : Business Communication; Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 

7. Kaul : Effective Business Communication :Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 

8. Patri V.R. : Essentials of Communication; Greenspan Publications, New Delhi. 

9. Senguin J : Business Communication; The Real WorId and Your Career, Allied Publishers, New 

Delhi. 

10. Robinson, Netrakanti and Shintre: Communicative Competence in Business English; Orient 

Lognman, Hyderabad. 


BC-202 

Business Mathematics - II 

10(348) 







equal marks. 

Linear Programming-Formulation of LPP: Graphical method of solution; Problems relating to two 

variables including the case of mixed constraints; Cases having no solution, multiple solutions; 

unbounded solution and redundant constraints; Simplex Method - Solution of problems up to 

three variables, including cases of mixed constraints, Duality; Transportation Problem. 

Compound interest and Annuities: Certain different types of interest rates, Concept of present 

value and amount of a sum; Types of annuities; Present value and amount of an annuity, including 

the case of continuous compounding; Valuation of simple loans and debentures; Problems 

relating to sinking funds. 


1. Allen RG,D. : Basic Mathematics; Macmillan, New Delhi. 

2. Dowling E.T.: Mathematics for Economics; Sihaum Series, McGraw Hill, London. 

3. Loomba Paul: Linear Programming; Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

4. Vohra, N.D. : Quantitative Techniques in Management; Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

5. Soni, R.S. : Business Mathematics; Pitamber Publishing House. 

6. Kapoor, V.K. : Business Mathematics; Sultan Chand & Sons, Delhi. 

7. Holden: Mathematics for Business and Economics; Macmillan India, New Delhi. 


BC-203 

Financial Accounting - II 

10(349) 







equal marks. 

Special Accounting Areas. 

Consignment Accounts: Important terms; Accounting records; Valuation of unsold stock; 

Conversion of consignment into branch. 

Joint Venture Accounts: Meaning of joint venture; Joint venture & partnership; Accounting 

records. 

Branch Accounts: Dependent branch, Debtors system, Stock and debtor system; Final accounts 

system; wholesale branch, independent branch; Foreign branch. 

Hire purchase and installment purchase system: Meaning of hire-purchase contract; Legal 

provisions regarding hire-purchase contract; Accounting records for goods of substantial sale 

values and accounting records for goods of small values; Installment purchase system; After sales 

service. 

Partnership Account: Essential Characteristics of Partnership; Partnership deed; Final accounts; 

Adjustment after closing the accounts; Fixed and fluctuating capital; Goodwill; Joint Life Policy; 

Change in Profit Sharing Ratio. 

Reconstitution of a partnership firm: Admission of a partner; Retirement of a partner; death of a 

partner; Amalgamation of partnership firms; Dissolution of a partnership firm -Modes of 

dissolution of a firm; Accounting entries; Insolvency of partners; Sale of firm to a company; 

Gradual realization of assets and piecemeal distribution. 


1. Anthony, R.N. and Reece, J.S. : Accounting Principle: Richard Irwin Inc. 

2. Gupta RK. and Radhaswamy, M. : Financial Accounting; Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi. 

3. Monga J.R, Ahuja Girish, and Sehgal Ashok: Financial Accounting; Mayur Paper Back, Noida. 

4. Shukla, M.C. Grewal T.S. and Gupta, S.C. : Advanced Accounts; S. Chand & Co., (New Delhi). 

5. Compendium of Statement of Standards of Accounting: The Institute of Chartered Accountants of 



BC-204 

Business Management - II 

10(350) 







equal marks. 

Leadership: Concept and leadership styles; Leadership theories (Tannenbaum and Schmidt); 

Likert’s System Management. 

Motivating and Leading people at work: Motivation concept; Theories-Maslow, Herzberg, 

Mcgregor, and Ouchi, Financial and non-financial incentives. 

Communication: nature, process, networks and barriers, Effective communication. 

Managerial Control: Concept and process, Effective control system, Techniques of control: 

traditional and modern. 

Management of change: Concept, nature, and process of planned change, Resistance of change, 

Emerging horizons of management in a changing environment 

Suggested Reading 

1. Drucker, Peter F : Management Challenges for the 21 st Century; Butterworth Heinemann, 

Oxford. 

2. Weihric and Koontz, et al: Essentials of Management, Tata McGraw Hill, new Delhi. 

3. Fred Luthans : Organizational Behaviour; McGraw Hill, New York. 

4. Louis A. Allen: Management and Organization; McGraw Hill, Tokyo. 

5. Ansoff H.I. : Corporate Strategy; McGraw Hill, New York. 

6. Hampton, David R.: Modern Management; McGraw Hill, New York. 

7. Stoner and Freeman: Management; Prentice-Hall, New Delhi. 

8. Maslow Abraham: Motivation and Personality; Harper & Row, New York, 1954. 

9. Hersey Pual and Balnchard Kenneth: Management of Organizational Behaviour-Utilizing the 

Human Resources; Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. 

10. Ibancevish J.M. and Matleson M.T.: Organizational Behaviour & Management; Irwin 



BC- 205 

Business Economics -II 

10(351) 







equal marks. 

Market Structures : market structures and business, Decisions; Objectives of a business firm. 

(a) Perfect Competition: Profit maximization and equilibrium of firm and industry; Shortrun 

and long-run supply curves; Price and output determination, practical applications. 

(b) Monopoly: Determination of price under monopoly; Equilibrium of a firm; comparison 

between perfect competition and monopoly; Multi-plant monopoly; Price discrimination, 

Practical applications. 

(c) Monopolistics Competition: Meaning and characteristics; Price and output determination 

under monopolistic competition; product differentiations; Selling costs; Comparison with 

perfect competition; Excess capacity under monopolistic competition. 

(d) Oligopoly; Characteristics; Indeterminate pricing and output; Classical models of 

Oligopoly; Price leadership; Collusive oligopoly; Kinked demand curve. 

Factor Pricing-I: Marginal productivity theory and demand for factors; Nature, supply of factor 

inputs, Determination of wage rates under perfect competition and monopoly, Exploitation of 

labour, Rent-concept; Ricardian and modern theories of rent; Quasi-rent. 

Factor-Pricing-II: Interest-Concept and theories of interest; Profit: nature, concepts and theories of 

profit. 


1. John P. Gould. Jr. and Edward P. Lazear: Macroeconomic Theory, All India Traveller, Delhi. 

2. Browining Edger K. and Browining Jacquenlence M: Microeconomic Theory and Applications, 

Kalyani, New Delhi. 

3. Watson Donalds and Getz Moloclm : Price Theory an Its user, Khosla Publishing House, 

New Delhi. 

4. Koutsoyianni A. : Modern Microeconomics; Macmillan New Delhi. 

5. Richard G. Lipsey: An Introduction to Positive Economics; ELBS, Oxford. 

6. Singler G. : The Theory of Price; Prentice Hall of India. 

7. Nellis & Parker: The Essence of Business Economics; Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 

8. Ferguson P.R. and Rothschil R. and Ferguson G.J.: Business Economics; Macmillan, 

Hampshire. 

9. Ahuja H.L. : Business Economics; S. Chand & Co., New Delhi. 


BC-206 


BASICS OF COMPUTER-II 

(IInd Semester) 

10(352) 


Practical Paper Max Mark-50 Marks 



Note: The Examiner shall set eight questions in all covering the whole syllabus out of 

which five questions are required to be attempted by the students. 

Fundamental of computers: Model of a digital computer; Functioning of a digital computer; 

Types of a digital computer; Advantages of computers. Difference between digital computer 

and analog computer, Applications of computers: Computers in Commerce, Marketing, 

Education and Management. 

Software concepts: Types of Software and their role, Different System Software types- 

Operating systems, Translators, System Utilities; Concept of Application Packages; Types of 

an operating system-Multi-user O.S. Multitasking O.S., Multi-Processing as; Time-sharing 

as., Multi-Programming O.S. Operating System as a resource Manager, concept of GUI and 

CUI. 

Introduction to Windows: Components of Application Window; Types of Windows, 

Windows as an operating System, Windows explorer, Using Paintbrush, Control Panel, 

Installing a printer. User interfaces- CUI and GUI; Concept of a Desktop and Taskbar, My 

Computer, Recycle Bin, My Documents and Internet Explorer icons. 

MS-Excel: Applications of Spreadsheet; Advantages of in Spreadsheet; Features of Excel; 

Rows, Columns, Cell, Menus, Creating worksheet, Formatting, Printing, establishing 

worksheet links, Table creating and printing graphs, Macros, Using Built-m-functions. 


BC-207 

Environmental Studies (Qualifying paper) 

10(353) 



The Subject of Environmental Studies is included as a qualifying paper in all UG Courses 

(including professional courses also) from the session 2004-2005 and the students will be required 

to qualify the same otherwise the final result will not be declared and degree will not be awarded. 

Annual System: The duration of the course will be 50 lectures. The examination will be conducted 

by the college at its own level earlier than the examination alongwith the Annual Examination. 

Semester System: The Environment Course of 50 lectures will be conducted in the second semester 

and the examinations shall be conducted at the end of second semester: 

Credit System: The core course will be awarded 4 credits. 

Exam. Pattern: In case of awarding the marks, the question paper should carry 100 marks. The 

structure of the question paper being: 

PART-A: Short Answer Pattern 25 Marks 

PART-B: Essay type with inbuilt choice 50 Marks 

PART-C: Field work 25 Marks 

INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE EXAMINERS 

Part-A: Questions 1 is compulsory and will contain ten short answer type question of 2.5 marks 

each covering the entire syllabus. 

Part-B : Eight essay type questions (With inbuilt choice) will be set from the entire syllabus and the 

candidates will be required to answer any four of them. Each essay type question will be of 12.5 

marks. 

The examination will be conducted by the college concerned at its own level earlier than he 

annual examination and each student will be required to score minimum of 35% marks each in 

Theory and Practical. The marks obtained in this qualifying paper will not be including in 

determining the percentage of marks for the award of degree. 

However, these will be shown in the detailed marks certificate of the student. 

Syllabus and Course of reading 

The multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies: Defination, Scope and importance need for 

public awareness. (2 Lectures) 

Natural Resources: Renewable and non-renewable resources: 

Natural resources and associated problems. 

a) Forest resources: Use ad over-exploitation, deforestation, case studies. Timber extraction, 

mining, 


dams and their effects on forests and tribal people. 

b) Water resources: Use and over-utilization of surface and ground water, floods, drought, 

conflicts over water, dams-benefits and problems. . 

c) Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting abd using mineral 

resources, case studies. 

d) Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture and overgrazing, effects 

of modem agriculture, fertilizer-pestcide problems, water loging, salinity, case studies. 

e) Energy resources; Growing energy needs, renewable and non-renewable energy sources, case 

studies. 

f) Land resources: Land as a resources, land degradation man induced landsslidies, soil erosion 

and desertification. 

- Role of an individual in conservation of natural resources. 

- Equitable use of resources for sustainable lifestyles. 

(8 Lectures) 

Ecosystems 

- Concept of an ecosystem 

-Structure and function of an ecosystem. 

- Producers, Consumers and decomposers. 

-Energical flow in the ecosystem 

-Ecological succession 

--Food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids. 

-Introduction, types, Characteristic features, structure and function of the following of the 

ecosystem. 

a. Forest ecosystem 

b. Grassm land ecosystem 

c. desert ecosystem 

d. Aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams, lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries). 

(6 lectures). 

Biodiversity and its conservation 

--Introduction-Definition: genetic, species and ecosystem diversity. 

--Bio-geographical classification of India. " 

--Value of bioversity : consumptive use, productive use, social, ethical; aestheic and option 

calues. 

--Biodiversity at global, National and local levels. 

--India as a mega-diversity nation. 

Hot-sports of biodiversity. 

--Threats to biodiversity: habitat loos, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts. 1 

--Endangered and endemics. 

--Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and Ex-situ, Conservation of biodiversity. 

(8 Lectures) 

Environmental Pollution 

Definition 

--Causes, effects and control measures of :- 

a. Air pollution 

b. Water pollution 

c. Soil pollution 

d. Marine pollution 

10(354) 


e. Noise pollution 

f. Thermal pollution 

g. Nuclear hazards 

- Solid waste Management: Causes, effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes. 

--Role of an individual in prevention of pollution. 

--Pollution case studies. . 

--Disaster Management: floods, earthquake, cyclone and landslides. 

(8 lectures) 

Social Issues and the environment 

--From Unsustainable to Sustainable development. 

--Ur ban problems related to energy. . 

-- Water conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management. . 

--Resettlement and rehabilitation of people; its problems and concerns. Case studies. 

--Environmental eithics: Issues and possible solutions. 

--Climate change, global warming, acid rain, ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and 

holocaust. Case studies. 

-- Wasteland reclamation. 

--Consumerism and waste products. 

--Air (prevention and Control of Pollution) Act. 

-- Water (prevention and control of pollution) Act. 

--Wildlife Protection Act. 

--Forest Conservation Act. 

--Issues involved in enforcement of environmental 

legislation. 

--Public awareness. 

(7 

lectures) 

Human Population and the Environment 

-- Population growth, variation among nations. 

-. Population explosion- family Welfare Programme. 

--Environment and human hea1th. 

--Human Rights. 

--Value Education. 

--HIV/AIDS. 

--women and child welfare 

--role of information technology in environment and human health 

--Case Studies. (6 

lectures) 

Field work 

--Visit to a local area to document environmental assets: river/forest grass land/ 

hill/mountain. 

-Visit to a local polluted site-Urban/Rural/Industrial/ Agricultural. 

--Study of common plants, insects, birds. 

--Study of simple ecosystems pond, river, hill slopes, etc. 

(Field work Equal to 5 lecture. hours). 

10(355) 


SIX MONTHS COMPULSORY CORE MODULE COURSE IN ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES: 

FOR UNDERGRADUATES 

Teaching Methodologies 

The Core Module Syllabus for Environmental Studies includes class room teaching and Field 

Work. The syllabus divided into eight units covering 50 lectures. The first seven unit will cover 45 

lectures which are class room based to enhance knowledge skills mid attitude to environment. 

Unit eight is based on field activities which will be covered in five lecture hours and would 

provide students first hand knowledge on various local would environmental aspects. 

Field experience is one of the most effective learning to for environmental concerns. This moves 

out of the scope of text book mode of teaching into realm of real learning in the field where the 

teacher morely acts as a catalyst to interpret what student observes or discovers in his/her 

environment. 

Fields are as essential as class work and form an irreplaceable synegistic tool in the entire learning 

process. 

Course material provided by UGC for class room teaching and field activities be utilized. 

The universities/Colleges can also draw upon expertise of outside resource persons for teaching 

purposes. 

Environmental Core module shall be integrated into the teaching programmes of all 

undergraduate courses. 

Reference: 

1. Agarwal, K.C. 2001 Environmental Biology, Nidi Publ. Ltd. Bikaner. 

2. Bharucha Erach, The Biodiversity of India, Mapin Publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahmedabad- 380013, India, 

Email. mapin@icenet.net(R). 

3. Brunner R.C., 1989, Hazardous Waste Incineration, McGraw Hill Inc. 480p. 

4. Clerk RS., Marine Pollution; Clanderson Press Oxford(1B) 

5. Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, E & Hepworth, M. T. 2001, Environmental Encyclopedia, 

Jaico Publishing House, Mumbai, 1196p. . 

6. De A.K., Environmental Chemistry, Wiley Esteem Ltd. 

7. Down to Earth, Centre for Science and Environment(R) 

8. Gleick, H.P.1993. Water in crisis, Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev., Environment & Security. 

Stockholm Env. Institute. 

9. Hawkins R.E., Encyclopedia of Indian Natural History, Bombay Natural History Society, 

Bombay(R). 

10. Heywood, V.H. & Watson, R.T. 1995. Global Biodiversity Assessment. Cambridge Univ. Press 114p. 

11. Jadhav, H& Dosale, V.M. 1995, Environmental Protection and Laws. Himalaya Pub. House, Delhi 

284p. 

12. Mhaskar A.K, Matter Hazardous, Techno-Science Publications(TB). 

13. Miller T.G. Jr., Environmental Science, Wadsworth Publishing Co. em). 

14. Odmn, E.P. 1971. Environments of Ecology. W.B. Saunders Co. USA, 574p. 

15. Rao MN. & Datta, A.K. 1987 . Waste Water treatment. Oxford & IBH Publ. Co. Pvt. Ltd. 345p. 

16.Sharma B.K, 2001. Enviromnental Chemistry. Goel Pub1" House, Meerut. Survey of the 

Environmental The Hindu(M) 

17. Townsend C., Harper J, and Michael Begon, Essentials 0 ecology, Blackwell Science(1B). 

18. Trivedi R.K, Handbook of Environmental Laws, Ru1es, Guidelines Compliances and Standards, Vol 

I and II, Envirol Media(R) 

19. Trivedi R.K and P.K Goel, Introduction to air pollution, Techno-Science Publications (TB). 

20. Wagner KD., 1998. Environmental Management. W.B. Saunders Co. Philadelphia, USA 499p. 

(M) Magazine 

(R) Reference 

(TB) Textbook 

10(356) 


BC-301 

Business Regulatory Framework - I 

10(357) 







equal marks. 

Law of Contract (1872) : Nature of contract; Classification; Offer and acceptance; Capacity of 

parties of contract; Free consent; Consideration; Legality of object; Agreement declared void; 

Performance of contract; Discharge of contract, Remedies for breach of contract. 

Special Contracts: Indemnity & Guarantee, Bailment, Pledge & Agency. 

Partnership Act, 1932. 

Salient features of Right to Information Act 2005 (RTI). 


1. Desai T.R., Indian Contract Act, Sale of Goods Act and Partnership Act, S.C. Sarkar & Sons Pvt. 

Ltd., 

Kolkata. 

2. Singh, Avtar , The Principles of Mercantile Law : Eastern Book Company, Lucknow. 

3. Kuchal, M.C., Business Law; Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi. 

4. Kapoor, N.D., Business Law, Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi. 

5. Chandha, P.R., Business Law, Galgotia, New Delhi. 

6. Chawla & Garg, Mercantile Law, Kalyani Publishers, New Delhi. 


BC-302 

Corporate Accounting - I 

10(358) 







equal marks. 

Issue, Forfeiture and Re-issue of Shares: Redemption of preference shares; Issue and Redemption 

of Debentures. 

Final accounts of Companies: Excluding computation of Managerial Remuneration. 

Accounting for Amalgamation, Absorption of companies as per Indian Accounting Standard 14; 

Accounting for internal reconstruction; excluding re-construction schemes. 


1. Gupta, R.L. and Radhaswamy, M., Company Accounts; Sultan Chand and Sons, New 

Delhi, 2000. 

2. Maheshwari, S.N., Corporate Accounting; Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi, 2000. 

3. Monga, l.R., Ahuja, Girish, and Sehgal, Ashok; Financial Accounting; Mayur Paper Back. 

Noida,2000. 

4. Shukla, M.C., Grewal, T.S.; and Gupta, S.C.; Advanced Accounts; S.Chand & Co. New 

Delhi, 2000. 

5. Moora, C.L. and Jaedick, R.K., Managerial Accounting; South Western Publishing Co., 

Cincinnati, Ohio, 1997. 

6. Agarwala, A.N. and Agarwala K.N., Higher Science of Accountancy; Kitab Mahal, 2001. 


BC-303 

Company Law 

10(359) 







equal marks. 

Introduction- Meaning, characteristics & types of companies. 

Promotion and incorporation of companies. 

Memorandum of Association, Articles of Association, Prospectus; Share Capital, Membership, 

Borrowing powers, mortgages and charges. 

Directors- appointment, powers and Legal position. 

Company meetings- kinds, quorum, voting, resolutions, minutes. 


1. Gower L.C.B., Principles of modern Company Law : Stevens & Sons London,2000. 

2. Ramaiya A., Guide to the Companies Act: Wadhwa & Co, Nagpur, 2000. 

3. Singh Avtar, Company Law : Eastern Book Co., L:ucknow, 2000. 

4. Kuchal M.C., Modern India Company Law : Shri Mahavir Books, Noida,2000. 

5. Kapoor N.D., Company Law- Incorporating the provisions of the Companies 

6. Amendment Act, 2000: Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi, 2000. 

7. Gupta Kamal, Contemporary Auditing; Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi. 

8. Tandon B.N. , Principles of Auditing; S. Chand and Co., New Delhi. 


BC-304 

Business Statistics - I 

10(360) 







equal marks. 

Introduction: Statistics as a subject; Statistical Data: Meaning and types, Collection and Rounding 

of Data, classification and presentation of data. 

Analysis of Univariate Data: Construction of a frequency distribution; concept of central tendency 

and dispersion-and their measures; Moments; Measures of Skewness; Measures of Kurtosis. 

Analysis of Bivariate Data: Linear regression and correlation. 

Index Number: Meaning, types, and uses: Methods of constructing price and quantity indices 

(simple and aggregate); Tests of adequacy; chain-base index numbers; Base shifting, splicing, and 

deflacting; Problems in constructing index numbers; Consumer price index. 


1. Hooda, R.P., Introduction to Statistics, Macmillan, New Delhi, 2002. 

2. Hooda, R.P., statistics for Business and Economics, Macmillan, New Delhi, 1999. 

3. Ya-Lin Chau, Statistical Analysis with Business and Economics: Applications, Holt, 

Reinhard & Winster, 1997. 

4. Lewin and Rubin, Statistics for Management; Prentice-Hall of India, New Delhi, 2000. 

5. Sancheti, D.C. and Kapoor V.K., Statistics (Theory, Methods & application); Sultan Chand 

& Sons, Delhi, 2000. 

6. Hoel & J Assen, Basic Statistics for Business and Economics; John Wiley and Sons, New 

York, 1992. 


BC-305 

Principles of Marketing - I 

10(361) 







equal marks. 

Introduction: Nature and scope of marketing; Importance of marketing as a business function and 

in the economy; marketing concepts- traditional and modern; selling vs. marketing, marketing 

mix; Marketing environment. 

Consumer behaviour and Market Segmentation: Nature, scope and significance of consumer 

behaviour; market segmentation- concept and importance, Bases for market segmentation. 

Product: Concept of product, consumer and industrial goods; product planning and development; 

packaging role and functions; Brand name and trade mark; after-sales service; product life cycle 

concept. 

Suggested readings: 

1. Kotler Phillip: Marketing Management; Prentice-Hall of India, New Delhi, 1986. 

2. Pride, willian M. and Ferrel, O.C.: Marketing; Houghton, Mifflin, Boston. 

3. Stantan, W.J., Etzel Michael J. and Walker Bruce J.,: Fundamentals of Marketing, McGraw- 

Hill, New York. 


BC-306 (i) 

Information Technology and Its Applications in Business 

(Theory Paper) 

10(362) 







equal marks. 

Essentials of Computer: Concept of data, information and data processing; Levels of information; 

Electronic data processing. 

Computer Processing System: Definition of computer, Generation of computers, classification of 

computers; Insights into a digital computer system; Advantages of computers. 

Input/Output devices: “Keyboard”, “Mouse”, MICR, digitlizer, scanners, OCR, microphone, Impact 

and Non-impact printers, Dot-Matrix printers, Laser printers, Plotters, Monitors. 

Memory and Mass Storage Devices: characteristics of memory systems, Memory Hierarchy, Types of 

Memory-Primary, secondary and backup; RAM and ROM; Magnetic Disks-Characteristics, 

classification of magnetic disks; Optical disks, Magnetic Tapes. 

Software Concepts: Types of software and their role, Different system software types-operating 

systems, Tanslators, System utilities; concept of Application Packages; Os and Its types. 

Data communication: Forms of data transmission; primal data transmission; Communication 

Channels-wire cables, Microwave, Fibre-optics, communication satellites; Data transmission speeds; 

Modes of Data Transmission. 

Computer Networks: Key issues for Computer Network, Types of computer networks; Local Area 

Networks (LAN); Wide Area Network (WAN); Public and private networks; Network topology; 

Client-Server Concept. 

Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) : Basics of EDI; Financial EDI; Advantages and applications of EDI. 

Internet and Its Applications: History of Internet, benefits of Internet, H/W and S/W requirements for 

Internet, Applications of Internet, Internet Addressing, ISD Internet in India. Information Revolution 

and IT; Impact of IT on Business environment; Computing and dissemination of Information and 

Knowledge; Convergence of technologies. 

Computer-based Business Applications using MS-Access: Programming under a DBMS environment; 

concept of DBMS; Data field, records, and files, sorting and indexing data; Searching records, 

designing queries and reports; Linking of data files, Understanding programming environment in 

DBMS and developing application using MS-Access. 


1. Gill, N.S., Essentials of Computer and Network Technology, Khanna Book Publishing Co(P) 

Ltd., Delhi. 

2. Knight A.V. and Silk, D.J., Managing Information, McGraw Hill Book Company, New Delhi. 

3. Semdler, Teach Yourself MS-Office, BPB Publications, Delhi. 

4. Bangla, R., Learning MS-Office, 2000, Khanna Book Publishing Co.(P) Ltd., Delhi. 


BC-306(ii) 

Indian Financial System - I 

10(363) 







equal marks. 

Money: Functions theories and money supply in India; Finance: Sources and role of finance in 

Economic Development, Indian Financial System: Components, Financial intermediaries, capital 

and money markets and their instruments; Methods for Note Issues in India. 

Indian Banking System: Definition of bank, Commercial banks importance, functions and 

problems of Non-performing assets; Structure of commercial banking system in India, Regional 

Rural Banks, Co-operative banking in India. 

Credit Creation: Process of Credit creation, functions and its limitations. 


1. Chandle, L.V. and Goldfeld, S.M., The Economic of Money and Banking, Harper and Row, 

New York. 

2. Gupta, S.B., Monetary Planning of India; S. Chand, New Delhi. 

3. Khan, M.Y., India Financial System-Theory and Practice; Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

4. Report on Currency and Finance. 

5. Sengupta, A.K. and Agarwal, M.K., Money Market Operations in India; Skylark 

Publications, New Delhi. 

6. Gupta and Sharma, Indian Financial System, Kalyani Publishers, New Delhi. 


BC-306(iii) 

Fundamentals of Insurance - I 

10(364) 







equal marks. 

Introduction to Insurance: Purpose and need of insurance; Insurance as a social security tool; 

Insurance and economic development. 

Fundamentals of Agency Law: Definition of an agent, Agents Regulations; Insurance 

Intermediaries; Agents, Compensation. 

Procedure for Becoming an Agent: Pre-requisite for obtaining a licence; duration of licence; 

Cancellation of licence; Revocation or suspensation/termination of agent appointment; code of 

conduct; unfair practices. 

Functions of the Agent: Proposal form and other forms for grant of cover, Financial and medical 

underwriting; Material information; Nomination and assignment; Procedure regarding settlement 

of policy claims. 


1. Mishra, M.N., Insurance Principles and Practice; S. Chand and Co., New Delhi. 

2. Insurance Regulatory Development Act, 1999. 

3. Life Insurance Corporation Act, 1956. 

4. Gupta, O.S., Life Insurance, Frank Brothers, New Delhi. 

5. Vinayakam N. Radhaswamy and Vasudevan, S.V., Insurance-Principles and Practice, S. 

Chand and Co., New Delhi. 

6. Mishra, M.N.:,Life Insurance Corporation of India, Vols. I, II & III, Raj Books, Jaipur. 


BC-306(iv) 

Human Resource Management - I 

10(365) 







equal marks. 

Human Resource Management: Concept, benefits and prerequisites; Difference between human 

resource development and human resource management; Role, functions and status of human 

resource manager; Role of chief executives, Line managers and HRD managers in developing 

human resources; Personnel policies, procedures and programmes; Human resource planning; Job 

analysis and Job evaluation. 

Recruitment: Steps in recruitment, recruitment policy, sources and methods of recruitment. 

Selection Process and Policy; Career Planning: objectives and responsibilities; process, 

prerequisites, advantages and limitations of career planning, career problems and their solutions. 


1. K. Aswathappa, Human Resource and Personnel Management, Tata McGraw Hill, New 

Delhi. 

2. V.S.P. Rao, Human Resource Management, Text and Cases, Excel Books. 

3. C.B. Mamoria, Personnel Management, Himalaya Publishing House, New Delhi. 

4. B.P. Singh, T.N. Chhabra and P.L. Taneja, Personnel Management and Industrial Relations, 

Dhanpat Rai and Co., New Delhi. 

5. R.S. Dwivedi, Management of Human Resources, Galgotia Publications. 


BC-401 

Business Regulatory Framework - II 

10(366) 







equal marks. 

Sale of Goods Act 1930 : Formation of contracts of sale; Goods and their classification, Price; 

conditions, and warranties; Transfer of property in goods; Performance of the contract of sales, 

Unpaid seller and his rights, Sale by auction; Hire purchase agreement. 

Negotiable Instrument Act 1881; Definition of negotiable instruments: Features; Promissory note; 

Bill exchange & cheque; types of crossing; Dishonour and discharge of negotiable instrument. 

Consumer Protection Act 1986; Salient features; Definition of Consumer; Grievances Redressal 

Machinery. 

Foreign Exchange Management Act 2000: Definitions and main provisions. 


1. Desai T.R. Indian Contract Act, Sale of Goods Act and Partnership Act, S.C. Sarkar & 

Sons Pvt. Ltd., Kolkata. 

2. Khergsamwala, lS., The Negotiable Instrument Act; N.M. Tripathi, Mumbai. '. 

3. Singh, Avtar, The Principles of Mercantile Law, Eastern Book Company, Lucknow. . 

4. Kuchal, M.C., Business Law; Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi. . . 

5. Kapoor, N.D., Business Law, Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi. 

6. Chandha, P.R, Business Law, Galgotia, New Delhi. 


BC-402 

Corporate Accounting - II 

10(367) 







equal marks. 

Company Accounts: Valuation of Shares and Goodwill. 

Consolidated balance sheet of holding companies with one subsidiary only. 

Liquidation of companies. 

Accounts of Banking and Insurance Companies; Accounts relating to insurance claims. 


1. Gupta, R.L. Radhaswamy, M., Company Accounts, Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi, 

2000. 

2. Maheshwari, SN., Corporate Accounting, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi, 2000. 

3. Monga, lR, Ahuja, Girish, and Sehgal, Ashok, Financial Accounting, Mayur Paper Back. 

Noida, 2000. 

4. Shukla, M.C., Grewal, T.S.; and Gupta, S.C., Advanced Accounts, S. Chand & Co. New 

Delhi, 2000. 

5. Moora, C.L, and Jaedick, R.K., Managerial Accounting; South Western Publishing Co., 

Cincinnati, Ohio, 1997. 

6. Agarwala, AN. and Agarwala K.N.: Higher Science of Accountancy, Kitab Mahal, 2001. 


BC-403 

Auditing 

10(368) 







equal marks. 

Introduction: Meaning and objectives of auditing, types of audits, Internal audit. 

Audit Process: Audit programme; working papers and evidences; 

Routine checking and test checking; 

Internal checking system 

Vouching: Verification of assets and liabilities. 

Audit of Limited Companies-Company Auditor- appointment, power, duties and liabilities, Audit 

Reports, Investigation: Meaning, nature and importance. 


1. Gower L.C.B; Principles of modern Company Law, Stevens & Sons London,2000. 

2. Ramaiya A., Guide to the Companies Act: Wadhwa & Co. Nagpur, 2000. 

3. Singh Avtar, Company Law, Eastern Book Co., Lucknow, 2000. 

4. Kuchal M.C., Modern India Company Law : Shri Mahavir Books, Noida,2000. 

5. Kapoor N.D, company Law- Incorporating the provisions of the Companies. 

6. Gupta Kamal, Contemporary Auditing, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi. 

7. Tandon B.N. Principles of Auditing, S. Chand and Co., New Delhi. 


BC-404 

Business Statistics -II 

10(369) 







equal marks. 

Meaning of Time Series and Uses of Time Series. 

Analysis of Times Series: Causes of variation in time series data; 

Components of a time series; Decomposition-additive and multiplicative models; determination of 

trend- Moving averages method and method of Least Squares (including linear second degree, 

parabolic, and exponential trend); Computation of seasonal-indicates by sample averages, ratio-totrend, 

ratio-to moving average and link relative methods. 

Theory of Probability: Probability as a concept; approaches to defining probability; addition and 

multiplication laws of probability; Conditional probability; Bayes’ Theorem. 

Probability distributions: Probability distribution as a concept; Binomial, Poisson and Normal 

distributions- their properties and parameters. 


1. Hooda, R.P., Introduction to Statistics, Macmillan, New Delhi, 2002. 

2. Hooda, R.P., Statistics for Business and Economics; Macmillan, New Delhi, 1999. 

3. Ya-Lin Chau, Statistical Analysis with Business and Economics: Applications, Holt, 

Reinhard & Winster, 1997. 

4. Lewin and Rubin, Statistics for Management, Prentice-Hall of India, New Delhi, 2000. 

5. Sancheti, D.C. and Kapoor V.K., Statistics (Theory, Methods & application), Sultan Chand 

& Sons, Delhi, 2000. 

6. Hoel & J Assen, Basic Statistics for Business and Economics; John Wiley and Sons, New 

York, 1992. 


BC-405 

Principles of Marketing -II 

10(370) 







equal marks. 

Price: Importance of price in the marketing mix, Factors affecting price of a product/service; 

Discounts and rebates. 

Distribution Channels and Physical Distribution: distribution channels-concept and role; types of 

distribution channels; Factors affecting choice of a distribution channel; Retailer and wholesaler; 

Physical distribution of goods; Transportation; Warehousing; Inventory control; Order processing. 

Promotion: Methods of promotion; Optimum Promotion Mix; Advertising Media: Merits and 

limitations, Characteristics of an effective advertisement, Personal selling, publicity; Sales 

promotion and public relations. 

Suggested readings: 

1. Kotler Phillip: Marketing Management; prentice-Hall of India, New Delhi, 1986. 

2. Pride, willian M. and Ferrel, O.C.: Marketing; Houghton, Mifflin, Boston. 

3. Stantan, W.J., Etzel Michael J. and Walker Bruce J.,: Fundamentals of Marketing, MCGraw- 



BC - 406 (i) 

Information Technology and Its Applications in Business 

(Practical) 

10(371) 

Practical Paper Max 

Mark-50 Marks 


MS Access, Creation of database, forms, reports, programming and developing 

applications. 


1. Gill, N.S.: Essentials of Computer and Network Technology, Khanna Book 

Publishing Co(P) Ltd., Delhi. 

2. Knight A.V., Silk, D.J.: Managing Information, McGraw Hill Book Company, New 

Delhi. 

3. Semdler: Teach Yourself MS-Office, BPD Publications, Delhi. 

4. Bangla, R.: Learning MS-Office, 2000. Khanna Book Publishing Co.(P) Ltd., Delhi. 


BC-406(ii) 

Indian Financial System -II 

10(372) 







equal marks. 

Development Banks- features and functions; State level Development banks: Objectives, functions 

and their role; Non-banking Financial Institutions. 

Reserve Bank of India: Functions, regulation and control of credit, monetary policy. 

Determination and regulation and interest rates in India. 

Venture capital; Credit rating; Merchant banking. 

Institutional financing in India: UTI, LIC and GIC: Objectives, functions investment policies, and 

role in industrial financing. 

Mutual Funds: Meaning, role, importance, types, SEBI guidelines, etc. 


1. Chandle, L.V. and Goldfeld, S.M., The Economic of Money and Banking, Harper and Row, 

New York. 

2. Gupta, S.B., Monetary Planning of India, S. Chand, New Delhi. 

3. Khan, M.Y., India Financial System-Theory and Practice, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

4. Report on Currency and Finance. 

5. Sen Gupta, A.K. and Agarwal, M.K., Money Market Operations in India, Skylark 



BC-406(iii) 

Fundamentals of Insurance –II 

10(373) 







equal marks. 

Profile of Insurance Companies: Organizational set-up of the company; Promotion strategy; 

Market share; Important activities, Structure; Product; Acturial profession; product pricingacturial 

aspects; Distributions channels. 

Principles of Life Insurance/Marine/Fire/Medical/General Insurance. 

Contracts of various kinds; Insurable Interest. 


1. Karam Pal, Bodla B.S. & Garg M.C., Insurance Management, Deep & Deep Publications, 

New Delhi. 

2. Mishra, M.N., Insurance Principles and Practice; S. Chand and Co., New Delhi. 

3. Insurance Regulatory Development Act, 1999. 

4. Life Insurance Corporation Act, 1956. 

5. Gupta, O.S., Life Insurance, Frank Brothers, New Delhi. 

6. Vinayakam N. Radhaswamy and Vasudevan, S.V.: Insurance-Principles and Practice, S. 

Chand and Co., New Delhi. 

7. Mishra, M.N., Life Insurance Corporation of India, Vols. I, II & III, Raj Books, Jaipur. 


BC-406(iv) 

Human Resource Management - II 

10(374) 







equal marks. 

H.R.D. Concept, Benefits and Pre requisites. 

Training and development: Concept and importance of training, training methods/techniques; 

Performance appraisal. 

Wage and salary administration: Promotion, transfer, demotion, separation and absenteeism, 

labour turnover; Personnel records and audit. 

Industrial Relations: Concept, components and approaches. 

Industrial relations in India; HRD practices in Indian Industries; 

Concept and forms of industrial democracy. 


1. K. Aswathappa, Human Resource and Personnel Management, Tata McGraw Hill, New 

Delhi. 

2. V.S.P. Rao: Human Resource Management: Text and Cases, Excel Books. 

3. C.B. Mamoria, Personnel Management, Himalaya Publishing House, New Delhi. 

4. B.P. Singh, T.N. Chhabra and P.L. Taneja, Personnel Management and Industrial Relations, 

Dhanpat Rai and Co., New Delhi. 

5. R.S. Dwivedi, Management of Human Resources, Galgotia Publications. 


BC-501 

Income Tax- I 

10(375) 







equal marks. 

Basic Concepts; Income, agricultural income, casual income, assessment year, previous year, gross 

total income, total income, person; Tax evasion, avoidance, and tax planning. 

Basis of Charges: Scope of total income, residence and tax liability, income which does not form 

part of total income. 

Heads of Income: Salaries, Income from house property. 

Profit and gains of business or profession, including provisions relating to specific business, 

Capital gains; Income from other sources. 

Fringe Benefits 


1. Singhania V.K.: Student’s Guide to Income Tax. 

2. Prasad, Bhagwati: Income Tax Law & Practice. 

3. Mehrotra H.C.: Income Tax Law & Account. 

4. Dinker Pagare: Income Tax Law and Practice. 

5. Girish Ahuja and Ravi Gupta: Systematic Approach. 

6. Chandra Mahesh and Shukla D.C.: Income Tax. 


BC-502 

Cost Accounting - I 

10(376) 







equal marks. 

Introduction: Nature and scope of cost accounting; Cost concepts and classification; Methods and 

techniques; Installation of costing system; Concept of cost audit. 

Accounting for Material: Pricing of material issues; Treatment of material losses, Material control; 

Concept and techniques. 

Accounting for Labour: Labour cost control procedure; Labour turnover; Idle time and overtime; 

Methods of wage payment-time and piece rates; Incentive schemes. 

Accounting for Overheads: Classification and departmentalization; Absorption of overheads; 

Determination of overhead rates; under and over absorption and its formations. 

Cost Ascertainment: Unit costing including tender price and reconciliation of cost and financial 

accounts. 


1. Arora M.N., Cost Accounting-Principles and Practice, Vikas, New Delhi. 

2. Jain S.P. and Narang K.L., Cost Accounting Kalyani, New Delhi. 

3. Anthony Robert, Reece, Principles of Management Accounting; Richard D. Irwin Inc. 

Illinois. 

4. Horngren, Charles, Foster and Dalar, Cost Accounting – A Managerial Emphasis, 

Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. 

5. Khan M.Y. and Jain P.K., Management Accounting; Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

6. Kaplan R.S. and Atkinson A.A., Advanced Management Accounting, Prentice India 

International, New Delhi. 

7. Tulsian P.C., Practical Costing, Vikas, New Delhi. 

8. Maheshwari S.N., Advanced Problems and Solutions in Cost Accounting, Sultan 

Chand & Co., New Delhi. 


BC-503 

Management Accounting and Financial Management -I 

10(377) 







equal marks. 

Management Accounting: Meaning, nature, scope and functions of management accounting; Role 

of Management accounting in decision-making; Management accounting vs. financial accounting; 

Tools and techniques of management accounting. 

Financial Statements: Meaning and types of financial statements; Limitations of financial 

statements; Objectives and methods of financial statements analysis; Ratio analysis; Classification 

of Ratios-Profitability ratios, turnover ratios, liquidity ratios, solvency ratios; Advantages and 

limitations of ratio analysis. 

Funds Flow Statement, Cash Flow statement as per Indian Accounting Standard 3. 

Financial Management: Goals- Profit vs. Wealth maximization; Finance Functions-investment, 

financing and dividend decision, Financial planning, over-capitalization and under capitalization. 

Capital Budgeting: Nature of investment decisions, investment evaluation criteria; Net present 

value (NPV) internal rate of return (IRR), profitability index, payback period, accounting rate of 

return; NPV and IRR comparison, excluding risk analysis. 


1. Arora M.N., Cost Accounting-Principles and Practice; Vikas, New Delhi. 

2. Jain S.P. and Narang K.L., Cost Accounting, Kalyani, New Delhi. 

3. Anthony Robert, Reece, Principles of Management Accounting; Richard D. Irwin Inc. 

Illinois. 

4. Horngren, Charles, Foster and Dalar, Cost Accounting – A Managerial Emphasis, 






BC-504 

Business Environment -I 

10(378) 







equal marks. 

Business Environment: Concept, components, and importance; Environmental scanning 

techniques; 

Economic Trends (overview): Income, Savings and investment, Industry, Trade and balance of 

payments, Money, Finance, Prices. 

Problems of growth: Unemployment; Poverty; Regional imbalances; Social Injustice; Inflation; 

Parallel economy, Industrial sickness-meaning, causes, remedial measures, SICA. 

Role of Government in Indian Economy: Monetary and fiscal policy. 

Industrial policy; Industrial Licensing, Special Economic Zones, Privatization, SEBI - Objectives & 

functions. 


1. Sundaram & Black, The International Business Environment, Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 

2. Aggarwal A.N., Indian Economy, Vikas Publishing House, Delhi. 

3. Khan Farooq A.L., Business and Society, S.Chand, Delhi. 

4. Dutt R. and Sundharam K.P.M., Indian Economy, S. Chand, Delhi. 

5. Misra S.K. and Puri V.K., Indian Economy, Himalaya Publishing House, New Delhi. 

6. Hedge Ianl, Environment Economics, Macmillan, Hampshire. 

7. Dutt Ruddar: Economic Reforms in India-A Critique; S. Chand, New Delhi. 


BC-505 (Opt. – i) 

Financial Market Operations - I 

10(379) 







equal marks. 

An Overview of financial markets in India. 

Money Market; Indian money market’s composition and structure; (a) Acceptance houses, (b) 

Discount houses, and (c) Call money market; Recent trends in Indian Money market; Capital 

market: Security market- (a) New issue market, (b) Secondary market; Functions and role of stock 

exchange; Listing procedure and legal requirements; Public issue-pricing and marketing; Stock 

exchanges- National stock exchange and over-the-counter exchange. 

Securities Contract and Regulations Act: main provisions. 


1. Chandler M.V. and Goldfeld S.M., Economics of Money and Banking, Harper and Row, 

New York. 

2. Gupta Suraj B., Monetary economics, S. Chand and Co., New Delhi. 

3. Gupta Suraj B, Monetary Planning in India, Oxford, Delhi. 

4. Bhole L.M., Financial Markets and Institutions; Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

5. Hooda R.P., Indian Securities Market-Investors view point, Excel Books, New Delhi. 

6. R.B.I., Functions and Working. 

7. R.B.I., Report on currency and finance. 

8. R.B.I., Report of the Committee to Review the Working of the Monetary System: 

Chakravarty Committee. 


BC-505(Opt. – ii) 

International Marketing - I 

10(380) 







equal marks. 

International Marketing: Nature, definition and scope of international marketing; domestic 

marketing vs. international marketing; International marketing environment-economic, cultural, 

Political & legal environment; Identifying and Selecting foreign market; Foreign market entry 

mode decisions. 

Product planning for International Market: Product designing; standardization vs adapatation; 

Branding and packaging; Labelling and quality issues, After sales services. 

International pricing: factors influencing international price, Pricing process and methods; 

international price quotation and payment terms. 

SUGGESTED READINGS 

1. Bhattacharya R.L. and Varshney B, International Marketing Management; Sultan Chand, 

New Delhi. 

2. Bhattacharya B: Export Marketing Strategies for Success; Global Press, New Delhi. 

3. Keegan W.J: Multinational Marketing Management, Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 

4. Kriplani V: International Marketing; Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 

5. Taggart J.H and Moder Mott M.C: The Essence of International Business; Prentice Hall, 

New Delhi. 

6. Kotler Phillip: Principles of Marketing; Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 

7. Fayer Weather John, International Marketing, Prentice Hall, NJ. 

8. Cateora P.M. and Keavenay S.M., Marketing- An International Perspective, Erwin 


9. Paliwala, Stanley J, The Essence of International Marketing; Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 


BC-505(Opt. – iii) 

INVESTMENT MANAGEMENT - I 

10(381) 







equal marks. 

Investment: meaning, nature and process; Investment alternatives, concept and Measurement of 

Investment risk and return, Identification of Investment Opportunity; Stock Exchange; Functions, 

trading system, Regulation and listing of securities. 

Fundamental analysis; company analysis; industry analysis and economy analysis; Technical Vs 

Fundamental analysis; Implications for investment decision-making; Technical analysis; Dow 

theory, Charting techniques, Volume indicators. 

Valuation of Securities: equity, bonds and convertible securities. 


1. Fischer, Donald E. and Jordon, Ronald J., Security analysis and Portfolio 

Management, Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 

2. Fuller, Russell J. and Farrell, James L., Modern Investments and Security analysis. 

McGraw Hill, International Edition (finance Services) New York. 

3. Sharpe, William F., Alexander, Gordon J. and Baily, Jafery V.S., Investments, Prentice 

Hall of India, New Delhi. 

4. Bhalla, V.K. security analysis and Portfolio management, Sultan Chand, New Delhi. 


BC-505(Opt. – iv) 

INDIRECT TAXES - I 

10(382) 







equal marks. 

Central Excise: Nature and scope of Central Excise; Important terms and definitions under the 

Central Excise Act; General procedures of central excise; Clearance and excisable goods; 

Concession to small scale industry under Central Excise Act; CENVAT. 

Customs: Role of customs in international trade; Important terms and definitions under the 

Customs Act 1952; Assessable value; Baggage; Bill of entry; Dutiable goods; Duty; Exporter; 

Foreign going vessel; Aircraft goods; Import; Import Manifest; Importer; Prohibited goods; 

shipping bill; store; Bill of Lading ; ‘Export Manifest; Letter of credit; Kinds of duties –basic, 

auxiliary, additional or countervailing; Basics of levy-advalorem, specific duties; Prohibition of 

export and import of goods, and Provisions regarding notified & specified goods; Import of 

goods-free import and restricted import; Type of import –import of cargo, import of personal 

baggage, import of stores. 

Clearance Procedure- For home consumption, for warehousing, for re-export. 

Clearance procedure for import by post; Prohibited exports; canalized exports; Exports against 

licensing; ‘type of exports, export of cargo, export of baggage; Export of cargo by land, sea, and 

air routes. 

SUGGESTED READINGS: 

1. Central Excise Act. 

2. Customs Act. 

3. Central Sales Tax Act. 

4. Ahuja Girish & Gupta Ravi: Practical approach to Income tax, Wealth Tax and Central 

sales tax (Problems and Solutions with Multiple choice questions), Bharat Law House 

Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi. 


BC-505(Opt. – v) 

ADVERTISING AND SALES MANAGEMENT - I 

10(383) 







equal marks. 

Communication Process: Basic communication process, role of source; Encoding and decoding of 

message, media, audience, feedback, and noise. 

Advertising and Communication mix: Different advertising functions; Types of advertising; 

Economic social aspects of advertising; advertising process-an overview; setting advertising 

objectives and budget. 

Creative aspects of Advertising: Advertising appeals, copy writing, headlines, illustration, 

message, copy types. 

Advertising Media: Different types of media; Media planning and scheduling. 

SUGGESTED READING: 

1. Asker, David and Myers John G., Advertising Management, Prentice Hall of India , New 

Delhi. 

2. Border W.H., Advertising, John Wiley, N Y. 

3. Oglvy D., Ogivy on Advertisding, Longman Publication. 

4. Aaker David A, Batra Rajeev, Myers G., Advertising Management, Prentice Hall of India, , 

New Delhi. 

5. Sengupta Subroto, Brand Positioning Strategies for Competitive Advantage, Tata McGraw 

Hill, New Delhi. 

6. Cundiff Still and Govani: Sales Management, Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 

7. Rorsiter John R. and Percy Larry, Advertising and Promotion Management; McGraw Hill , 

New York. 

8. Sundage, Fryburger, Rotzoll, Advertising Theory and Practice, AITBS, New Delhi. 

9. Skill, Richarcd R., Gundiff, Edwars W & Govani, Norman A.P., Sasles Management, PM. 


BC-505(Opt. – vi) 

Essentials of E-commerce - I 

10(384) 







equal marks. 

Introduction to E-Commerce:-Business operations; E-commerce practices vs. traditional business 

practices; concepts of b2b, b2c,c2c,b2g,g2h,g2c; Features of E-Commerce, Types of E-Commerce 

Systems, Elements of E-Commerce, principles of E-Commerce, Benefits and Limitations of E- 

Commerce. 

Management Issues relating to e-commerce. 

Operations of E-commerce: Credit card transaction; Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol (SHTP); 

Electronic payment systems; Secure electronic transaction (SET); SET`s encryption; Process; 

Cybercash; Smart cards; Indian payment models. 

Applications in governance: EDI in governance; E-government; E-Governance applications of 

Internet; concept of government –to- business, business-to-government and citizen-togovernment; 

E-governance models; Private sector interface in E-governance. 

Applications in B2C: Consumers shopping procedure on the Internet; Impact on disinter 

mediation and re-intermediation; Global market; Strategy of traditional department stores; 

Products in b2c model; success factors of e-brokers; Broker-based services on-line; On-line travel 

tourism services; Benefits and impact of e-commerce on travel industry; Deal estate market; 

online stock trading and its benefits; Online banking and its benefits; On-line financial services 

and their future; E-auctions – benefits, implementation and impact. 


1. Turban E,. Lee J., King D. and Chung H.M: Electronic commerce-a Managerial Perspective, 

Prentice-Hall International, Inc. 

2. Bhatia V., E-commerce, Khanna Book Pub. Co.(P) Ltd., Delhi. 


BC-601 

Income Tax - II 

10(385) 







equal marks. 

Clubbing and Aggregation of Income, Set-off and Carry Forward of Losses. 

Deduction under section 80C to 80U in Computing Total Income. 

Computation of Tax Liability 

Computation of Total Income and Tax Liability of an Individual, H.U.F. and Firm. 

Income Tax Authorities 

Procedure for Assessment 

Deduction of Tax at Source 

Advance Payment of Tax 

Recovery of Tax and Refund of Tax 

Appeals, Revision, Penalties and Prosecutions. 


1. Singhania V.K., Student’s Guide to Income Tax. 

2. Prasad, Bhagwati, Income Tax Law & Practice. 

3. Mehrotra H.C., Income Tax Law & Account. 

4. Dinker Pagare, Income Tax Law and Practice. 

5. Girish Ahuja and Ravi Gupta, Systematic Approach. 

6. Chandra Mahesh and Shukla D.C., Income Tax. 


BC-602 

Cost Accounting - II 

10(386) 







equal marks. 

Job, batch and contract costing; Operating costing; Process costing-including inter-process profits 

(excluding equivalent production) and joint and by-products; Cost records: Integral and nonintegral 

system: Standard Costing and variance analysis-Material and labour variance only; 

Budgetary control. Marginal Costing and Break-even analysis. 


1. Arora M.N., Cost Accounting-Principles and Practice; Vikas, New Delhi. 


3. Anthony Robert, Reece, Principles of Management Accounting, Richard D. Irwin Inc. 

Illinois. 

4. Horngren, Charles, foster and Dalar, Cost Accounting – A Managerial Emphasis, 


5. Khan M.Y. and Jain P.K., Management Accounting, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

6. Kaplan R.S. and Atkinson A.A.: Advanced Management Accounting, Prentice India 


7. Tulsian P.C., Practical Costing, Vikas, New Delhi. 

8. Maheshwari S.N., Advanced Problems and Solutions in Cost Accounting, Sultan 

Chand & Co., New Delhi. 


BC-603 

Management Accounting and Financial Management - II 

10(387) 







equal marks. 

Management of Working Capital: Nature of working Capital, Significance of working capital, 

operating cycle and factors determining of working capital requirements. Estimation of working 

capital. 

Sources of Finance: short term and long term. 

Cost of Capital: Significance of cost of capital; Calculating cost of debt; Preference, Equity and 

Retained Earnings; Combined (Weighted) cost of capital. 

Capital structure theories and determinants; Leverage: Operating, financial and combined. 

Dividend Policies: Issues in dividend policies; Walter’s Model, Gordon’s Model; M.M. Hypothesis; 

Forms of dividends, stability in dividends and its determinants. 


1. Arora M.N., Cost Accounting-Principles and Practice, Vikas, New Delhi. 


3. Anthony Robert, Reece, Principles of Management Accounting, Richard D. Irwin Inc. 

Illinois. 

4. Horngren, Charles, foster and Dalar: Cost Accounting – A Managerial Emphasis, 






BC-604 

Business Environment - II 

10(388) 







equal marks. 

Economics Systems. 

Economic Planning- Concept, Types of plans, Economic Planning in India: Five Year Plans and 

Planning Machinery. 

International Business Environment: International environment (overview); Globalization; Trends 

in world trade and the problems of developing countries; 

Foreign trade and economic growth. 

International Economic Institutions –WTO, UNCTAD, World Bank, IMF; Export-Import Policy, 

Foreign Investment and Collaborations; Regional Economic groupings: meaning, types and 

advantages. 

Multinational Enterprises (MNEs). 


1. Sundaram & Black, The International Business Environment, Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 

2. Aggarwal A.N., Indian Economy, Vikas Publishing House, Delhi. 

3. Khan Farooq A.L., Business and Society, S.Chand, Delhi. 

4. Dutt R. and Sundharam K.P.M., Indian Economy, S. Chand, Delhi. 

5. Misra S.K. and Puri V.K. Indian Economy, Himalaya Publishing House, New Delhi. 

6. Dutt Ruddar, Economic Reforms in India-A Critique; S. Chand, New Delhi. 


BC-605 (Opt. – i) 

Financial Market Operations - II 

10(389) 







equal marks. 

Investors protection: Grievances concerning stock exchange dealings and their removal; grievance 

cells in stock exchanges; SEBI; Company Law Board; Press; Remedy through courts. 

Functionaries on Stock exchanges: Brokers, sub-brokers, market makers, jobbers, portfolio 

consultants, institutional investors, and NRIs. 

Financial services: Merchant banking-functions and roles, SEBI guidelines; Credit rating-concept, 

functions and types. 


1. Chandler M.V. and Goldfeld S.M., Economics of Money and Banking, Harper and Row, 

New York. 

2. Gupta Suraj B., Monetary economics, S. Chand and Co., New Delhi. 

3. Gupta Suraj B., Monetary Planning in India, Oxford, Delhi. 

4. Bhole L.M., Financial Markets and Institutions, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

5. Hooda R.P., Indian Securities Market-investors view point, Excel Books, New Delhi. 

6. R.B.I., Functions and Working. 

7. R.B.I., Report on Currency and Finance. 

8. R.B.I., Report of the Committee to Review the Working of the Monetary System: 

Chakravarty Committee. 


BC-605(Opt. – ii) 

International Marketing - II 

10(390) 







equal marks. 

Promotion of Product/services in international markets: Methods of international promotion; 

Direct mail and sales literature; Advertising; Personal selling; Trade fairs and exhibitions. 

International Distribution: Distribution channels and logistics decisions; Selection and 

appointment of foreign sales agents. 

Planning, organizing and controlling of International Marketing; Exim policy-an overview; Trends 

in India`s foreign trade. 

SUGGESTED READINGS 

1. Bhattacharya R.L. and Varshney B; International Marketing Management; Sultan Chand, 

New Delhi. 

2. Bhattacharya B, Export Marketing Strategies for Success; Global Press, New Delhi. 

3. Keegan W.J., Multinational Marketing Management, Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 

4. Kriplani V., International Marketing; Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 

5. Taggart J.H and Moder Mott M.C., The Essence of International Business; Prentice Hall, 

New Delhi. 

6. Kotler Phillip, Principles of Marketing, Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 

7. Fayer Weather John, International Marketing, Prentice Hall, NJ. 

8. Cateora P.M. and Keavenay S.M., Marketing- An International Perspective; Erwin 


9. Paliwala, Stanley J, The Essence of International Marketing, Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 


BC-605(Opt. – iii) 

INVESTMENT MANAGEMENT - II 

10(391) 







equal marks. 

Market Efficiency: Weak form, semi-strong form and strong form. Bond analysis: Yield to 

maturity, term structure of interest rates and bond market efficiency. 

Diversification: meaning, gains from diversifications, Markowitz’s mean-variance criterion, 

Sharpe Model. Capital Assets Pricing Model (CAPM); meaning and assumptions, capital market 

line, securities market line, APT. Investment Performance Evaluation-Sharpe, Treynor, and Jensen 

models. 

Options and Futures: meaning, nature and difference between options and Futures, Forms and 

types of Option and Futures contracts, advantages and limitations of options and futures. 


1. Fischer, Donald E. and Jordon, Ronald J., Security Analysis and Portfolio, Management, 

Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 

2. Fuller, Russell J. and Farrell, James L., Modern Investments and Security Analysis, 

McGraw Hill, International Edition (finance Services) New York. 

3. Sharpe, William F., Alexander, Gordon J. and Baily, Jafery Vs Investment Prentice Hall of 


4. Bhalla, V.K. Security Analysis and Portfolio Management, Sultan Chan, New Delhi. 


BC-605(Opt. – iv) 

INDIRECT TAXES - II 

10(392) 







equal marks. 

Central Sales Tax.: Important terms and definitions under the Central sales Tax Act 1956- Dealer, 

declared good, place of business, sale, sale price, turnover, year, appropriate authority; Nature and 

scope of Central Sales Tax Act; Provisions relating to inter-state sales; Sales inside a state; 

Sales/purchase in the course of imports and deemed exports. 

Registration of dealers and procedure thereof; Rate of tax; Exemption of subsequent sales; 

Determination of turnover; Sales against `C` and `D` forms. 

Principles for determining levy of central sales tax; concept of sale or purchase of goods in the 

course of central/state trading; When does sales or purchase of goods take place inside the state; 

When does the sale or purchase of goods take place in the course of imports or exports. 

VAT- Important definition, Appellet Authority, Assessee, Assessing Authority, Business, Capital 

Goods, Dealer, Declared Goods, Contractor, Contractee and Gross Turn Over. 

Incidence and Levey of Tax, Registration of Dealer, Information to be submitted regarding change 

of business. 

Filing return, Assessment and Collection of Tax and Refund. 

SUGGESTED READINGS: 

1. Central Excise Act. 

2. Customs Act. 

3. Central Sales Tax Act. 

4. Ahuja Girish & Gupta Ravi, Practical approach to Income tax, Wealth Tax and Central 

sales tax (Problems and Solutions with Multiple choice questions); Bharat Law House 

Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi. 


BC-605(Opt. – v) 

ADVERTISING AND SALES MANAGEMENT - II 

10(393) 







equal marks. 

Impact of Advertising : Advertising agency roles, relationship with clients, advertising 

department; Measuring advertising effectiveness; Legal and ethical aspects of advertising. 

Sales Management: Sales Management, Personal Selling and Salesmanship, Organising the sales 

efforts; Sales force management : Recruitment, Selection, Training, Motivation, Compensating and 

Controlling sales personnel, Sales Budget, Sales quotas and Sales Territories. 

SUGGESTED READING: 

1. Asker, David and Myers John G., Advertising Management, Prentice Hall of India , 

New Delhi. 

2. Border W.H., Advertising, John Wiley, N Y. 

3. Oglvy D., Ogivy on Advertisding, Longman Publication. 

4. Aaker Daind A, Batra Rajeev, and Myers G: Advertising Management, Prentice Hall of 

India, , New Delhi. 

5. Sengupta Subroto, Brand Positioning Strategies for Competitive Advantage; Tata 

McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

6. Cundiff Still and Govani, Sales Management, Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 

7. Rorsiter John R, and Percy Larry, Advertising and Promotion Management, Mc Graw 

Hill , New York. 

8. Sundage, Fryburger, Rotzoll, Advertising Theory and Practice; AITBS, New Delhi. 

9. Skill, Richarcd R., Gundiff, Edwars W & Govani, Norman A.P., Sasles Management, 

PM. 


BC-605(Opt. – vi) 

Essentials of E-commerce - II 

10(394) 







equal marks. 

Applications in B2B: Key technologies for b2b; architectural models of b2b, characteristics of the 

supplier –oriented marketplace, buyer-oriented marketplace and intermediary-oriented 

marketplace; Just In Time delivery in b2b; Internet-based EDI from traditional EDI; Marketing 

Issues in b2b. 

Emerging Business models: Retail model; Media model; advisory model, made-to-order 

manufacturing model; Do-it- yourself model; Information service model; Emerging hybrid 

models; Emerging models in India. 

Internet & E-Commerce scenario in India; Internet security Issues; Legal aspects of E-commerce 


1. Turban E,. Lee J., King D. and Chung H.M, Electronic commerce-a Managerial Perspective, 

Prentice-Hall International, Inc. 

2. Bhatia V., E-Commerce, Khanna Book Pub. Co.(P) Ltd., Delhi. 


Advertising, Sales Promotion and Sales Management 

(Vocational Course) 

Each student who has opted for the above said course shall opt two theory papers in each 

Semester in addition to four papers common with B.Com. General Scheme. 

Outline of B.Com. (Vocational) Advertising Sales, Promotion and Sales Management 

Semester –I 

Paper Code Subject External Internal Max. Marks 

BC-101 Business Communication - I 80 20 100 

BC-102 Business Mathematics - I 80 20 100 

BC-103 Financial Accounting - I 80 20 100 

BC-104 Business Management - I 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-105 Marketing Communication-I 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-106 Advertising-I 80 20 100 



BC-201 Business Communication - II 80 20 100 

BC-202 Business Mathematics – II 80 20 100 

BC-203 Financial Accounting – II 80 20 100 

BC-204 Business Management - II 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-205 Marketing Communication-II 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-206 Advertising-II 80 20 100 

Environment Studies: (Qualifying Paper)* - - 100 



BC-301 Business Regulatory Framework - I 80 20 100 

BC-302 Corporate Accounting - I 80 20 100 

BC-303 Company Law 80 20 100 

BC-304 Business Statistics – I 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-305 Advertising-II(i) 80 - 80 

BC(Voc)-306 Personal Selling and Salesmanship-I 80 - 80 

BC(Voc)-307 On-the-Job Training Report - - 40 

10(395) 




BC-401 Business Regulatory Framework – II 80 20 100 

BC-402 Corporate Accounting – II 80 20 100 

BC-403 Auditing 80 20 100 

BC-404 Business Statistics – II 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-405 Advertising-II(ii) 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-406 Personal Selling and Salesmanship-II 80 20 100 

Semester –V 


BC-501 Income Tax – I 80 20 100 

BC-502 Cost Accounting - I 80 20 100 

BC-503 Management Accounting & 

80 20 100 

Financial Management – I 

BC-504 Business Environment - I 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-505 Management of Sales Force-I 80 - 80 

BC(Voc)-506 Sales Promotion and Public Relations-I 80 - 80 


Semester –VI 


BC-601 Income Tax – II 80 20 100 

BC-602 Cost Accounting - II 80 20 100 


Financial Management – II 

80 20 100 

BC-604 Business Environment - II 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-605 Management of Sales Force-II 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-606 

Objectives: 

Sales Promotion and Public Relations-II 80 20 100 

The course is intended to impart knowledge and develop skill among the participants in the field of marketing 

communication, so as to equip them to maintain junior and lower middle level positions in the fast growing and 

challenging business areas of advertising, sales promotion, selling and sales management and public relations. 

They are required to undergo training in advertising agencies. Sales/marketing department of industrial houses 

etc. 

After having completed on-the-job training, every student will be required to submit a report which would be 

called ‘On-the-Job Training Report’ at least one month before the commencement of B.Com-IIIrd Semester and 

B.Com-Vth Semester examination. Such training reports would be got evaluated by external and internal 

examiners. There will be viva-voce for there Training Report. 

Not more than two students be allowed to undertake training in the same organization. 

The duration of this vocational course shall be three academic years. The candidates will be awarded B.Com 

degree with advertising, sales promotion and sales management (Vocational Course) and they shall be eligible to 

seek admission to M.Com and other Post-Graduate classes just like other B.Com students. 


However, the examination will be conducted alongwith IInd Semester. 

10(396) 


BC(Voc)-105 

Marketing Communication-I 

10(397) 







equal marks. 

- Nature and Importance of Communication. 

- Communication Process, Elements of the Communication Process. 

- Application of Communication Process in Marketing Steps in Developing Effective 

Marketing Communication. 

- Emerging trends in marketing communication 

- Social, ethical and economic aspects of marketing communication. 

Suggested References: 

1.Philip Kotler, Marketing Management, (Prentice Hall of India, New 

Delhi). 

2. Subroto Sen Gupta : Case in Advertising and Communication Management in 

India (IIM, Ahmedabad). 

3. Belch, George, E. and Michael A. Belch, Advertising and Promotion, Tata McGraw 

Hill. 


BC(Voc)-106 

Advertising-I 

10(398) 







equal marks. 

- Importance of Advertising in Modem Marketing. Role of Advertising in the 

National Economy. 

- Types of Advertising: Commercial and Non-commercial Advertising, Primary 

Demand and Selective Demand, Advertising; Classified and display advertising. 

Comparative Advertising Co-operative Advertising. 

- Setting of Advertising Objectives. 

- Setting of advertising Budget. Factors Affecting the Advertising Expenditure in a 

Company. 


1. Duna and Darban: Advertising: Its Role in Modern Market (The Drydon 

Press) (Relevant Chapters). 

2. Philip Kotler : Marketing Management 8th Ed. (Prentice Hall of India) CHAP 

22. 

3. Mahendra Mohan : Advertising (Tata McGraw Hill) (Relevant Chapters). 

4. Subroto Sen Gupta : Cases in Advertising and Communication Management in 

India (IIM, Ahmedabad) 


BC(Voc)-205 

Marketing Communication-II 

10(399) 







equal marks. 

- Methods of Marketing Communication. 

- Advertising Personal Selling, Public Relations, Sales Promotion, their meaning and 

distinctive characteristics. 

- Setting up of Targets-Policies, Strategies and Methods of Achievements. 

- Integrated Communication in Marketing: Meaning, Importance process and tools. 


1. Philip Kotler, Marketing Management, (Prentice Hall of India, New 

Delhi). 

2. Subroto Sen Gupta : Case in Advertising and Communication Management in 

India (IIM, Ahmedabad). 

3. Belch, George, E. and Michael A. Belch, Advertising and Promotion, Tata McGraw 

Hill. 


BC(Voc)-206 

Advertising-II 

10(400) 







equal marks. 

Creativity in Advertising. 

Advertising Message, Preparing and Effective Advertising Copy; Elements of a Print 

Copy: Headlines, illustration, Bodycopy, Slogan, Loge, Elements of a Broadcast Copy, 

Copy for direct Mail, In flight advertising, Transit advertising. 


1. Duna and Darban: Advertising: Its Role in Modern Market (The Drydon 

Press) (Relevant Chapters). 

2. Philip Kotler : Marketing Management 8th Ed. (Prentice Hall of India) CHAP 

22. 

3. Mahendra Mohan : Advertising (Tata McGraw Hill) (Relevant Chapters). 

4. Subroto Sen Gupta : Cases in Advertising and Communication Management in 

India (IIM, Ahmedabad) 


BC(Voc)-305 

Advertising-II(i) 

10(401) 


Time: 3 hours 




equal marks. 

- Advertising Media, Types of Media; Print Media, (News paper and Magazines, 

Pamphlets, Posters, and Brochures) Electronic Media (Radio, Television, Audio- 

Visuals, Cassettes), Other Media (Direct Mail, Outdoor Media), Their 

Characteristics, Merits and Limitations, Media Scene in India, Problems of 

Reaching Rural Audience and Markets. Exhibitions and Mela Press Conference. 

- Media Planning, Selection of Media Category, their Reach, Frequency and 

Impact. Cost and other Factors Influencing the choice of Media. 

- Media Scheduling. 


1. Russel, Beach and Buskirk: Selling (McGraw-Hill) 

2. Still, Cundiff and Govent: Sales Management (Prentice Hall of India). 

3. J.S.K.Patel: Salesmanship and Publicity (Sultan Chand & sons, New Delhi). 

4. Johnson, Kirtz and Schueing: Sales Management (McGraw Hill). 


BC(Voc)-306 

Personal Selling and Salesmanship-I 

10(402) 


Time: 3 hours 




equal marks. 

- Nature and Importance of Personal Selling. Door-to-door, selling Situations. 

Where Personal Selling is more effective than Advertising. Cost of Advertising vs. 

Cost of Personal Selling. 

- AIDA Model of Selling. Types of Selling Situations. Types of Sales persons. 

- Buying Motives Types of Markets Consumer and Industrial Markets, their 

Characteristics and Implications for the Selling function. 

- Process of Effective Selling: Prospecting, Pre-Approach, Approach, Presentation 

and Demonstration, Handling No Objections, Closing sale and post-sale activities. 






5. Gupta S.L., Sales and Distribution Management, Excel Books. 


BC(Voc)-405 

Advertising-II(ii) 

10(403) 







equal marks. 

- Advertising Department. Its Organisation and Functions. 

- Evaluation of Advertising Effectiveness. Importance and Difficulties. Methods of 

Measuring Advertising effectiveness. Pre-Testing and Post-Testing. 

- Regulation of Advertising in India. Misleading advertising and False Claims. 

- Advertising Agencies: Functions, Selection of Advertising Agency, Agency 

Commission and Fee. Client Agency Relationships. 







BC(Voc)-406 

Personal Selling and Salesmanship-II 

10(404) 







equal marks. 

- Qualities of the successful sales person with particular reference to consumer 

services. 

- Selling as a career, advantages and difficulties, measures for making selling and 

attractive career. 

- Distribution network relationship. 

- Reports and documents; sale manual, order desk, cash memo, tour diary, diary 

and periodical reports. 

- Other problems in selling. 







BC(Voc)-505 

Management of Sales Force-I 


Time: 3 hours 




equal marks. 

- Importance of the Sales Force and Its Management. 

- Functions of Sales Manager. 

- Recruitment and Selection 

- Training and Direction 

- Motivation and Compensation 

- Appraisal of Performance 

- Sales Force Size, Organisation of the Sales Department : Geographic, Product-wise, 

Market-Based. 


1. Stanton and Buskrik: Management of the Sales Force (Richard D. Irwin). 

2. Philip Kotler: Marketing Management 8 th Ed. (Prentice Hall of India). 

10(405) 


BC(Voc)-506 

Sales Promotion and Public Relations-I 

10(406) 


Time: 3 hours 




equal marks. 

- Nature and importance of sales Promotion. Its Role in marketing. 

- Forms of Sales Promotion: Consumer-Oriented; motion, Trade-oriented Sales 

Promotion and Sales Oriented Sales Promotion. 

- Major Tools of Sales Promotion: Sample, Purchase. Displays and Demonstrations. 

Exhibitions Fashion shows, Sales Contests and Games of chance and Skill, Lotteries, 

Gifts Offers, Premium and Free goods, Rebates, Patronage, Rewards. 

- Conventions, Conference and Tradeshows, Specific: Novelties. 

- 



2. J.S.K. Patel: Salesmanship and Publicity (Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi.) 

3. Stanton & Futrell: Fundamentals of Marketing 7 th Ed. (McGraw Hill). 


BC(Voc)-605 

Management of Sales Force-II 

10(407) 







equal marks. 

- Sales Planning; Market Analysis and Sales Forecasting, Methods of Forecasting 

Sales. 

- Sales Budget: Importance, Process of Sales Budget, Uses of Sales Budget. 

- Sales Territory: Meaning, Importance, Process and Consideration in Allocation of 

Sales Territory. 

- Sales Quota: Objectives, Principles of Setting Sales Quota, Administration of Sales 

Quota. Uses of Sales Quota. 

- Sales and Cost Analysis: Uses and Methods. 

- Ethical considerations in sales force management. 


1. Stanton and Buskrik: Management of the Sales Force (Richard D. Irwin). 



BC(Voc)-606 

Sales Promotion and Public Relations-II 

10(408) 







equal marks. 

- Developing and Sales Promotion Programmes, Pre Testing Implementing, 

Evaluating the Results and marking Necessary Modifications. 

- Public Relations: Meaning, Features, Growing Importance Role in Marketing, 

Similarities of Publicity and Relations. 

- Major Tools of Public Relations; News, SPEECHES Special Events, Handouts and 

Leaflets, Audio- Visual, Public service activities, Miscellaneous Tools. 

- Ethical and Local Aspects of Sales Promotion and Public Relations. 



2. J.S.K. Patel: Salesmanship and Publicity (Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi.) 

3. Stanton & Futrell: Fundamentals of Marketing 7 th Ed. (McGraw Hill). 

4. Belch, George, E. and Michael A. Belch, Advertising and Promotion, Tata 

McGraw, Hill. 


Principles and Practice of Insurance 




Semester –I 

Outline of B.Com. (Vocational) Principles and Practice of Insurance 


BC-101 Business Communication – I 80 20 100 

BC-102 Business Mathematics – I 80 20 100 

BC-103 Financial Accounting – I 80 20 100 

BC-104 Business Management – I 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-105 Life Insurance-I 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-106 General Insurance -I 80 20 100 



BC-201 Business Communication – II 80 20 100 



BC-204 Business Management – II 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-205 Life Insurance -II 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-206 General Insurance -II 80 20 100 

Environmental Studies: (Qualifying Paper)* - - 100 



BC-301 Business Regulatory Framework – I 80 20 100 

BC-302 Corporate Accounting – I 80 20 100 



BC(Voc)-305 Fire Insurance 80 - 80 

BC(Voc)-306 Insurance Finance and Legislation-I 80 - 80 


10(409) 






BC-403 Auditing 80 20 100 


BC(Voc)-405 Marine Insurance 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-406 Insurance Finance and Legislation-II 80 20 100 

Semester –V 


BC-501 Income Tax – I 80 20 100 

BC-502 Cost Accounting – I 80 20 100 



80 20 100 


BC(Voc)-505 Property and Liability Insurance-I 80 - 80 

BC(Voc)-506 Group Insurance and Retirement 

Benefit Schemes-I 

80 - 80 






BC-603 Management Accounting & Financial Management – II 80 20 100 

BC-604 Business Environment – II 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-605 Property and Liability Insurance-II 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-606 Group Insurance and Retirement Benefit Schemes –II 80 20 100 

Each student will be required to undergo on-the-job training of four weeks duration during the vacation after IInd 

Semester and IVth Semester examinations. The purpose of such training is to appraise the student with the functions of 

Insurance Companies. Insurance Agents and other associated agencies including the preparation and filling of insurance 

proposal forms and other related documents, claims, maintenance and keeping of account books and other office 

records. For this purpose, the student will be attached with any office of the Life Insurance Corporation, General 

Insurance, Corporation or with Development Officers/full time insurance agents. They can even enroll themselves as 

insurance Agent and work under a Development officer for this duration, if they so desire. Not more than two students 

be allowed to undertake training in the same organization. On completion of ‘On-the-Job Training’ each student will be 

required to submit a report which would be called ‘On-the-Job Training Report’ atleast one month before the 

commencement of B.Com-IIIrd Semester and B.Com-Vth Semester examinations respectively and such training reports 

will be evaluated by External and Internal Examiners. There will be a viva-voce for these Training Reports. 

The duration of this vocational course shall be three academic years. The candidate will be awarded B.Com. degree with 

Principles and Practice of Insurance (Vocational Course) and shall be eligible to get admission to M.Com and other post- 

graduate courses like other B.Com students. 



10(410) 


BC(Voc)-105 

Life Insurance-I 

10(411) 







equal marks. 

Introduction: Need of security against economic difficulties, Risk and uncertainty; 

Individual values system; Individual Life Insurance. Nature and uses of Life Insurance; 

Life Insurance as a collateral, as a measure of financing business continuation, as a 

protection to property, as a measure of investment. 

Life Insurance Contract: Distinguishing characteristics, Utmost Good faith, Insurable 

Interest, Caveat Emptor, Unilateral and aleatory nature of contract. Proposal and 

application form, warranties, medical examination, policy construction and delivery, 

policy provision, lapse revival, surrender value, paid-up policies, maturity, nomination 

and assignment. Suicide and payment of insured amount; Loan to Policy-holders. 

Life Insurance Risk: Factors governing sum assured; Methods of calculating economic risk 

in life insurance proposal. Measurement of risk and mortality table; Calculation of 

premium; Treatment of sub-standard risks. Life Insurance Fund; Valuation and 

investment of surplus: payment of bonus. 

Suggested Books : 

1. Karam Pal, Bodla B.S. and Garg M.C., Insurance Management, Deep & Deep 


2. Huebner S.S. and Kennerth Black Jr.:Life Insurance (Prentice Hall Inc. 

Englewood Chiffs, New Jersey). 

3. Meher Robert, L. : Life Insurance; Theory and Practice (Business 

Publications, Texas). 

4. Maclean: Life Insurance 

5. Gupta O.S. : Life Insurance-(Frank Brothers, New Delhi). 

6. Mishra, M.N.: Insurance Principles and Practice (Delhi, Vikas Publishing 

House). 


BC(Voc)-106 

General Insurance-I 

10(412) 







equal marks. 

Introduction to risk and insurance 

(a) Risk (b) The treatment of risk. 

The structure and operation of the Insurance Business 

(a) Insurance contract fundamentals. 

(b) Insurance marketing. 

(c) Insurance loss payment. 

(d) Underwriting rating, reinsurance, and other functions. 

General Insurance Corporation and other Insurance Institutions-working of GIC in India; 

Types of risks assumed and specific policies issued by ECGC. 

Suggested Reference: 

1. General Insurance by Biakelhaupt and Magee, Eighth Edition, Published by 

Richard D. Irwin, Inc., Homewood, Illinois, Irwin Dorsey Limited, George-town, 

Ontario, chapters: 1 to 7, 13,21,27 and 28. 


BC(Voc)-205 

Life Insurance-II 

10(413) 







equal marks. 

Life Insurance Policies: Types and their applicability to different situations. Important Life 

Insurance Policies issued by the Life Insurance Corporation of India. Life Insurance 

annuities, Important Legal provisions and judicial pronouncements in India. 

Life Insurance Salesmanship: Rules of agency; essential qualities of an ideal insurance 

salesman; Rules to canvass business from prospective customers; After-sale service to 

policy-holders. 


1. Huebner S.S. and Kennerth Black Jr.:Life Insurance (Prentice Hall Inc. 


2. Meher Robert, L.: Life Insurance; Theory and Practice (Business 

Publications, Texas). 

3. Maclean: Life Insurance 

4. Gupta O.S.: Life Insurance-(Frank Brothers, New Delhi). 

5. Mishra, M.N.: Insurance Principles and Practice (Delhi, Vikas Publishing 

House). 


BC(Voc)-206 

General Insurance-II 

10(414) 







equal marks. 

Health Insurance: 

(a) Individual Health Insurance. 

(b) Group Health Insurance. 

Motor Insurance: 

Multiple line and All-line Insurance-such as Rural Insurance-Hull Insurance, etc. 

Suggested Reference: 

1. General Insurance by Biakelhaupt and Magee, Eighth Edition, Published by 

Richard D. Irwin, Inc., Homewood, Illinois, Irwin Dorsey Limited, George-town, 

Ontario, chapters: 1 to 7, 13,21,27 and 28. 


BC(Voc)-305 

Fire Insurance 

10(415) 






equal marks. 

Fire Insurance Contract-Origin of fire insurance, its nature, risks, hazards and indemnity, 

legal basis; Stipulation and conditions; Contracts, Full disclosure of material facts; 

Inspection and termination of coverage. 

Fire Insurance Policies-Issue and renewal of policies; Different kinds; Risks covered; 

Recovery of claims-Insurer's option; Ex-gratia payment and subrogation. Policy 

conditions; Hazards not covered; Contribution and average; Reinsurance, double insurance 

and excess insurance. Types of fire protection policies issued by the General 

Insurance Corporation of India. 

Suggested Books : 

1. Rodder: Marine Insurance (Prentice Hall, New Jersey). 

2. Winter, W.D.: Marine Insurance. 

3. Godwen : Fire Insurance. 

4. Cambell, H. : The Fire Insurance Contract Indian Policy (the Rough Notes Co.). 


BC(Voc)-306 

Insurance, Finance and Legislation-I 

10(416) 






equal marks. 

Introduction: Laws of Probability, Forecast of future events; Construction of mortality 

tables; Mortality tables for annuities. 

Premium Determination -Basic factors; Use of mortality tables in premium determination; 

interest; Compound interest functions, net and gross premium; Mode of periodicity of 

premium payment; Mode of claim payment; Benefits to be provided. Mode of loading for 

expenses. Gross premium general consideration, insurer's expenses; Margin adjusting; 

Premium for term insurance; Temporary insurance: Endowment, insurance; Level and 

natural premium plan; Premium calculation for study of actuarial valuations. 

Reserves and Surplus-Nature, origin and importance of reserves and funds in Life and 

property insurance, retrospective and prospective reserve computation. Statutory 

regulation of reserve. Nature of surrender value; Concept and calculation of surrender 

value; Standard non-forfeiture; Law; Non-forfeiture value, reduced paid up values; 

Settlement options; Automatic premium loan. 


1. Srivastava, S.S.: Insurance Administration and Legislation in India (Allahabad, 

Asia Book, Depot). 

2. Govt. of India: Life Insurance Corporation of India Act, 1956. 

3. Govt. of India: General Insurance Corporation of India Act, 1956. 


BC(Voc)-405 

Marine Insurance 

10(417) 







equal marks. 

Marine Insurance Contract-Origin and growth; History of Loyds; Evaluation of marine 

insurance business in India. Basic elements-Insurable interest, Utmost Good Faith, implied 

warranties, policy document. Types of marine insurance contract Freight, Cargo and 

vessel, Procedure for obtaining marine protection policy; Marine policies and conditions. 

Nature of coastal marine insurance; perils covered, protection available; Procedure for 

preparation and presentation of claim; payment of compensation by insurer. 

Marine losses - Total loss; partial loss, particular average loss and general average loss; 

preparation of loss statement, Payment of Marine Losses-requirement of the insured, 

documents needed, procedure for presentation of claim; Valuation of loss salvage; Limits 

of liability; Attachment and termination of risk. 

Suggested References : 

1. Rodder : Marine Insurance (Prentice Hall, New Jersey). 

2. Winter, W.D.: Marine Insurance. 

3. Godwen : Fire Insurance. 

4. Cambell, H. : The Fire Insurance Contract Indian Policy (the Rough Notes Co.). 


BC(Voc)-406 

Insurance, Finance and Legislation-II 

10(418) 







equal marks. 

Nature and sources of insurance surplus; Special forms of surplus, distribution of 

surpluses; Extra dividen, residuary dividend; Investment of surplus and reserves-basic 

principles. Investment policy of LIC and GIC in India. 

Legislation- A brief study of Indian Insurance Act, 1938; detailed study of Life Insurance 

Corporation of India Act, 1956; General Insurance Corporation of India Act, Export Credit 

and Guarantee Corporation Act., IRDA Act 2000. 


1. Srivastava, S.S.: Insurance Administration and Legislation in India (Allahabad, 

Asia Book, Depot). 

2. Govt. of India: Life Insurance Corporation of India Act, 1956. 

3. Govt. of India: General Insurance Corporation of India Act, 1956. 


BC(Voc)-505 

Property and Liability Insurance-I 

10(419) 






equal marks. 

Introduction-Risk and insurance; insurable and non-insurable risks; Nature of property 

and liability insurance; Crop and Cattle Insurance; Types of liability insurance, 

Reinsurance. 

Basic concepts of liability insurance-Basic concepts: specific and all risk insurance; 

Valuation of risk; Indemnity contracts and specific value contracts; Average and 

contribution excess and short insurance careers, Liability Insurance Procedure for 

obtaining liability insurance. Legal position of insurance agent; Construction and issue of 

policy; Records of liability insurance; Policy conditions. Types of Liability Insurance 

Policy-Mandatory Public Liability Insurance, Dwelling property losses; Business 

interruption and related losses; Theft insurance Contracts, Budgetary covers, Auto 

Insurance, Medical Benefit Insurance; Dishonesty, disappearance and destruction 

insurance; Employers, liability; Aviation insurance; Personal and residential insurance; 

Boiler machinery insurance; Commercial enterprises and industrial property insurance. 


1. Bodda: Property and Liability Insurance (Prentice Hall, New Jersey). An 

Introduction to Liability Claims Adjusting, Cincinnati-(The National Underwriting 

Co.) 

2. John, Carydon. L. : An Introduction to Liability Claims adjusting, Cincinnati- (The 

National Underwriting Co.). 

3. Long anq Greg: Property and Liability Insurance (Handbook, Hommewood, 

Richard D. Irwin). 


BC(Voc)-506 

Group Insurance and Retirement Benefit Schemes-I 

10(420) 


Time: 3 hours 




equal marks. 

Superannuation schemes, Types, terms and conditions and benefits. Gratuity Schemes. 

Group Insurance Schemes. 


1. Group Insurance and Retirement Benefits Schemes (Federation of Insurance 

Institutes, Bombay). 


BC(Voc)-605 

Property and Liability Insurance-II 

10(421) 







equal marks. 

Insurance Problems of Institutions-Insurance problems of educational. and religious 

institutions-Hospitals, clubs and association; Professional package contracts, Errors and 

omission insurance; Professional Liability insurance; Accountants liability Insurance; 

Limits on amount of Insurance. Marketing and underwriting of liability insurance; 

Finance of liability insurance. 

Adjustment of losses and claims compensation- Nature of losses and their adjustment; 

Procedure of adjustment; Functions of adjusters; Responsibilities of adjusters; Survey of 

losses, Procedure for preparing claims statements; Documents in use in claim settlement. 

Requirement of the insured in the event of loss. Apportionment and loss valuation; 

Statutory control over liability insurance in India. Liability policies by General Insurance 

Corporation of India. 


1. Bodda: Property and Liability Insurance (Prentice Hall, New Jersey). An 

Introduction to Liability Claims Adjusting, Cincinnati-(The National Underwriting 

Co.). 

2. John, Carydon. L. : An Introduction to Liability Claims adjusting, Cincinnati- (The 

National Underwriting Co.). 

3. Long anq Greg: Property and Liability Insurance (Handbook, Hommewood, 

Richard D. Irwin). 


BC(Voc)-606 

Group Insurance and Retirement Benefit Scheme-II 

10(422) 







equal marks. 

Provident Fund and Employees Pension and Deposit Linked Insurance Schemes. 

Taxation treatment of provisions for retirement benefits; Group Schemes and Data 

Processing. 


1. Group Insurance and Retirement Benefits Schemes (Federation of Insurance Institutes, 

Bombay). 


Foreign Trade, Practices & Procedures 



Semester in addition to four papers common with B.Com. general scheme. 

Outline of B.Com. (Vocational) Foreign Trade, Practices & Procedures 

Semester –I 




BC-103 Financial Accounting - I 80 20 100 

BC-104 Business Management - I 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-105 Basics of Foreign Trade-I 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-106 India’s Foreign Trade-I 80 20 100 



BC-201 Business Communication - II 80 20 100 



BC-204 Business Management - II 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-205 Basics of Foreign Trade-II 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-206 India’s Foreign Trade -II 80 20 100 








BC(Voc)-305 Elements of Export Marketing-I 80 - 80 

BC(Voc)-306 Foreign Trade Financing and Procedures-I 80 - 80 

BC(Voc)-307 On-the-job Training Report - - 40 





BC-403 Auditing 80 20 100 


BC(Voc)-405 Elements of Export Marketing-II 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-406 Foreign Trade Financing and Procedures-II 80 20 100 

10(423) 


Semester –V 

Paper Code Subject External Internal Max. 

Marks 

BC-501 Income Tax - I 80 20 100 

BC-502 Cost Accounting - I 80 20 100 


Financial Management - I 

80 20 100 

BC-504 Business Environment -I 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-505 Shipping and Insurance Practices & 

Procedures-I 

80 - 80 

BC(Voc)-506 Foreign Trade Documentation and 80 - 80 

BC(Voc)-507 

Procedures-I 

On-the-Job Training Report - - 40 

Semester-VI 




BC-603 Management Accounting & Financial 

Management – II 

80 20 100 


BC(Voc)-605 Shipping and Insurance Practices & 80 20 100 

Procedures-II 

BC(Voc)-606 Foreign Trade Documentation and 

Procedures-II 

10(424) 

80 20 100 

Examination of each theory papers shall be of 3 hours duration. Besides this, every student will be 

required to undergo on-the-job training of 4 weeks after 1st year and 2nd year during vacations. 

The purpose of such a training is to develop the students for preparing various returns, forms, 

documents etc. used in foreign trade. Students should be attached for the purpose of training with 

local industrial houses doing export-import business, banks dealing in foreign exchange, 

forwarding and cleaning agents, govt. agencies, institutions facilitating foreign trade etc. Not more 

than two students be allowed to under take training in the same organization. 

After having completed on-the-job training, every student will be required to submit a hand 

written report which would be called "On-the-Job Training Report", at least one month before the 

commencement of B.Com.- IIIrd and B.Com.-Vth examinations. Such training reports will be 

evaluated by external and internal examiners. There will be a Viva-voce of the Training Report. 




BC(Voc)-105 

Basics of Foreign Trade-I 

10(425) 







equal marks. 

(a) Why Trade takes place - Theories of International Trade. Absolute Cost Advantage 

Theory, Comparative Cost Advantage Theory, H.O. Theory. 

(b) Balance of Trade, Balance of Payments and Adjustment Mechanism. 

(c) Objectives of Trade; Policies, Role of Foreign Trade in Economic Growth. 

(d) Tariffs and Quantitative Restrictions. 

(e) Exchange rate determination mechanism, exchange rate adjustments. 

(f) An overview of FEMA. 


BC(Voc)-106 

India's Foreign Trade-I 

10(426) 







equal marks. 

(a) Analysis of India's Foreign Trade: Growth trends, Composition, Direction of exports 

and imports. 

(b) India's Balance of Payments position including invisibles exports. Recent trends in 

India’s Foreign Trade. 

(c) Assessment of Prospective Markets and Products. 

(d) India's trade agreements including bilateral and multilateral trade agreements. 


BC(Voc)-205 

Basics of Foreign Trade-II 

10(427) 







equal marks. 

(a) International Economics Institutions : 

- WTO 

- UNCTAD 

- IMF 

- WORLD BANK. 

- ASIAN DEVELOPMENT BANK (ADB) 

(b) Trade Blocs and Regional Co-operation: European Union, NAFTA, SAFTA, ASEAN 

and other Trading Blocs. 


BC(Voc)-206 

India's Foreign Trade-II 

10(428) 







equal marks. 

(a) Salient features of India's Export and Import policies during post liberalization era. 

(b) Institutional set up for export promotion. 

(c) 100 per cent EOU's and Special Economic Zones. 

(d) Export assistance measures. 

(e) State Trading in India: STCs, MMTC. 

(f) Sources of Foreign Trade Statistics; Analysis of Foreign Trade Statistics. 


BC(Voc)-305 

Elements of Export Marketing-I 

10(429) 


Time: 3 hours 




equal marks. 

(a) Exports: Need and role of exports. 

(b) Meaning and Scope of Export Marketing. 

(c) Modes of entry to international markets; Role of export houses. 

(d) Sources of information for export markets, Selection of Export Markets. 

(e) Selection of Export Products; Pricing of exports. 


BC(Voc)-306 

Foreign Trade Financing and Procedures-I 

10(430) 


Time: 3 hours 




equal marks. 

(a) INCO Terms; Export payment methods. 

(b) Preshipment and postshipment finance. 

(c) Import finance; letter of credit: Types and their operation. 

(d) Role of EXIM Bank and Commercial banks in foreign trade finance. 

(e) Role of ECGC in foreign trade, obtaining an ECGC policy and filing claims. 


BC(Voc)-405 

Elements of Export Marketing-II 

10(431) 







equal marks. 

(a)Channel Selection and appointment of agents in export markets, agency 

agreement and payment of agency commission. 

(b) Promotion abroad, use of mailing lists, advertisement abroad; participation in trade 

fairs and exhibitions. 

(c) Legal aspects of export contracts including INCO Terms. 

(d) WTO provisions regulating exports. 

(e) Arbitration and settlement of disputes. 


BC(Voc)-406 

Foreign Trade Financing and Procedures-II 

10(432) 







equal marks. 

(a) Sources of Finance for Foreign Trade. 

(b) Obtaining long term finance from export import bank. 

(c) Costing and pricing for Exports. 

(d) International Capital Markets and Instruments. 

(e) Foreign exchange rates determination, exchange rate fluctuations and obtaining 

forward covers. 


BC(Voc)-505 

Shipping and Insurance Practices & Procedures-I 

10(433) 


Time: 3 hours 




equal marks. 

(a) Role of shipping, Liners and tramps, bills of lading and charter party. 

(b) Determination of freight 

(c) Containarization and other developments. 

(d) Air transport and procedures involved in the determination of freight and booking of 

cargo space. 

(e) Multi-model transport and the procedures involved. 


BC(Voc)-506 

Foreign Trade Documentation and Procedures-I 

10(434) 


Time: 3 hours 




equal marks. 

(a) Foreign Trade documents: Need, rationale and types. 

(b) Obtaining Export and import licenses. 

(c) Processing of an Import/Export order. 

(d) Pre-shipment inspection and quality control measures. 

(e) Foreign exchange and GR formalities. 


BC(Voc)-605 

Shipping and Insurance Practices & Procedures-II 

10(435) 







equal marks. 

(a) Packing and marking for exports. 

(b) Role of Forwarding and clearing agents and their functions. 

(c) Cargo, Insurance, its importance, basic principles, types of cover, types of 

losses and determination of premium. 

(d) Obtaining cover and filling claims. 


BC(Voc)-606 

Foreign Trade Documentation and Procedures-II 

10(436) 







equal marks. 

(a) Customs valuation: Methods and practices. 

(b) Excise and customs clearance of export/import cargo. 

(c) Shipment of goods and port procedures. 

(d) Customs Clearance of import cargo. 

(e) Post-shipment formalities and procedures. 

(f) Claiming duty drawbacks and other benefits. 


Tax Procedure and Practice 




Semester –I 

Outline of B.Com. (Vocational) Tax Procedure and Practice 






BC(Voc)-105 Indian Tax System 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-106 Central Sales Tax Procedure and Practice 80 20 100 







BC(Voc)-205 Income Tax Law 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-206 Value Added Tax Act 80 20 100 








BC(Voc)-305 Income Tax Procedure and Practice-I 80 - 80 

BC(Voc)-306 Wealth Tax and Other Taxes 80 - 80 






BC-403 Auditing 80 20 100 


BC(Voc)-405 Income Tax Procedure and Practice-II 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-406 Service Tax and Other Taxes 80 20 100 

10(437) 


Semester –V 


BC-501 Financial Market Operations - I 80 20 100 



80 20 100 



BC(Voc)-505 Central Excise Procedure and Practice-I 80 - 80 

BC(Voc)-506 Customs Procedure and Practice-I 80 - 80 


Semester- VI 


BC-601 Financial Market Operations - II 80 20 100 



80 20 100 

Financial Management – II 


BC(Voc)-605 Central Excise Procedure and Practice-II 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-606 Customs Procedure and Practice-II 80 20 100 

Examination of each theory paper shall be of 3 hours duration. Besides this, every student will be 

required to undergo on-the-job training of 4 weeks after 1 st year and 2 nd year during vacations. The 

purpose of such as training is to develop the students for preparing various returns, forms, documents, 

etc. related to Income Tax and Sales Tax/Excise Duty so that they can prepare these documents 

independently. Students should be attached for the purpose of training with local industrial houses, 

excise and custom departments, income and sales tax departments and practicing firms of Chartered 

Accountants. Not more than two students be allowed to under take training in the same organization. 

After having completed on-the-job training, every student will be required to submit a hand written 

report which would be called “on-the-Job Training Report”, at least one month before the 

commencement of B.Com-II and B.Com-III examinations. This hand written training reports will be 

evaluated by external and internal examiners. There will be a viva-voce of the project report or 

Training report. 

The duration of this Vocational Course shall be three academic years. The candidates will be awarded 

B.Com(Pass) degree with Tax Procedure and Practice (Vocational Course) and they shall be eligible to 

seek admission to M.Com. and other Post-graduate classes just like other B.Com students. 



10(438) 


BC(Voc)-105 

Indian Tax System 

10(439) 







equal marks. 

Meaning of Tax - Central and State Power of Taxation in Distribution of Revenues 

between Central and States. 

Direct and Indirect Taxes: Meaning, Merits & Demerits & their comparison. 

Direct Taxes of the Central Government -Income Tax, Wealth Tax, Service Tax. 

Indirect Taxes of Central Government - Central Excise, Customs Duty & Central Sales Tax. 

Taxes of the State Governments - Taxes on sale and purchase of goods, Tax on land and 

building; Tax on Profession, Toll Tax; Tax on Motor Vehicles, Tax on Electricity; Stamp 

Duty; Agricultural Income Tax and Land Revenue. 


BC(Voc)-106 

Central Sales Tax-Procedures and Practice 

10(440) 




Note: Paper setter will set nine questions in all. Question number one will be compulsory which will be 

from the entire syllabus. It will contain six short type questions. Students are required to attempt four 

questions from the remaining eight questions. All questions will carry equal marks. 

1. Regulatory framework - An overview of Central Sales Tax, 1956; An overview of Central Sales Tax 

(Registration and Turn Over) Rules, 1957, Import Out Terms and Definitions: Dealer, Declared Goods, 

Goods, Place of Business in Sale, Sale Price, Turn Over, Inter-State Sale. 

Principles for Determining - When Central Sales Tax is Leviable; The Concept of Sale or Purchase of Goods 

in the Course of Inter-State Trade of Commerce. 

When does a Sale or Purchase of Goods take place outside the State. 

When does the Sale or Purchase of Goods take place in Course of Import or Export. 

Registration of Dealers and Procedures there of Filling and Filing of Application in Form-A for registration; 

Relevant fee payable Security/Surety for Registration. 

Grant of Certificate of Registration in Form 3. 

Procedure for Amendment, Cancellation and obtaining Duplicate Certificate of Registration. 

2. Rates of Tax 

Confessional Rate when available; Kinds of Forms for availing the Confessional Rates and maintenance of 

Records related thereto. 

(A) Sales to the Registered Dealers against From-C 

Purchasers obligations: Procedure for obtaining Form-C from Sales Tax Authorities and Issuing of Form-C 

to Dealers. Application under prescribed form with requisite fee for obtaining Form-C. Maintenance of 

Records for Receipts and issue of Form-C, Form 2. Seller's Obligations: Obtaining Form 'c' from Purchasers. 

Maintenance of Records of' ‘C’ Form collected and submission of 'C’ Form at the time of assessment. 

(B) Sales to the government against D Form. 

Form D-Use and Custody of Maintenance, etc. of Records of Certificates in Form-D. 

(C) Subsequent sale in the Course of Inter-State Sale and Receipt and Issue of Form E-1 and E-2 in 

connection thereto. Application for obtaining Form E-l and E-2 and the relevant Fee to be paid therewith, 

Maintenance of Records E-1 and E-2 Forms for Receipts. 

3. Branch and Consignment Transfer 

Inter State Transfer of Goods from one office to another or Principal to Agent or Agent to Principal and Issue 

and Receipt of Form-F. 

Application for obtaining Form and the relevant fee; Maintenance of Records of such Forms and matters 

incidentals thereto, Form No.5. 

4. Determination of Turnover, Deduction from turn over. 

5. Return of Sales Tax Payable Under the Central Sales Tax Act 1956. Form No.-1 

Filling and Filing of Form No.1, Deposit of Central Sales Tax and Filling and Filing of Challan in the 

prescribed Form. 


BC(Voc)-205 

Income Tax Law 

10(441) 







equal marks. 

Extent and Application, Definitions, Previous Year, Residential Status, Incomes which do 

not form part of the total income, Computation of Total Income; Head of Income: Salaries, 

Income from House Property, Profit and Gains from business and Profession, Capital 

Gains and Income from other sources. 

Income of other persons to be included Assesses Total Income, Aggregation of Incomes 

and set off and carry forward of losses, Deduction from Gross Total Income under section 

80 C to 80 U Chapter- VI-A. Computation of Tax Liability of an Individual. 

Note: - Students must be taught on computer in Business Lab. How Tax Consultants 

use computer for keeping tax matters including keeping or records of their clients? 


BC(Voc)-206 

Value Added Tax Act 

10(442) 







equal marks. 

1. Salient Features of Value Added Tax Act and Rules made there under. 

2. Important Terms and Definitions. 

3. Incidental and Levy of Tax -When, What and How the Tax is paid. 

4. Registration of Dealers-Compulsory, Registration; Procedure for Registration; 

Application for obtaining Registration under the prescribed Form and the Requisite fee 

and Security/Surety for the purpose of Registration and Certificate of Registration 

Amendment, Cancelling and obtaining Duplicate Registration Certificate and Procedure 

thereof. 

5. Rates of Tax on sale or purchase of goods in the state. Determination of Input Tax. 

Assessment of Registered Dealer, Assessment of unregistered dealer liable to tax, 

Maintenance of accounts, Production and inspection of books, documents and accounts. 

Use of various kinds of Forms from availing Concessional rate under the respective State, 

Value Added Tax Procedure for applying for such Concessional Form and maintenance of 

Records and Issue and Receipt of such Declaration Form and Maintenance of Records 

thereto. 

Return and Procedure for recovery and Refund of Tax. Deposit of Value Added Tax and 

Filling and Filing of Challan in the prescribed Form. 

Filing of Return in the prescribed Form and Procedure for claiming Refund of Tax. 


BC(Voc)-305 

Income Tax Procedure and Practice-I 


Time: 3 Hours 

Note: Paper setter will set nine questions in all. Question number one will be compulsory which will be 

from the entire syllabus. It will contain six short type questions. Students are required to attempt four 

questions from the remaining eight questions. All questions will carry equal marks. 

1. Regulatory Framework- An overview of Income- Tax Act, 1961 and Income Tax Rules, 1962. 

2. Income Tax Authorities. 

3. Basis of Charge - Who is liable to pay Income Tax- person, Assessee Assessment Year, Previous 

Year, Residential Status and Incidence of Tax. 

4. Permanent Account No., Procedure for obtaining Permanent Account No. (PAN)- Filling and Filing 

of Application under Form No. 49A. 

5. Computation of Total Income for Filing of Return- Heads of Income, Deductions under section 80 C 

to 80 U Chapter-VI A; computation of Tax in Case of Individual, Hindu Undivided Family, Firm, 

Companies. 

6. Payment of Tax : Tax deducted at Source, Advance Tax, Self Assessment Tax. 

A. Tax Deducted at Source: Filling and Filing of Application Form for obtaining TDS number under Form 

No. 49B-Obligation of the person making payment, Who and when the person is liable to deduct Tax at 

Source. Procedure and Rate of Tax Deducted at Source on various Payments. 

Employer Obligations: 

Stage-I: Certificate to be issued to the Recipients Filing and Issue of the various TDS Forms (16, 16A and 

16B). 

Stage-II: Deposit of Tax Deducted at Source-Filling and Filing of the Challan and Deposit of Tax. 

Stage-III: Submission of Returns of TDS under Form No. 24, Form No. 26, 26A, 26B, 26BB, 26C, 26D, 26E. 

Recipient's Obligations: 

(i) To obtain TDS Certificate from Payer, Filling and Filing of Relevant Certificates for Lower or 

No. Deduction of Tax at Source (Form No. l3C, 14, 14B, 15, 15A, 15AA, 15B, 15D,15E, 15F, 15G, 

15H, 15 I.). 

(ii) Advance Tax : who is liable to pay Advance Tax, computation of Advance Tax, Instalment and 

due date of Advance Tax, Interest payable by the Assessee. Filing of Challan and Deposit of 

Advance Tax. 

(iii) Self Assessment Tax : Filing of the Challan and Depositing, of the Tax thereof, interest under 

self-Assessment. 

Return of Income : who is liable of file Return of Income Time Limit, Return of Loss, Belated Return, Revised 

Return, Defective Return, Return by whom to be signed filling and Filing of Return of Income Under: 

Form No.1: In Case of Companies other than these Claiming Exemption under Section 11. 

Form No.2: For Assessees (Other than companies and those Claiming Exemption under Section 11) Whose 

total Income includes Profit and Gain from Business and Profession. 

Form No.3: For Assessees (Other than Companies and those Claiming Exemption under Section 11) 

whose total Income does not includes Profit and Gain from Business and Profession. 

Form No.3a : For Assessees including Companies Claiming Exemption under Section 11. 

10(443) 


BC(Voc)-306 

Wealth Tax and Other Taxes 

10(444) 


Time: 3 hours 




equal marks. 

Wealth Tax: 

1. Regulatory Framework-An overview of Wealth Tax Act, 1957 and Wealth Tax 

Rules, 1957. 

2. Wealth Tax Authorities. 

3. Important Terms and Definitions Valuation-Date, Assessment Year, Meaning of 

Asset, Net Wealth, Debt, Deemed Asset, Exempted Assets. 

4. Exempted Assets, Valuation of Immovable property & Jewellery Computation of 

Net Wealth, computation of Wealth Tax, Filling of Challan for Payment of Wealth 

Tax and Deposit Tax. 

5. Return of Wealth Tax, Limit for filing return, filling and filing of return of wealth 

under Form A & B. 

Other Taxes: 

1. Assessment of charitable or religious trust and institutions. 

2. Assessment of corporative societies. 


BC(Voc)-405 

Income Tax Procedure and Practice-II 

10(445) 







equal marks. 

Assessment Procedures: Inquiring before Assessment 

Assessment under Section 143 (1), Regular Assessment under Section 143(2), Best 

Judgement Assessment, Income Escaping Assessment, Issue of Notice where income has 

escaped Assessment, Time Limit for Notice, Time Limit for Completion of Assessment 

and Reassessment. 

Post Assessment Procedures: 

A. Refund: Who can c1aimrefund, Form No. 30 for refund, Time Limit for claiming 

refund. Refund on appeal, Interest on Refunds. 

B. Rectification of Mistake(s). 

C. Appeals and Revisions: When an Assessee can file appeal, Appellate Authorities, 

Procedure for filing Appeal, Filling and Filing of Form No. 35, Form No. 36, Time Limit 

for Filing Appeal, Revision by Income Tax Commissioner. 

" 

D. Penalties & Procedure: Procedure for imposing Penalties, Walver of Penalty, Nature of 

Default and Penalties Imposable. Transfer of Moveable Property; Filling and Filing of 

Form No. 37EE, Form No. 37G, Form No. 37 I. 

Tax Clearance Certificate and Exemption Certificate; Procedure and Filling and Filing of 

Form No. 31. 


BC(Voc)-406 

Service Tax and Other Taxes 

10(446) 







equal marks. 

Concepts & General Principles of Service Tax: 

Need for a tax on Services, Genesis of Service tax in India, selective Vs. Comprehensive Coverage, 

Vital Statistics of service tax, Nature of service tax, constitutional authority, service tax law 

Administration of service tax, Service tax procedures, role of A Chartered Accountant, Challenges 

before the service tax administration in India Extent, Commencement and application (Sec.64), 

Definitions (Sec.65) 

Charge of Service Tax, taxable services and variation 

(i) Charge of service Tax:- Charge of service tax for all services. 

(ii) Taxable Services 

(iii) Valuation of taxable Services 

Payment of Service Tax and filing of returns 

(ii) Payment of Service Tax:- Person liable to pay service tax, Payment only on receipt, 

service tax not payable on free Services, Service tax liable to be paid even if not 

collected from the client, services performed prior to the date of levy not liable for 

payment of service tax, Service tax payable on advance received, service tax collected 

from the recipient of service must be paid to the central Govt. (Sec. 73A), interest on 

amount collected in excess (Sec., 73 B), due date for payment of service tax, manner of 

payment, points to be remembered while paying service tax, adjustment of service tax 

paid when service is not provided either wholly or partially, Adjustment of excess 

service tax paid, Provisional payment of service tax, special provision for payment of 

service tax in case of air travel agent, special provision for payment of service tax in 

case of life insurer carrying on life insurance business, interest on delayed payment of 

service tax. (Sec. 75) 

(iii) Filing of returns: Persons liable to file returns, periodicity and form for return, Due 

dates for filing of service tax returns, Delayed return may be filed with late fee, revised 

return, contents of the return, Documents to be submitted along with the return, 

Manner of filing returns, E-filing of returns, Nil return. 

Other Taxes: 

1. Assessment of Non-Residents in India. 

2. Assessment of Discontinued Business. 

3. Double Taxation Relief. 


BC(Voc)-505 

Central Excise-Procedure and Practice-I 

10(447) 


Time: 3 hours 




equal marks. 

1. Nature, Meaning of Central Excise-Excise and Central Excise; Distinction between 

Central Excise Duties and Customs, Sales Tax, Octroi Duty. 

Basis of Excise Duty-Specific Duty; A valourum Duty Levy of Slabs, Compounded Duty. 

Leviability-On what duty is leviable and who is liable to discharge the Duty Liability. 

Kinds of Excise Duty- Basic, Additional Duty of Excise, Special Duty. 

2. Organisation of Central Excise in India-Administrative and Operational Authorities. 

3. Regulatory Framework-An overview of Central Excise and Salt Act, 1944; An overview 

of Central Excise Tariff Act, 1985; Central Excise Rule, 1944. 

Important Terms and Definition- Assessee; Assessable Value, Excisable Goods, 

manufacture, Manufacturer. 

4. General Procedure Under Central Excise: 

(a) Registration for Central Excise- Purpose and Procedure thereof, Exemption from 

Registration, Filing of Declaration for claiming Exemption, Forms of Application for 

Regis1ration and Filling and Filing of the same. 

(b) Classification Lists-Filling and Submission of Form 1. 

Classification Lists and its approval. 

Classification Lists of Excisable Goods Provided. 

( c) Price Lists- When prior approval of Price Lists required, when submission of Price 

Lists not required; Submission of Price Lists under Part-I and Part-VII. 

Valuation of Excisable Goods - Items included and Excluded in the Value. 

(d) Maintenance of Production Records- AG 1 Register of Daily Production; Stock Register 

for issue of Raw Materials under Form No. RG 23 A (Part-I); Account of Raw Material in 

Form No. 4. 


BC(Voc)-506 

Customs Procedure and Practice-I 

10(448) 


Time: 3 hours 




equal marks. 

1. Role of Customs in International Trade. 

2. Organisation of Customs in India-Administrative and Operational Authorities. 

3. Regulatory Frame Work-An overview of Customs Act , 1962; An Overview of Customs 

Tariff Act, 1975; Important Terms and Definitions :- 

Assessable Value, Baggage, Bill of Entry, Bill of Export Suitable Goods, Duty, Exporter, 

Foreign Going Vessel, Air craft Goods, Import, Import Manifest, Importer, Prohibited 

Goods, Shopping Bill Stores, Bill of Lading, Export Manifest, DOB, FAS, ClF, GATT, Letter 

of Credit. 

4. Kinds of Duties - Basic, Auxiliary, Additional or Countervailing; Basic of Levy- 

Advalorem, Specific Duties. 

5. Prohibition of Exportation and Importation of Goods and Provisions regarding Notified 

and Specified Goods. 

6. Import of Goods- Free Import and Restricted import; 

Types of Restricted Import- Prohibited Goods, Canalised Goods, Import against 

Licensing. 


BC(Voc)-605 

Central Excise Procedure and Practice-II 

10(449) 







equal marks. 

Types of Clearances: 

Clearances of Excisable Goods under Physical Control, Self Removal Procedure, 

Compounding scheme; Clearance of Non Excisable Goods; Removable of Goods for Home 

Consumption; Removal of Goods for Exports. 

(I) Removal of Goods for Home Consumption: 

(a) Clearance under Physical Control- Making an Application under Form No. AR I to 

Circle Inspector before Removal of Goods. Preparation of TR6 and Depositing of Duty; 

Removal of Excisable Goods under GP 1. (b) Removal of Goods under Compounded Levy 

Scheme Application for Exercise of this Option. (c) Self Removal Procedure-Applicability 

and its Salient Features Record based Control and Production based control. Depositing of 

Excise Duty under Challan TR 6. Preparation of GP I and Maintenance of other Records of 

Removal like P.L.A., TG 23 Apart-II Register (d) Clearance of Non-Excisable Goods. 

(II) Removal of Goods for Export : 

Export of Excisable Goods, Excise Concession in case of Exports. Types of Exporters- 

Manufacturer Exporter and Merchant Exporter. Export of Excisable Goods under Claim 

for Rebate, Export under Bond and Procedures thereof. Form No. A4 ANCD A 4A. 

CENVAT: 

What is CENVAT, Salient Features of CENVAT. 

Declaration under Rule 57 G for claiming CENVAT under Rule 57A. 

Small Scale Industry 

(i) Eligibility of SSI which are exempted from licensing Control (ii) SSI availing 

Concession Rate of Duty. General Exemption in Small Scale Exemption Scheme under 

Notification No. 175/86. 

Books of Accounts, Records and their Preservation- 

(a) Records RGI, EB-4 For Daily production and Clearance (b) Account of Principal Raw 

Material- Form No. 4. (c) Cenvat and Proforma Credit Record. 

RG 23 A (Part-I) (d) Personal Ledger Account. (e) Goods Received for Reprocessing - 

Form No.5 (f) Excise Control Code No. Return RT-5 Periodica1/Quarterly Return of 

Material Used. 

RT-l1 For Obtaining Excisable Goods for Special Industrial Purposes without payment of 

whole or part of the Duty and State the Nature and Quantity of such goods used for 

finalized products. 

RT-12 Monthly Return under S.R.P. 


BC(Voc)-606 

Customs Procedure and Practice-II 

10(450) 




Note: (i) Paper setter will set nine questions in all. Question number one will be compulsory 



equal marks. 

Note: (ii) Only simple numerical problems should be given. Due weightage should be given to 

theory portion. 

Types of Import- Import of Cargo, Import or Personal Baggage, Import of Stores; 

Import of Cargo-- (A) Import by Land, Sea or Air Route 

(B) By Post 

Clearance Procedure - For Home Consumption, For Warehousing Exbound Clearance; 

Steps and Documents to be prepared and Filed, Viz. Bill of Entry Form No. 22 Bill of Entry 

for Home Consumption. 

Form No. 23 Bill of Entry for Warehouse. 

Form No. 24 Shipping Bill for Exbound Clearance for Home Consumption, And other 

Accompanying Document. 

Clearance Procedure for Import by Post. 

Clearance of Baggage- Import of Baggage - Meaning and kinds of Baggage; Rules and 

Procedure of Import thereof- (General passenger, Tourist Passenger, and Transfer of 

Residence Passenger; (Form No.37- Form for Baggage Declaration). 

Export of Goods- Free Export and Restricted Exports; Types of Restricted Exports- 

Prohibited Exports, Canalised Exports, Exports against Licensing. 

Types of Exports - Export of Cargo; Export of Baggage; 

Types of Exporters- Manufacturer Exporter and Merchant Exporter. 

Export of Cargo--(A) By Land, Sea and Air Route 

(B) By Post 

Clearance Procedure-Procedure and Filling & filing of Relevant Documents. 

Form No. 94 Shipping Bill for Export of Suitable Goods. 

Form No. 95 Shipping Bill for Export of Duty Free Goods. 

Form No. 96 Shipping Bill for Export of Duty Free Goods Ex-Bound. 

Form No. 98 Bill for Export of Dutiable Goods. 

Form No. 99 Bill for Export for Duty Free Goods. 

Form No. 100 Bill for Export for Duty free Goods. Ex-Bound. 

Duty Drawback – Meaning/Scheme, Procedure and Documentation thereof. 

Form No. 93 -Shipping Bill for Export of Goods under claim for Duty Drawback. 

Form No. 97 -Bill for Export for Export of Goods under claim for Duty Draw back. 


Tourism and Travel Management 




Outline of B.Com. (Vocational) Tourism and Travel Management 

Semester –I 






BC(Voc)-105 Tourism Business – I 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-106 Tourism Products – I 80 20 100 







BC(Voc)-205 Tourism Business – II 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-206 Tourism Products – II 80 20 100 

Environmental Studies:(Qualifying Paper)* - - 100 



BC-301 Business Regulatory Framework – I 80 20 100 

BC-302 Corporate Accounting – I 80 20 100 



BC(Voc)-305 Tourism Marketing – I 80 - 80 

BC(Voc)-306 Travel Agency: Tour Operations Business – I 80 - 80 

BC(Voc)-307 Field Trip Report - - 40 





BC-403 Auditing 80 20 100 


BC(Voc)-405 Tourism Marketing – II 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-406 Travel Agency: Tour Operations Business – II 80 20 100 

10(451) 


Semester –V 


BC-501 Income Tax – I 80 20 100 


BC-503 Management 

Management - I 

Accounting & Financial 80 20 100 

BC-504 Business Environment – I 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-505 Emerging Concepts for Effective Tourism 

Development – I 

80 - 80 

BC(Voc)-506 Information, Communication and Automation 

in Tourism Industry - I 

80 - 80 

BC(Voc)-507 Training/Project Reports - - 40 

Semester- VI 




BC-603 Management Accounting & Financial 80 20 100 

BC-604 

Management – II 

Business Environment - II 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-605 Emerging Concepts for Effective Tourism 80 20 100 

Development - II 

BC(Voc)-606 Information, Communication and Automation 

in Tourism Industry - II 

10(452) 

80 20 100 

Examination of each theory paper shall be of 3 hours duration. The students shall be sent 

for Field Trips and Training at the end of B.com- IInd Semester and B.Com-IV Semester 

examinations for a period of 4 weeks and 6 Weeks respectively. Not more than two 

students be allowed to take training in the same organization. They will have to submit 

hand written Field Trip and Training/Project Reports at least one month before the 

commencement of B.Com-IIIrd Semester and B.Com- Vth Semester examinations 

respectively. The hand written project report/training report of B.Com. Vocational Course will 

be evaluated by external and internal examiners. There will be a viva-voce of the project 

report/training report. 

The duration of this vocational course shall be three academic years. The candidates shall 

be issued B.Com degree (pass) with Tourism and Travel Management. They shall be 

eligible to get admission to M.Com and other Post-graduate classes after passing the said 

course just like other B.com students. 




BC(Voc)-105 

Tourism Business-I 

10(453) 







equal marks. 

Definition of Tourism, Understanding the terms Tourist, Excursionist, Visitor, Vacationer, 

Tourist resource, Tourism Product and Destination, Nature and scope of tourism, 

Components and types of Tourism 

Tourism as an Industry, Performance of tourism in India over the Years, Problems and 

Prospects of Tourism in India, Tourism Education and its Significance for Tourism 

Industry, 

Factors Responsible for Growth and development of Tourism at the Global level, Tourism 

trends at international level, Economic impacts of tourism, Socio-cultural impacts of 

tourism. 


1. Christopher J. Holloway- The Business of Tourism Macdonald and Evans, 1983. 

2. A.K. Bhatia- Tourism Development Principles and Practices Sterling Publiershers, 

New Delhi. 

3. Anand M.M.- Tourism and Hotel Industry in India: Sterling Publishers, New Delhi. 

4. Kaul R.H. Dynamics of Tourism: A Terilogy, Sterling Publishers, New Delhi. 

5. IITTM- Growth of Modern Tourism Manograph: IITTM, New Delhi 1989. 

6. Burhat & Madlik- Tourism- Past, Present and Future, Heinermann, London. 

7. Wahab, S.E.- Tourism Management: tourism International Press, London, 1986. 

8. Brymer, Robert A- Introduction of Hotel and Restaurant Management: HUB 

Publication Co., Lowa, 1984. 


BC(Voc)-106 

Tourism Products-I 

10(454) 







equal marks. 

Socio-cultural Resources-I: Indian culture through the Ages - a general survey, Major 

Religions of India, Concept of pilgrimage and major pilgrimage centres of India. 

Socio-cultural Resources-II: (Architecture in India), Landmarks of Buddhist and Jain 

architecture, Major specimen of Hindu architecture in central, southern and eastern parts 

of India, Important monuments belonging to Islamic and British periods. 

Socio-cultural Resources-III: (performing Arts of India), Major fair and festivals of India, 

Classical dances and music of India, Indian handicrafts. 


1. Precy Brawan - Indian Architecture - Hindu and Buddhist Period. 

2. Harle J.C. - The Art and Architecture of Indian Subcontinent. 

3. Bharatiya Vidhya Bhawan : Imperial Unity 

4. Bharatiya Vidhya Bhawan : Classical Age 

5. Acharya Ram - Tourism & Culture Heritage of India : Rosa Publication (Jaipur, 

1986). 

6. Basham A.L. : The Wonder That Was India: Rupa and Co.: Delhi-1988. 

7. Basham A.L. - The Gazette of India : History and Culture, Vo1.2, Publication 

Division, Ministry of Information and Broadcasting, Government of India, 1988. 

8. Hussain, A.A- The National Culture of India, National Book Trust, New Delhi, 

1987. 

9. Mukerjee, R.K.- The Culture and Art of India : George Allen and Unwin Ltd., 

London 1969. 

10. The Treasure of Indian Museums - Marg Publication, Bombay. 


BC(Voc)-205 

Tourism Business-II 

10(455) 







equal marks. 

- Domestic tourism development in India 

- Domestic vs International Tourism 

- Role of different tourism organizations 

- WTO, PATA, IATA, TAAI, IATO 


1. Christopher J. Holloway- The Business of Tourism Macdonald and Evans, 1983. 

2. A.K. Bhatia- Tourism Development Principles and Practices Sterling 

Publiershers, New Delhi. 

3. Anand M.M.- Tourism and Hotel Industry in India: Sterling Publishers, New 

Delhi. 


5. IITTM- Growth of Modern Tourism Manograph: IITTM, New Delhi 1989. 

6. Burhat & Madlik- Tourism- Past, Present and Future, Heinermann, London. 

7. Wahab, S.E.- Tourism Management: tourism International Press, London, 1986. 

8. Brymer, Robert A- Introduction of Hotel and Restaurant Management: HUB 

Publication Co., Lowa, 1984. 


BC(Voc)-206 

Tourism Products-II 

10(456) 







equal marks. 

Natural Tourist Resources-I 

- Major Physiographic units of India: Tourist Resources in Mountains with special 

references to Srinagar Valley, Shimla, Nainital, Darjeeling and Gangtok. 

- Indo-Ganga-Brahmaputra Plain: Main Tourist Resources and main Destinations 

with special reference to Amritsar, Delhi, Allahabad, Lucknow, Kolkata. 

Natural Tourist Resources-II 

- Peninsular India: Tourist Resources in Peninsula with special reference to 

Khajuraho, Ajanta, Ellora, Hyderabad, Bangalore, Mysore 

- Coastal Plains and Islands with special reference to Mumbai, Goa, Cochin, Chennai 

and Andamanand Nicobar. 


1. Precy Brawan - Indian Architecture - Hindu and Buddhist Period. 

2. Harle J.C. - The Art and Architecture of Indian Subcontinent. 

3. Bharatiya Vidhya Bhawan : Imperial Unity 

4. Bharatiya Vidhya Bhawan : Classical Age 

5. Acharya Ram - Tourism & Culture Heritage of India : Rosa Publication (Jaipur, 1986). 

6. Basham A.L. : The Wonder That Was India: Rupa and Co.: Delhi-1988. 

7. Basham A.L. - The Gazette of India : History and Culture, Vo1.2, Publication Division, 

Ministry of Information and Broadcasting, Government of India, 1988. 

8. Hussain, A.A- The National Culture of India, National Book Trust, New Delhi, 1987. 

9. Mukerjee, R.K.- The Culture and Art of India : George Allen and Unwin Ltd., London 

1969. 

10. The Treasure of Indian Museums - Marg Publication, Bombay. 


BC(voc)-305 

Tourism Marketing-I 

10(457) 


Time: 3 hours 




equal marks. 

Concept of Marketing, Services Marketing and Tourism Marketing. Distinction between 

Products and Services. Implications of this difference for Tourism Marketing. 

Marketing Environment and its Analysis( swot) Concept of Marketing mix and its 

elements, Developing Marketing mix for Tourism. Internal Marketing, Customer 

Relationship Management: Concept, Importance and Strategies. 


1. Kotler Philip. Bowen John and Makens James Marketing for Hospitality & Tourism. 

Person Education 2004. 

2. Lovelock Christopher, Wirtz Jochen--Services Marketing, Pearson Education 2004. 

3. Alan Jefferson & Leinard Lickorish, “Marketing Tourism". 

4. American Marketing Association, Journal of Marketing (Quartely). 

5. Andrew Vladmir, a Comlete Travel marketing handbook NTC, Business Books, 

Illinois 1990. 

6. Asworth, Gregory and Brian G. (ed) Marketing Tourism Places, Routledge, 

London, 1990. 

7. Braden, P.V. and Wiener, L., Tourism Marketing and Management Issues. George 

Washington University, 1980. 

8. Christopher, H. Lovelock, Services Marketing, Prentice Hall, Eaglewood Cliffs, 

1984. 

9. Donnelly, J.H. and George, W.H. Marketing of Service Chicago, 1984. 

10. Green, P. and Tull, D., Research for Mareting Decision Prentice Hall, 1978. 

11. Holloway, J.C. and Plant R.V. Marketing for Tourism, Pitman Publishing, London, 

1980. 

12. King, Brian and Geoff. Hyde, Tourism marketing in Austrilia. 

13. Lotler, Philip, Marketing for Non-Profit Organsation, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 

1975. 

14. Luther, W.M., the Marketirig Plan: How to Purpose and Imlement, Amn, Com. 

New York, 1982. 

15. McCarthy, E.J., Basic Marketing. A Management Approach. 


BC(Voc)-306 

Travel Agency: Tour Operations Business-I 

10(458) 


Time: 3 hours 




equal marks. 

Travel Agency/four Operations-meaning, definition, types, significance and growth over 

the year. 

Function of Travel agencies and tour operators. Linkages and integrations in tour 

operation business. 

Travel Agency Organisation Structure-Meaning and significances. Procedure for 

recognitions of Travel Agency and tour operations from Ministry of Tourism Govt. of 

India. 


1. Merissen, Jome, W.: Travel Agents and Tourism. 

2. Foster. D. The Business of Travel Agency. 

3. Aggarwal Surinder: Travel Agency Management (Communication India 1983). 

4. Geo. Chack Profession Travel Agency Management (Prentice Hall, London, 1 90). 

5. IATA, IATO,TAAI, Mannal. 

6. William Cordy Travel in India. 

7. National Publishers. The World of Travel, (National Publishers, Delhi, 1979). 


BC(Voc)-405 

Tourism Marketing-II 

10(459) 







equal marks. 

The Tourism Product: Concept. Packaging & Branding of Tourism Products Tourism Product life 

cycle and difference marketing strategies for different of life cycle. 

Supply of Tourism Product: Planning Service Environment. Balancing Demand & Capacity, 

Managing Distribution chain for effective supply. 

Destination Marketing: Destinations as Tourism Product, Categorization of Destinations(Plog's), 

Visitors Segments of a destination (Cohen’s classification), Development and Marketing a new 

Destination. 


1. Kotler Philip. Bowen John and Makens James Marketing for Hospitality & Tourism. Person 

Education 2004. 

2. Lovelock Christopher, Wirtz Jochen--Services Marketing, Pearson Education 2004. 

3. Alan Jefferson & Leinard Lickorish, “Marketing Tourism". 

4. American Marketing Association, Journal of Marketing (Quartely). 

5. Andrew Vladmir, a Comlete Travel marketing handbook NTC, Business Books, Illinois 

1990. 

6. Asworth, Gregory and Brian G. (ed) Marketing Tourism Places, Routledge, London, 1990. 

7. Braden, P.V. and Wiener, L., Tourism Marketing and Management Issues. George 


8. Christopher, H. Lovelock, Services Marketing, Prentice Hall, Eaglewood Cliffs, 1984. 

9. Donnelly, J.H. and George, W.H. Marketing of Service Chicago, 1984. 

10. Green, P. and Tull, D., Research for Mareting Decision Prentice Hall, 1978. 

11. Holloway, J.C. and Plant R.V. Marketing for Tourism, Pitman Publishing, London, 

1980. 

12. King, Brian and Geoff. Hyde, Tourism marketing in Austrilia. 

13. Lotler, Philip, Marketing for Non-Profit Organsation, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1975. 

14. Luther, W.M., the Marketirig Plan: How to Purpose and Imlement, Amn, Com. New York, 

1982. 

15. McCarthy, E.J., Basic Marketing. A Management Approach. 


BC(Voc)-406 

Travel Agency: Tour Operations Business-II 

10(460) 







equal marks. 

Tour Packaging-Concept, meaning, types. Role and contribution of Air India. Indian 

airlines and India Railways in Promotion of tour package business. 

Role an contribution of Tourism Trade Associations in the healthy growth and 

development of tour business- IATO, TAAI, IATA, PATA. 


1. Merissen, Jome, W.: Travel Agents and Tourism. 

2. Foster. D. The Business of Travel Agency. 

3. Aggarwal Surinder: Travel Agency Management (Communication India 1983). 

4. Geo. Chack Profession Travel Agency Management (Prentice Hall, London, 1 

90). 

5. IATA, IATO,TAAI, Mannal. 

6. William Cordy Travel in India. 

7. The World of Travel, (National Publishers, Delhi, 1979). 


BC (Voc)-505 

Emerging Concepts for Effective Tourism Development - I 

10(461) 


Time: 3 hours 




equal marks. 

Types of Tourism, International and Domestic Tourism, Hard and Soft Tourism, Pilgrimage 

Tourism, Adventure Tourism, Eco Tourism, Green Tourism, Heritage and Cultural Tourism, 

Senior citizen Tourism, Village Tourism, Sustainable Tourism 

Tourism Policy: Meaning, definition and objectives; Rationale for the development of tourism; 

dynamics of destination development, the elements of tourist destination, emerging tourism 

policy paradigims. 

National Development Council (1982) Report; National Action Plan (1992); Tourism Policy of 

India after independence National Tourism Policy 2002; International Tourism trends during the 

five year plans in India; New policies on Tourism and Civil Aviation in India. 

References 


2. Chuck, Gee; Professional Travel Agency Management, Prentice Hall, London. 

3. Pareek, Udai; HRD: New Dimension, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

4. Silveria, D.L., HRD: The Indian Experience, New Book Publications, New Delhi. 

5. Kamra, Krishan K., Managing Tourist Destination, Kanishka Publishers and Distributors, 

New Delhi. 

6. Bhatia, S.K., Business Ethics and Managerial Values, Deep & Deep Publications Pvt. Ltd., 

New Delhi. 

7. Bhatia, S.K., Business Ethics & Corporate Governance, Deep & Deep Publications Pvt. Ltd., 

New Delhi. 

8. National Development Council Report, Ministry of Tourism, Govt. of India, New Delhi. 

9. National Action Plan, 1992 (Draft) Ministry of Tourism, Govt. of India, New Delhi. 

10. Report – Workshop on Tourism Legislation – February 20-23, 1988, IITTM, New Delhi. 

11. National Policy Documents, 2002. 

12. Consumer’s Protection Act, 1986. 

13. Tourist Statistic, Department of Tourism, Ministry of Tourism, Government of India, New 

Delhi. 


BC (Voc)-506 

Information, Communication and Automation in Tourism Industry-I 

10(462) 


Time: 3 hours 




equal marks. 

Importance of Information in Tourism, Management Information System, Role of Market Research 

in information management. 

Communication in Tourism Industry between different partners. Integrated communication system. 

Advertising & Public Relations as tools of communication. 

Automation in Tourism Industry – Use of Information Technology & Computers. Central 

Reservation System in different sectors. 

References: 

1. Kotler Philip, Bowen John and Makens James “marketing for Hospitality & Tourism, 

Pearson Education 2004. 

2. Lovelock Christopher, Wirtz Jochen – Services Marketing, Pearson Education 2004. 

3. Alan Jefferson & Leonard Lickorish, “Marketing Tourism. 

4. American Marketing Association, Journal of Marketing (Quarterly). 

5. Andrew Vladmir, a Complete Travel Marketing Handbook NTYC, Business Books, 

Illinois, 1975. 

6. Ashworth, Gregory and Brian G. (ed) Marketing Tourism Places, Routledge, London, 

1990. 

7. Braden, P.V. and Wiener, L., Tourism Marketing and Management Issues, George 


8. Christopher, H. Lovelock, Services Marketing, Prentice Hall, Eagle-wood Cliffs, 1984. 

9. Donnelly, J.H. and George, W.H., Marketing of Service Chicago, 1984. 

10. Green, P. and Tull, D., Research for Marketing Decision Prentice Hall, 1978. 

11. Holloway, J.C. and Plant R.V., Marketing for Tourism, Pitman Publishing, London, 

1980. 

12. King, Brian and Geoff, Hyde, Tourism Marketing in Australia. 

13. Kotler, Philip, Marketing for Non-profit Organisation, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1975. 

14. Luther, W.M., the Marketing Plan: How to Purpose and Implement, Amn. Com, New 

York, 1982. 

15. McCarthy, E.J., Basic Marketing: A Management Approach. 


BC (Voc)-605 

Emerging Concepts for Effective Tourism Development - II 

10(463) 







equal marks. 

Tourism Legislation guidelines from Department of Tourism, Ministry of Tourism, Government of 

India concerning – Approval of Tour Operators/travel Agencies, Approval of Hotels. Business; 

Business ethics and their relevance in tourism; Consumer’s Protection Act 1986 (Relevant 

provisions for tourism). 

HRD – Meaning, definition, objectives and significance in tourism industry. HRD systems – 

Recruitment, Selection, Manpower Planning in public and private sectors in Indian tourism 

industry. 

Security and Safety issues in tourism, Environmental issues. 

References 


2. Chuck, Gee; Professional Travel Agency Management, Prentice Hall, London. 

3. Pareek, Udai; HRD: New Dimension, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

4. Silveria, D.L., HRD: The Indian Experience, New Book Publications, New Delhi. 

5. Kamra, Krishan K., Managing Tourist Destination, Kanishka Publishers and 

Distributors, New Delhi. 

6. Bhatia, S.K., Business Ethics and Managerial Values, Deep & Deep Publications Pvt. 

Ltd., New Delhi. 

7. Bhatia, S.K., Business Ethics & Corporate Governance, Deep & Deep Publications 

Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. 

8. National Development Council Report, Ministry of Tourism, Govt. of India, New 

Delhi. 

9. National Action Plan, 1992 (Draft) Ministry of Tourism, Govt. of India, New Delhi. 

10. Report – Workshop on Tourism Legislation – February 20-23, 1988, IITTM, New 

Delhi. 

11. National Policy Documents, 2002. 

12. Consumer’s Protection Act, 1986. 

13. Tourist Statistic, Department of Tourism, Ministry of Tourism, Government of 



BC (Voc) - 606 

Information, Communication and Automation in Tourism Industry-II 

10(464) 







equal marks. 

Electronic Business in Tourism Industry. Online Sales and Purchase of Travel Services 

and important related issues. 

Challenges of Automation of Information – Impacts on organization, work structures & 

manpower training. 

Future trends of automation of information in Indian Travel Industry. 

References: 

1. Kotler Philip, Bowen John and Makens James “marketing for Hospitality & 

Tourism, Pearson Education 2004. 

2. Lovelock Christopher, Wirtz Jochen – Services Marketing, Pearson Education 

2004. 

3. Alan Jefferson & Leonard Lickorish, “Marketing Tourism. 

4. American Marketing Association, Journal of Marketing (Quarterly). 

5. Andrew Vladmir, a Complete Travel Marketing Handbook NTYC, Business 

Books, Illinois, 1975. 

6. Ashworth, Gregory and Brian G. (ed) Marketing Tourism Places, Routledge, 

London, 1990. 

7. Braden, P.V. and Wiener, L., Tourism Marketing and Management Issues, 

George Washington University, 1980. 

8. Christopher, H. Lovelock, Services Marketing, Prentice Hall, Eagle-wood Cliffs, 

1984. 

9. Donnelly, J.H. and George, W.H., Marketing of Service Chicago, 1984. 

10. Green, P. and Tull, D., Research for Marketing Decision Prentice Hall, 1978. 

11. Holloway, J.C. and Plant R.V., Marketing for Tourism, Pitman Publishing, 

London, 1980. 

12. King, Brian and Geoff, Hyde, Tourism Marketing in Australia. 

13. Kotler, Philip, Marketing for Non-profit Organisation, Prentice Hall, New 

Jersey, 1975. 

14. Luther, W.M., the Marketing Plan: How to Purpose and Implement, Amn. Com, 

New York, 1982. 

15. McCarthy, E.J., Basic Marketing: A Management Approach. 


Computer Applications 




Semester –I 

Outline of B.Com. (Vocational) Computer Applications 






BC(Voc)-105 Computer Fundamentals & Logical Organizations-I 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-106 Business Data Processing & PC Software-I 80 20 100 







BC(Voc)-205 Computer Fundamentals and Logical 

80 20 100 

Organizations-II 

BC(Voc)-206 Business Data Processing and PC Software-II 80 20 100 




10(465) 


Semester-III 

B.Com Computers (Vocational) Syllabus 

Session 2010-11 

Paper Code Subject External Internal Max Marks 

BC-301 Business Regulatory Framework-I 80 20 100 

BC-302 Corporate Accounting-I 80 20 100 


BC-304 Business Statistics-I 80 20 100 

BC (Voc)-305 Programming in C 

Theory 

Practical 

BC (Voc)-306 Fundamentals of Database System-I 

Theory 

Practical 

45 

30 

5 80 

BC (Voc)-307 On the Job Training Report* - - 40 

Semester-IV 

Paper Code Subject External Internal Max 

Marks 

BC-401 Business Regulatory Framework-II 80 20 100 

BC-402 Corporate Accounting-II 80 20 100 

BC-403 Auditing 80 20 100 

BC-404 Business Statistics-II 80 20 100 

BC (Voc)-405 Desktop Publishing 

Theory 

Practical 

BC (Voc)-406 Fundamentals of Database System- 

II 

Theory 

Practical 

10(466) 


45 

30 

60 

30 

60 

30 

10 

10 

5 

100 

100 

80

Semester-V 


Marks 

BC-501 Financial Market Operations-I 80 20 100 

BC-502 Cost Accounting-I 80 20 100 

BC-503 Management Accounting & 80 20 100 

BC-504 

Financial Management-I 

Business Environment-I 80 20 100 

BC (Voc)-505 Computer Aided Design 

Theory 

45 5 80 

Practical 

BC (Voc)-506 Data Structure 

30 

Theory 

45 5 80 

Practical 

30 

BC (Voc)-507 On the Job Training Report* - - 40 

Semester-VI 


Marks 

BC-601 Financial Market Operations-II 80 20 100 

BC-602 Cost Accounting-II 80 20 100 


BC-604 

Financial Management-II 

Business Environment-II 80 20 100 

BC (Voc)-605 Advanced Computer Applications 

Theory 

60 20 100 

Practical 

BC (Voc)-606 System Analysis & Design 

30 

Theory 

60 20 100 

Practical 

30 

Note : 

*The students shall undergo On-the-Job Training to get a practical experience of the 

Computer Applications in Business. The faculty will supervise the students for their training. 

Three copies of the Project Report shall be submitted to the college, which will be sent for 

evaluation to an external examiner. There will be no Viva-Voce of there project/training 

reports. 

10(467) 


BC(Voc)-105 

Computer Fundamentals and Logical Organization-I 

10(468) 







equal marks. 

Fundamentals of Computer: Functional components of a digital computer. Limitations 

and capabilities of computer. Uses of computers. Concepts of translators, linkers and 

loader. 

Overview of functions operating system, concepts of single user, multi-user, time-sharing, 

real-time, multi-programming, multi-processing, multitasking, networking and 

distributed processing, Structure of DOS, internal and external commands of DOS. 

Generations of programming languages. Number systems, binary arithmetic operations. 

Character codes and error detecting and correcting codes. Simple I/O devices. Magnetic 

and optical storage devices. Introduction to computer network, Basic concept of 

simulation. 


1. Sinha, P .K. : Computer Fundamentals, BPB Publications. 

2. Mano, M. Morris: Digital Logic and Computer Design, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 

2000. 

3. Rajaraman, V. : An Introduction to Digital 

Radhakrishnan, T.: Computer Design 

Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd 4th Ed. 


BC(Voc)-106 

Business Data Processing and PC Software-I 

10(469) 







equal marks. 

Data processing, various business functions, use of computers in data processing and in 

carrying out business functions, concepts of data and information, characteristics of 

information, economics of business data processing, impact of data processing on business 

organizations, information and product flow in production environment, concepts of 

records and files, various types of file organizations, data capturing, data preparation, 

data verification and validation, and data editing. 


1. Business Data Systems (3/e) by HD Clifton (Prentice Hall of India). 

2. System Analysis for Business Data Processing by HD Clifton (prentice Hall of India). 

3. Introducing Systems Analysis and Design by Lee, Galgotia Publications. 

4. Mastering Data Processing by J. Bingham (MaCmillan Publishing House). 

5. The Big Basics Book of MS Office-97 by Jennifer Fulton et aI. (PHI). . 

6. Teach Yourself Office-97 for Windows by Corey Sandleret al. (BPB). 

7. MS-Office User Certification Study Guide by Gini Courteret al. (BPB). 


BC(Voc)-205 

Computer Fundamentals and Logical Organization-II 

10(470) 







equal marks. 

Logical organization of Computer: Boolean algebra, boolean functions, truth tables, 

simplifications of boolean functions, digital logic gates. Combinational logic- adders 

subtractions, encoders, decoders, multiplexors, demultiplexors. Sequential logic- flip 

flops, shift registers, counters, Memory organization semiconductor RAMs and ROMs. 

Machine instructions, instruction formats, addressing modes, instruction cycles. Concept 

of micro-programming. I/O interface, I/O transfer - program - controlled, interrupt 

controlled, direct memory access. 

References: 



2000. 





BC(Voc)-206 

Business Data Processing and PC Software-II 






equal marks. 

PART-A 

Word-processor- Creating, opening, saving, previewing, printing of documents; typing of 

text, selecting the text or graphics and navigating within the documents; editing and 

sorting of text, correcting and deleting the text/graphics; checking the spelling and 

grammar of documents; formating; sharing data with other applications, creating index 

and table of contents; mail merge. 

Spreadsheet - Creating, opening, saving, previewing and printing workbooks; working 

with workbooks and worksheets; entering and editing, worksheet data; working with 

cells, ranges, formulas and charts; worksheet formating, creating drawings and importing 

pictures; automating tasks with macros; validating cell entries; performing What - If 

analysis on worksheet data. 

Presentation Software - Creating, opening and saving presentations; working in different 

views; working with slides; adding and formating text; spelling checks; preparing 

overhead transparencies speakers notes, handouts and outlines etc.; printing 

presentations; working with objects; designing, running and controlling electronic slide 

shows. 

Above-mentioned softwares/packages be taught with reference to Microsoft 

Office/Lotus Smartsuite/Star Office. 

References: 


2. System Analysis for Business Data Processing by HD Clifton (prentice Hall of 

India). 



5. The Big Basics Book of MS Office-97 by Jennifer Fulton et aI. (PHI). . 

6. Teach Yourself Office-97 for Windows by Corey Sandleret al. (BPB). 

7. MS-Office User Certification Study Guide by Gini Courteret al. (BPB). 

PART-B 

Practical Examinations: 

DOS/WINDOWS & WORD 

Processor (WINDOWS Based) 

(WINOWS Based Spreadsheet and Presentation S/W) 

10(471) 


Time: 3 hours 


BC (Vocational)-305 

Programming in C 

10(472) 



Time: 3 Hours 


which will be from the entire syllabus. It will contain six short questions. Students are 

required to attempt four questions from the remaining eight questions. All questions will 

carry equal marks. 

Programming in C : Character Set, identifiers & keywords, constants & variables, data types, 

expressions & statements. 

Arithmetic, logical, relational and bitwise operators and their hierarchy, Assignment and 

conditional operators. 

Input/Output statements, control statements-if-else, switch break, continue & loops. 

Arrays, functions, pointer, structure & unions, data files, developing simple programmes. 

References : 

1. Gotterfried, Programming in C, Schaum Outline Series (TMH). 

2. Yashwant Kanetker, Let Us C, (BPB). 

Programming in C-language 

PRACTICAL 

Max. Marks : 30 Marks 



Fundamentals of Database System-I 

10(473) 



Time: 3 Hours 





Overview of Data Management System : Element of data-base system, DBMS and its architecture, 

Advantages of DBMS, Types of database users, Role of Database administrator. 

Brief overview of Hierarchical and Network Model, Detailed study of Relational Model (Relations, 

properties of relational model, keys and integrity rules), E-R diagrams. 

Normalization: Concepts and update anomalies, Funcational and Transitive dependencies Normal 

forms : (1NF, 2NF, 3NF & BCNF). 

References : 

1. C.J. Date: An Introductions to Data Base System (Narosa Publisher). 

2. D. Kroenke : Database Processing (Galgotia Publications). 

3. H.F. Korth: Database System (TMH). 

MS Access (latest version) 

PRACTICAL 




Desktop Publishing 

10(474) 



Time: 3 Hours 





Desktop Publishing : Concept, Need and Applications; Hardware, Software Requirements for DTP, 

An overview of DTP packages- MS word, Open office, etc. Comparison of DTP software, 

PageMaker: Text formatting and word-formatting features, Composition and typography, graphics 

and text objects, indexes contents and pagination, colour management, Tables handling, printing & 

publications. Advantages and limitations of PageMaker over MS Word. 

References : 

1. Altman, Mastering PageMaker 6 for Windows XP (BPB). 

2. Shamms, PageMaker 6.5 Complete (Tech Media). 

PageMaker (latest Version) 

PRACTICAL 




Fundamentals of Database System-II 

10(475) 



Time: 3 Hours 





Database Objects : Terminologies- Tables, views, materialized views, indexes; Triggers; synonyms; 

Functions, Procedures and Packages; Create operator, Create directory, Create library, Database 

links. 

SQL : Methods to access SQL Plan; DDL, Describe command; DML, Joining Tables; Break 

Clause. 

Oracle Service : Terminology; Architecture and Background support processes. Role of Database 

Administrator. Applications of ORACLE in business. 

References : 

1. C.J. Date: An Introductions to Data Base System (Narosa Publisher). 

2. D. Kroenke : Database Processing (Galgotia Publications). 

3. H.F. Korth: Database System (TMH). 

4. Michael Abbey, Michael Corey, Ian Abramson, Oracle 9 i: A Beginner’s Guide, TMH. 

ORACLE (latest version) 

PRACTICAL 




Computer Aided Design 

10(476) 



Time: 3 Hours 





Graphics fundamentals, point and lines, input devices, output devices, display devises, 2-D 

transformations. 

Application of graphics, Introduction to CAD, Benefits of ACAD, Hardware used in ACAD, 

Creating simple drawing using 2-D. 

References : 

1. Computer Graphics : Gottfried (THM) 

2. Computer Graphics 2/e : Hearn & Becker (PHI) 

Auto CAD (latest version) 

PRACTICAL 




Data Structures 

10(477) 



Time: 3 Hours 





Data Structure : Linear and least structures : array definition, type, address calculation, stack : 

push/pop algorithms, applications. 

Queue : INS/DEL algorithm, double and circular queue concept only. 

List : Single linked list, Algorithm and Double linked list and circular linked list concepts. B-Tree 

concept. 

Files : Serial, Sequential, Indexed, Direct, Multi-list. 

References : 

1. J.P. Trembly and Sorrerson: Data Structures with Application. 

2. A. Tanenbaum, T. Langhsam and A.S. Augenstein : Data Structures Using C, Prentice Hall of 

India, 1990. 

3. Seymour Lipschultz, Theory and Practical of Data Structure, McGraw Hill, 1988. 

Implementation of Data Structures in C 

Practical 




Advanced Computer Applications 

10(478) 



Time: 3 Hours 





Networking: Fundamentals, LAN/MAN/WAN, Topologies, Transmission Media, ISDN, B-ISDN, 

Protocols- TCP/IP, OSI, ATM, Internet Services. Hardware and Software requirements for Internet. 

Browsers- Internet explorer, Mozilla Firefox, Opera, google chrome; Search engines; Webpage. 

Information Technology Application in Business, E-Business, E-Commerce. Net banking; Online 

purchasing and selling; Electronic Payment Systems- an overview. E-Governance- Concept and 

examples. 

References : 

1. Data Communication & Networking : Forouzan (TMH) 

2. Computer Networks, 3/e (Peterson Edu.) : A.S., Tanenbaum 

Computer Networking and Internet 

PRACTICAL 




System Analysis & Design 

10(479) 



Time: 3 Hours 





SAD : Definition of system, characteristics, elements, types of system, system development life 

cycle; Techno-economic feasibility; Role of system analyst the process of logical and physical 

design. Form design: input, output, form. System testing, auditing, system maintenance, threats to 

security, control measures. 

References : 

1. Structured Systems Analysis by E.M. Award, Galgotia Publications. 

2. System Analysis and Design by Lee, Galgotia Publications. 

Practical 

Feasibility studies of SAD applications in small business. 



Office Management & Secretarial Practice 




Outline of B.Com. (Vocational) Office Management & Secretarial Practice 

Semester –I 






BC(Voc)-105 Computer 

Processing 

Fundamentals and Business Data 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-106 Computer Practical - - 100 







BC(Voc)-205 Shorthand: Theory 80 20 100 

BC(Voc)-206 Shorthand: Practical - - 100 




10(480) 


Semester-III 

Office Management & Secretarial Practice 


Paper Code Subject Externa 

l 

Internal Max Marks 

BC-301 Business Regulatory Framework-I 80 20 100 

BC-302 Corporate Accounting-I 80 20 100 


BC-304 Business Statistics-I 80 20 100 

BC (Voc)-305 Office Practice & Communication 

Theory : 

60 10 80 

Practical : 

BC (Voc)-306 Typewriting Theory (English) 

10 - 

Theory : 

30 10 80 

Practical : 

40 

BC (Voc)-307 On-the-Job Training Report - - 40 

Semester-IV 


Marks 

BC-401 Business Regulatory Framework-II 80 20 100 

BC-402 Corporate Accounting-II 80 20 100 

BC-403 Auditing 80 20 100 

BC-404 Business Statistics-II 80 20 100 

BC (Voc)-405 Office Practice & Communication 

Theory 

Practical 

BC (Voc)-406 Shorthand 

Theory 

Practical 

10(481) 


60 

30 

50 

40 

20 

20 

100 

100

Semester-V 


Marks 

BC-501 Financial Market Operations-I 80 20 100 

BC-502 Cost Accounting-I 80 20 100 


BC-504 

Financial Management-I 

Business Environment-I 80 20 100 

BC (Voc)-505 Office Practice 70 20 80 

BC (Voc)-506 Typewriting (English) Practical 80 - 80 

BC (Voc)-507 On-the-Job Training Report - - 40 

Semester-VI 


Marks 

BC-601 Financial Market Operations-II 80 20 100 

BC-602 Cost Accounting-II 80 20 100 


BC-604 

Financial Management-II 

Business Environment-II 80 20 100 

BC (Voc)-605 Computer Application 

Theory 

70 10 100 

Practical 

20 

BC (Voc)-606 Shorthand(English) Practical 100 - 100 

Each student will be required to undergo on-the-job training of four weeks duration during the 

vacation after IInd Semester and IVth Semester examinations. The purpose of such training is to 

appraise the student with the real world office and secretarial practices. On completion of ‘On-the- 

Job Training Report’ each student will be required to submit a report which would be called ‘Onthe-Job 

Training Report’ atleast one month before the commencement of B.Com-IIIrd semester and 

B.Com-Vth Semester examinations respectively and such training reports will be evaluated by 

external and internal examiners. There will be a viva-voce of the Training Report. 

10(482) 


BC(Voc)-105 

. 

Computer Fundamentals & Business Data Processing 

10(483) 







equal marks. 

Fundamentals of Computer: Functional components of a digital computer. Limitations 

and capabilities of computer. Structure of DOS, internal and external commands of DOS. 

Generations of programming languages. Number systems, binary arithmetic operations. 

Overview of functions operating system, concepts of single user, multi-user, time-sharing, 

real-time, multi-programming, multi-processing, multitasking 

Data processing, various business functions, use of computers in data processing and in 

carrying out business functions, concepts of data and information, characteristics of 

information, economics of business data processing, impact of data processing on business 

organizations. 




2000. 





5. System Analysis for Business Data Processing by HD Clifton (prentice Hall of India). 




Practical Examinations: 

DOS/WINDOWS 

BC(Voc)-106 

. 

Computer Practical 

10(484) 


Time: 3 hours 

Note: The practical examination will be conducted jointly by internal and external 

examiners as per University Policy. 


10(485) 

BC(Voc)-205 

Shorthand (English) Theory 







equal marks. 

Introduction : Origin of Shorthand with particular emphasis on Pitman Shorthand; 

definition and importance of stenography; qualities of a successful stenographer; writing 

techniques and materials. 

Consonants: Definition, number, forms, classes, thinness, thickness, directions and joining 

strokes. 

Vowels, Dipthongs and Diphones: Vowels - definition, number sounds, signs, places, 

position of outlines, intervening vowels. 

Introduction of upwards/downwards strokes in Stenography. 

Dipthong: definition, names, signs, places, joined dipthongs and triphones. 

Diphones-definitions, signs and application. 

Grammalogues and Phraseography Grammalogues., definition of grammalogues and 

logoram, list of grammalogues, punctuation signs. Phraseography-definition of phrase, 

how to phrase is written, qualifies of a good phraseogram, list of simple phrases. 

Circles, loops and hooks Size & direction rules for application i.e. attachment with 

straight and curved strokes, exception to the use of circle, application in phraseography. 

Loops & Hooks--size & direction, rules for application with the straight strokes and 

curves. 


BC(Voc)-206 

Shorthand (English) Practical 

10(486) 



(a) The students will be given twenty Grammalogues/Pharases to write in shorthand, 

each carrying ½ marks, within 5 minutes. 

(b) One passage in English containing 300 words will be dictated in ten minutes with a 

speed of 30 words w.p.m. The candidates will be required to transcribe the same within 

half an hour into longhand. 

(c) The practical examiner will give a passage of about 100 words written in shorthand. 

A passage of shorthand of the choice of practical examiner containing about 100 words 

will be given to the candidates for reading orally before the practical examiner within ten 

minutes. 

Note: - The practical examiner is expected to exercise a clear cut pronunciation of words 

and maintain a constant speed while dictating the passage to the students. 

The practical examination will be conducted jointly by internal and external 

examiners as per University Policy. 


B.Com Semester-III Semester 

Paper-305 

Office Practice & Communication 

(Part-A) Theory 



Time: 3 Hours 





Office-Meaning, functions, importance, concept of an organization, centralization vs. 

decentralization of office service, principal departments of a modern office. 

Filing and Indexing- meaning and importance, essentials of a good filing system, centralized vs. 

decentralized filing system, methods of filing, filing equipments. 

Office Appliances and Machines : A study of various types of commonly used appliances and 

machines i.e. duplicator, accounting machines, calculator, addressing machines, punch card 

machine. Franke in machine, weighing and folding machines, sealing machine, Dictaphone, cheque 

protector, cash register, coin sorter, time recorder and such other machines. 

Modern Office Machines : Photocopier, Duplicator, Telephone handling, Computer, Word 

processor, scanner printer-their operation and use in the office set up. 

Introduction of Computer- Importance, history and types of computers, computer hardware and 

software, computer operation. 

Word processor- Concept of word processing, creating and editing documents, taking print out, 

Do’s and Don’ts in details from application point of view. Scanner- Introduction of scanner, its 

importance and use in offices. 

PRACTICAL 

10(487) 


Time: 1 Hours 

Workability of the candidate is to be judged by the Practical examiners both internal and external 

jointly giving practical assignments on different type office machines i.e. Duplicator, Photo-copiers 

and processor, scanner etc. as studied in theory. 


B.Com Semester-III Semester 

Paper-306 

Typewriting Theory (English) 




Time: 2 Hours 





Carbon Manifolding : Carbon papers and their kinds, carrying out correction on carbon copies i.e. 

use of eraser, erasing shield, while correcting fluid etc. squeezing and spreading carbon economy. 

Stencil-Cutting and Duplicating : 

Techniques of stencil cutting, correction of errors on stencil papers-use of correcting fluid, graft 

methods and use of Gumcoate paper method, signatures and lining on stencil paper with the help of 

stylus pen and backing sheet. 

Duplicating- kinds of duplicators taking out copies on duplicators, duplicating ink. 

Electric and Electronic Typewriters: Salient features of Electronic Typewriters, Computers- Salient 

Features, Typing on Computers. 

Correspondence : Business Official 

10(488) 


TYPEWRITING PRACTICAL 


Time: 1 Hours 

A passage of about 300 words will be given which will be typed by the candidates on the 

typewriter/Computer alongwith two carbon copies of the same (time 10 minutes). 10 Marks 

After a gap of five minutes, a passage of about 300 words will be provided alognwith a piece of 

Stencil paper. The candidates will be required to cut the stencil on the typewriter/computer of the 

matter already provided to them within a period of 10 minutes. 10 Marks 

After a gap of ten minutes, a letter of official nature will be given containing atleast 300 words 

which will be typed by the candidates on the typewriter/computer within a period of 20 minutes. 

10 Marks 

After a gap of five minutes, a business letter will be given of about 300 words which is required to be 

typed by the candidates on the typewriter/computer within a period of 20 minutes. 10 

Marks 

Note: All the above practical work will be supervised and assessed by the internal/external practical 

examiner(s) on-the-spot and marks will be given accordingly depending upon the performance of 

the candidates. The material required for the purpose will be provided by the Examining Body to be 

supplied to the candidates on-the-spot for actual use. 

10(489) 


B.Com Semester-IV Semester 

Paper-405 

Office Practice & Communication 




Time: 3 Hours 





Mailing Department : Meaning and importance of mail, centralization mail handling or work- its 

advantages, mail room equipment, sorting table and racks, letter opener, time and date stamps, 

postal franking machine, addressing machine, mailing scales, post office guide. 

Handling Mail: 

Inward Mail: Receiving, sorting, opening, recording, marking, distributing. 

Outword Mail : folding of letters, preparation of envelopes, sorting, scaling, weighting, stamping, 

entering in letters, sent book or peon book, Dispatching rail parcel service, Air mail service, 

Courier service, Postal service. 

Office Correspondence: Essentials of a good letter, drafting of business letter, i.e. enquiry, 

quotation, order, advice making payment, trade reference, complaints, circular letters, follow up 

letters, official letters, Semi-official letters, Interview letter, appointment letters, letter for issue of 

tenders, office notes, Office orders etc. 

Office equipments; effective use of language, preparation of appointment schedules and maintain 

visitors diary, furnishing desire information, instructing co-workers. 

PRACTICAL 

10(490) 


Time: 1 Hours 

Workability of the candidate is to be judged by the Practical examiners both internal and external 

jointly giving practical assignments on different type office machines i.e. Franking Machine, 

Addressing Machine etc. as studied in theory. 


B.Com Semester-IV Semester 

Paper-406 

Shorthand 




Time: 2 Hours 





Extended use of certain Consonant : 

The Aspirate, tick and dot ‘H’ 

Downward and upward ‘R’ upward ‘Sh’ 

Compound consonants, Medical Semi Circles. 

Halving and Doubling Principle : 

Halving-general principles and their exception, use of halving principle in phraseography. 

Doubling-general principles and their exception, use of doubling principle in phraseography. 

Prefixes, Suffixes, Contraction and Intersections: 

Prefixes and suffixes, Contractions : general rules and list of contractions. 

Intersections, writing of figures in shorthand, note taking techniques and transcription on 

typewriter. 

SHORTHAND PRACTICAL 

10(491) 


Time: 1 Hours 

Atleast twenty-five contractions/intersections will be given in longhand i.e. English Version, out of 

which twenty contractions/intersections are required to be written in Shorthand, within a period of 

ten minutes. 20 Marks 

After a gap of 10 minutes an unseen passage of 300 words will be dictated to the candidates by the 

practical examiner with a minimum speed of 60 w.p.m. The candidate will not be dictate in 

Shorthand. Afterwards, there will be gap of five minutes time and then the candidates will be give a 

time of half an hour for transcription of the shorthand notes on the typewriter/computer into 

English. 20 Marks 


B.Com Semester-V Semester 

Paper-505 

Office Practice 




Time: 3 Hours 


which will be from the entire syllabus. It will contain five short type questions. Students are 



Office Stationary : Types of papers and envelopes, control of consumption of papers, ink, 

typewriting ribbons, carbon papers, pins, clips, erasers etc. issue thereof, stock and stock record. 

Meeting: Notice, agenda, Physical facilities, quorum, providing secretarial assistance. 

Using Information : working knowledge of making use of information from different sources- 

Telephone Directory, Post Office Guide, Railway Time Table, Teleprinter, Telex, Fascimle, 

telegraphy. 

Making Travel Arrangement : Preparing tour programme, railway and air reservation booking, 

Hotel accommodation, fitting of form for Tour advance, preparing TA Bills. 

10(492) 


B.Com Semester-V Semester 

Paper-506 

Typewriting (English) Practical 

10(493) 


Time: 2 Hours 

Note : There will be pre-set question paper depending on number of group containing five 

questions in all, as mentioned below. The candidates are required to attempt all the questions. An 

interval of five minutes is to be given at the end of each question. 

Typewriting- 

(i) A passage of 800 words to be typed in twenty minutes at the speed of 40 w.p.m. 16 Marks 

(ii) A letter of 400 words to be typed in twenty minutes with one carbon copy of the same. 

16 Marks 

(iii) A tabular statement of not more than four columns and fifteen items to be typed in twenty 

minutes with proper display. 16 Marks 

(iv) A subject matter containing 400 words is to be typed on stencil paper i.e. stencil cutting 

within twenty minutes. 16 Marks 

(v) A manuscript of handwritten material containing 200 words is to be typed in twenty 

minutes. 16 Marks 


B.Com Semester-VI Semester 

Paper-605 

Computer Application 




Time: 3 Hours 





Computer- Introduction, characteristics, application to business, CPU- main memory and secondary 

storage services. Input/output devices, Personal computer, Laptop; Internet and Computing on 

Mobile phones. 

Configuration, Disc-operating systems, File Management and disc management command, words, 

Pronouncing, elaborating, block, saving, formatting, shelling ched and Printing command. 

MS Office : MS Word, MS Excel, MS Powerpoint 

Various Operating System : DOS, LINUX. 

Practical 

10(494) 


Time : 30 Min. 

Two practical assignments carrying 10 marks each from above syllabus will be given by the 

practical examiners. 


B.Com Semester-VI Semester 

Paper-606 

Shorthand (English) Practical 

10(495) 


Time: 2 Hours 

Note : There will be pre-set question-papers depending on the number of groups. Each group will 

have a separate Question-Paper containing four questions as mentioned below. The candidates are 

required to attempt all the four questions compulsorily. 

(i) Two letters containing 400 words is to be dictated at the speed of 80 w.p.m. which is to be 

typed by the candidates on the typewriter/computer within a period of 25 minutes. 

50 marks 

(ii) After a gap of five minutes, Two passages of 400 words is to be dictated in five minutes at 

a speed of 80 w.p.m. which is to be transcribed by the candidates into longhand within a 

period of twenty minutes. 50 Marks 


SYLLABUS 

OFFICE MANAGEMENT 

B.A. Semester-I (w.e.f. Session 2011-12) 


Time: 3 Hours Max. Marks :80 

Int. Assessment:20 

Introduction: Meaning, functions and importance of office management; office management and 

organization. Principles of office management and organization. Principal departments of modern 

office. Centralization vs. decentralization of office services. 

Office Manager: Qualifications and qualities of office manager. The status of office manager in 

total organization. The authorities and responsibilities of an office manger. 

Office accommodation: Selection of site. Office layout. Environment and working conditions. 

Office Communication: Various means of communication- Their use, merits and limitations. 

Selection of means of communication. Correspondence through Internet. 

10(496) 


SYLLABUS 


B.A. Semester-II 




Office Records: Filing and Indexing. Retention and weeding out of papers. 

HRM for office Management: Recruitment, Selection and Training of office staff. Office 

supervision-duties and responsibilities of supervisory staff. Motivation- Financial and non-financial 

incentives to subordinates. 

Planning and Scheduling Office Work: Office routine, flow of work and office manual. 

Stationery and forms: The design and control of office forms. Control over stationery, forms and 

supplies. 

Office Automation: Uses and abuses of labour saving appliances. A study of various types of 

commonly used appliances i.e. typewriter, duplicator, accounting machines, addressing, machines, 

calculator, franking machine, weighting and folding machine, Dictaphone, cash register, coin 

sorter, time recorder, photocopier, telephone, facsimile, computer, scanner, printer, letter opener, 

time and date stamps etc. 

Correspondence: Routine of handling mail. Importance of correspondence in business and Govt. 

offices. Essentials of good business and official correspondence. Various forms of correspondence. 

10(497) 


SYLLABUS 


B.A. Semester-III 



Meaning and types of secretaries. Qualities, qualifications, powers and duties of Secretary of: 

Cooperative society, club or other such associations, educational societies, and Chambers of 

commerce. 

Joint Stock Company: Meaning, characteristics and types of companies; Lifting of corporate veil. 

Company Secretary: Qualities, qualifications, and appointment of company secretary; Rights, 

duties and liabilities of company secretary. 

Formation of a joint stock company and secretarial work; Share capital of a company; Secretarial 

practices relating to issue and allotment of shares and share certificate. 

Secretarial practices relating to transfer and transmission of shares. 

10(498) 


SYLLABUS 


B.A. Semester-IV 



Company meeting: Meaning and types of meeting; Secretarial practices relating to holding of 

meetings with special reference to notice, agenda, quorum, motions, resolutions, sense of meeting, 

adjournment of meeting and minutes. Minutes writing- types of minutes, minutes book, contents of 

minute, drafting or writing of minutes. 

Personal Secretary: Qualities, qualifications, role and functions of personal secretary in business 

houses. Personal traits of secretary. 

Government Secretary: Role of secretary in Govt. offices, Types and qualifications of Govt. 

secretaries. Organization of State Govt. Secretariat; 

Main provisions of Official Language Act applicable to Govt. offices. 

10(499) 


SYLLABUS 

MARKETING 

B.A. Semester-I 

MARKETING 



Introduction: Meaning, Importance and various marketing concepts; Functions of Marketing, 

Concept of Marketing Mix, Market Segmentations, Bases of Market Segmentation; Consumer 

Behaviour: Buying process of consumers, factors affecting consumer behavior; Marketing 

Planning; Marketing Research. 

Product: Concept of Product, Consumer goods vs. Industrial goods and their marketing 

characteristics. Product Line and Product mix decisions; Product life cycle; Branding and 

Packaging decisions. 

10(500) 


SYLLABUS 

MARKETING 

B.A. Semester-II 

MARKETING 



Emerging Trends in Marketing. 

Price Decisions: Importance of price decision, Pricing objectives, Factors influencing pricing 

decisions, Nature of competition and pricing- Different pricing policies and strategies. 

Distribution: Decisions, Concept of distribution, Elements of physical distribution; Channels of 

distribution, Marketing Institutions- their role in marketing, functions of merchant and agent 

middle-men, factors affecting the choice of the channels of distribution. 

Promotion Decision: Concept of promotion, Objectives and importance of promotion, 

Communication and promotions; promotional tools and promotion mix- Advertising, personal 

selling, sales promotion and publicity; Services Marketing; International Marketing. 

10(501) 


SYLLABUS 

MARKETING 

B.A. Semester-III 



Note:- The Paper Setter will set ten questions and a student is required to attempt any five 

questions. 

Personal selling: Concept and features, classification of sales jobs, qualities and functions of a sales 

person, prospecting, personal selling process; Functions of a sales manager. 

Sales Planning: Importance and process of sales planning; sales budgeting. 

Sales Organization: Purpose, principles and process of setting up a sales organization; Sales 

organizational structures; Determining size of sales force. 

Managing the Sales force: Recruitment; Selection; Training; Compensation; Motivating and 

Leading the sales force. Sales meetings and contests. 

Ethical issues in sales management. 

10(502) 


SYLLABUS 

MARKETING 

B.A. Semester-IV 



Note:- The Paper Setter will set ten questions and a student is required to attempt any five 

questions. 

Introduction to Advertising: Meaning, nature and importance; Communication process; Advertising 

and communication; Types of advertising; Advertising management process- an overview. 

Advertising Objectives and Budget: Determining advertising objectives; Methods of determining 

advertising budget. 

Media Planning: Features of Print, broadcasting media, Internet media and outdoor media; Media 

Planning and selection. 

Role of advertising agencies, advertising agency and client relationship. 

Ethical issues in advertising. 

10(503) 


SCHEME OF PAPERS 

FOR 

BACHELOR OF LIBRARY & INFORMATION SCIENCE 

SESSION 2012-13 


Paper No. Nomenclature of Papers Internal 

Assessment 

10(504) 

Max. 

Marks 

I. Library and Information Society 20 100 

II. Knowledge Organisation, Information Processing & 

Retrieval 

20 100 

III. Information Sources (Theory and Practice) 20 100 

IV. Library Classification & Cataloguing Practice –A 20 100 

SEMESTER – II 

V. Management o - 504 -f Libraries and Information Centres 20 100 

VI. Users and Information Services (Theory and Practice) 20 100 

VII. ICT Applications in LIS (Theory and Practice) 20 100 

VIII. Library Classification & Cataloguing Practice – B 20 100 



PAPER I: LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SOCIETY 


Internal assessment: 20 Marks (Assignment – 10 + Attendance – 5+ Class Test – 5) 

Theory: 80 Marks Time 3 Hours 

Objectives: 

(i) To introduce students to the field of Library and Information Science; 

(ii) To introduce students to the concepts of information society; and 

(iii) To provide an overview of the entire programme. 

Note: The paper is divided into 4 Units. The examinees will be required to attempt Five 

questions in all, including Question 1, which is compulsory and selecting One question 

from each Unit (I-IV). Question 1 will consist of 8 short Answer (2 marks each) questions 

(having no internal choice) spread over the whole syllabi. The Examiner will set Two 

questions from each Unit. 

Unit-I: Concept of Library in Society 

- Social and historical foundations of library. 

- Development of libraries with special reference to India. 

- Different types of libraries - their distinguishing features and functions. 

Unit-II: Normative Principles of Library and Information Science 

- Five Laws of Library Science and their Implications on Library and Information 

Activities. 

Unit-III: Laws relating to Libraries and Information Centres 

- Library Legislation in India: Need and essential features. 

- Copyright Act and Delivery of Books (Public Libraries) Act. 

- Librarianship as a Profession 

- Professional ethics 

Unit-IV: Professional Association, Public Relations, Extension Activities and Resource 

Sharing 

- Professional Associations and their role with particular reference to ILA, IASLIC, 

IFLA and UNESCO 

- Definition: Facets and programmes of PR and Extension Services 

- Resource Sharing and Library Networking 


1. GARDENER (Frank M). Public Library Legislation: A Comparative Study, Paris, UNESCO, 1971. 

2. HARRISON (Colin) and BEENHAM (Rosernary). The Basic of Librarianship. London. Clive-Bengley, 1987. 

3. INDIA MINISTRY OF EDUCATION, Report of the Advisory Committee for Libraries, Delhi, Manager of 

Publications, 1959. 

4. JEFFERSON (G). Libraries and Society, London, James Clarks and Co., 1969. 

5. KHANNA (J K). Fundamentals of Library Organisation. 

6. KHANNA (J K). Library and Society, Kurukshetra; Research Publication, 1987. 

7. SAINI (O P). Pustakālaya aura samāja. (Hindi medium) 

* * * * * * * 

10(505) 


PAPER-II: KNOWLEDGE ORGANISATION, INFORMATION PROCESSING & 

RETRIEVAL 



Theory: 80 Marks Time: 3 Hours 

Objectives: 

(i) To introduce the structure and attributes of Universe of Knowledge. 

(ii) To develop skills in subject analysis and proficiency in using standard schemes of 

classification and subject cataloguing; and 

(iii) To familiarise with the principles and practice of document description including 

electronic documents. 






Unit-I: Universe of Knowledge 

- Universe of Subjects: Definitions and Purpose. 

- Modes of Formation of Subjects. 

- Library Classification: Definition, Need and Purpose. 

- Notation: Need, Type and Quality. 

- Call Number: Class Number, Book Number and Collection Number 

Unit-II: Library Classification Theory 

- Postulational Approach: Postulates, Facet Analysis, Fundamental Categories, Phase 

Analysis, Principles of Helpful Sequence and Facet Sequence. 

- Standard Schemes of Library Classification; Introduction, features and applications of 

CC, DDC and UDC. 

- Current Trends: Developments in DDC and UDC, Computers and Classification. 

Unit-III: Bibliographic Description 

- Catalogue – Definition, Need and Purpose, Types of Library Catalogue - Physical 

forms: Conventional and Non-conventional; Kinds of Entries and their functioning 

according to CCC and AACR-2. ALA Rules for filing Entries 

Unit-IV: Subject Cataloguing 

- Definition, Need, Purpose and problems of Subject Cataloguing, Methods of Subject 

Cataloguing. Chain Procedure and Sears List of Subject Headings. Latest trends - 

MARC, ISBD, CCF. 


1. CHOUDHURY (G G). Modern information retrieval theory, 1999. Library Association, 

London. 

2. DHYANI (Pushpa). Theory of Library Classification, 2000. Vishwa Prakashan, Delhi. 

3. FOSKETT (A C). Subject approach to information. 5 th Ed. 1990. Bingley, London. 

4. HUNTER (E J) and BAKEWELL (K G B). Advanced Cataloguing. 1989. Bingley, London. 

10(506) 


5. KRISHAN KUMAR. Theory of Library Classification. 1985. Vikas, Delhi. 

6. RANGANATHAN (S R) Prolegomena to library classification. 3 rd ed. 1967. Sarda 

Ranganathan Endowment, Bombay. 

7. TRIPATHI (S M) and SHOKEEN (N S). Fundamentals of Cataloguing theory (Hindi 

Medium). 1998. Y.K. Agra. 

8. TRIPATHI (S M) and SHOKEEN (N S). Fundamentals of Library Classification (Hindi 

Medium). 1988. Y.K. Agra. 

* * * * * * * 

PAPER-III: INFORMATION SOURCES (THEORY AND PRACTICE) 

Objectives: 

(i) To acquaint with various types of information sources. 

(ii) To familiarize with different types of reference books. 

(iii) To develop evaluative and practical skill in dealing with information sources. 

Part-I: Theory 

10(507) 



Internal assessment: 10 Marks (Attendance – 5 (includes attendance of Practical Classes also) + 

Class Test – 5) 


Note: The paper is divided into 3 Units. The examinees will be required to attempt Four 


from each Unit (I-III). Question 1 will consist of 7 short Answer (2 marks each) questions 



Unit-I: Reference and Information Sources 

- Documentary Sources of Information: Print, Non-print 

- Categories: Primary, Secondary and Tertiary Information Sources 

- Human and Institutional: Nature, types, Characteristics and utility 

- Internet as a Source of Information. 

Unit-II: Types and Evaluation of Reference Sources 

Different types of reference books and Criteria for evaluation of Encyclopaedias, 

Dictionaries, Geographical Sources, Biographical Sources, Reference Sources for 

Current Events and Ready Reference Sources. 

Unit-III: Bibliographical Sources 

- Bibliographical Sources: Functions and Types and Branches. 

- Uses and criteria for evaluation of National Bibliography, Trade Bibliography, 

Subject Bibliography, Indexing and Abstracting Sources. 

Assignments: 10 Marks 

Part-II: Practice 

Section – A 



Section – B 

Practical Examination: 30 Marks Time: 2 Hours 

The Distribution of Marks and scheme of examination will be as follows: 

1. The examinees will be required to evaluate One Information Source. Marks: 10 

2. This part will consist of 10 Information Queries. The examinees must give Marks: 15 

only one standard Source of Information (which according to the examinee 

is the most appropriate) along with complete bibliographical details. 

3. Viva-voce: Marks: 05 

Study and Evaluation of following Information Sources: 

1. Bibliographical Sources: 

Indian National Bibliography, Indian Books-in-Print, Books-in-Print (Bowker), Whitaker's 

Books-in-Print. 

2. Indexing and Abstracting 

Guide to Indian Periodical Literature, Library and Information Science Abstracts (LISA), 

Indian Science Abstracts. 

3. Encyclopaedias: 

New Encyclopaedia Britannica, Encyclopaedia Americana, Encyclopaedia of Library and 

Information Science, International Encyclopaedia of Social Sciences, McGraw Hill 

Encyclopaedia of Science and Technology. 

4. Dictionaries: 

Oxford English Dictionary, Webster's Third New International Dictionary, Samantar Kosh: 

Hindi Thesaurus, Rogets International Thesaurus. 

5. Geographical Sources: 

Gazetteer of India, World Geographical Encyclopaedia, Times Atlas of the World, Fodor's 

India. 

6. Biographical Sources: 

India Who's Who, International Who's Who, Dictionary of National Biography (India). 

Chamber's Biographical Dictionary. 

7. Reference Sources for Current Events: 

Asian News Digest, Keesing's Record of World Events. 

8. Year Books: 

Europa World Yearbook, Statesman's Yearbook, India: A Reference Annual. 

9. Directories: 

Universities Handbook India, Commonwealth Universities Yearbook, World of Learning. 

10. Statistical Sources: 

Statistical Abstracts of India, Census of India, UNESCO Statistical Yearbook. 

11. Handbooks: 

Limca Book of Records, Guinness Book of World Records. 

10(508) 


12. Almanacs: 

Whitaker's Almanac. 


1. BUNCH (Allan). Basics of information work, 1995. Clive Bingley. London. 

2. CHANDLER (G) How to find out: A guide to sources of information for all, Ed. 4. 1971. Pergamon, 

Oxford. 

3. KATZ (William A). Introduction to reference work, Ed. 7 2V, 1996. McGraw Hill, New York. 

4. KRISHAN KUMAR, Reference Service, Vikas, New Delhi. 

5. TRIPATHI (S M). Modern bibliographical control, Bibliography and documentation. 1992. Y.K. Agra. 

6. USHA PAWAN and GUPTA (Pawan Kumar) Sandarbh Sewa: Saidhantik avom kriyatmak. 1994. RBSA, 

Jaipur. (Hindi Medium). 

* * * * * * * 

PAPER-IV: LIBRARY CLASSIFICATION & CATALOGUING PRACTICE – A 

Part – I Colon Classification (6th revised edition) 

10(509) 

Max. Marks: 100 (50+50) 


Internal assessment: 10 Marks (Attendance – 5 (includes attendance of Cataloguing Practical 

classes also) + Class Test – 5) 


Objectives: 

(i) To familiarise with the process of classification. 

(ii) To familiarise with various provisions of CC 

Note: There will be Ten Titles and the examinees will be required to classify any Eight titles only. 

Classification of Documents 

- Representing Simple Subject. 

- Having Common Isolates. 

- Representing Compound Subject. 

- Representing Complex Subject. 


1. RANGANATHAN (S.R.). Colon Classification, Rev. ed. 6. 1963. 

Part – II: Classified Catalogue Code (CCC) 

Internal assessment: 10 Marks (Assignments – 10 (Preparation of Cataloguing Copy) 




Objectives: 

(i) To familiarise with the process of cataloguing. 

(ii) To familiarise with various provisions of CCC. 

(iii) To familiarise with the process of preparation of Entries according to CCC. 

Note: There will be Five Titles in all and the Examinees will be required to attempt any Three Titles 

only. All Titles carry equal marks. 

Classified Catalogue Code 

- Sections and Skeleton Card of Main and Added Entries (Class Index, Book Index, 

Cross Reference Index and Cross Reference Entry). 

- Cataloguing of Personal Authorship, Pseudonym Work. 

- Cataloguing of Multi - Volume documents. 

- Cataloguing of Periodical Publications (Simple Periodical Publications). 

Books Recommended: RANGANATHAN (S R). Classified Catalogue Code with additional 

Rules for Dictionary Catalogue Code. Ed. 5. 1964. 


PAPER-V: MANAGEMENT OF LIBRARIES AND INFORMATION CENTRES 


10(510) 



Objectives: 

(i) To introduce environmental factors of Libraries and Information Centres. 

(ii) To understand organisational structure. 

(iii) To study functions and routines of different sections. 



from each Unit (I-IV). Question 1 will consist of 8 short Answer (2 marks each) 

questions (having no internal choice) spread over the whole syllabi. The Examiner will set 

Two questions from each Unit. 

Unit-I: Library Environment 

- Organisation, Management and Administration: A Conceptual Framework. 

- Relationship of the library with its parent organisation. 

- Library Organisational Structure, Ranganathan's Staff Formula 

- Library Committee: Types, functions and powers. 

Unit-II: Library Finance and Budgeting 

- Sources of Finance. 

- Methods of Estimating Library Finance. 

- Budget Preparation for different types of Libraries. 

- General Administration: Annual Report, Library Statistics, Library Rules. 

Unit-III: Sections of the Library 


- Book Selection and Procurement: Principles, Policy, Committee, Tools and 

Procedure. 

- Technical Processing Section. 

- Periodicals Section. 

- Circulation Section. 

- Reference Section 

Unit-IV: Maintenance, Building and Space Management 

- Maintenance Section: Stacking, Shelving, Shelf Rectification, Stock Verification, 

Binding etc. 

- Basic elements in designing library building. 

- Furniture and Equipments. 


1. Application of Management Techniques to Library and Information Systems, 12 th IASLIC 

Conference, Roorkee, 1979. 

2. MITTAL (R L). Library Administration: Theory and Practice. 5 th ed. New Delhi, Metropolitan, 1983. 

3. MOOKERJEE (Subodh Kumar) and SENGUPTA (Beneyendra). Library Organization and Library 

Administration. Calcutta; World Press, 1972. 

4. PANWAR (B S) and VYAS (S D). Library Management; Delhi; R.R. Publishing Corporation, 1986. 

5. RANGANATHAN (S R) Library Manual for Authorities, Librarians and Honorary Library Workers. 2nd 

ed. Bombay; Asia, 1967. 

6. SINGH (M). Library and Information Management: Theory and Practice Delhi; IBT, 1983. 

7. SINGH (R S P). Fundamentals of Library Administration and Management. Delhi; Prabhat, 1990. 

8. STEUART (Robert) and EASTILICK (John T). Libraries Management. 2 nd ed. Colorado Libraries 

Unlimited, 1991. 

9. WILSON (A). The Planning approach to Library Management. 

10. TRIPATHI (S M). Granthalya prabandh (Hindi medium). 

* * * * * * * 

PAPER-VI: USERS AND INFORMATION SERVICES (THEORY AND PRACTICE) 

Objectives 

(i) To introduce with various categories of Users and their Information Needs. 

(ii) To familiarise with different types of Information Services. 

(iii) To introduce with various Information Systems. 

(iv) To introduce with methods of organising User Education Programmes. 

(v) To develop practical skills in preparation of selected Information Products. 


10(511) 



Internal assessment: 10 Marks (Attendance – 5 (includes attendance of Practical Classes also) + 









Unit-I: Information Users and their Information Needs 

- Categories of Information Users 

- Information Needs: Definition and Characteristics. 

- Information Seeking Behaviour: Models 

- User Studies: Methods and Techniques. 

- Information Literacy and User Education: Concepts and Methods. 

Unit-II: Information Services and Products 

- Information Services: Evolution, Types and Trends. 

- Current Awareness Type of Services: CAS, SDI, Press Clipping Service. 

- Other Services: Indexing and Abstracting Services, Referral Service, Document 

Delivery and Translation Services. 

- Reference Process: Reference Question; Interview; Search Strategy and Reference 

Service 

Unit-III: Information Systems and their Services 

- Overview of National, International and Commercial Information Systems and 

Networks. 

- Introduction to the Background, their Services and Products: DELNET, INFLIBNET, 

ENVIS, INIS, AGRIS, and OCLC 

Assignments: 10 marks 


Section – A 

Section – B 



10(512) 


Note: There will be ONE question from the following for each examinee: 

1. Preparation of Current Contents List on a specified subject. 

(Broad Subject Heading arrangement). 

2. Preparation of a Subject Bibliography (of about 20 books) on a specified subject. Marks: 25 

3. Preparation of Newspaper Clippings on a specified subject. 


Syllabus: 

Preparation of: Current Awareness Bulletin, Newspaper Clippings, Contents List, Subject 

Bibliography. 



1. ATHERTON (Pauline). Handbook for information systems and services. 1977. UNESCO, Paris. 

2. BOPP (Richard E) and SMITH (Linda C), Ed. Reference and information services: An Introduction. Rev. 

ed. 1995. Libraries Un., USA. 

3. GUHA (B) Documentation and information. Rev. ed. 2. 1983. World Press Calcutta. 

4. KATZ (William A). Introduction to reference work. E 7. 2 V. 1996. Mc Graw Hill, New York. 

5. TRIPATHI (S.M.). Documentation, Information Services and Networks. 2 V. (Hindi Medium) 1998. Y.K. 

Agra. 

6. TRIPATHI (S.M.). New Dimensions on Reference and Information Services. (Hindi Medium) 1998. Y.K. 

Agra. 

7. USHA PAWAN and GUPTA (Pawan Kumar). Sandarbh Sewa : Saidhantik avom Kriyatmak 1994. RBSA, 

Jaipur. (Hindi Medium). 

* * * * * * * 

PAPER-VII: ICT APPLICATIONS IN LIS (THEORY AND PRACTICE) 


Objectives: 

(i) To acquaint the students with the basic concepts of computers. 

(ii) To understand various aspects of library automation. 

(iii) To develop skills in using computers technologies. 


10(513) 


Internal assessment: 10 Marks (Assignment – 5 + Attendance – 5 (includes attendance of 

Practical Classes also) 


Note: The paper is divided into 3 Units. The examinees will be required to attempt Four questions 

in all, including Question 1, which is compulsory and selecting One question from each Unit 

(I-III). Question 1 will consist of 7 short Answer (2 marks each) questions (having no 

internal choice) spread over the whole syllabi. The Examiner will set Two questions from 

each Unit. 

Unit – I: Overview of Information Communication Technology 

- Overview of Computer Technology, Communication Technology, Reprography & 

Micrograph and Printing and Publishing Technology 

Unit –II: Introduction to Computers and Computer Architecture 

- The Evolution of Computers. 

- Characteristics of Computers. 

- Classification of Computers: Super Computer, Mainframe Computer, Mini Computer 

and Micro Computer. 

- Digital vs. Analog Computers. 

Computer Architecture: 

- Input Devices, Output Devices, Central Processing Unit. Memory (Auxiliary). 

Unit – III: Software Concept 

� System Software/Operating System (OS) 


- Definition of OS. 

- Principal functions of the OS. 

- Various Operating Systems: Single and Multiuser. 

- Basic Features of Windows XP. 

� Programming Languages: Concepts and Tools. 

� Application Software Packages. 

� Word Processor Software: MS-WORD: 

- Creating a Document. 

- Editing a Document. 

- Formatting a Document. 

- Maintaining Mailing List. 


Internal assessment: 10 Marks (Assignment – 5 + Class Test – 5) 

10(514) 



Note: There will be One question each from the following units. The examinees will be required to 

attempt Two questions in all. The candidates will be required to record the steps of database 

creation on the assigned area. 

Unit – I: Operating System: Introduction to WINDOWS XP 

- Important Features of Windows 

- Desktop, My Computer, Control Panel, Windows Explorer 

- Accessories Applets. 

Unit – II: MS Office 

- MS WORD: Standard Toolbars, Creating a Document, Editing a Document, 

Formatting a Document, Maintaining Mailing List. 

- MS POWER POINT: Creating Presentation Slides, Formatting/ Adding Graphics. 

Slide Show. Customizing and Printing. 

Unit – III: WINISIS 

- Overview of WINISIS features. 

- Installation of WINISIS. 

- SYSPAR.PAR Parameters. 

- WINISIS Windows and Dialog Boxes. 

- Database Creation. 

- Formatting Language: Additional Features - Hypertext Link (within a database and 

among databases), Handling Multimedia. 

- Database Searching, Sorting and Printing. 


1. BHARIHOKE (Deepak). Fundamentals of IT. 2nd ed. Excel Books. New Delhi, 2002. 

2. BURXTON (Andrew) and HOPKINSON (Alan). The CDS/ISIS for Windows Handbook. 

UNESCO/CI, Paris, 2001. 

3. COLEMAN. Windows XP from A – Z. BPB Publications. New Delhi. 


4. LEON (Alexis) and LEON (Mathews). Fundamentals of Information Technology. 2 nd Ed. 

Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi. 2009. 

5. Nagpal (D P). Computer Fundamentals. S. Chand. New Delhi. 2008. 

6. WINISIS. Library & Information Division , Kerala Institute of Local Administration, India. 

Available at: http://greenstonesupport.iimk.ac.in/Documents/Winisis%20Archiving%20 

Guide.pdf 

7. ROWLEY (J E). Basics of Information Technology. 

8. ROWLEY (Jennifer). Computers for libraries. 3rd ed. Library Association. London. 1993. 

9. RUTKOSKY. MS PowerPoint 2007. BPB Publications. New Delhi. 

10. RUTKOSKY. MS Word 2007 (W/CD). BPB Publications. New Delhi. 

11. JAIN (S). MS PowerPoint 2007- Made Simple. BPB Publications. New Delhi. 

12. JAIN (S). MS Word 2007- Made Simple. BPB Publications. New Delhi. 

13. SINHA (P K) and Sinha (P). Foundations of computing. BPB Publications. 2008. 

14. TAXALI (R K). PC software for Windows made simple. Tata McGraw Hill. 

15. UNESCO. CDS/ISIS for WINDOWS ver. 1.5: Reference Manual. Paris. 2004. 

16. WEIXEL. Learning Microsoft Office XP. BPB Publications. New Delhi. 

* * * * * * * 

PAPER-VIII: LIBRARY CLASSIFICATION 

& CATALOGUING PRACTICE - B 

Part – I: Dewey Decimal Classification 

10(515) 

Max. Marks: 100 (50+50) 


Internal assessment: 10 Marks (Attendance – 5 (includes attendance of Cataloguing Practical 

classes also) + Class Test – 5) 


Objectives: 


(ii) To familiarise with various provisions of DDC. 

Note: There will be Ten Titles and the examinees will be required to classify any Eight titles only, 

using latest available edition of DDC. 

Classification of Documents 

- Representing Simple Subject. 

- Having Common Isolates. 

- Representing Compound Subject. 

- Representing Complex Subject. 


1. DEWEY (Melvil). Dewey Decimal Classification, Latest available edition. 

Part – II: AACR – II 


Internal assessment: 10 Marks (Preparation of Cataloguing Copy) 

10(516) 


Practical Examination: 40 Marks `Time: 2 Hours 

Objectives: 

Note: 


(ii) To familiarise with various provisions of AACR - II 

(iii) To familiarise with the process of preparation of Entries according to AACR – II 

1. There will be Five Titles and the examinees will be required to attempt any Three Titles. All 

titles carry equal marks. 

2. Anglo-American Cataloguing Rules – II 

Conventional Documents 

- Sections and Skeleton Card of Main and Added entries. 

- Basic features, Personal Author(s), Shared Authorship, Collaborator (s). 

- Cataloguing of Pseudonym Work. 

- Cataloguing of Multivolume documents. 

- Cataloguing of Periodical Publications (Simple Periodical Publications) 


1. ALA and others. Anglo American Cataloguing Rules. Revised ed. 2. 1998. 

2. SEARS (ME). Sears List of Subject Headings. Latest edition. 

* * * * * * * 


DISTANCE EDUCATION 


FOR 

BACHELOR OF LIBRARY & INFORMATION SCIENCE 

SESSION 2012-13 

Paper No. Nomenclature of Papers Max. Marks 

I Library and Information Society 100 

II Knowledge Organisation, Information Processing & 

Retrieval 

III Management of Libraries and Information Centres 100 

IV Information Sources 100 

V Users and Information Services 100 

VI ICT Applications in LIS (Theory and Practice) 100 

VII Library Classification Practice 100 

VIII Library Cataloguing Practice 100 

10(517) 

100 

Total 800 


Objectives: 

PAPER – I: LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SOCIETY 


Time: 3 Hours 

i) To introduce students to the field of Library and Information Science; 

ii) To introduce students to the concepts of information society; and 

iii) To provide an overview of the entire programme. 






Unit-I: Concept of Library in Society 

- Social and historical foundations of library. 

- Development of libraries with special reference to India. 

- Different types of libraries - their distinguishing features and functions. 

Unit-II: Normative Principles of Library and Information Science 

- Five Laws of Library Science and their Implications on Library and Information 

Activities. 

Unit-III: Laws relating to Libraries and Information Centres 

- Library Legislation in India: Need and essential features. 

- Copyright Act and Delivery of Books (Public Libraries) Act. 

- Librarianship as a Profession 

- Professional ethics 

Unit-IV: Professional Association, Public Relations, Extension Activities and Resource 

Sharing 

- Professional Associations and their role with particular reference to ILA, IASLIC, 

IFLA and UNESCO 

- Definition: Facets and programmes of PR and Extension Services 

- Resource Sharing and Library Networking 


GARDENER (Frank M). Public Library Legislation: A Comparative Study, Paris, UNESCO, 1971. 

HARRISON (Colin) and BEENHAM (Rosernary). The Basic of Librarianship. London. Clive-Bengley, 

1987. 

INDIA MINISTRY OF EDUCATION, Report of the Advisory Committee for Libraries, Delhi, Manager of 


10(518) 


JEFFERSON (G). Libraries and Society, London, James Clarks and Co., 1969. 

KHANNA (J K). Fundamentals of Library Organisation. 

KHANNA (J K). Library and Society, Kurukshetra; Research Publication, 1987. 

SAINI (O P). Pustakālaya aura samāja. (Hindi medium) 

* * * * * * * 

PAPER – II: KNOWLEDGE ORGANISATION, INFORMATION PROCESSING & 

RETRIEVAL 


Time: 3 Hours 

Objectives: 

(i) To introduce the structure and attributes of Universe of Knowledge. 

(ii) To develop skills in subject analysis and proficiency in using standard schemes of 

classification and subject cataloguing; and 

(iii) To familiarise with the principles and practice of document description including 

electronic documents. 






Unit-I: Universe of Knowledge 

- Universe of Subjects: Definitions and Purpose. 

- Modes of Formation of Subjects. 

- Library Classification: Definition, Need and Purpose. 

- Notation: Need, Type and Quality. 

- Call Number: Class Number, Book Number and Collection Number 

Unit-II: Library Classification Theory 

- Postulational Approach: Postulates, Facet Analysis, Fundamental Categories, Phase 

Analysis, Principles of Helpful Sequence and Facet Sequence. 

- Standard Schemes of Library Classification; Introduction, features and applications of 

CC, DDC and UDC. 

- Current Trends: Developments in DDC and UDC, Computers and Classification. 

Unit-III: Bibliographic Description 

- Catalogue – Definition, Need and Purpose, Types of Library Catalogue - Physical 

forms: Conventional and Non-conventional; Kinds of Entries and their functioning 

according to CCC and AACR-2. ALA Rules for filing Entries 

Unit-IV: Subject Cataloguing 

- Definition, Need, Purpose and problems of Subject Cataloguing, Methods of Subject 

Cataloguing. Chain Procedure and Sears List of Subject Headings. Latest trends - 

MARC, ISBD, CCF. 

10(519) 



1. CHOUDHURY (G G). Modern information retrieval theory, 1999. Library Association, London. 

2. DHYANI (Pushpa). Theory of Library Classification, 2000. Vishwa Prakashan, Delhi. 

3. FOSKETT (A C). Subject approach to information. 5th Ed. 1990. Bingley, London. 

4. HUNTER (E J) and BAKEWELL (K G B). Advanced Cataloguing. 1989. Bingley, London. 

5. KRISHAN KUMAR. Theory of Library Classification. 1985. Vikas, Delhi. 

6. RANGANATHAN (S R) Prolegomena to library classification. 3rd ed. 1967. Sarda Ranganathan 

Endowment, Bombay. 

7. TRIPATHI (S M) and SHOKEEN (N S). Fundamentals of Cataloguing theory (Hindi Medium). 1998. 

Y.K. Agra. 

8. TRIPATHI (S M) and SHOKEEN (N S). Fundamentals of Library Classification (Hindi Medium). 1988. 

Y.K. Agra. 

10(520) 


PAPER – III: MANAGEMENT OF LIBRARIES AND INFORMATION CENTRES 


Time: 3 Hours 

Objectives: 

(i) To introduce environmental factors of Libraries and Information Centres. 

(ii) To understand organisational structure. 

(iii) To study functions and routines of different sections. 






Unit-I: Library Environment 

- Organisation, Management and Administration: A Conceptual Framework. 

- Relationship of the library with its parent organisation. 

- Library Organisational Structure, Ranganathan's Staff Formula 

- Library Committee: Types, functions and powers. 

Unit-II: Library Finance and Budgeting 

- Sources of Finance. 

- Methods of Estimating Library Finance. 

- Budget Preparation for different types of Libraries. 

- General Administration: Annual Report, Library Statistics, Library Rules. 

Unit-III: Sections of the Library 

- Book Selection and Procurement: Principles, Policy, Committee, Tools and 

Procedure. 

- Technical Processing Section. 

- Periodicals Section. 

- Circulation Section. 

- Reference Section. 

Unit-IV: Maintenance, Building and Space Management 

- Maintenance Section: Stacking, Shelving, Shelf Rectification, Stock Verification, 

Binding etc. 

- Basic elements in designing library building. 

- Furniture and Equipments. 


1. Application of Management Techniques to Library and Information Systems, 12 th IASLIC 

Conference, Roorkee, 1979. 

2. MITTAL (R L). Library Administration: Theory and Practice. 5 th ed. New Delhi, Metropolitan, 1983. 

3. MOOKERJEE (Subodh Kumar) and SENGUPTA (Beneyendra). Library Organization and Library 

Administration. Calcutta; World Press, 1972. 

4. PANWAR (B S) and VYAS (S D). Library Management; Delhi; R.R. Publishing Corporation, 1986. 

5. RANGANATHAN (S R) Library Manual for Authorities, Librarians and Honorary Library Workers. 2nd 

ed. Bombay; Asia, 1967. 

6. SINGH (M). Library and Information Management: Theory and Practice Delhi; IBT, 1983. 

10(521) 


7. SINGH (R S P). Fundamentals of Library Administration and Management. Delhi; Prabhat, 1990. 

8. STEUART (Robert) and EASTILICK (John T). Libraries Management. 2 nd ed. Colorado Libraries 

Unlimited, 1991. 

9. WILSON (A). The Planning approach to Library Management. 

10. TRIPATHI (S M). Granthalya prabandh (Hindi medium). 

* * * * * * * 

PAPER – IV: INFORMATION SOURCES 

Objectives: 

(i) To acquaint with various types of information sources. 

(ii) To familiarize with different types of reference books. 

(iii) To develop evaluative and practical skill in dealing with information sources. 

10(522) 


Time: 3 Hours 

Note: The paper is divided into 4 Units. The examinees will be required to attempt Five questions 

in all, including Question 1, which is compulsory and selecting One question from each 

Unit (I-IV). The Examiner will set Two questions from each Unit. Question 1 will consist of 

10 Information Queries (2 marks each). The examinees must give only one standard Source 

of Information (which according to the examinee is the most appropriate) along with 

complete bibliographical details. 

Unit-I: Reference and Information Sources 

- Documentary Sources of Information: Print, Non-print 

- Categories: Primary, Secondary and Tertiary Information Sources 

- Human and Institutional: Nature, types, Characteristics and utility 

- Internet as a Source of Information. 

- Different types of reference books and Criteria for evaluation of Reference Sources. 

Unit-II: Types, Criteria and Evaluation of Reference Sources – I 

- Encyclopaedias: New Encyclopaedia Britannica, Encyclopaedia Americana, 

Encyclopaedia of Library and Information Science, International Encyclopaedia of 

Social Sciences, McGraw Hill Encyclopaedia of Science and Technology. 

- Dictionaries: Oxford English Dictionary, Samantar Kosh: Hindi Thesaurus, Rogets 

International Thesaurus. 

- Geographical Sources: Gazetteer of India, Times Atlas of the World, Fodor's India. 

- Biographical Sources: India Who's Who, International Who's Who, Dictionary of 

National Biography (India). Chamber's Biographical Dictionary. 

Unit-III: Types, Criteria and Evaluation of Reference Sources – II 

- Reference Sources for Current Events: Asian News Digest, Keesing's Record of 

World Events. 

Ready Reference Sources: 

- Year Books: Europa World Yearbook, Statesman's Yearbook, India: A Reference 

Annual. 

- Directories: Universities Handbook India, Commonwealth Universities Yearbook, 

World of Learning. 


- Statistical Sources: Statistical Abstracts of India, Census of India, UNESCO 

Statistical Yearbook. 

- Handbooks: Limca Book of Records, Guinness Book of World Records. 

Unit-IV: Bibliographical Sources 

- Bibliographical Sources: Functions, Types and Branches. 

- Uses and criteria for evaluation of National Bibliography. 

Evaluation of: 

- National Bibliography: Indian National Bibliography, British National Bibliography. 

- Trade Bibliography: Books-in-Print (Bowker), Indian Books-in-Print. 

- Indexing and Abstracting Sources: Chemical Abstracts, Guide to Indian Periodical 

Literature, Library and Information Science Abstracts (LISA), Indian Science 

Abstracts. 


1. BUNCH (Allan). Basics of information work, 1995. Clive Bingley. London. 

2. CHANDLER (G) How to find out: A guide to sources of information for all, Ed. 4. 1971. Pergamon, 

Oxford. 

3. KATZ (William A). Introduction to reference work, Ed. 7 2V, 1996. McGraw Hill, New York. 

4. KRISHAN KUMAR, Reference Service, Vikas, New Delhi. 

5. TRIPATHI (S M). Modern bibliographical control, Bibliography and documentation. 1992. Y.K. Agra. 

6. USHA PAWAN and GUPTA (Pawan Kumar) Sandarbh Sewa: Saidhantik avom kriyatmak. 1994. 

RBSA, Jaipur. (Hindi medium). 

* * * * * * * 

PAPER – V: USERS AND INFORMATION SERVICES 

Objectives 

(i) To introduce with various categories of Users and their Information Needs. 

(ii) To familiarise with different types of Information Services. 

(iii) To introduce with various Information Systems. 

(iv) To introduce with methods of organising User Education Programmes. 

(v) To develop practical skills in preparation of selected Information Products. 

10(523) 


Time: 3 Hours 



Unit (I-IV). Question 1 will consist of 10 short Answer (2 marks each) questions (having no 


each Unit. 

Unit – I: Information Users and their Information Needs 

- Categories of Information Users. 

- Information Needs: Definition and Characteristics. 

- Information Seeking Behaviour: Models. 

- User Studies: Methods and Techniques. 


Unit – II: Reference and Information Services 

- Reference Service: Need and Types. 

- Reference Process: Reference Questions, Reference Interview. 

- Referral Service. 

- Information Literacy and User Education: Concepts and Methods. 

Unit – III: Information Services 

- Information Services: Evolution, Need and Types. 

- Current Awareness Type of Services: CAS & SDI. 

- Indexing and Abstracting Services. 

- Document Delivery Service 

- Translation Service. 

- Trends in Reference and Information Services. 

Unit-IV: Information Systems and their Services 

- Overview of National and International Information Systems and Networks. 

- Introduction to the Background, their Services and Products: DELNET, INFLIBNET, 

ENVIS, INIS, AGRIS and OCLC. 


1. ATHERTON (Pauline). Handbook for information systems and services. 1977. UNESCO, Paris. 

2. BOPP (Richard E) and SMITH (Linda C), Ed. Reference and information services: An Introduction. 

Rev. ed. 1995. Libraries Un., USA. 

3. GUHA (B) Documentation and information. Rev. ed. 2. 1983. World Press Calcutta. 

4. KATZ (William A). Introduction to reference work. E 7. 2 V. 1996. Mc Graw Hill, New York. 

5. TRIPATHI (S.M.). Documentation, Information Services and Networks. 2 V. (Hindi Medium) 1998. 

Y.K. Agra. 

6. TRIPATHI (S.M.). New Dimensions on Reference and Information Services. (Hindi Medium) 1998. 

Y.K. Agra. 

7. USHA PAWAN and GUPTA (Pawan Kumar). Sandarbh Sewa: Saidhantik avom Kriyatmak 1994. 

RBSA, Jaipur. (Hindi medium). 

Objectives: 

* * * * * * * 

PAPER – VI: ICT APPLICATIONS IN LIS (THEORY AND PRACTICE) 


(i) To acquaint the students with the basic concepts of computers. 

(ii) To understand various aspects of library automation. 

(iii) To develop skills in using computers technologies. 


Max. Marks: 60 Time: 3 Hours 


in all, including Question 1, which is compulsory and selecting One question from each Unit 

(I-III). Question 1 will consist of 5 short Answer (3 marks each) questions (having no 


each Unit. 

10(524) 


Unit – I: Overview of Information Communication Technology 

- Overview of Computer Technology, Communication Technology, Reprography & 

Micrograph and Printing and Publishing Technology 

Unit – II: Introduction to Computers and Computer Architecture 

- The Evolution of Computers. 

- Characteristics of Computers. 

- Classification of Computers: Super Computer, Mainframe Computer, Mini Computer 

and Micro Computer. 

- Digital vs. Analog Computers. 

Computer Architecture: 

- Input Devices, Output Devices, Central Processing Unit. Memory (Auxiliary). 

Unit – III: Software Concept 

� System Software/Operating System (OS) 

- Definition of OS. 

- Principal functions of the OS. 

- Various Operating Systems: Single and Multiuser. 

- Basic Features of Windows XP. 

� Programming Languages: Concepts and Tools. 

� Application Software Packages. 

� Word Processor Software: MS-WORD: 

- Creating a Document. 

- Editing a Document. 

- Formatting a Document. 

- Maintaining Mailing List. 

10(525) 



Max. Marks: 40 Time: 3 Hours 

Note: There will be One question each from the following units. The examinees will be required to 

attempt Two questions in all. The candidates will be required to record the steps of database 

creation on the assigned area. 

Unit – I: Operating System: Introduction to WINDOWS XP 

- Important Features of Windows. 

- Desktop, My Computer, Control Panel, Windows Explorer. 

- Accessories Applets. 

Unit – II: MS Office 

- MS WORD: Standard Toolbars, Creating a Document, Editing a Document, 

Formatting a Document, Maintaining Mailing List. 

- MS POWER POINT: Creating Presentation Slides, Formatting/ Adding Graphics. 

Slide Show. Customizing and Printing. 

Unit – III: WINISIS 

- Overview of WINISIS features. 

- Installation of WINISIS. 

- SYSPAR.PAR Parameters. 

- WINISIS Windows and Dialog Boxes. 

- Database Creation. 

- Formatting Language: Additional Features – Hypertext Link (within a database and 

among databases), Handling Multimedia. 

- Database Searching, Sorting and Printing. 


1. BHARIHOKE (Deepak). Fundamentals of IT. 2nd ed. Excel Books. New Delhi, 2002. 

2. BURXTON (Andrew) and HOPKINSON (Alan). The CDS/ISIS for Windows Handbook. 

UNESCO/CI, Paris, 2001. 

3. COLEMAN. Windows XP from A – Z. BPB Publications. New Delhi. 

4. LEON (Alexis) and LEON (Mathews). Fundamentals of Information Technology. 2 nd ed. Vikas 

Publishing House Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi. 2009. 

5. Nagpal (D P). Computer Fundamentals. S. Chand. New Delhi. 2008. 

6. WINISIS. Library & Information Division, Kerala Institute of Local Administration, India. 

Available at: http://greenstonesupport.iimk.ac.in/Documents/Winisis%20Archiving%20 

Guide.pdf 

7. ROWLEY (J E). Basics of Information Technology. 

8. ROWLEY (Jennifer). Computers for libraries. 3rd ed. Library Association. London. 1993. 

9. RUTKOSKY. MS PowerPoint 2007. BPB Publications. New Delhi. 

10. RUTKOSKY. MS Word 2007 (W/CD). BPB Publications. New Delhi. 

11. JAIN (S). MS PowerPoint 2007- Made Simple. BPB Publications. New Delhi. 

12. JAIN (S). MS Word 2007- Made Simple. BPB Publications. New Delhi. 

13. SINHA (P K) and Sinha (P). Foundations of computing. BPB Publications. 2008. 

14. TAXALI (R K). PC software for Windows made simple. Tata McGraw Hill. 

15. UNESCO. CDS/ISIS for WINDOWS ver. 1.5: Reference Manual. Paris. 2004. 

10(526) 


16. WEIXEL. Learning Microsoft Office XP. BPB Publications. New Delhi. 

* * * * * * * 

PAPER-VII: LIBRARY CLASSIFICATION PRACTICE 

Objectives: 


(ii) To familiarise with various provisions of CC and DDC. 

(iii) To familiarise with the process of assigning Class Number in these schemes. 

10(527) 


Time: 3 Hours 

Note: The question Paper should be made out in Three Parts: 

Part – I: Colon Classification and Dewey Decimal ClassificationMarks: 30 

Part – II: Colon Classification Marks: 35 

Part – II: Dewey Decimal Classification Marks: 35 

In Part I Five Titles having compound subjects should be given and the candidates be asked 

to classify all titles both with CC and DDC. In Part II (CC) Seven titles of compound and 

complex nature should be given from which candidates be asked to classify any Five titles. In 

Part III (DDC) Seven titles of compound and complex nature should be given from which 

candidates be asked to classify any Five titles. 

PART – I: Colon Classification and Dewey Decimal Classification 

Classify all the Titles both with CC and DDC. 

Classify any Five Titles of the following: 

Classify any Five Titles of the following: 

PART – II: Colon Classification 

PART – III: Dewey Decimal Classification 


o RANGANATHAN (S.R.). Colon Classification, Ed. 6, 1963. (Reprinted with amendments). 

o DEWEY (Melvil). Dewey Decimal Classification, Latest available edition. 

* * * * * * * 

PAPER – VIII: LIBRARY CATALOGUING PRACTICE 


Time: 3 Hours 

Objectives: 


(ii) To familiarise with various provisions of CCC and AACR II. 

(iii) To familiarise with the process of preparation of Entries according to CCC and AACR 

II. 

Note: The Paper will be divided into Two Parts: 

Part – I: Classified Catalogue Code (CCC) 



Part – I and II will consist of Five Titles each and the Examinees will be required to Catalogue 

any Five Titles in all, selecting at least Two Titles from each Part. All Titles carry equal marks. 

Part – I: Classified Catalogue Code (CCC) 

- Sections and Skeleton Card of Main and Added Entries (Class Index, Book Index, 

Cross Reference Index and Cross Reference Entry). 

- Cataloguing of Personal Authorship, Pseudonym Work. 

- Cataloguing of Multi - Volume documents. 

- Cataloguing of Periodical Publications (Simple Periodical Publications). 


- Sections and Skeleton Card of Main and Added entries. 

- Basic features, Personal Author(s), Shared Authorship, Collaborator (s). 

- Cataloguing of Pseudonym Work. 

- Cataloguing of Multivolume documents. 

- Cataloguing of Periodical Publications (Simple Periodical Publications) 



2. RANGANATHAN (S. R.). Classified Catalogue Code with additional Rules for Dictionary Catalogue 

Code. Ed. 5. 1964. 

3. SEARS (M. E.). Sears List of Subject Headings. Latest edition. 

* * * * * * * 

10(528) 



for 

MASTER OF LIBRARY & INFORMATION SCIENCE 

SESSION 2012 – 2013 


Paper No. Nomenclature Internal 

Assessment 

I. Information Analysis, Consolidation and Repackaging 

(Theory and Practice) 

10(529) 

Max. 

Marks 

20 100 

II. Information Systems Management 20 100 

III. Information Retrieval (Theory and Practice) 20 100 

IV. Advanced ICT Applications in LIS (Theory & 

Practice) – I 


20 100 

V. Research Methods and Statistical Techniques 20 100 

VI. Advanced ICT Applications in LIS (Theory & Practice) – II 20 100 

VII. ELECTIVE: Information System (Theory and Practice) 

Any one of the following: 

(a) Social Science Information System 

(b) Business Information System 

(c) Health Science Information System 

20 100 

VIII. Depth Classification and Advanced Cataloguing (Practice) 20 100 


PAPER – I: INFORMATION ANALYSIS, CONSOLIDATION AND REPACKAGING 

(THEORY AND PRACTICE) 


Objectives 

(i) To impart to students thorough understanding of the conceptual framework of Information 

Consolidation and Repackaging. 

(ii) To train the students with the practical skills for preparation of Information Products. 

(iii) To introduce the concept of Marketing of Information Products and Services. 

Part – I: Theory 

10(530) 


Internal assessment: 10 Marks (Attendance – 5 (Includes attendance of practical Classes also) + 








UNIT – I: Information Consolidation 

- Definitional Analysis, purpose, process and role of Information Consolidation. 

- Value and benefits of Consolidation. 

- Packaging and Repackaging of Information. 

- Modes of presentation. 

UNIT – II: Processing Methods and Techniques 

- Information Products: Types and Methodology for Preparation. 

- Role of various specialists in Design and Development of Information Products. 

- Methodology for preparation of House Journals, Newsletters, Technical Digests, 

Trend Reports, Reviews and related products. 

- Technical Writing: Scaling to Audience. 

- Abstract and Abstracting: Types and Guidelines in preparing Abstract. 

UNIT – III: Management of Information Consolidation Centres 

- Management of an Information Consolidation Unit (ICU) 

- Concept of Marketing. 

- Marketing of Information Products and Services. 


Part – II: Practice 

Section – A 


(Preparation of Indicative and Informative Abstracts, Literature Reviews and Book Reviews) 

Section – B 




1. The examinees will be required to prepare One INDICATIVE ABSTRACT Marks: 15 

and One INFORMATIVE ABSTRACT of One Research Article. 

2. The examinees will be required to prepare One abstract, either INDICATIVE Marks: 10 

ABSTRACT OR INFORMATIVE ABSTRACT of One Journal 

Article, as specified by the examiners. 


Books Recommended 

1. SEETHARAMA (S). Information consolidation and repackaging. 1997. Ess Ess, New 

Delhi. 

2. ATHERTON (Pauline). Handbook for information Systems and Services. 1977. Unesco, Paris. 

3. DRTC Annual Seminar 18; 1981. 

4. SARACEVIC (T) and WOOD (J S). Consolidation of information: A Handbook of evaluation, 

restructuring and repackaging of scientific and technical information 1981. Unesco, Paris. 

5. SEETHARAMA (S). Modes of presentation of information in information consolidation 

products. Library Science with a Slant to Document, 22; 1985; Paper E. 

* * * * * * 

PAPER – II: INFORMATION SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT 

Internal assessment: 20 Marks (Assignment – 10 + Class Test – 5 + Attendance – 5) 

10(531) 



Objectives 

(i) To develop an understanding of modern Principles of Management. 

(ii) To familiarise with the process of Planning and Various Types of Plans. 

(iii) To develop an understanding of various Organisational Positions and Techniques of 

Managing Human Resources. 

(iv) To familiarise with the Systems Approach in Libraries and Quality in Library Functions 

and Services. 






UNIT- I: Management 

- Concept, Definition and Scope. 

- Principles of Scientific Management. 

- Management Schools of Thought: Classical School, Human Behaviour and Human 

Relation 

UNIT- II: Human Resource Management 

- Meaning, Functions and Objectives of HRM. 

- Job Description, Job Analysis and Job Evaluation. 


- Recruitment and Selection Procedure. 

- Training and Development. 

- Motivational Patterns: Maslow’s Need Hierarchy. Herzberg’s Two Factor Theory. 

McGregor’s Theory X and Y. 

- Performance Appraisal: Objectives, Problems in Rating, Methods of Performance 

Appraisal. 

UNIT- III: System Analysis and Control 

- System Analysis and Design. 

- Work Flow and Organisational Routines. 

- Monitoring Techniques: OR, MIS, MBO, Network Analysis, Budgeting as a 

Monitoring Techniques, Monitoring Team or Consultants. 

- Evaluation Techniques. 

UNIT- IV: Library Planning and Total Quality Management (TQM) 

- Library Planning: Types of Plans, Factors and Techniques of Library Planning 

- TQM: Definition, Concept and Elements. 

- Quality Standards: ISO 9000 Series. 


1. EVANS (G E). Management techniques for libraries. Ed.2. 1983. Academic Press, New York. 

2. STEUART (Robert) and EASTLICK (John T). Library management Ed. 2. 1991. Libraries 

Unlimited, Cotorado. 

3. BROPHY (Peter) and COULLING (Kate). Quality management for information and library 

managers. 1996. Aslib Gover, Hampshire. 

4. JONES (Noragh) and JORDAN (Peter). Case studies in library management. 1988. Clive 

Bingley, London. 

* * * * * * 

PAPER – III: INFORMATION RETRIEVAL (THEORY & PRACTICE) 


Objectives 

(i) To introduce the Concept and Principles of Indexing; 

(ii) To acquaint with the Role and Types of Indexing Languages; and 

(iii) To familiarise with the Advanced Information Processing and Retrieval Techniques. 


10(532) 


Internal assessment: 10 Marks (Attendance – 5 (Includes attendance of practical Classes also) + 








UNIT- I: Cataloguing and Subject Indexing: Principles and Practices 


- Principles of Subject Cataloguing. 

- Assigning Subject Headings using: 

- Library of Congress Subject Headings (LCSH), 

- Sears List of Subject Headings (SLSH) 

- Chain Procedure. 

- Models: Assigned and Derived. Pre and Post Co-ordinate indexing. 

UNIT- II: Indexing Languages and Vocabulary Control 

- Indexing Languages: Types and Characteristics. 

- Vocabulary Control: Concept, Meaning and Tools. 

- Structure and Construction of IR thesauri. 

- Trends in Automatic Indexing. 

UNIT- III: Information Retrieval 

- Search strategies: Manual/ Machine, Feedback and Refining. 

- Evaluation of IR Systems. 

- IR Models. 

- Trends in IR Models. 

- Projects and Parameters. 



Section – A 

10(533) 


Assignments on assigning/ deriving Subject Headings according to Chain Procedure, 

PRECIS, Sears List of Subject Headings 

Section – B 



a) Thesaurus Construction on an assigned topic: 

b) Viva-voce: 

Marks: 5 

Section – C 

Note: The question paper shall consist of following Two Questions: 

Marks: 10 

1. There will be one question carrying five titles. The examinees will be Marks: 5 

required to assign Subject Headings to these titles according to Sears List 

of Subject Headings. 

2. There will be one question carrying Six titles in Section – A (Chain Procedure)Marks: 10 

& B (PRECIS). The examinees will be required to attempt any Five titles. 


1. FOSKETT (A C). Subject approach to information. Ed.5. 1996. Bingley, London. 


2. CHOUDHURY (G G). Introduction to modern information retrieval. 1999. Library Association, 

London. 

3. AUSTIN (Derek). PRECIS: A manual of concept analysis. 1984. British Library, London. 

4. RAJAN (T N). Indexing systems: Concepts methods and techniques. 1981. IASLIC, Calcutta. 

5. GILCHRIST (Alan). Thesaurus construction and design. 

* * * * * * 

PAPER IV: ADVANCED ICT APPLICATIONS IN LIS (THEORY AND PRACTICE) – I 


Objectives: 

(i) To familiarise students with major Applications of ICT in Libraries and Information 

Centers and issues affecting their implementation. 

(ii) To familiarise with the Networking concepts. 

(iii) To enable student to use various MS Office Applications; 

(iv) To enable student to understand the elements of Web Designing. 

Part I: Theory 

10(534) 


Internal assessment: 10 Marks (Assignment – 5 + Attendance – 5 (Includes attendance of 

practical classes also)) 

Theory: 40 Marks Time: 2½ Hours 



Unit (I-III). Question 1 will consist of 5 short Answer (2 marks each) questions (having no 


each Unit. 

Unit – I: Library Automation 

- Planning and Implementation of Library Automation. 

- Use of computers for In-house Operations: Acquisition, Cataloguing, Circulation, Serials 

Control, OPAC and Information Storage and Retrieval. 

- Retrospective Conversion Techniques. 

Unit – II: INTERNET Basic Feature and Tools 

- Genesis and Utility. 

- Connectivity: Dialup, Leased Line, ISDN and Cable Modem. 

- Protocols: TCP/IP, HTTP, FTP 

- Web Browsers: Netscape Navigator, Internet Explorer 

- Services: World Wide Web (WWW), E-Mail, Search Engines, Remote Login (Telnet), FTP, 

Bulletin Boards, Usenet, Social Networking Sites, Chatting and Instant Message. Internet 

Security. 

UNIT – III: Communication Technology (Networking) 

- Fundamentals of Telecommunication Technology. 


- What is Network? Network Media: Wires and Cables, Ethernet, Wireless (Satellite), Hubs and 

Switches, Modems. 

- Network Types: LAN, MAN and WAN. 

- Topologies: Bus, Star, Ring, Token Ring, Tree and Mesh. 

- Network Protocols and Standards. OSI Architecture. 

- Network Based Services: Teleconferencing, Tele-facsimile. 

- Library Networks in India: ADINET and CALIBNET. 

Part II: Practice 

Internal assessment: 10 Marks (Assignment – 5 + Class Test – 5 Marks) 

10(535) 



Unit – I: MS OFFICE 

- MS EXCEL: Toolbars, Formatting Formulas, Database Management, Charts and Additional 

Functions. 

- MS ACCESS: Databases, Tables, Queries, Forms and Reports. 

Unit – II: Web Designing with FRONT PAGE 

Introduction to Front Page, Creating a Web and Web Pages, Lists and Headings, Formatting, 

Managing Web in the Explorer, Linking, Using Tables, Displaying Images, Getting images with 

image composer, Creating a consistent look for Web-using Wizards and Templates, Themes, 

Enhancing Design with Style Sheets, Forms, Publishing the Site. 


1. ALBERTO LEON-GARCIA and WIDJAJA (Indra). Communication Networks: 

Fundamental concepts and key architectures. 

2. BHARIHOKE (Deepak). Fundamentals of IT. 2nd ed. Excel Books. New Delhi. 2002. 

3. CHELLIS (James), PERKINS (Charles) and STREBE (Mathew). MCSE: Networking 

essential study guide. BPE. 1997. 

4. D'SOUZA. Web Publishing. 

5. Excel Functions & formulas book. BPB Publications. 

6. FOROUZAN (Behrouz A), COOMBS (Catherine) and FEGAN (Sophia Chung). Data 

Communication and Networking. 2nd ed. Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2000. 

7. LANCASTER (F W) and SANDORE (Beth). Technology and management in library and 

information services. 1997. Library Association, London. 

8. LEON (Garcia). Communication Networks. 

9. MANSFIELD (Ron). The compact guide to Microsoft Office professional. Tech Publication, 

Singapore. 1995. 

10. MCSA MCSE WINDOWS XP professional study guide. 2 nd Ed. Available at: 

http://rapidshare.com/files/115837493/mcsa_mcse_windows_xp_professional_study_guide_ 

2nd.pdf 

11. McCOY (John). Mastering Web design. LWB, New Delhi. 1996. 

12. PANTRY (Sheila), Ed. Building community information networks: Strategies and 

experiences. 1999. Library Association, London. 

13. MS OFFICE complete references. BPB, New Delhi. 

14. Rajesh. Computer Networks: Fundamentals & Applications. Vikas Publishing House. 2009. 


15. TANENBAUM (Andrew S). Computer networks. 4 th Ed. Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. 

2003. 

16. TAX ALI (R K) PC software for Windows made simple. Tata McGraw Hill. 

17. VITTAL (N). Information technology: India’s tomorrow. 2001. 

* * * * * * * * * 


Paper – V: Research Methods and Statistical Techniques 




Objectives: 

(i) To introduce students to the concept of the Research. 

(ii) To provide an insight into the Research Methods in Library and Information Science. 

(iii) To provide an overall understanding of Statistical Techniques in Research Operations. 






UNIT – I: Research 

- Concept, Meaning, Need and Process of Research. 

- Types of Research – Fundamental and Applied. 

- Types of Research Design. 

- Identification and Formulation of Problem. 

- Hypothesis: Definitions, Functions and Types 

- Designing Research Proposal. 

- Ethical Aspects of Research. 

- Literature Search – Print, Non-Print and Electronic Sources. 

- Research Reporting: Structure Style and Contents. (Guidelines for Research 

Reporting). 

UNIT – II: Research Methods 

- Spiral of Scientific Method. (S. R. Ranganathan). 

- Historical Method. 

- Experimental Method. 

- Descriptive Method. 

- Survey Method and Case Study Method. 

- Bibliometrics: Concept and Definition, Bibliometrics Laws: Bradford, Zipf. Lotka, 

Bibliographic Coupling and Citation Analysis. 

UNIT – III: Research Techniques and Tools 

- Questionnaire 

- Interview 

- Observation 

- Library Records and Reports 

- Sampling Techniques 

UNIT – IV: Descriptive Analysis and Interpretation 

- Descriptive Statistics – Measures of Central Tendency – Mean, Mode, Median. 

10(536) 


- Measures of Dispersion, Variance and Co-Variance. 

- Standard Deviation 

- Inferential Statistics 

- Z – T test Correlation 

- Regression – linear and non-linear 

- Chi – Square test 

- Tabulation and Generalisation 

- Graphical presentation of data Bar, Pie, Line graphs, Histograms 

- Sociometry. 


1. CHARLES (H) and others. Research Methods in librarianship: Techniques and Interpretations. 

1980. 

2. KRISHAN KUMAR. Research Methods in Library and Information Science, New Delhi, 

Vikas Publishing House. 1992. 

3. POWELL (Ronald R). Basic Research Methods for Librarians. 1985. 

4. RAVI CHANDRA RAO (I K). Quantitative methods in Library and Information Science. 

New Delhi. Wiley Eastern Limited, 1983. 

5. SARAVANAVEL (P). Research and Report Writing. 1993. 

* * * * * * 

PAPER VI: ADVANCED ICT APPLICATIONS IN LIS (THEORY AND PRACTICE) – II 

10(537) 


Objectives 



(ii) To familiarise with the Internet, Digital Libraries and Digitisation and other ICT Services. 

(iii) To enable students to understand the features and use of Library Application Software: 

Open Source: KOHA and Alice for Windows. 

(iv) To enable students to create Digital libraries. 

Part I: Theory 


Internal assessment: 10 Marks (Assignment – 5 + Attendance – 5 (Includes attendance of 

practical classes also)) 

Theory: 40 Marks Time: 2½ Hours 



Unit (I-III). Question 1 will consist of 5 short Answer (2 marks each) questions (having no 


each Unit. 

Unit – I: Library Application Software Packages 

- Basics of Library Automation Software. 

- Selection Criteria for Library Automation Software. 

- SOUL, LIBSYS, Alice for Windows, Open Source Software: KOHA. 

UNIT – II: Digital Libraries 

- Genesis, Definition, Objectives and Scope of Digital Libraries. 


- Digitisation and Tools: Techniques of Digitisation, Resolution, Imaging. 

- Files and Formats of documents, images, video, audio, etc. 

- Metadata: Role of Metadata and Metadata Types. 

UNIT – III: Database Types and other Concepts 

- Bibliographic, Full text and Multimedia Databases. 

- Basics of Artificial Intelligence, Expert Systems, Virtual Reality. 

- Digital Preservation: Overview, Need, Challenges. 

- DP strategy: Migration, Replication, Computer archaeology. 

Part II: Practice 

Internal assessment: 10 Marks (Assignment – 5 + Class Test – 5 Marks) 

10(538) 



The candidates will be required to record the steps of database creation on the assigned area 

and steps in Digital Library creation. 

Unit – I: Library Automation Software 

� Open Source Library Application Software: KOHA 

- Overview of KOHA. 

- Installation and Configuration of KOHA. 

- Acquisition and Cataloguing. 

- Members Management and Circulation. 

- Reports and Backups. 

� Alice for Windows 

- Overview. Installation and Configuration. 

- Acquisition and Cataloguing. 

- Members Management and Circulation. 

- Reports and Backups. 

Unit – II: Digital Library Software 

- Installation, Configuration and working in Greenstone or DSpace. 


1. ACKERMANN (Ernest). Learning to use the Internet: An introduction with examples and 

experiences. BPB. 


3. CADY (Glee Harray) and McGregor (Pat). Mastering the INTERNET. BPB. New Delhi. 

1996. 

4. COX (Ingemer, J). Digital Watermarking. 2002. 

5. Digital Libraries: Policy, planning and practice. Hants: Ashgate. 2004. 

6. Digital Libraries and Multimedia. Boston: Kluwer, Academic Publishers. 2000. 


7. Digital Libraries from technology to culture. New Delhi: Kanishka Publications. 2006. 

8. Digital Libraries and use. Cambridge: MIT Press, 2003. 

9. DSpace Manual, Release 1.6.2. http://www.dspace.org/1_6_2Documentation/DSpace- 

Manual.pdf 

10. DSpace Release 1.6.2 Notes. https://wiki.duraspace.org/display/DSPACE/DSpace+Release 

+1.6.2+Notes 

11. FALK (Bennett). The Internet basic reference from A to Z. 

12. GOPAL KRISHNAN. Digital Libraries in electronic information era. Delhi: Authors press. 

2001. 

13. Greenstone Home page. http://www.greenstone.org/greenstone3-home 

14. Greenstone Manual. http://www.greenstone.org/manuals/gsdl2/ 

15. HUGHES (Loma M). Digitizing collection: strategic issues for the information manager. 

2004. 

16. JEEVAN (V K J). Digital Libraries. 2003. 

17. http://koha.org/ 

18. KOHA Documentation. http://www.kohadocs.org/ 

19. KOHA on Windows. http://cid-6ac4b4f2fe0a3144.office.live.com/self.aspx/Public/Koha%20 

on%20Windows.pdf 

20. KOHA on Windows. http://www.koha.rwjr.com/Koha_on_Windows.html 

21. LEON, Alexis and LEON, Mathews. Fundamentals of Information Technology. 2nd Ed. 

Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi. 2009. 

22. RAMAMURTHY (C R). Globalization and library information networking. 2004. 

23. STALLINGS (William). Data and Computer Communications. 6th Ed. Pearson Education 

Asia. 2001. 

* * * * * * 

PAPER - VII: ELECTIVES: INFORMATION SYSTEMS (THEORY & PRACTICE) 

(a) SOCIAL SCIENCE INFORMATION SYSTEM 


Objectives: 

(i) To familiarise with the Concept, Scope, Landmarks and Research Trends in the disciplines 

of Social Sciences. 

(ii) To develop an understanding of Social Science Information System and its Components. 

(iii) To develop evaluative skills for Specialised Information Sources and Systems. 


10(539) 


Internal assessment: 10 Marks (Attendance – 5 (Includes attendance of practical classes also) + 








UNIT – I: Structure and Development of Social Sciences 

- Growth and Development of Social Science. 

- Definition, Scope, Landmarks and Research Trends in the disciplines of: 


- Political Science, - Public Administration, 

- Economics, - Management, 

- Sociology, - History, 

- Psychology, - Education. 

UNIT – II: Institutional Sources 

- Social Science Information System: Components. 

- Sources: Types and Media: Print and Non – Print, Electronic and Web-based 

- Institutions connected with Social Science Information Generation and 

Dissemination. 

- Study of the activities of: ICSSR, ICWA, Indian Institute of Management - 

Ahmedabad, Indian Institute of Public Administration, National Council for Applied 

Economic Research, TISS, UNESCO, ICHR, London School of Economics and 

Political Science. 

UNIT – III: Information Systems and Networks 

- Planning of Social Science Research Libraries. 

- Evaluation of existing Information Systems and Networks in Social Sciences at 

National and International level: DELNET, INFLIBNET, NASSDOC, SENDOC, 

DEVSIS, DEVINSA, APINESS. 



Section – A 

10(540) 


Section – B 


i. Evaluation of One Documentary Information Source. Marks: 15 

ii. Evaluation of One Institutional Source. Marks: 10 

iii. Viva-voce: Marks: 5 

Syllabus: 

I. Listing of Institutional Sources is given in the Theory Part of the Syllabus. 

II. Documentary Sources of Information: 

1. International Encyclopedia of Social Sciences 

2. International Encyclopedia of Education 

3. McGraw Hill Encyclopedia of Economics 

4. Europa World Yearbook 

5. Statesman’s Yearbook 

6. India 2006 or the latest 

7. World Directory of Social Science Institutions 

8. World of Learning 

9. International Bibliography of the Social Sciences. 

10. The Dictionary of the Social Sciences. (OUP) 

11. Social Sciences Index. 

12. IPSA 

13. Psychological Abstracts. 

14. Keesing’s Record of World Events. 

15. Asian News Digest. 

16. Commonwealth Universities Yearbook. 


17. Universities Handbook (India) 

18. Bibliography of Doctoral Dissertations 

19. UNESCO Statistical Yearbook 

20. Census of India. 

21. Statistical Abstracts of India. 

22. Webster’s New Geographical Dictionary. 

23. The Book Review. 


1. WEBB (William H), Ed. Sources of information in social sciences. 

2. HERRON (Nancy), Ed. Social Sciences: A Cross disciplinary guide to selected sources. 

1996. Libraries Unlimited. 

3. HUNT (Elgin F) and COLANDER (David L). Social sciences: An Introduction to the study 

of society. Ed. 9. 1995. Allyn. 

4. LI (Tze Chung). Social science reference sources: A Practical guide. Rev and enlarged ed 2. 

1990. Greenwood. 

5. VYAS (S D). Social science information in India: Efforts toward bibliographic control. 

1992. Concept, New Delhi. 

* * * * * * 

(b) BUSINESS INFORMATION SYSTEM 


Objectives: 

(i) To familiarise with the Concept, Scope, Landmarks and Research Trends in the disciplines of 

Business. 

(ii) To develop an understanding of Business Information System and its Components. 



10(541) 










UNIT – I: Business Information 

- Nature and Characteristics: Its Role, Generation and Utilisation. 

- Systems View of Business Information 

- Components of Business Information Systems: Resources, Centres, Consultants, 

Suppliers, Financial Organisations, Industrial Promoters, etc. 

- Users of Business Information: Categories, Role, Functions and needs. 

UNIT – II: Business Information Sources, Products and Services 

- Sources of Information: Documentary: Types with particular reference to 

Directories, Digests, Market Research Reports, Trade Literature, Technical 

Notes, Company Profiles, Patent, Design & Trade marks, Standards, Databases. 


- Institutional: National & International: Studies related to the activities of: 

� NIDCS, IIFT, ITPO, CII, FICCI, etc. 

� UNIDO, UNCTAD, etc. 

- Information Services and Networks: 

� CAS, SDI, Technical Enquiry Service, other Computerised Services. 

� Overview of Business Information Networks. 

UNIT – III: Organising Business Information for end user support 

- Database System: Business Measurement System; Business Planning System. 

- Text Management System: Text Retrieval Systems; Office Systems. 

- Management Support Systems: Decision Support Systems; Information Centres. 



Section – A 

Section – B 

10(542) 



Evaluation of One Documentary Information Source. Marks: 15 

Evaluation of One Institutional Source. Marks: 10 

Viva-voce: Marks: 5 

Note: Evaluation of Information Sources. 


1. AHITUV (N I V). Principles of Information System for Management. USA Business & 

Educational Technologies, 1994. 

2. ATHERTON (Pauline). Handbook for information systems and services, 1977. 

3. CAMPBELL (M J), ed. Manual of business library practice, 1975. 

4. CURTIS (GRAHAM). Business information systems: Analysis, design & practice, 1989. 

5. DOSSETT (PATTI), ed. Handbook of special librarianship & information services, 6 th ed.1992. 

6. GARLAND (John L). How to develop Business information systems for End User. 1986. 

7. NEELAMEGHAM (A). Comp: DRTC reference course on information services for 

business and industry, 1974. 

8. WASSERMAN, et al: Encyclopaedia of business information sources, 1983. 

* * * * * * 

(c) - HEALTH SCIENCE INFORMATION SYSTEM 


Objectives: 

(i) To familiarise with the Concept, Scope, Landmarks and Research Trends in the disciplines 

of Health Sciences. 

(ii) To develop an understanding of Health Science Information System and its Components. 













UNIT – I: Health Science Information 

- Growth and developments of Health Science. 

- Types of Health Science Libraries/Information Centres 

- Users of Health Science information 

UNIT – II: Health Science Information and Global Issues 

- Sources of Information: Documentary: Printed and Non-print. 

- Institutional: National & International: Studies related to the activities of: 

- The role and functions of National Medical Library. 

- The role and function of other National and International Organisations delivering 

Health Science Information: WHO, ICMR, Department of Biotechnology, 

Council of Ayurveda and Siddha, Council of Homeopathy, Unani System, 

National Institute of Health and Family Welfare, CDRI, CFTRI, NIN, NII, NIC, 

etc. 

- Information Services: Current Awareness Services: SDI Services, Indexing and 

Abstracting Services, Literature Search. 

UNIT – III: Information Systems and Networks 

- HELLIS, MEDLARS, BIOSIS 

- Trends in Health Science Information System 

- Application of Hypertext, Hypermedia, Multimedia, Expert system and Artificial 

Intelligence. 



Section – A 

Section – B 

10(543) 



Evaluation of One Documentary Information Source. Marks: 15 

Evaluation of One Institutional Source. Marks: 10 

Viva-voce: Marks: 5 

Syllabus: Evaluation of Information Sources. 


1. DIXIT (R P). Information management in Indian medical libraries, 1995, pp 1-423. 

2. R P KUMAR, SRIVASTAVA (Divya) and GUPTA (S P), eds. Education for librarianship 

in information age, MLAI sp. Pub. 1995, pp.1-287. 


3. GUPTA(S P) et al. Information technology and health science libraries, MLAI sp. Pub. 

1993, pp.1-279. 

4. CARMEL (Michael), ed.: Health care librarianship and Information work 22 nd ed, 1995. 

5. PICKEN (Fiona Mackay) and KAHN (Ann M C). Medical librarianship in the eighties and 

beyond: A world perspective, 1986. 

6. JOURNAL OF American Society for Information Science: Perspectives on medical 

informatics: information technology in health care, 1995, 46 (10), 723 – 800. 

7. VARALAXSHMI (R S R). Information services in medical college libraries. 1993. 

* * * * * * 

10(544) 


PAPER – VIII: DEPTH CLASSIFICATION AND ADVANCED CATALOGUING (PRACTICE) 

Part – I: Depth Classification 

10(545) 


Internal assessment: 10 Marks (Attendance – 05 Marks (includes attendance of Cataloguing 

Practice also) + Class Test – 05 Marks) 


Note: The question paper will be divided into Two Units: Unit – A: Colon Classification and Unit – 

B: UDC. Distribution of Marks and scheme of examination will be as follows: 

UNIT – A: Colon Classification 

Section – A 

1. Four Titles will be given in this Section and the examinees will be required to attempt Two 

Titles. 

2. Each Title will carry 6 Marks. 

Section - B 

1. Two Titles will be given in this Section and the examinees will be required to attempt One 

Title. 


UNIT – B: Universal Decimal Classification 

Section - A 


Titles. 


Section - B 


Title. 


Syllabus: Classification of Complex Titles of Monographs and Articles by Colon 

Classification and Universal Decimal Classification. 

Part – II: Advanced Cataloguing 

Internal assessment: 10 Marks (Preparation of Cataloguing Copy) 



Note: 1. The paper will be divided into 3 Units. 

2. All the Units will consist of Two Titles each and the Examinees will be required to 

attempt One Title from every part. 

Syllabus: Practical cataloguing of Complex Periodicals and of documents involving complicated 

Personal and Corporate Author Headings and Index Headings according to the 5 th edition 


of the Classified Catalogue Code with Additional Rules for Dictionary Catalogue Code 

(CCC) of Dr. S. R. Ranganathan and AACR – II. 

Distribution of Marks: 

UNIT – A: Classified Catalogue Code 13 

UNIT – B: Anglo American Cataloguing Rules -2 13 

UNIT – C: Cataloguing of Non-Book Material 14 


- Atlas: Maps, Globe 

- Manuscript 

- Musical Works 

- Sound Recordings 

- Motion Picture and Video Recordings 


2. RANGANATHAN (S R). Classified Catalogue Code with additional Rules for Dictionary 

Catalogue Code. Ed. 5. 1964. 

* * * * * * 

10(546) 


Paper No. 

DISTANCE EDUCATION 


for 

MASTER OF LIBRARY & INFORMATION SCIENCE 

SESSION 2012 – 2013 

Nomenclature of Papers 

10(547) 

Max. 

Marks 

I Information Analysis, Consolidation and Repackaging 100 

II Information Systems Management 100 

III Information Retrieval 100 

IV Research Methods and Statistical Techniques 100 

V Social Science Information System 100 

VI Advanced ICT Applications in LIS (Theory) 100 

VII Advanced ICT Applications in LIS (Practice) 100 

VIII – A Depth Classification (Practice) 50 

VIII – B Advanced Cataloguing (Practice) 50 

Total 800 


PAPER – I: INFORMATION ANALYSIS, CONSOLIDATION AND REPACKAGING 


Time: 3 Hours 

Objectives 

(i) To impart to students thorough understanding of the conceptual framework of Information 

Consolidation and Repackaging. 

(ii) To train the students with the practical skills for preparation of Information Products. 

(iii) To introduce the concept of Marketing of Information Products and Services. 





each Unit. 

UNIT – I: Information Consolidation 

- Definitional Analysis, purpose, process and role of Information Consolidation. 

- Value and benefits of Consolidation. 

- Packaging and Repackaging of Information. 

- Modes of presentation. 

UNIT – II: Processing Methods and Techniques – I 

- Information Products: Types and Methodology for Preparation. 

- Abstract and Abstracting: Types and Guidelines in preparing Abstract. 

- Technical Writing: Scaling to Audience. 

UNIT – II: Processing Methods and Techniques – II 

- Role of various specialists in Design and Development of Information Products. 

- Methodology for preparation of House Journals, Newsletters, Technical Digests, 

Trend Reports, Reviews and related products. 

UNIT – IV: Management of Information Consolidation Centres 

- Management of an Information Consolidation Unit (ICU) 

- Concept of Marketing. 

- Marketing of Information Products and Services. 


1. SEETHARAMA (S). Information consolidation and repackaging. 1997. Ess Ess, New Delhi. 

2. ATHERTON (Pauline). Handbook for information Systems and Services. 1977. Unesco, Paris. 

3. DRTC Annual Seminar 18; 1981. 

4. SARACEVIC (T) and WOOD (J S). Consolidation of information: A Handbook of evaluation, 

restructuring and repackaging of scientific and technical information 1981. Unesco, Paris. 

5. SEETHARAMA (S). Modes of presentation of information in information consolidation 

products. Library Science with a Slant to Document, 22; 1985; Paper E. 

* * * * * * 

PAPER – II: INFORMATION SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT 

Objectives 

(i) To develop an understanding of modern Principles of Management. 

10(548) 


Time: 3 Hours 


(ii) To familiarise with the process of Planning and Various Types of Plans. 

(iii) To develop an understanding of various Organisational Positions and Techniques of 

Managing Human Resources. 

(iv) To familiarise with the Systems Approach in Libraries and Quality in Library Functions and 

Services. 






UNIT – I: Management 

- Concept, Definition and Scope. 

- Principles of Scientific Management. 

- Management Schools of Thought: Classical School, Human Behaviour and Human 

Relation 

UNIT – II: Human Resource Management 

- Meaning, Functions and Objectives of HRM. 

- Job Description, Job Analysis and Job Evaluation. 

- Recruitment and Selection Procedure. 

- Training and Development. 

- Motivational Patterns: Maslow’s Need Hierarchy. Herzberg’s Two Factor Theory. 

McGregor’s Theory X and Y. 

- Performance Appraisal: Objectives, Problems in Rating, Methods of Performance 

Appraisal. 

UNIT – III: System Analysis and Control 

- System Analysis and Design. 

- Work Flow and Organisational Routines. 

- Monitoring Techniques: OR, MIS, MBO, Network Analysis, Budgeting as a 

Monitoring Techniques, Monitoring Team or Consultants. 

- Evaluation Techniques. 

UNIT – IV: Library Planning and Total Quality Management (TQM) 

- Library Planning: Types of Plans, Factors and Techniques of Library Planning 

- TQM: Definition, Concept and Elements. 

- Quality Standards: ISO 9000 Series. 


1. EVANS (G E). Management techniques for libraries. Ed.2. 1983. Academic Press, New York. 

2. STEUART (Robert) and EASTLICK (John T). Library management Ed. 2. 1991. Libraries 

Unlimited, Cotorado. 

3. BROPHY (Peter) and COULLING (Kate). Quality management for information and library 

managers. 1996. Aslib Gover, Hampshire. 

4. JONES (Noragh) and JORDAN (Peter). Case studies in library management. 1988. Clive 

Bingley, London. 

* * * * * * 

Paper – III: Information Retrieval 

10(549) 



Objectives 

To introduce the Concept and Principles of Indexing; 

To acquaint with the Role and Types of Indexing Languages; and 

To familiarise with the Advanced Information Processing and Retrieval Techniques. 

10(550) 

Time: 3 Hours 





each Unit. 

UNIT – I: Cataloguing and Subject Indexing: Principles and Practices 

- Principles of Subject Cataloguing. 

- Assigning Subject Headings using: 

- Library of Congress Subject Headings (LCSH) 

- Sears List of Subject Headings. (SLSH) 

- Chain Procedure. 

UNIT – II: Indexing Techniques 

- Models: Assigned and Derived. 

- Pre and Post Coordinate indexing. 

- Trends in Automatic Indexing. 

UNIT – III: Indexing Languages and Vocabulary Control 

- Indexing Languages: Types and Characteristics. 

- Vocabulary Control. Tools of Vocabulary Control: Concept, Meaning and Tools. 

- Structure and Construction of IR Thesauri. 

UNIT – IV: Information Retrieval 

- Search Strategies: Manual/ Machine, Feedback and Refining. 

- Evaluation of IR Systems. 

- IR Models. 

- Trends in IR Models. 

- Projects and Parameters. 


1. FOSKETT (A C). Subject approach to information. Ed.5. 1996. Bingley, London. 

2. CHOUDHURY (G G). Introduction to modern information retrieval. 1999. Library Association, 

London. 

3. AUSTIN (Derek). PRECIS: A manual of concept analysis. 1984. British Library, London. 

4. RAJAN (T N). Indexing systems: Concepts methods and techniques. 1981. IASLIC, Calcutta. 

5. GILCHRIST (Alan). Thesaurus construction and design. 

* * * * * * 

PAPER – IV: RESEARCH METHODS AND STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES 


Time: 3 Hours 

Objectives: 

(i) To introduce students to the concept of the Research. 

(ii) To provide an insight into the Research Methods in Library and Information Science. 

(iii) To provide an overall understanding of Statistical Techniques in Research Operations. 







UNIT – I: Research 

- Concept, Meaning, Need and Process of Research. 

- Types of Research – Fundamental and Applied. 

- Types of Research Design. 

- Identification and Formulation of Problem. 

- Hypothesis: Definitions, Functions and Types 

- Designing Research Proposal. 

- Research Reporting: Structure Style and Contents. (Guidelines for Research 

Reporting). 

UNIT – II: Research Methods 

- Spiral of Scientific Method. (S. R. Ranganathan). 

- Historical Method. 

- Experimental Method. 

- Descriptive Method. 

- Survey Method and Case Study Method. 

UNIT – III: Research Techniques and Tools 

- Questionnaire; Interview; Observation; Library Records and Reports; Sampling 

Techniques 

UNIT – IV: Descriptive Analysis and Interpretation 

- Bibliometrics: Concept and Definition, Bibliometrics Laws: Bradford, Zipf. Lotka, 

Bibliographic Coupling and Citation Analysis. 

- Descriptive Statistics – Measures of Central Tendency – Mean, Mode, Median. 

- Tabulation and Generalisation 

- Graphical presentation of data Bar, Pie, Line graphs, Histograms 

- Sociometry. 


1. CHARLES (H) and others. Research Methods in librarianship: Techniques and Interpretations. 

1980. 

2. KRISHAN KUMAR. Research Methods in Library and Information Science, New Delhi, 

Vikas Publishing House. 1992. 

3. POWELL (Ronald R). Basic Research Methods for Librarians. 1985. 

4. RAVI CHANDRA RAO (I K). Quantitative methods in Library and Information Science. 

New Delhi. Wiley Eastern Limited, 1983. 

5. SARAVANAVEL (P). Research and Report Writing. 1993. 

* * * * * * 

PAPER – V: SOCIAL SCIENCE INFORMATION SYSTEM 


Time: 3 Hours 

Objectives: 

(i) To familiarise with the Concept, Scope, Landmarks and Research Trends in the 

disciplines of Social Sciences. 

10(551) 


(ii) To develop an understanding of Social Science Information System and its Components. 






each Unit. 

UNIT – I: Structure and Development of Social Sciences 

- Growth and Development of Social Science. 

- Definition, Scope, Landmarks and Research Trends in the disciplines of: 

- Political Science, - Public Administration, 

- Economics, - Management, 

- Sociology, - History, 

- Psychology, - Education. 

UNIT – II: Documentary Sources 

- Social Science Information System: Components. 

- Information Sources: Documentary and Non-documentary; Popular and Scholarly 

Literature; Derived and Bibliographical Sources. 

- Web based Information Sources: E-journals, E-Reference Sources, Subject Gateways, 

Institutional Repositories, Digital Libraries. 

- Study of International Encyclopaedia of Social Sciences, International Encyclopaedia 

of Social and Behavioural Sciences, International Bibliography of the Social 

Sciences, Social Science Index, International Political Science Abstracts, 

Psychological Abstracts, Bibliography of Doctoral Dissertations (Social Sciences and 

Humanities), Statistical Abstracts India. 

UNIT – III: Institutional Sources 

- Institutions connected with Social Science Information Generation and 

Dissemination. 

- Study of the activities of: ICSSR, ICWA, Indian Institute of Management - 

Ahmedabad, Indian Institute of Public Administration, National Council for Applied 

Economic Research, TISS, UNESCO, ICHR, London School of Economics and 

Political Science. Social Science Research Council, 

UNIT – IV: Information Systems and Networks 

- Planning of Social Science Research Libraries. 

- Evaluation of existing Information Systems and Networks in Social Sciences at 

National and International level: DELNET, INFLIBNET, NASSDOC, SENDOC, 

DEVSIS, DEVINSA, APINESS. 


1. WEBB (William H), Ed. Sources of information in social sciences. 

2. HERRON (Nancy), Ed. Social Sciences: A Cross disciplinary guide to selected sources. 

1996. Libraries Unlimited. 

3. HUNT (Elgin F) and COLANDER (David L). Social sciences: An Introduction to the study 

of society. Ed. 9. 1995. Allyn. 

4. LI (Tze Chung). Social science reference sources: A Practical guide. Rev and enlarged ed 2. 

1990. Greenwood. 

5. VYAS (S D). Social science information in India: Efforts toward bibliographic control. 

1992. Concept, New Delhi. 

10(552) 


* * * * * * 

PAPER VI: ADVANCED ICT APPLICATIONS IN LIS (THEORY) 


Time: 3 Hours 

Objectives: 



(ii) To familiarise with the Networking concepts. 

(iii) To familiarise with the Internet, Digital Libraries and Digitisation. 





each Unit. 

UNIT – I: Library Automation 

- Planning and Implementation of Library Automation. 

- Use of computers for In-house Operations: Acquisition, Cataloguing, Circulation, Serials 

Control, OPAC and Information Storage and Retrieval. 

- Selection Criteria for Library Automation Software. 

- SOUL, LIBSYS, Alice for Windows, Open Source Software: KOHA 

UNIT – II: INTERNET Basic Feature and Tools 

- Genesis and Utility. 

- Connectivity: Dialup, Leased Line, ISDN and Cable Modem. 

- Protocols: TCP/IP, HTTP, FTP 

- Web Browsers: Netscape Navigator, Internet Explorer 

- Services: World Wide Web (WWW), E-Mail, Search Engines, Remote Login (Telnet), FTP, 

Bulletin Boards, Usenet, Social Networking Sites, Chatting and Instant Message. Internet 

Security. 

UNIT – III: Communication Technology (Networking) 

- Fundamentals of Telecommunication Technology. 

- What is Network? Network Media: Wires and Cables, Ethernet, Wireless (Satellite), Hubs and 

Switches, Modems. 

- Network Types: LAN, MAN and WAN. 

- Topologies: Bus, Star, Ring, Token Ring, Tree and Mesh. 

- Network Protocols and Standards. OSI Architecture. 

- Network Based Services: Teleconferencing, Tele-facsimile. 

- Library Networks in India: ADINET and CALIBNET. 

UNIT – IV: Digital Libraries 

- Genesis, Definition, Objectives and Scope of Digital Libraries. 

- Digitisation and Tools: Techniques of Digitisation, Resolution, Imaging. 

- Files and Formats of documents, images, video, audio, etc. 

- Metadata: Role of Metadata and Metadata Types. 

10(553) 



1. ACKERMANN (Ernest). Learning to use the Internet: An introduction with examples and 

experiences. BPB. 

2. ALBERTO LEON-GARCIA and WIDJAJA (Indra). Communication Networks: 

Fundamental concepts and key architectures. 


4. CADY (Glee Harray) and McGregor (Pat). Mastering the INTERNET. BPB. New Delhi. 

1996. 

5. CHELLIS (James), PERKINS (Charles) and STREBE (Mathew). MCSE: Networking 

essential study guide. BPE. 1997. 

6. COX (Ingemer J). Digital Watermarking. 2002. 

7. Digital Libraries: Policy, planning and practice. Hants: Ashgate. 2004. 

8. Digital Libraries and Multimedia. Boston: Kluwer, Academic Publishers. 2000. 

9. Digital Libraries from technology to culture. New Delhi: Kanishka Publications. 2006. 

10. Digital Libraries and use. Cambridge: MIT Press, 2003. 

11. GOPAL KRISHNAN. Digital Libraries in electronic information era. Delhi: Authors press. 

2001. 

12. FOROUZAN (Behrouz A), COOMBS (Catherine) and FEGAN (Sophia Chung). Data 

Communication and Networking. 2nd ed. Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2000. 


2004. 

14. JEEVAN (V K J). Digital Libraries. 2003. 

15. LANCASTER (F W) and SANDORE (Beth). Technology and management in library and 

information services. 1997. Library Association, London. 

16. LEON (Alexis) and LEON (Mathews). Fundamentals of Information Technology. 2nd Ed. 

Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi. 2009. 

17. LEON (Garcia). Communication Networks. 

18. PANTRY (Sheila), Ed. Building community information networks: Strategies and 

experiences. 1999. Library Association, London. 

19. Rajesh. Computer Networks: Fundamentals & Applications. Vikas Publishing House. 2009. 

20. TANENBAUM (Andrew S). Computer networks. 4th Ed. Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. 

2003. 

21. TAX ALI (R K) PC software for Windows made simple. Tata Me Graw Hill. 

22. VITTAL (N). Information technology: India’s tomorrow. 2001. 

* * * * * * * * * 

PAPER VII: ADVANCED ICT APPLICATIONS IN LIS (PRACTICE) 


Time: 3 Hours 

Objectives 

(i) To enable student to use various MS Office Applications; 

(ii) To enable student to understand the elements of Web Designing. 

(iii) To enable students to understand the features and use of Library Application Software: 

Open Source: KOHA. 

(iv) To enable students to create Digital libraries. 


in all. The Examiner will set Two questions from each Unit. 

The candidates will be required to record the steps of database creation on the assigned area 

and steps in Digital Library creation. 

10(554) 


UNIT – I: MS OFFICE 

- MS EXCEL: Toolbars, Formatting Formulas, Database Management, Charts and Additional 

Functions. 

UNIT – II: Web Designing with FRONT PAGE 

Introduction to Front Page, Creating a Web and Web Pages, Lists and Headings, Formatting, 

Managing Web in the Explorer, Linking, Using Tables, Displaying Images, Getting images with 

image composer, Creating a consistent look for Web-using Wizards and Templates, Themes, 

Enhancing Design with Style Sheets, Forms, Publishing the Site. 

UNIT – III: Library Automation Software 

� Open Source Library Application Software: KOHA 

Overview of KOHA. 

Installation and Configuration of KOHA. 

Acquisition and Cataloguing. 

Members Management and Circulation. 

Reports and Backups. 

UNIT – IV: Digital Library Software 

- Installation, Configuration and working in Greenstone or DSpace. 


1. DSpace Manual, Release 1.6.2. http://www.dspace.org/1_6_2Documentation/DSpace- 

Manual. pdf 

2. DSpace Release 1.6.2 Notes. https://wiki.duraspace.org/display/DSPACE/DSpace+Release 

+1.6.2+Notes 

3. D'SOUZA. Web Publishing. 

4. Excel Functions & formulas book. BPB Publications. 

5. FALK (Bennett). The Internet basic reference from A to Z. 

6. Greenstone Home page. http://www.greenstone.org/greenstone3-home 

7. Greenstone Manual. http://www.greenstone.org/manuals/gsdl2/ 


2004.http://koha.org/ 

9. KOHA Documentation. http://www.kohadocs.org/ 

10. KOHA on Windows. http://cid- 

6ac4b4f2fe0a3144.office.live.com/self.aspx/Public/Koha%20 on%20Windows.pdf 

11. KOHA on Windows. http://www.koha.rwjr.com/Koha_on_Windows.html 

12. MANSFIELD (Ron). The compact guide to Microsoft Office professional. Tech Publication, 

Singapore. 1995. 

13. McCOY (John). Mastering Web design. LWB, New Delhi. 1996. 

14. MS OFFICE complete references. BPB, New Delhi. 

* * * * * * 

PAPER – VIII – A: DEPTH CLASSIFICATION (PRACTICE) 

10(555) 


Time: 2 Hours 

Note: The question paper will be divided into Two Units: Unit – A: Colon Classification and Unit – 

B: UDC. Distribution of Marks and scheme of examination will be as follows: 

UNIT – A: Colon Classification 


Section - A 

1. Four Titles will be given in this Section and the examinees will be required to attempt Two Titles. 


Section - B 


Title. 


UNIT – B: Universal Decimal Classification 

Section - A 


Titles. 


Section - B 


Title. 


Syllabus: Classification of Complex Titles of Monographs and Articles by Colon 

Classification and Universal Decimal Classification. 

PAPER – VIII – B: ADVANCED CATALOGUING (PRACTICE) 

10(556) 


Time: 2 Hours 

Note: 1. The paper will be divided into 3 Units. 

2. All the Units will consist of Two Titles each and the Examinees will be required to 

attempt One Title from every part. 

Syllabus: Practical cataloguing of Complex Periodicals and of documents involving complicated 

Personal and Corporate Author Headings and Index Headings according to the 5 th 

edition of the Classified Catalogue Code with Additional Rules for Dictionary 

Catalogue Code (CCC) of Dr. S. R. Ranganathan and AACR – II. 

Distribution of Marks: 

UNIT – A: Classified Catalogue Code 17 Marks 

UNIT – B: Anglo American Cataloguing Rules -2 17 Marks 

UNIT – C: Cataloguing of Non-Book Material 16 Marks 

- Atlas: Maps, Globe 

- Manuscript 

- Musical Works 

- Sound Recordings 

- Motion Picture and Video Recordings 




2. RANGANATHAN (S R). Classified Catalogue Code with additional Rules for 

Dictionary Catalogue Code. Ed. 5. 1964. 

* * * * * * 

10(557) 



FOR 

M. PHIL. IN LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SCIENCE 

SESSION 2012 – 13 

PAPER – I: EMERGING TRENDS IN LIBRARY & INFORMATION SCIENCE 

Note: The Paper will be of 200 Marks divided into Two Parts of 100 Marks each: 


Part – II: Seminar Presentations 



10(558) 







each Unit. 

Unit – I: Library Automation & Digitization 

- Planning of Library Automation: Environmental, Infrastructural, Human Resources 

- Digital, Virtual and Hybrid Libraries. 

- Digital Resources in different fields: S & T, Social Sciences, Arts & Humanities. 

Unit – II: Networking 

- Network based Information Services. 

- Library Consortia. 

- Internet Services: E-mail, WWW, FTP, Browsers and Search Engines. 

Unit – III: Legal and Ethical Issues 

- Intellectual Property Rights (IPR). 

- Copyright and Patents: Legal issues. 

- Ethical issues of Information. 

- Plagiarism. 

- Bibliographic Citations: APA Style and Chicago Manual of Style. 

Unit – IV: Education for Library & Information Science 

- LIS Education and Training: Levels and Courses, Curriculum Design, Teaching Techniques 

and Student Assessment. 

- Educational Technology & its use in LIS Education. 

Part – II: Seminar Presentations 

Internal assessment: 20 Marks (Assignment – 20) 



Literature Survey on any one assigned Topic. 

Seminar Presentations: 80 Marks 

Note: The students will be required to make Eight Presentations, Two from each Unit. The topics 

for the Seminar presentation will be decided in consultation with the teacher concerned and 

presentations will be made using Power Point. 

* * * * * * * 

PAPER – II: RESEARCH METHODS IN LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SCIENCE 



10(559) 






each Unit. 

Unit-I: Research Methods in LIS 

- Research Methods and their application in LIS: Historical, Survey and Experimental 

Methods 

- Bibliometric Study and its techniques 

- Other Research Methods – Library Case Studies, User Studies, Evaluation Research, 

Comparative Librarianship, Content Analysis, Documentary Research and Delphi Method 

Unit-II: Sampling and Classification of Data. Presentation of Data 

Sampling and Classification of Data 

- Probability and Non-probability Sampling Methods; Sample Size Determination; and 

Sampling and Non-sampling errors 

- Classification of Data: Types of Classification 

Presentation of Data 

- Tabulation of Data: Rules of Tabulation and Types of Tables 

- Diagrams: Rules for construction of Diagrams; Types of Diagrams 

- Graphs: Techniques of construction; Types of Graphs 

Unit-III: Measures of Central Value and Dispersion. Correlation Analysis 

- Types of Averages, their calculation and use in different types of Library Data 

- Variation and its calculation; Methods of studying Variation 

- Types of Correlation and Methods of studying Correlation 

Unit-IV: Tests of Hypotheses 

- Hypothesis testing procedure (Application on Library Data); χ2 Test; F-Test and Analysis 

of Variance 

PAPER – III: DISSERTATION 

Dissertation will be prepared by the students on assigned topics under the supervision of a 

teacher guide, which will be evaluated by awarding grades instead of marks. 


Paper-VII: Guidance 

B. A. (Hons.) Psychology: Semester-III 

10(560) 

Max. Marks: 60+15 Internal 

Time: 3 Hours 

Note: The question paper will consist of NINE questions out of which the candidate would be 

required to attempt FIVE questions. Each question will carry 12 marks. The first question 

will be compulsory and will have 6 short answer questions uniformly spread over entire 

syllabus. The remaining EIGHT questions will be set taking TWO questions from each of 

the four units. The candidate would be required to attempt ONE question from each unit. 

UNIT-I 

Guidance:- Nature, Historical Background, Scope and Objectives. Individual and group 

guidance, Organization of guidance programme. 

UNIT-II 

Assessment in guidance:- Need, Nature and assessment of intelligence, Personality, 

aptitude, interest and achievement. 

UNIT-III 

Educational guidance:- Nature, needs, objectives and process. Role of teacher in guidance, 

preparation and training. Guidance of gifted and slow learners. 

UNIT-IV 

Personal guidance:- Nature of emotional problems, adjustment problems of adolescents- 

their prevention and treatment. Vocational guidance: Nature, Need, objectives and principles. 

Recommended Reading:- 

1. Bernard, H.W. and Fullmer, D.W. (1977). Principles of Guidance. New York: 

Gowell. 

2. Crow, L.D. and Crow, A (1961). Introduction to guidance. New Delhi: Eurasia. 

3. Pietrofesa, J.J. et al (1980). Guidance an introduction Chicago band Menally. 

4. Anastasi, A. and Urbina, S. (1997). Psychological Testing. New York: Mac Miller 

Publishing Company. 

5. Sharma, R.N. and Sharma, R. (2004). Guidance and Counselling in India. Atlantic 

Publishers. 

6. Tuaxler, M. and North, R.D.(1967). Techniques of Guidance. New York: Harper and Row. 

Paper-VIII: Child Psychology 



Time: 3 Hours 







UNIT-I 

Human Development:- Nature, Characteristics and Principles, Biological, Cultural and 

Social Influences on Development. 

UNIT-II 

Methods of Study: Observation, Cross-sectional and Longitudinal. 

Theories of development:- Freud, Piaget and Erikson. 

UNIT-III 

Beginning of life: Prenatal development, stages, birth and Prematurity. 

Infancy: Characteristics, Adjustment to Post Natal Life and Hazards. 

UNIT-IV 

Childhood: Needs; perceptual, cognitive and emotional development. 

Moral and social development: Development of morality and self control; development of 

gender differences and gender roles. 


1. Crain, W. (1980). Theories of Development. New Jersey: Prentice Hall. 

2. B Hurlock, E.B.(1997). Child Development. New Delhi: Tata Mc Graw Hill. 

3. Hetherington, M.E. and Parke, R.D. (1993). Child Psychology: A Contemporary View 

Point. New York: Mc Graw Hill. 

4. Berk, L.E. (2003). Child Development. New Delhi: Pearson Education 

5. Srivastava, A.K. (1998). Child Development: An Indian Perspective. New Delhi: 

NCERT. 


Paper IX: Research Methods & Statistics (i) 

Time: 3 Hours 

10(561) 







UNIT-I 

Psychological Research: Nature, Scientific Approach, Problem, Hypothesis. 

Variables: Types and Techniques of control. 

UNIT-II 

Types of research: Experimental, Quasi Experimental, Ex Post Facto Research, 


Field Studies. 

UNIT-III 

Statistics: Frequency distribution, Graphical representation of data. Measures of central 

tendency. 

Normal distribution: Characteristics and properties, Divergence from normality: Skewness, 

Kurtosis. 

UNIT-IV 

Measures of variability: Standard deviation, Quartile deviation. 

Correlation: Product Moment, Rank difference, Biserial and Point Biserial. 


1. Baroota, K.D. (1992). Experimental Design in Behavioural Research, New Delhi: Wiley 

Eastern. 

2. Kerlinger, F.N. (1973). Foundation of Behavioural Research. New York: Holt Rinehart 

and Winston. 

3. Garrett, H.E. (1981). Statistics in Psychology and Education. Bombay: Vakils. 

4. McGnigau, F.J. (1983). Experimental Psychology: Methods of Research. New Jersey: 


5. Singh, A.K. (1992). Testing, Measurement and Research Methods in Behavioural 

Sciences. Patna: New Bharti Bhawan. 

Paper-X: Practicals 


Time: 3 Hours 


Note: The students would be required to conduct at least 6 practicals during the session. Each 

examinee will have to conduct one practical during the examination as allotted by the examiner. 

The distribution of marks will be as under: 

a. Conduction and reporting: 25 Marks 

b. Viva-voce: 15 Marks 

c. Record book: 10 Marks 

Conduct any six practicals: 

1. Multiple Aptitude Test 

2. Cognitive development test 

3. Neo five factor Inventory 

4. Guidance Needs Inventory 

5. Moral Judgment test 

6. Multifactor Interest Questionnaire/ Chatterji’s Non language Preference record 

7. Parent Child relationship scale 

8. Emotional Maturity Scale 

9. Computer Application: Computation of Median in MS Excel 

10(562) 


Paper XI: Counselling 

B. A. (Hons.) Psychology: Semester-IV 

10(563) 


Time: 3 Hours 






UNIT-I 

Nature, needs and goals of counselling, 

Counsellor: Functions and characteristics. 

Ethical issues in counselling. 

UNIT-II 

Assessment in counseling: Meaning, objectives and difficulties. Interview, case history and 

psychological tests. 

UNIT-III 

Counselling issues: Emotional and adjustment problems of adolescents, adults and aged. 

Educational and career counselling. 

UNIT-IV 

Counselling approaches: Psychoanalytic, Behavioural, Client-centered, Rational emotive 

and Transactional Analysis. 

References: 

1. Gelso, G.J. & Fretz, B.R. (1995). Counselling Psychology. New York: Prison Harcourt 

Brace. 

2. Palmer, S. & McMohan, G. (1997). Handbook of Counseling Psychology. London: 

British Association for counseling. 

3. Patterson, C.H. (1973). Theories of Counselling and Psychotherapy. New York: Harper 

and Row. 

4. Rao, S.N. (2001). Counselling Psychology. New Delhi Tata Mc Graw Hill. 

5. Gibsow, R.L. (2005). Introduction to Counseling and Guidance. New Delhi: Pearson 

Education. 

6. Tolbeat, E.L. (1959). Introduction to Counseling. New York: Mc Graw Hill. 

Paper XII: Psychology of Adolescence 



Time: 3 Hours 







UNIT-I 

Adolescence: Nature and characteristics. 

Approaches to study: Developmental, Biological, Psychodynamic. 

UNIT-II 

Physical, Social, Cognitive, Emotional and Sexual changes during adolescence. 

UNIT-III 

Adolescent’s Adjustment with Family, School, Peers and Society. 

Identity crisis and gender stereotyping. 

UNIT-IV 

Adolescent Problems: Anxiety, Depression, Suicide, Delinquency, Substance abuse; and 

Prevention/Intervention Programs. 

References: 

1. Berk, L.E. (2007). Development Through the Life Span. New Delhi. Pearson 

Education. 

2. Grinder, R.E. (1972). Adolescence. New York: John Willey and Sons. 

3. Hurlock, E.B. (2001) Developmental Psychology: A Life Span Approach. New 

Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill. 

4. Sheffer, D.R. & Katherine, K. (2007). Developmental Psychology: Childhood and 

Adolescence. New York. Thomson Wordsworth. 

5. Santrock, J.W. (2011). Life Span Development. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill. 


Paper XI: Research Methods and Statistics (ii) 

10(564) 


Time: 3 Hours 






UNIT-I 

Research Design: Meaning, objectives. 

Types: Between subjects (one and two factor), within subjects (one and two factor). 

Sampling: Probability and non-probability. 


UNIT-II 

Methods of Data Collection: Interview, Observation, Case history and Psychological Tests. 

UNIT-III 

Hypothesis Testing: Chi square (equal probability and independence hypothesis), t-test 

(independent, single, and matched groups). 

UNIT-IV 

Analysis of variance: One way and two-way (independent groups). 

Regression Equation: Score form and deviation form (two variables case). 


1. Broota, K.D. (1992). Experimental Design in Behavioural Research. New Delhi: Wiley 

Eastern. 

2. Kerlinger, F.N. (1973). Foundations of Behavioural Research. New York: Holt 

Rinehart and Winston. 

3. Garrett, H.E. (1981). Statistics in Psychology and Education. Bombay: Vakils. 

4. McGuigan, F.J. (1983). Experimental Psychology: Methods of Research. New Jersey: 


5. Singh, A.K. (1992). Testing, Measurement and Research Methods in Behavioural 

Sciences. Patna: New Bharti Bhawan. 

Paper-XIV: Practicals 


10(565) 


Time: 3 Hours 








1. Adjustment Inventory 

2. Home/Family Environment Inventory 

3. Depression Scale 

4. Self-Esteem Inventory 

5. Parent-Child Relationship Scale 

6. Seguin Form Board Test 

7. Youth Problem Checklist 

8. Cognitive Development Scale 

9. Computer Application: Computation of SD in MS Excel. 


B. A. (Hons.) Psychology: Semester-V 

Paper XV: Psychopathology 

10(566) 


Time: 3 Hours 






UNIT-I 

Psychopathology: Meaning and historical views. Contemporary Models: Biological, 

Psychodynamic, Behavioural and Cognitive. 

UNIT-II 

Classification of Mental Disorders: Need for classification, DSM system. 

Substance abuse and dependence: Nature, etiology. Mental retardation: Nature, 

classification, etiology. 

UNIT-III 

Anxiety Disorders: Generalized anxiety disorder, phobic disorder, obsessive compulsive 

disorder. Somatoform and dissociative disorders. 

UNIT-IV 

Mood Disorders: Unipolar and Bipolar- Clinical picture and causes. 

Schizophrenia: Clinical Picture, causes and types; Delusional (paranoid) disorder. 

Recommended Reading: 

Buss, A. H. (1999). Psychopathology. NY: John Wiley. 

Carson, R.C., Butcher, T.N. Mineka, S. (2001). Abnormal Psychology and Modern Life (11 th ed.). 

New York: Harper & Collins. 

Davison, G.C. and Neale, J.M. (1998). Abnormal Psychology (7 th ed.). New York: John Wiley. 

Lamm, A. (1997). Introduction to Psychopathology. NY: Sage. 

Srivastava, D.N. (1991). Adhunik Asamanya Manovigyan (6 th ed.). Agra : Sahiytya 


Paper XVI: Psychological Testing 


10(567) 


Time: 3 Hours 






UNIT-I 

Psychological Tests: Nature, History, Types, Characteristics and Uses. Social and Ethical 

issues in psychological testing. 

UNIT-II 

Reliability: Meaning, methods and factors affecting reliability. 

Validity: Meaning, types and factors affecting validity. 

UNIT-III 

Test construction: Construction of items, item analysis, reliability and validity of final test. 

Norms: Meaning, Types and Development of norms. 

UNIT-IV 

Intelligence Tests: Nature, types and psychological issues in intelligence testing. 

Personality Tests; Personality inventories and Projective Techniques. 


Anastasi, A. (1996). Psychological Testing (7 th ed.). New York: McMillan. 

Cronbach, L. J. (1990). Essentials of Psychological Testing (5 th ed.). New York: Harper and 

Row. 

Guilford, J. P. (1954) Psychometric Methods (2 nd ed.). New York: McGraw Hill. 

Singh, A. K. (1992). Tests, Measurements, and Research Methods in Behavioural Sciences. 

Patna: New Bharti Bhawan. 

Paper XVII: Industrial Psychology 



Time: 3 Hours 







UNIT-I 

Introduction: Nature and scope of industrial psychology. New Trends in Industrial 

Psychology. Individual differences and their evaluation. 

UNIT-II 

Personnel selection and placement; Psychological tests and other techniques of selection; 

Training and evaluation in industry; Job analysis and Job performance. 

UNIT-III 

Physical environment and work: Temperature, noise and pollution. Motion-time studies, 

Fatigue, monotony, accidents and their prevention. 

UNIT-IV 

Motivation and work, financial and non-financial incentives. Job Satisfaction: Nature and 

factors affecting, Job involvement and job stress. 


Blum, M. L. & Naylor, J. C. (1984) Industrial Psychology: Its theoretical and social 

foundations. New Delhi: GBS Publishers. 

Gosh, P.K. and Gorpande, M.B. (1986). Industrial Psychology. New Delhi: Himalaya 

Publication. 

McMormik, E.J. and Illgen (1980). Industrial Psychology. New Delhi: Prentice Hall. 

Mohanty, G.(1990). Industrial and Organizational Psychology. New Delhi: Oxford and 

IBH. 

Spector, P.E. (1996). Industrial and Organizational Psychology: Research and Practice. New 

York: Wiley. 

Paper-XVIII: Practicals 


10(568) 


Time: 3 Hours 








1. Clinical Analysis Questionnaire 

2. Job Involvement Scale 

3. W A I S 

4. T A T 

5. Anxiety Scale 

6. Mental Health Questionnaire 


7. Job Satisfaction Scale 

8. Organizational Commitment Questionnaire 

9. Computer Application: Computation of Pearson Correlation in MS Excel. 

B. A. (Hons.) Psychology: Semester-VI 

Paper XIX: Clinical Psychology 

10(569) 


Time: 3 Hours 






UNIT-I 

Clinical Psychology: Nature, History and Allied Disciplines. 

Roles and Training of Clinical psychologists. Ethical issues in clinical practice. 

UNIT-II 

Clinical Assessment: Interview, Case history, Psychological tests in clinical use- WAIS, 

MMPI, Rorschach, TAT. 

UNIT-III 

Psychotherapy: Goals and Principles. Psychoanalysis, Behaviour Therapy, Cognitive 

Therapy, Client-Centered. 

UNIT-IV 

Family Therapy, Group Therapy, and Encounter group therapy. ECT and Chemotherapy. 


Buss, A. H. (1999). Psychopathology. NY: John Wiley. 

Carson, R.C., Butcher, T.N. Mineka, S. (2001). Abnormal Psychology and Modern Life 

(11 th ed.). NewYork: Harper & Collins. 

Davison, G.C. and Neale, J.M. (1998). Abnormal Psychology (7 th ed.). New York: John 

Wiley. 

Korchin, S. J. (1986). Modern Clinical Psychology. New Delhi: CBS Pulishers. 

Srivastava, D.N. (1991). Adhunik Asamanya Manovigyan (6 th ed.). Agra : Sahiytya 


Paper XX: Organizational Behaviour 


10(570) 


Time: 3 Hours 






UNIT-I 

Organizational Behaviour: Introduction, Emergence of OB as a discipline. 

Organizational Structure: Design and elements. Perspectives of organizational 

Effectiveness. 

UNIT-II 

Employee motivation: Drives, Needs, Theories. 

Organizational stress: Nature, stressors, management. 

Organizational commitment: nature, types, consequences. 

UNIT-III 

Decision making: Nature, Optimizing, Satisficing, and Implicit favourite model. 

Team Dynamics: Types, effectiveness. Communication: Process, Types, Office grapevine. 

UNIT-IV 

Organizational Culture: Typology, components and development. Organizational Climate: 

Dimensions, models. Organizational Development and Change: Cycle of development, 

Approaches to change, strategies for change management. 


Colquitt, J.A., LePine, J.A., & Wesson, M.J. (2011). Organizational Behaviour. New Delhi: 

Tata McGraw Hill. 

Kalliath, T., Brough, P., et al. (2011). Organizational Behaviour. New Delhi: Tata McGraw 

Hill. 

McShane, S.L., Glinow, M.A.V., & Sharma, R.R. (2011). Organizational Behaviour. New 

Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill. 

Mohanty, G. (1990). Industrial and Organizational Psychology. New Delhi: Oxford and IBH. 

Robbins, S.P. (1995). Organizational Behaviour: Concepts controversies, and applications. New 

Delhi: Prentice Hall. 

Spector, P.E. (1996). Industrial and Organizational Psychology: Research and Practice. New 

York: Wiley. 



Paper XIX: Biological Psychology 

10(571) 


Time: 3 Hours 






UNIT-I 

Introduction: Nature, fields, relation with disciplines of neuroscience. 

Methods of study: Imaging techniques, recording physiological activity, brain lesion, 

neuropsychological testing. 

UNIT-II 

Human Nervous system: Cells- types, structure and functions. Neural conduction and 

synaptic transmission. Central NS: Structure and functions of brain and spinal cord. 

NIT-III 

Peripheral NS: Structure and functions of Somatic and Autonomic NS. 

Hormones and behaviour: Pituitary, Adrenal, Pancreas, Gonads. 

UNIT-IV 

Physiological mechanisms associated with learning and memory. 

Motivation: Physiological mechanisms of Hunger, Thirst, and Sex. 

Psychophysiology of sleep: necessity, stages of sleep, REM sleep and dreaming. 


Leukel, F. (1985). Introduction to Physiological Psychology (3 rd Ed.). New Delhi: CBS 

Publishers. 

Levinthal, C.F. (1990). Introduction to Physiological Psychology (3 rd Ed.). New Delhi: PHI. 

Morgan, T.H. and Stellar, A. (1965). Physiological Psychology. New York: McGraw Hill. 

Pinel, J.P.J. (2007). Biopsychology. New Delhi: Pearson. 

Paper-XXII: Practicals 



Time: 3 Hours 






. Viva-voce: 15 Marks 



1. MMPI 

2. Neuropsychological Battery 

3. General Health Questionnaire 

4. Employee Motivation Schedule 

5. Mapping of Retinal Colour Zones 

6. Rorschach Inkblot Test 

7. Organisational/Job Stress Inventory 

8. EEG 

9. Computer Application: prepare a polygon through MS Excel. 

10(572) 


SOCIOLOGY 

POST- GRADUATE SYLLABUS OF SOCIOLOGY 

(Under Semester System) 

Scheme of Examination (w.e.f.2012-2013 and onward) 

Maximum Marks -100 Marks 

Theory -80 Marks 

Internal Assessment- 20 Marks (Division of Marks as given below) 

Two Handwritten Assignments: 10% 

(First Assignment after one month & 

Second Assignment after two months) 

One Class Test : 5% 


Attendance : 5% 

Marks of attendance will be given as under: 

(1) 91 % onwards : 5 Marks 

(2) 81% to 90% : 4Marks 

(3) 75% to 80% : 3Marks 

(4) 70 % to 74% : 2Marks* 

(5) 65 % to 69% : 1Mark* 

* For students engaged in co-curricular activities of 

the University only/ authenticated medical grounds 

duly approved by the concerned Chairperson. 

Time: - 3 Hrs. 

Scheme of examination for M.A. Sociology Course 

The M.A. Examination in Sociology has been divided into four Semesters spread 

over two years. Every student has to pass 20 papers of 100 marks (80 Marks Theory +20 Marks 

Internal Assessment) each as necessary to earn the degree. The degree shall be awarded on the 

basis of 2000 total marks under new scheme. 

In all semesters, Three Compulsory and Two Optional papers shall be offered to 

the students. However, the choice of optional paper is subjected to the availability of teaching 

faculty in the Department. The paper scheme detail semester-wise is as follow: 

M.A. (Previous), 1 st SEMESTER, SOCIOLOGY 

Paper No. Nomenclature Max. Marks Time 

Paper – I General Sociology 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Assessment) 

3 Hours 

Paper – II Classical Sociological Theory 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 3 Hours 

10(573) 


10(574) 

Assessment) 

Paper – III Research Methodology 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Assessment) 

Paper – IV Rural Sociology 

100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Optional 

Assessment) 

Paper – V Urban Sociology 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Optional 

Assessment) 

Paper-VI Social Anthropology 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Optional 

Assessment) 

Paper –VII Social Psychology 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Optional 

Assessment) 

Paper-VIII Sociology of Education 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Optional 

Assessment) 

M.A. (Previous), 2 nd SEMESTER, SOCIOLOGY 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 

Paper No. Nomenclature Max. Marks time 

Paper –IX Modern Sociological Theory 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Assessment) 

Paper – X Indian Society and Culture 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Assessment) 

Paper –XI Qualitative and Quantitative 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Research 

Assessment) 

Paper–XII Sociology of Population 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Optional Studies 

Assessment) 

Paper–XIII Sociology of Rural 

100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Optional Development 

Assessment) 

Paper -XIV Political Sociology 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Optional 

Assessment) 

Paper –XV Social Problems 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Optional 

Assessment) 

Paper –XVI Criminology 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Optional 

Assessment) 

M.A. (Final), 3 rd SEMESTER, SOCIOLOGY 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 


Paper -XVII Advanced Social Theory 

Trends 

100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Assessment) 

Paper –XVIII Perspectives on Indian Society 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Assessment) 

Paper –XIX Gender and Society 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Assessment) 

Paper –XX Industrial Sociology 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

(Optional) 

Assessment) 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 


Paper –XXI 

(Optional) 

Paper –XXII 

(Optional) 

Paper –XXII 

(Optional)I 

Paper –XXIV 

(Optional) 

Social Change and Social 

Movements in India 

Sociology of Marginalized 

Sections 

10(575) 

100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Assessment) 

100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Assessment) 

Social Change and 

100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Development 

Assessment) 

Sociology of Religion 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Assessment) 

M.A. (Final), 4 th SEMESTER, SOCIOLOGY 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 


Paper – XXV 

Paper – XXVI 

Paper – XXVII 

Paper – XXVIII 

(Optional) 

Paper – XXIX 

(Optional) 

Paper – XXX 

(Optional) 

Paper – XXXI 

(Optional) 

Paper –XXXII 

(Optional) 

Sociological Concepts and 

Key Ideas 

100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Assessment) 

Sociology of Organizations 100 (80Theory + 20 Int. 

and Human Resource Assessment) 

Computer Applications in 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Social Research 

Assessment) 

Sociology of Mass 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Communication 

Assessment) 

Cultural Studies 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Assessment) 

Sociology of Development 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Assessment) 

Sociology of Health 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Assessment) 

Environment and Society 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. 

Assessment) 


Syllabus and Courses of Reading (w.e.f.2012-2013 onward) 

PAPER – I (Compulsory) GENERAL SOCIOLOGY 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 

3 Hours 


Time- 3 hours 

Note: - The Paper setter shall set 8 questions from all four units of the syllabus giving internal 

choice. However, one compulsory question in addition is to be set under fifth unit based on entire 

syllabus. This compulsory question would comprise four questions, four marks each. Such way, the 

examinees have to attempt five questions in all. 


Unit - I Sociology: Nature, Scope and Significance; Development of Sociology as a 

discipline in General, and in India; Universalistic Sociology vis-a-vis Indigenization; 

Interdisciplinary Perspective 

Unit – II Basic Concepts: Society, Group, Community, Association, Social System, Social 

Structure; Status and Role; Socialization; Culture 

Unit – III Social Processes: Associative - Co-operation, Accommodation, Assimilation; 

Dissociative – Competition, Conflict; 

Social Stratification 

Unit - IV Social Institutions: Marriage, Family, Kinship, Economy, Polity, Religion. 

Readings:- 

Abrahm, F. : History of Sociological Thought, OUP, New Delhi 

Aron, Raymond : Main Currents in Sociological Thought (Vol. I & II), Penguin; 1965/67 

Bottomore, T.B. : Sociology: A Guide to Problems and Literature, George Allen and Unwin, 

Delhi; 1972 

Davis, Kingsley : Human Society, Surjeet Publicaiton , New Delhi; 1981. 

Fox, R. : Kinship and Marriage; 1963 

Giddens Anthony : Sociology Oxford University Press; 1989. 

Ginsberg, M. : Sociology, Surjeet Publication, New Delhi; 1979 

Haralambos : Sociology: Themes and Perspectives, Bell and Hyman, London; 1985 

Inkeles, A : What is Sociology, Prentice hall, New Delhi; 1987 

Johnson, H.M. : Sociology: A Systematic Introduction, Allied Publishers, New Delhi; 1995 

Kapadia, K.M. : Marriage and Family in India, Oxford University Press, Bombay; 1980 

MacIver, R. M. and : Society –An Introductory Analysis, Macmillan, New Delhi; 1974. 

H.Page 

Nisbet : The Sociological Tradition, Heinemann Education. Books Ltd. 

Parsons, T. : The Social System, Amerind Pub. Company; 1951 

Smelser, J. : Sociology, Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 



PAPER – II (Compulsory) CLASSICAL SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit - I Sociological Theories: Nature and Types; Theory Construction; Sociological 

Perspectives; Sociological Imagination. 

Unit – II Structural-Functionalism – I: 

10(576) 


Durkheim – Social Fact, Social Solidarity, Theory of Religion. 

Malinowski – Individualistic Functionalism 

Radcliffe Brown – Societal Functionalism 

Unit – III Structural-Functionalism – II: 

Parsons – Voluntaristic Action, Pattern Variables 

Merton –Functional Paradigm, Reference Groups 

Anti-Positivism Perspective:- 

Max Weber – Social Action, The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of 

Capitalism 

Pareto, Vilfredo – Logical and Non-Logical Action, Circulation of Elites. 

Unit - IV Conflict Theories: 

Karl Marx – Historical-Dialectical Materialism, Modes of Production; Class 

Struggle. 

Dahrendorf – Class and Class Conflict in Industrial Societies. 

Lewis A, Coser – Functions of Conflict. 

Readings:- 

Abrahm, F. : Modern Sociological Theory, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 

Aron, Raymond : Main Currents in Sociological Thought (Vol. I & II), Penguin; 1965 

Cohen, S.P. : Modern Sociological Theory, Heinemann Education Books Ltd., 1968 

Coser, L.A. : The Functions of Social Conflict, Free Press; 1956 

Durkheim, E. : Division of Labour in Society, Free Press; 1947 

Daharendorf, R. : Class and Class Conflict in industrial Society, Calif Stanford press; 1959 

Fletcher, R. : The making of Sociology (Vol. I & II), Nelso, London; 1971 

Giddens, A. : Capitalism and Modern Sociological Theory: Cambridge Univ. Press; 1997 

Marx, K. : Das Capital, Gateway Editions, 1996 

Marx, K. : Communist Manifesto (J.H. Laski ed.), Panton, New York; 1967 

Martindale, D. : Nature and Types of Sociological Theory, Houghton-Millin, Boston; 1960 

Merton, R.K. : Social Theory and Social Structure, Amerind Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd.; 1968 

Mills, C.W. : The Sociological Imagination, Oxford University Press; 1956 

Parsons, T. : The Structure of Social Action, Free Press, New York; 1949 

Parsons, T. : The Social System, Free Press, New York; 1951 

Ritzer, G. : Sociological Theory (IIIrd Ed.), McGraw Hill Inc.; 1992 

Turner, J.H. : The structure of Sociological Theory, Rawat Publication, Jaipur; 1978. 

Weber, M. : The Protestant Ethic and Spirit of Capitalism, New York, 1930. 

Zeitlin, Irving M : Rethinking Sociology: A Critique of Contemporary Theory, Rawat 

Publication, New Delhi; 1998 

10(577) 




PAPER – III (Compulsory) RESEARCH METHODOLOGY 

10(578) 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit - I Research Methodology: Nature, Scope and Types of Social Research. 

Problem of Objectivity; Ethics in Social Research 

Unit – II Research Process: Formulation of Research problem; Hypothesis, Variables and 

their Relationship; Generalization; Verification of Theory 

Unit - III Research Designs and Sampling: Research Design – types 

Sampling Probability and Non–Probability; Determination of Sample Size 

Scaling Techniques – Bogardus, Likert and Thurstone; 

Reliability and Validity, 

Unit – IV The Data and Data Collection: Types and Sources of Data 

Techniques of Data Collection – Observation, Schedule, Questionnaire, 

Interview, Case Study; Mixed Method 

Readings:- 

Ackoff R. L : The Designing of Social Research, University of Chicago Press, 1955 

Babbie, Earl : The Practice of Social Research, Thomson Asia Pvt. Ltd., Singapore; 2004 

Garett H.E. : Statistics in Psychology and Education, Vakils, Bombay, 1981 

Goode and Hatt : Methods in Social Research, Mc Graw Hill Co. Ltd., 1952 

Kerlinger , F.N. : Foundation of Behavioural Research, Half Ronehartand Winston, New York, 

1973 

Majumdar, P.K. : Research Methods in Social Science, Viva Books Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi; 2005 

Matt Henn & others : a short introduction to Social Research, Vistaar Publication, New Delhi; 

2006 

Neuman, W.L. : Social Research Methods: Qualitative and Quantitative Approaches (6 th Ed.) 

Pearson Education Inc., New Delhi; 2006 

Sarantakos, S. : Social Research (2 nd Ed.), Palgrave, New York; 1998 

Seltiz, C.H. : Research Methods in Social Relations, Holt Rine Hart, and Winston, 1951 

Thakur D. : The Research Methodology in Social Sciences, Deep and Deep Publications, New 

Delhi, 1998 

Young P.V. : Scientific Social Survey and Research, Prentice Hall New Jersey, 1956 




PAPER – IV (Optional) RURAL SOCIOLOGY 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit - I Rural Sociology: Nature and Scope, Significance of village studies; Rurbanism; 

Universalization and Parochialization. 

Unit – II Rural Social Structure: Agrarian Mode of Production, Agrarian Classes, Agrarian 

Relations; Rural Family-Structure and Change 

Unit – III Rural Economy and Polity: Place of Agrarian Sector in National Perspective; 

Agrarian Reforms; Land acquisition policy, Depeasantization; Green Revolution, 

Second Green Revolution; Panchyat Raj, Emerging patterns of Rural Leadership 

Unit – IV Rural Problems: Agrarian Unrest: Rural Poverty, Bonded Labour, 

Unemployment; Food Security, Problem of Health and Housing 

Readings:- 

Ahuja, Ram : Social Problems, Rawat Publication, Jaipur; 2006 

Beteille, A. : Studies in Agrarian social Structure, Oxford University Press, New Delhi; 

1975 

Desai, A.R. : Rural Sociology in India, Popular Prakashan, Bombay; 1996 

Desai, A.R. : Rural India in Transition, Popular Prakashan, Bombay; 1979 

Dhanagre, D.N. : Peasant Movement, Oxford University Press, New Delhi; 1985 

Dube, S.C. : India’s changing Village: Human Factor in Community 

Development, Himalayan Publishing House, Bombay; 1988 

Fernandes, Leela : India’s New Middle Class, Oxford Univ. Press; 2006 

Govt. Of India : Food Security Bill, 2011 

Lewis, Oscar : The Stigma of Poverty 

Maheshwari, S.R. : Rural Development in India; Sage Publication, New Delhi; 1985 

Pradhan, P.K. : Land, Labour and Rural Poverty, Himalayan Publishing House Ltd., 

Bombay; 1988 

Randev, B.T. : Bharat Mein Jati aur Varg, Popular Prakashan, Bombay; 1966 

Sidhiqui, M.H. : Agrarian Unrest in North India; Vikas Publishing House; 1978 

Vidyarthi, L.P. : Leadership in India, Asia Publishing House, Bombay; 1967 

10(579) 




Paper-V (Optional) URBAN SOCIOLOGY 


Time- 3 

hours 





Unit-I Classical Sociological Perspective: Emile Durkheim, Karl Marx, Max Weber and 

Tonnies. 

Unit-II Urbanism: Simmel–Metropolis and Mental Life; Louis Wirth –Urbanism; Manuel 

Castell – The City and Grass Roots, Sex and City. 

Unit-III Urban Community: Spatial Dimension – Robert E. Park, Burgess. Types of Cities; 

Characteristics of Urban Society vis-à-vis Rural Society; Rural-Urban Convergence; 

Significance of Cities 

Unit-IV Urban Problems and Planning in India: Pace of Urbanization, Over-urbanization, 

Urban Polity; Forms and Sources of Urban Stress, National Urban Renewal Mission 

REFERENCES: 

Abrahamson M : Urban Sociology, Prentice Hall, Englewood; 1976 

Alfred de Souza : The Indian City; Poverty, ecology and urban development, Manohar, Delhi; 

1979 

Ashis Boss, : Studies in India’s Urbanisation; 1901-1971, 1979 

Colling Worth, J b : Problems of Urban Society VOL. 2, George and Unwin Ltd.; 1972 

Desai A R and : Slums and Urbanisation, Popular Prakashan, Bombay; (ed), 1970 

Pillai S D 

Harry Gold : The Sociology of Urban Life, Prentice Hall; 1982 

M.S.A. Rao : Urban Sociology in India; (ed.), 1974 

M.S. Gore, : Urbanisation and Family Change; 1968 

N. Jayapalan , : Urbanization in India in Contribution to Indian Sociology, Sage Pub. 2003 

Pickwance C G : Urban Sociology; Critical Essays, Methuen; (Ed.) 1976 

Quinn J A, : Urban Sociology, S Chand & Co., New Delhi;1955 

Ram Chandran, R. : Urbanisation and Urban System in India, OUP, Delhi; 1991 

Raj S. Gandhi, : Urban Sociology in India, International Journal 

Contemporary Sociology, Vol.18, Nos. & 4; 1981 

Saberwal, S. : The Mobile Men: Limits to Social Mobility in Urban Punjab, Vikas, 

Delhi; (ed.), 1976 

Saberwal, S. : Process and Institution in Urban India; (ed.), 1978 

Saunders Peter : Social Theory and Urban Question, Hutchinson; 1981 

T.K. Oommen, : The Rural Urban Continuum Re-examined in the Indian 

Context, Sociologia Ruralis, Vol.7 No.1. 1967 

Wilson R.A. and : Urban Sociology, Prentice Hall, Englewood; (1978) 

D.A. Schulz 

W. W. Burgess & : Contributions to Urban Sociology, 

D.J. Bogue University of Chicago Press; (ed.), 1964 

10(580) 




Paper-VI (Optional) SOCIAL ANTHROPOLOGY 

10(581) 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit – 1 Social Anthropology: Meaning, Nature and Scope 

Tribal studies Perspectives: Frazer, R.Brown, B.Malinowski. 

Unit – II Theoretical and Methodological orientations: Functionalism (R. Brown and 

Malinowski) Structuralism (Levi Straus) and Marxism (Maurice, Godlier). 

Comparative study, Fieldwork approaches; Ethnographic Method 

Unit – III Tribal Institutions: Marriage, Family and Kinship, Youth Organisations, 

Economy, Religion and Magic 

Unit – IV Tribal Society in India: Races and Tribes; Geographical Distribution; 

Tribal Problems- Identity and Detribalization; Mainstreaming; Tribal Rights and 

Livelihood; Welfare Schemes. 

REFERENCES: 

Beattie, John : Other Cultures: Aims, Methods and Achievements 

in Anthropology: R.K.P, London; 1964 

Bose, N. K. : Culture and Society in India, Asia Publishing House, New 

Delhi;1967 

Dube, S.C. : Tribal Heritage of India, Vikas Pub: New Delhi; 1977 

Fox, Robin , : Encounter with Anthropology,: Penguin Books Ltd., England; 1973 

Godelier, Maurice, : Perspectives in Marxist Anthropology, London: Cambridge University 

Press; 1973 

Harris, Marvin, : The Rise of Anthropology, London: Routledge and Kegan 

Paul; 1972 

Heimendorf, : Tribes of India; The Struggle for Survival, Oxford 

Christophvon University Press; 1982 

Keesing, Roger, M. : Cultural Anthropology: A Contemporary Perspective, 

America: Holt Remmhart and Winston; 1976 

Kuper, Adam , : Social Anthropology of Radcliffe Brown, : Routledge and 

Kegan Paul, London; 1977 

Madan, T.N. and : An Introduction to Social Anthropology,: Asia Publishing 

Majumdar, D.N. House, Delhi; 1980 

Mandelbaum, G. : Society in India: Popular Parkashan, Bombay; 1974 

Pritchard, Evans, : Social Anthropology,: Routledge and Kegan Paul, London;1972. 

Radcliffe-Brown, A.R. : Structure Function in Primitive Society, R.K.P., London; 1957 


Raza, Moonis and : An Atlas of Tribal India: Concept Publishing, 

A. Ahmad, Delhi; 1990 

Sharma, S. : Tribal Identity and Modern World, Sage, New Delhi; 1994 

Singh K.S. : Tribal Movements in India, Vol. 1 & 2 , 

: Manohar Publications, Delhi; 1983 

Singh, K.S. : The Scheduled Tribes, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 1995 



Paper – VII (Optional) SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit-I Social Psychology: Definition, Scope, Methods; Relationship with 

Sociology, Psychology and Social Anthropology. 

Unit-II Social Perception: Human Consciousness and Self Awareness; 

Social Cognition; Cognitive Dissonance; 

The Nature of Social Self; Impression Formation; Personality. 

Unit-III Social Motivation: Definition, Nature, Types - Achievement Motivation 

and Power Motivation. 

Unit-IV Collective Behaviour: Social Attitude, Prejudices and Stereotypes, 

Propaganda and Public Opinion. Violance, Leadership 

REFERENCES: 

Baron, R.A. and Byrne,D.H. : Social Psychology, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi; (1995) 

B.N.Maltzer, W. : Symbolic Interactionism, Routledge and Kegan 

John & Others Paul Ltd., New Jersey, (1945). 

Krech D. and Crutchifield : Theory and Problems of Social Psychology: McGraw Hill, 

R.S. New York; (1975), 

Kimball Young : A Hand Book of Social Psychology, Routledge and Kegan Payl 

Ltd.: Revised Edition London, (1963), 

Karl Mannheim : Essays on Sociology and Social Psychology, Routledge and Kegan 

Paul Ltd., London, 3 rd Edition; (1966), 

Lindzey : Handbook of Social Psychology: Vol.I & II Wiley Publishing Co. 

The London Third Edition.(ed.) (1964), 

Lindgren, H. Clay : An Introduction to Social Psychology, Willey Eastern, New Delhi. 

(1973), 

Merton, R.K. : Social Theory and Social Structure, Amerind Publication, New 

Delhi; (1968) 

McDavid, John and : Social Psychology, CBS Publishers & 

10(582) 


Herbert Harari Distributers, Delhi; (1986) 

Robert R.Evans : Readings in Collective Behaviour, Chicago: Rand Monally College 

Publishing Co; (1975) 

Kuppuswami, B. : An Introduction to Social Psychology, Media Promoters & 

Publishers Pvt, Ltd. Bombay; (1980), 

T.M.Newcomb : Social Psychology, : Drvdon Press, New York; (1950), 

W.J.H.Sprott : Social Psychology,: Methuen and Co. London;(1952) 



Paper-VIII (Optional) SOCIOLOGY OF EDUCATION 

10(583) 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit-I Sociology of Education: Nature, Scope and importance; Relationship of Sociology and 

Education; Feature of Educational Sociology; 

Unit-II Social Perspectives on Education: Functionalism (Durkheim), Marxist (Althusser), 

Cultural Reproduction (Bourdieu) and Post-Modern View. 

Alternative thinking on Education-- Gandhi, Ivan Illich 

Unit-III Indian Education System: Structure of Education in India; Social issues of Education 

– Inequalities, Inclusive Education, Gender Dimension of Education; Values in 

Education; Commoditization of Education; Human Resource Perspective. 

Unit-IV Educational Reforms: Abdul Kalam Azad Committee, Kothari Commission, 

J.B. Patnaik Committee; Education Policy, 1986 Right to Education; Sarva 

Shiksha Abhiyan 

REFERENCES: 

Acker, S. : Gendered Education: Sociological Reflections on 

Women : Open University Press, Buckingham; (1994), 

Chanana, Karuna. : Socialization, Education and Women: Explorations in 

Gender Identity : Orient Longman, New Delhi; (1988), 

Chanana, Karuna. : ‘Towards a Study of Education and Social Change’. In Economic and 

Political Weekly, 27, 14 (4):157-64.; (1979) 

Chitnis, Soma & : Higher Education Reforms in India, Experience 

P.G. Altbach. and Perspectives,: Sage, New Delhi; (1993), 

Dreze, Jean and : India Economic Development and Social Opportunity. 

Sen, Amartya Oxford University Press, Oxford. (1995), 

Gandhi, M.K. : Problems of Education: Navjeevan Prakashan, Ahmadabad;1962 

Gore, M.S. et.al. : Papers on the Sociology of Education in India, NCERT. New Delhi; 

(ed.).(1975), 

Illich, Ivan. : Deschooling Society: Penguin, London; (1973) 


Robinson, P. : Perspectives in the Sociology of Education: An Introduction: 

Routledge and Kegan Paul, London ;( 1987) 

Shatrugan, M. : Privatizing Higher Education, EPW.pp.2624; (1988), 

Durkheim, E. : Education and Sociology: Free Press, New York; (1956), 

Jayaram, N. : Sociology of Education in India,: Rawat Publication, Jaipur; (1990), 

Kamat, A.R. : Education and Social Change in India: Somaiya, Bombay ;( 1985) 

Shukla,S.C. : Sociological Perspective In Education: A Reader 

and Kumar, K. (Ed.) Chankya Publication, New Delhi ; (1985) 

National Policy on : Ministry of Human Resource Development, Government of India; 

Education 1986 



PAPER – IX (Compulsory) MODERN SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit – I Exchange Theory: C.H. Homans- Exchange Principles, Peter M. Blau- 

Power in Exchange; Emerson- Exchange Network 

Unit – II Everyday Life Approach: G.H.Mead/Goffman - Symbolic Interactionism 

Schutz --- Social Phenomenology, Garfinkel - Ethnomethodology 

Unit – III Critical Theory: Habermas –Communicative Action 

Althusser – Structural Marxism, Gramsci – Hegemony 

Unit - IV Structuralism and Post-Structuralism: Levi- Strauss – Concept, Models. 

Foucault – Power and Knowledge; Derrida--Deconstruction 

Readings:- 

Abrahm, F. : Modern Sociological Theory Oxford University Press, New Delhi 

Aron, Raymond : Main Currents in Sociological Thought (Vol. I & II), Penguin; 

1965/67 

Berger & Luckmann : The Social Construction of Reality, Penguin; 1963 

Brown, A.R. : Structure in Primitive Society, Cohen and West, London 

Cohen, S.P. : Modern Sociological Theory, Heinemann Education Books Ltd.; 1968 

Collins, R. : Sociological Theory, Rawat Publication, Jaipur; 1997 

Craib, I. : Modern Social Theory, Harvestor; 1992 

Douglas, J. : Introduction to Sociologies of Everyday Life, Allyn and Bacon; 1980 

Giddens, A. : Central Problem in Social Theory, MacMillan, London; 1983 

Giddens, A. : Capitalism and Modern Sociological Theory: Analysis of 

Writing of Marx, Durkheim and Weber, Cambridge Univ. Press; 1997 

10(584) 


Layder, Derek : Understanding Social Theory (2 nd Ed.), Sage Publication, New Delhi; 2006 

Malinowski, B. : ‘Culture’ In Encyclopedia of Social Sciences. 

Martindale, D. : Nature and Types of Sociological Theory: Houghton-Millin, 

Boston; 1960 

Merton, R.K. : Social Theory and Social Structure: Amerind Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd.; 

1968 

Parsons, T. : The Structure of Social Action: Free Press, New York; 1949 

Ritzer, G. : Sociological Theory: McGraw Hill Inc.; (IIIrd Ed.) 1992 

Skidmore, W. : Theoretical Thinking in Sociology: Cambridge University Press, 

Cambridge; 1975 

Strauss, C. Levy : Social structure in Structural Anthropology, Penguine; 1968 

Turner, Bryan S. : Social Theory, Blackwell Publishing, London; 1996 

Turner, J.H. : The structure of Sociological Theory, Rawat Publication, Jaipur; 1995 

Wagner, H. : Introduction: The Phenomenological Approach to Sociology. In Alfred 

Schutz on Phenomenology of Social Relations, The University of Chicago 

Press; 1970 



PAPER – X (Compulsory) INDIAN SOCIETY AND CULTURE 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit - I Historical Background: Traditional Hindu Social Organization – Purushartha, 

Samaskara, Theory of Karma; Diversity and Unity in India; Impact of Islam and 

Christianity. 

Unit – II Social Stratification – I: Caste -- Features, functions and changes; 

Caste and Mobility, Role of Caste in Indian Politics. 

Unit – III Social Stratification – II: Class - Agrarian and Industrial, 

Changing Class structure; 

Scheduled Tribes -- Distribution, Economy and development; Minorities 

Unit - IV Family, Marriage and Kinship: Joint Family – Structure, Function and Changing 

Pattern; Marriage – Types, Marriage in different ethnic groups; 

Kinship System – Usage, Regional Variations 

Readings:- 

Dube, S.C. : Indian Society: National Book Trust, New Delhi; 1986 

Dumont, L. : Homo Hierarchicus: The Caste System and Its Implications; University of 

Chicago Press, 1981. 

Ghurye, G.S. : Caste and Role in India: Popular Prakashan, Bombay; 1969 

Kapadia, K.M . : Marriage and Family in India: Oxford University Press, Bombay; 1960 

10(585) 


Mandelbaum, D.G. : Society in India: Popular Prakashan, Bombay; 1972 

Majumdar & Madan : An Introduction to Social Anthropology: Asia Publication House, Bombay; 

1966 

Momin, A.R. : The Legacy of G.S. Ghurye: A Centennial festschrift, Popular Prakashan, 

Bombay; 1996 

Prabhu, P.H. : Hindu Social Organization: Popular Parkashan, Bombay; 1963 

Sharma, K.L. : Essays on Social Stratification, Rawat Publication, Jaipur; 1980 

Singh, Yogendra. : Modernization of Indian Tradition : Thomson press, Faridabad; 1973 

Singh, Yogendra. : Social Stratification and change in India: Manohar publications, New Delhi; 

1979 

Singer & Cohn : Structure and Change in Indian Society: Aldine Publishing Co. 

Chicago; 1968 

Srinivas, M.N. : India Social Structure: Hindustan Publishing Corp. New Delhi; 1980 

Srinivas & Shah : Hinduism in International Encyclopedia of Social Science, Meerut; 

1970 

Srinivas, M.N. : Caste in Modern India and other Essays, Asian Publishing House, Bombay; 

1966 

10(586) 




PAPER –XI (Compulsory): QUALITATIVE AND QUANTITATIVE RESEARCH 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit - I Qualitative and Quantitative Researches, 

Qualitative Methods - Grounded Theory, Ethnography, 

Participatory Research. 

Quantitative Methods- Survey, Experimental, Content Analysis 

Unit – II Classification, Tabulation and Graphic Presentation, 

Frequency Distribution, Measures of Central Tendency and Variability 

Unit - III Normal Distribution: Divergence from Normality, 

Correlation -- Co-efficient of Correlation; 

Method – Product Moment, Rank Difference 

Association and Attribution 

Unit – IV Test of Significance:‘t’ test, Chi-Square; ANOVA - One Way and Two Way 

Report Writing and Editing. 

Readings:- 

Ackoff R. L. : The Designing of Social Research University of Chicago Press, 1955 

Babbie, Earl : The Practice of Social Research, Thomson Asia Pvt. Ltd.,Singapore; 2004 

Bose P.K. : Research Methodology (Third Survey) Monography of 

ICSSIL 

New Delhi 

Garett H.E. : Statistics in Psychology and Education, Vakils Bombay, 1981 

Giddens, A. : New Rules of Sociological Methods, Stanford University Press; 

1993 

Goode and Hatt : Methods in Social Research: Mc Graw Hill Co. Ltd., 1952 

Kerlinger , F.N. : Foundation of Behavioural Research Half Ronehartand 

Winston, 

New York, 1973 

Lazarsfeld,P.F. : On Social Research and Its Language: University of Chicago 

Press, 1993 

Majumdar, P.K. : Research Methods in Social Science, Viva Books Pvt. Ltd., New 

Delhi; 2005 

Martin H. : The Philosophy of Social Science: An Introduction 

Cambridge University press, 2000 

Matt Henn & others : A Short introduction to Social Research, Vistaar Publication, 

New Delhi; 2006 

Neuman, W.L. : Social Research Methods: Qualitative and Quantitative 

Approaches (6 th Ed.), Pearson Education, Inc.2006 

Sarantakos, S. : Social Research (2 nd Ed.)Palgrave, New York; 1998 

10(587) 


Seltiz, C.H. : Research Methods in Social Relations Holt Rine Hart, and Winston, 

1951 

Thakur D. : The Research Methodology in Social Sciences 

Deep and Deep Publications, New Delhi, 1998 

Young P.V. : Scientific Social Survey and Research: Prentice Hall 

New Jersy, 1956 



Paper –XII (Optional) SOCIOLOGY OF POPULATION STUDIES 

10(588) 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit –I Sociology of Population Studies: Nature, Scope and Importance; Demographic 

Methods, Sources of Data. 

Unit –II Population Theories: Biological/Natural, Malthusian, Neo- Malthusian, 

Optimum Population and Demographic Transition. 

Unit –III Fertility: Concept, Measures, Differential Fertility in India, Factors affecting 

Fertility in India. 

Mortality: Concept and Measures; Differential Mortality in India, Factors affecting 

Mortality in India; Life table. 

Migration: Concept, Types, Trends and Factors; Problem of Migrant Labourers. 

Unit –IV Demographic Structure of India: Age, Sex, Literacy, Rural – Urban, 

Religious Population, Over population and Food Security. 

REFERENCES: 

Agarwal, S.N. : India’s Population Problems, New Delhi; 1977 

Bhende, Asha and : Principles of Population,: Himalaya Publishing House, Delhi; 1995 

Tara Kanitkar, 

Bogue, Donald J. : The Principles of Demography: John Wiley, N.Y.; 1969. 

Bose, Ashish : India’s Basic Demographic Statistics: B.R. Publishing Corporation, New Delhi; 

1996 

Census of India : New Delhi: Govt. of India. 2011 

UN Publication : Determinants and Consequences of Population Growth- 1973 

Franda, Marcus : Response to Population Growth in India: Praeger Publishers Inc, 1975 

Hansraj : Fundamentals of Demography; 1997: Population Studies with 

Special reference to India: Surjeet Publication, Delhi; (2003-R) 


Malthus, T.R. : An Essay on the Principle of Population,: William Pickering, London; 

1986 

National Family and : (NFHS) (1994-1999). Bombay: IIPS. 

Health Survey 

Premi, M.K. : Social Demography: A Systematic Exposition: Jawahar Publisher. Delhi; 

2003 

Premi, M.K : Population of India in the New Millennium,National Book Trust, New 

Delhi. 2006 

Srinivasan, K. Population Policy and Reproductive Health: Hindustan 

Publishing Corporation, New Delhi; 1996 



PAPER – XIII (Optional) SOCIOLOGY OF RURAL DEVELOPMENT 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit - I Rural Development: Concept, Indicators, Objectives and Scope, 

Rural Development Emphasis-Agriculture Development, Quality of life 

Approach, Hunger and Poverty Alleviation, Empowerment Paradigm 

Unit – II Rural Infrastructure: Physical, Institutional; other opportunities; 

Rural Management; Public Distribution System 

Unit - III Strategies and Programs of Rural Development: Under Five Year Plans Rural 

Technology; Rural Innovation and Diffusion; Income Generation – 

Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Act (MGNREGA); 

PURA Connectivities; Rural Marketing Solutions, Self Help Groups 

Unit – IV Program Evaluation: Program Evaluation Organization; People’s Participation 

in Rural Development, Social Auditing, Challenges and Bottle necks in Rural 

Development 

Readings:- 

Arora, Sanjay : “Precision Agriculture and Sustainable Development,”Kurukshetra 

(Journal), Vol. 54 No. 2; Dec.2005 

Desai, A.R. : Rural India in Transition, Popular Prakashan, Bombay; 1979 

Guruswami, Mohan : India: Issues in Development, Hope, India; 2006 

Gulati, Archna, g. : “Empowering Rural India: From Pipedream to Reality” In Kurukshetra 

(Journal); Vol.54 No. 6, April, 2006 

Hartwick, E. : Theories of Development, Rawat Pub., Jaipur; 2005 

Harris, John : Rural Development: Theories of Peasant Economy and Agrarian Change, 

Hutchison, London; 1982 

Loganathan, P. & : “Rural Introduction Development Fund” 

Asokan, R. Kurukshetra (Journal), Vol. 54 No. 2; Dec.2005 

10(589) 


Kurmar, S. : Vilayudhan Rural Marketing: Targeting the Non-Urban Consumer, 

Response Books; 2002 

Madan, G.R. : India’s Developing Villages Print House in India; 1983 

Maheshwari, S.R. : Rural Development in India, Sage Publication, New Delhi; 1985 

Norman, Long : Development Sociology: Actor Perspective Routledge; 2001 

Pant, K.C. : India’s Development Scenario: Next Decade and Beyond (Vol.II) A.F. 

Publisher; 2003 

Pradhan, P.K. : Land, Labour and Rural Poverty: Himalayan Publishing House Ltd., 

Bombay; 1988 

Rogers, E.M. : Diffusion of Innovation (5 th Ed.), Free Press; 2003 

Razvi, Shahra (Ed.) : Agrarian Change, Gender and Land Rights: Blackwell; 2003 

Vivek, R.& : The New Strategies of Development in Village India, 

Bhattacharya Metropolitan; 1885 

Govt. of India : India Year Book 2008, 2011: Publication Division, Govt. of India 

Singh Katar : Rural Development: Principles, Policies and Management; Sage 

Publication New 

Delhi; 2009 

Shrilal Shukla : Raagdarbari, Rajkamal Prakashan Delhi 



Paper-XIV (Optional) POLITICAL SOCIOLOGY 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit – I Political Sociology: Definition, Nature, Scope; Political systems-Major Types, 

Socio-political ideologies- socialism, Fascism and Sarvodya. 

Unit – II Concepts in Political Sociology: Democratic Polity-Parties, Political Culture, 

Political Participation, Pressure Groups, Political recruitment 

Unit – III Approaches to study Political System: Structural-functional, System approach, 

Behavioural and Conflict approaches 

Unit – IV Society and Polity in India: Constitutional aspect; Institutional Structure; Social 

bases of Politics in India: Caste and Religion; 

Criminalization of politics; Right to Information and Good Governance; 

India Against Corruption Movement (IAC). 

REFERENCES: 

Allardt, E. and Rukkan, S. : Politics: Studies in Political Sociology; 1970 

10(590) 


Almond and Coleman : The Politics of Developing Areas: Princeton University Press; 

1960 

Almond and Powell : Comparative Politics Development Approach, New Delhi; 1972 

Bendix, R, : Nation Building and Citizen ship: Studies of Our Changing Social 

Order, John Villey & Sons; 1964 

Dahl, R.A., : Modern Political Analysis, Prentice Hal of India, New Delhi; 1994 

Desai, A.R. : Social Background of Indian Nationalism, Popular Parkashan, Bombay; 

1988 

Dowse, R.E. and : Political Sociology, John Wiley, London; 1972 

Hughes J.A. 

Easton, David : A System Analysis of Political Life, Wiley, New-York; 1965 

Finkle, Jason & R.W. : Political Development and Social Change, : John Wiley and Sons Inc. 

New York; 1971 

Horowitz, Irving L. : Foundation of Political Sociology, Harper and Row, New York; 1972 

Huntington, S.P., : Political Order in Changing Societies; 1969 

Kothari R. : Politics in India, Orient Longmans Ltd.; 1979 

Kothari R., : Caste in Indian Politics, Asia Book Corporation of America; 1973 

Key V. O. : Politics, Parities and Pressure Groups, Crowell New York; 1964 

Lapalombaran, Joseph& : Political Parties and Political Development; 1966 

Weiner Myron, 

Pizzorno, A. : Political Sociology, Penguin Books; 1970 

Pye, Lucien , : Aspects of Political Development, Amerind Publishing Company 

Ltd. 1966 

Rush, M., : Political Sociology, New York; 1966 

Runciman, W.G. : Social Sciences and Political Theory, Cambridge University Press; 1969 



Paper XV (Optional) SOCIAL PROBLEMS 

10(591) 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit-I Social Problem: Meaning; Social Problem Perspectives – Labelling 

Theory (Becker), Non-Conformity (Merton), Differential Association 

(Sutherland), Discourse Theory (Foucault) 

Unit-II Group Context of Social Problems: Casteism, Untouchability, 

Communalism, Discrimination, Atrocities against Women, Child Abuse. 

Unit-III Gender Disadvantages and Women’s Protection: Domestic Violence, 

Marital Discrepancies, Prostitution, Foeticide; Legal Remedies for Gender 

Problems. 


Unit-IV Deviant Behaviour: Deviance and Crime, Delinquency; Organized 

Crime, White Collar Crime and Corruption; Alcohol and Drug Addiction 

REFERENCES: 

Ahuja Ram : Social Problems in India, Rawat Publications, Jaipur; (1992), 

Beteille, Andre. : Social Inequality: OUP, New Delhi; (1974), Beteille, Andre. 

: Backward Classes in Contemporary India: Oxford University Press, 

New Delhi; (1992), 

Berreman, GD : Caste and Other Inequalities: Essays in Inequality, Folklore 

Institute, Meerut; (1979), 

Ghurye, G.S. : Social Tensions in India: Popular Parkashan, Bombay; (1968), 

Gill, S.S. : The Pathology of Corruption,: Harper Collin Publisher, New Delhi; 

(1998), 

Inden, Ronald. : Imaging India: Brasil Blackward, Oxford; (1990) 

Merton R.K. : Social Theory and Social Structure, Amerind Publishing Company, 

New Delhi; (1972), 

Mamoria, C.B. : Social Problems in India, Kitab Mehal, Allahabad; (1981), 

Madan, G.K. : Social Problems, Allied Publications, Bombay; (1973) 

Ministry of Home Affairs. : Crime in India: Government of India, New Delhi; 1998. 

Monterio, J.P. : Corruption: Control of mal-administration, Bombay 

: Mankatalss; (1966) 

Satya Murty, T.V. : Region, Religion, Caste, Gender and Culture in Contemporary 

India: OUP. New Delhi; (1996), 

Srinivas, M.N. : Social Change in Modern India : Orient Longman, New Delhi,; (1972 

Waxman : The Stigma of Poverty: A Critique of Poverty Theories and Policies; 

(1983), 



Paper-XVI (Optional) CRIMINOLOGY 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit – 1 Criminology: Meaning and Scope, Criminality and Para Criminality; Indian Crime 

Scenario –Classification, Crime Statistics, National Crime Record Bureau, Indian 

Penal Code. 

Unit – II Theoretical Perspectives: Classical and Neo-Classical, Biological, Psychological, 

Social. 

Unit – III Forms of Crimes: Physical Violence, Economic Crime, White Collar and 

Blue Collar Crimes, Organized Crimes, Cyber-Crimes, Crime against 

Women, Crime against Child. 

10(592) 


Unit – IV Correctional and Control Mechanisms: Correctional Approaches- Community 

Based and Prison Based; Correctional Programmes- Prison Reforms, Educational, 

Vocational, Psychological, Recreational and Meditational. 

REFERENCES: 

Teeters, Negley and : New Horizons in Criminology. 

Harry Elnar Barnes Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi; (1959), 

Sutherland, Edwin. : Principles of Criminology. 

Parsonage, William H. : Perspectives on Criminology. Sage Publications, London (1979), 

Ministry of Home Affairs : Crime in India. New Delhi: Government of India Annual Report of 

National Crime Bureau, New Delhi;(1998), 

Merton, R.K. : Social Theory and Social Structure: Emerind Publishing Co. New 

Delhi; 1972. 

Bedi, Kiran, : It Is Always Possible: Sterling Publications Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi ;( 

1998), 

Williams, Frank P. and : Criminological Theory: Prentice Hall, New Jersey; (1998),. 

Marilyn D. Meshere, 

Williamson, Herald E. : The Correction Profession: Sage Publications, New Delhi; 1990 

Ministry of Home Affairs : Report of the All India Committee on Jail Reforms 1980-83 

India. 

Goel, Rakesh M. and : Computer Crime: Concept, Control and Prevention. 

Manohar S. Powar. Sysman Computers Pvt. Ltd, Bombay; (1994), 

Makkar, S.P. Singh : Global perspectives in Criminology. 

and Paul C. Friday. ABC Publications, Jalandhar; (1993). 

Reid, Suetitus. : Crime and Criminology. : Dey Dan Press, Illinois; (1976) 

Shankardas, Rani Dhavan, : Punishment and the Prison: India and International Perspective: 

Sage Publications, New Delhi; (2000), 

Sutherland, Edwin H. and : Principles of Criminology: The Times of India Press, Bombay; (1968) 

Donald R. Cressey. 

Walklete, Sandra : Understanding Criminology: Open University Press, Philadelphia; 

(1998) 



Paper-XVII (Compulsory) ADVANCED SOCIAL THEORY TRENDS 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit-I Integrative genre Social Theory-I: 

1. Micro Foundation of Macro Sociology (Collins.) 

2. Neo-functionalism (Jaffrey C. Alexander) 

3. Social Construction of Reality (Berger & Luckman) 

4. Integrative Paradigm (Ritzer) 

10(593) 


Unit-II Integrative genre social Theory-II: 

1. Duality of Agency and Structure (Giddens.) 

2. Habitus and Field (Bourdieu, P.) 

3. Life World and System (Habermas, J.) 

Unit-III Synthesis in Sociological Theory: 

1. Network Theory (Burt and others) 

2. Rational Choice Theory (Coleman, J; Elster) 

3. Feminist Theory (Dorothy, Patricia Collins) 

Unit-IV Post Modern Scenario: 

1. Decline of Grand Narrative (Lyotard) 

2. Hyperreal World (Baudrillard) 

3. Truth and Knowledge (Foucault) 

4. Post –Feminist Theory (Judith Butler) 

REFERENCES: 

Adams Bert N.& Sydie, R.A. : Sociological Theory,: Vaster Publication, New Delhi; (2001), 

Aron Raymond : Main Currents in Sociological Thought, Vol.1 and 2, Penguin, 

Chapters on Marx, Durkheim and Weber. ;( 1967), 

De, Beauvoir, Simon : The Second Sex: Vintage, New York; (1957), 

Hughes, Jhon, A.Martin, Perer, W.W: Understanding Classical Sociology- Marx, 

J. and Sharrok, Durkheim and Weber, Sage Publication, London; (1995) 

Kivisto, P. : Key Ideas in Sociology (2 nd ed.), 8Pine Forge Press, New Delhi, 

(2004), 

Lash,S. : Sociology of Postmodernism; Routledge, London; (1990), 

Parsons Talcott : The Structure of Social Action, Vol.1 and 2. McGraw Hill, New 

York. 1949 

Ritzer, George, : Sociological Theory, : McGraw Hill, New York 1992. 

Ritzer, George, : Modern Sociological Theory, : McGraw Hill, New York; (2000), 

Swingewood, A. : A short history of Sociological thought; Palgrave; New York; 

(2000), 

Seidman,S.& Alexander, J.C. : The New Social Theory Reader, Routledge, London; (2001), 

Taylor Steve (ed.) : Sociology: Issues and Debates; Palgrave. (1999), 

Turner, Jonathan H. : The Structure of Sociological Theory: Rawat Publication, Jaipur 

(1995) (4 th edition) 

Zeitlin, Irving M. : Rethinking Sociology: A Critique of Contemporary Theory, 

Rawat Publication, New Delhi; (1998), 



PAPER – XVIII: PERSPECTIVES ON INDIAN SOCIETY 


Time- 3 hours 





10(594) 


Unit - I Text View/Indological Approach -- G.S. Ghurye, Louis Dumont 

Unit – II Structural-Functional View: -- M.N. Srinivas, S.C. Dube 

Unit – III Marxian Perspective: -- D.P. Mukerjee, A.R. Desai 

Unit – IV Subaltern Perspective: -- B.R. Ambedkar, David Hardiman 

Readings:- 

Atal, Yogesh : Indian Sociology from Where to Where Rawat Publication, New Delhi; 

2003 

Ambedkar, B.R. : The Untouchable Who Were They and Why They 

Became Untouchable: Amrit Book, Delhi: (1949), 

Desai, A.R. : Rural Sociology in India: Popular Prakashan, Bombay; 1996 

Desai, A.R. : Rural India in Transition: Popular Prakashan, Bombay; 1979 

Dube, S.C. : Indian Village, Routledge, London; 1967 

Dhanagre, D.N. : Themes and Perspective in Indian Sociology, Rawat Publication, Jaipur; 

1993 

Dumont, Louis : Homo Hierarchicus: The caste System and its Implications, Vikas Pub., 

New Delhi; 1970 

Ghurye, G.S. : Caste and Race in India Popular Prakashan, Bombay; 1969 

Hardiman, D. : Feeding the Bania: Peasants ans Usurers in Western India, Oxford 

University Press; 1996 

Hardiman, D. : The Coming of the Devi: Adivasi Assertion in Western India, Oxford 

University Press; 1987 

Marriot, M. : India Through Hindu categories, Sage Publication, New Delhi; 1990 

Mendalbaum, G. : Society in India: (Vol.I & II), Popular Prakashan, Bombay. 

Momin, A.R. : The Legacy of G.S. Ghurye: A Centennial Festschrift, 

Popular Parkashan, Bombay; 1996 

Mukerjee, D.P. : Indian Culture: A Sociological Study: Roopa & Sons, Delhi 

Oommen, T.K. & : Indian Sociology: Reflections and Introspections, 

Mukerjee, P.N. Popular Parkashan, Bombay; 1986 

Singh, Y. : Modernization of Indian Tradition, Thomson press, Faridabad; 1973 

Singh, Y. : Indian Sociology: Social Conditioning and Emerging Concerns, Vistaar 

Pub., Delhi; 1986 

Srinivas, M.N. : India’s Village, Asia Publishing House, Bombay; 1960 

10(595) 




Paper-XIX (Compulsory) GENDER AND SOCIETY 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit-I Sex and Gender: The Concepts; Equality and difference; 

Gender as Social Construct-Socialization and Gender Role 

Gender ideologies-Patriarchy and Matriarchy 

Unit-II Gender Theories and Women’s Movements: Theories of Gender relations; 

Women’s Movements: Liberalist, Socialist, Radicalist; Eco-feminism. 

Unit-III Gender and Development: Women’s role in Production and Reproduction; Nature 

of Household work; Women’s Work and Technology. Class and Women; 

Empowerment Paradigm; Personal Laws v/s Common Civil Code 

Unit-IV Status of Women: Changing Status of Women in India; Gender Gaps (Census, 

NSS, Health Survey bases), Strategies for Women’s Development- Affirmative 

action; Health and Education problems of Women. 

REFERENCES: 

Agarwal, B., : A Field of One’s Own: Gender and Land Rights in South Asia, 

Cambridge: Cambridge University Press; 1994. 

Altekar, A.S. : The Position of Women in Hindu Civilization, Second Edition: P Fifth 

reprint. Motilal Banarasidass, Delhi; 1983 

Chanana, Karuna. : Socialization, Women and Education: Explorations in Gender Identity: 

Orient Longman, New Delhi;1988 

De, Beauvoir, Simon : The Second Sex, Vintage, New York; 1957 

Desai, Neera and : Women and Society in India. Ajanta Delhi; 1987 M. Krishnaraj. 

Dube, Leela et.al. (eds.) : Visibility and Power: Essays on Women in Society and Development. 

OUP New Delhi; 1986 

Dube, Leela. : Women and Kinship: Comparative Perspectives on 

Gender in South and South-East Asia.: United Nations University Press, Tokyo; 1997 

Forbes, G. : Women in Modern India. New Delhi, Cambridge University Press; 

1998 

Government of India. : Towards Equality: Report of the Committee on the Status of Women. 

1974 

Kapur, Promila (Ed.). : Empowering the Indian Women, Publications Division, Ministry of 

Information and broadcasting, Government of India; 2001 

Maccoby, Eleaner and : The Psychology of Sex Differences. 

Carol Jacklin. Stanford : Stanford University Press; 1975 

Oakley, Ann., : Sex, Gender and Society: Harper and Row, New York; 1972 

Ghadially, Rehana (ed.) : Women in Indian Society: Sage, New Delhi; 1988. 

10(596) 


Mies Maria. : Indian Women and Patriarchy: Conflicts and Dilemmas of Students and 

Working Women.: Concept, New Delhi; 1980 

Omvedt, Gail. : Caste, Class and Women’s Liberation in India,’ Bulletin of Concerned 

Asian Scholars.7 ;1975 

Sharma, Ursula. (1983) : Women, Work and Property in North-West India: Tavistock, London; 

1983 

Shulamitz, Reinharz and : Feminist Research Methods: Oxford University Press, 

Lynn Davidman, New York; 1991 

Srinivas, M.N. (Ed.) : Caste: Its Modern Avatar, Penguin, New Delhi: 

(Leela Dube’s Article on Caste and Women). 

Tong, Rosemarie : Feminist Thought: A Comprehensive Introduction. 

: Westview Press, Colarodo; 1989. 

Whelham, Imelda. : Modern Feminist Thought. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press; 

1997 

Waters, Malcom : Modern Sociological Theory, Sage Publication, London; 1994 



PAPER(Optional) –XX: INDUSTRIAL SOCIOLOGY 


1 

Time- 3 hours 





Unit - I Definition and Perspectives: Nature and Scope of Industrial Sociology; Pace of 

Industrialization, De-Industrialization- Growth beyond Industrialization 

Major Perspectives – Durkheim, Weber, Marx, Ritzer (McDonaldisation) 

Unit – II Politico-Economic Frame of Industry: Sectors of Economy; Factory as a System; 

Industrial Management; Approaches – Scientific Management and Human Relation; 

Industrial Democracy, Growth of Slums, Environment Degradation and Health 

Hazards 

Unit – III Industrial Work-Force: Changing Character of Work-Force in India; 

Motivation and Morale; Work Culture; Worker’s Welfare; From Collective 

Bargaining to Individual Negotiation Incorporate Sector. 

Unit - IV Industry-Society Interface: Impact of Social Structure on Industry i.e. Caste, 

Class, Joint Family, Kinship; Impact of Industry on Social Structure i.e. on Caste, 

Class, Joint Family, Kinship, Socio-Cultural Values of Society. 

Readings:- 

Danial, Bell : The Coming of Post-Industrial Society, Basic Books, New York; 1973 

Desai, A.R. : Rise and Development of Modern Indian Industries Perspective Chapter 

VII in Social Background of Indian Nationalism; Popular Parkashan, Bombay; 

1978 

10(597) 


Edwards, Paul : Industrial Relations: Blackwell Publishing; 2003 

Faunce, William : Problem of Industrial Society, McGraw Hill Book Company; 1968 

Giddens, A. : Sociology (4 th Ed.) Polity; 2001 

Gisbert, S.J. : Fundamental of Industrial Sociology: McGraw Hill; 1972 

Hal.R.Arkese & : Psychological Theory of Motivation, 

Haralambos : Sociology: Themes and Perspectives, Bell and Hyman, London; 1985 

John P. Garske : Brookes/Cole Publishing Co. Ltd. New Delhi; 1985 

Hoselitz, B. & : Industrialization and Society, UNESCO; 1960 Moore, W.E. 

Melvin & Jacks: New Foundations for Industrial Sociology, East-West Press Pvt.ltd. New Delhi; 

1965 

Ramaswamy, E.S.: Industrial Relation in India: A Sociological Perspective, Thee Milan, India;1978 

Sheth, N.R. : Industrial Sociology in India: Allied Publishers Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi; 

1985 

Vitalse, M. : Motivation and Morale in Industry, Allied Pub. Bombay; 1962 

Watson, T.J. : Sociology, Work and Industry, Routledge; 1995 

M.A. (FINAL), 3 rd SEMESTER, SOCIOLOGY 


Paper-XXI (Optional) SOCIAL CHANGE AND SOCIAL MOVEMENTS IN INDIA 

10(598) 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit – I Social Change: Meaning, Dimensions, Types; Endogenic and Exogenic factors; 

Diffusion of Innovation. 

Unit – II Contemporary Indian Social Changes: Modernization, Westernization, 

Sanskritization, Secularization, Globalization. 

Unit – III Social Movements: Concept, Elements, Classification and Theories. 

Unit – IV Traditional and New Social Movements in India: Traditional Movements - 

Reform, Tribal and Peasant Movements New Age Movements – 

Ecological, Women, Backward Class and Dalit Movements; Identity Movements. 

REFERENCES: 

Albrow, Martin & Elizabeth King : Globalisation, Knowledge and Society, Sage: London; 

(Ed.),(1990), 

Banks, J.A. : The Sociology of Social Movements: Macmillan, London; (1972) 

Desai, A.R. Ed. : Peasant Struggles in India: Oxford University Press, Bombay; 

(1979), 

Dhanagare, D.N., : Peasant Movements in Indian 1920-1950:O.U.P, Delhi;(1983), 

Gore, M.S., : The Social Context of an Ideology: Ambedkar’s Political and 

Social Thoughts (New Delhi: Sage); (1993), 


Harlambos and Holborn : Sociology: Themes and Perspectives 5 th Edition, Harper Collins 

Pub. London ;( 2000), 

Nash, J.(ed.) : Social Movements: an anthropological reader, Blackwell 

Publishing, Oxford ; (2005), 

Oomen, T.K., : Protest and Change: Studies in Social Movements: sage 

Publication , Delhi; (1990), 

Rao, M.S.A., : Social Movements in India: Manohar; New Delhi; (1979) 

Rao, M.S.A., : Social Movements and Social Transformation: Macmillan, Delhi; 

(1979), 

Singh, K.S., : Tribal Movements in India: Manohar, NewDelhi; (1982), 

Selliot, Eleanor, : From Untouchable to dalit: Essays on the Ambedkar Movement: 

Manohar, New Delhi; (1995) 

Oommen, T.K., : (Charisma, Stability and Change: An Analysis of Bhoodan 

Grandan Movement : Thomas Press, New Delhi; (1972), 

Seidman,S.& Alexander, J.C. : The New Social Theory Reader, Routledge,London; (2001), 

Shah, Ghanshyam, : Protest Movements in two Indian States.: Ajanta, New Delhi; 

(1977) 

Shah, Ghanshyam, : Social Movements in India; a review of the Literature: Sage, 

Delhi; (1990), 

Shah, Nandita, : The Issues at Stake : Theory and Practice in the Contemporary 

women’s movements in India, :Kali for Women, New Delhi; 

(1992), 

Shiva, Vandana, : Ecology and the Politics of Survival : Sage, New Delhi; 

(1991), 

M.A. (Final), 3rd SEMESTER, SOCIOLOGY 


Paper- XXII (Optional) SOCIOLOGY OF MARGINALIZED SECTIONS 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit – I Marginalization: Meaning, Exclusion-Inclusion Perspective; Marginalized 

Groups—Scheduled Castes, Scheduled Tribes, Minorities, Women and other Social 

Isolates. 

Unit – II Conditions and Characteristics of Marginalization: Ideology of Marginalization, 

Dependency; Caste, Class and Power Perspectives; Sustainment of Poverty. 

Unit – III Reform and Protest Movements: Social Reform movements and 

Underprivileged Classes; Dalit Movements, Tribal Movements, Women’s 

Movements; Subaltern Movements. 

Unit –IV Affirmative Action- Welfare Measures/Programmes; Inclusive Policies for 

Scheduled Caste, Scheduled Tribes, Welfare of Religious Minorities and Women. 

10(599) 


REFERENCES: 

Ambedkar, B.R. : The Untouchable Who Were They and Why They Became 

Untouchable,: Amrit Book, Delhi: (1949), 

Beteille Andre, : Social Inequality,: Penguin Book,. London; (1975), 

Gore, M.S. : The Social Context of an Ideology; The Social and Political Thought of 

Babasahab Ambedkar: Sage Publication, Delhi; (1993), 

Gupta, Dipankar : Social Stratification, Oxford University, Press. New Delhi,; (1991), 

Ghadially, Rehana : Women in Indian Society. Sage. New Delhi; (ed.) (1988), 

Issacs, Harold : Deprived Castes and their Strength for Equality: Ashish 

Publishing House, Delhi; (1962). 

Jogdand, P.G. : New Economic Policy and Dalits, Rawat Publication. Jaipur; (2000), 

Lynch, Owen, M. : The Politics of Untouchability; Social Mobility and Social Change in a 

City of India: National Publishing House, Delhi; (1969). 

Mathew Joseph : Ideology, Protest and Social Mobility: Case Study of Mahars and 

Pulayes.: Inter India Publication, Delhi; (1986). 

Omvedt, Gail. : ‘Caste, Class and Women’s Liberation in India,’ Bulletin of Concerned 

Asian Scholars.7; (1975), 

Omvedt Gail : Dalits and the Democratic Revolution,: Sage Publications,Delhi; 

(1999), 

Oomen, T.K. : Protest and Change: Studies in Social Movement, Sage Publication, 

Delhi; (1990), 

Pimpley, P.N.& : Struggle for Status,: B.R. Publishing House, Satish Delhi;1985 Sharma, 

Satish Delhi; (1985). 

Schchidananda : Harijan Elites: Thomson Press, Faridabad; (1977). 

Shah, Ghanshyam : Social Movement in India: A Review of Literature in India,: Sage 

Publication. Delhi; (1990) 

Upadhyaya, H.C. : Scheduled Caste and Scheduled Tribe in India : Anmol Publication. 

Delhi; (Ed.) (1991). 

Zelliot, Eleanor : From Untouchable to Dalit: Essays on the Ambedkar Movement: 

Manohar Publication, New Delhi; (1995), 



Paper-XXIII (Optional) SOCIAL CHANGE AND DEVELOPMENT 

10(600) 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit – I Social Change: Concept and Characteristics, Sources, Forms and Forces; 

Resistance to Change. 

Unit – II Theories and Patterns of Change: Linear, Cyclical, Fluctuation; Unpatterned 

Change; Conflict, Historical, and Cultural Lag Theory 


Unit – III Development and Underdevelopment: Concepts, characteristics; Varieties of 

Development – Human Development; Social Development, Economic 

Development, Sustainable Development, 

Unit – IV Theories of Development and Underdevelopment: Modernization, Dependency 

and the World System; Globalization and Liberalization; Barriers and Breakdowns 

in Development, 

REFERENCES: 

Appadurai, Arjun. : Modernity at Large Cultural Dimensions of Globalization, OU P, New 

Delhi; 1997 

Bernd, Hamns & :Sustainable Development and Future of Cities, Intermediate Technology 

Publication, NSECO; 

Pandurang K. Mutagi 1998 

Desai, A.R. : India’s Path of Development: A Marxist Approach Popular Parkashan. 

Bombay1985(Chapter 2). 

Dube, S.C. : Modernization and Development: The Search for Alternative Paradigm, 

Vistaar Publication, New Delhi; (1988), 

Dube, S.C. : Vikas Ka Samajshastra, Vani Parkashan, New Delhi; (2000), 

Harrison, D. : The Sociology of Modernization and Development. New Delhi: Sage.; 

1989. 

Magdoff, Harry : Imperialism and Globalization, Cornerstone Publications, Kharagpur; 

(2002), 

Moor, Wilbert and : Social Change: Prentice-Hall (India) New Delhi; (1967), 

Robert Cook 

Sharma, SL : “Criteria of Social Development”, Journal of Social Action. Jan-Mar; 

(1980). 

N. Long : An Introduction to the Sociology of Rural Development, Tavistock 

Publications; London; (1977), 

Sharma, SL : Development: Socio-Cultural Dimensions. Rawat, Jaipur: (1986), 

Srinivas, M.N. : Social Change in Modern India: University of Berkley, Berkley; (1966), 

Symposium on Implications: Sociological Bulletin. Vol.44. (Articles by Mathew, of Globalization. 

Panini & Pathy); UNDP. Sustainable Development. New York: 

OUP; (1995) 

World Bank. : World Development Report. New York; (1995) 

Kiely, Ray and Phil Marfleet : Globalization and the Third World.: Routledge, London. 

;(eds).(1998), 

Wallerstein Immanue, : The Modern World System. OUP, New York, (1974), 

World Commission on : Our Common Future. . (Brundland Report). 

Environment and Development OUP, New Delhi; (1987), 

10(601) 




Paper-XXIV (Optional) SOCIOLOGY OF RELIGION 

10(602) 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit-I Religion: Definition, Functions and Dysfunctions; Fusion and Fission Processes: 

Sects and Cults; Religion and Morality 

Unit-II Perspectives on Religion: Frazer, Durkheim, Marx, Weber, Structuralist Thinking 

(Levi Strauss). New Religious Movements; Clash of Civilizations. 

Unit-III Conceptual Categories: Science, Religion, Divinity; Nature of Religious 

Experience, Spiritualism; Secularization, 

Unit-IV Religion of India: Orientalism v/s Occidentalism-- Context of World Religion; 

Religious Demography of India; Religion in Politics; Identity Conflict. 

REFERENCES: 

Baird, Robert D. (ed.) : Religion in modern India. Manohar, Delhi; (1995), (3 rd edition). 

Clarke, P.B., : New Religious Movement: An introduction in Ed. S. Sutherland, et al. 

The World’s Religion: Routledge ` pp. 907-11; (1988) 

D’Souza, Lila, : The Sociology of Religion: A historical review, Rawat Publications, N. 

Delhi; (2005) 

Dube, S.C. : India Society, National Book Trust, New Delhi; 1990 

Durkheim, Emile : The Elementary Forms of Religious Life, Free Press, New York ;( 1965) 

Giddens, A. : Sociology 4 th Edition, Polity Press; (2001) 

Hadden, J.K. : “Challenging Secularization Theory” in A. Giddens, Sociology, Polity 

Press; (1997) 

Jones, Kenneth W. : Socio-religious reform movements in British India (The new Cambridge 

history of India III-1). Hyderabad: Orient Longman. 

Johnson, H.M. : Sociology: a systematic introduction, Allied Publishers 

Madan, T.N. (ed.). : (enlarged edition). Religion in India: Oxford University Press, New Delhi.; 

(1992) 

Majumdar, H.T. : India’s religious heritage,: Allied, New Delhi; (1986), 

Roberts, Keith A. : Religion in sociological perspective,: Dorsey Press, New York; (1984) 

Shakir, Moin (ed.). : Religion, State and politics in India: Ajanta Publications, Delhi; (1989) 

Turner, Bryan S. : Religion and social theory. London: Sage: (1991), (2 nd edition). 




Paper – XXV (Compulsory) SOCIOLOGICAL CONCEPTS AND KEY IDEAS 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit: I Globalization-Glocalization, Americanization, Easternization, World System 

Unit: II Reflexive Modernity, Civil Society and Public Sphere. 

Unit: III Global Society, Network Society, Knowledge Society, Risk Society. 

Unit: IV Identity, Ideology, Hyper Reality, Imagined Communities, New Citizenship 

REFERENCES: 

Anderson, B. : “Imagined Communities” in Theory Reader, 

Ed.Seidman, S.& Routledge, London; (2001), 

Barker, Chris &. : Cultural Studies and Discourse Analysis, Sage 

Galasinksi, D Publication, New Delhi; (2001), 

Bell, Daniel :The Coming of Post Industrial Society, Basic Books, New York; 

(1973) 

Churton, Mell : Theory and Method, Macmillan, London; (2000), 

Derek, Layder Understanding Social Theory, IInd Edition, Sage Publication, 

London; (2006), 

Harlambos, M. : Sociology: Themes and perspectives; OPU New Delhi; (1998), 

Houghes, Christina : Key Concepts in Feminist Theory and Research,Sage Pub. London; 

(2002) 

Giddens, Anthony : Capitalism & Modern Social Theory ; Cambridge University 

Press, Cambridge; (1996), 

Jones, Pip : Introducing Social Theory :Polity Press, Cambridge; (2003), 

Kivisto, P. : Key Ideas in Sociology (2 nd ed.), 8Pine Forge Press, New Delhi; 

(2004), 

Lash, S. : Sociology of Postmodernism: Routledge, London; (1990) 

Lemert, Charles : Social Theory: The Multicultural and Classic Readings: Rawat 

Publications. Jaipur; (2004), 

Lyotard, J.F. : Post Modern Condition in Ed. by Seidman,S.& Alexander, J.C., 

:The New Social Theory Reader: Routledge,London; (2001), 

Ritzer, George, : Modern Sociological Theory,New York: McGraw Hill.; (2000) 

Ritzer, George The McDonaldisation of Society 5, Pine Forge 

Press, New Delhi.; 

Rhoads, John K. : Critical Issues in Social Theory, Renn State Press; (1991), 

Seidman, S.& Alexander, J.C.:The New Social Theory Reader, Routledge, London; (2001), 

10(603) 


Slattery, M. : Key Ideas in Sociology Nelson Thornes Ltd.UK; (2003) 

:The Polity Reader in Social Theory; Polity 

Press; (1994) 

Toffler, Alwin : Future Shock, Bentum Books, New York; (1971), 

Turner, J.H. : The Structure of Sociological Theory: Rawat Pub , Jaipur; (1995) 



Paper- XXVI (Compulsory) Sociology of Organizations and Human Resource 

10(604) 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit-I Industrial Revolution and Growth of Formal Organisations; Corporatization; 

Theories of Modern Organization: Rational Bureaucracy (Max Weber), 

Informal Organisations (Blau, P.M.); Power and Compliance (Etzioni); 

Fordism and Post-Fordism; Control and Surveillance (Foucault). 

Unit-II Organizational Behaviour: Organization Man, Organizational 

Environment, Organizational Leadership, Goal Commitment and Goal 

Displacement, Role of incentive and Punishment 

Unit-III Human Resource Management and Functions: Concept and Meaning; 

Importance of Human Resource; Human Resource Management Functions; 

Component Concepts—Human Capital, Social Capital; Human Resource Policies 

in Public and Private Undertakings 

Unit-IV Human Resource Management and Practice: Recruitment Principles, Training, 

Maintenance of Human Resource; Grievances Redressal 

REFERENCES: 

Abha & Anil Chaturvedi : The Sociology of Formal Organizations,Oxford University Press, 

New Delhi.; (1995), 

Agarwal, R.D : Dynamics of labour Relations in India, A book Readings: Tata Mc 

Graw Hill; (1972) 

Denis, Pym : Industrial Society: Social Sciences in Management, Penguin Books, 

Paper Back; (1968) 

E.V.Schneider : Industrial Sociology, :Second Edition,: McGraw Hill,NewYork.; 

(1969), 

Etzioni, A. : Modern Organizations,:Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi;(1987), 

F. William : Readings in Industrial Sociology : Appleton Century Books;(1967) 

H.C.Gandhi : Industrial Productivity and Motivations: Asia Publishing. House, 

Bombay. (1961), 

Jean, Fleat and : Sociology of Works in Industry: Collier 

John F. Goldthrope Macmillan Ltd; (1971), 

K.K.Sen : Indian Labour Legislation and Industrial Laws : The World Press 

Pvt. Ltd., Calcutta; (1968), 


Karnik, VB : Indian Trade Union: A survey : Popular Parkashan, 

Mumbai;(1970), 

Laxamanna, C (et al) : Workers Participation and Industrial Democracy: Global 

Perspective: Ajantha Publications, New Delhi; (1990) 

N.R. Sheth : The Social Framework of an Indian Factory, Oxford University 

Press; (1968), 

Philip Hancock and : Work Post Modernism and Organization : Sage Publication, Melissa 

Taylor New Delhi; (2001), 

Ramaswamy, E A, : Industry and labour: New Delhi: OUP; (1988) 

Ramaswamy, E A : Industry relation in India, New Delhi; (1978) 

Watson, K Tony, : Sociology, work and Industry, Routledge Kegan Paul;(1995) 

Weber, Max : Theory of Social and Economic Organization: The Free Press, 

New York; (1997) 

M.A. (Final),4 th SEMESTER, SOCIOLOGY 

Syllabus and Courses of Reading (2012-13) 

Paper- XXVII (Compulsory) COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN SOCIAL RESEARCH 

10(605) 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit-I Computer Fundamentals: Introduction, Significance, Classification and 

Generations; Hardware and Software; Functional Components;Virus, Printer & 

Scanner. 

Unit-II Operating System :- Basics of MS Windows: Features, Getting started with 

Windows, Managing files and folders, Creating Short Cuts, Windows 

Customization; Basic Windows Accessories - Mouse Pointer, Control Panel Data 

Storage Devices- HDD, CD/DVD, USB/PEN Drive Printing. 

Unit-III Basic of MS office: Creation of files, Editing of Document - Bold , Italics , 

Underline, Fonts type & size, Paragraph, line spacing, spelling & grammar, Insertion 

of Images, Tables. 

MS Excel: Basics of MS-Excel, Data Entry, Graphs, Aggregate Formulas and 

Functions, Worksheet and Charts, Cell Editing. 

MS PowerPoint: Creating & Editing of Power Point Presentation, Physical 

Aspects. 

Unit IV Social Research Aspects & Computer: 

Internet – Introduction & History, Computer Networks, Introduction of WWW & 

Net –Surfing, Emails. Attachments, EBooks & online Journal System. 

SPSS: Introduction, Creating a Data File, Analysis- Univariate, Bivariate and 

Multivariate. 


REFERENCES: 

Balamurali, S. : An Introduction to Computer Science: Vikas Publishing House, 

New Delhi; (1998) 

Babbie, Earl : The Practice of Social Research 10 th edition, Thomson, Singapore; 

(2004), 

Gaur, Ajay S. and Sanjay S. Gaur : Statistical Method for Practice and Research: a guide to 

Data analysis using SPSS, Response Books, Delhi;(2006) 

Lean and Loen : Internet for Everyone: Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi: (1998), 

Mattelart, Armond : The Information Society: Sage Publications, New Delhi; (2003), 

Sarantakos, S. : Social Research: Palgrave, New York; (1988) 

Saxena, Sanjay : A First Course in Computer: Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi; 

(1998), 

Singhal, A. and E.M.Rogers : India’s Communication Revolution, : Sage Publications, London; (2000), 

Tesch, R. : ‘Computer Software and qualitative Analysis: A Reassessment’, in 

Blank et al. (ed.), New Technology in 

Sociology : Practical Applications in Research and Work, Transaction Books, 

New Brunswick; (1989) 



Paper- XXVIII (Optional) SOCIOLOGY OF MASS COMMUNICATION 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit – 1 Communication: Concept, Major Models and Types; Varieties of 

Communication- -Developmental, Corporate, and Political Communication 

Media Studies Methods –Content Analysis, Surveys and Ethnographic Method 

Unit – II Mass Communication: Meaning, Features and Functions; Means of Mass 

Communication; Media Audience; Mass Media effects onYouth and Children 

Unit – III Mass Media and Media Criticism: Culture Industry (Adorno), Popular Culture 

(Braudrillard) vis-à-vis High/Elite Culture; Globalization of Culture and Media 

Imperialism 

Unit – IV Communication and Development: Communication Infrastructure in India; 

Developmental Role of Communication; Innovation and Diffusion; Mass 

Communication Dysfunctions – Digital Divide; Cultural Hegemony 

REFERENCES: 

Adorno, T. : Culture Industry, Routledge, New Delhi; (2001), 

Appadurai, Arjun : Modernity at large: Cultural Dimension of Globalization, New 

Delhi, Oxford University Press; (1997), 

Blumber, J.G. and E. Katz : Mass Communication: Sage Publications, London;(1974), 

10(606) 


Bronsius, C. and M. Butcher : Image Journey – Audio Visual Media and Cultural Change in India,: 

Sage Publications, Delhi; (1999),(ed.). 

Breckenridge, C. : Public Culture in Contemporary India. Consuming Modernity 

Curran, J and M. Gurvitch, : Mass Media and Society (London : Edward Arnold) ; eds (1991),: 

Gunaratne, S. : Handbook of the Media in Asia: Sage, London); 2000, eds. 

Johnson, Kirk : Television and Social Change in Rural India: Sage Publications,London; 

(2000), 

Joshi, P.C. : Sanskriti, Vikas aur Sanchar Kranti, GranthShilpi, New.Delhi; (2001), 

Klaus Bruhn, J. : A Handbook of Media Research: Qualitative and Quantitative 

Methodologies, Routledge, N. Delhi; (2005), 

Kumar, Kewal : Mass Communication: Jaico, Bombay; (1991), 

Lerner, Daniel : The Passing of Traditional Society: Free Press, New York; (1958) 

Manuel, P., : Cassette Culture: Popular Music and Technology in North India; (1998) 

Mcquail, Dennis : Mass Communication Theory: Sage PublicationsLtd, New Delhi; (2005) 

Mitra, A. : Television and Popular Culture: Sage Publications, Delhi; (1993) 

Melkote, Srinivas, R. : Communication for Development in the third and H. Leslie World, Sage 

Publication, New Delhi ; (2004) 

Robertson, R. : Globalization, Social Theory and Global Culture: Sage Publications, 

London; (1992). 

Schramn, Wilbur : Mass Media and National Development, Harper and Raw, New York; 1973 

Singh, Yogendera : Cultural Change in India, : Rawat Publications, Jaipur; (2000), 

Singhal, A. and E.M. Rogers: India’s Communication Revolution,: Sage Publications, London; 

2000 

Schiller, Herbert translated : Sanchar Madhyam aur Sanskritic by Singh, Ram Kavinder Varchasav; 

Granth Shilpi, Delhi; (2002), 

Snow, R.P. : Crating Media Culture, : Sage Publications, London; (1983). 

Tester, Keith : Media, Culure; (1994), 

M.A. (FINAL), 4 th SEMESTER, SOCIOLOGY 


Paper XXIX (Optional) Cultural Studies 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit – I Cultural Studies: Emergence, Meaning, Nature and Scope; 

Place of Cultural studies in social science and Humanities 

Unit – II Cultural Studies Perspectives: Contribution of Symbolic Interactionism, Critical 

School, Structuralism, Post Structuralism/Postmodernism 

Unit – III Key concepts and Methods in Cultural studies: 

Identity, Representation, Ideology, Text, Intertextuality; Sites of Cultural Studies. 

Methods of Cultural Studies- Ethnographic, Anthropological, Discourse Analysis, 

Semiotic. 

10(607) 


Unit – IV Production and consumption of Culture: Production of meanings and 

signification; Production of popular culture, Post-Modern Culture. 

Reference: 

Rolland Barthes : Mythologies: Vintage, Jonarthan Cape; 2000/1972 

Gillian Rose : Visual Methodologies: An Introduction to the interpretation of visual 

material (IInd Ed.) 

Daniel Chandler Semiotics basics: Routledge, London; 2002 

Gary Hall : New Cultural Studies. : Adventures in Theory and Clare, Birchall 

Jeremy Volentine : Cultural Studies and Post Marxism (Ch.3) in New Cultural Studies, Sage 

publication, New Delhi; 2007 

Steve Taylor : Sociology: Issue and debates: Palgrave; 1999 

Swingwood , Alan : A Short history of Sociological theory; Palgrave; (3 rd Ed.) 2000. 

Barkar, Chris & : Cultural Studies and Discourse Analysis: A dialogue on 

Dariusz, Golasinski Language and Identity: Sage Publication, New Delhi; 2001 

Nayar, K, Pramod : Literary Theory Today: Asia Book Club, New Delhi. 

Lemert , Charles (Ed.) : Social Theory : The Multicultural & Classic Readings; Rawat Publication; 

(2nd Ed.)1999. 

John Scott and : Dictionary of Sociology: Oxford University Press; 

Garder Merdull 2009(Revised Ed.) 



PAPER – XXX: SOCIOLOGY OF DEVELOPMENT 

10(608) 


Time- 3 hours 





UNIT-I Development : Concept and indicators; Variants - Economic Development, 

Social Development, Human Development, Sustainable Development; Less 

Developed countries; Stages in Development 

UNIT-II Theories of Development: Modernization, Dependency and World system, 

Globalization-Glocalization; Paths of Development-Capitalistic, Socialistic, 

Gandhian. 

UNIT-III Social Structure and Development: Socio-Cultural impediments to 

Development; Idea of Equal Opportunity and inclusive Development; Break downs 

in Development--Environmental Crises, Inequalities in Development. 

UNIT-IV Agencies, experiences in Development: Role of NGOs, Public Private 

Participation, Foreign Direct Investment (FDI), Development Infrastructure; 

Experiences of Development- India, China, Bangladesh; GDP v/s Equality 

Approach. 


Reference 

Appadurai, Arjun. : Modernity at Large Cultural Dimensions of Globalization. Oxford University 

Press, New Delhi; 1997 

Bernd, Hamns & : Sustainable Development and Future of Cities, 

Pandurang K. Mutagi Intermediate Technology Publication, UNSECO; 1998 

Dereze, Jean and : India: Economic Development and Social Opportunity. OUP, New Delhi; 

Amartya Sen. (1996), 

Desai, A.R. : India’s Path of Development: A Marxist Approach Popular 

Parkashan.Bombay; 1985(Chapter 2). 

Dube, S.C. : Modernization and Development: The Search for Alternative Paradigm, 

Vistaar Publication, New Delhi; (1988), 

Dube, S.C. : Vikas Ka Samajshastra, Vani Parkashan, New Delhi; (2000), 

Giddens, Anthony. : The Consequences of Modernity: Polity Press, Cambridge; (1990), 

Harrison, D. : The Sociology of Modernization and Development. New Delhi: Sage.; 

1989. 

Myrdal, G. : In Shanin, Theodor (Ed.), Peasant and Peasant Societies, Penguin; 1966 

Sharma, SL : Criteria of Social Development, Journal of Social Action. Jan-Mar; 1980 

N. Long : An Introduction to the Sociology of Rural Development, Tavistock 

Publications; London; (1977), 

Sharma, SL : Development: Socio-Cultural Dimensions. Rawat, Jaipur: 1986. 

Srinivas, M.N. : Social Change in Modern India. University of Berkley, Berkley; 

1966. 

Symposium on Implications: Sociological Bulletin. Vol.44; UNDP. Sustainable Development. 

New York: OUP; (1995) 

World Bank. : World Development Report. New York; (1995) 

Kiely, Ray and Phil Marfleet : Globalization and the Third World. Routledge, London. ; 1998. 

Wallerstein Immanue, : The Modern World System. OUP, New York, (1974), 

World Commission on : Our Common Future. . (Brundland Report). 

Environment &Development OUP, New Delhi; (1987), 



Paper-XXXI (Optional) SOCIOLOGY OF HEALTH 

10(609) 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit-I Sociology of Health: Meaning and scope; Dimensions of Human Health; Social 

Perspective on Health and Illness; Self Concept and Health. 

Unit-II Basic Concepts: Health, Disease, Sick role, Health Care, Health Socialization, 

Health Social Movements; Medicalization of Society. 

Unit-III Distributional aspects of Health and Disease: Caste, Class, Gender, Occupational 

Groups, Rural and Urban variations; Life-styles and Diseases. 


Unit-IV Health Care and Health Care System in India: Carrying Capacity of Health 

Institutions; Health Programme in India, Health Insurance; National Rural Health 

Mission; Role of WHO. 

REFERENCES: 

Albert, Gary L. and Fitzpatrick.R. : Quality of Life in Health Care: Advances in Medical 

Sociology:Jai Press, Mumbai; (1994) 

Bloom, S.W. : The Doctor and His Patient: Free Press, New York ;( 1963) 

Conrad, Peter : The Medicalization of Society: On the Transformation of 

Human onditions into Medical Disorders, John Hopkins 

University Press; (2007) 

Dingwal, Robert : Aspects of Illness,: Martin Press, London; (1976) 

Dutt, P.K. : Rural Health Services,: DGHS, New Delhi; (1965) 

Freeman, Howard.E. : Handbook of Medical Sociology, Englewood 

and Sol Levine Cliffs : Prentice-Hall, New-.Jersy ; (1989) 

Hasan, K. :The Cultural Frontiers of Health in Village India: Manakatlas, 

Bombay; (1967) 

Madan, T.N. : Doctors and Society: Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi; 1980 

Mechanic, David : Medical Sociology: A Selective View: Free Press, New-York; 

(1968) 

Government of India. : National Rural Health Mission, 2005 

Oommen, T.K. : Doctors and Nurses: A Study in Occupational Role Structure: 

Macmillan, Delhi; (1978) 

Park, J.R. and K.Park : Text Book of Preventive and Social Medicine:Banarasidass and 

Company Jabalpur; (2000) 

Parson, Talcott : The Social System,: Free Press, Illinois; (1951), 

Tailor, S. Ch. : “Health, Illness and Medicine” pp253-276 in Sociology: Issues 

and Debates Ed. by Taylor Steve; Palgrave, 1999 

Schawatz, H. : Dominant Issues in Medical Sociology, McGraw-Hill, New York; 

(1994) 

Taylor Steve : Sociology: Issues and Debates; Palgrave ; (ed.) (1999), 

M.A. (FINAL), 4 th SEMESTER, SOCIOLOGY 


Paper XXXII (Optional) ENVIRONMENT AND SOCIETY 

10(610) 


Time- 3 hours 





Unit – I Environmental Sociology: Meaning, Sociological Thinking on 

Environment - Karl Marx; Max Weber; Luhman – Social System and Environment 

Unit – II Developmental Issues and Environmental Factors: Technology 

Choice; Factorization; Environmental Consciousness, Dimensions 

of Environmental Degradation, Health Hazards; Food Security. 


Unit – III Environmental Movements in India: International Organizations Intervention, 

Green Peace Movements, Chipco Movement, Narmada Bachao Movement, Ganga 

Bachao Abhiyan. 

Unit –IV Green Policies and Programs: Remedial Strategies- Environmental Acts, 

Displacement and Rehabilitation Policy; Environmental education. 

REFERENCES: 

Albrow, Martin & : Globalization, Knowledge and Society, Sage: London; 

Elizabeth King (Ed.),(1990) 

Agarwal, Anil : “Economy and Environment in India”, in Anil Aggarwal (ed) The 

Price of Forests.: Centre or Science and Environment, New Delhi; 

(1989). 

Baviskar. Amita : In the Valley of the River: Tribal Conflict over Development in the 

Narmada Valley,: OUP, Delhi; (1995), 

Benton, Ted : Natural Relations,: Verso, London; (1993) 

Bhatt, Anil : Development and Social Justice: Micro Action by Weaker Section, 

Sage: New Delhi; (1989) 

Burman, B.K. Roy : Report of Committee on Forest and Tribals in India: Government. 

of India, Ministry of Home Affairs, New Delhi; (1982) 

Chauhan, I.S : Environmental Degradation,: Rawat Publications, Delhi. (1998) 

Desh Bandhu and Garg, R.K. : Social Forestry and Tribal Development, Defraud: Natraj 

Publishers, (eds) (1986) 

Dickens, Peter : Society and Nature: Towards a Green Social Theory, 

Hemel-Hemsteed: Hawester Wheatsheaf.; (1992) 

Dobson. A : Green Political Thought,: Andre Dentsch, London; (1990) 

Fernandes, Walter : Tribals and Forests, New Delhi: Indian Social Institute; (1989) 

Ghai, Dharam : Development and Environment: Sustaining People and 

Nature UNRISD: Blackwell Publication. (ed)(1994) 

Giddens, Anthony : Global Problems and Ecological Crisis”, 2 nd edition: 

W.W. Norton and C, New York; (1996) 

Guha, Ramechandra : The Unquiet Woods: Ecological Change and Peasant 

Resistance in the Himalaya. OUP: Delhi; (1995) 

Katyal, Jimmy and M.Satake : Environmental Pollution: Anmol Publications; (1989) 

Krishna, Sumi : Environmental Politics: People’s lives and Development Choices, 

New Delhi: Sage Publications; (1996) 

Mehta S.R. : Poverty, Population and Sustainable Development, Rawat 

Publications, New Delhi; (ed)(1997) 

Munshi, Indra : “Environment’ in Sociological Theory”, Sociological Bulletin, Vol. 

49 No. 2.; (2000), 

Plumwood, Val : Gender and Ecology: Feminism and Making of Nature,: 

Routledge. London; (1992) 

Shiva, Vandana : Staying Alive: Women, Ecology and the Environment, : Zed 

Books, London; (1988) 

UNDP, Sustainable Development: World commission On Environment and 

Development Our Common Future Brutland Report, OUP: New 

Delhi. ; (1987) 

Wilson, Des : The Environmental Crisis Heinemann, London; (ed) (1984) 

10(611) 


UNDER GRADUATE SYLLABUS OF SOCIOLOGY 

(Semester System Scheme) 

Scheme of Examination (w.e.f.2012-2013 onward) 

Maximum Marks -100 Marks 

Theory -80 Marks 

Internal Assessment - 20 Marks (Division of Marks as given below) 

Two Handwritten Assignments : 10% 

(First Assignment after one month & 

Second Assignment after two months) 

One Class Test : 5% 


Attendance : 5% 


(6) 91 % onwards : 5 Marks 

(7) 81% to 90% : 4Marks 

(8) 75% to 80% : 3Marks 

(9) 70 % to 75% : 2Marks* 

(10) 65 % to 70% : 1Mark* 

* For students engaged in co-curricular activities of 

the colleges only/authenticated medical grounds duly 

approved by the concerned Principal. 

Time: - 3 Hrs. 

Note for paper setter: 

The question paper will consist of four Units, having a set of two questions with internal 

choice within each unit. The candidate will be required to answer one question from each 

unit. However, one compulsory question of short answer type would be set from the entire 

syllabus comprising eight sub-questions of two marks each under 5 th unit. All questions will 


Papers and their nomenclature for Six Semesters degree course 

B.A. 1 st Semester Basic Concepts in Sociology 

B.A. 2 nd Semester Society, Culture and Social Change 

B.A. 3 rd Semester Methods in Social Research 

B.A. 4 th Semester 

Optional Papers * 

i) Indian Society 

ii) Social Problems in India 

iii) Social Change and Development 

* The candidate will have to opt for only one optional paper amongst the 

three papers listed above. 

10(612) 


B.A. 5 th Semester Foundations of Social Thought 

B.A. 6 th Semester 

Optional Papers * 

i) Population Studies 

ii) Society and Environment 

iii) Rural Society: Structure and Change 

* The candidate will have to opt for only one optional paper amongst the 

three papers listed above. 

B.A.I - 1 st Semester 

Basic Concepts in Sociology 


Theory – 80 

Internal Assessment – 20 

Time – 3 hours 

Note: - The Paper setter shall set 8 questions from all four units with internal choice. 

However, one compulsory question of short answer type would be set from the entire syllabus 

comprising eight sub-questions of two marks each under 5 th Unit. Such way, the examinees are 

required to attempt five questions in all, of 16 marks each. 

UNIT – I 

Sociology: Nature, Scope and Significance; Relationship with History, Economics, Political 

Science, Anthropology and Psychology 

UNIT – II 

Basic Concepts: Society, Community, Association, Social Structure, Status & Role, Norms and 

Values 

UNIT – III 

Social Groups & Processes: Definition, Nature and types of Groups- Primary Secondary & 

Reference Group; Processes- Co-operation, Conflict and Accommodation. 

UNIT – IV 

Social Institutions: Marriage, Family, Kinship and Religion; Their Functions and Features 

Readings: 

Ahuja, Ram (2001): Indian Social System, New Delhi: Rawat Publication. 

Ahuja, Ram (2003): Society in India, New Delhi: Rawat Publication. 

Bottomore, T.B. (1972): Sociology: A Guide to Problems and Literature, Bombay: George Allen 

and Unwin (India). 

Fulcher & Scott (2003: Sociology, New York: Oxford University Press. 

Giddens, Anthony (2005): Sociology, Polity Press. 

Harlambos, M. (1998): Sociology: Themes and Perspective, New Delhi: Oxford University Press. 

Harlambos & Holborn (2000): Sociology, London: Harper-Collins. 

Inkeles, Alex (1987): What is Sociology? New Delhi: Prentice-Hall of India. 

Johnson, Harry M. (1995): Sociology: A Systematic Introduction, New Delhi: Allied Publishers. 

MacIver and Page (1974): Society: An Introductory Analysis, New Delhi: Macmillan & co. 

P. Gisbert (2010): Fundamental of Sociology, New Delhi: Orient Blackswan. 

10(613) 


B.A.I - 2 nd Semester 

Society, Culture and Social Change 


Theory – 80 







UNIT – I 

Societies: Types and Characteristics- Tribal, Rural, Urban, Industrial and Post-Industrial. 

UNIT – II 

Culture: Definition and Nature; Types- Material and Non- Material. Socialization: Its importance, 

Process and Stages. Social Control: Its Types and Means. 

UNIT – III 

Processes of Social Change: Characteristic Features of Industrialization, Modernization, 

Globalization and Secularization 

UNIT – IV 

Social Stratification: Concept and Bases; Forms- Caste, Class, Power & Gender 

Readings: 

Bottomore, T.B. (1972): Sociology: A Guide to Problems and Literature, Bombay: George Allen 

and Unwin (India). 

Fulcher & Scott (2003: Sociology, New York: Oxford University Press. 

Giddens, Anthony (2005): Sociology, Polity Press. 

Gordon Marshall (1998): Oxford Dictionary of Sociology, New York: Oxford University Press. 

Harlambos, M. (1998): Sociology: Themes and Perspective, New Delhi: Oxford University Press. 

Harlambos & Holborn (2000): Sociology, London: Harper-Collins. 

Inkeles, Alex (1987): What is Sociology? New Delhi: Prentice-Hall of India. 

Johnson, Harry M. (1995): Sociology: A Systematic Introduction, New Delhi: Allied Publishers. 

Tumin, M.M. (1994): Social Stratification: The Forms and Functions of Inequality, New Delhi: 

PHI, 

Maciver&Page(1974): Society: An introductory Analysis, New Delhi: Macmillan & co. 

Mandelbaum, D.G. (1972): Society in India, Bombay: Popular Prakashan. 

Smelser, Neil J. (1993): Sociology, Prentice Hall of India-Pvt. Ltd. 

Singh Y. 91983): Modernisation of Indian Tradition. Jaipur, Rawat Publications. 

Sharma K.L.(1986): Essays in Social Stratification, Jaipur, Rawat Publications. 

10(614) 


B.A.II- 3rd Semester 

Methods in Social Research 


Theory – 80 







UNIT – I 

Social Research: Definition, Nature and purpose; Steps in Social Research; Problem of Objectivity 

and Subjectivity in Social Research 

UNIT – II 

Research Method: Research Designs; Social Survey; Hypothesis- Types & significance; 

Sampling and Sampling Procedure 

UNIT – III 

Techniques of Data Collection: Types of Data; Techniques- Observation, Interview, 

Questionnaire, Schedule and Case Study 

UNIT – IV 

Statistical Analysis and Use of Computer in Social Research: Classification and Tabulation of 

data; Measures of Central Tendency: Mean, Median and Mode; Use of Computers in Social 

Research. 

Readings: 

Ahuja, Ram (2001): Research Methods, New Delhi: Rawat Publication. 

Goode, W.J. and P.K.Hatt (1952): Methods in Social Research, New York: McGraw 

International. 

Seltiz, Claise et al; (1959): Research Methods in Social Relation, New York: Henry Holt and Co. 

Srivastava, Prakash G.N. (1994): Advances Research Methodology, Delhi: Radha Publication. 

Thakur, Devender (2003): Research Methodology in Social Science, Delhi: Deep and Deep 

Publication. 

Young, P.V. (1988): Scientific Social Survey and Research, New Delhi Prentice Hall. 

B.A.II - 4 th Semester 

Indian Society 

(Optional-I) 


Theory – 80 







10(615) 


UNIT – I 

Evolution of Indian Society: Traditional bases of Indian Society; Unity and Diversity in India; 

India as a Pluralistic Society. 

UNIT – II 

Indian Social Institutions: Kinship, Family, Marriage; Caste and its Changing Dimensions. 

UNIT – III 

Processes of Social Change in India: Sanskritization, Westernization, Parochiatization and 

Universatization 

UNIT – IV 

Social Issues and Problems: Gender Discrimination, Secularism and Religious Minorities, 

Problems of Dalits Women and OBC and Affirmative Actions 

Readings: 

Ahuja, Ram (1997): Society in India: Concept, Theories and Recent Trends, Jaipur: Rawat 

Publication. 

Beteille, Andre (1992): Backward Classes in Contemporary India, New Delhi: OUP. 

Dube, S.C.(1991): Indian Society, New Delhi : National Book Trust. 

Ghurye, G.S. (1968): Social Tension, Bombay: Popular Prakashan. 

Karve, Iravati (1961): Hindu Society: An Interpretation, Pune: Daccan College. 

Mandelbaum, D.G. (1970): Society in India, Bombay: Popular Prakashan. 

Sharma K.L.(ed.) (1994): Caste and Class, Jaipur, Rawat Publication. 

Srinivas, M.N.(1980): India’s : Social Structure, New Delhi : Hindustan Publication. 

Srinivas, M.N.(1985): Social Change in Modern India, New Delhi : Orient Longman. 

India: 2010 Govt. of India, New Delhi, Govt. of India publication division. 


Social Problems in India (Optional-II) 


Theory – 80 







UNIT – I 

Social Problem: Meaning and Definition; Importance of the Study of Social Problems; 

Sociological Perspectives on Social Problem-Anomie (Durkheim), Diffential Association 

(Sutherland), Labeling (Becker). 

UNIT – II 

Structural Issues: Inequality of Caste, Class Gender and Ethnicity; Communalism; Problems of 

Minorities. 

10(616) 


UNIT – III 

Problems and Issues: Female Foeticide, Dowry, Domestic Violence, Divorce; Problems of Aged. 

UNIT – IV 

Social Disorganization: Crime and Juvenile Delinquency, Corruption, Drug Addiction, Suicide, 

Prostitution and AIDS 

Readings: 

Ahuja, Ram (2000): Social Problems in India, New Delhi: Rawat Publications. 

Beteille, Andre (1992): Backward Classes in Contemporary India, New Delhi: OUP 

Beteille, Andre (1974): Social Inequality, New Delhi: OUP 

Bereman, G.D. (1979): Caste and Other Inequalities: Essay in Inequality, Meerut: Folklore 

Institut. 

Dube, Leela (1997): Women and Kinship, Comparative Perspectives on Gender in South and 

Southeast Asia, New Delhi: Sage Publication. 

Desai, Neera & Usha Thakkar (2007): Women in Indian Society, National Book Trust, India. 

Gadgil, Madhav and Ramchandra Guha (1996): Ecology and Equality: The use and Abuse of 

Nature in Contemporary India, New Delhi: OUP. 

Gill, S.S. (1998): The Pathology of Corruption, New Delhi: Harper Collin Publishers. 

Lewis, Oscar (1966): Culture of Poverty “Scientific American” Vol-II and V No.IV PP-19-25. 

Satya Murty, T.V. (1996): Region, Religion, Caste, Gender and Culture in Contemporary 

India, New Delhi: OUP. 


Social Change and Development 

(Optional-III) 


Theory – 80 







Unit – 1 

Social Change: Concept, Forms and Factors; Concept and Features of Development. 

Unit – II 

Theories of Social Change: Linear (Spencer), Cyclical (Pareto), Fluctuation (Sorokin); Conflict 

Theory (Marx) 

Unit – III 

Social Change in Contemporary India: Trends and Processes of Change – Sanskritisation, 

Westernisation, Modernisation and Secularisation 

Unit – IV 

Development Programmes in India: Development Programme in India; The Five Year Plans, 

Community Development Programme, , Panchayat Raj; Impact of new Panchayati Raj on Women 

Empowerment 

10(617) 


Readings: 

Appadurai, Arjun.(1997), Modernity At Large: Cultural Dimensions of Globalization. New Delhi: 

OUP 

Bernd, Hamns & Pandurang K. Mutagi (1998), Sustainable Development and Future of Cities, 

Intermediate Technology Publication, UNSECO 

Dereze, Jean and Amartya Sen.(1996), India: Economic Development and Social Opportunity. New 

Delhi:OUP. 

Desai, A.R. (1985), India’s Path of Development: A Marxist Approach. Bombay: Popular 

Parkashan.(Chapter2). 

Dube, S.C. (1988), Modernization and Development: The Search for Alternative Paradigm, Vistaar 

Publication, New Delhi. 

Dube, S.C. (2000), Vikas Ka Samajshastra, Vani Parkashan, New Delhi. 

Giddens, Anthony.(1990), The Consequences of Modernity. Cambridge: Polity Press. 

Magdoff, Harry (2002), Imperialism and Globalisation, Cornerstone Publications, Kharagpur. 

Myrdal, G. (1966), in Shanin, Theodor (Ed.), Peasant and Peasant Societies, Penguin. 

Moor, Wilbert and Robert Cook. (1967), Social Change. New Delhi: Prentice-Hall (India) 

N.Long (1977), An Introduction to the Sociology of Rural Development, Tavistock 

Publications;London 

Sharma, SL(1986), Development: Socio-Cultural Dimensions. Jaipur: Rawat.(Chapter1). 

Srinivas, M.N. (1966), Social Change in Modern India. Berkley: University of Berkley. 

S.C. Dube (1998): Modernization and Development, New Delhi: VistaarPublishers. 

B.A. III– 5th Semester 

Foundations of Social Thought 


Theory – 80 







UNIT – I 

Positivism: Comte’s Law of three stages, Social Static & Dynamics, Evolutionism- Spencer’s 

Evolutionary Approach 

UNIT – II 

Functionalism: Durkheims’ Concept of Social Fact, Division of labour in Society; Radcliffe 

Brown’s Structural-Functional Approach 

UNIT – III 

Conflict: Marx’s concept of Dialectical Historical Materialism, Class & Class Conflict; Coser’s 

Approach to Social Conflict 

UNIT – IV 

Interactionalism: Weber’s Interpretative Sociology; Types of Social Action; G.H.Mead’s Concept 

of Self & Society 

10(618) 


Readings: 

Atal, Yogesh (2003): Sociology: From where to where, Jaipur: Rawat Publication. 

Barnes, H.E. (1959): Introduction to the history of Sociology, Chicago Uni. Press. 

Bose, N.K.: Structure of Hindu Society, New Delhi. 

Coser, Lewis, A. (1979): Master of Sociological Thought, Harcourt Brake, Jovanovich. 

Dube, S.C.(1990): Society in India, New Delhi: National Book Trust. 

Dumont, Luis (1970): Homohierarchichus: The caste System and its Implications, New Delhi: 

Vikas Publication. 

Fletcher, Ronald (1994): The Making of Sociology (Two Volumes), Jaipur: Rawat Publication 

Ghurye, G.S.(1969): Caste and Races in India, Bombay: Popular Prakashan. 

Johnson, H.M.( 1995) : Sociology: A Systematic Introduction, New Delhi: Allied Publishers. 

Prabhu, P.H. ( 1963): Hindu Social Organistion, Bombay: Popular Parkashan. 

Singh, Yogendra (1986): Indian Sociology: Social conditioning and emerging trends, 

New Delhi: Vistaar Publication. 

B.A.III 6 th Semester 

Population Studies 

(Optional-I) 


Theory – 80 







UNIT – I 

Population Studies: Meaning, Scope and Significance; Demographic Processes: Fertility, 

Mortality and Migration 

UNIT – II 

Population Theories: Malthusian, Demographic Transition and Optimum Population Theory 

UNIT – III 

Population Composition in India: Age Structure, Sex-Ratio, Rural-Urban Composition, Literacy 

in India 

UNIT – IV 

Population Planning and Control: Needs and Objectives; Population Policy of India, National 

Rural Health Mission 

Readings: 

Agarwal, S.N. (1989): Population Studies with Special Reference to India, New Delhi: Lok 

Surjeet Publication. 

Bose, Ashish (1991): Demographic Diversity in India, Delhi: B.R.Publishing Corporation. 

Banarjee, D. (1985): Health and Family Planning Services in India, New Delhi: Lok Parkshan. 

Chandrasekhar, S. (ed.) (1974): Infant Mortality, Population Growth and Family Planning in 

India, London: George Alen and Unwin Ltd. 

10(619) 


Dubey, Surendra Nath (2001): Population of India, Delhi: Authors Press. 

Kohli, S. (1977): Family Planning in India, New Delhi. 

Malthus, T.R. (1986): An Essay on the Principle of Population, London: William Pickering. 

Premi, M.K. (2004): Social Demography, Delhi: Jawahar Publishers and Distributors. 

Sharma, Rajendra (1997): Demography and Population Problems, New Delhi: Atlantic 

Publishers. 

Srivastava, O.S. (1998): Demography and Population Studies, New Delhi: Vikas Publishing 

House. 

National Rural Health Mission (2006), Govt. of India, New Delhi. 

B.A.III – 6th Semester 

Environment and Society 

(Optional-II) 


Theory – 80 







UNIT – I 

Environment and its Concepts: Ecology, Eco-system, Environment and Society – their interrelations; 

Eco-Feminism 

UNIT – II 

Environmental Issues: Sustainable Development, Industrialization and Development, 

Urbanization and Development, Environmental Degradation 

UNIT – III 

Environment and Development: Global Efforts for Resource Conservation, Environmental 

Movements: Chipko Movement, Narmada Bachao Andolan, Ganga Bachao Abhyan; Forest Rights. 

UNIT – IV 

Contemporary Environmental Problems: Problems of Water, Deforestation, Urban Wastes, 

Slums, Global-Warming and Climate Change. 

Readings: 

Albrow, Martin & Elizabeth King (Ed.), (1990), Globalisation, Knowledge and Society, Sage: 

London 

Baviskar. Amita (1995), In the Valley of the River: Tribal Conflict over Development in the 

Narmada Valley, Delhi: OUP. 

Bhatt, Anil (1989) Development and Social Justice: Micro Action by Weaker Section, Sage: New 

Delhi. 

Chauhan, I.S (1998), Environmental Degradation, Delhi: Rawat Publications. 

Desh Bandhu and Garg, R.K.(eds) 91986), Social Forestry and Tribal Development, Dehradun: 

Natraj Publishers. 

Dubey, S.M. and Murdia, Ratno(ed)91980), Land Alienation and Restoration in Tribal 

Communities in India, Bombay: Himalaya Publishing House. 

Gadgil, Madhav & Ram Chandra. Guha (1996), Ecology and Equity: The use and Abuse of Nature 

in contemporary India:: New Delhi: OUP. 

10(620) 


Ghai, Dharam (ed) (1994), Development and Environment: Sustaining People and Nature. 

UNRISD: Blackwell Publication. 

Giddens, Anthony (1996), “Global Problems and Ecological Crisis”, 2 nd edition New 

York:W.W.Norton and Co. 

Huha, Ramechandra (1995), The Unquiet Woods: Ecological Change and Peasant Resistance in the 

Himalaya, OUP: Delhi. 

Mehta S.R. (ed)(1997), Poverty, Population and Sustainable Development, New Delhi: Rawat 

Publications. Plumwood, Val (1992), Gender and Ecology: Feminism and Making of Nature, 

London: Routledge. 

B.A.III – 6th Semester 

Rural Society: Structure and Change 

(Optional-III) Maximum Marks – 100 

Theory – 80 







UNIT – I 

Introduction to Rural Sociology: Origin, Nature, Subject Matter and Importance. 

UNIT – II 

Rural Social Structure: Caste and Class in Rural Set Up, Inter Caste Relation with reference to 

Jajmani System; Rural Family and Changing pattern 

UNIT – III 

Rural Economy: Land Tenure System, Land Reforms; Green Revolution and Its Impact; Bonded 

and Migrant Labourers; Major Changes in Rural Society. 

UNIT – IV 

Rural Political Structure: Traditional Caste and Village Panchayats; Panchayati Raj before and 

after 73 rd Constitutional Amendment, Panchayati Raj and Empowerment of Women 

Readings: 

Desai, A.R. (1996): Rural Sociology in India, Bombay: Popular Prakashan. 

Desai, A.R. (1979): Rural India in Transition, Bombay: Popular Prakashan. 

Dube, S.C. (1988): India’s changing Village: Human Factor in Community Development, 

Bombay: Himalayan Publishing House. 

Maheshwari, S.R. (1985): Rural Development In India, New Delhi: Sage Publication. 

Pradhan, P.K. (1988): Land, Labour and Rural Poverty, Bombay: Himalayan Publishing House Ltd. 

Ranbir, D.T.(1966) : Bharat Mein Jati aur Varg, Bombay: Popular Prakashan. 

Vidyarthi, L.P.(1967): Leadership in India, Bombay: Asia Publishing House. 

Razvi, Shahra (2003): Agrarian Change, Gender and Land Rights (Ed): Blackwell. 

Vivek, R.& Bhattacharya (1885) : The New Strategies of Development in Village India, 

Metropolitan 

Govt. of India (2010): India Year Book 2010: Publication Division, Govt. of India 

10(621) 


Scheme of Examination for M.A. (Social Work) Effective from Academic Session 2012-13 

Semester-I 

Semester-II 

Paper-I Society and Social Problems 

Paper-II Human Growth and Development-I 

Paper-III Social Work Profession: Philosophy and Concepts 

Paper-IV Social Case Work-I 

Paper-V Social Group Work-I 

Paper-VI Community Organization and Social Action-I 

Paper-VII Field Work Practicum 


Paper-I Social Justice and Social Legislation 

Paper-II Human Growth and Development-II 

Paper-III Health Care: Needs and Services 

Paper-IV Social Case work-II 

Paper-V Social Group Work-II 

Paper-VI Community Organization and Social Action-II 


10(622) 


Theory Paper: 80 

*Internal assessment :20 

Time: 3 Hours 

Study tour: 50 

Internal Viva-Voce : 50 



*Internal assessment : 20 

Time: 3 Hours 


External Viva-Voce: 150 

Summer Placement: 50 

(Project Work) 


Semester-III 

OR 

OR 

OR 

Paper-I Social Policy and Planning 

Paper-II Administration of Welfare Services-I 

Paper-III Social Work Research 

Paper-IV Mental Health, Care and Services 

Paper-V Environmental Imbalances & Disaster Management 

Paper-VI Elective/ Specialization 

10(623) 


Theory Paper :80 


Time: 3 Hours 

I. Human Resource Management, Industrial Relations and Labour Welfare 

a. Human Resource Management and Industrial Relations- I 

b. Labour Welfare and Labour legislations- I 

II. Family and Child welfare. 

a. Family Dynamics: Issues & Needs-I 

b. Developmental Services for Child and Women-I 

OR 

III. Medical and Psychiatric Social Work 

a. Policy and Development of Health Care-I 

b. Psycho-social Perspectives on Mental Health-I 

VI. Community Development 

a. Rural Community Development: Policies and Programmes-I 

b. Urban Community Development: Policies and Programmes-I 

V. Criminology and Correctional Administration 

a. Crime and Criminal Justice-I 

b. Institutional Services & Rehabilitation of Criminals-I 


Semester-IV 

OR 

OR 

OR 

OR 



Paper-1 Dynamics of Social Development 

Paper-II Administration of Welfare Services - II 

Paper-III Statistical Methods in Social Work Research 

Paper-IV Drug Abuse and Counselling 

Paper-V Services for Aged and Disabled 

Paper-VI Elective/ Specialization 

10(624) 

Seminar : 50 

Internal Viva-Voce : 50 


Theory Paper :80 


Time: 3 Hours 

I. Human Resource Management, Industrial Relations and Labour 

Welfare 

a. Human Resource Management and Industrial Relations - II 

b. Labour Welfare and Labour Legislations-II 

II. Family and Child welfare. 

a. Family Dynamics: Issues & Needs-II 

b. Developmental Services for Child and Women-II 

III. Medical and Psychiatric Social Work 

a. Policy and Development of Health Care-II 

b. Psycho-social Perspectives on Mental Health-II 

VI. Community Development 

a. Rural Community Development: Polices and Programmes-II 

b. Urban Community Development: Policies and Programmes-II 

V. Criminology & Correctional Administration 


a. Crime and Criminal justice-II 

b. Institutional Services & Rehabilitation of Criminals-II 



10(625) 

External Viva-Voce: 150 

Block Field Work-50 

(Project Work) 

* In every Semester Internal Assessment will consist of two hand written assignments (10 

marks), Class Test (5 marks) & Class Attendance (5 marks). The marks for attendance will 

be given as per the following criteria:- 


(2) 81% to 90% : 4 Marks 

(3) 75% to 80% : 3 Marks 

(4) 70% to 75% : 2 Marks 

(5) 65% to 70% : 1 Mark 

FIELD WORK PRACTICUM 

Field Work Practicum is closely supervised educational internship in a Social work setting 

that provides planned opportunities to apply theory taught in classrooms to Field Situations, which 

in-turn, enhance classroom learning. 

‘Knowing’ does not automatically result in the ability of 'doing' so necessary for 

professional development therefore, a distinctive feature of the instructional programmes at the 

department is the emphasis laid on field work as an integral part of the total curriculum. Field Work 

enables the student to integrate and reinforce the knowledge acquired in the classroom with actual 

practice under competent supervision provided by field work supervisors in the department as well 

as in the field work agency. The content of field work is planned to provide an orderly sequence of 

learning. 

General Objectives of Field Work Practicum 

The Field Work Programme has been designed to achieve the following objectives. 

1 To develop among students, the ability to integrate theoretical learning with practice 

experience. 

2 To enable students to develop core skills of Social Work practice. 

3 To facilitate the development of thinking feelings and attitudes relevant to professional 

practice. 

4 To help students understand the socio-economic. Cultural and political milieu and develop 

capacity for critical examination of positive and maintenance factors of social problems and 

their consequences. 


5 To provide students with an opportunity to apply theories in practical situations for problem 

solving with individuals, groups and community. 

6 To help students identify, plan and implement social work instruments and to assess their 

impact on different client system in various agency settings. 

7 To help students appreciate the role of social work profession in empowering 

individuals, groups and communities and in facilitating social change. 

8 To help students to develop skills and appropriate personality required for professional 

social work practice. 

9 To provide opportunities to accept challenges and respond to then. 

10 Development of critical self-awareness about one's attributes values and sensitivities with 

reference to ideologies of social justice and critical requirements of social work profession 

through experience. 

Field work Objectives for 1 st and 2 nd Semesters 

The emphasis is on-learning skills which revolve around specific tasks where cause-effect 

relationships are understood, where the persons have problems but they are more victims of their 

life circumstances rattier than of pathology for which great knowledge of psychological and social 

dynamics would be required and lower order of skills of intervention is required to be utilized. 

The processes dealt with at the individual, group or community are specific. Show dynamics 

but do not require unusual skills of intervention. 

Administrative tasks are also specific, e.g. planning and programming around a specific 

service. The specific objectives of field-work in the 1 st year of the course (I & 11 Semesters) may 

include: 

1. Development of the knowledge of: 

(a) Socio-economic background and the liv ing condition of tire vulnerable groups and 

the problems confronting them. 

(b) Problem-solving techniques utilized in the specific area of work of the organization 

where student is placed. 

(e) The use of simple research procedures and maintenance of scientific data to assess 

problems/needs/agency. 

2. Development of skills in : 

(a) Work with individuals, families, groups and communities and seeing the need for an 

integrated approach to problem solving. 

(b) Selecting and utilization of community resources. 

10(626) 


(c) Work as a member of a team with other professional anti own discipline to, plan, 

organise and implement projects, programmes with emphasis cm the use of the 

process in problem-assessment and problem solving; and 

3. Development of professional attitudes, conducive to work with individual families 

groups and communities, leading gradually to an awareness of self as a professional 

person. 

Efforts will be made to work out objectives in each semester for every student in 

field-practicum according to the nature and services of the agency and his 

performance will be evaluated accordingly. 

Field Work Objectives for 3 rd and 4 th Semesters 

1. Development of knowledge of: 

(a) Complexity/pathological patterns of behaviour among individuals, families, groups 

and communities. 

(b) The interaction of the micro and macro systems and their effect on vulnerable 

groups systemic factors in problem identification and assessment. 

(c) Social policy, planning, social change as major factors in shift of the locus 

from the remedial to development work with such groups. 

2. Development of skills to: 

(a) Critically analyze and evaluate problems/needs of individuals, families, groups 

and communities in the context of the micro and macro systems so as to : 

(i) use of an integrated approach in problem solving. 

(ii) mobilize individuals/groups for development work, 

(iii) enhance functioning of the change agent system to initiate new services and 

participate in the planning and policy making process of the organization where 

the students are placed for field-work. 

(iv) use leadership in the interdisciplinary team and adequately interpret and social 

worker's role. 

(b) Supervise, staff and volunteers in the agency. 

(c) Work as a member of research team/initiate agency based small studies for 

assessment of problem/ need/delivery of services. 

(d) Initiate projects/programmes in the agency and give leadership to others in 

implementation. 

10(627) 


3. Development of professional attitudes, conducive to work with individuals, 

families, groups and communities, leading gradually to an awareness of self as a 

professional person. 

4. Develop identification with self as a professional working with maturity and 

understanding with people having different value orientations and sell as an 

agency of change. 

Efforts will be made to work out objectives in each semester for every student in field- 

practicum according to the nature and services of the agency and his performance will be 

evaluated accordingly. 

Components of Field work 

Concurrent Field work 

The supervised field work will be of 16 hrs per week, (twice a week, 8 hours per day) for 15 

weeks in each semester i.e. 30 days in each semester. Attendance in all the days of field work is 

must for every student. 

The performance of student is discussed with his/her supervisor weekly on the basis of 

his/her weekly fieldwork reports and is evaluated at the end of each semester. As a professional 

institution, the department attaches great importance to field work which is expected to develop, in 

the students, a sense of proper work habits and responsibility. Except on the grounds of sickness, 

certified by the competent Doctor and countersigned by the RMO, University Health Centre, 

Kurukshetra University, Kurukshetra, absence from field work is not allowed. 

In addition to concurrent field work, students will attend the following field programmes as 

integral part of their field practicum for which they will be assessed. 

(i) Study Tour: Study tour of ten days duration will be organized in the 1 s t semester for 50 

marks which will be awarded to the students by the respective teachers on the basis of their 

performance, organizing abilities, participation in agency discussions, responsibilities 

shared and behaviour during study tour. 

(ii) Summer Placement (Project Work): The students of 2 nd semester will be required to 

undergo Summer Placement of 14 working days, after they have appeared in their theory 

examination. During the Summer Placement the student placed will work in 

organization/agency of his/her choice and will perform the functions duly assigned by the 

Organization/Agency. The students will prepare his daily report, which will be required to 

submit at the time of internal evaluation. The In-charge of the Organization/Agency will be 

requested to send a Confidential Report of the quality of work and conduct of the student to 

10(628) 


the Chairman. This report will also be considered by the teachers of the department while 

evaluation done at the time of Internal Evaluation. The performance of the students will be 

judged by all the teachers of the department by holding Internal Viva-Voce examination. 

The average of marks awarded by each teacher separately out of total 50 marks earmarked 

for it will form the final score obtained by the students in Summer Placement. 

(iii) Seminar : All the students of 3 rd semester will have to prepare class seminar on the basis of 

their theory/fieldwork experiences, given by their respective supervisors. The same has to 

be presented in the class by the students during the tenure of 3 rd semester. The respective 

supervisors will evaluate the performance of the students on the basis of content and 

presentation of the assignment and award marks to the students under his/her supervision 

out of 50 marks. 

(iv) Block Field Work: After satisfactory completion of concurrent field-work during the two 

academic years and after the final university examination of 4 th Semester, every student will 

be placed by the Department for block field-work for a period of 8 weeks for full time work 

in an agency outside, Kurukshetra. The Department selects these agencies from amongst a 

large number spread all over the country, keeping in mind the availability and learning 

opportunities for the students. All expenses in this connection have to be borne by the 

students themselves. The students going for block field-work will have to make their own 

arrangements for boarding and lodging. The Department has no responsibility in this regard. 

The purpose of Block Field-Work is to broaden the student's perspective of welfare services 

and provide pre-employment work experience, which should facilitate him to assume 

professional responsibilities upon graduation. A student will not be eligible for the 

degree unless he completes the block field-work successfully up to the satisfaction of the 

Head of the Department. On the basis of Block Field Work report, observations of 

block agency supervisor and viva-voce by all the teachers, students will be given marks out 

of 50. Average marks given by all the teachers will be the final marks for Block placement. 

10(629) 


Semester -1 

Paper –1 Society and Social Problems 

10(630) 

Max. Marks. : 100 

Theory : 80 


Time- 3 Hours 

Unit-I 

- Basic sociological concepts: Society- Meaning, definition and types 

( Tribal, Agrarian, Industrial and Post Industrial), structure and features; Association; 

Institution; Organization; social organization and social disorganization. 

- Social institutions- family, marriage: their functioning and impact on life of 

individuals. 

- Social Processes- associative and dissociative. 

Unit- II 

- Social system: concept, meaning, characteristics, elements and classification. 

- Social stratification: caste and class- meaning and nature of social class, 

development of class, meaning and nature of caste, difference between caste and class. 

- Origin of the caste system, merits and demerits of caste system and modern trends of caste 

system in India. 

Unit- III 

- Culture and Civilization –meaning, definition, elements and functions of culture, difference 

between culture and civilization. 

- Cultural change and Acculturation. 

- Social Change- meaning, nature, causes and theories. 

- Social control- meaning, need and means of social control. 

Unit- IV 

- Social Problems- concept, methods of study, various approaches, causations. 

- Major social problems such as poverty, crime and violence, corruption, communal tension- 

causes, extent, effect and role of social worker. 

- Current social problems- terrorism, regionalism, child abuse and trafficking, drug addiction 

and alcoholism- meaning, definition, causes, effects and role of social worker. 

Note. 

� The examiner shall set 9 questions in all. 

� Candidate shall be required to attempt five questions. 

� Question No. 1 shall be compulsory, consisting of 5 short answer type questions spread 

over the whole syllabus, to be answered with in 100 words. Each question carry 4 

marks (5X4=20 marks). 

� Candidates are required to attempt other 4 long answer type questions, by selecting one 

from each of the four units. Each unit shall have two questions of 15 marks each. 

(4X15=60 Marks) 

List of Readings: 

1. Bhushan, V. & Sachdeva, D.R., 2006. An Introduction to Sociology, Allahabad: Kitab 

Mahal. 


2. Desai, A.R.1986. Agrarian Struggles in India after Independence, 

Oxford University Press Delhi. 

3. Harlambos, M. 1981. Sociology: Themes & Perspectives Delhi. Oxford 

University press. 

4. Horton and Leslie, 1981. The Sociology of School Problems, Prentice Hall, 

New Jersey. 

5. Johnson, H.M. 1978. Sociology: A Systematic Introduction Allied 

Publishers. 

6. Kinch, John, W. Social Problems in the World Today, Addison-Wesley 

Pub. Co. California, London. 

7. Leonard, Peter 1966. Sociology in Social Work, London Rout ledge & 

Kegan Paul. 

8. Lund Berg, G.A., Clarend, C.S. Sociology, Harper and Row Publishers, New York. 

9. Maclver, R.M. & Page C.H. 1985. Society: An introductory Analysis, Madras Macmillan 

Co. of India Ltd. 

10. Madan, G.R. 1994. Indian Social Problems, VOl. I and Vol. II Allied Pub. 

Pvt. Ltc., New Delhi. 

11. Mandel Baum, D.G.1970. Society in India, Vol. 1 Continuity and Change: 

Change & Continuity vol. 3 Mumbai: Popular 

Prakashan. 

12. Mandel Baum, D.G. 1970. Society in India (Vol. 1), Popular Prakashan Bombay. 

13. Merton, R.K. & Nisbet, R. 1976. Contemporary Social Problems, Harper and Row, 

Publishers, New York. 

14. Poplin, D.E. 1978. Social Problems, Scott Foreman & Company, Illiones. 

15. Parsad, B.K., 2004 Social Problems in India, Anmol Publications, New 

Delhi. 

16. Ram Ahuja, 1999. Society in India, Rawat Publications, Jaipur. 

17. Sharma, R.N. Social Disorganisation and social Problem, Rajhans 

Parkashan Mandir. Meerut. 

18. Singh, Yogendra 1988. Modernization of Indian tradition, Delhi Thomson 

Press. 

19. Srinivas, M.N. 1966. Social Change in Modern India, Mumbai: Allied 

Publishers. 

20. Wallance, W.I., 1969. Sociological Theory, London, Illienemann. 

Semester-I 

Paper –II : Human Growth and Development – I 

10(631) 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

Unit- I 

- Human growth and development: concept, principles. 

- Biological and social influences (heredity and environment) on human growth and 

behaviour, fulfillment of basic human needs and behaviour. 

- Dimensions of development- physical, motor, cognitive, emotional, social and moral. 

- Communication: concept, principles, process, elements and types. 


- Conditions for effective communication. Developing communication skills and effective 

use of feedback. 

Unit-II 

- Understanding of human life span – Indian concept of life span (Brahmcharya, grihastha 

vanprastha and sanyas). 

- Human Psycho-social development ( Erikson and Freud) 

- Socialization- concept and factors, role of family, peer group, neighborhood, school, 

religion and social values in socialization. 

- Perception: nature, perceptual organization/ integration, role of experience in perception and 

perceptual change. 

Unit- III 

- Stages of development: characteristics, needs, problems, and tasks during 

developmental stages of infancy, 

babyhood, child hood (early & late), puberty and adolescence, adult hood (early, middle & late) 

and old age, relevance of social work practice during each stages of development. 

Unit- IV 

- Male and female reproductive systems. Prenatal development and anti-natal care. Necessary 

precautions such as medical, nutritional, emotional during parental period and preparations for 

anti-natal care. 

Note. 

- Creativity and creative learning and its use in social work practice. 

- Social adjustment: concept and factors. 








(4X15=60 Marks) 


1. Anastasi, A., 1987. Psychological Testing, New York MachMillan, 

Revised Edition. 

2.Camron, N. 1969. Personality Development and Psycho-pathology, 

Mumbai : Vakil Reffer and Simmons Pvt. Ltd. 

3. Carstairs, G.M. 1978. Change in Indian Village Societies and their Impact on 

child Development : Personal Perspective, In Anthny. 

E.J. and Collette. C (eds) The Child in His Family 

Wiley. 

4. Crow. L.D.1957. Abnormal Psychology and Modern life, Mumbai : 

D.B. Taraporevala Sons and Co. 

5. Crow. L.D. 1957 Psychology of Human Adjustment, New York: 

McGraw Hill Books Co. Inc. 

10(632) 


6. English. O.S. and Pearson. G.J. 1952 Emotional Problems of of Living,London: Allen and 

Unwin. 

7. Erikson, E.H. 1963. Childhood and Society, New York W.W. Norton and 

Co. 

8. Frank s. Freeman, 1965. Theory and Practice of Psychological testing. Oxford 

& IBH Publishing Co., New Delhi. 

9. Gore, M.S., 1978. Changes in the Family and the Process of 

Socialization in India. Mumbai : Popular Prakashan. 

10. Hall. C.S. and Lindzey, G. 1989. Theories of Personality, New York John wiley and 

Sons Inc. 

11. Hurlock, E.B. 1981. Developmental Psychology: a lifespan Approach, 

Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

12. Hurlock E.B., 1992. Child Growth and Development, Tata McGraw Hill, 

New Delhi. 

13. Hurlock E.B., 1992 Personality Development, McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

14. Krech D., Crutchfield R.S. and Individual in Society, New York, McGraw Ballachey, 1962 Hill. 

15. Krech, D. and Crutchfield. R.S. 1948. Theory and Problems of social Psychology, New 

York: McGraw Hill. 

16. Kuppuswamy, B., 1980. An Introduction to Social Psychology, Mumbai: 

Media Promoters and Pub. Pvt. Ltd. 

17. Lindgren. H.C. and Byrne. D., 1971. Psychology: An Introduction to a behavioural Science, 

New York: McGraw Hill Book Co. 

18. Robert A. Baron, 2003. Social Psychology, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. 

19. Sanrouck, john W.2007. A Topical Approach to life- Span Development. Tata 


20. Sherff, M., and Shieririff, C.W. 1969. Inter Social Psychology, New York: Harper and Row. 

21. Thompson, G.G. 1962. Child Psychology-Growth Trends in Psychological 

Adjustment, Mumbai: The Times of India Press. 

22. Weiner, E.A. and Stewart. B.J., 1984. Assessing Individuals: Psychological and Educational 

Tests and Educational Test and Measurement, Boston: 

Little, Brown and Co. 

23. William Flexner, 2004. Educational Psychology and Mental Health, Sarup 


24. Young. K., 1957. Handbook of Social Pathology London: 

Routledge & Kegan Paul. 

10(633) 


Semester- I 

Paper- III: Social Work Profession, Philosophy and Concepts 

10(634) 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

Unit- I 

- Nature, concept and philosophy of social work, scope of social work. 

- Relationship of social work with other social sciences. 

- Social work and related concepts- social reform, social welfare, social development, social 

service, social services, social revolution and social security. 

Unit- II 

- Social work: basic values, goals and principles. 

- Methods of social work. 

- Gandhian Social Work, Sarvodaya and Antyodaya. 

- Social Work in the changing scenario of Globalization and Liberalization. 

- Preventive, curative, rehabilitative and developmental roles of social work profession. 

Unit- III 

- History of social work in U.K, U.S.A and India. 

- Development of social work from charity to radical social work. 

- Definition of social work from Human Rights perspective. 

- Problems in practice of social work in India. 

- Social work education and present social environment. 

Unit- IV 

- Social work as a profession: characteristics and code of ethics of social work. 

- Professional organization at national and international level: their structure, functions and 

importance. 

- Field- practicum in social work; philosophy and objectives. 

Note : 








(4X15=60 Marks) 


1. Brenda Dubois and Kalra Social-Work an Empowering Profession, Keogsrud Miley-(2002). 

2. Bradford W. sheafor and Charles Techniques and Guidelines for Social Work R. Horejsi, 

2006Practice, Allyn and Bacon, London. 

3. Bogo, Mario, 2006 Social Work Practice:Concepts, Processes and Interviewing.Columbia 

University press., Indian Reprint Rawat Publications, New Delhi. 


4. Clack, G. & Asquith, S (1985) Social Work and social Philosphy, Routledge & 

Kogan Paul, London. 

5. Dasgupta, S Ed. (1967): Towards a Philosophy of Social Works in India, New 

Delhi, Popular Book Service. 

6. Desai, Murli,2006. Ideologies and social Work: Historical and 

Contemporary analyses, Rawat Publication, New 

Delhi. 

7. Encyclopaedia of Social Work, Vol, 2&3. Ministry of Welfare, New Delhi. 

8. Friedlander, W.A. (1958) Concepts and Methods of Social Work, Englewood 

Cliffs: Prentice-Hall. 

9. Ganguli, B.N. (1973) Gandhi’s Social Philosophy, Delhi: Vikas Publishing 

House. 

10. Gold Begg EM (1979). Ends and Means in Social Work, Allen and Unwin, 

London. 

11. Gokhale, S.D. (1975) Social Welfare-Legend & Legacy, Popular Prakshan, 

Bombay. 

12. Gore M.S. (1965) Social Work and Social Work Education Asia 

Publishing House, Bombay. 

13. Hugh, England (1986) Social Work as Act: Making Sense For Good Practice, 

Allien and Unwin, Poston. 

14. Joseph, J & Gracy, Farnandes(Ed), 2006 An Enquiry into Ethical Dilamas in Social Work. 

Research Unit, Nirmala Nikatan, Mumbai. 

15. Jobise C. Johnson (1989). Social Work Practice, Allign and Bacon, London. 

16. Louise C. Johnson (1998) Social Work Practice A Genesolist Approach Allyn 

and Bacon, London. 

17. Midglay, Kames, 1997 Social Welfare in global Context, Sage Publications, 

London. 

18. Pathak, (1981). Social Welfare, Macmillan, New Delhi. 

19. Shastri, R.R.,(1996) Social Work tradition in India, Welfare Forum & 

Research Organization, Varanasi. 

20. Skidmore, R.X.et.al(1982) Introduction to Social Work, Prentice Hall Englewood 

Cliffs. 

21. Stevan, Shardlaw (1985) The Values of changes in Socialwork, Tavistock, Rout 

ledge, London. 

22. Shastri, R.R. (1966). Social Work tradition in India, Welfare Research 

Organization, Varanasi. 

23. Timms, Noel & Timms Rita,(1977) Perspectives in Social Work Routledge & Kegan paul, 

London. 

24. Unnithan, T.K.N.1979 Gandhi and Social Change, Rawat Publications jaipur. 

25. University Grant Commission (1980) Review of Social Work Education in India, New 

Delhi. 

26. Woodroofe, K.1962. Form Charity to Social Work, Rout ledge & Kegan 

Paul, London. 

10(635) 


Paper – IV Social Case Work- I 

Semester- I 

Unit- I 

- Social Case Work: nature, assumptions, values and principles. 

- Development of social case work. 

- Concepts in social case work: Human needs, stress, social role and adaptation. 

- Components of social case work: person, place, problem & process 

Unit- II 

- Intake: need and importance, Relationship: nature and ways to establish. 

- Ego- functions and defense mechanisms. 

- Work with individuals in the context of the family and other sub-systems. 

- Recording: types and format. 

10(636) 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

Unit- III 

- Process of social case work- study, assessment, goal formation, planning, treatment, 

evaluation, termination. 

- Techniques of social case work: interviewing, support, encouragement, clarification, 

correcting perception, reality orientation; resource mobilization, home visiting, 

interpretation, topical shift, logical reasoning. 

- Referral: its use in social case work. 

Unit- IV 

- Models of social case Work practice: Problem solving, Psycho- social, Task oriented. 

- Rational Emotive Therapy in social case work. 

- Discussion on role of case worker from the records in school, family and marriage settings. 

- Presentations and discussions on cases and practical questions. 

Note. 








(4X15=60 Marks) 


1. Banarjee, G.R. TISS Series 23. Papers on Social Work: An Indian Perspective; Tata 

Institute of Social Sciences, Mumbai. TISS(Series 23). 


2. Batra, Sushma & Marlin Taber, 1996. Social strains of Globalization in India, Mittal 


3. Biestek, F.P. 1970. The Case Work Relationship: London: Unwin 

University Books, VI Impression. 

4. Bogo, Mario, 2006-07. Social Work Practice: Concepts, Processes and 

Interviewing. Columbia University Press-2006. Indian 

Reprint by Rawat Publication : New Delhi,2007. 

5. Friedlander, W.A. 1964. Concepts and Methods of Social “Work, New Delhi: 

Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. 

6. Fisher, J, 1978. Effective Case Work Practice: An Effective Approach 

, New York McGraw Hill Book Co. 

7. Florence, H., 1964. Case Work: A Psycho social therapy, Random House, 

New York. 

8. Farard, M.L. & N.K. Hunnybun, 1962 The Case Work’s use of relationship London, 

Tavistock. Pub. 

9. Goldstein, H., 1970. Social Work Practice: A Unitary Approach, Carolina: 

Univ. of S. Carolina Press. 

10. Grace, Methew, 1992. Introduction to School Case Work, Tata Institute of 

Social Sciences, Mumbai. 

11. Hamilton, G., 1946. Principles of Social Case recording, New York: 

Columbia University Press. 

12. Himilton, Gordon, 1959. Theory & Practice of Social Case Work, New York: 

Columbia University Press, VI Ed. 

13. Husband. E.(ed) New Developments in Social Case Work Reading in 

Social Work, Vol. III, London: Georque Allen & 

unwin Ltd. 

14. Mishra, P.D., 1985. Samajik Vijyaktik Sewa Karya (Hindi) Uttar Pradesh 

Hindi Sansthan, Lucknow. 

15. Perlman, 1957 Social Case Work-A Problem solving Process, 

Chicago: The University of Chicago Press, V 

Impression. 

16. Pathak, S.H. 1966. Records in Social Case Work, Delhi School of Social 

Work, Delhi. 

17. Pinkus, Helen, 1971. Case Records for Teaching Purposes, Faculty as social 

Work, M.S. University, Baroda. 

18. Roberts R.W. Nee, R.H. 1972 Theories of Social Case Work, the Uni. Of Chicago 

Press, Chicago, London. 

19. Reid, W.K. & Anne W. Shyne, 1969 Brief and Extended Case Work: New York: Columbia 

Uni. Press. 

20. Scott Briar and Henry Miller, 1971 Problems and issues in social Case Work: Columbia 

University Press, New York. 

21. Timmis, N., 1964. Social Case Work: Principles and Practice, London; 

Rout ledge and Kegan Paul. 

22. Timmis, N., 1972. Recording in Social Work, London, Rout ledge & 

Kegan Paul. 

23. Terner, F (Ed) 1974. Social Work Treatment, New York: The Free Press. 

24. Upadhyay, R.K. 1991. Samajik Vijyaktik Karya (Hindi) Haryana Sahitaya 

Academy, Chandigarh. 

25. Upadhyay, R.K. 1993. Indian Philosophical Concepts in Clinical Social work, 

Kurukshetra Press, Kurukshetra. 

10(637) 


26. Upadhyay, R.K. 2003. Social Case Work, Rawat publications, New Delhi, 

Jaipur. 

Semester- I 

Paper-V Social Group Work- I 

Unit- I 

- Group- meaning, definition, characteristics and purpose. 

- Major classification of social groups. 

- Types of groups in social group work practice. 

- Significance of groups in individual life. 

10(638) 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

Unit- II 

- Social group work- meaning, definitions, nature, philosophy, objectives and significance. 

- Historical development of social group work. 

- Social group work as a method of social work profession and its relationship with other 

methods of social work. 

- Models of social group work. 

Unit- III 

- Principles of social group work. 

- Guided group interaction as the heart of programme planning. 

- Skills in and techniques of social group work. 

- Role of social group worker. 

Unit- IV 

- Social group work process- group formation, assessment, formulation of objectives, 

planning, action and termination. 

- Stages of group development- planning, beginning, middle and ending stage. 

- Practical questions and discussion of group work records in school and community setting. 

Note. 








(4X15=60 Marks) 


1. Alissi, A.S.1990 Perspectives on Social Group Work Practice: A Book 

of Readings, New York, The Free Press. 


2. Balgopal, P.R. and Vassil. Groups in social Work- An Ecological Perspective, 

New York, Macmillan Publishing Co. Inc. 

3. Bhatt, P.M.1970 Records of Group Work Practice in India, faculty of 

Social Work, M.S. University, Baroda. 

4. Brandler S & Roman CP 1999 Group work, Skills and Strategies for Effective 

Interventions, New York. The Haworth Press. 

5. Brandler S & Roman CP 1991. Group work, Skills and Strategies for Effective 

Interventions, New York. The Haworth Press. 

6. Garland, J.A.(Ed) 1992. Group Work Reaching Out: People, Places and Power, 

New York, The Haworth Press. 

7. Garwin, C 1987. Contemporary Group Work, New York Prentice-Hall 

Inc. 

8. Golpelwar, Banmala, 2007 social Group Work, Indian Institute of Youth welfare, 

Nagpur. 

9. Kemp, C.G. 1970. Perspectives on the Group Process, Boston: Houghton 

Mifflin C. 

10. Klein, A.F.1970. Social Work Through Group Process,: School of 

Social Welfare- Albany: State University of New 

York. 

11. Konopka, G 1963. Social Group Work: A Helping Process, Englewood 

Cliff, NJ Prentice Hall, Inc. 

12. Kurland, R & Salmon, R 1998. Teaching a Methods Course in Social Work with 

Groups Alexandria: Council on Social Work Edu. 

13. Middleman, R, R 1968. The Non- Verbal Methods in Working with Groups. 

14. Northen, H 1969. Social Work with Groups, New York: Columbia 


15. Pepell, C.P & Rothman B. Social Work with Groups, New York: The Haworth 

Press. 

16. Sundel, M,Glasser, P sari, Individual change Through Small R., Vinter, 1985 

Groups. The Free Press. 

17. Samuel, T. Gladhing 1999. Group Work: A Counseling Specility, Simon& 

Schaster, NJ Printice Hall Inc. 

18. Siddiqui H.Y.2005. Group Work, theories and Practice, Rawat Publication 

New Delhi. 

19. Toseland RW 1998. An introduction to Group Work Prectice, New York 

Macmillan Publication Co. 

20. Trecker, Harleigh B 1990. Social Group Work: Principles and Practice, New 

York: Association Press. 

21. Wilson, G. Ryland, G 1949. Social Group Work Practice, Boston: Houghton 

Miffin, Co 

Semester- I 

Paper-VI Community Organization & Social Action-I 

Unit-I 

- Community- meaning, characteristics, types (rural & urban): 

10(639) 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 


- Community Organization- meaning, concept & scope. 

- Community organization as a method of social work intervention. 

- Principles of community organization. 

Unit- II 

- Steps in community organization- study, analysis, assessment, organization, action, 

evaluation, modification. 

- Skills and techniques in community organization. 

- Role of community organizer. 

Unit- III 

- Strategies in community organization such as bargaining, confronting, collaborating, 

problem- solving, educating, social advocacy, joint action, persuasion and campaign. 

- Models (approaches) in community organization- Enabling and power confrontation 

models. 

Unit- IV 

- Ruthman’s locality development, social planning and social action models. 

- Problems in development of community work in India- such as problems of community 

welfare councils, community chests, public relations in community work. 

- Public participation in community programmes. 

- Practical records in community setting and their discussions. Presentations and discussions 

of community work records. 

Note. 








(4X15=60 Marks) 


1. Gangrade, K. D. 1971. Community Organization in India, Mumbai; 

Parkashan, 1971. 

2. Karamer, R.M. & Spech,H. Reading in Community Organization Practice-Hall 

Inc. Englewood Cliffs, 1983. 

3. Murphy C. G.: Community Organization Practice, Boston; Houghton 

Miffin Co. Ross, 1954 

4. Patil, S.H. Community Dominance & Political Modernization; 

Mittal Publication; New Delhi; 2002. 

5.Rashmi Dewas & R. Community Participation & Empowerment in Primary 

Education; Mittal Publication New Delhi; 2003. 

6. Sengupta, P.K.; Community Organization Process in India, Kiran 

Publishers, 1976. 

10(640) 


7. Selgen, S. Empowerment & Social Development Issues in 

Community Participation; Mittal Publication: New 

Delhi; 2005. 

8. Spech, H & Karmer: R.M.; 1969 Reading in Community; Englewood Cliffs: Prentice 

Hall. 

9. Surya Rao: Under Development with community initiative 

retrospect & prospect: Mittal Publication: New Delhi, 

2000. 

10. Zastrow Charles: 1978. Introduction to social Welfare Institution Social 

Problems, services & Current Issues (Social work 

Community Practices Part-3 Chapter-10) Ontario: The 

Dorsey Press. 

11 Butcher H. 2007 : Critical community Practice. 

12 Kothari M 2006 : Development and Social Action , Rawat 

Publication, New Delhi 

13 Grundy M : Community Work, Rawat Publication, New Delhi 

Semester- II 

Paper-I Social Justice and Social Legislation 

Unit-I 

10(641) 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

- Social Justice- concept, meaning and scope. 

- Issues of social Justice in Indian society with reference to inequality and socio- political 

structure. 

- Law as an instrument of social change. 

- Role of the social worker in relation to humanism and social justice. 

Unit- II 

- Social security: concept, meaning, objectives, basis and scope. 

- Methods of social security: social assistance programme in India especially in relation to old 

age, unemployment and widowhood. 

- Social insurance- concept, characteristics and significance. 

- Legal Aid- concept, need, scheme and problems. 

- Lok- Adalat- concept and meaning. 

Unit- III 

- Concepts of Rights: U. N. Declaration of Human Rights. 

- National Human Rights Commission, State Human Right Commission: 

Structure, functions and role. 

- Constitutional provisions related to human rights and their implications. 

- Family Court. 

- Criminal justice- nature and agencies: prosecutions, judiciary and correction 


Unit- IV 

- Social Legislations and social work. 

- The Hindu Marriage Act, 1955(related to marriage and divorce) 

- The Adoptions and Maintenance Act, 1956. 

- The Dowry Prohibition Act, 1961 

- The Consumer Protection Act, 1986 

- The Right to Information Act, 2005. 

Note : 








(4X15=60 Marks) 


1. Adarkar, B.P. (1973) Social Insurance in India. 

2. Buxi Uperdra Perspectives in Development; Law, the Crises of 

Indian Legal System, Vikas Publication, New Delhi. 

3. Diwan, Paras (1985) Modern Hindu Law, Law Agency, Allahabad. 

4. Gangrade, K.D.1978. Social Legislation In India Vol. 1 & 2, Concept 

Publishing Co. New Delhi. 

5. Govt. of India, 1973. Report of the Legal Aid Committee, New Delhi. 

6. Gupta, H.N. (1986) Social Security Legislation for Labour in India, Deep 

and Deep Publication, Delhi. 

7. Hallen G.C. 1967 Dynamics of social Security, Rastogi Publication, 

Meerut. 

8. Indian Social Institute (1992) Legal Education Series( nol-34), Indian Social 

Institute, Delhi. 

9. Lyer V.R.K. 1980. Some Half Hidden Aspects of Indian Social Justice, 

Eastern Book Co. Lucknow. 

10. Lyer V.R.K. 1981. Justice in Words and Justice in Deed for Depressed 

Classes, Indian Social Institution, New Delhi. 

11. Iyer,Krishna V.K.1987. Social Justice; Sunset or Dawn, Lucknow, Eastern 

Book Company. 

12. Kothari S. & Sethi H (Ed) 1991. Rethinking Human Rights, Lokayan. 

13. Sharma, A.M.1988. Aspects of labour Welfare & Social Security, 

Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai. 

14. Singh, Sujan (1996) Legal Aid-Human Rights to Equality, Deep and Deep, 

Publication, Delhi. 

15. Subramaniam, S (1977) Human Rights- International Challenges, Manes 


16. T.K.N. 1979. Gandhi and Social Change, Rawat Publications, 

Jaipur. 

10(642) 


Semester- II 

Paper-II Human Growth and Development- II 

Unit-I 

10(643) 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

- Motivation of human behavior, motivational cycle, internal and external factors affecting 

motivation. 

- Attitude: nature, organization, influence on human behavior. 

- Attitudinal change, learning and dissonance theories of attitude change. 

- Public opinion and prejudice: formation, factors and change. Role of publicity and 

propaganda in formation and change of public opinion and prejudice. 

- Mass media (print and electronic): use & misuse. 

Unit- II 

- Personality: concept, definitions, nature and theories. 

- Brief discussion of the theories of personality and its implications on social work practice, 

such as psychodynamic (Freudian and Adler), behavioral (Classical and Instrumental 

conditioning), humanism (Rogers and Maslow) and existentialist. 

Unit- III 

- Concept and nature of attention, learning, memory and retention. 

- Collective behaviour, crowd behaviour- audience and mob. 

- Theories of collective behaviour. 

Unit-IV 

- Intelligence: nature and use. Understanding and brief introduction to assessment of 

intelligence. 

-An orientation to Seguin Form Board, Pass-along test, progressive matrices. 

-Projective test of personality: Rorschach and TAT 

Note. 








(4X15=60 Marks) 



1. Anastasi, A., 1987. Psychological Testing, New York Macmillan, Revised 

Edition. 

2. Bronfenbrenner. W. The Ecology of Human Development, Cambridge; 

Harward University Press. 

3. Camron, N.1969. Personality Development and Psycho-pathology, 

Mumbai: Vakil Reffer and Simmons Pvt. Ltd. 

4. Carstairs, G.M 1978. Change in Indian Village Societies and their Impact on 

Child Development; Personal perspective. In Anthony 

.E.J. and Collette. C (eds) The Child His Family 

Wiley. 

5. Crow. L. D. 1957. Abnormal Psychology and Modern Life, Mumbai ; 

D.B. Taraporevala Sons and Co. 

6. Crow. L.D. 1957. Psychology of Human Adjustment, New York; 

McGraw Hill Book Co. Inc. 

7. English O.S. and Pearson. G.J. 1952. Emotional Problems of Living London; Allen and 

Unwin. 

8. Erikson, E.H. 1963. childhood and Society, New York W.W. Norton and 

Co. 

9. Gore,M.S. 1978. Changes in the Family and the Process Of 

Socialization in India. Mumbai; Popular Prakashan. 

10. Hall, C.S. and Lindzey, G.1976. Theories of Personality, New York John Wiley and 

Sons Inc. 

11. Hurlock, E.B. 1968 Developmental Psychology, Mumbai New Delhi; Tata 

McGraw Hill. 

12. Thompson, G.G. 1962. Child Psychology-Growth trends in Psychological 

Adjustment, Mumbai; The Times of India Press. 

13. Krech, D. and Crutchfield R.S. 1948. Theory and Problems of Social Psychology, New 

York; McGraw Hill. 

14. Krech D., Crutchfield R.S. Ballachey, Individual in Society , New York McGraw 1962. 

Hill. 

15. Kuppuswamy, B 1980. An Introduction to Social Psychology, Mumbai: 

Media Promoters and Pub. Pvt. Ltd. 

16. Lindgren. H.c. and Byrne.d, 1971. Pshychology; An Introduction to a Behavioural 

Science, New York McGraw Hill Book. Co. 

17. Sherff, M.and Shierirff, C.W.1969 In Inter Social Psychology, New York; Harper and 

Row. 

18.Thorne, I.P. and Schmuller, A.M. Personality an inter-Disciplinary approach, New 

Delhi; East West Press Pvt. Ltd. Student Ed. 

19. Young. K. 1957. Handbook of Social Pathology London; Routledge & 

Kegan Paul. 

20. Walia J.S. Foundations of Educational Psychology Paul 

Publishers. 

21. Weiner, E.A.and Stewart B.J.1984. Assessing Individuals; Psychological and Educational 

Tests and Measurement. Boston: Little, Brown and 

Co. 

10(644) 


Semester- II 

Paper-III Health Care: Needs and Services 

Unit-I 

- Health-concept and nature. 

- Hygiene: personal and environmental, need and importance. 

- Malnutrition: concept, measurements and extent. Balanced diet. 

- Main systems of body. 

- Immunity and immunization of children. 

- First Aid- concept and importance 

10(645) 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

Unit- II 

- Common ailments and diseases: symptoms, causes, prevention and control of diseases caused 

by viruses: measles, chickenpox, polio, mumps and leprosy 

- Diseases caused by parasites: scabies, malaria and intestinal worms. 

- Sexually Transmitted Diseases, HIV and AIDS, 

Unit- III 

- Diseases caused by bacteria: symptoms, causes, prevention and control of whooping cough, 

diphtheria, typhoid, cholera and Tuberculosis. 

- Diseases: plague, dengue, hepatitis. 

- Common diseases of childhood: causes, symptoms, prevention and control of diarrhea, 

dysentery, common cold, jaundice. 

Unit- IV 

- Preventive and social medicine: concept and meaning. 

- Programmes for controlling communicable diseases. 

- Health services in Haaryana and India. 

- Maternal and child health services. 

- National Health Policy, NRHM. 

- Primary Health Care: organization and functions. 

- Role of medical social worker. 

Note: 








(4X15=60 Marks) 



1. Banarjee, G.R.,1950 Social Service Department in Hospital its 

Organization and Functions, Mumbai; Tata Institute of 

social Sc. 

2. Bartalatt, Harriet; M. 1961. Social Work Practice in the Health Field, New York; 

National association of Social Workers. 

3. Bergatta, E.F. and moluekey N.g.1980. Aging and society: Current Research and Policy 

Perspective; Benerely Hills; London sage Publication. 

4. Caplan, Gerald,1951. An approach to Community Mental Health. Grune and 

Startion. 

5. Codey, Control h., 1951. Social Aspects to Illness, Philadelphia & London; 

W.D. Saunders Co. 

6. Desai, M.M.and Khetani M.D.1979. Inter Strategies For the Aged in India in reaching the 

Sqed-Social Services in Morton, J.t. etc. 

7. Doyal Lesley & Pennell, Imoqen, 1978. Health Medicine and Underdevelopment Economics& 

Political Weekly Vol. XI 31-33, August, special 

Number. 

8. Hassan, K.A.1979. Medical Sociology of Rural India, Sachin 

Publications. 

9. K.Park, (2005) Textbook of Prevetive and Social Medicine, Jabalpur: 

M/sBanarsidas Bhonot. 

10. Khandekar, Mandakini: The Social Dimensions of Child Nutrition among the 

Economically Disadvantaged in Greater Mumbai. 

11. King, Maurice (Ed) 1966. Medical Care in Developing Countries A Sympostum 

from Markerere, London Oxford University Press. 

12. Mahajan, B.K. 1969. Health Services in India, Jamnagar. 

13. Naik, J.P., 1977. An Alternative System of Health Care Services in 

India, Some Proposals, Allied Publishers. Pvt. Ltd. 

14. Paul, Benjamin D, 1955. Health, Culture and Community, Case Studies of 

Public Reactions of Health Programmes, Russel 

Saqe,P. Foundation. 

15. Rao, Dr. K.N., 1969. Health Services Public Health in Encyclopedia of 

Social Work in India, Vol. 1, India: Publication Divn. 

16. Singh, Surendra and Mishra, P.D. Health & Illnesses: Dynamics and Dimensions: Royal 

Book Co. Lucknow. 

17. Sendaram, E.B., 1975 Health Services with Social Justice, 

Voluntary Action. Vol. 17, no.6. 

Paper-IV Social case Work- II 

Semester- II 

Unit-I 

- Social case work, counselling and psychotherapy. 

10(646) 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

- Techniques of intervention: reflective discussion in current person situation configuration, 

dynamic and developmental factors. 

- Development and use of Professional Self. 


Unit-II 

- Authority in social casework: nature, types, uses and techniques. 

- Crisis: meaning and types of crisis, crisis intervention. 

- Role of social case worker: role of social and emotional intelligence in problem solving. 

Unit- III 

- Interpersonal skills: nature and types. 

- Considerations in social case work with children. 

- Family case work. 

Unit- IV 

- Indian Philosophical concepts in practices of social casework ( Brahma, Vishnu, Mahesh), 

three debts, three gunas, Anekantwad. 

- Various theoretical orientations in social Casework: Gestalt, System approach, Behaviorism. 

- Discussion of role of social case worker with the records from psychiatric, correctional 

administration and health settings. 

- Discussion of cases and practical questions with reference to children with problem, marital 

partners, juvenile delinquents. 

Note. 








(4X15=60 Marks) 


1. Aptekar, H.R. 1955. Dynamics of Case Work and Counseling. Houghton 

Miffin, MSS. 

2. Banarjee, G.R. Papers on Social Work An Indian Perspective: Tata 

Institute of Social Science, Mumbai. 

3. Biestek, F.P. 1970. The Case Work Relationship: London: Unwin 

University Books, VI Impression. 

4. Colemn, J.V. 1955. Distinguishing Between Psychotherapy and Case 

Work J.S.C.W.,Feb. 

5. Farad, M.L. & N.K. Hunnybun, 1962. The Case Work, s use of relationship London, 

Tacistock. Pub. 

6. Fisher, J, 1978. Effective Case Work Practice: An Effective Approach, 

New York: McGraw Hill Book Co. 

7. Florence H., 1964. Case Work : A Psychology Social Therapy, Random 

House, New York. 

8 Friedlander, W.A. 1964. Concepts and Methods of Social Work, New Delhi: 

Prentice Hall Of India Pvt. Ltd. 

9. Goldstein, H., 1970. Social Work Practice: A Unitary Approach, Carolin : 

Univ. of S. Carolina Press. 

10. Grace, Methew, 1992. Introduction to Social Case Work: Tata Institute of 

Social Science, Mumbai. 

10(647) 


11. Hamilton, G., 1946. Principles of Social Case Recording, New York: 


12. Hamilton, Gordon, 1959. Theory & Practice of Social Case Work, New York: 

Columbia University Press (VIEd). 

13. Hoff, Lu Ann, 1978. People in Crisis, Crisis: Addison Wesley 

14. Mishra, P.D., 1985. Samajik Vijyaktik Sewa Karya (Hindi) Uttar Pradesh 

Hindi Sansthan, Lucknow. 

15. Peldman, 1957 Social Case Work-A Problem solving Process, 

Chicaqo: The University of Chichqo Press, V 

Impression. 

16. Pathat, S.H. 1966. Records in Social Case Work, Delhi School of social 

work, Delhi. 

17. Pinkus, Helen, 1971. Case Records for Teaching Purposes, Faculty as social 

Work, M.S. University, Baroda. 

18. Roberts R.W. Nee, R.H. 1972 Theories of Social Case Work, the Uni. Of Chicago 

Press, Chicago, London. 

19. Reid, W.K. & Anne W. Shyne, 1969 Brief and Extended Case Work: New York: Columbia 

Uni. Press. 

20. Scott Briar and Henry Miller, 1971 Problems and issues in social Case Work: Columbia 


21. Timmis, N., 1964. Social Case Work: Principles and Practice, London; 

Rout ledge and Keqan Paul. 

22. Timmis, N., 1972. Recording in Social Work, London, Rout ledge & 

Kegan Paul. 

23. Terner, F (Ed) 1974. Social Work Treatment, New York: The Free Press. 

24. Upadhyay, R.K. 1991. Samajik Va yaktik Karya (Hindi) Haryana Sahitaya 

Academy, Chandigarh. 

25. Upadhyay, R.K. 1993. Indian Philosophical Concepts in Clinical Social 

work, Kurukshetra Press, Kurukshetra. 

26. Upadhyay, R.K. 2003. Social Case Work, Rawat publications, New Delhi, 

Jaipur 

Semester- II 

Paper-V Social Group Work- II 

10(648) 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

Unit-I 

- Group dynamics- concept, principles, dimensions and theoretical orientation with 

reference to field theory, psychodynamic and system approach. 

- Group cohesiveness-concepts and its relationship with group effectiveness. 

Unit-II 

- Programme- concepts, principles and its importance in social group work. 

- Programme development process. 

- Programme planning- concepts skill and basis. 

- Social group work practice in agency settings. 


Unit- III 

- Group Therapy- concept and method like training group, psycho-therapy, Psycho- drama and 

play therapy. 

- Leadership- concept and theories. 

- Skills and tasks of group leader. 

Unit- IV 

- Evaluation and monitoring in social group work- importance, types and methods. 

- Recording in social group work- types, principles, structure and importance in different stages 

of group work. 

- Social Group work practices in different setting- health, psychiatric, alcoholic and addicts. 

- Practical questions and discussion of records of each settings. 

Note: 








(4X15=60 Marks) 


1.Alissi, A.S 1990 Perspectives on social Group work practice 

A Books of Readings, New York, The Free press. 

2. Balgopal, P R and Vassil Groups in social work- An Ecological perspective New York, 

Machillan Publishing Co. Inc. 

3.Bhatt, P.M. 1970 Records of Group work Practice in India Faculty of social 

work M S University , Baroda. 

4. Brandler S & Roman CP 1999 Group work skills and strategies for Effective Interventions 

New York: The Haworth Press. 

5. Brandler S & Roman CP1991 Group work skills and strategies for Effective Interventions 

New York: The Haworth Press 

6. Graland, J A ( Ed) 1992 Group work Reaching out. People, places and Power, New 

York the Haworth Press. 

7. Garwin. C 1987 Contemporary Group work, New York. 

Prentice Hall inc. 

8. Golpelwar, Banmala,2007. Social Group work Indian intitute of youth Welfare, Nagpur, 

9. Kemp, C G. 1970 Perspectives on the Group Process Boston. 

Houghton Miffin C. 

10. Klein, A G. 1970 Social Work Through Group Process: School of social 

Welfare – Albany State University of New York. 

11. Konopka,G 1963 Social Group Work: A Helping Process; Englewood Cliff, N J 

Prentice Hall inc 

12. Kurland, R& Salmon,R 1998 Teaching a Methods Course in Social Work with Group 

Alexenedria: council on social work Edu. 

13. Middleman, R. R, 1968 The Non- Verbal Methods of working with Groups: 

10(649) 


14. Northen H 1969 Social Work with Groups, New York: Columbia University 

Press. 

15. Peopell, C P& Rothman. B Social Work with Group, New York: The Haworth Press. 

16. Sundel, M, Glasser, P Individual Change Through small Groups The Free Sarri, R, 

V Vinter, R 1985 Press. 

17. Samuel, T. Gladhing 1999 Group work: A Counselling speciality, Simon& Schaster, N J 

Printer Hall Inc. 

18. Siddiqui, H. Y 2005 Group work theories and practice, Rawat Publication, New 

Delhi, 

19 Toseland R W 1998 An introduction to Group work Pracitce, New York 

Macmillin Publication Co. 

20. Trecker, Harleigh B 1990 Social Group Work Principles and Practice, New York, 

Association Press 

21. Wilson, G Ryland, G 1949 Social Group Work Practice, Boston: Houhton Miffin, Co. 

Semester- II 

Paper-VI Community Organization & Social Action - II 

Unit-I 

- Community Development: concept and meaning. 

- Rural Community Development- concept & meaning. 

- Current Rural Development programmes in India. 

- Urban Community Development- concept & meaning. 

- Urban Community Development Programmes in India. 

Unit- II 

- Introduction to Local Self- Government (LSG)-meaning, attributes, organization and function (Rural& urban LSG). 

- Panchyat Raj, Balwant Rai Mehta Committee Report. 

- 73th & 74 th Amendments of India Constitution. 

- Community Power Structure - its importance for community organization. 

10(650) 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

Unit- III 

- Community Empowerment. 

- Different types of conflicts like ethnic, regional, caste, rural & urban conflicts. 

- Social Action- concept, strategies, steps and use of social action in social work. 

Unit- IV 

- Social Movement- Bhoodan, Narmada Bachao Andolan, Chipko Movement, J. P Movement in Bihar. 

- Concept of mass communication. 

- Models of communication. 

- Large group communication- methods and their applications. 

- Use of Audio- Visual aids. 

- Practical records in community setting and their discussion. 


Note : 








(4X15=60 Marks) 

List of Reading Books. 

1. Arora, E. K (ed.): People’s Participation in Development Process Essays in honour of 

B. Mahata; Jaipur; the HCM State Institute of Public Administration 

1979 

2. Dandekar, V.M: Nature of Class Conflict in the Indian Society, Bombay: Bharat 

Foundation. 1977 

3. Dayal, R Panchyat Raj in India, Delhi, 1970 

4. Dey S. K. Sarvodaya; The welfare of All, Ahmedabad; Navjivan Pub. House 

1964 

5. Kantonksy, D: Sarvodaya; the welfare of all, Ahmedabad: Navjivan Pub. House 

1980 

6.Kaswmbi, Merra: Urbanization and Uraban development in India ICSSR, New Delhi 

1994 

7. Nagtual, Hans: Modernization & Urabanization in India, Pawat Publication Jaipur 

1996 

8 Rao, M.S. A.(ed) Social Movements in India, New Delhi, Manohar; 1978. 

9 Saunder D.j Visual Communication Handbook of Teaching & Learning Using 

Simple Visual Materials; 1984. 

10 Jayal,N.G; Local Governance in India Decentralization and 

Prakash, A & Beyond, Oxford University Press, London. 

Sharma,P.K.(ed) 

11. Thudipara; J Z. 2007 Urban Community Development, Rawat Publications. New Delhi. 

12. Ledwith M 2006 Community Development: A Critical Approach 

Rawat Publications, New Delhi. 

13. Gangrade K.D.1971 Community Origination in India. Mumbai 

Parkashan. 

14. Gary Paulgreen& Asset Building and Community Development, Sage 

Anna Halnes 2007 Publication 

Paper-I 

Social Policy and Planning 

UNIT – I 

- Social Policy: concept and Objectives. 

Semester-III 

10(651) 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 


- Values underlying Social Policy based on constitutional provisions. 

- Instruments of Social Policy. 

- Approaches of Social Policy. 

- Models of Social Policy – Residual welfare, unified, integrated, sectoral, industrial 

achievement and institutional redistributive model. 

UNIT – II 

- Social policy formulation: contribution of research, interest groups and role of professional 

social worker. 

- Critical review of policies concerning education, health, population and family welfare. 

- Methods of evaluation of social policy. 

UNIT – III 

- Social Planning: conceptual and operational aspects. 

- Scope of social planning. 

- Economic planning, welfare planning, developmental planning: Meaning importance and 

differences. 

- Social planning process – steps and strategies in social planning. 

- Levels of social planning: Centre, State, District and Block levels. 

UNIT – IV 

- Monitoring and evaluation of social planning. 

- Need of decentralization and people’s participation. 

- Machinery and procedure of planning in India at Centre and State levels. 

- Planning Commission – Organization, structure and functions. 

- State Planning Boards – Organization, structure and functions. 

- Five year plans in India – Salient features with an emphasis on the objectives of growth 

and social justice, education and family welfare. 

Note: 








(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography: 

1. Kulkarni, P.D 1965 : Social Policy in India, Tata Institute of Social Sciences, Bombay. 

2. Modison, Bornice : Meaning of Social Policy: A Comparative Dimension in Social 

Welfare, London, George Allen and Unwin. 

3. Jones, Kathleen and others : Issues in Social Policy, Routledge and Kopan 1983 Paul, 

London. 

4. Kulkarni, P.D. 1979. : Social Policy and Social Work in India: Madras, Association of 

Schools of Social Work in India. 

5. Sharma, P .N and Shastri. C : Social Planning: Concepts and Techniques, Lucknow Print 

House 

6. Gilbert, N and Specht, H : Planning for Social Welfare: Issues, Models and Tasks, 

Prentice Hall Inc. Englewood cliffs, New Jersey. 

7. Jhingon, M.L. 2007. : The Economics of Development and Planning, New Delhi, 

Konark Publishers Pvt. Ltd. 

10(652) 


8. Bore, A.B. : Social Welfare Planning in India, New Delhi: ECAEF. 

9. Goel, S.L. and Jain, P.K. : Social Welfare Administration, Vol. 1 and 2 1988 New 

Delhi: Deep & Deep Publication. 

10. Skidmore, R.X. 1983. : Social Work Administration, New Jersey: Prentice Hall. 

11. Lavalette Michael & : Social Policy-Theories, Concepts and Issues. Pratt Alam 

Sage New Delhi. 

12 Mishra, R.1977. : Society and Social Policy, London: Macmillan Ltd. 

13 Mullard, M and : Social Policy in Changing Society, Landon: Spicker.1998. 

Routledge. 

14 Huttman, E.D.1981. : Introduction to Social Policy, New York, MacGraw Hill. 

15 Livingstane, A.1969 : Social Policy in Developing Countries, London: Routledge 

and Kogan Paul. 

16 Weimer,D.L. and : Policy Analysis: concepts and practice, 

Vining, A.R.1994. New Jersy: Prentice Hall. 

17. Hills J. 2007 : Making Social Policy Works, Rawat Publications, New 

Delhi. 

18. Hudson J. 2007 : Understanding the Policy Process, Rawat Publications, New 

Delhi 

Semester-III 

Paper- II 

Administration of Welfare Services-I 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

UNIT-I 

- Administration: concept and principles. 

- Conceptual understanding of social administration, welfare administration, public 

administration and social work administration. 

- Social welfare administration: definition, features, scope, elements and principles. 

UNIT-II 

- Formulation and registration of welfare organization/NGO. 

- Administrative processes: programme planning and formulation, organizing, 

staffing, supervision, monitoring and evaluation. 

- Problems of voluntary organizations/NGOs and remedies. 

UNIT-III 

- Welfare administration at central and state levels. Central Social Welfare Board 

and State Social Welfare Boards; organizational structure, functions, role and 

Programmes; 

- Funding to NGOs: a critical review 

UNIT-IV 

- Administration of voluntary welfare agencies such as Indian Council for Child 

Welfare (ICCW), YMCA, YWCA and Indian Red Cross Society. 

- Role of voluntary agencies/NGOs in promotion of welfare services. 

- Welfare Services to vulnerable groups such as women, children, aged, youth, 

physically handicapped, SCs & STs. 

10(653) 


Note: 








(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography: 

1. Dubey, S.N. 1973. : Administration of Social Welfare Programme in India, 

Somaiya Publications, Co.Ltd. Bombay. 

2. Ranade,S.N.1974. : Voluntary Action and Social Welfare in India, Voluntary 

Action Research (David Horton Smith), Zexinton Books, 

London. 

3. Warham, Joyce. 1975 : Introduction to Administration for Social Workers, 

Routledged & Kegan Paul, London. 

4. Slavin,S.(ed.)1978 : Social Administration, New York, The Haworth Press. 

5. Pathak,Shankar.1981 : Social Welfare:An Evolution and Development, Macmillan 

India, Ltd. 

6. Evertt, J. 1981. : Women and Social Change in India: Heritage Publiushers, 

New Delhi. 

7. Tripathi, P.M 1981. : Voluntary Action for alleviating rural poverty: report of the 

Seminar on Role of Voluntary Agencies in Rural Devt. 

NIPCCD, New Delhi. 

8. Skidamore.1983 : Social Work Administration, The Haworth Press, New York. 

9. Sankaran & Rodrigues: Handbook for the Management of Voluntary Organisation’ 

1983. Alpha Publications, Madras. 

10. Choudhari, D. Paul.1983 : Social Welfare Administration, Delhi, Atma Ram and Sons. 

11. Lalith, N.V.1984. : Voluntary Work in India, a Study of Volunteers in Welfare 

Agencies, New Delhi. 

12. Frenda, M.1985. : Voluntary Actions and Local Development, Young India 

Foundation, New Delhi. 

13. Kapoor, K.K 1986 : Directory of Funding Organisations, Delhi, Information and 

News Network. 

14. Desai, N and : Women and Society in India, Ajanta Publishers, New Delhi 

Krishnaraj, M.1987. 

15. Govt. of India. 1988. : Report of the Committee on the Status of Women in 

India-Towards Equality,Ministry of Education and Social welfare. 

16. Mukherjee, K.K and : Voluntary Organization: some Perspectives, Gandhi Peace 

Mukherjee,Sutapa.1988. Centre, Hyderabad. 

17. Govt. of India.1988. : National Perspective Plan for Women in India- 2000 AD, 

Department of Women and Child Development. 

18. Mukherjee, K.K and : Guide Book for Strengthening Voluntary Organization, 

Mukherjee,Sutapa.1989. Gram Niyojan Kendra, Ghaziabad. 

19. Jackson, J. 1989. : Evaluation of Voluntary Organizations, Delhi, Information 

And News Networks. 

20. Fernandes,W. 1989. : Voluntary Action and Government Control, Indian Social 

10(654) 


Institute. 

21. Handy, Charles.1990.: Understanding Voluntary Organisations, Penguin Books, 

London. 

22. PRIA. 1991. : NGOs in India, A Critical Study, Delhi. PRIA. 

23. Vishwanat. 1993. : NGOs and Women’s Development in Rural South India. 

24 Mathur K. 1996. : Development Policy and Administration, sage, New Delhi. 

25. Fried,L : Introduction to Social Welfare, University of California 

Press, Berkeley. 

26 Sachdeva, D.R. : Social Welfare Administration, Allahbad: Kitab Mahal. 

1992-93 

27. Siddiqui H.Y.Ed. : Social Welfare Administration, Dynamic Management and 1983. 

Human Relationships, New Jersey: Prentice Hall. 

28 Goel, S.L. and : Social Welfare Administration:Theory and Practice, Vol-I 

Jain, R.K. and II, New Delhi, Deep and Deep Publications. 

29 Slavin, S.(ed.) 1978 : Social Administration. New York: The Howorth Press 

Paper – III 


Social Work Research 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

UNIT – I 

- Scientific Study: meaning, characteristics and steps in Scientific Study 

- Concepts and variables: Meaning and Definitions 

- Social Phenomena- Nature, levels of measurement and problems in measurement of 

Social Phenomena 

- Scaling Techniques – Bogardus, Sociometric, Thurstun and Likert – 

an overview 

UNIT – II 

- Social Research: meaning, nature, objectives, need and importance 

- Types of Social Research- Historical, Descriptive and Experimental 

- Social Work Research – meaning, purpose and process 

- Scope and importance of Social Work Research 

- Qualitative and Participatory Research – meaning, characteristics and use of these 

methods in inquiry 

UNIT – III 

- Research Proposals: steps and importance 

- Research Design – meaning and types 

- Identification, sources and criteria of Research Problem 

- Review of related Literature- significance and sources 

- Hypothesis – meaning, characteristics, types, formulation and uses 

UNIT – IV 

- Sampling – meaning, need, steps, characteristics and types 

- Tools of Data Collection: characteristics, types, uses and limitations of Questionnaire, 

Interview, Observation and Case Study 

- Analysis of data – meaning, significance and process 

10(655) 


- Research Report – purpose, characteristics and steps of writing report 

- References and Bibliography 

Note: 








(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography: 

1. Blaikie, Norman 1993. : Approaches to Social Enquiry. Cambridge, Polity Press. 

2. May,Tim 1997. : Social Research: Issues, Methods, and Process. Buckingham, 

Open University Press. 

3. Marshall, Catnerine : Designing qualitative Research (IInd Ed.), New 

& Rossman, Gretcher B. Delhi, Sage Publication.(1995) 

4. Reid, William J. & Smith, : Research in Social Work, New York, Audrey D.(1981) 


5. RamChandran R : Issue in Social Work Research in India, Bombay, 

1990. TISS. 

6. Society for : Participatory research: An introduction Research 

Participatory Research Network series No.3 New Delhi Press. In Asia 1995. 

7. Moser, C.A& Kaltan : Survey methods in social Investigation. London 

G.1971.Heinemann Educational Books Ltd. 

8. Chandwief Bruce,.A. : Social Science Research Methods,New Jersey: and others, 

1984 Prentice Hall. 

9. Shjoberg.G. Nett,1992 : Research and methodology for Social research New.Delhi, 

Rawat Publication 

10. Mukherjee R.N. 1982 : Samajik Shodh Va Sankhiykee. Delhi Ranjan Prakashan 

11. Laldas D.K. 2000. : Practice of social Research.Rawat Publications, Jaipur. 

12. Aggarwal, Y.P. 1990 : Better sampling, New Delhi Sterting. 

13. Bajpai S.R. : Methods of Social survey and Research, Kanpur Kitab Ghar. 

14. Selltiz, Clare, : Research Methods in Social Relations, New York, and 

Others, 1959.Rinchart and Winston. 

15. Doby, John T.(ed.), An Introduction to Social Research ( 2 nd Ed.) 1967. Newyork, 

Appleton- Century- Court. 

16. Long Norman & Battlefields of Knowledge: The Interlocking of Theory and 

Long Ann. Ed. practice in Social Research and1992. Development, London, 

Routiedge. 

17. Riessman, Qualitative Studies in Social Work Research,Catherine K. 

1994.New Delhi, Sage Publication. 

18. Cranstein, A. and Phillips Understanding Social Research- An Introuction, 

W. R. 1978. Boston: allwyn and Bacon. 

19. Pedgett, Deborah, K. Qualitative Methods in Social Work Research, New 

1988. Delhi: Sage Publication. 

10(656) 


20. Rubin, A. and Babbie, K. Research Methods for Social Work, California:Brooks 

Cole Publishing Co. 

21. Bhattacharyya, D.K., 2009 Research Methodology, Excel Publications, New Delhi. 

22. Rao, A.B.,2009 Research Methodology for Management and Social 

Sciences, Excel Publications, New Delhi. 


Paper – IV 

Mental Health, Care and Services 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

UNIT – I 

- Mental Health, Psychopathology, and Psychiatry: concept, meaning and scope Concept of 

normality and abnormality 

- Classification of mental diseases, ICD – 10 (WHO) 

UNIT – II 

- Psychoneurotic reactions- Hysteria: dissociative and somatoform disorders 

Anxiety disorders, obsessive-compulsive reactions, phobic reactions and depressive 

reactions: prevalence, symptoms, types & treatment. 

- Mood disorders and personality disorders: symptoms, types and treatment 

UNIT – III 

- Psychotic disorders- Schizophrenia (in adults & children): prevalence, symptoms, types and 

treatment 

- Paranoid reactions- symptoms and treatment 

- Epilepsy- causes, types, symptoms, precautions and treatment 

- Mental Retardation: Causes, types, management, prevention and rehabilitation 

UNIT – IV 

- Treatment Modalities in mental illness. 

- Services for Mental Health, National Mental Health Programme: objectives, progress and 

problems 

- Mental Health Act- 1987 

- Therapeutic community: concept and use, Community Psychiatry 

- Rehabilitation, prevention and promotion of mental health. 

- Role of Social Worker individually as well as part of a team. 

- Yoga and Meditation and other indigenous therapeutic measurers 

Note: 








(4X15=60 Marks) 

10(657) 


Bibliography: 

1. Brockbank, R. and Mental Health in a Changing Community 

Westhy, Gibson, D. : USA. Grune and Stratton, Inc. 

(eds.), 1966: 

2. Commission on Mental : Social Change and the Mental Health of 

Health of Children, 1973 Children, New York. Harper & Row. 

3. Frank. M, 1982 : Primary Prevention for Children and Families, New York . 

The Haworth Press. 

4. Riess, B.F. ed, : New Directions in Mental Health, Vol. I, 

1968 New York. Grune and Stratton. 

5. Bastide, R., 1972 : Sociology of Mental Disorders, London. Routledge and 

Kagan Paul . 

6. Freeman, H. and : New Aspects of Mental Health Service, London. 

Farandale, J.,1967 Pergamon Press. 

7. Young, V. : Handbook of Social Pathology, London. Routledge and 

Kegan Paul. 

8. Roberts, N.,1967 : Mental Health and Mental illness, London. Routledge and 

Kegan Paul. 

9. Coleman, J.C. : Abnormal Psychology and Modern Life, Mumbai. D.B., 

Taraporevala Sons & Co. 

10. Bessell, R., 1971 : Interviewing and Counselling, London.: B.T., Butsford. 

11. Chopra, R.N. and : Drug Addiction with Special Reference 

Chopra, F.C., 1965 to India, New Delhi. Council of Scientific & Industrial 

Research. 

12. National Institute of : Drug Abuse (Summaries of Research Studies). 

Social Defence, Govt. 

of India,1992 

13. Cohan, Raquel E, 2006 : Mental Health Services in Disaster: Instructor’s Guide, Pan 

America Health Organization, World Health 

Organization,Washington USA. 

14. World Health Organization, : Mental Health of Refugees,WHO 

1996. Publications,Geneva. 

15. World Health Organisation : The ICD-10 Classification of Mental and 1992. 

Behavioural Disorders. clinical descriptions and 

diagnostic guidelines, Oxford University Press, Delhi. 

16. Single Eric et al, 2003 : International Guidelines for Estimating the Costs of 

Substance Abuse and . Addiction, WHO Publication, 

Geneva. 

17. Tredgold, R.F & Wolff : U.C.H Handbook of Psychiatry (2 nd ed.), 

H.H. 1975. Duckworth, London. 

18. Singh, Chandra Paul. : Mansik Mandata- Karan, Pehchan,Upchar, 

2005. avam Punarwas (Hindi). Kanishka Publishers.Delhi. 

19. Upadhyay, R.K. & Sandhya : Mental Disorders and Mental Health Policy, 

New Delhi, Kanishka. 

10(658) 



Paper-V 

Environmental Imbalance and Disaster Management 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

UNIT-I 

- Ecology and environment: meaning, nature and components. 

- Environmental imbalance: global warming and green house effect, ozone 

layer depletion and its effects. 

- Pollution: land, water, air, noise- causes, effects, prevention and control. 

UNIT-II 

- The Environment Protection Act, 1986. 

- Role of government, NGOs and general public in environment protection. 

- Environmental movements in India. 

- Areas for social work intervention in environment protection. 

- Local people and their participation. 

UNIT-III 

- Disaster: concept, meaning, definition and types (natural and man made) 

- Factors contributing to disasters: Political, economic, social, technological, cultural, 

geographical etc. 

- Impact of disasters: Physical, economic, spatial, psycho-social etc. 

UNIT-IV 

- Disaster management: concept, meaning and definition. 

- Pre-disaster prevention and mitigation of disasters. 

- Protection against post disaster effects and Rehabilitation. 

- National Disaster Management Authority: organization and functions 

- Role of Govt. and NGOs in disaster management. 

- Social Work intervention at different levels. 

Note: - 








(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography: 

1. Ryding, S.O. 1992 : Environmental Management Handbook, Ahmedabad: IOS Press. 

2. Sapru, R.K.ed. 1987 : Environment Management in India, Vol. II, New Delhi: 

Ashish Publishing House. 

3. Sharma,P.D. 1995 : Ecology and Environment, New Delhi: Rastogi Publishers. 

10(659) 


4. Shiva, vandana 1991 : The violence of the Green Revolution, Goa: The other India 

Press. 

5. Birnabaum, F., Coplon, : “Crisis Intervention after a Natural Disaster” 

J., and Scharff, I.1973 Social Case Work. Vol. 54, No. 9. 545-551. 

6. Blaufard, H. and Levine, : “Crisis Intervention in an Earthquake.” Social 

J. 1972 Work Vol. 17, No. 4, 16-19. 

7. Fritz, C. E. 1968 : “Disaster.” Sills, D. (ed) International Encyclopedia of Social 

Science. Vol. 4. U.S.A 

The Macmillan Company and the Free Press. 202-208. 

8. Gangrade, K.D. and : Challenge and Response. 

Dhadde, S. 1973 Delhi : Rachna Publications. 

9. Grossman, L. 1973 : Train Crash : Social Work and Disaster Services. Social Work. 

Vol.18, No. 5, 38-44. 

10. Hoff, A. 1978 : People in Crisis. Understanding and Helping. California: 

Addison Wesley Publishing Company. 

11. Joint Assistant Centre : Natural Disaster. New Delhi: 

1980 Adhyatma Sadhana Kendra. 

12. Shader, I. and : Management of Reaction to Disaster. Social Work. Vol. II, 

No. 2, 99-1-4. 

Schwartz, A. 1966 : 13. Siporin, M. 1966 : The Experience of Aiding the victims 

of 

Hurricane Betsy. Social Service Review. Vol. 10 

14. Wolfenstein, M. 1977 : Disaster : A Psychological Eassy. New York:Arno Press. 

15. Uberoi, N.K., 2009 Environmental Studies, Excel Publications, New Delhi. 

Semester– III 

Paper-VI (1) (a) 

Human Resource Management and Industrial Relations- I 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

. 

UNIT – I 

- Human Resource Management: meaning, definition, objectives, scope and significance. 

- Difference between personnel Management, Human Resource Management and Human 

Resource Development. 

- Functions of Human Resource Management. 

- Recent trends of Human Resource Management and challenges in India. 

UNIT – II 

- Human Resource Planning: definition, objectives, need and importance. 

- Levels of Human Resource Planning. 

- Human Resource Planning Process: its problems and pre-requisites of effective Human 

Resource Planning. 

- Recruitment: meaning, definition, process, sources, methods and techniques 

- Selection: meaning, definition and its process. 

- Psychological Tests, Interview, Induction, Placements, Promotion, Demotion and 

transfer. 

10(660) 


UNIT – III 

- Training: meaning and concept, need and importance, steps and methods of training 

programme. 

- Executive Development: meaning and concept, need and importance, steps and methods 

of development programme. 

- Career Planning, Career Development and Succession Planning: meaning, concept, 

stages and process. 

- Industrial Health and Safety. 

UNIT – IV 

- Job Analysis and Design: concept, objectives, process and methods. 

- Job Evaluation: concept, objectives, process and methods of job evaluation. 

- Performance and Potential Appraisal: concept, objectives, process and methods of 

Performance Appraisal. 

- Voluntary Retirement Scheme. 

- Industrial Relations: concept, scope, objectives, importance and its Approaches. 

- Key Issues and emerging trends in industrial relations. 

Note:- 








(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography: 

1. Dole Yoder, 1975 : Personnel Management and Industrial Relations, Printice Hall 

of India, New Delhi. 

2.David Goss, 1997. : Human Resource Management, International Thomson 

Business Press, London. 

3. Debi S. Saini and : Human Resource Management (Perspectives for 

Sanu A. Khan, ed. 2000 . the New Era), Response Books, New Delhi. 

4. Edwin B. Flippo, 1984 : Personnel Management, McGrow-Hill, New York. 

5. Gary Dessler, 2002 : Human Resource Management, Practice-Hall of India Private 

Limited, New Delhi. 

6.Gupta C.B. 2002 : Human Resource Management, Sultan Chand and Sons, New 

Delhi. 

7. Khanka S.S. 2003 : Human Resource Management (Text and Cases) S. Chand & 

Company Limited, New Delhi. 

8. Koontz H. and others, 1986 : Essentials of Management, McGrow Hill, New York. 

9. Mamoria C.B. 1994 : Personnel Management, Himalaya Publishing House, 

Bombay. 

10. Mark Mendenhall and : International Human Resource Management, PWS 

Gary Addau, ed. 1991 – Kent Publishing Company, Boston. 

11. Monappa Arun, 1997 : Managing Human Resources, Macmillan India Limited, New 

Delhi. 

10(661) 


12. National Institute of : Personnel Management in India, Asia Publishing Personnel 

Management, 1973 House, Bombay. 

13. Phillio, E.B. 1980 : Principles of Personnel Management, McGrow Hill Books 

Company, New York. 

14. Punekar, S.D. : Labour Welfare, Trade Unionism and Industrial 

and others, 1984: Relations, Himalaya Publishing Company, Mumbai. 

15. Rao V.S.P. 2005 : Human Resource Management (Text and Cases) Excel Books, 

New Delhi 

16. Schein E.H. 1978 : Carrier Dynamics: Matching Individual and Organizational 

Needs, Addison Wesley, Reading Massachussetts. 

17. Sharma A.H. 1988 : Aspects of Labour Welfare and Social Security, Himalaya 

Publishing Company, Mumbai. 

18. Sharma D.C. and : Personnel Management: Surjeet Prakashan, Meerut. 

Sharma R.C. 1988 

19. Sodhi J.S. 1996 : Industrial Relations and Human Resources in India, B.R. 

Publishing Corporation, Delhi. 

20 Sengupta N and Bhattacharya: International Human Resource Management, Excel 

M. 2009 Publication, New Delhi. 

21 Aquinas P.G. 2009 : Essentials of Organization Behaviour, Excel Publication, New 

Delhi. 

Semester– III 

Paper-VI (1) (b) 

Labour Welfare and Labour Legislations- I 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

UNIT: I 

- Concept & importance of labour 

- Socio-Economic characteristics of Indian labour 

- Organized and Unorganized labour: meaning, characteristics and problems. 

- Globalization and its impact on Indian labour 

- The Factories Act, 1948 

- The Trade Unions Act, 192 

UNIT: II 

- Labour Welfare: concept and scope 

- Theories/approaches of labour welfare 

- Principles of labour welfare 

- Agencies of labour welfare in India 

- Types of labour welfare measures: intra mural and extra mural, statutory and nonstatutory 

UNIT: III 

- Labour Welfare Officer: - Statutory position, role, status and functions. 

- Welfare of women labour. 

- Prohibition & Rehabilitation of child labour & bonded labour. 

- Role of social worker in promotion of welfare of labour. 

- The Industrial Disputes Act, 1947 

10(662) 


- The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act, 1946 

UNIT: IV 

- The Building and Other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment and 

Condition of Services) Act, 1996. 

- The Unorganised Workers’ Social Security Act, 2008. 

- Domestic Workers (Registration, Social Security and Welfare) Act, 2008. 

- Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act, 1970. 

Note: - 








(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography: 

1. Pandey, S.M.(ed),1976 : Rural Labour in India, New Delhi:Shri Ram Centre 

2. Joshi,V.,1987 : Migrant Labour and related Issue, 

New Delhi : Oxford and IBH Publishers 

3. Bhogoliwal, TN : Economics of Labour and Indistrial Relations, 

Agra : Sahitaya Bhawan 

4. Moorthy, M.V.,1982 : Principles of Labour Welfare, New Delhi : Oxford . 

& IBH Publishing Co. 

6. Saxena,R.C. : Labour problems& social welfare, 

Meerut: Jai Parkash Pub. House 

10 Sharma, A.M.,1988 : Aspects of Labour Welfare and Social Security, Mumabai : 

Himalya Publishing 

7. Pant, S.C. : Indian Labour Problems, Chaitanya Publishing House. 

8. Punekar, S.D.& ; Labour Welfare, Trade vnionism and Industrial 

Others, 1978 Relations, Mumbai: Himalaya publishing Housing 

9. Ministry of Labour : Report of National Commision on labour, New Delhi :Govt. 

of India (2 nd ed) 

10. Vaid, K.N. Labour Welfare in India, New Delhi: Shri Ram Centre for 

industrial relations. 

11. Banerjee N Women Workers in theUnorganised Sector, Sangam 

Book 1985. 

12. Gangrade, K.D. Women and Child workers in unorganized sector: 

Non-Government Organization perspectives, New Delhi, 

Concept, 1983. 

13. ILO, Structure and functions of Rural Workers 

Organization, Geneva 1978. 

14. Jain Mahaveer Bonded labour-Justice through Judiciary, Manak Publishers in 

association with V.V.giri Labour Institute, 1997 

15. Sharma, A.M. Welfare of special categories of Labour, Himalaya, 1990 

16. Tripathy, S.N Migrant child labour in Inida, Mohit Publications.New Delhi, 

1997. 

17. Ministry of Labour Second Labour Commission Report 

10(663) 


G.O.I (2002) 

18. Puri, S.K., 1981: An Introduction to Labour and Industrial Laws, 

Allahabad Law Agency. 

19. Sahary, H.K. 1987. Industrial and Labour Laws of India, New Delhi: New 

Delhi: Prentice Hall 

20. Singh B.D., 2009 Industrial Relations and Labour Laws, Excel Publication, 

New Delhi. 

21. Singh B.D., 2009 Labour Laws for Managers, Excel Publication, New Delhi. 

Paper – VI Option – II (a) 


Family Dynamics: Issues & Needs-I 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

UNIT – I 

- Family as an Institution – importance and functions 

- Impact of Urbanization on Family 

- Role of Family in Social Development 

- Indian Family – its characteristics viz. power structure, patriarchal norms, values and 

practices, Changing Functions of Family 

- Ecology and the Family 

- Family Disorganization and Family Problems 

UNIT – II 

- Husband, Wife and Children relationship; Single Parent Family 

- Family Life Education – objectives and process, Family Life Education as a method of 

Family enrichment 

- Family Counseling and Guidance 

- Family Welfare Policy and Programmes 

- Voluntary and Government agencies for Family Welfare 

- Poverty and Family Life 

- 

UNIT – III 

- Patterns of mothering and child rearing practices in India 

- Family Management – nature and principles 

- Family Budgeting 

- Problems of Girl Child and Women in India 

- Legal Rights of Women 

- Factors affecting the status of women 

UNIT – IV 

- Role of Women in Development 

- Women’s Social Organizations 

- Institutional Services for Handicapped and Destitute Women 

- Current socio-economic schemes for women of weaker sections 

- Traditional and emerging role of professional social worker in the filed of women’s 

development 

10(664) 


Note: - 








(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography: 

1. Dasai, M.(ed), 1994 : Family and Intervention: A Course Compendium, Mumbai, 

TISS. 

2. TISS,1993 : Special Isasue of the Indian journal of Social Work 

on “Family Development”54(1)Mumbai, TISS. 

3. Hartman, Ann and : Family Centred Sfdocial welefare 

Laired, Joan, 1986 Practice, London Press. 

4. Fanscca, Mobel, : Family and Marriage in Inida, Jaipur: Sachin 

1980 Publication 

5. Tata institute of : Family(Special Issue),The Journal of Social work 

Social Sciences Vol. XLVII, No.1, April 

1986 

6. Gangrade, K.L. : Social Network and Social work, 

1985 Crisis Management in Indian families, New Delhi Northern 

Book Centre 

7. Shrinivasan, etc : Dynamics of Population and family 

Care, New Delhi: Himalaya Pub. House 

8. Gore,M.S.1968 : Urbanization and family Change Popular Parkashan, Mumbai 

9. Singh A.N. 1990 : Child Labour Sociao-Economic Perspective, Shipra, New 

Delhi 

10. Chowdhary, D. Paul : Child Welfare and Development; 

1980 Atma Ram and Sons, New Delhi. 

11. Kuppuswamy,B. : Child and Development, Vikas 

1980 Publishing House Pvt.Ltd,New Delhi. 

12. Ghosh, S.K., : Women in a Changing Society, 

1984 Ashish Publishing House Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi. 

13. Brien Shirley, O. : Child Abuse, Uni. Press, .USA. 

1980 

14 Chowdhary, D. : Hand Book of Social welfare 

Paul 1981 Atma Ram and Sons, New Delhi. 

15. Mitra, Alok etc., : The Status of women in Occupational 1961 to 1971 Delhi: 

Abhinav. 

16. Chattopadhya : Indian women’ Battle for freedom Delhi 

Kamla Devi 1982 Abhinav. 

17. NIPCCD,1975 : Social Problem of Working Mothers, New Delhi. 

18. Slhrivastva : women and law, New Delhi: Intellectual Publishing 

T.M.,1985 Housing. 

19. Dhagamwar, : Women and Divorce, ICSSR (Minco). Vassudha,1979 

10(665) 


20. Gandhi,M.K.1950 : Women’s role in Society Ahmedabad :Navjeevan Publishing 

House. 

Semester III 

Paper-VI Option – II (b) 

Developmental Services for Child and Women - I 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

UNIT-I 

- Child Welfare- concept & philosophy 

- Nature and extent of Child development needs; problems of children ; Demographic 

profile of child in India. 

- Evolution of child welfare services in India and abroad. 

- Types of Child Welfare Services and the changing trends in child welfare services. 

- Nature, extent and causes of the problem of children in difficult circumstances: 

- Destitute, Neglected, Handicapped, Mentally Retarded. 

UNIT-II 

- Role of voluntary organizations in the field of child development. 

- Welfare Programmes for the care and protection of the handicapped and 

destitute children. 

Preventive Services for Children- Child Guidance Clinic, School Social Work 

- Non –Institutional Services for Children – Adoption, Foster Care, and Sponsorship 

Programme 

- Recreational Services for Children – Bal Bhawan, Film, Play centres. 

UNIT-III 

- Integrated Child Development Scheme- its concept, objectives and services. 

- Organizational and Administrative structure of ICDS. 

- Child welfare services in Five Year Plans. 

- Protective services for children under J.J Act 2000 and Domestic workers Act, 2008. 

UNIT-IV 

- Indicators of Women’s position – Issues and Challenges : demographic profile, 

education, health, employment and work 

- Working Mothers – causes, conditions and protections 

- Problem faced by Women in - organized sector, unorganized sector, self-employed. 

Note: - 






10(666) 




(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography: 

1. Berry, Juliet : Social Work with Children, Routledge and Kegan 

1972. Paul, London. 

2. Desai, N. and : Indian Women : Change and Challenges in the 

Patel, V International Decade, Popular Prakashan, Bombay. 

3. Evertt. J.1981. : Women & Social change in India, Heritage Publishers, New 

Delhi. 

4. NIPCCD.1984 : Perspective plan on Child Development (1980- 

2060),The Author, New Delhi. 

5. Rani Asha 1986 :Children in difficult situation in India-A Review, TISS, 

Mumbai. 

6. Gangrade K.D.1985. : Social network and Social Work in Indian Families : Crisis 

Management, Delhi, Northern Book Centre. 

7. Mcpharson Steward : Five Hundred Million Children, poverty and child 

1987. Welfare in the Third World, New York, St. Martinis Press. 

8. Singh. R.R. : Social Care of child in Delhi : Policy, Programme 

1987. And process, Deptt. of Social Work. 

9. Sharm Shakti : A Report of National Commission on self employed 

1988. Women and Women informal sector. 

10. Mahadevan K. (ed) : Policies and Strategies for Child Survival 

1990. Experiences from Asia, Delhi. B.R. Publishing Corporation. 

11. Omvedt, Gail : Violence against Women : New Movements and 

1990. New Theories in India, Kali for Women, New Delhi. 

12. Dubey, Leela and : Structure and Strategies : Women, Work and 

Palkiwala, J (ed) Family, Sage Publications, New Delhi. 

1990. 

13. Govt. of India, Deptt. : National Plan of Action-A Commitment to the 

Of Women and Child Child. 

Development. 1992. 

14. NIPCCD.1992 : National Evaluation of Integrated Child 

Development Service, New Delhi, The Author. 

15. Kanth Amod & : Neglected child-changing Perspective Prayas 

Varma R.M.1993. Juvenile Aid Centre, New Delhi 

16. NIPCCD. : Child in India a Statistical profile, National 

1994. Institute of Public Cooperation and Child Development, New 

Delhi. 

17. Joshi, Sandhya : Child Survival, Health and Social Work 

1996. Intervention, Concept Publishing Company, New Delhi. 

18. Kaul Sandhya. : Child-Bearing a Scoial Phenomen on, New Delhi, Rawat 

Publications. 

19. Nehal, Ashraf : Crime against Women, Commonwealth Publishers, 

1996. New Delhi. 

20. Purshothman, : The Empowerment of Women in India. New Delhi, Sangeeta. 

1998. Sage Publication. 

10(667) 


Semester-III 

Paper-VI, Elective III (a) 

Policy and Development of Health Care-I 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

UNIT-I 

- Concept of Health: individual and community health 

- Health and Social Work, medical social work: meaning, nature, scope 

- Health problems-economic considerations, social and cultural aspects 

- Role and functions of Social Workers in hospital and in community health. 

UNIT-II 

- Major health problems of the disadvantaged such as T.B., leprosy, malaria and 

other communicable diseases 

- Psycho-social effects of disabilities on growth and development 

- Health work in the hospitals: work with patient, individual groups and 

community, family and collaterals 

UNIT-III 

- Specialized services-problems of the deaf, blind and orthopedically handicapped 

Indian and western treatment and approaches to various psychiatric problems 

Review of mental health services, economic aspects and effectiveness of various 

models of treatment. 

UNIT-IV 

- National Health Policy: national health programmes a critical analysis 

- Rehabilitation services-concept, nature and services for psychiatric and the 

physically disabled 

- Prevention of mental health problems and promotion of mental health 

- Role of Social Workers, individually and as a part of a team of professionals. 

- Role of international organizations in health care 

Note: - 








(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography: 

1. Doyal, Lestely and Health, Medicine and Underdevelopment, 

Pennell, Imogen, 1978 : Economic & Political Weekly, Vol.XI, 31-33, 

August, Special Number. 

2. Hasan, K.A.,1978 : Medical Sociology of Rural India, 

Sachin Publications. 

3. King, Maurice (ed),1966: Medical Care in Developing Countries; 

10(668) 


Symposium from Makerere, London : 

Oxford University Press. 

4. Mahajan, B.K.,1969: Health Services in India, Jamnagar : Aruna B. Mahajan. 

5. Naik, J.P.,1977 : An alternative system of health care services in 

India; Some proposals; Allied Pub., Pvt. Ltd. 

6. Park, J.R. & Park,K., : Textbook of Preventive and Social Medicine, 

2005 Jabalpur : M/s Banarsidas,Bhonot Publishers. 

7. Paul, Benjamin, D.,1985 : Health Culture and Community, Case Studies of 

Public Reactions to Health Programmes; Russell 

Sage Foundations. 

8. Rao, Dr.K.N.,1968 : Health Services, Public Health in Encyclopedia 

Of Social Work in India, Vol. I ; Publications 

Divisions. 

9. Sundaram, E.B.,1975 : Health Services with Social Justice, Voluntary 

Action, Vol.17, No.6. 

10. UNICEF : Health and Basic Services : Keys to Development 

New Delhi. 

11. Morley, David, Rohde Practising Health for All, Oxford Medical 

Jon and William. G.1985 : Publications. 

12. Simith, Bryan, C.,1978 : Community Health : An Epidemiological 

Approach : New York : Macmillan Pub. Co. 

13. Banarjee, G.R.,1950 : Social Service Department in Hospital : Its 

Organization and Functions, Mumbai. 

14. Bartalatt, Harriet M.1961 : Social Work Practice in the Health Field, New 

York : National Association of Social Work. 

15. Codey, Carol H.,1951 : Social Aspects of Illness, Philadelphia & 

London : W.B. Sounders Co. 

16. Caplan, Gerald, 1961 : An Approach to Community Mental Health, 

Grune and Stratton. 

Paper-VI, Elective III (b) 

Semester-III 

Psycho-Social Perspectives of Mental Health-I 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

UNIT-I 

- Concept of normality and abnormality 

- Epidemiology of mental illness: incidence and prevalence of mental disorders in 

India 

- Concept of mental health, community mental health, community psychiatry 

UNIT-II 

- Classification of mental diseases: ICD-10 and DSM IV & IV(R) 

- Scope of Psychiatric Social Work and role of Psychiatric Social Worker 

Mental Health Act 1986 – A review. 

10(669) 


UNIT-III 

- Psychoneurotic disorders: anxiety states, hysteria, obsessive compulsive 

reactions 

- Neurotic depression and neurasthenia to be discussed in terms of symptoms and 

common treatment method 

- Magnitude of the problem worldwide and analysis of the problem from different 

perspectives 

UNIT-IV 

- Psychotic reactions-schizophrenia, MDP 

- Paranoid State to be discussed in terms of its types, symptoms, treatment and 

rehabilitation 

- Epilepsy-types and management 

- Mental Retardation causes, types-management and rehabilitation 

- Personality disorders-nature and types 

Note: - 








(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography: 

1. Morley, David, Rohde : Practising Health for All, Oxford Medical 

Jon and William. G.1983 Publications. 



Sage Publication. 


Approach : New York : Macmillan Pub. Co..Inc. 


Organization and functions, Mumbai : Tata 

Institute of Social Science. 

5. Bartkatt Harriet, M.,1961 : Social Work Practice in the Health Field, New 

York : National Association, of Social Workers. 

6. Codey,Carol H.,1951 : Social Aspects of Illness, PhiladelPhia & 

London : W.B. Founders Co. 

7. Caplan, Gerald, 1961 : An Approach to Community Mental Health, 

Grune and Stratton. 

8. UNICEF : Health and Basic Services : Keys to Development New Delhi. 

9. Sundaram, E.B.,1975 : Health Services with Social Justice, Voluntary 


10. Park,K,2005 : Textbook of Preventive and Social Medicine, 

Jabalpur : M/s Banarsidas,Bhonot Publishers. 

11. Doyall, Lesley and : Health, Medicine and Underdevelopment Pennell, 

Imogen, 1978 Economic and Political Weekly, Vol.XI,31-33 

10(670) 


August : Special Number. 



13. Khandekar, Mandakani : The Social Dimensions of Child Nutrition 

among the economically disadvantaged in Greater Mumbai. 

14. Mahajan, B.K.,1969 : Health Services inIndia, Aruna. B. Mahajan. 

15. Naik, J.P.,1977 : An alternative system of health care service in India; Some 

proposals; Allied Pub.Pvt.Ltd. 

16. World Health Organization,: Mental Health of Refugees,WHO 


17. World Health Organisation :The ICD-10 Classification of Mental and 

1992. Behavioural Disorders. clinical descriptions and diagnostic 

guidelines,Oxford University Press, Delhi 

18. Single Eric et al, 2003 : International Guidelines for Estimating the Costs of 

Substance Abuse and . Addiction, WHO Publication, Geneva. 

19. Tredgold, R.F & Wolff : U.C.H Handbook of Psychiatry (2 nd ed.), 


20. Singh, Chandra Paul. : Mansik Mandata- Karan, Pehchan,Upchar, 

2005. avam Punarwas(Hindi). Kanishka Publishers.Delhi. 

Paper-VI, Elective IV (a) 

Semester-III 

Rural Community Development: Policies and programmes-I 

10(671) 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

UNIT-I 

- Rural Community: definition, features and Characteristics. 

- Rural Sociology and its use in understanding of rural community. 

- Major Institutions of Indian Rural Community: religion, caste, class, marriage and 

family. 

UNIT-II 

- Traditional village organizations; Panchayat, caste panchayat, Khap panchayat and 

informal justice system in rural communities. 

- Community Power Structure: leadership in Indian villages: factors influencing 

leadership and changing patterns of leadership in Indian villages. 

- Provision of loan and its related problems; return of loan, waiving off loan and its 

impact. 

UNIT-III 

- Democratic Decentralization: concept and importance. 

- Panchayati Raj in India: Balwant Rai Mehta Committee and Ashok Mehta 

Committee reports, 73rd Constitutional Amendment. 


- Representation of people’s Act. 

- Rural employment, under -employment and unemployment. 

- Government efforts to minimize and remove rural unemployment 

UNIT-IV 

- Rural economy: definition, scope and pattern. 

- Economics of agriculture. 

- Problems related to agriculture- technical, irrigation, manure, fertilizer, land and live 

stock. 

- Land reforms in India. 

- Surplus Land: its distribution and use. 

Note: - 








(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography: 

1. Arora R.K : People’s Participation in Development Process: 

Essays in honour of B.Mehta, Jaipur,The HMC state 

Institut of Public Administration. 

2. Gandhi M.K 1958 : Sarvodaya (The Welfare of all), Ahmadabad, 

Navjivan Publishing House. 

3. Sussman, M.B 1959 : community Structure and analysis, new York, Thomas Y. 

Crowell Co. 

4. Dayal, R. 1960 : Community Development Programme in India, 

Allahabad Kitab Mahal Publishers. 

5. Hamumantha Rao, C.H : Economic Reforms and Poverty Allivation in India, 

And Lime man, Hans 1966 Sage New Delhi. 

6. Biddle, W.Willam & : Encouraging Community Development –A Training Guide 

Biddle J.Lourride. 1968 for Local Workers, Lite & Life Publishers, New Delhi. 

7. Brager, G & Specht,H 1969: Community Organization, New York: Columbia 


8. Desai A.R 1969 : Rural Sociology in India (IV th revised ed), Popular 

Prakashan, Mumbai. 

9. Dayal, R.1970 : Panchayati Raj in India, Delhi, Metropolitan Book Co. 

10. Ramchandra Raj, G 1974: Functions and Dysfunction of Social Conflicts, Bombay, 

Popular Prakashan. 

11. Jones, D.& Mayo.M.1974: Community Work, Rutledge and Kegan Paul, London. 

12. Dandavate,M. 1977 : Marx and Gandhi, Bombay: Popular Prakashan Pvt. Ltd. 

13. Raiman Eva Schindler: The Volunteer Community, University Associates Inc. 

& Lippit, Ronald. 1977 California. 

14. Lal,A.K 1977 Politics of Poverty : A study of bonded labour, New Delhi, 

Chetana Publication. 

10(672) 


15. Poleson and Sannderson.: Rural Community Organization, New Work, John 

1979 Wiley and Sons. 

16. Long, Norman, 1984 : Introduction to the Sociology of development, Tavistoik, 

London. 

17. Roy, Ramashray.1986 Dialogues on Development, Sage Publications, London. 

18. Singh, K. 1986 Rural Development, Principles, Policies and Mangt. 

New Delhi, Sage Publication. 

19. Siddiqui, H.Y 1997 : Working with Communities: A Introduction to Community 

Work, New Delhi, Hira Publications. 

20. Desai, Vasant. 1998 : Rural Development (Vol.1 to 4). Himalaya Publishing 

House, Bombay. 

Paper-VI, Elective IV (b) 

Semester-III 

Urban Community Development: Polices and Programme-I 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

UNIT-I 

- Urban Community: concept and characteristics 

- Growth of cities; causes and consequences, different related concepts such as 

metropolis, towns, megapolis. 

- Urbanization: concept, causes, process and significance for human development. 

UNIT-II 

- Urbanization in India: Demographic and occupational aspects, economic pattern. 

- Urbanization and social institutions such as marriage, family, education, religion and 

recreation. 

- Urbanization and economic development, urbanization and problems of social 

defense. 

- Social implications of urbanization: emergence of urban slums; causes, growth and 

problems, life and living in slum, slum city relationship, different programmes 

related to slum. 

UNIT-III 

- Urban Community Development (UCD): need, concept, historical development, 

assumptions, philosophy objectives, functional areas, methods and programmes of 

urban community development, barriers of urban community development. 

UNIT-IV 

- Urban poverty: nature and extent 

- Factors and implications of urban poverty. 

- Developmental programmes for urban poor. 

- Review of urban planning in India. 

- Scope of social work intervention in urban development. 

10(673) 


Note: - 








(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography: 

1 Sussman, M.B 1959 : Community Structure and analysis, new York, 

Thomas Y. Crowell Co. 


Allahabad, Kitab Mahal Publishers. 

3. Batten, T.R.1965 The Human Factor in Community Work, London: 


4. Nagpaul,Hans. 1966 : Modernization and Urbanization in India, Rawat 

Publication,Jaipur. 

5. Hamumantha Rao, C.H : Economic Reforms and Poverty Allivation in India, 

And Limeman, Hans 1966 Sage New Delhi 

6. Biddle, W.Willam & : Encouraging Community Development –A Training Guide 

Biddle J.Lourride. 1968 for Local Workers, Lite & Life Publishers, New Delhi 

7. Schwartz, David B 1970: Who Cares Rediscovering Community, USA, West view 

Press. 

8. Desai, A.R and : A Profile of an Indian Slums: University of Mumbai, 

Pillai, S.D. 1972 Mumbai. 

9. Centre for Urban Studies,: Urban Planning and Development Authorities, The Author, 

IIPA, 1974. New Delhi. 

10. Clinard, M.B. 1976 : Slums and Community Development, Experiments in Self 

Help , Free Press, New York. 

11. Raiman Eva Schindler : The Volunteer Community, University Associates Inc. 

& Lippit, Ronald. 1977 California. 

12. Chandra,Subhash 1977 : Social Participation in Urban Neighborhoods’, National 

Publishing House, New Delhi. 

13. Lal,A.K 1977 Politicts of Poverty : A study of bonded labour, 

New Delhi, Chetana Publlication. 

14. Twelvetrees,A. 1982 : Community Work, London, Macmillan Press Ltd. 

15. Roy, Ramashray.1986 Dialogues on Development, Sage Publications, London. 

16. Jacob,I Thudipara. 1993: Urban Community Development, Rawat Publication, Jaipur 

And New Delhi. 

17. Kasambi,Meera. 1994 : Urbanisation and Urban Development in India,ICSSR, 

New Delhi. 

18. Weil, M (Ed) 1996 : Community Practice: Concepts, Models, New York, 

The Haworth Press. Inc. 

19. Siddiqui, H.Y 1997 : Working with Communities:An Introduction to Community 

Work , New Delhi, Hira Publications. 

20. Mishra,G.K and : Development Programmes for Urban Poor, New Delhi, 

Narain,M.K IIPA. 

10(674) 


21. Five Year Plans : Planning Commission New Delhi 

22. Chandrasekhara, : Urban Perspective-2000, National Institute of Urban Affair, 

C.S & others New Delhi. 

Paper-VI, Elective V (a) 

Crime and Criminal Justice-I 

Semester-III 

UNIT-I 

- Criminology: definition, nature and scope 

- Social, psychological and legal approaches of criminology 

- Relationship of criminology with other social sciences . 

- Relevance of criminology to contemporary society 

UNIT-II 

- Crime: definition and nature, forms and consequences 

- Theories of Crime : Sociological theories, Ecological theory. 

- Culture Conflict theory 

- Differential Association theory. 

- Anomie theory 

UNIT-III 

- Social change, 

- Social deviance 

- Social disorganization 

- Individual disorganization, 

- Group disorganization, 

- Community disorganization 

- Family disorganization 

UNIT -IV 

- Criminal Justice System : meaning, purpose and social relevance 

- Historical evolution of criminal justice system 

- Overview of CJS: national and international perspective. 

- Co ordination in criminal justice system. 

10(675) 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

Note: 








(4X15=60 Marks) 


Bibliography: 

1. Burke, Roger Hopkins 2003. : Introduction to Criminological Theory, Lawman (Inc) Pvt 

Ltd, New Delhi. 

2. Tara Gray 2002. : Exploring Corrections, Allyn and Bacon, Boston 

3. Srivastava, S. S. 2002. : Criminology and Criminal Administration, Central Law 

Agency, New Delhi. 

4. Williams, Katherine. S. 2001. : Textbook on Criminology, 3rd edition, Universal Law 

Publishing Co., Delhi. 

5.Paranjape, N. V. 2001.: Criminology and Penology, 2nd edition,Central aw 

Publication, Allahabad, UP. 

6. Coleman, Clive. 2000. : Introducing Criminology, Willan Publication, UK. 

7. Ahuja, Ram. 2000. : Criminology, Rawat Publication, New Delhi. 

8. Brogden, Mike. 2000. : Crime, Abuse and the Elderly, Lawman (Inc) Pvt Ltd, New 

Delhi 

9. Siegel, Larry J. 2000. : Criminology, Wadsworth Thomson Learning, New Delhi 

10. Tripathy, P. C. 2000.: Crime against Working Women, APH Publishing Co., New 

Delhi. 

11 Ebbe, Obi N. Ignatius. 2000. : Comparative and International Criminal 

Justice System: Policing, Judiciary and Butterworth, 

Butterworth, Boston Corrections,. 

12. Shah, Giriraj. 1999. : Crime and Criminology, Anmol Publications Pvt, New Delhi. 

13. Schmalleger, Frank. 1999.: Criminology Today: An Integrative Introduction 2nd edition, 

Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 

14. Shah, Giriraj. 1999.: Crime and Criminology, Anmol Publications, New Delhi 

15. Atri, P. K. 1998. : Dynamics of Crime Prevention and Criminology, Anmol 


16.Livingston, Jay. 1996. : Crime and Criminology, Prentice Hall, New Jersey 

17Choudhuri, Mrinmaya. 1995: Languishing for Justice: Being a Critical Survey of the Criminal 

Justice System, Datt Sons, Nagpur 

18. Reid, Sue Titus. 1988: Crime and Criminology, Holt Rinehart and Winston, New York. 

19. Mehraj -ud-din, Mir, 1984. : Crime and Criminal Justice System in India, Deep & Deep 

Publications, New Delhi 

20. Das, Ram Mohan. 1982. : Crime and Punishment in India: With a particular reference to 

the Manusmrti, Kanchan Publications, Bodh-Gaya 

21. Akers, Ronald L. 2004. : Criminological Theories, Rawat Publications, Jaipur 

22. Williams Katherine S. 2001. : Text Book on Criminology, Universal Law Publishing Co. 

New Delhi. 

Semester-III 

Paper VI (V) (b) 

Institutional Services and Rehabilitation of Criminals-1 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

UNIT- I 

- Nature, meaning and importance of punishment 

- Forms of punishment in ancient, medieval and modern times. 

- Theories of punishment 

10(676) 


- New alternative forms of punishment. 

UNIT-II 

- Definition and need of prison 

- Prisons in ancient, medieval and modern times 

- Types of prisoners. 

- Prison reforms:- Role of inquiry committees and commissions. 

- Prison administration. 

UNIT-III 

- History and evolution of prison legislations in India 

- Prisons Act. 

- Prisoners Act: Transfer of Prisoners Act 

- Jail Manuals 

- UN Standard Minimum Rules for treatment of prisoners and other standard 

settings, conventions and documents. 

UNIT- IV 

- Meaning, purpose and types of institutional and non institutional Services for 

offenders 

- Correctional programs, 

- Probation & Parole, meaning, scope and legal provisions under Probation of 

Offenders Act and other laws 

- After care and Rehabilitation services. 

- Role of NGOs 

Note: - 








(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography: 

1. Paranjape, N. V. 2005. : Criminology & Penology. Central Law Publications. 

2. Rani Dhavan Shankardass. 2000: Punishment and the Prison – Indian and International 

Perspectives, Sage Publications, New Delhi. 

3. Chakrabarti, N K. 1999. : Institutional Corrections, Deep & Deep Publications, New 

Delhi. 

4. Vadackumchery, James. 1998: Crime Police and Correction, APH Publishing Co. 

New Delhi. 

5. Deb, R. 1998. : Criminal Justice, The Law Book Company Pvt Ltd, 

Allahabad. 

6. Renquld, Ville, 

Ugljesa Zuekic Jon F Klaus. 1997: Promoting Probation Internationally, United Nations 

Publications. 

7. George S Bridges, 

Joseph G Weis, 

Robert D Crutchfield, 1996. : Criminal Justice, Pine Forge Press, New Delhi. 

8. Snarr, Richard W. 1996. : Introduction to Corrections: Brown and Benchmark, 

10(677) 


9. Harland, Alan J. 1996. : Choosing Correctional Options that work, Sage Publications, 

New Delhi 

10. Abadinsky Howard. 1994: Probation & Parole, Simon & Schuster Company, New Jersey 

11. Williamson, Harold E. 1990. : The Corrections Profession, Sage Publications, New Delhi. 

12. Robert M Carter, Daniel Glaser: Correctional Institutions, Harper & Row Publishers 

Leslie T Wilkins, 1985. Inc. 

13. Bart ollas Clemens, 1985. : Correctional Treatment: Theory and Practice, Prentice Hall, 

New Jersey. 

14. Robert M Carter, Daniel Glaser, 

Leslie T Wilkins, 1984. : Probation, Parole and Community Corrections, Prentice Hall, New 

Jersey. 

15. Carney, Louis P, 1980. : Corrections, Treatment & Philosophy. Prentice Hall, New 

Jersey. 

16. Justice Malimath, 2003: Committee on Criminal Justice Reforms Delhi Police Act, 

Universal Law Pub. Co. 

17. Padmanabhaiah,K. 2001 : Committee on Police Reforms. 

Paper – I 

Dynamics of Social Development 

UNIT-I 


10(678) 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

- Social Development: meaning, concept, indicators; goals, assumptions and Factors of 

Social Development. 

- Basic needs in Social Development and Components of social development. 

- Problems of social development. 

UNIT-II 

- Social and economic transformation in India after independence. 

- Models of social development: Charity Oriented model, Institutional model, Push model, 

Input model, Gandhian and Nehruian model. 

- Relationship between Social work and Social development: role and intervention. 

UNIT-III 

- Economic development: meaning and indicators. 

- Characteristics of developed and developing countries. 

- Theories of economic development- Rostow’s stages of economic growth and balanced 

growth theory. 

- National Income concepts: GNP, GDP, NNP, PCI, PI, OI. 

UNIT-IV 

- Globalization and its impact on quality of life. 

- Poverty in India: concept of absolute, subjective and relative poverty. 

- Causes of poverty, Current poverty alleviation programmes. 


- Social Inequalities: nature, causes and extent. 

- Rural Development: Meaning, problems and stages, 

- Policy, planning and administration concerning development of rural area. 

- Gender issues, land reforms and green revolution: economic and social implications. 

Note: - 








(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography: 

1. John & Pandey : Social Development 

2. Kulkarni, P.D. : Social Policy and Social Development in 

(1979) India; Madaras : Association of Schools of 

Social Work in India. 

3. Mishra, S.K. & :Development and Planning (Theory and Puri, V.K 1986 

Practice) Himalaya Publishing House,Bombay, Pune. 

4. Clearence Zuvekas : Economic Development : An introduction, Macmillan 1979. 

5. Jhingon M.L. 1988. : The Economics of Development and 

Planning, Konark Publishers Pvt. Ltd. 

6. Mclver Gerald : Leading issues in Economic Development : 

Studies in international Poverty, Oxford University Press. 

7. Kindleberger,C.P.1977. Economic Development, Mc Graw Hill, Kogakusha. Tokyo. 

8. Prasad, Kanta, 1985. : Planning for Poverty Alleviations, New Delhi : Agricale 

9. Gore, M.S.1973. : Some Aspects of Social Development, Tata 

Institute of Social Science, Bombay. 

10. Jain, T.L. : Poverty in India, ESS Publishers, New Delhi. 

11. Mahajan, O.P : Economic Planning and Regional 

Development In India, ESS Publication, New Delhi. 

12. Beteill A (ed) 1968 : Social inequality, Pengwn Education, Harmonds work. 

13. Dantwala, M.L. : Poverty in India : Then and Now 1870-1970, 

Macmillan India, New Delhi. 

14. Sen, A.K. : Economic inequality, Delhi : Oxford 


15. Mandal G.C.1961 : Problems of Rural Development, World Press, Culcutta. 

16. Narayana, D.L. 1970 : Students in Rural Development, Tireepati : Sri Venkateshni 


17. Roax V.K.R.U. : Rural India, Real India, S.K. Sharma (Ed) 

18. Azad, RN : IRD in Dynamics of Developments Delhi : 

19. Midgley, James 1997. : Social Welfare in Global Context. Sage Publications, London. 

20. Siddiqui H. Y. 2004 : Social Development in Indian Subcontinent, Rawat 


21. Jacob K.K. : Social Development Perspective, Rawat Publications, New 

Delhi. 

10(679) 


22. Gore M.S., 2003 : Social Development. Rawat Publications, New Delhi. 

Paper- II 

Semester-IV 

Administration of Welfare Services-II 

Max. 

Marks. 100 

Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

UNIT-I 

- Project Formulation: concept, steps and limitations. 

- Formulation of service project proposals, guidelines for effective project 

formulation. 

- Communication: concept principles and importance. 

- Public relations and mass media: meaning, importance and methods. 

UNIT-II 

- Project implementation: meaning, steps and problems. 

- Project Monitoring and Evaluation: objectives, types and methods. 

- Implementations of Health and Family Welfare Services in India. 

- National Health Programmes; Health Schemes at centre and 

state levels, problems and drawbacks, conditions of effective implementation 

- Housing Schemes, programmes and policies in India. Governmental agencies for 

housing such as NBCC (National Building Construction Corporation) & HUDCO 

(Housing and Urban Development Corporation). 

UNIT-III 

- Decision making: meaning, steps and techniques. 

- Coordination: meaning, elements, factors and steps. 

- Financial resources: sources of funding and problems. 

- Budgeting: meaning, principles, steps and types. 

- Accounting: meaning, nature and procedure. 

UNIT-IV 

- Family Welfare Programmes; meaning, need and historical 

Background, problems and drawbacks, effective measures for success of family 

Welfare Programmes in India. 

- International Social Welfare; meaning, need and significance, 

- United Nations Development Programme (UNDP). 

- Role of UNDP for the Welfare & Development of weaker sections. 

- Welfare through Universal Declaration of Human Rights. 

Note: - 



10(680) 







(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography 

1. Hauman, A. 1962. : Professional Management and Practice, Delhi, Eurasia Pub. 

2. Hasenfeld, Y and : Human Service Organizations Ann Arbor. (ed). 

University of Michigan Press. 

1978. 

3. Slavin, S.ed, 1978. : Social Administration, New York, The Haworth Press. 

4. Weiner, M. 1982 : Human Service Management, Dorsey Press, Illinois. 

5. Haimann, A.1982 : Professional Management and Practice, Delhi, 

Eurasia Publication. 

6. Drucker, Peter.1983 ; Managing the NGOs: Principles and Practices, New 

Delhi, Macmillan. 

14. Kulkarni,V.M.1984 : Voluntary Action in a Developing Society, IIPA, New Delhi. 

7. Lok Sabha Secretariat : National Health Policy, New Delhi, 1985. 

8. Singh, K. 1986 : Principles, Policies and Management, sage 

publication and Perspectives, Abhinav Publications, 

New Delhi. 

9. Gangrade, K.D.1988 : Social Welfare and Social Development, Northern 

Book Centre, New Delhi. 

10. Jackson, J. 1989. : Evaluation of Voluntary Organizations, Delhi, 

Information And News Networks. 

11. Luthans, Fred. 1990 ; Organizational Behaviour Boston, Irwin McGraw 

Hill. 

12. PRIA. 1990 a. : Manual on Financial Management and Accounts 

Keeping For Voluntary Organizations, New Delhi, 

Society For Participatory Research in Asia. 

13. Govt. of India : Evaluation of Social Welfare Programmes, 

Encyclopedia Of Social Work, Vol-I. 297-310. 

14. Singh, S., Mishra, P.D : Bharat mein Samajik NitiYojna eavam Vikas,and 

&Singh. Social Work Department, Lucknow University. 

15. PRIA. B. : Training of Trainers: A Manual for Participatory 

Training Methodology in Development, New Delhi, 

Society for Participatory Research in Asia. 

16. Gupta, N.S. Principles and Practice of Management, 

Delhi, Light and Life Publishers. 

17. Malkote, S.R. : Communication for Development in the Third 

World: Theory and Practices. 

18. Dale, R. 2000 : Organizations and Development Strategies 

Structures and Process, Sage, New Delhi. 

19. Lauffer, A. 1982 : Grandmanship and Fund Raising, New Delhi: 

Sage Publication 

20. Kapoor, K.K.1986 :` Directory of Funding Organizations, Delhi: Eurasia 

Publication 

21. Slavin, S, ed.1978. : Managing Finance Personnel and Information in 

10(681) 


Human Services, New York: Haworth Press 

22. Goyal, B.B. : Project Management, Deep and Deep Publication, New 

Delhi. 

23 Sapru, R.K. : Developmental Administration. 

24. Narkwiboonwang,w. : Project Identification, Formulation and Start up Non-and 

others, 1986. Governmental Rural Development rganizations in 

Thailand, Bangkok, AIT 

Paper-III 

10(682) 

Semester-IV 

Statistical Methods in Social Work Research 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

UNIT I 

- Statistics: meaning and significance. 

- Primary and secondary sources of data 

- Classification and Tabulation of data: types and importance. 

- Diagrammatic and Graphic presentation of data: meaning, significance and limitation. 

- Graphs of frequency distribution- Histogram, Frequency Polygon, Smooth Frequency 

Curve and Ogive. 

UNIT-II 

- Measures of Central Tendency: meaning, uses, and computation of mean, median and 

mode. 

- Measures of Dispersion: meaning, assumptions, uses and computation of range, quartile 

deviation, standard deviation and average deviation 

- Correlation-meaning, assumption, uses, computation and interpretation of product 

moment and rank difference correlation 

UNIT-III 

- Normal Probability Curve- an overview 

- Simple Regression: Regression Equation of Y on X and X on Y. 

- Chi Square Test- meaning, assumption, uses and computation by hypothesis of equality, 

independence and normality 

- Significance of difference between (i) Means (2) Proportion. 

UNIT-IV 

- Computer for Data Processing, Basics of MS Word and MS Excel 2003/2007. 

- Basics of SPSS. 

- Data management, analysis and presentation. 

Note: - 









(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography 

1. Reichmann,W.J. 1981. : Use and Abuse of Statistics, Penguin Books. 

2. Sirkin, R.Mark 1995. : Statistics for Social Sciences, sage publications, New Delhi 

3. Yeomans, K.A. 1979. : Statistics for social Scientist: 2, applied statistics, Penguin 

Books. 

4. Gupta.C.B.1973. : An introduction to Statistical Methods; Agra, Ram Prsad and 

sons. 

5. Gupta, S.D. 1969. : Statistical methods, Delhi, sultan Chand and sons. 

6. Elhance, D.N, 1978. : Fundamental of Statistics, Allahabad, Kitab Mahal. 

7. MC Millian, W. 1952. : Statistical methods for social Workers, university of Chicago 

press. 

8. Aggarwal, Y.P. 1989. : Statistical Methods; Concepts Applications and Computation 

New.delhi Stergy. 

9. Yeomans, K. A. 1979. : Statistics for the Social Scientist: 2, Applied Statistics, 

Penguin Books. 

10. Coolidge, Frederick L. : Statistics: A Gentle Introduction, New Delhi: Sage 

Publication 

11. Foster, J.J. 1998. : Data Analysis Using SPSS for Windows: A Beginner’s 

Guide, New Delhi: Sage Publication 

12. Blalock, H.M.1972. : Social Statistics, New York, McGraw Hill. 

13. Banerjee, S. 2008. : Fundamentals of Research Methodology, Allahbad Kitab 

Mahal 

14. Garrett, H. E., 1966. : Statistics in Psychology and Education 

Paper – IV 


Drug Abuse and Counselling 

10(683) 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours. 

UNIT – I 

- Substance abuse and dependence: meaning, definition, nature and extent of the problem 


- Types of addictive substances: natural, synthetic, narcotics, stimulants and depressants 

- Nature, symptoms, short-term effects and long-term effects of substance abuse. 

UNIT – II 

- Theories of addiction: physiological, psychological, sociological and cultural theories 

- Alcohol dependence and Alcoholism: causes, symptoms, long term and short-term 

effects. 

- Different terms used such as social drinking, alcoholic and relapse 

- Phases of alcohol addiction 

- Social-economic implications of addiction, Problems experienced by the family 

UNIT – III 

- Methods of prevention, treatment and rehabilitation – the multidisciplinary approach, 

Role of social worker in curative, rehabilitative and prevention of substance abuse 

- Counselling – meaning, definition, types, directive and non-directive 

counselling as a tool for help 

- Process of counseling 

- Legislation and government programme to control drug abuse 

UNIT – IV 

- Marriage and Drug Counseling: concept and process 

- Characteristics and traits of a good counsellor 

- Approaches to Counselling – Psychoanlytical, Client Centred Therapy, R.E.T. 

- Indigenous approaches of help and self-help such as yoga & meditation, specific attitude 

and values 

Note: - 








(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography 

1. Bessell, R., 1971. : Interviewing and Counselling, London ,: B.T., Butsford, 

2. Chopra, R.N. and : Drug Addiction with special reference 

Chopra, F.C., 1965. to India, New Delhi Council of Scientific & Industrial 

Research 

3. National Institute of : Drug Abuse (Summaries of Research 

Social Defence, Govt. Studies) 

of India,1992. 

4. Cohan, Raquel E, 2006. : Mental Health Services in Disaster 

Instructor’s Guide, Pan America Health Organization, World 

Health Organization,Washington USA. 

5. World Health Organization. : Mental Health of Refugees, WHO 

1996. Publication,Geneva. 

10(684) 


6. World Health Organisation. : The ICD-10 classification of mental and 

1992. Behavioural Disorders. Clinical descriptions and diagnostic guidelines, Oxford University 

Press. Delhi. 

7. Single, Eric et al, 2003. : International Guidelines for Estimating the Costs of 

Substance Abuse and Addiction. 

8. Dave, Indu. 1983. : The Basic Essentials of Counseling, New Delhi Sterling 

Publishers Pvt.LTD 

9. Delaney & Eisen : The Counseling Process. 

Berg, 1973 

10. Fullmer, D.W.& : Counselling,Content and Process, New 

Benard, H.W, 1973. Delhi,Thomson Press, India. 

11. Harm, E.&Schriebver: Handbook of Counseling Techniques, 

P.1963 . Oxford: Pergamon Press. 

12. Singh,Chandra : Alcohol and Drug Dependence Among 

Paul,2000. Industrial Workers, Delhi, Shipra Publications. 

13. G. de. Girolamo, : Epidemiology of Mental disorders and 

J.H. Reich,1993. Psychosocial Problems, Personality Disorders. WHO, 

Geneva. 

14. R. Warner, : Scizophrania , WHO.Geneva 

G. de. Girolamo 1995. 

15. Upadhyay, R.K. & : Mental Disorders and Mental Health Policy, 

Sandhya New Delhi, Kanishka. 

Paper-V 

Semester -IV 

Services for Aged and Disabled 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

UNIT-I 

- The aged: concept and definition-legal, social, cultural and medical views. 

- Perception of the role of aged in India. 

- Needs and problems of the aged. 

- Role of family in promotion of physical and mental health of the aged. 

- Areas for social work intervention. 

UNIT-II 

- Legislation pertaining to the care of the aged. 

- Social security schemes for the aged: pension, provident fund and other statutory 

provisions. 

- National policy for aged . 

- Role of NGOs in welfare of the aged. 

UNIT-III 

- Concept of impairment, disability and handicap. 

- Types of handicap: Sensory, physical and mental handicap. 

10(685) 


- Social handicap: concept and nature. 

- Needs and problems of the disabled at different life stages. 

- The disabled persons and their family. 

- Stages in developing community education programme for disabled people. 

- Parents’ reactions towards disability in their children. 

UNIT-IV 

- Services for disabled persons. 

- Government policy and programmes for the rehabilitation of handicapped and gaps in 

implementation. 

- Role of NGOs in welfare of disabled. 

- Areas for social work intervention.. 

- Legal rights of the disabled. 

- Community Based Rehabilitation. 

- The Persons With Disabilities Act, 1995. 

Note: - 








(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography: 

1. Binstock, R.H. : Handbook of Aging and the social 

and Shahas, E.1976. Sciences, New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold Col. 

2. Desai, M.M. and : Inter Strategies for the Aged in India 

Khetani, M.D.1979. in reaching the aged-Social Services in Forty Four Countries, 

Editors Morton, JT etc. 

3. Bergatta, E.F. and : Aging and Society: current Research 

Moluckey, N.G.1980. and Policy perspectives: Benerely Hills: London Sage 

Publications. 

4. Gurimurthy, K.G. : The Aged in India,New Delhi: Reliance Publishing House. 

5. Kohli, A.S.1996. : Social Situation of the Aged in India: Anmol Publications Pvt. 

Ltd. 

6. Blacher, J.(ed), 1984 : Severely Handicapped Young children and their families , 

New york: Academic Press. 

7. Singh,A.N.2002. : :Enabling the Differently Able, New Delhi: Shipra 

Publications. 

8. Crawford, K .,2004. : Social Work with older people, Jaipur: Rawat Publications. 

9. Haider, S.I. : Visually Handicapped Children, Jaipur: Rawat Publications. 

10.Klasing,I.,2007. : Disability and social Exclusion in Rural 

India, Jaipur: Rawat Publications. 

11.Wadia, A..R.1963. : Handicapped Child, Bombay: Tata Institute of Social 

Sciences. 

10(686) 


12.Gunzburg, H.C.1960. : The Social Rehabilitation of the Subnormal, London: Bailliere, 

Tindall & core. 

13.Bhatt, Usha 1963. : Physically Handicapped in India:Growing National Problem, 

Bombay: Popular Book Depot. 

14.Chainani, M.L.1971. : Rehabilitation of Physically Handicapped, Bombay: Popular 

prakashan. 

15.Blodgett,Harriet,E. 1971. : Mentally Retarded Children: what parents 

and others should know,Minneapolis: Uni. of Minnesota 

Press. 

16.Mani Ram,1988. : Physically Handicapped, India ,New Delhi: 

Ashish Publishing House. 

Paper-VI (1) (a) 


Human Resource Management and Industrial Relations -II 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

UNIT – I 

- International Labour Organization (ILO) and Industrial Relation in India. 

- Trade Union: meaning, types, theories and historical development of Trade Union 

Movement in India. 

- Weaknesses of Trade Unions and essentials for successful trade union. 

- Role of trade unions in industrial relation. 

UNIT – II 

- Collective Bargaining: meaning, objective and process, collective bargaining in India 

- Worker’s Participation in Management: meaning, objectives, forms and pre-requisite 

conditions for effective working of the scheme. 

- Evaluation of the Indian Schemes of worker’s participation in management. 

UNIT – III 

- Concept of organization, theories of organization: classical theories, bureaucratic theory 

and contingency theory. 

- Organisational Behaviour: meaning, nature, scope and historical background. 

Contribution of Elton Mayo, Renis and Likert. 

UNIT – IV 

- Industrial unrest: concept, causes, forms and consequences. 

- Motivation: meaning, importance and a brief explanation of theories of motivation: 

Maslow’s Need of Hierarchy theory, McGregor’s participation theory, Argyris’s theory 

and Vroom’s Expectancy theory. 

- Corporate Social responsibility; issues and prospect in contemporary Indian industrial 

scenario. 

Note:- 



10(687) 







(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography: 

1. Bhagoliwal T.N. 1995. : Economics of Labour and Industrial Economics, Sahitya 

Bhawan, Agra. 

2. Burke W. Warner, 1987. : Organization Development: A Normative View, Addison 

Wesley, Reading, Mass. 

3. Dale Yoder, 1975. : Personnel Management and Industrial Relations, Printice Hall 

of India, New Delhi. 

4. Debi S. Saini and 

Sanu A. Khan,(Eds).2000. : Human Resource Management (Perspectives for the New 

Era), Response Books, New Delhi. 

5. David J. Cherrington, 1994. : Organisational Behaviour, Allyn and Bacon, Boston. 

6. Edwin B. Flippo, 1984. : Personnel Management, McGrow-Hill, New York. 

7. Gary Dessler, 2002. : Human Resource Management, Practice-Hall of India Private 


8. Gupta C.B,2002. : Human Resource Management, Sultan Chand and Sons, New 

Delhi. 

9. Khanka S.S. 2003. : Human Resource Management (Text and Cases) S. Chand & 

Company Limited, New Delhi. 

10 Koontz H. and others, 1986. : Essentials of Management, McGrow Hill, New York. 

11.Mamoria C.B. 1994 : Personnel Management, Himalaya Publishing House, 

Bombay. 

12.Mark Mendenhall and : International Human Resource Management, 

Gary Addau (Eds) 1991. PWS – Kent Publishing Company, Boston. 

13.Monappa Arun 1997 : Managing Human Resources, Macmillan India Limited, New 

Delhi. 

14.Morgan P.V. 1986 . : International Human Resource Management: Fact or Fiction, 

Personnel Administration, Vol.3 No.I. 

15.National Institute of Personnel : Personnel Management in India, Asia 

Management 1973. Publishing House, Bombay. 

16.Newstorm, John and : Organizational Behaviour: Human Behaviour at 

Devis Keith 1998. work, Tata Mc Grow – Hill Publishing Company Limited, 

New Delhi. 

17.Phillio, E.B. 1980. : Principles of Personnel Management, McGrow Hill Books 


18.Prasad L.M. 2000. : Business Policy: Strategies Management, Sultan Chand & 

Sons, New Delhi. 

19.Punekar, S.D. and : Labour Welfare, Trade Unionism and Industrial 

others 1984. Relations, Himalaya Publishing Company, Mumbai. 

20.Rao V.S.P. 2005 . : Human Resource Management (Text and Cases) Excel Books, 

New Delhi. 

10(688) 


21.Schein E.H. 1978. : Carrier Dynamics: Matching Individual and Organizational 

Needs, Addison Wesley, Reading Massachussetts. 

22.Sharma A.H. 1988. : Aspects of Labour Welfare and Social Security, Himalaya 

Publishing Company, Mumbai. 

23.Sharma D.C. and : Personnel Management: Surjeet Prakashan, 

Sharma R.C. 1988. Meerut 

24.Sodhi J.S. 1996. : Industrial Relations and Human Resources in India, B.R. 

Publishing Corporation, Delhi. 

25.Stephen P. Robbins 1998. : Organizational Behaviour Pranctice – Hall of India Private 


Paper-VI (1) (b) 


Labour Welfare and Labour Legislations-II 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

UNIT: I 

- Labour legislation: meaning, need, scope and principles 

- History of labour legislation in India 

- Grievance handling procedures in industries. 

- Industrial Discipline: meaning, approaches & code of discipline 

- Labour welfare administration: concept, need and importance 

- Labour administration at central and state level 

UNIT: II 

- Wages for industrial workers: - meaning, importance, theories of wages 

- Types of wages: minimum, fare and living wages 

- Methods of wage determination in India: Wage Boards, adjudication and bipartite 

committees 

- Wage differential: factors, types & importance 

- National Wage Policy 

- The Payment of Wages Act, 1936 

- The Minimum Wages Act, 1948 

- The Payment of Bonus Act, 1965. 

UNIT: III 

- Protective provisions for labour in Indian constitution 

- International Labour Organization (ILO): organizational set-up, functions and role in 

labour welfare. 

- Labour Bureau: organization set-up and functions 

UNIT: IV 

- The Workman’s Compensation Act, 1923 

- The Employees’ State Insurance Act, 1948 

- The Employees’ Provident Fund and miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952 

- The Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972 

10(689) 


- The Equal Remuneration Act, 1976 

- The Maternity Benefit Act, 1961 

Note: - 








(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography: 

1 Puri, S.K., 1981 : An Introduction to Labour and Industrial Laws, Allahabad 

Law Agency. 

2. Saharay, H.K. 1987 : Industrial and Labour Laws of India, New Delhi: Prentice 

Hall. 

3. Srivastava, S.C.1992 : Labour Law in factories, Mines & Other Industrial 

Establishment, New Delhi: Prentice Hall. 

4. Saharay, H.K.1987 : Industrial and Labour laws of India, New Delhi: Prentice 

hall 

5. Malik, P.L. : Industrial Law, Lucknow: Eastern Book co. 

1982 

6. Ministry of Labour : Second Labour Commission Report G.O.I (2002) 

7. Bhatnagar, Deepak, 1984: Labour Welfare and social security legislation in India 

8. Bhagoliwal, TN : Economics of Labour and Indistrial Relations,Agra : Sahitaya 

Bhawan 

9. Saxena,R.C. : Labour problems& social welfare, Meerut: Jai Parkash Pub. 

House 

10 Sharma, A.M., 1988 : Aspects of Labour Welfare and Social Security, 

Mumabai : Himalya Publishing House. 

11. Pant, S.C. : Indian Labour Problems, Chaitanya Publishing House. 

12. Punekar, S.D.& ; Labour Welfare, Trade Unionism and Industrial 

Others, 1978 Relations, Mumbai: Himalaya publishing Housing 

13. Ministry of Labour : Report of National Commision on labour, New Delhi :Govt. 

of India (2 nd ed) 

14 Vaid, K.N. Labour Welfare in India, New Delhi: Shri Ram Centre for 

industrial relations. 

15. Banerjee N. Women Workers in theUnorganised Sector, Sangam Book 

1985. 

16. ILO Showing the Way-Trade unions agains child labour in India, 

New Delhi,1998. 

17. Joshi,S.S. Women workers-at the grass-root level-A Sociological 

study, Ashish Publishing House 1995. 

18. Tripathy, S.N Migtrant child labour in Inida, Mohit Publications.New Delhi, 

1997. 

19. Kapoor,N.D.1996. Handbook of Industrial Law.Sultan Chand &Sons, New 

Delhi. 

10(690) 


20. Ministry of Labour Second Labour Commission Report 

G.O.I (2002). 

21. The Building and Other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment and Condition 

of Services) Act, 1996. 

22. The Unorganised Workers Social Security Act, 2008. 

23. Domestic Workers (Registration Social Security and Welfare) Act, 2008. 

Paper - VI opt. -II (a) 

Family Dynamics: Issues & Needs-II 

Semester-IV 

- Marriage: nature and types, 

- Changing Marriage Patterns. 

- Incidence of Divorce in India. 

- Marriage Counseling and Guidance- nature and process 

- Role of social worker in marriage counseling. 

10(691) 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours UNIT-I 

UNIT-II 

- Child Abuse, Child labour and Child marriage: its causes and consequences ; Social and 

Legislature efforts to control it 

- Family Courts Act, 1985. 

- Legislatures related to Marriage, Divorce, Dowry, Domestic Violence, 

Adoption of Children, Minority & guardianship. 

- Rights of Inheritance and Succession 

UNIT-III 

- Demographic profile of Youth in India 

- Concept of Youth welfare. 

- Student and Non student youth, Services for student and non student Youth 

- Youth Welfare Programmes in India; National youth policy. 

UNIT-IV 

- Needs and problems of Youth in the area of family adjustment, education, marriage and 

employment. 

- Intergenerational conflict, youth unrest and politicization of youth 

- Role of youth in development. 

Note: - 









(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography 

1. Gore, M.S. : Indian Youth: Proces and Socialization; Vishwa 

1977 Yuva Kendra. New Delhi 

2. John, v.v. 1974 : Youth and national goal, vishwa Yova Kendra N.Delhi 

3. Mehta P ed. 1971. : Indian Youth, Somaiya Bombay 

4. Mukherjee, Dhurjali : Youth change and challenge, firma KLM Pvt. 

1977. Ltd, Calcutta. 

5. Raghuvanshi, M.S. : Modernizing rural Youth, Ajanta,N,Delhi 

1984. 

6. Pandey, Rajendra : Sociology of Youth, Sterling, N.Delhi 1984 

7. Hertmenm Ann & : Family centered social work practice, London Laird 

Joan1985 Press. 

8. Zimmerman S.L. : Understanding Family Policy: Theories and Applications, 

London sage Publications 

9. TISS (1994) : Enhancing the Role of Family as an Agency for Social and 

Economic Development, unit for Family studies, TISS. 

10. Mathur Hari Molhan ed. : The family Welfare Programme in India, New 

1995 Delhi Vikas Publishing House Pvt.Ltd. 

11. Zimmerman Shirly.L : family Polices and Families well being, New 

1992. Delhi, sage Publication. 

Semester IV 

Paper-VI opts. -II (b) 

Developmental Services for Child and Women - II 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

UNIT- I 

- Rights of Children – Constitutional and Legislative 

- National and Global policies and trends in Child Welfare – A critical review. 

- Role of Social Worker in promotion of Child Welfare Services. 

- 

UNIT-II 

Family Welfare and its implications for Social Work practice. 

- Policies and Programmes for Destitute, Neglected, Handicapped and Mentally Retarded 

Children. 

- Role of Professional Social Worker in correctional institutions for Handicapped Children. 

- Functions of National and International agencies working for Child Welfare. 

- 

UNIT-III 

Reproductive Child Health – concept, objectives and its programmes. . 

- Gender Issues, Gender Budgeting and areas of Gender Discrimination 

10(692) 


- Institutional and Non-Institutional Programmes and Services for the both mother and 

child. 

- Violence against Women – Infanticide, Rape, Dowry death, Sexual abuse, 

Women Labour. 

- Female Sex Workers – concept, problems and social work intervention with 

female sex workers. 

UNIT-IV 

- Mother and Child Health Care – concept, Pre-natal, Neo-natal and Post-natal. 

- Rehabilitative Services for Women – Widows, Deserted/ Divorced. 

- Protective Services and Programmes for Women under Five Year Plans. 

- Economic Empowerment of Women through-Micro-financing, Self-Help Groups, 

Capacity building and Skill Development Training. 

Note: - 








(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography: 

1. Berry Juliet : Social Wrok with Children, Routledge and 

1972. Kegan Paul, London. 

2. Chowdhary. D. Paul, : Child Welfare and Development; Atma Ram 

1980. and Sons, New Delhi. 

3. Manor, Oded : Family work in Action-A Handbook for Social 

1984. Workers, Tavistock Publications, Illinois. 

4. NIPCCD : Perspective plan on Child Development (1980- 

1984. 2060), The Author, New Delhi. 

5. Singh R.R. : Social Care of Child in Delhi : Policy 

1987. Programme and process, Deptt. of Social Work. 

6. Sharm Shakti : A Report of National Commission on self 

1988. employed Women and women informal Sector. 

7. Govt. of India : National Plan of Action-A Commitment to the 

1992. child, Department of Women and Child development, GOI. 

8. Kanth Amod & : Neglected Child-Changing Perspective prayas 

Verma R.M.1993 juvenile Aid Centre, New Delhi. 

9. Aggarwal, Beena : A Field of one’s own : Gender and Land Rights 

1994. in South Asia, Delhi : Cambridge University Press. 

10. Desai Murli, ed. : Family and Intervention : A Course 

1994. Compendium, Bombay TISS. 

11. Govt. of India, : Towards equality : Report of the Committee on 

Ministry of Education Status of Women, New Delhi. 

& Social Walfare,1994 

12. Mathur Hari Mohan : The Family Welfare Programme in India. New 

(ed).1995. Delhi,Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd. 

10(693) 


13. Govt. of India. : National Perspective Plan for Women, 1990. 

1998. New 

14. Govt. of India, Deptt. : National Plan of Action-A Commitment to the 

Of Women and Chlid child. DelhiDepartment of Women and Child 

Development. 2000 

15. Sinha, P.N. : Population Education and Family planning 

Authors Press, New Delhi. 

Paper-VI, Elective III (a) 

Semester-IV 

Policy and Development of Health Care-II 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

UNIT-I 

Emotional aspects of chronic diseases and accidents: T.B., Cancer, Leprosy, Arthritis, 

Asthma, V.D. (STD) 

Organization of medical services: medical services for different diseases and in different 

regions and their nature, types, organizations and functions. 

UNIT-II 

Drug control and related legislation: 

Lepers Act- 1898; Preventive service – levels of prevention 

Role of Social Work in prevention . 

Health for All by 2000 A.D. a critical analysis. 

UNIT-III 

Policy for specialized groups and diseases 

Magnitude of the mental health problems at world level 

Concept of Social Security: Insurance for health and ESI scheme 

Concept of Community Health and its progress 

Services for health by voluntary organizations 

UNIT-IV 

Polyclinic, nursing homes, quacks and rural health services 

Different systems of medicine and their role-Ayurveda, Homeopathy, Unani and Allopathy 

Role of Social Worker in policy development for health. 

Emotional aspects of illness, social perception of illness 

Concept of patient and his role 

Preparing family and community for the return of the affected individual 

Follow up, Public health and its programmes. 

Note: - 



10(694) 







(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography: 

1. Banarjee, G.R.,1950. : Social Service Department in Hospital : Its Organization and 

Functions, Mumbai. 

2. Codey, Carol H.,1951. : Social Aspects of Illness, Philadelphia & London : W.B. 

Sounders Co. 

3. Bartalatt, Harriet M.1961. : Social Work Practice in the Health Field, New York : 

National Association of Social Work. 

4. Caplan, Gerald, 1961. : An Approach to Community Mental Health, Grune and 

Stratton. 

5. King, Maurice ed,1966. : Medical Care in Developing Countries; Symposium from 

Makerere, London : 


6. Rao, Dr.K.N.,1968 : Health Services, Public Health in Encyclopedia 

Of Social Work in India, Vol. I ; Publications Divisions. 

7. Mahajan, B.K.,1969 : Health Services in India, Jamnagar : 

Aruna B. Mahajan. 

8. Sundaram, E.B.,1975. : Health Services with Social Justice, Voluntary 


9. Naik, J.P.,1977. : An alternative system of health care services in 

India; Some proposals; Allied Pub., Pvt. Ltd. 


Approach: New York : Macmillan Pub. Co. 

11. Doyal, Lestely and Health, Medicine and Underdevelopment, 

Pennell, Imogen, 1978 : Economic & Political Weekly, Vol.XI, 31-33, 

August, Special Number. 





Sage Foundations 



15. UNICEF : Health and Basic Services : Keys to 

Development New Delhi. 

16. Goel, Rajneesh, : Community Health Care, Deep and Deep Pub. 


17. Goel, S.L.2004 : Health Care Management and Administration, 

Deep and Deep Publication, New Delhi. 

18. Goel, S.L.2004 : Health Care Organization and Structre. 

Deep and Deep Publication, New Delhi. 

19 Goel, S.L.2004 : Health Care Policies and Programmes. 

Deep and Deep Publication, New Delh. 

20. Park,K., : Textbook of Preventive and Social Medicine, 

10(695) 


2005 Jabalpur : M/s Banarsidas,Bhonot Publishers. 

21. Ramani, K.V,et.al : Strategic Issues and Challenges in Health 

2008. Management, Sage Publication, New Delhi. 

22. Wainwright, David. : A Sociology of Health, Sage Publication, 


23. Maire Barry, Anne : Understanding the Sociology of Health, 

& Chris Yuill. 2008. Sage Publication, New Delhi. 

Paper-VI, Elective III (b) 

Semester-IV 

Psycho-Social Perspectives of Mental Health-II 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

UNIT-I 

Concept of Psychiatry and Psychopathology 

History of mental health care in India and in western countries 

Recent developments in health care. 

UNIT-II 

Criteria for measuring effects of mental health programmes 

Environmental and socio-cultural factors in promoting effective performance Impact of 

environment on mental illness. 

Social concept of mental illness; mental illness as a social problem 

UNIT-III 

Patient and Society; Health, Medicine and Society 

Hospital as a social organization 

Concept of therapeutic community and open mental hospital 

Development of mental health profession and man-power, private practice, limitations of 

treatment 

UNIT-IV 

Property rights of certified mental patient, insanity as defense 

Community consciousness of mental health 

Government Policy on mental health care.Mental Health Act,1987. 

Recent trends in mental health services: mental hospitals, psychiatric clinics, nursing 

homes, psychiatric emergency, team approach 

Community Mental Health and units in general hospital. 

Note: - 








(4X15=60 Marks) 

10(696) 


Bibliography: 


Organization and functions, Mumbai : Tata Institute of Social 

Science. 

2. Codey,Carol H.,1951 : Social Aspects of Illness, PhiladelPhia & London : W.B. 

Founders Co. 

3. Bartkatt Harriet, M.,1961 : Social Work Practice in the Health Field, New 

York : National Association, of Social Workers. 

4. Caplan, Gerald, 1961 : An Approach to Community Mental Health, Grune and 

Stratton. 

5. Mahajan, B.K.,1969 : Health Services in India, Aruna. 

. B. Mahajan. 

6. Tredgold, R.F & Wolff :U.C.H Handbook of Psychiatry (2 nd ed.), 


7. Sundaram, E.B.,1975 : Health Services with Social Justice, Voluntary Action, 

Vol.17, No.6. 

8. Naik, J.P.,1977 : An alternative system of health care 

service in India; Some proposals; Allied Pub.Pvt.Ltd. 


Approach : New York : Macmillan Pub. Co..Inc. 

10. Doyall, Lesley and : Health, Medicine and Underdevelopment Pennell, 

Imogen, 1978 Economic and Political Weekly, Vol.XI,31-33 

August : Special Number. 

11. Hasan, K.A.,1978 : Medical Sociology of Rural India, Sachin Publications. 




Public Reactions to Health Programmes; Russell Sage 

Publication. 

14. UNICEF : Health and Basic Services : Keys to Development New Delhi. 

15. World Health Organisation :The ICD-10 Classification of Mental and 

1992. Behavioural Disorders. clinical descriptions and diagnostic 

guidelines, 

Oxford University Press, Delhi. 

16. Khandekar, Mandakani : The Social Dimensions of Child Nutrition 

among the economically disadvantaged in Greater Mumbai. 

17. World Health Organization, : Mental Health of Refugees,WHO 


18. Single Eric et al, 2003 : International Guidelines for Estimating 

the Costs of Substance Abuse and . Addiction, WHO Publication, 

Geneva. 

19. Park,K,2005 : Textbook of Preventive and Social Medicine, 

Jabalpur : M/s Banarsidas,Bhonot Publishers. 

20. Singh, Chandra Paul. :Mansik Mandata- Karan, Pehchan,Upchar, 

2005. avam Punarwas. Kanishka Publishers. 

Delhi. 

10(697) 


Semester-IV 

Paper-VI, Elective IV (a) 

Rural Community Development: Policies and programmes-II 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

Unit-I 

- Rural Community Development: concept, nature, assumptions, history, philosophy and 

approaches: target group oriented, area based, integrated rural development. 

- Extention Eductation : concept and methods, Rural Development: concept, meaning, 

approach and issues related to rural development. 

- Social Education: Concept, objective, historical background, methods of social education ( 

audio-visual aids, reading material, adult literacy ) 

Communication and education as tools to empower rural poor. 

Unit-II 

- Rural Labour: nature and problems; Agriculture labour; Main and marginal workers. 

- Landless labour , bonded labour, removal of bonded labour, women labour, child labour. 

- Government schemes for welfare of rural labour. 

Unit-III 

- Rural Development: organizational set up at central and state Levels, -National 

Rural Employment Guarantee Act 2005. 

- District Rural Development Agency (DRDA); organization function and challenges. 

- UNESCO: structure and programmes for rural people. 

- Concretization and social education for women, youth and role of social worker as 

Development promoter. 

Unit-IV 

- Rural and Cottage Industries: present scinerio and challneges before it, 

- Khadi and Village Industry Commission (KVIC). 

- Role of voluntary orgainsations in rural development. 

- Council for Advancement of People’s Action & Rural Technology (CAPART):organization 

and function. 

- Cooperation: philosophy, values and principles. 

- Cooperative Organizations: nature & functions. 

- Role of financial institutions such as (RBI, NABARD) Commercial Banks. 

Note: - 








(4X15=60 Marks) 

10(698) 


Bibliography: 

1. Gandhi M.K 1958 : Sarvodaya (The Welfare of all), Ahmedabad , 

Navjivan Publishing House. 

2. Ross,Murray.G.1958 : Case Histories in Community Organisation, Harberand 

Brothers, NEW York. 


Allahabad, Kitab Mahal Publishers. 

4. India, 1961 : Directorate of Extension: Extension Education in 

Community Development, New Delhi. Ministry of 

Food and Agriculture. 

5. Batten, T.R.1962 : The Non-Directive Approach in Group and Community 

Work, London, Oxford University Press. 

6. Schwartz, David B 1970: Who Cares Rediscovering Community, USA, West 

view 

7. Bulsara, J.F & Perspective on Social Welfare in India, S.Chand & 

Verma,R.M Co, New Delhi. 

8. Sen, A.C.(ed)1976 : Comprehensive Area Development, Ass. Of 

Voluntry Agencies for Rural Development,New Delhi. 

9. Zaltman, G and : Strategies for Planned change, New york, Association 

Duncan, R. 1977 Press 

10. Sharma, S.K and : Rural Development-A approach, Strategies and 

Malhotra,S.L.1977 Perspective Abhinav Publications, New Delhi. 

11. Rao, M.S.A. 1978 : Social Movement in India.Vol.1,Peasant and Backward 

12. Choudhry, D.P.1978 : New Partnership in Rural Development, M.N 

Publishers, New Delhi. 

13. Arora, R.C. 1979 : Integrated Rural Development. S.Chand and Co. New Dlhi. 

14. Tripathi, P.M 1981. : Voluntary Action for alleviating rural poverty: report of 

the Seminar on Role of Voluntary Agencies in Rural Dev., NIPCCD, 

New Delhi. 

15. Volken, H. et. Al.1982: Learning from the Rural Poor; Shared Experiences of 

the Mobile Orientation and Training Team, New Delhi, Indian Social 

Institute. 

16. Leal, D.A.M. & : Rural Development and the State: Contractions and 

Srivastava, R.K.1983 Dillemmas in Developing Countries, Methuen, London 

17. Laksham, T.K and : Rural Development in India: a Multidimensional 

Narayan, K. 1984 Approach Analysis, Himalayan Publishing House. 

Classes Movement, Monohar Publications, New Delhi. 

18. Patnaik, U. and : Chains of Servitude, Bondage and Slavery in India, 

Dingwaney, M.1985 : Madras: Sangam Books Pvt. Ltd. 

19. Misara, R.P 1985 : Rural Development (Vol.1to 5) Concept Publishing 

Company, New Delhi. 

20. Cheem, G.S.1985 : Rural Development in Asia: Case study on Programme 

Implementation, Sterling Publishers, New Delhi. 

21. Singh,K. 1986 : Rural Development, Principles, Policies and Mangt. 

New Delhi, Sage Publication. 

22. Consult Jouranals : Khadi Gramodyog, NIRD journal, Indian 

Journal of Public Administration, Mainstream. 

23. Development support : Community development : An attempt by people’s 

Team, 1987. multi purpose Development society, Pune, Development 

Support Team. 

10(699) 


24. Srinivasan, T.N & : Rural Poverty in South Asia, Oxford University Press, 

Bardhan, P.K 1988 Delhi. 

25. Chaturvedi, T.N : Rural Development, Some Themes and 

dimensions, New Delhi, IIPA. 

26. Mishra,S.N : Panchayati Raj, Bureaucracy, Rural 

Development New Delhi, IIPA. 

27. Desai, I.P and : History of Rural Development in Modern Indian 

Impex. India, New Delhi. 

28. Social Action : A Quarterly Review of Social Trends and Social Action 

Trust, Delhi Seminar, New Delhi. 

29. Singh, Sukhdev. 1994 : IRDP and DRDA: Role and Implimentation of DRDA 

Schemes, Deep and Deep Publication, New Delhi. 

30. Gruenwald, Paul.J.1997: Measuring Community indicators: A System Approach 

to Drug and Alcohol Problems, New Delhi, Sage publication. 

Semester-IV 

Paper-VI, Elective IV (b) 

Urban Community Development: Policies and Programme-II 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

Unit-I 

- Unorganized sector of urban economy: tertiarization, poverty and housing 

environment. 

- National and international perspectives on unauthorized settlement. 

- Structure, functions and achievements of Housing and Urban Development 

Corporation (HUDCO), HDFC, Nation Housing Bank. 

- Public support in urban community development: role of banks, industries and 

voluntary organizations in urban community development 

- Govt. urban housing schemes for poor sections. 

Unit-II 

- Urban Local Self-Government: concept, structure and functions. Municipal 

Administration; historical development, responsibilities, pattern and procedure, 

Civic amenities; essential services. 

- Municipal Corporation, Municipal Committee, Notified Town Area and Cantonment 

Board: structure, functions and powers; their role in urban development. 

Unit-III 

- Migration: causes, consequences and checks. 

- Housing problem in urban areas. 

- Town Planning: nature and approaches. 

- Government efforts to solve housing problem. 

- Perspective planning for urban development; management and evaluation of UCD 

projects. 

10(700) 


Unit-IV 

- Public conveniences and facilities; local public transportation, problems in 

transportation, pollution in urban cities; air and noise pollution, extent and control. 

- Effect on physical and mental health. 

- Govt efforts to manage problem of local transportation. 

- Civic sense, civic right and civic responsibilities. 

- Public Distribution System and consumer protection services. 

Note: - 

� Candidate shall be required to attempt any five questions. 








(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography: 

1. Ross,Murray.G.1958 :Case Histories in Community Organisation, Harberand 

Brothers, NEW York. 

2. Centre for Urban Studies,: Urban Planning and Development Authorities, 

IIPA, 1974. The Author, New Delhi. 

3. Zaltman, G and : Strategies for Planned change, New york, Association 

Duncan, R. 1977 Press 

4. Krishna, Swami.O.R 1978: Fundamentals of Coopration, S. Chand and Company Ltd. 

5. Social Action : A Quarterly Review of Social Trends and Social Action 

Trust, Delhi Seminar, New Delhi. 

6. Verma,S.P. and : Comparative pub. Administration: Indian Institute of 

Sharma,S.K. Public Administration, New Delhi. 

7. Sharma,S.K and : Development Administration: Indian Institute of Public 

S.P.Verma. Administration, New Delhi. 

8. Development support : Community Development : An attempt by people’s 

Team, 1987. multi purpose Development society, Pune, Development 

Support Team. 

9. Dasgupta, Biplab.1988: Urbanization Migration and Rural Change- A Study of 

West Bengal, Mukherjee and Co.Pvt.Ltd. 

10. Moury, S.D. 1989 : Urbanisation and Environmental Problems, chugh Pubt. New 

Delhi. 

11. Five Year Plans : Planning Commission. 

12. Issues of Jouranls of : Nagarlok and Indian Journals of Public Administration. 

13. Sarma, K.S.R.N. : Housing Finance in India, New Delhi, IIPA. 

14. Sarma, K.S.R.N. : Financing Urban Development on India, New Delhi, IIPA. 

15. Misara,Girish.K : Urban Traffic Management in India, New Delhi, IIPA. 

16. Govt .of India : Report of Ministry of Housing and Urban Development. 

17. Singh, Sham.S. 1992 : Urban Planning and Development: Issues and 

Imperatives, Ashish Publishing House, New Delhi. 

18. Gruenwald, Paul.J.1997: Measuring Community indicators: A System Approach 

to Drug and Alcohol Problems, New Delhi, Sage publication. 

10(701) 


19. Mohanty, Vijayani. : Municipal System in India. Ashish Publishing House,New 

Delhi. 

Semester -IV 

Paper- VI (V) (a) 

Crime and criminal Justice-11 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

UNIT-I 

- Need and importance of judicial system 

- Components of judicial system: police, prosecution and courts 

- Features of indian judicial system: independence, public trail and fare trail 

UNIT-II 

- Criminal Justice system: process and prospective 

- Social defense and legislation: An introduction to Indian Penal Code (IPC) 

- Criminal Procedure Code (Cr. P.C) 

- Anti beggary act 

- Narcotics Drugs and Psychotropic Substances Act, 1985 

UNIT- III 

- Positive Theories of Crime: 

- Morphological theories. 

- Biological theories: Constitution, Genetics, Chromosomes. 

- Psychological Theories of crime: 

- Learning Behavior theory 

- Psycho-analytical theory. 

- Conditional Adaptation Theory. 

UNIT- IV 

- Social control and crime prevention 

- Community and crime prevention. 

- Contemporary crime prevention strategies. 

- Role of social worker in the prevention of crime 

Note: - 








(4X15=60 Marks) 

10(702) 


Bibliography: 

1. Akers, Ronald L. 2004. : Criminological Theories, Rawat Publications, Jaipur. 

2. Williams Katherine S. 2001. : Text Book on Criminology, Universal Law Publishing Co. 

New Delhi 

3. Schmalleger Frank. : Criminology Today: An Integrative Introduction 

1999.Prentice Hall, New Delhi 

4. Tahir, Mary. 1996. : Crime in Delhi, National Book Organization, New Delhi. 

6. Gottfredson, Michael R and : A General Theory of Crime, Standford HirchTravis. 1990. 


7. Mannle, Henry W and Fundamentals of Criminology, Prentice Hall,. 

Hirschel J David. 1988. : New Delhi 

8. Conklin, John E. 1981. : Criminology, MacMillan Publishing Co . 

9. Chakrabarti, Nirmal Kant, 1995. : Probation System in the Administration of Criminal 

Justice, Deep & Deep Publications, New Delhi. 

10. Choudhuri, Mrinmaya, 1995. : Languishing for Justice: Being a Critical 

Survey of the Criminal Justice System, Datt Sons, Nagpur. 

11. Mehraj -ud-din, Mir, 1984. : Crime and Criminal Justice System in India, 

Deep & Deep Publications, New Delhi. 

12. Das, Ram Mohan, 1982. : Crime and Punishment in India: With a 

particular reference to the Manusmrti, Kanchan Publications, 

Bodh-Gaya. 

14. Ratanlal & Dhirajlal, 2002. : IPC-Indian Penal Court, Wadhwa & Company Publications. 

15. Canadino, Michael & : The Penal System- An introduction, 3rd edition, 

Dignam, James, 2002. Sage Publications. 

17. Kelkar R. V . : Criminal Procedure, 4th edition, Eastern Book Company. 

18. Dutta, K K, 1998 : Some Aspects of Criminal Law, Law Research Institute. 

19. Mallick, M R, 1996 : Criminal Court (Practice & Procedure), 9th edition, Eastern 

Law House. 

20. Ratanlal & Dhirajlal, (2004 ): The Code of Criminal Procedure, Wadhwa & Company 

Publication 

Paper VI (V) (b) 

UNIT-I 

UNIT-11 

Semester -IV 

Institutional Services and Rehabilitation of Criminals-11 


Theory : 80 


Time 3 Hours 

- Meaning and purpose of Social Legislation 

- Historical account of social legislation in India. 

- The concept of social justice and constitutional framework 

- An assessment of social legislation in India. 

- Impact of social legislation on the criminal law in India. 

- Protection of Civil Rights Act,1976 

- Dowry Prohibition Act,1961 

10(703) 


UNIT–III 

UNIT -1V 

- Child Marriage and Restraint Act,1929 

- Child Labor Prohibition Act, 1986. 

- Bonded Labor Prohibition Act, 1976 

- Prevention of Immoral Traffic Act, 1995 

- Juvenile Justice ( care and protection ) Act, 2000 

- The Protection of women against domestic violence Act 2005 

- Definition; nature and forms of juvenile delinquency; 

- Psychological and social explanations 

- Delinquent Subculture 

- Children in need of Care and Protection 

- Patterns of delinquent behavior in India. 

- Changing concepts of juvenile delinquency from past to present 

Note: - 








(4X15=60 Marks) 

Bibliography: 

1. Rolf Loeber, David P Farrington. : Child Delinquents (Development, Intervention and 

Service needs), 

2001. Sage Publications, New Delhi. 

2. Bhattacharya, Sunil K. 2000. : Juvenile Justice – An Indian Scenario, Regency 


3. Bynum, Jack E & Thompson, : Juvenile Delinquency – A Sociological 

William E. 1999. Approach, 4th edition, Allyn and Bawn Publications. 

4. Rolf Loeber, David P Farrington. : Serious and Violent Juvenile Offenders 

1998. – Risk Factors and Successful interventions, Sage 


5. Hawkins, David J. 1996. : Delinquency and Crime- Current Theories, Cambridge 

Univ. Press. 

6. Rolf Loeber, David P Farrington. : Preventing Childhood Disorders, Substance 1996. and 

Delinquency. Sage Publications, New Delhi. 

7. Kratcoski, Peter C & Kratcoshi. : Juvenile Delinquency, 4th edition, Prentice 

Dunn Lucilli, 1996. Hall,New Jersey. 

8. Champion, Dean J. 1992. : The Juvenile Justice System - Delinquency, 

Processing and the Law, 2nd edition, Prentice Hall, New 

Jersey. 

10(704) 


9. Mishra, B.N. Ashish.1991. : Juvenile Delinquency and Justice System, Publishing House, 

New Delhi 

10. Sharma, Bharti. 1990. : Juvenile Delinquency and their Social Culture, Uppal 

Publishing House, New Delhi 

11. Krishnamurthy, S. 1987. : Impact of Social Legislations, on the Criminal Law in India, R 

R Publishers, Bangalore. 

12. Singh, Darshan, 2003 : Juvenile delinquency, Saloni Publishing House, New Delhi. 

13. Krishnamurthy S, 1987 : Impact of Social Legislations, on the Criminal 

Law in India, R R Publishers, Bangalore. 

14. NDPS, 2002 

15. Prevention of Immoral Traffic Act 1995 

16. Dowry Prohibition Act ( 28 of 1961) 

17. Child Labor Prohibition Act 1986. 

18. Protection of Civil Rights Act,1976 

19. Child Marriage and Restraint Act,1929 

20. Child Labor Prohibition Act, 1986 

21. Bonded Labor Prohibition Act, 1976 

22. Juvenile Justice (care and protection) Act, 2000 

23. The Protection of women against domestic violence Act 2005 

10(705) 


Semester-I 

Paper-I: Basics of Social Work 

B.A. (Social Work) 

Scheme of Examination for Under Graduate 

(Effective from the Academic session 2012-2013) 

Time: 3-Hrs 


Theory Paper : 50 

*Internal Assessment : 20 

Field Practicum : 30 

In the first semester under Field Practicum Component, the college concern, under the 

supervision of a teacher will arrange agency visits. Students will undertake minimum five visits to 

different Government agencies in the field of social welfare. The students will be required to 

submit their observation reports about the functioning, organizational structure, sources of funds 

and the programmes services undertaken by the agencies and lesson learnt out of Field visits. 

Semester-II 

Paper-I: History & Fields of Social Work 

10(706) 

Time: 3-Hrs 



*Internal Assessment : 20 


In the Second Semester under Field Practicum Component agency visits will be arranged by the 

College under the supervision of concern teacher. Students will undertake minimum five visits to 

different NGOs of national repute in the field of social welfare. The students will be required to 

submit their observation reports about the functioning, organizational structure, sources of funds 

and the programmes services undertaken by the agencies and their learning out of field visits. 

NOTE: - The Field Work Viva-voce examination will be conducted on the basis of 

field work done in each semester by an external examiner. The reports of 

first and second semesters must be submitted by the end of each semester 

before examination. 

* Internal Assessment will consist of two hand written assignments (10 marks), 

Class Test (5 marks) & Class Attendance (5 marks). The marks for attendance will 

be given as per the following criteria:- 


(2) 81% to 90% : 4 Marks 

(3) 75% to 80% : 3 Marks 

(4) 70% to 75% : 2 Marks 


Semester-III 

(5) 65% to 70% : 1 Mark 

Paper-: Direct Methods of Social Work Practice 

10(707) 

Time: 3-Hrs 



*Internal Assessment: 20 


Under Field Practicum Component the students of IIIrd Semester will undertake Field 

Survey of rural area under supervision of a teacher to investigate socio-economic 

conditions/problems of people and submit a report to the Department of Social Work of the concern 

college. 

Semester-IV 

Paper-: Indirect Methods of Social Work Practice 

Time: 3-Hrs 



*Internal Assessment: 20 


Under Field Practicum Component the students of IVth Semester will undertake Field Survey of 

urban/slum community under supervision of a teacher to investigate socio-economic 

conditions/problems of people and submit a report to the Department of Social Work of the concern 

college. 

NOTE:- The Field Work Viva-voce examination will be conducted on the basis of 

field work in the each semester by external examiner. The reports of field 

work of IIIrd and IVth semesters must be submitted by the end of each 

semester before examination. 

* Internal Assessment will consist of two hand written assignments (10 marks) Class 

Test (5 marks) & Class Attendance (5 marks). The marks for attendance will be 

given as per the following criteria:- 


(2) 81% to 90% : 4 Marks 


(3) 75% to 80% : 3 Marks 

(4) 70% to 75% : 2 Marks 

(5) 65% to 70% : 1 Marks 

Semester-V 

Paper- Social Problems and Social Work Intervention 

Time: 3-Hrs 

Semester-VI 

Paper- Research Methodology 

Time: 3-Hrs 

B.A. Part-I Syllabus 

Semester-I 

Paper: Basics of Social Work 

10(708) 









Time: 3-Hrs 



Internal. Assessment: 20 

Field Practicum: 30 

UNIT-I Fundamental Sociological Concepts-meaning: meaning, definition, characteristics of 

society, community, association. 

Social Institutions-family, marriage, their types & functioning. 

UNIT-II Group : meaning, definition, characteristics and type. 

Social Work: Meaning, nature and scope. Goals of Social Work. 

UNIT –III Social Work and Related Concepts: social service, social reform, social welfare and 

social development. 

Relationship of Social Work with other Social Sciences. 

UNIT-IV Social Work as a Science and Art, Values and Philosophy of Social Work Principles 

of Social Work. 


NOTE:- 

The paper setter will set Nine questions in all i.e. two questions from each of the units 

carrying ten marks each and the ninth question containing five short answered questions carrying 

two marks each covering the entire syllabus. Candidates will be required to attempt four questions 

selecting one question from each unit of the fifth question containing short answer questions will be 

compulsory 

Books Recommended : 

1. Bhushan, V. & Sachdeva, D.R., 2006. An Introduction to Sociology, 

Allahabad: Kitab Mahal. 

2. Verma R.B.S Bharat Me Samaj Karya Ka Kashtra 

3. Mishra P.D. (2003) Samaj Karya Itiha Darshan Evam Parnaliyan 

4. Mishsra P.D Social Work Profession in India 

5. Singh A.N. Samaj Karya 

6. Singh Surendra Horizens of Social Work 

7. Clarks, H : Principles and Practice of Social Work 

8. Planning Commission : Social Welfare in India 

9. Friedlander, W.A. : Concept & Methods of Social Work 

10. Friedlander, W.A. : Introduction to Social Welfare 

11 Shastri, R.R. : Social Work Tradition in India 

Semester-II 

Paper-I : History & Fields of Social Work 

UNIT-I 

UNIT-II 

UNIT-III 

10(709) 

Time: 3-Hrs 

Max. Marks :100 




Historical development of social work in U.K, U.S.A. and India. Contribution of reform 

movements in 19 th and 20 th century. 

Fields of social work: family welfare, child welfare, women welfare and youth welfare, 

programmes and services Gandhian Constructive Programmes. 

Medical & Psychiatric Social work. Correctional Services in India. Role of Social Worker 

in Correctional Services. 


UNIT-IV 

NOTE:- 

Welfare of Weaker Sections: SC, ST, aged and physically challenged. 

Population Education. School Social Work 

The paper setter will set Nine questions in all i.e. two questions from each of the 

units carrying ten marks each and the ninth question containing five short answered questions 

carrying two marks each covering the entire syllabus. Candidates will be required to attempt four 

questions selecting one question from each unit of the fifth question containing short answer 

questions will be compulsory 


1. Wadia, A.R. : History & Philosophy of Social Work 

2. Stroup, H. : Social Work : Introduction to the Field 

3. Fink and Others : Fields of Social Work 

4. Bisno, H. : Philosophy of Social Work 

5. Mazumdar, A.M. : Social Welfare in India : Gandhi’s Contributions 

6 Verma R.B.S Bharat Me Samaj Karya Ka Kashtra 

7. Mishra P.D. (2003) Samaj Karya Itiha Darshan Evam Parnaliyan 

8. Mishsra P.D Social Work Profession in India 

9. Singh A.N. Samaj Karya 

10. Desai, Murli,2006. Ideologies and social Work: Historical and 

Contemporary analyses, Rawat Publication, New Delhi. 

11 Friedlander, W.A. (1958) Concepts and Methods of Social Work, Englewood 

Cliffs: Prentice-Hall. 

12. Shastri, R.R. (1966). Social Work tradition in India, Welfare Research 

Organization, Varanasi. 

B.A Semester-III 

Paper-: Direct Methods of Social Work Practice 

UNIT-I 

UNIT-II 

10(710) 

Time: 3-Hrs 





Social Case Work :concept, meaning, basic assumptions, objectives, historical development, 

components and principles. 

Basics of Social Case Work : intake, study, analysis, assessment, goal formation, 

treatment and termination. Defence Mechanism 


UNIT-III 

UNIT-IV 

NOTE:- 

Social Group Work :concept, meaning, basic assumptions, objectives, historical development & 

principles. Scope and need of social group work. 

Community Organization :concept, meaning, assumptions, objectives, scope, principles and steps. 

Recording :meaning, importance, types and uses of recording in social work practice. 

The paper setter will set Nine questions in all i.e. two questions from each of the units 

carrying ten marks each and the ninth question containing five short answered questions carrying 

two marks each covering the entire syllabus. Candidates will be required to attempt four questions 

selecting one question from each unit of the fifth question containing short answer questions will be 

compulsory 


1 Upadhyay R.K. 1991 Samajik Vaiyaktik Karya (Hindi); Chandigarh: 

Haryana Sahitaya Academy. 

2 Mishra, P.D. 1985 Samajik Vaiyaktik Sewa Karya (Hindi); Lucknow: 

Uttar Pradesh Hindi Sansthan. 

3 Mishra, P.D. 1985 Samajik Samuhik Sewa Karya (Hindi); Lucknow: 

Uttar Pradesh Hindi Sansthan. 

4 Kanopka, G. 1970 Group Work in the institution; New York: 

Association Press. 

5 Singh A.N. Samudaik Sangathan (Hindi); Chandigarh: Haryana 

Sahitaya Academy. 

6 Singh A.N. Community Empowerment Education: An Inter- 

disciplinary Approach; Ambala: Associated Pub. 

7 Kanopka, G. 1963 Social Group Work: A Helping Process; New Jere 

Prentice Hall Inc. 

Semester-IV 

Paper-I: Indirect Methods of Social Work Practice 

UNIT-I 

10(711) 

Time: 3-Hrs 





Social Action: meaning, nature, objectives, principles and role of social worker in social action. 


UNIT-II 

UNIT-III 

UNIT-IV 

NOTE:- 

Social Welfare Administration: meaning, definition, features, functions and principles. 

Difference between social welfare administration, social administration & public 

administration. 

Social Research: meaning, definition, types, significance and steps of social research 

Social Work Research: meaning, objectives & difference with social research 

Socialization: concept. significance, process and factors and agencies. Role of family, 

peergroup, neighbourhood, school and religion in socialization 

The paper setter will set Nine questions in all i.e. two questions from each of the units carrying ten 

marks each and the ninth question containing five short answered questions carrying two marks 

each covering the entire syllabus. Candidates will be required to attempt four questions selecting 

one question from each unit of the fifth question containing short answer questions will be 

compulsory 


1 Siddiqui, H.Y. Social Work and Social Action; New Delhi: Harnam 

Publications. 

2 Goel, S.C. and Jain Social Welfare Administration; Vol I & II; New Delhi: Deep & 

P.K. 

Deep Publication. 

3 Chaudhary, D. Paul Social Welfare Administration; Delhi: Atma Ram & sons. 

4 Young, P.V. 1968 Scientific Social Surveys & Research; New Delhi: Prentice Hall 

of India. 

5 Gupta, S.P. 1969 Statistical Methods; Delhi: Sultan Chand and sons. 

6 Bhushan V. & 

Sachdev D.R. 

An introduction to sociology; Allahabad: Kitab Mahal. 

7 Maclver, R.M& Society: An Introductory Analysis; Madras: Macmillan W of 

Page C.H. 1985 India Ltd. 

10(712) 


Semester-V 

Paper- Social Problems and Social Work Intervention 

Time: 3-Hrs 

UNIT-I 

UNIT-II 

UNIT-III 

UNIT-IV 

NOTE:- 

10(713) 

Max. Marks :100 




Social Change; meaning, pattern, sources and agencies of social change. 

Social Disorganisation ; Concept, Process, Symptoms, Factors, Types and Causes, Social 

Change and Social disorganisation 

Social deviation ; Meaning, definition and scope/fields of social deviation. 

Social Problem: Meaning and Concept. 

Major Social Problems in India: Unemployment, Corruption, Poverty, Child Labour and 

Dowry their causes, effects and suggestions Govt. Measures to eradicate the Problem. 

Emerging Social Problems: Drug abuse, Alcoholism, HIV/AIDS, Juvenile Delinquency 

Domestic violence, Female Feticide causes effects and remedies. 

Role of Social Worker in dealing with these problems. 

Environment Pollution: meaning & concept, Land Pollution, Water Pollution, Air 

Pollution, Noise Pollution causes, effects, prevention and role of social worker. 





compulsory 


Semester-VI 

Paper- Research Methodology 

UNIT-I 

UNIT-II 

UNIT-III 

UNIT-IV 

NOTE:- 

10(714) 

Time: 3-Hrs 

Max. Marks: : 100 




Social Research: meaning, objectives, importance, types and steps of social research. 

Identification of problem, review of literature, sampling, Analysis of Data. 

Social Phenomena: meaning and nature. 

Social Survey: Meaning, nature, subject matter and scope, types, importance, difference between 

social survey and social research. 

Types of Data- Primary & Secondary. 

Tools of data collection: meaning, types, characteristics, uses and limitations of interview 

schedule, questionnaire, interview, observation and case study. 

Statistics: meaning and significance, Tabulation & Graphical Presentation of Data. 

Measures of Central Tendency – mean, median and mode. 

Report writing, Preparation of References & Bibliography. 





compulsory 

Semester-V 

In the Fifty semester under Field Practicum component , the student will under take two detailed 

case studies under the supervision of a teacher on the Social Problem as mentioned in the course 

content . The students will be required to submit the case studies and leaving. 


Note : The Field Work Viva-Voce examination will be conducted on the basis of field two case 

studies submitted by an external examiner . Case studies must be submitted by the end of the Vth 

semester before examination. 


In the VIth Semester under field practicum component, student will undertake a social survey under 

supervision of a teacher on any social issue. The report of which will include tabulation, graphical 

presentation and findings, 

In the VIth Semester under field work component, students will be placed individually in any NGO. 

/ melts institutions for 7 working days. The students will submitted their observation report about 

functioning, organizational structure, programmes and services of organization, sources of funding 

with discussion with the beneficiaries and analyses in their life style. 

10(715) 


M. A. Economics 

2012-2013 

Course Structure 

M.A. Economics (Semester I) 

Total Marks External Internal Time 

Paper-101 Micro Economic Analysis-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Paper-102 Macro Economic Analysis-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Paper-103 Quantitative Methods-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Paper-104 

Paper-105 

Public Economics-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Option (i) Financial Economics-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Option (ii) Demography-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Option (iii) Economics of Infrastructure-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Option (iv) Economics of Insurance-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Option (v) Economics of Labour-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Option (vi) Computer Applications in 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Economic Analysis-I (60 Theory + 20 Practical) 

Option (vii) Mathematical Economics-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Option (viii) Economics of Regionalism-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Note: Students are required to select any one option from Paper-105. The students will select 

the same optional stream in Semester II. 

M.A. 1st Semester 

Paper-101 (Compulsory) 

MICRO ECONOMIC ANALYSIS-I 

10(716) 

Session : 2012-13 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 

Note: (i) Nine Question will be set in all and students will be required to attempt 5 questions. 

(ii) Question No. 1 will be compulsory and will consist of 8 short answer type questions 

of 2 marks spread over the entire syllabus (2*8=16 marks). 

(iii) For the remaining four questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2 questions from each 

of the four units (16 marks each). 

PREAMBLE 

This paper analyses the economic behaviour of individuals, firms and markets. It is mainly 

concerned with the objective of equipping the students in a rigorous and comprehensive manner 

with the various aspects of consumer behaviour and demand analysis, production theory and 

behaviour of costs, the theory of traditional markets and equilibrium of firm in modern non-profit 

maximizing framework. The paper also deals with the micro and macro theories of distribution, 


welfare economics, general equilibrium in closed and open systems and analysis of economic 

behaviour under uncertainty. 

Unit-I 

Theories of Demand: Indifference curve approaches; Income and Substitute effects (Hicks and 

Slutsky); Revealed preference theory; The Consumer’s surplus. Applications of Indifference Curve 

Analysis; Demand function and Elasticities (Price, cross, income) of demand. Revision of Demand 

theory by Hicks; Linear expenditure system. 

Unit-II 

Production function and Laws of production; Technical Progress and production function; 

Equilibrium of the firm; Derivation of cost function from production function;(using Cobb- 

Douglas function); Equilibrium of Multi-product firm; Theories of costs – traditional and 

modern; Analysis of economies of scale. 

Unit-III 

Perfect competition – Short and long term equilibrium of the firm and industry. 

Monopoly – short run and long run equilibrium; Price discrimination; Multiplant firm; Bilateral 

monopoly. 

Monopolistic competition - Chamberlin’s approaches to equilibrium of the firm. 

Unit-IV 

Oligopoly – non-collusive models: Cournot, Bertrand, Chamberlin, Kinked-demand curve 

and Stackleberg solution. 

Collusive models: Market sharing cartels; Price leadership models. 

Basic Reading List 

� Kreps, David M. (1990), A Course in Microeconomic Theory, Princeton University Press, 

Princeton. 

� Koutsoyiannis, A. (1979), Modern Microeconomics, (2nd Edition), Macmillan Press, London. 

� Layard, P.R.G. and A.W. Walters (1978), Microeconomic Theory, McGraw Hill, New York. 

� Sen, A. (1999), Microeconomics: Theory and Applications, Oxford University Press, New 

Delhi. 

� Varian, H. (2000), Microeconomic Analysis, W.W. Norton, New York. 

Additional Reading List 

� Baumol, W.J. (1982), Economic Theory and Operations Analysis, Prentice Hall of India, New 

Delhi. 

� Hirshleifer, J. and A. Glazer (1997), Price Theory and Applications, Prentice Hall of India, New 

Delhi. 

� Green H.A.G. (1971), Consumer Theory, Penguin, Harmondsworth. 

� Henderson, J.M. and R.E. Quandt (1980), Microeconomic Theory: A Mathematical Approach, 


� Da Costa, G. C. (1980), Production, Prices and Distribution, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

� Healthfields and Wibe (1987), An Introduction to Cost and Production Functions, Macmillan, 

London. 

� Archibald, G.C. (Ed.) (1971), Theory of the Firm, Penguin, Harmondsworth. 

� Broadway, R.W. and N. Bruce (1984), Welfare Economics, Basil Blackwell, London. 

10(717) 


� Graff, J. De. V. (1957), Theoretical Welfare Economics, Cambridge University Press, 

Cambridge. 

� Quirk, J. and R. Saposnik (1968), Introduction to General Equilibrium Theory and Welfare 

Economics, McGraw Hill, New York. 

� Borch, K.H. (1968), The Economics of Uncertainty, Princeton University Press, Princeton. 

� Diamond and Rothschild (Eds.) (1978), Uncertainty in Economics, Academic Press New York. 


Session : 2012-13 


MACRO ECONOMIC ANALYSIS-I 

10(718) 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 




(iii) For the remaining four questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2 questions from each of 

the four units (16 marks each). 

PREAMBLE 

Macroeconomics analyses and establishes the functional relationships between large aggregates. 

The aggregate analysis has assumed such a great significance in recent times that a prior 

understanding of macroeconomics theoretical structure is considered essential for the proper 

comprehension of the different issues and policies. Macroeconomics now is not only a scientific 

method of analysis; but also a body of empirical economic knowledge. The paper equips the 

students at the postgraduate level to understand systematic facts and latest theoretical developments 

for empirical analysis at economy level. 

Unit-I 

National Income and Accounts 

Circular Flow of Income in two, three and four-sector economy; different forms of national income 

accounting – social accounting, input-output accounting, flow of funds accounting. 

Consumption function 

Keynes’ Psychological law of consumption – implications of the law; Empirical evidence on 

consumption function; Reconciliation of short run and long run consumption function – absolute 

income, relative income, permanent income and life cycle hypotheses. 

Investment Theories 

Unit-II 

Investment Function; The Marginal Efficiency of Capital Approach; Accelerator- Simple & 

Flexible; Profits Theory; Financial Theory; The Neoclassical Model. 


Demand for Money 

Unit-III 

Classical and Keynesian approach (The Regressive Expectations model); Post Keynesian 

approaches to demand for money-Tobin (Portfolio balance approach), Baumol (Inventory theoretic 

approaches) and Friedman (Restatement of quantity theory of money). 

Unit-IV 

Supply of Money 

Measures of money supply; Instruments of Monetary control. Mechanism of Monetary expansion 

and contraction (deterministic and behavioural models); Determinants of money supply; 

Neo-classical and Keynesian Synthesis 

The Basic IS-LM model, extension of IS-LM model with government sector, labour market and 

variable price level. 


� Ackley, G. (1978), Macroeconomics: Theory and Policy, Macmillan, New York. 

� Blackhouse, R. and A. Salansi (Eds.) (2000), Macroeconomics and the Real World (2 Vols.), 

Oxford University Press, London. 

� Branson, W.A. (1989), Macroeconomic Theory and Policy, (3rd Edition), Harper and Row, 

New York. 

� Dornbusch, R. and F. Stanley (1999), Macroeconomics, Irwrin McGraw Hill, Inc. New York, 

7th Edition. 

� Heijdra, B.J. and V.P. Fredericck (2001), Foundations of Modern Macroeconomics, Oxford 

University Press, New Delhi. 

� Jha, R. (1991), Contemporary Macroeconomic Theory and Policy, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New 

Delhi. 

� Romer, D.L. (1996), Advanced Macroeconomics, McGraw Hill Company Ltd., New York. 

� Shapiro, E. (1996), Macroeconomic Analysis, Galgotia Publications, New Delhi. 


� Mankiw, N.G. and D. Romer (Eds.) (1991), New Keynesian Economics, (2Vols.), MIT Press, 

Cambridge. 

� Mankiw, N. Greogory (2000), Macroeconomics Macmillan Worth Publishers 4th Edition 

� Frisch, H. (1983), Theories of Inflation, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge. 

� Sheffirin, S.M. (1996), Rational Expectations, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge. 

� Lucas, R. (1981), Studies in Business Cycle Theory, MIT Press, Cambridge, Masscechusetts. 

� Taylor, L. (1983), Structuralist Macroeconomics, Basic Books, New Longman. 

� Turnovsky, S.J. (1977), Macroeconomic Analysis and Stabilization Policy, Cambridge 

University Press, Cambridge. 

� Ruggles R. and N. Ruggles (1956), National Income Accounts and Income Analysis Mc Graw 

Hill, Newyork. 

� Veniers, Y.P. and F.D.Sebold, (1977) Macroeconomics; Models and Policy 

John Wiley and Inc, USA. 

� Dernburg, T.F.and D. M.Mc Dougall, Macroeconomics, McGraw Hill International Book 

Company. 

10(719) 



Session: 2012-13 


Time: 3 Hrs. 

QUANTITATIVE METHODS-I 

10(720) 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 




(iii) For the remaining four questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2 questions from 

each of the four units (16 marks each). 

PREAMBLE 

The main objective of this paper is to train the students to use the techniques of mathematical and 

statistical analysis, which are commonly applied to understand and analyze economic problems. 

The emphasis of this paper is on understanding economic concepts with the help of mathematical 

methods rather than learning mathematics itself. Hence in this paper a student will be initiated into 

various economic concepts, which are amenable to mathematical treatment. The paper also deals 

with simple tools and techniques, which will help a student in data collection, presentation, analysis 

and drawing inferences about various statistical hypotheses. 

Unit-I 

Concept of Matrix and Determinant – their types, simple operations on matrices, matrix inversion 

and rank of matrix; Solution of simultaneous equations through Cramer’s rule and Matrix inverse 

method. Introduction to input-output analysis. 

Unit II 

Rules of differentiation; Elasticity and their types; Rules of Partial differentiation and interpretation 

of partial derivatives; Problem of maxima and minima in single and multivariable function; 

Unconstrained and constrained optimization in simple economic problems. 

Unit III 

Concept and simple rules of integration; Application to consumer’s and producer’s surplus. 

Difference equations – Solution of first order and second order difference equations; Applications 

in trade cycle models; Growth models and lagged market equilibrium models. 

Unit IV 

Linear programming – Basic concept, Nature of feasible, basic and optimal solution; Solution of 

linear programming problem through graphical and simplex method. 

Concept of a game; Two person Zero sum game; value of a game; strategies- simple and mixed; 

Dominance rule; Solution of a game by linear programming. 


� Mathematics for Economics by Michael Hoy etal, PHI, New Delhi, 2004. 


� Quantitative Methods for Business and Economics by Adil H. Mouhammed, PHI, New Delhi, 

2003. 

� Quantitative Methods by D.R. Aggarwal 

� Basic Mathematics for Economists by R.C. Joshi, New Academic Publishing 

� Leontief, W. (1936) Quantitative input-output relations in the economic systems of the United 

States. Review of Economics and Statistics, Vol 18, pp.105-125. 

� Miller, R.E. and P.D. Blair (1985) Input-Output Analysis: Foundations and Extensions. 

Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey. 

� Proops, J., Faber, M. and Wagenhals, G. (1993) Reducing CO2 Emissions: A Comparative 

Input-Output Study for Germany and the UK, Springer-Verlag, Heidelberg. 

� Aggarwal, H.S. : Modren Micro -Economics, Konark, New Delhi, 1998. 

� Taro Yamane, Mathematics for Economists, PHI, 1973. 

� Quantitative Techniques in Management by N.D. Vohra, TMH. 

� Operations Research by R. Wagnor 

� Operations Research by Hamdy A. Taha 

� Allen R.G.D. (1974), Mathematical Analysis for Economists, Macmillan Press, London. 

� Black, J. and J.F. Bradley (1973), Essential Mathematics for Economists, John Wiley and Sons. 

� Chiang, A.C. (1986), Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics (3rd Edition), 



Paper-104 (Compulsory) Session : 2012-13 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


PUBLIC ECONOMICS –I 

10(721) 

External : 80 

Internal : 20 






PREAMBLE 

Role and functions of the Government in an economy have been changing with the passage of time. 

The term ‘Public Finance’ has traditionally been applied to the package of those policies and 

operations which involve the use of tax and expenditure measures while budgetary policy is an 

important part to understand the basic problems of use of resources, distribution of income, etc. 

There are vast array of fiscal institutions — tax systems, expenditure programmes, budgetary 

procedures, stabilization instruments, debt issues, levels of government, etc., which raise a 

spectrum of issues arising from the operation of these institutions. Further, the existence of 

externalities, concern for adjustment in the distribution of income and wealth, etc. require political 

processes for 


their solution in a manner which combines individual freedom and justice. This paper combines a 

thorough understanding of fiscal institutions with a careful analysis of the issues which underline 

budgetary policies in general and Indian experience in particular. 

UNIT – I 

Economic Rationale of Mixed Economy; Role of Government in a State; Efficiency, markets and 

Governments; Market Failure and the rationale for Government Intervention; Natural Monopolies 

and Market Failure; Non-Existence of Futures Markets and Market Failure; Asymmetric 

Information and market Failure; The Problem of Externalities and their Internalization 

UNIT – II 

Concept, Characteristics and Types of Public Goods; Efficient Provision of Public Goods; Pure 

Theories of Public Goods – Bowen Model, Lindahl Model, Pigou Model, Samuelson Model; 

Empirical Theories of public goods – Wagner Hypothesis, Wiseman-Peacock Hypothesis; 

Preference revelation Mechanisms for Public Goods – Thompson Mechanism, Clarke Mechanism, 

Lindahl- Wicksell Mechanism; Theory of Club Goods. 

UNIT – III 

Efficiency and Equity Principles of Taxation; Incentive Effects of Taxation on Labour Supply; 

Supply of Savings and Risk Taking; Taxation and Investment; Other Distorting Effects of the Tax 

System; Tax Incidence – Partial and General equilibrium Analysis; Mieszkowski Analysis of Tax 

Incidence; Keynesian Short Run Model of Tax Incidence; Dynamic Tax Incidence. 

UNIT – IV 

Normative Analysis of Taxation – Income v/s Excise Tax; Optimal Tax Mix – Optimal Commodity 

Tax, Optimal Income Tax; Excess Burden of Tax and its Measurement; Equity Considerations in 

the Choice of a Tax System; Corporation tax and its Effects on Corporate Decisions; Indian 

Taxation System; Fiscal Reforms in India; Fiscal Imbalance in India; Value Added Tax in India. 

Reading List 


� American Economic Association, Readings in the Economics of Taxation, edited by R. A. 

Musgrave and C. Shoup (Homewood: Richard D. Irwin, 1959). 

� Anthony Downs, An Economic Theory of Democracy (New York: Harper, 1957). 

� Duncan Black and R. A. Newing, Committee Decisions with Complementary Valuation 

(London:William Hodge, 1951). 

� Duncan Black, The Theory of Committees and Elections (Cambridge: Cambridge 

University Press, 1958). 

� Howard Bowen, Toward Social Economy (New York: Rinehart, 1948), pt. IV. 

� International Economic Association, Classics in the Theory of Public Finance, edited by R. 

A. Musgrave and A. T. Peacock (London: Macmillan, 1958). 

� J. de V. Graaf, TheoreticalWelfare Economics (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 

1957). 

� James M. Buchanan and Gordon Tullock, The Calculus of Consent (Ann Arbor: University 

of Michigan Press, 1962). 

� James M. Buchanan, Fiscal Theory and Political Economy (Chapel Hill: University of 

North Carolina Press, 1960). 

10(722) 


� Kenneth J. Arrow, Social Choice and Individual Values (New York: John Wiley and Sons, 

1951; Revised edition, 1963). 

� Mancur Olson, The Logic of Collective Action (Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 

1965). 

� R. A. Musgrave, The Theory of Public Finance (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1959). 

� William J. Baumol, Welfare Economics and the Theory of the State (Cambridge: Harvard 

University Press, 1952; Revised second edition, 1965). 

Advanced Reading List 

� Atkinson, A. and J. Stiglitz, Lectures on Public Economics, 16-1. 

� Atkinson, A. B. and N. Stern, “Pigou, Taxation, and Public Goods,” Rev. Econ. Stud., 

January 1974. 

� Baumol, W., “On Taxation and the Control of Externalities,” Amer. Econ. Rev., June 1972. 

� Berglas, E. and D. Pines, “Clubs, Local Public Goods, and Transportation Models: A 

Synthesis,” J. Public Econ., April 1981 (Sections 1-3). 

� Bergstrom, T., “When Does Majority Rule Supply Public Goods Efficiently?” Scand. J. 

Econ., No. 2, 1979. 

� Bergstrom, T., et. al., “Micro-Based Estimates of Demand Functions for Local School 

Expenditures,” Econometrica, September 1982. 

� Bergstrom, T., L. Blume, and H. Varian, “On the Private Provision of Public Goods,” J. 

Public Econ., January 1986. 

� Borcherding, T. and R. Deacon, “The Demand for the Services of Non-Federal 

Governments,” Amer. Econ. Rev., December 1972. 

� Bradford, D. and Oates, W., “Toward a Predictive Theory of Intergovernmental Grants,” 

Amer. Econ. Rev., May 1971. 

� Brito, D. and W. Oakland, “On the Monopolistic Provision of Excludable Public Goods,” 

Amer. Econ. Rev., March 1981. 

� Brueckner, J., “Congested Public Goods: The Case of Fire Protection,” J. Public Econ., 

February 1981. 

� Brueckner, J., “Equilibrium in a System of Communities with Local Public Goods: A 

Diagrammatic Exposition,” Economics Letters, 1979. 

� Brueckner, J., “Property Value Maximization and Public Sector Efficiency,” J. Urban 

Econ., July 1983. 

� Brueckner, J., “Tastes, Skills, and Local Public Goods,” J. Urban Econ., March 1994 

� Coase, R., “The Problem of Social Cost,” J. Law Econ., October 1960. 

� Cornes, R. and T. Sandler, The Theory of Externalities, Public Goods, and Club Goods, pp. 

69-80. 

� Feldman, A., Welfare Economics and Social Choice Theory, Ch. 6 (Sections 1-3) 

� Groves, T. and M. Loeb, “Incentives and Public Inputs,” J. Public Econ., August 1975. 

� Hamilton, B., “The Flypaper Effect and Other Anomalies,” J. Public Econ., December 

1983. 

� Helsley, R. and W. Strange, “Exclusion and the Theory of Clubs,” Canadian J. Econ., 

November 1991. 

� Lee, K. “Bureaucrats and Tax Limitation,” J. Urban Econ., July 1993. 

� McGuire, T., “Budget-Maximizing Governmental Agencies: An Empirical Test,” Public 

Choice, 1981. 

� Moene, K., “Types of Bureaucratic Interaction,” J. Public Econ., 1986. 

� Niskanen, W., “The Peculiar Economics of Bureaucracy,” Amer. Econ. Rev., May 1968. 

10(723) 


� Peltzman, S., “The Effect of Government Subsidies in Kind on Private Expenditures: The 

Case of Higher Education,” J. Polit. Economy, January/February 1973. 

� Romer, T. and H. Rosenthal, “The Elusive Median Voter,” J. Public Econ., October 1979. 

� Samuelson, P., “A Diagrammatic Exposition of a Theory of Public Expenditure,” Rev.Econ. 

Statist., November 1955. 

� Samuelson, P., “The Pure Theory of Expenditure and Taxation,” in Public Economics, 

Margolis and Guiton, Eds. 

� Sandmo, A., “Public Goods and the Technology of Consumption,” Rev. Econ. 

Stud.,October 1973. 

� Scotchmer, S. and M. Wooders, “Competitive Equilibrium and the Core in Club Economies 

with Anonymous Crowding,” J. Public Econ., November 1987. 

� Silva, E. and C. Kahn, “Exclusion and Moral Hazard: The Case of Identical Demand,” J. 

Public Econ., September 1993. 

� Tiebout, C., “A Pure Theory of Local Expenditures,” reprinted in Readings in Urban 

Economics, Edel and Rothenberg, Eds. 

� Turnbull, G., “The Overspending and Flypaper Effects of Fiscal Illusion: Theory and 

Empirical Evidence”, Journal of Urban Economics, July 1998. 

� Wheaton, W., “Land Capitalization, Tiebout Mobility, and the Role of Zoning Regulations,” 

J. Urban Econ., September 1993. 

� White, M. and D. Wittman, “Pollution Taxes and Optimal Spatial Location,” Economica, 

May 1982. 

� Wildasin, D., “On Public Good Provision with Distortionary Taxation,” Economic Inquiry, 

April 1984. 

� Wilson, J., “Theories of Tax Competition,” National Tax Journal, June 1999. 

� Zodrow, G. and P. Mieszkowski, “Pigou, Tiebout, Property Taxation, and the 

Underprovision of Local Public Goods,” J. Urban Econ., May 1986. 


Paper-105 (Option-I) 

FINANCIAL ECONOMICS-I 

10(724) 

Session : 2012-13 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 


(ii) Question No. 1 will be compulsory and will consist of 8 short answer type questions of 

2 marksspread over the entire syllabus (2*8=16 marks). 



PREAMBLE 

Financial economics is the branch of economics studying the interrelation of financial variables, 

such as prices, interest rates and shares, as opposed to those concerning the real economy. Financial 

economics concentrates on influences of real economic variables on financial ones, in contrast to 

pure finance. Financial economics is primarily concerned with building models to derive testable or 


policy implications from acceptable assumptions. The theory component centers on decision 

making under uncertainty in the context of the financial markets, and the resultant economic and 

financial models. The application of the economic principles include the valuation and 

determination of the fair value of an asset; the riskiness of the asset, generation of cash flows and 

their discounting; relative valuations; derivatives and other financial instruments. The aim here is 

twofold: firstly, to complement the theory; secondly, providing students with practical market 

knowledge. 

Unit-I 

Nature and Scope of Financial Economics; Goals of Finance; Economics of capital Budgeting- 

Investment Criteria, Estimation of project Cash Flows, Risk Analysis in Capital Budgeting, 

Computation of Cost of Capital. 

Unit-II 

Economics of Capital Structure and Firm Value- Net Income Approach, Net Operating income 

Approach, Modigliani and Miller Approach; Analysis of Optimal Capital structure – EBIT & EPS 

Analysis, ROI & ROE Analysis, Operating and Financial Leverage; Ratio Analysis. 

Unit-III 

Economics of Dividends- Walter Model, Gordon Model, Modigliani and Miller Model; Economics 

of Working Capital- Estimation of Working Capital, Financing of working Capital. Cost-Volume- 

Profit Analysis; Economics of Mergers and Acquisitions. 

Unit-IV 

Economics of Cash – Cash Budgeting and its Simulation, Optimal Cash balance, Baumol Model, 

Miller and Orr Model; Economics of Receivables; Discriminant Analysis and Customer 

Classification; Economics of Inventory – EOQ Model, Pricing of Raw materials, Monitoring and 

Control of Inventories. 

Reading List 

� A.Auerbach, “Corporate Takeovers: Causes and Consequences”, University of 

Chicago Press, 1988 

� A.C.Shapiro, “Modern Corporate Finance”, Macmillan Publishing Co., New 

York,1991 

� Brealey, Myers and Allen, “Principles of Corporate Finance”, McGraw Hill, Inc., 

New York, 8 th Edition. 

� D.R.Mehta, “Working Capital Management”, Prentice Hall Inc., Englewood Cliffs, 

N.J.,1974 

� Deryl Northcott, “Capital Investment Decision-Making”,Thomson Learning, 1992. 

ISBN10: 1861524587 

� E.I.Altman and M.G.Subrahmanyam (ed.), “Recent advances in corporate Finance”, 

Richard D.Irwin, Inc., Homewood, Ill., 1985 

� F.J.Weston, “The Scope and Methodology of Finance”, Prentice Hall, Englewood 

Cliffs, N.J. 1966. 

� G.Donaldson, “Corporate Debt Capacity”, Division of Research, Graduate school of 

Business administration, Harvard University Press, Boston, 1961 

� H.Bierman,Jr. and S. Smidt, “The Capital Budgeting Decision”, The Macmillan 

Company, New York, 1988. 

10(725) 


� J. Harold Mulherin, “Mergers and Corporate Governance”, Edward Elgar 

Publishing, 2004. ISBN10: 1843764210 

� J.A.Brittain, “Corporate Dividend Policy”, Brookings Institution, Washington D.C., 

1966 

� J.C.Van Horne, “Financial Management and Policy”, Prentice hall, New Delhi, 1995 

� Jason Draho, “The IPO Decision: Why and How Companies Go Public”, Edward 

Elgar Publishing, 2004. ISBN10: 1843766132 

� Jay R. Ritter (Ed.), “Recent Developments in Corporate Finance”, Edward Elgar, 

2005. ISBN10: 184376797X 

� Jean Tirole, “The Theory of Corporate Finance”, Princeton University Press, 2006. 

ISBN10: 0691125562 

� Joel M. Stern, “Revolution in Corporate Finance”, Blackwell Publishing, 1997. 

ISBN10: 1577180445 

� John D. Martin, J. William Petty, “Value Based Management: Corporate Response 

to the Shareholder Revolution”, Oxford University Press Inc, USA, 2001. ISBN10: 

0875848001 

� Jonathan Barron Baskin, “A History of Corporate Finance”, Cambridge University 

Press, 1999. ISBN10: 0521655366 

� Prasana Chandra, “Financial Management”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company 

Limited, New Delhi 


Paper-105 (Option-II) Session : 2012-13 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 

DEMOGRAPHY-I 



2 marks spread over the entire syllabus (2*8=16 marks). 



PREAMBLE 

The main objective of this paper is to make the students aware of the importance of population in 

economic development and the various theories that explain the growth of population in a country. 

The paper also enlightens the student on the quantitative and the qualitative aspects and 

characteristics of the population through various demographic techniques. In recent times, gender 

characteristics of the population have acquired importance and these have also been included in the 

framework of study. Migration and urbanization are the characteristics of structural change taking 

place in a society. Their study is essential to understand the dynamics of this change. The paper 

exposes the students to sources of population and related characteristics as also to the rationale, 

need and evolution of population policy. 

10(726) 


Unit-I 

Population and Development-meaning and scope of demography; Components of population 

growth and their inter-dependence; Measures of population change and sources of population data. 

Unit-II 

Latest Population trends; Population explosion; International aspects of population growth and 

distribution; Pattern of age and sex structure in more developed and less developed countries. 

Unit-III 

Importance of study of fertility – Total fertility rate, gross reproduction rate and net reproduction 

rate; Factors affecting fertility – Socio-economic factors, economic status, health, education, 

nutrition, caste, religion, race, region, rural-urban and status of husband and wife; Nuptiality – 

Concept and analysis of marital status; Trends in age at marriage. 

Unit-IV 

Urbanization – Growth and distribution of rural–urban population in india – Methodology and 

characteristics of Census; Nature of information collected in census in India with emphasis on latest 

Census.Population and human development issues; Culture and fertility; Education and fertility; 

Demography and household economic behaviour. 


� Bose, A. (1996), India’s Basic Demographic Statistics, B.R. Publishing Corporation, New 

Delhi. 

� Chenery H. and T.N. Srinivasan (Eds.)(1989), Hand Book of Development Economics, Vol. 1 

& 2 Elsevier, Amsterdam. 

� Choubey, P.K. (2000), Population Policy in India, Kanishka Publications, New Delhi. 

� Coale, A.J. and E.M. Hoover (1958), Population Growth and Economic Development in Low 

Income Countries: A Case Study of India’s Prospectus, Princeton University Press, Princeton. 

� Goel, MM ( 2011): Economics of Human Resource Development in India, VK Global 



� Simon, J.L. (1992), Population and Development in Poor Countries, Princeton University Press. 

� Srinivasan, K, (1998), Basic Demographic Techniques and Applications, Sage, New Delhi. 

� Srinivasan, K. and A.Shariff (1998), India: Towards Population and Demographic Goals, 

Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 

� Agnihotri, S.B. (2000), Sex ration in Indian Population: A Fresh Exploration, Sage New Delhi. 

� Baud, I.S.A. (1992), Form of Production and Women’s Labour, Gender Aspects of 

Industrialization in India and Mexico, Sage, New Delhi. 

� Jhabwala, R. and R.K. Subramanya (2000) (Eds.), The Unorganized Sector: Work Security and 

Social Protection, Sage, New Delhi. 

� King M. and M.A. Hill (Eds.) (1993), Women’s Education in Developing Countries: Barriers, 

Benefits and Politics, John Hopkins, Baltimore. 

� Krshnaji M., R.M. Sudarshan and A. Shariff (1999), Gender Population and Development, 


� Lewis (Ed.) (1989), Strengthening the Poor: What Have We Learnt, OECD, Paris. 

10(727) 


� Sudarshan and A. Shariff (1999), Gender Population and Development, Oxford University 

Press, New Delhi. 

� Gupta, J. A. (2000), New Reproductive Technologies, Women’s Health and Autonomy, Indo 

Dutch Studies on Development Alternatives, Sage, New Delhi. 

� Mishra S. (2000), Voluntary Action in Health and Population: The Dynamics of Social 

Transition, Sage, New Delhi. 

� Seth M. (2000), Women and Development: The Indian Experience, Sage, New Delhi 


Paper- 105 (Option-III) Session : 2012-13 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 

ECONOMICS OF INFRASTRUCTURE-I 






PREAMBLE 

The important role infrastructure plays in a country’s development need not be reiterated. In case of 

developing countries, lack of adequate infrastructure has been held as a major obstacle to growth. 

The main purpose of this paper is to introduce a course on infrastructure, as it would help the 

students to understand the strength of infrastructure - physical and social in the process of economic 

development. 

Unit-I 

Infrastructure – Physical & Social Infrastructure; Infrastructure as a public good; the peak load, off 

- load problem; Present status & progress of infrastructure in Indian economy; Role of 

infrastructure in economic development; Issues & policies in financing of infrastructure. 

Unit-II 

Transport system- Modes, problems and importance; pricing principles; Present status and issues in 

transport infrastructure in Indian economy; Development of transport infrastructure in various 

plans. 

Unit-III 

Primacy of Energy in the Process of Economic Development; Sources of energy: Renewable & 

Non Renewable; Energy Conservation; Effects of Energy Shortages; The search for an Optimal 

Energy Policy in the Indian Context. 

Unit-IV 

Concept, scope and relevance of Human Resource Development (HRD); Domain of HRD; 

Educational infrastructure and Economic Growth; Approaches to Educational Planning- Social 

10(728) 


Demand, Rate of Return and Manpower Balance Approaches; The case for Universal, Free, 

Primary Education; The issues & challenges in Indian higher education. 


� Crew, M.A. P.R. Kleindorfer (1979), Public Utility Economics, Macmillan, London. 

� Indian Council of Social Sciences Research (ICSSR) (1976), Economics of Infrastructure, Vol. 

VI, New Delhi. 

� Goel, M.M. (2011), Economics of Human Resource Development in India, VK Global 

Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, ISBN 978- 93-5058-014-1. 

� Kneafsey J.T: Transportation - Economic Analysis (Lex ington, Torouts, 1975) 

� National Council of Applied Economic Research (NCAER) (1996), India Infrastructure Report; 

Policy Implications for Growth and Welfare, NCAER, New Delhi. 

� Parikh, K.S. (Ed.) (1997), India Development Report 1997, Oxford, New Delhi. 

� Parikh, K.S. (Ed.) (1999), India Development Report – 1999-2000, Oxford, New Delhi. 

� Raghuram G & Rich J: Infrastructure Development and Financing (Mac Millan, New Delhi, 

1999) 

� Turvey. R. (Ed.) (1968), Public Enterprises, Penguin, Harmondwoth. 


� Goyal, S.K. (Ed.) (1995), Public Enterprises, Indian Institute of Public Administration, New 

Delhi. 

� Panchamukh, P.R. (1980), Economics of Health: A Trend Report in ICSSR, A Survey of 

Research in Economics, Vol. VI, Infrastructure, Allied, Delhi. 

� Tilak, J.B.G. (1994), Education for Development in Asia, Sage Publications, New Delhi. 


Paper- 105 (Option-IV) 

ECONOMICS OF INSURANCE-I 

10(729) 

Session : 2012-13 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 






PREAMBLE 

The vital role of insurance in the task of risk-bearing and risk-elimination in the economic affairs 

has not been appreciated adequately in our country. Given that the element of risk or uncertainty is 

a universal and fundamental phenomenon in our economic life, the importance of insurance as a 

means of reducing uncertainty and risk in regard to personal and business activities cannot be 

overemphasized. The role of insurance sector in mobilizing a country’s saving for channeling them 

into capital formation and thus contribute to a country’s economic development is also 

documented. There is a wide spread recognition that insurance, particularly life insurance, is a 


prominent segment of applied economics. Insurance industry is an important constituent of 

financial services industry in India and is a major investment institution and prominent player in the 

capital market. However, in our country, study of the subject of insurance has largely remained 

neglected. With the opening of the insurance sector for private Indians and foreign players, the 

interest in the subject has been kindled. This course on Insurance Economics attempts to give a 

fairly comprehensive view of the subject to the postgraduate students in Economics and pave the 

way for possible future expansion of the teaching of an important branch of economics. 

Unit-I 

Economic Security; Human quest for economic security through time; Exposure to losses; Role and 

definition of insurance; Risk pooling and risk transfer; Economic and legal perspectives; Social vs. 

private insurance; Life vs. non-life insurance; Classification of life, health and general insurance 

policies. 

Unit-II 

Fundamentals of life & health insurance; Functions of life & health insurance; Mathematical basis 

of life insurance; Plans of life insurance; Legal aspects of life insurance; Provisions of policies; 

Individual health insurance; Uses and types of evaluation; Principles of underwriting of life & 

health insurance; Group insurance and superannuation (pension) schemes. 

Unit-III 

Fundamentals of uncertainty & risk; Pure risk & speculative risk; Expected utility and decisionmaking 

under uncertainty; Expected utility & demand for the insurance; Moral hazard and 

insurance demand; Essentials of risk management; Elements of risk assessment; Risk control & risk 

financing. Worldwide risk sharing- concept of reinsurance, types of re-insurers; Reinsurance 

distribution systems; reinsurance markets in developing countries. 

Unit-IV 

Definition, types and importance of general insurance; Concept of short term risk; Basics of the 

following concepts - Common law, equity, proposal/accidence, indemnity, insurable interest, 

contribution subrogation; representation; utmost good faith, material fact, physical hazard, moral 

hazard, policy endorsements conditions/warranties; selection and inspection of risks; rating and 

calculation of premiums; tariffs and non-tariffs; technology development and general insurance. 


� Black. K. Jr. and H.D. Skipper Jr.(2000), Life & Health Insurance, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle 

River, New Jerssey. 

� Dionne, G. and S.E. Harrington (eds.) (1997), Foundations of Insurance Economics, Kluwer 

academic Publishers, Boston. 

� Pteffer, I. And D.R. Klock (1974), Perspectives on Insurance, Prentice Hall Inc., Engleword 

Cliffs. 

� Williams Jr., C.A. M.L. Smith and P.C.Young (1995), Risk Management and Insurance, 

McGraw Hill, New York. 

� Skipper Jr., H.D.(ed.) (1998), International Risk & Insurance : An Environmental Managerial 

Approach, Irwin McGraw Hill, Boston. 

� United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (1987), The Promotion of Risk 

Management in Developing Countries, UNCTAD, Geneva. 

� Insurance Institute of India, Life Assurance Underwriting, (IC-22), Mumbai. 

� Insurance Institute of India, General Insurance Underwriting, (IC-22), Mumbai. 

10(730) 


� Government of India (1998), Old Age and Income Security (OASIS) Report (Dave Committee 

Report), New Delhi. 

� Ivers, J.I. III and E.T. Johnson (eds) (1991), Readings in Wealth Accumulation Planning, The 

American College, Bryn Mawr, Pa. 

� Insurance Regulation and Development Authority (2001), IRDA Regulations, New Delhi. 

� Meier. K.J. (1998), The Political Economy of Regulation : The Case of Insurance, The State 

University of New York Press, Albany, N.Y. 


Paper- 105 (Option-V) 

ECONOMICS OF LABOUR-I 

10(731) 

Session : 2012-13 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 






PREAMBLE 

Issues pertaining to the labour market, wage theories, employment policies, trade unions and 

collective bargaining in the globalized economy have become vitally important for developing 

countries. In a country like India where the bulk of the labour force is in the unorganized sector and 

the organized sector is witnessing “jobless” growth, the importance of issues such as employment 

and unemployment as well as livelihood and social security for the growing millions continues to 

assume significance. This Paper exposes students to theoretical as well as empirical issues relating 

to the labour market with special reference to India. 

Unit I 

Nature and characteristics of labour markets in developing countries like India; Paradigms of labour 

market analysis – Classical and neo-classical; Demand for labour in relation to size and pattern of 

investment. 

Unit II 

Supply of labour in relation to growth of labour force; Labour market policies; Mobility and 

productivity of labour; Rationalization; Methods of recruitment and placement; Employment 

service organization in India; Poverty and unemployment in developing countries; Unemployment 

– Concept, Types, and Measurement; particularly in India. 

Unit III 

Impact of rationalization, technological change and modernization on employment in organized 

private industry; Public sector and employment in agricultural sector; Employment policy under 

Five Year Plans and its evaluation. 


Unit IV 

Classical, neo-classical and bargaining theories of wage determination; Concepts of minimum 

wage, living wage and fair wage in theory and practice; Wage determination in various sectors – 

rural, urban, organized, unorganized and in informal sectors. 


� Hajela, P.D. (1998), Labour Restructuring in India: A Critique of the New Economic Policies, 

Commonwealth Publisher, New Delhi. 

� Lester, R.A. (1964), Economics of Labour, (2 nd Edition), Macmillan, New York. 

� McConnell, C.R. and S.L. Brue (1986), Contemporary Labour Economics, McGraw-Hill, New 

York. 

� Papola, T.S., P.P. Ghosh and A.N. Sharma (Eds.) (1993), Labour, employment and industrial 

Relations in India, B.R. Publishing Corporation, New Delhi. 

� Venkata Ratnam, C.S. (2001), Globalization and Labour-Management Relations: Dynamics of 

Change, Sage Publications/Response Books, New Delhi. 


� McCormickm B. and Smith (Eds.)(1968), The Labour Market, Penguin, Harmondsworth. 

� Das, N. (1960), Unemployment, Full Employment and India, Asia Publishing House, Bombay. 

� Deshpande L.K. and J.C. Sandesara, (Eds.)(1970), Wage Policy and Wages Determination in 

India, Bombay University Press, Bombay. 

� Hicks J.R. (1932), The Theory of Wages, Clarendon Press, Oxford. 

� Mazumdar, D. (1989), Micro-economic Issues of Labour Markets in Developing Countries, 

EDI Services Paper No. 40, World Bank, Washington D.C. 

� Memoria, C.B. (1966), Labour Problems and Social Welfare in India, Kitab Mahal, Allahbad. 

� Punekar, S.D. (1978), Labour Welfare, Trade Unionism and Industrial Relations, Himalaya 

Publishing House, Bombay 

� Singh V.B. (Ed.) (1970), Industrial Labour in India, Popular Parakashan, Bombay. 

� Misra, L. (2000), Child Labour in India, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 

� Riveros, L. (1990), Labour Market Policies and Labour Market Reforms in Socialist 

Economies, World Bank, Washington D.C. 


Paper- 105 (Option-VI) Session : 2011-12 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN ECONOMIC ANALYSIS-I 






10(732) 


PREAMBLE 

The direction towards the knowledge society shall be resting on a healthy economics and proper 

use of Information Technology. Economics being an empirical science, computers have emerged as 

the pivotal instruments of economic analysis, research and forecasting. Therefore, the future 

economists must be equipped with skills and tools based on computers, which this course shall 

provide to them. This will not only enhance their employability but also prepare them for the 

challenges of the future. 

Introduction to Computers 

Unit I 

History and Evolution of Computers; Generations of Computers; Computer : Definition, 

Characteristics and Limitations; Components of a Personal Computer System; Classification of 

Computers and their applications; Model and Functioning of a Digital Computer, Computer Vs. 

Human – Being. 

Computer Fundamentals 

Unit II 

System – Meaning and Concept; Hardware, Software and Types of Software; Operating System- 

Meaning and Functions; Memory – RAM and ROM; Input-Output Devices. 

Unit III 

Computer Codes and Programming Fundamentals: 

Computer Languages - Machine, Assembly and High-Level Languages; Computer Translators - 

Assemblers, Compilers and Interpreters; Computer Codes; BCD, EBCDIC, ASCII and Collating 

Sequence; Planning the Computer Program : Algorithm, Flowcharts and Computer Program. 

Business Data Processing Concepts 

Unit IV 

Data and Information: Meaning, Types, Data Storage Hierarchy; Data base Concepts; Data base 

Management System, Data Base Structuring Techniques, Advantages and Limitations of Database 

System; Information Technology in Business : Internet, Intranet, Extranet, LAN, MAN, WAN, 

WWW, E-Mail, Search Engines and EDI. 


� Sinha, P.K. , Computer Fundamental, BPB Publications, New Delhi. 

� Rajaraman, V. Fundamentals of Computers, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. 

� Parameswaranm R. Computer Applications in Business, S. Chand and Company, New Delhi. 

� Sudalaimuthu, S. and Anthony Raj S, Computer Applications in Business, Himalays Publishing 

House, New Delhi. 

� Goel, Sushil, Computer Application to Business & E-Commerce, Natraj Publishing House, 

Karanl. 

� Madan, Sushila, Information Technology, Taxman Allied Services, New Delhi. 

� P.T. Joseph, S.J. , E- Commerce : An Indian Perspective, PHI Learning , New Delhi. 

� Lipschultz, M.M. and S. Lipschultz , Theory and Problems of Data Processing, Schaum's 

Outline Series, McGraw Hill, New York. 

10(733) 


� David Whiteley, E-Commerce: Strategy, Technologies and Applications, Tata McGraw Hill, 

New Delhi. 

M.A. 1 st Semester 

Paper-105 (Option – VII) Session : 2012-13 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 

MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS-I 






PREAMBLE 

This course is designed to equip students to understand the economic concepts and theories which 

use mathematical tools and techniques to refine the verbal logic. The use of calculus has permitted 

formulation of economic problems in multivariable mode and yield valuable insight about 

optimizing human behaviour. Modern algebraic tools allow convenient handling of simultaneous 

equations in the context of linear programming, game theory and input-output analysis. 

Mathematical economics deals with various applications of mathematical tools and techniques in 

defining and developing economic relationships. This course has been accordingly designed to 

include various mathematical techniques/methods/models related to the different parts of economic 

theory like consumer theory, theory of production, pricing, trade cycles, growth models, etc. The 

paper covers important aspects of microeconomics, macroeconomics and development theory and 

the various modules have been accordingly designed. 

Unit I 

Types of utility functions; Ordinal utility maximization; Demand functions- ordinary and 

compensated; Slutsky equation- income, substitution, and price effects; Consumer surplus; 

Elasticity of demand; Linear expenditure systems; Indirect utility function. 

Unit II 

Production function; Properties of Cobb-Douglas, CES and Translog production functions; 

Producers equilibrium; Behaviour of cost curves; Derivation of Cost functions from production 

function (using CD function). 

Unit III 

Price and output determination with marginalist rule; Equilibrium of a price discriminating 

monopolist; Cournot model; Multi-plant model; Baumol’s sales maximization model; Williamsons 

model. 

10(734) 


Unit IV 

Pricing of factors under different types of competitions; product exhaustion theorems – Euler, 

Clark-Wicksteed; Derivation of Pareto-optimal conditions. 


� Henderson, J. M. and R.E. Quandt (1980), Microeconomic Theory: A Mathematical Approach, 



� Allen, R.G.D. (1976), Mathematical Economics, Macmillan, London. 

� Arrow, K. J. and M. Intrilligator (Eds.)(1982), Handbook of Mathematical Economics, 

Volumes I, II and III, North Holland, Amsterdam. 


� Chung, J.W. (1993), Utility and Production: Theory and Applications, Basil Blackwell, 

London. 

� Ferguson, C.E. (1976), New-classical Theory of Production and Distribution. 

� Allen R.G.D. (1974), Mathematical Analysis for Economists, Macmillan Press and ELBS, 

London. 

� Chiang, A.C. (1986), Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics, McGraw Hill, New 

York. 


Delhi. 

� Jones, H.G. (1976), An Introduction to the Modern Theory of Economic Growth, McGraw Hill- 

Kogakusha, Tokyo. 

� Handley, G. (1962), Linear Programming, Addison Wesley Publishing Co., Massachusetts. 

� Hiller, F.S. and G.J. Lieberman (1985), Operations Research, C.B.S., New Delhi. 

� Kothari, C.R. (1992), An Introduction to Operations Research, Vikas Publishing House, New 

Delhi. 

� Mustafi, C. K. (1992), Operations Research: Methods and Practice, Wiley Eastern, New Delhi. 

M.A. 1 st Semester 

Paper-105 (Option – VIII) Session : 2012-13 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 

ECONOMICS OF REGIONALISM -I 






10(735) 


Unit - I 

The rationale and motivation behind Regionalism; Multinational Trade Liberalization and RIAs; 

Regional v/s Global Liberalization; RIAs and Domestic Policy Integration. 

Unit – II 

The Economics of Custom Unions (Viner), Economies of Scale and Custom Union. The GATT’s 

Article XXIV, Preferential Trading Areas and Multilaterarlism; Domino Theory of Regionalism; 

Hub and Spoke theory of Regional intearation. 

Unit – III 

East Asian Regionalism; Asia’s New role in Global Economy; Relevance of Broader Regional 

Economic Integration in Asia; A Strategic Perspective on Asian Economic Integration. 

Unit – IV 

Building Blocs of Broader Regional Cooperation; ASEAN’s Role in Asian Economic Integration; 

Japan in Asian Economic Community; China’s Role in the Asian Economic Integration Process; 

India and the Asian Economic Integration. 


� Jacob Viner (1950) “The Economics of Customs Unions” in the Custom Union Issue 

Chapter 4, NY: Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, 41-81. 

� W.M. Corden (1972)”Economies of Scale and Customs Union Theory” Journal of Political 

Economy, 80, January/February/November/December 465-75. 

� Murray C. Kemp & Henry Y. Wan Jr. 91976) An Elementary Proposition Encouraging the 

Formation of Customs Unions, Journal of International Economics, 6 Feb. 95-7. 

� Paul Wonnacott and Ronald Wonnacott (1981) “Is Unilateral Tariff Reduction Preferable to 

a Customs Union? The Curios Case of the Missing Foreign Tariffs’ American Economic 

Review 719(4) Sep. 704-14 

� Richard H. Snape 91993) “History and Economics of GATTS Article XXTV in My 

Anderson and Richard Blackhurs (Eds) Regional Integration and Global Trading System, 

New York: Havesfer Wheatsheaf, 273-91. 

� J. Bhagwati & A. Panagariya (1998) “Preferential Trading Areas and Multilateralism: 

Strangers, Friends and Foes? In Regionalism in Trade Policy: Essays on Preferential 

Trading, Singapore, River Edge, NJ & London. 

� Arvind Panagariya (2000) “Preferential Trade Liberalisation: The Traditional Theory and 

New Developments” Journal Economc Literature, XXXVIII 2 June, 287-331. 

� Martin Richardson (1993) “Endogenous Protection and Trade Diversion” Journal of 

International Economics, 34 (3-4) May 309-24. 

� Richard E. Baldwin 91995) “A Domino Theory of Regionalism” in Richard Baldwin, Perth 

Haaparonta and Jarakko Kiander (eds), Expanding Membership of the European Union, 

Cambridge: Cambridge University Press 25-48. 

� Arvind Panagariya and Ronald Fividlay (1996) “A Political Economy Analysis of Free 

Trade Areas and Customs Unions” in Robert C Feensba, Gene M. Grossman and Dongla A. 

Irwin (eds) The Political Economy of Trade Policy: Papers in Honor of Jagdish Bhagwati. 

Cambridge, MA:MIT Press (265-87) 

10(736) 


� Kyle Bawell and Robert W. Staiger (1997) “Multilateral Tariff Cooperation During the 

Formation of Customs Unions” Journal of International Economics, 42,91-123. 

� Philip I. Lecy (1997) “ A Political Economics Analysis of Free Trade Agreements” 

American Economic Review 87 (4) Sept. 506-19. 

� Pravin Krishna (1996) “Regionalism and Multilateralism “ A Political Economy Approach” 

Quarterly Journal of Economics XIII (I) Feb, 227-51. 

� Wilfred J. Ethier (1958) “Regionalism in a Multilateral World” Journal of Political 

Economy 106 (6) Dec. 1214-45. 

� Caroline Freiend (2000) “ Multilateralism and the Endogenous Formation of Preferential 

Trade Agreements” Journal of International Economics 52, 359-76 

� Paul Wonnacott and Mark Lutz (1089) “Is there a case for Free Trade Areas?” in Jeftrey J. 

Schott (eds) Free Trade Areas and US Trade Policy Washington DC Institute of 

International Economics, 59-84. 

� Lawrence H. Summers (1991) “Is there a case for Free Trade Areas?” in Institute of 

International Economics, 59-84. 

� Paul Krugman (1993) “Regionalism Versus Multilateralism: Analytical Notes; in Jaime De 

Melo and Arvind panagariya (eds) New Dimensions in Regional Intergration Cambridge: 

Cambridge University Press 58-84. 

� Jeffrey Frankel Ernesto Stein iand Shang Jin Wei (1995) “Trading Blocs and the Americas: 

The aNatural the Unnatural and the Super Natural” Journal of Development Economics, 47 

(E), June, 61-95. 

� “Asia’s New Regionalism and Global Role: Agenda for the East Asia Summit” edited by 

Nagesh Kumar, K. Kesavpny and Yao Cheocheng published by RIS & ISERS, 2008. 


Syllabus for 2012-2013 


M.A. Economics (Semester II) 


Paper-201 Micro Economic Analysis-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Paper-202 Macro Economic Analysis-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Paper-203 Quantitative Methods-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Paper-204 

Paper-205 

Public Economics-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Option (i) Financial Economics-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Option (ii) Demography-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Option (iii) Economics of Infrastructure-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Option (iv) Economics of Insurance-II 100 80 20 3Hrs. Option 

(v) Economics of Labour-II 100 80 20 3Hrs. Option 

(vi) Computer Applications in 100 80(60+20) 20 3Hrs. 

Economic Analysis-II (60 Theory + 20 Practical) 

Option (vii) Mathematical Economics-II 100 80 20 3Hrs. 

Option (viii) Economics of Regionalism-II 100 80 20 3Hrs. 

10(737) 


Note: Students are required to select an option from Paper-205 from the same stream which 

they selected in Semester I. 

M.A. 2 nd Semester 


MICRO ECONOMIC ANALYSIS-II 

10(738) 

Session : 2012-13 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 






PREAMBLE 

This paper analyses the economic behaviour of individuals, firms and markets. It is mainly 

concerned with the objective of equipping the students in a rigorous and comprehensive manner 

with the various aspects of consumer behaviour and demand analysis, production theory and 

behaviour of costs, the theory of traditional markets and equilibrium of firm in modern non-profit 

maximizing framework. The paper also deals with the micro and macro theories of distribution, 

welfare economics, general equilibrium in closed and open systems and analysis of economic 

behaviour under uncertainty. 

Unit-I 

Critical evaluation of marginal analysis; Average cost pricing model; Bain’s limit pricing 

theory; Baumal’s sales revenue maximization model; Marris model of managerial enterprise; 

Williamson’s model of managerial discretion. 

Unit-II 

Pricing of factors of production; Elasticity of technical substitution, technical progress and 

factor shares; Factor pricing and income distribution; Macro theories of distribution – 

Ricardo, Marx, Kalecki and Kaldor. 

Unit-III 

The Walrasian approach to general equilibrium; Existence, stability and uniqueness of the 

partial equilibrium; Criterion of welfare economics; Maximization of social welfare; Market 

failure; Externalities, Public goods, asymmetric information. 


Unit-IV 

Inter-temporal choice in consumption; Economics of Uncertainty - Decision rules under 

uncertainty; Individual behaviour towards risk: Risk, gambling, insurance decisions. Economics of 

information – search costs, market signaling. 


� Kreps, David M. (1990), A Course in Microeconomic Theory, Princeton University Press, 

Princeton. 


� Layard, P.R.G. and A.W. Walters (1978), Microeconomic Theory, McGraw Hill, New York. 

� Sen, A. (1999), Microeconomics: Theory and Applications, Oxford University Press, New 

Delhi. 

� Varian, H. (2000), Microeconomic Analysis, W.W. Norton, New York. 


� Baumol, W.J. (1982), Economic Theory and Operations Analysis, Prentice Hall of India, New 

Delhi. 

� Hirshleifer, J. and A. Glazer (1997), Price Theory and Applications, Prentice Hall of India, New 

Delhi. 

� Green H.A.G. (1971), Consumer Theory, Penguin, Harmondsworth. 



� Da Costa, G. C. (1980), Production, Prices and Distribution, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

� Healthfields and Wibe (1987), An Introduction to Cost and Production Functions, Macmillan, 

London. 

� Archibald, G.C. (Ed.) (1971), Theory of the Firm, Penguin, Harmondsworth. 

� Broadway, R.W. and N. Bruce (1984), Welfare Economics, Basil Blackwell, London. 

� Graff, J. De. V. (1957), Theoretical Welfare Economics, Cambridge University Press, 

Cambridge. 

� Quirk, J. and R. Saposnik (1968), Introduction to General Equilibrium Theory and Welfare 

Economics, McGraw Hill, New York. 

� Borch, K.H. (1968), The Economics of Uncertainty, Princeton University Press, Princeton. 

� Diamond and Rothschild (Eds.) (1978), Uncertainty in Economics, Academic Press New York. 

M.A. 2nd Semester 


MACRO ECONOMIC ANALYSIS-II 

10(739) 


Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 







PREAMBLE 

Macroeconomics analyses and establishes the functional relationship between large aggregates. The 

aggregate analysis has assumed such a great significance in recent times that a prior understanding 

of macroeconomics theoretical structure is considered essential for the proper comprehension of the 

different issues and policies. Macroeconomics now is not only a scientific method of analysis; but 

also a body of empirical economic knowledge. The paper entitled “Macro Economics Analysis” 

equips the students at the postgraduate level to understand systematic facts and latest theoretical 

developments for empirical analysis at economy level. 

Open Macro Economics 

Unit-I 

International flow of capital and goods; saving and investment in a small open economy; Exchange 

Rates-real and nominal; Demand and supply of Foreign Exchange; Balance of payments-current 

and capital account; Mundell-Fleming Model under fixed and flexible exchange rates. 

Unit-II 

Theory of Inflation 

Classical, Keynesian and Monetarist approaches; Structuralist theory of inflation; Philips curve 

analysis – Short run and long run Philips curve; Natural Rate of Unemployment hypothesis; 

Tobin’s modified Philips curve. 

Unit-III 

Theory of Business Cycles 

Business Cycle Theories of Schumpeter, Kaldor, Samuelson and Hicks; Control of business cycles 

– relative efficacy of monetary and fiscal policies. 

Macro Economic Policy 

Unit-IV 

Monetary and Fiscal Policy- Targets and instruments; The Great Depression; Lags in the effects of 

policies; Expectations and Reactions; Uncertainty and Economic Policy; Economic Policy - Rules 

vs Discretion . 

Recent Developments 

The Concept of Rational Expectations; New Classical Macro Economics – basic approach and 

policy implications; New Keynesian Economics - Sticky Nominal prices (Mankiw Model). 


� Ackley, G. (1978), Macroeconomics: Theory and Policy, Macmillan, New York. 

� Blackhouse, R. and A. Salansi (Eds.) (2000), Macroeconomics and the Real World (2 Vols.), 

Oxford University Press, London. 

� Branson, W.A. (1989), Macroeconomic Theory and Policy, (3 rd Edition), Harper and Row, New 

York. 

� Dornbusch, R. and F. Stanley (1999), Macroeconomics, Irwrin McGraw Hill, Inc. New York, 

7 th Edition. 

� Heijdra, B.J. and V.P. Fredericck (2001), Foundations of Modern Macroeconomics, Oxford 



Delhi. 

10(740) 


� Romer, D.L. (1996), Advanced Macroeconomics, McGraw Hill Company Ltd., New York. 

� Shapiro, E. (1996), Macroeconomic Analysis, Galgotia Publications, New Delhi. 


� Mankiw, N.G. and D. Romer (Eds.) (1991), New Keynesian Economics, (2Vols.), MIT Press, 

Cambridge. 

� Mankiw, N. Greogory (2000), Macroeconomics Macmillan Worth Publishers 4 th Edition 

� Frisch, H. (1983), Theories of Inflation, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge. 

� Sheffirin, S.M. (1996), Rational Expectations, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge. 

� Lucas, R. (1981), Studies in Business Cycle Theory, MIT Press, Cambridge, Masscechusetts. 

� Taylor, L. (1983), Structuralist Macroeconomics, Basic Books, New Longman. 

� Turnovsky, S.J. (1977), Macroeconomic Analysis and Stabilization Policy, Cambridge 


� Ruggles R. and N. Ruggles (1956), National Income Accounts and Income Analysis Mc Graw 

Hill, Newyork. 

� Veniers, Y.P. and F.D.Sebold, (1977) Macroeconomics; Models and Policy 

John Wiley and Inc, USA. 

� Dernburg , T.F.and D. M.Mc Dougall, Macroeconomics, McGraw Hill International Book 

Company. 


Paper-203 (Compulsory) Session 

: 2012-13 Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 

QUANTITATIVE METHODS-II 






PREAMBLE 

The main objective of this paper is to train the students to use the techniques of mathematical and 

statistical analysis, which are commonly applied to understand and analyze economic problems. 

The emphasis of this paper is on understanding economic concepts with the help of mathematical 

methods rather than learning mathematics itself. Hence in this paper a student will be initiated into 

various economic concepts, which are amenable to mathematical treatment. The paper also deals 

with simple tools and techniques, which will help a student in data collection, presentation, analysis 

and drawing inferences about various statistical hypotheses. 

Unit I 

Index numbers: uses and types, tests for consistency, Base shifting, splicing and deflating of index 

numbers. Time series analysis: introduction and components, method of simple averages, moving 

averages and ratio to moving averages. 

10(741) 


Unit II 

Basic concepts and definitions of probability; Laws of addition and multiplication; Conditional 

probability; Bay’s theorem (statement); Binomial, Poisson and Normal distribution; Basic concepts 

of sampling- random and non-random sampling. 

Unit III 

Types of data and statistical analysis procedures: Univariate, Bivariate and Multivariate (only 

overview); Hypothesis Testing procedure based on Z, t, x 2 and F-test and one-way ANOVA. 

Unit IV 

Meaning and assumptions of simple regression analysis; Single linear equation regression model 

(by OLS Method), Concept of an estimator and its desirable properties; Coefficient of 

determination. Estimation of simple and exponential growth rates. 


� Vohra, N. D. Quantitative Techniques in Management, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

� Speigal, M. R. Theory and Prodblems of Statistics, McGraw Hill Book, London 

� Croxton, F. E., D. Cowden and S. Kliein, Applied General Statistics, Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 

� Gupta S.C. and V.K. Kapoor, Fundamentals of Applied Statistics, S. Chand and Sons New 

Delhi. 

� Yates, Frank, Sampling Methods for Census and Surveys, Charles, Griffin Co., London. 

� Cocharm, W. G., Sampling Techniques, John Willey, New York. 

� Hansen, hurditz and meadow, Sample Survey Methods and Theory, John Willey New York. 

� Gupta S. C. Fundamentals of statistics, Himalaya Publishing house, New Dehlhi. 

� Gupta S.P. and Gupta M. P. Business statistics, Sultan chand and sons, New Delhi. 

� Kamenta J. Elements of Econometrics, Machmillan Publishing Co., Inc. New York. 


Paper-204 Session : 2012-13 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 

PUBLIC ECONOMICS –II 






PREAMBLE 

Role and functions of the Government in an economy have been changing with the passage of time. 

The term ‘Public Finance’ has traditionally been applied to the package of those policies and 

operations which involve the use of tax and expenditure measures while budgetary policy is an 

important part to understand the basic problems of use of resources, distribution of income, etc. 

There are vast array of fiscal institutions — tax systems, expenditure programmes, budgetary 

10(742) 


procedures, stabilization instruments, debt issues, levels of government, etc., which raise a 

spectrum of issues arising from the operation of these institutions. Further, the existence of 

externalities, concern for adjustment in the distribution of income and wealth, etc. require political 

processes for 

their solution in a manner which combines individual freedom and justice. This paper combines a 

thorough understanding of fiscal institutions with a careful analysis of the issues which underline 

budgetary policies in general and Indian experience in particular. 

UNIT – I 

Public Choice – Reasons for Public Choice; Public Choice under Direct Democracy – Unanimity 

rule – Lindahl and Wicksell, Majority Rule - Buchanan and Tullock Model, Bowen-Black Model; 

Arrow’s Impossibility Theorem; Public Choice Under Representative Democracy – Downs Model 

on Demand and Supply of Government Policy; Niskanen Model of Bureaucratic Behaviour. 

UNIT – II 

Public Enterprises – Forms of Organization of Public Enterprises; Pricing Policy of Public 

Enterprises; Theory of Second Best; Capacity Constraints and Peak Load Problem; Social Cost 

Benefit Analysis; Problem of Risk and Uncertainty. 

UNIT – III 

Public Debt – Objectives and Sources of Public Debt; Classification and Effects of Public Debt; 

Burden Controversy of Public Debt – Classical Theory, Modern Theory, Buchanan Thesis, 

Secondary Burden of Public Debt; Public Debt and Inflation; Public Debt Management and 

Redemption of Public Debt. 

UNIT – IV 

Fiscal Federalism – Principles of Multi-Unit Finance; Assignment of Functions Among Levels of 

Government; Tiebout Model and Citizen’s Mobility; Theory of Intergovernmental Grants; 

Budgeting – Phases of Budgetary Cycle; Parliamentary Control Over Budgets; Structure of Central 

Government Budget; Program Budgeting and Zero Base Budgeting. 

Reading List 


1. American Economic Association, Readings in the Economics of Taxation, edited by R. A. 

Musgrave and C. Shoup (Homewood: Richard D. Irwin, 1959). 

2. Anthony Downs, An Economic Theory of Democracy (New York: Harper, 1957). 

3. Duncan Black and R. A. Newing, Committee Decisions with Complementary Valuation 

(London:William Hodge, 1951). 

4. Duncan Black, The Theory of Committees and Elections (Cambridge: Cambridge 

University Press, 1958). 

5. Howard Bowen, Toward Social Economy (New York: Rinehart, 1948), pt. IV. 

6. International Economic Association, Classics in the Theory of Public Finance, edited by R. 

A. Musgrave and A. T. Peacock (London: Macmillan, 1958). 

7. J. de V. Graaf, TheoreticalWelfare Economics (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 

1957). 

8. James M. Buchanan and Gordon Tullock, The Calculus of Consent (Ann Arbor: University 

of Michigan Press, 1962). 

10(743) 


9. James M. Buchanan, Fiscal Theory and Political Economy (Chapel Hill: University of 

North Carolina Press, 1960). 

10. Kenneth J. Arrow, Social Choice and Individual Values (New York: John Wiley and Sons, 

1951; Revised edition, 1963). 

11. Mancur Olson, The Logic of Collective Action (Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 

1965). 

12. R. A. Musgrave, The Theory of Public Finance (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1959). 

13. William J. Baumol, Welfare Economics and the Theory of the State (Cambridge: Harvard 

University Press, 1952; Revised second edition, 1965). 

Advanced Reading List 

� Atkinson, A. and J. Stiglitz, Lectures on Public Economics, 16-1. 

� Atkinson, A. B. and N. Stern, “Pigou, Taxation, and Public Goods,” Rev. Econ. Stud., 

January 1974. 

� Baumol, W., “On Taxation and the Control of Externalities,” Amer. Econ. Rev., June 1972. 

� Berglas, E. and D. Pines, “Clubs, Local Public Goods, and Transportation Models: A 

Synthesis,” J. Public Econ., April 1981 (Sections 1-3). 

� Bergstrom, T., “When Does Majority Rule Supply Public Goods Efficiently?” Scand. J. 

Econ., No. 2, 1979. 

� Bergstrom, T., et. al., “Micro-Based Estimates of Demand Functions for Local School 

Expenditures,” Econometrica, September 1982. 

� Bergstrom, T., L. Blume, and H. Varian, “On the Private Provision of Public Goods,” J. 

Public Econ., January 1986. 

� Borcherding, T. and R. Deacon, “The Demand for the Services of Non-Federal 

Governments,” Amer. Econ. Rev., December 1972. 

� Bradford, D. and Oates, W., “Toward a Predictive Theory of Intergovernmental Grants,” 

Amer. Econ. Rev., May 1971. 

� Brito, D. and W. Oakland, “On the Monopolistic Provision of Excludable Public Goods,” 

Amer. Econ. Rev., March 1981. 

� Brueckner, J., “Congested Public Goods: The Case of Fire Protection,” J. Public Econ., 

February 1981. 

� Brueckner, J., “Equilibrium in a System of Communities with Local Public Goods: A 

Diagrammatic Exposition,” Economics Letters, 1979. 

� Brueckner, J., “Property Value Maximization and Public Sector Efficiency,” J. Urban 

Econ., July 1983. 

� Brueckner, J., “Tastes, Skills, and Local Public Goods,” J. Urban Econ., March 1994 

� Coase, R., “The Problem of Social Cost,” J. Law Econ., October 1960. 

� Cornes, R. and T. Sandler, The Theory of Externalities, Public Goods, and Club Goods, pp. 

69-80. 

� Feldman, A., Welfare Economics and Social Choice Theory, Ch. 6 (Sections 1-3) 

� Groves, T. and M. Loeb, “Incentives and Public Inputs,” J. Public Econ., August 1975. 

� Hamilton, B., “The Flypaper Effect and Other Anomalies,” J. Public Econ., December 

1983. 

� Helsley, R. and W. Strange, “Exclusion and the Theory of Clubs,” Canadian J. Econ., 

November 1991. 

� Lee, K. “Bureaucrats and Tax Limitation,” J. Urban Econ., July 1993. 

� McGuire, T., “Budget-Maximizing Governmental Agencies: An Empirical Test,” Public 

Choice, 1981. 

10(744) 


� Moene, K., “Types of Bureaucratic Interaction,” J. Public Econ., 1986. 

� Niskanen, W., “The Peculiar Economics of Bureaucracy,” Amer. Econ. Rev., May 1968. 

� Peltzman, S., “The Effect of Government Subsidies in Kind on Private Expenditures: The 

Case of Higher Education,” J. Polit. Economy, January/February 1973. 

� Romer, T. and H. Rosenthal, “The Elusive Median Voter,” J. Public Econ., October 1979. 

� Samuelson, P., “A Diagrammatic Exposition of a Theory of Public Expenditure,” Rev.Econ. 

Statist., November 1955. 

� Samuelson, P., “The Pure Theory of Expenditure and Taxation,” in Public Economics, 

Margolis and Guiton, Eds. 

� Sandmo, A., “Public Goods and the Technology of Consumption,” Rev. Econ. 

Stud.,October 1973. 

� Scotchmer, S. and M. Wooders, “Competitive Equilibrium and the Core in Club Economies 

with Anonymous Crowding,” J. Public Econ., November 1987. 

� Silva, E. and C. Kahn, “Exclusion and Moral Hazard: The Case of Identical Demand,” J. 

Public Econ., September 1993. 

� Tiebout, C., “A Pure Theory of Local Expenditures,” reprinted in Readings in Urban 

Economics, Edel and Rothenberg, Eds. 

� Turnbull, G., “The Overspending and Flypaper Effects of Fiscal Illusion: Theory and 

Empirical Evidence”, Journal of Urban Economics, July 1998. 

� Wheaton, W., “Land Capitalization, Tiebout Mobility, and the Role of Zoning Regulations,” 

J. Urban Econ., September 1993. 

� White, M. and D. Wittman, “Pollution Taxes and Optimal Spatial Location,” Economica, 

May 1982. 

� Wildasin, D., “On Public Good Provision with Distortionary Taxation,” Economic Inquiry, 

April 1984. 

� Wilson, J., “Theories of Tax Competition,” National Tax Journal, June 1999. 

� Zodrow, G. and P. Mieszkowski, “Pigou, Tiebout, Property Taxation, and the 

Underprovision of Local Public Goods,” J. Urban Econ., May 1986. 


Paper-205 (Option – I) 

FINANCIAL ECONOMICS-I 

10(745) 

Session : 2012-13 

Time: 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 






PREAMBLE 

Financial economics is the branch of economics studying the interrelation of financial variables, 

such as prices, interest rates and shares, as opposed to those concerning the real economy. Financial 


economics concentrates on influences of real economic variables on financial ones, in contrast to 

pure finance. Financial economics is primarily concerned with building models to derive testable or 

policy implications from acceptable assumptions. The theory component centers on decision 

making under uncertainty in the context of the financial markets, and the resultant economic and 

financial models. The application of the economic principles include the valuation and 

determination of the fair value of an asset; the riskiness of the asset, generation of cash flows and 

their discounting; relative valuations; derivatives and other financial instruments. The aim here is 

twofold: firstly, to complement the theory; secondly, providing students with practical market 

knowledge. 

Unit-I 

Risk- Return Analysis; Choice under Uncertainty; Bond Return and Valuation-Term Structure of 

interest Rates, Duration and Immunisation; Stock return and Valuation; Economics of personal 

Finance – Fundamental and Technical Security Analysis; Efficient market Theory. 

Unit-II 

Economics of Portfolio of Financial Assets – Markowitz Model, Sharpe Index Model, Capital asset 

pricing Model, Arbitrage Pricing Theory; Economics of Mutual Funds- Sharpe, Treynor and Jensen 

Performance Index. 

Unit-III 

Economics of Futures Contracts- Pricing of Futures Contracts, Hedging with Futures Contracts; 

Economics of Options Contracts – Types and Payoffs; Option Pricing – Binomial option Pricing 

Model, Black – Scholes Option Pricing Model; Options Hedging strategies – Delta, Gamma, Theta, 

Vega and Rho. 

Unit-IV 

Economics of Multinational Finance: The Multinational financial system; Current Assets and 

Capital Budgeting Decisions in MNCs; Special Financing Vehicles; Designing a Global Financing 

strategy. 

Reading List 

� Bodurtha, J. and Courtadon G., The Pricing of Foreign Currency Options, New York, 

Salomon Brothers Center, New York University, 1987-4/5. 

� Bolten, Steven E., “Security Analysis and Portfolio Management: An Analytical Approach 

to Investments”, N.Y.Holt, Rinehert and Winston, 1972 

� Bowyer, John, W., “Investment Analysis and Management”, Illinois, Irwin, 1972 

� Carr, J.L., “Investment Economics”, Sage Pub., California, 1969 

� Chance D.M., “An Introduction to Options and Futures”, Dryden press, Orlando,FL,1989 

� Chance, D., “An Introduction to Derivatives”, New York, Dryden, 1998. 

� Conrad Michael Mattern, “ Handbook of Investment Research: Economic and Financial 

Indicators as Market Movers”, Palgrave Macmillan, 2002. ISBN10: 0333968697 

� Cox, J. and M. Rubinstein, “Options Markets”, Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall, 

1985,ISBN0136382053. 

� Curley, Anthony J. and Bear Robert M., “Investment Analysis and management”, N.Y., 

Harper & Row, 1979 

10(746) 


� David G. Luenberger, “Investment Science”, Oxford University Press,1997. ISBN10: 

0195108094 

� David King, “Financial Claims and Derivatives”, Thomson Learning, 1998. ISBN10: 

186152448X 

� Fama, E.F. and Miller, M.H., “Theory of Finance”, N.y.Holt, Rinehert and Winston, 1972 

� Figlewski, S., W. Silber and M. Subrahmanyam, “Financial Options, : From Theory to 

Practice”, Homewood, Illinois, Business One Irwin, 1990, ISBN 1556232349. 

� Frank Milne, “Finance Theory and Asset Pricing”, Oxford University Press, 2003. ISBN10: 

0199261075 

� Hull, J., “Options, Futures and Other Derivative Securities”, Upper Saddle River, N.J., 

Prentice Hall, 6 th edition,2006, ISBN 013149908-4, 

� Jarrow, R.A. and A. Rudd, “Option Pricing”, Homewood, Illinois, Dow Jones-Irwin, 1983, 

ISBN 0870943782. 

� Jarrow, R.A. and S. Turnbull, “Derivative Securities”, Cincinnati, Ohio, South-Western, 1996. 

� McDonald, R., “Derivatives Markets”, Boston, MA, Addison-Wesley Publishing, 2002, 

ISBN: 0201729601 

� Richard T. Baillie, “The Foreign Exchange Market” Cambridge University Press, 1990. 

ISBN10: 0521396905 

� Robert W. Kolb, “Financial Derivatives”, Blackwell Publishing, 1996. ISBN10: 1557869308 

� Robert W. Kolb, James Overdahl, “Understanding Futures Markets”, Blackwell Publishing, 

2006. ISBN10: 1405134038 

� Thomas A. Ho, Sang Bin Lee,”Securities Valuation: Applications of Financial Modeling”, 

Oxford University Press, 2005. ISBN10: 0195172752 


Paper-205 (Option-II) 

DEMOGRAPHY-II 

10(747) 


Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 






PREAMBLE 

The main objective of this paper is to make the students aware of the importance of population in 

economic development and the various theories that explain the growth of population in a country. 

The paper also enlightens the student on the quantitative and the qualitative aspects and 

characteristics of the population through various demographic techniques. In recent times, gender 

characteristics of the population have acquired importance and these have also been included in the 

framework of study. Migration and urbanization are the characteristics of structural change taking 


place in a society. Their study is essential to understand the dynamics of this change. The paper 

exposes the students to sources of population and related characteristics as also to the rationale, 

need and evolution of population policy. 

Unit I 

Theories of population – Malthus, Optimum theory of population; Theory of demographic 

transition. 

Unit II 

Determinants of age and sex structure; Age pyramids and projections – Individual aging and 

population aging; Mortality – Death rates, crude and age-specific; Mortality at birth and infant 

mortality rate; Factors for decline in mortality in recent past. 

Unit III 

Life Table and its uses; Migration: Concept and types – Temporary, internal and international; 

International migration - its effects on population growth and pattern; Factors affecting migration. 

Unit IV 

Changing characteristics of Indian population; Population growth rates, trends and age structure of 

population, Pattern of migration and urbanization in India. Latest population policy in India; 

Population and strategies for human development of different social groups. 


� Bose, A. (1996), India’s Basic Demographic Statistics, B.R. Publishing Corporation, New 

Delhi. 

� Chenery H. and T.N. Srinivasan (Eds.)(1989), Hand Book of Development Economics, Vol. 1 

& 2 Elsevier, Amsterdam. 

� Choubey, P.K. (2000), Population Policy in India, Kanishka Publications, New Delhi. 




� Simon, J.L. (1992), Population and Development in Poor Countries, Princeton University Press. 

� Srinivasan, K, (1998), Basic Demographic Techniques and Applications, Sage, New Delhi. 

� Srinivasan, K. and A.Shariff (1998), India: Towards Population and Demographic Goals, 


� Agnihotri, S.B. (2000), Sex ration in Indian Population: A Fresh Exploration, Sage New Delhi. 

� Baud, I.S.A. (1992), Form of Production and Women’s Labour, Gender Aspects of 

Industrialization in India and Mexico, Sage, New Delhi. 

� Jhabwala, R. and R.K. Subramanya (2000) (Eds.), The Unorganized Sector: Work Security and 

Social Protection, Sage, New Delhi. 

� King M. and M.A. Hill (Eds.) (1993), Women’s Education in Developing Countries: Barriers, 

Benefits and Politics, John Hopkins, Baltimore. 

� Krshnaji M., R.M. Sudarshan and A. Shariff (1999), Gender Population and Development, 


� Sudarshan and A. Shariff (1999), Gender Population and Development, Oxford University 


� Gupta, J. A. (2000), New Reproductive Technologies, Women’s Health and Autonomy, Indo 

Dutch Studies on Development Alternatives, Sage, New Delhi. 

10(748) 


� Mishra S. (2000), Voluntary Action in Health and Population: The Dynamics of Social 

Transition, Sage, New Delhi. 

� Seth M. (2000), Women and Development: The Indian Experience, Sage, New Delhi. 


Paper-205 (Option-III) 

ECONOMICS OF INFRASTRUCTURE-II 

10(749) 


Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 






PREAMBLE 

The important role infrastructure plays in a country’s development need not be reiterated. In case of 

developing countries, lack of adequate infrastructure has been held as a major obstacle to growth. 

The main purpose of this paper is to introduce a course on infrastructure, as it would help the 

students to understand the strength of infrastructure - physical and social in the process of economic 

development. 

Unit I 

Public Utilities: Objectives and characteristics; Case of nationalization; Economies of scale of Joint 

supply; Marginal Cost Pricing vs. other methods of pricing in public utilities; Cross-subsidization – 

free prices, equity and efficiency. 

Unit II 

Communication- modes, problems & progress; Rate-making in Communication Utilities. 

Electrification in India- problems & progress; Bulk Supply and Pricing of Electricity – The relative 

Economics of Thermal, hydel and nuclear Power Plants; The Case for a National Power Grid. 

Unit III 

Social services- Concept & its domain; Private Vs Public financing; Recent debate about the 

fixation of prices of social services; Development of Social Services in successive Indian plans. 

Tourism and economic development; Infrastructural requirements for marketing tourism; Housing 

as an Infrastructure activity. 

Unit IV 

Health and economic development; Determinants of Health – poverty, malnutrition, illiteracy and 

lack of information; Economic dimensions of health care – Demand and supply of health care; 

Financing of health care and resource constraints; Inequalities in health – class and gender 


perspectives; Institutional issues in health care delivery; Development of health infrastructure in 

Indian plans. 


� Bhatia A.K: Tourism Development - Principles and Practices (Sterling, New Delhi 1996) 

� Crew, M.A. P.R. Kleindorfer (1979), Public Utility Economics, Macmillan, London. 

� Indian Council of Social Sciences Research (ICSSR) (1976), Economics of Infrastructure, Vol. 

VI, New Delhi. 

� Kumar, P., & Goel, M.M. (2010), Economics of Health Sector Reforms in India, Mohit 

Publications, New-Delhi, ISBN 978-81-7445-519-2. 

� National Council of Applied Economic Research (NCAER) (1996), India Infrastructure Report; 

Policy Implications for Growth and Welfare, NCAER, New Delhi. 

� Parikh, K.S. (Ed.) (1997), India Development Report 1997, Oxford, New Delhi. 

� Parikh, K.S. (Ed.) (1999), India Development Report – 1999-2000, Oxford, New Delhi. 

� Raghuram G & Rekha J: Infrastructure Development and Financing (Mac Millan, New Delhi, 

1999) 

� Turvey. R. (Ed.) (1968), Public Enterprises, Penguin, Harmondwwoth. 


� Goel, M.M. (2011), Economics of Human Resource Development in India, VK Global 

Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, ISBN 978- 93-5058-014-1. 

� Goyal, S.K. (Ed.) (1995), Public Enterprises, Indian Institute of Public Administration, New 

Delhi. 

� Panchamukh, P.R. (1980), Economics of Health: A Trend Report in ICSSR, A Survey of 


� Tilak, J.B.G. (1994), Education for Development in Asia, Sage Publications, New Delhi. 


Paper-205 (Option-IV) 

ECONOMICS OF INSURANCE-II 

10(750) 

Session : 2012-13 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 






PREAMBLE 

The vital role of insurance in the task of risk-bearing and risk-elimination in the economic affairs 

has not been appreciated adequately in our country. Given that the element of risk or uncertainty is 

a universal and fundamental phenomenon in our economic life, the importance of insurance as a 

means of reducing uncertainty and risk in regard to personal and business activities cannot be 

overemphasized. The role of insurance sector in mobilizing a country’s saving for channeling them 

into capital formation and thus contribute to a country’s economic development is also 


documented. There is a wide spread recognition that insurance, particularly life insurance, is a 

prominent segment of applied economics. Insurance industry is an important constituent of 

financial services industry in India and is a major investment institution and prominent player in the 

capital market. However, in our country, study of the subject of insurance has largely remained 

neglected. With the opening of the insurance sector for private Indians and foreign players, the 

interest in the subject has been kindled. This course on Insurance Economics attempts to give a 

fairly comprehensive view of the subject to the postgraduate students in Economics and pave the 

way for possible future expansion of the teaching of an important branch of economics. 

Unit I 

Wealth accumulation planning; Life cycle planning; Planning for accumulation, objectives; 

purchase of insurance and accumulation planning; Investments - tax advantaged and non-tax 

advantaged 

Unit II 

Essentials of individual retirement planning; Analysis of retirement; Income needs; Retirement 

planning strategies; Investing for retirement, pension plans; Basic principles of pension plans; 

Pension plans in India; Estate planning - process and tools; Life insurance for estate liquidity. 

Unit III 

Role of risk-management and insurance in economics development; Insurance institutions as 

financial intermediaries; Incurrence institutions as investment institutions; Insurance institutions in 

Indian capital market. 

Unit IV 

Regulation of insurance; Purpose of government intervention in markets; Theories of regulation; 

Insurance regulation in India; Insurance regulation & Development Authority; Set up and 

management of insurance companies; Marketing of general insurance; Regulation governing 

investments of insurance institutions in India, scope and limitation of Indian Agriculture Insurance. 


� Black. K. Jr. and H.D. Skipper Jr.(2000), Life & Health Insurance, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle 

River, New Jerssey. 

� Dionne, G. and S.E. Harrington (eds.) (1997), Foundations of Insurance Economics, Kluwer 

academic Publishers, Boston. 

� Pteffer, I. And D.R. Klock (1974), Perspectives on Insurance, Prentice Hall Inc., Engleword 

Cliffs. 

� Williams Jr., C.A. M.L. Smith and P.C.Young (1995), Risk Management and Insurance, 

McGraw Hill, New York. 

� Skipper Jr., H.D.(ed.) (1998), International Risk & Insurance : An Environmental Managerial 

Approach, Irwin McGraw Hill, Boston. 

� United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (1987), The Promotion of Risk 

Management in Developing Countries, UNCTAD, Geneva. 

� Insurance Institute of India, Life Assurance Underwriting, (IC-22), Mumbai. 

� Insurance Institute of India, General Insurance Underwriting, (IC-22), Mumbai. 

� Government of India (1998), Old Age and Income Security (OASIS) Report (Dave Committee 

Report), New Delhi. 

� Ivers, J.I. III and E.T. Johnson (eds) (1991), Readings in Wealth Accumulation Planning, The 

American College, Bryn Mawr, Pa. 

� Insurance Regulation and Development Authority (2001), IRDA Regulations, New Delhi. 

10(751) 


� Meier. K.J. (1998), The Political Economy of Regulation : The Case of Insurance, The State 

University of New York Press, Albany, N.Y. 


Paper-205(Option-V) 

ECONOMICS OF LABOUR-II 

10(752) 

Session : 2012-13 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 






PREAMBLE 

Issues pertaining to the labour market, wage theories, employment policies, trade unions and 

collective bargaining in the globalized economy have become vitally important for developing 

countries. In a country like India where the bulk of the labour force is in the unorganized sector and 

the organized sector is witnessing “jobless” growth, the importance of issues such as employment 

and unemployment as well as livelihood and social security for the growing millions continues to 

assume significance. This Paper exposes students to theoretical as well as empirical issues relating 

to the labour market with special reference to India. 

Unit I 

Non-wage component of labour remuneration; inflation-wage relationship at micro and macro 

levels; Productivity and wage relationship; National wage policy; Wages and Wage Boards in 

India; Bonus system and profit sharing. 

Unit II 

Theories of labour movement – Growth, pattern and structure of labour unions in India; 

Achievements of labour unions; Causes of industrial disputes and their settlement and prevention 

mechanism; social security and labour welfare in India. 

Unit III 

Role of tripartism; Current trends in collective bargaining; Role of judicial activism; labour 

legislation in India with special reference to the Trade Union Act 1923, Industrial Disputes Act 

1947 and Factories Act 1948. 

Unit IV 

Special problems of labour; Child labour, female labour, discrimination and gender bias in 

treatment of labour; Labour market reforms – Exit policy, need for safety nets, measures imparting 

flexibility in labour markets; Second National Commission of Labour; Globalization and labour 

markets. 



� Hajela, P.D. (1998), Labour Restructuring in India: A Critique of the New Economic Policies, 

Commonwealth Publisher, New Delhi. 

� Lester, R.A. (1964), Economics of Labour, (2 nd Edition), Macmillan, New York. 

� McConnell, C.R. and S.L. Brue (1986), Contemporary Labour Economics, McGraw-Hill, New 

York. 

� Papola, T.S., P.P. Ghosh and A.N. Sharma (Eds.) (1993), Labour, employment and industrial 

Relations in India, B.R. Publishing Corporation, New Delhi. 

� Venkata Ratnam, C.S. (2001), Globalization and Labour-Management Relations: Dynamics of 

Change, Sage Publications/Response Books, New Delhi. 


� McCormickm B. and Smith (Eds.)(1968), The Labour Market, Penguin, Harmondsworth. 

� Das, N. (1960), Unemployment, Full Employment and India, Asia Publishing House, Bombay. 

� Deshpande L.K. and J.C. Sandesara, (Eds.)(1970), Wage Policy and Wages Determination in 

India, Bombay University Press, Bombay. 

� Hicks J.R. (1932), The Theory of Wages, Clarendon Press, Oxford. 

� Mazumdar, D. (1989), Micro-economic Issues of Labour Markets in Developing Countries, 

EDI Services Paper No. 40, World Bank, Washington D.C. 

� Memoria, C.B. (1966), Labour Problems and Social Welfare in India, Kitab Mahal, Allahbad. 

� Punekar, S.D. (1978), Labour Welfare, Trade Unionism and Industrial Relations, Himalaya 

Publishing House, Bombay 

� Singh V.B. (Ed.) (1970), Industrial Labour in India, Popular Parakashan, Bombay. 

� Misra, L. (2000), Child Labour in India, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 

� Riveros, L. (1990), Labour Market Policies and Labour Market Reforms in Socialist 

Economies, World Bank, Washington D.C. 


Paper-205(Option-VI) 

COMPUTER APPLICATION IN ECONOMICS ANALYSIS-II 

10(753) 

Session : 2012-13 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External: 80 (60 +20) 

Theory : 60 

Practical : 20 

Internal : 20 






PREAMBLE 

The direction towards the knowledge society shall be resting on a healthy economics and proper 

use of Information Technology. Economics being an empirical science, computers have emerged as 

the pivotal instruments of economic analysis, research and forecasting. Therefore, the future 

economists must be equipped with skills and tools based on computers, which this course shall 


provide to them. This will not only enhance their employability but also prepare them for the 

challenges of the future. 

Introduction to Text Processing 

Unit I 

Word Processor : Meaning, Uses and Advantages; Popular Word Processing Packages; Features 

of a Good Word Processor; MS-Word: Getting Started, Creating and Saving a document, Editing, 

Page Setting and Formatting the text and Printing the Document. 

Unit II 

Spreadsheet Software 

Spreadsheet: Meaning, overview and application areas; Features of MS-Excel: Entering 

Information; Saving workbooks and Formatting; Creating Graphs; Printing Worksheets and 

Graphs; Spreadsheet Function – Mathematical, Statistical and Financial Functions. 

Unit III 

Statistical Processing Techniques and Methods 

Summarizing and analysis of data, Descriptive Statistics; Calculation of Mean, Correlation and 

Regressing analysis, Estimation of Growth Rates, An overview of Techniques used in Research- 

Univariate, Bivariate and Multivariate analysis; Trends Forecasting. 

Unit IV 

IT Application to Commerce: 

E-Commerce: Meaning, basis and scope, E-Commerce, E-Business and E- Transaction; E- 

Commerce Vs. Traditional Commerce; Basis of E-Commerce; Business Models of E-Commerce; 

Electronic Transactions- Security, Digital Signature, Digital Certificate; Encryption; Electronic 

Payment System - Debit Cards, Credit Cards, Smart Cards, Electronic Funds Transfer, ATM. 


� David Whiteley, E-Commerce: Strategy, Technologies and Applications, Tata McGraw Hill, 

New Delhi. 

� Goel, Sushil, Computer Application to Business & E-Commerce, Natraj Publishing House, 

Karanl. 

� Lipschultz, M.M. and S. Lipschultz , Theory and Problems of Data Processing, Schum's Outline 

Series, McGraw Hill, New York. 

� Madan, Sushila, Information Technology, Taxman Allied Services, New Delhi. 

� P.T. Joseph, S.J. , E- Commerce : An Indian Perspective, PHI Learning , New Delhi. 

� Parameswaranm R. Computer Applications in Business, S. Chand and Company, New Delhi. 

� Rajaraman, V. Fundamentals of Computers, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. 

� Sinha, P.K. , Computer Fundamental, BPB Publications, New Delhi. 

� Sudalaimuthu, S. and Anthony Raj S, Computer Applications in Business, Himalaya Publishing 


10(754) 



Paper-205(Option-VII) 

MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS-II 

10(755) 

Session : 2012-13 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 






PREAMBLE 

This course is designed to equip students to understand the economic concepts and theories which 

use mathematical tools and techniques to refine the verbal logic. The use of calculus has permitted 

formulation of economic problems in multivariable mode and yield valuable insight about 

optimizing human behaviour. Modern algebraic tools allow convenient handling of simultaneous 

equations in the context of linear programming, game theory and input-output analysis. 

Mathematical economics deals with various applications of mathematical tools and techniques in 

defining and developing economic relationships. This course has been accordingly designed to 

include various mathematical techniques/methods/models related to the different parts of economic 

theory like consumer theory, theory of production, pricing, trade cycles, growth models, etc. The 

paper covers important aspects of microeconomics, macroeconomics and development theory and 

the various modules have been accordingly designed. 

Unit I 

Partial and general market equilibrium model; National income models (closed and open economy 

model); Jacobian Determinant and its application to IS-LM models. Leontief input-output models. 

Unit II 

Dynamics of market price using first-order differential equation; Qualitative-Graphic approach; 

Dynamic stability of equilibrium using second-order differential equation; Complex root case; Cob- 

Web model using first-order difference equation. 

Unit III 

Static and dynamic multiplier; Accelerator (Simple and flexible); Market model with price 

expectations; Interaction of inflation and unemployment (Augmented Phillips relation); Samuelson 

Multiplier-Acceleration Interaction Model; 

Unit IV 

Domar model; Harrod model; Solow and Meade models; Growth models of Kaldor and Joan 

Robinson. 

Basic Reading List PP 

� Allen, R.G.D. (1976), Mathematical Economics, Macmillan, London. 


� Chiang & Wainright, Fundamental Methods Mathematical Economics, 4 th ed, McGrawHill, 

Singapore, 2005. 

� Dernburg, and Dernburg, Macroeconomics; A Mathematical approach McGraw Hill 

International Book Company. 

� Arrow, K. J. and M. Intrilligator (Eds.)(1982), Handbook of Mathematical Economics, 

Volumes I, II and III, North Holland, Amsterdam. 

� Henderson, J. M. and R.E. Quandt (1980), Microeconomic Theory: A Mathematical Approach, 



� Allen R.G.D. (1974), mathematical Analysis for Economists, Macmillan Press and ELBS, 

London. 

� Chiang, A.C. (1986), Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics, Mc Graw Hill, New 

York. 

� Jha, R. (1991), Contemporary Macroeconomics Theory and Policy, Willey Eastern Ltd., New 

Delhi. 

� Jones, H.g. (1976), An Introduction to the Modern Theory of Economics Growth, McGraw 

Hill-Kogakusha, Tokyo. 

� Handley, G. (1962, Linear programming, Addison Wesley Publishing Co., Massachusetts. 

� Hiller, F.S. and G.J. Lieberman (1985), Operations Research, C.B.S., New Delhi. 

� Kothari, C.R. (1992), An Introduction to Operations Research, Vikas Publishing House, New 

Delhi. 

� Mustafi, C. K. (1992), Operations Research: Methods and Practice, Wiley Eastern, New Delhi. 


Paper-205(Option-VIII) 

ECONOMICS OF REGIONALISM-II 

10(756) 

Session : 2012-13 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 






Unit I 

Political Economy of Regionalism : An Overview, Regionalism in Asia and The America; the 

Political Economy of Currency regions; Open regionalism. 

The European Case; Systemic Sources of variation in Regional Institutionalization in Europ; East 

Asia and the Americas Major Power Trade floors. 

Unit II 

Theories of New Regionalism; The New Regionalism: Revisited; The World Order Approach; 

Regionalism and World Order: The Changing Global Setting. 


Unit III 

Regional Security Complex; Theory in the Post Cold War World; A regional 

Building Approach: Futures for new Regionalism. 

Unit IV 

WTO and RTAs; Rules on Regional Trade Agreements; The EU, ASEAN, NAFTA, SAARC; 

Asian Economics Community. 

Reading List 

� “The Political Economy of Regionalism”, by Edward D Mansfield, Helen V Milner; Columbia 

University Press, 1997. 

� “Open Regionalism”, Working Paper 97-3 by C Fred Bergsten, Peterson Institute, Washington 

D.C. USA. 

� “Regionalism or Multilateralism” of Giorgia Albertin: IMF Working Paper, 1 st March 2008. 

� “Theories of New Regionalism” A Palgrave Macmillan Publication, Nov 2003 Edited by 

Fredriek Soderbaurne and Timothy M. Shaw. 

� “The Economics of International Integration”, by Peter Robson, Published by 

� Regional Trade Agreement Section, WTO, Geneva, SWISS. 

� WTO Multilateralising Regionalism; Challenges for the Global Trading System, Feb. 2009. 

� WTO Discussion Paper No. 12, the Changing Landscape of Regional Trade Agreement, 2006. 

M.A. Economics (Semester III) 





Paper-306 International Trade and Finance-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Paper-307 Economics of Environment and 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Social Sector-I 

Paper-308 Indian Economic Policy-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Paper-309 Economics of Growth and 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Development-I 

Paper-310 

Option (i) Econometrics-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Option (ii) History of Modern Economics 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

(Contribution of Nobel Laureates 

in Economics)-I 

Option (iii) Economics of Agriculture-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Option (iv) Welfare Economics-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Option (v) Industrial Economics-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Option (vi) Financial Markets and Institutions-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Option (vii) Economics of Gender and 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Development-I 

Option (viii) Economic History of ASEAN 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Countries, China, South Korea 

and Japan-I 

10(757) 


Note: Students are required to select any one option from Paper-310. The students will select 

the same optional stream in Semester IV. 

M.A. 3 rd Semester 

Paper-306 

INTERNATIONAL TRADE AND FINANCE-1 

10(758) 

Session : 2013-14 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 






PREAMBLE 

The course provides a deep understanding about the broad principles and theories, which tend to 

govern the free flow of trade in goods, services and capital — both short-term and long-term — at 

the global level. Besides, preparing the students about the relevance and limitations of these 

principles, the contents of the paper spread over different modules, lay stress on the theory and 

nature of the subject which, in turn, will greatly help them to examine the impact of the trade 

policies followed both at the national and international levels as also their welfare implications at 

macro level and the distribution of gains from trade to North and South with particular reference to 

India. The study of the paper under the present era of globalization will train the students about the 

likely consequences on income, employment and social standards and possible policy solutions as 

the world will move into the 21st century. 

Unit-I 

Theory of International Trade 

Classical Theory of International Trade – Theories of absolute advantage, comparative advantage 

and opportunity costs, J.S. Mill’s Theory of Reciprocal Demand; Offer Curve Analysis, Empirical 

Testing of theory of comparative advantage. 

Unit -II 

Neo-Classical Theories of International Trade- 

Heckscher-Ohlin Model; Factor Price equalization theorem; Rybczynski theorem; 

Immizerizing growth, Metztor Paradox, Alternative Trade Theories; Strategic Trade 

Theory, Intra Industry Trade: Emergence and Measurement; Trade under imperfectly 

Competitive Markets. 

Unit-III 

Measurement of Gains from International Trade 

Measurement of gains from trade and their distribution; Concepts of terms of trade, their uses and 

limitations; Hypothesis of secular deterioration of terms of trade, its empirical effects of relevance 

and policy implications for less developed countries; Trade as an engine economic growth; Stopler 

Samuelson Theoram; Effects of Tariffs, Quotas, Non-tariff barriers; Nominal, effective and 

optimum rates of tariffs – their measurement. 


Unit-IV 

Growth and Trade 

The nature of the growth process; The effects of growth on small countries; The Effects of 

Growth on Large Countries; Technical Progress and International Trade; Import 

substitution v/s Export Push; Trade Liberalization: order, sequencing and speed; 

Liberalization experience of developing countries. 


� Carbough, R.J. (1999), International Economics, International Thompson Publishing, New 

York 

� Chacholiades, M. (1990), International Trade: Theory and Policy, McGraw Hill, Kogakusha, 

Japan. 

� Dana, M.S. (2000), International Economics: Study, Guide and Work Book, (5 th Edition), 

Routledge Publishers, London. 

� Dunn R.M. adn J.H. Mutt (2000), International Economics, Routledge, London. 

� King, P.G. (1995), International Economics and International Economic Policy: A Reader, 

McGraw Hill International, Singapore. 

� Krugman, P.R. and M. Obstfeld (1994), International Economics: Theory and Policy, 

Glenview, Foresman. 

� Sodirston, Bo. (1991), International Economics, The Macmillan Press Ltd. London. 

� Feenstra, R.C. (1992), “ How Costly is Protectionalism?,” Journal of Economic Perspectives. 

6,159-178. 

� Gallaway, M.C., Blonigen, B.A., and J.E. Flynn, (1999), “Welfare Costs of the US 

Antidumping and Countervailing Duty Laws”, Journal of International Economics, 49,211-214. 

� Hufbauer G.C. and K.A. Elliott (1994), Measuring the Costs of Protection in the United States, 

Institute for International Economics. 

� Miyagiwa, K. and Y. Ohno (1995), “Closing the Technology Gap Under Protection,” American 

Economic Review, 85, 755-770. 

� Vanderbussche, H. and M. Zanardi (2006), “The Global Chilling Effects of Antidumping 

Proliferation, “ CEPR Discussion paper. 5597. 

� Panagariya, A. (2000), “Preferential Trade Liberalization: the Traditional Theory and new 

Developments,” Journal of Economic Literature, 38, 287-331. 

� Maggi, G. and A. Rodriguez-Clare (1998), “The Value of Trade Agreements in the Presence of 

Political Pressures,” Journal of Political Economy, 106, 574-601. 


� Bhagwati J. (1988), Protectionism, Cambridge University Press, Mass. 

� Goldsten, M. (1998), The Asian Financial crisis: causes cure and systematic implications, 

Institute of International Economics, Washington D.C. 

� Jackson, J. (1989), The World Trading System, Cambridge University Press, Mass. 

� Pomfert, R. (1988), Unequal Trade: The Economics of Discriminatory International Trade 

Policies, Blackwell Publishers, Oxford. 

� Mishkin, S.F. (1998), The Economics of Money, Banking and Financial Markets, (5 th Edition), 

Harper Colins Publishers, New York. 

� Panchmukhi, V.R. (1978), Trade Policies of India–A Quantitative Analysis, Concept Publishing 

Company, New Delhi. 

� Panchamukhi V.R. and R. Tandon (1987), Money and Finance in World Economic Order 

(RIS), Indus Publishing Co. Delhi. 

10(759) 


� Brahmananda, P.R. and V.R. Panchmukhi (Eds.) (1987), The Development Process of the 

Indian Economy, Himalaya Publishing House, Bombay. 

� Joshi, V. and I.M.D. Little (1998), India’s Economic Reforms, 1999-2000, Oxford University 


� Patel, S. J. (1995), Indian Economy Towards the 21 st Century, University Press Ltd., India. 

� Satyanarayan, B. (1986), India’s Trade with Asia and the Far East Countries, B.R. Publishing 

Corp., New Delhi. 

M.A. 3rd Semester 

Paper-307 

ECONOMICS OF ENVIRONMENT AND SOCIAL SECTOR-1 

10(760) 

Session : 2013-14 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 






PREAMBLE 

This course is meant to provide some insights into the application of economic theory in the design 

and implementation of public policy related to the management of environment and social sectors. 

The course finds roots in welfare economics, national income accounting, macroeconomic policies 

and trade and development. Modules incorporated in this paper are devoted to issues of 

environmental economics, environmental and social services and the problem of valuation of these 

services, and designing of instruments and institutions for the management of environment. The 

models of optimal use of natural resources, macroeconomic issues, sustainable development, 

environmental resource problems in India and the economics of health and education constitute the 

other areas of the modules of this paper. 

Unit-I 

Environment, ecology and economy; Pareto optimality and perfect competition; External 

effects in production and consumption; Market failure in case of environmental goods - 

incomplete markets, externalities, non-exclusion; non-rivalry; non-convexities and 

asymmetric information. 

Unit-II 

Environmental policy framework in India - problems of command & control regime; New 

Environment Policy. Natural resources: types, classification and scarcity; Elementary capital 

theory; Economics of natural resources. 

Unit-III 

Economic instruments for environmental protection; Pollution charges, ambient charges, product 

charges, subsidies; Liability rules - non-compliance fees, deposit refund system, performance 


onds. Marketable pollution permits; Evaluative criteria of and practical conditions for use of the 

economic incentives; Mixed instruments; Choice among policy instruments. Estimation of marginal 

cost of pollution abatement for designing the pollution tax. 

Unit-IV 

Coase’s bargaining solution and collective action. Measures of economic value of environment 

WTP and WTAC; Contingent valuation method; Travel cost method; Hedonic market methods; 

Averting behaviour approach - household health production function method. 

Reading List 



� Hanley, N., J.F. Shogern and B. White (1997), Environmental Economics in Theory and 

Practice, Macmillan. 

� Cropper, Maureen (1999), Valuing Environmental Benefits, Edward Elgar. 

� Sankar, U. (Ed.) (2001), Environmental Economics, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 

� James, A.J., M. N. Murty and Smita Misra (1999), Economics of Water Pollution – The Indian 

Experience, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 


Paper-308 


INDIAN ECONOMICS POLICY-1 

10(761) 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 






PREAMBLE 

The objective of this Paper at the postgraduate level would be to sharpen the analytical faculty of 

the student, by highlighting an integrated approach to the functioning aspects of the Indian 

economy, keeping in view the scope for alternative approaches. Such an analysis is essential 

because the Indian economy is a unique amalgam of alternative competing and often conflicting 

theories and a proper understanding of its working is imperative if the student is to comprehend the 

ramifications that underlie most of the observed phenomena in the Indian economic set-up. The 

emphasis of the paper is on overall social, political and economic environment influencing policy 

decisions. To develop all these themes, the course is divided into specific modules. 

Unit I 

Major features of Indian Economy in present times. Role of State and Market in economic 

development. Broad demographic features of Indian population; Rural-urban migration; 

Urbanization ; Poverty and Inequality. 


Unit II 

Institutional Structure – land reforms in India; Technological change in agriculture; pricing of 

agricultural inputs and output; Issues in food security; Policies for sustainable agriculture. 

Unit III 

Fiscal federalism – Centre-state financial relations; Finances of Central Government; Finances of 

State Governments; Parallel economy; Problems relating to fiscal policy. 

Unit IV 

Structure and direction of foreign trade; Balance of payments; Issues in export-import policy; 

Exchange rate policy and FEMA; Foreign capital and MNCs in India. 

Reading List 

� Ahluwalia, I.J. and I.M.D. Little (Eds.) (1999), India’s Economic Reforms and Development 

(Essays in honour of Manmohan Singh), Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 

� Bardha, P.K. (9 th Edition) (1999), The Political Economy of Development in India, Oxford 


� Brahmananda, P.R. and V.R. Panchmukhi (Eds.) (2001), Development Experience in the Indian 

Economy: Inter-State Perspectives, Bookwell, Delhi. 

� Datt, R. (Ed.) (2001), Second Generation Economic Reforms in India, Deep & Deep 


� Government of India, Economic Survey, (Annual), Ministry of Finance, New Delhi. 

� Government of India, Planning Commission; Five Year Plan Development. 

� Jalan, B. (1992), The Indian Economy – Problems and Prospects, Viking, New Delhi. 

� Jalan, B. (1996), India’s Economic Policy- Preparing for the Twenty First Century, Viking, 

New Delhi. 

� .Kapila Uma Indian Economy Academic Foundation New Delhi Latest Edition. 

� Mishra S.K.and Puri V.K, Indian Economy Himalya Publication House Latest Edition. 

� Monga G.S.and Goel M.M. (2001) Wage Goods Approach and Development Deep and Deep 

New Delhi. 

� Parikh, K.S. (1999), India Development Report – 1999-2000, Oxford University Press, New 

Delhi. 

� Reserve Bank of India, Report on Currency and Finance, (Annual). 

� Rudar Dutt and Sundram; Indian Economy S Chand and Company Latest Edition 

� Sen, R.K. and B. Chatterjee (2001), Indian Economy: Agenda for 21 st Century (Essays in 

honour of Prof. P.R. Brahmananda), Deep & Deep Publications, New Delhi. 

� Goel, MM ( 2011): Economics of Human Resource Development in India,VK Global 


10(762) 



Paper-309 

ECONOMICS Of GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT-1 

10(763) 


Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 






PREAMBLE 

The study of economic development has gained importance because of sustained interest of the 

developing countries in uplifting their economic conditions by restructuring their economies to 

acquire greater diversity, efficiency and equity in consonance with their priorities. While few 

success stories can be counted, many have grappled with chronic problems of narrow economic 

base, inefficiency and low standard of living. For this and other reasons, there have been many 

approaches to economic development. In recent times, besides hardcore economic prescriptions to 

development, concerns hitherto relegated to background like education, health, sanitation and 

infrastructural development, have found a place of pride in explaining the preference of various 

economies. Modules incorporated in this paper are devoted to the theories of growth and 

development, social and institutional aspects of development, importance of agriculture, and the 

rationale and pattern of industrialization in developing countries. The other important issues in the 

context of development such as infrastructure-linkages, role of international trade, importance of 

domestic macroeconomic policies, investment criteria, and relevance of planning have been 

included in the modules of this paper. 

Unit I 

Economic Growth and Development 

Factors affecting Economic Growth: capital, labour and technology; Historical Perspective of 

Economic Growth and its relevance; Structural Diversity and common characteristics of developing 

nations. 

Measuring Development: Income Measures, Basic Needs Approach, PQLI, HDI and Capabilities 

Approach; Goulet’s core values of development. 

Poverty, Inequality and Development: Measurement, Impact and Policy options; Development 

Gap: concepts and measurement. 

Unit-II 

Theories of Development 

Contributions of Adam Smith, Ricardo, Karl Marx and Schumpeter, Rostow’s Theory of Stage of 

Economic Growth. 


Unit-III 

Growth Models 

Harrod and Domar: Instability of equilibrium; Neo Classical Growth Models: Solow and Meade; 

Growth Models of Joan Robinson, Kaldor and Pasinetti. 

Unit-IV 

Technological Progress 

Embodied and Disembodied; Neutral and Non-Neutral (Hicks and Harrod); Endogenous Growth 

Theory: Role of learning, education and research; Accumulation of Human Capital; Explanation of 

Cross-Country Differentials in Economic Growth. 


� Adelman, I. (1961), Theories of Economic Growth and Development, Stanford University 

Press, Stanford. 

� Barro, R. and X. Salai- Martin, Economic Growth, McGraw Hill, New York. 

� Behrman, S. and T.N. Srinivasan (1995), Handbook of Development Economics, Vol. 3, 

Elsevier, Amsterdam. 

� Brown, M. (1966), On the Theory and Measurement of Technical Change, Cambridge 

University Press, Cambridge, Mass. 

� Chakravarti, S. (1982), Alternative Approaches to the Theory of Economic Growth, Oxford 


� Chenery, H. and T.N. Srinivasan (Eds.) (1989), Handbook of Development Economics, Vols. 1 

& 2, Elsevier, Amsterdam. 

� Ghatak, S. (1986), An Introduction to Development Economics, Allen and Unwin, London. 

� Gillis, M., D.H. Perkins, M. Romer and D.R. Snodgrass (1992), Economics of Development, 

(3rd Edition), W.W. Norton, New York. 

� Higgins, B. (1959), Economic Development, W.W. Norton, New York. 

� Jones, HG.(1975), An Introduction to Modern Theories of Economic Growth, Nelson, London. 

� Kindleberger, C.P. (1977), Economic Development, (3rd Edition), McGraw Hill, New York. 

� Meier, G.M. and J.E.Rauch (2005), Leading Issues in Economic Development, (8th Edition), 


� Sen, A.K. (Ed.) (1990), Growth Economics, Penguin, Harmondsworth. 

� Todaro, M.P. and S.C. Smith (2003), (8th Edition), Economic Development, Pearson 

Education, Delhi. 

� Thirlwal, A.P. (1999), (6th Edition), Growth and Development, Macmillan, U.K. 

M.A. (3 rd Semester) 

Paper- 310 (Option- i) 

ECONOMETRICS–I 

10(764) 


Time: 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 







PREAMBLE 

Applications of economic theory need a reasonable understanding of economic relationships and 

relevant statistical methods. The econometric theory thus becomes a very powerful tool for 

understanding of applied economic relationships and for meaningful research in economics. This 

paper accordingly is devoted to equip the students with basic theory of econometrics and relevant 

applications of the methods. The topics covered in the course include various problems faced in 

estimation of both single equations and simultaneous equations models. The course also covers 

various econometric methods applicable to different topics in economics and those needed for 

applied economic research. An introductory module on multivariate methods has also been 

included in the course which constitutes an important tool for analysis in multivariable data in 

development-related studies. 

Unit – I 

Definition, Scope and Methodology of Econometrics, Simple Linear Regression Model; OLS 

Estimates and Their Properties. Functional forms of Regression Models, Growth Rates. 

Unit – II 

General Linear regression Model, Maximum Likelihood Estimates and their properties .R 2 and 

adjusted R 2 ; Hypothesis Testing of Parameters in Multiple Regression Analysis. 

Unit – III 

Nature, Test, Consequences and remedial steps of problem of Heteroscedasticity, Multicollinearity 

and Autocorrelation. 

Unit – IV 

Types of Specification Errors, Errors of Measurement. The Simultaneous Equation bias and 

Consistency of OLS Estimators; The Identification Problem; Rules of Identification- Order and 

Rank Conditions. 

Basic Reading List: 

� Amemiya, T. (1985), Advanced Econometrics, Harvard University Press, Cambridge, Mass. 

� Baltagi, B.H. (1988), Econometrics, Springer, New York. 

� Goldberger, A.S. (1998), Introductory Econometrics, Oxford University Press, New York. 

� Gujarati, D.N. (1995), Basic Econometrics (2 nd Edition) MC Graw Hill New Delhi. 

� Intrilligator, M.D. (1978), Econometric Methods, Techniques and Applications, Prentice Hall 

Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey. 

� Johnson J. (1991), Econometric Methods, MCGraw Hall Book Co. London 

� Kmenta J. (1998), Elements of Econometrics, University of Michigan Press, NewYork 

� Koutsoyiannis, A. (1977), Theory of Econometrics, The Macmillan Press Ltd. London 

� Maddala G.S.(Ed) (1993), Econometric Methods and application, Aldershot U.K. 

� Pindyck R.S. and D.L. Rubinfield (1976), Econometric Models and Economic Forecasts, 

MCGraw Hill Kogakusha Tokyo 

� Theil H. (1981), Introduction to Econometrics, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi 

10(765) 



Paper-310 (Option-ii) 

HISTORY OF MODERN ECONOMICS -I 

(Contribution of Nobel Laureates in Economics) 

10(766) 


Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 






PREAMBLE 

A critical study of the economic theories of the past and economic ideas of the great economic 

thinkers of the past is at once challenging and illuminating and enlightening. A historical 

reconstruction of the ideas of economic thinkers is essential for understanding and appreciating the 

many controversial questions in the history of economic ideas and development of social thought of 

which economic thought is only one part — significantly important part. The subject of history of 

economic analysis or history of economic thought, as is taught in Universities and colleges, covers 

the analysis of economic ideas from Mercantilism to Keynesianism. As is well known, the progress 

of the subject of economics and evolution and development of economic ideas has not come to a 

stop with Keynesianism. The subject has shown rapid progress since then and is showing further 

healthy developments in the present also. The paper “History of Modern Economic Analysis” is an 

attempt to make the student of economics acquainted with the ideas and works of economists and 

thinkers who received Nobel Memorial Prize in Economics. The development of ideas by the Nobel 

Laureates in Economics is breathtaking and covers almost all areas of economic analysis, a 

relatively new branch. In a semester or year course it will be, of course, not possible to cover this 

paper which is divided into eight modules. The University/College concerned will have to choose 

one or two modules, on the basis of faculty availability and student interest, among others. 

Friedman, Milton. 

Tobin, James, Modigliani, Franco. 

Markowitz, Harry M. Sharpe, William F. 

Miller, Merton H. 

Unit-I 

Unit-II 

Unit-III 

Unit-IV 


Reading List 

� Allais, M. (1978), Contributions to Economic Science. 

� Friedman, M. (1957), A Theory of the Consumption Function, Princeton University Press, 

Princeton, New Jersey. 

� Friedman, M. (1959), The Demand for Money: Some Theoretical and Empirical Results, 

Journal of Political Economy, Vol. 67. 

� Fiedman, M. (1968), The Optimum Quantity of Money and other Essays, Aldine Publishers, 

Chicago. 

� Markowitz, H.M. (1990), Foundations of Portfolio Theory: Nobel Lecture. 

� Modigliani F. (1980), The Collected Papers of Franco Modigliani, Vol. 1,2 and 3 (Edited by A. 

Abel), MIT Press, Cambridge, Mass. 

� Sharpe, W.F. (1970), Portfolio Theory and Capital Markets, McGraw-Hill New York. 

� Tobin, J. Essays in Economics, Vols. I to III, 1971, 75, 82, North Holland, Amsterdam. 

� Tobin, J. and D, Hester (Eds.)(1967), Financial Markets and Economic Activity, John Wiley, 

New York. 

� Kuznets, S. (1959), Six Lectures on Economic Growth, NBER, New York. 

� Lewis, W.A. (1955), The Theory of Economic Growth, Macmillan, London. 


Paper-305 (Option -iii) 

ECONOMICS OF AGRICULTURE-I 

10(767) 

Session : 2013-14 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 






PREAMBLE 

The Objective of this course is to provide a detailed treatment of issues in agricultural 

economics to those intending to specialize in this area. Its objective is to familiarize students 

with policy issues that are relevant to Indian agricultural economics and enable them to 

analyze the issues, using basic micro-economic concepts. 

Agriculture and Economic Development 

Unit I 

Agricultural Economics : Definition, Nature and Scope; Traditional agriculture and its 

Modernization; Role of Agriculture in Economic Development; Inter- Sectoral Linkages of 

Agriculture (Backward and Forward Linkages and Feedback Effects). 


Economics of Rural Development 

Rural Development : Nature, Objectives, Scope, Importance, Approaches and Strategy; 

Technology for Rural Development; Communication for Rural Development; Peoples’ 

Participation in Rural Development. 

Models of Agricultural Development 

Unit II 

Ancient Economic Thought and Agriculture : Hebrew Economic Thought, Greek Economic 

Thought – Socrates, Plato, Aristotle; Roman Economic Thought; Medieval Economic Thought and 

Agriculture – St. Augustine; Physiocrats and Agriculture; Classical Economic Thought and 

Agriculture. 

Risk and Uncertainly in Agriculture 

Nature and Types of Risks and Uncertainties in Agriculture, Public Policy and Farm Level 

Measures to reduce risks and uncertainties. 

Unit III 

Rural Labour Market 

Agriculture Labour : Classification, Characteristics and Conditions; Role of Labour in agriculture; 

Demand and Supply of Labour; Problems and Measures to improve the conditions of Agricultural 

Labourers : Some Special Development Agencies. 

Rural Unemployment and Poverty 

Rural Unemployment : Nature, Magnitude, Causes and Suggestions to solve unemployment 

problem; Rural Poverty, Inequalities in income distribution; Concept of Poverty Line; Measures to 

eradicate Poverty in India. 

Agricultural Prices 

Unit IV 

Trends in Agricultural Prices; Effect of fluctuations in Agricultural Prices; Need for stability in 

Agricultural Prices; Terms of trade; Agricultural Price Policy : origin, objectives, need , 

instruments, shortcomings and suggestions for Re-orientation of Agricultural Price Policy in India. 

Agricultural Growth in India 

Indian Agriculture : Features, Problems and Trends; Agricultural Productivity in India – Causes of 

Low Productivity and Suggestions to increase Productivity in India; Agricultural Development and 

Five Year Plans; Sustainable Agriculture. 


� Black, J.D. (1945), Introduction to Economics of Agriculture. MacMillan, New York. 

� Bruce L., Gardener and Gordon C., Rausser (Eds.), Handbook of Agricultural Economics, 

Vol.1A, Agricultural Production, Amersterdam, Elsevier Science B.V. 

� Bruce L., Gardener and Gordon C., Rausser (Eds.), Handbook of Agricultural Economics, Vol. 

2B, Agricultural and Policy, Amsterdam, Elsevier Science B.V. 

� Bruce L., Gardener and Gordon C., Rausser (Eds.),Handbook of Agricultural Economics, 

Vol.1B, Marketing, Distribution and Consumption, Amersterdam, Elsevier Science B.V. 

� Bruce, L., Gardener and Gordon C., Rausser (Eds.), Handbook of Agricultural Economics, 

Vol.2A, Agricultural and Its External Linkages, Amsterdam, Elsevier Science B.V. 

� Cohen, R.L. (1948), Economics of Agriculture, Nishet, London. 

10(768) 


� Dantwala, M.L. et. al (1991), Indian Agricultural Development Since Independence, Oxford & 

IBH, New Delhi. 

� Drummond H. Evan and Goodwin W. John (2006), Agricultural Economics, Pearson 

Education, New Delhi. 

� Eicher Carl and Lawrence Witt (Eds.) (1964), Agriculture in Economic Development, New 

York, McGraw Hill Co. 

� Forster, G.W. and Leoger, M.C. (1959), Elements of Agricultural Economics, Prentice Hall. 

� Ghatak Subrata and Ken Ingersent, Agriculture and Economic Development, Harvestor Press 

Ltd., London. 

� Goodwin, H.G. (1977), Economics of Agriculture, Reston Publiching Co. 

� Gulati, A. and T. Kelly (1999), Trade Liberalisation and Indian Agriculture, Oxford University 


� Halcrow, H.G.(1981), Economics of Agriculture, McGraw Hill International Book Agency. 

� Meier, G.M. (1995), Leading Issues in Economic Development, Oxford University Press, New 

Delhi. 

� Metcaff, D. (1969), Economics of Agriculture, Harmondsworth, Penguin Books. 

� Nicholls, W.H. (1964), “The Place of Agriculture in Economics Development”, in Eicher, C. 

and Witt, L.(ed) 1964, Agriculture in Economics Development, Vora & Co. Publishers Pvt. Ltd, 

Bombay. 

� Ojala, E.M.(1950), Agriculture and Economic Progress, Oxford University Press, London. 

� Southworth Herman and Bruce Johnston (eds.) (1968), Agricultural Development and 

Economic Growth, Cornell University Press, New York. 


� Bilgrami, S.A.R. (1996), Agricultural Economics, Himalaya Publishing House, Delhi. 

� Desai, Vasant (1991), Fundamentals of Rural Development (A Systems Approach), Himalaya 


� Harque, T. and A.S. Sirohi (1986), Agrarian Reforms and Institutional Changes in India, 

Concept Publishing Company, Delhi. 

� Joshi, P.C. (1975), Land Reforms in India: Trends and Prospects, Allied Publishers, Bombay. 

� Lekhi, R.K. and Singh, Joginder (2010), Agricultural Economics, Kalyani Publishers, New 

Delhi. 

� Sadhu and Singh (1991), Agricultural Problems in India, Himalaya Publishing House, New 

Delhi. 

� Sadhu and Singh (2002), Fundamentals of Agricultural Economics, Himalaya Publishing 


� Singh, Kuldeep (2010), “Agricultural Trajectories and Environment Dilemma : Some Evidence 

from Haryana”, Agricultural Situation in India, Vol. LXVII, No. 3, June, 2010. 

� Soni, R.N. (1995), Leading Issues in Agricultural Economics, Arihant Press, Jalandhar. 

� Sundaram I. Satya (2009), Rural Development, Himalaya Publishing House , New Delhi. 

10(769) 



Paper-310 (Option-iv) 

WELFARE ECONOMICS – I 

10(770) 


Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 






PREAMBLE 

Evaluation of normative significance of economic events and issues forms the framework of 

welfare economics. Many applied branches of economics such as public finance, cost-benefit 

analysis, industrial economics and economics of government policy use welfare economic criteria 

as their foundation. The paper is divided into three modules—Pre-Paretian Welfare Economics, 

Paretian Welfare Economics and Later Developments. 

Unit-I 

Benthamite Approach to Aggregate Welfare; Optimum Resource Allocation and Welfare 

Maximization; Assumption of Uniform Income – Utility Function of Individuals; Questions of 

Income Distribution; Issue of Interpersonal Comparisons of Utility. 

Unit-II 

Marshallian Welfare Economics; Consumer’s Surplus; Measurement of Consumer’s Surplus 

– Difficulties involved, Criticism. 

Unit-III 

Principle of Compensating Variation; Hicks’s Surpluses; Concept of Consumer’s Surplus; 

Consumer’s Surplus and Tax-Bounty Analysis. 

Unit-IV 

Pareto optimality – Optimum exchange conditions; The production optimum; The consumption 

optimum; Concept of contract curve; Top level optimum. 


� Baumo, W.J. (ed.) (2001), Welfare Economics, Edward Elgar Publishing Ltd., U.K. 

� Broadway, R.W. and N. Bruce (1984), Welfare Economics, Basil Blackwell, Oxford. 

� Pigou, A.C. (1962), The Economics of Welfare (4 th Edition), Macmillan. 


� Hicks, J.R. (1956), A Revision of Demand Theory, Clarendon Press, Oxford. 

� Little, I.M.D. (1949), The Foundations of Welfare Economics, Oxford Economic Papers, Vol. 

1. 



Paper-310 (Option-v) 


INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS- I 

10(771) 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 






PREAMBLE 

In the contemporary world with globalization and liberalization more and more attention is being 

given to industry. This course intends to provide knowledge to the students on the basic issues such 

as productivity, efficiency, capacity utilization and debates involved in the industrial development 

of India. The objective is to provide a thorough knowledge about the economics of industry in a 

cogent and analytical manner, particularly in the Indian context. 

Unit-I 

Concept and Organization of a firm – ownership, control and objectives of the firm; Passive and 

active behaviour of the firm; Growth of the firm –Theory and evidence, constraints on firm’s 

growth; 

Unit-II 

Productivity, efficiency and Capacity utilization – concept and measurement; Indian situation. 

Theories of industrial location – Weber and Sargent theories, Factors affecting location. 

Unit-III 

Sellers’ concentration; Product differentiation; Entry conditions; Economies of Scale; Market 

structure and profitability; Market structure and innovation; 

Product pricing – theories and evidence. 

Unit-IV 

Methods of project evaluation; Ranking of Projects – NPV and IRR; Social cost-benefit Analysis; 

Theories and empirical evidence on Mergers and Acquisitions (M & A’s) and diversification. 


� Ahluwalia, I.J. (1985), Industrial Growth in India, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 

� Barthwal, R.R. (1985), Industrial Economics, Wiley Eastern Ltd. New Delhi. 

� Cherunilam, F. (1994), Industrial Economics: Indian Perspective (3 rd Edition), Himalaya 


� Desai, B. (1999), Industrial Economy in India (3 rd Edition), Himalaya Publishing House, 

Mumbai 


� Divine, P.J. and R.M. Jones et. al. (1976), An Introduction to Industrial Economics, George 

Allen and Unwin Ltd., London. 

� Government of India, Economic Survey (Annual). 

� Hay, D. and D.J. Moris (1979), Industrial Economics: Theory and Evidence, Oxford University 


� Kuchhal, S.C. (1980), Industrial Economy of India (5 th Edition), Chaitanya Publishing House, 

Allahbad. 

� Reserve Bank of India, Report on Currency and Finance (Annual). 


� Bains, J.S. (1996), Industrial Organization, Cheltanham, U.K. 

� Harndeen, J.B. (1975), The Economics of Corporate Economy, Dunellen Publishers, New 

York. 

� Kemien, M.T. and N.L. Schwartz (1982), Market Structure and Innovation, Cambridge 


� Bagchi, A. and M. Banerjee (Eds.) (1979), Change and Choice in Indian Industry, Bagchi 

Publications, Calcutta. 

� Kelkar, V.L. and V.V. Bhnoji Rao (Eds.) (1996), India Development Policy Imperatives, Tata 



Indian Economy, Himalaya Publishing, Bombay. 

� Chakravarty, S. (1987), Development Planning: The Indian Experience, Oxford University 


� Joshi, V. and I.M.D. Little (1999), India: Macro Economics and Political Economy: 1964-1991, 


� Jalan, B. (1996), India’s Economy Policy, Viking, New Delhi. 

� Sen, R. and B. Chatterjee (2001), Indian Economy: Agenda for the 21 st Century (Essays in 

honour of Professor P.R. Brahmananda), Deep and Deep Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. 


Paper- 310 (Option-vi) 

FINANCIAL MARKETS AND INSTITUTIONS -I 

10(772) 


Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 







Unit-I 

Financial System 

Concept and functions of Financial System; Role of Financial Market and Institutions. 

Assessment and management of risk and return in financial institutions. Interest Rate 

Analysis and yield curve. 

Unit-II 

Banking System 

Meaning and Functions of Banking; Types of Banks; Commercial Banks, Banking law and 

regulation, Functions of RBI Credit and Monetary Planning. Capital Adequacy and NPAs. 

Money Market 

Unit-III 

Introduction, Meaning Definitions, Characteristics and Functions of Money market; Call Money 

Market; Treasury bill market; Commercial Papers Market; Certificate of Deposit Market; Gilt- 

edged Securities Market; Repo Market. Recent Developments in Indian Money Market. 

Unit-IV 

Capital Market 

Introduction, Meaning, Objectives, Importance and Functions of Capital Market; Financial 

instruments and market functionaries in primary capital Market. Characteristics and Functions of 

Stock Exchange; Procedure for dealing at Stock Exchanges; Trading system- Clearing and 

settlement mechanisms; Concepts and Types of Derivatives; Futures and Options. 


� Bhole, L.M. (1999), Financial Institutions and Markets, Tata McGraw Hill Company Ltd., New 

Delhi. 

� Bhole, L.M. (2000), Indian Financial System, Chugh Publications, Allahbad. 

� Johnson, H.J. (1993), Financial Institutions and Markets, McGraw Hill, New York. 

� Machiraju, M.R. (1999), Indian Financial Systems, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi. 

� Ohlson, J.A. (1987), The Theory of Financial Markets and Institutions, North Holland, 

Amsterdam. 

� Prasad, K.N. (2001), Development of India’s Financial System, Sarup & Sons, New Delhi. 

� Smith, P.F. (1978), Money and Financial Intermediation: The Theory and Structure of Financial 

System, Prentice Hall, Englewood-Cliffs, New Jersey. 


� Chandra, P. (1997), Financial Markets, (4 th Edition), Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

� Machiraju, H.R. (1997), International Financial Markets in India, Wheeler Publishing, 

Allahbad. 

� Fenstermaker, J.V. (1969), Readings in Financial Markets and Institutions, Appleton, New 

York. 

� Gupta, S.B. (1983), Monetary Economics, S. Chand & Company, New Delhi. 

� Bhatt, R.S. (1996), Unit Trust of India and Mutual Funds: A Study, UTI Institute of Capital 

Markets, Mumbai. 

� Sahadevan, K.G. and M.T. Thiripalraju (1997), Mutual Funds, Prentice Hall of India, New 

Delhi. 

10(773) 


� Goss, B.A. and B.S. Yamey (1978), The Economics of Futures Trading, Macmillan, 

London. 

� Gupta, L.C. (Ed.) (1999), India’s Financial Markets and Institutions, Society for Capital 

Research and Development, Delhi. 

� Crocker, A. (1982), International Money; Issues and Analysis, The English Language Book 

Society, Nelson, London. 

� Niehans, J. (1994), International Monetary Economics, John Hopkins University Press, New 

York. 

� Attri, V. N. and Verma Neera (1995), Financial Liberalization and Economic Growth in 

Developing Countries with special reference to India, Unpublished UGC, Major Project. 


Paper- 310 (Option-vii) 

ECONOMICS OF GENDER AND DEVELOPMENT- I 

10(774) 

Session:2013-14 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 






PREAMBLE 

Gender biases in societal practices and development policies have resulted in persistent gender 

inequalities. It is increasingly being realized that mitigating such inequalities and enhancing 

women’s capabilities and entitlements are crucial to the overall development of the country. This 

course “Economics of Gender and Development” would provide students an understanding of the 

nature of the economic role of women and their contribution to the national economy on the basis 

of a scientific and non-sexist analysis. The modules incorporated in this course provide an analysis 

of issues at the theoretical level and also with regard to specificity of issues prevailing in the Indian 

context. 

Unit-I 

Importance and concepts of women studies – women in patriarchal and matriarchal societies and 

structures, patrilineal and matrilineal systems and relevance to present day society in India; 

Economic basis and functioning of patriarchy in developed Countries and LDCs, particularly India. 

Unit-II 

Demography of female population: Age structure, mortality rates, and sex ratio – Causes of 

declining sex ratios and fertility rates in LDCs and particularly India – Theories and measurement 

of fertility and its control; Women and their access to nutrition, health, education and social and 

community resources, and its impact on female mortality and fertility, economic status, and work 

participation rate. 


Unit-III 

Factors affecting decision making by women; Property rights; access to and control over economic 

resources, assets; Power of decision making at house hold, class community level; Economic status 

of women and its effect on work-participation rate, income level, health, and education in 

developing countries and India. 

Unit-IV 

Concept and analysis of women’s work: valuation of productive and unproductive work; visible 

and invisible work; paid and unpaid-work; economically productive and socially productive work 

.Factors affecting female entry in labour market; Supply and demand for female labour in 

developed and developing countries, particularly India; Studies of female work participation in 

agriculture, non-agricultural rural activities, informal sector, cottage and small-scale industries, 

organized industry and services sector. 


� Boserup E. (1970), Women’s Role in Economic Development, George Allen and Unwin, 

London. 

� Desai, N. and M.K. Raj (Eds.) (1979), Women and Society in India, Research Center for 

Women Studies, SNDT Unviersity, Bombay 

� Government of India (1974), Towards Equality – Report of the Committee on the Status of 

Women in India, Department of Social Welfare, Ministry of Education and Social Welfare, 

New Delhi. 

� Krishnaraj, M., R.M. Sudarshan and A. Shariff (1999), Gender, Population and Development, 


� Seth, M. (2000), Women and Development: The Indian Experience, Sage Publications, New 

Delhi. 

� Srinivasan K. and A. Shariff (1998), India: Towards Population and Development Goals, 


� Venkateswaran S. (1995), Environment, Development and the Gender Gap, Sage Publications, 

New Delhi. 

� Wazir, R. (2000), The Gender Gap in Basic Education: NGOs as Change Agents, Sage 


M.A. (Previous) IVth Sem. 

Paper- 310 (VIII) Opt. 

ECONOMICS HISTORY OF ASEAN, CHINA, SHOUT KOREA AND JAPAN-I 

10(775) 

Session : 2013-14 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 







Unit – I 

Problems of Economic History of ASEAN: China, Japan and South Korea, Different Approaches of 

Study and Their Limitations, Sources for the study of Modern Economic History of ASEAN: 

China, Japan and South Korea. 

Unit - II 

China, Japan and South Korea during the first half of the 20 th century: Industrial Development and 

effects of industrial development, Labour Organization and Labour Problems.The population 

problems, Foreign Trade, Agrarian Settlements and Changes in the Agrarian Life, Development of 

credit and Banking System. 

Unit – III 

Economy of ASEAN during the Second half of the 20 th century: Economic and Educational 

Reforms, The Land Reforms and changes in Agrarian Life, Industrialization. 

Unit – IV 

Foreign Trade, Development of Roads and Railways, Competition and Collaboration with Global 

Economy, Internal Aspects of the Economic problem, China, Japan and South Korea. 

Reading List: 

� ‘Reshaping the Asia Pacific Economic Order”, by Hadi Soesastro, Christopher Charles Findley, 

2006, 286 P. 

� “Institutional Balancing in the Asia Pacific: economic” by Kaithe 2009, P. 209. 

� “China and World Economy” by Zhouggno she hui ke Xue Yawn shi jie juia ji, 2002. 

� “Strategic consequences of India’s Economic Essays” by Sanjay Baru published in 2006. 

� “A New look at the US-China-Japan Triangle” Toward Building a Stable Framework” Asian 

Perspectives, Vol. 27, No3, 2003, PP 177-219 by Yoshihide Soeya, Jianweiwang and David A 

Weleh. 

� “The Economic History of Korea” by Myung soo Cha, Yeunguam University. EH. Net 

Encyclopedia. 

� “Economic Growth and Democratization in North East Asia, Part I & II. 

� “The Rise of China and its effectson Taiwan, Japan and South Korea” US Policy choices, Jan. 

2006 Dick K Nanto. 

� “America and Japan Approach a Rising China” by Dan Blumenthal, Dec. 2006. 

� “Look East: India’s Economic ties with Japan, South Korea, China, 3 Dec. 2009. 

� “China, Japan and South Korea to consider Free trade Pact” Oct. 11, 2009 MYT. 

10(776) 





M.A. Economics (Semester IV) 


Paper-406 International Trade and Finance-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Paper-407 Economics of Environment and 

Social Sector-II 

100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Paper-408 Indian Economic Policy-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Paper-409 

Paper-410 

Economics of Growth and 


100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Option (i) Econometrics-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Option (ii) History of Modern Economics 

(Contribution of Nobel Laureates 

in Economics)-II 

100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Option (iii) Economics of Agriculture-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Option (iv) Welfare Economics-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Option (v) Industrial Economics-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Option (vi) Financial Markets and Institutions-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Option (vii) Economics of Gender and 


100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Option (viii) Economic History of ASEAN 

Countries, China, South Korea 

and Japan-II 

100 80 20 3 Hrs. 

Note: Students are required to select an option from Paper-410 from the same stream which 

they selected in Semester III. 

10(777) 


M.A. (4 th Semester) 

Paper-406 

INTERNATIONAL TRADE AND FINANCE-II 

10(778) 

Session : 2013-14 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 






PREAMBLE 

The course provides a deep understanding about the broad principles and theories, which tend to 

govern the free flow of trade in goods, services and capital — both short-term and long-term — at 

the global level. Besides, preparing the students about the relevance and limitations of these 

principles, the contents of the paper spread over different modules, lay stress on the theory and 

nature of the subject which, in turn, will greatly help them to examine the impact of the trade 

policies followed both at the national and international levels as also their welfare implications at 

macro level and the distribution of gains from trade to North and South with particular reference to 

India. The study of the paper under the present era of globalization will train the students about the 

likely consequences on income, employment and social standards and possible policy solutions as 

the world will move into the 21st century. 

Unit-I 

Balance of Payments 

Meaning and components of balance of payments; Equilibrium and disequilibrium in the balance of 

payments; Foreign Exchange Market : Meaning ,Nature and Concepts.. process of adjustment under 

gold standard; fixed exchange rates and flexible exchange rates. 

Unit-II 

The Determination of Floating Exchange Rate; Expenditure-Switching Policies and Direct 

Controls; A critical review of the monetary approach; Foreign trade multiplier with and without 

foreign repercussions; determination of national income in an open economy. 

Unit-III 

The International Monetary System 

Emerging International Monetary System; Reforms of International Monetary System; India and 

developing Countries; Functions, Achievement of GATT/WTO, UNCTAD, IMF, World Bank and 

Asian Development Bank; WTO, World Bank and India. 

The Theory of Regional Blocs 

Forms of economic cooperation; Static and Dynamic effects of a customs union and free trade area; 

SAARC, ASEAN, EU, NAFTA; Asian Economic Integration : Rationale and Economic Progress. 


Unit-IV 

Trade Policies in India 

Trade problems and trade policies in India during the last five decades; Recent changes in the 

direction and composition of trade and their implications; Rationale and impact of trade reforms 

since 1991 on balance of payments, employment and Growth; Working and regulations of MNCs in 

India; FDI and Sectoral Growth in India; Recent Export and import policy of India. 


� Carbough, R.J. (1999), International Economics, International Thompson Publishing, New 

York 

� Chacholiades, M. (1990), International Trade: Theory and Policy, McGraw Hill, Kogakusha, 

Japan. 

� Dana, M.S. (2000), International Economics: Study, Guide and Work Book, (5 th Edition), 

Routledge Publishers, London. 

� Dunn R.M. adn J.H. Mutt (2000), International Economics, Routledge, London. 

� King, P.G. (1995), International Economics and International Economic Policy: A Reader, 

McGraw Hill International, Singapore. 

� Krugman, P.R. and M. Obstfeld (1994), International Economics: Theory and Policy, 

Glenview, Foresman. 

� Sodirston, Bo. (1991), International Economics, The Macmillan Press Ltd. London. 

� Feenstra, R.C. (1992), “ How Costly is Protectionalism?,” Journal of Economic Perspectives. 

6,159-178. 

� Gallaway, M.C., Blonigen, B.A., and J.E. Flynn, (1999), “Welfare Costs of the US 

Antidumping and Countervailing Duty Laws”, Journal of International Economics, 49,211-214. 

� Hufbauer G.C. and K.A. Elliott (1994), Measuring the Costs of Protection in the United States, 

Institute for International Economics. 

� Miyagiwa, K. and Y. Ohno (1995), “Closing the Technology Gap Under Protection,” American 

Economic Review, 85, 755-770. 

� Vanderbussche, H. and M. Zanardi (2006), “The Global Chilling Effects of Antidumping 

Proliferation, “ CEPR Discussion paper. 5597. 

� Panagariya, A. (2000), “Preferential Trade Liberalization: the Traditional Theory and new 

Developments,” Journal of Economic Literature, 38, 287-331. 

� Maggi, G. and A. Rodriguez-Clare (1998), “The Value of Trade Agreements in the Presence of 

Political Pressures,” Journal of Political Economy, 106, 574-601. 


� Bhagwati J. (1988), Protectionism, Cambridge University Press, Mass. 

� Goldsten, M. (1998), The Asian Financial crisis: causes cure and systematic implications, 

Institute of International Economics, Washington D.C. 

� Jackson, J. (1989), The World Trading System, Cambridge University Press, Mass. 

� Pomfert, R. (1988), Unequal Trade: The Economics of Discriminatory International Trade 

Policies, Blackwell Publishers, Oxford. 

� Mishkin, S.F. (1998), The Economics of Money, Banking and Financial Markets, (5 th Edition), 

Harper Colins Publishers, New York. 

� Panchmukhi, V.R. (1978), Trade Policies of India – A Quantitative Analysis, Concept 

Publishing Company, New Delhi. 

� Panchamukhi V.R. and R. Tandon (1987), Money and Finance in World Economic Order 

(RIS), Indus Publishing Co. Delhi. 

10(779) 



Indian Economy, Himalaya Publishing House, Bombay. 

� Joshi, V. and I.M.D. Little (1998), India’s Economic Reforms, 1999-2000, Oxford University 



Paper- 407 Session: 2013-14 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 

ECONOMICS OF ENVIRONMENT AND SOCIAL SECTOR-II 






PREAMBLE 

This course is meant to provide some insights into the application of economic theory in the design 

and implementation of public policy related to the management of environment and social sectors. 

The course finds roots in welfare economics, national income accounting, macroeconomic policies 

and trade and development. Modules incorporated in this paper are devoted to issues of 

environmental economics, environmental and social services and the problem of valuation of these 

services, and designing of instruments and institutions for the management of environment. The 

models of optimal use of natural resources, macroeconomic issues, sustainable development, 

environmental resource problems in India and the economics of health and education constitute the 

other areas of the modules of this paper. 

Unit-I 

Concept and indicators of sustainable development - sustainability rules, Common-Perrings model; 

The Solow/Hartwick approach to sustainability. System of integrated environmental and economic 

accounting (SEEA). 

Unit-II 

Management of common property resources; CPRs, LDCs and sustainable development; Subsidies, 

controls and use of natural capital in India. Political Economy of ecology and equity; Resettlement 

and rehabilitation of the displaced. 

Unit-III 

Environment and energy; Water resource planning; Water and air pollution - existing pollution 

control mechanisms; Land and forest degradation and the strategy for regeneration; Wetlands – 

policy briefs; Role of the state in forest resource management in India. 

10(780) 


Unit-IV 

Gender perspective in environmental management; Global environmental issues; Problems in 

managing climate change; International trade and environment; Trade and environment in WTO 

regime. 

Unit-V 

Education as an instrument for economic growth; Social and private returns on education; 

Important issues in basic and higher education; Economic dimensions of health care and 

determinants of health; Institutional issues in health care - role of Government and market; 

Inequalities in health and education – the class and gender perspective; Financing of education and 

health in India. 

Reading List 



� Chary, S.N. and Vyasulu, Vinod (2000), Environmental Management - an Indian Perspective, 

Macmillan, New Delhi. 

� Schultz, T.W. (1971), Investment in Human Capital, Free Press, New York. 

� World Bank (1993), The World Development Report, 1993: Investing in Health, Oxford 


� Panchmukhi, P.R. (1980), Economics of Health: A Trend Report in ICSSR, A Survey of 


� Brian G. Dahlin , The Impact of Education on Economic Growth -Theory, Findings, and Policy 

Implications, Duke University, pdf from internet. 

� Psacharopoulos, G. 1973. Returns to Education: An International Comparison. 

Amsterdam:Elsevier. 

� Barro, Robert. “Economic Growth in a Cross Section of Countries,” Quarterly Journal of 

Economics, 1991 

� Education and economic growth, Jonathan Temple*, Department of Economics, University of 

Bristol, 8 Woodland Road, Bristol BS8 1TN, pdf from internet. 

� Education and Economic Growth, Robert J. Barro, pdf from internet. 

� Painuly, J P, Economic Instruments: Application to Environmental Problems, Working paper 

no 3, by UNEP from IGIDR, Bombay, 1995. 

� Value of Life, Value of Time, and Costant Relative, Blaug, M. (1972), Introduction to 

Economics of Education, Penguin, London. 

� Hussen, A.M. (1999), Principles of Environmental Economics, Routledge, London. 

� Jeroen. C.J.M. van den Berg (1999), Handbook of Environmental and Resource Economics, 

Edward Elgar Publishing Ltd., U.K. 

� Pearce, D.W. and R. Turner (1991), Economics of Natural Resource Use and Environment, 

John Hopkins University Press, Baltimore. 

10(781) 



Paper- 408 

INDIAN ECONOMIC POLICY-II 

10(782) 

Session : 2013-14 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 






PREAMBLE 

The objective of this Paper at the postgraduate level would be to sharpen the analytical faculty of 

the student, by highlighting an integrated approach to the functioning aspects of the Indian 

economy, keeping in view the scope for alternative approaches. Such an analysis is essential 

because the Indian economy is a unique amalgam of alternative competing and often conflicting 

theories and a proper understanding of its working is imperative if the student is to comprehend the 

ramifications that underlie most of the observed phenomena in the Indian economic set-up. The 

emphasis of the paper is on overall social, political and economic environment influencing policy 

decisions. To develop all these themes, the course is divided into specific modules. 

Unit 1 

Five year Plans with emphasis on latest plan. Infrastructural development- issues and policies in its 

financing. 

Unit 2 

Industrial policy; Public Sector enterprises and their performance; Privatization and dis- 

investment debate; Micro and Small-scale Industries ; Labour sector reforms. 

Unit 3 

Analysis of price behaviour in India; Review of monetary policy of the Reserve Bank of India 

(RBI) with emphasis on latest developments; Banking Sector reforms in India. 

Unit 4 

Globalization of Indian economy; WTO and its impact on the different sectors of the economy; 

Rationale of and issues in good governance. 

Reading List 

� Ahluwalia, I.J. and I.M.D. Little (Eds.) (1999), India’s Economic Reforms and Development 

(Essays in honour of Manmohan Singh), Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 

� Bardha, P.K. (9 th Edition) (1999), The Political Economy of Development in India, Oxford 


� Brahmananda, P.R. and V.R. Panchmukhi (Eds.) (2001), Development Experience in the Indian 

Economy: Inter-State Perspectives, Bookwell, Delhi. 


� Datt, R. (Ed.) (2001), Second Generation Economic Reforms in India, Deep & Deep 


� Government of India, Economic Survey, (Annual), Ministry of Finance, New Delhi. 

� Government of India, Planning Commission; Five Year Plan Development. 

� Jalan, B. (1992), The Indian Economy – Problems and Prospects, Viking, New Delhi. 

� Jalan, B. (1996), India’s Economic Policy- Preparing for the Twenty First Century, Viking, 

New Delhi. 

� .Kapila Uma Indian Economy Academic Foundation New Delhi Latest Edition. 

� Mishra S.K.and Puri V.K, Indian Economy Himalya Publication House Latest Edition. 

� Monga G.S.and Goel M.M. (2001) Wage Goods Approach and Development Deep and Deep 

New Delhi. 

� Parikh, K.S. (1999), India Development Report – 1999-2000, Oxford University Press, New 

Delhi. 

� Reserve Bank of India, Report on Currency and Finance, (Annual). 

� Rudar Dutt and Sundram; Indian Economy S Chand and Company Latest Edition 

� Sen, R.K. and B. Chatterjee (2001), Indian Economy: Agenda for 21 st Century (Essays in 

honour of Prof. P.R. Brahmananda), Deep & Deep Publications, New Delhi. 




Paper- 409 

ECONOMICS OF GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT – II 

10(783) 


Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 






PREAMBLE 

The study of economic development has gained importance because of sustained interest of the 

developing countries in uplifting their economic conditions by restructuring their economies to 

acquire greater diversity, efficiency and equity in consonance with their priorities. While few 

success stories can be counted, many have grappled with chronic problems of narrow economic 

base, inefficiency and low standard of living. For this and other reasons, there have been many 

approaches 

to economic development. In recent times, besides hardcore economic prescriptions to 

development, concerns hitherto relegated to background like education, health, sanitation and 

infrastructural development, have found a place of pride in explaining the preference of various 

economies. Modules incorporated in this paper are devoted to the theories of growth and 

development, social and institutional aspects of development, importance of agriculture, and the 

rationale and pattern of industrialization in developing countries. The other important issues in the 


context of development such as infrastructure-linkages, role of international trade, importance of 

domestic macroeconomic policies, investment criteria, and relevance of planning have been 

included in the modules of this paper. 

Unit-I 

Approaches to Development 

Balanced and Unbalanced Growth; Critical Minimum Efforts Theory; Low Income Equilibrium 

Trap; Dual Economy: Models of Lewis, Fei-Ranis, Jorgensen, Dixit and Marglin, Kelly et.al. 

Unit-II 

Sectoral Aspects of Development 

Role of Agriculture in Economic Development; Barriers to Agriculture; Agricultural 

Transformation: Designing an Agricultural Strategy; Rationale and Pattern of Industrialization in 

developing Countries; Choice of Techniques, appropriate technology and employment; Terms of 

Trade between Agriculture and Industry. 

Unit-III 

Trade Theory and Development Experience 

International Trade as an Engine of Growth: Static and Dynamic gains from Trade; Prebisch-Singer 

Thesis vis-à-vis Free Trade experience of Developing Countries; Trade Policy Debate: Export 

promotion, Import Substitution and Economic Integration; WTO and Developing Countries, 

Growth of Services Sector in Developing Economies. 

Unit-IV 

Economic Development and Institutions 

Market efficency and Market Failure; Role of State in Economic Development: State Capacity and 

State Failure; The Washington Consensus Issues of Good Governance; Development Planning: 

Rationale, Types and Process of Planning. 


� Behrman, S. and T.N. Srinivasan (1995), Handbook of Development Economics, Vol. 3, 

Elsevier, Amsterdam. 

� Bhagwati, J. and P. Desai (1970), India: Planning for Industrialization, Oxford University Press, 

London. 

� Brown, M. (1966), On the Theory and Measurement of Technical Change, Cambridge 

University Press, Cambridge, Mass. 

� Chakravarti, S. (1982), Alternative Approaches to the Theory of Economic Growth, Oxford 


� Chakravarti, S. (1987), Development Planning: The Indian Experience, Clarendon Press, 

Oxford. 

� Chenery, H. and T.N. Srinivasan (Eds.) (1989), Handbook of Development Economics, Vols. 1 

& 2, Elsevier, Amsterdam. 

� Dasgupta, P. (1993), An Enquiry into Well-being and Destitution, Clarendon Press, Oxford. 

� Ghatak, S. (1986), An Introduction to Development Economics, Allen and Unwin, London. 

� Gillis, M., D.H. Perkins, M. Romer and D.R. Snodgrass (1992), Economics of Development, 

(3rd Edition), W.W. Norton, New York. 

� Grossman, G. and E. Helpman (1991), Innovation and Growth in the Global Economy, MIT 

Press, Cambridge, Mass. 

� Higgins, B. (1959), Economic Development, W.W. Norton, New York. 

10(784) 


� Hirschman, A.O. (1958), The Strategy of Economic Development, Yale University Press, New 

York. 

� Kindleberger, C.P. (1977), Economic Development, (3rd Edition), McGraw Hill, New York. 

� Lewis, W.A. (1955), The Theory of Economic Growth, George Allen and Unwin, London. 

� Meier, G.M. and J.E.Rauch (2005), Leading Issues in Economic Development, (8th Edition), 


� Nayyar, D. (Ed.) (1994), Industrial Growth and Stagnation: The Debate in India, Oxford 


� Sen,A. (1983), Poverty and Famines, Oxford University Press, Oxford. 

� Sen, A.K.(Ed.) (1990), Growth Economics, Penguin, Harmondsworth. 

� Sen, A. (1992), Inequality Reexamined, Oxford University Press, Oxford. 

� Todaro, M.P. and S.C. Smith (2003), (8th Edition), Economic Development, Pearson 

Education, Delhi. 

� Thirlwal, A.P. (1999), (6th Edition), Growth and Development, Macmillan, U.K. 

M.A. (4 th Semester) Session : 2013-14 

Paper- 410 (Option- i) 

Time: 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 

ECONOMETRICS–II 






PREAMBLE 

Applications of economic theory need a reasonable understanding of economic relationships and 

relevant statistical methods. The econometric theory thus becomes a very powerful tool for 

understanding of applied economic relationships and for meaningful research in economics. This 

paper accordingly is devoted to equip the students with basic theory of econometrics and relevant 

applications of the methods. The topics covered in the course include various problems faced in 

estimation of both single equations and simultaneous equations models. The course also covers 

various econometric methods applicable to different topics in economics and those needed for 

applied economic research. An introductory module onmultivariate methods has also been included 

in the course which constitutes an important tool for analysis in multivariable data in developmentrelated 

studies. 

Unit – I 

Auto Regressive and Distributed lag Models- Koyak Model, Partial Adjust Model, Adaptive 

Expectations; Problem of Autocorrelation; Almon Approach to distributed- lag model; 

Causality tests; Granger and Sim’s Test. 

10(785) 


Unit – II 

Dummy Variable Technique- Testing Structural Stability of Regression Models, Comparing 

two regressions, interaction effects, seasonal analysis, piecewise linear Regression; Use of 

dummy variables, regression with dummy dependent variables; The LPM , Logit Probit and 

Tobit Models. 

Unit – III 

Methods of Estimating Simultaneous Equation System; Recursive Methods and OLS; Indirect 

Least Squares (ILS), Instrumental Variables (IV) , 2SLS and 3SLS Methods. 

Unit – IV 

Time Series ; Stationarity, Unit Roots, Co-Integration- Spurious Regression, Dicky Fuller 

Test, Engel Granger Test, Random Walk Model, Error Correction Mechanism. 

Forecasting with ARIMA and VAR Models-Box Jenkins Methodology, Vector Auto 

Regression (VAR). 


� Amemiya, T. (1985), Advanced Econometrics, Harvard University Press, Cambridge, Mass. 

� Baltagi, B.H. (1988), Econometrics, Springer, New York. 

� Goldberger, A.S. (1998), Introductory Econometrics, Oxford University Press, New York. 

� Gujarati, D.N. (1995), Basic Econometrics (2 nd Edition) MC Graw Hill New Delhi. 

� Intrilligator, M.D. (1978), Econometric Methods, Techniques and Applications, Prentice Hall 

Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey. 

� Johnson J. (1991), Econometric Methods, MCGraw Hall Book Co. London 

� Kmenta J. (1998), Elements of Econometrics, University of Michigan Press, NewYork. 

� Koutsoyiannis, A. (1977), Theory of Econometrics, The Macmillan Press Ltd. London 

� Maddala G.S.(Ed) (1993), Econometric Methods and application, Aldershot U.K. 

� Pindyck R.S. and D.L. Rubinfield (1976), Econometric Models and Economic Forecasts, 

MCGraw Hill Kogakusha Tokyo 

� Theil H. (1981), Introduction to Econometrics, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi 

M.A. (4th Semester) 

Paper-410 (Option-ii) 

HISTORY OF MODERN ECONOMICS -II 

(Contribution of Nobel Laureates in Economics) 

10(786) 

Session : 2013-14 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 







PREAMBLE 

A critical study of the economic theories of the past and economic ideas of the great economic 

thinkers of the past is at once challenging and illuminating and enlightening. A historical 

reconstruction of the ideas of economic thinkers is essential for understanding and appreciating the 

many controversial questions in the history of economic ideas and development of social thought of 

which economic thought is only one part — significantly important part. The subject of history of 

economic analysis or history of economic thought, as is taught in Universities and colleges, covers 

the analysis of economic ideas from Mercantilism to Keynesianism. As is well known, the progress 

of the subject of economics and evolution and development of economic ideas has not come to a 

stop with Keynesianism. The subject has shown rapid progress since then and is showing further 

healthy developments in the present also. The paper “History of Modern Economic Analysis” is an 

attempt to make the student of economics acquainted with the ideas and works of economists and 

thinkers who received Nobel Memorial Prize in Economics. The development of ideas by the Nobel 

Laureates in Economics is breathtaking and covers almost all areas of economic analysis, a 

relatively new branch. In a semester or year course it will be, of course, not possible to cover this 

paper which is divided into eight modules. The University/College concerned will have to choose 

one or two modules, on the basis of faculty availability and student interest, among others. 

Solow, Robert M. 

Leontief, Wassily W. 

Koopmans C. Tjalling 

Myrdel, Gunnar 

Meade, James E. 

Ohlin, Bertil 


Unit-I 

Unit-II 

Unit-III 

Unit-IV 

� Allais, M. (1978), Contributions to Economic Science. 

� Solow, R.M. (1970), Growth Theory: An Exposition, Oxford University Press, Oxford. 

� Meade, J.E. (1951 and 1955), The Theory of International Economic Policy, Vols. I & III, 

Duckwoth, London. 

� Mundell, R.A. (1971), Monetary Theory, W.W. Norton, New York. 

� Ohlin, B. (1933), Interregional and International Trade, Harvard University Press, Cambridge, 

Mass. 

10(787) 


M.A. 4 th Sem. 

Paper-410 (Option-iii) Session : 2013-14 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 

ECONOMICS OF AGRICULTURE-II 






PREAMBLE 

The Objective of this course is to provide a detailed treatment of issues in agricultural economics to 

those intending to specialize in this area. Its objective is to familiarize students with policy issues 

that are relevant to Indian agricultural economics and enable them to analyze the issues, using basic 

micro-economic concepts. 

Unit I 

Agricultural Production and Productivity 

Agricultural Production- Stock and Flow Resources, Production Relationships, Resource use and 

efficiency; Production Functions analyses in agriculture; Factor – Factor Relationships – Isoquant 

and Iso Cost Line, Optimum Combination; Product – Product Relationships – Joint Products, 

Competitive Products, Supplementary Products and Antagonistic Products; Diversification of 

Agricultural Production – Horticulture and Floriculture, Mushroom Cultivation and Processing of 

Agricultural Products. 

Unit II 

Rural Finance 

Role of capital and rural credit; Organized and unorganized capital market; Rural savings and 

capital formation; Characteristics and Sources of rural credit- Institutional and non institutional; 

Reorganization of rural credit- cooperatives, commercial banks, regional rural banks; Role of the 

NABARD. 

Unit III 

Models of Agricultural Development: 

Schultz’s Transformation of Traditional Agriculture, 

Mellor’s Model of Agricultural Development, 

Boserup Model of Agriculture Development, 

Hayami - Ruttan Induced Innovation Hypothesis. 

Unit IV 

Agriculture and External Sector 

Issues in liberalization of domestic and international trade in agriculture - nature and features of 

agri-business; Globalization of Indian economy; Impact of World Trade Organization on Indian 

10(788) 


agriculture; Agriculture and Environment; Food Security and International Trade – Concept, 

Threat, Indicators and Mechanism to Food Security. 


� Black, J.D. (1945), Introduction to Economics of Agriculture. MacMillan, New York. 

� Bruce L., Gardener and Gordon C., Rausser (Eds.), Handbook of Agricultural Economics, 

Vol.1A, Agricultural Production, Amersterdam, Elsevier Science B.V. 

� Bruce L., Gardener and Gordon C., Rausser (Eds.), Handbook of Agricultural Economics, Vol. 

2B, Agricultural and Policy, Amsterdam, Elsevier Science B.V. 

� Bruce L., Gardener and Gordon C., Rausser (Eds.),Handbook of Agricultural Economics, 

Vol.1B, Marketing, Distribution and Consumption, Amersterdam, Elsevier Science B.V. 

� Bruce, L., Gardener and Gordon C., Rausser (Eds.), Handbook of Agricultural Economics, 

Vol.2A, Agricultural and Its External Linkages, Amsterdam, Elsevier Science B.V. 

� Cohen, R.L. (1948), Economics of Agriculture, Nishet, London. 

� Dantwala, M.L. et. al (1991), Indian Agricultural Development Since Independence, Oxford & 

IBH, New Delhi. 

� Drummond H. Evan and Goodwin W. John (2006), Agricultural Economics, Pearson 

Education, New Delhi. 

� Eicher Carl and Lawrence Witt (Eds.) (1964), Agriculture in Economic Development, New 

York, McGraw Hill Co. 

� Forster, G.W. and Leoger, M.C. (1959), Elements of Agricultural Economics, Prentice Hall. 

� Ghatak Subrata and Ken Ingersent, Agriculture and Economic Development, Harvestor Press 

Ltd., London. 

� Goodwin, H.G. (1977), Economics of Agriculture, Reston Publiching Co. 

� Gulati, A. and T. Kelly (1999), Trade Liberalisation and Indian Agriculture, Oxford University 


� Halcrow, H.G.(1981), Economics of Agriculture, McGraw Hill International Book Agency. 

� Meier, G.M. (1995), Leading Issues in Economic Development, Oxford University Press, New 

Delhi. 

� Metcaff, D. (1969), Economics of Agriculture, Harmondsworth, Penguin Books. 

� Nicholls, W.H. (1964), “The Place of Agriculture in Economics Development”, in Eicher, C. 

and Witt, L.(ed) 1964, Agriculture in Economics Development, Vora & Co. Publishers Pvt. Ltd, 

Bombay. 

� Ojala, E.M.(1950), Agriculture and Economic Progress, Oxford University Press, London. 

� Rao, C.H. Hanumantha (1994), Agricultural Growth, Rural Poverty and Environmental 

Degradation in India, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 

� Rudra, A. (1982), Indian Agricultural Economics: Myths and Reality, Allied Publishers, New 

Delhi. 

� Southworth Herman and Bruce Johnston (eds.) (1968), Agricultural Development and 

Economic Growth, Cornell University Press, New York. 

� Taylor, H.C.(1949), Outlines of Agriculture Economics, MacMillan, New York. 


� Bilgrami, S.A.R. (1996), Agricultural Economics, Himalaya Publishing House, New Delhi. 

� Desai, Vasant (1991), Fundamentals of Rural Development (A Systems Approach), Himalaya 


� Harque, T. and A.S. Sirohi (1986), Agrarian Reforms and Institutional Changes in India, 

Concept Publishing Company, Delhi. 

10(789) 


� Kumar, Rajesh (2010), India’s Export in Processed Food Products : Status & Potential, an 

Unpublished Thesis of the Department of Economics, K.U.K. 

� Lekhi, R.K. and Singh, Joginder (2010), Agricultural Economics, Kalyani Publishers, New 

Delhi. 

� Rana, Sarita (2002), Global Marketing in Floricultural Products : Challenges and Prospects for 

India, an Unpublished Thesis of the Department of Economics, K.U.K. 

� Rani, Vandna (2004), Economics of Mushroom Cultivation in Haryana, an Unpublished Thesis 

of the Department of Economics, K.U.K. 

� Sadhu and Singh (1991), Agricultural Problems in India, Himalaya Publishing House, New 

Delhi. 

� Sadhu and Singh (2002), Fundamentals of Agricultural Economics, Himalaya Publishing 


� Singh, Kuldeep (2006), “Indian Agriculture Trade in Pre and Post WTO Regime : A 

Comparative Study”, K.U.R.J.( Arts & Humanities), Vol. XL, Jan- Dec., 2006. 

� Soni, R.N. (1995), Leading Issues in Agricultural Economics, Arihant Press, Jalandhar. 

� Sundaram I. Satya (2009), Rural Development, Himalaya Publishing House , New Delhi. 


Paper-410 (Option-iv) 

WELFARE ECONOMICS – II 

10(790) 


Time:3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 






PREAMBLE 

Evaluation of normative significance of economic events and issues forms the framework of 

welfare economics. Many applied branches of economics such as public finance, cost-benefit 

analysis, industrial economics and economics of government policy use welfare economic criteria 

as their foundation. The paper is divided into three modules — Pre-Paretian Welfare Economics, 

Paretian Welfare Economics and Later Developments 

Unit-I 

Infinite number of non-comparable optima vs. unique social optimum; Compensation criteria – 

Contributions of Barone, Kaldor and Hicks. 

Unit-II 

The Scitovsky double criterion; Concept of Community indifference map; Samuelson’s utility 

possibility curve; Value judgements and welfare economics; Bergson’s social welfare function, 

Arrow’s impossibility theorem. 


Unit-III 

Divergence between private and social costs; Problems of non-market interdependence; 

Externalities of production and consumption; External economies and diseconomies; Problem of 

public goods; Pigovian welfare economics. 

Unit-IV 

Second-best optima; Marginal cost pricing; Cost-benefit analysis; Interdependent utilities; 

Attempts of develop dynamic welfare analysis. 


� Baumo, W.J. (ed.) (2001), Welfare Economics, Edward Elgar Publishing Ltd., U.K. 

� Broadway, R.W. and N. Bruce (1984), Welfare Economics, Basil Blackwell, Oxford. 

� Pigou, A.C. (1962), The Economics of Welfare (4 th Edition), Macmillan. 


� Hicks, J.R. (1956), A Revision of Demand Theory, Clarendon Press, Oxford. 

� Little, I.M.D. (1949), The Foundations of Welfare Economics, Oxford Economic Papers, Vol. 

1. 


Paper-410 (Option-v) 

INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS - II 

10(791) 


Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 




(iii) For the remaining four questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2questions from each of 


PREAMBLE 

In the contemporary world with globalization and liberalization more and more attention is being 

given to industry. This course intends to provide knowledge to the students on the basic issues such 

as productivity, efficiency, capacity utilization and debates involved in the industrial development 

of India. The objective is to provide a thorough knowledge about the economics of industry in a 

cogent and analytical manner, particularly in the Indian context. 

Unit-I 

Industrial Policy in India – evolution and paradigm shift; Recent trends in Indian industrial growth; 

National manufacturing Policy 2011; MNCs, transfer of technology and issues related with TRIMS. 

Unit-II 

Regional industrial growth in India; Industrial economic concentration and remedial measures; 

MRTP and Competition Act, 2002. 


Development of Cottage and Small Scale industries; Recent Policy Measures. 

Unit-III 

Industrial Finance; Sources of short term and long term finance; Industrial Financial Institutions: 

Role and functioning in India; Corporate securities; Ownership and creditor-ship securities. 

Unit-IV 

Structure of Industrial labour; Globalization and labour ; Gender Dimensions of industrial labour; 

Industrial legislation – Industrial Disputes Act ,1947 and Factories Act, 1948 . Industrial relations – 

Worker’s participation in management and Collective Bargaining; Exit policy and safety nets; 

Second National Commission on Labour Report. 


� Ahluwalia, I.J. (1985), Industrial Growth in India, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 

� Arun Monappa- Industrial Relations,Tata Mcgraw Hill,1997. 

� Barthwal, R.R. (2000), Industrial Economics, Wiley Eastern Ltd. New Delhi. 

� Cherunilam, F. (1994), Industrial Economics: Indian Perspective (3 rd Edition), Himalaya 


� C.S. Venkata Ratnam-Industrial Relations ,Oxford University Press,2008. 

� Chadha, V. and G.S. Bhalla (1999), Industrial Development in India: The Post 

Reform Scene, Kalyanai Publishers, New Delhi. 

� Desai, B. (1999), Industrial Economy in India (3 rd Edition), Himalaya Publishing House, 

Mumbai. 

� Hajela, F.D. (1998), Labour Restructuring in India : A Critique of the New Economic Policies, 

Commonwealth Publishers, New Delhi. 

� Government of India, Economic Survey (Annual). 

� Kuchhal, S.C. (1980), Industrial Economy of India (5 th Edition), Chaitanya Publishing House, 

Allahbad. 

� Mishra &Puri-Indian Economy, Himalaya Publishing House ,2008 

� Reserve Bank of India, Report on Currency and Finance (Annual). 

� Ratna Sen-Industrial Relations in India Shifting Paradigms,Mcmillan,2005 

� Website of Labour Ministry (Government of India) 


� Bains, J.S. (1996), Industrial Organization, Cheltanham, U.K. 

� Bagchi, A. and M. Banerjee (Eds.) (1979), Change and Choice in Indian Industry, Bagchi 

Publications, Calcutta. 


Indian Economy, Himalaya Publishing, Bombay. 

� Chakravarty, S. (1987), Development Planning: The Indian Experience, Oxford University 


� Chandra, Prasanna (1995), Projects: Planning Analysis, Selection, Implementation and Review, 

Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi 

� Harndeen, J.B. (1975), The Economics of Corporate Economy, Dunellen Publishers, New 

York. 

� Joshi, V. and I.M.D. Little (1999), India: Macro Economics and Political Economy: 1964-1991, 


� Jalan, B. (1996), India’s Economy Policy, Viking, New Delhi. 

10(792) 


� Kemien, M.T. and N.L. Schwartz (1982), Market Structure and Innovation, Cambridge 


� Kelkar, V.L. and V.V. Bhnoji Rao (Eds.) (1996), India Development Policy Imperatives, Tata 


� Mamoria and Mamoria (2000), Dynamics of Industrial Relations in India (15 th Edition), 

Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai. 

� Sen, R. and B. Chatterjee (2001), Indian Economy: Agenda for the 21 st Century (Essays in 

honour of Professor P.R. Brahmananda), Deep and Deep Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. 


Paper-410 (Option-vi) 

FINANCIAL MARKETS AND INSTITUTIONS-II 

10(793) 

Session:2013-14 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 






Unit-I 

Insurance Market 

Introduction, Definition and Principles of Insurance; Kinds of Insurance-Life Insurance and 

General Insurance; Rationale for opening up of the Insurance to Private Sector; Growth and 

Development of Insurance business with special reference to India; Emerging Scenario in 

Insurance Sector. 

Unit-II 

Foreign Exchange Market 

Structure and Participants; Foreign Exchange Rate; Fixed and Floating Exchange Rates; 

Forward Exchange Market and its Functions; International Liquidity; International 

Banking; International Monetary and Payment System. 

Unit-III 

Financial Institutions 

Merchant Bankers; Mutual Funds; Credit Unions; Savings and Loan Associations; Pension 

Funds; Finance Company; Investment Trusts; Common Trusts Fund. 

Unit-IV 

Financial Institutions in India 

Working and Organisation of different Financial Institutions in India: IFCI, ICICI, IDBI, UTI and 

LIC. International aspects of financial institutions. 



� Bhole, L.M. (1999), Financial Institutions and Markets, Tata McGraw Hill Company Ltd., New 

Delhi. 

� Bhole, L.M. (2000), Indian Financial System, Chugh Publications, Allahbad. 

� Johnson, H.J. (1993), Financial Institutions and Markets, McGraw Hill, New York. 

� Machiraju, M.R. (1999), Indian Financial Systems, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi. 

� Ohlson, J.A. (1987), The Theory of Financial Markets and Institutions, North Holland, 

Amsterdam. 

� Prasad, K.N. (2001), Development of India’s Financial System, Sarup & Sons, New Delhi. 

� Smith, P.F. (1978), Money and Financial Intermediation: The Theory and Structure of Financial 

System, Prentice Hall, Englewood-Cliffs, New Jersey. 


� Chandra, P. (1997), Financial Markets, (4 th Edition), Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

� Machiraju, H.R. (1997), International Financial Markets in India, Wheeler Publishing, 

Allahbad. 

� Fenstermaker, J.V. (1969), Readings in Financial Markets and Institutions, Appleton, New 

York. 

� Gupta, S.B. (1983), Monetary Economics, S. Chand & Company, New Delhi. 

� Bhatt, R.S. (1996), Unit Trust of India and Mutual Funds: A Study, UTI Institute of Capital 

Markets, Mumbai. 

� Sahadevan, K.G. and M.T. Thiripalraju (1997), Mutual Funds, Prentice Hall of India, New 

Delhi. 

� Goss, B.A. and B.S. Yamey (1978), The Economics of Futures Trading, Macmillan, 

London. 

� Gupta, L.C. (Ed.) (1999), India’s Financial Markets and Institutions, Society for Capital 

Research and Development, Delhi. 

� Crocker, A. (1982), International Money; Issues and Analysis, The English Language Book 

Society, Nelson, London. 

� Niehans, J. (1994), International Monetary Economics, John Hopkins University Press, New 

York. 

� Attri, V. N. and Verma Neera (1995), Financial Liberalization and Economic Growth in 

Developing Countries with special reference to India, Unpublished UGC, Major Project. 


Paper- 410 (Option-vii) 


Time: 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 

ECONOMICS OF GENDER AND DEVELOPMENT - II 




10(794) 




PREAMBLE 

Gender biases in societal practices and development policies have resulted in persistent gender 

inequalities. It is increasingly being realized that mitigating such inequalities and enhancing 

women’s capabilities and entitlements are crucial to the overall development of the country. This 

course “Economics of Gender and Development” would provide students an understanding of the 

nature of the economic role of women and their contribution to the national economy on the basis 

of a scientific and non-sexist analysis. The modules incorporated in this course provide an analysis 

of issues at the theoretical level and also with regard to specificity of issues prevailing in the Indian 

context. 

Unit-I 

Wage differential in female activities; Determinants of wage differentials: Gender, education, skill, 

productivity, efficiency, opportunity; Structure of wages across regions and economic sectors. 

Unit-II 

Impact of technological development and modernization on women’s work participation in general 

and in various sectors such as agriculture, non-agriculture rural activities, small and cottage 

industries and organized industry . 

Unit-III 

Female activities, ecological and environmental concern: the two way relationship - Role of new 

technologies for helping women – Provision of information and training for simple harvesting of 

economic services. 

Unit-IV 

Review of legislation for women’s entitlements, protection of property rights, social security. 

Gender and development indices; Mainstreaming gender into development policies; Genderplanning 

techniques; Gender sensitive governance. 


� Boserup E. (1970), Women’s Role in Economic Development, George Allen and Unwin, 

London. 

� Desai, N. and M.K. Raj (Eds.) (1979), Women and Society in India, Research Center for 

Women Studies, SNDT University, Bombay 

� Government of India (1974), Towards Equality – Report of the Committee on the Status of 

Women in India, Department of Social Welfare, Ministry of Education and Social Welfare, 

New Delhi. 

� Krishnaraj, M., R.M. Sudarshan and A. Shariff (1999), Gender, Population and Development, 


� Seth, M. (2000), Women and Development: The Indian Experience, Sage Publications, New 

Delhi. 

� Srinivasan K. and A. Shariff (1998), India: Towards Population and Development Goals, 


� Venkateswaran S. (1995), Environment, Development and the Gender Gap, Sage Publications, 

New Delhi. 

� Wazir, R. (2000), The Gender Gap in Basic Education: NGOs as Change Agents, Sage 


10(795) 


M.A. (Previous) IVth Sem. 

Paper- 410 (VIII) Opt. Session : 2013-14 

Time : 3 Hrs. 


External : 80 

Internal : 20 

ECONOMIC HISTORY OF ASEAN, CHINA, SOUTH KOREA AND JAPAN- II 






Unit – I 

Contemporary Economic History: East ASEAN Economic Development, Globalization and 

Economic Development in East Asia; Dictatorship and Democratizations in South East Asia, South 

East Asia globalization and Social Change. 

Unit – II 

Economic Reforms and Their impact on: Agriculture, Industry and Service Sector in ASEAN, 

China, South Korea and Japan.Trade Development Strategies: Export Promotion versus Import 

Substitution in ASEAN, China, South Korea and Japan. 

Unit – III 

Trade, Investment and Monetary Cooperation: Forging an integrated Asia-Pacific Region. Welfare 

Gains from Regional Economic Integration in Asia: ASEAN and China, South Korea and Japan. 

Monetary and Financial Cooperation in Asia; Reducing Global Imbalances. 

Unit – IV 

Regional Cooperation for Energy Security: Asian Energy outlook to 2020: Trends; Regional 

Cooperation for Asian Energy Security; Climate change and Asian Economic Development; India’s 

role in Asian Economic Community; East Asia Summit, European Union, NAFTA, APEC, and 

their impact on Asian Economic Integration. 

Reading List: 

� ‘Reshaping the Asia Pacific Economic Order”, by Hadi Soesastro, Christopher Charles 

Findley, 2006, 286 P. 

� “Institutional Balancing in the Asia Pacific: economic” by Kaithe 2009, P. 209. 

� “China and World Economy” by Zhouggno she hui ke Xue Yawn shi jie juia ji, 2002. 

� “Strategic consequences of India’s Economic Essays” by Sanjay Baru published in 2006. 

� “A New look at the US-China-Japan Triangle” Toward Building a Stable Framework” 

Asian Perspectives, Vol. 27, No3, 2003, PP 177-219 by Yoshihide Soeya, Jianweiwang and 

David A Weleh. 

� “The Economic History of Korea” by Myung soo Cha, Yeunguam University. EH. Net 

Encyclopedia. 

� “Economic Growth and Democratization in North East Asia, Part I & II. 

10(796) 


� “The Rise of China and its effectson Taiwan, Japan and South Korea” US Policy choices, 

Jan. 2006 Dick K Nanto. 

� “America and Japan Approach a Rising China” by Dan Blumenthal, Dec. 2006. 

� “Look East: India’s Economic ties with Japan, South Korea, China, 3 Dec. 2009. 

� “China, Japan and South Korea to consider Free trade Pact” Oct. 11, 2009 MYT. 

10(797) 


SYLLABUS OF M.A. (PREVIOUS) POLITICAL SCIENCE (SEMESTER 

SYSTEM) SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS AND COURSES OF 

READING (w.e.f. 2012-13) 

M.A. Political Science Course shall be a two years Degree Course of 2000 

Marks consisting of four Semesters. The candidate shall take 5 Papers in each 

Semester, i.e. 20 Papers in the full Course. Each Paper will carry 100 marks 

out of which 20 marks shall be earmarked for 

Internal Assessment. 

M.A. (Previous) Political Science 1 st & 2 nd Semester: 

There shall be 4 Core Papers and 1 Optional Paper. The candidate will opt for 

1 Optional Paper out of the given list of 3 Optional Papers. 

M.A. (Final) Political Science 3 rd & 4 th Semester: 

There shall be 2 Core Papers and 3 Optional Papers. The Candidate will opt 

for 3 Papers from within the given 4 Groups of Papers. 

Note:- 

The Candidate opting for a particular Optional Paper/Group in the Odd 

Semester shall take the same Optional Paper/Group in the Even Semester. The 

choice of the Optional Papers in M.A. Course shall be determined on the basis 

of merit. However, the Department shall decide the number of Optional papers 

to be offered in the Department in a particular year. 

M.A. (Previous), Semester-I Political Science 

Scheme of Examination w.e.f. 2012-13 

Paper No. Nomenclature Max.Marks Time 

Paper:-I Western Political Thought 100 3 Hours 

Paper:-II Indian Government and Politics-I 100 3 Hours 

Paper:-III International Relations-Theory 100 3 Hours 

Paper:-IV Public Administration-I 100 3 Hours 

Paper-V One paper to be chosen from any of the following (the corresponding option has 

to be taken in Semester-II ) 

Option (i) Research Methodology-I 100 3 Hours 

Option (ii) Political Geography 100 3 Hours 

Option (iii) Political Leadership-Special Reference to Nation 

Building Process 

100 3 Hours 

10(798) 


Syllabus and Courses of Reading 

Paper: I Western Political Thought 

10(799) 


Internal Marks :20 

External Marks : 80 

Time: 3 Hours 

Note: The question paper will consist of nine questions. The candidate shall attempt five 

questions in all. Question No. 1 will be compulsory. The compulsory question will 

consist of four short answer type conceptual/thematic questions of equal marks (i.e. 

4 marks each) spread over the whole syllabus. The Candidate shall attempt four 

more questions selecting at least one from each Unit. Each question will carry 16 

marks. 

Unit-I Plato, Aristotle, Machiavelli. 

Unit-II Hobbes, Locke, Rousseau. 

Unit-III Bentham, J.S. Mill. 

Unit-IV Hegel, Marx. 

Readings : 

1. Sir E. Barker, The Political Thought of Plato and Aristotle, New York, Dover Publications, 

1959. 

2. Sir E. Barker, Greek Political Theory: Plato and His Predecessors, New Delhi, B.I. 


3. Sir E. Barker, The Politics of Aristotle,(Translated with Introduction, Notes and Appendix), 

Oxford, Oxford University Press, 1995. 

4. R.N. Berki, The History of Political Thought: A Short Introduction, London, Dent., 1977. 

5. J.H. Burns (ed.), The Cambridge History of Political Thought, 1450-1700, Cambridge, 

Cambridge University Press, 1991. 

6. H. Butterfield, The Statecraft of Machiavelli, New York, Collier, 1962. 

7. A. Cobban, Rousseau and the Modern State, London, Unwin University Books, 1964. 

8. J. Coleman, A History of Political Thought: From Ancient Greece to Early Christianity, 

London, Blackwell, 2000. 

9. W.L. Davidson, Political Thought in England: The Utilitarians from Bentham, to Mill, 

Oxford, Oxford University Press, 1957. 

10. M.B. Foster, W.T. Jones and L.W. Lancaster, Masters of Political Thought, 3 Vols., 

London, George G. Harrap and Co. Ltd., 1959. 

11. R.G. Gettel, History of Political Thought, New York, Novell. & Co., 1924. 

12. I.W. Hampsher-Monk, Modern Political Thought from Hobbes to Marx. Oxford, Basil 

Blackwell, 1992. 

13. H.J. Laski, Political Thought from Locke to Bentham, Oxford, Oxford University Press, 

1920. 

14. S. Mukerjee and S. Ramaswamy, A History of Political Thought: Plato to Marx, New 

Delhi, Prentice Hall, 1999. 

15. G.H. Sabine, History of Political Theory, 4th edn., Revised by T.L. Thorson, New Delhi, 

Oxford and IBH, 1973. 


16. Shefali Jha, Western Political Though, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

17. Bhargava and Acharya, Political Theory: An Introduction, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012.18. 

Bhargava and Acharya/ Choubey, Rajniti Siddhant: Ek Parichay, Pearson, New 

Delhi, 2012. 

19. Kymlicka/Choubey, Samkaleen Rajniti-Darshan: Ek Parichay, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

20. Abbas, Political Theory, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

Paper: II Indian Government and Politics-I 

10(800) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I Historical Background, Fundamental Rights & Duties, Directive Principles of State 

Policy, Constitutional Amendments. 

Unit-II Union and State Government- President, Prime Minister, Cabinet and Council of 

Ministers. 

State- Governor, Chief Minister. 

Union Parliament and State Vidhan Sabha. 

Local Government- Rural and Urban. 

Unit-III Judiciary- Supreme Court and the High Courts. 

Judicial Review, Judicial Activism including Public Interest Litigation Cases, 

Judicial Reforms. 

Unit-IV Indian Federalism- Theory and Practice. 

Readings: 

Demands for State Autonomy and Separatist Movements. 

Political and Social Dimensions- Political Elites, Civil Society and Secularism. 

1. G. Austin, The Indian Constitution: Corner Stone of a Nation, Oxford, Oxford University 

Press, 1966. 

2. P. Bardhan, The Political Economy of Development in India, London, Oxford, Blackwell, 

1984. 

3. D.D.Basu, An Introduction to the Constitution of India, New Delhi, Prentice Hall, 1994. 

4. C.P. Bhambri, The Indian State: Fifty Years, New Delhi, Shipra, 1999. 

5. K.R. Bombwall, The Foundations of Indian Federalism, Bombay, Asia Publishing House, 

1967. 


6. P.R. Brass, Politics of India Since Independence, 2nd edn., Cambridge, Cambridge 


7. N. Chandhoke, Beyond Secularism: The Rights of Religious Minorities, Delhi, Oxford 


8. B.L. Fadia, State Politics in India, 2 Vols., New Delhi, Radiant, 1984. 

9. A.Kaushik, Democratic Concerns: The Indian Experience, Jaipur, Alekh, 1994. 

10. S.Kaviraj, Politics in India, Delhi, Oxford University Press, 1998. 

11. A.Kohli (ed.), India’s Democracy: An Analysis of Changing State-Society Relations, 

Princeton NJ, Princeton University Press, 1988. 

12. A.Kohli, (ed), The Success of India’s Democracy, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 

2001. 

13. R.Kothari, Caste and Politics in India, New Delhi, Orient Longman, 1970. 

14. R. Kothari, Politics in India, New Delhi, Orient Longman, 1970. 

15. W.H. Morris Jones, Government and Politics in India, Delhi, BI Publications, 1974. 

16 M.V. Pylee, An Introduction to the Constitution of India, New Delhi, Vikas, 1998. 

17. Abbas, Indian Government and Politics, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

18. Neera Chandoke, Contemporary India, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

19. Pravin Kumar Jha, Indian Politics in Comparative Perspective, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

20. Pravin Kumar Jha, Tulnatamak Paripekchay Mein Bhartiya Rajniti, Pearson, New Delhi, 

2012. 

Paper-III International Relations-Theory 

10(801) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I Nature, Scope and Development of International Relations, Autonomy Debate. 

Types of International Systems. 

Concept of Power- Tangible and Intangible Elements, limitation of Power. 

Unit-II Theories of International Relations-Realist, Neo-Realist/Idealist,/Neo-Idealist, 

System. 

Marxist, Game Theory, World System. 

Unit-III Balance of Power, Collective Security and Deterrence Doctrine. 

Disarmament Theories & History. 


International Security in Post-Cold War Era-Concept and Approaches 

International Trade Regimes and Trade Strategies. 

Unit-IV Foreign Policy-Nature, Types, Decision Making and Bargaining Theory. 

Readings : 

Determinants: External and Internal. 

Instruments- Ideology, National Interest, Diplomacy. 

1. John, Baylis and Steve Smith, Globalization of World Politics, Oxford, London, 1997. 

2. P.Allan and K. Goldman (eds.), The End of the Cold War, Dordrecht, Martinus Nijhoff, 

1992. 

3. D.G. Brennan (ed.), Arms Control, Disarmament and National Security, New York, George 

Braziller, 1961. 

4. S. Burchill et. al., Theories of International Relations, Hamsphire, Macmillan, 2001. 

5. I.Claude, Power and International Relations, New York, Random House, 1962. 

6. A.A. Couloumbis and J.H. Wolf, Introduction to International Relations: Power and 

Justice, New York, Praegar, 1989. 

7. W. Epstein, The Last Chance: Nuclear Proliferation and Arms Control, New York, The 

Free Press, 1976. 

8. K.W. Deutsch, The Analysis of International Relations, New Delhi, Prentice Hall, 1989. 

9. P.Gilbert, Terrorism Security and Nationality, London and New York, Routledge, 1995. 

10. A.J.R. Groom and M. Lights (eds.), Contemporary International Relations: A Guide to 

Theory, London, Printer, 1993. 

11. F. Halliday, Revolution and World Politics: The Rise and Fall of the Sixth Great Power, 

Basingstoke, Macmillan, 1999. 

12. F. Halliday, Rethinking International Relations, Basingstoke, Macmillan, 1994. 

13. R.O. Keohane (ed.), Neo-realism and Its Critics, New York, Columbia University Press, 

1986. 

14. H.J. Morgenthau, Politics Among Nations, 6th Edition, revised by K.W., Thompson, New 

York, Alfred Knopf, 1985. 

15. M.S. Rajan, Non-Alignment and the Non-Alignment Movement in the Present World Order, 

Delhi, Konark, 1994. 

16. J.N. Rosenau and K. Knorr (eds.), Contending Approaches to International Politics, 


17. M.P. Sullivan, Theories of International Politics: Enduring Paradigm in a Changing World, 

Hamsphire, Macmillan, 2001. 

18. S.P. Verma, International System and the Third World, New Delhi, Vikas, 1988. 

19. Ajay Kumar, Antarrashtriya Sambandhon Ke Siddhant, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

20. Chimni et al, International Relations, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

21. Sanju Gupta, An Introduction to International Relations, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

10(802) 


Paper-IV Public Administration-I 

10(803) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I Meaning, Nature and Scope of Public Administration. 

Public and Private Administration. 

Development of Public Administration as a Discipline; New Public Administration. 

Unit-II Approaches to the Study of Public Administration- Ecological; Rational Decision 

Making, Development Administration and Political Economy, Liberal, Democratic 

and Marxist Frameworks. 

Theories of Organization: Classical, Scientific, Human Relations. 

Unit-III Principles of Organization- Line and Staff, Unity of Command, Hierarchy, Span of 

Control, Centralization and Decentralization. 

Types of Organization -Formal and Informal 

Forms of Organization: Department, Public Corporation and Board. 

Unit-IV Chief Executive: Types, Functions and Roles. 

Readings : 

Control Over Administration- Judicial and Legislative. 

Impact of Liberalization and Information Technology on Public Administration. 

1. J.E. Anderson, Public Policy Making, Boston, Houghton, Miffin, 1990. 

2. P.H., Appleby, Public Administration for a Welfare State, Bombay, Asia Publishing House, 

1961. 

3. A. Avasthi and S.N. Maheshwari, Public Administration, Agra, Laxmi N. Aggarwal, 1996. 

4. P.R. Dubashi, Recent Trends in Public Administration, Delhi, Kaveri Books, 1995. 

5. E.N. Gladden, The Essential of Public Administration, London, Staples Press, 1958. 

6. J. La Palombara and M. Weiner (eds.), Bureaucracy and Political Development, Princeton 

NJ, Princeton University Press, 1966. 

7. S.R. Maheshwari, Administrative Theories, New Delhi, Allied, 1994. 

8. F.A. Nigro and L.S. Nigro, Modern Public Administration, New York, Harper and Row, 

1984. 


9. L. Peters, “Downsizing the Civil Service in Developing Countries: Golden Handshake or 

Smiling Farewells?” Public Administration and Development, 18(4), Oct. 1998, pp. 381-86. 

10. D.C. Pitt, and B.C. Smith (eds.), The Computer Revolution: The Impact of Information 

Technology on Government Brighton, Wheatsheaf Books, 1984. 

11. R. Presthus, Public Administration, New York, Ronald, 1975. 

12. D. Waldo (ed.), Ideas and Issues in Public Administration: A Book of Readings, New York, 

McGraw Hill, 1953. 

13. Hoshiar Singh and Pradeep Sachdeva, Public Administration, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

14. Hoshiar Singh and Pradeep Sachdeva, Lok Prashasan, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

Paper-V Research Methodology-I (Option-i) 

10(804) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I Social Research- Its Nature and Types. 

Traditional Approaches- Philosophical, Institutional, Marxian and Gandhian. 

Behavioural Revolution in Political Science and its Criticism. 

Post-Behaviouralism 

Unit-II Models, Paradigms and Theories- Conceptual and Theoretical Models. 

Meaning and Types of Paradigms. 

Theory-Meaning, Goals and Types. 

Construction of a Theory and Relationship Between Theory and Research. 

Unit-III Scientific Method-Basic Assumptions, Steps and Limitation. Scientific Study of 


Historical Method, Comparative Method, Analytical Method and Psycho-Analysis. 

Methods of Popper and Kuhn. 

Unit-IV The Building Blocs of Social Scientific Research-Hypotheses, Concepts and 

Variables, Generalization and Law. 

Readings : 

1. H.N. Blalock, An Introduction to Social Research, Englewood Cliffs NJ, Prentice Hall, 

1970. 

2. J. Blondel, Thinking Politically, London, Wildwood House, 1976. 


3. A. Bryman, Quantity and Quality in Social Research, London, Unwin Hyman, 1988. 

4. A.F. Chalmers, Science and Its Fabrication, Milton Keynes, Open University Press, 1990. 

5. J. Galtung, Theory and Methods of Social Research, New York, Columbia University Press, 

1987. 

6. A.Giddens, Profiles and Critiques in Social Theory, London Macmillan, 1982. 

7. W.J. Goode and P.K. Hatt, Methods of Social Research, New York, McGraw Hill, 1952. 

8. A.C. Isaak, Scope and Methods of Political Science, Homewood Illinois, Dorsey Press, 

1985. 

9. J.B. Johnson and R.A. Joslyn, Political Science Research Methods, Washington DC, C.Q. 

Press, 1986. 

10. F.N. Kerlinger, Behavioural Research, New York, Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1979. 

11. T.Kuhn, The Structure of Scientific Revolution, Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1970. 

12. R. K. Merton (ed.), Social Theory and Social Structure, New York, The Free Press, 1957. 

13. D. Miller (ed.), Pocket Popper, London, Fontana, 1997. 

14. Sir, K.R. Popper, The Logic of Scientific Discovery, London, Hutchinson, 1959. 

15. Sir, K. R. Popper, Conjectures and Refutations: The Growth of Scientific Knowledge, 

London, Rougtledge and Kegan Paul, 1963. 

16. Sir, K.R. Popper, The Poverty of Historicism, London, Reoutledge, 1991. 

17. P.V. Young, Scientific Social Surveys and Research. 

18. Robert A. Dahl, Modern Political Analysis, Englewood Cliffs, NJ Prentice Hall, 1963. 

Paper-V Political Geography (Option-ii) 

10(805) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I History & Development, Nature and Scope of Political Geography. 

Relation with other Social Sciences. 

Geopolitical and Geostrategic Structure of the World. 

International and Regional Dimension. 

Unit-II Models of World Structure and their Relevance. 

Boundary Studies-Type, Importance and Legal Status, 

Boundaries as Barriers- Case Studies. 

Unit-III Global Strategic Views-Mahan; Mackinder; Spykman, Hooson. 

Global Strategy in Air and Ocean Age. 

Unit-IV Approaches- Traditional, Functional and Generic 


Readings : 

Unified field Theory. 

Clash of Civilizations- Huntington's Scheme of World Divisions. 

1. Charles C. Colby, ed., Geographic Aspects of International Relations. 

2. J.P. Cole, Geography and World Affairs. 

3. W. Gordon East and A.E. Moodie, eds., The Changing World: Studies in Political 

Geography. 

4. Pascal Girot and Eleonore Kofman, eds., International Geopolitical Analysis. 

5. C.S. Gray, The Geopolitics of the Nuclear Era: Hertland, Rimland and the Technological 

Revolution. 

6. W.A. ZDouglass Jackson, Politics and Geographic Relationships. 

7. R. Paddison, The Fragmented State: The Political Geography of Power. 

8. W.H. Parker, Mackiner: Geography as an Aid to Statecraft. 

9. J.R.V. Prescott, Political Geography of the Oceans. 

10. B.M. Russett, International Regions and International System. 

11. R. Strausz-Hupe, Geopolitics. 

12. B.L. Sukhwal, Modern Political Geography, Sterling Publishers, New Delhi, 1968. 

13. Teter Taylor, Political Geography, Longmen, London, 1985. 

14. Charies A. Fisher, Essays in Political Geography, Methuen, London, 1968. 

15. N.J. G. Pounds, Political Geography, McGraw Hill, New York, 1972. 

16. A.E. Moddie, Geography Behind Politics, Hutchnison, London, Latest Edition. 

17. J.R.V. Prescott, The Geography of Frontiers and Boundaries Aldine, Chicago. 

18. R.D. Dikshit, Political Geography: A Contemporary Perspective, Tata McGraw Hill, New 

Delhi, 1996. 

19. R.D. Dikshit, Political Geography: A Century of Process, Sage, New Delhi, 1999. 

Paper-V Political Leadership-Special Reference to India (Option-iii) 

10(806) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I Study of Political Leadership-A Comparativist Perspective: Classical and Elite 

Views. 

Psychological, Sociological and Political Approaches. 

Leadership- Types, Roles, Style, Personality Traits, Functions, Performance. 

Unit-II Issues and Problems of Recruitment and Situational Factors. 

Issues and Problems of Socialization and Socialization Factors. 

Unit-III Typologies of Power and Decision-Making, and Executive Authority. 


Unit-IV Political Leadership and Nation-Building in India: Local, Regional and National 

Levels. 

Readings : 

1. S.P. Aiyar and R. Srinivasan, eds., Studies in Indian Democracy. 

2. Yogesh Atal, Building a Nation: Essays on India. 

3. Marie C. Carras, Indira Gandhi in the Crucible of Leadership. 

4. Sudipta Kaviraj, "Indira Gandhi and Indian Politics", Economic and Political Weekly", 

September 20-27, 1986. 

5. W.H. Morris-Jones, ed., The Making of Politicians: Studies from Africa and Asia. 

6. W.H. Morris-Jones, Politics: Mainly Indian. 

7. Iqbal Narain, et al., Political Elite in an Indian State. 

8. R.L. Park and I. Tinker, eds., Leadership and Political Institutions in India. 

9 G. Ram Reddy and K. Seshadri, "Studies of Leadership", in ICSSR, Survey of Research in 

Political Science, 

Vol. I. 

10. Arun Shourie, Symptoms of Fascism. 

11. V.M. Sirsikar, "Political Leadership in India", Economic Weekly, March 20-27, 1965. 

12. Janardan Thakur, Indira Gandhi and Her Power Game. 

13. E. Victor Wolfenstein, Personality and Politics. 

M.A. (Previous), Semester-II Political Science 


Paper Nomenclature Max.Marks Time 

Paper:-VI Indian Political Thought 100 3 Hours 

Paper:-VII Indian Government and Politics-II 100 3 Hours 

Paper:-VIII International Relations-Issues 100 3 Hours 

Paper:-IX Public Administration-II 100 3 Hours 

Paper-X One Paper corresponding to Option Number, Opted in Semester-I: 

(Option-i) Research Methodology-II 100 3 Hours 

(Option-ii) Geo-Politics and World Affairs 100 3 Hours 

(Option-iii) Media and Politics 100 3 Hours 


Paper: VI Indian Political Thought 

10(807) 




Time: 3 Hours 







marks. 

Unit-I Manu, Kautilya. 

Unit-II Gokhle, Tilak, Raja Ram Mohan Roy. 

Unit-III Vivekanand, M.N. Roy. 

Unit-IV Gandhi, Nehru, Ambedkar 

Readings : 

1. A.S. Altekar, State and Government in Ancient India, Delhi, Motilal Banarsidass, 1966. 

2. A.Appadorai, Documents on Political Thought in Modern India, 2 Vols., Bombay Oxford 

University Pres, 1970. 

3. S. Ghose, Modern Indian Political Thought, Delhi, Allied, 1984. 

4. U.N. Ghoshal, A History of Indian Political Ideas, London, Oxford University Pres, 1959. 

5. K.P. Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, Calcuta, Butterworth, 1924. 

6. R. P. Kangle, Arthashastra of Kautilya, Delhi, Motilal Bansarsidass, 1965. 

7. M.J. Kanetkar, Tilak and Gandhi: A Comparative Study, Nagpur, Author, 1935. 

8. V.B. Karnik, M.N. Roy: Political Biography, Bombay, Jagriti, 1978. 

9. K. P. Karunakaran, Modern Indian Political Tradition, New Delhi, Allied Publishers, 1962. 

10. V.R. Mehta, Foundations of Indian Political Thought, New Delhi, Manohar, 1992. 

11. T. Pantham, and K. Deustch (eds), Political Thought in Modern India, New Delhi, Sage, 

1986. 

12. B. Parekh and T. Pantham (eds), Political Discourse: Exploration in Indian and Western 

Political Thought, New Delhi, Sage, 1987. 

13. D.P. Roy, Leftists Politics in India: M. N. Roy and the Radical Democratic Party, Calcutta, 

Minerva, 1989. 

14. B.S. Sharma, The Political Philosophy of M.N. Roy, Delhi, National Publishing House, 

1965. 

15. V.P. Verma, Studies in Hindu Political Thought and its Metaphysical Foundations, Delhi, 

Motilal Banarsidass, 1974. 

16. Shefali Jha, Western Political Though, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

17. Bhargava and Acharya, Political Theory: An Introduction, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

18. Bhargava and Acharya/Choubey, Rajniti Siddhant: Ek Parichay, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

19. Kymlicka/Choubey, Samkaleen Rajniti-Darshan: Ek Parichay, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

20. Abbas, Political Theory, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

Paper: VII Indian Government and Politics-II 

10(808) 




Time: 3 Hours 







marks. 

Unit-I Historical Dimensions of Political Culture. 

Dominant Values and Traditions. 

Political Legacies. 

Social Composition and Sociological Foundations. 

Unit-II Party System in India, National and Regional Parties. 

Interest and Pressure Groups, Politics of Defections and 

Anti-Defection Law. Coalition Politics-Bases, Nature and 

Impact on Indian Polity. 

Unit-III Political Economy Dimensions-Politics of Economic Development, 

Planning. 

Elections and Electoral Behavior-Election Commission and 

Electoral Reforms, Role of Media and Public Opinion. 

Politics of Violence. 

Unit-IV Impact of Caste, Religion, Regionalism; Language. 

Readings : 

Weaker Sections -SC, ST and OBC and Gender Issues. 

Problems of Nation Building and Integration. 

Emerging Trends in Indian Polity. 

1. B.Arora and D.V. Verney (eds.), Multiple Indentities in a Single State: Indian Federalism in 

a Comparative Perspective, Delhi, Konark, 1995. 

2. T.R. Andhyarujina, Judicial Activism and Constitutional Democracy in India, Bombay, N. 

M. Tripathi, 1992. 

3. G. Austin, Working on Democratic Constitution: The Indian Experience, Delhi, Oxford 


4. D.D.Basu, An Introduction to the Constitution of India, New Delhi, Prentice Hall, 1994. 

5. U. Baxi and B. Parekh (ed)., Crisis and Change in Contemporary India, New Delhi, Sage, 

1994. 

6. C.P. Bhambri, The Indian State: Fifty Years, New Delhi, Shipra, 1999. 

7. P.R. Brass, Politics of India Since Independence, 2nd edn., Cambridge, Cambridge 


8. P.R. Brass, Language, Religion and Politics in North India, London, Cambridge University 

Press, 1974. 

10(809) 


9. N. Chandhoke, Beyond Secularism: The Rights of Religious Minorities, Delhi, Oxford 


10. F.R. Frankel, and et al. (eds.), Transforming India: Social and Political Dynamics of 

Democracy, New Delhi, Oxford University Press, 2000. 

11. N.G. Jayal (ed.), Democracy in India, Delhi, Oxford University Press, 2001. 

12. A.Kaushik, Democratic Concerns: The Indian Experience, Jaipur, Alekh, 1994. 

13. S.Kaviraj, Politics in India, Delhi, Oxford University Press, 1998. 

14. A.Kohli, (ed), The Success of India’s Democracy, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 

2001. 

15. R.Kothari, (ed.), State and Nation Building, Bombay, Allied Publishers, 1976. 

16. R.Kothari, Caste and Politics in India, New Delhi, Orient Longman, 1970. 


18. R. Kothari, Party System and Election Studies, Bombay, Asia Publishing House, 1967. 

19. A.Kumar (ed.), Nation-Building in India: Culture, Power and Society, New Delhi, Radiant 


20. W.H. Morris Jones, Government and Politics in India, Delhi, BI Publications, 1974. 

21. A.G. Noorani, Constitutional Questions in India: The President, Parliament and the States, 

Delhi, Oxford University Press, 2000. 

22. M.V. Pylee, Constitutional Government in India, Bombay, Asia Publishing House, 1977. 

23. M.V. Pylee, An Introduction to the Constitution of India, New Delhi, Vikas, 1998. 

24. M.P. Singh and H. Roy (ed.), Indian Political System: Structure, Policies, Development, 

New Delhi, Jnanada Prakashan, 1995.. 

25. R. Thakur, The Government & Politics of India, London, Macmillan, 1995. 

26. P. Wallace (ed.), Region and Nation in India, Delhi, Oxford University Press, 1985. 

27. M. Weiner, The Indian Paradox: Essays in Indian Politics, New Delhi, Sage, 1999. 

28. Abbas, Indian Government and Politics, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 


30. Pravin Kumar Jha, Indian Politics in Comparative Perspective, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

31. Pravin Kumar Jha, Tulnatamak Paripekchay Mein Bhartiya Rajniti, Pearson, New Delhi, 

2012. 

Paper-VIII International Relations-Issues 

10(810) 




Time: 3 Hours 







marks. 

Unit-I Global Order-Cold War, Détente, End of Cold War, Emerging World Order, 

Theories of Globalization. 

Unit-II Environment Politics and Conferences, Issues and Challenges; 

Human Rights. Concept, Sources and Problems. 

Gender Issues- Theories, Conferences, Impact of Globalization. 

Unit-III Nation and Nationalism – Debates and Issues, 

Nationalism and Ethnicity. 

International Terrorism. 

Neo-Imperialism and Politics of MNCs. 

Unit-IV Regionalism & Integration. 

Readings : 

Regional Organizations -EU, ASEAN, SAARC. 

New International Economic Order- 

Non Aligned Movement.-Bases, Growth and Relevance 

1. John, Baylis and Steve Smith, Globalization of World Politics, Oxford, London, 1997. 

2. P.Allan and K. Goldman (eds.), The End of the Cold War, Dordrecht, Martinus Nijhoff, 

1992. 

3. S. Burchill et. al., Theories of International Relations, Hamsphire, Macmillan, 2001. 

4. A.A. Couloumbis and J.H. Wolf, Introduction to International Relations: Power and 

Justice, New York, Praegar, 1989. 

5. K.W. Deutsch, The Analysis of International Relations, New Delhi, Prentice Hall, 1989. 

6. A.J.R. Groom and M. Lights (eds.), Contemporary International Relations: A Guide to 

Theory, London, Printer, 1993. 

7. F. Halliday, Revolution and World Politics: The Rise and Fall of the Sixth Great Power, 

Basingstoke, Macmillan, 1999. 

8. F. Halliday, Rethinking International Relations, Basingstoke, Macmillan, 1994. 

9. S.H. Hoffman, Essays in Theory and Politics of International Relations, Boulder Colorado, 

Westview Press, 1989. 

10. R.O. Keohane (ed.), Neo-realism and Its Critics, New York, Columbia University Press, 

1986. 

11. H.J. Morgenthau, Politics Among Nations, 6th Edition, revised by K.W., Thompson, New 

York, Alfred Knopf, 1985. 

12. M.S. Rajan, Non-Alignment and the Non-Alignment Movement in the Present World Order, 

Delhi, Konark, 1994. 

13. J.N. Rosenau and K. Knorr (eds.), Contending Approaches to International Politics, 


14. A.P. Schmidt and A.J. Jongman (eds.), Political Terrorism: A New Guide to Actors, 

Authors, Concepts, Data Bases, Theories and Literature, 2nd edn., Amsterdam, North 

Holland Publishing Co., 1988. 

15. M.P. Sullivan, Theories of International Politics: Enduring Paradigm in a Changing World, 

Hamsphire, Macmillan, 2001. 

16. S.P. Verma, International System and the Third World, New Delhi, Vikas, 1988. 

10(811) 


17. G. Williams, Third World Political Organizations, London, Macmillan, 1987. 

18. Mahadev Kumar, Antarrashtriya Rajniti Ke Saidhantik Paksh, Agra, 1984. 

19. Ajay Kumar, Antarrashtriya Sambandhon Ke Siddhant, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

20. Chimni et al, International Relations, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

21. Sanju Gupta, An Introduction to International Relations, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

Paper-IX Public Administration-II 

10(812) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I Bureaucracy- Theories, Types and Roles, Max Weber and his Critics. 

Civil Servant - Minister Relationship, Downsizing and Modernization of 

Bureaucracy. 

Personnel Administration-Recruitment, Training, Promotion, Discipline, Morale 

Employee-Employer Relations. 

Unit-II Financial Administration- Budget, Audit. 

Control Over Finance with Special Reference to India and U.K. 

Development Planning and Administration in India. 

Unit-III Good Governance- Problems of Administration, Corruption, Transparency and 

Accountability. 

Administrative Reforms, Right to Information and Crisis Management. 

Unit-IV Leadership- Role in Decision-Making, Communication, 

Readings : 

Grievance Redressal Institutions- Ombudsman, Lokpal and Lokayukta. 

Role of Political Parties, Pressure Groups and Public Opinion in the Process of 

Policy Formation. 

1. J.E. Anderson, Public Policy Making, Boston, Houghton, Miffin, 1990. 

2. P.H., Appleby, Public Administration for a Welfare State, Bombay, Asia Publishing House, 

1961. 

3. A. Avasthi and S.N. Maheshwari, Public Administration, Agra, Laxmi N. Aggarwal, 1996. 

4. P.R. Dubashi, Recent Trends in Public Administration, Delhi, Kaveri Books, 1995. 

5. E.N. Gladden, The Essential of Public Administration, London, Staples Press, 1958. 

6. J. La Palombara and M. Weiner (eds.), Bureaucracy and Political Development, Princeton 

NJ, Princeton University Press, 1966. 

7. S.R. Maheshwari, Administrative Theories, New Delhi, Allied, 1994. 


8. F.A. Nigro and L.S. Nigro, Modern Public Administration, New York, Harper and Row, 

1984. 

9. L. Peters, “Downsizing the Civil Service in Developing Countries: Golden Handshake or 

Smiling Farewells?” Public Administration and Development, 18(4), Oct. 1998, pp. 381-86. 

10. D.C. Pitt, and B.C. Smith (eds.), The Computer Revolution: The Impact of Information 

Technology on Government Brighton, Wheatsheaf Books, 1984. 

11. R. Presthus, Public Administration, New York, Ronald, 1975. 

12. D. Waldo (ed.), Ideas and Issues in Public Administration: A Book of Readings, New York, 

McGraw Hill, 1953. 

13. Hoshiar Singh and Pradeep Sachdeva, Public Administration, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

14. Hoshiar Singh and Pradeep Sachdeva, Lok Prashasan, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

Paper-X Research Methodology-II (Option-i) 

10(813) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I Identification and Formulation of Problem. 

Research Design: Formation, Experimental and Non-Experimental Designs 

Sampling-Principles and Methods. 

Unit-II Data-Types and Sources, Observation, Questionnaire, Schedule and Interview. 

Survey Method- Utility, Application and Limitations. 

Unit-III Analysis of Secondary Data-Archival and Library Research, Document Analysis, 

Using Written Records, Scrutinizing the Evidences, Content Analysis. 

Quantification in Social Research: Statistics- Meaning, Purpose and Scope, 

Statistical Techniques of Data-Analysis. 

Unit-IV Presentation of Data- Textual, Graphic and Tabular. 

Readings : 

Presentation of Research- Paper Writing, Report Writing and Thesis Writing. 


1970. 





1987. 





1985. 


Press, 1986. 








Paper-X Geo-Politics and World Affairs (Option-ii) 

10(814) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I Scope and Importance of Geo-Politics, Geo-Politics in the Cold War and Post Cold 

War Era. 

Importance of Geo-Political Factors-Physical, Human, Economic, Political and 

Environmental. 

Unit-II Geo-Political Significance of West Asia, South Asia, South-East Asia and 

Indian Ocean. 

Unit-III Land Locked States-Advantages and Disadvantages, Case Studies. 

Core-Periphery- Economic and Political Implication. 

Unit-IV Geo-Political Explanation of Foreign Policy Formulation. 

Readings : 

Ecological Determinants. 

Regionalist, Internationalist Globlist Challenges and Opportunities. 

1. Charles C. Colby, ed., Geographic Aspects of International Relations. 

2. J.P. Cole, Geography and World Affairs. 

3. W. Gordon East and A.E. Moodie, eds., The Changing World: Studies in Political 

Geography. 

4. Pascal Girot and Eleonore Kofman, eds., International Geopolitical Analysis. 

5. C.S. Gray, The Geopolitics of the Nuclear Era: Hertland, Rimland and the Technological 

Revolution. 

6. W.A. ZDouglass Jackson, Politics and Geographic Relationships. 


7. B.M. Russett, International Regions and International System. 

8. R. Strausz-Hupe, Geopolitics. 

9. L.M. Alexander, World Political Patterns, Ran McNally, Chicago, 1963. 

10. B.L. Sukhwal, Modern Political Geography, Sterling Publishers, New Delhi, 1968. 

11. Teter Taylor, Political Geography, Longmen, London, 1985. 

12. N.J. G. Pounds, Political Geography, McGraw Hill, New York, 1972. 

13. A.E. Moddie, Geography Behind Politics, Hutchnison, London, Latest Edition. 

14. J.R.V. Prescott, The Geography of Frontiers and Boundaries Aldine, Chicago. 

15. R.D. Dikshit, Political Geography: A Contemporary Perspective, Tata McGraw Hill, New 

Delhi, 1996. 

16. R.D. Dikshit, Political Geography: A Century of Process, Sage, New Delhi, 1999. 

17. C.D. Deshpande, India-A Regional Interpretation Northern Book Centre, New Delhi, 1992. 

18. K.M. Panikkar, Geographical Factors in India History, 2 Vols, Asia Publishing House 

Bombay, 1959. 

Paper-X Media and Politics (Option-iii) 

10(815) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I Theories of Political Communication: Concept, Role of Communication in a 

Democracy; Media as a Means of Socialization 

Unit-II Press and Politics in India-Critical Evaluations of Role and Impact 

Election Campaigns, Opinion Polls, Exit Polls, Relevance, and Reliability. 

Agenda Setting Function of the Media. 

Unit-III T.V., Radio and politics in India-Critical Evaluation of role and Impact 

Freedom of Media and Right to Information 

Unit-IV Mass Media and the Government- Issues and Problems: Government Monopoly; 

Executive Censorship; Judicial Interpretation; Legislation 

Readings : 

Mass Media , Nation Building and Political Development in India 

1. Yogesh Atal, Local Communities and National Politics: A Study in Communication Links 

and Political Involvement. 

2. B.D. Dhawan, Development of Television in India. 

3. S.K. Goyal, et al., Ownership and Control Structure of the Indian Press. 

4. Rebert L. Hardgrave, "Politics and The Film in Tamil Nadu: The Stars and the DMK", 

Asian Survey, March 1973. 


5. Indian Institute of Mass Communication, An Indian Personality for Television: Report of 

the Working Group on Software for Doordarshan. 

6. Sharad Karkhanis, Indian Politics and the Role of the Press. 

7. Prayag Meha, Election Campaign. 

8. Ministry of Information and Broadcasting, Publication Division, Govt. of India, Mass 

Media in India. 

9. Claus Mueller, The Politics of Communication. 

10. Uma Narula and S.S. Yadava, Portrayal of Election Campaign in Press. 

11. A.G. Noorani, ed., Freedom of the Press in India. 

12. Thomas E. Patterson, The Mass Media Election: How Americans Choose their President. 

13. Nicholas Pronay and D.W. Spring, eds., Propaganda, Politics and Film. 

14. R. Righter, Whose News? Politics, the Press and the Third World. 

15. Susanne H. Rudolph, "Form Madras: A View of the Southern Film", Yale Review, Vol. 60, 

No. 3, March 1971. 

16. B. Rubin, Media Politics and Democracy. 

17. Aruna Vasudev, An Outlook for India's Future. 

10(816) 


M.A. (FINAL) SEMESTER SYSTEM-III 

POLITICAL SCIENCE 

SCHEME OF EXAMINATION W.E.F. 2012-13 

SEMESTER-III 

Paper No. Nomenclature Max. 

Marks 

Time 

Paper-XI Political Theory-I 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-XII Comparative Politics-I 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-XIII, XIV & XV Three Papers may be chosen from any of the following Groups : 

Group A : Paper XIII, XIV & XV 

Option-(i) India’s Foreign Policy & Relations-I 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(ii) International Law-I 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(iii) International Organization and Global 

Order Studies-I 

100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(iv) South Asia in International Politics-I 100 3 Hrs. 

Group B : Paper XIII, XIV & XV 

Option-(i) Political Sociology : The Indian Context- 

I 

100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(ii) State Politics in India (with special 

reference to Haryana)–I 

100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(iii) Democracy in India-I 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(iv) Indian Political Economy-I 100 3 Hrs. 

Group C : Paper XIII, XIV & XV 

Option-(i) Government & Politics of USA-I 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(ii) USA and the World-I 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(iii) USA and South Asia 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(iv) USA and Europe 100 3 Hrs. 

Group D : Paper XIII, XIV & XV 

Option-(i) Ancient Indian Political Thought-I 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(ii) Modern Indian Political Thought-I 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(iii) Liberal Political Theory 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(iv) Marxist and Neo-Marxist Political 

Theory-I 

100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-XI (Compulsory) 

Political Theory-I 

10(817) 




Time: 3 Hours 







marks. 

UNIT-I Meaning, Nature, Concerns and Significance of Political Theory; Different 

Interpretations of Political Theory. Importance and Limitations of Classical 

Tradition. 

UNIT-II Behaviouralism and Post Behaviouralism. Decline of Political Theory; Resurgence 

of Political Theory. 

UNIT-III Critical Theory: Herbert Marcuse, Jurgen Habermass, Libertarianism: Hayek and 

Nozick. 

UNIT-IV Rationalism & Limits of Politics: Michael Oakshatt; Importance of Politics and 

Power: Hannah Arendt. 

Readings: 

1. D.Bell, The End of Ideology, New York, The Free Press, 1960. 

2. A.Cobban, ‘The Decline of Political Theory,’ Political Science Quarterly, 1953, LXVIII, 

pp. 321-337. 

3. D. Easton, The future of the postbehavioural phase in political science, in Contemporary 

Empirical Political Theory, K. R. Monroe (ed.), Berkeley, University of California Press, 

1997. 

4. F. Fukuyama, The End of History and the last Man, Harmondsworth, Penguins, 1992. 

5. R. E. Goodin and H.D. Klingemann (eds.), A New Handbook of Political Science, Oxford, 

Oxford University Press, 1996. 

6. D. Held, Political Theory Today, Cambridge, Polity Press, 1991. 

7. W. Kymlicka, Contemporary Political Philosophy : An Introduction, Oxford, The 

Clarendon Press, 1990. 

8. S. Mulhall and A. Swift, Liberals and Communitarians, Oxford, Basil Blackwell, 1992. 

9. R. Plant, Modern Political Thought, Oxford, Blackwell, 1991. 

10. G.H. Sabine, What is Political Theory?, Journal of Politics, 1939, 1(1). 

11. R. J. Bernstein (ed.), Habermas and Modernity, Cambridge, Polity Press, 1985. 

12. R. Grant, Oakeshott, London, Claridge Press, 1990. 

13. L. Hutcheon, The Politics of Postmodernism, London and New York, Routledge, 1989. 

14. S. K. White, Political Theory and Postmodernism, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 

1991. 

M.A. (Final) Semester-III 

Paper-XII (Compulsory) 

Comparative Politics-I 

10(818) 




Time: 3 Hours 







marks. 

UNIT-I Comparative Politics: Meaning, Nature & Scope; Evolution of Comparative Politics 

as a Separate Discipline. Approaches to the Study of Comparative Politics: 

Traditional Approaches: Philosophical, Historical, Legal – Institutional. 

UNIT-II Modern Approaches: Systems Analysis; Structural-Functionalism; Political Culture, 

Political Socialization, Political Development, Political Modernization, Political 

Communication, Political Participation. 

UNIT-III Constitutionalism: Concept, History of Constitutionalism and Problems, Forms of 

Government: Unitary & Federal, Presidential & Parliamentary. 

UNIT-IV Liberal Democratic & Authoritarian Political Systems; Organs of Government: 

Executive, Legislature & Judiciary – their relationship in Comparative Perspective. 

Readings : 

1. G.A. Almond and J.S. Coleman, The Politics of the Developing Areas, Princeton NJ, 

Princeton University Press, 1960. 

2. G.A. Almond, and S. Verba, The Civic Culture : Political Attitudes and Democracy in Five 

Nations, Princeton NJ, Princeton University Press, 1963. 

3. G.A. Almond, Comparative Politics Today : A World View, 7th edn., New York, London, 

Harper/Collins, 2000. 

4. D.E. Apter, The Politics of Modernization, Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1965. 

5. A.Bebler and J. Seroka (eds.), Contemporary Political Systems: Classifications and 

Typologies, Boulder Colerado, Lynne Reinner Publishers, 1990. 

6. L.J.Cantori and A.H. Zeigler (ed.), Comparative Politics in the Post-Behaviouralist Era, 

London, Lynne Reinner Publisher, 1988. 

7. O. Dunleavy and B.O’ Leary, Theories of Liberal Democratic State, London, Macmillan, 

1987. 

8. R. Hauge and M. Harrop, Comparative Government and Politics. An Introduction, 5th edn., 

New York, Palgrave, 2001. 

9. H. Finer, Theory and Practice of Modern Government, London, Methuen, 1969. 

10. J.C. Johari, Comparative Political Theory: New Dimensions, Basic Concepts and Major 

Trends, New Delhi, Sterling, 1987. 

11. K. Kumar, Revolution : The Theory and Practice of a European Idea, London, Weidenfeld 

and Nicolson, 1971. 

12. R.C. Macridis, The Study of Comparative Government, New York, Doubleday, 1955. 

13. R.C. Macridis and R.E. Ward, Modern Political Systems : Europe, and Asia, 2nd edn. 

Englewood Cliffs NJ, Prentice Hall, 1968. 

14. J. Manor (ed.), Rethinking Third World Politics, London, Longman, 1991. 

15. R.C. Macridis, Modern European Governments: Cases in Comparative Policy - Making, 


16. L.W. Pey (ed.), Communication and Political Development, Princeton NJ, Princeton 


17. R.I. Rotberg (ed.), Politics and Political Change : A Journal of Inter-Disciplinary History 

Reader, Massachusetts, MIT Press, 2001. 

18. H.J. Wiarda (ed.), New Developments in Comparative Politics, Boulder Colorado, 


19. Prabir De, Comparative Politics, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

10(819) 


Group-A: Paper- XIII, XIV & XV (Opt. i) 

India’s Foreign Policy & Relations-I 

10(820) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I Meaning of Foreign Policy: History, Principles and Objectives of India’s Foreign 

Policy; Domestic and External Determinants. 

UNIT-II Structure and Process of Foreign Policy Making-Role of Cabinet and National 

Security Council, Ministry of External Affairs, Parliament and Intelligence 

Agencies. 

UNIT-III India’s Relations With Major Countries: - USA, USSR/Russia, Britain, Japan and 

Australia. 

UNIT-IV India’s Foreign Economic Policy-Determinants, Impact of Globalization, Foreign 

Direct Investments, Foreign Aid and Foreign Trade 

Readings : 

1. R.S. Yadav, Bharat Ki Videsh Niti (in Hindi), Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

2. R.S. Yadav & Suresh Dhanda, eds., India’s Foreign Policy: Contemporary Trends, New 

Delhi, Shipra, 2009. 

3. R.S. Yadav (ed.), India’s Foreign Policy Towards 2000 A.D., New Delhi, Deep & Deep, 

1993. 

4. J.N. Dixit, Across Border: Fifty Years of India’s Foreign Policy, New Delhi, 1999. 

5. J. Bandhopahdyaya, The Making of India’s Foreign Policy, Calcutta, Allied, 1979. 

6. V.P. Dutt, India’s Foreign Policy in a Changing World, New Delhi, Vikas, 1999. 

7. N.K. Jha (ed.), India’s Foreign Policy in a Changing World, New Delhi, South Asian 


8. H. Kapur, India’s Foreign Policy : 1947-1993, New Delhi, Sage, 1994. 

9. N. Jetley, India’s Foreign Policy : Challenges and Prospects, New Delhi, Janaki Prakashan, 

1985. 

10. S. Mansingh (ed.), India’s Foreign Policy in the 21st Century, New Delhi, Foreign Policy 

Institute, 1999. 

11. R. Thakur, Politics and Economics of India’s Foreign Policy, Delhi, Oxford University 

Press, 1993. 

12. C. Raja Mohan, Crossing The Rubicon: The Shaping of India’s New Foreign Policy, New 

Delhi, Viking, 2003. 

13. N.S. Sisodia & C. Uday Bhaskar, eds., Emerging India: Security and Foreign Policy 

Perspective, New Delhi, Promilla, 2007. 

14. Rajen Harshe & K.M. Seethi, eds., Engaging with the World: Critical Reflections on India’s 

Foreign Policy, New Delhi, Orientlongman, 2005. 


15. Anand Mathur & Sohanlal Meena, eds., India Profile in Polycentric World Order, Jaipur, 

RBSA, 2008. 

16. Annpurna Nantiyal, ed., Challenges to India’s Foreign Policy in the New Era, New Delhi, 

2006. 

17. Atish Sinha & Madhup Mahota, eds., Indian Foreign Policy: Challenges and Opportunities, 

New Delhi, Academic, 2007. 

18. Jayanta Kumar Roy, India’s Foreign Relations, 1947-2007, Routtedge, New Delhi, 2011. 

19. Dilip H. Mohite and Amit Dholakia, eds, India and The Emerging World Ordre, Kalinga, 

New Delhi, 2001. 

20. Anjali Ghosh & others, India’s Foreign Policy, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

Group-A: Paper- XIII, XIV & XV (Opt. ii) 

International Law-I 

10(821) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I Nature, Scope and Basis of International Law; Sources of International Law. 

Relationship between International Law and Municipal Law. 

UNIT-II Codification, Subjects of International Law. 

Recognition; State Succession; Intervention and Treaties. 

UNIT-III Jurisdiction over Aliens; Nationality; Extradition and Diplomatic Privileges and 

Immunities. 

UNIT-IV State Territory and Jurisdiction over Land, Air and Water; Modes of Acquiring and 

Losing State Territory. 

Readings : 

1. Brownline, Principles of Public International Law, Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1973, Second 

Edition. 

2. C.G. Fenwick, International Law, Bombay, Vakils, 1971. 

3. J.G. Starke, An Introduction to International Law, London, Butterworths, 1972. 

4. P.E. Corbett, Law and Diplomacy, Princeton NJ, Princeton University Press, 1959. 

5. K. Deutsc and S. Hoffman (ed.), The Relevance of International Law, Oxford, Clarendon 

Press, 1955. 


6. L. Duguit, Law in the Modern State, New York, B.W. Huebsch, 1919. 

7. W. Friedmann, The Changing Structure of International Law, New York, Columbia 


8. H. Kelsen, Principles of International Law, New York, Rinehart and Co., 1952. 

9. J. Mattern, Concepts of State, Sovereignty and International Law, Baltimore, Johns Hopkins 

Press, 1928. 

10. L. Oppeheimer, International Law Vol. 1, 1969, Revised edn., Vol II, 1953. 

11. J. Stone, Legal Controls of International Conflict, New York, Rinehart and Company, 1954. 

12. C. de Visscher, Theory and Reality in Public International Law, Princeton NJ, Princeton 


13. Sir J.F. Williams, Aspects of Modern International Law, New York, Oxford University 

Press, 1939. 

Group-A: Paper- XIII, XIV & XV (Opt. iii) 

International Organization and Global Order Studies-I 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I Historical Evolution of International Organization: Concert of Europe, Hague 

Systems, Public International Unions, Genesis of League. Origin of the United 

Nations: Nature and Principles; Comparison between League and UN systems. 

UNIT-II Organs of the United Nations: General Assembly, Security Council, Economic & 

Social Council, Trusteeship, International Court of Justice, Secretariat; Role of 

Secretary General. 

UNIT-III Disarmament; Changing Nature of UN in the Post-Cold War Era; Democratization 

of UN System and India’s Claim for Permanent Seat in Security Council. 

UNIT-IV International Organization and Global Political Problems: Pacific and Coercive 

Methods for the Settlement of Disputes, (Ch.VI&VII), Promotion of International 

Cooperation and Non-Political Agencies, Role of Special Agencies of the UN; 

United Nations and Socio-Economic Developments. 

10(822) 


Readings : 

1. Richard K. Ashley, “The Eye of Power : The Politics of World Modelling,” International 

Organization, Vol. 37, No. 3, 1983. 

2. Inis Claude, Changing United Nations, New York, Random House, 1967. 

3. Inis Claude, Swords into ploughshares : The Problems and Progress of International 

organisations, New York, Random House, 1971. 

4. S.J.R. Bilgrami, International Organisation, New Delhi, Vikas, 1971. 

5. E. Laurd, A History of the United Nations, London, Macmillan, 1989. 

6. R.C. Angell, The Quest for World Order, Ann Arbor, University of Michigan Press, 1979. 

7. A.L. Bennett, International Organizations : Principles and Issues, Englewood Cliffs NJ, 

Prentice Hall, 1977. 

8. H.G. Nicholas, The UN as a Political Institution, Oxford, Oxford University Press, 1975. 

9. W.H. Lewis (ed.), The Security Role of the United Nations, New York, Praegar, 1991. 

10. Ronald Meltzer, “Restructuring the UN System, Institutional Reform, Efforts in the Context 

of North-South Relations,” International Organization, vol. 32, No. 4, 1978. 

11. Ronald Yalem, “Conflicting Approaches to World Order,” Alternatives, Vol. 5, 1979-1980. 

12. P. Baehr and L. Gordenker, The United Nations in the 1990s, London, Oxford University 

Press, 1992. 

13. Rikhey, Strengthening UN Peace keeping, London, Hurst and Co., 1993. 

14. K. P. Saxena, Reforming the United Nations : The Challenge and Relevance, New Delhi, 

Sage, 1993. 

Group-A: Paper- XIII, XIV & XV (Opt. iv) 

South Asia in International Politics-I 

10(823) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I Geopolitics of South Asia; Evolution of South Asia as a distinct region. 

UNIT-II State and Society in South Asia; Role of Political Parties, Military & Ethnic Groups. 

UNIT-III Cold War and South Asia: Intra-regional Disputes and, Big Power Rivalry. 


UNIT-IV Non Alignment: Ideology and Practice; SAARC and Regional Cooperation. 

Readings : 

1. Sugata Bose and Ayesha Jalal, Modern South Asia: History, Culture, Political Economy 

(Delhi: OUP, 1999). 

2. Ayesha Jalal, Democracy and Authoritarianism in South Asia (New Delhi: CUP, 1995). 

3. P.R. Chari (ed.), Perspectives on National Security in South Asia: In Search of a New 

Paradigm (New Delhi: Manohar, 1999). 

4. Sridhar K. Khatri and G.W. Kueck (eds.), Terrorism in South Asia (Delhi: Shipra Pub., 

2003). 

5. Raja Menon, A Nuclear Strategy for India (New Delhi: Sage, 2000). 

6. George Perkovich, India’s Nuclear Bomb (Delhi: OUP, 2001). 

7. Robbie Robertson, The Three Waves of Globalization (London: Zed Books, 2003). 

8. Linda Racioppi, Soviet Policy towards South Asia since 1970 (Cambridge: CUP, 1994). 

9. Dilip H. Mohite and Amit Dholakia (eds.), India and the Emerging World Order (New 

Delhi: Kalinga Pub., 2001). 

10. Lars Blinkenberg, India – Pakistan: The History of Unsolved Conflicts, Vol. 1&2 (Odense: 

Odense University Press, 1998). 

11. K. Ahuja, H. Coppens and Hermen van der Wusten (eds.), Regime Transformations and 

Global Realignments (New Delhi: Sage, 1993). 

12. Mohammad Ayoob (ed.), Conflict and Intervention in the Third World (New Delhi: Vikas 

Pub., 1980). 

13. A.P. Rana, The Imperatives of Nonalignment (Delhi: The Macmillan Company of India 

Ltd., 1976). 

14. J.N. Dixit, India’s Foreign Policy 1947 – 2003 (New Delhi: Picus Books, 2003). 

15. Shelton U. Kodikara (ed.), External Compulsion of South Asian Politics (New Delhi: Sage, 

1993). 

Group-B: Paper- XIII, XIV & XV (Opt. i) 

Political Sociology: The Indian Context-I 

10(824) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 


UNIT-I Meaning, Nature and Scope of Political Sociology, Historical Sociology – Weber, 

Evolution and Development of Political Sociology. 

Major Approaches to the Study of Political Sociology: System, Structural 

Functional, Behavioural & Conflict Approach. 

UNIT-II The Social Framework and the Political System in India: Political Influence, Power, 

Authority and Bureaucracy, Legitimacy, Masses and Elite. 

UNIT-III Interaction between Society & Polity: Political Recruitment, Political 

Communication, Socio-Economic Bases of Community Power Structure & Political 

Participation. 

UNIT-IV Social Asymmetries and Politics in India: Social Stratification – Theory and Practice 

with Special Reference to Caste and Class, Equality and Inequality Debate. 

Readings : 

1. G.A. Almond and S. Verba, The Civic Culture, Princeton NJ, Princeton University Press, 

1963. 

2. S. Bayly, Caste, Society and Politics in India from the Eighteenth Century to the Modern 

Age, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 1999. 

3. R. Bendix, and S.M. Lipset, Class, Status and Power, 2nd edn., New York, The Free Press, 

1966. 

4. P.R. Brass, Caste, Faction and Party in Indian Politics, Vols. 2, Delhi, Chankya Publication, 

1984-85. 

5. P.R. Brass, Ethnicity and Nationalism : Theory and Comparison, New Delhi, Sage, 1991. 

6. R.E. Dawson and K. Prewitt, Political Socialization, Boston, Little Brown, 1969. 

7. A.R. Desai, State and Society in India : Essays in Dissent, Bombay, Popular, 1974. 

8. M. Galanter, Competing Equalities : Law and the Backward Classes in India, Berkley, 

University of California Press, 1983. 

9. M. Janowitz, Political Conflict : Essays in Political Sociology, New York, New Viewpoints, 

Watts, 1970. 

10. R. Kothari, Caste and Politics in India, New Delhi, Orient Longman, 1970. 


12. R. Kothari, Democratic Polity and Social Change in India, Delhi, Allied, 1976. 

13. A.Kumar (ed.), National-Building in India : Culture, Power and Society, New Delhi, 

Radiant Publishers, 1999. 

14. L.Milbrath, Political Participation, Skokie Illinois, Rand-McNally, 1965. 

15. T.K. Oomen, Protest and Change : Studies in Social Movements, New Delhi, Sage, 1990. 

16. D. Sheth, “Caste and Class : Social Reality and Political Representation” in V.A. Pai 

Panadikar and A. Nandy (eds.), Contemporary India, Delhi, Tata McGraw Hill, 1999. 

10(825) 


Group-B: Paper- XIII, XIV & XV (Opt. ii) 

State Politics in India (with special reference to Haryana) -I 

10(826) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I Theoretical Framework for the Study of State Politics. Significance of the Study of 

State Politics, Patterns of State Politics. 

UNIT-II Determinants of State Politics, Linguistic Reorganization of States in India. 

UNIT-III Federalism in India;Theory & Practice, Centre-State Legislative, Administrative & 

Financial Relations. 

UNIT-IV Demands for Separate States in India, Secessionist Movements in India-Punjab, 

Jammu &Kashmir and the North- East, Problem of Naxalism in Indian States 

Readings : 


Press, 1966. 

2. A.Chanda, Federalism in India : A Study of Union-State Relations, London, George Allen 

& Unwin, 1965. 

3. P.Chatterjee (ed.), States and Politics in India, Delhi, Oxford University Press, 1997. 

4. A.Kohli (ed.), India’s Democracy : An Analysis of Changing State - Society Relations, 

Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1988. 

5. A.Kohli, Democracy and Discontent : India’s Growing Crisis of Governability, Cambridge, 



7. I.Narain (ed.), State Politics in India, Meerut, Meenakshi Parkashan, 1967. 

8. S. Pai, State Politics : New Dimensions : Party System, Liberalization and Politics of 

Identity, Delhi, 2000. 

9. S.C. Mittal, Haryana : A Historical Perspective, New Delhi, Atlantic Publishers, 1986. 

10. K.C. Yadav, Hayana Ka Itihas, 3 Volumes, New Delhi, Macmillan India Ltd., 1981. 

11. P.D. Sharma, Legislative Elite in India : A Study in Political, Socialization, Kurukshetra, 

Vishal, 1984. 

12. Harinder K. Chhabra, State Politics in India, Delhi, Surjeet Publications, 1980. 

13. B.L. Fadia, State Politics in India, Vol I & II, New Delhi, Radiant Publishes, 1984. 

14. O.P. Goel, Caste and Voting Behaviour, New Delhi, Ritu Publishers, 1981. 


15. Subhash C. Kashyap, The Politics of Defection - A Study of State Politics in India, Delhi, 

National Publishing House, 1969. 

16. T.R. Sharma (ed.), New Challenges of Politics in Indian States, New Delhi, Uppal 

Publishing House, 1985. 

17. P. Choudhary, The Veiled Women : Shifting Gender Equations in Rural Haryana 1880- 

1990, Delhi, Oxford University Press, 1994. 

18. Other Readings : Journal of Haryana Studies, Kurukshetra University Research Journal of 

Arts and Humanities. 

Group-B: Paper- XIII, XIV & XV (Opt. iii) 

Democracy in India-I 

10(827) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I Concept, Nature and Structure of Indian Democracy; Theories of Democracy: 

classical, Elitist, Pluralist and Marxist. 

Resilience of Democracy in India: Democratic Thinking and Tradition in Ancient 

India; Democratic Thinking in Indian Independence Movement and After 

Independence. 

UNIT-II Election Commission, Electoral Process, Defects and Reforms of Electoral Process: 

V.M. Tarkunde, Dinesh Goswami and Inderjeet Gupta Reports, Electoral Politics 

and Determinants of Voting Behaviour. 

UNIT-III Political Parties: Evolution, Bases, Nature and Classification of Political Parties. 

Their role in Democracy, Alignment and Realignment among Political Parties in 

India. 

UNIT-IV Interest & Pressure Groups in India; Kinds and Techniques of Pressure groups: 

Factions and Factional Politics, Politics of Defections and Anti-Defection Law. 

Readings : 

1. G.Austin, Working a Democratic Constitution : The Indian Experience, Delhi, Oxford 


2. P. Brass, The Politics of India Since Independence, 2nd edn., Cambridge, Cambridge 


3. P. Chatterjee (ed.), States and Politics in India, Delhi, Oxford University Press, 1997. 

4. F. Frankel, India’s Political Economy, 1947-77 : The Gradual Revolution. Princeton NJ, 


5. A.H. Hanson and J. Douglas, India’s Democracy, New Delhi, Vikas, 1972. 


6. N. Jayal, Democracy and the State : Welfare, Secularism and Development in 

Contemporary India, Delhi, Oxford University Press, 1999. 

7. N. Jayal (ed.), Democracy in India, Delhi, Oxford University Press, 2001. 

8. Kohli, Democracy and Discontent : India’s Growing Crisis of Governability, Cambridge, 


9. Kohil (ed.), India’ Democracy : An Analysis of Changing State- Society Relations, 


10. Kohli (ed.), The Success of India’s Democracy, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 

2001. 

11. R. Kothari, Politics in India, Delhi, Orient Longman, 1970. 

12. R. Kothari, Democratic Polity and Social change in India, Delhi, Allied, 1976 

13. R. Kothari, State Against Democracy : In Search for Humane Governance, Delhi, Ajanta, 

1988. 

14. W. H. Morris-Jones, Politics Mainly Indian, Delhi, Orient Longman, 1978. 

15. D. Sheth, “Caste and class : social reality and political representations” in V.A. Pai 

Panandikar and A. Nandy (eds.), Contemporary India, Delhi, Tata MacGraw-Hil, 1999. 

16. M.N. Srinivas, Social Change in Modern India, Bombay, Allied Publishers, 1966. 

17. Varshney (ed.), The Indian Paradox: Essays in Indian Politics, New Delhi, Sage, 1989. 

18. J. Sachs, A. Varshney and N. Bajpai (eds.), India in the Era of Economic Reforms, Oxford, 



20. Parvin Kumar Jha, Tulnatamak Paripekchay mein Bhartiya Rajniti, Pearson, New Delhi, 

2011. 

21. Nawab Singh Sombanshy, Bharatiya Samvidhan ek Samagra Avlokan, Pearson, New Delhi, 

2011. 

Group-B: Paper- XIII, XIV & XV (Opt. iv) 

Indian Political Economy-I 

10(828) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I Political Economy – Meaning, Nature and Scope. Major approaches to the Study of 

Political Economy, Social, Political Order and Economic Change. 

UNIT-II Planning Process in India: Objectives, growth and Development. Strategy of 

Economic Planning; Democratic Social Transformation; Concept of Mixed 

Economy. 

UNIT-III Political Economy of Under-Development; Theories of Imperialism: Dependency, 

Centre – Periphery and World Capitalist System and Under Development; The 

Mode of Production. 


UNIT-IV Nature and Role of Capital in India: Industrialization, Agrarian Reforms and Social 

Transformation. Political Elements of Economic Inequality and Self-Sufficiency. 

Readings : 

1. A.Abdul, Poverty Alleviation in India : Policies and programmes, New Delhi, Ashish, 1994. 

2. I.J. Ahluwalia, and I.M.D. Little, India’s Economic Reforms and Development, Delhi, 


3. P. Bardhan, The Political Economy of Development in India, Oxford Blackwell, 1984. 

4. A.Beteille, Studies in Agrarian Social Structure, Delhi, Oxford University Press, 1977. 

5. Bhaduri, The Economic Structure of Backward Agriculture, London, Academic Press, 1983. 

6. P. Chaudhuri, The Indian Economy : Poverty and Development, New Delhi, Vikas, 1979. 

7. V.M. Dandekar, Poverty in India, Pune, Gokhale Institute of Politics and Economics, 1971. 

8. F. Frankel, India’s Green Revolution : Economic Gains and Political Costs, Princeton NJ, 


9. F. Frankel, India’s Political Economy, 1947-77 : The Gradual Revolution, Princeton NJ, 


10. Ghosh, Indian Economy : Its Nature and Problems, 22nd revised edn., Calcutta, World 

Press, 1979-80. 

11. R. Jenkins, Democratic Politcs and Economic Reform in India, Cambridge, Cambridge 


12. R. Khator, Environment, Development and Politics in India, Lanham, Md, University Press 

of America, 1991. 

13. Kohli, The State and Poverty in India : Politics of Reform, Cambridge, Cambridge 


14. G. Myradal, Asian Drama : An Inquiry into the Poverty of Nations, Harmondsworth, 

Penguin, 1968. 

15. R.I. Rudolph and S.H. Rudolph, In Pursuit of Lakshmi : The Political Economy of the 

Indian State, Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1987. 

16. A.Sen, The State, Industrialization and Class Formation in India, London, Routledge and 

Kegan Paul, 1982. 

Group-C: Paper- XIII, XIV & XV (Opt. i) 

Government & Politics of USA-I 

10(829) 




Time: 3 Hours 







marks. 

UNIT-I Constitutional Basis: Historical and Philosophical; Evolution and Making of 

Constitution; Basic Features. Fundamental Rights of Citizens, Federalism, 

Amendment Process. 

UNIT-II Union Legislature & Executive: President – Election, Power & Position; Congress – 

Composition, Power & Position. 

UNIT-III Judiciary System: Supreme Court of USA, Judicial Review, Independence of 

Judiciary, Lower Courts. 

UNIT-IV Problems in the Working of Constitution System. 

Readings: 

1. Lawrence Dodd, The Dynamics of American Politics, 1994. 

2. Schlesinger, Running for President: The Candidates and Their Images, 1994. 

3. Hill, Real Life Dictionary of American Politics, 1994. 

4. P.S., Paludan, The Presidency of Abraham Lincoln, 1994. 

5. Sidney Milkis, The American Presidency: Origins Development, 1994. 

6. Robert Ross, American National Government, 1993. 

7. Schneider, Legislative Strategy: Shaping Public Policy, 1993. 

8. Baumgartner, Agendas and Instability in American Politics, 1993. 

9. Max Skidmore, American Government: A Brief Introduction, 1992. 

10. E.J., Dionne, Why Americans hate Politics, 1991. 

11. Connelly, Almanac of American Presidents: From 1789 to the Present, 1991. 

12. Steven Smith, Committees in Congress, 1990. 

13. Blumenthal, Pledging Allegiance: The Last Campaign of the Cold War, 1990. 

10(830) 


Group-C: Paper- XIII, XIV & XV (Opt. ii) 

USA and the World-I 

10(831) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I US Foreign Policy: Origin, Sources, Principles & Objectives, Historical 

Development upto 1945. 

UNIT-II Containment & Rivalry with USSR upto 1975. 

UNIT-III Policy of Détente and its implications for USA and Global Politics. 

UNIT-IV End of Cold War & Problem of US Hegemony and Dominance; New Challenges & 

Non-conventional Security Threats. 

Readings: 

1. Dennis Kux, India and the United States, Estranged Democracies, 1941-1991 (National 

Defense University Press, Washington, 1992). 

2. Dennis Kux, The United and Pakistan, 1947-2000: Disenchanted Allies (John Hopkins 

University Press, Baltimore, 2001). 

3. Strobe Talbott, Engaging India: Diplomacy, Democracy and the Bomb (Penguin, 2004). 

4. Kanishkvan Sathasivam, Uneasy Neighbors: India, Pakistan and US Foreign Policy 

(Ashgate Publication, Burlington, Vt., 2005). 

5. John Spanier and Steven Hook, American Foreign Policy Since World War II (13 th Ed., 

Washington, D.C., Congressional Quarterly Press, 1995). 

6. James David Meernik, The Political Use of Military Force in US Foreign Policy 

(Ashgate Publications, Burlington, VT., 2004). 

7. Margaret P., Karns and Karen A. Mingst, eds., The United States and Multilateral 

Institutions (Boston, Unwin Hyman, 1990). 

8. Bruce W., Jentleson, American Foreign Policy: The Dynamics of Choice in the 21 st 

Century (New York, W.W., Norton, 2000). 

9. Robert Wirsing, Kashmir in the Shadow of War: Regional Rivalries in Nuclear Age 

(Spring Books, India, 2004). 


Group-C: Paper- XIII, XIV & XV (Opt. iii) 

USA and South Asia 

10(832) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I US Interest in South Asia: Traditional and Contemporary 

UNIT-II US Policy Towards Core Countries of South Asia: India & Pakistan 

UNIT-III US Policy, Towards Peripheral Countries of South Asia: Nepal, Sri Lanka & 

Bangladesh. 

UNIT-IV Policy of Foreign Aid, Trade, FDI and Joint Venture of US in South Asia; 

Challenges and Problems in South Asia and American Response. 

Readings: 

1. Lloyd I. Rudolph and Susanne Hoeber Rudolph (Ed.) Making U.S. Foreign Policy toward 

South Asia: Regional Imperatives and the Imperial Presidency. 

2. Aftab Alam, US Policy Towards South Asia: Special Reference to Indo-Pak Relations, 

Vedame Books, New Delhi 

3. R.K. Jain, US-South Asia Relations, 1947-32: Documents, New Delhi: Radiant, 1983, Vol. 

II, p. 16. 

4. Neil Joeck (ed.), Strategic Consequences of Nuclear Proliferation in South Asia, London: 

Frank Cass and Co., 1986. 

5. Kolko, Cabriel, and Joyce Kolko, The Limits of Power: The World and United States 

Foreign Policy, 1945-1954 (New York Harper & Row, 1972). 

6. Wolpert, Stanley, Roots of Confrontation in South Asia: Afghanistan, Pakistan, India and 

the Superpowers, New York: Oxford University Press, 1982. 

7. Barry Buzan and Gowher Rizvi (eds.), South Asian Insecurity and the Great Powers, 

London: Macmillan, 1986. 

8. Lawrence Ziring (ed.), The Subcontinent in World Politics: India Its Neighbours, and the 

Great Powers, New York: Praeger, 1982. 

9. R.K. Jain, US-South Asia Relations, 1947-82: Documents, New Delhi: Radiant, 1983. 


Group-C: Paper- XIII, XIV & XV (Opt. iv) 

USA and Europe 

10(833) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I USA Policy in Europe: Isolationism to Engagement 

UNIT-II US and Politics of East & West Europe 

UNIT-III US Strategic & Political Relations from 1975-1990 

UNIT-IV US-European Union Partnership; Globalization, Economic Recession and Foreign 

Policy Options for USA. 

Readings: 

1. Ralph, B. Levering, The Cold War, 1945-1972 (Arlington Heights, IL: Harlan Davidson, 

1982. 

2. John Gaddis, L., Rsia, the Soviet Union, and the United States (New York: Wiley, 1978). 

3. George W. Breslauer and Philip E. Tetloc, eds., Learning in U.S. and Soviet Foreign Policy 

(Boulder, CO: Westview, 1991). 

4. John Gaddis, The Cold War: A New History (New York: Penguin, 2006). 

5. Kolko, Cabriel, and Joyce Kolko, The Limits of Power: The World and United States 

Foreign Policy, 1945-1954 (New York Harper & Row, 1972). 

6. Robert, Kagan, Of Paradise and Power: America and Europe in the New World Order (New 

York: Vintage, 2003). 

7. Peter J., Katzenstein, A World of Regions: Asia and Europe in the American Imperium 

(Ithaca, New York: Cornell University Press, 2005). 

8. William, Wallace, The Transformation of Western Europe (London: Royal Institute for 

International Affairs, Pinter, 1990). 


Group-D: Paper- XIII, XIV & XV (Opt. i) 

Ancient Indian Political Thought-I 

10(834) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I Sources of Knowledge of Ancient Political Thought. Interpretations of Ancient 

Indian Political Thought – Methodological Issues & Schools of Thought; Features of 

Ancient Indian Polity. Difficulties in the Study of Indian Political Thought 

UNIT-II Political Philosophy of Puranas – Basic Concepts, Evolution; Character and 

Interpretations; Political Philosophy of Vedanta – Basic concepts, Evolution, 

Character and Interpretations. 

UNIT-III Buddhist Political Philosophy – Basic Concepts, Evolution; Character and 

Interpretations; Political Philosophy of Jainism – Basic Concepts, Evolution, 

Character and Interpretations. 

UNIT-IV Brahmanical Works of Sacred Law – Manu and Yajnavalkya. 

Readings : 


2. D.R. Bhandarkar, Some Aspects of Ancient Hindu Polity, Varanasi, Banaras Hindu 

University, 1963. 

3. Drekmeri, Kingship and community in Early India, Berkeley, University of california Press, 

1962. 

4. U.N. Ghoshal, A History of Hindu Political Theories, Calcutta, Oxford University Press, 

1966. 

5. R.P. Kangle, Kautilya’s Arthashastra, Bombay, University of Bombay, 1972. 

6. N.N. Law, Aspects of Ancient Indian, Polity, Oxford, The Clarendon Press, 1921. 

7. R.K. Mukherji, Local Government in Ancient India, Oxford, Oxford University Press, 1920. 

8. B.Prasad, The State in Ancient India, Allahabad, University of Allahabad, 1960. 

9. C.Radhakrishna, Kautilya’s Political Ideas and Institutions, Varanasi, Chowkhamba 

Sanskrit Series Office, 1971. 

10. B.A. Saletroe, Ancient Indian Political Thought and Institutions, Bombay, University of 

Bombay, 1963. 


11. R. Shamasastry, Evolution of Indian Polity, Calcutta, 1920. 

12. J.P.Sharma, Republics in Ancient India, London, Leiden E.J., Brill, 1968. 

13. R.S. Sharma, Aspects of Political Ideas and Institutions in Ancient India, Delhi, 1959. 

14. J. Spellman, The Political Theory of Ancient India, Oxford, The Clarendon press, 1964. 

15. V.P. Varma, Studies in Hindu Political Thought and Its Metaphysical Foundations, Dehli, 


Group-D: Paper- XIII, XIV & XV (Opt. ii) 

Modern Indian Political Thought-I 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I Rammohan Roy; Swami Vivekanand. 

UNIT-II Rabindra Nath Tagore, Bal Gangadhar Tilak; Bhagat Singh 

UNIT-III Dadabhai Naoroji; MG Ranade 

UNIT-IV G.K. Gokhle; Jawaharlal Nehru 

Readings : 

1. A.Appadorai, Indian Political Thinking Through the Ages, Delhi Khanna Publishers, 1992. 

2. J. Bandhopahdyaya, Social and Political Thought of Gandhi, Bombay, Allied, 1969. 

3. R.J. Cashman, The Myth of ‘Lokmanya’ Tilak and Mass Politics in Maharashtra, Berkeley, 


4. Chandra, Nationalishm and Colonialism in Modern India, Delhi, Vikas, 1979. 

5. K.Damodaran, Indian Thought : A Critical Survey, London, Asia Publishing House, 1967. 

6. D.G. Dalton, India’s Idea of Freedom : Political Thought of Swami Vevekananda, 

Aurobindo Ghose, Mahatma Gandhi and Rabindranath Tagore, Delhi, Academic Press, 

1982. 

7. S. Ghose, The Renaissance to Militant Nationalism, Bombay, Allied Publishers, 1969. 

8. S.Ghose, Socialism, Democracy and Nationalism in India, Bombay, Allied Publishers, 

1973. 


10. U.N. Ghoshal, A History of Indian Political Ideas, London, Oxford University Press, 1959. 

10(835) 


11. J.P. Haitheox, Communism and Nationalism in India : M.N. Roy and Comintern Policy, 


12. Heimsath, Indian Nationalism and Social Reform, Princeton NJ, Princeton University Press, 

1964. 

13. R. Iyer, The Moral and Political Thought of Mahatma Gandhi, Delhi, Oxford University 

Press, 1973. 

14. K.N. Kadam (ed.), Dr. B.R. Ambedkar, New Delhi, Sage, 1992. 

15. K.P. Karunakaran, Modern Indian Political Tradition, New Delhi, Allied Publishers, 1962. 

16. K.P. Karunakaran, Indian Politics from Dababhai Naoroji to Gandhi : A Study of Political 

Ideas of Modern India, New Delhi, Gitanjali, 1975. 

17. V.R.Mehta, Foundations of Indian Political Thought, New Delhi, Manohar, 1992. 

18. V.S. Narvane, Modern Indian Thought, New Delhi, Orient Longman, 1978. 

19. D.P. Roy, Leftist Politics in India : M. N. Roy and the Radical Democratic Party, Calcutta, 


20. V.P. Verma, Modern Indian Political Thought, Agra, Lakshmi Narain Aggarwal, 1974 

Group-D: Paper- XIII, XIV & XV (Opt. iii) 

Liberal Political Theory 

10(836) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I Liberalism: Meaning, Nature, Main Features of Liberalism; Liberalism and 

Industrial Revolution; Liberalism and Imperialism & Neo Imperialism 

UNIT-II Early Liberals: Locke, Kant 

Liberal Economists: Smith and Ricardo 

UNIT-III Revisionist Liberals: Bentham, J.S. Mill & T.H. Green 

UNIT-IV Modern Liberals: John Dewey, Milton Friedan 

Readings: 

1. A.Arblaster, The Rise and Decline of Western Liberalism, Oxford, Blackwell, 1984. 

2. Sir E. Barker, Political Thought in England from Herbert Spencer to the Present Day, Oxford, 

Oxford University Prss, 1950. 

3. Z. Brzezinski and Staff of the Research Institute of International Change (eds.), The Relevance 

of Liberalism, Boulder Colorado, Westview Press, 1978. 


4. A.Bullock and M. Shock (ed.), The Liberal Tradition : From Fox to Kaynes, London, and New 

York, Oxford University Press, 1967. 

5. Collins, Liberalism in Nineteenth Century Europe, London, The Historical Association, 1957. 

6. W.L. Davidson, Political Thought in England, The Utilitarians from Bentham to Mill, Oxford, 


7. M.Freeden, The New Liberalism, Oxford and New York, Oxford University Press, 1978. 

8. J. Gray, Liberalism, Delhi, World View, 1998. 

9. L.T. Hobhouse, Liberalism, London, Oxford University Press, 1964. 

10. H.J. Laski, Political Thought from Locke to Bentham, Oxford, Oxford University Press, 1920. 

11. A.J. Manning, Liberalism, London, John Dent & Sons, 1976. 

12. J. Rawls, Political Liberalism, New York, Columbia University Press, 1993. 

13. J. Rawls, The Law of Peoples: The Idea of Public Reason Revisited, Cambridge Massachusetts, 

Harvard University Press, 1999. 

14. J.S. Shapiro, Liberalism: Its Meaning and History, New York, Can Nostrand Reinhold, 1958. 

15. F.H. Watkins, The Age of Ideology - Political Thought from 1750 to the Present, New Delhi, 


16. S. Wolin, Politics and Vision : Continuity and Innovation in Western Political Thought, Boston, 

Little Brown, 1960. 

Group-D: Paper- XIII, XIV & XV (Opt. iv) 

Marxist and Neo-Marxist Political Theory-I 

10(837) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I Marxism in Theory – Karl Marx: Main Postulates and Ideas; Young Marx and Old 

Marx; Marx on Theory of State, Society, Polity, History and Alienation. 

UNIT-II Russian Communism: Lenin, Stalin 

UNIT-III Chinese Communism: Mao-Tse-Tung 

UNIT-IV Cuban and Italian Communism: Che Guevara, Fidel Castro, Antonio Gramsci 

Readings: 

1. L. Althusser, For Marx, London, Allen Lane, 1969. 

2. P. Anderson, Considerations on Western Marxism, London, Verso, 1976. 


3. S. Avineri, The Social and Political Thought of Karl Marx, New Delhi, S. Chand, 1977. 

4. E. Bernstein, Evolutionary Socialism, New York, Schoken Books, 1961. 

5. R. Blackburn (ed.), After the Fall : The Failure of Communism and Future of Socialism, 

London, Verso, 1991. 

6. E.H. Carr, The Russian Revolution : Lenin to Stalin, London, Penguins, 1979. 

7. G.D.H. Cole, A History of Socialist Thought, 5 Vols., London, Macmillan, 1953-60. 

8. J. Dunn, Modern Revolutions, London, the Clarendon Press, 1988. 

9. Gramsci, Selections for Prison Notebooks, edited and translated by Quintin Hoare and 

Geoffery Nowell-Smith, London, Lawrence and Wishart, 1971. 

10. S. Mukherjee and S. Ramaswamy, A History of Socialist Thought, From the Precursors to 

the Present, New Delhi, Sage, 2000. 

11. S. Hoffman, Marx and the Theory of Praxis, London, Oxford University Press, 1977. 

12. H. Marcuse, One Dimensional Man, Boston, Beacon, 1964. 

13. R. Miliband, Marxism and Politics, Oxford, Oxford University Press, 1977. 

14. R. Tucker, Philosophy and Myth of Karl Marx, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 

1961. 

15. V. Verma, Justice, Equality and Community : An Essary in Marxist Political Theory, New 

Delhi, Sage, 1999. 

16. B. Wolfe, Marxism : One Hundred Years in the Life of a Doctorine, New York, Doubleday, 

1969. 

M.A. (FINAL) SEMESTER SYSTEM-IV 

POLITICAL SCIENCE 


SEMESTER-IV 


Marks 

Time 

Paper-XVI Political Theory-II 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-XVII Comparative Politics-II 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-XVIII, XIX & XX Three Papers may be chosen from any of the following Groups : 

Group A : Paper XVIII, XIX & XX 

Option-(i) India’s Foreign Policy & Relations-II 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(ii) International Law-II 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(iii) International Organization and Global Order Studies-II 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(iv) South Asia in International Politics-II 100 3 Hrs. 

Group B : Paper XVIII, XIX & XX 

10(838) 


Option-(i) Political Sociology : The Indian Context-II 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(ii) State Politics in India (with special reference to Haryana)-II 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(iii) Democracy in India-II 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(iv) Indian Political Economy-II 100 3 Hrs. 

Group C : Paper XVIII, XIX & XX 

Option-(i) Government & Politics of USA-II 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(ii) USA and the World-II 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(iii) USA and Asia Pacific 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(iv) USA and United Nations 100 3 Hrs. 

Group D : Paper XVIII, XIX & XX 

Option-(i) Ancient Indian Political Thought-II 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(ii) Modern Indian Political Thought-II 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(iii) Recent Trends in Liberalism 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(iv) Marxist and Neo-Marxist Political Theory-II 100 3 Hrs. 


Paper-XVI (Compulsory) 

Political Theory-II 

10(839) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I Concept of Ideology; End of Ideology Debate; End of History Debate. 

UNIT-II Post Modernism; Communitarianism, Green Political Theory (Environment); 

Feminism. 

UNIT-III Theories of Liberty, Equality, Justice & Democracy. 

UNIT-IV Theories of Change: Lenin, Mao & Gandhi. 

Readings: 

1. Sir, I. Berlin, Does Political Theory Still Exist? In Philosophy, Politics and Society, 2nd series, 

ed. P. Laslett and W.G. Runciman, Oxford, Blackwell, 1964. 

2. A.Cobban, ‘The Decline of Political Theory,’ Political Science Quarterly, 1953, LXVIII, pp. 

321-337. 

3. Dobson, Green Political Thought, London, Unwin Hyman, 1990. 

4. D. Easton, The future of the postbehavioural phase in political science, in Contemporary 

Empirical Political Theory, K. R. Monroe (ed.), Berkeley, University of California Press, 1997. 

5. F. Fukuyama, The End of History and the last Man, Harmondsworth, Penguins, 1992. 

6. D. Germino, Beyond Ideology: The Revival of Political Theory, New York, Harper and Row, 

1967. 

7. R. E. Goodin, Green Political Theory, Cambridge, Polity Press, 1992. 


8. A.Hacker, Political Theory: Philosophy, Ideology and Science, New York, Macmillan, 1961. 

9. D. Held, Political Theory Today, Cambridge, Polity Press, 1991. 

10. A.Heywood, Political Theory: An Introduction, London, Macmillan, 1999. 

11. S. Mulhall and A. Swift, Liberals and Communitarians, Oxford, Basil Blackwell, 1992. 

12. G.H. Sabine, What is Political Theory?, Journal of Politics, 1939, 1(1). 

13. L. Strauss, What is Political Philosophy and Other Studies? Glencoe, The Free Press, 1959. 

14. R. J. Bernstein (ed.), Habermas and Modernity, Cambridge, Polity Press, 1985. 

15. S. Benhabib, The Reluctant Modernism of Hannah Arendt, Thousand Oaks California, Sage, 

1996. 

16. R. Grant, Oakeshott, London, Claridge Press, 1990. 

17. N. P. Barry, Hayek’s Social and Economic Philosophy, London, Macmillan, 1979. 

18. E Butler, Hayek : His Contribution to the Political and Economic Thought of Our Time, 

Hounslow, Temple Smith, 1983. 

19. C. Kukathas, Hayek and Modern Liberalism, Oxford, The Clarendon Press, 1989. 

20. J. Wolff (ed.), Robert Nozick : Property, Justice and the Minimal State, Oxford Polity with 

Basil Blackwell, 1991. 

Paper: XVII (Compulsory) Comparative Politics-II 

10(840) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I Political Elites, Party Systems, Pressure Groups. 

Unit-II Electoral Systems & Electoral Processes, Separation of Powers and Checks and 

Balances. 

Unit-III Rule of Law, Judicial Review, Bureaucracy- Roles and Problems. 

Unit-IV Theories of Social Change, Social and New Social Movements. 

Readings : 

1. G.A. Almond and J.S. Coleman, The Politics of the Developing Areas, Princeton NJ, 


2. G.A. Almond, and S. Verba, The Civic Culture : Political Attitudes and Democracy in Five 

Nations, Princeton NJ, Princeton University Press, 1963. 

3. G.A. Almond, Comparative Politics Today : A World View, 7th edn., New York, London, 

Harper/Collins, 2000. 


4. D.E. Apter, The Politics of Modernization, Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1965. 

5. A.Bebler and J. Seroka (eds.), Contemporary Political Systems: Classifications and 

Typologies, Boulder Colerado, Lynne Reinner Publishers, 1990. 

6. L.J.Cantori and A.H. Zeigler (ed.), Comparative Politics in the Post-Behaviouralist Era, 

London, Lynne Reinner Publisher, 1988. 

7. O. Dunleavy and B.O’ Leary, Theories of Liberal Democratic State, London, Macmillan, 

1987. 

8. R. Hauge and M. Harrop, Comparative Government and Politics. An Introduction, 5th edn., 

New York, Palgrave, 2001. 

9. H. Finer, Theory and Practice of Modern Government, London, Methuen, 1969. 

10. J.C. Johari, Comparative Political Theory: New Dimensions, Basic Concepts and Major 

Trends, New Delhi, Sterling, 1987. 

11. K. Kumar, Revolution : The Theory and Practice of a European Idea, London, Weidenfeld 

and Nicolson, 1971. 

12. R.C. Macridis, The Study of Comparative Government, New York, Doubleday, 1955. 

13. R.C. Macridis and R.E. Ward, Modern Political Systems : Europe, and Asia, 2nd edn. 


14. J. Manor (ed.), Rethinking Third World Politics, London, Longman, 1991. 

15. R.C. Macridis, Modern European Governments : Cases in Comparative Policy - Making, 


16. L.W. Pey (ed.), Communication and Political Development, Princeton NJ, Princeton 


17. R.I. Rotberg (ed.), Politics and Political Change : A Journal of Inter-Disciplinary History 

Reader, Massachusetts, MIT Press, 2001. 

18. H.J. Wiarda (ed.), New Developments in Comparative Politics, Boulder Colorado, 


19. Prabir De, Comparative Politics, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

Group-A: Paper- XVIII, XIX & XX (Opt. i) 

India’s Foreign Policy & Relations-II 

10(841) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I India’s Relations with Big Neighbours – China and Pakistan 

UNIT-II Relations with Small Neighbours – Bangladesh, Bhutan, Sri Lanka, Nepal 


UNIT-III Relations with Different Regions and Associations – West Asia, Southeast Asia, 

Central Asian Republics. SAARC, ASEAN, NAM and UN. 

UNIT-IV Major Challenges to Foreign policy – defence and Nuclear Policy, Human Rights, 

Cross Border Terrorism and Environmental Position, Assessment of Foreign Policy. 

Readings : 

1. R.S. Yadav, Bharat Ki Videsh Niti: Ek Vishleshan (in Hindi), Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

2. R.S. Yadav & Suresh Dhanda, eds., India’s Foreign Policy: Contemporary Trends, New 

Delhi, Shipra, 2009. 

3. R.S. Yadav (ed.), India’s Foreign Policy Towards 2000 A.D., New Delhi, Deep & Deep, 

1993. 

4. J.N. Dixit, Across Border: Fifty Years of India’s Foreign Policy, New Delhi, 1999. 

5. J. Bandhopahdyaya, The Making of India’s Foreign Policy, Calcutta, Allied, 1979. 

6. V.P. Dutt, India’s Foreign Policy in a Changing World, New Delhi, Vikas, 1999. 

7. N.K. Jha (ed.), India’s Foreign Policy in a Changing World, New Delhi, South Asian 


8. H. Kapur, India’s Foreign Policy : 1947-1993, New Delhi, Sage, 1994. 

9. N. Jetley, India’s Foreign Policy : Challenges and Prospects, New Delhi, Janaki Prakashan, 

1985. 

10. S. Mansingh (ed.), India’s Foreign Policy in the 21st Century, New Delhi, Foreign Policy 

Institute, 1999. 

11. R. Thakur, Politics and Economics of India’s Foreign Policy, Delhi, Oxford University 

Press, 1993. 

12. C. Raja Mohan, Crossing The Rubicon: The Shaping of India’s New Foreign Policy, New 

Delhi, Viking, 2003. 

13. N.S. Sisodia & C. Uday Bhaskar, eds., Emerging India: Security and Foreign Policy 

Perspective, New Delhi, Promilla, 2007. 

14. Rajen Harshe & K.M. Seethi, eds., Engaging with the World: Critical Reflections on India’s 

Foreign Policy, New Delhi, Orientlongman, 2005. 

15. Anand Mathur & Sohanlal Meena, eds., India Profile in Polycentric World Order, Jaipur, 

RBSA, 2008. 

16. Annpurna Nantiyal, ed., Challenges to India’s Foreign Policy in the New Era, New Delhi, 

2006. 

17. Atish Sinha & Madhup Mahota, eds., Indian Foreign Policy: Challenges and Opportunities, 

New Delhi, Academic, 2007. 

18. Anjali Ghosh & others, India’s Foreign Policy, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012. 

10(842) 


Group-A: Paper- XVIII, XIX & XX (Opt. ii) 

International Law-II 

10(843) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I War and its effects; Enemy Character; Means for Settlement of Disputes – Amicable 

and Coercive. 

UNIT-II Laws of War – Land, Aerial and Maritime Warfare, Legality of Instruments of 

Warfare. 

UNIT-III Termination of War, Treatment of POWs, War Crimes, Prize Courts. 

Neutrality – Definition, Status, Rights and Duties, Blockade and Contraband. 

UNIT-IV Cooperative Law – Laws of Sea, Laws of Outer Space and Environmental 

Conferences. 

Readings : 


Edition. 




5. K. Deutsc and S. Hoffman (ed.), The Relevance of International Law, Oxford, Clarendon Press, 

1955. 


7. W. Friedmann, The Changing Structure of International Law, New York, Columbia University 

Press, 1964. 



Press, 1928. 





13. Sir J.F. Williams, Aspects of Modern International Law, New York, Oxford University Press, 

1939. 


Group-A: Paper- XVIII, XIX & XX (Opt. iii) 

International Organization and Global Order Studies-II 

10(844) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I Approaches to International Organization: Disarmament, Preventive Diplomacy, 

Grand Debate, Trusteeship and Functional Approaches to Peace. 

UNIT-II International Organization and World Order Models: Assessment of World Order 

Models of Clark-Sohn, Richard Falk, Marxian, Mahatma Gandhi and Rajni Kothari. 

UNIT-III UN and Major International Crisis: Korean, Arab-Israel, Kashmir, Iraq 

UNIT-IV UN & Contemporary Issues: Human Rights, Environment, Gender & Terrorism, 

Revision of UN Charter; Assessment of UN System. 

Readings : 

1. Richard K. Ashley, “The Eye of Power : The Politics of World Modelling,” International 

Organization, Vol. 37, No. 3, 1983. 

2. Inis Claude, Changing United Nations, New York, Random House, 1967. 

3. Inis Claude, Swords into ploughshares : The Problems and Progress of International 

organisations, New York, Random House, 1971. 

4. S.J.R. Bilgrami, International Organisation, New Delhi, Vikas, 1971. 

5. E. Laurd, A History of the United Nations, London, Macmillan, 1989. 

6. R.C. Angell, The Quest for World Order, Ann Arbor, University of Michigan Press, 1979. 

7. A.L. Bennett, International Organizations : Principles and Issues, Englewood Cliffs NJ, 


8. H.G. Nicholas, The UN as a Political Institution, Oxford, Oxford University Press, 1975. 

9. W.H. Lewis (ed.), The Security Role of the United Nations, New York, Praegar, 1991. 

10. Ronald Meltzer, “Restructuring the UN System, Institutional Reform, Efforts in the Context of 

North-South Relations,” International Organization, vol. 32, No. 4, 1978. 

11. Ronald Yalem, “Conflicting Approaches to World Order,” Alternatives, Vol. 5, 1979-1980. 

12. P. Baehr and L. Gordenker, The United Nations in the 1990s, London, Oxford University Press, 

1992. 

13. Rikhey, Strengthening UN Peace keeping, London, Hurst and Co., 1993. 

14. K. P. Saxena, Reforming the United Nations : The Challenge and Relevance, New Delhi, Sage, 

1993. 


Group-A: Paper- XVIII, XIX & XX (Opt. iv) 

South Asia in International Politics-II 

10(845) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I Globalization and Its Impact on South Asia 

UNIT-II South Asian Development in Comparative Perspective 

UNIT-III Perspectives on National Security in South Asia 

UNIT-IV Efforts Towards Conflict Resolution and Future Prospects. 

Readings : 

1. Sugata Bose and Ayesha Jalal, Modern South Asia: History, Culture, Political Economy 

(Delhi: OUP, 1999). 

2. Ayesha Jalal, Democracy and Authoritarianism in South Asia (New Delhi: CUP, 1995). 

3. P.R. Chari (ed.), Perspectives on National Security in South Asia: In Search of a New 

Paradigm (New Delhi: Manohar, 1999). 

4. Sridhar K. Khatri and G.W. Kueck (eds.), Terrorism in South Asia (Delhi: Shipra Pub., 

2003). 

5. Raja Menon, A Nuclear Strategy for India (New Delhi: Sage, 2000). 

6. George Perkovich, India’s Nuclear Bomb (Delhi: OUP, 2001). 

7. Robbie Robertson, The Three Waves of Globalization (London: Zed Books, 2003). 

8. Linda Racioppi, Soviet Policy towards South Asia since 1970 (Cambridge: CUP, 1994). 

9. Dilip H. Mohite and Amit Dholakia (eds.), India and the Emerging World Order (New 

Delhi: Kalinga Pub., 2001). 

10. Lars Blinkenberg, India – Pakistan: The History of Unsolved Conflicts, Vol. 1&2 

(Odense: Odense University Press, 1998). 

11. K. Ahuja, H. Coppens and Hermen van der Wusten (eds.), Regime Transformations and 

Global Realignments (New Delhi: Sage, 1993). 

12. Mohammad Ayoob (ed.), Conflict and Intervention in the Third World (New Delhi: 

Vikas Pub., 1980). 

13. A.P. Rana, The Imperatives of Nonalignment (Delhi: The Macmillan Company of India 

Ltd., 1976). 

14. J.N. Dixit, India’s Foreign Policy 1947 – 2003 (New Delhi: Picus Books, 2003). 


Group-B: Paper- XVIII, XIX & XX (Opt. i) 

Political Sociology: The Indian Context-II 

10(846) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I Political Culture – Meaning, Nature and Types, Political Culture in India, Political 

Socialization in India: Leadership, Masses and Social Mobility, State Power 

UNIT-II Social Differentiation and Democracy in India: Ethnic, Communal, Language and 

Regional Differentiations; The Rural-Urban Divide. 

Socio-Cultural Ethos; Social Change in India – Sanskritization, Westernization and 

Secularization, Tradition and Modernity, Post-Modernity. 

UNIT-III Society, State and Politics in Contemporary India; Regionalization of Politics; Role 

of Political Parties; Pressure Groups and Interest Groups. 

UNIT-IV Forms of Political Dissent and Protest, Terrorism and Politics of Violence, Role of 

Clergy in Politics; Role of Foreign Elements Influencing the Society, State and 

Politics. NGO’s – Role, Function and Limitations. 

Readings : 

1. G.A. Almond and S. Verba, The Civic Culture, Princeton NJ, Princeton University Press, 

1963. 

2. S. Bayly, Caste, Society and Politics in India from the Eighteenth Century to the Modern 

Age, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 1999. 

3. R. Bendix, and S.M. Lipset, Class, Status and Power, 2nd edn., New York, The Free Press, 

1966. 

4. P.R. Brass, Caste, Faction and Party in Indian Politics, Vols. 2, Delhi, Chankya Publication, 

1984-85. 

5. P.R. Brass, Ethnicity and Nationalism : Theory and Comparison, New Delhi, Sage, 1991. 

6. R.E. Dawson and K. Prewitt, Political Socialization, Boston, Little Brown, 1969. 



8. M. Galanter, Competing Equalities : Law and the Backward Classes in India, Berkley, 


9. M. Janowitz, Political Conflict : Essays in Political Sociology, New York, New Viewpoints, 

Watts, 1970. 

10. R. Kothari, Caste and Politics in India, New Delhi, Orient Longman, 1970. 


12. R. Kothari, Democratic Polity and Social Change in India, Delhi, Allied, 1976. 

13. L.Milbrath, Political Participation, Skokie Illinois, Rand-McNally, 1965. 

14. T.K. Oomen, Protest and Change : Studies in Social Movements, New Delhi, Sage, 1990. 

15. M.N. Srinivas, Caste in Modern India and Other Essays, Bombay, Asia Publishing House, 

1962. 

16. M.N. Srinivas, The Cohesive Role of Sanskritization and Other Essays, Delhi, Oxford 

University Pres, 1989. 

Group-B: Paper- XVIII, XIX & XX (Opt. ii) 

State Politics in India (with special reference to Haryana)-II 

10(847) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I Regionalism in India, Rise of Regional Parties – Causes and Impact on State 

Politics. 

UNIT-II State Autonomy: Concept, Rajamannar Committee Report, Arguments for and 

Against State Autonomy. 

Centre-State Relations: Area of Conflict, Sarkaria Commission’s Report. 

UNIT-III Office of the Governor, Governor’s Discretionary Powers, Politics of President’s 

Rule in the States. 

UNIT-IV Panchayati Raj System in India and Its Impact on State Politics, Politics of Party 

Splits and Merger. 


Readings : 


Press, 1966. 

2. A.Chanda, Federalism in India : A Study of Union-State Relations, London, George Allen 

& Unwin, 1965. 

3. P.Chatterjee (ed.), States and Politics in India, Delhi, Oxford University Press, 1997. 

4. A.Kohli, Democracy and Discontent : India’s Growing Crisis of Governability, Cambridge, 



6. I.Narain (ed.), State Politics in India, Meerut, Meenakshi Parkashan, 1967. 

7. S. Pai, State Politics : New Dimensions : Party System, Liberalization and Politics of 

Identity, Delhi, 2000. 

8. Prem Choudhary, Punjab Politics - The Role of Sir Chhotu Ram, Delhi, Vikas, 1984. 

9. S.C. Mittal, Haryana : A Historical Perspective, New Delhi, Atlantic Publishers, 1986. 

10. K.C. Yadav, Hayana Ka Itihas, 3 Volumes, New Delhi, Macmillan India Ltd., 1981. 

11. P.D. Sharma, Legislative Elite in India : A Study in Political, Socialization, Kurukshetra, 

Vishal, 1984. 

12. Ramesh Kumar, Regionalization of Politics in India, New Delhi, Mohit Publication, 1996. 

13. Harinder K. Chhabra, State Politics in India, Delhi, Surjeet Publications, 1980. 

14. B.L. Fadia, State Politics in India, Vol I & II, New Delhi, Radiant Publishes, 1984. 

15. O.P. Goel, Caste and Voting Behaviour, New Delhi, Ritu Publishers, 1981. 

16. Subhash C. Kashyap, The Politics of Defection - A Study of State Politics in India, Delhi, 

National Publishing House, 1969. 

17. S.Y. Qureshi, Haryana Rediscovered, Gurgaon, Indian Documentation Service, 1985. 

18. T.R. Sharma (ed.), New Challenges of Politics in Indian States, New Delhi, Uppal 


19. P. Choudhary, The Veiled Women : Shifting Gender Equations in Rural Haryana 1880- 

1990, Delhi, Oxford University Press, 1994. 

20. Other Readings : Journal of Haryana Studies, Kurukshetra University Research Journal of 

Arts and Humanities. 

Group-B: Paper- XVIII, XIX & XX (Opt. iii) 

Democracy in India-II 

10(848) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 


UNIT-I: Socio-Economic Determinants of Indian Democracy: Caste, Class, Language, 

Religion and Region. Poverty – Policies and Programmes of its alleviation. 

Legislative Behaviour; Parliamentary Vs. Presidential Model, Majoritarian Vs. 

Representational Parliamentary System 

UNIT-II: Indian Democracy at Grass Root Level: Urban and Rural Local Government. 

Social and Protest Movements in India; Social Movement and the Democratic 

Process, Politics of Gender Issue, Role of Women in Political Process, Dalit Politics. 

UNIT-III: Coalition Politics: Nature and Bases, Experiment of Coalition Government in India, 

Ruralization of Politics in India, Politicization of Peripheral Groups. 

UNIT-IV: Politics of Agitation cum violence in India, Problems of Nation Building and 

National Integration. Criminalization of Politics, Emerging Trends and Future of 

Democracy in India. 

Readings : 

1. P. Brass, The Politics of India Since Independence, 2nd edn., Cambridge, Cambridge 


2. N. Chandhoke, Beyond Secularism : The Rights of Religious Minorities, Delhi, Oxford 


3. P. Chatterjee (ed.), States and Politics in India, Delhi, Oxford University Press, 1997. 

4. N. Jayal (ed.), Democracy in India, Delhi, Oxford University Press, 2001. 

5. Kohli, Democracy and Discontent : India’s Growing Crisis of Governability, Cambridge, 


6. Kohli (ed.), The Success of India’s Democracy, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 

2001. 

7. R. Kothari, Politics in India, Delhi, Orient Longman, 1970. 

8. S. Kothari, Social Movement and the Redefinition of Democracy, Boulder Colorado, 


9. W. H. Morris-Jones, Politics Mainly Indian, Delhi, Orient Longman, 1978. 

10. S. Mukherjee, ‘Relating Parliamentary Democracy in India,’ Denoument, 9, January- 

February, 1999. 

11. J. K. Ray, Indian in Search of Good Governance, Calcutta, K.P. Bagchi, 2001. 

12. M.N. Srinivas, Social Change in Modern India, Bombay, Allied Publishers, 1966. 

13. Varshney (ed.), The Indian Paradox: Essays in Indian Politics, New Delhi, Sage, 1989. 

Group-B: Paper- XVIII, XIX & XX (Opt. iv) 

Indian Political Economy-II 

10(849) 




Time: 3 Hours 







marks. 

UNIT-I Process of State Formation in India; History and Legacy; Nation Building – Major 

Challenges; Character and Nature of Indian Contemporary State; State and Ideology: 

Capitalist, Socialist, Welfare Interventionist and Centrist-Authoritarian. 

UNIT-II Foreign Capital, Need and Forms of Foreign Capital, Politicization of Foreign Aid; 

Factors Leading to Liberalization of Indian Economy; Major Issues of 

Contemporary Indian Economy. 

UNIT-III Evolution of Public Sector in India, Role of Public Sector, Causes for the Expansion 

of Public Sector Enterprises, Performance and Short-comings of Public Sectors 

Enterprises. 

UNIT-IV Private and Joint Sector in India, The Government and Role of Private Sector in 

India, Problems and Prospects of Private Sector, Origin, Evolution and Rationale of 

Public-Private Partnership. 

Readings : 

1. A.Abdul, Poverty Alleviation in India : Policies and programmes, New Delhi, Ashish, 1994. 

2. I.J. Ahluwalia, and I.M.D. Little, India’s Economic Reforms and Development, Delhi, 


3. P. Bardhan, The Political Economy of Development in India, Oxford Blackwell, 1984. 

4. A.Beteille, Studies in Agrarian Social Structure, Delhi, Oxford University Press, 1977. 

5. Bhaduri, The Economic Structure of Backward Agriculture, London, Academic Press, 1983. 

6. R. Cassen and V. Joshi (eds.), India : The Future of Economic Reform, Delhi, Oxford 


7. P. Chaudhuri, The Indian Economy : Poverty and Development, New Delhi, Vikas, 1979. 

8. V.M. Dandekar, Poverty in India, Pune, Gokhale Institute of Politics and Economics, 1971. 


10. F. Frankel, India’s Green Revolution : Economic Gains and Political Costs, Princeton NJ, 


11. F. Frankel, India’s Political Economy, 1947-77 : The Gradual Revolution, Princeton NJ, 


12. Ghosh, Indian Economy : Its Nature and Problems, 22nd revised edn., Calcutta, World 

Press, 1979-80. 

13. R. Khator, Environment, Development and Politics in India, Lanham, Md, University Press 

of America, 1991. 

14. Kohli, The State and Poverty in India : Politics of Reform, Cambridge, Cambridge 


15. R. Lucas and G. Papanek (eds.), The Indian Economy : Recent Developments and Future 

Prospects, Delhi, Oxford University Press, 1988. 

16. G. Myradal, Asian Drama : An Inquiry into the Poverty of Nations, Harmondsworth, 

Penguin, 1968. 

10(850) 


17. P. Patnaik, “Imperialism and the growth of Indian capitalism,” in R. Owen and R. Sutcliffe 

(eds.), Theories of Imperialism, London, Longman, 1972. 

18. R.I. Rudolph and S.H. Rudolph, In Pursuit of Lakshmi : The Political Economy of the 

Indian State, Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1987. 

19. A.Sen, The State, Industrialization and Class Formation in India, London, Routledge and 

Kegan Paul, 1982. 

20. P. Verma, The Great Indian Middle Class, Delhi, Viking, 1998. 

Group-C: Paper- XVIII, XIX & XX (Opt. i) 

Government & Politics of USA-II 

10(851) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I Political Parties: Nature, Principles, Working & Role in US System. 

UNIT-II Pressure Groups: Working, Nature, Composition & Role. 

UNIT-III Public Opinion, Bureaucracy, Media, Voting Behaviour. 

UNIT-IV State Legislative and Administrative Setup and Local Administration in the USA. 

Readings: 

1. Shafter, Political Parties and the State, 1994. 

2. Fowler, Linda, Candidates, Congress, and the American Democracy, 1993. 

3. Torres-Gill, The New Aging: Politics and Change in America, 1992. 

4. Galbraith, J. The Culture of Contentment, 1992. 

5. Wald, Kenneth, Religion and Politics in the United States, 1992. 

6. Updike, John. Memories of the Ford Administration, 1992. 

7. Hartz, Louis, The Liberal Tradition in America, 1991. 

8. Jacobson, Gary, The electoral origins of divided government, 1990. 

9. Maisel, Louis, The Parties Respond: Changes in the American Party System, 1990. 

10. Weisbrot, Freedom Bound: A History of America’s Civil Rights Movement, 1990. 

11. Adoni, Hanna, Social Conflict and Television News, 1990. 


Group-C: Paper- XVIII, XIX & XX (Opt. ii) 

USA and the World-II 

10(852) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I Role of USA in Major Global Crisis: Cuban, Korean, Arab-Israel, Kashmir. 

UNIT-II USA and Arms Control & Disarmament. 

UNIT-III USA’s role in Global Economic Regimes: IBRD, IMF, GATT & WTO, 

Globalization & Hegemony and discrimination in New World Order. 

UNIT-IV USA and Issues of War and Peace: Peace Keeping, Humanitarian Interventions, 

Collective Security, Pre-emptive Attacks, Human Rights Concerns. 

Readings: 

1. Dennis Kux, India and the United States, Estranged Democracies, 1941-1991 (National 

Defense University Press, Washington, 1992). 

2. Dennis Kux, The United and Pakistan, 1947-2000: Disenchanted Allies (John Hopkins 

University Press, Baltimore, 2001). 

3. Strobe Talbott, Engaging India: Diplomacy, Democracy and the Bomb (Penguin, 2004). 

4. Kanishkvan Sathasivam, Uneasy Neighbors: India, Pakistan and US Foreign Policy 

(Ashgate Publication, Burlington, Vt., 2005). 

5. John Spanier and Steven Hook, American Foreign Policy Since World War II (13 th Ed., 

Washington, D.C., Congressional Quarterly Press, 1995). 

6. James David Meernik, The Political Use of Military Force in US Foreign Policy 

(Ashgate Publications, Burlington, VT., 2004). 

7. Margaret P., Karns and Karen A. Mingst, eds., The United States and Multilateral 

Institutions (Boston, Unwin Hyman, 1990). 

8. Bruce W., Jentleson, American Foreign Policy: The Dynamics of Choice in the 21 st 

Century (New York, W.W., Norton, 2000). 

9. Robert Wirsing, Kashmir in the Shadow of War: Regional Rivalries in Nuclear Age 

(Spring Books, India, 2004). 

Group-C: Paper- XVIII, XIX & XX (Opt. iii) 

USA and Asia Pacific 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 


UNIT-I: US interest in Asia-Pacific: Traditional and Contemporary 

UNIT-II: US Policy Towards South East Asian States 

UNIT-III: US Policy toward China & Japan 

UNIT-IV: US Security Concern in Australia & New Zealand and Challenges and Problems in 

Asia Pacific and American Response. 

Readings: 

1. Chronis Polychroniou. “Rise and Fall of US Imperialism” Economic and Political Weekly 

30, no. 30 (July 29, 1995), 

2. Andrew Bacevich, An American Empire (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 

2002). 

3. Charles Kupchan, The End of the American Era: US Foreign Policy and the Geopolitics of 

the Twenty-First Century (New York: Knopf, 2002), 

4. Chalmers Johnson, Blowback: The Costs and Consequences of American Empire (New 

York: Metropolitan Books, 2000), 

5. C. George Herring, America’s Logest War: The United States and Vietnam, 1950-1975 

(New York: McGraw, 1996). 

6. Antony, Cordesman, The Iraq War (Washington, DC: Center for Strategic and International 

Studies, 2003). 

7. Coulon, Jocelyn, Soldiers of Diplomacy: The United Nations, Peacekeeping and the New 

World Order (Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1998). 

8. Ignatieff, Michael, Virtual War: Kosovo and Beyond (New York: Holt, 2000). 

9. Safran, Nadav, From War to War: A Study of the Arab-Israel Confrontation 1948-97 (New 

York: Pegasus, 1969). 

10. R.A. Cossa, Restructuring the US-Japan Alliance, Washington DC, CSIS Press, 1997. 

Group-C: Paper- XVIII, XIX & XX (Opt. iv) 

USA and United Nations 

10(853) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I US Role in the Formation of the United Nations and American Attitude Towards 

Socio-Economic Activities in the UN. 

UNIT-II UN Coercive Settlement & Role of USA. 

UNIT-III US Role in the Peace-Keeping Operations of the UN and Non-Conventional Threats. 

UNIT-IV USA’s Role in Arms Control & Disarmament activities of the UN. 


Readings: 

1. John Allphin Moore and Jr. Jerry Pubantz. The New United Nations: International 

Organization in the Twenty-First Century (Upper Saddle River, New Jersey : Pearson 

Prentice Hall, 2006), 

2. Jasper, William F. Global Tyranny Step By Step: The United Nations and the Emerging 

World Order (Appleton, WI: Western Islands 1992 

3. U.S. Security,” International Security 25 (Spring 2001). 

4. Chomsky, Noam (2006), Failed States: The Abuse of Power and the Assault on Democracy, 

New York, New York, United States: Holt Paperbacks 

5. Niall Ferguson, Colossus: The Price of America’s Empire (New York: Penguin, 2004). 

6. John Genard Ruggie, “The United States and United Nations” International Organization 

Vol.39, No.2, 1985, p.343-56. 

7. James Alan, The Politics of Peacekeeping, Chetto & Windus, London,1969. 

Group-D: Paper- XVIII, XIX & XX (Opt. i) 

Ancient Indian Political Thought-II 

10(854) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I Valmiki and Vyasa, Shukra. 

UNIT-II Brahaspati, Shantiparva; Kamandaka Nitisara. 

UNIT-III Theories of the origin of state: Theory of property, family and Varna regarding the 

origin; the contract theory; Vedic popular assemblies; Sabha, Samiti, Gana & 

Vidatha, Kautilya’s Saptanga and Mandala Theory. 

UNIT-IV Republics (tribal and oligarchal republics, nature of republican administration) and 

Kingship (forms & types: Divine theory, training of the Prince, Functions of the 

King, Limitation on Monarchy. 

Readings : 


2. D.R. Bhandarkar, Some Aspects of Ancient Hindu Polity, Varanasi, Banaras Hindu 

University, 1963. 

3. U.N. Ghoshal, A History of Hindu Political Theories, Calcutta, Oxford University Press, 

1966. 

4. R.P. Kangle, Kautilya’s Arthashastra, Bombay, University of Bombay, 1972. 

5. R.K. Mukherji, Local Government in Ancient India, Oxford, Oxford University Press, 1920. 

6. B.Prasad, The State in Ancient India, Allahabad, University of Allahabad, 1960. 

7. C.Radhakrishna, Kautilya’s Political Ideas and Institutions, Varanasi, Chowkhamba 

Sanskrit Series Office, 1971. 


8. B.A. Saletroe, Ancient Indian Political Thought and Institutions, Bombay, University of 

Bombay, 1963. 

9. R. Shamasastry, Evolution of Indian Polity, Calcutta, 1920. 

10. J.P.Sharma, Republics in Ancient India, London, Leiden E.J., Brill, 1968. 

11. R.S. Sharma, Aspects of Political Ideas and Institutions in Ancient India, Delhi, 1959. 

12. J. Spellman, The Political Theory of Ancient India, Oxford, The Clarendon press, 1964. 

13. V.P. Varma, Studies in Hindu Political Thought and Its Metaphysical Foundations, Dehli, 


Group-D: Paper- XVIII, XIX & XX (Opt. ii) 

Modern Indian Political Thought-II 

10(855) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I: Gandhi; Vinoba Bhave. 

UNIT-II: M.N. Roy; Rajni Palme Dutt. 

UNIT-III: Ram Manohar Lohia; Jai Prakash Narayan. 

UNIT-IV: Ambedkar; Periyar. 

Readings : 

1. Appadorai, Indian Political Thinking Through the Ages, Delhi Khanna Publishers, 1992. 

2. J. Bandhopahdyaya, Social and Political Thought of Gandhi, Bombay, Allied, 1969. 

3. R.J. Cashman, The Myth of ‘Lokmanya’ Tilak and Mass Politics in Maharashtra, Berkeley, 


4. S.Ghose, Socialism, Democracy and Nationalism in India, Bombay, Allied Publishers, 

1973. 


6. J.P. Haitheox, Communism and Nationalism in India : M.N. Roy and Comintern Policy, 


7. R. Iyer, The Moral and Political Thought of Mahatma Gandhi, Delhi, Oxford University 

Press, 1973. 

8. K.N. Kadam (ed.), Dr. B.R. Ambedkar, New Delhi, Sage, 1992. 

9. K.P. Karunakaran, Indian Politics from Dababhai Naoroji to Gandhi : A Study of Political 

Ideas of Modern India, New Delhi, Gitanjali, 1975. 

10. U. Kaura, Muslims and Indian Nationalism, New Delhi, Manohar, 1977. 


11. R.M. Lohia, Marx, Gandhi and Socialism, Hyderabad, Nav Hind, 1953. 

12. V.R.Mehta, Foundations of Indian Political Thought, New Delhi, Manohar, 1992. 

13. V.S. Narvane, Modern Indian Thought, New Delhi, Orient Longman, 1978. 

14. D.P. Roy, Leftist Politics in India : M. N. Roy and the Radical Democratic Party, Calcutta, 


15. V.P. Verma, Modern Indian Political Thought, Agra, Lakshmi Narain Aggarwal, 1974. 

Group-D: Paper- XVIII, XIX & XX (Opt. iii) 

Recent Trends in Liberalism 

10(856) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I Liberal Democrats and Egalitarians: C.B. Macpherson, Isaiah Berlian, Rowls, 

Dworkin. 

UNIT-II Libertarian: Hayek, Nozick. 

UNIT-III Communitarian Liberal: Walzer, Charles Taylor. 

UNIT-IV Recent Critics of Liberalism: Post Modernist, Feminist and Marxists; Emerging 

Trends in Liberalism. 

Readings: 

1. A.Arblaster, The Rise and Decline of Western Liberalism, Oxford, Blackwell, 1984. 

2. R. Bellamy (ed.), Victorian Liberalism : Nineteenth Century Political Thought and Practice, 

Cambridge, Polity Press, 1990. 

3. Z. Brzezinski and Staff of the Research Institute of International Change (eds.), The 

Relevance of Liberalism, Boulder Colorado, Westview Press, 1978. 

4. N.Daniels (ed.), Reading Rawls, New York, Basic Books, 1975. 

5. M.Freeden, The New Liberalism, Oxford and New York, Oxford University Press, 1978. 

6. J. Gray, Liberalism, Delhi, World View, 1998. 

7. A.J. Manning, Liberalism, London, John Dent & Sons, 1976. 

8. J. Rawls, Political Liberalism, New York, Columbia University Press, 1993. 

9. J. Rawls, The Law of Peoples: The Idea of Public Reason Revisited, Cambridge 

Massachusetts, Harvard University Press, 1999. 

10. F.H. Watkins, The Age of Ideology - Political Thought from 1750 to the Present, New 

Delhi, Prentice Hall, 1961. 


Group-D: Paper- XVIII, XIX & XX (Opt. iv) 

Marxist and Neo-Marxist Political Theory-II 

10(857) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

UNIT-I Existentialist Marxism: Frederick Nietzsche, Martin Heidegger, Jean Paul Sartre 

UNIT-II Western Marxism: Bernstein, Althusser 

UNIT-III Critical Theorist: Herbert Marcuse, Jurgen Habermas 

UNIT-IV Theorist of Revolutionary Change: Ernest Lacan, Chantal Mouffe 

Readings : 

Beyond Marxism: Miliband, Poulantaz; Future of Marxism 

1. P. Anderson, Considerations on Western Marxism, London, Verso, 1976. 

2. E. Bernstein, Evolutionary Socialism, New York, Schoken Books, 1961. 

3. R. Blackburn (ed.), After the Fall : The Failure of Communism and Future of Socialism, 

London, Verso, 1991. 

4. G.D.H. Cole, A History of Socialist Thought, 5 Vols., London, Macmillan, 1953-60. 

5. J. Dunn, Modern Revolutions, London, the Clarendon Press, 1988. 

6. Gramsci, Selections for Prison Notebooks, edited and translated by Quintin Hoare and 

Geoffery Nowell-Smith, London, Lawrence and Wishart, 1971. 

7. S. Mukherjee and S. Ramaswamy, A History of Socialist Thought, From the Precursors to 

the Present, New Delhi, Sage, 2000. 

8. S. Hoffman, Marx and the Theory of Praxis, London, Oxford University Press, 1977. 

9. L. Kolakowski, Main Currents of Marxism 3 Vols., Oxford, Oxford University, 1981. 

10. R. Miliband, The State in the Capitalist Society, London, Weidenfeld and Nicholson, 1969. 

11. R. Miliband, Marxism and Politics, Oxford, Oxford University Press, 1977. 

12. N. Poulantaz, Political Power and Social Classes, London, New Left Books, 1973. 


13. N. Poulantaz, Classes in Contemporary Capitalism, London, New Left Books, 1975. 

14. V. Verma, Justice, Equality and Community: An Essary in Marxist Political Theory, New 

Delhi, Sage, 1999. 

10(858) 


SYLLABUS OF M.A. (PREVIOUS) HUMAN RIGHTS (SEMESTER 

SYSTEM) SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS AND COURSES OF 

READING (w.e.f. 2012-13) 

M.A. Human Rights Course shall be a two years Degree Course of 2000 Marks 

consisting of four Semesters. The candidate shall take 5 Papers in each 

Semester, i.e. 20 Papers in the full Course. Each Paper will carry 100 marks 

out of which 20 marks shall be earmarked for 

Internal Assessment. 

M.A. (Previous) Human Rights 1 st & 2 nd Semester: 

There shall be 5 Core Papers. 

M.A. (Final) Political Science 3 rd & 4 th Semester: 

There shall be 2 Core Papers and 3 Optional Papers. The candidate is to opt for 

any 1 Groups, consisting of 3 Papers each. 

Note:- 

The Candidate opting for a particular Optional Paper/Group in the Odd Semester shall take the 

same Optional Paper/Group in the Even Semester. The choice of the Optional Papers in M.A. 

Course shall be determined on the basis of merit. However, the Department shall decide the 

number of Optional papers to be offered in the Department in a particular year. 

Human Rights 

M.A. (Previous) Human Rights, Semester-I 


Paper-I Historical and Philosophical Perspectives of Human 

Rights 

100 Marks 3 Hours 

Paper-II Human Rights and Criminal Justice System in India 100 Marks 3 Hours 

Paper-III International Human Rights System 100 Marks 3 Hours 

Paper-IV Human Rights and Duties in India 100 Marks 3 Hours 

Paper-V Research Methodology-I 100 Marks 3 Hours 

10(859) 



M.A. (Previous) Human Rights, Semester – I 

Paper-I: Historical and Philosophical Perspectives of Human Rights 




Time: 3 Hours 


questions in all. Question No. 1 will be compulsory. (The compulsory question will 


4 marks each) spread over the whole syllabus.) The Candidate shall attempt four 


marks. 

Unit-I A Conceptual Understanding of Human Rights 

Human Rights Concept, Definition, Meaning & Nature, Human Values: Liberty, 

Equality, and Justice 

Unit-II Historical Foundation of Human Rights 

Historical Development: Magna Carta, British Bill of Rights, American Bill of 

Rights French Revolution and its Goal of Liberty Equality and Fraternity, Marxist 

Revolution 

Unit-III Theories and Classification of Human Rights 

Three Generation of Human Rights, Theory of Natural Rights, Legal/Positive 

Theory of Rights, Marxist Theory of Rights, Feminist Perspectives of Human 

Rights 

Unit-IV Rule of Law and Human Rights 

Rule of Law and Human Rights: Concept, Origin, Historical Development in Greek 

and English Civilization and its Contribution to the Development of Rights 

REFERENCES 

Alston, Phillip (ed.), (1992), The United Nations and Human Rights: A Critical Appraisal, Oxford: 

Clarendon Press. 

Bachr, Peter R, (1999), Human Rights: Universality in Practice, New York: Palgrave. 

Baxi, Upendra, (2002), The Future of Human Rights, New Delhi: Oxford University Press. 

Bhagwati, P.N., (1987), Dimensions of Human Rights, Madurai: Society for Community 

Organization Trust. 

Davidson, Scott, (1993), Human Rights. Buckingham: Open University Press. 

Donnelly, Jack, (1989), Universal Human Right in Theory and Practice, Ithaca: Cornell University 

Press. 

Dube, M.P. and Neeta Bora, (ed.), (2000), Perspective on Human Rights, New Delhi: Anamika 

Publishers. 

Freeman, Michael, (2003), Human Rights: An Interdisciplinary Approach, Cambridge: Polity 

Press. 

Hargopal, G. (1999), Political Economy of Human Rights, Hyderabad: Himalaya. 

10(860) 


Jacobs, Francis G and R.C.A. White, (1996), The European Convention of Human Rights, Oxford: 

Clarendon University Press. 

Kannabiran, K.G. (2003), The wages of Impunity: Power, Justice and Human Rights, New Delhi: 

Orient Longman. 

Kothari, Smitu and Harsh Sethi, (ed.), (1991), Rethinking Human Rights: Challenge for theory and 

Action, New Delhi: Lokayan 

Krasno, Jean A, (2005), The United Nations, New Delhi; VivaLangley 

Lauterpacht, Hersch, (1945), An International Bill of the Rights of Man. New York: Columbia 


Paper - II: Human Rights and Criminal Justice System in India 

10(861) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I Conceptual Perspectives 

Concept of Crime: Definition, Classification, General Causes. 

Criminal Liability: Definition, Principles 

Unit-II Administration of Criminal Justice and Human Rights 

Role of Criminal Justice System 

Administration of Criminal Justice: Ordinary Courts; Special Courts, District 

Courts, Human Rights Courts, Naya Panchayat, Lok Adalt, Fast-Track Court. 

Unit-III Human Rights Problems 

Police Atrocities and Custodial Torture, Violence against Women and Children, 

Communal Violence; Caste and Class Conflict, Terrorism and Insurgency 

Unit-IV Rights of the Accused 

Rights of Accused; Double Jeopardy, Against Self- Incrimination, Production 

Before Magistrate, Fair Trail, Speedy Trail, Appeal, Parole and Probation. 

Rights of Prisoner: Legal Aid, Access to Justice and Speedy Justice; Right to 

Compensation, Prison Reforms. 

REFERENCES 

Bava, Noorjahan, (ed), (2000), Human rights and Criminal Justice Administration in India, Uppal 


Vibhute Baxi, Upendra, (1988), Clemency, Extradition and Death: The Judicial Discourse in Keher 

Singh, Journal of Indian Law, Vol. 30, and No. 4. 


Bhagwati, P.N.,(1985,) Human Rights in the Criminal Justice System, Journal of Indian Law 

Institute, Vol. 27, No. 1. 

Arora, Nirman, (1999), Custodial Torture in Police Stations in India: A Radical Assessment, 

Journal of Indian Law Institute, Vol. 41, Nos 3 and 4. 

Vibhute, K.I, (1990), Compensating Victims of Crimes in Indian Society, Delhi Shubhi 

Ghosh, S.K., (1993), Torture and Rape in Police Custody, New Delhi: Asish Publishing House. 

Guttal, G.H, (1986), Human Right: The Indian Law, Indian Journal of International Law, vol. 26. 

Vada Kumchery, James, (1991), The Police and Delinquency in India, New Delhi: APH Publishing 

Corporation. 

Paper - III: International Human Rights System 

10(862) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I Concern for Human Rights 

Concern for the protection of the Individuals in Anti- Slave Trade Treaties, Rise of 

Nazism, Fascism, Holocaust and Human Rights Issues in International Relations 

Unit-II International Organisations and Human Rights 

League of Nations (mandate system, social and economic welfare), ILO and Labour 

Rights, United Nations (UN Charter, UDHR, International Covenant on Economic, 

Social and Cultural Rights, International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights 

(1966), UNESCO Declaration of the Responsibilities of the Present Generations 

Towards Future Generation 1997. 

Unit-III UN Organs and Human Rights 

UN Commission of Human Rights (UNCHR), UN Children Fund (UNICEF), UN 

High Commission for Refugee (UNHCR), UN Education, Scientific and Cultural 

Organization (UNESCO). 

Unit-IV Human Rights and International Politics 

Human Rights and Cold War: Tehran Conference (1968), Helsinki Declaration 

(1975), Vienna Conference (1993), Human Rights: Under the New World Order 

REFERENCES 

Bloed, A. and others, (1993), Monitoring Human Rights in Europe, Dordrecht, Martinus Nijhoff 

Buergenthal Thomas, The Advisory Practice of the Inter- American Human Rights Court, 

American Journal of International Law, vol. no.1. 

The Inter-American Court of Human Rights, American Journal of International Law, vol. 76 

The Domestic Status of the European Convention on Human Rights: A Second Look, International 

Commission of Jurist, vol. 7, no 1 


Buergenthal Thomas, The Advisory Practice of the Inter- American Human Rights Court, 


The Inter-American Court of Human Rights, American Journal of International Law, vol. 76 

The Domestic Status of the European Convention on Human Rights: A Second Look, International 

Commission of Jurist, vol. 7, no 

Davidson, Scot, Remedies for Violations of the American convention on Human Rights 

International and Comparative Law Quarterly, vol. 44, no.2. 

Drzemkzewski, A., The Sui Generis Nature of the European Convention on Human Rights, 

International and Comparative Law Quarterly, vol. 29, no.1 

Paper -IV: Human Rights and Duties in India 

10(863) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I Constitution, Human Rights and Duties 

Fundamental Rights, Directive Principles of State Policies, Fundamental Duties: 

Relationship Between Them, International Human Rights and the Indian 

Constitution. 

Unit-II Human Rights and Judiciary 

Judiciary: Article 32(Supreme Court and High Court) Article 226 (High Court), 

Judicial Activism and PIL, Legal Aid, Judicial Interpretations: Landmark Judgments 

(Delhi Domestic Working Women’s Forum V Union of India (1995), People’s 

Union for Civil Liberties (PUCL) V Union of India (1997), Sheela Barse V State of 

Maharastra (1983). 

Unit-III Implementations and Enforcements Mechanisms 

Human Rights Commission. National and States Human Rights Commissions, 

Extra-ordinary Situation and Human Rights in India, Emergency Powers of 

President, Governor and Human Rights, (Art. 352, 356, 371,-A, 317-B, 371-C and 

371-F) Proclamation of the Extra-ordinary Laws (MISA, NASA TADA and Armed 

Forces Special Power Act 1958). 

Unit-IV Violation of Human Rights and Civil Society in India 

Human Rights Violations in Private and Public Domain; Within the Family, by 

Dominant Castes and Religious Groups, Riots and Violence in Connection with 

Inter-Community Tensions, Unequal Access to Natural Resources. 

REFERENCES 

Desai, A.R. (ed.), (1986), Violations of Democratic Rights in India, Bombay: Popular Prakashan. 

Sathe S.P., (2004), Judicial Activism in India, New Delhi: OUP. 

Austin, Granville, (2000), Working of Democratic Constitutions: The Indian Experience, New 

Delhi: Oxford University Press. 


Austin, Granville, (2002), The Indian Constitutions: Cornerstone of a Nation, New Delhi: OUP. 

Dikshit, R.C., (1998), Human Rights and the Law, Universal and Indian, New Delhi: Deep and 

Deep. 

Kashyap, Subhash C., (1978), Human Rights and Parliament, Delhi: Metropolitan. Kirpal, B.N. et 

al., (2004), Supreme but Not Infallible, New Delhi: OUP 

Mehta, P. L. and Neena Verma, (1995), Human Rights Under the Indian Constitutions, New Delhi: 

Deep and Deep Publications. 

Sathe S.P., (2004), Judicial Activism in India, New Delhi: OUP 

Rao, K. Subha, (1962), Fundamental Rights under Constitution of India, Madras: Madras 

University. 

Sehgal, B.P. Singh (ed.), (1999), Human Rights in India: Problems and Perspectives, New Delhi: 

Deep and Deep. 

Paper-V Research Methodology-I 

10(864) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 















Readings : 

H.N. Blalock, An Introduction to Social Research, Englewood Cliffs NJ, Prentice Hall, 1970. 

J. Blondel, Thinking Politically, London, Wildwood House, 1976. 

Bryman, Quantity and Quality in Social Research, London, Unwin Hyman, 1988. 


A.F. Chalmers, Science and Its Fabrication, Milton Keynes, Open University Press, 1990. 

J. Galtung, Theory and Methods of Social Research, New York, Columbia University Press, 1987. 

A.Giddens, Profiles and Critiques in Social Theory, London Macmillan, 1982. 

W.J. Goode and P.K. Hatt, Methods of Social Research, New York, McGraw Hill, 1952. 

A.C. Isaak, Scope and Methods of Political Science, Homewood Illinois, Dorsey Press, 1985. 

J.B. Johnson and R.A. Joslyn, Political Science Research Methods, Washington DC, C.Q. Press, 

1986. 

F.N. Kerlinger, Behavioural Research, New York, Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1979. 

T.Kuhn, The Structure of Scientific Revolution, Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1970. 

R. K. Merton (ed.), Social Theory and Social Structure, New York, The Free Press, 1957. 

D. Miller (ed.), Pocket Popper, London, Fontana, 1997. 

Sir, K.R. Popper, The Logic of Scientific Discovery, London, Hutchinson, 1959. 

Sir, K. R. Popper, Conjectures and Refutations: The Growth of Scientific Knowledge, London, 

Rougtledge and Kegan Paul, 1963. 

Sir, K.R. Popper, The Poverty of Historicism, London, Reoutledge, 1991. 

P.V. Young, Scientific Social Surveys and Research. 

Robert A. Dahl, Modern Political Analysis, Englewood Cliffs, NJ Prentice Hall, 1963. 

M.A. (Previous) Human Rights, Semester-II 

Scheme of Examination 

Paper-VI Human Rights in the Modern Era 100 Marks 3 Hours 

Paper-VII Human Rights and Criminal Justice System: An 

International Perspective 


Paper-VIII Weaker Sections and Human Rights in India 100 Marks 3 Hours 

Paper-IX Regional Human Rights System 100 Marks 3 Hours 

Paper-X Research Methodology-II 100 Marks 3 Hours 


M.A. (Previous) Human Rights, Semester – II 

Paper- VI: Human Rights in the Modern Era 

10(865) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I United Nations and Human Rights 

UN Charter: UDHR (1948), International Bill of Rights, International Covenant on 

Economic, Social and Cultural Rights, International Covenant on Civil and Political 

Rights 1966, Optional Protocols to Civil and Political Rights. 


Unit-II Conceptual Understanding of Human Duties and Responsibilities 

Concept of Duties and Responsibilities; Relationship between Rights and Duties, 

UNESCO Declaration on the Rights and Responsibilities of the Present Generation 

Towards the Future Generations1997: UN Article 29 of the General Assembly on 

the Rights and Responsibilities of Individuals. Debate and Emphasis on Social 

Economic and Cultural Rights of Man (East Vs West: developing Countries and 

Developed Countries), NIEO. 

Unit-III Classifications of Human Duties and Responsibilities 

Classification of Human Duties and Responsibilities General and Specific; General, 

Moral; Ethical, Social, Economic, Political and Cultural Universal, Traditional and 

Modern; Specific, Family, Community and Society, Nation-State, Human Kind and 

Other Living Being on Earth. 

UNIT IV General Problems and Importance of Human Rights 

Poverty, Illiteracy: Sustainable Development and the Right Development, 

Discrimination: Racial, Gender, Religious and Caste. Importance of Sensitization 

and Internalization of Human Rights and Values. 

REFRENCES 

Alston, Phillip (ed.), (1992), The United Nations and Human Rights: A Critical Appraisal, Oxford: 

Clarendon Press. 

Bachr, Peter R, (1999), Human Rights: Universality in Practice, New York: Palgrave. 

Winstone E, (1999), Encyclopedia of Human Rights Issues Since 1945, London; Fitzroy Dearborn 

Publishers 

Lauterpacht, Hersch, (1945), An International Bill of the Rights of Man. New York: Columbia 

University Press 

Morsink, Johannes, (1999), The Universal Declaration of Human Rights; Origins, Drafting and 

Intent. Philadelphia; University of Pennsylvania Press 

O’Byrne, Darren J, (2003), Human Rights; an Introduction, New Delhi; Pearson. 

Sanajaoba, N, (2000), Human Rights in the New Millennium,: Manas Publications New Delhi 

Tuck, R, (1979), Natural Rights Theories, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press 

UN Centre for Human Rights, (1996), International Human Rights Standards for Law 

Enforcement, Geneva; World Campaign for Human Rights 

UN Centre for Human Rights, (1990), Special Issue on Implementation of International Human 

Rights Instruments, New York 

UN Centre for Human Rights, (1996), The International Bill of Human Rights; World Campaign 

for Human Rights, Geneva 

10(866) 


Vijapur, A.P, (1996), The United Nations at Fifty; Studies in Human Rights, New Delhi; South 

Asian Publishers 

Paper-VII: Human Rights and Criminal Justice: An International Perspective 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I Criminal Justice System in International Perspective 

International Crimes; International Crime Control and Protecting Agencies, e.g. 

Interpol; International Co-operation in Combating Trans-national Organized Crimes 

and International Terrorism, Palermo Convention on Trans-National Organized 

Crime 2000, Convention Against Illicit Trafficking of Narcotic and Psychotropic 

Substances 1988-90. 

Unit-II International Norms on Administration of Criminal Justice 

Extradition and Mutual Assistance in Criminal Justice, International Norms on 

Administration of Criminal Justice- UN General Assembly Resolution. 

Unit-III International Criminal Court 

International Criminal Court: Establishment, Jurisdiction, Applicable law, 

Composition Penalties, Appeal and Provision, War Crimes and War Trials. 

War Crimes: Definition and Trails on War Crimes (Nuremberg, Tokyo, Pileups, 

Etchmann). 

Unit-IV Offences Involving Human Rights 

Serious Human Rights offences: Torture, Rape, and Death of Suspected in Police 

and Security Forces Custody, Arbitrary Arrest and Detention Without 

Communication, Non Filing Arrest and Forced Disappearances 

REFERENCES 

1. Bag, R.K., (1997), Domestic violence and crime against women: Criminal Justice Response 

in India, Journal of Indian Law Institute, Vol. 39, and nos. 2-4. 

2. Bakken, T., (1985) International Law and Human Rights for Defendants in Criminal Trails, 

Indian Journal of Law Vol. 25 

3. Bava, Noorjahan, (ed), (2000), Human rights and Criminal Justice Administration in India, 

New Delhi: Uppal Publishing House. 

4. Baxi, Upendra, (1988), Clemency, Extradition and Death: The Judicial Discourse in Keher 

Singh, Journal of Indian Law, Vol. 30, and no. 4. 

5. Bhagwati, P.N.,(1985,) Human Rights in the Criminal Justice System, Journal of Indian 

Law Institute, Vol. 27, no. 1. 

6. Ghosh, S.K., (1993), Torture and Rape in Police Custody,: Asish Publishing House, New 

Delhi 

7. Guttal, G.H, (1986), Human Right: The Indian Law, Indian Journal of International Law, 

vol. 26. 

10(867) 


8. Landerer, L.E, (1971,) Capital Punishment as a Human Rights Issue before the United 

Nation, Human Rights Journal, Vol. 4, no. 2 

9. Monohar, Sujata V., (1996), Judiciary and Human Rights, Indian Journal of International 

Law Vol. 36 

10. Scobb, Harry, M. and Laurie Wizerber, (eds.), (1984), Access to Justice: Struggle for Rights 

in South East Asia, Washington D.C: Human Rights Internet. 

11. Suresh, H,(1996,), Human Rights and Criminal Justice and Functionaries, Economic and 

Political Weekly, Vol. 31, no. 24. 

12. UN, (1991), Enforced or Involuntary Disappearances, Geneva: Center for Human Rights, 

World Campaign for Human Rights 

13. UN, (1997), Extra- Judicial, Summary or Arbitrary Executions, Geneva: Center for Human 

rights, Under World campaign for Human rights. 

14. UN, (1994), Human rights and Pre-trial Detention: A Handbook of International Standard 

Relating to Pre –Trial Detention, New York: UN publication Division. 

15. Vibhute, K.I, (1990), Compensating Victims of Crimes in Indian Society, Shubhi, New 

Delhi. 

Paper - VIII: Weaker Section and Human Rights in India 

10(868) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I Theory and Practice of the Human Rights of the Dalits in India 

Special Laws and the Constitutional Provisions for the Protection of the Rights of 

the Dalits: National Commission for SC/ST, Protection of Civil Liberties Act, 

(1955), Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes Act, 1989, Employment of Manual 

Scavenger and Construction of Dry Latrine (Prohibition) Act, 1993 Social 

discrimination and caste violence in India. 

Unit-II Women and Human Rights 

Special Laws for the Protection of Women: Suppression of Immoral Traffic Act 

(1956), Maternity Benefit Act (1961), Dowry Prohibition Act (1961), Equal 

Remuneration Act (1976), Medical Termination of Pregnancy Act (1971), 

Commission of Sati (Prevention) Act (1982 Social: Status of Women in 

Contemporary Indian Society-Poverty, Illiteracy, Lack of Independence, Oppressive 

Social Customs and Gender Bias; Violence against Women at Public and Private 

Domain. 

Unit III Minorities and Human Rights 

Constitutional Framework: Fundamental Rights, Directive Principal and 

Fundamental, Duties, Special provision in Article 26 to 30, 331, 333, 336 and 337 of 


the Constitution, Special Laws and Policies: National Commission for Minorities 

Act 1992. 

UNIT IV Problems of the Implementations of Human Rights and Role of NGO’s: Poverty 

and Inaccessibility of Legal Protection, Social Prejudices, Abuse of Executive 

Power, Death Torture in Police Custody etc, Lack of Accountability and 

Transparency in Government Functioning and the Right to Information. 

A Historical Perspective of Civil Liberties Groups and Civil Liberties in India, 

People Union for Democratic Rights (PUDR), People Union for Civil Liberties 

(PUCL), NGO’s and Civil Rights Movements in India. 

REFERENCES 

1. Alam, Aftab, (ed.), (1999), Human Rights in India: Issues and Challenges. New Delhi: Raj 

Publications. 

2. Begum, S.M. (ed.), (2000), Human Rights in India: Issues ad Perspectives, New Delhi: 

APII Publishing Co. 

3. Centre for Development and Human Rights, (2004), The Rights to Development-A Primer, 

New Delhi: Sage Pub. 

4. Dikshit, R.C., (1998), Human Rights and the Law, Universal and Indian, Deep and Deep, 

New Delhi: 

5. Jha, R.C., (1995), Resurrecting: Human Right in India, Sheridan Book Company, New 

Delhi 

6. Mishra, Pramod (ed.), (2000), Human Rights in South Asia, Delhi: Kalpaz Publications. 

7. Paul, R.C., (2000), Situation of Human Rights in India, Commonwealth Publishers New 

Delhi, 

8. Ray, Arun, (2004), National Human Rights Commissions in India: Formation, Functioning 

and Future Prospects, Atlantic, New Delhi 

9. Ray, Aswani K, (1986), Civil Rights Movement and Social Struggle in India, Economic and 

Political Weekly, Vol. XXXI, NO. 28, 12 July. . 

10. Verma, R.S., (2000), Human Rights: Burning Issues of the World, Volumes I, II and III: 

Radiant Publishers Delhi, 

11. Dev, Arjun, (1996), Human Rights: A Source Book, NCRTE. 

Paper- IX: Regional Human Rights Systems 

10(869) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 


Unit-I American Human Rights System 

American Convention on Human Rights (1969), Inter- American Commission on 

Human Rights (1959), Inter-American Convention to Prevent and Punish Torture 

(1985), Inter- American Convention on Forced Disappearance (1994), American 

Court of Human Rights. 

Unit-II European Human Rights System 

European Convention for the Protection of Human Rights and Fundamental 

Freedoms (1950), European Social Charter (1961 revised 1966), European 

Convention for the Prevention of Torture and Inhuman Degrading Treatment and 

Punishment (1987), Monitoring and Enforcement Machinery, European Court of 

Human Rights, European Commission of Rights. 

Unit-III Arab Human Rights System 

Universal Islamic Declaration of Human Rights (1981), Arab Charter on Human 

Rights (1994), Casablanca Declaration of Human Rights (1999), Beirut Declaration 

(1999). 

Unit -IV African Human Rights System 

OAU Charter 1963, Mechanism of Implementation: African Commission and Court 

of Human and People's Rights, African Charter of Human and People's Rights 

(1981). 

REFERENCES 

1. Council of Europe, (1995), Human Rights: A Continuing Challenge for the Council of 

Europe, Strasbourg: Council of Europe Press. 

2. UN, (1995), World Campaign for Human for Human Rights: The African charter on 

Human and People’s Rights, Geneva. 

3. Ankumah, Evelyn A, (1996), The African Commission on Human and People’s Rights: 

Practice and Procedures, The Hague, Martinus Nijhoff. 

4. Bhargava, G.S, (1999), National Human Rights Commission: An Assessment of Its 

Functioning, in K.P. Saksena, ed., Human Rights: Fifty Years of India’s Independence New 

Delhi: Gyan Publishing House. 

5. Bloed, A. and others, (1993), Monitoring Human Rights in Europe, Dordrecht, Martinus 

Nijhoff. 

6. Buergenthal Thomas, The Advisory Practice of the Inter- American Human Rights Court, 


7. The Inter-American Court of Human Rights, American Journal of International Law, vol. 

76. 

8. The Domestic Status of the European Convention on Human Rights: A Second Look, 

International Commission of Jurist, vol. 7, and no.1. 

9. Cassese, Antonio, A New Approach to Human Rights: the European Convention for the 

Prevention of Torture, American Journal of International Law, vol. 83. 

10. Cast berg, Frede, (1974), The European Convention on Human Rights. Leiden: Setoff. 

11. Cerna, Christina, M. (1992), The Structure and Functioning of the Inter- American Court of 

Human Rights, British Yearbook of International Law, vol. 63. 

12. Cunningham, Andrew j. European Convention on Human Rights, Customary Law and the 

Constitution, International and Comparative Law Quarterly, vol. 43, no. 3. 

13. Davidson, Scot, Remedies for Violations of the American convention on Human Rights, 


10(870) 


14. Drzemkczewski, A., The Sui Generis Nature of the European Convention on Human Rights, 


Paper-X Research Methodology-II (Option-i) 

10(871) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 







Using Written Records, Scrutinizing the Evidences, Content Analysis. Quantification 

in Social Research: Statistics- Meaning, Purpose and Scope, Statistical Techniques 

of Data-Analysis. 


Readings : 



1970. 





1987. 




1985. 


Press, 1986. 






14. Sir, K.R. Popper, The Logic of Scientific Discovery, London, Hutchinson, 1959. 

15. Sir, K. R. Popper, Conjectures and Refutations: The Growth of Scientific Knowledge, 





M.A. (Final) Human Rights, Semester –III 


Paper-XI International Obligations to Protect Human Rights 100 Marks 3 Hours 

Paper-XII Civil Society, Social Movements and Human Rights In 

India 


Paper XIII, XIV, XV- Students may choose any one of the following Groups 

Group:-A 

Paper-XIII Women and Human Rights 100 Marks 3 Hours 

Paper -XIV Children and Human Rights 100 Marks 3 Hours 

Paper-XV 

Group:-B 

Human Rights and Duties of the Aged and Disabled 100 Marks 3 Hours 

Paper-XIII International Humanitarian and Refugee Laws 100 Marks 3 Hours 

Paper-XIV Development, Globalization and Human Rights 100 Marks 3 Hours 

Paper-XV People’s Right to Self -Determination 100 Marks 3 Hours 

10(872) 



M.A. (Final) Human Rights, Semester – III 

Paper-XI: International Obligations to Protect Human Rights 

10(873) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I Concept of International Obligations 

Concept of obligations: Legal, Moral, Social, 

Obligations Accepted by International Community Through International Law: 

Sources of International Law Giving Rise to International Obligations (Article 38(1) 

of the Statute of the ICJ). 

Unit-II International Concern for the Protection of Human Rights 

Evolution of International Concern for the Protection of the Individual; The Anti- 

Slave Trade Treaties, Emergence of International Humanitarian Law, League of 

Nations and Colonies: the Concept of Sacred Trust of Civilization (the Mandate 

System), ILO and Labour Welfare. 

Unit-III Obligations to Protect Human Rights 

International Customary Law Comprising Consensual Decision (Resolution, 

Declaration and Principles) on Human Rights, Evidencing Undertaking on the Part 

of States, Principle of International Cooperation, General Principles of Law of 

Human Rights in Diverse National Legal Systems 

Friendly Relations Declaration 1970, Articles 1 and 56 of UN Charter, 

Specific Aspects: Duty to Render Material Assistance, Charter of Economic Rights 

and Duties 1974, Duty to Consult and Inform. 

Unit-IV Crime against Humanity and Human Rights 

Crime against Humanity: Nazi, Fascist Atrocities and Totalitarianism Second World 

War, 

Crime Against Peace, War Crimes, Crimes Against Humanity, Nuremberg 

(London Charter of 1946) and Tokyo (General MC Arthur’s Decree of 1946), 

International Military Tribunals for Trails of Major War Criminals 

REFERENCES 

1. ILO, Labour Conventions and Recommendations, Official Bulletin (Geneva), vol.52, no.2, 

1969, pp.181-216 

2. Bailey, Sydney D, (1994), The UN Security Council and Human Rights New York: St. 

Martin’s Press 

3. Bakken, T., “International Law and Human Rights for Defendants in Criminal Trials, Indian 

Journal of International Law, vol.25, 1985, pp.411-23. 


4. Claude, R.P., and B.H. Weston, (1989). Human Rights in the World Community: Issues and 

Action, Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania 

5. Drost, P.N., (1951), Human Rights as Legal Rights: The Realization of Human Rights in 

Positive International Law Leiden: Sijthoff, 

6. Falk, Richard A, (1982), Human Rights and State Sovereignty New York: Holmes and 

Meier, 

7. Ferguson, C. Claude, Global Human Rights: Challenges and Prospects, Denver Journal of 

International Law and Policy, vol.8, 1979, pp.367-78. 

8. Gromley, W.P., “The Emerging Dimensions of Human Rights: Protection at the 

International and Regional Levels - The Common Standard of Mankind”, Banaras Law 

Journal, vol.17, no.1, 1981, pp.1-41. 

9. Holcombe, Arthur N., (1948), Human Rights in the Modern World, Washington: New York 

University Press, 

10. Hannum, Hurst, (1984), Guide to International Human Rights Practice, University of 

Pennsylvania Press, 

11. Henkin, Louis, (1979), Human Dignity: The Internationalization of Human Rights, 

Oceanna, New York 

12. Jha, Indra Mohan, (1999), “Human Rights and India’s Foreign Policy”, in A.P.Vijapur and 

Kumar Suresh, (eds), Perspectives on Human Rights, Manak Publications, New Delhi:, 

13. Kalshoven, F., “International Concern for Human Rights: Can it be Effective?” German 

Yearbook of International Law, vol.21, 1978. 

14. Kannamma, Raman, (1998), Universality of the Human Rights Discourse: An 

Overview,Mumbai: University of Mumbai, 

15. Karel, Vasak, ed., (1982), The International Dimensions of Human Rights, Connecticut: 

Greenwood Press, 

16. Khan, Rahamatullah, (1970) Implied Powers of the United Nations, Vikas Publications, 

(New Delhi. 

17. Kulkarni, M, “(1991), Universal Declaration of Human Rights”, Radical Humanist, vol.65, 

no.9, December Kumar, Arvind, Encyclopaedia of Human Rights Violence and Non- 

Violence, 3 Volumes 1998 

18. Lauterpacht, Hersch, (1973), Human Rights and International Law, Carland, New York 

19. Luard, E., (ed), (1967), The International Protection of Human Rights: Thames and Hudson 

, London 

20. Macfarlane, L.J., (1985), The Theory and Practice of Human Rights: Maurice Temple 

Smith, London 

21. Mani, V.S., “Human Rights and the United Nations: A Survey”, Journal of Indian Law 

Institute, vol.40, nos.1-4, 1998, pp.38-66. 

22. McCarthy, Thomas E., “The International Protection of Human Rights Ritual and Reality”, 

International and Comparative Law Quarterly, vol.25, 1976. 

Paper-XII: Civil Society, Social Movement and Human Rights in India 

10(874) 




Time: 3 Hours 







marks. 

Unit-I Conceptual Perspective 

Concept of Civil Society and Social Movements, Types of Movements; (Ideology, 

Organizations), Social Movements as Promoters of Social Change and Human 

Rights in India. 

Unit-II Socio-Religious Movements and Human Rights 

Social, Religious Movements and Human Rights in India: Brahmo Smaj, Arya 

Samaj Movement, Dalit Movement, Tribal Movements, and Women Movements. 

Unit- III Political and Environment Movement and Human Rights 

Political Movements, Freedom Movement, Trade Union Movements, Peasant 

Movements, Regional and Ethnic identity Movements (Special Reference to 

Language and Autonomy Movements) 

Unit-IV Role of International Organisations and NGOsin Promoting Human Rights in 

India: Role of UN Commissions of Human Rights, UN High Commission for 

Refugees (UNHCR), UN Commission on the Status of Women, International 

Labour Organisation (ILO), UN Education, Scientific and Cultural Organisation 

(UNESCO). People union for Democratic Rights (PUDR), People union for Civil 

Liberties (PUCL), NGO and Civil Rights Movements. 

REFERENCES 

1. Eide, Asbjorn, (1986), Human Rights Movements and the Transformation of International 

Order, Alternatives’, Vol. 11, NO. 3. 

2. Kaushik, Vijay, (1999), Women’s Movements and Human Rights, Pointer Publishers 

Jaipur, 

3. Kothari, Smitu, (1990), Human Rights Movement in India: A Critical Overview, Social 

Action, vol. 40, no. 1 

4. Puri, Balraj, (1990), Role of Human Rights Groups in Kashmir, Radical Humanist, 54 (3). 

5. A.P. Vijapur and Kumar Sures, (eds.) (1999), Perspectives on Human Rights., New Delhi: 

Manak. 

6. Stenier, Henry J., (1990), Diverse Partners: Non-Governmental Organizations in the 

Human Rights Movement: The Report of a Retreat of Human Rights Activists, 

Massachusetts: Harvard Law School. 

7. Tyagi, Y.K. (1995) “Golden Jubilee of Unfinished Task: The United Nations Human Rights 

Movement, International Studies, Vol. 32, and no. 4. 

8. Tyne, Claude H. Van, (1990), India Freedom Movement, Akashdeep Publishing House, 

Delhi. 

Paper- XIII, Group-A: Women and Human Rights 

10(875) 




Time: 3 Hours 







marks. 

Unit-I Perspectives on the Status of Women in India 

Historical and Philosophical, Social Perspectives: Social: Status of Women in 

Contemporary Indian Society-Poverty, Illiteracy, Lack of Independence, Oppressive 

Social Customs and Gender Bias; Violence Against and Abuse of Women in Public 

and Private Domains 

Special Laws for the Protection of Women: Suppression of Immoral Traffic Act 

(1956), Maternity Benefit Act (1961), Dowry Prohibition Act (1961), Equal 

Remuneration Act (1976), Medical Termination of Pregnancy Act (1971), 

Commission of Sati (Prevention) Act (1982), PNDT Act (1994) 

Unit-II International Norms for the Protection of Women 

ILO Convention For The Protection of Female Labour, UNESCO Convention 

against Discrimination in Education (!960), Convention on the Elimination of All 

Forms of Discrimination Against Women (1979), UN Convention on Political 

Rights of Women (1952), Convention on Nationality of Married Women (1957), 

Convention on Consent to Marriage , Minimum Age for Marriage and Registration 

of Marriage (1962) 

Unit-III Institutional Mechanism for the Protection of Women 

Convention of Elimination of Discrimination against Women (1979), Convention 

for the Suppression of the Traffic in Prostitution of Others (1949), The Vienna 

Convention on Human Rights (1993), Declaration on the Elimination of Violence 

against Women 1993, Declaration on the Participation of Women in Promoting 

International Peace and Cooperation (1982) 

Unit-IV Constitution of India and the Status of Women 

Fundamental Rights and Directive Principles Under the Constitution, Special 

Provisions for the Protection of Women; Article 15 (3), Article39 (d), and (e) Article 

42, Article 243 (D) and 243 (T). Women and Public Policy: Female Health and 

Family Welfare, Literacy Programmes, Female Labour Welfare: Issue of Current 

Debate: Political Rights of Women (Reservation and Protection of Women), 

Personal Laws and Status of Women. 

REFERENCES 

1. UN Centre for Human Rights (1995), Harmful Traditional Practices Affecting the Health of 

Women and Children, Geneva: World Campaign for Human Rights. 

2. Kaushal, Rachna, (2000), Women and Human Rights in India. New Delhi: Kaveri Books. 

3. Khan, Mumtaz Ali, (1998), Women and the Human Rights, Commonwealth, New Delhi 

4. Kaushik, Vijay (1999), Women’s Movements and Human Rights, Pointer Publishers Jaipur 

5. Mukhopadhyay, S., (ed.), (1998), In the Name of Justice; Women and Law in society, 

Manohar, New Delhi: 

6. Mishra, Jyotsana, (2000), Women and Human Rights, Kalpaz Pub, New Delhi;. 

7. Nirmal, C.J., (1999), Human Rights in India, Oxford, New Delhi 

8. Pachauri, S.K., (1999), Women and Human Rights, APH Publications, New Delhi 

9. Achauri, S.K., (1999), Women and Human Rights, APH Publications, New Delhi 

10. Saxena, Shobha, (1999), Crimes against Women and Protective Laws, Deep and Deep, New 

Delhi: 

11. South Asian HRDC, (2006), Introducing Human Rights: An Overview including issues of 

Gender Justice, Environmental and Consumer Law, OUP, New Delhi: 

10(876) 


12. UN, (1999), Convention on the Elimination of all Forms of Discrimination against Women, 

UN Department of Public Information, New York 

Paper- XIV, Group-A: Children and Human Rights 

10(877) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I Historical, Philosophical and Social Perspective 

Historical, Philosophical and Social Perspective of Child Rights, Status and 

Contemporary Indian Society: Impact of Poverty and Illiteracy on the Health and 

Education of Child, Social and Cultural Practices Regarding Girl Child Foeticide 

and Child Marriage, Child Labour (in Construction, Carpet, Glass, Bangles and 

Other Industries in Unorganized Sector) Forced Labor, Sale of Children, Child 

Abuse Inside and Outside Homes, Trafficking in Children, Children and Custodial 

Crimes 

Unit-II Indian Constitutions Status 

Fundamental Rights and Directive Principles Under the Indian Constitution, Special 

Provisions for the Protection for the Child: Article 15 (3) Article 24, Article 39 (e), 

(f) and Article (45), Legislature, Executive, Judiciary (Special Contribution of 

Judiciary, Nation Human Rights Commission, National Commission for Child. 

Unit-III Legal Norms and Policies 

Child Labour (Prohibition and Regulation) Act, Children (Pleading of Labour) Act 

1933, Child Marriage Restraint Act 1929, Pre-Natal Diagnostic Technique 

(Regulation and Prevention of Misuse) Act 1956, Child Labour (Prohibition and 

Regulation) Act 1986, Orphanage and Other Charitable Home (Supervision and 

Control) Act 1960, Juvenile Justice Acts 1986 and 2000. 

Unit-IV International Norms 

ILO Convention on Restriction and Prohibition on Child Labour Including ILO 

Convention on Child Labour (1990 UN Convention on the Rights of the Child 

(1989), Optional Protocol on the Involvement of Children in Armed Conflict, and 

Optional Protocol on Sale of Children, Child Prostitution and Child Pornography 

(2000), Declaration of Social and Legal Principles Relating to the Protection and 

Welfare of Children with Special Reference to Foster Placement and Adoption. 

REFERENCES 

1. Agrawal, Amita, (1992), and Handbook on Child, Concept Publishing Company, New 

Delhi 


2. Diwan, Paras and Peeyushi Diwan, (1994), Children and Legal Protection, Deep and Deep, 

New Delhi: 

3. Khanna, S.K., (1998), Children and the Human Rights, Commonwealth, New Delhi, 

4. Kumar, Bindal, (2000), Problems of Working Children, APH Publications, New Delhi 

5. UN Centre for Human Rights (1995), Practices Harmful Traditional Affecting the Health of 

Women and Children, Geneva: World Campaign for Human Rights 

6. Mookerjee, A, (2007), Commentaries on the Juvenile (Care and protection of Children, Act 

2000), Kamal Law House Kolkatta 

7. Bagula, A.M, (2006), Child and Crime, SBS publishing & Distributors, New Delhi 

8. Bhnadra, Mita, (1999), Girl Child in Indian Society, Rawat, New Delhi 

9. Bhargava, Vanita, (1996), Adoption in India, Sage Publication, New Delhi 

Paper- XV, Group-A: Human Rights and Duties of the Aged and Disabled 

10(878) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I Aging and Ageism: Conceptual Perspective 

Aging Definition: Problems of Aged: Medical, Economic, Social, Psychological 

Theoretical Perspective: Disengagement, Activity, Human Development, 

Continuity, Exchange Symbolic Interacts. 

Unit-II Disability 

Definition Estimates and Causes, Approaches to Disability; the Charity Model, the 

Bio Centric Model, the Functional Model and Human Rights. 

Unit-III Legal and Institutional Structure 

Constitutional Framework of Fundamental Rights, Directive Principles of State 

Policies and Fundamental Duties. 

Special Laws and Policies for Person with Disability (Equal opportunities, 

Protection of Rights and Full Participation) Act, Mental Health Act (1993). 

Constitutional: Legislature, Executive, Judiciary. 

Non-Governmental Organizations. 

Role of Education and Media. 

Unit-IV International Norms 

UN General Assembly Declaration on the Rights of the Disabled Persons 1975, 

Declaration on the Mentally Retired Persons 1971, Resolution on the Rights of the 

Disabled Persons adopted by the Coordinating Committee of National Institutions 

for the Promotion and Protection of Human Rights 1993, World Assembly on 

Ageing (1982) 


REFERENCES 

1. UN, (1993), Human Rights and Disabled persons, Geneva: World Campaign for Human 

Rights. 

2. UN, (1997), Protection of the Heritage of Indigenous People, UN Publication 

Division, New York: 

3. Alnasir, M.A., (1995), Human Rights and Female Foeticide, in B.P. Singh Sehgal, (eds), 

Human rights in India: Problems and Perspectives, Deep and Deep New Delhi, 

4. Jacob, Alice, (1998), Towards a Regime of Rights of Older Persons, Journal of Indian Law 

Institute 

5. Karna, G. and K. Gaharana, (1994), Rights of, Disabled Persons, In K.P., Saksena, ed. 

Human Rights: Perspective and Challenges, New Delhi. 

6. Karna, G.N. (2001), Disability Studiers in India: Retrospect and Prospect,: Gyan 

Publishing House, New Delhi 

7. Kumar, Bindal, (2000), Problems of Working Children, APH Publication, New Delhi 

8. Lalitha, S., Legality of Contract of Sale of Women, Journal of Indian Law Institute, vol. 30, 

no.1 

9. Sreenath, Lalith, Victimisation of Girl- Child in the Home, Indian Journal of International 

Law, vol. 38, no.1 

10. “Enforcement of Rights of the Disables”, Journal of Indian Law Institute, vol. 38, no.4 

11. Van Bueren, G., International Legal Protection of Children in Armed Conflicts, 

International and Comparative Law Quarterly, vol. 43. 

12. Karna, G.N. (2000), Disability Rights Movement: Conceptual Framework and its 

Implications for India, Disabilities and Impairments, Vol. 14, NO.1. 

Paper - XIII, Group-B: International Humanitarian and Refugee Laws 

10(879) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 


Origin and Development of International Humanitarian Law (IHL), Doctrine of 

Military Necessity Versus the Principles of Humanity, Role of IHL in Non- 

International Armed Conflicts, Role of Red Cross. 

Unit-II Enforcement and Problems 

Concept of Protecting Power: United Nations, International Criminal Court and 

Tribunals, Unilateralism: ‘Humanitarian’ intervention versus State Sovereignty, 

Humanitarian Assistance. 

Problems: Resettlement in Third Country, Repatriation: Voluntary or Forced, Local 

Assimilation, Protective Zones. 


Unit-III International Refugee Law 

The History of International Refugee Law: Cold War, Origin to Rights of People 

who are not Citizens, Determination of Refugees Status Under the Refugees 

Convention 1951 and Protocol 1967, 

Protection under International Law: Right of Non-Rofoulement, Rights to Asylum, 

UNHRC and Refugee Protection. 

Unit-IV Protection in India 

India Critique of UNHCR and Convention, 

Protection Without Legislation: Case law, 

Status of Refugee in India under UNHCR. 

REFERENCES 

1. Bond, B.E Harrel, (1985), and Imposing Aid: Emergency Assistance to Refugees. Oxford 

University Press, New York, 

2. Charkrabarty, Manik, (1998), Human Rights and Refugees: Problems, Law and Practices, 

Deep and Deep publications New Delhi, 

3. Chimni, B.S, (2000), International Refugee Law: A Reader, Sage Publication New Delhi 

4. Gaza Heregh, (1984), Development of International Humanitarian Law, Budapest: 

Akademai, Kiado 

5. Gill, Goodwin, (1996), The Refugee in International Law, Oxford: Oxford University Press 

6. Grahl-Madsen Atle, (1972), The Status of Refugees in International Law, Leiden: A.W. 

Sijthoff. 

7. Hathaway, James C, (1991), The Law of Refugees Status, Butter words Tronto, 

8. Hingorani, R.C(ed), (1991), Humanitarian Law, Oxford and IBH publishing Co, New Delhi 

9. Loeseher, Gill and L.Mohan, (eds.), (1989), Refugees and International Relations Oxford, 

University Press, Oxford 

10. Mani V.S., (1993), Humanitarian intervention and International Law, Indian Journal of 

Law, Vol. 33 

11. Mani V.S. (1993) Humanitarian intervention and International Law, Indian Journal of Law, 

Vol 33. 

12. Mani, V.,. (2001), International Humanitarian Law: An Indo- Asian Perspective, 

International Review of the Red Cross, vol. 833, no 841. 

13. Muntarborn, Vitit, (1993), The Status of Refugees in Asia, Clarendon Press Oxford 

14. Patil, U.T. and P.R. Trivedi, (2000), Refugees and the Human Rights, Author press Delhi: 

15. Saxena, J.N, (1994), Problems of refugees in Developing Countries and Need for 

International Burden- sharing, in K.P. Saksena, (ed.), Human Rights: Perspective and 

Challenges, Lancers Books, New Delhi 

16. Sinha, Manoj K, (2000), Basic Documents on International Human Rights and Refugees 

Laws, Manak Publications, New Delhi 

17. Zolberg, Aristide R,(etal), (1989), Escape From Violence: Conflict and the Refugees Crisis 

in Developing World, oxford university press New Delhi. 

Paper - XIV, Group-B: Development, Globalization and Human Rights 




Time: 3 Hours 



10(880) 





marks. 

Unit-I Connotations of Development 

Modernization and Dependency Approach, a Human Rights Approach to 

Development, Development, Poverty and Exclusion, Integrating the Human Rights 

Approach in Development; Towards an Ethical Development. 

Unit-II Human Rights and Question of Sovereignty 

National Control Over International Trade, Codes of Conduct and TNCs, Sovereign 

States and Peoples Rights: Issue of Economic Sovereignty, Human Rights Standards 

and International Trade 

Unit-III Globalization and Human Rights 

Globalization: Meaning, Voices for and Against, Globalization and its Impact on 

Agriculture, Labour, Women, Environment, Culture etc. 

Unit-IV International Trade and Human Rights 

International Trade and Development, WTO, Unequal Terms of Trade Imposed by 

the Uruguay Round of GATT Negotiations, Impact on Social System Transnational 

Corporations (TNCS) and Human Rights violations. 

REFERENCES 

1. Baxi, Updenra, (1983), the New International Economic Order, Basic Needs and Rights; 

Notes towards Development of the Right to Development, Indian Journal of International 

Law, vol. 23,-45. 

2. Baxi, Upendra, (1998), “The Development of the Right to Development”, in Janusz 

Eymonides, (eds), Human Rights: New Dimensions and Challenges, Sydney: UNESCO 

3. Centre for Development and Human Rights, (2004), The Right to Development-A Primer. 

New Delhi: Sage 

4. Cheria, Anita et al, (2004), Human Rights Approach to Development; Resource Book, 

Books for Change, Bang lore 

5. Jain, Devaki, (1990), Working with Human Rights to Development, Mainstream, vol. 29, 

no. 7. 

6. Mallik, Ross, (1998), Development, Ethnicity and Human Rights in South Asia, Sage, New 

Delhi 

7. Menon, N.R. Madhava, (1999), State of Economic and Social Rights, in K.P. Saksena, (ed.) 

Human Rights; Fifty Years of India’s Independence, Gyan Publishing House New Delhi 

8. O’ Byrne, Darren J, (2003), Human Rights; An Introduction; Pearson, New Delhi, 

9. Raj, Suhendu Ranjan, (1999), “Development Perspectives and Human Rights”, in A.P. 

Vijapur and Kumar Suresh, (eds.) Perspectives on Human Rights, Manak Publications, New 

Delhi; 

10. Rehman, M.M. et al. (2000), Human Rights and Human Development; Concepts and 

Contexts, Manak Publications New Delhi. 

10(881) 


Paper- XV, Group-B: Peoples’ Right to Self-Determination 

10(882) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I Normative and Conceptual Perspectives 

Meaning of Self-Determination: Autonomy, Democracy, Governance, Self 

Determination as a Process; Self-Determination: External and Internal, New 

Dimensions and Emerging Debates 

Unit-II Origins and Developments of the Concept 

Theories of Self-Governance: Kant, Locke, Rousseau, Marx; Views on Pluralism: 

Melver and Laski; Issues of Legitimacy of State and Forms of Governance; 

Colonization, Nationalism and Statehood: National Liberation Movements, Marxist 

Theory of Nationalities, Bolshevik Revolution, Woodrow Wilson’s Fourteen Points, 

Redrawing of Boundaries of Former Empires, League of Nations and Concept of 

Sacred Trust of Civilization’ 

Unit-III The Indian Case 

Evolution of Ideas of Nationalism, Autonomy and Self- Government, Independence, 

Federalism and Demand of Autonomy in India: The Constitutional Framework of 

India; Union-State Relations. 

Problems and Challenges: Problems Relating to Formation of New States (Demand 

of Linguistic States and Autonomy from Centre). 

The Movements for the Demand of Autonomy and Armed Rebellion (Special 

References to the State of Punjab and Jammu and Kashmir). 

Problems of Union-State Relations the Rajamannar and Sarkaria Commissions. 

Unit-IV Self – Determination in International Relations 

Emergence of the Principle of Self Determinations at the International Level : 

League of Nations, Minority Treaties, Atlantic Charter 1941, UN Charter (Article 

1(2), Articles 55-56, Chapters XI, XII and XIII) Framework and the Role of UN De- 

Colonization Process, Debate Between Domestic Jurisdiction and the People’s Right 

of Self Determination, Normative Developments: UN Declarations on the Granting 

of Independence to Colonial Countries and Friendly Relations and Cooperation 

Among States; Various UN Declarations on Economic Self- Determinations 

REFERENCES 

1. Cases, Antonio (1995) Self-determination of Peoples. Cambridge University Press, Oxford. 

2. Cobban, A.(1969) The Nation-State and National Self-determination, Leiden: Sijthoff. 


3. Frank, Thomas M. (1998) Personal Self-Determination: The Wave in Constructing Identity, 

in Antony and Garry Sturgess (eds.) Legal Visions of the 21 st Century: Essays in Honour of 

Judge Christopher Weeramantry, Kluwer, The Hague. 

4. Guruswamy, M.et. al. (1997) The Contemporary Character of the Principle of Self 

Determination, Indian Journal of International Law, vol. 37. 

5. Islam, M. Rafiqul (1996) Indigenous Self-determination at Cross Road Right of its People, 

Indian Journal of International Law, vol. 36. 

6. Joshi, P.C. (1994) The Right to Self-determination: its Scope and Limits, Journal of 

Philosophical Studies, vol. 1 No. 1 February. 

7. Kirgis Federic L. Jr. (1994) The Degrees of Self-determination in the United Nations Era, 

American Journal of Intrnational Law, vol. 88 no. 2. 

8. Mendelson, M.H. (1996) Self-determination in Jammu and Kashmir, Indian Journal of 

International Law, vol. 36. 

9. Nirmal, B.C. (1999) Rights of Self-determination in International Law: Evolution, UN Law 

and Practice, New Dimensions, Deep and Deep Publications, New Delhi . 

10. Norbu, Dawa (1997) Self-determination in the Post Soviet Era : A Case Study of Tibet, 

International Studies, vol. 34. 

11. Partsch, Karl Josef (1982) Fundamental Principles of Human Rights : Self-determination, 

Equality and Non-discrimination, in Karel Vasak (ed.) The International Dimensions of 

Human Rights, vol. I, Paris, UNESCO. 

12. Saini, R.S. (1998) Is the Right to Self-determination Relevant to Jammu and Kashmir, 

Indian Journal of International Law, vol. 38. 

13. Saini, R.S. (1999) Right to Self-determination Secede and International Terrorism : What 

are the UN Norms and Practices, in A.P. Vijapur and Suresh Kumar (eds.) Perspectives on 

Human Right, Manak Publishers, New Delhi. 

14. Swan, George S. (1982) Self-determination and the United National Charter, Indian Journal 

of International Law, vol. 22. 

15. Tomaschat, C. (ed.) (1993) Modern Law of Self-determination, Dordrecht, Martinus 

Nijhoff. UN, (1981), The Right to Self-determination: Historical and Current Development 

on the Basis of United Nations Instrument, UN, Publication Division, New York. 

16. UN, (1980) The Right to Self-determination : Implementation of United Nations 

Resolutions, UN Publication Division, New York. 

M.A. (Final) Human Rights, Semester-IV 


Paper-XVI Minorities and Human Rights and Duties 100 Marks 3 Hours 

Paper-XVII Environment & Human Rights & Duties 100 Marks 3 Hours 

Paper-XVIII, XIX, XX: Students may choose any one of the following Groups 

Group:-A 

Paper-XVIII Disadvantaged Groups and Human Rights 100 Marks 3 Hours 

Paper-XIX Working Class and Human Rights 100 Marks 3 Hours 

Paper-XX 

Group:-B 

Project Report on the Practice of Human Rights 100 Marks 3 Hours 

Paper-XVIII Protection and Enforcement of Human Rights 100 Marks 3 Hours 

Paper –XIX Science and Technology, and Human Rights and 

Duties 


Paper-XX Project Report on the Practice of Human Rights 100 Marks 3 Hours 

10(883) 



M.A. (Final) Human Rights, Semester – IV 

Paper- XVI: Minorities, Human Rights and Duties 

10(884) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 


Minorities as Socio-Economic-Religious-Linguistic Concept, Regional Minorities, 

Role of Minorities in the Development of Human Rights. 

Unit-II Mechanism for the Protection of Minorities: Constitutional Mechanism: 

Legislature, Executive and Judiciary, National and State Commission on Minorities, 

Non-Governmental Organizations. 

Unit-III International Legal Instruments 

UNESCO Constitution (1945), Universal Declaration of Human Rights (1948), 

Declaration on Race and Racial Prejudice (1978) Declaration On the Rights of 

Persons Belonging to National or Ethnic, Religious and Linguistic Minorities 

(1972), Vienna Declaration and Programming Action (1993), Universal Declaration 

on Cultural Diversity (2001). 

Unit-V Rights and Duties of Minorities Under the Indian Legal System 

Constitutional Framework: Fundamental Rights, Directive Principal and 

Fundamental, Duties, Special provision in Article 26 to 30, 331, 333, 336 and 337 of 

the Constitution, Special Laws and Policies: National Commission for Minorities 

Act (1992).Minority Rights and Politics in India, The Nation- Building Project and 

Minorities, 

Secularism and Minorities Rights: Crisis in the Secularism and Minority’s Rights, 

Communal Mobilization and Minority’s Rights. 

REFERENCES 

1. Bhargava, G.S. and R.M. Pal. (eds.), (2000), Human Rights of Dalits: Societal Violation, 

Gyan Publishing House New Delhi:, 

2. Brolmann, C. et al. (eds.), (1993), People and Minorities in International Law, Martinus 

Nijhoff, Dordrecht: 

3. Choedon, Yeshi, (1994), Ethnic, Social and Religions Conflicts: Rights of Minorities, in 

K.P., Saksena, (ed.) Human Rights: Perspective and Challenges, Lancers Book, New Delhi: 


4. Narang, A.S., (1999), Debate on Minority Rights, in A.P. Vijapur and Kumar Suresh, (eds.), 

Perspective on Human Rights, Manak Publications, New Delhi: 

5. Reddy, Jagmohan, (1981), Minorities and the Constitution, Bombay: University Press. 

6. Saxena, J.N., (1983), International Protection of Minorities and Individual Human Rights”, 

Indian Journal of International Law, vol. 23 

7. Seth, D.L. and Gurpreet Mahajan (eds.), (1999), Minority Identities and the Nation State,: 

Oxford University Press, New Delhi 

8. Thamilmaran, V.T. “Ethnic, Social and Religious Conflicts: Rights of Minorities, in K.P. 

Saksena (ed.), (1994), Human Rights: Perspectives and Challenges, Lancers Boo New 

Delhi 

9. Thornberry, Patrick, (1991), International Law and the Rights of the Minorities, Clarendon 

Press, Oxford 

10. UN, (1991), Rights, Study on the Rights of Persons Belonging to Ethnic, Religious and 

Linguistic Minorities, UN Publication Division, New York. 

Paper - XVII: Environment and Human Rights and Duties 

10(885) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I Meaning Nature and Scope of Environment 

Its meaning, concern for environment, historical perspective, pollution and its effects 

on environment and life on earth, Right to clean environment: Right to environment 

versus right to development, Sustainable development; Threats to environment. 

Unit-II International and National Perspective 

International and National Perspective: UN Declaration on the Right to 

Development 1986, International Conventions on the Protection of environment, 

precautionary principle, debate on social clause and WTO, 

National Regime of Environmental Protection: Constitutional Rights and Duties, 

Statutory Rights and Duties. 

Unit-III Issues of Environmental Development in Developing Countries 

Inter-Generational Equity: Preservation of Natural Resources, Indigenous People: 

Tribal and Forest Dwellers, Environment verses Development: Mega projects, 


Industrial accidents and their impact on human Emerging Problems of Science 

and Technological Development: Genetic Engineering, Hazardous of waste 

treatment, Pollution control mechanism, Dumping of waste and discarded 

technology. 

Unit -IV Supervision and Enforcement 

Commissions, Committees, International Reporting Delegations under various 

Treaties and NGOs, 

Enforcement Agencies: Issues of liability, insurance Courts: Process and Remedies, 

Tribunal arbitration and conciliation 

Emerging Concepts: Common concern of Humankind: Common heritage principle, 

Public trust, Precautionary Principle, Sovereign equality, Concern for unborn- 

animals and plants: Right of Future Generations, Code of Environmental Culture 

and Ethics. 

REFERENCES 

1. Balasubramanium, V., “Environment and Human Rights: A New Form of Imperialism”, 

Economic and Political Weekly, vol.33, no.8, 22-27 Feb. 1998, 

2. Birnie, Patricia and Allan Boyle, (1992) International Law and the Environment: 

Clarendon, Oxford 

3. Desai, Bharat, “Enforcement of the Right to Environmental Protection through Public 

InterestLitigation in India”, Indian Journal of International Law, vol.33, 1993, 

4. Finnies, J. (1987), Natural Law and Natural Rights, Clarendon Press, Oxford: 

5. Mahawal, S., “Right to Safe Environment”, World Focus, vol.13, no.2, March 1992 

6. RLEK, (1997), Community Forestry Management in Protected Areas: A Van Gujjar 

Proposal, Natraj Publishers, New Delhi 

7. Sachs, Aaron, Eco-Justice: (1995) Linking Human Rights and the Environment, World 

watch Institute, Washington D.C. 

8. Shelton, Dinah, “Human Rights, Environmental Rights and the Right to Environment”, 

Stanford Journal of International Law, vol.28, no.1, 1991, 

9. Singh, Nagendra, “Right to Environment and Sustainable Development as a Principle of 

International Law”, Journal of Indian Law Institute, 1987, 

10. Singh, Rajkumar Deepak, “Response of Indian Judiciary to Environmental Protection”, 

Indian Journal of International Law, vol.39, no.3, July-Sept. 1999, 

11. Trindade, A.C., (1998), “Human Rights and the Environment”, in Janusz Symonides, ed., 

Human Rights:New Dimensions and Challenges, UNESCO, Sydney. 

Paper- XVIII, Group-A: Disadvantaged People and Human Rights 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I Concept, History and Issues 

10(886) 


Disadvantage Group- Concept, Historical Background: Feudalism, Caste System 

Socio-Eco Situation: Social and Economic Deprivation of Lower Rungs of Society 

Through History 

British Rule and its Impact on Disadvantage Communities. 

Unit-II Status of Disadvantaged People in Contemporary Indian Society 

Issues of Identification of Scheduled Castes/ Scheduled Tribes, Dalits and Other 

Backward Classes 

Deprivation and Atrocities: Poverty, Illiteracy and Unemployment, Economic and 

Social Inequality Issues of Land Rights, Rural Indebtness. 

Unit-III Constitutional Protection and Institutional Mechanism 

Fundamental Rights and Directive Principles Under Constitution: Special 

Protections Under Articles 15(4), 16(4) & (4-A), 17, 29(1) and 46, Articles 

334,335,338,339,340,341&342, Fifth and Sixth Schedules: Special Protection: Laws 

and Policies: Protection of Civil Rights Act (1955), Scheduled Castes and 

Scheduled Tribes (Prevention of Atrocities) Act 1989, Employment of Manual 

Scavengers and Construction of Dry Latrines (Prohibition) Act (1999), Institution 

Mechanism for Protection of SC/ST, and OBCs 

National Commissions, State Commission, Non – Governmental Organizations, The 

Information Media: Role of Education. 

Unit-IV International Norms and Standards 

UN Declaration on the Indigenous People 1995, UN Voluntary Fund for Indigenous 

Population 1985, ILO Convention No. 169 Concerning Indigenous and Tribal 

Communities 1989, Current Debates on the Rights of Indigenous People. 

REFERENCES 

1. Bhargava, G.S. and R.M. Pal, (eds,)(2000) Human Rights of Dalits: Societal Violation, 

Gyan Publishing House New Delhi:, 

2. Bhatia, K.L. et al. (1995) Social Justice of Dr. B.R. Ambedkar,: Deep and Deep New Delhi, 

3. Brolmann, C. et al. (eds.) Peoples and Minorities in International Law, Martinus Nijhoff, 

Dordecht 

4. Chocdon, Yeshi (1994) “ Ethnic, Social and Religions Conflicts: Right of Minorities”, in 

K.P. Saksena (ed.) Human Rights: Perspective and Challenges, Lancers Books, New Delhi: 

5. Giridhar, Gormango (1987) Constitutional Provisions for the SCs and STs,: Himalaya 

Publishing House New Delhi 

6. Kazimi, M.R. (1996) “ Judiciary and the Protection of the Right of the Minorities in India”, 

in Mumtaz Ali Khan (ed.) Human Rights and the Dalits, New Delhi: D.K. Publishers. 

7. Narang, A.S. (1999) “Debate on Minority Rights”, in A. P. Vijapur and Kumar Suresh, 

(eds.) Perspectives on Human Rights.: Manak Publications, New Delhi 

8. Pillai, R.V. (1999) “Development Issues in Human rights with Reference to the Scheduled 

Castes and the Scheduled Tribes”, in a A.P.Vijapur and Kumar Suresh, (eds.) Perspectives 

on Human Rights,: Manak Publications, New Delhi 

9. Reddy, Jagmihan (1981) Minorities and the Constitution, Bombay University Press. 

10. Sheth, D.L. and Gurpreet Mahajan, (edu.) Minority Identities and the Nation State,: Oxford 

University Press, New Delhi 

11. Sinha, S.P. (1993) Conflict and Tension in Tribal Society, Concept Publication, New Delhi 

12. Thamilmaran, V.T, (1991) Ethnic, Social and Religious Conflicts: Rights of Minorities”, in 

Thornberry, Patrick (ed.) International Law and the Rights of the Minorities. Claredon 

Press, Oxford: 

10(887) 


13. UN Center for Human Rights (1991) Study on the Rights of Persons Belonging to Ethnic, 

14. Religious and Linguistic Minorities, UN Publication Division, New York, 

15. UN Centre for Human Rights (1997) The Rights of Indigenous Peoples, Geneva: World 

Campaign for Human Rights. 

16. UN High Commissioner for Human (1997) Protection of the Heritage of Indigenous 

People, Geneva: UN Publication Division. 

Paper-XIX, Group-A: Working Class and Human Rights 

10(888) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I Conceptual Issues 

Definition of working class, classification; Status of Working Class: Women, 

Children, Casual Workers, Bonded Labor, Agricultural Labor, Migrant 

Workers. 

Unit-II Ideology and Working Class 

Working class movement; From Laissez Faire to Welfare State; Privatization to 

Globalization; Basic Rights and Duties: Their Content and Scope – Association and 

Assembly, Work with Equality and Dignity, Education and Information, Trade 

Unionism and its Development, Industrial, Labour Safety. 

Unit-III Labour Welfare Problems 

Health Hazards: Accidents, Occupational Decease; Social Security; Collective 

Bargaining; Workers’ Participation in Management; Retrenchment, Termination and 

Displacement; Work Culture and Welfare Measures; Industrial Conflicts and 

Insecurity; Impact of Technological Developments; Conflicting Rights: Worker’s 

Benefit v. Employer’s Inconvenience, The right to strike, Lockout and closure of 

Industry. 

Unit-IV International and Indian Standards 

International Framework: ILO Labor Standards; Debate on Social Clause and WTO; 

Emerging Rights and Duties; Code of International Industrial Discipline; Role of 

International Labor Agencies. 

Indian Framework: Constitutional Protection; Worker’s Rights and Duties; 

Employers’ Responsibilities and Duties; Dispute Settlement Mechanisms. 

Institutional Framework for Promotion of Labour Welfare: National – State 

machinery, workers organizations; Role of International Labor Organization (ILO). 

REFERENCES 

1. ILO, (1974), Migrant Workers. Geneva, International Labor Office. 

2. ILO, (1970), Trade Union Rights and Their Relation to Civil Liberties, Geneva: 

International Labor Office. 


3. Jain, Mahavir (1997) Bonded Labor Justice through Judiciary.: Manak Publications, New 

Delhi 

4. Jenks, C.W. (1960) Human Rights and International Labor Standards,:Stevens London,. 

5. Kumar, Bindal, (2000), Problems of Working Children. APII Publications, New Delhi 

6. Mehta, P.L., (1996), Child Labor and the law, Deep and Deep, (New Delhi: 

7. Prakash, S.S. (1990), Bonded Labor and Social Justice, Deep and Deep, New Delhi: 

8. Sahoo, Umesh Ch. (1990) “Child Labor and Legislation”, Economic and Political Weekly, 

vol. XXV, no. 46, 17 November, pp. 2531-34. 

9. Saksena, Anu (1999), Human Rights and Child Labor in Indian Industries,:Shipra, 


10. Saksena, K.P. (1999) “Recent Supreme Court Judgment on Child Labor: A Critique”, in 

K.P. Saksena (eds.), Human Rights: Fifty Years of India’s Independence: Gyan Publishing 


11. Sankaran, Kamala (1998) “Human Rights and the World of Work”, Journal of Indian Law 

Institute, vol.40 nos. 1-4 

12. Saxsena, Anu ,(2002) ,Human Rights and Child Labor in Indian Industries, Shipra, New 

Delhi: 

13. Sharma, A.K. (1995) “ Human Rights Violations of Street Children and Child Labor in New 

Delhi”, In B. P. Singh Seghal (ed.) Human Rights in India: Problems and Perspectives, 

Deep and Deep, New Delhi 

14. Singh, S.K., (1994), Bonded Labor and the La, Deep and Deep. New Delhi 

15. UN, (1996), The Right to Migratory Workers, UN Centre for Human Rights, World 

Campaign for Human Rights, Geneva: 

16. Valticos, N. (1979) International Labor Law, Kluwer, Netherlands. 

Paper-XX, Group-A: Project Report on the Practice of Human Rights 


The student shall be required to write a project report based on the case study of any aspect of 

human rights and duties problem/situation. He/she shall focus on a particular problem area and 

prepare a report based on the study of the situation, its case, and solutions. 

The students may be provided with potential topics or the topics may be selected in consultation 

with the teacher 

Paper-XVIII, Group-B: Protection and Enforcement of Human Rights 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I Conceptual Issues 

Human Rights – Protection and Promotion; Human Rights as a Legal Ideal; 

Obligations to Implement Human Rights Provision; Ethics in Law Enforcement 

10(889) 


Human Rights Violations: Social Content and Subjectivities, Crimes Against 

Humanity; Response of Community to Violations. 

Unit-II Protection of Human Rights at the National Level 

Legislature, Executive, Judiciary 

National and State Commission on Human Rights and other Commissions 

Non Government Organizations 

Unit-III Protection of Human Rights at Regional Level 

European mechanisms of protection and enforcement, role of the Council of Europe, 

The European Court of Human Rights 

Regional mechanism in Latin America 

Regional mechanism in Africa 

Unit-IV Protection and Enforcement at Global Level 

UN Human Rights Commission, UN High Commissioner for Human Rights, 

Committees Under the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights & 

Economic. Social and Cultural Rights, Racial Discrimination Convention, Rights of 

the Child Convention, Torture Convention, etc., ILO mechanisms 

Monitoring techniques: reporting obligations, state and individuals complaints 

procedures, and compliance of recommendations 

Roles of UN Security Council, General Assembly, ECOSOC and the Secretary 

General. 

REFERENCES 

1. Bloed, A. and others, (1993), Monitoring Human Rights in Europe, Dordrecht, Martinus 

Nijhoff 




76 


International Commission of Jurist, vol. 7, no 1 




76 


International Commission of Jurist, vol. 7, no 

8. Davidson, Scot, Remedies for Violations of the American convention on Human Rights 


9. Drzemkzewski, A., The Sui Generis Nature of the European Convention on Human Rights, 


10. ILO, Comparative Analysis of the International Covenants on Human Rights and 

International 

11. Labour Conventions and Recommendations, Official Bulletin (Geneva), vol.52, no.2, 1969, 

12. Bailey, Sydney D, (1994). , The UN Security Council and Human Rights, St. Martin’s New 

York Press, 

13. Bakken, T., “International Law and Human Rights for Defendants in Criminal Trials”, 

Indian Journal of International Law, vol.25, 1985, 

14. Carey, J., U.N., (1970), Protection of Civil and Political Rights, Syracuse University Press, 

Syracuse 

15. Cassase, A., (ed), (1990), Human Rights: Thirty Years after the Universal Declaration 

16. ——————, Human Rights in Changing World, Temple University Press, Philadelphia 

10(890) 


17. Claude, R.P., and B.H. Weston, (1989), Human Rights in the World Community: Issues and 

Action, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia: 

18. Falk, Richard A., (1982) Human Rights and State Sovereignty: Holmes and Meier, New 

York 

19. Ferguson, C. Claude, “Global Human Rights: Challenges and Prospects”, Denver Journal of 

International Law and Policy, vol.8, 1979 

20. Halcombe, Arthur N, (1948). , Human Rights in the Modern World, Washington, University 

Press, New York 

Paper XIX, Group-B: Science and Technology and Human Rights and Duties 

10(891) 




Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit-I Conceptual Legal and Ethical Issues 

Concept of Science & Technology as a Tool for Furtherance of Human and Social 

Welfare; Debates Over ‘Development’: ‘Quality’ of Life: Spiritualism Versus 

Materialism. Some Ethical and Legal Issues: Developments in Biotechnology; Life 

Sustaining Technologies; Artificial Organs, Kidney Dialysis, Life Sustaining Drugs 

New Impacts of Science & Technology: Organ Transplantation and Sale of Human 

Organs, Computer Crimes, Pornography Online, New Torture Technologies. 

Unit-II Information Technology and Human Rights 

Revolution in Information Technology, Right to Information, Problems of Imposing 

Reasonable Restrictions, Applicable Legal Norms: Article19,41,45&46 of the Indian 

Constitution, Information Technology Act 199, Other Indian Laws Relating to 

Media, Information Technology, Satellite communication, Cinematograph Act, 

Official Secrets Act 1926. 

Unit-III Right to Food and Health 

Science & Technology to Improve and Diversify Food Production and Storage, and 

for Food Security, Fertilizers, Biotechnology to Produce Improved Varieties of 

Foods, Improvement in Storage Facilities Impact of Bio-Technology in Agriculture 

(Positive and Negative): Agriculture as a Commercial Industry, Science & 

Technology and Improvement of Individual and Community Health and Hygiene, 

Experiments on Living Beings, Community Health as a Public Service Industry: 

Shift in Character as a Commercial, Industry, Role of Multinationals, 

Pharmaceutical Industries, Changing Role of Government. 

Unit-IV Right to Development: Development (spiritual and material) as Both the Objective 

as Well as The Catalyst for Realization of Human Rights, Human Welfare: 

Indivisibility of Civil and Political Rights, and Economic, Social and Cultural 


Rights, SCIENCE and Technology as a Tool of Development, Declaration on the 

Right to Development 1986, Problems in Access to Technology Applicable Legal 

Norms. 

REFERENCES 

1. UN Centre for Human Rights, (1996) Advisory Services and Technological Cooperation in 

the Field of Human Rights, World Campaign for Human Rights, Geneva: 

2. UN Centre for Human Rights, (1991), Report of the International Consultation on AIDS 

and Human Rights, Geneva, 26-28 July 1989 UN Publication Division, New York 

3. UN, (1982), Human Rights and Scientific and Technological Developments,UN 

Department of Public Information, New York 

4. WHO, (1996), Health as a Bridge for Peace and Human Rights WHO, Geneva 

5. WHO, (1975). Protection of Human Rights in the Light of Scientific and Technological 

Progress in Biology and Medicine, WHO, Albany 

6. Amarasekara, Kumar, (1998), “Autonomy, Paternalism and Discrimination¨The Darker 

Side of Euthanasia”, in Antony Anghie and Garry Sturgess, eds., Legal Visions of the 21st 

Century: Essays in Honour of Judge Christopher Weeramantry: Kluwer, The Hague 

7. Bankowski, I., (ed.), (1993), International Ethical Guidelines for Bromedial Research 

Involving Human Subjects: WHO, Geneva 

8. Johnston, Ann and others, (eds), (1986). New Technologies and Development, UNESCO, 

Geneva: 

9. Michael, James, (1994), Privacy and Human Rights: An International and Comparative 

Study with Special Reference to Documents in Information Technology, UNESCO, and 

Paris 

10. Mukherjee, Sipra G., (1985) ,“Promotion of Human Rights and Science Education”, in 

K.P.Saksena,( ed)., The Teaching about Human Rights , Huriter New Delhi:, 

11. Nawaz, M.K., “Law, Human Rights and Computer”, Indian Journal of International Law, 

vol.25, nos. 3 and 4, July-Dec. (1985) 

12. Satyamala, C., “Hazardous Contraceptives and the Right to Life”, Journal of the Indian 

Law Institute, vol. 40, 1998, pp. 174-199. 

13. Sisskind, Charles, (1973), Understanding Technology Feffer and Simons, (New York): 

14. Zinian, John and others, (eds), (1986) The World of Science and the Rule of Law University 

Press, Oxford 

Paper-XX, Group-B: Project Report on the Practice of Human Rights 

10(892) 


The student shall be required to write a project report based on the case study of any aspect of 

human rights and duties problem/situation. He/she shall focus on a particular problem area and 

prepare a report based on the study of the situation, its case, and solutions. 

The students may be provided with potential topics or the topics may be selected in consultation 

with the teacher 


SYLLABUS OF M.A. (PREVIOUS) POLITICAL SCIENCE (SEMESTER SYSTEM) SCHEME 

OF EXAMINATIONS AND COURSES OF READING (w.e.f. 2012-13) 

M.A. Defence & Strategic Studies Course shall be a two years Degree Course 

of 2000 Marks consisting of four Semesters. The candidate shall take 5 Papers 

in each Semester, i.e. 20 Papers in the full Course. Each Paper will carry 100 

marks out of which 20 marks shall be earmarked for Internal Assessment. 

M.A. Defence & Strategic Studies (First Semester) w.e.f. 2012-13 



Paper:-I Evolution of Strategic Thought-I 100 3 Hours 

Paper:-II National Security: Conceptual Aspects 100 3 Hours 

Paper:-III International Relations-I 100 3 Hours 

Paper:-IV Theory and Practice of War-I 100 3 Hours 

Paper:-V Research Methodology-I 100 3 Hours 

Paper-I, Evolution of Strategic Thought-I 

10(893) 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: Students are required to attempt four questions, selecting one question from each 

unit. 

Unit: I Kautilya’s Philosophy of war; Sun Tzu- The Art of war; Machiavelli’s views on the 

Art of war; 

Unit: II Vauban: The impact of science on war; and, Frederick the Great: His views on 

National War. Mahan’s Views on Sea Power and Naval Warfare. 

Unit: III Clausewitz’s theories on war: war and its relationship with Policy, Strategy and 

Tactics; Jomini’s theories on the concept of mass army, strategy, tactics & logistics. 

Unit: IV Hamilton and Adam Smith: Their views on Importance of Military Power. 

Mackinder and Houshoffer: Their ideas on geo-politics and geo-strategy; 

Readings 

Dass, S.T. An Introduction to the art of war 

Earl, E.M. Makers of Modern Strategy 

Fuller, J.F.C. Armament and History 

Fuller, J.F.C. The Conduct of war 

Shapherd, E.W A Study of Military History 

Shama Shastri Kautilya’s Arthshastra 

Tzu, Sun The Art of War 

Cohen, S.B. Geography and Politics in a divided world 

Duffy, Chistopher Siege Warfare 


Ropp, Theodere War in the Modern World 

Beaufre Andre Deterrence and Strategy 

Fukuyama, F. The End of History 

Heil Brunn, Otto Conventional Warare in the Nuclear Age 

Huntington, Samunal The Clash of Civilizationa 

Mao-Te-Tung On the protracted War: Selected works 

Nasultion, Abdul Haris Fundamentals of Guerrilla Warfare 

Reid, Brain Holden J.F.C.Fuller: Military Thinker 

Fuller, J.F.C. The Second World War 

Greene, T.N. The Gurrilla and how to fight him 

Mecuen John J. The Art of Couter revolutionary 

Paper-II, National Security: Conceptual Aspects 




Time: 3 Hours 


unit. 

Unit: I Security: Definition, Concept, Types, and Objectives; and, National Defence and 

Security Policies: Formulations & Linkages. 

Unit: II Elements of National Security: Geographical, Social & Political Factors, Economic 

& Industrial Potential, Scientific & Technological Potential, National Unity & 

National Morale, Transport & Communication, Defence Potential & Defence 

Preparedness and Intelligence. 

Unit: III Challenges to National Security: Internal and External; and Responses to National 

Security. International terrorism. 

Unit: IV International Strategic environment in cold-war & post-cold war period. 

Contemporary trends in Arms proliferation; and, Challenges to International 

security: Proliferation of Weapons of Mass Destruction (WMD). 

Readings 

R.S. Yadav (ed.) (1993) India’s Foreign Policy : Towards 2000 A.D., New Delhi, Deep & 

Deep. 

R.S. Yadav (2005) Bharat Ki Videsh Niti: Ek Vishleshan, Allahabad, Kitab Mehal 

R.S. Yadav & Suresh India’s Foreign Policy: Contemporary Trends, New Delhi, 

Dhanda (eds.) (2009) Shipra. 

Bajpai,U.S.(1986) India and its Neighbourhood: New Delhi, Lancer International. 

Baranwal, S.P.(1984) Measures of Civil Defence in India: New Delhi, Guide Publications. 

Bobbing, Ross and India’s Strategic Future: Delhi, Oxford University Press. 

Gordon, Sandy(eds)(1992) 

Chatterjee,R.K.(1978) India’s Land Borders- Problems and Challenges: New Delhi, Sterling 

Publishers. 

Chaudhury, Rahul Roy(!995) Sea Power and India’s Security, London, Brassey’s. 

Dass, S.T.(1987) National Security in Perspective: Delhi, Gian Publishers. 

Karnard, Bharat(1994) Future Imperiled: New Delhi, Viking. 

10(894) 


Kavic, Lorne J.(1967) India’s Quest For Security: Defence Policies 1947-1965: LA, 

University of California Press. 

Khera,S.S.(1968) India’s Defence Problems: New Delhi, Orient Longmans 

Menon, V.P.(1961) The Story of the Integration of Indian States: New Delhi, Orient 

Longmans. 

Misra, R.N.(1986) Indian Ocean and India’s Security: Delhi, Mittal Publications. 

Nayar, V.K.(1992) Threats From Within: New Delhi, Lancer Publications. 

Rao, Ramakrishna and India’s Borders: New Delhi, Scholars’ Publishing Forum. 

Sharma, R.C.(ed)(1991) 

Rao,P.V.R.(1970) Defence Without Drift: Bombay, Popular Prakashan. 

Singh, Jaswant(1999) Defending India: Banglore, Macmillan India Ltd. 

Singh, Nagendra(1974) The Defence Mechanism and the Modern State: New Delhi, Asia 

Publishing House. 

Venkateshwaran(1967) Defence Organisation in India: New Delhi, Ministry of Information 

and Broadcasting, Government of India. 

Buzan, Barry(1987) People Fear and State: New Delhi, Transasia Publications. 

Buzan, Barry and Regions and Powers: Cambridge. 

Waever, Ole(eds)(2003) National Security in Perspective: Delhi, Gian 

Das, S.T.(1987) Publishing House. 

Frankal, Joseph(1970) National Interest: London, Macmillian 

Garnett, John(ed)(1970) Theories of Peace and Security: Macmillan St. Martin’s Press. 

Palmer, Norman D. and International Relations: Calcutta, Scientific Book Agency 

Perkins, Howard C. (1968) 

Chowdhury, Subrata Roy Military Alliances and Neutrality in War and Peace: New 

(1966) Delhi, Orient Longman. SIPRI Year Books. 

Paper-III, International Relations-I 

10(895) 




Time: 3 Hours 


unit. 

Unit: I International Relations: Concept, Nature, Scope & Development; Contending 

Theories of International Relations: Realist theory, Decision making theory, Systems 

theory & Game and Bargaining Theory. 

Unit: II National interest: Definition, types & methods of securing National Interest, Role of 

National Interest in the formulation of Foreign and Defence Policies. Balance of 

Power: Nature, Strategies and its relevance in contemporary times 

Unit: III State, Nation & Nation-State System; Origin, Issues of Ethnicity, Pluralism, 

Multiculturalism and Nation-State System in Contemporary times. Arms Control 

and Disarmament since World War-II. 


Unit: IV The United Nations: Purposes, Structure and Powers, The Principal Organs, 

Contribution to World-peace and security. Collective Security: Meaning, basic 

postulates and its working under the League & UN. 

Readings 

John Baylis & Steve Smith Globalization of World Politics 

Columbus, Theodore Introduction to International Relations 

A. Wolfe 

Dyke, Vernon Van International Politics 

Morgenthau, Hans J. Politics among Nations 

Palmer and Perkins International Relations 

Wright, Quincy The Study of International Relations 

Said A.A. Theory of International Relations 

Mahender Kumar Theoretical Aspects of International Politics 

Larche and Said Concept of International Politics 

Rosenau, James N.,(ed.) International Politics & Foreign Policy 

Sanders, Bruce L.and Contemporary International Policies. 

A.C.Durbin. 

Hartmann F.H. The Relations of Nations. 

Calvocoressi, Peter World Politics since 1945 

International Encyclopedia of Social Science. 

Journals Foreign Affairs, World Politics 

Paper- IV, Theory and Practice of War-I 

10(896) 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note : Students are required to attempt four questions, selecting one question from each 

unit. 

Unit: I War: Concept, Nature and Scope, Theories of War; Causes, Assumptions, Functions 

and Techniques: Animal Warfare, Primitive Warfare, Historical Warfare, Modern 

Warfare. 

Unit: II Guerilla Warfare and Low Intensity Conflict: Concept, Origin, Scope and 

objectives; and, Limited War: Meaning, Origin, Scope and Objectives. 

Unit: III War in Nuclear Age: Beginning of Nuclear Era, Main effects of Nuclear Energy, 

Flash, Heat, Blast and Nuclear Radiation; Theories of Nuclear Deterrence: 

Preventive, Pre-emptive, Massive Retaliation, Flexible Response. Ballistic Missile 

Defence: Missiles and their classification, Ground Based ABM System, Counter 

Measures: NMD, TMD 

Unit: IV Psychological Warfare: Concept, Definition, Functions and Limitations including 

various Psychological Aspects of War i.e. Leadership, Discipline, Motivation and 

Fear and Panic. 


Readings 

Howard, Michael Theory and Practice of War 

Howard, Michael The Causes of war 

Bernard, Black L. War and its causes 

Wright, Quincy A study of war 

Mao-Tse-Tung Guerilla Warfare 

Legueur Walter: Guerilla Warfare 

Robert E.Osgood Limited war- The Challenge to American Strategy 

Rees David Korea, the limited war 

Kitson, Frank Low, intensity Operations, Subversion, Insurgency, Peace 

Keeping 

Osanka FM Modern Guerilla Warfare 

Nasution, Abdual H. Fundamentals of Guerilla warfare 

Brodie,Bernard Strategy in the missile age 

Sampooran Singh India and the Nuclear Bomb 

Tirpathi K.S. Evolution of Nuclear Strategy 

Gupta Rakesh Militarisation of outer-space 

Encyclopedia Britannica 

Halperin Morton H. Defence Strategies for the seventies 

Mir Publications: Weaponry in space, The Dilemma of Society 

Hart, Liddle History of First World War 

Hart, Liddle History of Second World War 

Fuller, J.F.C. History of Second World War 

Fuller, J.F.C. The conduct of war 

Paper-V Research Methodology-I 

10(897) 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note : Students are required to attempt five questions, selecting one question from each 

unit. 
















Readings 

H.N. Blalock An Introduction to Social Research, Englewood Cliffs NJ, Prentice 

Hall, 1970. 

H.N. Blalock (ed.) Casual Models in the Social Sciences, London, Macmillan, 1972. 

J. Blondel Thinking Politically, London, Wildwood House, 1976. 

A. Bryman, Quantity and Quality in Social Research, London, Unwin Hyman, 

1988. 

T.L. Burton & G.L. Cherry Social Research Techniques, London, Unwin Hyman, 1989. 

A.F. Chalmers Science and Its Fabrication, Milton Keynes, Open University Press, 

1990. 

De D.A. Vaus Surveys in Social Research, 2nd edn., London, Unwin Hyman, 1991. 

M. Duverger An Introduction to the Social Sciences with Special References to 

their Methods, Translated by M. Anderson, New York, Frederick A. 

Praeger, 1964. 

S.V. Evera Guide to Methods for Students of Political Science, Ithaca, NY, 

Cornell University Press, 1997. 

J. Galtung Theory and Methods of Social Research, New York, Columbia 


E. Gellner Relativism and Social Science, Cambridge, Cambridge University 

Press, 1985. 

A.Giddens Profiles and Critiques in Social Theory, London Macmillan, 1982. 

W.J. Goode and P.K. Hatt Methods of Social Research, New York, McGraw Hill, 1952. 

A.C. Isaak, Scope and Methods of Political Science, Homewood Illinois, Dorsey 

Press, 1985. 

J.B. Johnson &R.A. Joslyn Political Science Research Methods, Washington DC, C.Q. Press, 

1986. 

F.N. Kerlinger Behavioural Research, New York, Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1979. 

T.Kuhn The Structure of Scientific Revolution, Chicago, University of 


D. Marsh & G. Stoker(ed.) Theory and Methods in Political Science, Basigstoke, Macmillan, 

1995. 

C.A. McCoy & C. Playford (eds.) Apolitical Politics : A Critique of Behaviouralism, New York, 

Thomas Crowell, 1967. 

R. K. Merton (ed.) Social Theory and Social Structure, New York, The Free Press, 1957. 

D. Miller (ed.) Pocket Popper, London, Fontana, 1997. 

G. Mydral Objectivity in Social Science, New York, Pantheon Books, 1969. 

Sir, K.R. Popper The Logic of Scientific Discovery, London, Hutchinson, 1959. 

Sir, K. R. Popper Conjectures and Refutations : The Growth of Scientific Knowledge, 


Sir, K.R. Popper The Poverty of Historicism, London, Reoutledge, 1991. 

A.Ryan (ed.) The Philosophy of Social Sciences, London, Macmillan, 1970. 

H.J. Rubin Applied Social Research, Columbus, North Illinois University Press, 

1983. 

B. Smith Political Research Methods, Boston, Hougton Milton, 1976. 

G.W. Snedecor Statistical Methods, 5th edn., Iowa, State College, 1965. 

10(898) 


M. Weber The Methodology of Social Science, translated and edited by E.A. 

Shils and H.A. Finch, New York, The Free Press, 1949. 

P.V. Young Scientific Social Surveys and Research. 

Robert A. Dahl Modern Political Analysis, Englewood Cliffs, NJ Prentice Hall, 1963. 

C. Charlesworth (ed.) Contemporary Political Analysis, New York, Free Press, 1967. 

Michael Hoas, Henry S. Kariel Approaches to the Study of Political Science, California, 

Chandler Publishing Co., 1970. 

Roland Young Approaches to the Study of Politics, Evanston, Ill, North Western 


E.J. Meehan The Theory and Method of Political Analysis, Homewood, Illinois, 

Dorsey Press, 1965. 

Stephen L. Wasby Political Science - The Discipline and Its Dimensions, Calcutta, 

Scientific Book Agency, 1970. 

M.A. Defence & Strategic Studies (Second Semester) w.e.f. 2012-13 



Paper:-VI Evolution of Strategic Thought-II 100 3 Hours 

Paper:-VII National Security: Indian Context 100 3 Hours 

Paper:-VIII International Relations-II 100 3 Hours 

Paper:-IX Theory and Practice of War-II 100 3 Hours 

Paper:-X Research Methodology-II 100 3 Hours 

Paper-VI, Evolution of Strategic Thought-II 

10(899) 




Time: 3 Hours 


unit. 

Unit: I J.F.C.Fuller: Concept of mobile warfare; Liddell Hart: Mobile Defence and Total 

war. 

Unit: II Douhet and Mitchell: Their views on the Role of Air Power in Modern Warfare; 

and, Skovetsky’s Views on Warfare. 

Unit: III Engel and Marx: Military concept of the social revolutionaries; Mao-Tse-Tung ‘s 

views on Guerrilla warfare; and, Lenin: Theory of Imperialism and Warfare. 

Unit: IV F. Fukuyama- The End of History; and, Samual, P.Huntington- The Clash of 

Civilizations. Dulles and Andre Beaufre - Theories of Nuclear War and Deterrence. 

Readings 

Dass, S.T. An Introduction to the art of war 

Earl, E.M. Makers of Modern Strategy 

Fuller, J.F.C. Armament and History 

Fuller, J.F.C. The Conduct of war 


Shapherd, E.W A Study of Military History 

Shama Shastri Kautilya’s Arthshastra 

Tzu, Sun The Art of War 

Cohen, S.B. Geography and Politics in a divided world 

Duffy, Chistopher Siege Warfare 

Ropp, Theodere War in the Modern World 

Beaufre Andre Deterrence and Strategy 

Fukuyama, F. The End of History 

Heil Brunn, Otto Conventional Warare in the Nuclear Age 

Huntington, Samunal The Clash of Civilizationa 

Mao-Te-Tung On the protracted War: Selected works 

Nasultion, Abdul Haris Fundamentals of Guerrilla Warfare 

Reid, Brain Holden J.F.C.Fuller: Military Thinker 

Fuller, J.F.C. The Second World War 

Greene, T.N. The Gurrilla and how to fight him 

Mecuen John J. The Art of Couter revolutionary 

Paper-VII, National Security: Indian Context 

10(900) 




Time: 3 Hours 


unit. 

Unit: I India’s Security problems as a result of partition: Geo-political impact of partition, 

Effects of partition over Indian Armed Forces, & their reorganization; Security 

problems related to the merger of states – Jammu and Kashmir, Junagarh, Hydrabad 

and Goa; Higher Defence Organization in India; 

Unit: II Role and Structure of Paramilitary Forces; India’s internal security problems: 

Terrorism in Jammu and Kashmir, Insurgency in North Eastern States, & Problem of 

Naxalism. 

Unit: III India’s Maritime Security: Maritime boundary, Maritime zones, Maritime 

routes & Island territories, Threats from Sea, & Role of Navy and Coast 

Guards. India’s Security problems related to Pakistan, China, Nepal, 

Bangladesh, Sri Lanka. 

Unit: IV India’s Nuclear policy: Nuclear doctrine & Nuclear and Missile capabilities of 

India; Civil Military relations in India; Civil Defence Organisation in India; and, 

India’s Defence policy and planning. 

Readings 

R.S. Yadav (ed.) (1993) India’s Foreign Policy : Towards 2000 A.D., New Delhi, Deep & 

Deep. 

R.S. Yadav (2005) Bharat Ki Videsh Niti: Ek Vishleshan, Allahabad, Kitab Mehal 


R.S. Yadav & Suresh India’s Foreign Policy: Contemporary Trends, New Delhi, 

Dhanda (eds.) (2009) Shipra. 

Bajpai,U.S.(1986) India and its Neighbourhood: New Delhi, Lancer International. 

Baranwal, S.P.(1984) Measures of Civil Defence in India: New Delhi, Guide Publications. 

Bobbing, Ross and India’s Strategic Future: Delhi, Oxford University Press. 

Gordon, Sandy(eds)(1992) 

Chatterjee,R.K.(1978) India’s Land Borders- Problems and Challenges: New Delhi, Sterling 

Publishers. 

Chaudhury, Rahul Roy(!995) Sea Power and India’s Security, London, Brassey’s. 

Dass, S.T.(1987) National Security in Perspective: Delhi, Gian Publishers. 

Karnard, Bharat(1994) Future Imperiled: New Delhi, Viking. 

Kavic, Lorne J.(1967) India’s Quest For Security: Defence Policies 1947-1965: LA, 

University of California Press. 

Khera,S.S.(1968) India’s Defence Problems: New Delhi, Orient Longmans 

Menon, V.P.(1961) The Story of the Integration of Indian States: New Delhi, Orient 

Longmans. 

Misra, R.N.(1986) Indian Ocean and India’s Security: Delhi, Mittal Publications. 

Nayar, V.K.(1992) Threats From Within: New Delhi, Lancer Publications. 

Rao, Ramakrishna and India’s Borders: New Delhi, Scholars’ Publishing Forum. 

Sharma, R.C.(ed)(1991) 

Rao,P.V.R.(1970) Defence Without Drift: Bombay, Popular Prakashan. 

Singh, Jaswant(1999) Defending India: Banglore, Macmillan India Ltd. 

Singh, Nagendra(1974) The Defence Mechanism and the Modern State: New Delhi, Asia 

Publishing House. 

Venkateshwaran(1967) Defence Organisation in India: New Delhi, Ministry of Information 

and Broadcasting, Government of India. 

Buzan, Barry(1987) People Fear and State: New Delhi, Transasia Publications. 

Buzan, Barry and Regions and Powers: Cambridge. 

Waever, Ole(eds)(2003) National Security in Perspective: Delhi, Gian 

Das, S.T.(1987) Publishing House. 

Frankal, Joseph(1970) National Interest: London, Macmillian 

10(901) 


Garnett, John(ed)(1970) Theories of Peace and Security: Macmillan St. Martin’s Press. 

Palmer, Norman D. and International Relations: Calcutta, Scientific Book Agency 

Perkins, Howard C. (1968) 

Chowdhury, Subrata Roy Military Alliances and Neutrality in War and Peace: New 

(1966) Delhi, Orient Longman.SIPRI Year Books. 

Paper-VIII, International Relations-II 

10(902) 




Time: 3 Hours 


unit. 

Unit: I Cold-War: Definition, Theories of its origin, Historical evolution & Consequences; 

and, Diplomacy and its role in settling international disputes. 

Unit: II Basic determinants of India’s Foreign Policy and India’s Relations with her 

neighbours (Pakistan, Bangladesh, Nepal, & Sri Lanka). 

Unit: III India’s relations with big powers (U.S.A., Russia, & China). 

Unit: IV Regional Cooperation & India: ASEAN, SAARC & IOR-ARC 

Readings 

John Baylis & Steve Smith Globalization of World Politics 

Columbus, Theodore Introduction to International Relations 

A. Wolfe 

Dyke, Vernon Van International Politics 

Morgenthau, Hans J. Politics among Nations 

Palmer and Perkins International Relations 

Wright, Quincy The Study of International Relations 

Said A.A. Theory of International Relations 

Mahender Kumar Theoretical Aspects of International Politics 

Larche and Said Concept of International Politics 

Rosenau, James N.,(ed.) International Politics & Foreign Policy 

Sanders, Bruce L.and Contemporary International Policies. 

A.C.Durbin. 

Hartmann F.H. The Relations of Nations. 

Calvocoressi, Peter World Politics since 1945 

International Encyclopedia of Social Science. 

Journals Foreign Affairs, World Politics 


Paper- IX, Theory and Practice of War-II 

10(903) 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note : Students are required to attempt four questions, selecting one question from each 

unit. 

Unit: I World War-I (1914-18): Causes (in brief), War plans of belligerents, Organisation of 

theatres of war (in brief) of contending nations & outcome, Strategy, Tactics; 

Unit: II World War-II (1939 to 1945): Causes (in brief), War plans of belligerents, 

Organisation of theatres of war (in brief) of contending nations and outcome, 

Strategy, & Tactics. 

Unit: III Korean War (1950-1953): Causes (in brief), War belligerents and their plans, 

Outline of main operations, & Consequences; and, Vietnam war (1954-1974): 

Causes, Main events (in brief) & Consequences. 

Unit: IV Indo-Pak War-1965, 1971 & 1999) : Causes, Main events (in brief) & 

Consequences. Gulf War (1990 & 2003): Causes, War belligerents, Outline of main 

operations, & Consequences. 

Readings 

Howard, Michael Theory and Practice of War 

Howard, Michael The Causes of war 

Bernard, Black L. War and its causes 

Wright, Quincy A study of war 

Mao-Tse-Tung Guerilla Warfare 

Legueur Walter: Guerilla Warfare 

Robert E.Osgood Limited war- The Challenge to American Strategy 

Rees David Korea, the limited war 

Kitson, Frank Low, intensity Operations, Subversion, Insurgency, Peace 

Keeping 

Osanka FM Modern Guerilla Warfare 

Nasution, Abdual H. Fundamentals of Guerilla warfare 

Brodie,Bernard Strategy in the missile age 

Sampooran Singh India and the Nuclear Bomb 


Tirpathi K.S. Evolution of Nuclear Strategy 

Gupta Rakesh Militarisation of outer-space 

Encyclopedia Britannica 

Halperin Morton H. Defence Strategies for the seventies 

Mir Publications: Weaponry in space, The Dilemma of Society 

Hart, Liddle History of First World War 

Hart, Liddle History of Second World War 

Fuller, J.F.C. History of Second World War 

Fuller, J.F.C. The conduct of war 

Paper-X Research Methodology-II 

10(904) 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note : Students are required to attempt five questions, selecting one question from each 

unit. 







Using Written Records, Scrutinizing the Evidences, Content Analysis. 

Quantification in Social Research: Statistics- Meaning, Purpose and Scope, 

Statistical Techniques of Data-Analysis. 



Readings 

H.N. Blalock An Introduction to Social Research, Englewood Cliffs NJ, Prentice 

Hall, 1970. 

H.N. Blalock (ed.) Casual Models in the Social Sciences, London, Macmillan, 1972. 

J. Blondel Thinking Politically, London, Wildwood House, 1976. 

A. Bryman, Quantity and Quality in Social Research, London, Unwin Hyman, 

1988. 

T.L. Burton & G.L. Cherry Social Research Techniques, London, Unwin Hyman, 1989. 


A.F. Chalmers Science and Its Fabrication, Milton Keynes, Open University Press, 

1990. 

De D.A. Vaus Surveys in Social Research, 2nd edn., London, Unwin Hyman, 1991. 

M. Duverger An Introduction to the Social Sciences with Special References to 

their Methods, Translated by M. Anderson, New York, Frederick A. 

Praeger, 1964. 

S.V. Evera Guide to Methods for Students of Political Science, Ithaca, NY, 

Cornell University Press, 1997. 

J. Galtung Theory and Methods of Social Research, New York, Columbia 


E. Gellner Relativism and Social Science, Cambridge, Cambridge University 

Press, 1985. 

A.Giddens Profiles and Critiques in Social Theory, London Macmillan, 1982. 

W.J. Goode and P.K. Hatt Methods of Social Research, New York, McGraw Hill, 1952. 

A.C. Isaak, Scope and Methods of Political Science, Homewood Illinois, Dorsey 

Press, 1985. 

J.B. Johnson &R.A. Joslyn Political Science Research Methods, Washington DC, C.Q. Press, 

1986. 

F.N. Kerlinger Behavioural Research, New York, Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1979. 

T.Kuhn The Structure of Scientific Revolution, Chicago, University of 


D. Marsh & G. Stoker(ed.) Theory and Methods in Political Science, Basigstoke, Macmillan, 

1995. 

C.A. McCoy & C. Playford (eds.) Apolitical Politics : A Critique of Behaviouralism, New York, 

Thomas Crowell, 1967. 

R. K. Merton (ed.) Social Theory and Social Structure, New York, The Free Press, 1957. 

D. Miller (ed.) Pocket Popper, London, Fontana, 1997. 

G. Mydral Objectivity in Social Science, New York, Pantheon Books, 1969. 

Sir, K.R. Popper The Logic of Scientific Discovery, London, Hutchinson, 1959. 

Sir, K. R. Popper Conjectures and Refutations : The Growth of Scientific Knowledge, 


Sir, K.R. Popper The Poverty of Historicism, London, Reoutledge, 1991. 

A.Ryan (ed.) The Philosophy of Social Sciences, London, Macmillan, 1970. 

H.J. Rubin Applied Social Research, Columbus, North Illinois University Press, 

1983. 

B. Smith Political Research Methods, Boston, Hougton Milton, 1976. 

G.W. Snedecor Statistical Methods, 5th edn., Iowa, State College, 1965. 

M. Weber The Methodology of Social Science, translated and edited by E.A. 

Shils and H.A. Finch, New York, The Free Press, 1949. 

P.V. Young Scientific Social Surveys and Research. 

Robert A. Dahl Modern Political Analysis, Englewood Cliffs, NJ Prentice Hall, 1963. 

C. Charlesworth (ed.) Contemporary Political Analysis, New York, Free Press, 1967. 

Michael Hoas, Henry S. Kariel Approaches to the Study of Political Science, California, 

Chandler Publishing Co., 1970. 

Roland Young Approaches to the Study of Politics, Evanston, Ill, North Western 


E.J. Meehan The Theory and Method of Political Analysis, Homewood, Illinois, 

Dorsey Press, 1965. 

Stephen L. Wasby Political Science - The Discipline and Its Dimensions, Calcutta, 

Scientific Book Agency, 1970. 

10(905) 


M.A. (Final) Defence & Strategic Studies (Third Semester) w.e.f. 2012-13 



Marks 

Time 

Paper-XI Defence Economics-I 100 3 Hours 

Paper-XII Psychological Dimensions of War 100 3 Hours 

Paper-XIII Area Studies-Pakistan 100 3 Hours 

Paper-XIV Science & Technology in Relation to Warfare-I 100 3 Hours 

Paper-XV International Law –I 100 3 Hours 

Paper-XI, Defence Economics-I 

10(906) 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note:- There will be eight Questions two questions from each unit. The candidates are 

required to attempt four questions in all, selecting one question from each unit. All 

questions carry equal marks. 

Unit: I Defence Economics: Meaning, Definition, Scope and Relevance; and The Economic 

Foundation of Military Power: Theories of Adam Smith and Alexander Hamilton. 

Unit: II Economic Impacts of War. Economic Mobilization in War, War potential of a 

Nation (resources of war) - Natural, Physical, Industrial and Man power resources; 

and Economic control during war. 

Unit: III Economic Warfare-Definition, Scope and Nature; Defence Budget: Definition, 

Scope, Determinants/Principle, Structure and Processes. 

Unit: IV War and Peace Economy; Effect of War on National Economy (Problems of 

Inflation, Balance of Payment and Real Cost); and Economic Impact of Defence 

Expenditure. 

Readings 

1. Aggarwal, A.M. : Economic Mobilization for Defence. 

2. Aggarwal, R.K. : Defence Production and Development. 

3. Clark, J.J.: The New Economics of Nations Defence. 

4. Hatfield, Marko: The Economics of Defence, Newyork; Praeger Publishers. 

5. Hitch, G.J. & Mckean: the Economics of Defence in the Nuclear age. 

6. Jack, D.T. : Studies in Economic Warfare. 

7. Knor, Klaus: War Potential of the Nations. 

8. Pandey, S.P.: Defence Economics Allahabad; Bhanumati Publication. 

9. Robinson, L.R: The Economic Problems in War & Peace. 

10. Singh Jasjit: India’s Defence Spending. 

11. Ludra, Lt. Col. Thakur K.S.: Understanding War: its implications and effects. 

12. J.N. Sharma: Defence Expenditure. 


Paper-XII, Psychological Dimensions of War 

10(907) 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note:- There will be 10 Questions two questions from each unit. The candidates are 

required to attempt five questions in all, selecting one question from each unit. All 


Unit: I Military psychology-Definition, scope and significance during peace and War; and 

Psychological factors in Conventional, Nuclear, Biological and Chemical Warfare. 

Unit: II Psychological Weapons of War: Propaganda, Rumor and Indoctrination; and 

Emotional Problems and Adjustments during War and Peace. Fear and Panic in war: 

Causes, Consequences and Management 

Unit: III Military Leadership: Meaning, Attributes, Importance and Role of Training; and 

Discipline: Definition, Purpose and Tools of Maintaining Discipline. War Neurosis: 

Meaning, Causes, Symptoms and Effects. 

Unit: IV The Significance of Personality: Traits, Group-Behavior and Communication Skills 

in Armed Forces; and Motivation & Morale and their Relevance in the Armed 

Forces. 

Readings: 

1. Bartlett, F.C.: Psychology and the Soldier, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press. 

2. Baynes, John: Morale: A study of Men and courage London, Cassell 1967. 

3. Boring. E.G(ed.): Psychology for the Armed Services, Dehradun, Natraj Publishers. 

4. Chibber, M.L.: Military Leadership to Prevent Military Coup, New Delhi, Lancer 

International. 

5. Copeland, Normal: Psychology and the soldier, Dehradun, English book Dept. 1967. 

6. Gupta, Col. Ranjit Sen (Retd.).: Management of Internal Security, New Delhi, Lancer 

Publications, Pvt. Ltd. 1994. 

7. Hasnain Qmar: Psychology for the fighting man, Dehradun, English Book Depot, 

Publishing Company 1967. 

8. Lienbarger, P.M.A.: Psychological Warfare, Washington, D.C. Combat Press 1954. 

9. Likert, Rensis and J.B. Likert: New ways of managing conflict, New-York, Mac Graw Hill 

Book Company. 

10. Raj Narain: Military Psychology, Agra: national Psychological Co-operation Ist. edition 

1979 

11. Rajender Nath, Military Leadership in India form Vadic time to Indo-Pak War. 


Paper-XIII, Area Studies-Pakistan 

10(908) 




Time: 3 Hours 




Unit: I Military Geography of Pakistan- Its Geo-Strategic Significance; and Population, 

Composition and Characteristics of Major Ethnic Groups. Nuclear and Defence 

Potential of Pakistan; 

Unit: II Pakistan’s Politics and Role of Military; and Internal Security Factors in Pakistan. 

Areas of Conflict and Cooperation between India and Pakistan. 

Unit: III Determinants of Foreign and Defence Policy of Pakistan; and Role of United States 

of America in Pakistan’s Politics. 

Unit: IV Pakistan’s Relations with its Neighbhours China, India, Afghanistan and Iran; and 

Pakistan and Terrorism- The Emerging Manifestations. 

Readings 

1. Jai Parkash Sharma, Federal systems of India and Pakistan: A comparative perspective, 

Printwell Publishers: Exclusive distributor, Rupa Books International, Jaipur,j India: 1987 

2. Jagdish P Jain, China, Pakistan, and Bangladesh, Radiant Publishers, New Delhi, 1974 

3. Saeed Shafqat (edited), Contemporary issues in Pakistan studies, Lahore: Azad, 1998 

4. K.K. Bhardwaj, Pakistan’s March to Democracy and Liberalism, Anmol Publications, New 

Delhi, 1999 

5. Rajvir Singh, U.S.- Pakistan and India: Strategic relations, Chugh Publications, Allahabad, 

1985 

6. Sahdev Vohra, Fifty Years of Pakistan, Intellectual book Corner, New Delhi, 1998 

7. Verinder Grover & Ranjana Arora, (eds.) 50 years of Indo-Pak relation, (3 Vols), Deep & 

Deep Publications, New Delhi, 1998 

8. Jaswinder Kumar, Irritants in Indo-Pak relation, Deep & Deep Publications, New Delhi, 

1989 

9. B.P. Barua, Politics and constitution-making in India and Pakistan, Deep & Deep 


10. Shuja Nawaz, Crossed Sword- Pakistan, its Army, and the Wars within, Oxford University 

Press, New York, 2008 

11. Bidanda M. Chengappa, Pakistan: Islamisation, army and foreign policy, A.P.H. 


12. E. Sridharan, The India-Pakistan Nuclear Relationship: Theories of Deterrence and 

International Relations, Routledge, 2007 

13. Rizwan Zeb, Suba Chandran, Ino-Pak Conflicts, Cambridge University Press, 2005 


14. Kapil Kak, amitabh Matto, Happymon Jacob (eds), India & Pakistan: Pathways Ahead, K 

W Publishers, New Delhi, 2007 

15. Gurmeet Kanwal, Pakistans Proxy War, Lancer Publishers, 2002 

16. Whither Pakistan? Growing Instability and Implications for India, IDSA NewDelhi. June 

2010 

Paper-XIV, Science & Technology in Relation to Warfare-I 




Time: 3 Hours 




Unit: I Impact of Science and Technology on warfare; and Relationship between 

Technology and Weapon Systems. 

Unit: II Relevance of Science and Technology in National Security. Impact of Emerging 

Technologies on Strategy and Tactics; and Military Technology and its Impact on 

Land, Sea and Air-Power. 

Unit: III Dual Use of Critical Technologies and its Impact on India’s Security. International 

Inter-Dependence and Transfer of Technology; and Political, Military and Economic 

Impact of Transfer of Technology. 

Unit: IV Growth and Development of Nuclear Power in India; and Growth and Development 

of Space Technology in India. 

Readings 

1. Deva Yashwant (1996):- Duel-use of Information Technology (An Indo Centric 

perspective): New Delhi, IDSA. 

2. Hard David (1983):- Nuclear power in India: London, George Allen. 

3. Jayant Baranwal:- S.P’s Military year book: New Delhi, Guide Publishers. 

4. John Ericson (1966):- The Military Technical revolution: Its impact on strategy and foreign 

policy: New York, Frederic A Prager. 

5. Khana S.K (1998):- India: a Nuclear Power: New Delhi, Commonwealth Publishers. 

6. Lal A K (2003):- Space warfare and Military strategy. (An Indian Perspective): New Delhi, 

USI of India. 

7. Rajan, Y.S. (2001):- Empowering India (with Economic, Business and Technology, 

Strengths for the twentyfirst century): New Delhi, Har Anand. 

10(909) 


8. Sen S.K.(2000):- Military Technology and Defence Industrialization: New Delhi, Manas 

Publishers. 

9. Siddhartha. K (1999):- Oceanography, A brief introduction 3 rd edition: New Delhi, Kisalaya 

Publishers. 

10. Tellis, A (2001):- India’s Emerging nuclear posture: Oxford, Oxford University Press 

11. Tewari, R. and Tewari, V.M (1996):- The High-Tech War of twentieth century: New Delhi, 

Vikas Publishers House. 

12. Thee Marek (1986):- Military technology, Military Strategy and Arms Race: London, 

Groom Helm. 

13. Ghosh, C N (2011):- Tomorrows War:21 st Century Defence Strategies, Manas 

Publications.NewDelhi. 

Paper-XV, International Law –I 

10(910) 




Time: 3 Hours 




Unit: I Definition, Nature, Basis and Sources of International Law. Treatment of 

Aliens; Asylum; and Extradition. 

Unit: II Relationship between International Law and Municipal Law; and Subjects of 

International Law. 

Unit: III Intervention – Meaning and Grounds; State Territory and Modes of Acquisition and 

Loss of Territory; and Law of the Seas. 

Unit: IV Pacific and Coercive Means of Settlement of International Disputes; and 

Readings 

International Law Regarding Weapons of Mass Destructions (WMDs) 

1. J.G. Starke, “Introduction of International Law” (10 th ed), Aditya Books, New Delhi, 1994 

2. Oliver J, Lissitgyn, “International Law- Today and tomorrow”, Debbs Ferry, New York, 

1965 

3. Perry E. Corbett, “The Growth of World Law”, Princeton, New Jersey, USA, 1971 

4. W. Friedmann, “Changing Structure of International Law”, Steven & Sons, London, UK, 

1964 


5. Aggrawal, S.K., (ed), “Essays on the Law of Treaties”. 

6. Anand, R.P., “New States and International Law”, Vikas Publications, New Delhi, 1972 

7. Rhyue, O.R., “International Law”. 

8. S.K. Kapoor, “International Law”, Central Law Agency, Allahabad, 1992 

9. C. Wilfred Jenks, “The Common Law of Mankind”, Stevens & Sons, London, UK, 1958 

10. W. F Friedmann, “Changing Structure of International Law”, Steven & Sons, London, UK, 

1964 

11. M.A. Kaplan and Node B. Katzenback, “The Political foundations of International Law”, 

John Wiley & Sons, London, UK, 1961 

12. Dr. Nagendra Singh, “India and International Law”, S. Chand & Co., New Delhi, 1969 

M.A. (Final), Defence & Strategic Studies (Fourth Semester) w.e.f. 2012-13 



Marks 

Time 

Paper-XVI Defence Economics-II 100 3 Hours 

Paper-XVII Sociological Dimensions of War 100 3 Hours 

Paper-XVIII Area Studies-China 100 3 Hours 

Paper-XIX Science & Technology in Relation to Warfare-II 100 3 Hours 

Paper-XX International Law –II 100 3 Hours 

Paper-XVI, Defence Economics-II 

10(911) 




Time: 3 Hours 




Unit: I Contemporary Economic Systems: Capitalism, Socialism and Mixed Economy. 

Unit: II Defence and Development: Concept and its Implications for India; and Determinants 

of Defence Expenditure: Threat Perceptions, Capabilities and Policies. 

Contemporary Trends in India’s Defence Expenditure. 

Unit: III Economic Constraints in Defence Management; Economic Implications of 

Technological Changes with Reference to Defence Production in India: The 

Rationale for Self – Reliance and Problems of Imported Technology in Defence 

Production. 


Unit: IV India’s policy on Defence Production: Department of Defence Production, 

Ordinance Factories and Defence Public Sector Undertakings (DPSUs); and Role of 

Private Sector in Defence Production. Defence Production of the following in India: 

Armament, Ammunition and Explosives, Tanks and Infantry Combat Vehicles, Air- 

Crafts, Naval Ships and Missiles. 

Readings 

1. Chatterji, Manas, J. Fontanel & a. Hattori (eds): Army Spending. 

2. Deger, Saadet: Military Expenditure in Third World Countries. 

3. Downey, John: Management in the Armed Forces, Dehradun: EBD.Edu.Pvt.Ltd. 

4. Ghosh, Amiya Kumar: India’s Defence Budget and Expenditure Management, New Delhi; 

Lancer Publications. 

5. Jalan, B: India’s Economic Policy- Preparing for 21 st century. 

6. Thingan, M.L.: The Economic of Development and Planning; Delhi; Vrinda Pub.Ltd. 

7. Mathews, Ron: Defence Production in India. 

8. Mckinlay, Robert: Third World Military Expenditure, London: Pinter Pub. 

9. Prasad, Bisheshwar: India War Economy. 

10. Subrahmanyam K: Perspective in Defence Planning. 

11. Thomas, Raju G.C.: The Defence of India, A budgetary perspective of Jhalegs & Politics. 

12. Vohra, Bharat: Defence Economics, Sumit Enterprises.New Delhi.2010. 

Paper-XVII, Sociological Dimensions of War 

10(912) 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: There will be 10 Questions two questions from each unit. The candidates are 



Unit: I Sociology of War: Social Causes of War, Social Mobilization for War; and Social 

Effects of War: Adjustments and Emotional Problems during War, Social Aspects of 

Victory, Defeat and Occupation. 

Unit: II Post-War Social Problems: Impact on Society (Problem of re-settlement of War 

Victims and Post-War Reconstruction), Impact on Military (Demobilization, 

Rehabilitation and Social Adjustment of Released Personnel) and Social Problem of 

Military Personnel (Killed or Disabled and Implications for their Families). 

Unit: III Civil-Military Relations: History and Contemporary Trends; Military Coup: Causes 

and Consequences; and Civil-Military Relations in India. 

Unit: IV Social Background of Military Personnel in India; and Problems of Ex-Servicemen 

in India. Women & Armed Forces: Role, Limitations, Impact and Contemporary 

Trends. 


Readings 

1. Alix Stracheys, The Unconscious Motives of War, (London, Allen, 1957). 

2. Anil Kumar Singh, Military and Media (New Delhi, lancer Publishers & Distributors, 

2006). 

3. C.W. Mills, The Power Elite, (New York, Oxford university Press, 1959). 

4. D. Feld Maury, Structure of violence: Armed forces as social systems, (New Delhi, Sage 

Publications, 1977). 

5. Eric A. Nordlinger, Soldiers in Plitics: Military Coups and Governments, (London, Prentic- 

Hall, 1977). 

6. J.A. Khan, India Armed Forces and Society, (2006). 

7. Jacques Van Doorn, (edit), Armed Forces and Society: sociological Essays, (Mouton, 

1968). 

8. Johnson John (edit), Race, Class & Military: The role of the Military in Under-Developed 

Countries, (Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1962). 

9. Morris Janowitz, The Professional Soldier. A Social and Political Portrait (New York, Free 

Press, 1964). 

10. Leena Parmar (Ed.), Military Sociology:Global Perspectives, Rawat Publications. Jaipur & 

NewDelhi, 1999. 

11. Leena Parmar, Society Culture and Military System, Rawat Publications. Jaipur & 

NewDelhi. 

Paper-XVIII, Area Studies - China 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note: There will be 10 Questions two questions from each unit. The candidates are 



Unit: I Military Geography of China- Its Geo-Strategic Significance; and Population, 

Composition and Characteristics of Major Ethnic Groups. 

Unit: II Peoples Liberation Army (PLA): Origin, Organization, Structure and Process; and 

Foreign Policy of China; Objectives and Determinants. 

Unit: III Areas of Conflict and Cooperation between China and India with Special Reference 

to Sino-Indian War of 1962. 

Unit: IV China’s Relations with United States of America and Pakistan. China’s Nuclear and 

Defence Potential; and China’s Strategic Postures towards India. 

Readings 

1. Susant Shirk, China- Fragile Superpower, Oxford University Press, New York, 2007 

10(913) 


2. Alka Acharya, China and India- Politics of Incremental Engagement, Har-Anand 


3. Ravi Vohra, P.K. Ghosh(eds), China and the Indian Ocean region, National Maritime 

Foundation, Anamaya Publishers, New Delhi, 2008 

4. B.R. Deepak, India- China Relations: In the first half of the 20 th Century, APH 

Publishing House, New Delhi, 2001 

5. Dinesh Lal, Indo-Tibet-China Conflict, Kalpaz Publications, New Delhi, 2008 

6. Vishun Saraf, India and China: Comparing the Incomparable, Macmillan Publishers 

India, 2008 

7. R.V. Kumar, Chinese Air Force threat: An Indian Perspective, Manas Publication, New 

Delhi, 2003 

8. M.L. Sali, India- China Border dispute: A case study of Eastern Sector, A.P.H. 

Publishing, New Delhi, 1998 

9. John R.R. Faust, Judith F. Kornberg, China in World Politics- Policies Processes and 

Prospects, Lynne Rienner Publishers, Boulder, USA, 1995 

10. C.K. Kapur, Chinese Military Modernization, Manas Publications New Delhi, 2003 

11. Andrew Scobell, China’s Use of Military Force, Cambridge University Press, New 

York, 2003 

12. Jasjit Singh (ed), India, China and Panchsheel, Sanchar Publication House, New Delhi, 

1996 

13. Liu Xuecheng, The Sino-Indian border dispute and Sino-Indian relations, University 

Press of America, 1994 

14. Immanuel C.Y. Hsu, Rise of modern China, Oxford University Press, New York, 2000 

15. Shen Qurong & Bhabani Sengupta (eds), China looks at the World, Konark Publisher 

Pvt. Ltd. Delhi, 1999 

Paper-XIX, Science & Technology in Relation to Warfare-II 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note:- There will be 10 Questions by selecting two questions from each unit. The 

candidates are required to attempt five questions in all, selecting one question from 

each unit. Each question carries equal marks. 

Unit: I Revolutions in Military Affairs (RMA); and Impact of RMA on Indian Defence. 

Unit: II Electronic Warfare- Concept and Application; and Information Warfare- Concept, 

Application and Implications. 

10(914) 


Unit: III New Technology and their Relevance to Security Systems- Rockets, Bio- 

Technology, LASERS/Satellite, Cyber, Missiles, Bio-Metrics, Stealth and NMD. 

Unit: IV Growth and Development of Ocean Technology in India; and India’s Achievements, 

Problems and Limitations in Ocean Technology. Defence Research and 

Development Organization (DRDO): Objectives, Achievements and Limitations. 

Readings 

1. B.S. Nanda, Science Technology in India’s Transformation, (New Delhi, Concept, 1986). 

2. Asian Productivity Organization, Intra-national Transfer of Technology, (Asian 

Productivity Organization, 1976). 

3. D.M. Desoutter, Aircraft and Missiles: What They are, What They Do and How They 

Work, (London, Faber, 1989). 

4. G.D. Bakshi, War in the 21 st Century, (Delhi, Lancer Publisher, 1997). 

5. Gerald Wendt, Prospects of Nuclear Power and Technology, (Van Nostrand, 1957). 

6. Iqtidar Alam Khan, Gunpowder and firearms, Warfare in Medieval India, (New Delhi, 

Oxford University Press, 2004). 

7. J.N. Nanda, Science and Technology in India’s transformation. 

8. Jayanta Kumar Ray, Security in the missile age, (University of Michigan, 2006). 

9. Macacy Kannets, Technology in World Arms and Armour, (London, 1961). 

10. Michael O. Hanlon, Technology Change and the Future of Warfare, (New Delhi, Manas 

Publication, 2005). 

11. Paul Leventhal, Sharon Tanzer and Steven Dolley, Nuclear Power and The Spread of 

Nuclear Weapons: can we have one without the other? (Brassey’s, 2002). 

12. R.K. Suri, T.N. Chhabra, Cyber Crime, (New York, Pentagon Press, 2004). 

13. R.L. Jetley, Rockets, guided missiles and satellites. 

14. Samir K. Sen, Military Technology and Defence Industrialization, (New Delhi, Manas 

Publication, 2000). 

15. Thomas & Hamnas, On War in the 21 st Century, (Delhi, Manas Publications, 2004). 

10(915) 


Paper- XX, International Law-II 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note:- There will be 10 Questions by selecting two questions from each unit. The 

candidates are required to attempt five questions in all, selecting one question from 

each unit. Each question carries equal marks. 

Unit: I War: Its Legal Character and Effects; Enemy Character; 

Genocide and Human Rights. 

Unit: II Laws of War: Land, Air and Sea. Blockade. Prize Court. 

Unit: III War Crimes and Different Trials- Tokyo, Nuremberg and Milosevic; Termination of 

War; Neutrality: Concept and Evolution; and Rights and Duties of Neutral States. 

Unit: IV Right of Angary; Contraband and Doctrine of Continuous Voyage; Belligent Rights 

of Visit & Search. 

Readings 


Edition. 




5. K. Deutsc and S. Hoffman (ed.), The Relevance of International Law, Oxford, Clarendon Press, 

1955. 


7. W. Friedmann, The Changing Structure of International Law, New York, Columbia University 

Press, 1964. 



Press, 1928. 





13. Sir J.F. Williams, Aspects of Modern International Law, New York, Oxford University Press, 

1939. 

10(916) 


Paper 

No. 

Nomenclature of Paper Max 

Marks 

W.E.F. 2012-13 

B.A/B.Sc. (Hons.) Semester-V 

10(917) 

Internal 

Assessment 

Total Marks Time 

501 Evolution of Geographic 

Thought 

90 10 100 3 Hours 

502 Geography and 

Ecosystems 

90 10 100 3 Hours 

503 Remote sensing and GIS 50 10 60 3 Hours 

(A) (Theory) 

503 Remote sensing and GIS 40 - 40 3 Hours 

(B) (Practical) 

504 Geography of India 90 10 100 3 Hours 

505 Any one of the 

followings: 

(i) Social Geography 

(ii) Cultural Geography 

(iii) Political Geography 

(iv) Geography of 

Haryana 

90 10 100 3 Hours 

Paper 

No. 

Nomenclature of Paper Max. 

Marks 

B.A/B.Sc. (Hons.) Semester-VI 

Internal 

Assessment 


601 Statistical Methods in 

Geography 

90 10 100 3 Hours 

602 Regional Development and 

Planning 

90 10 100 3 Hours 

603 Field Survey in Geography 50 10 60 3 Hours 

(A) (Theory) 

603 Field Survey in Geography 40 - 40 3 Hours 


604 Geography of Settlements 90 10 100 3 Hours 

605 Any one of the followings: 90 10 100 3 Hours 

(i) Geography of 

Transport 

(ii) Geography of 

Tourism 

(iii) Geography of Health 

(v) Soil Geography 


Paper 501 Evolution of Geographic Thought 

Maximum Marks: 90 


Time: 3 Hours 

Note: There will be nine questions in all covering the entire syllabus. Question No.1 shall be 

short answer type and compulsory. The candidates have to answer four questions from the rest of 

eight questions. All questions carry equal marks. 

SECTION-A 

1. Classification of Sciences and Place of Geography among Sciences. 

2. Relation of Geography with natural and social sciences. 

3. Contribution of Greeks and Roman Scholars in geographical knowledge. 

SECTION-B 

4. Geography in Medieval Period: Arab Geographers and Renaissance. 

5. Contribution of Varenius and Kant in geography. 

6. Classical Period: Humboldt and Ritter’s contribution to geography. 

SECTION-C 

7. Environmental Determinism and Possibilism. 

8. Chorology and Landscape concepts. 

9. Dualism in Geography: Systematic versus Regional and Physical versus Human Geography. 

SECTION-D 

10. Quantitative Revolution and Development of Geography as Spatial Sciences. 

11. Behavioral Geography. 

12. Welfare Geography and Radical Approach. 


1. Dikshit, R.D.(ed.)A The Art & Science of Geography Integrated Readings, Prentice Hall of 

India, New Delhi, 1994. 

2. Hartshorne, R.: Perspectives on Nature of Geography, Rand McNally & Co.1959. 

3. Husain, M.: Evolution of Geographic Thought, Rawat Pub., Jaipur, 1984. 

4. Johnston, R.J.: Philosophy and Human Geography, Edward Arnold, London, 1983. 

5. Johnston, R.J.: the Future of Geography, Methuen, London, 1988. 

6. Minshull, R. : The Changing Nature of Geography, Hutchinson University Library, London, 

1970. 

10(918) 


Paper 502 Geography of Ecosystem 

10(919) 



Time: 3 Hours 




Section - A 

1. Environmental Geography – Concept and Scope. 

2. Human-Environment Relationships–Historical Progression and Adaptation 

Section - B 

3. Ecosystem – Concept, Structure and Functions. Ecosystem productivity and ecological pyramid. 

4. Flow of energy; food chain and food web; trophic level. 

Section – C 

5. Biomes and Habitat: Classification of Biomes. Tropical rainforest biome, Grassland biomes, 

Monsoon biome and Marine biome. 

6. Environmental Problems: Climate change, ozone depletion, air pollution and soil degradation. 

Section – D 

7. Environmental Programmes and Policies –National and Local levels 

8. Global Environmental concern: Stockholm conference, Earth summit and Kyoto protocol and 

after. 

Suggested Reading List : 

1. Chandna R. C., 2002: Environmental Geography, Kalyani, Ludhiana. 

2. Cunninghum W. P. and Cunninghum M. A., 2004: Principals of Environmental 

Science: Inquiry and Applications, Tata Macgraw Hill, New Delhi. 

3. Goudie A., 2001: The Nature of the Environment, Blackwell, Oxford. 

4. Miller G. T., 2004: Environmental Science: Working with the Earth, Thomson Brooks 

Cole, Singapore. 

5. MOEF, 2006: National Environmental Policy-2006, Ministry of Environment and 

Forests, Government of India. 

6. Odum, E. P. et al, 2005: Fundamentals of Ecology, Ceneage Learning India. 

7. Singh S., 1997: Environmental Geography, Prayag Pustak Bhawan. Allahabad. 

8. UNEP, 2007: Global Environment Outlook: GEO4: Environment For Development, 

United Nations Environment Programme. 

Hindi Reading List 

1. Singh, Savindra 2001. Paryavaran Bhugol, Prayag Pustak Bhawan, Allahabad. (in 

Hindi). 

2. Singh, Shri Narayan 1993. Vatavaran Bhugol, Tara Book Agency. (in Hindi) 


Paper 503 (A) Remote Sensing and GIS (Theory) 

10(920) 



Time: 3 Hours. 




SECTION-A 

1. Introduction to Aerial Photographs: their advantages and types. 

2. Elements of Air, Photo Interpretation. 

SECTION-B 

3. Introduction to Remote Sensing: Electromagnetic spectrum and process of Remote Sensing. 

4. Types of Satellites, Indian Remote Sensing Satellites and their data Product (Type of 

imageries). 

SECTION-C 

5. Introduction to Geographical information system: Definition, Purpose, Advantages, 

Hardware and Software requirements. 

6. Spatial and Non-spatial Data: their sources and entering in GIS environment. 

SECTION-D 

7. Application of Remote Sensing in Agriculture Environment and Resource Management. 

8. Application of Geographical Information System in Urban, Regional and Real time 

Planning. 


1. Anji Reddy, Remote Sensing and Geographical Information Systems. 

2. J.R. Jensen (2009), Remote Sensing of the Environment: An Earth Resource Perspective 

Pearson Education (LPE), New Delhi. 

3. Lillesand and R.W. Kiefer (2005), Remote Sensing and Image Interpretation, John Wiley 

and Sons. 

4. Meenakshi Kumar (2001), ‘Remote Sensing, NCERT, New Delhi. 

5. Pritvish Nag and M. Kudrat (1998), Digital Remote Sensing, Concept Publication, New 

Delhi. 


Paper 503 (B) Remote Sensing and GIS (Practical) 



Exercise : 24 

Record Book : 10 

Viva-voce : 6 

Note: There will be four questions in all and candidates have to attempt three questions/exercises. 

1. Demarcation of Principal Point, Conjugate Principal Point and Flight line on Aerial 

Photograph--1 Exercise. 

2. Determination of Scale of Photograph-1 Exercise. 

3. Interpretation of Single Vertical Photgraph-1 Exercise. 

4. Use of Stereoscope of Identification of Features -1 Exercise. 

5. Identification of Features on PAN+ LISS Imagery (Mark copy of FCC)- 3 exercises. 


1. Melinda Meade and R.J. Earichson (2008), Medical Geography, Guilford Press, New York. 

2. Peter Hagett (2000) , The Geographical Structure of Epidemics, Oxford. 

10(921) 


Paper 504 Geography of India 

10(922) 



Time: 3 Hours 




SECTION-A 

1. India: Location, size and shape; physiographic structure and division; drainage 

system of India and their importance. 

2. Climate: Regional and seasonal variations of climate in India; Rainfall distribution; 

Climatic regions of India. 

SECTION-B 

3. Soils: Soil types, distribution and characteristics of Indian soils; soil erosion and 

conservation in India. 

4. Natural Vegetation: Vegetation types and their distribution; Forest, their utilization and 

need for conservation; Forest management programmes in India. 

SECTION-C 

5. Agriculture: Role of agriculture in Indian Economy; regional variations in cropping 

pattern; Role of Irrigation in agriculture; problems pertaining to Green 

Revolution and mitigation strategies. 

6. Minerals and power resources: 

Production and distribution of the following: (1) Iron-ore (2) Mica 

(3) Coal (4) Petroleum (5) Hydropower 

SECTION-D 

7. Industries: Factors affecting location of industries; production and distribution of iron 

and steel industries, cotton-textile industry and Sugar industry; Industrial 

Complexes of India. 

8. Trade: Factors affecting India’s trade; Major exports and imports of India, Balance 

of payments of India’s trade. 


Suggested Readings : 

1. Deshpande, C.D. 1992. India-A Regional Interpretation. Northern Book Depot, New Delhi. 

2. Khullar, D.R. 2009. India-A Comprehensive Geography, Kalyani Publishers, New Delhi. 

3. Shafi, M. 2000. Geography of South-Asia. McMillan and Company, Calcutta. 

4. Sharma, T.C. 2009. Economic and Commercial Geography of India. Vikas Publication, 

New Delhi. 

5. Singh, Gopal, 2006. Geography of India. Atma Ram and Sons, New Delhi. 

6. Singh, R.L. 1971. India- A Regional Geography, NGSI, Varansi. 

7. Spate, OHK and Learmonth. 1967. India and Pakistan. Methuen and Company, London. 

8. Tideman, E.M. 1996. Watershed Management: Guidelines for Indian Conditions, Omega 


9. Tirth, R. and Krishna, G. 1996. Emerging India. Rawat Publications, Jaipur 

10. Wadia, D.N. 1967. Geology of India, Macmillan, London. 

10(923) 


Paper 505 (i) Social Geography 



Time: 3 Hours 




1. Nature and Scope of Social Geography. 

10(924) 

SECTION-A 

2. Development and Philosophy of Social Geography. 

3. Social Geography and Social Sciences. 

4. Space and Society: Structure and Processes. 

5. Geographical Bases of Social Formations. 

SECTION-B 

6. Social Geography’s Contribution in Social Theory. 

SECTION-C 

7. Social Geography of India-Social Differentiation and Region Formation. 

8. Evolution of Socio-cultural Regions in India. 

9. Unity and Diversity in India. 

10. Social Transformation and Change in India. 

11. Social Wellbeing and Physical Quality of Life. 

SECTION-D 

12. Human Development: Measures and Indications. 


1. Ahmad, Aijazuddin, Social Geography, Rawat Publication, New Delhi, 1999. 

2. Dreze Jean, Amartya Sen, Economic Development and Social opportunity, Oxford 

University Press, New Delhi, 1996. 

3. Dubey. S.C. : Indian Society, National Book Trust, New Delhi, 1991. 

4. Gregory, D and J. Larry, (eds.). Social relations and spatial structures, McMillan, 1985. 

5. Schwartzberg Joseph; An Historical Atlas of South Asia, University of Chicago Press, 

Chicago, 1978. 

6. Sen, Amartya & Dreze Jean, Indian Development: Selected Regional Perspectives, Oxford 


7. Smith, David: Geography: A Welfare Approach, Edward Arnold, London, 1977. 

8. Sopher, David. : An Exploration of Indian, Cornell University Press, 1980. 

9. Subba Rao. Personality of India; Pre and Proto Historic Foundation of India and Pakistan. 

M. S. University Baroda, Vadodara, 1985. 


Paper 505 (ii) Cultural Geography 



Time: 3 Hours 




10(925) 

SECTION-A 

1. Introduction: Nature and Scope of Cultural Geography. 

2. Cultural Elements and Components of Culture. 

3. Cultural Changes: Perception and Behavioralism. 

SECTION-B 

4. Bases of Cultural Diversity: Race, Religion and Language. 

5. Cultural Diversity in World. 

6. Cultural Diversity and Regionalization in India. 

7. Geography of Ethnic and Tribal Groups. 

8. Cultural Landscape and Cultural Ecology. 

SECTION-C 

9. Religion: Origin, diffusion and Spatial Distribution. 

SECTION-D 

10. Pattern of Livelihood: Economic Activities and Cultural adaptation. 

11. Agriculture, Industrialization and Modernization. 

12. Technological Changes and Culture. 


1. Crang, Mike: Cultural Geography, Routledge Publications, London, 1998. 

2. Harmandorf, Tribes of India: The Struggle for Survival, Oxford University Press, Delhi, 

1989. 

3. Massey, D & Jess P. A Place in the World: Places, Cultures and Globalization Oxford 

University, New York, 1995. 

4. Massey, et.al (ed), Human Geography Today, Polity Press, Combridge, 1999. 

5. Mukherjee, A.B. and Aijazuddin, A: India: culture, Society and Economy, Inter-India 


6. Schwartzberg, J.E.: Historical Atlas of South Asia, University of Chicago, 1978. 

7. Singh, A.K. : Approaches to Tribal Development, Swarup and Sona, New Delhi, 1994. 


Paper 505 (iii) POLITICAL GEOGRAPHY 



Time: 3 Hours 




Section-A 

1.Introduction: Introduction, Nature, Scope and Geopolitics. 

2. State, Nation and Nation State – Concept of Nation and State, Attributes of State – Frontiers, 

Borders, Shape, Size, Territory and Sovereignty, Concept of Nation State. 

Section-B 

3. Global strategic views: Mahan and sea power, Mackinder and Heartland; Spykman and Rimland. 

4. Geopolitical significance of Indian Ocean. 

Section-C 

5. Electoral Geography – Geography of Voting, Geographic Influences on voting pattern, 

Geography of Representation, Gerrymandering. 

6. Political Geography of Resource Conflicts – Water Sharing Disputes, Disputes and Conflicts 

Related to Forest Rights and Minerals, issues of land locked states in Asia 

and Africa 

Section-D 

7. Politics of Displacement: Issues of relief, compensation and rehabilitation: with reference to 

Dams and Special Economic Zones 

8. Case studies of Displacement and Rehabilitation: Bhakra Nangal Dam, Narmada’s Sardar 

Sarovar Dam and displacement due to mining. 

Suggested Reading List: 

1. Agnew J., 2002: Making Political Geography, Arnold. 

2. Agnew J., Mitchell K. and Toal G., 2003: A Companion to Political Geography, 

Blackwell. 

3. Cox K. R., Low M. and Robinson J., 2008: The Sage Handbook of Political Geography, 

Sage Publications. 

4. Cox K., 2002: Political Geography: Territory, State and Society, Wiley-Blackwell 

5. Gallaher C., et al, 2009: Key Concepts in Political Geography, Sage Publications. 

6. Glassner M., 1993: Political Geography, Wiley. 

7. Jones M., 2004: An Introduction to Political Geography: Space, Place and Politics, Routledg . 

Dixit, R.D. 2010: Political Geography 

8. Mathur H M and M M Cernea (eds.) Development, Displacement and Resettlement – 

Focus on Asian Experience, Vikas, Delhi 

9. Painter J. and Jeffrey A., 2009: Political Geography, Sage Publications. 

10. Taylor P. and Flint C., 2000: Political Geography, Pearson Education. 

11. Verma M K (2004): Development, Displacement and Resettlement, Rawat 

Publications, Delhi 

12. Hodder Dick, Sarah J Llyod and Keith S McLachlan (1998), Land Locked States of 

Africa and Asia (vo.2), Frank Cass. 

10(926) 


Paper 505 (iv) Geography of Haryana 



Time: 3 Hours 




10(927) 

SECTION-A 

1. Haryana: Location, size, shape and administrative division; physical divisions 

and drainage systems. 

2. Climate: Characteristics and factors; seasons; distribution of rainfall and 

climatic regions. 

SECTION-B 

3. Soils and natural vegetation: Soil types-their distribution and characteristics; vegetation 

types, distribution and importance. 

4. Human resources: Distribution and density, growth and urbanization. 

SECTION-C 

5. Agricultural resources: Major crops; Irrigation; new trends in agriculture; problems 

pertaining to agricultural development and strategy for its 

advancement. 

6. Manufacturing Industries: Major Industries; Industrial policy, SEZ and Foreign investment 

in Industries. 

SECTION-D 

7. Transportation: Modes of transportation and road density; significance of Grant 

Trunk Road in the Economic development of Haryana. 

8. Regionalization of Haryana: Concept of region, bases and classification. 


1. Census of India. 1981. Regional Division in Haryana. 

2. Census of India. 2001. Administrative Atlas of Haryana. 

3. Chaudhary, D.R. 2009. Haryana at Crossroads: problems and prospects. National Book 

Trust of India, New Delhi. 

4. Singh, J. 1976. Agricultural Geography of Haryana, Vishal Publication, Kurukshetra. 

5. Singh, R.L. 1971. India- A Regional Geography. National Geographical Society of India, 

Varansi. 

6. Verma, D.C. and Singh, S. 2001. Haryana-The Land and People. National Book Trust of 



Paper 601 Statistical Methods in Geography 

10(928) 



Time: 3 Hours 




SECTION-A 

1. Type of data and descriptive Statistics: visual descriptive methods such as histograms, 

ogives. 

2. Numerical descriptive Statics: measure of Central Tendency and partition values. 

SECTION-B 

3. Measure of dispersion: Quartile deviation, Mean deviation, Standard deviation. 

4. Measure of Inequality: Lorenz Curve. 

5. Continuous Probability Distributions and Models. 

6. Properties of Normal Distribution. 

SECTION-C 

SECTION-D 

7. Inferential Statistics: confidence Intervals and Hypothesis Testing. 

8. Sampling its type and its application in Geographical Studies. 


1. Aslam Mahmood, Statistical Methods for Geographers, Rajesh Publications, New Delhi. 

2. Peter A. Rogerson (2010), Statistical Methods for Geography, Sage Publishers. 

3. Saroj Kumar Paul, “Statistics for Geoscientists: Techniques and Applications, Concept 

Publishers, 1998.” 


Paper 602 Regional Development and Planning 



Time: 3 Hours 




1. Concept of Region, types of Regions. 

2. Methods of Regionalization. 

SECTION-A 

SECTION-B 

3. Theories of Regional Development: Hirschman and Myrdal’s Theory. 

4. Regional Imbalances in development in India with spatial reference of human and 

Economic development. 

SECTION-C 

5. Concept of Planning: Spatial and Sectoral, Regional and National, Micro and Macro. 

6. Environmental Issues in Regional Planning: Planning for Sustainable Development. 

SECTION-D 

7. Features of Various Five years Plans in India. 

8. Urban Planning in India with spatial reference to National Capital Region. 


1. R.C. Chandna : Regional Planning and Development. 

2. Mahesh Chand and Puri : Regional Planning in India, Allied Publishers, Delhi. 

3. S.C. Patnaik, Economics of Regional Development and Planning in Third World Countries, 

Associated Publishing, New Delhi. 

4. V. Nath, Regional Development and Planning in India. 

10(929) 


Paper 603 A Field Survey in Geography (Theory) 



Time: 3 Hours 




1. Topographical Sheets-1:50,000 and 1:25,000 

2. Socio-economic Information on Toposheets. 

10(930) 

SECTION-A 

SECTION-B 

3. Sources of Demographic and Socio-economic Data of Villages. 

4. Census data for the Socio-economic Study of Village/Towns. 

SECTION-C 

5. Cadastral maps for Field mapping of Village/towns. 

6. Field mapping of the Features of Landuse and Land Quality. 

SECTION-D 

7. Use of Structured Questionnaires for Socio-economic Survey. 

8. Analysis of Collected Socio-economic Data. 


Paper 603 (B) Field Survey in Geography (Practical) 


10(931) 

Time: 3 Hours 

Students have to carry out compulsory socio-economic field survey of a village/town, 

analyse and interpret the collected data. Every student has to prepare a field survey 

report based on the survey. 

Break up of Marks. 

Activity Marks 

Participation in Field Survey 10 

Field Survey Report 20 

Viva-Voce 10 


Paper 604 GEOGRAPHY OF SETTLEMENTS 



Time: 3 Hours 




Section - A 

1. Introduction: Nature and Scope of settlement geography. 2. Basic Concepts: Rural and Urban 

Settlements, Hamlet, Village, Town, City, Metropolis, Megalopolis, Conurbation, and Rural-Urban 

Fringe. 

Section- B 

3. Histogenesis of rural settlements: historical development, distribution of rural settlements. Size 

and spacing of rural settlements in India 

4. Rural Settlements: Types, Patterns and Determinants. Functional classification of rural 

settlements. 

Section- C 

5. Regional Settlement Hierarchy: Central Place Theory, Rank-Size Rule, Primate City. 

6. Urban Land use Models; Concentric zone model, sector model and multiple nuclei model. 

Section- D 

7.Urban problems: housing, poverty, water supply and sanitation. 

8. Planned Cities: A Case Study of Chandigarh – Site and Situation, Layout and Landuse, Services 

and Infrastructure, Problems. 


1. Chishlom M., 2007: Rural Settlement and Land Use, Transaction Publishers. 

2. Daniel, P. 2002: Geography of Settlement, Rawat Publs., Jaipur & New Delhi. 

3. Ghosh, Santwana 1999: A Geography of Settlements, Orient Longman, Kolkata. 

4. Kalia Ravi, 1999: Chandigarh: The Making of Indian City, Oxford University Press. 

5. Kaplan D. H., Wheeler J. O. and Holloway S. R., 2008: Urban Geography, John Wiley. 

6. Krishan G., 1999: Inner Spaces – Outer Spaces of a Planned City: A Thematic Atlas of 

Chandigarh, Celebrating Chandigarh. 

7. Pacione M., 2009: Urban Geography: A Global Perspective, Taylor and Francis. 

8. Ramachandran R., 1989: Urbanisation and Urban Systems of India, Oxford University 

Press. 

9. Ramachandran, R., 1992: The Study of Urbanisation, Oxford University Press, Delhi 

10. Singh R. Y., 1994: The Geography of Settlement, Rawat Publication, New Delhi. 

11. Tiwari, R. C. 2000: Settlement Geography, (in Hindi), Prayag Publ., Allahabad. 

12. Misra, R. P. & Misra, K. eds. 1998: Million Cities of India, Sustainable 

Development Foundation, New Delhi. 

10(932) 


Paper 605 (i) Geography of Transport 



Time: 3 Hours 




10(933) 

SECTION-A 

1. Nature, scope, significance and development of transport geography. 

2. Factors associated with development of transport system; physical, economic, social 

cultural and institutional. 

SECTION-B 

3. Characteristic and relative significance of different modes of transport; railways, roads, 

airways and waterways. 

4. Regional variations in transport density; traffic flow and regional interaction; Bases of 

spatial interaction. 

SECTION-C 

5. Transport and location activities; Impact of different aspects of transport on spatial 

equilibrium of location; problem of location and regional development. 

6. Transportation network: Function, pattern and geometry; Models of network change. 

SECTION-D 

7. Urban transport: Profile of urban transport facilities; traffic in towns; transport services and 

urban landuse pattern. 

8. Problems of urban transportation: transportation and environmental degradation; vehicular 

pollution and congestion; alternative to transport system in Mega-cities. 


1. Ashton, W.D. 1966. The Theory of Traffic Flow. Methuen, London. 

2. Bhaduri, S. 1992. Transport and Regional Development, Concept Publishing Company, 

New Delhi. 

3. Fleming, D.K. and Hayuth. Y. 1994. Spatial Characteristics of Transportation Hubs. 

Centrality and Intermediacy. Journal of Transport Geography 2(i) 3-18. 

4. Hagget, P. 1965. Locational Analysis in Human Geography. Methuen, London. 

5. Hay, A. 1973. Transport Economy, Macmillan, London. 

6. Hoyle, B. S. and Knowles, R. 2000, Modern Transport Geography. John Wiley and Sons, 

New York. 

7. Hoyle, B.S. 1973. Transport and Development. Macmillan, London. 

8. Husain, M. and Zaidi, S.S.H. 1996. Environmental Management in India. Concept 



9. Nagar, V.D. and Gautam, S. 1984. Principles and Problems of Indian Transport. Kailash 

Pustak Sadan, Gwalior. 

10. Raza, M and Agarwal Y.P. 1986. Transport Geography of India. Concept Publication, New 

Delhi. 

11. Vaidya, B.C. 1998. Readings in Transport Geography, Devika Publications, New Delhi. 

12. White, H.P. and Senior, M.L. 1983. Transport Geography. Longman, London. 

10(934) 


Paper 605 (ii) GEOGRAPHY OF TOURISM 



Time: 3 Hours 




Section- A 

1. Nature and Scope – Concepts and Issues, Types of Tourists; Visitor, Traveller, and 

Excursionist–Definition and differentiation. 

2. Tourism, recreation and leisure, their interrelationships. 

Section- B 

3. Type of Tourism: Nature tourism, Heritage Tourism, Medical Tourism, Pilgrimage. 

4. Important Places of Tourism in India and their significance. 

Section- C 

5. Tourism Infrastructure – Transport, Facilitations and Hospitality Industry. 

6. International and Domestic Tourism – Recent Trends. 

Section- D 

7. Impact of Tourism: On Economy, Environment and Society; Concept of Ecotourism. 

8. Problems of Tourism: Social behaviour, maintenance of tourist places, inadequate funding, 

advertisement and propaganda. 


1. Babu S. S., Mishra S., and Parida B. B. (eds.): Tourism Development Revisited – 

Concepts, Issues and Paradigms, Sage. 

2. Bhardwaj et. al. (eds.): International Tourism: Issues and Challenges, Kanishka New 

Delhi. 

3. Bhatia, A. K., 1991: International Tourism: Fundamentals and Practices, Sterling 


4. Boniface B. G. and Chris C., 2005: Worldwide Destinations: The Geography of Travel 

and Tourism, Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann, Oxford. 

5. Dhar P. N., 2006: International Tourism: Emerging Challenges and Future Prospects, 

Kanishka, New Delhi. 

6. Hall M. and Stephan P., 2006: Geography of Tourism and Recreation – Environment, 

Place and Space, Routledge, London. 

10(935) 


Paper 605 (iii) Geography of Health 



Time: 3 Hours 




SECTION-A 

1. Evolution of medical Geography. 

2. Concept of Health and its Determinants. 

SECTION-B 

3. Indicators of Health, its measurement and Data sources. 

4. Global Patterns of Health, Mortality and Morbidity. 

SECTION-C 

5. Food Security and health. 

6. Demographic Transition and Health Transition Models. 

SECTION-D 

7. Health care, Infrastructures, Provisions and Policies in Developed and Developing countries 

8. Factors Affecting Regional Variations in Health with Spatial Reference to India. 


1. D.M. Smith, (1977), Human Geography: Welfare approach, Arnold Meinman. 



4. R.P. Misra (2006), Geography of Health, Concept Publishing. 

10(936) 


Paper 605 (v) Soil Geography 



Time: 3 Hours 




10(937) 

SECTION-A 

1. Definition, nature, scope and significance of soil geography; relationship of soil geography 

and pedology. 

2. Soil forming factors: parent material, climate, topographic organic and their spatial 

temporal dimensions. 

SECTION-B 

3. Soil Processes: Eluviations, Humification, Classification, salinization, 

podzolisation. 

4. Soil profile: Development and Characteristics of soil profile. 

SECTION-C 

5. Physical properties of soils: tenure, structure, colour, porosity and permeability. 

6. Chemical Properties of soils: soil reaction, Factors of controlling soil reaction, Humus, soil 

clays, 

pH and Ec. 

SECTION-D 

7. Soils and Environment problems: Soil erosion, degradation and conservation; methods to 

improve the physical qualities of soil. 

8. Soil Survey: Modern techniques of soil survey, soil mapping sustainable 

development of soil resources with reference to India. 


1. Buckman, H.O. and Brady N.C. 2000. The Nature and Properties of Soils, Macmillan, New 

York. 

2. Bunting, B.T. 1973. The Geography of Soils. Hutchinson, London. 

3. Brikeland, P.W.1984. Soils and Geomorphology. Oxford University Press, London. 

4. Daji, J.A. 1990. A Text Book of Soil Science. Asia Publishing House, New Delhi. 

5. Foth H.D. and Turk L.M. 1972. Fundamentals of Soils Science. John Wiley, New York. 

6. Govinda Rajan, S.V. and Gopala Rao, H.G. 1978. Studies of Soils of India. Vikas 


7. Sehgal, J. 2000. Pedology Concepts and Applications. Kalyani Publications, New Delhi. 

8. Pitty, A.F. 1978. Geography and Soil Properties. University Press, London. 


Paper 

No. 

Nomenclature of Paper Max 

Marks 

W.E.F. 2013-14 

B.A/B.Sc. (Hons.) Semester-V 

10(938) 

Internal 

Assessment 


501 Evolution of Geographic 

Thought 

80 20 100 3 Hours 

502 Geography and 

Ecosystems 

80 20 100 3 Hours 

503 Remote sensing and GIS 40 20 60 3 Hours 

(A) (Theory) 

503 Remote sensing and GIS 40 - 40 3 Hours 


504 Geography of India 80 20 100 3 Hours 

505 Any one of the 

followings: 

(vi) Social Geography 

(vii) Cultural 

Geography 

(viii) Political 

Geography 

(ix) Geography of 

Haryana 

80 20 100 3 Hours 

B.A/B.Sc. (Hons.) Semester-VI 

Paper Nomenclature of Paper Max. Internal Total Marks Time 

No. 

Marks Assessment 

601 Statistical Methods in 

Geography 

80 20 100 3 Hours 

602 Regional Development and 

Planning 

80 20 100 3 Hours 

603 Field Survey in Geography 40 20 60 3 Hours 

(A) (Theory) 

603 Field Survey in Geography 40 - 40 3 Hours 


604 Geography of Settlements 80 20 100 3 Hours 

605 Any one of the followings: 80 20 100 3 Hours 

(iv) Geography of 

Transport 

(v) Geography of 

Tourism 

(vi) Geography of Health 

(x) Soil Geography 


Paper 501 Evolution of Geographic Thought 



Time: 3 Hours 




SECTION-A 

1. Classification of Sciences and Place of Geography among Sciences. 

2. Relation of Geography with natural and social sciences. 

3. Contribution of Greeks and Roman Scholars in geographical knowledge. 

SECTION-B 

4. Geography in Medieval Period: Arab Geographers and Renaissance. 

5. Contribution of Varenius and Kant in geography. 

6. Classical Period: Humboldt and Ritter’s contribution to geography. 

SECTION-C 

7. Environmental Determinism and Possibilism. 

8. Chorology and Landscape concepts. 

9. Dualism in Geography: Systematic versus Regional and Physical versus Human Geography. 

SECTION-D 

10. Quantitative Revolution and Development of Geography as Spatial Sciences. 

11. Behavioral Geography. 

12. Welfare Geography and Radical Approach. 


1. Dikshit, R.D.(ed.)A The Art & Science of Geography Integrated Readings, Prentice Hall of 

India, New Delhi, 1994. 

2. Hartshorne, R.: Perspectives on Nature of Geography, Rand McNally & Co.1959. 

3. Husain, M.: Evolution of Geographic Thought, Rawat Pub., Jaipur, 1984. 

4. Johnston, R.J.: Philosophy and Human Geography, Edward Arnold, London, 1983. 

5. Johnston, R.J.: the Future of Geography, Methuen, London, 1988. 

6. Minshull, R. : The Changing Nature of Geography, Hutchinson University Library, London, 

1970. 

10(939) 


Paper 502 Geography of Ecosystem 



Time: 3 Hours 




Section - A 

1. Environmental Geography – Concept and Scope. 

2. Human-Environment Relationships–Historical Progression and Adaptation 

Section - B 

3. Ecosystem – Concept, Structure and Functions. Ecosystem productivity and ecological pyramid. 

4. Flow of energy; food chain and food web; trophic level. 

Section – C 

5. Biomes and Habitat: Classification of Biomes. Tropical rainforest biome, Grassland biomes, 

Monsoon biome and Marine biome. 

6. Environmental Problems: Climate change, ozone depletion, air pollution and soil degradation. 

Section – D 

7. Environmental Programmes and Policies –National and Local levels 

8. Global Environmental concern: Stockholm conference, Earth summit and Kyoto protocol and 

after. 


1. Chandna R. C., 2002: Environmental Geography, Kalyani, Ludhiana. 

2. Cunninghum W. P. and Cunninghum M. A., 2004: Principals of Environmental 

Science: Inquiry and Applications, Tata Macgraw Hill, New Delhi. 

3. Goudie A., 2001: The Nature of the Environment, Blackwell, Oxford. 

4. Miller G. T., 2004: Environmental Science: Working with the Earth, Thomson Brooks 

Cole, Singapore. 

5. MOEF, 2006: National Environmental Policy-2006, Ministry of Environment and 

Forests, Government of India. 

6. Odum, E. P. et al, 2005: Fundamentals of Ecology, Ceneage Learning India. 

7. Singh S., 1997: Environmental Geography, Prayag Pustak Bhawan. Allahabad. 

8. UNEP, 2007: Global Environment Outlook: GEO4: Environment For Development, 

United Nations Environment Programme. 

Hindi Reading List 

1. Singh, Savindra 2001. Paryavaran Bhugol, Prayag Pustak Bhawan, Allahabad. (in 

Hindi). 

2. Singh, Shri Narayan 1993. Vatavaran Bhugol, Tara Book Agency. (in Hindi) 

10(940) 


Paper 503 (A) Remote Sensing and GIS (Theory) 







SECTION-A 

1. Introduction to Aerial Photographs: their advantages and types. 

2. Elements of Air, Photo Interpretation. 

SECTION-B 

3. Introduction to Remote Sensing: Electromagnetic spectrum and process of Remote Sensing. 

4. Types of Satellites, Indian Remote Sensing Satellites and their data Product (Type of 

imageries). 

SECTION-C 

5. Introduction to Geographical information system: Definition, Purpose, Advantages, 

Hardware and Software requirements. 

6. Spatial and Non-spatial Data: their sources and entering in GIS environment. 

SECTION-D 

7. Application of Remote Sensing in Agriculture Environment and Resource Management. 

8. Application of Geographical Information System in Urban, Regional and Real time 

Planning. 


1. Anji Reddy, Remote Sensing and Geographical Information Systems. 

2. J.R. Jensen (2009), Remote Sensing of the Environment: An Earth Resource Perspective 

Pearson Education (LPE), New Delhi. 

3. Lillesand and R.W. Kiefer (2005), Remote Sensing and Image Interpretation, John Wiley 

and Sons. 

4. Meenakshi Kumar (2001), ‘Remote Sensing, NCERT, New Delhi. 

5. Pritvish Nag and M. Kudrat (1998), Digital Remote Sensing, Concept Publication, New 

Delhi. 

10(941) 


Exercise : 24 

Record Book : 10 

Viva-voce : 6 

Paper 503 (B) Remote Sensing and GIS (Practical) 

10(942) 



Note: There will be four questions in all and candidates have to attempt three questions/exercises. 

1. Demarcation of Principal Point, Conjugate Principal Point and Flight line on Aerial 

Photograph--1 Exercise. 

2. Determination of Scale of Photograph-1 Exercise. 

3. Interpretation of Single Vertical Photgraph-1 Exercise. 

4. Use of Stereoscope of Identification of Features -1 Exercise. 

5. Identification of Features on PAN+ LISS Imagery (Mark copy of FCC)- 3 exercises. 





Paper 504 Geography of India 

10(943) 



Time: 3 Hours 




SECTION-A 

1. India: Location, size and shape; physiographic structure and division; drainage 

system of India and their importance. 

2. Climate: Regional and seasonal variations of climate in India; Rainfall distribution; 

Climatic regions of India. 

SECTION-B 

3. Soils: Soil types, distribution and characteristics of Indian soils; soil erosion and 

conservation in India. 

4. Natural Vegetation: Vegetation types and their distribution; Forest, their utilization and 

need for conservation; Forest management programmes in India. 

SECTION-C 

5. Agriculture: Role of agriculture in Indian Economy; regional variations in cropping 

pattern; Role of Irrigation in agriculture; problems pertaining to Green 

Revolution and mitigation strategies. 

6. Minerals and power resources: 

Production and distribution of the following: (1) Iron-ore (2) Mica 

(3) Coal (4) Petroleum (5) Hydropower 

SECTION-D 

7. Industries: Factors affecting location of industries; production and distribution of iron 

and steel industries, cotton-textile industry and Sugar industry; Industrial 

Complexes of India. 


8. Trade: Factors affecting India’s trade; Major exports and imports of India, Balance 

of payments of India’s trade. 


1. Deshpande, C.D. 1992. India-A Regional Interpretation. Northern Book Depot, New Delhi. 

2. Khullar, D.R. 2009. India-A Comprehensive Geography, Kalyani Publishers, New Delhi. 

3. Shafi, M. 2000. Geography of South-Asia. McMillan and Company, Calcutta. 

4. Sharma, T.C. 2009. Economic and Commercial Geography of India. Vikas Publication, 

New Delhi. 

5. Singh, Gopal, 2006. Geography of India. Atma Ram and Sons, New Delhi. 

6. Singh, R.L. 1971. India- A Regional Geography, NGSI, Varansi. 

7. Spate, OHK and Learmonth. 1967. India and Pakistan. Methuen and Company, London. 

8. Tideman, E.M. 1996. Watershed Management: Guidelines for Indian Conditions, Omega 


9. Tirth, R. and Krishna, G. 1996. Emerging India. Rawat Publications, Jaipur 

10. Wadia, D.N. 1967. Geology of India, Macmillan, London. 

10(944) 


Paper 505 (i) Social Geography 



Time: 3 Hours 




1. Nature and Scope of Social Geography. 

10(945) 

SECTION-A 

2. Development and Philosophy of Social Geography. 

3. Social Geography and Social Sciences. 

4. Space and Society: Structure and Processes. 

5. Geographical Bases of Social Formations. 

SECTION-B 

6. Social Geography’s Contribution in Social Theory. 

SECTION-C 

7. Social Geography of India-Social Differentiation and Region Formation. 

8. Evolution of Socio-cultural Regions in India. 

9. Unity and Diversity in India. 

10. Social Transformation and Change in India. 

11. Social Wellbeing and Physical Quality of Life. 

SECTION-D 

12. Human Development: Measures and Indications. 


1. Ahmad, Aijazuddin, Social Geography, Rawat Publication, New Delhi, 1999. 

2. Dreze Jean, Amartya Sen, Economic Development and Social opportunity, Oxford 

University Press, New Delhi, 1996. 

3. Dubey. S.C. : Indian Society, National Book Trust, New Delhi, 1991. 

4. Gregory, D and J. Larry, (eds.). Social relations and spatial structures, McMillan, 1985. 

5. Schwartzberg Joseph; An Historical Atlas of South Asia, University of Chicago Press, 

Chicago, 1978. 


6. Sen, Amartya & Dreze Jean, Indian Development: Selected Regional Perspectives, Oxford 


7. Smith, David: Geography: A Welfare Approach, Edward Arnold, London, 1977. 

8. Sopher, David. : An Exploration of Indian, Cornell University Press, 1980. 

9. Subba Rao. Personality of India; Pre and Proto Historic Foundation of India and Pakistan. 

M. S. University Baroda, Vadodara, 1985. 

10(946) 


Paper 505 (ii) Cultural Geography 



Time: 3 Hours 




10(947) 

SECTION-A 

1. Introduction: Nature and Scope of Cultural Geography. 

2. Cultural Elements and Components of Culture. 

3. Cultural Changes: Perception and Behavioralism. 

SECTION-B 

4. Bases of Cultural Diversity: Race, Religion and Language. 

5. Cultural Diversity in World. 

6. Cultural Diversity and Regionalization in India. 

7. Geography of Ethnic and Tribal Groups. 

8. Cultural Landscape and Cultural Ecology. 

SECTION-C 

9. Religion: Origin, diffusion and Spatial Distribution. 

SECTION-D 

10. Pattern of Livelihood: Economic Activities and Cultural adaptation. 

11. Agriculture, Industrialization and Modernization. 

12. Technological Changes and Culture. 


1. Crang, Mike: Cultural Geography, Routledge Publications, London, 1998. 

2. Harmandorf, Tribes of India: The Struggle for Survival, Oxford University Press, Delhi, 

1989. 

3. Massey, D & Jess P. A Place in the World: Places, Cultures and Globalization Oxford 

University, New York, 1995. 

4. Massey, et.al (ed), Human Geography Today, Polity Press, Combridge, 1999. 

5. Mukherjee, A.B. and Aijazuddin, A: India: culture, Society and Economy, Inter-India 


6. Schwartzberg, J.E.: Historical Atlas of South Asia, University of Chicago, 1978. 

7. Singh, A.K. : Approaches to Tribal Development, Swarup and Sona, New Delhi, 1994. 


Paper 505 (iii) POLITICAL GEOGRAPHY 

10(948) 



Time: 3 Hours 




Section-A 

1.Introduction: Introduction, Nature, Scope and Geopolitics. 

2. State, Nation and Nation State – Concept of Nation and State, Attributes of State – Frontiers, 

Borders, Shape, Size, Territory and Sovereignty, Concept of Nation State. 

Section-B 

3. Global strategic views: Mahan and sea power, Mackinder and Heartland; Spykman and Rimland. 

4. Geopolitical significance of Indian Ocean. 

Section-C 

5. Electoral Geography – Geography of Voting, Geographic Influences on voting pattern, 

Geography of Representation, Gerrymandering. 

6. Political Geography of Resource Conflicts – Water Sharing Disputes, Disputes and Conflicts 

Related to Forest Rights and Minerals, issues of land locked states in Asia 

and Africa 

Section-D 

7. Politics of Displacement: Issues of relief, compensation and rehabilitation: with reference to 

Dams and Special Economic Zones 

8. Case studies of Displacement and Rehabilitation: Bhakra Nangal Dam, Narmada’s Sardar 

Sarovar Dam and displacement due to mining. 


1. Agnew J., 2002: Making Political Geography, Arnold. 

2. Agnew J., Mitchell K. and Toal G., 2003: A Companion to Political Geography, Blackwell. 

3. Cox K. R., Low M. and Robinson J., 2008: The Sage Handbook of Political Geography, 

Sage Publications. 

4. Cox K., 2002: Political Geography: Territory, State and Society, Wiley-Blackwell 

5. Gallaher C., et al, 2009: Key Concepts in Political Geography, Sage Publications. 

6. Glassner M., 1993: Political Geography, Wiley. 

7. Jones M., 2004: An Introduction to Political Geography: Space, Place and Politics, Routledg . 

Dixit, R.D. 2010: Political Geography 

8. Mathur H M and M M Cernea (eds.) Development, Displacement and Resettlement – 

Focus on Asian Experience, Vikas, Delhi 

9. Painter J. and Jeffrey A., 2009: Political Geography, Sage Publications. 

10. Taylor P. and Flint C., 2000: Political Geography, Pearson Education. 

11. Verma M K (2004): Development, Displacement and Resettlement, Rawat 

Publications, Delhi 

12. Hodder Dick, Sarah J Llyod and Keith S McLachlan (1998), Land Locked States of 

Africa and Asia (vo.2), Frank Cass 


Paper 505 (iv) Geography of Haryana 



Time: 3 Hours 




SECTION-A 

1. Haryana: Location, size, shape and administrative division; physical divisions 

and drainage systems. 

2. Climate: Characteristics and factors; seasons; distribution of rainfall and 

climatic regions. 

SECTION-B 

3. Soils and natural vegetation: Soil types-their distribution and characteristics; vegetation 

types, distribution and importance. 

4. Human resources: Distribution and density, growth and urbanization. 

SECTION-C 

5. Agricultural resources: Major crops; Irrigation; new trends in agriculture; problems 

pertaining to agricultural development and strategy for its 

advancement. 

6. Manufacturing Industries: Major Industries; Industrial policy, SEZ and Foreign investment 

in Industries. 

SECTION-D 

7. Transportation: Modes of transportation and road density; significance of Grant 

Trunk Road in the Economic development of Haryana. 

8. Regionalization of Haryana: Concept of region, bases and classification. 


1. Census of India. 1981. Regional Division in Haryana. 

2. Census of India. 2001. Administrative Atlas of Haryana. 

3. Chaudhary, D.R. 2009. Haryana at Crossroads: problems and prospects. National Book 

Trust of India, New Delhi. 

4. Singh, J. 1976. Agricultural Geography of Haryana, Vishal Publication, Kurukshetra. 

5. Singh, R.L. 1971. India- A Regional Geography. National Geographical Society of India, 

Varansi. 

6. Verma, D.C. and Singh, S. 2001. Haryana-The Land and People. National Book Trust of 


10(949) 


Paper 601 Statistical Methods in Geography 

10(950) 



Time: 3 Hours 




SECTION-A 

1. Type of data and descriptive Statistics: visual descriptive methods such as histograms, 

ogives. 

2. Numerical descriptive Statics: measure of Central Tendency and partition values. 

SECTION-B 

3. Measure of dispersion: Quartile deviation, Mean deviation, Standard deviation. 

4. Measure of Inequality: Lorenz Curve. 

SECTION-C 

5. Continuous Probability Distributions and Models. 

6. Properties of Normal Distribution. 

SECTION-D 

7. Inferential Statistics: confidence Intervals and Hypothesis Testing. 

8. Sampling its type and its application in Geographical Studies. 


1. Aslam Mahmood, Statistical Methods for Geographers, Rajesh Publications, New Delhi. 

2. Peter A. Rogerson (2010), Statistical Methods for Geography, Sage Publishers. 

3. Saroj Kumar Paul, “Statistics for Geoscientists: Techniques and Applications, Concept 

Publishers, 1998.” 


Paper 602 Regional Development and Planning 



Time: 3 Hours 




1. Concept of Region, types of Regions. 

2. Methods of Regionalization. 

SECTION-A 

SECTION-B 

3. Theories of Regional Development: Hirschman and Myrdal’s Theory. 

4. Regional Imbalances in development in India with spatial reference of human and 

Economic development. 

SECTION-C 

5. Concept of Planning: Spatial and Sectoral, Regional and National, Micro and Macro. 

6. Environmental Issues in Regional Planning: Planning for Sustainable Development. 

7. Features of Various Five years Plans in India. 

SECTION-D 

8. Urban Planning in India with spatial reference to National Capital Region. 


1. R.C. Chandna : Regional Planning and Development. 

2. Mahesh Chand and Puri : Regional Planning in India, Allied Publishers, Delhi. 

3. S.C. Patnaik, Economics of Regional Development and Planning in Third World 

Countries, Associated Publishing, New Delhi. 

4. V. Nath, Regional Development and Planning in India. 

10(951) 


Paper 603 A Field Survey in Geography (Theory) 

10(952) 



Time: 3 Hours 




SECTION-A 

1. Topographical Sheets-1:50,000 and 1:25,000 

2. Socio-economic Information on Toposheets. 

SECTION-B 

3. Sources of Demographic and Socio-economic Data of Villages. 

4. Census data for the Socio-economic Study of Village/Towns. 

SECTION-C 

5. Cadastral maps for Field mapping of Village/towns. 

6. Field mapping of the Features of Landuse and Land Quality. 

SECTION-D 

7. Use of Structured Questionnaires for Socio-economic Survey. 

8. Analysis of Collected Socio-economic Data. 


Paper 603 (B) Field Survey in Geography (Practical) 


10(953) 

Time: 3 Hours 

Students have to carry out compulsory socio-economic field survey of a village/town, 

analyse and interpret the collected data. Every student has to prepare a field survey 

report based on the survey. 

Break up of Marks. 

Activity Marks 

Participation in Field Survey 10 

Field Survey Report 20 

Viva-Voce 10 


Paper 604 GEOGRAPHY OF SETTLEMENTS 

10(954) 



Time: 3 Hours 




Section - A 

1. Introduction: Nature and Scope of settlement geography. 2. Basic Concepts: Rural and Urban 

Settlements, Hamlet, Village, Town, City, Metropolis, Megalopolis, Conurbation, and Rural-Urban 

Fringe. 

Section- B 

3. Histogenesis of rural settlements: historical development, distribution of rural settlements. Size 

and spacing of rural settlements in India 

4. Rural Settlements: Types, Patterns and Determinants. Functional classification of rural 

settlements. 

Section- C 

5. Regional Settlement Hierarchy: Central Place Theory, Rank-Size Rule, Primate City. 

6. Urban Land use Models; Concentric zone model, sector model and multiple nuclei model. 

Section- D 

7.Urban problems: housing, poverty, water supply and sanitation. 

8. Planned Cities: A Case Study of Chandigarh – Site and Situation, Layout and Landuse, Services 

and Infrastructure, Problems. 


1. Chishlom M., 2007: Rural Settlement and Land Use, Transaction Publishers. 

2. Daniel, P. 2002: Geography of Settlement, Rawat Publs., Jaipur & New Delhi. 

3. Ghosh, Santwana 1999: A Geography of Settlements, Orient Longman, Kolkata. 

4. Kalia Ravi, 1999: Chandigarh: The Making of Indian City, Oxford University Press. 

5. Kaplan D. H., Wheeler J. O. and Holloway S. R., 2008: Urban Geography, John Wiley. 

6. Krishan G., 1999: Inner Spaces – Outer Spaces of a Planned City: A Thematic Atlas of 

Chandigarh, Celebrating Chandigarh. 

7. Pacione M., 2009: Urban Geography: A Global Perspective, Taylor and Francis. 

8. Ramachandran R., 1989: Urbanisation and Urban Systems of India, Oxford University 

Press. 

9. Ramachandran, R., 1992: The Study of Urbanisation, Oxford University Press, Delhi 

10. Singh R. Y., 1994: The Geography of Settlement, Rawat Publication, New Delhi. 

11. Tiwari, R. C. 2000: Settlement Geography, (in Hindi), Prayag Publ., Allahabad. 

12. Misra, R. P. & Misra, K. eds. 1998: Million Cities of India, Sustainable 

Development Foundation, New Delhi. 


Paper 605 (i) Geography of Transport 



Time: 3 Hours 




SECTION-A 

1. Nature, scope, significance and development of transport geography. 

2. Factors associated with development of transport system; physical, economic, social 

cultural and institutional. 

SECTION-B 

3. Characteristic and relative significance of different modes of transport; railways, roads, 

airways and waterways. 

4. Regional variations in transport density; traffic flow and regional interaction; Bases of 

spatial interaction. 

SECTION-C 

5. Transport and location activities; Impact of different aspects of transport on spatial 

equilibrium of location; problem of location and regional development. 

6. Transportation network: Function, pattern and geometry; Models of network change. 

SECTION-D 

7. Urban transport: Profile of urban transport facilities; traffic in towns; transport services and 

urban landuse pattern. 

8. Problems of urban transportation: transportation and environmental degradation; vehicular 

pollution and congestion; alternative to transport system in Mega-cities. 


1. Ashton, W.D. 1966. The Theory of Traffic Flow. Methuen, London. 

2. Bhaduri, S. 1992. Transport and Regional Development, Concept Publishing Company, 

New Delhi. 

3. Fleming, D.K. and Hayuth. Y. 1994. Spatial Characteristics of Transportation Hubs. 

Centrality and Intermediacy. Journal of Transport Geography 2(i) 3-18. 

4. Hagget, P. 1965. Locational Analysis in Human Geography. Methuen, London. 

5. Hay, A. 1973. Transport Economy, Macmillan, London. 

6. Hoyle, B. S. and Knowles, R. 2000, Modern Transport Geography. John Wiley and Sons, 

New York. 

7. Hoyle, B.S. 1973. Transport and Development. Macmillan, London. 

8. Husain, M. and Zaidi, S.S.H. 1996. Environmental Management in India. Concept 


9. Nagar, V.D. and Gautam, S. 1984. Principles and Problems of Indian Transport. Kailash 

Pustak Sadan, Gwalior. 

10. Raza, M and Agarwal Y.P. 1986. Transport Geography of India. Concept Publication, New 

Delhi. 

11. Vaidya, B.C. 1998. Readings in Transport Geography, Devika Publications, New Delhi. 

12. White, H.P. and Senior, M.L. 1983. Transport Geography. Longman, London. 

10(955) 


Paper 605 (ii) GEOGRAPHY OF TOURISM 

10(956) 



Time: 3 Hours 




Section- A 

1. Nature and Scope – Concepts and Issues, Types of Tourists; Visitor, Traveller, and 

Excursionist–Definition and differentiation. 

2. Tourism, recreation and leisure, their interrelationships. 

Section- B 

3. Type of Tourism: Nature tourism, Heritage Tourism, Medical Tourism, Pilgrimage. 

4. Important Places of Tourism in India and their significance. 

Section- C 

5. Tourism Infrastructure – Transport, Facilitations and Hospitality Industry. 

6. International and Domestic Tourism – Recent Trends. 

Section- D 

7. Impact of Tourism: On Economy, Environment and Society; Concept of Ecotourism. 

8. Problems of Tourism: Social behaviour, maintenance of tourist places, inadequate funding, 

advertisement and propaganda. 


1. Babu S. S., Mishra S., and Parida B. B. (eds.): Tourism Development Revisited – 

Concepts, Issues and Paradigms, Sage. 

2. Bhardwaj et. al. (eds.): International Tourism: Issues and Challenges, Kanishka New 

Delhi. 

3. Bhatia, A. K., 1991: International Tourism: Fundamentals and Practices, Sterling 


4. Boniface B. G. and Chris C., 2005: Worldwide Destinations: The Geography of Travel 

and Tourism, Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann, Oxford. 

5. Dhar P. N., 2006: International Tourism: Emerging Challenges and Future Prospects, 

Kanishka, New Delhi. 

6. Hall M. and Stephan P., 2006: Geography of Tourism and Recreation – Environment, 

Place and Space, Routledge, London. 


Paper 605 (iii) Geography of Health 



Time: 3 Hours 




1. Evolution of medical Geography. 

2. Concept of Health and its Determinants. 

SECTION-A 

10(957) 

SECTION-B 

3. Indicators of Health, its measurement and Data sources. 

4. Global Patterns of Health, Mortality and Morbidity. 

SECTION-C 

5. Food Security and health. 

6. Demographic Transition and Health Transition Models. 

SECTION-D 

7. Health care, Infrastructures, Provisions and Policies in Developed and Developing countries 

8. Factors Affecting Regional Variations in Health with Spatial Reference to India. 


1. D.M. Smith, (1977), Human Geography: Welfare approach, Arnold Meinman. 



4. R.P. Misra (2006), Geography of Health, Concept Publishing. 


Paper 605 (v) Soil Geography 

10(958) 



Time: 3 Hours 




SECTION-A 

1. Definition, nature, scope and significance of soil geography; relationship of soil geography 

and pedology. 

2. Soil forming factors: parent material, climate, topographic organic and their spatial 

temporal dimensions. 

SECTION-B 

3. Soil Processes: Eluviations, Humification, Classification, salinization, 

podzolisation. 

4. Soil profile: Development and Characteristics of soil profile. 

SECTION-C 

5. Physical properties of soils: tenure, structure, colour, porosity and permeability. 

6. Chemical Properties of soils: soil reaction, Factors of controlling soil reaction, Humus, soil 

clays, pH and Ec. 

SECTION-D 

7. Soils and Environment problems: Soil erosion, degradation and conservation; methods to 

improve 

the physical qualities of soil. 

8. Soil Survey: Modern techniques of soil survey, soil mapping sustainable 

development of soil resources with reference to India. 


1. Buckman, H.O. and Brady N.C. 2000. The Nature and Properties of Soils, Macmillan, New 

York. 

2. Bunting, B.T. 1973. The Geography of Soils. Hutchinson, London. 

3. Brikeland, P.W.1984. Soils and Geomorphology. Oxford University Press, London. 

4. Daji, J.A. 1990. A Text Book of Soil Science. Asia Publishing House, New Delhi. 

5. Foth H.D. and Turk L.M. 1972. Fundamentals of Soils Science. John Wiley, New York. 

6. Govinda Rajan, S.V. and Gopala Rao, H.G. 1978. Studies of Soils of India. Vikas 


7. Sehgal, J. 2000. Pedology Concepts and Applications. Kalyani Publications, New Delhi. 

8. Pitty, A.F. 1978. Geography and Soil Properties. University Press, London. 


SCHEME OF EXAMINATION M.SC. FORENSIC SCIENCE 

(4 SEMESTER COURSE) 

TO BE IMPLEMENTED FROM THE SESSION 2012-2013 


Ext. Int. Max. Time/hrs 

Marks Marks Marks 

Paper-F.Sc.-I General Forensic Science 75 15 90 3 hrs 

Paper- F.Sc.-II Instrumental Analysis (Physical) 75 15 90 3 hrs 

Paper- F.Sc.-III Forensic Biology 75 15 90 3 hrs 

Paper- F.Sc.-IV Forensic Chemistry and Toxicology 75 15 90 3 hrs 

Paper- F.Sc.-V Practical based on F.Sc.-I & F.Sc.-II Examination to be held annually along 

with paper F.Sc. XI 

Paper- F.Sc.-VI Practical based on F.Sc.-III & F.Sc.-IV Examination to be held annually along 

with paper F.Sc. XII 

Seminar / Test 40 40 

Total 300 100 400 

SEMESTER – II 

Paper-F.Sc.-VII Forensic Serology 75 15 90 3 hrs 

Paper- F.Sc.-VIII Instrumental Analysis (Biochemical) 75 15 90 3 hrs 

Paper- F.Sc.-IX Document Forensics 75 15 90 3 hrs 

Paper- F.Sc.-X Finger Prints & Impressions 75 15 90 3 hrs 

Paper- F.Sc.-XI Practical based on F.Sc.-V, F.Sc.-VII & 

F.Sc.-VIII 

80 20 100 4 hrs 

Paper- F.Sc.-XII Practical based on F.Sc.-VI, F.Sc.-IX & 

F.Sc.-X 

80 20 100 4 hrs 

Project Report 40 40 

Total 


460 140 600 

Paper-F.Sc.-XIII Ballistics and Fire arms 75 15 90 3 hrs 

Paper-F.Sc.-XIV Forensic Psychology 75 15 90 3 hrs 

Paper-F.Sc.-XV DNA Profiling 75 15 90 3 hrs 

Paper-F.Sc.-XVI Recent Advances in Forensics 75 15 90 3 hrs 

Paper-F.Sc.-XVII Practical based on F.Sc. XIII & XIV Examination to be held annually in 


Paper-F.Sc.-XVIII Practical based on F.Sc. XV & XVI Examination to be held annually in 


Seminar / Test 40 40 

Total 300 100 400 


Examinations of Paper F.Sc. – XVII 60 15 75 4 hrs. 

Examinations of Paper F.Sc. – XVIII 60 15 75 4 hrs. 

Paper-F.Sc.-XIX Training and Project Report 300 100 400 - 

Project Report Evaluation, Viva-Voce 50 - 50 - 

Total 470 130 600 - 

10(959) 


10(960) 

SEMESTER-I 

PAPER-F.Sc.-I : GENERAL FORENSIC SCIENCE 





Note: 





each section. 


A 

I. Forensic Science: Introduction, definition, Scope and branches of forensic science. 

Basic principles of forensic science. Organizational set up of Forensic Science 

Laboratories – Central F.S.L. and State F.S.L. 

II. Crime Scene Investigation: Crime scene characteristics, sketching, photography, 

location, collection and preservation of exhibits/evidences. Physical evidence; types, 

significance and analysis. 

III. Investigation of sexual offenses. 

B 

IV. Photography: Basic principles and techniques, exposing, developing and printing. 

Recent developments in photography, digital photography, videography, crime scene 

photography and laboratory photography. 

V. Medical Jurisprudence: History of Forensic Medicine, Legal procedure in criminal 

courts, medical evidence, and medical witness, legal and Ethical Aspects of Medical 

practice. 

VI. Report Writing and Evidence Evaluation : Components of reports and reports 

formats in respect of crime scene and lab, findings, court testimony, admissibility of 

expert testimony, pre-court preparation and court appearance. 

Suggested Books 

1. Richard Saferstein, 2001, Criminalistic: An Introduction to Forensic Science. 7 th edition 

Prentice-Hall, New Jersey. 

2. L.J. Kaplan, 2001. A laboratory manual for the introduction to the Crime Lab. 

Williamstown, Massachusetts. 

3. Moenseens, A.A., Starrs, J.E., Henderson, C.E. and Inabare, F.E., 1995. Scientific Evidence 

in Civil and Criminal cases, IV edition, Foundation Press, Westbury, New York. 

4. Fishes, B.A.J., 2000. Techniques of Crime Scene Investigation. VI edition CRC Press, Boca 

Raton, 2000. 

5. James, S.H. and Nordby J.J. Forensic Science : An introduction to Scientific and 

investigative techniques, CRC Press, USA, 2003. 

6. Redsicker, 2000. The Practical Methodology of Forensic Photography. 


PAPER-F.Sc.-II : INSTRUMENTAL ANALYSIS (PHYSICAL) 





Note: 





each section. 


A 

I. Microscopy: Principles and techniques of Microscopy: Light Microscope, Phasecontract, 

Fluorescence, Confocal, and Electron Microscope (Scanning, Scanning 

tunneling, Transmissional) Forensic application of microscopy and microphotography. 

II. Spectrophotometery : Basic principles of spectrophotometery, UV-Visible, 

spectroscopy, Fluorescence and Phosphorescence Spectrophotometery, Atomic 

absorption Spectroscopy, NMR Spectroscopy, Mass Spectroscopy; Infrared 

Spectrophotometry, their forensic applications. 

B 

III. Basic Principles of Electrophoreses, Electrophoretic, techniques; 

immunoelectrophoresis, isoelectric focusing. 

IV. Chromatography: Basic principles, theory of this layer chromatography, Gas 

chromatography and liquid chromatography. 

V. Computers: Introduction, computer scanners, imaging softwares (Photo paint, 

Photoshop etc.), software piracy; Networked cyber crimes; unauthorized access, 

hacking, computer viruses, computer security, internet applications in forensic science. 

VI. Centrifugation, cold and ultracentrifuges basic principle, instrumentation, G-value & 

relationship between RPM & g. 


1. Lee and Caensstem. Advances in Forensic Science, Vol. 2. Instrumental Analysis. 

2. Peterson, 2001. Clinical and Forensic Application of Capillary Electrophoresis. 

3. Willard, H.H., 1974. Instrumental Methods of Analysis. 

4. Lundquist and Cury, 1983. Methods in Forensic Science. 

5. Mahajan, T.S. and Didar Singh, 2003. Computer Networking and HLML, Gurusewek 

Publishers, Patiala. 

6. Wilson, K. and Goulding, K.H. A Biologists guide to Principles and Techniques of Practical 

Biochemistry. 

10(961) 


PAPER-F.Sc.-III : FORENSIC BIOLOGY 





Note: 





each section. 


A 

I. Fundamentals of Biology, Biological Evidence: Nature, location, collection, 

identification, evaluation and importance of hair, fibres, grains, seeds, leaves, wood, 

diatoms etc. Role of Forensic Biologists. 

II. Wildlife Forensics: Wildlife species in traditional medicine, trade in wild life material, 

identification of pugmarks of various animals. Forensic Entomology: Insects of Forensic 

Importance, role of insects in forensic investigations, collection of entomological 

evidence from scene of crime, Forensic entomologist as expert witness. 

III. Semen composition, function and morphology of spermatozoa, sex determination and y 

chromosome, heterochromatin, autosomal genes in male sex determination. 

B 

IV. Forensic Anthropology: Human skeleton, comparative skeletal anatomy of domestic and 

wild animals (dog, cat, monkey, camel, fowl, frog etc.); Identification of bones, age and 

sex determination from skeletal remains. 

V. Forensic Odontology: Comparative anatomy of teeth, types, and functions of teeth, 

congenital abnormalities and diseases of teeth – their significance in personal 

identification; collection, preservation and forensic significance of bite marks. 

VI. Dosage compensation: Lyon Hypothesis, X-inactivation, mechanism of X-inactivation, 

sex chromatin. 


1. Chowdhri, S., Forensic Biology B.P.R. &D, Govt. of India. 

2. Krogmen, W.N. and Iscam, M. 1987. Human Skelton in Forensic Medicine Charles & 

Thomas USA. 

3. Stimson P.G. and Murtz, A., 1997. Forensic Detesting CRC Press. 

4. Najjar and NacWillim, 1978. Forensic Authropology. 

5. Byrd, J.H. and Cartner, J.L., 2001. Forensic Entomology, CRC Press, LIC. 

6. Comos, J.A., 1960. Manual of Physical Anthropology. Charles C. Thomas, USA. 

10(962) 


PAPER-F.Sc.-IV : FORENSIC CHEMISTRY & TOXICOLOGY 





Note: 





each section. 


A 

I. Introduction to Forensic Chemistry, Colour & Spot test, inorganic analysis, microchemical 

methods of analysis, analysis of beverages, alcoholic & non-alcoholic, 

medicinal preparations containing alcohol and drugs as constituents, examination of 

petroleum products. 

II. Chemistry of fire, Analysis of trace evidence – cosmetics dyes, paints pigments, 

quantitative and qualitative forensic analysis of organic and inorganic industrial 

products, chemical fertilizers, insecticides, metallic & non-metallic products. 

III. Toxico-kinetics, Biotransformation, cellular sites of action, Reproductive toxicology and 

teratology, Respiratory toxicology, cardiovascular toxicology, Hepatic toxicology, 

Immunotoxicology. 

10(963) 

B 

IV. Forensic Toxicology: Poisons, classification of poisons, sign and symptoms of common 

poisons, antidotes, collection of samples. 

V. Drugs: Drugs of abuse, classification and identification. Nacro analysis and brain 

fingerprinting techniques. 

VI. Explosives: Classification, composition and characteristics of explosives, 

pyrotechinques, IEDs, explosion process and affects, types of hazards, effect of blast 

waves on structure. 


1. Curry, 1986. Analytical Methods in Human Toxicology. 

2. Modi, J.K., 1988. Medical Jurisprudence and Toxicology. Tripathi N.M. Press Ltd., 

Allahabad. 

3. Curry, A.S., 1976. Poison detection in human organs. 

4. Tiwari, S.N., 1987. Analytical Toxicology. Govt. of India, Publications, New Delhi. 


PAPER-F.Sc.-V:(PRACTICALS BASED ON PAPERS-F.Sc.-I & F.Sc.-II) 

(Examination to be held annually along with Paper: F.Sc.-XI) 

I. Demonstration of crime scene and laboratory photography. 

II. Sketching and preservation of mock crime scene. 

III. Various types of microscopes – their components and working. 

IV. Introduction and practical demonstration of spectrophotometers, electrophoretic 

apparatus, chromatography. 

V. Electrophoretic techniques – Preparations of gels, media, buffers and determinations of 

enzymes polymorphisms. 

VI. Computer: Introduction, use of scanners, imaging softwares and internet. 

VII. Skeletal analysis (Human & animals). Articulated & disarticulated. 

VIII. Estimation of pigments by spectrophotometry. 

IX. Chemical analysis poisons, beverages collection of forensic evidences from scene of 

crime: 

(a) Biological 

(b) Physical 

10(964) 


PAPER-F.Sc.-VI : (PRACTICALS BASED ON PAPERS F.Sc.-III & F.Sc.-IV) 

(Examination to be held annually along with Paper-F.Sc.-XII) 

I. Study of human hair and comparison of hair from different parts of body/feathers of 

birds/plants fibers. 

II. Study of life history of insects of Forensic importance. 

III. Identification and study of human skeleton and skeleton of other animals. 

IV. Study of Dentition types and comparison of bite marks. 

V. Study of symptoms of common poisons. 

VI. Analysis of presence of toxicants like pesticides etc. from samples. 

VII. Visit to Forensic Science laboratory and preparation of report. 

VIII. Acid phosphates test for semen testing. 

IX. Fructose test of semen. 

X. Morphology of spermatozoa/sperm count. 

XI. Techniques to study drumstics and barr bodies. 

10(965) 


10(966) 

SEMESTER-II 

PAPER-F.Sc.-VII : FORENSIC SEROLOGY 





Note: 





each section. 


A 

I. Human blood groups: Introduction, ABO blood group system, and grouping methods, 

ABO subgroups, inheritance of ABO groups, blood group specific substances in tissues 

and body fluids. 

II. Rh system: Rh blood group system and Rh typing methods, anit-D antibodies detection 

methods, Rh antigens and inheritance, Rh sub-typing, Rh genes and antigens. 

III. ABO variants: Rare alleles, genes modifying the expression of A and B genes, Cis AB, 

biochemistry of ABO system. 

IV. Other blood group systems: MN, Ss, Kell, Duffy, Kid systems etc., red cell 

agglutination phenomena: Auto-, Bacterigenic, Pan and Pseudo-agglutination. 

B 

V. HLA system: Genetics and nomenclature, tissue typing and screening for HLA 

antibodies. 

VI. Forensics applications of blood groups: Cases of doubtful paternity – General principles, 

blood group systems used in problems of parentage; suitability and reliability of results; 

identification of stains from individuals, grouping of blood stains, detectable blood 

group markers in blood stains, deterioration of blood stains. 

VII. Procedure in case work; grouping of stains from other body fluids, mixture of stains, 

ABH grouping from body fragments. 


1. Bearman, K.E., 1988. Blood Group Serology. Churchill & Liewoin. 

2. Race, R.R. and Sanges, R. Blood Groups in Mau, Blackwill Scientific Oxford. 

3. Giblet, L, 1969. Markers in Human Blood, Davis Pennsylvania. 

4. Culliford, The examination and Typing of Blood Stains. US Dept. of Justice Washington. 

5. Dungsforlad Bowley, C. Blood Grouping Technique. Oliver and Boys, London. 


PAPER-F.Sc.-VIII : INSTRUMENTAL ANALYSIS (BIOCHEMICAL) 





Note: 





each section. 


A 

I. General Principles of Biological/Biochemical Analysis, Enzyme techniques, 

Immunochemical techniques, Radio chemical techniques. 

II. Microscopic and microbiological techniques, identification of microscopic organisms, 

sterilization, Media preparation, standard plate count technique. 

III. Diatoms identification, isolation and forensic significance. 

B 

IV. Human lymphocyte culture techniques: Design and working of tissue culture laboratory, 

culture media preparation, short term culture, cell harvesting, flow cytometery, 

automated karytyping with image analysis. 

V. Principle of Polygraph, method of lie detection. 

VI. Molecular biology techniques, preparation of culture media, isolation of DNA, RNA, 

purification, restriction, amplification, PCR, estimation & PCR. 

VII. Immunochemical techniques, immunodiagnostics, RIA, Elisa, Elispot, Immunohistochemistry. 


1. Manay Kliner, 2002. Handbook of Polygraph testing, Academic Press. 

10(967) 


PAPER-F.Sc.-IX : DOCUMENT FORENSICS 





Note: 





each section. 


A 

I. Document Examination, Classification, Ways of procurement handling and marking of 

documents various types of documents – genuine and forged documents, holographic 

documents, basic tools needed for forensic documents examination and their use. 

II. Handwriting: characteristics, identification, and analysis of handwriting, examinations 

of signatures – characteristics of genuine and forged signatures. 

III. Examination of travel documents and prediction of printers and printing devices 

(Typewriters). 

B 

IV. Examination of built up documents, various types of forgeries and their detection, 

various types of printing of security documents, examination of counterfeit currency 

notes. 

V. Determination of age of Documents, forensic linguistics and an introduction to 

computer forensics. Examination of built up documents, printing & security documents. 

VI. Discovery of facts by comparison with known material, prevention and collection of 

handwriting standards, care, handling and preservation of documents, reproduction of 

documents, preparation for trail. 


1. Rev. Ed. Ordway, Hilton, 1982. Scientific examination of questioned documents Elsevier, 

New York. 

2. Albert, S. Osbonn, 1998. Questioned Documents 2 nd Ed., Univ. Law Pub. Delhi. 

3. Wilson, R. Hanison, 2001. Suspect Documents Talli Scientific Examination, Univ. Law 

Pub., Delhi, Indian Reprit. 

10(968) 


PAPER-F.Sc.-X : FINGER PRINTS AND IMPRESSIONS 





Note: 





each section. 


A 

I. History and Development of Fingerprints, classification of fingerprints, Henry system 

and single digit classification, formation of ridges pattern types and areas, fingerprint 

Bureau. 

II. Chance fingerprints, latent and visible fingerprints, methods of development of 

fingerprints (Conventional methods). Taking of fingerprints from living and dead 

persons, preserving, lifting, photography, digital transmission and comparison of 

fingerprints, Automatic fingerprint identification system. 

III. Dermatoglyphics and clinical disorders. 

IV. Foot Prints: Gait pattern, casting of foot prints, lifting of latent foot prints. 

V. Lip prints: nature, location, collection and evaluation. 

VI. Ear prints: Forensic significance, location, collection & evaluation. 

VII. Examination of handwriting, seal impression and other mechanical impressions. 


1. Robertson, J., 1999. Forensic Examination of Hair. Taylor & Forensic. 

2. Cammins, H. and Middle C., 1961. Fingerprints Palms and Soles. Dover Publications. 

B 

3. Bodriak, W.J., Footwear Impression Evidence. Elsevier Science Publ. Co. New York, 1989. 

4. Sharma, B.R., 1980. Foot prints, tacks and trials. Central Law agency, Allahabad. 

5. Morris, 2000. Forensic handwriting identification. Fundamental concepts and Principles. 

6. Saxena. Saxena’s Law and Techniques relating Fingerprints, Foot Prints and Detections of 

Forgery. Central Law Agency Allahabad. 

10(969) 


PAPER-F.Sc.-XI : (PRACTICALS BASED ON PAPERS V, VII & VIII) 

(Examination of papers F.Sc.-V & F.Sc.-XI) 

I. Demonstration of ABO and Rh blood groups from whole blood. 

II. Examination of dried blood stains – identification and grouping. 

10(970) 




Time: 4 Hours 

III. Extraction of DNA from blood, determination of DNA concentration and restriction 

enzyme digestion. 

IV. Nuclear sexing from blood smears. 

V. Introduction and practical demonstration of spectrophotometers. 

VI. Short-term human lymphocyte culture and preparation of karyotype. 

VII. Preparation of media sterilization techniques maintenance of microbial culture and 

standard plate count. 

VIII. Estimation & identification of diatoms. 


PAPER – XII : (PRACTICALS BASED ON PAPERS VI, IX & X) 

(Examination of papers F.Sc.-VI & F.Sc.-XII) 

I. Comparison of hand-writing in cases of forgery. 

10(971) 




Time: 4 Hours 

II. Examination of additions, alterations and obliterations in the documents. 

III. Identification of writing inks by TLC. 

IV. Finger print lifting from scene of crime; study and comparison of fingerprints. 

V. Footprint casting and lifting of foot prints, comparison of foot prints. 

VI. Collection and evaluation of lip-prints. 

VII. Detection of counterfeit currency notes. 

VIII. Stereomicroscopy of handwriting – 3D study. 

IX. Casting & study of tyre impressions. 


10(972) 


PAPER-F.Sc.-XIII : BALLISTICS AND FIRE ARMS 





Note: 





each section. 


A 

I. Definition and background of Ballistics (internal and external ballistics), size, shape and 

ignition of propellants, factors affecting ballistics, ballistics coefficient and limiting 

velocity, Ballistics tables, measurements of trajectory parameters. 

II. Terminal Ballistics, wound ballistics, their characteristics, methods of measurement, 

velocity and evaluation. 

III. Analysis of shooting incidents: Theory of shooting reconstruction, mathematics of 

shooting reconstruction, Ejector pattern testing, shot pattern testing, function testing, 

determination of accuracy, Gun shot reside testing, bullet entry characteristics in tissue 

and clothing, blood on or in weapons, ricochet phenomena, bullet penetration 

phenomena. 

B 

IV. History and background of fire arms, their classification and characteristics, components 

of small arms, different systems and their functions, various, class characteristics, 

purpose and type of rifling cartridge fining mechanism. 

V. Identification of origin, improvised/ country made / imitative fire arms and their 

constructional features. 

VI. Classification and constructional features of different types of cartridges, ammunition, 

definition and types, various types of bullets and compositional aspects. 


1. J. Howard Mathews, and Thomas, Charles C., 1973. Firearms Identification Vol. I, II & III 

Springfield Illinois. 

2. Hatcher, Jury and Weller, 1997. Firearms investigations identification and Evidence. 

Stackpole Books Hanisburg, PA. 

3. Brain, J. Head, 1997. Handbook of Firearms and Ballistics. John Wilay England. 

4. Working Procedures Manual Ballistics, BPR &D, New Delhi, 2000. 


PAPER-F.Sc.-XIV : FORENSIC PSYCHOLOGY 





Note: 





each section. 


A 

I. Introduction to Forensic Psychology. Concepts debates and practice, distinction between 

Forensic and therapeutic evaluation. 

II. Public perceptions of Crime and Punishment status of sensational interests as indicator 

of possible risk. 

III. Principle of Polygraph, methods of lie detection. 

B 

IV. Forensic Psychology Practice, Malingering, Competency evaluation, sanity evaluations, 

sentence mitigation, other evaluations, ethical implications, delinquency. 

V. Domestic violence current issues in definitions and intervention. 

VI. Genetic basis of Psychology. 

VII. Brain fingerprinting techniques. 


1. Arrigo, B.A., 2002. Introduction to Forensic Psychology Academic Press, London. 

2. Hess, A.K. and Weiner, I.B., 1999. Handbook of Forensic Psychology, 2 nd Ed. John Wiley 

& Sons. 

3. Loe Nichans, 1999. Investigative Forensic Hypnosis CRC Press. 

10(973) 


PAPER-F.Sc.-XV : DNA PROFILING 





Note: 





each section. 


A 

I. The basics: Flow of genetic information, Topology of DNA; Satellite DNA, mini 

satellite, DNA and micro satellite DNA, Enzymes used in molecular genetics. 

II. Blotting techniques: Southern, Northern, Western, dot-, slot- and vacuum blotting. 

III. PCR: Basic features, types and applications. 

IV. Basic Genotyping: SNPs and VNTR polymorphism and other classes of DNA 

polymorphism. 

B 

V. DNA Fingerprinting (DEP) technology: An overview, Applications of DFP in forensic 

investigations, zygosity determination, paternity disputes and other applications; DNA 

Profiling practice in India with special reference to criminal cases. Quality assurance 

measures of DFP technology. 

VI. Nucleic acid hybridization: Preparation of nucleic acid probes for DNA profiling – 

Single locus and multilocus probes, and cDNA probes; Methods of labeling DNA – 

Radioactive and non-radioactive labeling; Principles of autoradiography; principles of 

nucleic acid hybridization and various assays. DNA Micro array technology. 

VII. Analyzing DNA: sequencing, dideoxysequencing, Automated DNA sequencing and 

Micro array based re-sequencing. 


1. Furley, M.A. and Hamington, J.J. Forensic DNA Technology. 

2. Kirby, DNA Fingerprinting Technology. 

3. Epplen, J.T. and Eabjulm, T., 1999. DNA Profiling and DNA Fingerprinting Bukhaagar 

Verlag, Switzerland. 

4. Lee M.C. and Gaenesten, R.E., 1990. DNA and other Polymorphism in Forensic Science. 

Year book Medical Published. 

5. Keith Immen and Norah Rudus, 1997. An introduction to Forensic DNA Analysis. CRC 

Press, New York. 

10(974) 


PAPER-F.Sc.-XVI : RECENT ADVANCES IN FORENSICS 





Note: 





each section. 


A 

I. Cyber Forensics: Cyber law, common principles, classification of Cyber Crime and 

Law, Investigation of Cyber Crime, Search and Seizure of computer system, computer 

based evidence and Jurisdiction. 

II. Fundamentals of Computer Security, Risk assessment and mitigation; Developing 

Secure computer system, security models, damage control, assessment and auditing, 

network security. 

III. Speaker and Tape authentication: Voice production theory-vocal anatomy, speech 

signal processing and pattern recognition, basic factors of sound in speech, acoustics 

characteristics of speech signal. 

B 

IV. Intellectual property protection, policy relevant to information technology companies in 

India, Obscurity and Pornography on the Internet. 

V. Forensic Art Illustration: Introduction, human face, drawing the face, finding and 

identifying the living, image assessment and modification, post mortem drawing, 

methods of superimposition, professional ethics and conduct, dealing with news media, 

forensic artist in court. 

VI. Fatality Forensics: Introduction, cause, manner and characteristics of death, RTF 

investigation versus RTF reconstruction, Jurisdictional and Statutory considerations: 

Basic events; general classification of RTFs; Basic injury mechanisms. 


1. Tiwari, R.K., Sastry, P.K. and Ravikumar, 2003. Computer Crime and Computer Forensic 

Select Publs. New Delhi, 2003. 

2. Goyal, R.M. and Pawan, M.S., Computer Crimes. 

3. Stern, D.K., Preventing Computer Frauds. 

4. Taylor, 2000. Forensic Art and Illustration, CRC Press. 

10(975) 


PAPER-F.Sc.-XVII : (PRACTICALS BASED ON PAPERS F.Sc.-XIII & F.Sc.-XIV) 

(Examinations to be held in Semester IV on annual basis) 

I. Characteristics of Firearms: Calibre, choke, trigger, pull, proof marks etc. 

II. Examination and comparison of fired bullets: Calibre, rifling characteristics, probable 

type of firearms. 

III. Chemical tests for powder residues (worker’s test) and Barrel wash. 

IV. Detection of lie using Poly graph. 

V. Ejector pattern testing. 

VI. Shot pattern testing. 

VII. Bullet entry characteristics in tissue & clothing. 

10(976) 


PAPER-F.Sc.-XVIII : (PRACTICALS BASED ON PAPERS F.Sc.-XV & F.Sc.-XVI) 

(Examinations to be held in Semester IV on annual basis) 

I. Nuclear Sexing from blood smears. 

II. Extraction of DNA 

III. PCR amplification and gel electrophoresis. 

IV. Survey of human genetic traits and calculation of allele frequencies. 

V. Southern and Western blotting 

VI. Case study of cyber crime: Report writing and evaluation. 


Ext. Int. Max. Time/hrs 

Marks Marks Marks 

Examinations of Paper F.Sc. – XVII 60 15 75 4 hrs. 

Examinations of Paper F.Sc. – XVIII 60 15 75 4 hrs. 

Paper-F.Sc.-XIX Training and Project Report 300 100 400 - 

Project Report Evaluation, Viva-voce 50 - 50 - 

Total 470 130 600 - 

10(977) 


DEPARTMENT OF GEOLOGY 


KURUKSHETRA 

SCHEME OF EXAMINATION AND COURSES OF READING 

FOR 

M.TECH (APPLIED GEOLOGY) 

(5 YEAR INTEGRATED COURSE) 

SEMESTER – I TO VI 

10(978) 


Course Name : M. Tech. (Applied Geology) 5 Years Integrated Course 

Course Type : Post Graduate 

Exam. Scheme : Semester 

Durat ion : Five Years 

Semest er-wise detail s : Option 

Scheme of Courses & Examination 

M .Tech. 1 s t Year (Sem ester-I) Common with all Branches of B.Tech. 

Course No Course Title Paper 

Type 

10(979) 

Allotment of Marks 

Sessional Theory Practical Total 

MATH-101E Mathem atics-1 Com pulsory 50 100 -- 150 

PHY-101E Physi cs-1 Com pulsory 50 100 -- 150 

BT-101E Introduction to 

Biotechnology OR 

Com m unication Skills 

Com pulsory 50 100 -- 

150 

HUM-101E in English 

50 100 -- 

150 

ME-101E/ Elem ents of 

Mech anical 


100 

CE-101E/ Engineering/El em ents 

of Civil 

EL-101E Engg./El em ents of 

Electrons Engg.* OR 

ME-105E Com puter Ai ded 

Engg. G raphi cs & 

Drawing 

50 

-- 100 150 

ME-103E Manufacturing 

Processes O R 


150 

CH-101E Chemistry 

50 100 -- 

150 

CSE-101E Fundam entals of 

Com puter & 

Programm ing in C OR 

Com pulsory 50 100 -- 150 

EE-101E Electrical Technology 

50 100 

150 

ES-101E Environm ent al 

Studies** 

Com pulsory 25 75 -- 100 

PHY-103E Physi cs Lab. -I Com pulsory 25 -- 25 50 

ME-107E Workshop Practice 

OR 

Com pulsory 25 

-- 25 

50 

CH-103E Chemistry Lab. 

25 

-- 25 

50 

CSE-103E Com puter 

Programm ing Lab.O R 

Com pulsory 25 

-- 25 

50 

EE-103E Electrical Technology 

Lab. 

25 

-- 25 

50 

ME-109E Elem ents of 

Mech anical 

Com pulsory 25 -- 25 50 

CE-109E Engineering/El em ents 

of Civil 

EL-109E Engg./El em ents of 

Electronics Engg.* 

Total 375/375 575/500 100/175 1050/1050 

Note: 1.Students will study either Group–A (BT-101E, ME-101E/CE-101/EL-101E, ME-3E, CSE- 

101E, ME-107E, CSE-103E, ME-109E/EL-109E/CE-109E) OR Group-B (HUM-101E, 

ME-105E, CH-101E, EE-101E, ES-101E, CH-103E, EE-103E) Semester-I/Semester-II 

branches to be decided by the concerned institution. 

2.Student s are all owed to use si ngl e me mory, non programmable scientif ic 

cal cul ator during examination. 

3.Practical Examination wil l consist of 10 marks f or vi va-voce and 15 m arks for 

experiment. 

* Institutes will off er one of these el ecti ves. 

**Subject is qu alif ying. It shall carry 25 se ssional mark s f or f ield work (to be 

conducted by the institute) report. 


Scheme of Courses & Examination 

M.Tech. 1 s t Year (Semester-II) Common with all Branches of B.Te ch. (2008 -2009) 

Course No Course Title Pa per 

Type Allotment of Marks 

Sessiona l Theory Practica l T otal 

MATH-102E Mat hematics-II Compulsor y 50 100 -- 150 

PHY-102E Phys ics- II Compulsor y 50 100 -- 150 

BT-101E Introduct io n t o 

Biotechno logy OR 

Compulsor y 50 100 -- 

150 

HUM-101E Communicat io n Skills 

in English 

50 100 -- 

150 

ME-101E / Elem ents of 

Mechanica l 


100 

CE-101E/ Engineer ing/E lem ents 

of Civil 

EL-101E Engg./Elem ents of 

Electrons Engg.* OR 

ME-105E Computer Aided 

Engg. Graphics & 

Drawing 

50 

-- 100 150 

ME-103E Manuf act ur ing 

Processes OR 


150 

CH-101E Chem istry 

50 100 -- 

150 

CSE-101E Fundam enta ls of 

Computer & 

Programming in C OR 

Compulsor y 50 100 -- 150 

EE-101E Electrical Tec hno log y 

50 100 

150 

ES-101E Environm ental 

Studies** 

Compulsor y 25 75 -- 100 

PHY-104E Phys ics Lab.-I Compulsor y 25 -- 25 50 

ME-107E W ork shop Practice Compulsor y 25 

-- 25 

50 

OR 

25 

-- 25 

50 

CH-103E Chem istry Lab. 

CSE-103E Computer 

Programming Lab. OR 

Compulsor y 25 

-- 25 

50 

EE-103E Electrical Tec hno log y 

Lab. 

25 

-- 25 

50 

ME-109E Elem ents of 

Mechanica l 

Compulsor y 25 -- 25 50 

CE-109E Engineer ing/E lem ents 

of Civil E ngg./ 

EL-109E Elem ents of 

Electronics E ngg.* 

Tota l 375/375 575/500 100/175 1050/1050 

Note: 1.Students will study either Group–A (BT-101E, ME-101E/CE-101/EL-101E, ME- 

103E, CSE-101E, ME-107E, CSE-103E, ME-109E/EL-109E/CE-109E) OR Group- 

B (HUM-101E, ME-105E, CH-101E, EE-101E, ES-101E, CH-103E, EE-103E) 

Semester-I/Semester-II branches to be decided by the concerned institution. 

2.Student s are allowed to use single memory, no n programmable scientifi c 

calculator during e xamination. 

3.Practi cal Examination will consist of 10 marks f or viva-voce and 15 mark s 

f or experiment. 

* Institutes wi ll off er one of these elective s. 

**Subj ect is q uali f ying. It shal l carry 25 se ssi onal marks f or f ield work (to be 

conducte d by the institute) rep ort. 

10(980) 


Scheme of Courses & Examinations 


Course Course Title Marks: Practical Sessional Total 

No. 

Theory 

GT-301 Introduction 

Geosciences 

to 100 -- 50 150 

GT-302 Physical 

Geology 

100 -- 50 150 

GT-303 Structural 

Geology 

100 -- 50 150 

GT-304 Crystal lography 

and Mineralogy 

100 -- 50 150 

GT-305 Palaeontology-I 100 -- 50 150 

GT-306 Crystal lography 

and Mineralogy 

Lab 

-- 75 25 100 

GT-307 Palaeontology -- 75 25 100 

and Structural 

Geology Lab. 

Total 950 




No. 

Theory 

GT-401 Geomorphology 100 -- 50 150 

GT-402 Geochemistry-I 100 -- 50 150 

GT-403 Basic Petrology 100 -- 50 150 

GT-404 Energy Mineral 100 -- 50 150 

Resources 

India 

of 

GT-405 Computational 

and Stati stical 

Methods in 

Geology 

100 -- 50 150 

GT-406 Field Training – 

I 

-- -- -- 150 

GT-407 Petrology Lab -- 75 25 100 

GT-408 Computer Lab -- 75 25 100 

Total 1100 

10(981) 


Course 

No. 

GT- 

501 

GT- 

502 

GT- 

503 

GT- 

504 

GT- 

505 

GT- 

506 

GT- 

507 

Course 

No. 

GT- 

601 

GT- 

602 

GT- 

603 

GT- 

604 

GT- 

605 

GT- 

606 

GT- 

607 

GT- 

608 

M.Tech (Applied Geology) 5 Year Integrated Course 

SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS 


Course Title Marks: 

Theory 

Practical Sessional Total 

Economic and 

Ore Geology 

100 -- 50 150 

Plate 

Tectonics 

100 -- 50 150 

Igneous 

Petrolog y 

100 -- 50 150 

Sedimentolog y 100 -- 50 150 

Geophysical 

Prospecting 

Practical: 

Based on GT- 

501; GT-503 

Practical: 

Based on GT- 

504, GT-505 

100 -- 50 150 

-- 75 25 100 

-- 75 25 100 

Total 950 

M.Tech. (Applied Geology) 5 Year Integrated Course 

SCHEME OF COURSES & EXAMINATIONS 



Theory 


Stratigrap hy 100 -- 50 150 

Structural 

Geology-II 

Metamorphic 

Petrolog y 

Applied 

Geochemistr y 

Mineral 

Exploration 

Practical : 

Based on GT- 

601, GT-602 

Practical : 

Based on GT- 

603, GT-604, 

GT-605 

Field 

Training-II 

100 -- 50 150 

100 -- 50 150 

100 -- 50 150 

100 -- 50 150 

-- 75 25 100 

-- 75 25 100 

10(982) 

150 

Total 1100 


Details of Course Contents 


DEPARTMENT : GEOLOGY 

COURSE: M.TECH. 5 YEAR INTEGRATED COURSE 

SEMESTER : 03 

SUBJECT CODE : G.T. 301 

COURSE TITLE: INTRODUCTION TO GEOSCIENCES 

MARKS: THEORY: 100, SESSIONAL : 50 

EXAMINATION DURATION: THEORY : 03 HOURS 

OBJECTIVES: To provide an overv iew of Earth Sciences including earth 

processes, resources and geo-hazards. 

Course Contents: 

S.No. Contents 

1 Earth, its place in solar system, physical features on its 

surface, other basic features (mass, shape, size, density, 

etc.) and its interior 

2 Minerals, rocks, gems and gemstones 

3 Volcanoes, earthquakes and tsunamis, glaciers, landslides, 

mudflows and av alanches, 

4 Evolution of life one earth through ages 

5 Remote sensing, GIS and GPS 

6 Mineral exploration and geophysical exploration 

7 Groundwater, hydrocarbons and coal 

8 Rock deformation, mining and tunneling 

9 Geological divisions of India and plate tectonics 


S.No. Name of Books/Authors Year of 

Publication 

1 Press, F. and Siever, R., “Understanding 

the earth”, W.H. Freeman & Co. 

1998 

2 Moore, J.S. and Wicander, R., “Physical 

Geology”, Brooks -Cole 

3 Lowrie, W., “Fundamentals of 

Geophysics”, Cambridge University Press 

10(983) 


2001 

1997




SEMESTER : 03 


COURSE TITLE: PHYSICAL GEOLOGY 



OBJECTIVES: To provide basic understanding of general geology and 

physical geology. 



1 Different hypotheses of earth’s origin 

2 Earth’s interior and constitution 

3 Basic concepts of isos tasy and its importance 

4 Earthquakes: Terminology, classification, global distribution, 

frequency of occurrence; Earthquakes causes and hazards 

5 Volcanoes: Terminology, classification, global distribution, 

frequency of occurrence; Volcanic eruption and hazards 

6 Continental drift, linear magnetic anomalies and mid-oceanic 

ridges 

7 Basic concepts of plate tectonics, types of plate boundaries, 

orogenesis 

8 Causes and types of mass movements of earth’s surface 



Publication 

1 Holmes, A., “Physical Geology”, Ronal 1980 

2 Marshak, S., “Essentials of Geology”, John 

Wiley & Sons 

2004 

3 Press, F. and Siever, R., “Understanding the 2000 

Earth”, Freeman 

4 Chernicoff, S., Fox,. H.A. and Tanner, L.H., 

“Earth: Geologic Principles and Histories”, 

Houghton Mifflin 

10(984) 


2002




SEMESTER : 03 


COURSE TITLE: STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY 



OBJECTIVES: To introduce with the basic concepts of tectonic structures in 

rocks. 



1 Geological significance and recognition of unconformities; 

morphology of folds 

2 Geometric classifications of folds 

3 Genetic classifications of folds 

4 Mechanism and causes of folding 

5 Strain distribution in different types of folds 

6 Outcrop patterns of different types of folds 

7 Geometric and genetic classification of faults, effects of 

faulting on outcrops, large scale faults and their tectonic 

significance 

8 Geometric and genetic classification of joints 

9 Foliation, their descriptive terminology, origin and relation to 

major structures 

10 Different types of lineation, their origin and their relation to 

major structures 

11 Different types of shear zones and their development 



Publication 

1 Ramsay, J.G., “Folding and Fracturing of Rocks”, 1967 

McGraw-Hill 

2 Hobbs,M B.E., Means, W.D. and Williams, P.F., 

“An Outline of Structural Geology”, John Wiley & 

Sons 

3 Ragan, D.M., “Structural Geology: An Introduction 

to geometrical Techniques”, John Wiley & son 

4 Pollard, D.D. and Fletcher, R.C., “Fundamentals 

of Structural Geology”, Cambridge University 

Press. 

5 Billings, M.P.: Structural Geology, Prentice Hall 

India. 

10(985) 


1976 

1985 

2005 

1968




SEMESTER : 03 


COURSE TITLE: CRYSTALLOGRAPHY AND MINEROLOGY 



OBJECTIVES: To introduce with the basic concepts of crystallography and 

mineralogy 



1 Classification of crystal systems, seven crystal systems 

2 Miller indices and crystal forms 

3 Crystal defects, polymorphism, isomorphism, pseudomorphism, 

exsolution and twinning 

4 Physical properties of minerals 

5 Different groups of minerals: Silicates, carbonates, sulphates, 

oxides and other mineral groups; Genesis, distribution, 

6 

occurrence and association of different mineral groups. 

X-ray diffraction; theory, instrumentation, Bragg's law 

7 Introduction to optical microscopy; isometrc minerals, uniaxial 

and biaxial minerals, optic figures, optical properties of minerals. 



Publication 

1 Bloss, F.D., "Crystallography and Crystal 1971 

Chemistry", Mineralogical Society of America 

2 Bloss, F.D., "An Introduction to the Methods of 

Optical Crystallography", Mineralogical Society of 

America Monograph 

3 Vainshtein, B.K., "Modern Crystallography 1: 

Fundamentals of Crystals, Symmetry, and 

4 

Methods of Structural Crystallography (Modern 

Crystallography)", Springer 

Klein, C., Cornelius, S.H., and Dana, J.D., "Danas 

Manual of Mineralogy", John Wiley & Sons. 

5 Deer, W.A., Howie, R.A. and Zussman, J., "An 

Introduction to the Rock-Forming Minerals", ELBS. 

6 Read, H.H., "Rutley's Elements of Mineralogy", 

Springer 

10(986) 


1961 

2003 

1971 

1992 

1988




SEMESTER : 03 


COURSE TITLE: PALAEONTOLOGY-I 



OBJECTIVES: To introduce basic concepts in Paleontology: invertebrate, 

vertebrate and plant fossils. 



1 Fundamentals: Definition, objectives and scope, nature of fossil 

record and their uses, the organic world, classification of 

animals, their habits and habitats, evolution of life through the 

ages, migration, dispersal and extinction of life. 

2 invertebrate Paleontology: Morphology, classification, 

evolutionary trends, geological history and geographical 

distribution of brachiopod, pelecypods, gasteropods, 

cephalopodan, 

graptolodiea 

trilobita, echinoidea, coelenterate and 

3 Basics of Palynology and its applications; elements of 

Vertebrate Paleontology- broad classification of groups. 

4 Paleobotany: Introduction, Gondwana Flora 

5 Micropaleontology: Introduction, techniques of processing of 

samples, brief morphology and classification of foraminifers, 

ostracods, radiolarians and conodonts 

6 Applied Aspects: Age determination and correlation, pale 

ecological interpretations with case histories, fossils as a tool in 

petroleum exploration 



Publication 

1 Walton, J., "An Introduction to the Study of 

Fossil Plants", Adam & Charles Black 

1953 

2 Woods, H., "Paleontology Invertebrate", CBS 

Publications 

1963 

3 Benton,M.J., 

Chapman & Hall 

"Vertebrate Paleontology", 1997 

4 Colbert, R.L., "Paleontology", John Willey & 1987 

Sons 

5 Shrock & Twinhofel – Inv ertebrate Paleontology. 

6 McGowran, B., "Biostratigraphy: Microfossils & 

Geological Time", Cambridge University Press. 

7 Brozier, “Microfossils” 

10(987) 


2005




SEMESTER : 03 

SUBJECT CODE : G.T. 306 (Based on GT-304) 

COURSE TITLE: CRYSTALLOGRAPHY AND MINERELOGY LAB. 

MARKS: Practical : 75, Sessional: 25, Total: 100 

EXAMINATION DURATION: 03 HOURS 

List of Practicals: Study of crystal forms in different crystal systems; 

Identification of hand specimen using physical properties; Study of 

properties of minerals under microscope; Identification of Minerals using Xray 

diffraction; Determination of specific gravity of Minerals and 

classification on that basis. 

====================================================== 




SEMESTER : 03 

SUBJECT CODE : G.T. 307 (Based on GT-305 & GT-303) 

COURSE TITLE: PALEONTOLOGY AND STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY 

LAB 

MARKS: Practical : 75, Sessional: 25, Total: 100 

EXAMINATION DURATION: 03 HOURS 

List of Practicals: Megascopic study of important inv ertebrate, vertebrate 

and plant fossils; Microscopic study of important invertebrate and vertebrate 

fossils and palynomorphs. 

Contour, stratum contour, dip and strike problem; Completion of 

outcrop pattern; Geological maps-cross-section through different types of 

structures and geological history; Identification of folds and faults in models 

and geological structures in hand specimen. 

====================================================== 

10(988) 





No. 

Theory 

GT-401 Geomorphology 100 -- 50 150 

GT-402 Geochemistry-I 100 -- 50 150 

GT-403 Basic Petrol ogy 100 -- 50 150 

GT-404 Energy Mineral 100 -- 50 150 

Resources 

India 

of 

GT-405 Computational 

and Statisti cal 

Methods in 

Geology 

100 -- 50 150 

GT-406 Field Training – I -- -- -- 150 

GT-407 Petrology Lab -- 75 25 100 

GT-408 Computer Lab -- 75 25 100 

Total 1100 

10(989) 





SEMESTER : 04 


COURSE TITLE: GEOMORPHOLOGY 

MARKS: THEORY: 100, SESSIONAL: 50 


OBJECTIVES: To introduce with different types of land forms and their 

related processes. 



1 Geomorphology as a branch of geology and its relation to other 

branches 

2 Weathering, erosion and deposition, effects of climatic factors on 

different types of rocks 

3 Erosion by running water, stages or river development, concept 

of base level of erosion, ox-bow lakes, karst topography, fluvial 

landforms 

4 Wind erosion, desertification, formation of dunes and other 

depositional processes by wind, aeolian landforms 

5 Ice, glaciers and ice sheets, moraines, classification of glaciers, 

glacial landforms 

6 Coastal processes, marine landforms 

7 Quantitative geomorphology 

8 Terrain evaluation and its applications 



Publication 

1 Holmes, A., "Physical Geology", Ronald Press 1980 

2 Thornbury, W.D., "Principles of Geomorphology", 

Balkema 

1995 

3 Ritter, D.F., Kochel, R.C., Miller, J.R., "Process 

Geomorphology", Waveland 

2006 

4 Huggett, R., "Fundamentals of Geomorphology", 2007 

Routledge 

5 Bloom, A., "Cenozoic Geomorphology", Eastern 

Economy 

10(990) 


1998




SEMESTER : 04 SUBJECT CODE : G.T. 402 

COURSE TITLE: GEOCHEMISTRY-I 



OBJECTIVES: To introduce the basic principle of Geochemistry. 



1 Objective and history of geochemistry. Geochemical 

classification of elements. Cosmic abundance of elements and 

stability. 

2 Application of thermodynamics, solution and mineral equilibria- 

their significance in Geology. 

3 Principles of ionic substitution in minerals; element partitioning 

in mineral/rock formation. Physic-chemical factors in 

sedimentation. Trace elements. Geochemical cycle. 

4 Geochemistry of Uranium, Thorium, Rubidium and Strontium. 

Principles of U-Pb, Rb-Sr, K-Ar, 14 C methods in dating. 

5 Significance of stable isotope geochemistry in Geology; isotope 

fractionation in nature. 

6 Stable isotopes of Oxygen, Carbon and Hydrogen and their 

determination. 

7 Geochemistry of hydrosphere and biosphere. 


S.No Name of Books/Authors 

1 Introduction to Geochemistry by Mason, B. and Moore, C.B., 

1991, Wiley Eastern. 

2 Introduction to Geochemistry by Krauskopf, K.B., 1967, McGraw 

Hill. 

3 Principles of Isotope Geochemistry by Faure, G., 1986, John 

Wiley. 

5 Geochemistry.Wedepohl,K.H.Holt, Rinehart and Winston Inc. 

USA. 

6 Geochemistry. Brownlow, A.H. Prentice-Hall. 

7 Inorganic Geochemistry. Henderson, P. Pergamon Press. 

8 Geochemical Thermodynamics. Nordstrom, D.K. and Munoz, J.L 

Blackwell. 

9 Hand Book of Exploration Geochemistry. Govett, G.J.S. Elsevier. 

10 Encyclopedia of Geochemistry. Marshal, C.P and Fairbridge, 

R.W. Kluwer Academic. 

11 Using Geochemical data. Rollinson, H. Longman Scientific & 

Technical NY. 

10(991) 





SEMESTER : 04 


COURSE TITLE: BASIC PETROLOGY 



OBJECTIVES: To provide basic knowledge of rock types, their origin, 

textures and structures. 



1 Fundamental concepts in igneous petrology 

2 Concepts of magma, fractional crystallization, liquid 

immiscibility, magma mixing and assimilation 

3 Igneous structures and textures and field relationships 

4 Classification of igneous rocks 

5 Types of metamorphism, agents of metamorphism 

6 Metamorphic textures and structures 

7 Concept of metamorphic facies and grade 

8 Classification of metamorphic rocks 

9 Classification and formation of sedimentary rocks 

10 Texture and structures of different types of sedimentary roc ks 

11 Petrological characteristics of sedimentary rocks 



Publication 

1 Raymond, L.A., "Petrology: The Study of Igneous, 

Sedimentary and Metamorphic Rocks", McGraw Hill 

College. 

2001 

2 Best, M.G., "Igneous and Metamorphic Petrology", 

Wiley-Blackwell 

2002 

3 Yardley, B.W.D., "Introduction to Metamorphic 1989 

Petrology", Longman Scientific and Technical 

4 Tucker, H.E., "Sedimentary Petrology", Wiley- 2001 

5 

Blackwell 

Pettijohn, 

Collins 

F.J., "Sedimentary Rocks,", Harper- 1975 

6 Vermon, R.H., and Clarke, G., "Principles of 2008 

Metamorphic 

Press 

Petrology", Cambridge University 

10(992) 





SEMESTER : 04 


COURSE TITLE: ENERGY MINERAL RESOURCES OF INDIA 



OBJECTIVES: To acquire the students with the major energy mineral 

resources of India 



1 Brief overview of Energy consumption patterns of the world with 

emphasis of India, linkage of industrialization with energ y 

consumption. 

2 Sources of renewable and non-rene wable energy, suitability of 

different parts of India for harnessing different types of 

renewable energy. 

3 A brief overview of Energy Mineral resources of India and their 

contribution to the total energy demands of the country, 

identification of key energy minerals. 

4 Definition of coal and sapropel, process of coalification- Rank 

and grades of coal; chemical characterization- proximate and 

ultimate analyses; lithotypes microlit hotypes and macerals of 

coals; Technological properties of coal, coking, gasification and 

hydrogenation. 

5 Coal forming epochs in geological past; present day peat bogs 

and swamps; geological and geographical distribution of coal 

deposits in India; important Gondwana Coal fields and Tertiary 

lignite deposits - their salient characteristic, origin and tectonic 

controls on deposition of Gondwana coals of India. 

6 Kerogen sediments, its composition and origin; transformation o f 

organic matter, maturation, thermal cracking, metagenesis and 

katagenesis; nature of migration of oil and gas; characteristics of 

reservoir rocks and traps. Major oil and gas fields of India; 

India’s oil and gas reserves- position in the world and future 

prospects. 

7 Radioactiv ity and nuclear energy; important atomic minerals - 

their mode of occurrence and association; U and Th deposits of 

India, production, reserves and future scenario. Nuclear power 

production and its potential in India. Peaceful uses of nuclear 

energy and nuclear environments hazards. 

10(993) 



S.No. Name of Books/Authors 

1 Text book of Coal Petrology. Stach, E., Mackowsky, M.T.H., 

Taylor, G.H. Chandra, D.Teichmuller, M and Tiechmuller, R. , 

1982.Gebruder Borntraeger, Stuttgart. 

2 Text book of coal (Indian Contex). Chandra, D., Singh R.M. and 

Singh. M.P. Tata book Agency, Varanasi. 

3 Coal and Organic Petrology. Singh, M.P. (Ed), Hindustan 

Publication Ltd. New Delhi. 

4 Introduction to Petroleum Geology. Holson, g.D and Tiratsoo, 

E.N., 1985, gulf Publication Houston, Texas. 

5 Geology of Petroleum. Laverson, A.i. 

6 Economic mineral deposits. Bateman, A.M. 

7 Ore Deposits of India. Gokhale and Rao, Thomson Press, Delhi. 

8 Economic mineral resources. Krishnaswami S 

9 Introduction to Petroleum Geology. Hobson, G.D. 

10 Petroleum Geology, North, F.K. 

10(994) 





SEMESTER : 04 


COURSE TITLE: COMPUTATIONAL AND STATISTICAL 

METHODS IN GEOLOGY 



OBJECTIVES: To provide basic concepts of computing techniques and 

statistical methods applicable to geological problems. 



1 Role of mathematical and nu merical techniques in ecosciences, 

measuring systems 

2 Computer System Hardware: CPU, Memory, Input/ Output 

devices, information storage media 

3 Software: Languages useful for scientific programming, 

operating system concepts, DOS and its use 

4 FORTRAN-77: Data types, expressions and statements, 

interactive statements, input/output statements subroutine and 

functions, data sharing among subprograms/programs. 

Examples of programming to handle statistical & numerical 

problems 

5 Numerical integration by Simpson’s method, trapezoidal method 

6 Matrix operation, matrix inversion by Gauss Jordon Method, 

least square fit to the given data. Programming in Fortran for 

above methods. 

7 Statistical techniques: Mean mode, median, cumulative 

frequency distribution, skewness & Kurtosis, graphical 

representation on histograms and curves 

8 Statistical probability; definition and simple case examples; 

Bionomial, Poisson and normal distributions, concepts of 

mathematical expectations; Regression analysis; Linear 

regression, correlation and correlation coefficients. 

10(995) 




Publication 

1 Borradaile, G.J., “Statistics of Earth science Data”, 

Springer 

2003 

2 Atkinson, K. and Han John, W., “Elementary 2003 

3 

Numerical Analysis”, John Wiley & Sons 

Yang, W.Y., Cao, W. and Chung, T.S., “Applied 

Numerical Methods”, John Wiley & Sons 

2005 

4 Press, W.H., Teukolsky,S.A., Vellerling, W.T. and 

Flannery,B.P., “Numerical Recipes: The Art of 

Scientific Computing”, Cambridge University Press 

2007 

5 Davis, J.C., “Statistics and Data Analysis in 

Geology”, 3 rd 2002 

6 

Ed., John Wiley & Sons. 

C. Xavier, “FORTRAN 77 and Numerical Method”. 

7 Grover, P.S., “Programming and Computing with 

FORTRAN 77 to 90”, Allied Publishers 

8 Rajaraman, V., “Computer Oriented Numerical 1984 

9 

Methods”, Prentice Hall of India 

Bhirud, L.L., “Computer Programming for Science 

and Engineering 

10(996) 





SEMESTER : 04 SUBJECT CODE : G.T. 406 

COURSE TITLE: FIELD TRAINING-I 

MARKS: THEORY: 150 : To be awarded jointly by the internal 

and external examiner after conducting viva-voce examination on field 

training report. 



1 Study of topo-sheets and geological maps 

2 Determination of location on maps 

3 Measurement of dip and strike of planar surfaces 

4 Measurement of lineation 

5 Measurement of stratigraphic columns 

6 Geological mapping 

7 Plotting and analysis of field data 

DURATIONS: 96 Contact hours (at least 10 work da ys or 2 calender-weeks including 

transit) 




SEMESTER : 04 SUBJECT CODE :G.T. 407 

COURSE TITLE: PETROLOGY LAB 

MARKS: THEORY: 75 : SESSIONAL : 25 TOTAL : 100 


List of Practicals: Study of different rock types in hand specimen; 

Microscopic study of mineral assemblages of different igneous, metamorphic 

and sedimentary rocks. 




SEMESTER : 04 

SUBJECT CODE : G.T. 408 (Based on GT-405) 

COURSE TITLE: COMPUTER LAB 

MARKS: THEORY: 75 SESSIONAL : 25 : TOTAL : 100 


List of practicals : Practical & Exercises based on application of 

computational and statistical analysis of geo-scientific data. 

M.Tech (Applied Geology) 5 Year Integrated Course 

SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS 

10(997) 


Course 

No. 

GT- 

501 

GT- 

502 

GT- 

503 

GT- 

504 

GT- 

505 

GT- 

506 

GT- 

507 



Theory 


Economic and 

Ore Geology 

100 -- 50 150 

Plate 

Tectonics 

100 -- 50 150 

Igneous 

Petrology 

100 -- 50 150 

Sedimentology 100 -- 50 150 

Geoph ysical 

Prospecting 

Practical: 

Based on GT- 

501; GT-503 

Practical: 

Based on GT- 

504, GT-505 

100 -- 50 150 

-- 75 25 100 

-- 75 25 100 

Total 950 

10(998) 




PROGRAM: M.TECH. 5 YEAR INTEGRATED COURSE 

SEMESTER: 05 

SUBJECT CODE: GT-501 

TITLE: ECONOMIC AND ORE GEOLOGY 

MARKS : THEORY : 100, SESSIONAL: 50 

EXAMINATION DURATION : THEORY: 3 HOURS 

OBJECTIVE: To impart basic understanding of different types of mineral deposit and processes of 

their formation. 

DETAILS OF COURSE: 

Sl. 

No. 

Contents 

1 Historical b ackground, distribution, morphology and disposition of ore 

bodies, Trace elements and their source characterization. 

2 Physical characteristics, structure and textur e of ore minerals 

3 Classification of ore b odies, stable isotopes and physic chemical 

conditions of ore formation. 

4 Endogenic processes of ore formation; Early and late magnetic 

segregation and injection, immiscible liquid segregation, different types 

of hydrothermal ore formation, volcanic exhalative process, 

metamorp hic and metamorphosed processes, role of fluids of fluid 

inclusions. 

5 Exogenic p rocesses of ore formation; Mechanical accumulation, 

sedimentar y precipitates, residual concentration, oxidation and 

supergene enrichment. 

6 Geology of imp ortant economic deposits of India: Bauxite, iron, 

manganese, copper, lead, zinc, gold, chromites, diamond, coal and 

petroleum. 

7 Imp ortance of mineral deposits in national economy. 


Sl. 

No. 

Name of Books/Authors Year of 

Publication 

1 Bateman, A.M. and Jensen, M.L., "E conomic Mineral Deposits", 

John Wiley & Sons, 3 r d Ed. 

1981 

2 Guilbert, J.M. and Charles F.P. Jr., "The Geology of Ore 

Deposits", Waveland 

1986 

3 Bannerjee, D.K., "Mineral Resources of India", The World Press 1992 

4 Evans, A.M., "Ore Geology and Industrial Minerals": An 

Introduction", Blackwell Science, 3 r d Ed. 

1993 

5 Mookherjee, A., "Ore Genesis: A Holistic Approach", Allied 

Publishers. 

1999 

6 Smirnov, V.I., "Geology of Mineral Deposits" MIR Publishers 1976 

10(999) 





SEMESTER: 05 


TITLE: PLATE TECTONICS 


EXAMINATION DURATION: THEORY: 3 HOURS 

OBJECTIVE: To impart basic understanding of different types of mineral deposits and 

processes of their genesis. 


Sl. 

Contents 

No. 

1 Introduction: Review of various hypothesis of the earth's origin, earth's 

interior and constitution 

2 Seismolog y: T ypes and propagation of seismic waves, propagation paths, 

interior structure of the earth based on seismological observations 

3 Earth's Crust: Oceanic and continental t ypes of earth's crust: 

Composition, mineralogy, maj or structural features of the earth. 

4 Plate tectonics: Historical background, types of place margins and sense 

of displacements of plates 

5 Creative Plate Margin: Composition, seismic structure and evolution 

6 Conservative Plate Margin: Transforms faults and plate motions, 

seismicity, structure and evolution 

7 Destructive Plate Margins: Surface manifestations, geophysical and 

geological characteristics, sedimentological, metamorphic and magmatic 

characteristics. 

8 Orogenesis: Plate tectonics and mountain building processes 

9 Indian Plate: Configuration and characters of Indian plate margins; 

Himalayan orogeny and tectonic models. 


Sl. 

No. 


Publication 

1 Brown, G.C., Hawkesworth, C.J. and Wilson, R.C.I. (Eds.), 

"Understanding the Earth", Cambridge University Press. 

1992 

2 Kearey, P. and Vine, F.J. "Global Tectonics", Blackwell. 1990 

3 Condie, K.C., "Plate Tectonics and Crustal Evolution", 

Butterworth-Heinemann. 

1982 

4 Cox, A. and Hart, R.B. "Plate Tectonics: How it Works", Wiley- 

Blackwell. 

1986 

5 Gansser, A., "Geology of the Himalayas", John Wiley & Sons. 1964 

6 Davies, G.F., "Dyna mic Earth: Plates, Plumes and Mantle 

Convection", Camb ridge 

2000 

10(1000) 





SEMESTER: 05 


TITLE: IGNEOUS PETROLOGY 



OBJECTIVE: To provide in-depth knowledge of igneous rocks includi ng their 

geochemical characteristics and petrogenesis 


Sl. 

No. 

Contents 

1 Processes involving modification of primar y magma 

2 Fractional crystallization and cr ystal contamination 

3 Phase diagrams 

4 Classifications of igneous rocks 

5 Geochemical characteristics of igneous rocks as petrogenetic indicators 

6 Rb-Sr Isotop e evolution in igneous rocks 

7 Sm – Nd s ystematics as p etrogenetic indicators 

8 Magmatism and global tectonic processes 

9 Magmatism at constructive plate margin, mid oceanic ridges, ocean floor 

magmatism 

10 Magmatism at destructive plate margin, subduction zone magmatism, 

island arc systems 

11 Intraplate magmatism, carbonatites 

12 Continental flood basalts, alkaline rocks 


Sl. 

No. 


Publication 

1 Willson, M., "Igneous Petrogenesis: A Global Tectonic 

Approach", Unwin-H yman 

1989 

2 Winter, J., "An Introduction to Igneous and Metamorphic 

Petrology", Prentice Hall. 

2001 

3 Hall, A., "Igneous P etrology", John Wiley & Sons. 1995 

10(1001) 





SEMESTER: 05 


TITLE: SEDIMENTOLOGY 



OBJECTIVE: To provide in-depth knowledge of sedimentary textures and structures 

and sedimentar y processes including depositional environments. 


Sl. 

No. 

Contents 

1 Weathering under different climatic conditions and sediment transport b y 

various agents 

2 Classification and genesis of various sedimentar y textures; Siliciclasti c 

sediments; Paleocurrent anal ysis; Importance in provenance anal ysis 

3 Classification of sedimentar y structures; Occurrence and distribution of 

foreland basins and deltas. 

4 Composition and classification of different types of sedimentar y rocks 

and their genetic importance 

5 Diagnosis of sedimentar y rocks, physico-chemical considerations 

6 Depositional environments, classification of facies 

7 Models for genetic environments of sandstone, conglomerate, breccia, 

mudstone, limestone, evaporate, iron deposits, phosphates, cherts, 

siliceous sediment.0-4 420..s and volcanoclastic sediments 

8 Plate tectonics and sedimentar y basins; Anal ysis of coal, oil and 

petroleum, basins 


Sl. 

No. 


Publication 

1 Blatt, H., Middleton, G.V. and Murra y, T.G., "Origin of 

Sedimentar y Rocks", Prentice – Hall. 

2 Boggs, S., "Principles of Sedimentology and Stratigraphy", 

4 t h Ed., Prentice – Hall. 

3 Leeder, M.R., "Sedimentology and S edimentary Basins", 


4 Reading, H.G., "Sedimentary Environments – Processes, 

Facies and Stratigraph y", Wiley-Blackwell. 

10(1002) 


1982 

2001 

1999 

1996




SEMESTER: 05 


TITLE: GEOPHYSICAL PROSPECTING 



OBJECTIVE: To introduce basic concepts of geophysical methods and their 

applications in solving geological problems. 


Sl. 

Contents 

No. 

1 Introduction: Overview and importance of various geophysical methods in 

geological studies 

2 Gravit y Method: Basic p rinciples, gravit y anomalies, gravimeters, data 

acquisition procedures, data reduction and processing, interpretation of 

Bouguer anomalies for basic geometrical shapes, depth rules; 

Applications. 

3 Magnetic Method: Basic principles, magnetic anomalies, magnetometers, 

data acq uisition procedures, data reduction and processing, interpretation 

of magnetic anomalies for basic geometrical shapes, depth rules: 

Applications. 

4 Seismic Methods: Refraction, reflection and attenuation of seismic waves, 

geophones and hydrophones, recording instruments, seismic refraction 

method, travel time curves for flat and dipping interfaces, interpretation 

of refraction profiles, seismic reflection method, CDP shooting, geophone 

grouping, elementar y ideas about processing and interpretation of seismic 

reflection data: Application. 

5 Electrical Method: Apparent receptivit y, sounding and profiling, different 

electrode configurations, field procedures, resistivity meters, data 

interpretation using curve matching method, electrical section; 

Application 

6 Electromagnetic Methods: Basic concepts, dip angle techniques, 

measurement of amplitude and phase, various transmitter and receiver 

loop configurations, response curves, airborne electromagnetic method; 

Applications. 


Sl. 

No. 


Publication 

1 Telford, W.M., Geldart, L.P. and Sheriff, R.E., "Applied 

Geophysics", Cambridge University Press. 

2 Kearey, P. Brooks, M. and Hill, I., "An Introduction to 

Geophysical Exploration:, Blackwell. 

3 Parasnis, D.S., "Principles of Applied Geophysics", 

Champ an and Hall. 

4 Dobrin, M.B. and Savit, C.H., "Introduction to Geophysical 

Prospecting". McGraw-Hall. 

10(1003) 


1999 

2002 

1997 

1988




SEMESTER: 05 

SUBJECT CODE: GT-506(Exercises based on GT-501, GT-503) 

TITLE: PRACTICAL: 

MARKS : PRACTCAL 75 , SESSIONAL: 25, TOTAL : 100 

EXAMINATION DURATION : PRACTICAL: 3 HOURS 

List of pra ctical 

1. Locating different important mineral deposits on outline map of India /world. 

2. Megascopic study of ore specimens/industrial minerals. 

3. Microscopic stud y of important ore minerals. 

4. Preparation of polished ore specimen. 

5 Microscopic studies of acidic, basic and ultramafic igneous rocks and their 

petrogenesis 

6. Geochemical variation di agram studies 

7. CIPW normative calculations based on geochemical data. 




SEMESTER: 05 

SUBJECT CODE: GT-507 (Exercises based on GT-504, GT-505) 

TITLE: PRACTICAL: 

MARKS : PRACTCAL 75 , SESSIONAL: 25, TOTAL : 100 

EXAMINATION DURATION : PRACTICAL: 3 HOURS 

List of Practicals 

1. Gain size anal ysis using sieves and its statistical anal ysis 

2. Determination of roundness of elastic particles using comparison chart 

method. 

3. Statistical anal ysis of orientation data 

4. Thin section study of sandstones and limestones 

5. Recognition of major cla y minerals from x-ray diffractograms 

6. Determination of facies cyclotherms from a vertical log. 

7 Geoph ysical practicals & exercises 

10(1004) 


Course 

No. 

GT- 

601 

GT- 

602 

GT- 

603 

GT- 

604 

GT- 

605 

GT- 

606 

GT- 

607 

GT- 

608 

M.Tech. (Applied Geology) 5 Year Integrated Course 

SCHEME OF COURSES & EXAMINATIONS 



Theory 


Stratigrap hy 100 -- 50 150 

Structural 

Geology-II 

Metamorphic 

Petrolog y 

Applied 

Geochemistr y 

Mineral 

Exploration 

Practical : 

Based on GT- 

601, GT-602 

Practical : 

Based on GT- 

603, GT-604, 

GT-605 

Field 

Training-II 

100 -- 50 150 

100 -- 50 150 

100 -- 50 150 

100 -- 50 150 

-- 75 25 100 

-- 75 25 100 

10(1005) 

150 

Total 1100 





SEMESTER: 06 


TITLE: STRATIGRAPHY 



OBJECTIVE: To provide basic understanding of principles of stratigraphy, 

stratigraphic contacts geological time scale and stratigraphic sequences of India. 


Sl. 

No. 

Contents 

1 Definition and scope of stratigraphy 

2 Principles of superposition, original horizontality and uniformitarianism 

3 Geological time scale, purpose, scope and development 

4 Stratigraphic classification and nomenclature of units, lithostratigraphy, 

biostratigraph y, chronostratigraphy and geochronology 

5 Stratigraphic contacts , conformit y and unconformit y 

6 Definition, scope and kinds of correlation 

7 Introduction to facies, transgression and regression 

8 Broad outline of some of the major stratigrap hic sequences of India, 

Archean Proterozoic, Paleozoic, Mesozolc, Cenozoic stratigraphic units 

of India. 


Sl. 

No. 


Publication 

1 Lemon, R.L., "Principles of Stratigraphy", Meril Publishing 1990 

2 Boggs, S., Jr. "Fundamentals of Historical Geology and 

Stratigrap hy of India", Wiley 

1987 

3 Kumar, R., "Fundamentals of Historical Geology and 

Stratigrap hy of India. 

1985 

4 Krishan, M.S., "Geology of India and Burma", CBS 

Publications 

1985 

5 Wadia, D.N., "Geolog y of India", Tata Mc-Graw Hill. 1975 

6 Ramakrishnan, M. and Vaidyanathan, R., "Geology of 

India", Vol. I and II, Geological Societ y of India. 

2008 

10(1006) 





SEMESTER: 06 


TITLE: STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY-II 



OBJECTIVE: To provide in-depth knowledge of techniques of structural anal ysis for 

understanding of deformation in rocks 


Sl. 

No. 

Contents 

1 Stress in homogeneous and inhomogeneous media and anal ytical 

techniques 

2 Geometry and analysis of fractures, joints and faults 

3 Homogeneous strain and techniques of strain anal ysis including Fr y 

method, grain centre method and Rf/ �method 

4 Geometry of folds and their classification schemes 

5 Mechanism of folding and internal strain accommodation. 

6 Shear zones and techniques of their anal ysis; Examples 

7 Anal ysis of foliation and lineation in rocks: Geometry, mechanics and 

significance 

8 Techniques of structural analysis in areas of superposed folding. 

9 Different types of defor mation mechanism 


Sl. 

No. 


Publication 

1 Suupe, J., "Principles of Structural Geology", Prentice-Hall. 1985 

2 Twiss, R.J. and Moores, E.M., "Structural Geology", W.H. 

Freeman & Co. 

1992 

3 Davis, G.H. and Reynolds, S.J., "Structural Geology of 

rocks and regions", John Wiel y &Sons, Inc. 

196 

4 Ghosh, S.K. 1993, "Structural Geology: Fundamental and 

Modern developments", Pergamon. 

1993 

5 Ramsay, J.G., Lisle, R.J., "Techniques of Modern Structural 

Geology", /Volume 3: Applications of Continuum Mechanics 

in Structural Geology (Modern Structural Geology) – 

Academic Press. 

2001 

10(1007) 



DEPARTMENT: GEOLOGY 


SEMESTER: 06 


TITLE: METAMORPHIC PETROLOGY 



OBJECTIVE: To provide in-depth knowledge of phase rule, classification of 

metamorphic rocks and metamorphic assemblages 


Sl. 

No. 

Contents 

1 Various t ypes of metamorphism, metamorphic rocks and facies 

2 Texture, structure and classification of metamorphic rocks 

3 Phase rule, metamorp hic reactions and phase equilibria in metamorphic 

rocks 

4 Graphical representation of various mineral assemblages in different P -T 

conditions 

5 Phase diagrams and p etrogenetic grid for metamorphic assemblages in 

various grades of metamorphism 

6 Thermodynamics of metamorphic reactions and mineral assemblages in 

different metamorphic isograds 

7 Concept of facies and different types of metamorphic facies 

8 Mineral assemblages for different rock types in zeolite, prehnit e, 

pumpell yite, greenschist, amphibolite, granulite, eclogite, and bluechist 

facies 

9 Mineral paragenesis and chemographic relations in metamorphism of 

calcareous, mafic and ultramafic rocks. 


Sl. 

No. 


Publication 

1 Spear, F.S. "Metamorphic Phase Equilibria and Pressure- 

Temperature-Time Paths". Mineralogical Societ y of America 

Monograph 

2 Yardley, B.W.D., "An Introduction to Metamorphic 

Petrology", Longman-ELBS 

3 Winter, J.D. "An Introduction to Igneous and Metamorphic 

Petrology", Prentice-Hall. 

4 Best, M.G., "Igneous and Metamorphic Petrology", 

Blackwell 

10(1008) 


1993 

1990 

2001 

2001




SEMESTER: 06 


TITLE: APPLIED GEOCHEMISTRY 



OBJECTIVE: To introduce geochemistry as a tool for understanding various earth 

processes 


Sl. 

No. 

Contents 

1 Chemical composition of earth, distribution of elements in igneous, 

sedimentar y and metamorp hic rocks, internal divisions and differentiation 

of earth 

2 Crystal chemistr y, silicate structures, isomor phism, pol ymorphism, 

substitution, surface chemistr y, sorption, ion exchange, colloids in 

igneous, sedimentar y and metamorphic conditions. 

3 Chemical equilibrium, equilibrium kinetics, chemical thermodynamics, 

enthalp y, free energ y, p hase equilibria, activity, reaction rates, oxidation 

reduction p rocesses. 

4 Aqueous solutions, carbonate equilibria, silicate equilibria 

5 Sedimentation and diagnosis-organic and inorganic geochemistr y 

6 Radiogenic and stable isotopes, different isotopic s ystematics, 

geochronolog y, petrogenesis. 

7 Anal ytical techniques for rock, sediments and water compositions 

8 Geochemical techniques for mineral exploration in different geological 

environments, geochemical surveys and data analysis 


Sl. 

No. 


Publication 

1 Kraushopk, K.B., and Bird, D.K., "Introduction to 

Geochemistr y", McGraw-Hill. 

1995 

2 Albarede, F., "Geochemistr y: An Introduction", Cambridge 

Universit y Press 

2003 

3 Walther, J.V., "Essentials of Geochemistr y", Johns & 

Bartlett. 

2005 

4 Gill, R., "Modern Anal ytical Geochemistr y", Addison 

Wesley. 

2000 

5 Holland, H.D. (Ed.), "Treatise of Geochemistr y", Elsevier. 2001 

10(1009) 





SEMESTER: 06 


TITLE: MINERAL EXPLORATION 



OBJECTIVE: To introduce basic concepts of mineral exploration including delineation 

of ore reserves. 


Sl. 

No. 

Contents 

1 Overview of various stages and data/tools of exploration 

2 Geological indicators for mineral deposits, lithological and structural 

controls of mineralization 

3 Basic concepts of geological and geochemical prospecting 

4 Different techniq ues in mineral exploration: Drilling, sampling, bench 

mapping underground mine mapping, geological plans and sections 

5 Delineation of subsurface ore bodies of different geometric shapes 

6 Ore reserve estimation and grade calculation for different types of ore 

deposits. 

7 Computer software applications in mi neral exploration 


Sl. 

No. 


Publication 

1 Moon, C.J., Whateley, M.K.G. and Evans, A.M., 

"Introduction to Mineral Exploration", Blackwell Science, 

2 n d Ed. 

2 Talapatra, A.K., "Modelling and Geochemical Exploration 

of Mineral Deposits", Capital Publishing. 

3 Rejendran, S., Srinivasamoothy, K. and Aravindan S., 

"Mineral Exploration: Recent Strategies", New India Pub. 

4 Edward E. and Hausel, W.D., "Diamond Deposits: Origin, 

Exploration, and Histor y of Discover y" Society for Mining, 

Metallurg y & Exploration (SME ). 

5 Naldrett, A.J., "Magmatic Sulfide Deposits: Geology, 

Geochemistr y and Exploration" Springer-Verlag. 

10(1010) 


2006 

2006 

2007 

2002 

2004




SEMESTER: 06 


TITLE: PRACTICAL 

MARKS : PRACTICAL : 75, SESSIONAL : 25, TOTAL : 100 

EXAMINATION DURATION : 3 HOURS 

PRACTICAL (Based on GT-601, GT-602) 


1. Techniq ues of strain analysis: determination of finite strain of deformed objects 

using long- to short axis, center-to-centre, Fry and Rf/ � methods. 

2. Determination of finite strain from deformed fossils. 

3. Dip isogon method of fold analysis. 

4. Determination of strain in ductile shear zones and anal ysis of brittle fault zones. 

5. Structural analysis of folded terrains. 

6. Practicals & exercises on stratigraphy 




SEMESTER: 06 SUBJECT CODE: GT-607 

TITLE: PRACTICAL 

MARKS : PRACTICAL : 75, SESSIONAL : 25, TOTAL : 100 

EXAMINATION DURATION : 3 HOURS 

PRACTICAL (Based on GT-603, GT-604 & GT-605) 


1. Microscopic/petrographic studies of metamorphic rocks such as, 

i. Phylite ii Garnet-biotite-staurolite-mica-schists 

iii Kyanite-sillimanite-mica schists iv Pelitic gneisses 

v. Migmatite vi Tremolite-actinolite schists 

vii Amp hibolite viii Basic graulite 

ix Calc-silicates and x Marbles 

2 Sampling of rocks, sediments and water for geochemical anal ysis. 

3 Digestion of rock samples, preparation of solutions for anal ysis. 

4. Anal ysis of major and trace elements in silicate rocks. 

5. Preparation of standards for geochemical anal ysis. 

6. Preparation of various solutions with differing ionic strength. 

7. Basic principles and demonstration of analytical instruments. 

8 Exercises on geoch emical data interpretation 

9. Regional exploration data anal ysis 

10. Exercises related to trenching, pitting and drilling data. 

11. Interp retation of field exploration data and ore reserve estimation. 

10(1011) 





SEMESTER: 06 


TITLE: FIELD TRAINING - II 

MARKS : 150 (To be awarded jointly by the internal and external examiner 

after conducting viva-voce exa mination on field training reports). 

OBJECTIVE: ADVANCED GEOLOGICAL FIELD TRAINING 


Large scale mapping on 1:10.00 and 1:100 scale using GPS, Brunton compass, 

plane table, telescopic alidade & theodolite. Visit to at least any one or more of the 

following applied geological projects:- 

Mineral/P etroleum/Coal and lignite/groundwater exploration, drilling, and 

development projects; visit to engineering geological sites such as dams, tunnels, high 

ways, rail roads, bridges, power houses; cement, bricks and tiles industries, marble and 

granite mining, cutting and polishing; coal washeries, coke-oven plants, steel plants, 

metalliferous mines ore concentration and smelling plants etc. 

DURATIONS: 96 Contact hours (at least 10 work da ys or 2 calender-weeks including 

transit) 

10(1012) 




(5 YEAR INTEGRATED COURSE) UNDER SFS 

III rd – IX th Semesters 

Instructions to Paper Setters 

1. Nine questions will be set in all out of which examinees will attempt only five questions. 

2. First question will be compulsory short answer type having no internal choice. 

3. Out of remaining eight questions examinees will answer any four questions. 

10(1013) 




(5 YEAR INTEGRATED COURSE) 

Grand Total marks 

Sr.No Semesters Total Marks 

1 I semester 1050 

2 II semester 1050 

3 III semester 950 

4 IV semester 1100 

5 V semester 950 

6 VI semester 110 

7 VII semester 950 

8 VIII semester 950 

9 IX semester 950 

10 X semester 450 


10(1014) 


SCHEME OF EXAMS. AND SYLLABI 

5 Years (10 Semesters) Integrated 

M. Sc. (Engineering Physics) 

for Session 2012-13 

2 nd Year (3 rd and 4 th semesters) 

(Effective from July 2012 and onward) 

10(1015) 


3 rd Semester 

Code 

5 Years (10 Semesters) – M.Sc. - Engineering Physics Degree 

(After 3 Years / 6 Semesters, students may be awarded B Sc -Engineering Physics Degree) 

2 nd Year 

Paper Marks Time 

EP - 301 Computer Programming and 

Thermodynamics 

40+10* 3 Hours 

EP - 302 Engineering Optics - I 40+10* 3 Hours 

ME- 301 Engineering Mechanics 40+10* 3 Hours 

CH- 301 Inorganic Chemistry-III 40+10* 3 Hours 

CH- 302 Physical Chemistry-III 40+10* 3 Hours 

CH- 303 Organic Chemistry-III 40+10* 3 Hours 

MT- 301 Engineering Mathematics - III 80+20* 3 Hours 

PH -Lab Physics Lab † 

CH -Lab Chemistry Lab † 

Total 400 

*Internal Assessment marks 

†The practical Examination will be held in 4 th semester 

4 th Semester 

Code 

Paper Marks Time 

EP - 401 Statistical Physics 40+10* 3 Hours 

EP - 402 Engineering Optics – II 40+10* 3 Hours 

CH- 401 Inorganic Chemistry-IV 40+10* 3 Hours 

CH – 402 Physical Chemistry-IV 40+10* 3 Hours 

CH – 403 Organic Chemistry-IV 40+10* 3 Hours 

MT - 401 Engineering Mathematics-IV 80+20* 3 Hours 

ME - 401 Engineering Drawing and 

Graphics 

10(1016) 

40+10* 3 Hours 

PH – Lab Physics Lab 100 6 Hours 

CH - Lab Chemistry Lab 100 6 Hours 

Total 600 

*Internal Assessment marks 


Note:- 

M. Sc. Engineering Physics 

Semester-III 

Subject: Physics (Paper Code: EP 301) 

Paper: Computer Programming and Thermodynamics 

10(1017) 

Syllabus-mscep-34(111114) 


Theory: 40 


Time: 3 hrs 

1. Nine questions will be set in total. 

2. Question no. 1 will be compulsory and based on the conceptual aspects of the entire syllabus. 

This question may have 5 parts and the answer should be in brief but not in Yes/No. 

3.Four more questions are to be attempted, selecting one question out of two questions set from 

each unit. Each question may contain two or more parts. All questions will carry equal marks. 


5.Use of scientific (non-programmable) calculator is allowed. 

UNIT-1 

Computer Programming 

Computer organization, Binary representation, Algorithm development, Flow charts and their 

interpretation. FORTRAN Preliminaries: Integer and floating point arithmetic expression, built in 

functions, executable and non-executable statements, input and output statements, Formats, IF, DO 

and GO TO statements, Dimension arrays, statement function and function subprogram. 

UNIT –2 

Applications of FORTRAN programming 

Print out of natural numbers, Range of the set of given numbers, Ascending and descending order, 

Mean and standard deviation, Least square fitting of curve, Roots of quadratic equation, Product of 

two matrices, Numerical integration (Trapezoidal rule and Simpson 1/3 rule) . 

UNIT-3 

Thermodynamics-I 

Second law of thermodynamics and statements, Carnot theorem, Absolute scale of temperature, 

Absolute Zero, Derivation of Clausius-Clapeyron and Clausius latent heat equation, Entropy, T-S 

diagram, Nernst heat law, Clausius theorem, Calculations of entropy of reversible and irreversible 

processes, Development of Maxwell thermodynamical relations. 


UNIT-4 

Thermodynamics-II 

Thermodynamic function: Internal energy (U), Helmholtz function (F), Enthalpy (H), Gibbs 

function (G) and the relations between them, Application of Maxwell relations in the derivation of 

relations between entropy, specific heats and thermodynamic variables, Phase diagram and triple 

point of a substance, Joule’s free expansion, Joule-Thomson (Porous plug) experiment, Joule 

Thomson effect, Liquefaction of gases, (air, hydrogen, helium), Solidifaction of He below 4K, 

Cooling by adiabatic demagnetization. 

References: 

1 Ian C and Malcon C, Interactive FORTRAN 77, Affiliated East West Press Pvt Ltd, 

New Delhi 

2 Rajaraman V, Computer Programming in FORTRAN 77, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt 


3 Suresh C, Computer Applications in Physics, Narosa ublishing House, New Delhi 

4 Roy S K, Thermal Physics and Statistical Mechanics, New Age International 

Publishers, New Delhi 

5 Sharma J K and Sarkar K K, Thermodynamics and Statistical Physics, Himalaya 

Publishing House, Bambay 

6 Stowe Keith, Introduction to Thermodynamics and its Applications, University press 

(India) Pvt Ltd, Hyderabad 

7 Infelta Pierre P. Introductory Thermodynamics Publisher: BrownWalker Press 

8 Johnson J. K, Fundamentals of Thermodynamics University of Pittsburgh 2009 

9 Jefferson Tester, Michael Modell, Thermodynamics and Its Applications 3rd Edition 

10 Thomas Engel, Philip Reid, Thermodynamics, Statistical Thermodynamics, & 

Kinetics 2nd Edition 

10(1018) 



Semester-III 


Paper: Engineering Optics - I 


Theory: 40 


Time: 3 hrs 

Note:- 




3.Four more questions are to be attempted, selecting one question out of two questions set from 



5.Use of scientific (non-programmable) calculator is allowed. 

Unit-1 

Interference I 

Interference by Division of Wave front: Young’s double slit experiment, Coherence, Conditions of 

interference, Fresnel's biprism and its applications to determination of wavelength of sodium light 

and thickness of a mica sheet, Lloyd's mirror, Difference between Bi-prism and Llyod mirror 

fringes, phase change on reflection. 

Unit 2 

Interference II 

Interference by Division of Amplitude: Thin film, Plane parallel film, Interference due to 

transmitted light, wedge shaped film, Newton's rings. Interferometers: Michelson's interferometer 

and its applications to (i) Standardization of a meter (ii) determination of wavelength. 

Unit- 3 

Diffraction I 

Huygen’s-Fresnel’s theory, Fresnel’s assumptions, rectilinear propagation of light, Fresnel’s halfperiod 

zones, zone plate, diffraction at a straight edge, rectangular slit and diffraction at a circular 

aperture, Diffraction due to a narrow slit and diffraction due to a narrow wire 

10(1019) 


Unit -4 

Diffraction II 

Fraunhoffer diffraction: one-slit diffraction, two slit diffraction, N-slit diffraction, plane 

transmission granting spectrum, dispersive power of grating, limit of resolution, Rayleigh's 

criterion, resolving power of telescope and a grating. 

References 

1 Hecht, Optics, Pearson Education, New Delhi 

2 Brooker G, Modern Classical Optics, Ane Books Pvt Ltd, New Delhi 

3 Chaudhuri R N, Waves and Oscillations, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi 

4 Khandelwal D P, Text Book of Optics and Atomic Physics, Himalaya Publishing 

House, Bombay 

5 Subrahmanyam N, Lal B, Avadhanulu M N, A Text Book of Optics, S Chand & Co, 

New Delhi 

6 Barton A w, atext Book on Light, Longmans Green & Co London 

7 Longhurst R S, Geometrical and Physical Optics, University Press India Pvt Ltd, 

Hyderabad. 

10(1020) 



Semester-III 

Subject: Mechanical Engineering (Paper Code: ME 301 

Paper: Engineering Mechanics 


Theory: 40 


Time: 3 hours 

Note:- 




3. Four more questions are to be attempted, selecting one question out of two questions set 

from each unit. Each question may contain two or more parts. All questions will carry equal marks. 



UNIT-I 

Force Systems 

Classification of a force system, Moment of a force about a point and about an axis, couple, 

moment; reduction of a force system to a force and a couple, equivalent systems, forces in 

equilibrium, principle and laws of equilibrium, Free body diagrams, Lami's Theorem, equations Of 

equilibrium, problems in two dimensions, plane frames and trusses, method of sections and joints. 

UNIT-II 

Concept of Centroid, Moment of Inertia and Virtual Work 

Concept of center of gravity and centroid, centroid of various shapes: Triangle, circle, semicircle 

and trapezium, theorem of parallel and perpendicular axes, moment of inertia of simple geometrical 

figures, polar moment of inertia. Virtual work: Principles of virtual work, applications to practical 

problems. 

UNIT-III 

Friction and Lifting machine 

Laws of Coulomb friction, angle of contact, angle of repose, problems involving large and small 

contact surfaces, Analysis of body on rough inclined plane, ladder friction, wedge friction. Lifting 

Machines: Definition, reversible and irreversible machines, laws of machines, mechanical 

advantage, efficiency, friction of machines in terms of load and effort, important lifting machines 

like wheel, axle, worm and worm wheel ,pulleys, differential pulleys and screw jack, crab winches. 

10(1021) 


UNIT-IV 

Dynamics 

Belt drives: Belt drive, velocity ratio, compound belt drive, length of belt, transmission of power, 

centrifugal tension. Toothed Gearing: Definition, Analysis of simple, compound, reverted and 

epicyclic gear trains. 

References 

1 A Bhavikatti S Sand Rajashekarappa K G, "Engineering Mechanics", New Age International, 

New Delhi (1998). 

2 Timoshenko S P and Young D H, "Engineering Mechanics", McGraw Hill (International) 4/e, 

New Delhi (1984). 

3 Popov, E. P," Engineering Mechanics of Solids", Prentice Hall of India, Second Edn., 2000. 

4 Shames,I.H., "Engineering Mechanics", Prentice Hall of India. 

10(1022) 




Subject: Chemistry (Paper Code: CH-301) 

Paper: Inorganic Chemistry-III 


Theory: 40 


Time: 3 hrs. 

Note:- 








Unit I 

Chemistry of d-Block Elements I 

Definition of transition elements, position in the periodic table, General characteristics and 

properties of d-block elements, Structures and properties of some compounds of transition elements 

- TiO2, VOCl2 

Unit II 

Chemistry of d-Block Elements II 

Comparison of properties of 3d elements with 4d and 5d elements with reference only to ionic radii, 

oxidation state, magnetic and spectral properties and stereochemistry. Structures and properties of 

some compounds of transition elements - FeCl3, CuCl2 and Ni(CO)4 

Unit III 

Coordination compounds 

Werner's coordination theory, effective atomic number concept, chelates, nomenclature of 

coordination compounds, isomerism in coordination compounds, valence bond theory of transition 

metal complexes 

Unit IV 

Non-aqueous Solvents 

Physical properties of a solvent, types of solvents and their general characteristics, reactions in nonaqueous 

solvents with reference to liquid NH3 and liquid SO2 

References:- 

1. Concise Inorganic Chemistry by: J. D. Lee. 

2. Inorganic Chemistry by: Puri, Sharma and Kalia. 

10(1023) 





Paper: Physical Chemistry-III 


Theory: 40 


Time: 3 hrs. 

Note:- 








Unit I 

Thermodynamics I 

Definition of thermodynamic terms: system, surrounding etc. Types of systems, intensive and 

extensive properties. State and path functions and their differentials. Thermodynamic process. 

Concept of heat and work. Zeroth Law of thermodynamics, First law of thermodynamics: 

statement, definition of internal energy and enthalpy. Heat capacity, heat capacities at constant 

volume and pressure and their relationship. 

Unit II 

Thermodynamics II 

Joule's law - Joule - Thomson coefficient for ideal gas and real gas: and inversion temperature. 

Calculation of W.Q. dU and dH for the expansion of ideal gases under isothermal and adiabatic 

conditions for reversible process, Temperature dependence of enthalpy, Kirchoffs equation. Bond 

energies and applications of bond energies. 

Unit III 

Chemical Equilibrium 

Equilibrium constant and free energy, concept of chemical potential, Thermodynamic derivation of 

law of chemical equilibrium. Temperature dependence of equilibrium constant; Van't Hoff reaction 

isochore, Van' t Hoff reaction isotherm. Le-Chatetier's principle and its applications Clapeyron 

equation and clausius - clapeyron equation its applications. 

10(1024) 


Unit IV 

Chemical Thermodynamics 

Nernst distribution law - its thermodynamic derivation, Modification of distribution law when 

solute undergoes dissociation, association and chemical combination. Applications of distribution 

law: (i) Determination of degree of hydrolysis and hydrolysis constant of aniline hydrochloride. (ii) 

Determination of equilibrium constant of potassium tri-iodide complex and process of extraction. 

References:- 

1. Book of Physical Chemistry (vol. II) by: K. L. Kapoor 

2. Introduction to Chemical Thermodynamics by R P Rastogi and R R Mishra 

3. Physical Chemistry by: O. P. Aggarwal. 

4. Thermodynamics by I M Klotz and R N Resenbess 

10(1025) 





Paper: Organic Chemistry-III 


Theory: 40 


Time: 3 hrs. 

Note:- 








Unit I 

Alcohols 

Monohydric alcohols - nomenclature, methods of formation by reduction of aldehydes, ketones, 

carboxylic acids and esters. Hydrogen bonding. Acidic nature. Reactions of alcohols. Dihydric 

alcohols nomenclature, methods of formation, chemical· reactions of vicinal glycols, oxidative 

cleavage [Pb(OAc)4 and HIO4] and pinacol-pinacolone rearrangement. 

Epoxides 

Synthesis of epoxides. Acid and base-catalyzed ring opening of epoxides, orientation of epoxide 

ring opening, reactions of Grignard and organolithium reagents with epoxides. 

Unit II 

Phenols 

Nomenclature, structure and bonding. Preparation of phenols, physical properties and acidic 

character. Comparative acidic strengths of alcohols and phenols, resonance stabilization of 

phenoxide ion. Reactions of phenols - electrophilic aromatic substitution, Mechanisms of Fries 

rearrangement, Claisen rearrangement, Reimer-Tiemann reaction, Kolbe's reaction and Schotten 

and Baumann reactions. 

10(1026) 


Unit III 

Ultraviolet (UV) Absorption Spectroscopy 

Absorption laws (Beer-Lambert law), molar absorptivity, presentation and analysis of UV spectra, 

types of electronic transitions, effect of conjugation. Concept of chromophore and auxochrome. 

Bathochromic, hypsochromic, hyperchromic and hypochromic shifts. UV spectra of conjugated 

enes and enones, Woodward – Fieser ru1es, calcu1ation of λmax of simple conjugated dienes and α, 

β -unsaturated ketones. Applications of UV Spectroscopy in structure elucidation of simple organic 

compounds. 

Unit IV 

Carboxylic Acids and Acid Derivatives 

Nomenclature of Carboxylic acids, structure and bonding, physical properties, acidity of carboxylic 

acids, effects of substituents on acid strength. Preparation of carboxylic acids. Reactions of 

carboxylic acids. Hell-Volhard-Zelinsky reaction. Reduction of 

carboxylic acids. Mechanism of decarboxylation. 

Structure, nomenclature and preparation of acid chlorides, esters, amides and acid anhydrides. 

Relative stability of acyl derivatives. Physical properties, interconversion of acid derivatives by 

nucleophilic acyl substitution. Mechanism of esterification and hydrolysi (acidic and basic) 

References:- 

1. Organic Chemistry by: Morrison Boyd. 

2. Advanced Organic Chemistry (vol. I & II) by: I. L. Finar. 

3. Introduction to Spectroscopy by Y R Sharma 

4. Introduction to spectroscopy by D L Pavia, G M George and s Kriz 

5. Advanced Organic Chemistry by F a Carey and R J Suns 

10(1027) 




Subject: Mathematics (Paper Code: MT-301) 

Paper: (Engineering Mathematics-III) 


Theory: 80 


Time: 3 hrs. 

Note:- 




3. Four more questions are to be attempted, selecting one question out of two questions set from 


UNIT-I 

Partial Differential Equations 

Solutions of Laplace equation in Cartesian coordinate, solution of Laplace equation in Cylindrical 

coordinate, solution of Lapace equation in spherical polar coordinate, one dimension heat equation, 

its solution by product method, One dimension wave equation, transmission line equation 

UNIT-II 

Numerical Solution of Differential Equation 

Taylor series method, Picard’s method, Euler’s method, Modifies Euler’s method, Milne’s method, 

Runge-Kutta Method, Simultaneous and Higher order differential equation, Differential equation of 

second order. 

UNIT-III 

Bessel Functions 

Bessel differential equation, generating function for Bessel functions, Relation between Jn(x), Jn(x), 

solutions of Bessel function, 0, 1 and ½ order of Bessel function, Recurrence relations, 

integral representation of bessel function, orthogonality, Bessel series, Behavior of Jn(x). 

Legender Polynomial 

Rodrigue’s formula, Generation function of Legender Polynomial, Definite integral form of 

Legender Polynomial, Recurrence Relation for legender Polynomial, Orthogonality of Legender 

Polynomial 

UNIT-IV 

Harmite Polynomial 

Generating functions, Recurrence relation, Rodrigue’s formula for Harmite Polynomial, 

Orthoganality Relation 

Laguerre Polynomial 

Generating functions, Recurrence relation, Rodrigue’s formula for Laguerre Polynomial, 

Orthoganality Relation 

REFERENCES: 

1. Advanced Engineering Mathematics: F. Kreyszig. 

2. Mathematical Methods (Engineers and Physicists) by A K Mukhopadhyay. 

3. Mathematical Physics by C Harper 

4. Differential and Integral Calculus: Piskunov. 

5. Advanced Engineering Mathematics: R.K. Jain and S.R.K. Iyengar 

6. Advanced Engg. Mathematics: Michael D. Greenberg 

10(1028) 



Semester-IV 


Paper: Statistical Physics 


Theory: 40 


Time: 3 hours 

Note:- 








Unit - I 

Statistical Physics-I 

Probability and probability theorem, some probability considerations, combinations possessing 

maximum probability, combinations possessing minimum probability, Micro-Macro states, 

Constraints, Accessible states, Ensembles, Thermodynamical probability, general distribution of 

particles in compartments of different sizes, Condition of equilibrium between two systems in 

thermal contact, β parameter, Entropy and Probability, Boltzmann distribution law. 

Unit - 2 

Statistical Physics II 

Postulates of statistical physics, Phase space, Division of Phase space into cells, three kinds of 

statistics, basic approach in three statistics, M. B. statistics applied to an ideal gas in equilibrium- 

energy distribution law (including evaluation of α and β) , speed distribution law & velocity 

distribution law. Expression for average speed, r m s speed, average velocity, r m s velocity, most 

probable energy & mean energy for Maxwellian distribution. 

Unit 3 

Quantum Statistics 

Classical vrs Quantum Statistics: Identical particles, Bose-Einstein Statistics, Fermi-Dirac statistics, 

Application of B.E Statistics of Planck's radiation law, B.E. gas, M. B. Law as a limiting case of 

B.E. Degeneracy and B.E. Condensation, F.D. gas, electron gas in metals, Zero point energy, 

Specific heat of metals and its solution. 

10(1029) 


Unit 4 

Theory of Specific Heat of Solids 

Dulong and Petit law, Derivation of Dulong and Petit law from classical physics. Specific heat at 

low temperature, Einstein theory of specific heat, Criticism of Einstein theory, Debye model of 

specific heat of solids, success and shortcomings of Debye, comparison of Einstein and Debye 

theory 

References: 

1. Prakash S and Agarwal J P, Statistical Mechanics, Kedar Nath Ram Nath & co, Meerut 

2. Reif F, statistical Physics, Berleley Physics Course Volume 5, Mc Graw Hill Book Co 

3. Ltd, New Delhi 

4. McQuarrie D A, Statistical Mechanics, Viva Books Pvt Ltd, New Delhi. 

5. Ashley Carter (August 1999), Classical and Statistical Thermodynamics 

6. Richard Fitzpatrick, Thermodynamics and Statistical Mechanics: An intermediate level 

course Lulu.com, 2007 

10(1030) 



Semester-IV 


Paper: Engineering Optics - II 


Theory: 40 


Time: 3 hours 

Note:- 








Unit-1 

Polarization 

Polarization and Double refraction, Polarisation by reflection, Polarisation by scattering, Malus 

Law, Phenomenon of double refraction, Huygen's wave theory of double refraction (Normal and 

oblique incidence), Analysis of polarized Light. Nicol prism, Quarter wave plate and half wave 

plate, production and detection of (i) Plane polarized light (ii) Circularly polarized light and (iii) 

Elliptically polarized light. Optical activity, Fresnel's theory of rotation, Specific rotation, 

Polarimeters (half shade and Biquartz). 

Fourier analysis 

Unit-2 

Fourier series, Fourier coefficients, odd functions, even functions, Fourier theorem, analysis of 

complex waves and its application for the solution of triangular and rectangular waves , half and 

full wave rectifier outputs. 

Fourier transforms 

Unit 3 

Fourier transforms and its properties, Application of Fourier transform to following functions: 

1 

f ( x) 

� e 

2 f(x) = 

2 

x 

� 

2 

1 |X|a 

10(1031) 


Geometrical Optics I 

Matrix methods in paraxial optics, effects of translation and refraction, derivation of thin lens and 

thick lens formulae, unit plane, nodal planes, system of thin lenses. 

Unit 4 

Geometrical Optics II 

Chromatic, spherical, coma, astigmatism and distortion and aberrations and their remedies. 

Fiber Optics 

Optical fiber, Critical angle of propagation, Mode of Propagation, Acceptance angle, Fractional 

refractive index change, Numerical aperture, Types of optics fiber, Normalized frequency, Pulse 

dispersion, Attenuation, Applications, Fiber optic Communication, Advantages. 

References 

1 Born M and Wolf E, Principles of Optics, Pergaman Press 

2 Jenkins and white, Fundamentals of Optics, McGraw Hill Book Co Ltd, New Delhi 

3 Moller K D, Optics, University Science Books, Mill ally California 

4 Tolansky, An Introduction to Interferometery, John Wiley & Sons, New Delhi 

5 Shurcliff, Polarized Light Production and Use, Harward University Press, Cambridge, 

M A (USA) 

6 Arora C L, Refresher Course in Physics Vol II, S Chand and Co, New Delhi. 

10(1032) 


M Sc. Engineering Physics 


Subject – Chemistry (Paper Code: CH-401) 

Paper: Inorganic Chemistry-IV 

10(1033) 


Theory: 40 


Time: 3 hrs. 

Note:- 








Unit I 

Chemistry of f - block elements Lanthanides 

Electronic structure, oxidation states and ionic radii and lanthanide contraction, complex formation, 

occurrence and isolation, lanthanide compounds. 

Unit II 

Actinides 

General features and chemistry of actinides, chemistry of separation of Np, Pu and Am from U, 

Comparison of properties of Lanthanides and Actinides and with transition elements. 

Unit III 

Theory of Qualitative Inorganic Analysis 

Chemistry of analysis of various groups of basic and acidic radicals, Chemistry of identification of 

acid radicals in typical combinations, 

Unit IV 

Theory of Quantitative Inorganic Analysis 

Chemistry of interference of acid radicals including their removal in the analysis of basic radicals. 

Theory of precipitation, co-precipitation, Post- precipitation, purification of precipitates. 

References:- 

1. Concise Inorganic Chemistry by: J. D. Lee. 

2. Inorganic Chemistry: Principle of Structure and Reactivity by: Huheey, Keiter & Keiter. 

3. Inorganic Chemistry by: Puri, Sharma and Kalia. 

4. Text Book of Macro- and Micro Quantitative Analysis by A I Vogel 




Subject-Chemistry (Paper Code: CH-402) 

Paper: Physical Chemistry-IV 

10(1034) 


Theory: 40 


Time: 3 hrs. 

Note:- 








Unit I 

Thermodynamics III 

Second law of thermodynamics, need for the law, different statements of the law, Carnot's cycles 

and its efficiency, Carnot's theorm, Thermodynamics scale of temperature. Concept of entropy - 

entropy as a state function, entropy as a function of V and T, entropy as a function of P and T, 

entropy change in physical change, entropy as a criteria of spontaneity and equilibrium. Entropy 

change in ideal gases and mixing of gases. 

Unit II 

Thermodynamics IV 

Third law of thermodynamics: Nernst heat theorem, statement of concept of residual entropy, 

evaluation of absolute entropy from heat capacity data. Gibbs and Helmholtz functions; Gibbs 

function (G) and Helmholtz function (A) as thermodynamic quantities, A & G as criteria for 

thermodynamic equilibrium and spontaneity, their advantage over entropy change. Variation of G 

and A with P, V and T. 

Unit III 

Electrochemistry I 

Electrolytic and Galvanic cells - reversible & Irreversible cells, conventional representation of 

electrochemical cells. EMF of cell and its measurement, Weston standard cell, activity and activity 

coefficients. Calculation of thermodynamic quantities of cell reaction (▲G, ▲H), Types of 

reversible electrodes - metal- metal ion gas electrode, metal -insoluble salt- anion and redox 

electrodes. Electrode reactions, Nernst equations, derivation of cell EMF and single electrode 

potential. Standard Hydrogen electrode, reference electrodes, standard electrodes potential, sign 

conventions, electrochemical series and its applications. 


Unit IV 

Electrochemistry II 

Concentration cells with and without transference, liquid junction potential, app1ication of EMF 

measurement i.e. valency of ions, solubility product activity coefficient, potentiometric titration 

(acid- base and redox). Determination of pH using Hydrogen electrode, Quinhydrone electrode and 

glass electrode by potentiometric methods. 

References:- 

1. Book of Physical Chemistry (vol. I, II, III & IV) by: K. L. Kapoor 

2. An Introduction to Chemical Thermodynamics by R P Rastogi and R R Mishra 

3. Principles of Physical Chemistry by Puri and Sharma 

4. Electrochemistry by S Glasstone 

5. Physical Chemistry by: O.P.Aggarwal. 

10(1035) 


Note:- 




Subject – Chemistry (Paper Code: CH-403) 

Paper: Organic Chemistry-IV 

10(1036) 


Theory: 40 


Time: 3 hrs. 







Unit I 

Infrared (IR) Absorption Spectroscopy 

Molecular vibrations, Hooke's law, selection rules, intensity and position of IR bands, measurement 

of IR spectrum, fingerprint region, characteristic absorptions of various functional groups and 

interpretation of IR spectra of simple organic compounds. Applications of IR spectroscopy in 

structure elucidation of simple organic compounds. 

Unit II 

Amines 

Structure and nomenclature of ammes, physical properties. Separation of a mixture of primary, 

secondary and tertiary amines. Structural features affecting basicity of amines. Preparation of alkyl 

and aryl amines (reduction of nitro compounds, nitriles, reductive amination of aldehydic and 

ketonic compounds. Gabrielphthalimide reaction, Hofmann bromamide reaction. electrophilic 

aromatic substitution in aryl ammes, reactions of amines with nitrous acid. 

Unit III 

Diazonium Salts 

Mechanism of diazotisation, structure of benzene diazonium chloride, Replacement of diazo group 

by H, OH, F, CI, Br, I, NO2 and CN groups, reduction of diazonium salts to hyrazines, coupling 

reaction and its synthetic application. 


Aldehydes 

Nomenclature and structure of the carbonyl group. Synthesis of aldehydes and ketones with 

particular reference to the synthesis of aldehydes from acid chlorides 

Unit IV 

Ketones 

Advantage of oxidation of alcohols with chromium trioxide (Sarett reagent) pyridinium 

chlorochromate (PCC) and pyridinium dichromate., Physical properties. Comparison of reactivities 

of aldehydes and ketones. Mechanism of nucleophilic additions to carbonyl group with particular 

emphasis on benzoin, aldol, Perkin and Knoevenagel condensations. Condensation with ammonia 

and its derivatives. Wittig reaction. Mannich reaction.Oxidation of aldehydes, Baeyer-Villiger 

oxidation of ketones, Cannizzaro reaction. MPV, Clemmensen, Wolff-Kishner, LiAIH4 and NaBH4 

reductions. 

References:- 

1. Organic Chemistry by: Morrison Boyd. 

2. Advanced Organic Chemistry (vol. I & II) by: I. L. Finar. 

3. Introduction to Spectroscopy by D L Parlia G M George and S Kriz 

4. Spectroscopy by Jagmohan 

5. Advanced Organic Chemistry :Reactions, Mechanism and Structures by J March. 

10(1037) 




Subject: Mathematics (Paper Code: MT-401) 

Paper: (Engineering Mathematics-IV) 


Theory: 80 


Time: 3 hrs. 

Note:- 




3. Four more questions are to be attempted, selecting one question out of two questions set from 


Unit-I 

Complex number and Analytic Functions 

Properties, Conjugate, Graphical representation, simple math operation, modulus and properties, 

condition of analyticity, derivatives, properties of analytic functions, methods of finding 

components of analytic functions, condition of analyticity in polar frame. 

Unit-II 

Line integral of a complex function 

Cauchy’s first integral theorem, Application to Multiplicity connected region, Singularity, 

Cauchy’s second integral theorem (Integral formula), Derivatives of analytic complex function, 

Morera’s theorem, Taylor Series of Complex function, Circle of Convergence, Laurent series 

Unit-III 

Residue of Functions and definite integrals 

The Residue, Cauchy’s residue Theorem, Method of finding residue at a point, Liouville’s theorem, 

integration around a unit circle, integration around a semi-circle contour, , integration along a 

rectangular contour, Jordan’s lemma, Fresnel’s integral, Bromwich contour. 

Unit-IV 

Mapping of complex functions 

Mapping, Linear Transformation, Pole Zero Configuration, Conformal transformation, Mapping at 

the critical point, Laplace equation after transformation, Mapping of some elementary functions, 

Riemann surface, Definition of a Branch, point, cut, Evaluation of definite integral having branch 

point, Transformation of real axis into polygon, Schwarz-Christoffel transformation, special case 

and solutions of the Laplace’s equation by conformal mapping. 

REFERENCES: 

1.Advance Engineering Mathematics: F. Kreyszig. 

2. Mathematical Methods (Engineers and Physicists) by A K Mukhopadhyay. 

3. Mathematical Physics by C Harper 

4. Advanced Engineering Mathematics: R.K. Jain and S.R.K. Iyengar 

5. Advanced Engg. Mathematics: Michael D. Greenberg 

10(1038) 




Subject: Mechanical Engineering (Paper Code: ME-401) 

Paper : Engineering Drawing and Graphics 


Theory: 40 


Time: 3 hrs 

Note:- 

1 Nine questions will be set in total. 

2 Question no. 1 will be compulsory and based on the conceptual aspects of the entire 

syllabus. This question may have 5 parts and the answer should be in brief but not in 

Yes/No. 

3 Four more questions are to be attempted, selecting one question out of two questions set 

from each unit. Each question may contain two or more parts. All questions will carry equal 

marks. 

4 20% numerical problems are to be set. 

5 Use of scientific (non-programmable) calculator is allowed. 

Unit I 

Introduction to Engineering Graphics and Drawing 

Importance of engineering graphics and drawing, introduction to drawing instruments, types of 

lines, dimensioning, lettering, types of projections, theory of orthographic projections, first angle 

and third angle projections, projection of points. 

Unit II 

Projection of Lines 

Projection of lines parallel to one or both planes, contained by one or both planes, perpendicular to 

a plane, inclined to one and parallel to the other, contained in the profile plane, true length of the 

line and its inclinations to the reference planes, Traces of line. 

Unit III 

Projection of Solids and Their Development 

Types of solids, polyhedra and solids of revolution, projection of solids with axis perpendicular to a 

plane(Solids in simple position) , axis parallel to both the planes, axis parallel to one and inclined to 

the other, section of solids in simple position. Development of right solids, prism, pyramid, 

tetrahedron, cylinder, cone and sectioned solids in simple position. 

Unit IV 

Orthographic Projections 

Orthographic projection of blocks, machine components like brackets, nuts bolts and rivets, 

development of missing view and lines, development of isometric views from orthographic 

projections of blocks. Introduction to AutoCAD and attempting simple problems with AutoCAD. 

10(1039) 


References 

1 N.D. Bhatt and V.M.Panchal,"Engineering Drawing Plane and Solid Geometry" Forty-Fourth 

Edition 2002, Charotar Publishing House. 

2 PS. Gill, "Engineering Graphics and Drafting", Millennium Edition, S.K. Katana and Sons. 

3 S.B. Mathur, "A Text Book of Engineering Drawing", Second revised and enlarged Edition 2000, 

Vikas Publishing House. 

4 T. Jeyapoovan, II Engineering Graphics using AutoCAD 2000", First Edition 2002, Vikas 

Publishing House: 

10(1040) 


Special Note: - 

M.Sc- Engineering Physics 

Semester- IV 

Paper: PH Lab (Physics Lab Practicals) 

1. Do any eight experiments from each Section. 

2. The students are required to calculate the error involved in a particular experiment. 

Note:- 

10(1041) 


Time: 3+3 hours (on two days) 

1. The Practical examination will be held in two sessions of 3 hours each (first session in the evening of 

first day and the second session in the morning of the next day). 

2. Distribution of Marks: 

Experiments 25+25 50 marks 

Viva- voce 15+15 30 marks 

Lab. Record 20 marks 

Tolal 100 marks 

1. To measure the (a) area of a window 

Section A 

(b) height of an inaccessible object. 

2. Refractive index and dispersive power of a prism material by spectrometer. 

3. To draw a graph between wave length and minimum deviation for various lines 

from a Mercury discharge source. 

4. Determination of wave length of Na light and the number of lines per centimeter 

using a diffraction grating. 

5. Wave length by Newton's Rings. 

6. Resolving power of a telescope. 

7. Comparison of Illuminating Powers by a Photometer. 

8. Measurement of (a) Specific rotation (b) concentration of sugar solution using 

polarimeter. 

9. Ordinary and extra ordinary refractive indices for calcite or quartz. 

10. To find the equivalent focal length of a lens system by nodal slide assembly. 


Section B 

(It will contain two parts (i) Electronics and (ii) Computer experiment.) 

Students have to perform a minimum of four experiments from each part. 

(I) Electronics. 

11. To draw common base and common emitter characteristics of a transistor and 

calculate transistor characteristics parameters. 

12. To study the ripple factor in a d.c. power supply. 

13. Study of Hartley oscillator (calibration of gang condenser). 

14. To find out the frequency of a tuning fork by Melde's experiment. 

15. Study of series and parallel resonance circuits. 

16. Electronic Voltmenter measurement of peak, average & R.M.S. value of signal. 

17. Study of voltage doubler and trippler circuits. 

(ii) Computer Experiments. 

18. To print out all natural (even/odd) numbers between given limits using computer. 

19. To find maximum, minimum and range of a given set of numbers using computer. 

20 To evaluate sum of finite series. 

21. Find the roots of a quadratic equation. 

22. To find integration of a definite integral by trapezoidal rule. 

23. To find the area of a triangle, sphere and cylinder. 

24. Given values for a, b, c and d and a set of values for the variable x evaluate the 

function defined by. 

f(x) = ax2 + bx + c if x < d 

f(x) = 0 if x = d 

f(x) = ax2 + bx - c if x> d 

For each value of x and print the value of x and f(x). Write a program for an 

arbitrary number of x values. 

References: 

1 Worshnop and Flint, Advanced Practical Physics 

2 Nelkon M and Ogborn, Advanced Level Practical Physics, Heinemann Education Books Ltd, 

New Delhi 

3 Srivastava S S and Gupta M K, Experiments in Electronics, Atma Ran & Sons, Delhi 

4 Gupta S L and Kumar V, Practical Physics, Pragati Prakashan, Meerut. 

10(1042) 


Note:- 

M.Sc- Engineering Physics 

Semester- IV 

Paper: CH Lab (Chemistry Lab Practicals) 

10(1043) 


Time: 3+3 hours (on two days) 

1. The Practical examination will be held in two sessions of 3 hours each (first session in the evening of 

first day and the second session in the morning of the next day). 

2. Distribution of marks 

Section I 20 marks 

Section II 20 marks 

Section III 20 marks 

Viva-voce 20marks 

Lab Record 20 marks. 

Section A (Inorganic Chemistry) 

1. Gravimetric Analysis 

Quantitative estimations of, Cu 2+ as copper thiocyanate and Ni 2+ as Ni - dimethylglyoxime. 

2. Colorimetry: 

To verify Beer - Lambert law for KMnO4/K2Cr2O7 and determine the concentration of the given 

KMnO4/K2Cr2O7 solution. 

3. Preparations 

Preparation of Cuprous chloride, prussion blue from iron fillings, tetraammine cupric sulphate, 

chrome alum, potassium trioxalatochromate(III). 

Section-B (Physical Chemistry) 

1. To determine the CST of phenol- water system. 

2. To determine the solubility of benzoic acid at various temperatures and to determine the ▲H of 

the dissolution process 

3. To determine the enthalpy of neutralisation of a weak acid/weak base vs. strong base/strong acid 

and determine the enthalpy of ionization of the weak acid/weak base. 

4. To determine the enthalpy of solution of solid calcium chloride 

5.To study the distribution of iodine between water and CCl4. 


Section-C (Organic Chemistry) 

Systematic identification (detection of extra elements, functional groups, determination of melting 

point or boiling point and preparation of at least one pure solid derivative) of the following simple 

mono and bifunctional organic compounds: Naphthalene, anthracene, acenaphthene, benzyl 

chloride, p-dichlorobenzene, m-dinitrobenzene, p-nitrotoluene, resorcinol hydroguinone, αnaphthol, 

β-naphthol, benzophenone, ethyl methyl ketone, benzaldehyde, . vanillin, oxalic acid, 

succinic acid, benzoic acid, salicyclic acid, aspirin, phthalic acid, cinnamic acid, benzamide, urea, 

acetanilide, benzanilide, aniline hydrochloride, p-toluidine, phenyl salicylate (salol), glucose, 

fructose, sucrose, o-, m-, p- nitroanilines, thiourea. 

References:- 

1. Inorganic Chemstry Practicals by: Gurdeep Raj Chatwal. 

2. Vogel’s Text book of Quantitative Chemical Analysis. 

3. Vogel’s Text book of Qualitative Chemical Analysis. 

10(1044) 


Paper-III Option (ii) 

Nuclear Physics-II 

Note : Nine questions will be set and students will attempt 5 questions. Question No. 1 

will be compulsory and will consist of 4-6 short parts of conceptual nature 

uniformly distributed over the whole syllabus. In addition to Question No. 1, there 

will be four units in the question paper. Each unit will consists of two questions 

belonging to the respective unit of the syllabus. Students will select one question 


Unit I: 

THE TWO NUCLEON PROBLEM 

10(1045) 



Qualitative features and phenomenological potentials, Exchange forces, generalized Pauli principle. 

The ground state of deuteron, Range-depth relationship for square well potential. Neutron-Proton 

scattering at low energies (below 10 Mev), Concept of scattering length and its interpretation, Spin 

dependence of neutron-proton scattering, Effective range theory of n-p scattering, Coherent 

scattering of neutrons on ortho and para hydrogen, Magnetic moment and its importance in the 

determination of exact ground state of deuteron. 

Unit II: 

NUCLEAR MODELS-I 

Liquid drop model, Outlines of Bohr and Wheeler theory of nuclear fission, Concept of magic 

numbers, The properties of magic nucleus, Nuclear Shell Model, Predictions of shell closure on the 

basis of harmonic oscillator potential, Need of introducing spin-orbit coupling to reproduce magic 

numbers. 

Unit III: 

NUCLEAR MODELS-II 

Extreme single particle model and its predictions regarding ground state spin parity, magnetic 

moment and electric quadrupole moments, Single particle electromagnetic transition probability 

according to the shell model, Qualitative features of collective model. 


Unit IV: 

NUCLEAR REACTION THEORY 

Nuclear reactions and cross sections, Resonance : Breit-Wigner dispersion formula for �= 0, Breit- 

Wigner dispersion formula for all values of �, The compound nucleus, Continuum theory of cross 

section � C , Statistical theory of nuclear reactions, Evaporation probability and cross sections for 

specific reactions, Optical model at low energies, Kapur-Peierls dispersion formulas for potential 

scattering, Kinematics of the stripping and pick-up reactions, Theory of stripping and pick-up 

reactions. 

References 

1. R R Roy and B P Nigam, “Nuclear Physics: Theory and Experiment”, Wiley Eastern 

Limited, 1993. 

2. M K Pal, “Theory of Nuclear Structure”, Affiliated East-West Press, New Delhi. 

3. W E Burcham, “Nuclear Physics : An Introduction”, Longman Group Limited, London, 

1973. 

4. R G Sachs, “ Nuclear Theory”, Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Cambridge, 1955. 

10(1046) 


Paper-IV Option (i) 

Computational Methods and Programming-II 

Note : Nine questions will be set and students will attempt 5 questions. Question No. 1 

will be compulsory and will consist of 4-6 short parts of conceptual nature 

uniformly distributed over the whole syllabus. In addition to Question No. 1, there 

will be four units in the question paper. Each unit will consists of two questions 

belonging to the respective unit of the syllabus. Students will select one question 


Unit I: 

10(1047) 



Differentiation: Taylor series method, Numerical differentiation using Newton’s forward difference 

formula, Backward difference formula, Stirling’s formula, Cubic splines method, 

Integration: Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rule, Gaussian Quadrature, Legendre–Gauss 

Quadrature, Numerical double integration, Numerical integration of singular integrals. 

Unit II: 

Numerical solution of ordinary differential equations: Taylor’s series method, Euler’s method, 

Forth-order Runge Kutta method, Cubic splines method 

Second order differential equations: Initial and boundary value problems, Numeric solution of 

Radial Schrodinger equation for Hydrogen atom using Forth-order Runge-Kutta method(when 

eigenvalue is given) 

Unit III: 

Random numbers: Random number generators, Mid-square methods, Multiplicative congruential 

method, Mixed multiplicative congruential methods, Modeling radioactive decay. 

Hit and miss Monte-Carlo methods, Monte-Carlo calculation of � , Monte-Carlo evaluation of 

integration, Evaluation of multidimentional integrals. 

Chaotic dynamics: Some definitions, The simple pendulum, Potential energy of a dynamical 

system. 

Portraits in phase space: Undamped motion, Damped motion, Driven and damped oscillator. 


Unit IV: 

Algorithms to simulate interference and diffraction of light, Simulation of charging and discharging 

of a capacitor, current in LR and LCR circuits, Computer models of LR and LCR circuits driven by 

sine and square functions, Computer model of Rutherford scattering experiment, Simulation of 

electron orbit in H2 ion. 

References 

1. F B Hildebrand, Introduction to Numerical Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

2. R C Desai, Fortran Programming and Numerical methods, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

3. Suresh Chandra, Computer Applications in Physics, Narosa Publishing House. 

4. William H. Press, Saul A Teukolsky, William T Vellerling and Brain P. Flannery, 

Numerical Recipes in Fortran, Cambridge University Press. 

5. M L De Jong, Introduction to Computation Physics, Addison-Wesley publishing company. 

6. R C Verma, P K Ahluwalia and K C Sharma, Computational Physics an Introduction, New 

Age International Publisher. 

7. S S Sastry Introductory methods of numerical Analysis, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. 

8. V Rajaraman, Computer Oriented Numerical Method, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. 

9. C Balachandra Rao and C K Santha, Numerical Methods, University Press 

10. K E Atkinson, An introduction to numerical analysis, John Wiley and Sons. 

10(1048) 


DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH 


(Established by the State Legislature Act XII of 1956) 

("A" Grade, NAAC Accredited) 

Outline of Test, Syllabi and Courses of Reading for M.Phil. (English) Examination 

(effective from the academic session 2012-2013) 

OUTLINES OF TEST 

10(1049) 



COURSE-I : Research Methodology and Critical Approaches 

COURSE-II (Opt. i) : Modern English Fiction 

(Opt. ii) : Modern English Poetry 

(Opt.iii) : Modern English Drama 

(Opt.iv) : Indian Writing in English 

Seminars : Two Seminars : 80 Marks (40+40) 

& Assignments Two Assignments : 20 Marks (10+10) 

Dissertation : Grading System 




(Established by the State Legislature Act XII of 1956) 

(A Grade, NAAC Accredited) 

M.Phil. (English) Syllabus for the Session 2012-13 

Note: There will be five questions in all, one from Section A, two from 

Section B 

and two from Section C. All the questions will be compulsory. 

Course-I: Research Methodology 

Section-A: Non-detailed Study 

10(1050) 

Marks: 100 

Time: 3 Hours 

(A candidate shall be required to show his/her acquaintance 

with any four of the given six items) 

Consulting library catalogue, Reader-Response Criticism, Eco-feminism, 

Paul de Man, Harold Bloom, Elaine Showalter, George Lukacs on Modernism, 

Michel Foucault, Phenomenological criticism, Ethnic Studies, Hermeneutics 

(Hirsch), Reception Theory, Queer Theory. 

Section-B: Research Methodology 

Part I: Mechanics of writing Dissertation 

(a) 

(4 x 5 = 20 Marks) 

(A candidate shall attempt two out of three items from part I(a) 

(i) Choice of the topic 

(ii) Overview of extant criticism. 

(iii) Use of quotations: Prose, Poetry, Drama 

(iv) Common scholarly abbreviations 

(2 x 5= 10 Marks) 

(A candidate shall attempt five given items from part I (b) 

(b) Documentation : Citing sources in the text. 

(Following sections from MLA Handbook are prescribed: 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4 and 

6.6) (5 X 2 = 10 Marks) 

Part II: 

(A candidate shall attempt ten items from part II) 

(a) Documentation: Preparing the list of works cited. 

(Following sections from MLA Handbook are prescribed: 5.1., 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 

5.5. and 5.6) 

(10 X 2 = 20 Marks) 


Section-C: Methodological Approaches/Theories. 

.Part-I: Post-structuralism and Feminism 

(There will be four questions based on the essays and the 

candidates shall be required to attempt two) 

(i) Post-structuralism 

(a) Roland Barthes: “Death of the Author” 

(b) Jacques Derrida: “Difference” 

(ii) Feminism 

Part-II: 

(a) Gayatri Spivak: “Feminism and Critical Theory”. 

(b) Gilbert and Gubar: “The Madwoman in the Attic” 

( There will be four questions based on the essays and the 

candidates shall be required to attempt two) 

(i) Postcolonialism 

(a) Edward Said: Crisis (in Orientalism) 

(b) Homi K. Bhabha: “The Location of Culture” 

(ii) New Historicism and Cultural Materialism 

10(1051) 

(2x10 = 20 Marks) 

(a) Stephen Greenblatt: “The Circulation of Social Energy” 

(b) Alan Sinfield: “Cultural Materialism, Othello, and the Politics of 

Plausibility” 

(2x10 =20 Marks) 

(The above essays are taken from Julic Rivkin and Michael Ryan., 

Literary Theory : An Anthology. London: Blackwell, 2002) 


1. Berry, Peter. Beginning Theory. 

2. Daiches, David. Critical Approaches to Literature. 

3. Gibaldi, Joseph. MLA Handbook for Research Papers. 

4. Soch, Wilbar. Five Approaches to Literary Criticism. 


Course-II (Opt.i) : Modern English Fiction 

10(1052) 

Marks:100 


Note: A candidate shall attempt five questions in all. Besides question No. 1 in section-A 

which is compulsory, the candidates shall attempt two questions from section-B and two 

from section-C. There will be internal choice in all the questions. All questions carry equal 

marks. 

SECTION-A (NON-DETAILED STUDY) 

This section aims at providing a historical perspective on books/ authors/trends/movements/subgenres 

of the Modern English/American Fiction. The section will carry one compulsory question of 

20 marks requiring the candidates to show acquaintance with any four of the six given items. The 

candidates are expected to write a paragraph of about 150 words on each of the four items they 

attempt. 

SUGGESTED ITEMS 

The Great Depression, Harlem Renaissance, Faulkner, Vonnegut, The Grapes of Wrath, The 

Assistant, Post-Modernism, Metafiction, The Campus Novel, Margaret Drabble, Decline and Fall, 

Lucky Jim. 

Section-B 

1. F. Scott Fitzgerald : The Great Gatsby 

2. Saul Bellow : Seize the Day 

3. Ralph Ellison : Invisible Man 

Section-C 

1. Iris Murdoch : The Nice and the Good 

2. John Braine : Room at the Top (Penguin) 

3. Anthony Burgess : A Clockwork Orange (Penguin) 


1. Hoffman, Frederick. The Twenties 

2. Aldridge, John W. After the Lost Generation 

3. Hasan, Ihab. Radical Innocence 

4. Hasan, Ihab. The Dismemberment of Orpheus: Toward a Post-Modern Literature 

5. Scholes, Robert. The Fabulators. 

6. Klein, Marcus. After Alienation. 

7. Tanner, Tony. City of Words. 

8. Scholes, Robert. Fabulation and Metafication. 

9. Bergonzi, Bernard. The Situation of the Novel . 

10. Karl, Federick R. A Reader’s Guide to the Contemporary English Novel 

11. Bradbury, Malcolm and David Palmer: Ed. The Contemporary English Novel 

12. Bradbury, Malcolm, ed. The Novel Today. 

13. Aggeler, Geoffery. Anthony Burgess . 

14. Lee, James W. John Braine. 


Course-II (Opt. ii) : Modern English Poetry 

10(1053) 

Marks:100 


Note: A candidate shall attempt five questions in all. Besides question No. I in section-A which is 

compulsory, the candidates shall attempt two questions from section-B and two from section-C. 

There will be internal choice in all the questions. All questions carry equal marks. 

SECTION-A (NON-DETAILED) STUDY 

This section aims at providing a historical perspective on books/authors/trends/movements/subgenres 

of the Modern English/American Fiction. The Section will carry one compulsory question of 

20 marks requiring the candidates to show acquaintance with any four of the six given items. The 

candidates are expected to write a paragraph of about 150 words on each of the four items they 

attempt. 

SUGGESTED ITESMS 

San Fransisco Renaissance, Ethnopoetics, Amy Lowell, Allen Tate, Randall Jarrell, Le Roi Jones, 

Modern British Poetry After Word War II, Symbolism, Movement Poets, Freudianism, D.H. 

Lawrence, W.H. Auden’s The Age of Anxiety. 

Section-B 

1. Wallace Stevens: “Domination of Black”, “Sunday, Morning”. 

“Idea of Order at key West” , “Study of Two Peers”, 

“Of Modern Poetry”, “Peter Quince at the Clavier,” 

“Holiday in Reality”, “Anecdote of the Jar” 

(From Oxford Book of American Verse) 

2. Langston Hughes: “I, too, Sing America”, “Dream Variation,” 

“The Weary Blues”, “Mother to Son”, “The Negro Speaks of Rivers” 

, 

“Personal”, “Merry-Go-Round” , “Song for a Suicide”, “Harlem,” 

“Birmingham” 

(From The Poetry of the Negro 1941-1970). 

3. Syliva Plath : “Daddy” , “Death & Co” , “ Two Views of Cadaver Room”, “Fever 103” 

, “Lady Lazarus” , “The Disquieting Muses”, “Suicide off Egg Rock” 

(From The Colossus and Other Poems N.Y., Knoff, 1969) 

Section-C 

1. Thom Gunn : The Poems included in Cambridge Book of English Verse, 1939-1975, 

ed. Alan 

Bold. 

2. Seamus Heaney: Poems included in Modern Poets Four ed. By Jim Hunter 

(Faber and Faber): 

“Digging”, “ Charming Day”, “At a Potato Digging”, 

“Follower”, “Mid Term Break”, “The Barn”, “Dawn Shoot”, 

“May Day” 


3. Ted Hughes: The following Poems included in Modern Poets Four, ed. by Jim 

Hunter (Faber and Faber), “The Thought Fox”, “View of a Pig”, 

“Pike”, “The Jaguar”, “Hawk Roosting”, “Wind”, “Second Glance at 

a Jaguar”, “The Bull Moses” 


1. Untermeyer, Louise. Modern American Poetry. 

2. Unger, Leonard, ed. Seven Modern American Poets: An Introduction. 

3. Pearce, Roy Harvey. The Continuity of American Poetry. 

4. Perkins, David. A History of Modern Poetry From The 1890s to the Modernist Mode. 

5. Rosenblatt, Jon. Sylvia Plath: The Poetry of Initiation. 

6. Wagner, Linda W., ed. Critical Essays on Sylvia Plath. 

7. Litz, A. Walton. Introspective Voyager: The Poetic Development of Wallace Stevens. 

8. Burney, William. Wallace Stevens. 

9. Jemie, Onwuchekwa. Langston Hughes: An Introduction. 

10. Wimsatt, W.K. The Verbal Icon. 

11. Ford, Borris, ed. The New Pelican Guide to English Literature. (Vol. 7 & 8 ). 

12. Davie, Donald. Purity of Fiction in English Verse. 

13. Bedient, B. Calvin. Eight Contemporary Poets. 

10(1054) 


Course-II (Opt. iii): Modern English Drama 

Marks:100 


Note: A Candidate shall attempt five questions in all. Besides Question No. 1 in section-A 

which is compulsory the candidates shall attempt two questions from section-B and two 

form section-C. There will be internal choice in all the questions. All questions carry equal 

marks. 


This section aims at providing a historical perspective on books/authors/movements/subgenres 

Modern English Drama. The section will carry one compulsory question of 20 marks 

requiring the candidates to show acquaintance with any four of the six given items, The 

candidates are expected to write a paragraph of about 150 words on each of the four items 

they attempt. 

SUGGESTED ITEMS 

Expressionism, Lorraine Hansberry, Elmer Rice, Sam Shepard, The American Dream, 

Death of a Salesman, Mourning Becomes Electra, Epic Theatre, The Theatre of the Absurd, 

Poetic Drama, Six Characters in Search of an Author, The House of Bernarda Alba, David 

Mamet. 

Section-B 

1. Arthur Miller: The Crucible 

2. Tennessee Williams: Cat on a Hot Tin Roof 

3. Edward Albee: Who’s Afraid of Virginia Woolf ? 

Section-C 

1. Edward Bond Lear 

(Translated by John Willett (Matheun Student Edition). 

2. Harold Pinter: The Birthday Party 

3. Caryl Churchill Top Girls 


1. Bentley, Eric. The Modern Theatre 

2. Gassner, John. The Theatre in Our Times. 

3. Gllmani, Richard. The Making of Modern Drama Farras, Straus 

4. Kernan, Alvin, ed. Modern American Theatre 

5. Esslin, Martin. The Theatre of the Absurd. 

6. Krutch, Joseph Wood. Modernism in Modern Drama. 

7. Lumbley, Frederick. New Trends in 20 th Century Drama . 

8. Bigsby, C.W.E. Modern American Drama. 

10(1055) 


9. Lewis, Allen. American Plays and Playwrights of Contemporary Theatre. 

10. Willaims, Raymond. Drama form Ibsen to Brecht. 

11. Brunstien, Robert. The Theatre of Revolt. 

12. Willett, John. Breacht in Contest. 

13. Gassner, John. Directions in Modern Theatre And Drama. 

14. Bentley, Eric. Life of the Drama. 

10(1056) 


Course-II Option (iv): Indian Writing in English 

10(1057) 

Marks:100 


Note: A candidate shall attempt five questions in all. Besides Question No. I in section-A 

which is Compulsory the candidates shall attempt two questions form section-B and to form 

section-C. There will be internal choice in all the questions. All questions carry equal 

marks. 


This section aims at providing a historical perspective on 

books/authors/trends/movements/sub-genres of Indian Writing in English. The section will 

carry one compulsory question of 20 marks requiring the candidates to show acquaintance 

with any four of the six given items. The candidates are expected to write a paragraph of 

about 150 words on each of the four items they attempt. 

Suggested Items 

Shiv K. Kumar, Kamla Das, Keki N. Daruwalla, Kamala Markanday, Nissim Ezekiel, Arun 

Joshi, Midnight’s, Children, Untouchable, The Man-Eater of Malgudi, Baumgartner’s 

Bombay, A Bend in the Ganges, Mahesh Dattani. 

Section-B 

Nayantara Sahgal : Storm in Chandigarh 

Amitav Ghosh : The Shadow Lines 

Girish Karnad : Tughlaq 

Section-C 

Ruth P. Jhabvala ; Heat and Dust 

A.K. Ramanujan : The Following poems form R. Parthasarthy, (ed.) 

Ten Twentieth Century Indian Poets: 

“Looking for a Cousin on a Swing” , “ A River” , “Of Mothers 

among Other Things”, “Love Poem for a Wife” , “ Small Scale 

Reflections on a Great House” , “Obituary” . 

Vijay Tendulkar : Ghasiram Kotwal 



1. Naik, M.K. Studies in Indian English Literature 

2. Naik, M.K. Perspectives on Indian Fiction in English 

3. Jain, Jasbir. Nayantara Sahgal 

4. Kohli, Devender. Kamla Das 

5. Ezekiel, Nissim. Contemporary Poets 

6. Peeradina, Saleem . Contemporary Indian Poetry in English: An Assessment and 

Selection 

7. Sharma, Vinod Bala. Vijay Tendulkar’s Ghashiram Kotwal: Critical Perspectives 

8. Madge, V.M. Madge, ed.Vijay Tendulkar’s Plays: An Anthology of Recent Criticism 

9. Shahane, Vasnat A. Ruth Prawar Jhabvala 

10. Pandey, S.N. A.K. Ramanujan 

11. Bose, Brinda. Amitav Ghosh: Critical Perspecitves 

10(1058) 


B.A. (GENERAL) HISTORY (ANNUAL SYSTEM) 

B.A. (General) History – Part – I 



Assessment 

Option-i History of India (From Earliest Times 

to 1526 A.D.) 

Option-ii History of Haryana (From Harappan 

Age to 1966 A.D) 


Option - (i) History of India (From Earliest Times to 1526 A. D) 

10(1059) 

Theory 

Paper 

Marks 

Total 

Marks 

Time 

10 90 100 3 Hrs. 

10 90 100 3 Hrs. 



Time: 3 Hours 

Note :- 1 The question paper will consist of nine questions. The candidate shall 

attempt five questions in all. The Question No. 1 will be compulsory. The 

Candidate shall attempt four more questions selecting at least one from each 

Unit. Each question will carry 18 marks. 

2 The Question No. 1 will be short answer type containing six questions of 

equal marks (i.e., 3 marks each) spread over the whole syllabus. 

3 The Map Question will be carrying 18 marks (10 for map work and 8 for 

explanatory note). For visually handicapped candidates, the part relating to 

the explanatory note will carry full marks. 

Unit- I 

Meaning and Scope of History; Sources of Ancient Indian History 

Pre-historic Age: Hunter Gatherers 

Concept of Neolithic: Origin of Agriculture System 

Harappan Civilization : Origins, Extent, Town Planning, Economy, Society, Arts and 

Political Organization, 

Vedic Culture : Polity, Society, Religion and Literature 

Social Institutions - Varna, Caste, Untouchability and Gender Relations 

Emergence of State : Sixteen Mahajanpadas and the Rise of Magada Empire 

Religious Movements: Buddhism and Jainism 

Unit- II 

Mauryan Empire : State, Administration and Economy; Ashoka’s Dhamma- Nature and 

Propagation; Mauryan Art and Architecture 

Post-Mauryan Empires: Kushanas and Satvahanas 

Gupta Empire: State, Administration, Agrarian and Land Revenue System, Urban Centres 

Trade, Society, Art and Architecture 


Post-Gupta Period up to 750 A.D : Pushyabhutis and Chalukyas 

Polity and Economy with special reference to Indian Feudalism (750–1206 A.D): 

Pratiharas, Palas, Rashtrakutas and Cholas 

Socio-Cultural Trends: Society, Culture and Literature during 600-1206 A.D. 

Unit-III 

Invasions of Mahmud Ghaznavi and Muhammad Ghori : Causes of Success and Effects 

Rise of Delhi Sultanate: Iltutmish, Balban, Ala-ud-din Khilji and Muhammad Tughlaq 

Bahmani and Vijaynagar Kingdoms 

Fragmentation and Fall of Delhi Sultanate 

Delhi Sultanate: Political and Administrative Institutions, Ruling Classes 

Economic and Technological Developments during 1206-1526 A. D: Agriculture, Industry, 

Trade and Commerce 

Society and Culture: Bhakti and Sufi Movements; Art and Architecture 

Unit IV 

Maps (India) : 

Important Sites of Harappan Civilization 

Ashokan Empire : Extent, Pillars and Edicts 

Extent of Kanishka’s Empire 

Extent of Harsha’s Empire 

Extent of Ala-ud-din Khiji’s Empire 


Allchin, B.and Allchin, F.R. Rise of Civilisation in India and Pakistan (Delhi, Select Book 

Services Syndicate, 1983) 

Ashraf, K.M. Life and Conditions of the People of Hindustan, (Delhi, 1965) 

Basham, A.L. The Wonder That Was India (Mumbai, Rupa, 1971) 

Brown, Percy Indian Architecture, Vol. – 1 (Mumbai, Taraporevala, 1984) 

Burton, Stein History of India, Oxford, New Delhi, 1998 

Burton, Stein Vijaya Nagar, Cambridge , 1989 

Chakrabarti, D.K. India : An Archaeological History, Paleolithic Beginnings to 

Early Historical Foundation (Delhi, OUP, 1999) 

Dani, A.H. Recent Archaeological Discovers in Pakistan (Paris, UNESCO, 

1998) 

Gopal, L. Economic History of Northern India 700-1200 (Delhi, 1989) 

Habib, Muhammad and Nizami, Comprehensive History of India, Vol. - V (Delhi, 1970) 

K.A. 

Harle, J.C. Art and Architecture of the Indian Subcontinent (Penguin, 

1986) 

Jackson, Peter The Delhi Sultanate, (Cambridge, 2001) 

Jha, D.N. and Shrimali, K.M. Prachin Bharat Ka Itihas (Hindi) (Delhi, 1990) 

Kulke, H and Rothenmund, D. History of India (London, Rutledge, 1998) 

Majumdar, R.C. et al. History and Culture of the Indian People, Vols. II and V 

(Mumbai, Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan Series, 1980) 

Nilkantha Shastri, K.A. A History of South India From Pre-Historic Times to the Fall of 

Vijaynagar (Chennai, OUP, 1983) 

Panday, A.B. Early Medieval India, (Allahabad, Central Book Depot, 1970) 

10(1060) 


Panday, Vimal Chander Prachin Bharat Ka Rajnatik Tatha Sanskritik Itihas, Vol.- II 

(Hindi) (Allahabad, 1994) 

Rizvi, S.A.A The Wonder That Was India, Vol.-II, (London, 1987,) 

Satish Chandra Medieval India from Sultanate to the Mughals (Delhi, Har 

Anand Publication, 1997) 

Satish Chandra Madhya Kalin Bharat : Rajniti, Samaj Aur Sanskirti (Hindi) 

(Delhi, 2007) 

Sharma, R.S. Aspects of Political Ideas and Institutions in Ancient India 

(Delhi, Motilal Banarsidas, 1991) 

Thapar, B.K. Recent Archaeological Discoveries in India (Paris, UNESCO, 

1985) 

Thapar, Romila A History of India, Vol. I (Pelican, 1966) 

Thapar, Romila From Lineage to State : Social Formations in the Mid-First 

Millennium BC in the Ganga Valley. (Bombay, Oxford, 1984) 

Option – (ii) History of Haryana (From Harappan Age to 1966 A. D) 



Time: 3 Hours 










Unit- I 

Regional History: Meaning and Scope 

Sources of History of Haryana 

Extent of Harappan Civilization 

Expansion of Vedic Culture 

Haryana between 600 B.C. to 200 A.D : Polity, Society and Economy 

Rise of Republies : Yaudheyas, Kunindas and Pushyabhutis 

Rise of Pratiharas, Tomars and Chauhans 

Unit-II 

Invasions of Ghaznavi and Ghori : Effects on Haryana 

Establishment of Turkish Rule: Resistance and Reconciliation 

Socio-Cultural Transition: Impact of Islam; Emergence of Composite Culture 

Mughal Rule in Haryana: Establishment, Administration and Decline 

Society, Economy, Art and Architecture under the Mughals 

Struggle for Supremacy during the 18th Century: Marathas, Sikhs and George Thomas 

10(1061) 


Unit-III 

The British Rule in Haryana: Establishment and Administration 

The Economic Effects of the British Rule 

The Uprising of 1857: Causes, Course and Effects 

Growth of Modern Education 

Social Transition and Reform Movements: Arya Samaj and Sanatan Dharam Mahasabha 

Gandhian Movements and Freedom Struggle during 1919-1947 

Parjamandal Movement in Princely States 

Formation of Haryana State 

Unit IV 

Maps (Haryana) : 

Important Excavated and Explored Sites of Harappan Civilization 

Important Urban Centers during the Mughal Period 

Major Centers of the Uprising of 1857 

Important Places Connected with the Freedom Struggle 

Princely States Connected with the Prajamandal Movement 


Buddha Prakash Glimpses of Haryana, Kurukshetra, 1967. 

Buddha Prakash Haryana Through the Ages, Kurukshetra, 1968. 

D.C. Verma Haryana, Delhi, 1972 

Fauja Singh (ed.) History of Punjab, Vol. I, Patiala, 1975 

Gulshan Rai Formation of Haryana, Delhi, 1981 

H.A. Phadke Haryana : Ancient and Medieval, Delhi, 1986 

K.C. Yadav Haryana: Itihas Evam Sanskriti, 3 Vols. (Hindi) 

Delhi 1981. 

K.C. Yadav The Revolt of 1857 in Haryana, Delhi, 1977 

K.C. Yadav and Rameshwar Dass Rebels Against the Raj : Who is Who of Freedom 

Fighters in Haryana, 1885-1947, Delhi, 1984 

Prem Chaudhary Panjab Politics : The Role of Sir Chhotu Ram , 

Delhi, 1984 

Rajpal Singh Banda Bahadur: His Life and Times, New Delhi, 

1998 

S.C. Mittal Haryana : A Historical Perspective, Delhi, 1986 

S.P. Sen Sources of Indian History, Vol. I, Delhi, 1978 

S.R. Phogat Inscriptions of Haryana, Kurukshetra, 1978 

10(1062) 


B.A. (General) History – Part – II 



Assessment 

10(1063) 

Theory 

Paper 

Marks 

Total 

Marks 

Time 

Option-i History of India (1526-1857 A.D.) 10 90 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-ii Modern India (1858-1964 A. D) 10 90 100 3 Hrs. 


Option – (i) History of India (1526-1857 A.D) 



Time: 3 Hours 










Unit – I 

Establishment of Mughal Empire : Babur 

Sher Shah Suri and His Administration 

Akbar: Expansion of Empire, Rajput Policy and Religious Policy 

Aurangzeb: Relations with Rajputs and Religious Policy 

Deccan Policy of the Mughals 

Relations of Mughals with the Sikhs 

Mughal Administration: Central and Provincial 

Institutions: Mansabdari and Jagirdari Systems 

Decline of Mughal Empire 

Unit- II 

Agrarian and Land Revenue System under the Mughals 

Currency System of the Mughals 

Medieval Social Structure: Ruling Class, Religious Class, Peasants and Artisans 

Position of Untouchables and Women 

Bhakti and Sufi Movements 

Cultural Trends: Education, Literature, Art and Architecture 

Pre-British India : Handicraft Industry; Trade and Commerce; Village Community 


Unit- III 

Rivalry between the French and the British in India 

Occupation of Bengal by the British: Battles of Plassey and Buxer 

Consolidation of the British Empire: Conquest over Mysore and Marathas; Subridary 

Alliance System and Doctrine of Lapse 

Uprising of 1857: Causes and Consequences 

Land Revenue System of the British: Permanent Settlement, Ryotwari Settlement and 

Mahalwari Settlement 

Decline of Handicraft Industries 

Introduction of Modern Education 

Development of Railways and its Impact 

Unit – IV 

Maps (India): 

Political Conditions of India in 1526 

Mughal Empire at the Death of Akbar (1605) 

Mughal Empire at the Death of Aurangzeb (1707) 

Expansion of British Empire upto 1856 

Major Centres of the Uprising of 1857 


Banerjee, Himadri Agrarian Society of the Punjab,1849-1901 

Banga, Indu and Jaidev (eds.) Cultural Reorientation in Modern India 

Basham, A.L. The Wonder That Was India, Vol. II 

Bayly, C. A. Indian Society and Making of the British Empire: The New 

Cambridge History of India, Vol. II 

Bipan Chandra Colonialism and Nationalism in India 

Brawn, Peray Indian Architecture : Muslim Period 

Desai, A.R. Social Background of Indian Nationalism 

Desai, Z. A. Indo-Islamic Architecture 

Gopal, S. The Permanent Settlement in Bengal 

Gordon, Stewart The Marathas 1600-1818 : The New Cambridge History of 

India, Vol. V 

Habib, Ifran Cambridge Economic History of India, Vol-I 

Habib, Irfan Agrarian System in Mughal India 

Hasan, Ibn Central Stracture of Mughal India 

Kulkarni, A. R. Medieval Maharastra 

Kulke, H and D. Rothemund History of India 

Lunia, B.N. Madyakalin Bhartiya Sanskriti (Hindi) 

Majumdar, Datta and 

Advanced History of India 

Raychowdhary 

Moreland, W.H. India at the Death of Akbar 

Pandey, A. B. Later Medieval India 

Rai, Satya M. Bharat Mein Upniveshwad Aur Rashtrawad (Hindi) 

Rashid, A. Society and Culture in Medieval India 

Rashid, A. Social and Cultural History of Medieval India 

Richards, John F. Mughal Empire: New Cambridge History of India, Vol. V 

Rizvi, S.A.A. History of Sufism in India, Vol-II 

Satish Chandra Medieval India: From Sultanate to the Mughals 

Satish Chandra Madhyakalin Bharat (Hindi) 

10(1064) 


Satish Chandra Mughal Religious Policies : Rajpur to Daccan 

Sen, Sunil, K. Agrarian Relations in India 1793-1947 

Shukla, R.L.(ed.) Adhunik Bharat Ka Itihas (Hindi) 

Spear, T.G.P. History of India, Vol. II 

Spear,T.G.P. History of India, Vol. II 

Srinivas, M.N. Caste in Modern India and Other Essays 

Stein, Burton Peasants, State and Society in Medieval South India 

Tara Chand Influence of Islam on Indian Culture 

Tripathi, R. P. Some Aspects of Muslim Administration 

Tripathi, R. P. Rise and Fall of Mughal Empire 

Verma, H. C.(ed.) Madyakalin Bharat (Hindi),Vols I & II 

Option – (ii) : Modern India (1858-1964 A.D) 

10(1065) 



Time: 3 Hours 










Unit – I 

Drain of Wealth under the Colonial Rule 

Rise of Modern Industries 

Rise of Middle Classes 

Social Reform Movements: Brahmo Samaj; Arya Samaj; Ramkishan Mission; 

Satyashodhak Samaj; Aligarh Movement 

Peasant and Labour Movements 

Depressed Classes Movement 

Changing Position of Women 

Unit – II 

Origin and Growth of National Consciousness 

Founding of Indian National Congress 

Moderates and Extremists: Ideology, Programmes and Politics 

Emergence of Mahatma Gandhi: Non-Cooperation Movement; Civil Disobedience 

Movement; Quit India Movement 

Ideology and Contribution of Revolutionaries with special reference to Bhagat Singh 

Round Table Conference and the Conclusion of Poona Pact 

Subhash Chandra Bose and Indian National Army 

Rise of Communal Politics: Muslim League – Ideology and Politics 


Unit-III 

Partition and Independence of India 

Rehabilitation of Displaced People 

Integration of Princely States 

Making of Indian Constitution and the Role of Dr. B. R. Ambedkar 

Economic Development: Five Years Plans 

India and Non-Aligned Movement 

Social Justice: Uplift of Weaker Sections 

Relations with Neighbourers: Pakistan and China 

Modernization and Social Change 

Unit – IV 

Maps (India): 

Places of Important Sessions of Indian National Congress 

Areas and Centers of Civil Disobedience Movement 

Important Centers of Revolutionary Movement 

Areas and Centers of Social Reforms Movements 

Major Centers of Modern Industries 


Agrow, D. Moderates and Extremists in the Indian National 

Movement 

Balbushevik, A. & Dyakov, A.M. A Contemporary History of India 

Basu, D.D. Shorter Constitution of India 

Bayly, Susan Caste, Society and Politics in India from the Eighteenth 

Century to the Modern Age 

Bayly, Susan Caste Society and Politics in India: The New Cambridge 

History of India 

Bettleheim, Charles India Independent 

Bipan Chandra Swatantrottar Bharat (Hindi) 

Bipan Chandra et. al. Bharat Ka Swatantrata Sangharsh (Hindi) 

Bipan Chandra et. Al. India’s Struggle For Independence 

Brown, Judith Gandhi’s Rise to Power: Indian Politics 1915-1922 

Chahal, S.K. Dalits Patronized 

Datta, K.K. Social History of Modern India 

Desai, A. R. Social Background of Indian Nationalism 

Desai, A.R. India’s Path of Development 

Dutt, R.C. Economic History of India, Vols.I & II 

Gaur, Madan India : 40 Years after Independence 

Gupta, M.N. History of the Revolutionary Movement in India 

Hasan, Mushirul India’s Partition : Process, Strategy and Mobilization 

Hasan, Mushirul Nationalism and Communal Politics in India 1916-1928 

Jaisingh, Hari India and Non-Aligned World: Search for A New Order 

Kothari, Rajni Caste in Indian Politics 

Kothari, Rajni Democratic Policy and Socialist Change in India 

Krishnamurthi, J. Women in Colonial India 

Kumar, Ravindra Social History of Modern India 

Majumdar, Datta and Ray 

chowdhary 


10(1066) 


Menon, V.P. Foreign Policy of India 

Mishra, B.B. The Indian Middle Classes : Their Growth in Modern 

Times 

Mishra, Girish Economic History of Modern India 

Mittal, S.C. Bharat Ka Saamajik aur Aarthik Itihas (1758-1947) 

Nanda, B.R. Jawaharlal Nehru : A Biography 

Nanda, B.R. Gandhi : A Biography 

Nurullah, S. & J.P. Naik History of Education in India 

Omvedt, Gail Dalits and Democratic Revolution : Dr. Ambdkar and 

Dalit Movement in Colonial India 

Pannikar, K.N. National and Left Movements in India 

Patel, Vallabhbhai Correspondence, Writings and Speeches 

Rao, M. S. A. Social Movement in India, Vol. I 

Rao, U. Bhaskar The Story of Rehabilitation 

Raychaudhuri, Tapan and Irfan The Cambridge Economic History of India, Vol. I 

Habib 

Sarkar, Sumit Modern India 

Satyamurti, T.V. India Since Independence 

Shukla, R. L. (ed.) Adhunik Bharat Ka Ithas (Hindi) 

Srinivas, M.N. Caste in India and Other Essays 

Tara Chand History of the Freedom Movement in India, Vols. I - IV 

Tomlinson, B.R. Indian National Congress and the Raj : 1929-1942 

Vajpeyi, J.N. Adhunik Bharat Ka Ithas (Hindi) 

Yadav, Rajbir Bharat Ki Videsh Niti (Hindi) 

10(1067) 


B.A. (General) History – Part – III 



Assessment 

10(1068) 

Theory 

Paper 

Marks 

Total 

Marks 

Time 

Option-i Ancient and Medieval World 10 90 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-ii Modern World 10 90 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-iii East Asia in Modern Times 10 90 100 3 Hrs. 

Option – (i) Ancient and Medieval World 




Time: 3 Hours 










Unit- I 

Evolution of Humankind: Paleolithic and Mesolithic Cultures 

Beginning of Agriculture and Animal Husbandry 

Civilization of Mesopotamia : Polity, Economy, Society, Culture, Arts, Science and 

Technology 

Civilization of Egypt: Polity, Economy, Society, Culture, Arts, Science and Technology 

Civilization of China: Polity, Economy, Society, Culture, Arts, Science and Technology. 

Unit- II 

Ancient Greece and Rome: Agrarian Economy, Trade and Urbanization 

Political Apparatus : Athenian Democracy, Roman Republic and Roman Empire 

Fall of Roman Empire 

Feudal Europe: Manorial System, Organization of Production, Position of Peasantry 

Technological Innovations, Trade and Commerce, Growth of Towns 

Medieval Church and State 

Decline of Feudalism 

Arabia before Islam 

Hazrat Muhammad and Pious Caliphs 

Unit-III 


Evolution of Islamic State under Umayyad and Abbasids 

Islamic World: Society, Education, Literature, Art and Architecture 

Religious Developments: Origins of Sufism 

Trade and Commerce, Urbanization 

Unit-IV 

Maps (World) : 

Important Places Connected with the Civilizations of Mesopotamia and Egypt 

Extent and Important Places Connected with the Greek Civilization 

Extent and Important Centers of Roman Civilization 

Major Ports and Urban Centers in Medieval World 

Expansion of Arab Empire in 1258 A.D 


A. Ali The Spirit of Islam 

A.H.M. Jones Constantine and Conversion of Europe 

A.R. Burn Pelican History of Greek 

Amar Faruqqi Prachin Aur Madhyakalin Samajik Sanrachanayain Aur 

Sanskritiya (Hindi) 

B. Trigger Ancient Egypt : A Social History 

Baj Shaoyi An Outline History of China 

Bernard Lewis The Arabs in History 

Burns and Ralph World Civilizations 

C. Stephenson Medieval Feudalism 

C.E. Bosworth and Joseph The Legacy of Islam 

Schachs 

Carl Stephenson Medieval History of Europe From 2nd to 16th Century 

Dominique Sourdel Medieval Islam 

G. Clark World Prehistory : A New Perspective 

G. Rook Ancient Iraq 

Glyn Daniel First Civilisations 

H.A.R. Gibo Mohammedanism: A Historical Survey 

H.W.F. Saggs The Greatness That Was Babylon 

Herbert Heaton Economic History of Europe 

J.W. Thompson Middle Ages. 2 Vols 

Jacquetta Hawkes First Civilisations 

K.P. Shahu Islam: Udbhav Aur Vikas (Hindi) 

M.I. Finley The Ancient Economy 

March Bloch Feudal Society, Vols. I and II 

Margaret Deanesly A History of Early Medieval Europe 

Maurice Keen A History of the Medieval Europe 

Montogomery Watt Muhammad in Mecca and Madina 

P.K. Hitti Hisjtory of the Arabs 

R. Levy The Social Structure of Islam 

R.J. Wenke Patterns in Prehistory 

Robert Latouche The Birth of Western Economy 

S.N. Kramer The Sumerians 

Shepard B. Clough The Economic Development of Western Europe 

Shri Ram Goyal Vishaw Ki Sabhyatayen (Hindi) 

10(1069) 


Solomon Katz The Social Structure of Islam 

V. Gordon Childe What Happened in History 

V.L. Aleveev The Origins of the Human Race 

Option- (ii): Modern World 

10(1070) 



Time: 3 Hours 










Unit – I 

Transition from Feudalism to Capitalism in Europe 

Renaissance: Origins, Emergence and Impact 

Reformation: Origins, Emergence and Impact 

Age of Enlightenment 

Economic Development during 16th Century: Shift of Economic Balance from the 

Mediterranean to Atlantic Region 

Old Colonial System: Motives and Consequences of Colonization in Americas 

Unit – II 

Mercantile Revolution: Origins, Progress and Impact 

Scientific Revolutions: Agricultural Revolution and Industrial Revolution 

Glorious Revolution: Nature and Impact 

American Revolution: Nature and Impact 

French Revolution: Nature and Impact 

Unit - III 

Rise of Imperialism: Causes and Consequences 

World War – I : Causes and Consequences 

Paris Peace Settlement: Important Treaties – Provisions and Consequences 

Rise of Socialism and Bolshevik Revolution in Russia 

Rise of Dictatorship: Nazism and Fascism 

World War - II: Causes and Consequences 

Unit - IV 

Maps (Europe/World): 

Important Centers of Renaissance in Europe 

Important Centers of Reformation in Europe 


Major Places Connected with Industrial Revolution in World 

Polarization of Countries before World War-I 

Polarization of Countries before World War-II 


Barrachough, G. An Introduction to Contemporary History (Penguin, 1968) 

Bronowski, J., and Bruce 

Mazlish 

The Western Intellectual Tradition (Ayer Co., 1960) 

Carr, E.H. The Bolshevik Revolution, 1917-23, 3 Vols. (Macmillan, 1950, 1951 

and 1953) 

Chauhan, D. S. Europe Ka Itihas (Hindi) 

Chauhan, D. S. Samkalin Europe (Hindi) 

Cipolla, Carlo M. Forntana Economic History of Europe, Vols II and III. 

Coleman, D. C. (ed.) Revisions in Mercantilism 

Davis, H. A. (ed.). Outline History of the World 

Davis, Ralph The Rise of the Atlantic Economics 

Dobb, Maurice Studies in the Developments of Capitalism 

Fisher, H.A.L. A History of Europe 

Gupta, Parthasarthi (ed.) Adhunik Paschim Ka Uday (Hindi) 

Gupta, Parthasarthi (ed.) Europe Ka Itihas (Hindi) 

Hall, J.R. From Galileo to Newton 

Henderson, O. P. The Industrial Revolution on the Continent 

Hill, Christopher From Reformation to Industrial Revolution (Penguin, 1970) 

Hill, Christopher Lenin and the Russian Revolution, (Penguin, 1978) 

Hilton, Rodney Transition From Feudalism to Capitalism 

Hobsbawm, E.J. The Age of Revolution 

Joll, James Europe Since 1870: An International History (Harper Row, 1973) 

Joll, James 1870 Se Europe (Hindi) 

Langer, W.L., Diplomacy of Imperialism 

Lefebvre, Georges Coming of the French Revolution (Princeton, 1989) 

Morgan, K.O. Oxford Illustrated History of Britain 1789-1983 

Palmer, R.A. and Cotton A History of Modern World (McGraw, 1982) 

Joel 

Parker, G. Europe in Crisis 1598-1648 

Parks, H.B. The United States of America 

Parry, J.P. The Age of Renaissance 

Porter, Andrew European Imperialism, 1860-1914 

Roberts, J.M. Europe 1880-1945 

Rude, George Revolutionary Europe (1984) 

Saboul, A. The French Revolution 

Stavrianes, L.S. The World Since 1500 (1928) 

Stephen, J. Lee Aspects of European History 1494-1789 

Taylor A.J.P. The Struggle for Mastery in Europe (OUP,1954) 

Taylor, A.J.P. The Origins of the Second World War 

Thompson, David Europe Since Napoleon (Penguin, 1966) 

Wood, Anthony History of Europe 1915-1960 

10(1071) 


Option – (iii) : East Asia in Modern Times 

10(1072) 



Time: 3 Hours 










Unit- I 

The Canton System in China and Opium Wars 

Anti - Imperialist Movement: Boxer Uprising 

Dr. Sun Yat Sen : Ideology and Contribution 

The Chinese Revolution of 1911: Causes, Course and Significance 

The May Fourth Movement: Causes, Course and Impact 

Communist Revolution of 1949: Causes, Course and Significance 

Unit- II 

The Meiji Restoration in Japan: Causes, Progress and Significance 

Foreign Policy of Japan (1900-1919) 

Militarism in Japan: Causes, Process and Consequences 

Japan and World War – II: Involvement and Consequences 

Japan after World War – II: New Political System 

Unit- III 

Industrial and Agricultural Transformation in Japan after Meiji Restoration 

Socio-Cultural Change in Japan after Meiji Restoration 

Land Collectivization, Industrialization and Other Economic Changes in China after 1949 

Cultural Revolution in China 

Economic, Social and Educational Remodeling in Japan during 1945-1960 

Unit- IV 

Maps (China/Japan): 

European Colonial Expansion in China 

Areas of Anti-Imperialist Movement in China 

Important Ports Opened for Western Powers in Japan 

Major Industrial Centers of Japan Emerged during 1949-1960 

Route of Long March in China 



George Allen A Short Economic History of Japan 

G.Beasley The Modern History of Japan 

Jean Chesneaun et al. China From Opium War to 1911 Revolution 

Jean Chesnoaux, et.al., China from the 1911 Revolution to Liberation 

Tan Chuntg Triton and Dragon Studies on the Nineteenth Century China and Imperialism 

John K. Faribank, et.al East Asia: Modern Transformation 

Mikiso Hane, Moden Japan: A Historical Survey 

Y. Immaneul Hus., The Rise of Modern China 

Chalmers A. Johnson Peasant Nationalism and Communist Power: The Emergence 

of Red China, 1937-1945 

John. Livingstone, et.al., The Japan Reader (Imperial Japan: 1800, 1945) Vol. I. 

F.H. Norman Japan’s Emergence as Modern State 

Nathaniel Peffer, The Far East: A Modern History 

Victor Purcell The Boxer Uprising: A Background Study 

Kenneth B. Pyle, The Making of Modern Japan 

Frauz Schurmann and Orville China Readings, 2 Volumes (Imperial China and Republican 

Schell (ed.) 

China) 

Benjanin I. Schwartz Mao and the Rise of Chinese Communism 

Hu Sheng Imperialism and Chinese Politics 

Chow Tse Tung The May Fourth Movement: Intellectual Revolution in Modern 

China 

Mao Tso Tung Selected Writings 

Mary C. Wright China in Revolution: The First Phase (1900-1913) 

P.H.Clyde For East 

P.H.Clyde Sudur Purva (Hindi) 

Vinayake Poovi Asia Ka Itihas (Hindi) 

10(1073) 


SYLLABUS OF M.A. (PREVIOUS) HISTORY (ANNUAL SYSTEM) 

SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS AND COURSES OF READING (w.e.f. 2012-13) 

M.A. History Course shall be a 2-year Degree Course of 1000 marks. The 

candidate shall take five papers in each year, i.e., Ten Papers in the full 

Course. Each Paper will carry 100 marks. 

M.A. (Previous) History: 

There shall be Six Papers out of which the candidate has to opt any Five Papers for M.A. 

(Previous). 



Marks 

Time 

Paper-I Medieval Societies 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-II Modern World 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-III Polity and Economy of Medieval India (1200-1750) 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-IV Colonial India (1757-1857) 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-V History of China and Japan in Modern Times 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-VI History of Europe (1789-1914) 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-I:– Medieval Societies 


10(1074) 


Time: 3 Hours 

Note: - The question paper will consist of nine questions. The candidate shall attempt five 

questions in all. The Question No. 1 will be compulsory, consisting of four short 

answer type conceptual / thematic questions of equal marks (i.e., 5 marks each) 

spread over the whole syllabus. The candidate shall attempt four more questions 

selecting at least one from each Unit. Each question will carry equal marks (20 

marks). 

Unit – I Medieval Europe: Transition from Ancient Society to Medieval Society; Medieval 

State and Church; Clergy and its Socio-Economic Role; Feudalism: Agrarian 

Structure and Relations, Manorial System, Agrarian Technology 

Unit – II Organization of Non-Agricultural Production under Feudalism; Trade and 

Commerce; Urbanization: Urban Centers and Society; Artisans and Merchants; 


Unit – III Arabia before Islam; Rise of Islam; Evolution of Islamic State from Pious Caliphs to 

the Abbasids; Society and Economy under the Prophet and the Caliphs; Art and 

Architecture; Education; Intellectual Contributions: Language, Literature and 

Sciences 


Unit – IV Advent of Islam in India and its Impact; Nature and Administrative Set up of Delhi 

Sultanate 


Aghnides, N. Muhammad an Theories of Finance 

Anderson, Perry Passages from Antiquity to Feudalism 

Bloch, March Feudal Society, 2 Vols. 

Satish Chandra Medieval India : From Sultanate to the Mughals, Vol.-I 

Cipolla, Carlo (ed.) The Fontana Economic History of Europe : The Middle 

Ages 

Dobb, Maurice & Sweezy Dobb Studies in the Development of Capitalism 

Faruqqi, Amar Prachin Aur Madhyakalin Samajik Sanrachanayen aur 

Sanskritiyan (Hindi) 

Ganshof, F.L. Feudalism 

Granebaum Medieval Islam 

Habib, Muhammad & Nizami, Comprehensive History of India, Vol. V 

K.A. (ed.) 

Heaton, Herbert Economic History of Europe 

Hilton, Rodni (ed.) The Transition from Feudalism to Capitalism 

Hitti, P.K. History of Arabs 

Hodgett, A.J. Gerald A Social and Economic History of Medieval Europe 

Jackson, P The Delhi Sultanate 

Kulke, Hermann The State in India (AD 1000-1700) 

Lamblon Landlords and Peasants in Persia 

Levy, P The Social Structure of Islam 

Pirenne, Henri Economic and Social History of Medieval Europe 

Rolls, Eric History of Economic Thought 

Richards, J.F. New Cambridge History of India : Mughal Empire 

Sahu, K.P. Islam : Udbhav Aur Vikas (Hindi) 

Sharma, G.D. Madhyakalin Bharat Ki Rajnaitik Avm Arthik 

Sansthayein (Hindi) 

Takashesh et. The Transition from Feudalism to Capitalism 

Verma, H.C. (ed.) Madhyakalin Bharat (Hindi), Vol. I 

White, Lynn Medieval Technology and Social Change 

Paper-II:– Modern World 

10(1075) 


Time: 3 Hours 


questions in all. The Question No. 1 will be compulsory. This question will be 

consisting of four short answer type conceptual / thematic questions of equal marks 

(i.e., 5 marks each) spread over the whole syllabus. The Candidate shall attempt four 


marks. 

Unit – I Transition from Feudalism to Capitalism in Europe; Renaissance and its Impact; 

Reformation and its Impact; Enlightenment and Scientific Revolution; 


Rise of Capitalism: Mercantile Revolution – Origins, Nature and Impact; Economic 

Development during the 16th Century: Shift of Economic Balance from the 

Mediterranean Region to Atlantic Region 

Unit – II Old Colonial System and its Consequences; Rise of Liberalism: ‘Glorious’ 

Revolution – Nature and Impact; American Revolution – Nature and Impact; French 

Revolution – Nature and Impact; Growth of Capitalism: Industrial and 

Technological Revolution – Origins, Nature and Impact; Nationalism in Central 

Europe 

Unit – III Imperialism: Origins, Interpretations and Consequences; World War-I: Origins and 

Consequences; Socialism and Bolshevik Revolution in Russia; Growth of 

Liberalism: Parliamentary Reforms in Europe; Paris Peace Settlement and its 

Consequences; Working of the League of Nations; Collective Security and 

Disarmament 

Unit – IV Economic Depression and its Effects; Rise of Fascism: Italy and Germany; World 

War-II: Origins and Consequences; United Nations Organization and World Peace; 

Nationalist Movements and De-Colonization in Asia and Africa; The Cold War : 

Origins, Strategic Alliances and Phases 



Bronowski, 

Mazlish 

J., and Bruce The Western Intellectual Tradition 

Carr, E.H. The Bolshevik Revolution, 1917-23, 3 Vols. 

Carr, E.H. 1917 : Before and After 



Cipolla, Carlo M Before the Industrial Revolution: European Society and 

Economy1000-1700 





Dorpalen, Andreas Europe in the 20th Century 






Hill, Christopher From Reformation to Industrial Revolution 

Hill, Christopher Lenin and the Russian Revolution 



Hobsbawn, E.J. Age of Extremes ; The Short 20th Century (1914-1991) 

Joll, James Europe Since 1870: An International History 


Joll, James Origins of the First World War 

Keenigsberger, H.G. and G. L. 

Mosse 

Europe in the Sixteenth Century 

10(1076) 


Langer, W.L. Diplomacy of Imperialism 

Lefebvre, Georges Coming of the French Revolution 

Lucass, Colin The French Revolution and the Making of Modern Political 

Culture, 2 Volumes 

Mergan, R.P. German Social Democracy and the First International 

Morgan, K.O. Oxford Illustrated History of Britain (1789-1983), 2 Volumes 

Palmer, R.A. and Cotton Joel A History of Modern World 




Porter, Andrew European Imperialism 1860-1914 

Rabb, Theodore K. The Struggle for Stability in Early Modern Europe 


Roth, J.J. (ed.) World War II : A Turning Point in Modern History 

Rude, George Revolutionary Europe 

Sinha, Manoj Samkalin Bharat (Hindi) 

Soboul, Albert History of the French Revolution, 2 Volumes 

Stavrianes, L.S. The World Since 1500 

Stephen, J. Lee. Aspects of European History 1494-1789 

Taylor A.J.P. The Struggle for Mastery in Europe 


Thompson, David Europe Since Napoleon 

Wiskemann, E. Europe of the Dictators 

Paper-III:– Polity and Economy of Medieval India (1200 - 1750 ) 

10(1077) 

Maximum Marks : 100 







marks. 

Unit – I Sources: Archival, Archaeological, Contemporary Historical Writings, Travel 

Accounts, European Factory Records; Nature of the Delhi Sultanate and the Mughal 

State; Theories of Kingship; Nature and Administrative set up of Regional States 

with special reference to Vijaynagar and Bahmani Kingdoms 

Unit – II Growth of Institutional Structure: Iqta, Amaram, Mansab and Jagir; Central and 

Provincial Administration; Ruling Classes: Evolving Compositions, Local 

Alliances and Conflicts 

Unit-III Agrarian Economy : Land Ownership and Production; Nature and Magnitude of 

Taxation; Agrarian Relations ; Textiles and Agro-Industries; Metal Technology; 

Artisans; Mercantile Groups and their Role in Production; Trade and Commerce; 

Medium of Exchange; Currency, Banking and Hundi System; Process of 

Urbanization 


Unit – IV Systemic Crisis: Tensions and Conflicts Inherent in the Imperial System; Patterns of 

Resistance; Collapse of the Mughal Empire; Interpreting the 18th Century 


Alam, Muzaffar and 

Subramanyam, Sanjay (ed.) 

The Mughal State 

Alavi, Seema (ed.) Eighteen Century in India 

Ali, M. Athar, The Mughal Nobility under Aurangzeb 

Ali, M. Athar, Mughal India 

Satish Chandra Medieval India : Society The Jagirdari Crisis and the 

Village 

Satish Chandra Parties and Politics in the Mughal Court, 1707-1740 

Satish Chandra The Eighteenth Century in India : Its Economy and the 

Role of the Marathas, the Jats, the Sikhs and the Afghans 

Satish Chandra Medieval India : From Sultanate to Mughals, Vol. I – II 

Chaudhuri, K.N. Trade and Civilization in the Indian Ocean 

Digby, Simon War Horse and Elephant in the Delhi Sultanate : A Study 

in Military Supplies 

Fukazawa Hiroshi The Medieval Decan : Peasants, Social System and States- 

Sixteenth to Eighteenth Centuries 

Gordon, Stewart The Marathas 1600-1818 

Grewal, J.S. (ed) State and Society in Medieval India 

Habib, Irfan Agrarian System of Mughal India 1526-1707 

Habib, Irfan Essays in Indian History : Towards a Marxist Perception 

Habib, Irfan Madhyakalin Bharat (Hindi), 4 Volumes 

Habib, Mohammad Politics and Society in Early Medieval Period, Vols. I & II 

Habib, Mohammad and 

K.A.Nizami (ed.) 

Comprehensive History of India, Vol. V AD 1206-1526 

Hasan, S. Nurul Thoughts on Agrarian Relations in Mughal India 


Khan, A.R. Chieftains in the Mughal Empire During the Reign of 

Akbar 

Kulke, Hermann The State in India (AD 1000-1700) 

Marshall, P.J. (ed.) Eighteen Century India : Evolution or Revolution 

Moosvi, Shireen Economy of the Mughals Empire : A Statistical Study 

Naqvi, H.K. Urbanization and Urban Centers under the Great Mughals 

1556-1707 

Nigam, S.B.P. Nobility under The Sultans of Delhi 

Nizami, Khaliq A. Religion and Politics in the Thirteenth Century 

Raychaudhri, Tapan and Irfan Cambridge Economic History of India, Vol. I, 1200 to 

Habib (eds.) 

1750 

Richards, J.F.(ed.) The Imperial Monetary System of Mughal India 

Richards, J.F.(ed.) New Cambridge History of India: The Mughal Empire 

Sangwan, R.S. Jodhpur and the later Mughals, A.D. 1707-1752 

Sharma, G.D. Madhyakalin Bharat Ki Rajnetik Aur Aarthik Sansthayen 

(Hindi) 

Singh, Chetan Region and Empire : Punjab in the 17th Century 

Singh, Chetan Madhyakalin Bharat : Sultanate Se Mughal Kal Tak Vols. 

I-II (Hindi) 

Stein, Burton New Cambridge History of India : Vijaynagar 

10(1078) 


Streusand, Douglas E. The Formation of the Mughal Empire 

Verma, H.C. (ed.) Madhyakalin Bharat (Hindi), 2 Volumes 

Wink, Andre Land and Sovereignty in India : Agrarian Society and 

Politics under the Eighteenth Century Maratha Swarajya 

Paper-IV:– Colonial India (1757-1857) 

10(1079) 


Time: 3 Hours 






marks. 

Unit – I Sources – Archival Records, Private Papers, News Papers, Periodicals and Oral 

Traditions; Pre-Colonial Order – Polity, Economy and Society; British 

Mercantilism and India 

Unit – II Colonial Expansion : Bengal, Mysore, Marathas, Awadh, Sindh and Punjab; 

Subsidiary Alliance System; Doctrine of Lapse; Evolution of British Paramountcy : 

Motives and Phases; The British Imperialist Ideology : Political, Economic and 

Cultural Theories 

Unit – III Construction of the Colonial State : The ‘Iron’ Framework - Armed Forces and 

Law; The ‘Steel’ Framework - Civil Administration and Bureaucracy; British Policy 

Towards Indian Society : Role of Orientalists, Evangelicals and Utilitarians 

Unit – IV Social Reforms; Introduction of Modern Education; Rise of Capitalism and 

Transition in Economy; The Pre-1857 Risings; The Uprising of 1857: Causes, 

Nature and Consequences 


Amold, David and 

Nature, Culture and Imperialism : Essays on the 

Ramachandra Guha (eds.) Environmental History of South Asia 

Bayly, C.A. Indian Society and the Making of the British Empire (New 

Cambridge History of India) 

Bipan Chandra India’s Struggle for Independence 

Bipan Chandra Bharat Ka Swatantra Sangharsh (Hindi) 

Brown, Judith Modern India: The Origin of an Asian Democracy 

Chicherov, A.L. Indian Economic Development in the Seventeenth and 

Eighteenth Century 


Fisher, M.H. (ed.) Policies of the British Annexation of India 1757-1857 

Gopal S. British Policy in India 

Guha, Ranjit (ed.) Subaltern Studies: Writings on South Asian History and 


Society, Vols. I - XI 

Habib, Irfan Essays in Indian History: Towards a Marxist Perception 

Joshi, P.C. Rebellion – 1857 

Kumar, Dharma (ed.) Cambridge Economic History of India, Vol. – II 


Mishra, Girish Adhunik Bharat Ka Arthik Itihas(Hindi tr.) 

Panigrahi, D.N. (ed.) Economy, Society and Politics in Modern India 

Rai, Satya Murti (ed.) Bharat Mein Upniveshwad Aur Rashtrawad (Hindi) 

Ravindra Kumar Social History of Modern India 

Raychandhary, Tapan Indian Economy in the 19th Century : A Symposium 

Sarkar, Sumit Modern India, 1885-1947 

Sarkar, Sumit Audhunik Bharat 1885-1947 (Hindi) 

Shukla, Ram Lakhan (ed.) Adhunik Bharat Ka Itihas (Hindi) 

Siddiqui, Aisya (ed.) Trade and Finance in Colonial India 

Paper-V:– History of China and Japan in Modern Times 

10(1080) 


Time: 3 Hours 



be consist of four short answer type conceptual / thematic questions of equal marks 



marks. 

Unit – I Shaping Forces of Modern China; The Canton System of Trade and Opium Wars; 

The Taiping Revolt; The Boxer Uprising; Socio-Economic Changes and Intellectual 

Awakening 1895-1911; Revolution and the Republic of 1911; Dr. Sun Yat Sen - 

Ideology and Work 

Unit – II The May 4th Movement ; Rise of the Communist Party and its Relations with Kuo 

Min Tang; The Civil War and Communist Revolution 1945-1949; Mao Tse Tung - 

Ideology and Work; Cultural Revolution; Structure of the Communist State; Land 

Collectivization and Economic Reforms 

Unit – III Japan in the 19the Century; Western Contact and its Implications; The Meiji 

Restoration - Causes, Nature and Significance; Reforms in Polity, Society, 

Education and Economy 1895-1931; Political Party System and its Drawbacks; 

Growth of Militarism - Expansion and Aggression 

Unit – IV Japan and World War-II; Post-War Japan - Disarmament and Demilitarization; 

Democratization - New Political System; Economic, Social and Educational 

Remodeling up to 1960 


Akita, George Foundation of the Constitutional Government in 

Modern Japan 

Allen, George C. Modern Japan and its Problem 


Allen, George C. A Short Economic History of Modern Japan 1867- 

1937 

Bakmann, George M. The Making of the Meiji Constitution 

Beasley, W.G. The Modern History of Japan 

Bianco, Lucien Origins of the Chinese Revolution 1915-1949 

Chen, Jerome Mao Tse-Tung and the Chinese Revolution 

Chesneaux Jean et al China from the 1911 Revolution to Liberation 

Chesneaux, Jean et al China from Opium Wars to 1911 Revolution 

Clyde, P.H. Far East 

Clyde, P.H. Sudoor Purva (Hindi tr.) 

Dengarfield, R.J. The New Japan 

Fairback ,John K. The United States of China 

Fairback ,John K. The Great Chinese Revolution 

Fairback, John K. East Asia : Modern Transformation 

Fine, S.M. Japan’s Post-War Industrial Recovery 

Hall, John W. Japan From Prehistory to Modern Times 

Holtam, D.C. Modern Japan and Shinto Nationalism 

Hsia, R. Economic Planning in Communist China 

Hsu, T.Immannuel The Rise of Modern China 

James, David H. The Rise and Fall of the Japanese Empire 

Jansen M.B. (ed.) The Cambridge History of Japan, Vols. V to VI 

Jansen, M.B. Japan and China : From War to Peace 1894-1972 

Johnson, C. A. Peasant Nationalism and Communist Power : The 

Emergence of Red China, 1937-1945 

Kostan, E.E.N Militarism and Foreign Policy in Japan 

Lockwood, William The Economic Development of Japan : Growth and 

Structural Change 

Mao Tse Tung Selected Works 

Mohanti, Manoranjan The Political Philosophy of MaoTse Tung 

Mohanti, Manoranjan (ed.) Cheenee Kranti (Hindi) 

Myers, Ramon H. and Mark R. The Japanese Colonial Empire 1895-1945 

Patric (eds.) 

Norman, E.H. Japan’s Emergence as a Modern State 

Purcell, Victor The Boxer Uprising : A Background Study 

Pyle, Kenneth B. The Making of Modern Japan 

Scalapino, Robrt A. Democracy and the Party Movement in Pre-War 

Japan 

Schwartz, Benjamin I. Chinese Communism and the Rise of Mao 

Smith, Thomas C. Political Change and Industrial Development in Japan 

: Government Enterprise 

Tanin, O and Yohan, E. Militarism and Fascism in Japan 

Thomas, S.B. Government and Administration in Communist China 

Thomas, S.B. Recent Political and Economic Developments in China 

Tse-Tung, Chow The May Fourth Movement : Intellectual Revolution in 

Modern China 

Vinayake Poorvi Asia Ka Itihas (Hindi) 

Wright, Mary C. China in Revolution : The First Phase 1900-1913 

Yanaga, Chitoshi Japan Since Parry 

Young, A. Morgan Imperial Japan 1926-1938 

10(1081) 


Paper-VI:– History of Europe (1789-1914) 

10(1082) 

Maximum Marks : 100 







marks. 

Unit – I The French Revolution: Causes, Course and Impact; Napoleon Bonaparte: 

Emergence and Downfall; Congress of Vienna and Reconstruction of Europe; The 

Concert of Europe: Nature, Growth and Failure; The Metternich System 

Unit – II Nature and Impact of the Revolutions of 1830 and 1848; The Eastern Question- 

Independence of Greece and Crimean War; Unification of Italy and Germany; 

Bismarck and Beginning of the Diplomatic Alignments: Three Emperors’ League, 

Dual Alliance, Triple Alliance and Re-Insurance Treaty 

Unit – III Franco-German Relations 1870-1890; Russo-Turkish War and Berlin Congress; 

European Imperialist Interests in Africa and its Partition; France-Russian Alliance; 

Anglo-French Alliance; Anglo-Russian Alliance and the Formation of Tripe Entente 

Unit – IV Shifting Position of Italy; Nature of the Triple Alliance and Triple Entente 1907- 

1914; Morocco Crisis, Bosnian Crisis and Agadir Crisis; Anglo-German Naval 

Rivalry; Balkan League and Balkan Wars; World War – I : Origins and 

Responsibility 


Bartbelt , C.J. Peace, War and European Powers 1814-1914 

Cipolla, C.M. Fontana Economic History of Europe, Vol. III 

Chauhan, D.S. Europe Ka Itihas (Hindi) 

Chauhan, D.S. Samkalin Europe (Hindi) 

Fay, S.B. Origins of the First World War 

Gooch, G.P. History of Modern Europe 1878-1920 

Grant and Temperley Europe in the Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries 


Gupta, Parthasarthi (ed.) Adhunik Pashchim Ka Uday (Hindi) 

Hamerow, T.S. Restoration, Revolution and Reaction: Economy and 

Politics in Germany 

Hazen, C.D. Modern Europe upto 1945 

Hobsbawm, E.J. Nation and Nationalism 

Hunt, Lynn Policies, Culture and Class in the French Revolution 

Jelavich, Charles Establishment of the Balkan National States 1840- 

1920 

Joll, James Europe Since 1870 



Langer, W.L. The Diplomacy of Imperialism 

Langer, W.L. European Alliances and Alignments 

Lefebvre, George Coming of the French Revolution 

Lucas, Colin The French Revolution and the Making of Modern 

Political Culture, 2 Vol. 

Marriot, J.A.R. The Eastern Question 

Marriot, J.A.R. The Remaking of Modern Europe 


Post, Ken Revolution and European Experience 1789-1914 


Robertson, C.G. Bismarck 

Roth, J.J. (ed.) World War I : A Turning Point in Modern History 

Smith, Meak Italy : A Modern History, Vol. I 

Soboul, Albert History of the French Revolution 

Stevenson, David The Outbreak of the First World War 

Taylor, A.J.P. Bismarck : The Man and Statesman 

Taylor, A.J.P. Struggle for Mastery in Europe 

Thomson, David Europe Since Napoleon 


10(1083) 


v’Ve iz”u&i= % fucU/k vkSj vuqokn 

funsZ”k %& 

tuojh] 2013 

ch-,- vkWulZ ¼fgUnh½ % NBk lsesLVj 

iw.kkZad % 90 

vkarfjd ewY;kadu % 10 

le; % 3 ?k.Vs 

1- fn, x, ikap fucU/kksa esa ls fdlh ,d lkfgfR;d fo’k; ij fucU/k fy[kuk gksxk] ftlds fy, 

45 vad fu;r gSaA 

2- ikB~;Øe esa fu/kkZfjr NUnksa & ¼xhfrdk] gfjxhfrdk] rksVd] >wyuk] cjoS] nksgk] lksjBk] 

dq.Mfy;k] NIi;½ esa ls “kr&izfr”kr fodYi lfgr iwNs x, NUnksa esa ls pkj ds mÙkj nsus 

gksaxs] ftlds fy, iUnzg vad fu;r gSaA 

3- ikB~;Øe esa ls fu/kkZfjr vyadkjksa & ¼vig~uqfr] mRizs{kk] vfr”k;ksfDr] n`’VkUr] “ys’k] 

vFkkZUrjU;kl] foHkkouk] dkO;fyax½ esa ls “kr&izfr”kr fodYi lfgr iwNs x, vyadkjksa esa ls 

pkj ds y{k.k vkSj mnkgj.k iwNs tk,axsA blds fy, chl vad fu;r gSaA 

4- ikB~;Øe esa fu/kkZfjr ikfjHkkf’kd “kCnkoyh ds vUrxZr nl ikfjHkkf’kd “kCn iwNs tk,axsA blds 

fy, nl vad fu;r gSaA ikfjHkkf’kd “kCnkoyh esa dksbZ fodYi ugha gksxkA ikB~;Øe esa fu/kkZfjr 

ikfjHkkf’kd “kCn fuEufyf[kr gSa & 

ikfjHkkf’kd “kCn 

1- Abnormal vlkekU; 

2- Absence vuqifLFkfr 

3- Asbent vuqifLFkr 

4- Academic “kS{kf.kd 

5- Acceptance Lohd`fr 

6- According rnuqlkj 

7- Account ys[kk&[kkrk 

8- Accountant ys[kiky 

9- Accuse vfHk;ksx yxkuk 

10- Acknowledgement ikorh 

11- Act vf/kfu;e 

12- Additional vfrfjDr] vij 

13- Adhoc rn~FkZ 

14- Adjournment LFkxu 

15- Adjustment lek;kstu 

16- Administration iz”kklu 

17- Administrator iz”kkld 

18- Admissible Lohdk;Z 

19- Advance vfxze 


20- Advertisement foKkiu 

21- Advisory Committee lykgdkj lfefr 

22- Affidavit “kiFki= 

23- Affiliated le~c) 

24- Agenda dk;Zlwph 

25- Aggregate iw.kZ;ksx 

26- Allegation vkjksi 

27- Allotment vkcaVu 

28- Allowance HkÙkk 

29- Annexure ifjf”k’V 

30- Applicant vkosnd 

31- Approval vuqeksnu 

32- Article vuqPNsn] fu;e] oLrq 

33- Attestation lk{;kadu] vuqizHkkou 

34- Authentication izek.khdj.k 

35- Authority izkf/kdkjh 

36- Autonomous Lok;Ùk 

37- Admonition HkRlZuk 

38- Bonafide okLrfod] vlyh 

39- Book Review iqLrd&leh{kk 

40- Book&Write xzUFkdkj 

41- Brevity laf{kIrrk 

42- Brochure foojf.kdk 

43- Cabinet efU=eaMy 

44- Candidate izR;k”kh 

45- Care Taker vHkh{kd 

46- Chairman v/;{k] lHkkifr 

47- Chancellor dqykf/kifr 

48- Circular ifji= 

49- Commissioner vk;qDr 

50- Communique foKfIr 

51- Conduct vkpj.k] dk;Zlapkyu 

52- Contingency vkdfLedrk] vkdfLed O;; 


tqykbZ] 2012 

ch-,- vkWulZ ¼fgUnh½ % ikapoka lsesLVj 

iw.kkZad % 90 


le; % 3 ?k.Vs 

v’Ve iz”u&i= % fucU/k vkSj vuqokn 

funsZ”k %& 

1- fn, x, ikap fucU/kksa esa ls fdlh ,d lkfgfR;d fo’k; ij fucU/k fy[kuk gksxk] ftlds fy, 45 

vad fu;r gSaA 

2- ikB~;Øe esa fu/kkZfjr NUnksa & ¼bUnzotzk] nzqrfoyfEcr] Hkqtaxiz;kr] olarfrydk] ekfyuh] f”k[kfj.kh] 

eUnkØkark] pkSikbZ] i)fj½ esa ls “kr&izfr”kr fodYi lfgr iwNs x, NUnksa esa ls pkj ds mÙkj nsus gksaxs] 

ftlds fy, iUnzg vad fu;r gSaA 

3- ikB~;Øe esa ls fu/kkZfjr vyadkjksa & ¼vuqizkl] ;ed] miek] :id] lUnsg] mYys[k] HkzkfUreku½ esa 

ls “kr&izfr”kr fodYi lfgr iwNs x, vyadkjksa esa ls pkj ds y{k.k vkSj mnkgj.k iwNs tk,axsA blds 

fy, chl vad fu;r gSaA 

4- ikB~;Øe esa fu/kkZfjr ikfjHkkf’kd “kCnkoyh ds vUrxZr nl ikfjHkkf’kd “kCn iwNs tk,axsA blds fy, 

nl vad fu;r gSaA ikfjHkkf’kd “kCnkoyh esa dksbZ fodYi ugha gksxkA ikB~;Øe esa fu/kkZfjr ikfjHkkf’kd 

“kCn fuEufyf[kr gSa & 

ikfjHkkf’kd “kCn 

1- Abnormal vlkekU; 

2- Absence vuqifLFkfr 

3- Asbent vuqifLFkr 

4- Academic “kS{kf.kd 

5- Acceptance Lohd`fr 

6- According rnuqlkj 

7- Account ys[kk&[kkrk 

8- Accountant ys[kiky 

9- Accuse vfHk;ksx yxkuk 

10- Acknowledgement ikorh 

11- Act vf/kfu;e 

12- Additional vfrfjDr] vij 

13- Adhoc rn~FkZ 

14- Adjournment LFkxu 

15- Adjustment lek;kstu 

16- Administration iz”kklu 

17- Administrator iz”kkld 

18- Admissible Lohdk;Z 

19- Advance vfxze 


20- Advertisement foKkiu 

21- Advisory Committee lykgdkj lfefr 

22- Affidavit “kiFki= 

23- Affiliated le~c) 

24- Agenda dk;Zlwph 

25- Aggregate iw.kZ;ksx 

26- Allegation vkjksi 

27- Allotment vkcaVu 

28- Allowance HkÙkk 

29- Annexure ifjf”k’V 

30- Applicant vkosnd 

31- Approval vuqeksnu 

32- Article vuqPNsn] fu;e] oLrq 

33- Attestation lk{;kadu] vuqizHkkou 

34- Authentication izek.khdj.k 

35- Authority izkf/kdkjh 

36- Autonomous Lok;Ùk 

37- Admonition HkRlZuk 

38- Bonafide okLrfod] vlyh 

39- Book Review iqLrd&leh{kk 

40- Book&Write xzUFkdkj 

41- Brevity laf{kIrrk 

42- Brochure foojf.kdk 

43- Cabinet efU=eaMy 

44- Candidate izR;k”kh 

45- Care Taker vHkh{kd 

46- Chairman v/;{k] lHkkifr 

47- Chancellor dqykf/kifr 

48- Circular ifji= 

49- Commissioner vk;qDr 

50- Communique foKfIr 

51- Conduct vkpj.k] dk;Zlapkyu 

52- Contingency vkdfLedrk] vkdfLed O;; 


lIre iz”u&i= % fgUnh lkfgR; dk fodkl 

ikB~;iqLrd@ikB~;&fo’k; 

tuojh] 2013 


1- fgUnh lkfgR; dk bfrgkl ¼jhfrdky rFkk vk/kqfud dky½ 

iw.kkZad % 90 


le; % 3 ?k.Vs 

funsZ”k %& 

1- bl iz”u&i= esa nl iz”u iwNs tk,axs] ftuesa ls dksbZ ikap iz”u djus gksaxsA dfo;ksa ij LorU= :i 

ls iz”u ugha iwNs tk,axsA 

2- ikB~;Øe esa fu/kkZfjr ikB~;fo’k; fuEufyf[kr gSa & 

1- jhfrdky dh ifjfLFkfr;ka vkSj fo”ks’krk,a 

2- jhfrc) vkSj jhfreqDr dkO; dh fo”ks’krk,a 

3- vk/kqfud dky dh ifjfLFkfr;ka vkSj fo”ks’krk,a] 

¼d½ HkkjrsUnq ;qx] f}osnh ;qx vkSj ijorhZ ;qx 

¼[k½ Nk;kokn 

¼x½ izxfrokn 

¼?k½ iz;ksxokn vkSj ubZ dfork 

¼M-½ izeq[k fgUnh x|&fo/kkvksa dk fodkl&miU;kl] dgkuh] ukVd] fucU/k] lekykspuk 


tqykbZ] 2012 


iw.kkZad % 90 


le; % 3 ?k.Vs 

lIre iz”u&i= % fgUnh lkfgR; dk fodkl 


1- fgUnh lkfgR; dk bfrgkl ¼vkfndky rFkk HkfDrdky½ 

funsZ”k %& 

1- bl iz”u&i= esa nl iz”u iwNs tk,axs] ftuesa ls dksbZ ikap iz”u djus gksaxsA dfo;ksa ij LorU= :i 

ls iz”u ugha iwNs tk,axsA 

2- ikB~;Øe esa fu/kkZfjr ikB~;fo’k; fuEufyf[kr gSa & 

1- fgUnh lkfgR; ds bfrgkl dk dky&foHkktu vkSj ukedj.k 

2- vkfndky dh ifjfLFkfr;ka vkSj fo”ks’krk,a 

3- HkfDrdky dh ifjfLFkfr;ka vkSj fo”ks’krk,a] fuxqZ.k dkO;] lwQh dkO;] d`’.k HkfDr dkO; ,oa 

jkeHkfDr dkO;A 


NBk iz”u&i= % x| lkfgR; 


tuojh] 2013 


1- lwjt&Mwcrs dh cnfy;ka] jkes”ojyky [kaMsyoky 

iw.kkZad % 90 


le; % 3 ?k.Vs 

funsZ”k %& 

1- ikB;Øe es fu/kkZfjr ikB~;iqLrd ¼lwjt&Mwcrs dh cnfy;ka½ ds fuEufyf[kr ikBksa & ¼1- unh uko 

latksx 2- ;qod lhek,a ugh tkurk 3- leqnz n”kZu 4- u;s fo”o esa ukjh dh Hkwfedk] 5- egkdfo fujkyk % 

pkj >yfd;ka 6- Hkkjrh; laLd`fr ds izrhd & jfoUnzukFk Bkdqj 7- ewaxQyh ds ets 8- fgeky; 

tyus&fnYyh tyus 9- O;fDrRo Vdjk x,½ esa ls N% vorj.k iwNs tk,axs] ftues esa ls fdUgh rhu dh 

lizlax O;k[;k ¼10$10$10½ djuh gksxhA 

2- ^lwjt&Mwcrs dh cnfy;ka^ laLej.k ls & laLej.kksa dh leh{kk] lkj rFkk laLej.kdkj dh 

fo”ks’krkvksa ij 15&15 vadksa ds vkB iz”u iwNs tk,axs] ftues ls pkj iz”uksa ds mÙkj nsus gksaxsA 


NBk iz”u&i= % x| lkfgR; 


1- esjk ifjokj] egknsoh oekZ 

tqykbZ] 2012 


iw.kkZad % 90 


le; % 3 ?k.Vs 

funsZ”k %& 

1- ikB;Øe es fu/kkZfjr ikB~;iqLrd ¼esjk ifjokj½ ds N% vorj.kksa esa ls fdUgh rhu dh lizlax 

O;k[;k ¼10$10$10½ djuh gksxhA 

2- ^esjk ifjokj^ fucU/k&laxzg ls vkB iz”u & fucU/kksa dh leh{kk] lkj rFkk fucU/kdkj dh fo”ks’krkvksa 

ij 15&15 vadksa ds vkB iz”u iwNs tk,axs] ftues ls pkj iz”uksa ds mÙkj nsus gksaxsA 


fu/kkZfjr ikB~;iqLrd@ikB~;&fo’k; 

Tkuojh] 2013 

ch-,- r`rh; o’kZ % NBk lsesLVj 

fgUnh ¼,sfPNd½ 

iw.kkZad % 90 


le; % 3 ?k.Vs 

1- egkHkkst 

2- fgUnh lkfgR; dk bfrgkl ¼vk/kqfud dky½ 

3- leh{kk “kkL= 

funsZ”k %& 

1- fu/kkZfjr ikB~;iqLrd ¼egkHkkst½ ds N% dkO;k”kksa esa ls rhu dh lizlax O;k[;k djuh gksxhA iwNs 

x, pkj leh{kkRed iz”uksa esa ls nks ds mÙkj nsus gksaxsA O;k[;k ds fy, rhl ¼10$10$10½ rFkk leh{kkRed 

iz”uksa ds fy, chl ¼10$10½ vad fu;r gSaA 

2- fgUnh lkfgR; dk bfrgkl ¼vk/kqfud dky½ ls fu/kkZfjr iz”uksa ¼HkkjrsUnq;qxhu x|] fgUnh i=dkfjrk] 

fgUnh miU;kl] fgUnh dgkuh] fgUnh ukVd] fgUnh fucU/k] fgUnh vkykspuk] js[kkfp=½ esa ls pkj iz”u iwNs 

tk,axs] ftues ls nks ds mÙkj nsus gksaxsA blds fy, rhl ¼15$15½ vad fu;r gSaA 

3- leh{kk “kkL= ds vUrxZr ikB;Øe es fu/kkZfjr iz”uksa ¼ukVd] ,dkadh] dgkuh] fucU/k] vkykspuk] 

laLej.k] thouh½ esa ls nl oLrqfu’B iz”u iwNs tk,axsA bl iz”u esa dksbZ fodYi ugha gksxkA blds fy, 10 

vad fu;r gSaA 



tqykbZ] 2012 

ch-,- r`rh; o’kZ % ikapoka lsesLVj 

fgUnh ¼,sfPNd½ 

iw.kkZad % 90 


le; % 3 ?k.Vs 

1- vkalw 

2- fgUnh lkfgR; dk bfrgkl ¼vk/kqfud dky½ 

4- leh{kk “kkL= 

funsZ”k %& 

1- fu/kkZfjr ikB~;iqLrd ¼vkalw½ ds N% dkO;k”kksa esa ls rhu dh lizlax O;k[;k djuh gksxhA iwNs x, 

pkj leh{kkRed iz”uksa esa ls nks ds mÙkj nsus gksaxsaA O;k[;k ds fy, rhl ¼10$10$10½ rFkk leh{kkRed 

iz”uksa ds fy, chl ¼10$10½ vad fu;r gSaA 

2- fgUnh lkfgR; dk bfrgkl ¼vk/kqfud dky½ ls fu/kkZfjr iz”uksa ¼vk/kqfud ;qx dh ifjfLFkfr;ka] 

HkkjrsUnq;qxhu dkO;] f}osnh;qxhu dkO;] Nk;koknh dkO;] izxfroknh dkO;] iz;ksxokn@ubZ dfork] 

ledkyhu dfork½ esa ls pkj iz”u iwNs tk,axs] ftueas ls nks ds mÙkj nsus gksaxsA blds fy, rhl ¼15$15½ 

vad fu;r gSaA 

3- leh{kk “kkL= ds vUrxZr ikB;Øe esa fu/kkZfjr iz”uksa ¼jl % vFkZ vkSj vo;o] jl ds Hksn vkSj ukS 

jlksa dk lksnkgj.k ifjp;] jl&fu’ifÙk½ esa ls nl oLrqfu’B iz”u iwNs tk,axsA bl iz”u esa dksbZ fodYi 

ugha gksxkA blds fy, 10 vad fu;r gSaA 



tuojh] 2013 

ch-,- r`rh; o’kZ % NBk lsesLVj 

fgUnh ¼vfuok;Z½ 

iw.kkZad % 90 


le; % 3 ?k.Vs 

1- gfj;k.koh yksd/kkjk 

2- iz;kstuewyd fgUnh 

3- fgUnh lkfgR; dk bfrgkl ¼e/;dky½ 

4- dkO;kax ¼vyadkj½ 

funsZ”k %& 

1- gfj;k.koh tuinh; Hkk’kk vkSj lkfgR; ij vk/kkfjr ^gfj;k.koh yksd/kkjk^ ikB~;iqLrd ds 

fuEufyf[kr 13 ¼rsjg½ dfo;ksa & ¼1- cLrhjke 2- QkSth esgjflag 3- rkjknÙk foy{k.k 4- jkes”ojn;ky 

“kkL=h 5- txnh”kpUnz oRl 6- gfjds”k iVokjh 7- ewypan oekZ 8- t;ukjk;.k dkSf”kd 9- HkkjrHkw’k.k 

lka?khoky 10- daoy gfj;k.koh 11 jkedqekj vk=s; 12 y{e.k flag 13- txchj jkBh½ esa ls O;k[;k ds fy, 

pkj vorj.k iwNs tk,axsA ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa dks buesa ls nks dh lizlax O;k[;k djuh gksxhA izR;sd O;k[;k 

lkr&lkr vadkas dh gksxhA 


fuEufyf[kr 6 ¼N%½ dfo;ksa %& & ¼1- y[kehpan] 2- ekaxsjke] 3- jkefd”ku O;kl] 4- QkSth esgjflag] 5- 

txnh”kpUnz oRl 6- gfjds”k iVokjh½ esa ls fdUgh nks jpukdkjksa dk lkfgfR;d ifjp; iwNk tk,xk] ftueas 

ls ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa dks ,d dk ifjp; fy[kuk gksxkA ;g iz”u vkB vadksa dk gksxkA 

3- gfj;k.koh yksd/kkjk ikB;iqLrd ds 6 ¼N%½ dfo;ksa & ¼1- y[kehpan] 2- ekaxsjke] 3- jkefd”ku 

O;kl] 4- QkSth esgjflag] 5- txnh”kpUnz oRl 6- gfjds”k iVokjh½ dh ^vuq”khyuh* esa ls fu/kkZfjr iz”uksa esa 

ls dksbZ nks iz”u iwNs tk,axs] ftuesa ls ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa dks ,d dk mÙkj nsuk gksxkA ;g iz”u vkB vadks a dk 

gksxkA 

4- iz;kstuewyd fgUnh vkSj fgUnh Hkk’kk ij vk/kkfjr iqLrd ls ¼i=dkfjrk vkSj Hkk’kk daI;wfVax½ pkj 

iz”u iwNs tk,axs] ftuesa ls ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa dks nks iz”uksa ds mÙkj nsus gksaxsA izR;sd iz”u nl&nl vadksa ds 

gksaxsA 

5- fgUnh lkfgR; dk bfrgkl ¼e/;dky½ ds fuEufyf[kr ikB~;fo’k;ksa & ¼1- HkfDrdkyhu ifjfLFkfr;ka 

2- lar dkO;/kkjk dh fo”ks’krk,a 3- izsekJ;h dkO;/kkjk dh fo”ks’krk,a 4- jkedkO;/kkjk dh fo”ks’krk,a 5- 

d`’.kdkO;/kkjk dh fo”ks’krk,a 6- HkfDrdky % Lo.kZ;qx 7- jhfrdky dh ifjfLFkfr;ka 8- jhfrdky dk 

ukedj.k 9- jhfrdky dh fo”ks’krk,a 10- jhfrdky dkO; dh fo”ks’krk,a½ esa ls pkj iz”u iwNs tk,axs] ftuesa 

ls ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa dks nks iz”uksa ds mÙkj nsus gksaxsA izR;sd iz”u vkB&vkB vadkas dk gksxkA 

6- fu/kkZfjr lexz ikB~;iqLrdksa ¼^gfj;k.koh yksd/kkjk^] iz;kstuewyd fgUnh vkSj fgUnh lkfgR; dk 

bfrgkl½ ls N% y?kwÙkjh iz”u iwNs tk,axs] ftuesa ls ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa dks rhu iz”uksa ds mÙkj ¼250&250 “kCnksa esa½ 

nsus gksaxsA izR;sd iz”u ikap vadksa dk gksxkA iwjk iz”u 15 vadksa dk gksxkA 

7- dkO;kax ls ¼vyadkj½ & ¼vuqizkl] “ys’k] ;ed] ohIlk] iqu#fDr izdk”k] miek] :id] mRizs{kk] 

vfr”k;ksfDr] ekuohdj.k½ esa ls nks vyadkjksa ds mnkgj.k lfgr y{k.k iwNs tk,axsA ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa dks ,d dk 

mÙkj nsuk gksxkA ;g iz”u 9 ¼ukS½ vadksa dk gksxkA 


tqykbZ] 2012 

ch-,- r`rh; o’kZ % ikapoka lsesLVj 

fgUnh ¼vfuok;Z½ 

iw.kkZad % 90 


le; % 3 ?k.Vs 


1- gfj;k.koh yksd/kkjk 

2- iz;kstuewyd fgUnh 

3- fgUnh lkfgR; dk bfrgkl ¼vkfndky½ 

4- dkO;kax ¼jl½ 

funsZ”k %& 


fuEufyf[kr 14 ¼pkSng½ dfo;ksa & ¼1- xjhcnkl] 2- furkuan] 3- tSrjke] 4- “kaHkw 5- vgenc[“k 

Fkkusljh] 6- ykyk nsorjke] 7- nhipan] 8- rkÅ lkaxh] 9- ckts Hkxr] 10- y[kehpan] 11- ekaxsjke] 12- 

jkefd”ku O;kl] 13- czãkuan ljLorh] 14- lk/kqjke½ esa ls O;k[;k ds fy, pkj vorj.k iwNs tk;saxsA 

ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa dks buesa ls nks dh lizlax O;k[;k djuh gksxhA izR;sd O;k[;k lkr&lkr vadksa dh gksxhA 


fuEufyf[kr 5 ¼ikap½ dfo;ksa %& ¼1- xjhcnkl] 2- furkuan] 3- vgenc[“k Fkkusljh] 4- nhipan] 5- ckts 

Hkxr½ esa ls fdUgha nks jpukdkjksa dk lkfgfR;d ifjp; iwNk tk,xk] ftueas ls ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa dks ,d dk 

ifjp; fy[kuk gksxkA ;g iz”u vkB vadksa dk gksxkA 

3- ^gfj;k.koh yksd/kkjk^ ikB;iqLrd ds 5 ¼ikap½ dfo;ksa & ¼1- xjhcnkl] 2- furkuan] 3- 

vgenc[“k Fkkusljh] 4- nhipan] 5- ckts Hkxr½ dh ^vuq”khyuh* esa ls fu/kkZfjr iz”uksa esa ls dksbZ nks 

iz”u iwNs tk;asxs] ftuesa ls ijh{kkfFkZ;kas dks ,d dk mÙkj nsuk gksxkA ;g iz”u vkB vadksa dk gksxkA 

4- iz;kstuewyd fgUnh vkSj fgUnh Hkk’kk ij vk/kkfjr iqLrd ls ¼iz;kstuewyd fgUnh vkSj dkedkth 

fgUnh½ pkj iz”u iwNs tk,axs] ftuesa ls ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa dks nks iz”uksa ds mÙkj nsus gksaxsA izR;sd iz”u 

nl&nl vadksa ds gksaxsA 

5- fgUnh lkfgR; dk bfrgkl ¼vkfndky½ ds fuEufyf[kr ikB~;fo’k;ksa & ¼1- fgUnh lkfgR; ds 

bfrgkl dk dky&foHkktu 2- vkfndky dk ukedj.k 3- vkfndky dh ifjfLFkfr;ka 4- vkfndky dh 

izo`fÙk;ka½ esa ls pkj iz”u iwNs tk,axs] ftuesa ls ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa dks nks iz”uksa ds mÙkj nsus gksaxsA izR;sd iz”u 

vkB&vkB vadksa dk gksxkA 

6- fu/kkZfjr lexz ikB~;iqLrdksa ¼gfj;k.koh yksd/kkjk] iz;kstuewyd fgUnh vkSj fgUnh lkfgR; dk 

bfrgkl½ ls N% y?kwÙkjh iz”u iwNs tk,axs] ftuesa ls ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa dks rhu iz”uksa ds mÙkj ¼250&250 “kCnksa 

esa½ nsus gksaxsA izR;sd iz”u ikap vadks dk gksxkA iwjk iz”u 15 vadksa dk gksxkA 

7- dkO;kax ls jl ¼fofo/k jl Hksn½ ls nks jlksa ds mnkgj.k lfgr y{k.k iwNs tk,axsA ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa 

dks ,d dk mÙkj nsuk gksxkA ;g iz”u 9 ¼ukS½ vadksa dk gksxkA 


Syllabus & Scheme of Examination B.A. Hindi Compulsory/Elective/Honours 3 rd & 4 th 

Semester (w.e.f. July 2012) 

B.A. III & IV Semester Hindi Compulsory : 

Paper Nomenclature Max. Marks Written Exam Internal Time 

No. 

marks Evaluation 

Hindi Compulsory 3 rd 

Semester 

100 80 20 3 hours 

Paper 

No. 

Paper 

No. 

Paper 

No. 

Nomenclature Max. Marks Written Exam Internal Time 


Hindi Compulsory 4 th 

Semester 

100 80 20 3 hours 



Hindi Elective 3 rd 

Semester 

100 80 20 3 hours 



Hindi Elective 4 th 

Semester 

100 80 20 3 hours 

B.A. Honours (Hindi) 3 rd Semester 


No. 


5 Madyakalin hindi kavita 100 80 20 3 hours 

6 Adhunik hindi kavita 100 80 20 3 hours 

7 Kahani sahitya 100 80 20 3 hours 

B.A. Honours (Hindi) 4th Semester 


No. 


8 Nibandh sahitya 100 80 20 3 hours 

9 Sansmaran aur 

Aatamkatha 

100 80 20 3 hours 

10 Hindi sahitya ka itihaas 

(Aadikaal, bhaktikaal aur 

ritikaal) 

100 80 20 3 hours 





















B.A. (GENERAL) HISTORY (SEMESTER SYSTEM) 

OUTLINES OF TEST AND SYLLABUS (w.e.f. 2012-13) 

B.A. – Part III 


Option – (i) Ancient and Medieval World 

Option – (ii) Modern Europe (1789-1945 A. D) 

Option – (i) Modern World 

Option – (ii) East Asia in Modern Times 


10(1116) 


B.A. (History) – Part III (General) (Semester-System) 

Option- (i): Ancient and Medieval World 

Semester - V 

Outlines of Test and Syllabus w.e.f. 2012-13 

10(1117) 




Time: 3 Hours 

Note- 1. The question paper will consist of 11 questions in all. The candidate will have to attempt 

5 questions in all, selecting one question from each section. The paper will carry 90 marks 

out of which 10 marks will be earmarked for internal assessment. Each question will 

therefore carry 18 marks 

2. There shall be a compulsory question on map carrying 18 marks (12 for map work and 6 

for explanatory note). Visually handicapped candidates may not attempt the map 

question. In lieu of the map question, they may attempt any other question. However, in 

case they wish to attempt the map question, the part relating to the explanatory note will 

carry full marks. 

3. There shall be one objective type question. The question will be divided into three Parts. 

Part - I shall have short answer type questions of 8 marks. The examiner will set 6 short 

answer type questions out of which candidate will have to attempt 4 questions. Part - II 

will have 5 multiple choice questions of 5 marks. Part - III shall have matching type 5 

questions of 5 marks. 

Section- I 

1. Pre-historic Age : Hunter-Gatherers and Food produces 

2. Bronze Age Civilizations: Egypt and Mesopotamia Polity, Economic Structure, Science and 

Technology 

3. Iron Age Civilizations : Greek and Rome : Polity, Economic Structure, Science and 

Technology 

Section- II 

4. Feudalism in Medieval Europe: Origins, Manorial System; Position of Peasants and Decline 

of Feudalism 

5. Medieval State and Church 

6. Feudal Economy : Organisation of Agricultural and Non-Agricultural Production; Trade 

and Commerce; Rise of Towns 

Section- III 

7 Arabia before Islam 

8. Rise of Islam : Prophet Hazrat Muhammad and his Teachings. 

9. Evolution of Islamic State : Administrative Structure under the pious caliphs Umayyad and 

Abbasids 

10. Islamic Society 


Section- IV 

Maps 

11 Important Sites of Bronze Age Civilizations. 

12. Important Towns of the Greek Civilizations. 

13. Important Towns of Roman Civilization 

14. Expansion of Islam 

Objective Type Questions 


Section – V 

1 A.H.M. Jones Constantine and Conversion of Europe. 

2 A.J. Wensinck The Muslim Creed. 

3 A.R. Burn Pelican History of Greek. 

4 A.S. Trinton Islam 

5 A. Ali The Spirit of Islam. 

6 Bernard Lewis The Arabs in History. 

7 C.E. Bosworth and Joseph Schachs The Legacy of Islam. 

8 C. Stephenson Medieval Feudalism. 

9 Carl Stephenson Medieval History (Europe) (From 2 nd to 16 Century) 

10 Dominique Sourdel Medieval Islam. 

11 Franceso Gabrieli The Arab Revival. 

12 Herbert Heaton Economic History of Europe. 

13 H.A.R. Gibo Mohammedanism: A Historical Survey. 

14 J.W. Thompson Middle Ages. 2 Vols. 

15 K.P. Shahu Islam: Udbhav Aur Vikas 

16 Margaret Deanesly A History of Early Medieval Europe. 

17 M.I. Finley The Ancient Economy. 

18 March Bloch Feudal Society, Vols. I and II 

19 Maurice Keen A History of the Medieval Europe. 

20 Montogomery Watt Muhammad in Mecca and Madina. 

21 W. Muir The Caliphate. 

22 Perry Anderson Passages from Antiquity to Feudalism. 

23 P.K. Hitti History of the Arabs. 

24 P.K. Hitti Islam: A Way of Life. 

25 Robert Latouche The Birth of Western Economy. 

26 R. Levy The Social Structure of Islam. 

27 Solomon Katz The Social Structure of Islam. 

28 Shepard B. Clough The Economic Development of Western Europe. 

29 S.N. Kramer The Sumerians. 

30 Thomas Arnold The Caliphate. 

31 T.W. Arnold Preaching of Islam. 

Option- (ii): Modern Europe (1789-1945 A. D) 

10(1118) 





10(1119) 

Time: 3 Hours 















Section- I 

French Revolution: Causes, Nature and Consequences 

Napoleon Bonaparte : Rise to Power, Reforms System and Continental system 

Congress of Vienna : Motives, Provisions and Significance 

Section- II 

Conservative Reaction in Europe : Metternich System and the Concert of Europe 

Glorious Revolution (1688). 

Nationalism in Europe : Unifications of Italy and Germany 

Bismarck and his Diplomatic Alliances : Formation of Triple Alliance and Triple Entente 

Section- III 


Peace Settlements: Treaty of Versailles - Provisions, Nature and Effects. 

Bolshevik Revolution : Causes Nature and Impact 

World War II : Causes and Consequences 

Section- IV 

Maps (World, Europe, Italy and Germany) 

Europe on the eve of |French Revolution. 

Unification of Italy 

Unification of Germany 

Europe on the Eve of World War – I 

Europe on the Eve of World War –II 



Section – V 


1 Anderson, Pery Lineages of the Absolutist State 

2 Barrachough, G. An Introduction to Contemporary History (Penguin, 1968) 

3 Bronowski, J., and Bruce The Western Intellectual Tradition (Ayer Co., Publication, 

Mazlish 

1960) 

4 Bury, J.I.T. France, 1840 (Rutledge, Chapman and Hall, 1985) 

5 Carr, E.H. The Bolshevik Revolution, 1917-23, 3 Vols. (Macmillan, 

1950, 1951 and 1953) 

6 Davies, H.A. Outline History of the World ed. 

7 Fisher, H.A.L. A History of Europe (London, Fontana Library, 1969). 

8 Henderson, O.P. The Industrial Revolution on the Continent. 

9 Hill, Christopher From Reformation to Industrial Revolution (Penguin, 1970) 

10 Hill, Christopher Lenin and the Russian Revolution, (Penguin, 1978) 

11 Hinsely, F.H. (ed.) Modern History: Material Progress and World Wide 

Problems 

12 Joll, James Europe Since 1870: An International History (Harper-Row, 

1973) 

13 Langer, W.L., Diplomacy of Imperialism. 

14 Langer, W.L., European Alliances and Alignments (Greenwood, 1977). 

15 Lefebvre, Georges Coming f the French Revolution (Princeton, 1989) 

16 Palmer, R.A. and Cotton 

Joel 

A History of Modern World, 6 th e.d. (McGraw, 1982) 

17 Parks, H.B. The United States of America. 

18 Randal J.G. and David The Civil War and Reconstruction, 2 

Donalds 

nd Ed. (rev.) Health, 

1969. 

19 Rolls, Eric History of Economic Thought 

20 Rude, George Revolutionary Europe (1984) 

21 Saboul, A. The French Revolution. 

22 Stavrianes, L.S. The World Since 1500 (1928) 

23 Taylor, A.J.P. The Origins of the Second World War. 

24 Taylor A.J.P. The Struggle for Mastery in Europe (OUP,1954) 

25 Thompson, David Europe Since Napoleon (Penguin, 1957,1966) 

10(1120) 


Option- (i): Modern World 

B.A. (History) – Part III (General) 

Semester - VI 

Outlines of Test and Syllabus w.e.f. 2012-13 

10(1121) 




Time: 3 Hours 















Section- I 

Rise of Modern West : Renaissance and Reformation 

Rise of Capitalism in Europe : Mercantilism 

Scientific and Industrial Revolution, Agricultural Revolution. 

Section- II 

Glorious Revolution : Causes and Impact. 

American Revolution: Causes, Progress and Impact 

French Revolution : Causes Nature and Impact 

Section- III 

China : Opium Wars; Revolution of 1911, Communist Revolution of 1949 


Paris Peace Settlements: Important Treaties – Provisions and Consequences 

World War II : Causes and Consequences 

Maps (Europe and World): 

Extent of Industrial Revolution in Europe 

Europe on the Eve French Revolution 

Section- IV 


Polarization of World War – I 

Polarization of World War – II 



Section – V 

1 A.H.M. Jones Constantine and Conversion of Europe. 

2 A.J. Wensinck The Muslim Creed. 

3 A.R. Burn Pelican History of Greek. 

4 A.S. Trinton Islam 

5 A. Ali The Spirit of Islam. 

6 Bernard Lewis The Arabs in History. 

7 C.E. Bosworth and Joseph Schachs The Legacy of Islam. 

8 C. Stephenson Medieval Feudalism. 

9 Carl Stephenson Medieval History (Europe) (From 2 nd to 16 Century) 

10 Dominique Sourdel Medieval Islam. 

11 Francesco Gabrieli The Arab Revival. 

12 Herbert Heaton Economic History of Europe. 

13 H.A.R. Gibo Mohammedanism: A Historical Survey. 

14 J.W. Thompson Middle Ages. 2 Vols. 

15 K.P. Shahu Islam: Udbhav Aur Vikas 

16 Margaret Deanesly A History of Early Medieval Europe. 

17 M.I. Finley The Ancient Economy. 

18 March Bloch Feudal Society, Vols. I and II 

19 Maurice Keen A History of the Medieval Europe. 

20 Montogomery Watt Muhammad in Mecca and Madina. 

21 W. Muir The Caliphate. 

22 Perry Anderson Passages from Antiquity to Feudalism. 

23 P.K. Hatti History of the Arabs. 

24 P.K. Hatti Islam: A Way of Life. 

25 Robert Latouche The Birth of Western Economy. 

26 R. Levy The Social Structure of Islam. 

27 Solomon Katz The Social Structure of Islam. 

28 Shepard B. Clough The Economic Development of Western Europe. 

29 S.N. Kramer The Sumerians. 

30 Thomas Arnold The Caliphate. 

31 T.W. Arnold Preaching of Islam. 

Option- (ii): East Asia in Modern Times 

10(1122) 




Time: 3 Hours 
















Section- I 

The Canton System in China and Opium Wars; Anti Imperialist Movements: Taping 

Revolution and Boxer Uprising 

The Chinese Revolution of 1911; Cause Nature and Significance 

Dr. Sum Yat Sen and his Contribution 

Communist Revolution of 1949; Causes, Nature and Significance. 

Section- II 

The Meiji Restoration in Japan : Causes, Progress and Significance 

Foreign Policy of Japan, 1900-1919 

Militarism in Japan 


Section- III 

Social and Economic Transition in China before 1911 

Industrial and Agricultural Transformation in Japan 

Social Change in Japan 


Section- IV 

Maps 


Important Ports open Western Powers in Japan 

Important Towns and Ports of Japan affected during World War- II 




Section – V 

1 Anderson, Pery Lineages of the Absolutist State 

2 Barrachough, G. An Introduction to Contemporary History (Penguin, 1968) 

3 Bronowski, J., and Bruce The Western Intellectual Tradition (Ayer Co., Publication, 

10(1123) 


Mazlish 1960) 

4 Bury, J.I.T. France, 1840 (Rutledge, Chapman and Hall, 1985) 

5 Carr, E.H. The Bolshevik Revolution, 1917-23, 3 Vols. (Macmillan, 

1950, 1951 and 1953) 

6 Davies, H.A. Outline History of the World ed. 

7 Fisher, H.A.L. A History of Europe (London, Fontana Library, 1969). 

8 Henderson, O.P. The Industrial Revolution on the Continent. 

9 Hill, Christopher From Reformation to Industrial Revolution (Penguin, 1970) 

10 Hill, Christopher Lenin and the Russian Revolution, (Penguin, 1978) 

11 Hinsely, F.H. (ed.) Modern History: Material Progress and World Wide 

Problems 

12 Joll, James Europe Since 1870: An International History (Harper-Row, 

1973) 

13 Langer, W.L., Diplomacy of Imperialism. 

14 Langer, W.L., European Alliances and Alignments (Greenwood, 1977). 

15 Lefebvre, Georges Coming f the French Revolution (Princeton, 1989) 

16 Palmer, R.A. and Cotton 

Joel 

A History of Modern World, 6 th e.d. (McGraw, 1982) 

17 Parks, H.B. The United States of America. 

18 Randal J.G. and David The Civil War and Reconstruction, 2 

Donalds 

nd Ed. (rev.) Health, 

1969. 

19 Rolls, Eric History of Economic Thought 

20 Rude, George Revolutionary Europe (1984) 

21 Saboul, A. The French Revolution. 

22 Stavrianes, L.S. The World Since 1500 (1928) 

23 Taylor, A.J.P. The Origins of the Second World War. 

24 Taylor A.J.P. The Struggle for Mastery in Europe (OUP,1954) 

25 Thompson, David Europe Since Napoleon (Penguin, 1957,1966) 

10(1124) 


B.A. (HONS.) HISTORY (SEMESTER SYSTEM) 

OUTLINES OF TEST AND SYLLABUS (w.e.f. 2012-13) 

B.A. (Hons.) History – Part III 


Paper – I East Asia in Modern Times 

Paper – II Modern India (1858-1947) 

Paper – III (Opt. i) History of the U.S.A. (1776-1865) 

Paper – III (Opt. ii) History of Russia (1855-1917) 


Paper – I Indian National Movement 

Paper – II Rise of Indian Republic (1947-1964) 

Paper – III (Opt. i) History of the U.S.A. (1865-1945) 

Paper – III (Opt. ii) History of the U.S.S.R. (1917-1991) 

10(1125) 


B.A. (Hons.) History , Part – III (Semester System) 

Paper – I : East Asia in Modern Times 

Outlines of Test and Syllabus (w.e.f. 2012-13) 


10(1126) 

Marks: 90 


Time: 3 Hours 

Note :- 1. The question paper will consist of 11 questions. The candidate will have to 

attempt 5 questions in all, selecting one question from each Unit. The paper will 

carry 100 marks out of which 10 marks will be earmarked for internal 

assessment. Each question will therefore carry 18 marks. 

2 There will be a compulsory question on map carrying 18 marks (12 for map work 

and 6 for explanatory note). Visually handicapped candidates may not attempt 

the map question. In lieu of the map question, they may attempt any other 

question. However, in case they wish to attempt the map question, the part 

relating to the explanatory note will carry full marks. 

3 There will be one objective type question. The question will be divided into three 

Parts. Part - I will have short answer type questions of 8 marks. The examiner 

will set 8 short answer type Questions out of which the candidate will have to 

attempt 4 Questions. Part - II will have 5 multiple choice questions of 5 marks. 

Part - III will have matching type 5 questions of 5 marks. 

Unit- I 

The Canton System in China – Opium Wars; Boxer Uprising 

Revolution of 1911: Causes and Significance 

The May Fourth Movement : Causes and Impact 

Communist Revolution of 1949 : Causes and Significance 

Unit- II 

The Meiji Restoration in Japan : Causes and Significance 

Foreign Policy of Japan 1900-1919 

Militarism in Japan : Causes and Consequences 


Unit- III 


Social Change in Japan after Meiji Restoration 

Land Collectivization and Economic Change in China after 1949 


Maps (China and Japan) : 


Unit- IV 



Important Towns and Ports of Japan Affected during World War- II 


Unit – V 

Objective Type Question 





Jean Chesnoaux et.al. China from the 1911 Revolution to Liberation 

Tan Chuntg Triton and Dragon Studies in the Nineteenth Century China and Imperialism 

John K. Faribank et.al East Asia: Modern Transformation 

Mikiso Hane, Modern Japan: A Historical Survey 

Y. Immaneul Hus. The Rise of Modern China 

Chalmers A. Johnson Peasant Nationalism and Communist Power: The Emergence of 

Red China 1937-1945 

John. Livingstone et.al. The Japan Reader : Imperial Japan 1800-1945, Vol. I 


Nathaniel Peffer The Far East: A Modern History 


Kenneth B. Pyle The Making of Modern Japan 

Frauz Schurmann and Orville China Readings: Imperial China and Republican China, 2 Vols. 

Schell (ed.) 




China 

Mao Tse Tung Selected Writings 


P.H.Clyde Far East 


Vinayake Poorvi Asia Ka Itihas (Hindi) 

Paper – II: Modern India (1858-1947) 

10(1127) 

Marks: 90 


Time: 3 Hours 


attempt 5 questions in all, selecting one question from each Unit. The paper 

will carry 100 marks out of which 10 marks will be earmarked for internal 


2 There will be a compulsory question on map carrying 18 marks (12 for map 

work and 6 for explanatory note). Visually handicapped candidates may not 

attempt the map question. In lieu of the map question, they may attempt any 

other question. However, in case they wish to attempt the map question, the 

part relating to the explanatory note will carry full marks. 


3 There will be one objective type question. The question will be divided into 

three Parts. Part - I will have short answer type questions of 8 marks. The 

examiner will set 8 short answer type Questions out of which the candidate 

will have to attempt 4 Questions. Part - II will have 5 multiple choice 

questions of 5 marks. Part - III will have matching type 5 questions of 5 

marks. 

Unit – I 


Social Reform Movements: Brahmo Samaj; Arya Samaj; Ramkrishan Mission; 

Satyashodhak Samaj and Aligarh Movement 

Expansion of Railways and its Impact 


Press and Literature 


Peasant Movements 

Labour Movements 



Process of Modernization 

Unit – II 

Unit - III 

Unit – IV 

Maps (India): 

Important Centers of Social Reforms Movements 

Major Centers of Peasants Movements 


Major Centers of Labour Movements 



Unit - V 

Bayly, Susan Caste Society and Politics in India: The New Cambridge 

History of India 




Frykenberg, R.E. Land Control and Social Structure in India 



Majumdar, Datta and Ray- Advanced History of India 

Chowdhary (eds.) 


Times 

10(1128) 



Mishra, Girish Adhunik Bharat Ka Arthik Itihas (Hindi) 






Patel, Vallabbhai Correspondence, Writings and Speeches 

Rai, Satya M.(ed.) Bharat Mein Upniveshwad Aur Rashtrawad (Hindi) 


Habib 

Shukla, R.L. (ed.) Adhunik Bharat Ka Itihas (Hindi) 

Sen, Sunil, K. Agrarian Relations in India, 1793-1947 

Spear, T. G. P. History of India, Vol. II 

Srinivas, M.N. Social Change in Modern India 

Stein, Burton The Making of Agrarian Policy in British India, 1770- 

1900 

Tandon, B.B. & K.K.Tandon Indian Economy 

Paper – III (Opt.- i): History of the U.S.A. (1776-1865) 

10(1129) 

Marks: 90 


Time: 3 Hours 















Unit – I 

Circumstances Leading to the American Revolution 

Nature and Significance of the War of Independence 

Process of the Making of Constitution 

Evolution of American Democracy 

Unit – II 

Political Parties and Electoral Politics during 1840-1860 


The Monroe Doctrine 

Expansion of Frontiers and Turner’s Thesis 

Mexico-American War 

Unit – III 

Problem of Blacks and its Complications 

Sectional Conflict : Origins and Growth 

The Civil War : Causes, Course and Consequences 

Abraham Lincoln’s Role in the Emancipation of Slaves 

Unit –IV 

Maps (U.S.A.) 

Colonies in America on the Eve of Revolution 

Republic of U.S.A. and its States 

Expansion of Frontiers in Turner’s Regime 

Northern and Southern States Involved in the Civil War 



Unit – V 

Bernard Baillyn The Great Republic 

Bernard Baillyn The Ideological Origins of the American Revolution 

Charles Beard An Economic Interpretation of the American Constitution 

Dee Brown History of the American West. 

Peter Carroll and David 

Noble 

Free and Unfree : A New History of the United States 

David B. Davis The Problem of Slaves in the Age of Revolution 

U.Faulkner Economic History of the United States of America 

Eric Foner America’s Black Past 

John Hope Franklin From Slavery to Freedom 

Gorald N. Grobb and Interpretations of American History : Patterns and Perspectives, 

George 

2 Vols. 

Richard Hofstadier The Age of Reform From Bryan to F.D.R. 

David M. Potter The Impending Crisis 

W. Pratt. A History of the United States Foreign Policy 

James Randall The Civil War and Reconstruction 

J.G.Randall and David 

Donald 

The Civil War and Reconstruction 

Keneeth Stamp The Peculiar Institution Slavery in the Ante-Beilum South 

Fedrick Jackson Turner The Frontier in American History 

Robert Wiebe The Search for Order 

Saxena, B.L. Sayunkt Rajya America Ka Itihas (Hindi) 

Lance E. Davis (ed.) American Economic Growth 

10(1130) 


Paper – III (Opt.-ii) : History of Russia (1855-1917) 

10(1131) 

Marks: 90 


Time: 3 Hours 
















Unit – I 

Regime of Alexander - II : Abolition of Serfdom and its Results 

Other Reforms – Local Government, Educational and Military 

Problem of Multilingual Groups and Policy of Russification 

Unit – II 

Economic and Industrial Development during the 19th Century 

Growth of Revolutionary Ideas: Populism; Nihilism; Socialism; Social Democrats 

Unit – III 

The Russo-Japanese War: Causes and Consequences 

Revolution of 1905: Causes, Nature and Impact 

World War – I and Russia: Involvement and Consequences 

Unit –IV 

Maps (Russia) : 

Political Conditions in the Regime of Alexander-II 

Areas of Different Multilingual Groups 

Industrial Centers during the 19th Century 

Political Conditions on the Eve of World War-I 


Unit – V 

Dukes, Paul A History of Russia 

Hans, Konn Basic History of Modern Russia 

Hobsbawm, Eric Age of Extremes: The Short Twentieth Century 


Kirchnev, Walter History of Russia 

Kohan, Lionel The Making of Modern Russia 

Lenin, V.I. The Development of Capitalism in Russia 

Milicakov, P.Seignobos History of Russia, Vol. III 

Omytryshyn, Besil A History of Russia 

Semirnov, T.L. (ed.) A Short History of the U.S.S.R (2 Vols.) 

Seton Watson, H The Decline of Imperial Russia 


Sumner, R.H. A Survey of Russian History 

Thanden, Edward, C. Russia Since 1801 

Thronton, Anderson Russian Political Thought 

Watson, Seton The Russian Empire 

Westwood, J.N. Endurance and Endeavour 


Outlines of Test and Syllabus 

Paper – I: Indian National Movement 

Note :- 1. 

Marks: 90 


Time: 3 Hours 

The question paper will consist of 11 questions. The candidate will have to 











examiner will set 8short answer type questions out of which the candidate will 

have to attempt 4 Questions. Part - II will have 5 multiple choice questions of 

5 marks. Part - III will have matching type 5 questions of 5 marks. 

Unit – I 




Rowlet Satyagrah and Home Rule Movement 

Unit – II 

Emergence of Mahatma Gandhi: Non-Cooperation Movement, Civil Disobedience 

Movement and Quit India Movement 


10(1132) 


Unit- III 

Political Reforms : Acts of 1909 and 1919 





Unit – IV 

Maps (India): 




Areas and Centers of Quit India Movement 



Unit- – V 

Agrow, D. Moderates and Extremists in the Indian National Movement 






Guha, Ranjit (ed.) Subaltern Studies, Vol. I – XI 




Majumdar, Datta and Ray Advanced History of India 

chowdhary 

Moon, Penderal Divide and Quit 



Omvedt, Gail Dalits and Democratic Revolution:Dr. Ambedkar and Dalit 

Movement inColonial India 


Rai, Satya M. Bharat Me Upniveshwad Aur Rashtrawad (Hindi) 


Sarkar, Sumit Adhunik Bharat (Hindi) 



Tomlinson, B.R. Indian National Congress and the Raj, : 1929-1942 

Vajpeyee, J.N. Adhunik Bharat Ka Ithas (Hindi) 

10(1133) 


Paper – II : Rise of Indian Republic (1947-1964) 

10(1134) 

Marks: 90 


Time: 3 Hours 












examiner will set 8 short answer type Questions out of which the candidate 

will have to attempt 4 Questions. Part - II will have 5 multiple choice 

questions of 5 marks. Part - III will have matching type 5 questions of 5 

marks. 

Unit – I 




Making of Indian Constitution and the Role of Dr. B.R.Ambedkar 

Problem of Kashmir 

Unit – II 

Economic Development: Five Year Plans 

Social Justice: Law and Policies for the Uplift of Weaker Sections 


Relations with Neighbourers : Pakistan and China 

Unit - III 

Linguistic Reorganization of States 

Growth of Democracy: Political Parties at National Level 

Development of Science, Technology and Modern Education 

Social Change: Caste, Class and Family 

Unit – IV 

Maps (India): 

India and its State after Independence 

Major Princely States Integrated in India 

Major Industrial Centers of India 

India and its States in 1956 


Unit – V 



Balbushevik, A. & Dyakov, 

A.M. 

A Contemporary History of India 



Bipan Chandra et. al. India’s Struggle For Independence 

Bipan Chandra et. al. Swatantrottra Bharat (Hindi) 


Desai, A.R. Bharat Ka Vikas Marg (Hindi) 






Majumdar, 

chowdhary 

Datta and Ray Advanced History of India 




Omvedt, Gail Dalits and Democratic Revolution: Dr. Ambedkar and 

Dalit Movement inColonial India 


Patel, Vallabhbhai Correspondence, Writings and Speeches 




Shukla, R. L. (ed.) Adhunik Bharat Ka Itihas (Hindi) 


Tara Chand History of the Freedom Movement in India, Vol. IV 



Paper – III (Opt.- i): History of the U.S.A. (1865-1945) 

10(1135) 

Marks: 90 


Time: 3 Hours 
















Reconstruction after Civil War 

Growth of Capitalism and Big Business 

Labour Movement 

Rise of Agrarian Unrest 

Unit- I 

Unit- II 

Populist Movement 

Progressive Movement 

Rise of Imperialism: Spanish-American War 

Expansion in the Far East and Latin America 

Unit- III 

U.S.A.’s Role in the World War-I and Paris Peace Settlement 

Economic Depression and the New Deal 

World War – II and the U.S.A.: Involvement and Consequences 

Unit – IV 

Maps (U.S.A.) : 


Areas and Centres of Labour Movement 

Areas of Agrarian Unrest 

U.S.A. before World War-II 

Unit – V 



Blum, John M. et. al. The National Experience : A History of the United 

States 

Boord, Charles Mary The Rise of American Civilization, 2 Vols. 

Boyer, Paul, Marvard Sitkoff et. The Enduring Vision : A History of the American 

al 

People, Vol. 1 

Current, Richard, M.T. Williams 

et. al. 

American History : A Survey, Vol. 1 

Dunning, William A. Reconstruction : Political and Economic 

Endoes, James F. History of the United States 

Faulkner, H.U American Economic History 

Franklin, John Hope From Slavery to Freedom 

Grobb, Gerald N. and George A. Interpretations of American History : Patterns and 

Billigs 

Perspectives, 2 Vols. 

Hicks, John D. The Federal Union : A History of the U.S.A. Since 1865 

10(1136) 


Hicks, John D. et. al. The American Nation 

Kaushik, R.P. Significant Themes in American History 

May, E.R. The World War and American Isolation 

Mofstadter, R.W.N. The American Republic Since 1865 

Morrison, S.E. et. al. The Growth of the American Republic 

Nicholas, Jeannetta P. The Republic of United States : A History 

Parkes, Henary B.et. al. The United States of America 

Pratt, J. W. A History of the United States Foreign Policy 


Tripathi, Dwijendra and S.C. 

Tiwari 

Themes and Perspective in American History 

Paper – III (Opt.- ii): History of the U.S.S.R. (1917-1991) 

10(1137) 

Marks: 90 


Time: 3 Hours 















Unit- I 

Social, Economic and Political Conditions of Russia on the Eve of the Revolutions of 1917 

Peasant Movement 

Working Class Movement 

Rise of Marxism: Bolsheviks and Mensheviks 

The February Revolution: Causes and Consequences 

Unit- II 

The October Revolution: Causes, Course and Significance 

War Communism and Emergence of the U.S.S.R. 

New Economic Policy under Lenin 

Land Collectivization under Stalin 


Unit- III 

U.S.S.R. and World War-II 

Process of De-Stalinization under Khrushchev 

U.S.S.R. and the Cold War 

Emerging Stagnancy in Soviet State under Brezhnev 

Reforms of Gorbachev and Disintegration of the U.S.S.R. 

Unit – IV 


Political Conditions on the Eve of Revolution of 1917 

Important Places Connected with the Bolshevik Revolution 

Emergence of the U.S.S.R. and its Constituent States 

Newly Emerged Countries after Disintegration of the U.S.S.R. 



Unit – V 

E.H.Carr History of Soviet Russia, 4 Volumes, 1952 

Stephen F. Cohen Bukhrin and the Boishevik Revolution : A Political Biography 

Isaac Deutscher Stalin, 1949 

Maurice Dobb Soviet Economic Development Since 1917 

Marc Ferro The Russian Revolution of 1917 

Sheila Fitzpatrick Cultural Revolution in Soviet Russia, 1978 

Arch Getty The Origins of the Great Purges, 1985 

Graeme Gill Peasants in the Russian Revolution, 1979 

John Keep The Last Empire : A History of the Soviet Union 1945-1991, 1995 

John Keep The Russian Revolution : A Study in Mass Mobilization, 1976 

Moshe Levin The Making of Soviet System, 1985 

Roy & Zhores Medveddev Khrushchev : The Years in Power, 1977 

Alec Nove An Economic History of the U.S.S.R., 1993 

Richard Pipes Russia of the Old Regime 

L. Szamuely First Model of Socialist Economic System 

L. Trotsky The History of the Russian Revolution (Translated by Max Eastman), 

1959 

A.B.Ulam Expansion and Coexistence : A History of Soviet Foreign Policy 

1917-1967 

K. Vaidyanathan The Formation of the Soviet Central Asian Nationalities 

10(1138) 


Paper 

No. 


B.A. (General) History – Part – I, Semester – I 


Nomenclature Internal 

Assessment 

Option-i Ancient India (From Earliest Times to 

Gupta Age) 

Option-ii History of Haryana (From Harappan 

Age to 1526 A.D) 


Option –(i) : Ancient India (From Earliest Times to Gupta Age) 

10(1139) 

Theory 

Paper 

Marks 

Total 

Marks 

Time 

20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 

Note :- 1. The question paper will consist of nine questions. The candidate shall attempt five 

questions in all. The Question No. 1 will be compulsory. The Candidate shall 

attempt four more questions selecting at least one from each Unit. The paper will 

carry 100 marks out of which 20 marks will be earmarked for internal assessment. 

Each question will, therefore, carry 16 marks. 

2 The Question No. 1 will be short answer type containing four questions of equal 

marks (i.e., 4 marks each) spread over the whole syllabus. 


explanatory note). For visually handicapped candidates, the part relating to the 

explanatory note will carry full marks. 

Unit- I 

Meaning and Scope of History 

Sources of Ancient Indian History 



Harappan Civilization: Origins, Extent, Town Planning, Economy, Society, Arts and Political 

Organization 

Vedic Culture: Polity, Society, Religion and Literature 

Unit- II 

Social Institutions: Varna, Caste, Untouchability, and Gender Relations Emergence of State: 

Sixteen Mahajanpadas and the Rise of Magada Empire 

Religious Movements: Buddhism and Jainism 


Unit- III 



Post - Mauryan Empires : Kushanas and Satvahanas 

Gupta Empire: State, Administration, Agrarian and Land Revenue System, Urban Centres, 


Unit-IV 

Maps (India): 


Ports and Urban Centres in Ancient India 

Ashoka’s Empire : Extent, Pillars and Edicts 

Extent of Kanishka’s Empire 

Extent of Samudragupta’s Empire 


Allchin, B.and Allchin, F.R. Rise of Civilisation in India and Pakistan (Delhi : Select Book 





Chakrabarti, D.K. India : An Archaeological History, Palaeolithic beginnings to 

Early Historical Foundation (Delhi OUP, 1999) 


1998) 


1986) 

Jha, D.N. and Shrimali, K.M. Prachin Bharat Ka Itihas (Delhi, Hindi Directorate, 1990) 

Majumdar, R.C. et al. History and Culture of the Indian People, Vols. II, III, IV and 

V (Mumbai Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan Series, 1970, 1979, 1980) 

Nilkanta Shastri, K.A. A History of South India From Pre-Historic Times to the Fall of 


Sharma, R.S. Aspects of Political Ideas and Institution in Ancient India 



1985) 

Thapar, Romila A History of India, Vol. I, Pelican, 1966 

Thapar, Romila From Lineage to State : Social Formations in the Mid-first 

Millennium BC in the Ganga Valley., Bombay : oxford, 1984 

Option –(ii) History of Haryana (From Harappan Age to 1526 A.D) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 



10(1140) 










Unit- I 



Extent of Harappan Civilization in Haryana 

Expansion of Vedic Culture in Haryana 

Unit-II 




Unit-III 



Socio - Cultural Transition: Impact of Islam 

Economic Conditions up to 1526 

Unit-IV 


Important Excavated and Explored Sites of Harappan Civilization in Haryana 


Towns in Haryana (600 B. C. to 1000 A.D.) 

Invasions of Ghaznavi and Ghori in Haryana 

Towns in Haryana (1000 A.D. to 1526 A.D.) 




K.C. Yadav Haryana Ka Itihas, Delhi, 1981. 

K.C. Yadav Haryana: Itihas Evam Sanskriti (Hindi), 2 Vols., Delhi, 1992) 






10(1141) 


Paper 

No. 

B.A. (General) History – Part – I, Semester – II 



Assessment 

10(1142) 

Theory 

Paper 

Marks 

Total 

Marks 

Time 

Option-i History of India (600-1526 A.D.) 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-ii History of Haryana (1526-1966 A.D.) 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Option – (i): History of India (600-1526 A.D) 


Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 











Unit- I 


Polity and Economy with special reference to Indian Feudalism (750- 1206 A.D): 


Socio-Cultural Trends: Society, Culture and Literature during 600-1206 A.D. 

Unit-II 

Invasions of Mahmud Ghaznavi and Muhammad Ghori - Causes of Success and Effects 

Rise and Expansion of Delhi Sultanate: Iltutmish, Balban, Ala-ud-din Khilji and 

Muhammad Tughlaq 



Unit-III 

Delhi Sultanate: Political and Administrative Institutions, Ruling Classes 

Economic and Technological Developments during 1206-1526 A.D: Agriculture, Industry, 




Unit-IV 

Maps (India): 



Extent of Muhammad Tughlaq’s Empire 

Extent of Vijaynagar Empire 

Urban Centres under the Delhi Sultanate 


Ashraf, K.M. Life and Conditions of the People of Hindustan (Delhi, 1965) 

Basham, A.L. The Wonder That Was India (Mumbai, 1971) 

Brown, Percy Indian Architecture Vol. – 1 (Mumbai 1984) 

Burton, Stein History of India (Oxford, 1998) 

Burton, Stein Vijayanagar (Cambridge , 1989) 


Habib, Muhammad and Comprehensive History of India, Vol. V (Delhi, 1970) 

Nizami, K.A. 

Harle J.C. Art and Architecture of the Indian Subcontinent (Penguin, 1986) 



Kulke, H and Rothenmund, 

D. 

History of India (London, 1998) 


(Mumbai, 1970, 1980) 

Panday, A.B. Early Medieval India, (Allahabad, 1970) 

Panday, Vimal Chander Prachin Bharat Ka Rajnatik Tatha Sanskritik Itihas, Bhag - 2 


Rizvi, S.A.A The Wonder That Was India, Vol. 2, (London 1987) 

Satish Chandra Medieval India from the Sultanate to the Mughals (Delhi, 1997) 


(Delhi, 2007) 


(Delhi, 1991) 

Shastri, K.A. Nilkanta A History of South India From Pre-Historic Times to the Fall of 

Vijaynagar (Chennai, 1983) 

Shastri, K.A.N. History of South India (Delhi, 1975) 

Thapar, Romila A History of India, Vol. I, (1966) 

Option - (ii): History of Haryana (1526-1966 A. D) 

10(1143) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 












Unit- I 

Mughal Rule in Haryana : Establishment, Administration and Decline 

Emergence of Composite Culture 

Society, Economy, Art and Architecture in Haryana under the Mughals 


Unit-II 

The British Rule: Establishment and Administration 

Uprising of 1857: Nature and Effects 



Unit-III 


Social Transition and Reform Movements: Arya Samaj and Sanatan Dharam Sabha 

Economic Effects of the Colonial Rule 


Unit-IV 



Major Centers of Uprising of 1857 



Formation of Haryana State : Districts and Important Cities 




D.C.Verma Haryana, Delhi, 1972 



Inderjeet Kakara Madhyakalin Haryana- (Hindi), Kurukshetra 

K.C. Yadav Haryana Ka Itihas, 3 Vols. Delhi 1981. 

K.C. Yadav The Revolt of 1857 in Haryana, Delhi 1977 



Prem Chaudhary Panjab Politics : The Role of Sir Chhotu Ram , Delhi 

1984 

Rajpal Singh Banda Bahadur – His Life and Times, New Delhi, 1998 



10(1144) 


Paper 

No. 


B.A. (General) History – Part – II, Semester – III 



Assessment 

Option-i Political History of India (1526-1857 

A.D.) 

Option-ii Socio-Economic History of India 

(1526-1857 A.D.) 


10(1145) 

Theory 

Paper 

Marks 

Total 

Marks 

Time 

20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Option - (i) : Political History of India (1526 – 1857 A.D) 

Note :- 1. 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 

The question paper will consist of nine questions. The candidate shall attempt five 










Unit – I 

Establishment of Mughal Empire: Babur 


Akbar: Expansion of Empire, Rajput Policy and Religious Policy 


Unit – II 



Mughal Administration: Central and Provincial; Revenue System 

Institutions: Mansabdari and Jagirdari 


Unit- III 


Occupation of Bengal by the British: Battles of Plessey and Buxer 

Consolidation of the British Empire: Subsidiary Alliance System and Doctrine of Lapse 

Uprising of 1857: Causes, Course and Consequences 


Unit – IV 

Maps (India): 











India, Vol. V 

Hasan, Ibn Central Stracture of the Mughal India 





Raychowdhary (eds.) 



Satish Chandra Medieval India: From the Sultanate to the Mughals 


Satish Chandra Mughal Religious Policies 

Shukla, R. L. (ed.) Adhunik Bharat KaItihas (Hindi) 




Verma, H. C. Madyakalin Bharat, (Hindi) Vol-I & II 

Option – (ii) Socio-Economic History of India (1526 – 1857A. D) 

Note :- 1. 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 











10(1146) 


Unit – I 

Medieval Society: Classes - Ruling Class, Religious Class, Peasants and Artisans; Position 

of Untouchables and Women 


Unit – II 

Medieval Economy: Agrarian and Land Revenue System under the Mughals 


Education and Literature; Art and Architecture 

Pre-British Economy: Handicraft Industry; Trade and Commerce; Village Community with 

special reference to Jajmani System 

Unit- III 

British India: Land Revenue Systems - Permanent Settlement; Ryotwari Settlement; 





Unit – IV 

Maps (India): 

Major Urban Centers during the Mughal Period 

Major Internal Trade Routes under the Mughals 

Centers of Major Mughal Monumants 

Jurisdiction of Major Land Revenue Settlements under the British 



Bayly, C. A. Indian Society and the Making of the British Empire: The New 

Cambridge History of India, Vols. I & II 











Raychowdhary 


Naqvi, H.K. Urbanization and Urban Centres under the Great Mughals 

Rai, Satya M. (ed.) Bharat Me Upniveshwad Aur Rashtrawat (Hindi) 


10(1147) 








Shukla, R.L. Adhunik Bharat Ka Itihas (Hindi) 



Tripathi, R.P. Rise and Fall of Mughal Empire 

Verma, H. C. Madyakalin Bharat (Hindi),Vols I & II 

10(1148) 


Paper 

No. 

B.A. (General) History – Part – II, Semester – IV 



Assessment 

10(1149) 

Theory 

Paper 

Marks 

Total 

Marks 

Time 

Option-i Modern India (1858-1947 A.D.) 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-ii Indian National Movement 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Option – (i): Modern India (1858-1947 A. D) 


Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 











Unit – I 













Unit – II 

Unit - III 


Unit – IV 

Maps (India): 






Bayly, Susan Caste Society and Politics in India: The New 

Cambridge History of India 










Times 











Habib 





Stein, Burton The Making of Agrarian Policy in British India, 

1770-1900 


Option - (ii) : Indian National Movement 

10(1150) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 












Unit – I 





Unit – II 




Unit- III 

Political Reforms: Acts of 1909 and 1919 





Unit – IV 

Maps (India): 















10(1151) 




Chowdhary 





Omvedt, Gail Dalits and Democratic Revolution : 

Pannikar, K.N. 

Dr. Ambedkar and Dalit Movement inColonial India 

National and Left Movements in India 








10(1152) 


B.A. (General) History – Part – III, Semester – V 



Assessment 

10(1153) 

Theory 

Paper 

Marks 

Total 

Marks 

Time 

Option-i Ancient and Medieval World 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-ii Rise of Modern World 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-iii East Asia in Modern Times 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Option - (i) : Ancient and Medieval World 


Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 











Unit- I 


Civilizations of Mesopotamia and Egypt: Polity, Economy, Society, Culture, Arts, Science 

and Technology 

Ancient Greece and Rome: Athenian Democracy, Roman Republic, Society, Economy; Fall 

of Roman Empire 

Unit- II 

Feudal Europe: Manorial System, Organization of Production, Position of Peasants and 

Artisans 


Medieval Church and State 


Unit- III 


Evolution of Islamic State under Umayyad and Abbasids 


Islamic World: Society, Education, Literature, Art and Architecture 


Unit-IV 


Extent and Important Places Connected with the Civilizations of Mesopotamia and Egypt 

Extent and Important Centers of Roman Civilization 

Major Ports and Urban Centres in Medieval World 

Extent of Arab Empire up to 1258 A.D 








Baj shaoyi An Outline History of China 




C.E. Bosworth and Joseph The Legacy of Islam 

Schachs 



G. Clark World Prehistory : A New Perspective 






K.P. Shahu Islam: Udbhav Aur Vikas(Hindi) 






P.K. Hitti Hisjtory of the Arabs 






Shri Ram Goyal Vishaw Ki Sabhyatayen(Hindi) 




10(1154) 


Option - (ii) : Rise of Modern World 

10(1155) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 











Unit – I 


Renaissance: Origins, Emergence and Results 

Reformation: Origins, Emergence and Results 

Unit – II 



Old Colonial System: Motives, Process and Consequences of Colonization in Americas 

Mercantile Revolution: Origins, Nature and Results 

. 

Unit – III 

Scientific Revolution: Origins, Nature and Results 

Glorious Revolution: Causes and Results 

Industrial Revolution: Origins, Nature and Impact 

Agricultural Revolution: Origins, Nature and Impact 

Unit – IV 

Maps (Europe): 

Important Centers of Renaissance 

Important Centers of Reformation 

Major Places Connected with Industrial Revolution 

Mercantile Powers of Europe 






Cipolla, Carlo M. Forntana Economic History of Europe, Vols II and III 














Hobsbawn, E.J. Nation and Nationalism 

Keenigsberger, H.G. and G. L. Europe in the Sixteenth Century 

Mosse 



Parker, G. and L. M. Smith General Crises of the Seventeenth Century 





Stavrianes, L. S. The World Since 1500 


Wood, Anthony History of Euorpe 1915-1960 

Option – (iii) : East Asia in Modern Times 

Note :- 1. 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 











Unit- I 

The Canton System in China – Opium Wars, Boxer Uprising 




10(1156) 


Unit- II 





Unit- III 





Unit- IV 

Maps (China and Japan): 















of Red China 1937-1945 

John. Livingstone et.al. The Japan Reader : Imperial Japan 1800-1945, Vol. I. 





Frauz Schurmann and Orville China Readings: Imperial China and Republican China, 2 

Schell (ed.) 

Vols. 




China 






10(1157) 


B.A. (General) History – Part – III, Semester – VI 



Assessment 

10(1158) 

Theory 

Paper 

Marks 

Total 

Marks 

Time 

Option-i Modern World 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-ii Modern Europe (1789-1945 A.D.) 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-iii Rise of Indian Republic (1947-1964 

A.D.) 

20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Option – (i) : Modern World 


Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 











Unit - I 

Renaissance and Reformation 

Rise of Capitalism: Early Stages – Mercantile Capital and Free Trade Capital 

Technological Revolutions: Agricultural Revolution and Industrial Revolution 

Growth of Liberalism in England: Development of Parliamentary Form of Government 

Unit - II 

American Revolution: Causes and Impact 




Unit – III 

Paris Peace Settlement: Important Treaties – Provisions and Consequences 



Rise of Dictatorship: Nazism and Fascism 

World War - II : Causes and Consequences 

Unit - IV 

Maps (World): 

Countries Witnessed Agricultural Revolution during 16 th to 19 th Centuries 

Europe on the Eve of French Revolution 




Anderson, Pery Lineages of the Absolutist State 


Bronowski, J. and Bruce 

Mazlish 


Carr, E.H. The Bolshevik Revolution, 1917-23, 3 Vols. (Macmillan, 1950, 

1951 and 1953) 



Davies, H.A. Outline History of the World 

Fisher, H.A.L. A History of Europe (Fontana Library, 1969). 

Gupta, Parthasarthi Adhunik Paschim Ka Uday (Hindi) 

Gupta, Parthasarthi Europe Ka Itihas (Hindi) 

Henderson, O.P. The Industrial Revolution on the Continent. 



Hinsely, F.H. (ed.) Modern History: Material Progress and World Wide Problems 

Joll, James Europe Since 1870: An International History (Harper-Row, 1973) 



Langer, W.L. European Alliances and Alignments (Greenwood, 1977). 


Palmer, R.A. and Cotton 

Joel 

A History of Modern World (McGraw, 1982) 




Saboul, A. The French Revolution. 




Thompson, David Europe Since Napoleon (Penguin, 1957,1966) 

10(1159) 


Option- (ii) : Modern Europe (1789-1945 A. D) 

10(1160) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 











Unit- I 

French Revolution: Causes and Consequences 

Napoleon Bonaparte: Rise to Power and Continental System 

Congress of Vienna: Motives and Significance 

Conservative Reaction in Europe: Concert of Europe and the Metternich System 

Unit- II 

Nationalism in Europe: Unification of Italy and Germany 

Diplomatic Alliances in Europe: Formation of Triple Alliance and Triple Entente 


Bolshevik Revolution in Russia: Nature and Impact 

Unit- III 

Paris Peace Settlement: Treaty of Versailles - Provisions and Effects 

League of Nations: Working and Causes of Failure 

Rise of Nazism and Fascism: Nature and Consequences 

World War - II: Causes and Consequences 

Unit- IV 

Maps (Europe) : 


Reconstruction of Europe by Vienna Congress 

Europe on the Eve of World War - I 

Europe on the Eve of World War - II 




Bronowski, J., and Bruce The Western Intellectual Tradition (Ayer Co., Publication, 1960) 

Mazlish 


Carr, E.H. The Bolshevik Revolution, 1917-23, 3 Vols. (Macmillan, 1950, 1951 

and 1953) 


Fisher, H.A.L. A History of Europe (London, Fontana Library, 1969). 






Langer, W.L., Diplomacy of Imperialism. 

Langer, W.L., European Alliances and Alignments (Greenwood, 1977). 

Lefebvre, Georges Coming f the French Revolution (Princeton, 1989) 

Palmer, R.A. and Cotton A History of Modern World (McGraw, 1982) 

Joel 





Taylor, A.J.P. The Origins of the Second World War. 



Option – (iii) : Rise of Indian Republic (1947-1964 A. D) 

10(1161) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 











Unit – I 






Unit – II 






Unit - III 





Unit – IV 

Maps (India): 







A.M. 











Jaisingh, Hari India and Non-Aligned World: Search for A New 

Order 



chowdhary 






Patel, Vallabhbhai 


Correspondence, Writings and Speeches 









10(1162) 



B.A. (Hons.) History – Part – I, Semester – I 



Assessment 

10(1163) 

Theory 

Paper 

Marks 

Total 

Marks 

Time 

Paper-I Ancient World 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-II Option- (i) Ancient India (From 

Earliest Times to Gupta Age) 

20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(ii) History of Haryana (From 

Harappan Age to 1526 A. D) 

20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-I: Ancient World 


Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 

Note :- 1. The question paper will consist of nine questions. The candidate shall attempt 

five questions in all. The Question No. 1 will be compulsory. The Candidate 

shall attempt four more questions selecting at least one from each Unit. The 

paper will carry 100 marks out of which 20 marks will be earmarked for internal 

assessment. Each question will, therefore, carry 16 marks. 






Unit- I 


Food Production: Beginning of Agriculture and Animal Husbandry 

Civilization of Mesopotamia : Polity, Economy, Society, Culture, Arts, Science and 

Technology 

Unit-II 

Civilization of Egypt : Polity, Economy, Society, Culture, Arts, Science and Technology 

Civilization of China : Polity, Economy, Society, Culture, Arts, Science and Technology 

Nomadic Groups in Central and West Asia : Their Society, Culture and Economy 


Unit- III 

Use of Iron and its Implications 

Ancient Greece and Rome: Agrarian Economy, Trade and Urbanization 

Political Apparatus : Athenian Democracy, Roman Republic and Roman Empire 

Fall of Roman Empire 


Unit-IV 

Main Sites of Paleolithic and Mesolithic Cultures 

Extent and Important Places Connected with the Civilization of Mesopotamia 

Extent and Important Places Connected with the Civilization of Egypt 

Extent and Important Places Connected with the Civilization of China 

Extent and Important Centers of Greek Civilization 




B. Fagan People of the Earth 


Baj shaoyi An Outline History of China 


G. Clark World Prehistory : A New perspective 

G. Rook Ancient Iraq 


H.W.F. Saggs The Greatness That Was Babylon 




Shri Ram Goyal Vishaw Ki Sabhyatayen(Hindi) 



Paper – II (Opt.- i): Ancient India (From Earliest Times to Gupta Age) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 









10(1164) 




Unit- I 

Meaning and Scope of History 

Sources of Ancient Indian History 



Harappan Civilization: Origins, Extent, Town Planning, Economy, Society, Arts and Political 

Organization 

Vedic Culture: Polity, Society, Religion and Literature 

Unit- II 

Social Institutions: Varna, Caste, Untouchability, and Gender Relations Emergence of State: 

Sixteen Mahajanpadas and the Rise of Magadha Empire 

Religious Movements: Buddhism and Jainism. 

Unit- III 



Post - Mauryan Empires : Kushanas and Satvahanas 

Gupta Empire: State, Administration, Agrarian and Land Revenue System, Urban Centres 


Unit IV 



Ports and Urban Centres in Ancient India 

Ashokan Empire : Extent, Pillars and Edicts 

Extent of Kanishka Empire 

Extent of Samudragupta’s Empire 


Allchin, B.and Allchin, F.R. Rise of Civilisation in India and Pakistan (Delhi : Select Book 





Chakrabarti, D.K. India : An Archaeological History, Paleolithic beginnings to 

Early Historical Foundation (Delhi OUP, 1999) 


1998) 


1986) 

Jha, D.N. and Shrimali, K.M. Prachin Bharat Ka Itihas (Delhi, Hindi Directorate, 1990) 

Majumdar, R.C. et al. History and Culture of the Indian People, Vols. II, III, IV and 

10(1165) 


V (Mumbai Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan Series, 1970, 1979, 1980) 

Nilkanta Shastri, K.A. A History of South India From Pre-Historic Times to the Fall of 


Sharma, R.S. Aspects of Political Ideas and Institution in Ancient India 



1985) 

Thapar, Romila A History of India, Vol. I, Pelican, 1966 

Thapar, Romila From Lineage to State : Social Formations in the Mid-first 

Millennium BC in the Ganga Valley., Bombay : oxford, 1984 

Paper-II (Opt. -ii): History of Haryana (from Harappan Age to 1526 A.D) 

10(1166) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 











Unit- I 



Extent of Harappan Civilization in Haryana 

Expansion of Vedic Culture in Haryana 

Unit-II 




Unit-III 



Socio - Cultural Transition : Impact of Islam 

Economic Conditions upto 1526 A.D 


Unit IV 


Important Excavated and Explored Sites of Harappan Civilization in Haryana 


Towns in Haryana (600 B. C. to 1000 A.D.) 

Invasions of Ghaznavi and Ghori in Haryana 

Towns in Haryana (1000 A.D. to 1526 A.D.) 




K.C. Yadav Haryana Ka Itihas, Delhi, 1981. 

K.C. Yadav Haryana: Itihas Evam Sanskriti (Hindi) 2 Vols., Delhi, 1992 






B.A. (Hons.) History – Part – I, Semester – II 



Assessment 

10(1167) 

Theory 

Paper 

Marks 

Total 

Marks 

Time 

Paper-I Medieval World 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-II Option-(i) History of India (600-1526 A.D) 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(ii) History of Haryana (1526-1966 

A.D) 

20 80 100 3 Hrs. 


Paper-I: Medieval World 

Note :- 1. 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 

The question paper will consist of nine questions. The candidate shall attempt 












Unit- I 

From Subsistence Economy to Feudal Economy in Europe (from 7th to 15th 

Centuries) 

Feudal Europe: Manorial System, Organization of Production, Position of Peasants 

and Artisans 


Unit-II 

Medieval Church and State : Rise of Papacy and Clergy Class 


Arabia before Islam 


Unit- III 

Evolution of Islamic State under Ummayads and Abbasids 

Islamic World : Society, Education, Literature, Art and Architecture 


Trade and Commerce, Urbanization 

Unit-IV 


Important Places Connected with Peasant Revolts in Medieval Europe 

Major Ports and Urban Centers in Medieval World 

Expansion of Islam under Prophet Muhammad 

Extent of Arab Empire upto 732 A.D 

Arab Empire in 1258 A.D 


A.J. Wensinck The Muslim Creed 


A.S. Trinton Islam 



C.E. Bosworth and Joseph Schachs The Legacy of Islam 




Franceso Gabrieli The Arab Revival 




K.P. Shahu Islam: Udbhav Aur Vikas 


10(1168) 






W. Muir The Caliphate. 

Perry Anderson Passages from Antiquity to Feudalism 

P.K. Hitti History of the Arabs 

P.K. Hitti Islam: A Way of Life 






Thomas Arnold The Caliphate 

T.W. Arnold Preaching of Islam 

Paper -II (Opt.- i): History of India (600-1526 A. D) 

10(1169) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 











Unit- I 


Polity and Economy with special reference to Indian Feudalism (750- 1206 A.D): 


Socio-Cultural Trends: Society, Culture and Literature during (600-1206 A.D.) 

Unit-II 

Invasions of Mahmud Ghaznavi and Muhammad Ghori - Causes of Success and Effects 

Rise and Expansion of Delhi Sultanate: Iltutmish, Balban, Ala-ud-din Khilji and 

Muhammad Tughlaq 



Unit-III 

Delhi Sultanate : Political and Administrative Institutions, Ruling Classes 


Economic and Technological Developments during 1206-1526 A. D: Agriculture, Industry, 






Extent of Muhammad Tughlaq’s Empire 

Extent of Vijaynagar Empire 

Urban Centres under the Delhi Sultanate 


Unit-IV 

Ashraf, K.M. Life and Conditions of the People of Hindustan (Delhi, 1965) 

Basham, A.L. The Wonder That Was India (Mumbai, 1971) 

Brown, Percy Indian Architecture, Vol. – 1 (Mumbai 1984) 

Burton, Stein History of India, (Oxford, 1998) 

Burton, Stein Vijayanagar (Cambridge, 1989) 


Habib, Muhammad and Comprehensive History of India, Vol. V (Delhi, 1970) 

Nizami, K.A. 

Harle J.C. Art and Architecture of the Indian Subcontinent (Penguin, 1986) 



Kulke, H and Rothenmund, 

D. 

History of India (London, 1998) 


(Mumbai, 1970, 1980) 

Panday, A.B. Early Medieval India, (Allahabad, 1970) 

Panday, Vimal Chander Prachin Bharat Ka Rajnatik Tatha Sanskritik Itihas, Bhag - 2 


Rizvi, S.A.A The Wonder That Was India, Vol. 2, (London 1987) 

Satish Chandra Medieval India from the Sultanate to the Mughals (Delhi, 1997) 


(Delhi, 2007) 


(Delhi, 1991) 

Shastri, K.A. Nilkanta A History of South India From Pre-Historic Times to the Fall of 

Vijaynagar (Chennai, 1983) 

Shastri, K.A.N. History of South India (Delhi, 1975) 

Thapar, Romila A History of India, Vol. I, (1966) 

10(1170) 


Paper -II (Opt.- ii): History of Haryana (1526-1966 A.D) 

10(1171) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 











Unit- I 

Mughal Rule in Haryana : Establishment, Administration and Decline 

Emergence of Composite Culture 

Society, Economy, Art and Architecture in Haryana under the Mughals 


Unit-II 

The British Rule: Establishment and Administration 

Uprising of 1857: Nature and Effects 



Unit-III 


Social Transition and Reform Movements: Arya Samaj and Sanatan Dharam Sabha 

Economic Effects of the Colonial Rule 


Unit-IV 



Major Centers of Uprising of 1857 



Formation of Haryana State : Districts and Important Cities 




D.C.Verma Haryana, Delhi, 1972 




Inderjeet Kakara Madhyakalin Haryana- (Hindi), Kurukshetra 

K.C. Yadav Haryana Ka Itihas, 3 Vols. Delhi 1981. 

K.C. Yadav The Revolt of 1857 in Haryana, Delhi 1977 



Prem Chaudhary Punjab Politics : The Role of Sir Chhotu Ram , Delhi 

1984 

Rajpal Singh Banda Bahadur – His Life and Times, New Delhi, 1998 



10(1172) 



B.A. (Hons.) History – Part – II, Semester – III 



Assessment 

10(1173) 

Theory 

Paper 

Marks 

Total 

Marks 

Time 

Paper-I Rise of Modern World 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-II Political History of India (1526-1857 A.D) 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-III Option-(i) History of Europe (1789-1900 

A.D) 

20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(ii) History of Britain (1815-1900 

A.D) 

20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper – I Rise of Modern World 


Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 











Unit – I 


Renaissance: Origins, Emergence and Results 

Reformation: Origins, Emergence and Results 

Unit – II 



Old Colonial System: Motives, Process and Consequences of Colonization in Americas 

Mercantile Revolution : Origins, Nature and Results 


Unit – III 

Scientific Revolution: Origins, Nature and Results 

Glorious Revolution: Causes and Results 

Industrial Revolution: Origins, Nature and Impact 

Agricultural Revolution: Origins, Nature and Impact 

Unit – IV 


Important Centers of Renaissance 

Important Centers of Reformation 

Major Places Connected with Industrial Revolution 

Mercantile Powers of Europe 






Cipolla, Carlo M. Fontana Economic History of Europe, Vols. II and III 














Keenigsberger, H.G. and G. L. Europe in the Sixteenth Century 

Mosse 











10(1174) 


Paper II: Political History of India (1526 – 1857 A. D) 

10(1175) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 











Unit – I 

Establishment of Mughal Empire: Babur 


Akbar: Expension of Empire, Rajput Policy and Religious Policy 


Unit – II 



Mughal Administration: Central and Provincial; Revenue System 

Institutions: Mansabdari and Jagirdari 


Unit- III 


Occupation of Bengal by the British: Battles of Plessey and Buxer 

Consolidation of the British Empire: Subsidiary Alliance System and Doctrine of Lapse 

Uprising of 1857: Causes, Course and Consequences 

Unit – IV 

Maps (India): 












India, Vol. V 

Hasan, Ibn Central Structure of the Mughal India 





Raychowdhary (eds.) 



Satish Chandra Medieval India: From the Sultanate to the Mughals 


Satish Chandra Mughal Religious Policies 

Shukla, R. L. (ed.) Adhunik Bharat KaItihas (Hindi) 




Verma, H. C. Madyakalin Bharat, (Hindi) Vol-I & II 

Paper III (Opt.-i) History of Europe (1789-1900 A. D) 

10(1176) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 











Unit – I 


French Revolution: Causes, Course and Consequences 

Napoleon Bonaparte: Domestic and Foreign Policies 

Unit – II 

Congress of Vienna (1815) 

Metternich System and Conservative Era 1815-1830 

Revolutions of 1830 and 1848 

Industrial Revolution and its Impact 

Unification of Germany 

Unit- III 


Unification Italy 

Imperialist Rivalries and Partition of Africa 

Maps (Europe) : 

Unit – IV 

Political Conditions of Europe in 1789 

Continental System of Napoleon 

Reconstruction of Europe by Vienna Congress 

Revolutions of 1848 in Europe 




Cipolla, Carlo M. Fontana Economic History of Europe, Vols.I, II and III 


Davis, H. A. (ed.) Outline History of the World 

Dobb, Maurice Studies in the Development of Capitalism 


Grant & Temperlay Europe in Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries 




Hill, Christopher A Century of Revolution 


Keenigsberger, H. G. and Mosse, Europe in the Sixteenth Century 

G. L 

Langer, W. L. Diplomacy of Imperialism 


Poliselky, V. War and Society in Europe 1618 – 1648 

Robb, Theodore K. The Struggle for Stability in Early Modern Europe 

Saboul, A. The French Revolution 



Thomson David Europe Since Napoleon 

Paper – III (Opt.- ii): History of Britain (1815- 1900 A. D) 

Note :- 1. 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 




paper will carry 100 marks out of which 20 marks will be earmarked for 

internal assessment. Each question will, therefore, carry 16 marks. 

2 The Question No. 1 will be short answer type containing four questions of 





10(1177) 


Unit- I 

Political, Economic and Social Conditions of Britain at the End of Napoleonic Wars 

Industrial and Agricultural Revolutions 

Growth of Tory and Whig Parties 

Home and Foreign Policy of the Tory Governments (1815-1830) 

Unit- II 

Parliamentary Reforms and the Effects of a Widening Franchise 

The Chartist Movement 

Home and Foreign Policies of Palmerton and Gladstone 

Unit- III 

Home and Foreign Policies of Disraeli 

Irish Problem 

Durham Report and the New Colonial Policy 

Labour and Social Legislations 

Maps (England) : 

Political Conditions of Britain in 1815 

Major Industrial Towns in Britain 

Centers of Chartist Movement 

British Occupation of Ireland 


Unit – IV 

Ashton, T.S.(ed.) An Economic History of England 1870-1939 

Best, Geoffrey Mid-Victorian Britain 1851-1875 

Cape, Jonathan England in the 19th Century, 1815-1914 

Clark, G.Kitson The Making of Victorian England 

Cole G.D.H & Raymond Postage The Common People 

Ensor, R.C.K. England 1870-1914 

Ewans, R.J. The Victorian Age 

Gupta, Parthasarthi England Ka Itihas (Hindi) 

Halvey, Elite History of British People in the 19th Century, Vols. I-IV 

Herbert, L.P. A History of Modern Britain 1815-1968 

Marriot, R.J. England Since Waterloo 

Norman, Edward A History of Modern Ireland 

Thomson, David England in the 19th Century 

Travelyan, G.M. British History in the 19th Century and After 

Travelyan, G.M. English Social History 

Ward, J.T. (ed.) Popular Movements 

Watson, R.W.S. Britain in Europe 1789-1914 

White, R.J. Waterloo to Peterloo 

Woodward, L. The Age of Reform 

10(1178) 


B.A. (Hons.) History – Part – II, Semester – IV 



Assessment 

10(1179) 

Theory 

Paper 

Marks 

Total 

Marks 

Time 

Paper-I Modern World 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-II Socio-Economic History of India (1526- 

1857 A.D) 

20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-III Option-(i) History of Europe (1900-1945 

A.D) 

20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(ii) History of Britain (1900-1945 

A.D) 

20 80 100 3 Hrs. 


Paper – I: Modern World 

Note :- 1. 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 











Unit - I 

Renaissance and Reformation 

Rise of Capitalism: Early Stages – Mercantile Capital and Free Trade Capital 

Technological Revolution: Agricultural Revolution and Industrial Revolution 

Growth of Liberalism in England: Development of Parliamentary Form of Government 

Unit - II 

American Revolution: causes and Impact 




Unit – III 

Paris Peace Settlement : Important Treaties – Provisions and Consequences 



Rise of Dictatorship : Nazism and Fascism 

World War - II : Causes and Consequences 

Unit - IV 

Maps (World): 

Countries Witnessed Agricultural Revolution during 16 th to 19 th Centuries 







Bronowski, J. and Bruce 

Mazlish 


Carr, E.H. The Bolshevik Revolution, 1917-23, 3 Vols. (Macmillan, 1950, 

1951 and 1953) 




Fisher, H.A.L. A History of Europe (Fontana Library, 1969). 

Gupta, Parthasarthi Adhunik Paschim Ka Uday (Hindi) 

Gupta, Parthasarthi Europe Ka Itihas (Hindi) 








Langer, W.L. European Alliances and Alignments (Greenwood, 1977). 


Palmer, R.A. and Cotton 

Joel 

A History of Modern World (McGraw, 1982) 









10(1180) 


Paper II: Socio-Economic History of India (1526 – 1857 A. D) 

10(1181) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 











Unit – I 

Medieval Society: Ruling Class, Religious Class, Peasants and Artisans; Position of 

Untouchables and Women 


Unit – II 

Medieval Economy : Agrarian and Land Revenue System under the Mughals 


Education and Literature; Art and Architecture 

Pre-British Economy: Handicraft Industry; Trade and Commerce; Village Community with 

special reference to Jajmani System 

Unit- III 

British India : Land Revenue Systems - Permanent Settlement; Ryotwari Settlement; 





Unit – IV 

Maps (India): 

Major Urban Centers during the Mughal Period 

Major Internal Trade Routes under the Mughals 

Centers of Major Mughal Monumants 

Jurisdiction of Major Land Revenue Settlements under the British 



Bayly, C. A. Indian Society and the Making of the British Empire: The New 

Cambridge History of India, Vols. I & II 












Raychowdhary 


Naqvi, H.K. Urbanization and Urban Centres under the Great Mughals 

Rai, Satya M. (ed.) Bharat Me Upniveshwad Aur Rashtrawat (Hindi) 








Shukla, R.L.(ed.) Adhunik Bharat Ka Itihas (Hindi) 



Tripathi, R.P. Rise and Fall of Mughal Empire 

Verma, H. C.(ed.) Madyakalin Bharat (Hindi),Vols I & II 

Paper III (Opt. – i) History of Europe (1900-1945 A. D) 

10(1182) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 











Unit – I 

Liberal Movements and Development of Parliamentary Form of Government in Europe 

Diplomatic Alliances and Rivalries: Triple Alliance and Triple Antente 

Eastern Question and the Balkan Wars 


Unit – II 

World War - I: Causes and Consequences 

Paris Peace Settlement : Important Treaties – Provisions and Effects 

Bolshevik Revolution in Russia : Nature and Impact 

Unit- III 

League of Nations: Working and Causes of Failure 

Economic Depression and its Effects 

Rise of Nazism and Fascism : Causes and Consequences 

World War –II: Causes and Consequences 

Unit – IV 


Political Conditions of Europe on the Eve of World War-I 

Major Countries Related to the Eastern Question 

Powers Involved in Triple Alliance and Triple Entente 

Political Conditions of Europe on the Eve of World War-II 


Carr, E. H. The Bolshevik Revolution 1917-23 




Economy 1000-1700 


Davis, H. A. (ed.) Outline History of the World 




Hill, Christopher A Century of Revolution 

Hinsley, F. H (ed.) Modern History: Material Progress and World Wide 

Problems 


Hobsbawm, E.J. Age of Extremes : The Short Twentieth Century 1914-1991 



Langer, W. L European Alliances and Alignments 

Langer, W. L. Diplomacy of Imperialism 

Lee, F. B. Europe Since 1914 

Mergan, R.P. German Social Democracy and The First International 

Morgan, K.O. Oxford Illustrated History of Britain (1789-1983), Volume 

II 



Robertson, E.(ed.) The Origins of the Second World War 

Roth, J.J. (ed.) World War-II : A Turning Point in Modern History 

Taylor, A. J. P. The Origins of the Second World War 

10(1183) 





Paper – III (Opt.-ii) : History of Britain (1900-1945 A. D) 

10(1184) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 











Unit- I 

Policy of Splendid Isolation 

Involvement in the Alignments : Anglo-Japanese Alliance and Triple Alliance 

World War – I and Britain: Involvement and Effects 

Role in the Paris Peace Settlement 

Unit- II 

Growth of Liberalism: Parliament Act of 1911and Other Reforms 

Growth of Capitalism 

Trade Unionism and Rise of Labour Party 

Unit- III 

Foreign Policy after 1918 

Effects of Economic Depression on Britain 

Anglo-German Rivalry 

World War- II and Britain: Involvement and Effects 

Unit – IV 

Maps (England): 


Capitalist and Industrial Centers of Britain 

Centers of Trade Union Movement in Britain 



Ashton, T.S.(ed) An Economic History of England 1870-1939 


Best, Geofrey Mid-Victorian Britain 1851-1875 

Cape, Jonathan England in the 19th Century 1815-1914 

Clapham, J.H. An Economic History of Modern Britain (3 Vols.) 

Clark, G. Kitson The Making of Victorian England 

Cole, G.D.H. and P. Raymond The Common People 



Gupta, Parthasarthi (ed.) England Ka Itihas (Hindi) 

Halvey, Elie History of British People in the 19th Century, Vols. I 

- IV 

Herbert, L.P. A History of Modern Britain, 1815-1961 


Morgan, Kenneth O. The Oxford Illustrated History of Britain Vols. I and 

II 

Peling, H. A History of British Trade Unionism 

Stvenson, Daivd The Outbreak of the First World War 




Ward, J.T.(ed.) Popular Movements 


Webb, R.K. Modern England (From 18th Century to Present) 



10(1185) 



B.A. (Hons.) History – Part – III, Semester – V 



Assessment 

10(1186) 

Theory 

Paper 

Marks 

Total 

Marks 

Time 

Paper-I East Asia in Modern Times 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-II Modern India (1858-1947 A. D.) 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-III Option-(i) History of the U.S.A. (1776-1865 

A.D.) 

20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(ii) History of Russia (1855-1917 A. 

D.) 

20 80 100 3 Hrs. 


Paper – I : East Asia in Modern Times 

Note :- 1. 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 




paper will carry 100 marks out of which 20 marks will be earmarked for 

internal assessment. Each question will, therefore, carry 16 marks. 

2 The Question No. 1 will be short answer type containing four questions of 





Unit- I 

The Canton System in China – Opium Wars, Boxer Uprising 




Unit- II 





Unit- III 






Unit- IV 

Maps (China and Japan) : 















of Red China 1937-1945 

John. Livingstone et.al. The Japan Reader : Imperial Japan 1800-1945, Vol. I. 





Frauz Schurmann and Orville China Readings: Imperial China and Republican China, 2 

Schell (ed.) 

Vols. 




China 






Paper- II : Modern India (1858-1947 A. D) 

10(1187) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 












Unit – I 













Unit – II 

Unit - III 

Unit – IV 

Maps (India): 






Bayly, Susan Caste Society and Politics in India: The New 

Cambridge History of India 










Times 



10(1188) 










Habib 





Stein, Burton The Making of Agrarian Policy in British India, 

1770-1900 


Paper – III (Opt.- i): History of the U.S.A. (1776-1865 A. D) 

10(1189) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 











Unit – I 

Circumstances Leading to the American Revolution 

Nature and Significance of the War of Independence 

Process of the Making of Constitution 

Evolution of American Democracy 

Unit – II 

Political Parties and Electoral Politics during 1840-1860 

The Monroe Doctrine 

Expansion of Frontiers and Turner’s Thesis 

Mexico-American War 


Unit – III 

Problem of Blacks and its Complications 

Sectional Conflict : Origins and Growth 

The Civil War : Causes, Course and Consequences 

Abraham Lincoln’s Role in the Emancipation of Slaves 

Unit –IV 

Maps (U.S.A.) 

Colonies in America on the Eve of Revolution 

Republic of U.S.A. and its States 

Expansion of Frontiers in Turner’s Regime 

Northern and Southern States Involved in the Civil War 


Bernard Baillyn The Great Republic 

Bernard Baillyn The Ideological Origins of the American Revolution 

Charles Beard An Economic Interpretation of the American Constitution 

Dee Brown History of the American West. 

Peter Carroll and David Noble Free and Unfree : A New History of the United States 

David B. Davis The Problem of Slaves in the Age of Revolution 

U.Faulkner Economic History of the United States of America 

Eric Foner America’s Black Past 

John Hope Franklin From Slavery to Freedom 

Gorald N. Grobb and George Interpretations of American History : Patterns and 


Richard Hofstadier The Age of Reform From Bryan to F.D.R. 

David M. Potter The Impending Crisis 

W. Pratt. A History of the United States Foreign Policy 

James Randall The Civil War and Reconstruction 

J.G.Randall and David Donald The Civil War and Reconstruction 

Keneeth Stamp The Peculiar Institution Slavery in the Ante-Beilum South 

Fedrick Jackson Turner The Frontier in American History 

Robert Wiebe The Search for Order 


Lance E. Davis (ed.) American Economic Growth 

Paper – III (Opt.-ii) : History of Russia (1855-1917 A. D) 

Note :- 1. 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 








10(1190) 






Unit – I 

Regime of Alexander - II : Abolition of Serfdom and its Results 

Other Reforms – Local Government, Educational and Military 

Problem of Multilingual Groups and Policy of Russification 

Unit – II 

Economic and Industrial Development during the 19th Century 

Growth of Revolutionary Ideas: Populism; Nihilism; Socialism; Social 

Democrats 

Unit – III 

The Russo-Japanese War: Causes and Consequences 

Revolution of 1905: Causes, Nature and Impact 

World War – I and Russia: Involvement and Consequences 

Unit –IV 


Political Conditions in the Regime of Alexander-II 

Areas of Different Multilingual Groups 

Industrial Centers during the 19th Century 

Political Conditions on the Eve of World War-I 









Semirnov, T.L. (ed.) A Short History of the U.S.S.R (2 Vols.) 

Seton Watson, H The Decline of Imperial Russia 







10(1191) 


B.A. (Hons.) History – Part – III, Semester – VI 



Assessment 

10(1192) 

Theory 

Paper 

Marks 

Total 

Marks 

Time 

Paper-I Indian National Movement 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-II Rise of Indian Republic (1947-1964 A.D.) 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-III Option-(i) History of the U.S.A. (1865-1945 

A.D.) 

20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(ii) History of the U.S.S.R. (1917- 

1991 A.D.) 

20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper – I: Indian National Movement 


Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 











Unit – I 





Unit – II 




Political Reforms: Acts of 1909 and 1919 

Unit- III 






Unit – IV 

Maps (India): 
















Majumdar, Datta and Ray Advanced History of India 

chowdhary 














Paper – II : Rise of Indian Republic (1947-1964 A. D) 

10(1193) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 












Unit – I 






Unit – II 





Unit - III 





Unit – IV 

Maps (India): 







A.M. 












10(1194) 




chowdhary 






Patel, Vallabhbhai 


Correspondence, Writings and Speeches 









Paper – III (Opt.- i): History of the U.S.A. (1865-1945 A. D) 

10(1195) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 












Growth of Capitalism and Big Business 

Labour Movement 

Rise of Agrarian Unrest 

Unit- I 

Unit- II 

Populist Movement 

Progressive Movement 

Rise of Imperialism: Spanish-American War 

Expansion in the Far East and Latin America 


Unit- III 

U.S.A.’s Role in the World War-I and Paris Peace Settlement 

Economic Depression and the New Deal 

World War – II and the U.S.A.: Involvement and Consequences 

Maps (U.S.A.) : 


Areas and Centres of Labour Movement 

Areas of Agrarian Unrest 

U.S.A. before World War-II 


Unit – IV 

Blum, John M. et. al. The National Experience : A History of the United 

States 


Boyer, Paul, Marvard Sitkoff et. The Enduring Vision : A History of the American 

al 

People, Vol. 1 

Current, Richard, M.T. Williams 

et. al. 

American History : A Survey, Vol. 1 






Billigs 


Hicks, John D. The Federal Union : A History of the U.S.A. Since 1865 










Tripathi, Dwijendra and S.C. 

Tiwari 

Themes and Perspective in American History 

Paper – III (Opt.- ii): History of the U.S.S.R. (1917-1991 A. D) 

Note :- 1. 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 





10(1196) 








Unit- I 

Social, Economic and Political Conditions of Russia on the Eve of the Revolutions of 1917 

Peasant Movement 

Working Class Movement 

Rise of Marxism: Bolsheviks and Mensheviks 

The February Revolution: Causes and Consequences 

Unit- II 

The October Revolution: Causes, Course and Significance 

War Communism and Emergence of the U.S.S.R. 

New Economic Policy under Lenin 

Economic Planning and Land Collectivization under Stalin 

Unit- III 

U.S.S.R. and World War-II 

Process of De-Stalinization under Khrushchev 

U.S.S.R. and the Cold War 

Emerging Stagnancy in Soviet State under Brezhnev 

Reforms of Gorbachev and Disintegration of the U.S.S.R. 

Unit – IV 


Political Conditions on the Eve of Revolutions of 1917 

Important Places Connected with the Bolshevik Revolution 

Emergence of the U.S.S.R. and its Constituent States 

Newly Emerged Countries after Disintegration of the U.S.S.R. 


E.H.Carr History of Soviet Russia, 4 Volumes, 1952 

Stephen F. Cohen Bukhrin and the Boishevik Revolution : A Political Biography 

Isaac Deutscher Stalin, 1949 

Maurice Dobb Soviet Economic Development Since 1917 

Marc Ferro The Russian Revolution of 1917 

Sheila Fitzpatrick Cultural Revolution in Soviet Russia, 1978 

Arch Getty The Origins of the Great Purges, 1985 

Graeme Gill Peasants in the Russian Revolution, 1979 

John Keep The Last Empire : A History of the Soviet Union 1945-1991, 1995 

John Keep The Russian Revolution : A Study in Mass Mobilization, 1976 

Moshe Levin The Making of Soviet System, 1985 

10(1197) 


Roy & Zhores Medveddev Khrushchev : The Years in Power, 1977 

Alec Nove An Economic History of the U.S.S.R., 1993 

Richard Pipes Russia of the Old Regime 

L. Szamuely First Model of Socialist Economic System 

L. Trotsky The History of the Russian Revolution (Translated by Max Eastman), 

1959 

A.B.Ulam Expansion and Coexistence : A History of Soviet Foreign Policy 

1917-1967 

K. Vaidyanathan The Formation of the Soviet Central Asian Nationalities 

10(1198) 


SYLLABUS OF M.A. (PREVIOUS) HISTORY (SEMESTER SYSTEM) 

SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS AND COURSES OF READING (W.E.F. 2012-13) 

M.A. History Course shall be a two years Degree Course consisting of four 

Semesters of 2000 marks. The candidate shall take Five Papers in each Semester, 

i.e., 20 Papers in the full Course. Each Paper will carry 100 marks out of which 20 

marks shall be earmarked for Internal Assessment. 

M.A. (Previous) History 1st Semester: 

There shall be two Core Papers, two Specialization Papers and five Optional Papers. 

The candidate shall take one out of the two Specialization Papers and any two 

Optional Papers out of the given list of five Optional Papers. 

M.A. (Previous) History 2nd Semester: 

There shall be two Core Papers, two Specialization Papers and five Optional Papers. 

The candidate shall take one out of the two Specialization Papers and any two 

Optional Papers out of the given list of five Optional Papers. 

Note:- The choice of the Specialization Papers as well as Optional Papers in M.A. Course 

shall be determined on the basis of merit. Moreover, the Department shall decide the 

number of Optional Papers to be offered in the Department in a particular year. 

M.A. (Previous) History, Semester-1st 



Assessment 

10(1199) 

Theory 

Paper 

Marks 

Total 

Marks 

Time 

Core Papers 

Paper-I Medieval Societies - I 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-II Modern World - I 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Specialization Papers 

Paper-III Option-(i): Medieval Indian Polity 

(1200-1750) 

20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(ii): Colonial India - I (1757- 

1857) 

20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Optional Papers 

Paper-IV History of China in Modern Times 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-V History of Europe - I (1789-1871) 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-VI History of the U.S.A. - I (1776-1865) 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-VII History of Britain - I (1688-1815) 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-VIII History of Imperial Russia - I (1855- 

1917) 

20 80 100 3 Hrs. 


Paper – I (Core Paper): Medieval Societies – I 


10(1200) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 


questions in all. Question No. 1 will be compulsory, which will consist of four 

short conceptual / thematic questions of equal marks (i.e. 4 marks each) spread over 

the whole syllabus. The candidate shall attempt four more questions, selecting at 

least one from each Unit. Each question will carry equal marks ( i.e. 16 marks). 

Unit – I Medieval Europe: Transition from Ancient Society to Medieval Society; Feudal 

Institutions; Medieval State and Church; Clergy and its Socio-Economic Role 

Unit – II Feudalism: Agrarian Structure and Relations; The Manorial System - Changing 

Position of the Peasantry; Agrarian Technology 

Unit – III Organization of Non-Agricultural Production; Major Non-Agricultural Productions; 

Artisans and Merchants 

Unit – IV Local Trade under Feudalism; Growth of Foreign Trade and Commerce; 

Urbanization: Urban Centers and Society; Decline of Feudalism 


Anderson, Perry Passages from Antiquity to Feudalism 

Bloch, March Feudal Society, 2 Vols. 

Cipolla, Carlo (ed.) The Fontana Economic History of Europe : The Middle Ages 

Colemn, D.C. Revisions in Mercantilism 

Dobb, Maurice & Sweezy Dobb Studies in the Development of Capitalism 

Faruqqi, Amar Prachin Aur Madhyakalin Samajik Sanrachanayen aur 

Sanskritiyan (Hindi tr.) 

Ganshof, F.L. Feudalism 

Hall, A.R. The Scientific Revolution 1500-1800 

Heaton, Herbert Economic History of Europe 

Hilton, Rodni (ed.) Transition from Feudalism to Capitalism 

Hodgett, A.J. Gerald A Social and Economic History of Medieval Europe 

Pirenne, Henri Economic and Social History of Medieval Europe 


Takashesh et. The Transition from Feudalism to Capitalism 

White, Lynn Medieval Technology and Social Change 


Paper – II (Core Paper): Modern World – I 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 






Unit – I Transition from Feudalism to Capitalism in Europe; Renaissance and its Impact; 

Reformation and its Impact; Enlightenment and Scientific Revolution 

Unit – II Rise of Capitalism: Mercantile Revolution – Origins, Nature and Impact; Economic 

Developments during the 16th Century: Shift of Economic Balance from the 

Mediterranean Region to Atlantic Region; Old Colonial System and its 

Consequences 

Unit-III Rise of Liberalism: ‘Glorious’ Revolution – Nature and Impact; American 

Revolution – Nature and Impact; French Revolution – Nature and Impact 

Unit- IV Growth of Capitalism: Industrial and Technological Revolution – Origins, Nature 

and Impact; Nationalism in Central Europe; Imperialism: Origins, Interpretations 

and Consequences 


Bronowski, J., and Bruce Mazlish The Western Intellectual Tradition 



Cipolla, Carlo M Before the Industrial Revolution: European Society 

and Economy1000-1700 

Cipolla, Carlo M. Fontana Economic History of Europe, Vols II and III. 
















Keenigsberger, H.G. and G. L. Mosse Europe in the Sixteenth Century 


Lefebvre, Georges Coming of the French Revolution 

Lucass, Colin The French Revolution and the Making of Modern 

10(1201) 


Political Culture, 2 Volumes 








Soboul, Albert History of the French Revolution, 2 Volumes 




10(1202) 


Paper – III (Opt. -i) (Specialization Paper ) : Medieval Indian Polity–I (1200 – 1750) 

10(1203) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 






Unit – I Sources: Archival, Archaeological, Major Contemporary Historical Writings, Travel 

Accounts, European Factory Records; Nature of State : Delhi Sultanate and the 

Mughal State 

Unit – II Theory of Kingship under Delhi Sultanate : Balban and Alauddin Khalji; Afghan 

Theory of Kingship; Mughal Theory of Kingship ; Nature of Regional States with 

special reference to Vijaynagar and Bahmani Kingdoms 

Unit – III Evolution of the Institutional Structure and System of Government : Iqta, Amaram, 

Mansab and Jagir; Central and Provincial Administration 

Unit-IV Ruling Classes: Evolving Compositions; Local Alliances and Conflicts 


Alam, Muzaffar and Subramanyam, 

Sanjay (ed.) 

The Mughal State 

Ali, M. Athar, The Mughal Nobility under Aurangzeb 

Satish Chandra Medieval India : Society, the Jagirdari Crisis and the Village 

Satish Chandra Medieval India : From Sultanate to Mughals, Vol. I – II 

Digby, Simon War Horse and Elephant in the Delhi Sultanate : A Study in 

Military Supplies 

Habib, Irfan Medieval India, 4 Volumes 



Habib, Mohammad and 

K.A.Nizami (ed) 

Comprehensive History of India A.D. 1206-1526, Vol. V 


Khan, A.R. Chieftains in the Mughal Empire During the Reign of Akbar 

Kulke, Hermann The State in India AD 1000-1700 

Nigam, S.B.P. Nobility Under The Sultans of Delhi 

Nizami, Khaliq A. Religion and Politics in the Thirteenth Century 

Richards, J.F.(ed.) The Mughal Empire 

Sharma, G.D. Madhyakalin Bharat Ki Rajnetik Aur Aarthik Sansthayen 

(Hindi) 

Stein, Burton New Cambridge History of India: Vijaynagar 

Streusand, Douglas E. The Formation of the Mughal Empire 

Verma, H.C. (ed.) Madhyakalin Bharat, 2 Volumes (Hindi) 


Paper III (Opt. – ii) (Specialization Paper ): Colonial India –I (1757-1857) 

10(1204) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 






Unit – I Sources : Archival Records, Private Papers, Newspapers, Periodicals and Oral 

Traditions; Pre-Colonial Order – Polity, Economy and Society 

Unit – II British Mercantilism and India; Colonial Expansion: Bengal, Mysore and Marathas 

Unit – III Consolidation of the Colonial Power: Annexation of Awadh, Sindh and Punjab; 

Subsidiary Alliance System; Doctrine of Lapse 

Unit – IV Evaluation of the British Paramountcy: Motives and Phases; Rise of the Colonial 

State 


Amold, David and Nature, Culture and Imperialism : Essays on the Environmental 

Ramachandra Guha (eds.) History of South Asia 

Bandopadhyay, Shekha Palasi Se Vibhajan Tak (Hindi) 




Brown, Judith Modern India: The Origin of an Asian Democracy 

Chicherov, A.L. Indian Economic Developments in the Seventeenth and Eighteenth 

Century 


Elphinstone, M. History of India 

Fisher, M.H. (ed.) Policies of British Annexation of India 1757-1857 

Gopal, S. British Policy in India 

Guha, Ranjit (ed.) Subaltern Studies: Writings on South Asian History and Society, 

Vols. I - XI 


Mill, James History of India, 6 Volumes 



Panigrahi, D.N. (ed.) Economy, Society and Politics in Modern India 


Roberts, P.E. History of British India 



Sinha, Manoj Madhyakalin Bharat (Hindi) 


Paper – IV (Optional Paper) : History of China in Modern Times-I 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 






Unit – I Shaping Forces of Modern China : The Canton System of Trade; Opium Wars; The 

Taiping Revolt; The Boxer Uprising 

Unit – II Socio-Economic Changes and Intellectual Awakening: Revolution and the Republic 

of 1911; Dr. Sun Yat Sen - Ideology and Work; The May 4th Movement 

Unit – III Resistance and Struggle: Rise of the Communist Party- Early Agendas and 

Initiatives, Relations with the Kuomintang; The Civil War and Communist 

Revolution 1945-1949; Causes of Communist Success 

Unit – IV Founding of the Peoples’ Republic: Mao Tse Tung – Ideology and Work; Cultural 

Revolution; Structure of the Communist State; Land Collectivization and Economic 

Reforms 


Bianco, Lucien Origins of the Chinese Revolution 1915-1949 

Chen, Jerome Mao Tse Tung and the Chinese Revolution 

Chesneaux, Jean et al China from Opium Wars to 1911 Revolution 

Chesneaux Jean et al China from the 1911 Revolution to Liberation 




Fairback ,John K. The United States of China 

Fairback ,John K. The Great Chinese Revolution 

Hsia, R. Economic Planning in Communist China 

Hsu, T.Immannuel The Rise of Modern China 


Johnson, C. A. Peasant Nationalism and Communist Power : The Emergence of 

Red China 1937-1945 

Mao Tse-Tung Selected Works 

Mohanti, Manoranjan The Political Philosophy of Mao Tse Tung 

Mohanti, Manoranjan (ed.) Cheenee Kranti (Hindi) 

Purcell, Victor The Boxer Uprising : A Background Study 

Schwartz, Benjamin I. Chinese Communism and the Rise of Mao 

Thomas, S.B. Government and Administration in Communist China 

Thomas, S.B. Recent Political and Economic Developments in China 

Tse-Tung, Chow The May Fourth Movement : Intellectual Revolution in Modern 

China 

Vinayake Purvi Asia Ka Itihas (Hindi) 

Wright, Mary C. China in Revolution : The First Phase 1900-1913 

10(1205) 


Paper – V (Optional Paper) : History of Europe –I (1789-1871) 

10(1206) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 






Unit – I French Revolution: Crisis of the Old Regime, Intellectual Currents, Growth of 

Democratic Institutions, Impact of the Revolution; Napoleon Bonaparte : Emergence 

and Downfall 

Unit – II Congress of Vienna and Reconstruction of Europe; The Concert of Europe: Nature, 

Growth and Failure; The Metternich System and Conservative Europe 

Unit – III Revolutionary Europe: Nature and Impact of the Revolutions of 1830 and 1848; The 

Eastern Question: Ethnicity and Nationalism among the Balkan States, 

Independence of Greece and Crimean War 

Unit – IV Unification of Italy and Germany; Process of Economic Change in Europe; Second 

French Republic and Second Empire 


Bartbelt, C.J. Peace, War and European Powers 1814-1914 

Cipolla, C.M. Fontana Economic History of Europe, Vol. III 

Chauhan, D.S. Europe of Itihas (Hindi) 

Evans, J. The Foundations of Modern State in 19th Century 


Gupta, Pathasarthi 

(ed.) 

Adhunik Pashchim Ka Uday (Hindi) 

Gupta, Pathasarthi Europe Ka Itihas (Hindi) 

(ed.) 

Hamerow, T.S. Restoration, Revolution and Reaction: Economy and Politics 

in Germany 




Hoeborn, H. A History of Modern Germany 

Hunt, Lynn Policies, Culture and Class in the French Revolution 

Jelavich, Charles Establishment of the Balkan National States 1840-1920 



Lefebvre, George Coming of the French Revolution 


Lucas, Colin The French Revolution and the Making of Modern Political 

Culture, Vol. 2 


Morgan, K.O. Oxford Illustrated History of Britain, Vol. 2 


Smith, Meak Italy : A Modern History, Vol. I 

Soboul, Albert History of the French Revolution 


Vovelle, Michel Fall of the French Monarchy 


Paper – VI (Optional Paper) : History of the U.S.A.-I (1776-1865) 

10(1207) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 






Unit – I American Revolution: Colonial Background, Revolutionary Ideologies; Nature and 

Significance of the War of Independence; Process of the Making of Constitution 

Unit – II Evolution of American Democracy: Rule of Thomas Jefferson and Andrew Jackson; 

Political Parties 1840-1860; Role of Judiciary; Blacks and Women under American 

Democratic System 

Unit – III The Monroe Doctrine; Expansion of Frontiers and Turner’s Thesis; Manifest 

Destiny; Mexico-American War 

Unit – IV Sectional Conflict : Origins and Growth; The Civil War : Causes, Interpretations and 

Consequences; Abraham Lincoln’s Role in the Emancipation of Slaves 


Aldon, John. R. A History of the American Revolution 

Beard, Charles An Economic Interpretation of the Constitution of the 

United States 

Blum, John M. et. al. The National Experience : A History of the United States 


Boyer, Paul, Marvard Sitkoff et. al. The Enduring Vision : A History of the American People, 

Vol. 1 

Clark, Thomas Frontiers of America 

Current, Richard, M.T. Williams et. American History : A Survey, Vol. 1 

al. 


Faulkner, H.U. American Economic History 

Gorraty, John. A. The American Nation, Vol I 



Billigs 




Kristol, Irving and Gordon Wood et. 

al. 

America’s Continuing Revolution 




Randal James et. al. The Civil War and Reconstruction 

Shihan, Donald The Making of American History : The Emergence of a 

Nation, Vol. 1 & II 

Saxena, B.L. Sanyukt Rajya America Ka Itihas (Hindi) 

Tripathi, Dwijendra and S.C. Tiwari Themes and Perspective in American History 

Paper – VII (Optional Paper ) : History of Britain –I (1688-1815) 

10(1208) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 






.. 

Unit – I ‘Glorious’ Revolution; Bill of Rights, Act of Settlement (1701); Growth of Whig 

and Tory Parties; Walpole and Cabinet System; Personal Rule of George -III and its 

Constitutional Significance 

Unit – II Britain and War of American Independence; Policy towards Ireland; Impact of 

French Revolution on Britain; Struggle against Napoleon Bonaparte 

Unit – III Mercantile System and British Colonialism; Origins of Industrial Revolution; 

Agrarian Revolution and its Impact; Increase in Trade and Commerce 

Unit – IV Society and Social Change: Peasants, Working Class, Capitalist Class and the 

Bourgeoisie; Methodist and Evangelical Movements 


Adams, G.B. The Constitutional History of England 

Briggs, A. Age of Empowerment 1784-1867 

Clapham, J.H. An Economic History of Modern Britain, 3 vols. 

Coleman, D.C. The Economy of England 1450-1750 

Gupta, Parthasarthi (ed.) Adhunik Pashchim Ka Uday (Hindi) 

Gupta, Parthasarthi (ed.) Britain Ka Itihas (Hindi) 

Hill C. The Century of Revolutions 

Hill, C. The World Turned Upside Down 

Hobsbawm, E.J. Industry and Empire 


Jones, J.R. The Revolution of 1688 in England 

Joliffe Constitutional History of England Since 1485 

Marriot, J.A.R. English Political Institutions 

Mathias, Peter The First Industrial Nation 

Morgan, Kenneth O. The Oxford Illustrated History of Britain Vols. 1 & 2 

Muir, Ramsay A Short History of British Commonwealth 


Russell, C. The Crisis of Parliaments 1509-1660 

Stone, Lawrence Crisis of the Aristocracy 

Stone, Lawrence Causes of the English Revolution 

Thomson, M.A. A Constitutional History of England 1642-1801 

Thompson, E.P. Making of the English Working Class 


Ward, J.T. (ed) Popular Movements 



White, R.J. The Making of English Constitution 

Paper – VIII (Optional Paper) : History of Imperial Russia-I (1855-1917) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 






Unit – I Reforms of Alexander -II: Abolition of Serfdom and its Results; Other Reforms – 

Local Government, Educational, Legal, Military and Financial 

Unit – II Problem of Multilingual Groups and Policy of Russification; Economic and 

Industrial Development in the 19th Century 

Unit – III Growth of Revolutionary Ideas in Russia: Populism; Nihilism; Social Democrats; 

Marxism – Bolsheviks and Mensheviks 

Unit – IV The Russo-Japanese War; Revolution of 1905: Causes and Consequences; The 

Constitutional Monarchy 1905-1917; Russia and World War - I 










10(1209) 


Semirnov, T.L. (ed.) A Short History of U.S.S.R., 2 Vols. 

Seton-Watson, H The Decline of Imperial Russia 







10(1210) 


M.A.(P) History, Semester-2nd 



Assessment 

10(1211) 

Theory 

Paper 

Marks 

Total 

Marks 

Time 

Core Papers 

Paper-IX Medieval Societies - II 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-X Modern World - II 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Specialization Papers 

Paper-XI Option-(i): Medieval Indian Economy 

(1200 -1750) 

20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Option-(ii): Colonial India- II (1757- 

1857) 

20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Optional Papers 

Paper-XII History of Japan in Modern Times 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-XIII History of Europe -II (1871-1914) 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-XIV History of the U.S.A.- II (1865-1945) 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-XV History of Britain - II (1815-1914) 20 80 100 3 Hrs. 

Paper-XVI History of Soviet Russia - II (1917- 

1991) 

20 80 100 3 Hrs. 


Paper – IX (Core Paper): Medieval Societies – II 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 






Unit – I Arabia before Islam: Political, Socio-Religious and Economic Conditions; Rise of 

Islam; Islam as a Socio-Religious System; Relations with Arab Tribes, Jews and 

Christians 

Unit – II Evolution of Islamic State from the Pious Caliphs to the Abbasids; Society and 

Economy under the Prophet and the Caliphs 

Unit – III The Arab Empire : Growth of Art and Architecture; Education; Intellectual 

Contribution : Language, Literature and Sciences 

Unit – IV Advent of Islam in India and its Impact; Nature and Administrative Set Up of Delhi 

Sultanate 



Aghnides, N. Muhammadan Theories of Finance 

Bakhsh, Khuda The Arab Civilization 

Satish Chandra Medieval India : From Sultanate to Mughals, Vol. I 

Digby, Simon War Horse and Elephant in the Delhi Sultanate : A Study in 

Military Supplies 

Faruqui, Amar Prachin Aur Madhyakalin Samajik Sanrachanayen Aur 

Granebaum 

Sanskritiyan (Hindi) 

Medieval Islam 

Habib, Irfan Medieval India, 4 Volumes 



Habib, Mohammad and Comprehensive History of India A.D. 1206-1526, Vol. V 

K.A.Nizami (ed.) 

Hitti, P.K. History of Arabs 


Kulke, Hermann The State in India AD 1000-1700 

Lamblon Landlords and Peasants in Persia 

Levy, P The Social Structure of Islam 

Nizami, Khaliq A. Religion and Politics in the Thirteenth Century India 

Richards, J.F. New Cambridge History of India: The Mughal Empire 

Sahu, K.P. Islam : Udbhav Aur Vikas (Hindi) 

Sharma, G.D. Madhyakalin Bharat Ki Rajnetik Aur Aarthik Sansthayen (Hindi) 

Verma, H.C. (ed.) Madhyakalin Bharat, 2 Volumes (Hindi) 

Paper – X (Core Paper) : Modern World – II 

10(1212) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 






Unit – I World War-I: Origins and Consequences; Socialism and Bolshevik Revolution in 

Russia; Growth of Liberalism: Parliamentary Reforms in Europe 

Unit-II Paris Peace Settlement and its Consequences; Working of League of Nations; 

Collective Security and Disarmament 

Unit-III Economic Depression and its Effects; Rise of Fascism: Italy and Germany; World 

War-II: Origins and Consequences 

Unit-IV United Nations Organization and World Peace; Nationalist Movements and De- 

Colonization in Asia and Africa; The Cold War: Origins, Strategic Alliances and 

Phases 



Barrachough, G. An Introduction to Contemporary History 

Carr, E.H. The Bolshevik Revolution, 1917-23 3 Vols. 









Hobsbawm, E.J. Age of Extremes : The Short Twentieth Century (1914-1991) 






Lee, F. B. Europe Since 1914 

Mergan, R.P. German Social Democracy and The First International 

Morgan, K.O. Oxford Illustrated History of Britain (1789-1983), 2 Volumes 



Robertson, E.(ed.) The Origins of the Second World War 

Roth, J.J. (ed.) World War II : A Turning Point in Modern History 

Stavrianes, L.S. The World Since 1500 

Taylor A.J.P. The Struggle for Mastery in Europe 




Wood, Anthony History of Euorpe 1915-1960 

Paper – XI (Opt. -i) (Specialization Paper) : Medieval Indian Economy-II (1200 – 1750) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 






Unit – I Agrarian Economy: Land Ownership and Production; Nature and Magnitude of 

Taxation; Agrarian Relations 

Unit – II Handicraft Production: Textiles and Agro-Industries; Metal Technology; Artisans; 

Mercantile Groups and their Role in Production 

Unit – III Trade and Commerce; Currency, Banking and Hundi System; Process of 

Urbanization 

Unit – IV Systemic Crisis: Tensions and Conflicts Inherent in the Imperial System; Patterns of 

Resistance; Fall of Mughal Empire; Interpreting the 18th Century 

10(1213) 



Alam, Muzaffar and Subramanyam, Sanjay (ed) The Mughal State 

Alavi, Seema (ed.) Eighteen Century in India 

Ali, Athar Mughal India 

Satish Chandra Medieval India : Society, the Jagirdari Crisis and the Village 

Satish Chandra Parties and Politics in the Mughal Court 1707-1740 

Satish Chandra The Eighteenth Century in India : Its Economy and the Role of 

the Marathas, the Jats, the Sikhs and the Afghans 

Satish Chandra Medieval India : From Sultanate to Mughals, Vols. I – II 

Chaudhuri, K.N. Trade and Civilisation in the Indian Ocean 

Eaton, Richard M. The Rise of Islam and the Bengal Frontier (1204-1760) 

Fukazawa, Hiroshi The Medieval Decan : Peasants, Social System and States during 

Sixteenth to Eighteenth Centuries 

Gordon, Stewart The Marathas, 1600-1818 

Grewal, J.S. (ed) State and Society in Medieval India 

Habib, Irfan Agrarian System of Mughal India 1526-1707 

Habib, Irfan Essays in Indian History : Towards a Marxist Perception 

Hasan, S. Nurul Thoughts on Agrarian Relations in Mughal India 

Khan, A.R. Chieftains in the Mughal Empire During the Reign of Akbar 

Kulke, Hermann The State in India A.D. 1000-1700 

Marshall, P.J. (ed.) Eighteenth Century India : Evolution or Revolution 

Moosvi, Shireen Economy of the Mughas Empire : A Statistical Study 

Naqvi, H.K. Urbanization and Urban Centre under the Great Mughals 1556- 

1707 

Raychaudhri, Tapan and Cambridge Economic History of India 1200 –1750, Vol I 

Irfan Habib (eds.) 

Richards, J.F.(ed.) The Imperial Monetary System of Mughal India 

Richards, J.F.(ed.) The Mughal Empire 

Sangwan, R.S. Jodhpur and the Later Mughals A.D. 1707-1752 

Sharma, G.D. Madhyakalin Bharat Ki Rajnaitik Aur Aarthik Sansthayen 

(Hindi) 

Singh, Chetan Region and Empire : Punjab in the 17 th Century 

Verma, H.C. (ed.) Madhyakalin Bharat (Hindi), 2 Volumes 

Wink, Andre Land and Sovereignth in India : Agrarian society and Politics 

under the Eighteenth Century Maratha Swarajya 

Paper XI (Opt. - ii) (Specialization Paper) : Colonial India-II (1757-1857) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 






Unit – I Construction of the Colonial State : The ‘Iron’ Framework – Armed Forces and 

Law; The ‘Steel’ Framework– Civil Administration and Bureaucracy 

10(1214) 


Unit – II British Policy Towards Indian Society – Role of Orientlists, Evangelicals and 

Utilitarians; Social Reforms 

Unit – III Introduction of Modern Education; The British Imperialist Ideology – Political, 

Economic and Cultural Theories; Rise of Capitalism and Transition in Economy 

Unit – IV Resistance to the Colonial State: The Pre-1857 Risings; The Uprising of 1857 – 

Causes, Nature and Consequences 


Amold, David and 

Nature, Culture and Imperialism : Essays on the 

Ramachandra Guha (eds.) Environmental History of South Asia 

Bandopadhyay, Shekha Palasi Se Vibhajan Tak (Hindi) 



Bipan Chandra India’s Struggle for Independence 


Bipan Chandra Bharat Ka Sawtantrata Sangharsh (Hindi) 

Brown, Judith Modern India : The Origin of An Asian Democracy 

Chicherov, A.L. Indian Economic Development in the Seventeenth and 

Eighteenth Century 


Fisher, M.H. (ed.) Policies of the British Annexation of India 1757-1857 

Gopal S. British Policy in India 

Guha, Ranjit Rule of Property for Bengal : An Essay on the Idea of 

Permanent Settlement 

Guha, Ranjit (ed.) Subaltern Studies: Writings on South Asian History and 

Society, Vols. I - XI 

Joshi, P.C. Rebellion – 1857 

Kumar, Dharma (ed,) Cambridge Economic History of India, Vol.-II 

Mill, James History of India, 6 Vols. 




Ravindra Kumar Social History of Modern India 

Raychandhary, Tapan Indian Economy in the 19th Century : A Symposium 

Sarkar, Sumit Modern India 1885-1947 




Sinha, Manoj Madhyakalin Bharat (Hindi) 

Paper – XII (Optional Paper): History of Japan in Modern Times-II 

10(1215) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 







Unit – I The Period of Transition: Japan in the 19th Century; Western Contact and its 

Implications; Circumstances Leading to the Meiji Restoration 

Unit – II The Meiji Era: Meiji Restoration – Nature and Significance; Political Reforms; 

Educational and Social Restructuring; Economic and Industrial Transformation 

Unit – III Failure of Democracy: Political Party System and its Drawbacks; Growth of 

Militarism – Expansion and Aggression; Japan and World War-II 

Unit – IV Post-War Japan: Disarmament and Demilitarization; Democratization - New 

Political System; Economic and Industrial Remodeling up to 1960; Social and 

Educational Remodeling up to 1960 


Akita, George Foundations of the Constitutional Government in Modern 

Japan 

Allen, George C. Modern Japan and its Problem 

Allen, George C. A Short Economic History of Modern Japan 1867-1937 

Beasley, W.G. The Modern History of Japan 

Bakmann, George M. The Making of the Meiji Constitution 



Dengarfield, R.J. The New Japan 


Fine, S.M. Japan’s Post-War Industrial Recovery 

Hall, John W. Japan: From Prehistory to Modern Times 

Holtam, D.C. Modern Japan and Shinto Nationalism 

James, David H. The Rise and Fall of the Japanese Empire 


Kostan, E.E.N Militarism and Foreign Policy in Japan 

Lockwood, William The Economic Development of Japan : Growth and 

Structural Change 

Jansen, M.B. (ed.) The Cambridge History of Japan, Vols V to VI 

Myers, Ramon H. and Mark The Japanese Colonial Empire 1895-1945 

R. Patric (eds.) 

Norman, E.H. Japan’s Emergence as a Modern State 

Pyle, Kenneth B. The Making of Modern Japan 

Scalapino, Robrt A. Democracy and the Party Movement in Pre-War Japan 

Smith, Thomas C. Political Change and Industrial Development in Japan : 

Government Enterprise 

Tanin, O and Yohan, E. Militarism and Fascism in Japan 

Yanaga, Chitoshi Japan Since Parry 

Young, A. Morgan Imperial Japan 1926-1938 

10(1216) 


Paper – XIII (Optional Paper): History of Europe –II (1871-1914) 

10(1217) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 






Unit – I Europe in 1871 : State, Politics and Society; Bismarck and Beginning of Diplomatic 

Alignments : Three Emperors’ League, Dual Alliance, Triple Alliance and Re- 

Insurance Treaty 

Unit – II Franco-German Relations 1871 – 1890; The Eastern Question: Revolt in Bosnia and 

Russo-Turkish War, Berlin Congress, Bulgarian Crisis; European Imperialist 

Interests in Africa and its Partition 

Unit – III Franco-Russian Alliance, Anglo-French Alliance, Anglo-Russian Alliance and 

Formation of Triple Entente; Shifting Positions of Italy; Nature of the Triple 

Alliance and Triple Entente 1907-1914 

Unit –IV Morocco Crisis, Bosnian Crisis and Agadir Crisis; Anglo-German Naval Rivalry; 

Balkan League and Balkan Wars; World War – I : Origins and Responsibility 


Bartbelt , C.J. Peace, War and European Powers 1814-1914 



Evans, J. The Foundations of A Modern State in 19 th Century 

Fay, S.B. Origins of the First World War 

Gooch, G.P. History of Modern Europe 1878-1920 


Gupta, Parthsarthi (ed.) Europe Ka Itihas (Hindi) 

Gupta, Parthsarthi (ed.) Samkalin Europe (Hindi) 






Langer, W.L. The Diplomacy of Imperialism 

Langer, W.L. European Alliances and Alignments 


Marriot, J.A.R. The Remaking of Modern Europe 


Post, Ken Revolution and European Experience 1789-1914 


Robertson, C.G. Bismark 

Roth, J.J. (ed.) World War I : A Turning Point in Modern History 



Taylor, A.J.P. Bismark : The Man and Statesman 

Taylor, A.J.P. Struggle For the Mastery in Europe 


Paper – XIV (Optional Paper) : History of the U.S.A. –II (1865-1945) 

10(1218) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 






Unit – I Reconstruction after Civil War: Presidential, Radical and Congressional Plans; 

Economic Changes: Growth of Capitalism and Big Business; Growth of Industries 

and Agriculture 

Unit – II Farmers’ Unrest and Populism; Causes of the Labour Unrest and Rise of Unionism; 

The Progressive Movement and Reforms under Roosevelt, Taft and Wilson 

Unit – III Emergence of U.S.A. as an Imperial Power: Spanish-American War; Foreign 

Policies of Roosevelt, Taft and Wilson; U.S.A. and World War – I 

Unit – IV Post-War Developments from Harding to Hoover; Economic Depression; Franklin 

D. Roosevelt and the New Deal; U.S.A and World War – II 


Blum, John M. et. al. The National Experience : A History of the United States 


Boyer, Paul, Marvard Sitkoff et. al. The Enduring Vision : A History of the American People, 

Vol. I 

Current, Richard, M.T. Williams et. al. American History : A Survey, Vol. 1 





Grobb, Gerald N. and George A. Billigs Interpretations of American History : Patterns and 


Hicks, John D. The Federal Union : A History of U.S.A. Since 1865 










Saxena, B.L. Sanyukt Rajya America Ka Itihas (Hindi) 

Shihan, Donald The Making of American History : The Emergence of A 

Nation, Vols. 1 & II 

Tripathi, Dwijendra and S.C. Tiwari Themes and Perspectives in American History 

Paper – XV (Optional Paper) : History of Britain –II (1815-1914) 

10(1219) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 






Unit – I Britain in 1815: Society and Economy; Industrial Transformation; Political System 

before the Parliamentary Reforms; Parliamentary Reforms; Chartist Movement 

Unit – II Durham Report and the New Colonial Policy; Changes in the Party System; Home 

and Foreign Policies of Palmers ton, Gladstone and Disraeli; Rise of Labour Party 

Unit – III Growth of Capitalism and British Economy; Society and Social Legislations; Trade 

Unionism; Parliament Act of 1911 

Unit – IV Policy of ‘Splendid Isolation’; British Diplomacy and the System of Alignments; 

Britain’s Involvement into World War – I 


Ashton, T.S.(ed.) An Economic History of England 1870-1939 

Best, Geofrey Mid-Victorian Britain 1851-1875 

Cape, Jonathan England in the 19th Century 1815-1914 

Clapham, J.H. An Economic History of Modern Britain, 3 vols. 

Clark, G. Kitson The Making of Victorian England 

Cole, G.D.H. and P. Raymond The Common People 




Gupta, Parthasarthi (ed.) Britain Ka Itihas (Hindi) 

Halvey, Elie History of British People in the 19th Century, Vols. I 

to IV 

Herbert, L.P. A History of Modern Britain 1815-1961 


Morgan, Kenneth O. The Oxford Illustrated History of Britain, Vols. 1&2 

Norman, Edward A History of Modern Ireland 


Stvenson, Daivd The Outbreak of the First World War 



Thompson, Dorthy Chartist : Popular Politics in the Industrial Revolution 



Ward, J.T.(ed.) Popular Movements 





Paper – XVI (Optional Paper ) : History of Soviet Russia-II (1917-1991) 

10(1220) 

Marks: 80 


Time: 3 Hours 






Unit – I Political, Social and Economic Conditions of Russia in 1917; The February 

Revolution; The Provisional Government and its Limitations; The October 

Revolution: Causes, Course and Consequences 

Unit – II ‘War Communism’ and Establishment of the Soviet State; New Economic Policy 

under Lenin; Intra-Party Struggle after Lenin; Economic Planning and Land 

Collectivization under Stalin 

Unit – III The Soviet Foreign Policy 1933-1941; Soviet Union and World War-II; Stalinist 

Policies of Recovery; U.S.S.R. and the Cold War; De-Stalinization under 

Khrushchev 

Unit – IV Stagnancy in Soviet State under Brezhnev; Gorbachev’s Reforms with special 

reference to ‘Perestroika and ‘Glasnost; Disintegration of the Soviet Union: Causes, 

Course and Significance 


Arago, Louis A History of U.S.S.R. from Lenin to Krushchev 

Omytrychyn, Besil A History of Russia 

Brar, Bhupinder Explaining Communist Crisis 

Carr, E.H. The Interregnum 1923-24 


Carr, E.H. The Bolshevik Revolution 1917-1923 

Deutscher, Issac Stalin : A Political Biography 

Dobb, Maurice Soviet Economic Development Since 1917 

Girkin, C.H. and H.H. 

Fisher 

Bolsheviks and the World War 


Hill, Christopher Lenin and the Russian Revolution 

Hobsbawm, Eric Age of Extremes : The Short Twentieth Century (1914-1991) 

Hobsbawm, Eric The Age of Revolution 

Kochan, Lionel B. The Making of Modern Russia 

Kochan, Lionel B. Russia in Revolution 1890-1918 

Male, D.J. Russian Peasant Organization Before Collectivization : A 

Study of Commune and Gathering 1925-1930 

Noger, Joseph L. and Soviet Foreign Policy Since World War II 

Robert H. Donaldson 

Nove, Alec An Economic History of the U.S.S.R. 

Robinson, Nail Ideology and the Collapse of Soviet System : A Critical 

History of Soviet Ideological Discourse 

Schapir, Leonard The Government and Politics of the Soviet Union 

Shub, David Lenin 

Trotsky, L. Lenin 

10(1221) 


Outline of Test, Syllabi and Courses of Reading for M.A. (Previous) English 

First and Second Semester Examinations (effective from the Academic session 

2012-13). 


SCHEME OF EXAMINATION 

End Semester Exam/Theory : 80 Marks Time : 3 Hours 

Internal Assessment : 20 Marks (Division of marks as given below) 

(i) Two handwritten assignments : 10 Marks 

(First assignment after one month of the 

start of the semester& second assignment 

after two months) 

(ii) One class test (One hour duration) : 5 Marks 

(iii) Attendance : 5 Marks 


(a) 91% onwards : 5 Marks 

(b) 81% to 90% : 4Marks 

(c) 75% to 80% : 3Marks 

(d) 70% to 74% : 2Marks 

(e) 65% to 69 % : 1Mark 

10(1222) 


COURSE-I: 

COURSE-II: 

COURSE-III: 

COURSE-IV: 

COURSE-V: 

COURSE-VI: 

COURSE-VII: 

COURSE-VIII: 

COURSE-IX: 

COURSE-X: 

LITERATURE IN ENGLISH: 1550-1660 

(PART-I) 


(PART-I) 


(PART-I) 


(PART-I) 

STUDY OF A GENRE (OPTION-i) 

FICTION(PART-I) 

STUDY OF A GENRE (OPTION-ii) 

DRAMA(PART-I) 

STUDY OF A GENRE (OPTION-iii) 

POETRY(PART-I) 

LITERATURE IN ENGLISH: 1550- 

1660 (PART-II) 







STUDY OF A GENRE (OPTION-i) 

FICTION(PART-II) 

STUDY OF A GENRE (OPTION-ii) 

DRAMA(PART-II) 

STUDY OF A GENRE (OPTION-iii) 

POETRY(PART-II) 

FIRST SEMESTER 

10(1223) 

Max. 

Marks 

100 

SECOND SEMESTER 

End Semester 

Exam /Theory 

80 

Internal Exam 

Assessment 

20 

Duration 

3 Hours 

100 80 20 3 Hours 

100 80 20 3 Hours 

100 80 20 3 Hours 

100 80 20 3 Hours 

100 80 20 3 Hours 

100 80 20 3 Hours 

Max. 

Marks 

100 

End Semester Exam 

/Theory 

80 

Internal Exam 

Assessment Duration 

20 3 Hours 

100 80 20 3 Hours 

100 80 20 3 Hours 

100 80 20 3 Hours 

100 80 20 3 Hours 

100 80 20 3 Hours 

100 80 20 3 Hours 


M.A. (PREVIOUS) ENGLISH 

FIRST SEMESTER 

COURSE-I: LITERATURE IN ENGLISH: 1550-1660 (Part-I) 

Hours 

Note: (To be printed in the question paper) 

10(1224) 


Time : 3 

1. Besides Question No. 1, which is compulsory, a candidate shall choose one question 

from each of the four units, attempting five questions in all. 

2. Each of the 5 questions carries 16 marks. 

Note for Paper-Setters: 

1. The paper-setter will set 9 questions in all. 

2. Question No. 1 shall consist of four short answer type questions evenly spread over 

the whole 

syllabus. Each of the answers should be of about 100-150 words. There will be no 

internal choice in this question. 

3. Two questions will be set from each unit. 

Unit-I: Philip Sidney : The following Sonnets from Astrophel and Stella are 

prescribed: 

“Loving in truth, and fain in verse my love to show”, 

“Not at first sight, nor with a dribbed shot", 

“Virtue, alas, now let me take some rest", 

“It is most true, that eyes are formed to serve", 

"Reason, in faith thou art well serv'd, that still", 

“Alas have I not pain enough, my friend", 

“You that do search for every purling spring”, 

“Your words, my friend, right healthful caustics, blame", 

“Because I oft, in dark abstracted guise”, 

“Come, let me write, And to what end?”, 

“This night while sleep begins with heavy wings”, 

“Stella oft sees the very face of woe", 

“No more, my dear, no more these counsels try”, 

“Desire, though thou my old companion art” 

Unit-II: Christopher Marlowe : Doctor Faustus 

Unit-III: John Milton : Paradise Lost, Book-I 

Unit-IV: William Shakespeare : Twelfth Night 



1. Reeves, James. A Short History of English Poetry. 

2. Sanders, Andrew .The Short Oxford History of English Literature. 

3. Ringler, William A., ed. The Poems of Sir Philip Sidney. 

4. Charlton, H.B. Shakespearean Comedy. 

5. Palmer, John Comic Characters in Shakespeare. 

6. Barber, C.L. Creating Elizahethan Tragedy: The Theater of Marlowe and Kyd. 

7. Levin, Harry. Christopher Marlowe: The Overreacher. 

8. Steans, J.B. Marlowe: A Critical Study. 

9. Barker, Arthur E, ed. Milton:Modern Essays in Criticism. 

10. Danielson, Daniss, ed. The Cambridge Companion to Milton. 

10(1225) 


COURSE-II: LITERATURE IN ENGLISH: 1660-1798 (Part-I) 


10(1226) 

Max. Marks : 80+20 








the whole 




Unit-I John Dryden : Absalom and 

Achitophel. 

Unit-II Alexander Pope : The Rape of the Lock. 

Unit-III William Congreve : The Way of the World. 

Unit-IV Richard Sheridan : The School for Scandal. 


1. Bonamee, Dobree. Restoration Comedy. 

2. John, Lofties, ed. Restoration Drama: Modern Essays in Criticism. 

3. Ian, Jack. Augustan Satire. 

4. Hugh, Walker. Satire and Satirists. 

5. Ford, Boris, ed. From Dryden to Johnson, The New Pelican Guide to English Literature, 

Vol.4 

6. Brower, Reuben Arthur. Alexander Pope: The Poetry of Illusion. 

7. Hammond, Paul. John Dryden: A Literary Life. 

8. Winn, James Anderson. John Dryden and His World. 

9. Morris, Brian, ed. William Congreve. 

10. Novak, Maximilian. William Congreve. 

11. Ayling, Stanley. A Portrait of Sheridan. 

12. Worth, Katharine. Sheridan and Goldsmith. 


COURSE-III : LITERATURE IN ENGLISH: 1798-1914 (Part-I) 


10(1227) 









the whole 




Unit-I: William Wordsworth : "To the Cuckoo", "The Solitary Reaper", "Daffodils", 

"Tintern 

Abbey", "Ode on Intimations of Immortality", “Lucy 

Gray”, “Simon Lee, The Old Huntsman”, "The 

Tables Turned". 

Unit-II John Keats : "On First Looking into Chapman's Homer", "When I 

have Fears 

that I may Cease to Be”, “Ode to a Nightingale”, 

“Ode on a Grecian Urn”, “Ode on Melancholy”, “To 

Autumn”, “To Psyche”. 

Unit-Ill: Charles Dickens : Oliver Twist 

Unit-IV: George Eliot : The Mill on the Floss 


1. Bowra, C.M. The Romantic Imagination. 

2. Reeves, James. A Short History of English Poetry. 

3. Abrams, M.H. English Romantic Poets:Modern Essays in Criticism. 

4. Batho, E. and B. Dobree. The Victorians and After 1830-1914. 

5. Leavis, F.R. New Bearings in English Poetry. 

6. Hartman, G.H. Wordsworth's Poetry. 1787-1834. 

7. Bateson, F.W. Wordsworth: A Re-Interpretation. 

8. Bate, WaIter Jackson, ed. Keats. 

9. Fraser, G.S. John Keats: Odes. 

10. Ford, Borid, ed. The New Pelican Guide to English Literature Volumes 5 and 6. 

11. Leavis, F.R. and Q.D. Leavis. Dickens: The Novelist. 

12. Hall, Stephan, ed. Charles Dickens. 

13. Creeger, George R., ed.George Eliot: A Collection of Critical Essays. 

14 Stephen, Leslie. George Eliot. 


Course IV: LITERATURE IN ENGLISH: 1914-2000 (Part-I) 


10(1228) 









the whole 




Unit I : T.S. Eliot : The Waste Land 

Unit II : E.M. Forster : A Passage to India. 

Unit III : Philip Larkin : "No Road", Poetry of Departures", 

"Going, Going", "Deceptions", "Next Please", 

"If My Darling", "Reasons for Attendance", 

"Wedding Wind", "Church Going", "The Old 

Fools", 

“Ambulances”, “Whitsun Weddings”. 

Unit IV : Kingsley Amis : Lucky Jim 

BOOKS RECOMMENDED 

1. Cox, C.B. and Arnold P. Hinchlife, eds. T.S. Eliot: The Waste Land 

2. Martin, Jay, ed. A Collection of Critical Essays on The Waste Land 

3. Reagen, Stephen, ed. Philip Larkin. 

4. King, Bruce. Three Indian Poets . 

5. Gransden, K.W. E.M.Forster. 

6. Bradbury, Malcolm, ed. Forster: A Collection of Critical Essays. 

7. Show, Peter. Inside Lucky Jim. 


COURSE-V: STUDY OF A GENRE (OPTION-i) FICTION (PART -I) 


10(1229) 









the whole 




Unit-I E.M. Forster : Aspects of the Novel 

Unit-II Jane Austen : Pride and Prejudice 

Unit-III Nathaniel Hawthorne : The Scarlet Letter 

Unit-IV James Joyce : A Portrait of the Artist as a Young Man 


1. Kettle, Arnold. An Introduction to the English Novel Vol.1 

2. Wright, Andrew H. Jane Austen's Novels. 

3. Watt, Ian, ed. Jane Austen. 

4 Gransden, K.W. E. M. Forster. 

5 Bradbury, Malcolm, ed. Forster: A Collection of Critical Essay. 

6 Waggoner , Hyatt H. Hawthorne: A Critical Study. 

7 Attridge, Derek, ed. The Cambridge Companion to Joyce. 

8 Fairhall, James. James Joyce and the Question of History. 


COURSE-V: STUDY OF A GENRE (OPTION-ii) DRAMA (PART-I) 


10(1230) 









the whole 




Unit-I: Sophocles : Oedipus Rex 

Unit-II: Kalidas : Abhijnanashakuntalam 

Unit-III: Henrik Ibsen : A Doll's House 

Unit-IV: Bertolt Brecht : Mother Courage and Her Children 


1. Gassner, John. An Anthology: Introduction to the Drama, 

2. Clark, Barrett H., ed. World Drama. 

3. Clark, Barret H. and George Freedlay, eds. A History of Modern Drama. 

4. Redmond, James, ed. Themes in Drama.. 

5. Driver, Tom F. The Sense of History in Greek and Shakespearean Drama. 

6. Gupt, Bharat. Dramatic Concepts Greek & Indian: A Study of The Poetics and the 

Natyasastra. 

7. Muir, Kenneth. Last Periods of Shakespeare, Racine, Ibsen. 

8. Lucas, F.L. Tragedy. 

9. Abraham, Taisha, ed. Feminist Theory and Modern Drama. 

10. Williams, Raymond. Drama from Ibsen to Brecht 


COURSE-V: STUDY OF A GENRE (OPTION-iii) POETRY (PART-I) 


10(1231) 









the whole 




Unit-I: Geoffrey Chaucer : Prologue to the Canterbury Tales 

Unit-II: S.T.Coleridge : "The Rime of the Ancient Mariner", “Kubla Khan” 

Unit-III: W.B. Yeats : “The Stolen Child”, 

“Lake Isle of Innisfree”, 

“When You are Old”, 

“No Second Troy”, 

“In Memory of Major Robert Gregory”, 

“Easter 1916”, 

“The Second Coming”, 

“A Prayer for My Daughter”, 

“Sailing to Byzantium”, 

“Among School Children”, 

“A Dialogue of Self and Soul”, 

“The Gyres” 

Unit-IV Wallace Stevens :The following poems from The Collected Poems of 

Wallace Stevens 

(Thomson Press India Ltd.) are prescribed. 

"Earthy Anecdote", "The Snow Man", "Sunday Morning", 

"The Emperor of Ice-Cream", "Farewell to Florida", 

"Of Modern Poetry", "The Motive for Metaphor". 


1. Ford, Boris. Medieval Literature: Chaucer and the Alliterative Tradition. 

2. Untermeyer, Louise. Modern American Poetry. 

3. Brewer, D.S., ed. Geoffrey Chaucer. 

4. Beer, John. Coleridge’s Poetic Intelligence. 

5 Leask, Nigel. The Politics of Imagination in Coleridge’s Thought. 

6 Foster, Roy. W. B. Yeats: A Life, 1865-1914. 

7 Jeffares, A Norman. W. B. Yeats:Man and Poet. 

8 Ellmann, Richard. Yeats: The Man and the Masks. 


M.A. (PREVIOUS) ENGLISH 

SECOND SEMESTER 

COURSE-VI : LITERATURE IN ENGLISH: 1550-1660 (Part-II) 


10(1232) 









the whole 




Unit-I: William Shakespeare : Hamlet 

Unit-II: John Donne : The following poems from The Metaphysical Poets ed. Helen 

Gardner 

(Penguin) are prescribed: 

"The Flea", 

"The Good Morrow", "Song: Go and Catch a Falling Star", 

"The Sun Rising", "The Canonization", "A Valediction: 

Forbidding Mourning", "The Extasie", "Batter My 

Heart:Three Person' d God", 

“Loves Growth”, “Since she whome I lovd, hath payd her 

last debt”. 

Unit-III: John Webster : The Duchess of Malfi 

Unit-IV: Francis Bacon : "Of Unity in Religion", “Of Simulation and Dissimulation”, 

"Of Friendship", "Of Ambition", 

"Of Great Place", “Of Studies", 

"Of Truth", “Of Nature in Men”, “Of Love”, “Of Parents and 

Children” 


1. Fredson, Bowers. Elizabethan Revenge Tragedy. 

2. Una, Ellis The Jacobean Drama. 

3. Irving, Ribner. Jacobean Tragedy: The Quest for Moral Order. 

4. Bradley, A.C. Shakespearean Tragedy. 

5. Harbage, Alfred, ed. Twentieth Century Views on Shakespeare. 

6. Bennet, Joan. Five Metaphysical Poets. 

7. Redpath, Theodore. The Songs and Sonnets of John Donne. 

8. Miner, Earl. The Metaphysical Mode from Donne to Cowley 


COURSE-VII: LITERATURE IN ENGLISH: 1660-1798 (Part-II) 


10(1233) 









the whole 




Unit-I: Daniel Defoe : Robinson Crusoe. 

Unit-II: Henry Fielding : Joseph Andrews 

Unit-III: (i) Joseph Addison : "The Aims of The Spectator", “Female Orators”, "Sir 

Roger at the Assizes" “Milton –I”, " “Milton –II”. 

(ii) Richard Steele : "The Spectator's Club", "Duelling". 

Unit-IV: Samuel Johnson : “The Vanity of Human Wishes”, “London” 


1. Lannering, J. Studies in the Prose Style of Joseph Addison 

2. Watt, Ian. The Rise of the Novel: Studies in Defoe, Richardson and Fielding. 

3. Ellis, F.H., ed. Twentieth Century Interpretations of Robinson Crusoe. 

4. Ford, Boris, ed. From Dryden to Johnson. The New Pelican Guide to English 

Literature, Vo1. 4. 

5 Rogers, Pat. Samuel Johnson. 

6 Hudson, Nicholas. Samuel Johnson and Eighteenth Century. 

7 Bloom, Edward. Addison and Steele: The Critical Heritage. 

8 Battestin, Martin C and Ruth Battestin. Henry Fielding: A Life. 

9 Rawson, Claude. Henry Fielding and the Augustun Ideal Under Stress. 


COURSE-VIII : LITERATURE IN ENGLISH: 1798-1914 (Part-II) 


10(1234) 









the whole 




Unit-I : Robert Browning : "Evelyn Hope", 

"Love Among the Ruins", 

"My Last Duchess", 

"The Last Ride Together", 

"A Grammarian's Funeral", 

"Porphyria's Lover", 

"Rabbi Ben Ezra", 

“Meeting at Night”, 

“The Lost Mistress”. 

Unit-II : Thomas Hardy : Tess of the d’Urbervilles. 

Unit-III : Bernard Shaw : Arms and the Man. 

Unit-IV : Gustav Flaubert : Madame Bovary. 


1. Bloom, Harold and Munich, eds.: Robert Browning: A Collection of Critical Essays. 

2. Batho, E. and B. Dobree. The Victorians and After 1830-1914. 

3. Cecil, David. Early Victorian Novelists. 

4. Kettle, Arnold. An Introduction to English Novel. Vol.1 

5 Cecil, David. Hardy: The Novelist. 

6. Kaufmann R.J., ed. G.B.Shaw. 

7. Girand, Raymond, ed. Flaubert. 


COURSE-IX : LITERATURE IN ENGLISH: 1914-2000 (PART-II) 


10(1235) 









the whole 




Unit-I: Nissim Ezekiel : "Night of the Scorpion”, 

“Goodbye Party for Miss Pushpa TS”, 

“The Patriot”, 

“The Visitor”, 

“Poet, Lover, Birdwatcher”, 

“Enterprise”, 

“Philosophy”, 

“Background, Casually”, 

“Poem of Separation”. 

Unit-II: R.K. Narayan : The Guide 

Unit-III: Arthur Miller : Death of a Salesman 

Unit-IV: Albert Camus : The Outsider 


1. Bigsby, C.W.E. An Introduction to Twentieth Century American Drama. 

2. Karl, Frederick R. A Reader's Guide to the Contemporary English Novel. 

3. Walsh, William. R.K. Narayan: A Critical Approach. 

4. Griffith, Alice. Understanding Arthur Miller. 

5. Bigsby, C.W.E., ed. The Cambridge Companion to Arthur Miller. 

6. Bree, Germaine. Camus. 

7. Karnani, Chetan. Nissim Ezekiel. 


COURSE -X: STUDY OF A GENRE (OPTION-i) FICTION (PART -II) 


10(1236) 









the whole 




Unit-I: Joseph Conrad : Heart of Darkness 

Unit-II: D.H. Lawrence : Sons and Lovers 

Unit-III: Raja Rao : Kanthapura 

Unit-IV : V.S. Naipaul : A House for Mr. Biswas 


1. Tredell, Nicolas. Joseph Conrad: Heart of Darkness. 

2. Daiches , David. The Novel and the Modern World. 

3. Beal, Anthony. D.H. Lawrence. 

4. Feder, Lilian. Naipaul's Truth. 

5. Paolo, Pier. The Fiction of Raja Rao. 

6. Naik, M.K.Raja Rao 

7. Hamner, Robert D. Critical Perspectives on V.S. Naipaul. 

8. Mustafe, Fawzia. V.S. Naipaul. 


COURSE X : STUDY OF A GENRE (OPTION-ii) DRAMA (PART -II) 


10(1237) 









the whole 




Unit-I: Tennessee Williams : The Glass Menagerie 

Unit-II: Anton Chekhov : The Cherry Orchard 

Unit-III: Samuel Beckett : Waiting for Godot 

Unit-IV: Mahesh Dattani : Final Solutions 


1. Nicoll, Allardyce. The Theory of Drama. 

2. Henn , T.R. The Harvest of Tragedy. 

3. McColom, William G. Tragedy. 

4. Stuart, Donald Cline. The Development of Dramatic Art. 

5. Bigsby, C.W.E. A Critical Introduction to Twentieth Century American Drama, Vo1. I. 

6. Bloom, Harold, ed. Samuel Beckett. 

7. Connor, Steven. Samuel Beckett: Repetition, Theory and Text. 

8. Ricks, Christopher. Beckett’s Dying Words. 

9. Chaudhary, Asha Kuthari. Mahesh Dattani. 


COURSE X : STUDY OF A GENRE (OPTION-iii) POETRY (PART -II) 


10(1238) 






NOTE for Paper-Setters: 



the whole 




Unit-I Kalidas : Meghdoot (tr) M.R. Kale 

Unit-II Rabindranath Tagore : Gitanjali 

Unit-III Matthew Arnold : The following poems from Fifteen Poets (O.U.P. 

Calcutta) are 

prescribed for study. 

"The Scholar Gipsy", "Thyrsis", "Memorial Verses", 

"Shakespeare", "Dover Beach". 

Unit-IV Wilfred Owen :The following poems from Pocket Book of Modern Verse 

(Washington Square Press: New York) are prescribed. 

"Greater Love", "The Send-off', "The Show", "Anthem 

for Doomed 

Youth", "Arms and the Boy", "Strange Meeting", 

"Apologia Pro 

Poe Meo", "Dulce et Decorum Est", "Insensibility". 


1. Sanders, Andrew. The Short Oxford History of English Literature. 

2. Allott , Kenneth, ed.. The Poems of Matthew Arnold . 

3. Buckley, Jerome Hamilton. The Victorian Temper: A Study of Literary Culture. 

4. Mallinath and Narayan Ram, ed. Meghduta with Commentaries. 

5. Shastri, Braham Shankar, ed. Meghduta with four Commentaries. 

6. Paul, S.K. The Complete Poems of Rabindranath Tagore: Text and Critical Evaluation. 

7. Bhattacharya, Sabyasachi. Rabindranath Tagore: An Interpretation. 



Outline of Test, Syllabi and Courses of Reading for M.A. (Final) English 

Third and Fourth Semester Examinations (effective from the Academic session 

2012-13). 



End Semester Exam/Theory : 80 Marks Time : 3 Hours 

Internal Assessment : 20 Marks (Division of marks as given below) 

(i) Two handwritten assignments : 10 Marks 

(First assignment after one month of the 

start of the semester& second assignment 

after two months) 

(ii) One class test (One hour duration) : 5 Marks 

(iii) Attendance : 5 Marks 


(a) 91% onwards : 5 Marks 

(b) 81% to 90% : 4Marks 

(c) 75% to 80% : 3Marks 

(d) 70% to 74% : 2Marks 

(e) 65% to 69 % : 1Mark 

10(1239) 


Outline of Test, Syllabi and Courses of Reading for M.A. (Final) English Third and 

Fourth Semester Examinations (effective from the Academic session 2012-13). 

OUTLINES OF TEST 

THIRD SEMESTER 

Max. 

Marks 

10(1240) 

End Semester 

Exam/Theory 

Internal 

Assessment 

COURSE-XI CRITICAL THEORY (PART-I) 100 80 20 3 Hours 

COURSE-XII AMERICAN LITERATURE (PART-I) 100 80 20 3 Hours 

COURSE-XIII INDIAN WRITING IN ENGLISH (PART-I) 100 80 20 3 Hours 

COURSE-XIV 

OPT. (I) COLONIAL AND POST-COLONIAL 

STUDIES (PART-I) 

100 80 20 3 Hours 

COURSE-XV 

COURSE- 

XVI 

COURSE- 

XVII 

COURSE- 

XVIII 

COURSE- 

XIX 

COURSE-XX 

OPT. (II) ENGLISH LANGUAGE (PART-I) 

OPT. (I) LITERATURE AND GENDER (PART- 

I) 

OPT. (II) LITERATURE AND PHILOSOPHY 

(PART-I) 

OPT. (III) NEW LITERATURES (PART-I) 

CRITICAL THEORY (PART-II) 

AMERICAN LITERATURE (PART-II) 

INDIAN WRITING IN ENGLISH (PART-II) 

OPT. (i) COLONIAL AND POST-COLONIAL 

STUDIES (PART-II) 

OPT. (ii) ENGLISH LANGUAGE (PART-II) 

OPT. (i) LITERATURE AND GENDER 

(PART-II) 

OPT. (ii) LITERATURE AND PHILOSOPHY 

(PART-II) 

OPT. (iii) NEW LITERATURES (PART-II) 

FOURTH SEMESTER 

Time 

100 80 20 3 Hours 

100 80 20 3 Hours 

100 80 20 3 Hours 

100 80 20 3 Hours 

Max. End Semester Internal 

Time 

Marks Exam/Theory Assessment 

100 80 20 3 Hours 

100 80 20 3 Hours 

100 80 20 3 Hours 

100 80 20 3 Hours 

100 80 20 3 Hours 

100 80 20 3 Hours 

100 80 20 3 Hours 

100 80 20 3 Hours 


COURSE-X1: Critical Theory (PART-I) 

M.A. (FINAL) ENGLISH 

THIRD SEMESTER 


1. A candidate shall attempt 5 questions in all. 

2. All questions carry equal marks. 

Note for paper- setters: 

10(1241) 



1. There shall be one question with internal choice on each of the five units prescribed in the 

syllabus. 

2. Question No. 5 will cover the short items prescribed in Unit-5 of the syllabus. This 

question shall carry six items out of which the candidates shall be required to write short 

notes (of about 150 words each) on four items. 

Unit-I Aristotle: Poetics 

Unit-II Bharatmuni : Natyashastra (Ed. Dr. N.P. Unni) Chapter-I: The Origin of Drama 

Chapter-VI: Sentiments; Chapter-VII: The Exposition of Emotion 

Unit-III Horace: Ars Poetica 

Unit-IV Dr. Johnson: Preface to Shakespeare 

Unit-V: Background Reading 

Plato on Poetry, Neo-Platonism, Longinus on Sublime, Plotinus on Beauty, Apologie 

for Poetry by Philip Sidney, Discourses on the Heroic Poems by Torquato Tasso, 

Essay of Dramatic Poesy by John Dryden, Boccaccio on Poetry, French 

Neoclassicism, Essay on Criticism by Alexander Pope. 

BOOK RECOMMENDED: 

1. James, R.A.J. Scoot. The Making of Literature. 


3. Wimsatt,W..K. Jr. & Cleanth Brooks. Literary Criticism. 

4. Blamires, Harry. A History of Literary Criticism. 

5. Habib, M.A.R. A History of Literary Criticism. 


COURSE-XII: American Literature (PART-I) 

Note: (To be printed in the question –paper) 




10(1242) 



1. There shall be one question with internal choice on each of the five units prescribed in 

the syllabus. 




Unit-I Walt Whitman: One’s Self I Sing”, “There was a Child Went Forth”, “When 

Lilacs Last in the Dooryard Bloom’d”, “Crossing Brooklyn 

Ferry”, 

“On the Beach at Night”, “Song of Myself” (Section 6 and 

Section 32) 

Unit-II Emily Dickinson: “This is My Letter to the World”, “Success is Counted 

Sweetest”, “Much 

Madness is Divinest Sense”, “Because I could not stop for 

Death”, “A Narrow Fellow in the Grass”, “The Heart Asks 

Pleasure First”, “I Never Saw a Moor”, “A Bird Came down 

the Walk”. 

Unit-III Mark Twain: The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn 

Unit-IV Henry James: The Portrait of a Lady 

Unit-V Background Reading: 

The Last of the Mohicans by James Fennimore Cooper, Henry Wadsworth 

Longfellow, 

R.W.Emerson, Nathaniel Hawthorne, Walden by H.D.Thoreau, Edgar Allan Poe, 

Moby Dick by 

Melville, The Awakening by Kate Chopin, William Dean Howells, Zora Neale 

Hurston. 



2. Chase, Richard. The American Novel and Its Tradition 

3. Waggoner, Hyatt Howe. American Poets. 

4. Pearce, Roy Harvey, ed. Whitman: A Collection of Critical Essays. 

5. Sewall, Richard B., ed. Emily Dickinson: A Collection of Critical Essays. 

6. Lettis, Richard et. al. Huck Finn and His Critics. 

7. Staffored, William T. ed. Perspectives on James’s The Portrait of a Lady: A 

Collection of 

Critical Essays. 

8 Grey, Richard. A History of American Literature. 






COURSE-XIII: Indian Writing in English (Part-I) 

10(1243) 




the syllabus. 




Unit-I Sri Aurobindo: Savitri, Book IV 

Unit-II Kamala Das: The following Poems from R. Parthasarathy, ed. Ten 

Twentieth Century 

Indian Poets. 

“The Freaks”, “My Grandmother’s House”, “A Hot Noon in 

Malabar”, “The Sunshine Cat”, “The Invitation”, “The 

Looking Glass”. 

Unit-III Jayant Mahapatra: “The Logic”, “A Missing Person”, “Glass”, “The Whorehouse 

in 

a Calcutta Street”, “Indian Summer”, “Lost”. 

Unit-IV Mulk Raj Anand: Coolie 


Gitanjali, A.K.Ramanujan, All About H. Hatter, The Man-Eater of Malgudi, He Who 

Rides a Tiger, Heat and Dust, Strom in Chandigarh, Such a Long Journey, Arun 

Joshi, Amitav Ghosh. 


1. Naik, M.K. ed. Aspects of Indian Writing in English. 

2. Prasad, Madhusudan. Jayant Mahapatra 

3. Ezekiel, Nissim. Contemporary Poets. 

4. Peeradine, Saleem. Contemporary Indian Poetry: An Assessment. 

6. Gokak, Vinayak Krishna. Sri Aurobindo Seer and Poet 

7. Sharma, K.K., ed. Indo English Literature: Collection of Critical Essays 


COURSE:XIV (Option-i): Colonial and Post-Colonial Studies (Part-I) 





10(1244) 




the syllabus. 


question shall carry 6 items out of which the candidates shall be required to write 

short notes (of about 150 words each) on four items. 

Unit-I B. Ashcroft, G. Griffiths and H. Tiffin: The Empire Writes Back, Theory and 

Practice in Post-Colonial Literature 

Unit-II Rudyard Kipling: Kim 

Unit-III Premchand: Karamabhumi 

Unit-IV Edward Said: Culture and Imperialism 


B. Anderson’s Imagined Communities, The Raj Quartet, Heart of Darkness, Waiting 

for the Mahatma, Burmese Days, Coolie, John Masters, The Story of My 

Experiments with Truth, Colonial Transactions, A Passage to India. 


1. Loomba, Ania. Colonialism/ Post Colonialism. 

2. Rubin, David. After the Raj: British Novels of India Since 1947. 

3. Pal, Adesh, et.al. : Decolonisation: A Search for Alternatives. 

4. Madan, Inder Nath. Premchand. 

5. Dhawan, R.K., ed. Commonwealth Fiction. 

6. Islam, Shamsul. Kipling’s Law: A Study of His Philosophy of Life. 

7. Lewis. The Imperial Imagination: Magic and Myth in Kipling’s India. 


COURSE-XIV: (Option-ii): English Language (Part-I) 





10(1245) 




syllabus. 

2. Question No. 2 will have two parts: a) Transcribing and marking stress on 10 out of 15 

words 

b) Marking stress and tones in 10 out of 15 sentences 

3. Question No. 4 will have two parts: (a) Translation of a prose passage from Hindi to English 

(b) Translation of a prose passage from English to Hindi. Both the parts will carry 10 marks 

each. 


question shall carry 6 items out of which the candidates shall be required to write short 


Unit-I Phonetics: Speech Mechanism, Role of different organs of speech, Sounds of 

English, Description of Sounds, Syllable and Stress, Intonation and its functions 

Unit-II a) Transcribing words phonemically with primary stress (using the symbols of 

Oxford Advanced Learner’s Dictionary, 7 th edition) 

b) Marking stress and tones (falling/rising/falling-rising) in sentences 

Unit-III History of English Language: Old English, Middle English, Latin, Celtic and 

Scandinavian Influence on Old English, Renaissance and the English Language, 

Change from Old to Modern English. 

Unit-IV Translation: (a) Hindi to English (b) English to Hindi 

Unit-V Background Reading 

Weak Forms, Dialect, Idiolect, Register, Received Pronunciation, Immediate 

Constituent Analysis, Cohesion and Coherence, Language Varieties, Rhythm in 

connected speech, Consonant clusters in English 


1. Connor, J.D.O. Better English Pronunciation. 

2. Roach, Peter. English Phonetics and Phonology. 

3. Sethi and Dhamija. A Course in Phonetics and Spoken English. 

4. Baugh, A.C. and T. Cable. A History of English Language. 

5. Rigg, A.G., ed. The English Language: A Historical Reader. 

6. Strang, B. A History of English. 


COURSE-XV : (Option-I) Literature and Gender (Part-I) 





10(1246) 




the syllabus. 


question shall carry six items out of which the candidates shall be required to write 

short notes (of about 150 words each) on four items. 

Unit-I Charlotte Bronte: Jane Eyre 

Unit-II Virginia Woolf: To the Lighthouse 

Unit-III Virginia Woolf: A Room of One’s Own 

Unit-IV Doris Lessing: The Golden Notebook 


Toril Moi’s Sexual/Textual Politics, Elaine Showalter’s The New Feminist Criticism, 

Margaret Drabble’s Waterfall, Margaret Atwood’s Surfacing, Kamla Markanday’s 

Nector in a Sieve, A feminist reading of D.H.Lawrence’s Sons and Lovers, Rama 

Mehta’s Inside the Haveli, Namita Gokhle, Nayantara Sehgal, Gita Mehta’s Raj. 


1. Ruthwen, K.K. Feminist Literary Studies: An Introduction. 

2. Showalter, Elaine. A Literature of Their Own. 

3. Gilbert, Sandra and Susan Gubar: The Madwoman in the Attic. 

4. Moody, A.D. Virginia Woolf: 

5. Bennett, Joan. Virginia Woolf: Her Art as a Novelist. 

6. Reid, Su, ed. Mrs. Dalloway and to the Lighthouse. 

7. Stubbs, Patricia. Women and Fiction. 

8. Rubenstein, Robert. The Novelistic Vision of Doris Lessing. 


COURSE-XV (Option-ii): Literature and Philosophy (Part-I) 





10(1247) 




the syllabus. 




Unit-I Plato: Republic Book-X 

Unit-II Dante: The Divine Comedy (The Inferno) 

Unit-III Pope: An Essay of Man 

Unit-IV Rousseau: Emile 

. 


Lucretius’s ‘On the Nature of Things’, Voltaire’s Candida, Johnson’s Rasselas, 

Debate between Leavis and Wellek in Scrutiny, Wordsworth’s The Prelude, 

Camus’s The Myth of Sisyphus, Tagore’s The Religion of Man , Spenser’s Four 

Hymns, Browne’s Religio Medici, A.K. Coomaraswamy 


1. Russell, B. The History of Western Philosophy. 

2. Quinton, Antony. Thoughts and Thinkers. 

3. Alston, William P. Reading in Twentieth Century Philosophy. 

4. Grube, G.M.A. Plato’s Thought. 

5. Meszaros, Istvan. The works of Sartre. 

6. Taylor, A.S. Plato: The Man and His Works. 

7. Lucretius. The Nature of Things. Translated by William Germa Leonard. 

8. Fergusson, Francis. Dante. 

9. Blooming, Mark Musa. Essay on Dante. 

10. Jacoff, Rachel. The Cambridge Companion to Dante. 

11. J., John D. Sinclair. Dante: The Divine Comedy. 

12. Sartre. Sartre: My Childhood and Early Days. 

13. Mazzotte, Guiseppa. Dante: The Poet of the Desert. 

14. Cruickshand, John. French Literature and its Background. 

15. Paul, S.L. Philosophical Background to Western Literature 

16. Gokak, Vinayak Krishna. Sri Aurobindo: Seer and Poet 


COURSE-XV: (Option-iii): New Literatures (Part-I) 





10(1248) 




the syllabus. 




Unit-I Patrick White: The Vivisecto. 

Unit-II Judith Wright: Poems from An Anthology of Commonwealth Poetry, ed. C.D. 

Narasimahia (Macmillan, Madras). 

Unit-III Sally Morgan: My Place 

Unit-IV Chinua Achebe: Things Fall Apart 

. 


David Malouf, Bruce Beaver, Thomas Keneally, We are Going by Kath 

Walker, The Concubine by Elechi Amadi, Ngugi Wa Thiong’o, The 

Wretched of the Earth of Franz Fannon, J.M.Coetzee, Doris Lessing, 

V.S.Naipaul. 


1. Wolfe, Peter. Critical Essays on Patrick White. 

2. Bjorksten, I. Patrick White: A General Introduction. 

3. Bliss, Carolyne Jane. Patrick White’s Fiction. 

4. Bliss, Delys and Dennis Haskell: Whose Place? A Study of Sally Morgan’s My 

Place. 

5. Brewster, Anne. Reading Aboriginal Women’s Autobiography. 

6. Inner, C.L. and Beruth Lindfros: Critical Perspectives on Chinua Achebe 

7. ---. Chinua Achebe. 

8. Carrol, David. Chinua Achebe. 


M.A. (FINAL) ENGLISH 

FORTH SEMESTER 

COURSE-XVI: Critical Theory (PART-II) 





10(1249) 




syllabus. 




Unit-I William Wordsworth: Preface to Lyrical Ballads 

Unit-II Matthew Arnold: Selections from Essays in Criticism 

1. “The Function of Criticism at the Present Time” 

2. “The Study of Poetry” 

3. “John Keats” 

Unit-III (i) Virginia Woolf: “Modern Fiction” 

(ii) T.S. Eliot: “Tradition and the Individual Talent” 

(iii) I.A. Richards: Chapters XXVII and XVIII 

of Principles of Literary Criticism 

(“Levels of Response and the Width of Appeal” and “The 

Allusiveness of 

Modern Poetry”) 

Unit-IV (i) Saussure: “The Object of Study” 

(ii) Jakobson: “The Metaphoric and Metonymic Poles” 

(iii) M.H. Abrams: “The Deconstructive Angel” 

Unit-V: T.S.Eliot’s “The Function of Criticism”, E.M.Forster on “Flat” and “Round” 

Characters, Foster on “Points of View”, W.K.Wimsatt and M.C. Beardslay 

on “The Intentional Fallacy”, Wimsatt and Beardslay on” The Affective 

Fallacy” , Raymond Williams’ “Realism and the contemporary Novel” , 

Lionel Trilling’s “Freud and Literature”, Psychoanalytical criticism, Poststructuralism, 

New Historicism 

BOOK RECOMMENDED: 

1. James, R.A.J. Scott.The Making of Literature. 


3. Wimsatt, W..K. & Cleanth Brooks: Literary Criticism. 

4. Blamires, Harry. A History of Literary Criticism. 

5. Habib, M.A. R. A History of Literary Criticism. 


COURSE-XVII : American Literature (Part-II) 





10(1250) 




syllabus. 




Unit-I Robert Frost: “Provide Provide”, “Mending Wall”, “The Road Not Taken”, 

“Two 

Tramps in Mud Time”, “Stopping By Woods on a Snowy 

Evening”, 

“Birches”, “The Onset”, “After Apple Picking” 

Unit-II Ernest Hemingway: The Sun Also Rises 

Unit-III Eugene O’Neill: The Hairy Ape 

Unit-IV Tennessee Williams: A Streetcar Named Desire 


The Great Gatsby by F. Scott Fitzgerald, The Sound and the Fury by Faulkner, 

Herzog by Saul Bellow, Invisible Man by Ralph Ellison, Arthur Miller, Who’s 

Afraid of Virginia Woolf by Albee, Sylvia Plath, Langston Hughes, Wallace Stevens, 

Catch-22 by Joseph Heller. 



2. Chase, Richard. The American Novel and Its Tradition 

3. Waggoner, Hyatt Howe. American Poets. 

4. Cox, James M., ed.Robert Frost: A Collection of Critical Essays, Spectrum Book 

5. Robert P. Weeks, ed. Hemingway: A collection of Critical Essays. 

6. Dahiya, Bhim S. The Hero in Hemingway. 

7. Gassner, John, ed. O’Neill: A Collection of Critical Essays. 

8. Weales, Gerald. Tennessee Williams, Pamphlets on American Writers. 

9 Grey, Richard. A History of American Literature. 


COURSE-XVIII: Indian Writing in English (Part-II) 





10(1251) 




syllabus. 




Unit-I Raja Rao: Kanthapura 

Unit-II Anita Dasai: Voices in the City 

Unit-III Asif Currimbhoy: Goa 

Unit-IV S. Radhakrishnan: The Hindu View of Life 


Hyavadan, The Autobiography of An Unknown Indian, Manohar Malgonkar, Geive 

Patel, Chaman Nahal, Bhisham Sawhney’s Tamas , Ghasi Ram Kotwal, Train to 

Pakistan, Vikram Seth, Shashi Deshpande. 


1. Naik, M.K., ed. Aspects of Indian Writing in English. 

2. ---. Raja Rao 

3. Bowers, Faubian. The World of Asif Currimbhoy 

4. Dhawan, M.K., ed. The Novels of Mulk Raj Anand 

5. Sharma, K.K. Indo English Literature: Collection of Critical Essays 


COURSE-XIX (Option-i): Colonial and Post-Colonial Studies (Part-II) 


1.. A candidate shall attempt 5 questions in all. 

2.All questions carry equal marks. 


10(1252) 




syllabus. 




Unit-I Doris Lessing: The Grass is Singing 

Unit-II Salman Rushdie: Midnight’s Children 

Unit-III Chinua Achebe: Things Fall Apart 

Unit-IV Shashi Tharoor: The Great Indian Novel 

Unit-IX Background Reading: 

Homi Bhabha on Hybridity, Nadine Gordimer, Orientalism, Ben Okri’s A Way of 

Being Free, Ania Loomba’s Colonialism/Post Colonialism, V.S. Naipaul’s A Bend 

in the River , Spivak’s Can the Subaltern Speak?, Evelyn Waugh’s Black Mischief , 

Kazuo Ishigaro The Remains of the Day , Francis Fukuyama,s The End of History 

and the Last Man 


1. Loomba, Ania. Colonialism/ Post Colonialism. 

2. Rubin, David. After the Raj: British Novels of India Since 1947. 

3. Anupam, Adesh Pal. Decolonization: A Search for Alternatives Nagar and Tapas. 

4. Madan, Inder Nath. Premchand,. 

5. Dhawan, R.K., ed. Commonwealth Fiction. 

6. Islam, Shamsul. Kipling’s Law: A Study of His Philosophy of Life. 

7. Wurgaft, Lewis D. The Imperial Imagination: Magic and Myth in Kipling’s India 

8. Dillam, G.D. The Novels of Chinua Achebe 


COURSE-XIX (Option ii): English Language (Part-II) 





10(1253) 




syllabus. 




Unit-I Study of Clauses: Nature and composition of Clauses vis-à-vis Phrases and 

compound sentences, subordinate and coordinate clauses and their formation by 

subordinate and coordinating conjunctions, composition, uses and function of 

Relative clauses, Noun clauses and Adverbial clauses. 

Unit-II Critical Appreciation: a) Critical analysis of a short poem b) Critical analysis of a 

prose text. 

Unit-III ELT in India: A brief history, Role of English, Nature and approaches of Methods, 

Problems and Perspectives 

Unit-IV Methods and Materials: Grammar-Translation Method, Direct Method, Audio- 

Lingual Method, Communicative Language Teaching, Devising Pedagogic exercises 

according to the principles of a method. 


Imagery, Metaphor, Symbolism, Euphemism, Transformational-Generative 

Grammar, ESP, Bilingualism, Second Language acquisition, Handling of large 

classes, Situational Language Teaching. 


1. Richards, Jack C. and Theodore S. Rodgers: Approaches and Methods in Language 

Teaching: A Description and Analysis. 

2.. Rossner, Richard and Rod Bilitho, ed. Currents of Change in English Language Teaching. 

3. Gautam, K.K. A Critical Study of Methods and Approaches. 


COURSE-XX: (Option-i) Literature and Gender (Part-II) 





10(1254) 




syllabus. 




Unit-I Toni Morrison: Beloved 

Unit-II Simone de Beauvoir: The Second Sex 

Unit-III Shashi Deshpande: That Long Silence 

Unit-IV Alice Walker: The Color Purple 


Rebecca West, Mary Wollstonecraft’s A Vindication of the Rights of the Women, 

Anita Desai’s Fire on the Mountain, Kamla Das’s My Story, Mahasweta Devi, A 

Feminist reading of Osborne’s Look Back in Anger, Bharti Mukherjee, Gita 

Hariharan, George Eliot’s Middlemarch, Kate Millette’s Sexual Politics 


1. Ruthwen, K.K. Feminist Literary Studies: An Introduction. 

2. Showalter, Elaine. A Literature of Their Own. 

3. Gilbert, Sandra and Susan Gubar: The Madwoman in the Attic. 

4. Moody, A.D. Virginia Woolf:. 

5. Bennett, Joan. Virginia Woolf: Her Art as a Novelist 

6. Reid, Su, ed. Mrs., Dalloway and to the Lighthouse. 

7. Stubbs, Patricia. Women and Fiction. 

8. Rubenstein, Robert. The Novelistic Vision of Doris Lessing . 


COURSE-XX : (Option-ii): Literature and Philosophy (Part-II) 





10(1255) 




syllabus. 




Unit-I Nietzsche: The Birth of Tragedy 

Unit-II Sartre: “Existentialism and Humanism.” 

Unit-III Rabindranath Tagore: Gitanjali 

Unit-IV Raja Rao: The Serpent and the Rope 


Shaw’s Man and Superman, Bergson’s Creative Evolution, Sri Aurobindo, Jalal ad- 

Din Mahammad Rumi, Pablo Neruda, Iris Murdoch’s The Sea, the Sea, Milan 

Kundera’s Ignorance, Franz Kafka The Metamorphosis, Michel Foucault, Jacques 

Derrida 


1. Russell, B. The History of Western Philosophy. 

2. Quinton, Antony.Thoughts and Thinkers. 

3. Alston, William P. Reading in Twentieth Century Philosophy. 

4. Grube, G.M.A. Plato’s Thought. 

5. Meszaros, Istvan. The Works of Sartre. 

6. Taylor, A.S. Plato: The Man and His Works. 

7. Leonard, William Germa, trans.The Nature of Things: Lucretius. 

8. Sartre. Sartre: My Childhood and Early Days. 

9. Cruickshand, Paul. French Literature and its Background. 

10. Paul, S.L. Philosophical Background to Western Literature. 


COURSE-XX : (Option-iii): New Literatures (Part-II) 





10(1256) 




syllabus. 




Unit-I Wole Soyinka: Death and the King’s Horseman 

Unit-II Nadine Gordimer: July’s People 

Unit-III Jean Rhys: Wide Sargasso Sea 

Unit-IV Louise Erdrich: Tracks 


Claude Mckay, Rohinton Mistry, Jhumpa Lahiri, Maya Angelou, Kevin 

Gilbert, Judith Ortis Cofer, Alberto Alvaro Rios, Sipho Sepmla, Yusef 

Komunyakaa, Sherman Alexie’s Reservation Blues 


1. Jones, Eldred. The Writing of Wole Soyinka 

2. Wright, Derek. Wole Soyinka. 

3. Angier, Carole. Jean Rhys, Life and Works. 

4. Howells, Caroll Ann. Jean Rhys. 

5. Thomas, Sue. The Worlding of Jean Rhys. 

6. Thieme, John. Derek Walcolt. 

7. Sawhney, Brajesh. Studies in the Literary Achievement of Louise Erdrich, Native 

American Writer: Fifteen Critical Essays. 



B.A.II 

Semester III 

2012-13 

ENGLISH (COMPULSORY) 

10(1257) 

Max.Marks 100 

End Semester Exam 80 

Internal Assessment 20 

Time 3 Hours 

1. Sounds in Stillness An Anthology of Poems. ed.by S.S. Sangwan . Delhi: OUP, 

2. Selected episodes from the Mahabharta by C.Raja Gopalachari, Mumbai 7 : Bharatiya 

Vidya Bhavan . 

The episode “Ganapti, the Scribe” and first 24 Chapters from “Devarata” to “The 

Wager”are prescribed for study. 

3. Grammar, Pronunciation/Transcription 

From A Text book of Grammar by Inderjit Kumar and Sanjay Kumar .Kurukshetra : K U 

K. 

Instructions to the Paper-Setter and Students: 

Q.1 Explanation with reference to the context : Candidates will be required to attempt two 

extracts one each from the book of poems i.e.Sounds in Stillness Mahabharta. The passages 

will have internal choice. 6 x2=12 marks 

Q.2 Short-answer type questions 

Four short-answer type questions will be set on the prescribed poems and four short-answer 

type questions will be set on the Mahabharta. Students will be required to attempt five 

questions out of given eight questions selecting at least two from each text (i.e.Sounds in 

Stillness and the Mahabharta) 

5x4=20 marks 

Q.3 One essay type question (with internal choice) will be set on the prescribed book of poems. 

10 marks 

Q.4 One essay type question (with internal choice) will be set on the 

Mahabharta . 10 marks 

Q.5 Fifteen words / phrases from the book of poems and the Mahabharta. Students 

will be required to use any twelve in sentences of their own 12x1=12 marks 

Q.6 Questions on Grammar on the prescribed items(use of Tenses in communicative situations, 

subject-verb concord, active and passive voice, narration, common errors, word power, 

vocabulary, idioms and phrases ) and transcription based on prescribed text-book of 

Grammar but not necessarily the same as those given in 

the text book. The candidate will be required to attempt sixteen items out of given twenty. 

16 marks 


B. A. II (Semester-III) 

ADDITIONAL ENGLISH 

(2012-13) 

Scheme of Examination Max.Marks 100 



Time 3 Hours 

Texts 

Part-I English Essayists. Ed. Sushant K. Sinha (Delhi: O.U.P,1978) 

The candidate will be required to study the following essays: 

1. A.C.Benson “The Art of the Essayist” 

2. Francis Bacon “Of Studies” 

3. Joseph Addison “Sir Roger at Church” 

4. Richard Steele “The Spectator Club” 

5. Charles Lamb “The Two Races of Men” 

6. William Hazlitt “On Familiar Style” 

7. R.L. Stevenson “Walking Tours” 

8. E.V. Lucas “A Funeral” 

9. Hillaire Belloc “In Praise of Ignorance” 

Part-II Fragrance (A Poetry Anthology). Ed. K. Sreenivasan (O.U.P.) excluding the following poems: 

i) “Ode to a Skylark” by P.B. Shelley 

ii) “Ode on a Grecian Urn” by John Keats 

iii) “A Prayer for My Daughter” by W. B. Yeats 

Instructions to the Paper Setter and the Students: 

Question 1. Two extracts for explanation with reference to the context (with internal choice) from 

Part I and II. 8x2=16 

Question 2 One essay type general question (with internal choice) on Part I requiring 

students to give answer in about 300 words 12 

Question 3 One essay type general question (with internal choice) on Part II requiring the students 

to give answer in about 300 words 12 

Question 4 Students will be required to answer in about 50 words each any five out of the given 

eight questions on Part-I 5x3=15 

Question 5 Students will be required to answer in about 50 words each any five out of the given 

eight questions on Part-II 5x3=15 

Question 6 Students will be required to give meanings of any five words out of the given eight 

(from the prescribed texts) and also use them in sentences of their own to make the meaning clear. 

5x2= 10 

10(1258) 


B.A.II 

Semester III 

2012-13 

FUNCTIONAL ENGLISH 




Time 3 Hours 

Communicative and Writing Skills: 

Course Content: 

1. Spotting the errors pertaining to nouns, pronouns, adjectives and adverbs, subject verb 

concord. 

2. Lexis : Idioms and phrases, words often confused, one -word substitution,foreign words (A 

selected list), vocabulary development through synonyms, antonyms,formation of words 

with affixes . 

3. Developing writing skills: Writing small paragraphs on general and current issues, events 

and slogan writing. 

4. Technical Writing : 

(a) Drafting memo and circular 

(b) e-mail writing 

(c) Resume writing,Press Report Writing 

(d) Writing Notices, Agendas, Minutes 

(e) Note taking 

5.Editing Skills : Use of capital letters, punctuation , parentheses, square brackets , ellipsis, 

apostrophe and quotation marks 

Instructions to the Paper Setter and Students: 

1. Students will be required to spot errors in any sixteen out of the given twenty sentences 

16 marks 

2. This question will have sub -parts on all items with internal choice. The candidate will be 

required to attempt any sixteen out of the given twenty items. 

16 marks 

3.(a)Students will be required to write one paragraph out of given four on general and current 

issues/events. 8 marks 

(b) Students will be required to give a slogan to a paragraph. There will be internal choice. 

8 marks 

10(1259) 


4. Students will be asked to write on any topic under technical writing. There will be internal 

choice. 16 marks 

5. Students shall be given a paragraph for editing. 16 marks 


Communication Skills in English by S D Sharma 

Written Communications In English by Sarah Freeman 

Corridors to Communication by Ranu Vanikar 

Grammar and Composition for Communication by Sagarmal Gupta, Alpana Gupta,(Orient 

BlackSwan ) 

Synergy: Communication in English and Study Skills by Board of Editiors 

(Orient BlackSwan). 

10(1260) 


Paper-V Literature in English (1750-1830) 


Texts Prescribed for Detailed Study: 

B.A II (Honours) English 

Semester III 


10(1261) 

Max.Marks 100 



Time 3 Hours 

A) William Wordsworth “ Daffodils,” “ The Solitary Reaper,” 

“ The World is Too Much With us,” 

“ Lines Composed upon Westminster’s Bridge,” 

“ Lucy,” “ It’s a Beauteous Evening” 

( From Fifteen Poets) 

B) S.T. Coleridge “ Dejection: An Ode," “ Frost at Midnight,” 


C) John Keats “ When I Have Fears ,” “ La Belle Dame Sans Merci,” 

“ On First Looking into Chapman’s Homer,” “ To Autumn” 


Instructions to the paper-setter and the students: 

All Questions are Compulsory. 

Q.No. 1 Students will be required to explain with reference to the context all the three 

stanzas ( with internal choice) from A, B and C respectively. 

3x8= 24 

Q.Nos II, III, and IV will be essay type questions set on A, B and C respectively. Students 

will be required to attempt any two out of given three questions. 

2x16=32 

Q. Nos V and VI ( with internal choice) will be set on the literary history of this period with 

special focus on the important trends, movements and schools etc. Questions on individual 

authors will not be asked. 

2x12=24 


Recommended Reading 

(i) English Literature: Its History and Significance by William J. Long (Indian 

edition) 

(ii) An Introduction to the Study of English Literature by W.H.Hudson (Lyall 

Books Depot) 

(iii) The Short Oxford History of English Literature by Andrew Sanders (OUP India) 

(iv) The Concise Cambridge History of English Literature by George Sampson Cambridge 

University Press, New Delhi). 

(v) The New History of English Literature by Bhim S. Dahiya Delhi: Doaba 

(vi) The Routledge History of Literature in English by Ronald Carter and John 

Mcrae (London and New York:Routledge, 2010) 

(vii) Romantic Imagination by C.M.Bowra ( Oxford ) 

(viii) An Oxford Guide to Romanticism Nicholas Roe (Oxford Press, Indian Edition) 

(ix) The Mirror and the Lamp by M.H.Abrams( Oxford ) 

(x) English Poetry of the Romantic Period by J.R.Watson ( Longman) 

(xi) The Cambridge Companion to British Romanticism ( Cambridge) 

(xii) A Preface to William Wordsworth by John Purkins ( Longman) 

(xiii) A Preface to S.T. Coleridge by Allan Grant ( Longman) 

(xiv) Coleridge’s Poetry and Prose: ed, by Nicholas Halmi, Paul Magnuson and Raimonda 

Modiano ( A Norton Critical Edition) 

(xv) John Keats:Odes ( Case book Series)ed. G.S.Fraser ( Macmillan) 

10(1262) 


B.A.II (Honours ) English 

Semester III 


Paper VI Literature in English (1750-1830) 



A) Oliver Goldsmith Vicar of Wakefield 

B) Jane Austen Emma 

10(1263) 

Max.Marks 100 



Time 3 Hours 

C) Charles Lamb “ Poor Relations,” “ The Superannuated Man,” “ In Praise of 

Chimney Sweepers,” “Imperfect Sympathies” 

( From A Book of English Essays, ed. W.E Williams. Penguin.) 


All the Questions are Compulsory 

Question no 1. will consist of three short-type questions(with internal choice) to be attempted in 

approximately two hundred (200) words each set on A ,B and C respectively. 

3x8=24 

Question Nos II, III, and IV will be essay-type questions set on A, B and C respectively. The 

students will be required to do any two out of the given three questions. 

2x16=32 

Q. Nos V and VI ( with internal choice) will be set on the literary history of this period with special 

focus on the important trends, movements and schools etc. Questions on individual authors will not 

be set. 

2x12=24 


Recommended Reading 

(i) English Literature: Its History and Significance by William J. Long (Indian edition) 

(ii) An Introduction to the Study of English Literature by W.H.Hudson (Lyall Books 

Depot) 


(iv) The Concise Cambridge History of English Literature by George Sampson (Revised 

by R.C. Churchill, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi). 


(vi) The Routledge History of Literature in English by Ronald Carter and John Mcrae 

(London and New York:Routledge, 2010) 

(vii) An Introduction to the English Novel, Vol. 1 Arnold Kettle ( UBS). 

(viii) Jane Austen’s Emma, Stephen. M. Parrish (A Norton Critical Edition) 

(ix) Jane Austen’s Emma (Viva Modern Critical Interpretation) 

(x) Emma:Collection of Critical Essays, Robert Clark ( New Casebook Prentice 

Hall) 

(xi) Jane Austen’s Emma ( Macmillan) 

(xii) Oliver Goldsmith (Chelsea house 1987) 

(xiii) Oliver Goldsmith : The Critical Heritage ( Routledge) 

(xiv) Companion to Charles Lamb (Mansell) 

10(1264) 



Semester III 


Paper-VII Grammar and Contemporary English Usage 


1 Essay 

2 Comprehension 

3 Grammar: 

i. Parts of Speech 

ii. Verbs: 

(a) Main and auxiliaries 

(b) Linking (or equative) intransitive and transitive 

(c) Finite and non-finite 

(d) Sequence of Tenses 

10(1265) 

Max.Marks 100 



Time 3 Hours 

iii. Word Order: Position and order of objects; Substitute subjects: ‘its’ and 

‘there’; Inversion of verb and subject after certain adverbs; Order of words in 

indirect questions. 

iv. Verb Patterns 

v. Adjective equivalents: 

(a) Nouns 

(b) Participles 

(c) Gerunds 

vi. Adverbs, adverbial particles and adverb phrases: 

a) Their Positions 

b) Kinds of Time, Place, Manner, Frequency, Duration and Direction 

. 

vii. Prepositions of time, place, direction; for and since; under, underneath; below, 

beneath; over and above; between and among; describing people and their clothes; at; by; 

in; on; out; of. 



Question I Students will be required to write an essay in about 450 words on any one topic out 

of the given four/five topics of literary and creative nature. 14 Marks 

Question II Unseen passage of comprehension. 10 Marks 

Question III, IV, V, VI, VII, VIII, and IX (8 Marks each) will be set on items (i) to (vii) given 

under Grammar. (All these questions will have sufficient choice). 

10(1266) 

7x8=56Marks 

Note: In questions on grammar the students may, for example, be asked: 

i) To form sentences of their own using the given material/verb patterns. 

ii) To complete the given incomplete sentences. 

iii) To fill in the blanks. 

iv) To re-write the sentences with the desired changes. 

v) To make corrections in the given strings and/or 

vi) To pick up the correct answer out of four/five alternatives provided (multiple-choice 

questions). 

All/any of these questions may be based on isolated sentences or short paragraphs. 

Books Prescribed 

1. Hornby, A.S. Guide to Patterns and Usage in English (ELBS) 

2. Graver, B.D. Advanced English Practice 

3. Corder, S. Pit. An Intermediate English Practice Book (Orient Longman) 

Recommended Readings 

1. Vallins, G. D. Good English: How to Write it (ELBS) 

2. –do- Better English 

3. Hudson, W.H. An Introduction to the Study of English Literature 

4. Scaibsbye, Kund A Modern English Grammar (O.U.P.) 

5. Wood, F.T. A Remedial English Grammar for Foreign Students 

6. Zandvoort A Handbook of English Grammar (ELBS) 


B.A.II 

Semester IV 

2012-13 

ENGLISH (COMPULSORY) 

10(1267) 

Max.Marks 100 



Time 3 Hours 

1. Snapshots: An Anthology of One-Act Plays. ed. S.K.Sharma. 

New Delhi: OUP 

2. The Mahabharta chapter 25 to 49 i.e. “Draupadi’s Grief” to ”Arjuna’s Charioteer.” 

3. Precis, Translation, Comprehension, email and Resume writing 

From A Text book of Grammar by Inderjit Kumar and Sanjay Kumar .Kurukshetra : K U 

K. 


Q.1 Explanation with reference to the context. Candidates will be required 

to attempt two passages (with internal choice) from the prescribed 

book of one act plays i.e. Snapshots. 4x2=8 marks 

Q.2 Short answer type questions will be set on the prescribed book of one act plays. Students 

will be required to attempt any four out of the given six questions. 

4x3=12 marks 

Q.3 Short answer type questions will be set on the Mahabharata will be required to attempt any 

four out of the given six questions. 

3x4 = 12 marks 

Q.4 Two essay type questions (a) and (b) (with internal choice) will be set on the prescribed 

book of one act plays and The Mahabharta. Part (a) and (b) will be setrespectively on each 

prescribed book. 2x5= 10 marks 

Q.5 The break up of Question No.5 is as under:- 

a) Precis : 8 marks 

A passage of about 350 words will be given. 

b) Translation : 7 marks 

Translation from English to Hindi of a passage consisting of 

9 to 10 sentences on a general topic. (In lieu of translation, foreign students will be 

required to write a paragraph of about 150 words on any one of the three given topics ) 

c) Comprehension : 


Comprehension passage of about 300 words 

followed by six questions at the end. 8 marks 

d) Drafting email : 7 marks 

expressing views about any current topic 

e) Resume writing : 8 marks 

The examiner will give specific details to the students 

about the purpose and the kind of the resume. 


Communication Skills in English by S.D.Sharma 

Essentials of Communication by D.G.Saxena, Kuntal Tamang 

10(1268) 


B. A. II (Semester-IV) 

ADDITIONAL ENGLISH 

(2012-13) 




Time 3 Hours 

Part A Lord of the Flies by William Golding 

Part B Essay, Precis and Comprehension 

Instructions to the Paper Setter and the Students: 

1 One general essay type question with internal choice requiring a first hand study of the 

prescribed text. Students will be required to give the answer in about 350words 

12 marks 

2.The question will consist of eight short answer type questions from the prescribed text on 

character, theme, plot, technique, imagery etc. The students will be required to answer any five out 

of the given eight questions in about 150 words each. 5x5 = 25 marks 

3 Essay: The students will be required to write an essay in about 250 words on any one out of the 

four/five given topics of reflective, descriptive and/or literary nature. 12 marks 

4 Precis: Reducing a given passage of about 300 words to one third of its length (in student’s own 

words) and giving it a suitable heading. 11 marks 

5 Unseen passage for comprehension. 10 marks 

6 Students will be required to give phonemic transcriptions of any five of the given ten words from 

the prescribed novel(only first twenty five pages of the text of the prescribed novel). 

5x2=10 marks 

10(1269) 


B.A.II 

Semester IV 

2012-13 

FUNCTIONAL ENGLISH 

Scheme of Examination Max.Marks : 100 marks 

Theory : 60 marks 

Practical: 20 marks 

Internal Assessment/ 20 marks 

Oral Exam./Viva 



Unit-I Introducing Communication: 

i) Nature and objectives of communication 

ii) Process of communication 

iii) Principles of effective communication 

iv) Barriers to communication: Wrong choice of medium, physical barriers, 

semantic barriers, sociophysiological barriers 

Unit- II Non-verbal Communication: 

(i) Body language, appearance , voice, facial expression, posture and 

gestures 

(ii) Functions of non-verbal communication 

Unit-III Communication through mass media: 

Basic understanding of role of information technology and media: 

Newspapers, radio, television, computers, internet and multimedia. 

Unit-IV English in Situations : 

1. Greetings 

2. Receiving and Seeing people off 

3. Making complaints 

4. Making an appointment 

5. Buying at shops 

6. Placing orders 

7. Offering apologies 

8. Consulting a Doctor 

9. Making enquiries 

10. Conversation on telephone 

10(1270) 


11. Asking the time : Time expression 

12. In the post-office 

13. At the bank 

14. At the customs 

15. At the airportP 

16. At the travel agency 

17. Booking a room in a hotel 

18. Buying guidebook 

19. At the temple 

20. At the police Station 

21. At a dinner party 

22. Hiring a taxi 

23. At the stock exchange 

24. At the chemist 

25. At the Restaurant 

26. Description of events 

(Students shall develop dialogue based paragraphs on the above mentioned situations) 

Field Work & Practical Training 

i) Visit to various places offering different situations and practicing conversation in actual 

situations 

ii) Students should be asked to write dialogues relating to the situations. 


There will be eight questions in all out of which students shall attempt any five selecting 

at least one question from every unit. All questions shall be of twelve marks each 


English in Situations by R.O.Neill (O.U.P.) 

English Conversation Practice by Grant Taylor(Tata Mc Graw Hill Co.) 

Developing Communication Skills by Krishna Mohan (Macmillan Indian Ltd.) 

A Self Learning Guide to Conversation Practice (with cassettes ) by Sasikumar V. and 

P.V.Dhamija New Delhi: Tata Mg.Graw Hill Co. 

Success with English : The Penguin Course Course Book I by Geoffry 

Bronghton(Peguin Books) 

What To Say When Ed. Viola Huggins (BBC London). 

Fifty Ways to Improve your Presentation Skills in English by Bob Dignen(Orient Black 

Swan) 

Television and Radio Announcing by Stuart Hyde (Kanishka ) 

Communication by Larry Barker (Prentice Hall) 

Essential of Business Communication by Rajinder Pal and Korahlar 

(Sultan Chand & Sons) 

Deevloping Reading Skills by Francoise Grellar (Cambridge Uni. Press). 

10(1271) 


B.A. II (Honours )English 

Semester IV 

2012-13 

Paper VIII Literature in English (1830-1900) 



10(1272) 

Max.Marks 100 



Time 3 Hours 

A) Lord Tennyson “ Break, Break, Break,” “Ulysses,” “The Lady of Shallot,” 

“The Lotus- Eaters,” “Tears,Idle Tears” 


B) Matthew Arnold “ Dover Beach,” “Memorial Verses,” “Shakespeare,” 

“To Marguerite,” “Life and Thought” 


C) Robert Browning “ Porphyria’s Lover,” “ My Last Duchess,” “Rabbi Ben 

Ezra” 



All the Questions are Compulsory 

Q.No. 1 The Students will be required to explain with reference to the context all the three 

stanzas( with internal choice) from A, B and C respectively. 

3x8=24 

Q.Nos II, III, and IV will be essay type questions set on A, B and C respectively. Students 

will be required to attempt any two out of given three questions. 

2x16=32 

Q. Nos V and VI ( with internal choice)will be set on the literary history of this period with 

special focus on the important trends, movements and schools etc. Questions on individual 

authors will not be asked. 

2x12=24 


Recommended Reading (General) 


(ii) An Introduction to the Study of English Literature by W.H.Hudson (Lyall Books 

Depot) 


(iv) The Concise Cambridge History of English Literature by George Sampson (Revised 

by R.C. Churchill, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi). 


(vi) The Routledge History of Literature in English by Ronald Carter and John Mcrae 

(London and New York:Routledge, 2010) 

(vii) Major Victorian Poets: Reconsiderations by Isobel Armstrong ( Routledge) 

(viii) English Poetry of the Victorian Poets 1830- 1890 by Bernard Richards 

(ix) ( Longman) 

(x) Tennyson’s Poetry by Robert W. Hill.Jr (A Norton Critical Edition) 

(xi) Critical Essays on the Poetry of Tennyson by John Killham ( Routledge) 

(xii) Arnold by Stefan Colline ( Oxford) 

(xiii) The Imaginative Power: The Poetry of Matthew Arnold by A.D Wight Culler ( New 

Haven) 

(xiv) Robert Browning’s Poetry by James F. Loucks and Andrew M. Stauffer (A Norton 

Critical Edition) 

10(1273) 


B.A.II (Honours ) English 

Semester IV 

2012-13 

Paper IX Literature in English (1830-1900) 



A) Charles Dickens A Tale of Two Cities 

B) Thomas Hardy The Mayor of Casterbridge 

Non Detailed Study: 

Authors 

Robert Browning 

John Henry Newman 

Arthur Clough 

D.G.Rossetti 

A.C.Swinburne 

John Ruskin 

R.L.Stevenson 

Benjamin Disraeli 

J.S.Mill 

Charles Darwin 

E.B.Browning 

George Meredith 

Literary works 

Thomas Carlyle—The French Revolution 

W.M.Thackeray—Vanity Fair 

10(1274) 

Max.Marks 100 



Time 3 Hours 


George Eliot—Adam Bede 

Emily Bronte—Wuthering Heights 

Edward Fitzgerald—The Rubiyat of Omar Khayam 

H Ibsen—A Doll’s House 

Rudyard Kipling—The Jungle Book 

Arthur Canon Doyle—Sherlock Holmes 

H.G.Wells— Time Machine 

Henry James—The Portrait of a Lady 

Mrs Elizabeth Gaskell—Life of Charlotte Bronte 

Oscar Wilde—Mrs Arbuthnot 


Students will be required to write short notes in about 200 words each on any three out of given 

four questions from the novels prescribed for detailed study. 

3x7=21 marks 

Question Nos II and III( with internal choice) will be essay type questions set on the novels 

prescribed for detailed study. 

2x14=28 marks 

Q.No.IV Students will be required to write notes in about 300 words each on any two out of the 

three authors prescribed for non-detailed study. 


Q.No.V . Students shall be required to write notes in about 150 words each on any three out of four 

literary works prescribed for non-detailed study. 




(ii) An Introduction to the Study of English Literature by W.H.Hudson (Lyall Books Depot) 

(iii)The Short Oxford History of English Literature by Andrew Sanders (OUP India) 

(iv) The Concise Cambridge History of English Literature by George Sampson (Revised by 

R.C. Churchill, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi). 


(vi) The Routledge History of Literature in English by Ronald Carter and John Mcrae (London 

and New York:Routledge, 2010) 

(vii) Early Victorian Novelists by David Cecil (Constable, London) 

(viii) A Concise Companion to the Victorian Novel ed, Francis O’ Gorman 

(Oxford). 

(ix) The Cambridge Companion to the Victorian Novel. 

(x) Charles Dickens’s A Tale of Two Cities ( Viva Modern Critical Interpretation) 

(xi) Thomas Hardy’s The Mayor of Casterbridge (A Norton Critical Edition) 

10(1275) 



Semester IV 

2012-13 

Paper-X Grammar and Contemporary English Usage 

1 Précis 

2.Translation 

3.Paragraph 


10(1276) 

Max.Marks 100 



Time 3 Hours 

4.Grammar: 

i) Phrasal verbs with be, do, make, come, bring, keep and let. . 

ii) Mood and modality. 

iii) Conjunctions: Coordinating and subordinating. 

iv Types of Sentences; Simple, Complex and Compound with particular reference 

to Noun, Relative, Conditional and Coordinate Clauses. 

v) Voices and Narration 

vi) Various concepts (instructions, requests, invitations, suggestion, prohibition, 

permission, probability, likelihood, possibility, intention, obligation and necessity, 

promises, threats, wish, hope, purpose, and result supposition, and ways in which they are 

expressed. 


Question I, II, III, IV, V and VI (9 Marks each) will be set on items (i) to (vi) given under 4. 

Grammar (all these questions will have sufficient choice). 6x9=54 Marks 

. 

Question VII Students will be required to translate from Hindi to English a short paragraph or 

around ten isolated sentences. Foreign students will be required to develop a proverb or maxim 

into a paragraph of 100 words. 8 Marks 


Question VIII Students will be required to compose a paragraph in about 200 words on one of 

the two given topics based on current affairs. 8 Marks 

Question IX Students will be required to make a précis of a passage of about 350 words 

(preferably of a newspaper editorial or some similar contemporary writing) and give it a 

suitable title. 10 Marks 

Note: In questions on grammar the students may, for example, be asked: 

vii) To form sentences of their own using the given material. 

viii) To complete the given incomplete sentences. 

ix) To fill in the blanks. 

x) To re-write the sentences with the desired changes. 

xi) To make corrections in the given strings and/or 

xii) To pick up the correct answer out of four/five alternatives provided (multiple-choice 

questions). 

All/any of these questions may be based on isolated sentences or short paragraphs. 

Books Prescribed 

1. Hornby, A.S. Guide to Patterns and Usage in English (ELBS) 

2. Graver, B.D. Advanced English Practice 

3. Corder, S. Pit. An Intermediate English Practice Book (Orient Longman) 

Recommended Readings 

1. Vallins, G. D. Good English: How to Write it (ELBS) 

2. –do- Better English 

3. Hudson, W.H. An Introduction to the Study of English Literature 

4. Scaibsbye, Kund A Modern English Grammar (O.U.P.) 

5. Wood, F.T. A Remedial English Grammar for Foreign Students 

6. Zandvoort A Handbook of English Grammar (ELBS) 

10(1277) 


Syllabus & Courses of Reading 

M.A. Public Administration 


Paper No. Nomenclature of the Paper Max. Marks Time 

1 Administrative Theory 80+20 3 hours 

2 Public Personnel Administration and Human 

Resource Management. 

10(1278) 

80+20 3 hours 

3 Financial Administration. 80+20 3 hours 

4 Organisational Behaviour Option A / 

Indian Constitution ( Option B) 

5 Optional Papers: Choose any one of the 

following: - 

(a) Comparative Public Administration. 

(b) Public Administration and Computer 

Applications. 

(c) Environmental Policy and 

Administration 

(d) Business Administration. 

(e) Politics and Administration 

(f) Political Theory 

80+20 3 hours 

Theory-60 

The Internal assessment will be based on assignments: 10 marks 

Attendance: 5 marks 

One class test: 5 marks 

Practical-20 

Internal 

Assessment-20 

Total= 100 

3 hours 

2hours 

1 hour 

3 hours 


Paper-I: Administrative Theory 

Max. Marks: 80 Time: 3 hours 


Note: There will be nine questions of equal marks in all and the candidate has to attempt five questions 

selecting one question from each. Question No. 1 in Unit-I is compulsory. 

Unit-I There will one compulsory question in the UNIT-I and it will be short answer type 

comprises of eight parts and will be based on the syllabus prescribed in other four units 

(UNIT-II to UNIT-V) of the syllabus. 

Unit-II Meaning, Nature, Scope and Significance of Public Administration, Public and Private 

Administration: Its Role in Developed and Developing Societies. Environmental Influences. 

Unit-III Evolution of Public Administration as an independent discipline; New Public 

Administration; and New Public Management Perspective. Approaches to the study of 

Public Administration – Behavioural, System and Structural – Functional Approach. 

Unit- IV Structure of Organisation: Chief Executive – Role and Functions. Line and Staff Agencies. 

Forms and Bases of Organisation, Departments, Corporations, Companies, Boards and 

Commissions. Accountability and Control – Concept of Accountability and Control, 

Legislative, Executive and Judicial Control over Administration. 

Unit –V Citizens and Administration. Public Policy – Meaning and Relevance of Policy Making in 

Public Administration; Bases, Agencies and Process of Policy Formulation and 

Implementation. 

Books: 

1. Avasthi and Maheshwari: Public Administration, Laxmi Narain Aggarwal, Agra, 1988. 

2. Hoshiar Singh & Pardeep Sachdeva, Administrative Theory, Kitab Mahal, New Delhi,2005. 

3. M.P. Sharma and B.L.Sadana: Public Administration in Theory and Practice, Kitab Mahal, 

Allahabad, 1988. 

4. J.D. Straussman: Public Administration, Holt, Rinehart and Winslow, New York, 1985. 

5. Mohit Bhattacharya: Public Administration, Calcutta: World Press (2 nd Ed.) 1991. 

6. A.R. Tyagi, Public Administration – Principles and Practices, Delhi Atma Ram & Sons (6 th ed.) 

1992. 

7. S.L.Goel: Public Administration (Theory & Practice), New Delhi: Deep & Deep Publications 2003 

8. C.P.Bhambhari: Public Administration – Theory and Practice, Meerut, Jaiparkash Nath Publishers 

(ed.) 1992-93. 

9. Shahib Singh & Swinder Singh: Public Financial Administration, New academic Publisher 

Company, Jalandhar, 2007 

10(1279) 


Paper – II: Public Personnel Administration & Human Resource Management 








Unit – II Public Personnel Administration – Concept, Nature, Scope and Significance. Bureaucracy: 

Meaning, Concepts, Types, Recent Trends and its Role in Modern Society. Public Personnel 

System in India with Reference to Civil Services: Recruitment, Training, Promotion and 

Salary Administration. 

Unit – III Human Resource Management: Meaning, Nature, Scope and Significance. Human Resource 

Planning and Strategy. Job Analysis and Job Design. Employees’ Capacity Building 

Strategies. Total Quality Management. 

Unit – IV Human Resource Management and Employment Involvement. Code of Conduct, Discipline 

and Grievances. 

Unit – V Assessing Human Resource Management Effectiveness. Human Resource Audit. Managing 

Change at Work Place. Stress Management. 

Books: 

1. David E. Kalinger: Public Personnel Management, IPMA, Prentice Hall Inc., Englewood Cliffs, 

New Jersey, 1986. 

2. India: Administrative Reforms Commission, Report on Personnel Administration, 1969. 

3. C.M.Jain, Public Personnel Administration, Jaipur, College Book Depot, 2003. 

4. V.M.Sinha: Personnel Administration, (English & Hindi) Jaipur, RBSA Swai Man Singh Highway, 

1985. 

5. P Ghosh.: Personnel Administration, New Delhi, Sudha Publication, 1975. 

6. O.Glenn Stanl: Public Personnel Administration, 7 th Ed., Oxford IBH Publication Company, New 

Delhi, 1977. 

7. S.L.Goel: Public Personnel Administration, New Delhi, Deep & Deep Publishers, 2004. 

8. K.Aswathappa: Human Resource Management. 

9. Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2008. 

10. V.S.P.Rao, Human Resource Management, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2007. 

11. A.K.Singh et. Al: Human Resource Management, Sun India Publications, New Delhi, 2005. 

12. C.L.Chaturvedi: Manav Sansadhan Parbandh, Shri Mahavir Book Depot, 2603, Nai Sarak, Delhi. 

13. Shahib Singh & Swinder Singh: Public Financial Administration, New academic Publisher 

Company, Jalandhar, 2007. 

10(1280) 


Paper – III: Financial Administration 








Unit – II Basic Concepts and Budgetary system 

Meaning, Scope, Significance of Financial Administration, Agencies involved in Financial 

Administration, Budget: Concept, Principles of Budget Making. Budgetary Process: 

Formulation, Enactment and Execution. 

Unit – III Indian Financial System 

Zero Based Budgeting, Performance Budgeting. Tax Administration, Centre-State Financial 

Relations. Fiscal Federalism: Issues and Objectives of the Fiscal Policy. 

Unit – IV Financial Committees 

Parliamentary Financial Control Committees - : Public Accounts Committees, Estimates 

Committees, Parliamentary Standing Committees. Finance Ministry: Organisation and 

working. 

Unit – V Audit and Accounting 

Accounting and Audit System: Concept, Types, Emerging Trends in Accounting System, 

Role of C.A.G. 

Books: 

1. A. Sarapa: Public Finance in India, Kanishka Publishers Distributors, New Delhi, 2004. 

2. Manjusha Shanna & O.P.Bohra: Bhartiya Lok Vitta Prashasan, Ravi Books, Delhi, 2005. 

3. B.P.Tyagi: Public Finance, Meerut, Jai Prakash Nath, 1997. 

4. G.S.Lal: Financial Administration in India, New Delhi, HPJ Kapoor, 1987. 

5. MJK Thavaraj: Financial Administration in India, Delhi, Sultan Chand & Sons, 1996. 

6. Andley, Sundharam: Public Finance, Agra, Rattan Prakash and Mandir, 1979. 

7. Ruddar Dutt & K.P.Sundharam: Indian Economy, New Delhi, S.Chand & Co. Pvt. Ltd., 1997. 

8. M.Y.Khan and P.K.Jain: Finance Management, New Delhi, Tata McGraw Hill 1982. 10, 

R.N.Srivastave: Management of Financial Institutions, Bombay, Himalaya Publishing House, 

1988. 

9. C.P.Bhambhri: Public Administration in India, Bombay, Vikas Publishing House, 1973. 

10. S.L.Goel, Public Financial Administration, New Delhi, Deep & Deep Publications, 2004. 

11. Dutt and Sundharam: Indian Economy, Delhi, S.Chand & Co.,2004. 

10(1281) 


Paper – IV (Optional-A): Organisational Behaviour 








. 

Unit – II Basic Concepts 

Organisational Behaviour – Concept, Nature, Determinants and Models of Organizational 

Relationship between Organisational theory and Organisational Behaviour. 

Unit – III Theories of Organization 

Approaches to Organisational Behaviour: - Historical Perspective, Scientific Management, 

Behavioural, Contingency and Human-relation Approach. 

Unit – IV Organizational Dynamics 

Organisational Change And Development: - Concept, Need, Resistance Change Process and 

Forces of Change, Organisational Development: Concept and Objectives. Organisational 

Effectiveness: - Concept, Sources, Factors, Models of Organisational Effectiveness. 

Unit –V Motivation Theorists 

Motivation and Behaviour: Concept and Sources, Theories of Motivations – Abraham 

Maslow, Douglas MCGregor, Fredric Herzberg’s and MC Cllelland’s Theory. 

Books: 

1. Stephen P. Robinson: Organisational Behaviour, 11 th edition, New Delhi – 110001 Prentice – Hill of 

India Pvt.Ltd., 2007 

2. Jit S Chandan: Organisational Behaviour, 3 rd edition, 576, Masjid Road, Jangpura, N.D., New Delhi- 

1100014, Vikas Publishing House Pvt.Ltd., 2006, , ,. 

3. N.K.Sahni: Management Concept and Organisational Behaviour, 5 th edition, New Delhi, [B-15, 

Sector – 8, NOIDA] Kalyani Publishers, 2007. 

4. B.P.Singh & TN Chhahra: Organisational Theory and Behaviour, 3 rd edition, 1682, Nai Sarak, Delhi 

– 110006, 2000. 

5. Luthans F.: Organisational Behaviour, 7 th edition, New York, MC Graw Hill, 1995. 

6. L.M.Prasad: Organisational Behaviour, New Delhi, Sultan Chand & Sons educational Pub., 2001. 

10(1282) 


Paper – IV (Optional-B) : Indian Constitution 








UNIT – II Constitutional Development and Framing of Present Constitution. Preamble, Features and 

Significance of Indian Constitution. Citizen and State : Fundamental Rights; Fundamental 

Duties; Directive Principles of the State Policy and Rule of Law. 

UNIT – III Parliament: Lok Sabha and Rajya Sabha – Their Compositions, Functions, Powers and 

Relationship. State Legislature: Vidhan Sabha and Vidhan Parishad – Their Composition, 

Powers, Functions and Relationships. 

UNIT – IV Judiciary : Supreme Court and High Court – Their Organisation, Powers, Functions and 

Roles. Services under the Union and States. 

UNIT – V Constitutional Amendment Process and Constitutional Amendments with special reference 

to 42 nd , 44 th and 52 nd Amendments. 


1. Bombwall, K.R.: Government and Politics in India, Ambala Cantt.: Modern Publications, 1981. 

2. D.D. Basu: Constitutional Law of India, Bombay: Prentice Hall of India. 

3. B.K. Gokhle: The constitution of India and Its Working, Meerut City: Educational Publishers. 

4. Austin Granville: The Indian Constitution, Corner Stone of a Nation, Oxford: Clarendon Press, 

1966. 

5. S.C. Dube (Ed.): Public Services and Social Responsibility, New Delhi: Vikas, 1979. 

6. Anurud Prasad: Centre and State Powers Under Indian Federation, New Delhi: Deep & Deep 

Publications. 

7. B.L. Fadia: Indian Government and Politics, Agra: Sahitya Bhawan, 1992. 

8. Morris-Jones, W.H.: The Government and Politics in India, Bombay: B.I. Publishing, 1971. 

9. Palmer-Norman, D.: Elections and Political Development, New Delhi: Vikas, 1976. 

10. Shiva Rao: The Framing of Indian Constitution, Bombay: N.M. Tripathi & Co., 1969. 

11. M.V. Pylee: Indian Constitution, Madras: Vishvanathan Publishers, 1985. 

10(1283) 


Paper – V (Opt.-A): Comparative Public Administration 








Unit – II Comparative Public Administration: Concept, Nature, Scope and Significance. Public 

administration and Environment. Approaches and Methods to the Study of CPA – 

Institutional, Behavioural, Structural – Functional, Ecological and Systems Approach. 

Unit – III Weber's Typology of Authority. Salient Features of Administrative Systems of UK, USA 

and France and with Particular Reference to Ideal type of Bureaucratic Model. 

Unit – IV Riggs Typology of Developing Societies with Particular Reference the Prismatic Society 

and Sala Model. Administration of Development and Administrative Development 

Problems and Prospects. 

Unit – V A Study of Salient Features and Control Mechanism, of Administrative Systems in of UK, 

U.S.A., France. 

Books: 

1. W.J. Siffin: Towards the Comparative Study of Public Administration, Indian University Press, 

Bloomington, Indian 1959. 

2. F. W. Riggs: Administration in Developing Countries - The Theory of Prismatic Society, Houghton 

Miffen Co. Boston 1964. 

3. F. Heady and Stokes: Papers in Comparative Public Administration, Institute of Public 

Administration, University of Michigan USA. 

4. Lucian W. Pye:" Aspects of Political Development, Amerind Pub Co. Ltd. New Delhi, 1966. 

5. RJS Baker: Administrative Theory and Public Administration, London: Hutchinson & Co. Ltd. 

1972. 

6. W. Robson (ed.): Civil Service in England and France, Hogarth, 1956. 

7. U.K. Royal Commission in the Civil Service (2 Vols.) 1953-55. 

8. National Productivity Council: Personnel Management in Japan, USA and Britain, New Delhi, NPC, 

1963. 

10(1284) 


Paper-V (Opt.-B): Public Administration and Computer Applications 

Part – A (Theory) 








Unit – II Meaning, Nature, Need, Role, Evolution of Management through Information System. 

Relatedness of MIS with Management Activities. Management Functions and Decision- 

Making. Components of MIS with special emphasis in Reporting System, Data 

Organisation, Concept of Data Base. Data and Data Processing Operation, Database vs. 

Information System. Role of Computer Technology in Development and Maintenance of 

MIS. Introduction to Computers: A General Model of Computer System: Brief description 

of Various Components; Input/Output Devices; Types of Auxiliary storage, Data Storage on 

different types of Media, Classification of Computers on Chronology, Size and 

Architecture; Hardware vs. Software, Types of Software, Problems Solving on Computers; 

Steps in Problem Solving on Computers. 

Unit – III Introduction to Operating System: Objectives and functions of an Operating System; Types 

of Operating System, Introduction to MS-Windows. Introduction to Word Processing, 

Word Processing Concepts; General Characteristics of Word Processing packages; Using 

MS Word. 

Unit –IV Introduction to Spread Sheet: Data Organisation Concepts; Using MS-Excel, Data 

Organization Concepts, Graphs & Charts, Various Types of Functions like Statistical, 

Mathematical & Financial Function etc. Creating Spread-Sheets on the basis of Simple 

Formulas. 

Unit – V Computer Application in Public Administration with Special Reference to Record Keeping, 

Research and Communication, concept, opportunities and challenges of electronic 

governance, case study of Haryana govt. web portal. Using electronic mail for 

communication and Internet for searching information. 

10(1285) 


Part (b) Practical 

10(1286) 


Time: 90 minutes 

Working with MS-Windows: Desktop, Task Bar, My Computer, My Documents, Control Panel, etc. 

Word Processing with MS Word: Creating, editing, formatting, viewing and printing documents 

with MS-Word, Using Insert, Tools and Table Menus of MS-Word. 

MS-Excel Spreadsheet: Entering/filling data in worksheets, working with different views, various 

toolbars of MS Excel, Graphs & Charts in MS-Excel, Using Various Types of Functions like 

Statistical, Mathematical & Financial Function etc., Using Format, Tools and Data menus in Excel. 

Working with Internet, World Wide Web and e-Mail, Study of e-governance ventures of various 

state governments and union govt. 


1. Gear, C. Williams: Computer Organisation and Programming with an Emphasis on Personal 

Computer (IV Ed.), New York, McGraw Hill 1986. 

2. P.K.Sinha, Computer Fundamentals, BPB, 3rd Ed. 

3. R.K. Taxali: PC Software Made Simple, Tata McGraw Hill 

4. Saxena & Steyer: Basic principles of Data Processing. 

5. Murdic, Ross, Management Information System, Prentice Hall of India, latest Edition 

6. P.K.Sinha, Foundations of Computing, BPB 

7. S.K.Bajendra, Computer Today, Galgotia Publishers. 


Paper – V (Opt.-C): Environmental Policy and Administration. 








Unit – II Environment Meaning, Component, Eco-system, Ecology and Biosphere. Environment 

Problems, Environmental Pollution: Causes and factors. 

Unit – III Environmental Policy in India. Constitutional provisions Relating to Environmental 

Protection. 

Unit – IV Environment Laws and Planning- in India. Air Quality Management, Pollution Control, 

Pollution and Eco-System. 

Unit – V Environment Control Administrative Machinery at the National, State and District Level. 

Books: 

1. Hoshiar Singh (ed.): Environment Policy and Administration, Jaipur, Printwell Publishers, 1992. 

2. Shyam Divan & Annin Rosenerang: Environmental Law and Policy in India, Oxford University 

Press, New Delhi, 2001. 

3. Shekhar Singh (ed.): Environmental Policy in India, New Delhi, IIPA 1984. 

4. India, NCEP: Draft Report of the State of the Environment, Delhi, December 1981. 

5. O.P.Dwivedi, India: Pollution Control Policy and Programmes, International Review of 

Administrative Sciences, vol. XLIII, Nos. 2, 1977. 

6. S.C. Bhatia (ed.): Papers in Environmental Education, Indian University Association for Continuing 

Education, 1981. 

7. A.K. Sharma and A. Sharma (ed.): Impact of the Development of Science and Technology on 

Environment, Indian Science Congress Association, 1981. 

8. Desh Bandhu: Environmental Management, Indian Environmental Society, 1981. 

9. UNESCO: "Environmental Education in Asia and the Pacific" Bulletin of the UNESCO Regional 

Office for Education in Asia and the Pacific 1981. 

10. H.N.Tiwari: Environmental Law, Allahabad Law Agency, Faridabad, 2001. 

11. V.N. Srivastava & B.P. Rai, Environment and Ecology, Vasundra Publications, Gorakhpur, 1998 

12. Report of the Committee for Recommending Legislative Measures and Administrative Machinery 

for Ensuring Environmental Protection, Department of Science and Technology, 1980. 

10(1287) 


Paper – V (Opt.-D): Business Administration 


Internal Assessment:20 






Unit – II Administrative Process in Business: Basic Concepts – Business, Industry, Trade, 

Commerce, Management and Administration. Importance of Scientific Management in 

Developed and Developing Economies. 

Unit – III Administrative Tasks in Business Enterprises: Planning, Organizing, Implementing, 

Coordinating and Controlling, Goals and Policy Formulation. 

Unit – IV Mechanics of Organizing a new Business Enterprise: Forms of Organisation, Nature of 

Business, Plant Location and Lay-out, Capital Budgeting and Financial. Production: 

Concept, Elements of Production Management. Planning and Control. 

Unit – V Process of Decision-Making in Business Organisation: Identification of Problem, Search for 

Alternative Solutions, Comparative Analysis of Alternatives and The Final Choice. Business 

Communication: Basic Forms and Models. Marketing: Concept, Elements of Marketing 

Management with Special Reference to Sales Promotion 

Books: 

1. S.S.Khera: Government in Business, Delhi, National, 1977. 

2. Samuel Paul: Managing Development Programmes: The Lessions of Succes, Boulder, West view, 

1982. 

3. James C.Van: Financial Management and Policy (New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India). 

4. D.J.Aggrwala: Management Principles, Practices, Techniques, Deep and Deep Pub., New Delhi. 

5. K.R.P.Singh: Organisation and Management of Public Enterprises, Deep and Deep Pub., Delhi. 

6. Pfiffner & Sherwood: Administrative Organisation (New Delhi, 1968). 

7. Peter F.Drucker: Management Tasks, Responsibilities, Select Chapters, Bombay, 1974, Practices. 

8. Amitai Etzioni: Modern Organisations (Prentice Hall of India, 1972). 

9. A.R.Palit: An Outcome of Materials Management (Bombay) Academic Book Ltd. 

10. Philip Kotler: Marketing Management – Analysis: Planning and Control, New Delhi, Prentice Hall 

of India, 1976. 

11. Edward W.Condiff Richard R., Still Normal A., V.Govoni: Fundamentals of Modern Marketing 

(New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India, 1974). 

12. R.A.Bilas: Micro-Economic Theory, McGraw Hill, New York, 1971. 

13. A.R.C.Govt. of India: Report on Public Sector Undertakings, Oct.1967. 

10(1288) 


Paper: V (E) Politics and Administration 








UNIT – II Approaches to the Study of Political System – Structural Functional and System Approach. 

Political System, Its Concept, Common Properties of Political System. The Concept of 

Political Culture and Models of Political System. 

UNIT – III Political Systems of Developing Countries – Important Features with special reference to 

India and Nepal. Political Parties, Pressure Groups and Concept of Political Development. 

UNIT – IV The Concept of Administrative System, Relationship between Administrative and Political 

System. Models of Administrative System with special reference to the contribution of 

F.W. Riggs. Bureaucracy – Weberian Interpretation – Studies in Bureaucracy by Blau and 

Merton. 

UNIT – V The Concept of Administrative State. Bureaucracy and Political Ideology – Marxist 

Interpretation of Bureaucracy. Bureaucracy and Political Development. Bureaucracy and 

Social Changes. The Concept of Administrative Change. 


1. Brecht: Political Theory: The Foundations of Twentieth Century Political Thought (Princeton: 

Princeton University Press, 1959). 

2. M.N. Roy: Parties, Politics and Powers, Calcutta, 1960. 

3. Lucian W. Pye: Aspects of Political Development, New Delhi: Amerind Pub. Co. Pvt. Ltd., 1966. 

10(1289) 


Paper: V (F) Political Theory 








UNIT – II Major Traditions of Political Theory, Approaches to the study of Political Theory: 

Behaviour Approach, Structural Functional Approach and System Approach. 

UNIT – III Elements of State. Basis Concepts: Powers and Authority; Liberty and Equality, Rights and 

Duties: Consensus and Legitimacy. 

UNIT – IV Political Culture, Political Socialization and Revolution. Contemporary Political Theory : 

Political Development and Modernization. 

UNIT – V 

Political Ideologies: Pluralism, Liberalism, Individualism and Idealism. Totalitarianism and Socialism, 

Marxism and Democracy. 


1. C. James, Charlesworth (Ed.) Contemporary Political; Analysis, New York, 1967. 

2. Robert Jahl: Modern Political Analysis, New Delhi, 1967. 

3. C.L. Waper; Political Thought, London, 1973. 

4. Andres Lacker – Political Theory: Philosophy, Ideology and Sciences, New York, 1961. 

5. Lucian N. Pye: Aspects of Political Development, New Delhi: Amerind Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., 

1966. 

6. Gester, Jones and Lancastar; Masters Political Thought Vols, I,II and III, London: George Harper, 

1959. 

7. Ralph Miliband. Marxism and Politics, London, Oxford Univ. Press, 1977. 

8. P. Chaterjee: The State of Political Theory, Calcutta: K.P. Bagchi and Co., 1978. 

9. S.P. Verma: Modern Political Theory – A Critical Survey, Delhi: Vikas, 1975. 

10. David Easton: The political System, II Varieties of Political Theories, Englewood, Cliffs, Frentice 

Hall, 1966. 

10(1290) 



Paper No. Nomenclature of the Paper Max. 

Marks 

Time 

6 Organisational and Administrative Issues. 80+20 3 hours 

7 Financial Management. 80+20 3 hours 

8 Administrative Thought. 80+20 3 hours 

9 Industrial Relations and Labour Laws. 80+20 3 hours 

10 Optional Papers: Choose any one of the following: 

- 

(a) Development Administration. 

(b) Management of Voluntary Agencies. 

(c) Corporate Governance. 

(d) Police Administration. 

The Internal assessment will be based on assignments : 10 marks 



10(1291) 

80+20 

80+20 

80+20 

80+20 

3 hours 

3 hours 

3 hours 

3 hours 

3 hours 


Paper-VI: Organisational & Administrative Issues 








. 

Unit-II Organisation: Classification and Concept, Good Governance, Citizen Charter, Right to 

Information 2005. 

Unit-III Principles of Organisation: Hierarchy, Span of Control, Unity of Command, Authority 

and Responsibility, Centralisation and Decentralization, Supervision and Control. 

Unit- IV. Administrative Behaviour – Decision-Making and Contributions of Herbert Simon, 

Leadership, Communication, Morale and Motivation. Administrative Law: Concept and 

Importance of Administrative Law. 

Unit –V Delegated Legislation – Meaning, Types, Advantages, Limitations and Safeguards. Citizens 

and Administration, Administrative Adjudication, Administrative Ethics and Transparency 

in Administration. 

Books: 

1. Avasthi and Maheshwari: Public Administration, Laxmi Narain Aggarwal, Agra, 1988. 

2. Hoshiar Singh & Pardeep Sachdeva, Administrative Theory, Kitab Mahal, New Delhi,2005 

3. M.P. Sharma and B.L.Sadana: Public Administration in Theory and Practice, Kitab Mahal, 

Allahabad, 1988. 

4. J.D. Straussman: Public Administration, Holt, Rinehart and Winslow, New York, 1985. 

5. Mohit Bhattacharya: Public Administration, Calcutta: World Press (2 nd Ed.) 1991. 

6. A.R. Tyagi, Public Administration – Principles and Practices, Delhi Atma Ram & Sons (6 th ed.) 

1992. 

7. S.L.Goel: Public Administration (Theory & Practice), New Delhi: Deep & Deep Publications 2003 

8. C.P.Bhambhari: Public Administration – Theory and Practice, Meerut, Jaiparkash Nath Publishers 

(ed.) 1992-93. 

10(1292) 


Paper – VII: Financial Management 








Unit – II Basic Concepts 

Financial Management: Concept, Scope, Approaches to Finance Functions, Evolution and 

Goals. Fundamental Principles and Functions of Financial System. 

Unit – III Financial Institution 

Role of Financial Institutions: Industrial Financial Corporation of India, Industrial 

Development Bank of India, State Financial Corporation, State Industrial Bank of India. 

Unit – IV Measurement Techniques 

Cost Benefit Analysis: Meaning, Nature, Scope and Techniques, Marginal Costing - 

Concept Utility and Limitations, Working Capital-Concept, Components, Importance and 

Factors Affecting Working Capital. 

Unit – V Monetary System 

RBI and Monetary Management Organisation and Function, Monetary Policy and Bill 

Market, Working of Indian Monetary System, Indian Money Market: Composition, Features 

and Reforms. 

Books: 

1. A. Sarapa: Public Finance in India, Kanishka Publishers Distributors, New Delhi, 2004. 

2. Manjusha Shanna & O. P. Bohra: Bhartiya Lok Vitta Prashasan, Ravi Books, Delhi, 2005. 

3. B.P.Tyagi: Public Finance, Meerut, Jai Prakash Nath, 1997. 

4. G.S.Lal: Financial Administration in India, New Delhi, HPJ Kapoor, 1987. 

5. MJK Thavaraj: Financial Administration in India, Delhi, Sultan Chand & Sons, 1996. 

6. Andley, Sundharam: Public Finance, Agra, Rattan Prakash and Mandir, 1979. 

7. Ruddar Dutt & K.P.Sundharam: Indian Economy, New Delhi, S. Chand & Co. Pvt. Ltd., 1997. 

8. M.Y.Khan and P.K.Jain: Finance Management, New Delhi, Tata McGraw Hill 1982. 10, 

R.N.Srivastave: Management of Financial Institutions, Bombay, Himalaya Publishing House, 

1988. 

9. C.P.Bhambhri: Public Administration in India, Bombay, Vikas Publishing House, 1973. 

10. S.L.Goel, Public Financial Administration, New Delhi, Deep & Deep Publications, 2004. 

11. Dutt and Sundharam: Indian Economy, Delhi, S. Chand & Co.,2004. 

10(1293) 


Paper – VIII : Administrative Thought 








Unit – II Basic Concept 

Administrative Thought: Concept and Evolution, Organisational Goals; Concept, Functions 

and Types, Goal Succession, Displacement and Distortion. 

Unit – III Theories of Organization 

Organisational Theories: Classical Theory, Bureaucratic Theory and Public Choice Theory. 

Unit – IV Dichotomy and Classical Theories 

Woodrow Willson, F.W.Taylor, Henry Fayol, Mary, P.Follet, Gullick Urwick, Max Weber. 

Unit – V Human Relation, Behavioural and Indian Administrative Thinkers 

Elton Mayo, Herbert Simon, Chester Barnard, F.W.Riggs, Kautilya and Gandhi. 

Books: 

1. Likert, K.: New Patterns of Management, New York: McGraw Hill, 1961. 

2. A.Etzioni: Modern Organisation, 5 th edition, New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India, 1981. 

3. Shanna, RA.: Organisational Theory and Behaviour, New Delhi: Tata. McGraw Hill Pub. Co.1985. 

4. Nisa Alia: Administrative Thinkers, New Delhi, Associated Pub., 1987. 

5. R.S.Dwivedi: Human Relations and Organisational Behaviour, New Delhi, Oxford and IBH 

Pub.1987. 

6. M.R.Minto: Management Thinkers, New Delhi, Allied Pub.Ltd., 1989. 

7. R.K.Sapru: Theories of Administration, New Delhi, S.Chand & Co.Ltd., 1996. 

8. MJ Mathew: Organisation, Theory and Behaviour, Jaipur, RBSA Pub. SMS Highway. 

10(1294) 


Paper – IX : Industrial Relations and Labour Laws 








Unit – II Industrial Relations: Meaning, Nature, Objectives, Importance and Constituents of Industrial 

Relations, Role of State in Industrial Relations. Industrial Disputes and Industrial Relations 

Machinery, Employee Grievances: Meaning, Nature, Causes and Procedure of Grievances. 

Unit – III Employee Counselling: Meaning, Nature and Functions of Counselling. Trade Unionism: 

Meaning, Functions, Growth and Problems of Trade Unionism in India. Worker’s 

Participation in Management – Concept, Need, Nature, Importance & Forms of Workers 

Participation. 

Unit – IV Labour Laws: Main Provisions of: 

(a) Trade Unions Act, 1926. 

(b) The Payment of Wages Act, 1936. 

(c) The Industrial Disputes Act, 1947. 

(d) The Factories Act, 1948. 

Unit – V (a) Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act, 1946. 

(b) Minimum Wages Act, 1948. 

(c) Employees State Insurance Act, 1948. 

(d) Employees Provident Fund Act, 1952. 

Books: 

1) S.K.Puri: An Introduction to Labour and Industrial Laws, Allahabad Law Agency, Plot No.33, 16/2, 

Mathura Road, Faridabad, Haryana 

2) B.P.Singh, T.N.Chhabra, P.L.Taneja: Personnel Management and Industrial Relations., Dhanpat Rai 

& Co., Educational & Technical Publishers, 1710, Nai Sarak, Delhi -110006. 

3) R.C.Saxena: Labour Problems and Social Welfare, Meerut: K.Nath and Co.1988. 

4) M.L.Monga: Insustrial Relations and Labour Laws in India, New Delhi, Deep & Deep 1984. 

5) G.K.Sharma: Labour Movement in India, New Delhi, Sterling Publishers, 1972. 

6) S.Malik: Industrial Law, Eastern Book Company, Delhi, 1983. 

7) S.N.Mishra, Labour and Industrial Laws, Allahabad Law Agency, 1976. 

8) C.B.Memoria & S.Memoria: Dynamics of Industrial Relations in India, Bombay, Himalaya 


9) D.C.Sharma and R.C.Sharma: Personnel Management and Industrial Relations, Meerut, SJ 


10(1295) 


Paper – X (Opt.-A): Development Administration 








Unit – II Development Administration: Concept, Nature, Scope, Features and Significance, 

Objectives of Development Administration. Development Administration and Non- 

Development Administration Dichotomy. Ecology of Development Administration. 

Unit – III Administrative Development: Concept, Need, Problems and Sources. Relations between 

Administrative Development and Development Administration. 

Unit – IV Development and Its Dimensions. Development and Modernization. Problems and 

Prospects of Development. Approaches of Development. Sustainable Development. 

Unit – V Role of Administration in the Field of Development Administrative Organisation for 

Development at Centre, State and Local levels, Bureaucracy and Development 

Administration. 

Books: 

1. S.P. Verma and S.K.Sharma (ed.): Development Administration, New Delhi, IIPA. 

2. C.N.Bhalerao (ed.): Administration, Politics and Development in India, Bombay, Lal, Pani 


3. R. Braibhanti and J.S.Spengler: Administration and Economic Development in India, Duke 

Univ. Press. 

4. UNO: Development Administration: Current Approaches and Trends in Public Administration 

for National Development, New York, UNI 1975. 

5. S.K.Sharma (ed.), Dynamics of Development (Two volumes), New Delhi: Concept Publishing 

House. 

6. Fred W. Riggs (ed.), Frontiers of Development Administration, purham: N.C. Duke University 

Press, 1970. 

7. Irwing, Swndlow (ed.): Development Administration: Concepts and Problems, Syracause: NY 

Syracuse University Press, 1963. 

8. Joseph, La Palombara (ed.): Bureaucracy and Political Development, Princeton: NJ Princeton 


9. Preeta Joshi: Vikash Prashashan, Jaipur, RBSA, Swai Man Singh, Highway, Chaura Rasta 2nd 

Ed. 1991. 

10. Gabriel Almond and G.B. Well: Comparative Politics: A Developmental Approach, Oxford & 

IBH Pub. Co. New Delhi, 1976. 

11. Roy Macridis and B. Brown: Comparative Politics, 4th ed. Honwood, Dorsey Press 1972 

12. Cherry Oertzel, Maure Goldschmidth and Donald Rotchild, Government and Politics in Kenya, 

Nairobi 1970. 

10(1296) 


Paper – X (Opt.-B): Management of Voluntary Agencies 








Unit – II Voluntary Organisations – Concept, Need, Types, Roles and Functions. Voluntary Agency 

Trends in India. 

Unit – III Organisational Structure of Voluntary Organisations. Legal and Policy Environment 

Including Registration, Statutory Returns, FERA and Income Tax. Welfare Schemes and 

Voluntary Organisations. 

Unit – IV Voluntary Organisations and Moblisation of Local Resources. Management Accounting, 

Foreign Currency Accounting, Procurement of Goods and Services. Voluntary 

Organisations and CAPART. Project Appraisal, Monitoring and Evaluation. 

Unit – V Project Management, Project Cycle Approach, Logical Framework Analysis. Human 

Resource Management. Audit, Accountability and Control. 

Books: 

1. D.Paul.Chaudhary: Profile of Social Welfare and Development in India, M.N.Publishers & 

Distributors, New Delhi, 1985. 

2. Mathivaanan: Voluntary Agencies and Social Change, Menas Publications, New Delhi, 1991. 

3. Stephan, Hatch, Outside the State: Voluntary Organisations in Three English Towns, 

Croomhelm, London, 1980. 

4. Avasthi and Maheshwari, Public Administration, Laxmi Narain Aggarwal, Agra, 1988. 

5. Narman, Johnson: Voluntary Social Services, Basil Blackwell and Mortin Roberton Oxford, 

1981. 

6. Usha, Kapoor, Women Welfare: A Study of Voluntary Agencies, Indus Publishing Company, 

New Delhi, 1995. 

7. P.D.Kulkarni, (ed.), Voluntary Action: Myth and Reality, NIPCCD, New Delhi, 1991. 

8. R.B.Jain, (ed.), N.G.Os in Development Perspective, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi, 1995. 

9. E.A.Naryana, Voluntary Organisations and Rural Development in India, Uppal Publishing 

House, New Delhi, 1990. 

10. IIPA: Special Issue, Vol.33, No.3, July – September, 1987. 

11. S.L.Goel, Public Administration (Theory and Practice, Deep & Deep Publications, New Delhi, 

2003. 

10(1297) 


Paper – X (Opt.-C): Corporate Governance 








Unit – II Corporate Governance – A Conceptual Framework & Practice, C G – The New Paradigm. 

Corporate Governance in India and Trends in C G 

Unit – III Trends in Corporate Governance, CG for Building Global Competance, CG: Issues and 

Challenges CG in. 

Unit – IV Corporate Governance in Banking Sector, Scams in Indian Capital Market, Impact of CG on 

Household Investors, Ethics in Business – Bases for Corporate Governance. RTI and 

Corporate Governance; CG Reporting; CG and Corporate Social Responsibility. 

Unit – V Financing Pattern of Indian Corporate Sector, Strengthening of Corporate Governance. 

Media and CG ; and CG in the Era of LPG. Implication of CG, Measures for Effective 

Corporate Governance. 

Books recommended: 

1. P.V. Sharma & S. Rajani, Corporate Governance – Contemporary Issues and 

Challenges, Kanishka Publishers, Distributors, New Delhi, 2007. 

2. N. Gopalaswamy, Corporate Governance – The New Paradigm, Wheeler Publishing, 

A Division of A.H. Wheeler and Co. Ltd, New Delhi, 1998. 

3. Task Force Report on Corporate Governance in India – An Investors’ Perspective, 

submitted by Institute of International Finance, February 2005. 

4. P.P. Arya et.al., Corporate Governance, Deep and Deep Publishers Pvt. Ltd., 2003. 

5. Vepakesam, “Corporate Governance”, Reserve Bank Bulletin, January, 2000, 

pp. 21-43. 

6. Devi Singh and Subhash Garg, Corporate Governance, Excel Books, New Delhi, 

2001. 

7. Corporate Governance, What it means and what it needs, Management Review, July- 

Dec., 1996. 

8. Corporate Governance: What needs to be Done, Fortune India, January 16-31, 1997. 

9. Corporate Governance: Multi-faceted Issue, Chartered Secretary, October, 1997. 

10(1298) 


Paper – X (Opt.-D) : Police Administration 








Unit – II Need and Concept of Police in Society. Evolution and Growth of Police System – Ancient, 

Medieval, British and Post Independence Periods with Emphasis on Various Commissions 

and Committees Constituted during Crown’s Rule and after Independence in India. 

Unit – III Police and Policing in India – An Overview. Police and The Union Government. Ministry of 

Home Affairs, Indian Police Service, Central Police Forces and Organisations and Central 

Vigilance Commission. Police and Human Rights in India. 

Unit – IV Organisation and Working of Police in Indian States. The District Police in India – District 

Police Organisations and Its Working. Metropolitan Police, Police and Panchayati Raj – 

Organisation of Village Force and Issues Related to it. Police and Executive. Police and 

Political Order (Political Parties and Political Change/Development). 

Unit – V Emerging Issue in Police Administration 

(a) Police and E-Governance . 

(b) Measuring Police Efficiency in India 

(c) Women Police. 

(d) Police – Problems. 

(e) Corruption in Police Administration. 

(f) Police Reforms. 

(g) Police – Public Relations. 

Books: 

1. Shanker Sen: Indian Police Today, New Delhi, Ashish Publishing House, 1994. 

2. Sultan Akhar Khan: Power, Police and Public, Kurukshetra, Vishal Publications, 1983. 

3. K.M. Mathur: Internal Security Challengers and Police in a Developing Society, RBSA, Jaipur, 

1989. 

4. Charles D. Hale: Fundamentals of Police Administration, Boston, Helbrook Press, 1977. 

5. S.C. Mishra: Police Administration in India, 1970. 

6. D.H. Bayley: The Police and Political Development in India (Latest Edition). 

7. O.W. Wilson and Roy Clinton McLaran: Police Administration (Latest Edition). 

8. K.M. Mathur: Problems of Police in a Democratic Society, RBSA Publishers, Jaipur, 1987. 

9. N.S. Saksena: Law and Order in India, Abhinav Publications. 

10. P.D. Sharma: Indian Police – A Development Approach (Latest Edition) 

Journals 

11. Indian Journal of Public Administration, July-September, 1985. 

12. 

10(1299) 




11. Public Administration in India 

10(1300) 

80+20 3 hours 

12 Public Sector Management 80+20 3 hours 

13. Research Methodology 80+20 3 hours 

14. & 15 Optional Papers: Choose any two of the 

following:- 

(1) Urban Local Administration 

(2) Rural Local Administration 

(3) Social Welfare Administration 

(4) Insurance Sector Administration in 

India 

80+20 

80+20 

80+20 

80+20 

3 hours 

3 hours 

3 hours 

3 hours 

Training/Field Work: The students will undertake 3 weeks training/field survey concerning their 

respective choice of paper/area after finishing their IIIrd semester examinations. After 

completion of training, every student will write a project report and submit it till the 

completion of fourth semester examinations. 

Note: During the training, faculty members would make surprise checking to ensure the availability 

of the students at their respective training centers. 





Paper-XI: Public Administration in India. 








Unit-II Evolution of Indian Administration: Ancient, Mughal Period and British Influences on 

Indian Administration; Constitutional Framework and of Features of Indian Administration. 

Federation and Parliamentary characteristics in Indian Administration 

Unit-III Political Executive at the Union Level: President; Prime Minister and and Council of 

Ministers. PMO; Cabinet Secretariat and Central Secretariat. Ministries (Finance & Home); 

Departments & Boards at Union Government Level. 

Unit-IV Administration of Law and Order at Centre State and District Levels. Centre-State Relations 

– Legislative, Administrative, Financial and Planning. Planning Machinery at Centre State 

and District Levels. 

Unit-V State Government Administration: Governor, Chief Minster and Council of Ministers. State 

Administration: State Secretariat; Chief Secretary and Directorate. Departments & Boards at 

State Level. District Administration: District Collector, Powers, Functions and his 

Changing Role. District Rural Development Agency and Special Development. 

Programmes. 


1. Hoshiar Singh & Mohiner Singh: Public Administration in India: Theory & 

Practice, New Delhi: Sterling Pub., Reprint, 1990. 

2. Hoshiar Singh & D.P. Singh: Indian Administration: Current Issues and Problems, 

Jaipur: Aalekh Publishers, 1990. 

3. G.P. Pilani & Hoshiar Singh: Administration & Social Changes, Jaipur; Printwell 


4. Avasthi: Central Administrative, Tata McGraw Hill, Publishers Co. Put. Ltd. 1988, 

New Delhi. 

5. R.B. Jain: Contemporary Issues in Indian Administration, Delhi: Vishal Publishers, 

1976. 

6. S.R. Maheshwari: Indian Administration, Delhi: Orient Longman, 1989. 

7. C.P. Bhambri: Public Administration in India, Delhi, Vikas 1973. 

8. V. Bhaskara Rao and b. Venkateshwarlu ( ed.): Parliamentary Democracy in India: 

Trends and Issues, Delhi, Mittal Pub. 1987. 

9. Pramatama Sharan: Public Adminstration in India, Meerut: Meenakshi Publications, 

1978. 

10(1301) 


Paper-XII: Public Sector Management 








Unit-II Public Enterprises meaning, Definition, Growth and Environment of Public Enterprises. 

Rationale and Objectives. Government’s Policy Towards Public Enterprises. 

Unit-III Role of Public Sector in India. Organisational Forms: Public Corporation; Public Company; 

Department Form; and other Forms. The Board of Directors – its Constitution and 

Functions. 

Unit-IV Management of Public Enterprises at Middle and Lower Levels. Financial Management. 

Personnel Management-Recruitment and Training. Business Ethics and Corporate 

Responsibility. 

Unit-V Industrial Relations and Wokers’s Participation in Management. Project Management. 

Market Management. Public Relations and Profitability and Efficiency. Performance 

Evaluation Privatisation of Public Enterprises. Autonomy and Accountability of Public 

Enterprises. 


1. A.N. Aggarwal: Indian Economy, Delhi: Wiley Eastern Ltd. 1987. 

2. A. Ghosh: Indian Economy – its Nature and Problems, Calcutta: The World Press Pvt. 

3. Dutt and Sundharam: Indian Economy, Delhi: S. Chand & Co., 2004. 

4. B.L. Mathur: Economic Policy and Administration (Hindi), Jaipur: RBSA Publishers, SMS 

Highway 1990. 

5. Hoshiar Singh & Mohinder Singh – Public Administration In India – Theory and Practice, New 

Delhi: Sterling Pulbishers, 1990. 

6. Mohinder Singh (ed.): Some Aspects of Public Enterprises in India – a Plea for Reforoms, New 

Delhi: Uppal Publishing House, 1993. 

7. V.V. Ramanadhan (ed.), Public Enterprises and Developing World, London: Groom Helm, 

1984. 

8. A.H. Hansen: Public Enterprises and Econmic Development, London: Routledge and Kegan, 

1972. 

9. Laxmi Narain: Principles and Practice of Public Enterprises Management, New Delhi: S.Chand 

& Co. 

10. S.C. Kuchhal: The Industrial Economy of India. Agra: Chitanya Pub. House, 1987. 

11. Prahlad Kumar Basu: Public Enterprises: Policy Performance and Professionalism, New Delhi, 

Allied 1982. 

10(1302) 


Paper-XIII Research Methodology 








Unit-II Social Science Research: Meaning, Nature, Objectives and Types, Scientific Methods of 

Social Science Research-Meaning, Characteristics and Various Stages of Scientific 

Methods. Importance of Scientific Method in the Study of Public Administration. 

Unit-III Identifications of Research Problem. Hypotheses: (Meaning, Significance, types & 

sources) research Design, ( Exploration Descriptive & Experiment) & Research Studies 

(Panel and Case). Selection of Universe & various Methods of Sampling. 

Unit-IV Data Collection: Sources of Data (Primary & Secondary), Tools & Techniques of Data 

Collection, (Questionnaire, Interview Schedules, Observation and Projective Techniques). 

Unit-V Classification, Codification and Tabulation of Data. Analysis of Data: Statistical Method- 

Significance & Limitations, Measures of Central Tendency (Mean, Median, & Mode), 

Measure of Dispersion (Range, Quartile, Mean Deviation & Standard Deviation). Report 

Writing: Structure; Characteristics and precautions. Reference writing 


1. Goode & Hatte: Methods of Social Research, New Delhi, McGrow Hill Book Company, 1987. 

2. Pauline V. Young: Scientific Social Survey & Research, New Delhi, Printice Hall of India, 

1979. 

3. John Galtung: Theory & Methods of Social Research, New Delhi, Colombia University Press, 

1967. 

4. B.M. Jain: Research Methodology, Research Publications (Hindi), Jaipur. 

5. R.N. Trivedi and O.P. Shukla: Research Methodology, Jaipur Research Publication (Hindi). 

6. S.R. Bajpai: Methods of Social Survey & Research (Hindi & English), Kanpur, Kitab Mahal. 

7. S.R. Kothari: Research Methodology- Methods & Techniques (2 nd Ed.), New Delhi; Wiley 

Eastern Ltd. 

8. C.J. Pearsons: Thesis & Project Work, A Guide to Research & Thesis Writing, London; Allen & 

Unwin, 1973. 

9. Jonathan Anderson: Berry, H. Durston, Millicent Poole Thesis & Assignment Writing, New 

Delhi; Wiley Eastern Limited, 1977. 

10(1303) 


Paper-XIV/XV Urban Local Administration 








Unit-II Meaning, Scope and Significance of Urban Local Government. Urbanization: Challenges 

and Remedies Special Purpose Agencies. 

Unit-III Features of Urban Local Government in India. Structure Orgnisation and functions of 

Urban Local Government in India. Local Government Performs in India. Urban Poverty 

Alleviation. 

Unit-IV Municipal Personnel Administration: Various types, Recruitment and Training Municipal in 

India. Urban Development: Issues and Challenges. 

Unit-V Municipal Politics. People’s Participation. Municipal Leadership. State Local Relationship 

in India. Urban Governments and Good Governance. 


1. Pardeep Sachdeva: Urban Local Government and Administration in India, Kitab Mahal, New Delhi, 

2000. 

2. Hoshiar Singh: Local Government in India, Britain, France and USA, Kitab Mahal, Allahabad, 

1997. 

3. Hoshiar Singh and Zia-U-Din Khan: leadership in Municipal Government, Jaipuer, RBSA 

Publishers. 

4. Hoshiar Singh: State Surpevision and Control over Municipal Bodies, New Delhi: Associated 

Publishers. 

5. S.L. Kaushik: Leadership in Urban Government in India, Allahabad: Kitab Mahal 1989. 

6. Sahib Singh and Swinder Singh: Local Government in India, Jalandhar: New Academic Publishing 

Co., 1991. 

7. Pardeep Sachdeva: Dynamics of Municipal Government and Politics in India, New Delhi, Kitab 

Mahal 1991. 

8. David Wilson & Chris Game & Others: Local Government in the United Kingdom, London: 

Macmillan 1994. 

9. Tony Byrne: Local Government in Britain, London: Penguin Press 5 th Ed. 1990. 

10. Vincent Ostrom and Others: Local Government in the United States, San Franscisco, Califoronia, 

ICS Press, 19987. 

11. Michael Keating: Comparative Urban Politics, Edward Elgar Publishing Ltd. Hamshire, England, 

Gover House Croft Road, Aldershot, 1992. 

12. D.A. Chandler (Ed.), Local Government in Liberal Democracies: An Introductory Survey, London: 

Routledge 11, New Fetter Lane, EC 4P. 1992. 

10(1304) 


Paper: XIV/XV Rural Local Administration 








Unit-II Meaning, Concept and Scope of Rural Local Administration. Growth of Rural 

Administration Institutions of India. Community Development Programme, Balwant Rai 

Mehta and Ashok Mehta Committees Reports. Organisation and working of Gram 

Panchayat Samiti and Zila Parishad. 

Unit-III Administrative Machinery for Rural Development at National, State, District and Block 

levels. Panchayati Raj Before and after 73 rd Constitutional Amendment Act. 

Unit-IV Desert Development Programme, Drought Prone Development Programme, Rural Energy 

Programme, National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme (NREGS) and Swaran Jayanti 

Gram Swa Rojgar Yojana (SGSY). Agriculture and Rural Development. Role of District 

Industry Centre and Rural Industrialization. 

Unit-V Ministries of Rural Development and Panchayati Raj-Organisation and Functions. IT and 

Rural Development. Cooperation and Rural Development-Role of Cooperatives, 

Cooperative Principles; Forms of Cooperatives. Cooperative Administration at the Centre, 

State and Local Levels. 


2. Hoshiar Singh: Administration of Rural Development in India, New Delhi, Sterling Publishers, 1995. 

3. S.R. Maheswari: Local Government in India, New Delhi: Origin Longman, 1984. 

4. Bhatnagar: Rural Development in India, New Delhi: Light and Life Publishers, 1978. 

5. Hoshiar Singh: Rural Development in India, Jaipur: Printwell Publishers, 1985. 

6. S.R. Maheswari: Rural Development in India, A Public Policy Approach, New Delhi: Sage 


7. S.N. Mishra: New Horizons in Rural Development Administration, New Delhi: Mittal Publications, 

1989. 

8. B.S. Khanna: Rural Development in India, New Delhi: Deep & Deep Publications, 1982. 

9. Mohinder Singh: Rural Development in India – Current Perspectives, New Delhi: Intellectual 


10. Kurukshetra: A journal of Rural Development, Government of India. 

11. Journal of Rural Development, National Institute of Rural Development, Hyderabad. 

12. Sahib Singh and Swinder Singh: Local Government in India, New Academic Publishing Co. 

Jallandhar, 1992. 

13. A.S. Malik: Concept and Strategy of Rural Industrial Development, New Delhi: M.D. Publications, 

1995. 

14. Surat Singh and Mohinder Singh (Eds.): Rural Development Administration in 21 st Century: A Multi 

Dimensional Study, New Delhi: Deep & Deep Publications, 2006. 

10(1305) 


Paper: XIV/XV Social Welfare Administration 








Unit-II Social welfare: Meaning, Nature, Scope and Principles of Social Administration. Social 

Policy - A Study of Relevant Constitutional Articles and Provisions in the Five year Plan 

Documents. Legislations with Special Reference to legislation for Women and Children. 

Unit-III Ministry of Social Justice and Empowerment: Organisation and Functions, Department of 

Women and Child Development at Central Level. Central Social Welfare Boards-its 

Composition, Functions. Social Planning and Five Year Plans. 

Unit-IV Directorates of Social Justice and Empowerment, Welfare of SCs & BCs; and Women & 

Child Development – Composition, and Functions. State Social Welfare Advisory Board: 

Composition, Powers and Personal Practice in the Field of Social Administration. Major 

Social Sectors – Health and Education. 

Unit-V National Commission for SCs and STs - Progammes for the Development of SCs and STs 

and Women. Welfare of the Disabled and Aged. Drug De-addition. Methods of Social 

Administration: Social Case Work; Group Work; and Community Organisation and their 

application in India. Role of Voluntary/ Non-Governmental Agencies in Socio-economic 

Development. 


1. Surendra Kataria, Social Administration (Hindi), RBSA Publishers, SMS High Way, Jhaipur, 2002. 

2. C.P. Barthwal (Ed.), Social Justice in India, Bharat Book Centre, 17, Ashok Marg, Lucknow, 1998. 

3. D.R. Sachdeva, Social Welfare Administration (English and Hindi), Kitab Mahal, Allahabad, 2004. 

4. Davis C. March: An Introduction to Social Administration, Routledge and Kegan Paul, London, 1965. 

5. P.D. Kulkarni: Centre Social Welfare Board, New Delhi: Asia Publishing House, 1961. 

6. V. Jaganadhan: Social Welfare Organisation, New Delhi, IIPA 1966. 

7. D.K.Mishra: Social Administration (Hindi) Jaipur: College Book Depot, Tripolia Bazar, 1990. 

8. D. Paul Chowdhry: Social Welfare Administration, New Delhi, Atma Ram & Sons, 1979. 

9. S.L.Goel and R.K.Jain: Social Welfare Adminsitratiion, vol. I, New Delhi: Deep & Deep, 1988. 

10. T.N.Chaturvedi and S.K. Chandra: Social Administration Development and Change, New Delhi, IIPA 1980. 

11. D.P. Chowdhry: Social Welfare Administration, Atma Ram & Sons, Deli 1992. 

12. Mohinder Singh (ed.): Social Policy and Administration in India, M.D. Publications Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi, 1996. 

10(1306) 


Paper: XIV/XV Insurance Sector Administration in India 





Unit-I There will one compulsory question in the UNIT-I and it will be short answer type comprises of 

eight parts and will be based on the syllabus prescribed in other four units (UNIT-II to UNIT-V) 

of the syllabus. 

Unit-II Life Insurance: Concept and Significance, Need of Security against economic difficulties, Risk 

and uncertainty; Individual values system, Individual Life Insurance. Nature and uses of Life 

Insurance. 

Life Insurance Policies: Types and Their applicability to different situations. Important Life 

Insurance Policies issued by the Life Insurance Corporation of India. Administrative Set-Up of 

Life Insurance of India. 

Unit-III General Insurance: Introduction to risk and insurance: (a) Risk (b) The treatment of risk. 

General Insurance Corporation and other Insurance Institutions-Working of GIC in India; 

Types of risks assumed and specific policies issued by ECGC. 

Health Insurance: Individual Health Insurance; and Group Health Insurance Motor 

Insurance: Multiple line and All-line Insurance-such as Rural Insurance-Hull Insurance, etc. 

Property and Liability Insurance: Nature of property and liability insurance; Crop and Cattle 

Insurance; Types of liability insurance, Reinsurance. Liability insurance-Basic concepts: 

specific and all risk insurance 

Unit-IV Fire and Maine Insurance: Fire Insurance Policies-Issue and renewal of policies; Different 

kinds; Risks covered; Recovery of claims-Insurer’s option; Ex-gratia payment and subrogation. 

Types of fire protection policies issued by the General Insurance corporation of India. Marine 

policies and conditions. Nature of coastal marine insurance; perils covered protection available; 

Procedure for preparation and presentation of claim; payment of compensation by insurer. 

Unit-V Insurance, Finance and Legislation: 

Investment policy of LIC and GIC in India. Legislation-A Brief study of Indian Insurance 

Corporation of India Act, 1956; General Insurance Corporation of India Act, Export Credit and 

Guarantee Corporation Act ; Valuation of risk; and Indemnity contract and specific value 

contracts. Average and contribution excess and short. 


1. Huebner S.S. and Kennerth Black Jr. : Life Insurance (Prentice-Hall Inc. 


2. Mehar Robert, L. : Life Insurance; Theory and Practice 

(Business Publication, Texas). 

3. Maclean : Life Insurance. 

10(1307) 


4. Gupta, O.S. : Life Insurance-(Frank Brother, 

New Delhi). 

5. Mishra, M.N. : Insurance Principle and Practice 

(Delhi Vikas Publishing House). 

6. Palande, P.S. et. al : Insurance in India, (New Delhi Sa 

Sage Publication). 

7. Rodder : Marine Insurance (Prentice Hall, 

New Jersey). 

8. Winter, W.D. : Marine Insurance. 

9. Godmen : Fire Insurance. 

10. Cambell, H. : Fire Insurance Contract Indian 

Policy (the Rough Notes Co.). 

11. Srivastava, S. S. : Insurance Administration and 

Legislation in India (Allahabad, 

Asia Book Depot). 

12. Govt. of India : Life Insurance Corporation of India 

Act, 1956. 

13 Govt. of India : General Insurance Corporation of 

India Act, 1956. 

14. General Insurance by Biakelhaupt and Magee, Eight Ediction, Published by Richard D. Irwin, Inc., 

Homewood, Illinois, Irwin Dorsey Limited, George-town, Ontario, Chapter: 1 to 7m, 13, 21, 27 & 

28. 

10(1308) 


SEMESTER- IVTH 


16. Issues in Indian Administration 

80+20 3 hours 

17. Public Policy Analysis 80+20 3 hours 

18 & 19 Optional Papers: Choose any two of the 

following:- 

(1) Public Relations & Governance 

(2) Electronic Governance 

(3) Administrative Law 

(4) Health and Hospital Administration 

80+20. 

80+20 

80+20 

80+20 

20. Project Report and Viva-Voce 75+25=100 




10(1309) 

3 hours 

3 hours 

3 hours 

3 hours 


Paper –XVI Emerging Issues in Indian Administration 








. 

Unit-II Public Services: All India Services Constitutional Position, role and functions, Control 

Services: Nature and functions UPSC, State Services and State Public Service 

Commissions, Training especially in the changing contest of the Governance. 

Unit-III Accountability of Public Administration: Parliamentary, Executive & Judicial control over 

Indian Administration. 

Ethics and Values in Administration 

Unit-IV Integrity in Administration 

Right to Information Act, 2005 

Lok Pal and Lok Ayukas 

Good Governance 

Consumer Protection 

Unit-V Political and Permanent Executive 

Generalists and Specialists 

Administrative Culture 

Administrative Reforms 

IT & Public Administration 

E- Governance (National e-Governance Plan) 


1. Hoshiar Singh & Mohinder Singh: Public Administration in India: Theory & Practice, New 

Delhi: Sterling Pub., Reprint, 1990. 

1. Hoshiar Singh & D.P. Singh: Indian Administration: Current Issues and Problems, Jaipur: 

Aalekh Publishers, 1990. 

2. G.P. Pilani & Hoshiar Singh: Administration & Social Changes, Jaipur; Printwell Publishers, 

1990. 

3. Avasthi: Central Administrative, Tata McGraw Hill, Publishers Co. Put. Ltd. 1988, New 

Delhi. 

4. R.B. Jain: Contemporary Issues in Indian Administration, Delhi: Vishal Publishers, 1976. 

5. S.R. Maheshwari: Indian Administration, Delhi: Orient Longman, 1989. 

6. C.P. Bhambri: Public Administration in India, Delhi, Vikas 1973. 

7. V. Bhaskara Rao and b. Venkateshwarlu ( ed.): Parliamentary Democracy in India: Trends 

and Issues, Delhi, Mittal Pub. 1987. 

8. Pramatama Sharan: Public Adminstration in India, Meerut: Meenakshi Publications, 1978. 

10(1310) 


Paper-XVII Public Policy Analysis 








Unit-II Public Policy: Meaning, Nature, Scope, Importance and Types. Policy Formulation: 

Concept, Constitutional Framework for Policy Making, Role of Bureaucracy, Legislature 

and Judiciary and Political Parties in Policy Formulation making. 

Unit-III Policy Implementation and Evaluation: Meaning Elements in Implementation; 

Implementation Techniques. Policy Evaluation: Meaning, Problems and Approaches in 

Policy Evaluation. 

Unit-IV Policy Analysis: Approaches, Models of Policy Analysis A Study of Policies Relating to: 

(a) Urban Development and Housing Policy and (b) Educational Policy. 

Unit-V A Study of Policies Relating to (a) Employment Policy. Environmental Policy: (a) Water 

Pollution, (b) Disposable Wastage. 


1. E. Lindblom Charles: The Policy Making Process, Englewood Cliffs, NJ Prentice Hall 

Incorporation 1968. 

2. Paul H. Appleby: Policy and Administration, The University of Albara Press 1940. 

3. E. Jacob Charles: Policy and Bureaucracy, P. Van Nostrand Co. 1976. 

4. Jones Charles O., An Introduction to the Study of Public Administration Policy, Brooks Cole 

Pub. Co., Monetary California (3 rd Ed.) 1986. 

5. Larry N Gerston: Making Public Policy, Glenview, III Scott, Forsman (1983), USA. 

6. O. Pardeep Sahni: Public Policy, Conceptual Dimension, Allahabad: Kitab Mahal, 1987. 

7. Richard M. Hodgetts and Jr. Max. S. Wortman: Administrative Policy – Text and Cases in the 

Policy Science, New York: Wiely. George A. Steiner: Top Management Planning, Macmillan 

1969. 

8. R.B. Jain: Policy and Parliament in India, Indian Institute of Public Administration, New Delhi. 

9. James F. Anderson: Public Policy Making, New York: Preager, 1979. 

10(1311) 


Paper – XVIII/XIX: Public Relations and Governance 








Unit-II Public Relations – Meaning, Need and role; Growth and Development of Public Relations in 

India. Public Relations: Tools and Methods. 

Unit-III Public Relations Department: Structure and functions; Public Relations - Laws and Ethics; 

Public Relations and Globalization. 

Unit-IV Communication – Forms of Communication – Effective and Ineffective Communication, 

Complexity of Communication Techniques for Communication. Public Relations for 

Educational Institutions, Public Interest Issues in Higher Education; Public Relations and 

Technological Advancement. 

Unit-V Advertising – Meaning, functions and types, growth and Development of Advertising in 

India; Social and Economic Role of Advertising. 

Reference Books: 

1. Chhunawalla and Sethia, Foundations of the theory and Practice of Advertising Himalaya 

Publisher, Bombay, 1986. 

2. Dyer Gillian, Advertising as Communication, Mathuen, Newyork. 1982 

3. Dunn S. Wastson, Advertising: Hold Sandaras International Editing. 

4. Keval J. Kumar, Advertising: A Critical Approach, Niraali Prakan, Pune, 1992. 

5. Kleppner otto, Advertising Procedure, Simon Schuster Procedure, Simon Schuster In nglewood, 

1986. 

6. Rathor B.S., Advertising Management, Himalaya Publishers, Bombay, 1986. 

7. Willshurst John, The Fundamentals of Advertising, Henemann, London, 1986. 

8. Cutlip and Centre, Effective Public Relations, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1982. 

9. Anil Basu, Practical Public Relations. 

10. Balan K.R., Chemistry of Public Relations. 

11. Narasimha Reddy, How to be a good PR. 

12. Sam Black, Practical Public Relations, Universal Book House, New Delhi, 1976. 

10(1312) 


Paper: XVIII/XIX Electronic Governance 








Unit-II E – Governance: Concept, Stages, Models, Legal and Policy Framework and Significance. 

Information and Communication Technology: Concept and Components. ICTs: Role and 

Applications. 

Unit-II Role of ICT in Administration. Administrative Organisation Culture: Towards ICT Based 

Reforms. Role of ICT in Rural Development. 

Unit-IV Panchayati Raj Institutions: Improving Self-Governance Through ICT. E – Learning: Role 

of ICT in Education and Training. E – Commerce. 

Unit-V Role of ICT in Delivery of Citizen Services. ICT in Indian Railway. E – Governance in 

Haryana. Information Policy. Right to Information Act, 2005 ICT E- Seva Project: 

Implementation in Governance; Issues, Challenges and Suggestions. 


1. Annual Report, 2008-09, Department of Information Technology, Government of India. 

2. Government of India, Information Technology Act, 2000 (No. 21 of 2000). 

3. Kroenke, David, 1992, Management Information Systems, McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 

4. Srivastave, P., 2004, Management Information Systems: A New Framework, Shree Niwas 

Publication, Jaipur. 

5. Menon, N., V., C., 2003, Applications of Information Technology in Disaster Risk Reduction, in 

P., Sahni, and Madhavi Malagoda Riyabandu, (eds.) Disaster Risk Reduction in South Asia, 


6. Kapoor, Jagdish, IT and Good Governance, IJPA, July-September 2000, Vol., XLVI, No. 3. 

7. Gupta, M., P., P., Kumar, and J., Bhattacharya, 2004, Government Online-Opportunities and 

Challenges, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi. 

8. Bhatnagar, Subhash, 2004, E-Government-Form Vision to Implementation-A Practical Guide 

with Cast Studies, Sage, New Delhi. 

9. Bhatnagar, Subhash, and Robert, Schware, 2000, Information and Communication Technology: 

Cases from India, Sage, New Delhi. 

10. Emery, Dale,Resistance as a Resource, Cutter IT Journal, 10 Oct. 2001. 

11. Derby, Esther, n.d., A Manager’s Guide to Supporting Organisational Change, n.p. 

10(1313) 


12. Harris, Philip, R., Robert, T., Moran, and Sarah, V., Moran, 2004, Manageing Cultural 

Difference: Global Leadership Strategies for the 21 st Century, Business and Economics, n.p. 

13. Prabhu, C., S., R., 2004, E-Governance: Concepts and Case Studies, Prenthice-Hall of India 

Private Ltd., New Delhi. 

14. Satyanarayana, J., 2004, E-Government… The Science of the Possible, Prentice-Hall of India 

Private Ltd., New Delhi. 

15. Vayandan, E., and Dolly Mathew, (Ed.) 2003, Good Governance Initiatives in India, Prentice- 

Hall of India Private Ltd., New Delhi. 

16. Indian Journal of Public Administration, Special Number on Governance for Development, New 

Delhi, Vol. No. 1, Jan-March, 2004. 

17. Indian Journal of Public Administration, Special Number on IT and Indian Administration, New 

Delhi, Vol. XLVI, No. 3, July-Sept., 2003. 

18. Karim, Muhmmad, Raisabdul, Technology and improved Service Delivery: Learning Points 

from the Malysian Experience, International Review of Administrative Sciences, Vol. 69, 

Number 2, SAGE Publication, June, 2003. 

19. Agarwal, Sunil, Technology Development and Transfer at Grassroots Level, Kurukshetra Vol. 

50, No. 5, March 2002. 

20. Ghosh, Souvik, Information and Communication Technologies in Rural Development, 

Kurukshetra, November 2001 Prabha, C., S., R., 2004, E-Governance: Concepts and Case 

Studies, Prentice-Hall of India Private Ltd., New Delhi. 

21. Jha, Rajesh, K., E-Panchayat: Role of IT in Empowering PRIs, Kurukshetra, Vol. 52, No. 10, 

August 2004, pp. 34-38. 

22. Report, Working Group on Information Technology, Planning Commission, Government of 

India, November 2001. 

23. Gupta, N., and R., Singhal, Appropriate Strategy for E-Training in Government, paper presented 

in Eastern Regional Organisation of Public Administration, Nineteenth General Assembly and 

Conference, New Delhi, 6-9 Oct. 2003. 

24. Goel, S.L., 2008, Right to Information Act, 2005, Deep & Deep, New Delhi. 

10(1314) 


Paper-XVIII/XIX: Administrative Law 








Unit-II Legal Basis of Modern State, Government and Administration; Administration Law – its 

meaning, nature, and scope. Some Basic Constitutional Concepts in Relation to 

Administrative Law: (a) Rule of Law; (b) Doctrine of Separation of Powers; (c) Principles 

of Checks and Balances; and (d) Principles of Natural Justice. 

Unit-III Doctrine and Ultra-Vires. Relation between Constitutional Law and Administrative Law. 

Concept and Courts of Administrative Law (Droit Administrative) in France, including 

Courts of Conflicts. 

Unit-IV Classification of Administrative Functions and Difficulties of Classification. Legislative 

Functions of Administration: (a) Delegated Legislation – its Meaning, Nature and Causes 

for its Growth. (b) Forms and Classification of Delegated Legislation. (c) Constitutionality 

of Legislative Delegation, (d) Control over Delegated Legislation: (i) Parliamentary Control, 

and (ii) Judicial Control over Delegated Legislation. Administrative Law relating to Public 

Corporations. Constitutional Protection to Civil Servants. 

Unit-V Judicial Functions of Administration: Administrative Adjudication and Tribunals, Judicial 

Control of Administrative Authorities and Tribunals. Structure, Powers, Functions and 

Personnel of the following Tribunals: (a) Railway Rates Tribunals; and (b) Income Tax 

Appellate Tribunals. Legal Redressal of Grievances – Government Liability, Tortuous and 

Contractual; (b) The Ombudsman – The Lokpal and the Lok Ayuktas. 


1. H. WR. Wade: Administrative Law (5 th Ed., 1982). 

2. Griffith and Street: Principles of Administrative Law (4 th Ed.), 1967. 

3. M.A. F: Judicial Control of Administrative Action in India, Pakistan (Oxford Clarendon 

Press, J 1969). 

4. S.P. Sathe: Administrative Law in India, 1970. 

5. B. Ganguly: Administrative Legislation in Modern India, 1968. 

6. A.P. Hassumani: Some Problems of Administrative Law in India, 1964. 

7. M.P. Jain and S.N. Sain: Principles of Administrative Law,. 1971. 

8. M.C.I. Kaozi, Indian Administrative Law (2 nd Ed.), 1969. 

10(1315) 


Paper –XVIII/XIX (Group - G): Health and Hospital Administration 








Unit-II Basic Concept: Meaning, Nature, Scope and Principles of Health Administration 

Evolution of Health Administration as a Discipline. A Critical Study of the Health and 

Family Welfare Policies in India. 

Unit-III Machinery at the Central Level: A Critical Study of the Composition; Powers and functions 

of Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, Directorate General of Health & Family Welfare 

- their Inter-relationship. The Composition powers and functions of Indian Medical Council- 

Indian Council of Medical Research. 

Unit-IV Machinery at the State Level: Composition powers and functions of State Departments and 

Directorates of Health and Family Welfare- the problems of their inter-relationships - 

Composition, Powers and Functions of State Medical Councils - Composition, Function and 

Role of State Hospitals. Composition, functions and role of District Hospitals. Machinery 

for Health & Family Welfare at the Local levels- Problems of Administration and 

Management of Municipal Hospitals and Primary Health Centres Dispensaries and Family 

Welfare Centres. 

Unit-V Personnel System for Medical, Health and Family Welfare Administration: The problems 

for finding suitable personnel for these areas, with special reference to the idea of creation 

of an all India Service of Health and Family Welfare Administrators. Reforming Health 

Education with special reference to the idea of Curricula revision. 


1. G. Ramesh Waram: Medical and Health Administration in Rural India, New Delhi: Ashish 


2. The Central Health Education, Health Today, Director-General of Health Services, New Delhi, 

1971. 

3 S. L. Goel: Health Care Administration - levels and Aspects. New Delhi: Sterling Publishers 1980. 

4 S. L. Goel: Health Care Administration: Ecology Principles and Modem Trends, New Delhi: 

Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd. 1980. 

5 S.L. Goel: Public Health Administration: New Delhi: Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd. 1984. 

6 N.V. Ram Raghu: Health Administration and Policy Development, Hyderabad: Ramkrishna Printers 

and Publishers, 1971. 

7. G. Broker: Health in Independent India (Latest Edition). 

8. J.K. Owen Madan: Concepts of Hospital Administration (Latest Edition). 

9. Brown and Fraling: The Doctor-Patient Relationship (Latest Edition). 

10. C.A. Robinson: Hospital Administration (Latest Edition) 

11. M.T. Mac Eachiru: Hospital Organisation and Management (Latest Edition). 

12. A. Cart Wright: Human Relations and Hospital (Latest ed.) 

10(1316) 


2 nd Year 

Scheme of B.A.-II (Economics) (General) Semester System w.e.f. 2011-12 

Semester-III 

Macro Economics – I 80 20 

Semester-IV 

Macro Economics –II 80 20 

10(1317) 


B. A. Part II (Economics) 

Semester- III 

Paper 2: Macro Economics – I 

10(1318) 




Note: -The question paper will consist of 9 questions. The candidate will be asked to attempt 5 

questions in all selecting one question each from the three units and the fourth question may be 

attempted from any unit. Question 1 shall be compulsory consisting of objective type (filling blanks, 

true/false, multiple choice) nine questions of two marks each and spread over the entire syllabus. All 

questions will carry equal marks. 

Unit – I 

Introduction to Macro Economics and National Income: 

Macro Economics and Open Macro Economics; scope meaning importance and limitations. 

Concepts of National Income including potential GDP; measurement of National Income; product method; 

income method; expenditure method; their importance and limitations. 

Determination of Income and Employment: 

Unit – II 

Say’s law of Market; Classical theory of employment; Keynesian theory of employment; Comparison 

between classical and Keynesian theory; Consumption function and its determinants; Psychological law of 

consumption; Investment function: meaning, kinds and determinants; marginal efficiency of capital. 

Unit – III 

National Income Determination and Open Economy: 

Impact of changes in Govt. Expenditure and taxes. Investment multiplier; Accelerator; Trade Cycles: 

meaning phases causes and control; Samuelson and Hick’s Theories of Trade Cycle;. 

Monetary System: 

Unit –IV 

The Demand and supply of money: concepts, functions and significance; Quantity Theory of Money; 

Fisher’s Approach and Cambridge Quantity Theory; Keynesian Liquidity Theory of Money; Supply of Money: 

Meaning and Determinants; measuring the money supply; Money and Credit; Credit Creation; Money 

Multipliers; 


1. R.G. Lipsey and K.A. Chrystal, “Principles of Economics” (9th Ed.) Oxford University Press. 

2. Ackley, G (1978), “Macroeconomics: Theory and Policy”, Macmillan, New York. 

3. Branson, W.A. (1989), “Macroeconomic Theory and Policy”, (3rd Ed.), Harper & Row, New 

York. 

4. Shapiro, E (1996), “Macroeconomic Analysis”, Galgotia Publication, New Delhi. 

5. Joseph E. Stiglitz and Carl E. Walsh (2002) “Principles of Macroeconomics”, W.W. Norton & 


6. Samuelson Paul and Nordhaus: (2005) “ Economics” (18 th ed.) Tata Hill Publishing Company, 

New Delhi. 

7. Mankiw N. Gregory: (2007) “Principles of Economics”, Thomson, Indian Reprint. 

8. Lipsey R.G. and K.A. Chrystal (2007) “Economics”, Oxford University Press. Oxford. 

9. Goodwin Neva, J. A. Nelson & J. Harris (2009) “Macroeconomics in Context”, PHI Learining Pvt. 


10. Taylor Lance (2008), “Reconstructing Macroeconomics”, Viva Books, Harvard University Press, 

USA. 

11. Dornbusch R, S. Fischer & R. Startz (2009) “Macro Economics” Tata McGraw Hill Publishing 

Company Ltd. New Delhi. 


B. A. Part II (Economics) 

Semester- IV 

Paper 2: Macro Economics – II 



Time: 3 hours 






Unit – I 

Money Growth and Inflation: 

The Classical Theory of Inflation; The classical Dichotomy and Monetary Neutrality; Case Studies: 

Money and Prices during four Hyper Inflations; The Inflation Tax; The Fisher effect; The Cost of Inflation: A 

fall in purchasing power; Shoe Lather Cost; Menu Cost; Relative- price variability and the misallocation; 

Inflation induced Tax Distortions; Case study: the free silver debate. Demand pull and cost push theories of 

Inflations; Effects and control of Inflation. 

Banking and Financial System: 

Unit - II 

Banking: Functions of Central Banks; Function of Commercial Banks; Recent Reforms in Banking 

Sector; The relationship between Saving, Investment and the Financial System. Present Value: Measuring 

the Time value of Money; Managing Risk and Asset Valuation: Basic Idea. 

Public Economics: 

Unit - III 

Nature and Scope of Public Finance; The Principle of Maximum social advantage; Classifications; 

Canons and effects of Public Expenditure; Canons and Effects of Taxation; Impact and incidence of 

taxation; Characteristics of good taxation systems; Public debt: Sources and effects. 

Market Failure: Market efficiency, Reasons for Market failure, Public goods and externalities. 

International Trade: 

Unit - IV 

Interregional and International Trade; Theory of comparative cost; Heckscher –Ohlin Theory; Gains 

from Trade; Their Measurement and Distribution; Trade as an engine of Economic Growth; Balance of 

Payments and balance of trade. 


1. Mankiw, Principles of Economics (4th Ed.), First Indian Reprint 2007, Chapter 26, 27 and 30. 

2. R.G. Lipsey and K.A. Chrystal, “Principles of Economics” (9th Ed.) Oxford University Press. 

3. Ackley, G (1978), “Macroeconomics: Theory and Policy”, Macmillan, New York. 

4. Branson, W.A. (1989), “Macroeconomic Theory and Policy” (3rd Ed.), Harper & Row, New York. 

5. Shapiro, E (1996), “Macroeconomic Analysis” Galgotia Publication, New Delhi. 

6. Joseph E. Stiglitz and Carl E. Walsh (2002) “Principles of Macroeconomics”, W.W. Norton & 


7. Ackley, G (1978), “Macroeconomics: Theory and Policy”, Macmillan, New York 

8. Stiglitz J. E. and Carl E. Walsh (2002) Principles of Macroeconomcs, W.W. Norton & Company, 

New York. 

9. Samuelson Paul and Nordhaus: (2005) “ Economics” (18 th ed.) Tata Hill Publishing Company, 

New Delhi. 

10. Lipsey R.G. and K.A. Chrystal (2007) “Economics”, Oxford University Press. Oxford. 

11. Goodwin Neva, J. A. Nelson & J. Harris (2009) “Macroeconomics in Context”, PHI Learining Pvt. 


12. Taylor Lance (2008), “Reconstructing Macroeconomics”, Viva Books, Harvard University Press, 

USA. 

13. Dornbusch R, S. Fischer & R. Startz (2009) “Macro Economics” Tata McGraw Hill Publishing 

Company Ltd. New Delhi 

10(1319) 


Semester-3 

Scheme of B.A. , 2 nd (Economics Hons.) Semester System 

B.A.Part-2 

Paper-305 Money & Banking 

Paper-306 Issues in Indian Economy 

Paper-307 Development Economics & Planning 

Semester-4 

Paper-408 Public Economics 

Paper-409 Sectoral Development & Policies in India 

Paper-410 Mathematics for Economics 

10(1320) 


B.A. 2 nd (Eco. Hons.) 

3 RD SEMESTER 

Paper - 305 

Money & Banking 

10(1321) 


Internal assessment: 20 

The Question paper will have Nine questions, including two questions from each unit. The 

candidate will be required to attempt Five questions in all. Question number one will be 

compulsory and it will have nine objective type questions (each carrying 2 marks) uniformly 

spread over entire syllabus. Out of the remaining eight questions (each carrying 18 marks), the 

candidate will be required to attempt four questions selecting one from each unit. 

Unit-1 

Money: Functions, Classification and Significance; Money Supply: Determinants, Alternative 

Measures of Money Supply in India (concepts only); Money and Capital Market: Structure, 

Instruments, Role; Developed and Under-Developed Money Markets. 

Unit-2 

Banking: Commercial Banks- Functions and Importance, Process of Credit Creation; The 

Reserve Banking of India: Functions and Instruments of credit control, Recent Monetary Policy of 

RBI. 

Unit-3 

Financial sector: Money and Capital Markets in India: Structure, Functions and Significance; 

SEBI: Powers and Functions; Non-Bank Financial Intermediaries- Role and Significance; Recent 

Financial Sector Reforms in India. 

Unit-4 

Exchange Rate Determination: Fixed and Flexible, Theories of Exchange Rate: Mint Par, 

Purchasing Power Parity, Balance of Payments Theory. 


1. Bailey Roy (2005) The Economics of Financial Markets 

2. D.M. Mithani: Money, Banking and Public Finance 

3. A.D. Bain (1992) Economics of the Financial System 

4. Suraj.B.Gupta: Monetary Economics - Institutions, Theory & Policy;S Chand publications 

5. Suraj.B.Gupta:Monetary Planning for India 

6. Khan,MY: Indian Financial System;Tata-McGrawhill 

7. M.K. Lewis (2000), Monetary Economics, OUP 

8. M.R. Baye, D.W. Jansen (1996), Money Banking and Financial Markets, AITBS, 

(Indian Edition) 

9. Maurice Levi (1999), International Finance, Tata McGraw Hill 

10. L.M. Bhole (1999), Financial Institutions and Markets, Tata Mcgraw Hill 

11. R.R.Paul “Monetary Economics” 

12. R.B.I. Bulletin, Annual Report; Report on Currency and Finance 

13. R.B.I. - Report of the Committee on the Financial System (Narasimham Committee 

Report I) 


B.A. 2 nd (ECO. HONS) 

3 rd SEMESTER 

Paper - 306 

Issues in Indian Economy 

10(1322) 








Unit-1 

Basic Issues: Over population, poverty, unemployment, inequality, urbanization and Problems of 

civic amenities, Backwardness, rural- urban migration. 

Unit-2 

Regional Issues in India’s Economic Development: Regional imbalances and Economic 

backwardness, Causes and remedies. 

Haryana Economy: Basic Features, Growth and Sectoral Distribution of State Domestic Product. 

(SDP); Declining sex- Ratio and its social and economics implications; Regional disparities in 

Haryana; Globalization in Haryana Economy: Concept of effective cities and poverty eradication in 

haryana. 

Unit-3 

Human Resource Development: Role of Education and health: issues, problems & policies; Labor 

productivity: Issues, policies and programmes, Gender and Development. 

Unit-4 

Economic Reforms in India: Liberalization, privatization and Globalization: Need & Rationale; 

An Appraisal of Economic reforms in India; Competitiveness of Indian trade and Industry: Special 

Economic Zones, Highlights of Current Five Year Plan. 


1. M.P. Todaro & Smith, Economic Development in the Third World. Addison-Wesley. 6th ed. 

2. Uma kapila, Indian Economy: Issues in Development and Planning & Sectoral Aspects (2005). 

Academic Foundation. 

3. Arvind Virmani. Accelerating Growth and Poverty reduction: A Policy Framework for India’s 

Development (2004) 

4. Government of India, Economic Survey (latest) 

5. Government of India, Five Year Plan, (latest) 

6. Government of India. Finance Commission Report (Latest Ed.) 

7. Ray, Debraj, (1998)Development Economics, Princeton University Press, 

8. Banerjee, Abhijit, Ronald Benabon and Dilip Mookerjee (ed.), Understanding Poverty, OUP, 

2006. 

9. Statistical Abstract Haryana and Economic Survey of Haryana published by Department of 

Economic and Statistical Analysis Haryana (latest) 

10. Datt, Rudar & K.P. Sundaram, “Indian Economy” S. Chand & Company (Latest Ed.). 

11. Mishra S. K. & V. K. Puri, “Indian Economy”, Himalya Publishing House (Latest Ed.). 



3 rd SEMESTER 

Paper-307 

Development Economics & Planning 

10(1323) 

Theory paper: 80 







Unit-1 

Basic Concepts of Economic Development: Economic growth and Development, concept of 

underdevelopment and Basic Characteristics; Determinants & Measurement of economic 

development; Sustainable economic development. 

Unit-2 

Theories of Economic Development: Adam Smith, Mill, Other theories (Karl Marx, Schumpeter 

Unit-3 

Different Approaches to Development: Vicious Circle of Poverty, Lewis’ dual economy model, 

Leibenstein critical minimum effort theory, balanced vs. unbalanced growth theories. 

Unit-4 

Economic Planning and Policy: Development Planning: Rationale, Strategies and objectives of 

Planning; Role of State &Capital formation in economic development. 


1. Adelman, I, (1961), Theories of Economics Growth and Development, Stanford 

University Press, Stanford. 

2. Barro, R. and X. Salai- Martin, Economics Growth, McGraw Hill, New York. 

3. Chakravarti, S. (1982), Alternative Approaches to the Theory of Economic 

Growth, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 

4. Ghatak, S. (1986), An Introduction to Development Economics, Allen and 

Unwin, London. 

5. Higgins, B.(19590, Economic Development, W.W. Norton, New York. 

6. Kindleberger, C. P. (1977), Economics Development, (3 rd Edition), McGraw 


7. Meier, G.M. and J.E. Rauch (2005), Leading Issues in Economics Development, 

(8 th Edition), Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 

8. Todaro, M.P. and S.C. Smith (2003), (8 th Edition), Economics Development, 

Pearson Education, Delhi. 

9. Thirlwal, A.P. (1999), (6 th Edition), Growth and Development, Macmillan, U.K. 

10. Mishra S.K. and V.K. Puri ‘Economics Development and Planning. (Latest 

Edition) 

11. Myer and Taneja ‘Economics Development and Planning (latest Edition). 

Kalyani Publishers. 

12. Lekhi, R.N. ‘Economics of Development and Planning’, (Latest Edition) 



4 TH SEMESTER 

Paper-408 

Public Economics 

Time: 3 Hours Theory Paper: 80 







Unit-1 

Introduction: Nature & Scope of Public Economics; Public Goods: Concept, Characteristics & 

Types; Efficient Provision of Public Goods, Market Failure and Externalities; Principle of 

Maximum Social Advantage. 

Unit-2 

Public Revenue: Taxation: Meaning, Classification , Canons and Effects; Impact and Incidence of 

taxes: Concept and factors ; Public Debt: sources, Methods of Debt Redemption, Effects of Public 

Borrowing . 

Unit-3 

Public Expenditure: Meaning, Classification , Canons and Effects, Factors affecting Public 

Expenditure, Wagner’s Law, Peacock- Wiseman Hypothesis; 

Unit-4 

Budget: Concepts of revenue and capital expenditure, deficit types 

Fiscal Federalism: Fiscal Federalism in India, Centre –State Financial Relations, Latest Finance 

Commission Report. 

References 

Bailey Roy (2005) The Economics of Financial Markets 

DM Mithani: Money, Banking and Public Finance 

A.D. Bain (1992) Economics of the Financial System 

Suraj.B.Gupta: Monetary Economics - Institutions, Theory & Policy;S Chand publications 

Suraj.B.Gupta:Monetary Planning for India 

Khan,M.Y: Indian Financial System;Tata-McGrawhill 

R.K. Lekhi: Public Economics 

M.K. Lewis (2000), Monetary Economics, OUP 

M.R. Baye, D.W. Jansen (1996), Money Banking and Financial Markets, AITBS, (Indian Edition) 

Maurice Levi (1999), International Finance, Tata McGraw Hill 

L.M. Bhole (1999), Financial Institutions and Markets, Tata Mcgraw Hill 

R.B.I. Bulletin, Annual Report; Report on Currency and Finance 

R.B.I. - Report of the Committee on the Financial System (Narasimham Committee 

Report I) 

Joseph Stiglitz, Economics of the Public Sector, 3 rd Ed , W.W. Norton & Co; New- York/London 

10(1324) 


Paper-409 

Sectoral Development & Policies in India 

10(1325) 



Time: 3 Hours 






Unit-1 

Infrastructure in Indian Economy: Irrigation, Energy, Telecom, Transport, Health and Education 

(problems and prospects) 

Unit-2 

Agriculture: Nature and Importance, Major production and productivity trends, Land Reforms, 

Green Revolution , Agricultural Marketing. 

Unit-3 

Industry : Industrial sector at the time of independence, Growth of industry in recent years, Small 

Scale Industries, Industrial policy of 1956, 1991 and latest Policy. 

Unit-4 

Financial institutions for sectoral Development: Purpose and Functioning of NABARD, IFCI, 

ICICI, IDBI, SIDBI and EXIM Bank. 

References 

PN Dhar: Evolution of Economic Policy in India 

IG Patel: Glimpse of Indian Economic Policy 

Dreze Jean&Amartya Sen:Indian Development Selected Regional Perspective 

RC Dutt: Problems of India’s Development 

Mishra&Puri:Indian Economy 

I.C. Dhingra: Indian Economy 

A.N. Aggarwal: Indian Economy 


Paper-410 

Mathematics for Economics 

10(1326) 



Time: 3 Hours 






Unit-1 

Elementary Set Theory: Operations on sets; Ordered Pairs, Cartesian products of Sets. 

The Real numbers: Natural Numbers, Integers, rational and Irrational Numbers. 

Functions: Types of Functions; function in economic theory: Revenue, cost, demand, production 

and profit functions, limit and continuity of functions. 

Unit-2 

Matrices and determinants : Addition and matrix Multiplication determinants:Minors and 

Cofactors, inverse of a matrix and Cramer’s Rule 

Input Output analysis: Basic idea only. 

Unit-3 

Simple derivatives : First Principle Method, Rules of Differentiation, Economic applications. 

Partial Derivatives: Basic idea of Partial Derivatives. 

Unit-4 

Maxima and Minima : Unconstrained Maxima and minima( one variable only) with economic 

applications; 

Integration: Basic Rules of integration, Application of integration in Economics (Consumer and 

producer surplus only) 

References 

A.C. Chiang: fundamental Methods of mathematical Economics. 

Knut Sydsaeter and peter J. Hammond : Mathematics for Economic Analysis. 

D.R. Aggarwal: Quantitative Methods 

TR Jain, S.C.Aggarwaland R.K. Rana :Basic Mathematics for economists 

R.G.D. Allen:Basic Mathematics 


Scheme of B.A.-III (Economics)(General) Semester System 

3 rd Year 

Semester-V 90 10 

Issuses in Development 

and Planning with 

reference to India 

Semester-VI 90 10 

Sectoral Aspects of the 

Indian Economy 

10(1327) 


B. A. Part III (Economics) 

Semester- V 

Issues in Development and Planning with reference to India 

10(1328) 


Internal Asses: 10 

Time: 3 hours 






Economic Growth and Development: 

Unit – I 

Meaning, Determinants and Measurement of Development; Balanced and Unbalanced Growth; 

Development with limited supply of Labour (Lewis Model) Critical minimum effort thesis (Leibenstein Model) 

Import substitution strategy and consumption led - innovative - entrepreneurship strategy of development. 

Characteristics of Indian Economy: 

Unit – II 

Factors in Development: Capital formation (Physical and human), role of technology:: Economic 

reforms (1991): Approaches to liberalization; Privatization and Globalization and Indian Economy; 

Measuring the degree of Globalization in India; sustainability; Institutional factor. 

Unit – III 

Demography and Economic Development in India: 

Population and Economic Development, demographic trends, urbanisation, occupational structure and 

population policy; Employment (in the organized and unorganized sectors) and unemployment (open, under, 

disguised rural, urban) in India, Employment generation schemes and their impact. 

Indian Planning and Performance: 

Unit – IV 

Issues in Indian planning; Objectives and Critical - evaluation (Growth, Self-reliance. Employment - 

generation; Inequality - reduction; Poverty removal; Modernization and Competitiveness; Economic - 

reforms). Saving and investment; mobilization of Internal and External finance. 


1. M.P. Todaro & Smith, Economic Development in the Third World. Addison-Wesley. 6th ed. 

2. Uma kapila, Indian Economy: Issues in Development and Planning & Sectoral Aspects (2005). 

Academic Foundation. 

3. Arvind Virmani. Accelerating Growth and Poverty reduction: A Policy Framework for India’s 


4. Government of India, Economic Survey (latest) 

5. Government of India, Five Year Plan, (latest) 

6. Government of India. Finance Commission Report (Latest Ed.) 

7. Ray, Debraj, (1998)Development Economics, Princeton University Press, 

8. Banerjee, Abhijit, Ronald Benabon and Dilip Mookerjee (ed.), Understanding Poverty, OUP, 

2006. 

9. Statistical Abstract Haryana and Economic Survey of Haryana published by Department of 

Economic and Statistical Analysis Haryana (latest) 

10. Datt, Rudar & K.P. Sundaram, “Indian Economy” S. Chand & Company (Latest Ed.). 

11. Mishra S. K. & V. K. Puri, “Indian Economy”, Himalya Publishing House (Latest Ed.). 


B. A. Part III (Economics) 

Semester- VI 

Sectoral Aspects of the Indian Economy 

10(1329) 


Internal Asses: 10 

Time: 3 hours 






Agriculture: 

Unit – I 

Types of Pollution Agriculture: Its importance in the Indian Economy Problems and solutions 

regarding low productivity, agricultural credit, agricultural labour, agricultural marketing, and agricultural 

pricing. The Green Revolution. Land – reform; 

Unit – II 

Industry: 

Industrial Policy: pre and post Liberalization Era (1991), Relative roles of large and small scale 

Industries; Public and Private sector. The role and forms of foreign capital (Foreign institutional Capital, 

foreign Direct Investment). 

Foreign Trade: 

Unit -III 

Role and importance of foreign trade in India. The balance of trade and the balance of payments 

situation. India and International Institutions: World Trade Organization (WTO); The World Bank; The 

International Monetary Fund (IMF)- Their role in India’s Economic Development. 

Recent Developments in Indian Economy: 

Unit - IV 

State of the Indian Economy and Prospects; Fiscal Development and Public Finance; Prices and 

Monetary Management; Financial Intermediation and Markets; Human Development Poverty and Public 

Programmes. 

Haryana Economy: Growth and Sectoral Distribution of State Domestic Product. (SDP); declining 

sex – ratio and its social and economics implications; regional disparities in Haryana; Globalization in 

Haryana Economy: Concept of effective cities and poverty eradication in Haryana. 


1 Uma Kapila, Indian Economy since Independence.. 17th edition. Academic Foundation. 

2 Arvind Virmani. Accelerating Growth and Poverty reduction: A Policy Framework for India.s 


3 Government of India, Economic Survey (latest) 

4 Government of India, Five Year Plan, (latest) 

5 Statistical Abstract of Haryana, Department of Economics and Statistical Analysis Haryana 

(latest) 

6 Economic Survey of Haryana, Department of Economics and Statistical Analysis Haryana 

(latest) 

7 Datt, Rudar & K.P. Sundaram, “Indian Economy” S. Chand & Company (Latest Ed.). 

8 Mishra S. K. & V. K. Puri, “Indian Economy”, Himalya Publishing House (Latest Ed.). 

9 State Development Report Haryana (2009) Planning Commission, Govt. of India. 


Semester-5 

Paper-511 History of Economic Thought 

Paper-512 International Economics-I 

Paper-513 Environment Economics & Policy 

Semester-6 

Paper-614 Statistics for Economists 

Paper-615 International Economics-II 

B.A.Part-3 Economics Hons. 

Paper-616 Comparative Economic Development 

10(1330) 


B.A. 3 rd (HONS) 

5 TH SEMESTER 

Paper-511 

History of Economic Thought 








Unit-1 

Classical Thought Adam Smith: Division of Labour, Theory of value, Theory of growth, Ricardo : 

Theory of Rent, Distribution , Malthus : Theory of Population. 

Unit-2 

Neo-Classical Thought Marginalism: Jevons Menger and Walras (Main economic ideas) 

Alfred Marshall : As a great synthesizer; Price determination, Consumer and Producer’s surplus, 

elasticities and quasi-rent. 

Unit-3 

Keynesian Economics : Underemployment equilibrium, Effective Demand, MEC, Liquidity 

Preference, Role of fiscal policy. 

Unit-4 

Indian Economic Thought : Main economic ideas of Kantilya, Naroji, Gandhi ,Vakil & 

Brahmanand, J.K. Mehta and A.K. Sen. 

References 

O’Brien: Classical Economics 

Mark Blaug:History of Economic Thought 

Hajela,TN: History of Economic Thought 

Ajit Kumar Dasgupta:History of Indian economic thought 

Amartya Sen: On Ethics&Economics. 

Development as Freedom: Amartya Sen 

R.R Paul “History of Economic Thought” 

10(1331) 


Paper-512 

International Economics -I 








Unit-1 

International Trade and Trade Theories : Need & Importance of study of international 

economics, interregional and international trade, classical theories of international trade : Adam 

Smith’s Absolute advantage and Ricardo’s comparative advantage, Comparative advantage in term 

of opportunity cost; 

10(1332) 

Unit-2 

Other Trade Theories : Mill’s offer curve Analysis, Modern H-O theory of international trade, 

Factor price equalization theorem, Leontief Paradox. 

Unit-3 

Gains from Trade : Measurement of gains from Trade and their distribution, concepts of terms of 

trade : uses and limitations; trade as an engine of growth 

Hypothesis of secular deterioration of terms-of-trade and its relevance for Under Developed 

Countries (UDC’s) 

Unit-4 

The Theory of Interventions : Tariffs and Quotas : Partial and General effects (on National 

Income, employment, Terms-of-trade, BOP and Income distribution) Non Tariff Trade Barriers. 

References 

Dominic Salvatore: International Economics 

Bosoderston; “International Economics”. 

Rana&Verma: International Economics 

H.G.Mannur: International Economics 

D.M.K. Mithani: International Economics 

M.C.Vaish: International Economics 

V.C.Sinha: International Economics 

Francis Cherunilam : International Economics 

D.N. Dwivedi: International Economics 

Mrudula E: International Financial Institutions an Introduction. 


Paper-513 

Environment Economics & Policy 








Unit-1 

Environment and Economy: Nature and scope of environmental economics; Linkage between 

environment and economy; population-environment linkage. 

Unit-2 

Market failure: Incomplete markets; Externalities; Environment as public good – non exclusion, 

non-rivalry; Non-convexities; Asymmetric information. 

Unit-3 

Environment and Development: Natural resources; Asset markets theory; Concept of sustainable 

development; Green GDP; Environmental Kuznets Curve. 

Unit-4 

Environmental legislation: Pollution-causes, control and abatement; 

Environment protection mechanism in India; Global environmental issues – climate change, trade 

and environment. 

References 



� Sankar, U. (Ed.) (2001), Environmental Economics, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 

� James, A.J., M. N. Murty and Smita Misra (1999), Economics of Water Pollution – The Indian 

Experience, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 

� Varian. Hal R., (2006), Intermediate Micro-economics – A Modern Approach, 7th ed., East- 

West Press. 

� Chary, S.N. and Vyasulu, Vinod (2000), Environmental Management - an Indian Perspective, 

Macmillan, New Delhi. 

10(1333) 


B.A. 3 rd (HONS) 

6 TH SEMESTER 

Paper-614 

Statistics for Economists 








Unit-1 

Statistics: Meaning, Scope , importance and limitations. Frequency distribution: Bivariate and 

cumulative. 

Central Tendency: Mean, Median, Mode, Harmonic and Geometric Mean. 

Unit-2 

Measures of Dispersion: Range, Mean & Standard Deviation, Quartile Deviation, Coefficient of 

variation, percentile rank. 

Skewness and Kurtosis: Basic idea and methods. 

Unit-3 

Correlation : Simple coefficient of correlation (Karl Pearson & Spearman’s Rank Correlation), 

Coefficient of determination 

Regression: Estimate of Regression lines & regression equations, computation and interpretation 

of regression coefficients. Basic idea of standard Error and Probable Error. 

Unit-4 

Time Series Analysis : Concepts, components, methods of finding trend : Semi average, moving 

average, least square, ratio-to-average. 

Index Numbers : Types and Uses , Tests of Consistency, Fisher’s ideal Index. Fixed base and 

Chain base index numbers. Problems in Construction of Index numbers and the limitations of 

index numbers. 

References 

M.R. Spiegel (2 nd Edition), Theory and Problems of Statistics.I 

G.W. Snedecor,W.G.Cochran : Statistical Methods 

T.R. Jain, S.C. Aggarwal ,R.K.Rana: Basic statistics for economists 

S.P. Gupta: Statistical Methods 

S.C. Gupta: Fundamentals of Statistics. 

D.C Sancheti , and V.K Kapoor,: Statistics(Theory, Method and Application) 

10(1334) 


Paper-615 

International Economics- II 








Unit-1 

Balance of Payments : Meaning, Components, disequilibrium in (Balance of Payments); causes 

and measures to disequilibrium in Balance of Payment correct . 

Theories of BOP adjustment: Elasticity, Absorption and Monetary approach. 

Unit-2 

International Institutions : International Monetary Fund, and The World Bank: working and 

functions (Particularly in relation to Developing countries) 

International liquidity: Need, nature and problems; Multinational Corporations and working with 

special reference to India. 

Unit-3 

Regional Blocs : Custom union(s) (introductory view), WTO : organization and functions ;TRIPS, 

TRIMS. European Union (EU), ASEAN: organization structure; and working); 

Unit-4 

Foreign Trade of India: Changes in composition and direction of Foreign Trade since 1991, BOP 

disequilibrium–causes and policy measures, 

Trade Reforms : Need & rationale with special emphasis on Exchange Rate- reforms(full and 

partial convertibility of rupee), Latest Export and Import Policy. 

References 

Dominic Salvatore: International Economics 

Soderston: International Economics 

Rana&Verma: International Economics 

Mrudula E: International Financial Institutions-an Introduction. 

H.G.Mannur: International Economics 

D.M.K. Mithani: International Economics 

M.C.Vaish: International Economics 

V.C.Sinha: International Economics 

Francis Cherunilam : International Economics 

D.N. Dwivedi: International Economics 

Mrudula E: International Financial Institutions an Introduction. 

10(1335) 


Paper-616 

Comparative Economic Development 








Unit-1 

Economic Development of Britain : Basic features of British Economy and Trends( Industrial 

Revolution, Transport and Communication) 

Economic Development of USA : Basic features of US Economy and Trends(infrastructure, 

trade),Role of USA in world economic cooperation; Indo-US economic cooperation. 

Unit-2 

Economic Development of Japan : Agriculture, Industry; role of entrepreneurship; and 

technology 

Economic development of China :Agriculture, Industry and Trade; Cultural revolution; and 

Economic reforms. 

Unit-3 

Economic Development of USSR : Basic Features of USSR economy, Industry & Trade, Indo – 

USSR economic Cooperation, Glasnost , Prestorika & Disintegration of USSR economy. 

Growth miracle of Newly Industrialised countries: Taiwan, South Korea, and Singapore . 

Unit-4 

Role of State in economic development (regulatory and developmental role) : USA, USSR, 

China and Japan 

Lesson for India from the growth experience of these countries. 

References 

WHB Court: A concise economic History of Britain 

R Floud,McCloskey D: The economic History of Britain since 1700 

GC Allen1867-1937:A short economic History of modern Japan 

JW Hall,Peter Duus :The Cambridge History of Japan 

FG Walett: An economic History of the USA 

Stuart Kirby: An Introduction to Economic History of China. 

Marvice Dobb(1977) Sonit economic development since 1917 6 th Edition, Rutledge & kegan Paul. 

W.W.Lockwood(1966),Economic Development of Japan, Expanded edition, Princeton University 

press. 

Chalmers Johnson(1982),MITTI and the Japanese Miracle: The Growth of Industrial Policy 1925- 

1975, Stanford University Press. 

Alec Nove(1969)An economic History of USSR, Penguin,1969. 

10(1336) 


Syllabi and Scheme of Examination 

For M.A. Psychology (w.e.f. 2012-13) 


The M. A. Psychology course will be of FOUR semesters. In each semester there shall be four 

theory papers (100 marks each) and one practical (150 marks) leading to a degree of 2200 marks. 

M.A. (Semester-I) Psychology 

The 1 st Semester of M.A. Psychology would have following five papers, all the papers are 

compulsory. 

Paper No. Nomenclature Marks Time 

Paper-I SYSTEMS AND THEORIES 80+20 3 Hours 

Paper-II EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY 80+20 3 Hours 

Paper-III SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY (i) 80+20 3 Hours 

Paper-IV RESEARCH METHODS AND STATISTICS (i) 80+20 3 Hours 

Paper-V (i) PRACTICAL 100 3 Hours 

(ii) PROFILING OF EQUIPMENTS 50 1 Hour 

M.A. (Semester-II) Psychology 

The 2 nd Semester of M.A. Psychology would have following five papers, all the papers are 

compulsory. 


Paper-I PHYSIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY 80+20 3 Hours 

Paper-II COGNITIVE PSYCHOLOGY 80+20 3 Hours 

Paper-III SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY (ii) 80+20 3 Hours 

Paper-IV RESEARCH METHODS AND STATISTICS (ii) 80+20 3 Hours 

Paper-V (i) PRACTICAL 100 3 Hours 

(ii) PROFILING OF EQUIPMENTS 50 1 Hour 

10(1337) 


M.A. (Semester-III) Psychology 

The 3 rd Semester of M.A. Psychology would have four theory papers and one paper of practical; 

all the theory papers are optional and paper of practical is compulsory. The students may opt for any 

four of the ten theory papers. However, the options to be floated in any particular year would be 

decided by the Chairperson of the Department keeping in view the available resources. 


Paper-I: PSYCHOPATHOLOGY 80+20 3 Hours 

Paper-II: INTELLIGENCE 80+20 3 Hours 

Paper-III: INDUSTRIAL-ORGANISATIONAL 

PSYCHOLOGY (i) 80+20 3 Hours 

Paper-IV: PRINCIPLES AND APPLICATIONS OF 

GUIDANCE 80+20 3 Hours 

Paper-V: HUMAN DEVELOPMENT 80+20 3 Hours 

Paper-VI: PSYCHOMETRICS (i) 80+20 3 Hours 

Paper-VII: PERSONALITY (i) 80+20 3 Hours 

Paper-VIII: FUNDAMENTALS OF MILITARY PSYCHOLOGY 80+20 3 Hours 

Paper-IX (i) PRACTICAL 100 3 Hours 

(ii) PROFILING OF INSTRUMENTS 50 1 Hour 

M.A. (Semester-IV) Psychology 

The 4 th Semester of M.A. Psychology would have four theory papers and one paper of practical. 

The theory papers would be corresponding to optional papers opted in Semester-III, the paper of 

practical is compulsory. 


Paper-I: CLINICAL PSYCHOLOGY 80+20 3 Hours 

Paper-II: CREATIVITY 80+20 3 Hours 

Paper-III: INDUSTRIAL-ORGANIZATIONAL 

PSYCHOLOGY (ii) 80+20 3 Hours 

Paper-IV: PRINCIPLES AND APPLICATIONS OF 

GUIDANCE 80+20 3 Hours 

Paper-V: LIFE SPAN HUMAN DEVELOPMENT (ii) 80+20 3 Hours 

Paper-VI: PSYCHOMETRICS (ii) 80+20 3 Hours 

Paper-VII: PERSONALITY (ii) 80+20 3 Hours 

Paper-VIII: ADVANCED MILITARY PSYCHOLOGY 80+20 3 Hours 

Paper-IX (i) PRACTICAL 100 3 Hours 

(ii) PROFILING OF INSTRUMENTS 50 1 Hour 

10(1338) 


M.A. (Semester-I) Max. Marks: 80 

Paper-I: SYSTEMS AND THEORIES Time: 3 Hours 

NOTE: The question paper will consist of NINE questions. The candidate will have to attempt FIVE 

questions, selecting ONE question from each unit. The first question will be compulsory and will 

include 8 short-answer questions spread over entire syllabus. The remaining EIGHT questions will be 

set taking TWO questions from each unit. Each question will carry 16 marks. 

UNIT-I 

Psychology as Science, current status. Nature and characteristics of systems, theories. 

Schools: Associationism- British empiricism, S-R relationship, tenets. 

Structuralism- Contribution of Wundt and Titchener, methodology, tenets. 

Functionalism- Antecedents, pioneers, tenets. 

UNIT-II 

Behaviourism: Antecedents and foundation, methodology, tenets. 

Gestalt Psychology: Antecedents and foundation, empirical work, tenets. 

UNIT-III 

Psychoanalysis: Antecedents and foundation, basic concepts, tenets. 

Individual Psychology: Basic concepts and contribution. 

Analytic Psychology: Basic concepts and Contribution. 

UNIT-IV 

Field theory: Lewin’s life space- basic concepts and contribution; Tolman’s purposive behaviourism- 

basic concepts and contribution. 

S-R Theory: Hullian system and contribution; Skinnerian positivism; Guthrian associationism. 


Chaplin T. and Kraweic T.S. (1979). Systems and Theories of Psychology. NY: Thompson Learning. 

Wolman, B.B. (1995). Contemporary Theories and Systems in Psychology. Delhi: Freeman. 

Marx, M.H. & Hillix, W.A. (1978). Systems and Theories in Psychology. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill. 

10(1339) 



Paper-II: EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY Time: 3 Hours 





UNIT-I 

Experimental Psychology: Nature, Historical background, contribution of Weber, Fechner, Wundt, 

Galton. 

Sensory Processes: Visual and Auditory - structure and functions of eye and ear. 

UNIT-II 

Perception: Nature, Perception of Form, Space, Movement, and Time. 

Perceptual constancy, Illusion, Subliminal Perception 

UNIT-III 

Psychophysics: Problems and Methods of Classical Psychophysics. 

Signal Detection Theory: Basic Concepts, Assumptions, Psychophysical Procedures and applications. 

UNIT-IV 

Learning: Nature, Cognitive Learning, Classical Conditioning- Phenomena, Process and Theories, 

Instrumental Conditioning- Appetitive and Aversive. Discrimination Learning: Phenomena and 

paradigms. 


D’ Amato, M.R. (1970). Experimental Psychology. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill. 

Flaherty, C.F. , Hamilton, L.W., Gandelman, R.J., & Spear, N.E. (1977). Learning and Memory. Chicago: 

Rand McNally. 

Goldstein, E.R. (2007). Psychology of Sensation and Perception. New Delhi: Cengage Learning. 

Gordon, W.C. (1989). Learning and Memory. California: Brooks-Cole. 

Guilford, J.P. (1954). Psychometric methods (2 nd ed.). New Delhi: McGraw-Hill. 

Kling, J.W. & Riggs, L.A. (1971). Woodworth and Schlosberg’s Experimental Psychology. 

London: Methuen & Co. 

Mazur (1989). Learning and Behavour. New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India. 

Postman, L. & Egan, J.P. (1949). Experimental Psychology: An Introduction. Delhi: Kalyani Publisher. 

Sehiffman, H.R. (1982). Sensation and Perception: An Integrated Approach. New York: John Wiley & 

Sons. 

Snodgrass, J.G., Berger, G.L., & Haydon, M. (1985). Human Experimental Psychology. New York: Oxford. 

10(1340) 



Paper-III: SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY (i) Time: 3 Hours 





UNIT-I 

Social Psychology: Nature, Historical background, Scope and New Perspectives. 

Methods: Experimental, Observation, and Content analysis. 

UNIT-II 

Socialization: Nature, Process, Theories - Psychoanalytic, Cognitive Development, 

Social learning, and Ethological. 

The Self: Development of self, self-concept and self-esteem. 

UNIT-III 

Social Perception: Verbal and Nonverbal communication, Attribution process, Impression formation. 

Social Cognition: Social Inference, Emotional and Motivational biases, Schemas and Heuristics. 

UNIT-IV 

Attitude: Nature, Formation, Change and Consistency, and Measurement. 

Prejudice and Discrimination: Nature, Sources, Combating prejudice. 


Baron, R.A. & Byrne, D. (2003). Social Psychology: Understanding Human Interaction (6 th Ed.). New 

Delhi: Prentice-Hall of India. 

Baron, R.A. & Byrne, D. (2005). Social Psychology. New Delhi: Prentice-Hall of India. 

Daniel, P. & Cozby, P.C. (1983). Social Psychology. NY: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. 

Lindzey, L., & Aronson, E. (1975). The Handbook of Social Psychology (2 nd Edn.), Vol. IV & V. New 

Delhi: Amerind Publishing Co. 

Mathur, S.S (2004). Social Psychology. Agra: Vinod Pustak Mandir. 

Penrod, S. (1986). Social Psychology (2 nd Ed.) New Jersey: Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs. 

Taylor, S.E., Peplau, L.A. & Sears, D.O. (2006). Social Psychology (12 th Ed.). New Delhi: Pearson 

Education. 

10(1341) 



Paper-IV: RESEARCH METHODS AND STATISTICS (i) Time: 3 Hours 





Non-programmable calculators and statistical tables are allowed in the examination. 

UNIT-I 

Psychological Research: Nature, Characteristics, Univariate vs. Multivariate approach, Problem, 

Hypothesis, Variables - Types, Control of relevant variables. 

UNIT-II 

Types of Research: Experimental, Ex Post facto, Field studies, and Correlational. 

UNIT-III 

Normal Probability Curve: Characteristics, Applications. 

Hypothesis testing: Chi-square and t-test, significance of Mean Difference. 

Correlation: Concept, Product-moment and Rank difference methods. 

UNIT-IV 

Other methods of correlation: Biserial, Point biserial, and Tetrachoric. 

Partial correlation (first order), Multiple Correlation (three variables). 


Garrett, H.E. (1981). Statistics in Psychology and Education. Bombay: Vakils. 

Guilford, J.P. (1981). Fundamental Statistics in Psychology and Education (6 th Ed.). New Delhi: McGraw 

Hill. 

Kerlinger, F.N. (1973). Foundation of Behavioural Research. New York:Holt Rinehart and Winston. 

McGuigan, F.J. (1983). Experimental Psychology: Methods of Research (4 th Ed.). New Jersey: Prentice 

Hall. 

Shaughnessy, J.J. & Zechmeister, E.B. (1997). Research Methods in Psychology. New York: Mc Graw 

Hill. 

Singh, A.K. (1986). Tests, Measurements and Research Methods in Behavioural Sciences. New Delhi: Tata 

McGraw Hill. 

10(1342) 



Paper-V (i): PRACTICAL Time: 3 Hours 

Note: Any 10 practicals out of the following are to be conducted and reported during the semester. 

One practical will be allotted to a candidate during the examination and evaluation will be based on 

Practical Note Book, Performance during practical examination and Viva-voce. 

1. Retinal Colour Zones. 

2. Emert’s law. 

3. Figural after effect. 

4. Perceptual constancy. 

5. Phi-phenomenon. 

6. Perception of time. 

7. Autokinetic movement. 

8. Experiment of classical conditioning. 

9. Depth perception. 

10. Weber’s law. 

11. SDT. 

12. Muller Lyre illusion. 

13. Relative effectiveness of any two methods of learning. 

14. Serial position effect. 

15. Incidental v/s intentional learning. 

16. Discrimination learning. 

Paper-V (ii): PROFILING OF EQUIPMENTS Max. Marks: 50 

10(1343) 

Time: 1 Hour 

Candidate is required to prepare a profile of at least 16 equipments (8 Instruments and 8 

Tests), other than those included in Paper-V (i). Two equipment profiles will be allotted to a 

candidate during the examination and evaluation will be based on Profile Record, Report, and Vivavoce. 


M.A. (Semester-II) Max. Marks: 80 

Paper I: Physiological Psychology Time: 3 Hours 





UNIT I 

Introduction: Nature and Scope. Methods of Study: Ablation and Lesion, Recording Electrical Activity 

of Brain. Brain Stimulation-Electrical and Chemical. Imaging Techniques. 

UNIT II 

Neuron: Structure, types and functions. Conduction of Nerve impulse and synaptic transmission. 

Structure and Functions of Central Nervous System, Peripheral Nervous System-Peripheral Somatic 

and Autonomic Nervous System, Endocrine System. 

UNIT III 

Motivation: Peripheral and Central mechanisms of Hunger, Thirst and sex. 

Emotions: Central and Peripheral physiological correlates. Theories of Emotion: James-Lange, Cannon- 

Bard, and Papez-MacLean. 

UNIT IV 

Electrophysiological mechanisms associated with Learning and Memory. Sleep, Arousal and 

Dreaming: Nature, stages of sleep, Brain mechanisms of sleep and dreaming. Neural basis of arousal 

and attention. 


Bannett, T.L. (1977). Brain and Behaviour. California: Brooks/Cole. 

Leukel, F. (1985). Introduction to Physiological Psychology. New Delhi: CBS Publishers. 

Levinthal, C.F. (1990). Introduction to Physiological Psychology (3 rd Ed.). New Delhi: PHI. 

Morgan, T.H. and Stellar, A. (1965). Physiological Psychology. New York: McGraw Hill. 

Pinel, J.P.J. (2007). Biopsychology. New Delhi: Pearson. 

Plutchik, R. (1980). Emotion: A Psychoevolutionary Synthesis. New York: Harper and Row. 

Rosenzweig M.R. and Leiman, A.L. (1989). Physiological Psychology. New York: Random House. 

Thompson, R.F. (1982). Introduction to Physiological Psychology. New York: Harper and Row. 

10(1344) 



Paper-II: COGNITIVE PSYCHOLOGY Time: 3 Hours 





UNIT-I 

Cognitive Psychology: Historical beground, Scope, Approaches- Top-down, Bottom-up, and 

Information processing, Methods of study-Behavioural and Physiological. 

UNIT-II 

Attention: Nature, Capacity and Information Processing. Selective attention: Nature, Models-Filter and 

Attenuation. Divided Attention. Pattern Recognition: Template Matching, and Feature Analysis. 

UNIT-III 

Memory: Process, Models- Atkinson and Shiffrin, Level of Processing, and Parallel Distributed 

Processing Model. Autobiographical Memory. Eye-witness Testimony. Mnemonics. 

UNIT-IV 

Language: Properties, Structure and Processes of Language Acquisition. Thinking and Problem 

Solving: Well defined and ill defined problems, Blocks and Aids in problem solving. Reasoning: Types 

and Approaches. 


Eysenck, M.W., and Keane, M.P (2000). Cognitive Psychology: A students guide, Psychology Press. 

Galotti, K.M. (2000), Cognitive Psychology in and out of the Laboratory. Delhi: Thomson 

Kellogg, R.T. (2012). Fundamentals of Cognitive Psychology. Lab Angles: Sage. 

Matlin, M.W. (2008), Cognitive. New York: Wiley. 

Solso, R.L. (2001). Cognitive Psychology. Delhi: Pearson Education. 

Sternberg, R.J. (2007). Cognitive Psychology. Delhi: Thomson. 

10(1345) 



Paper-III: SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY (ii) Time: 3 Hours 





UNIT-I 

Group Dynamics: Structure, Functions and Classification of Groups, Group cohesiveness and 

Effectiveness. Group Norms: Formation, Conformity, Social roles, and Role conflict. 

UNIT-II 

Leadership: Nature, Styles, Theories: Trait, Contingency, Zeitgeist, and Path goal; Leader-follower 

relations. Social Influence: Conformity, Compliance, and Obedience. 

UNIT-III 

Interpersonal Relationship: Affiliation, Interpersonal Attraction and their determinants. 

Interpersonal Influence: Social power-kind and determinants; high-status, peer and low-status 

influencers. 

UNIT-IV 

Prosocial Behaviour: Helping, determinants of helping behaviour. Altruism: Stages of Development 

and Personality dispositions. Anti Social Behaviour: Aggression and violence-Causes and Prevention. 


Baron, R.A. & Byrne, D. (2005). Social Psychology. New Delhi: Prentice-Hall of India. 

Lindzey, L. & Aronson, E. (1975).The Handbook of Social Psychology (2 nd Ed.), Vol. II, III & IV. New 

Delhi: Amerind Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. 

Mathur, S.S (2004). Social Psychology. Agra: Vinod Pustak Mandir. 

Myers, D.G. (2006). Social Psychology (8 th Edn.)-Tata McGraw Hill International Editions. 

Penrod, S. (1986). Social Psychology (2 nd Edn.) New Jersey: Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs. 

Perlman, D. & Cozby, P.C.(1983). Social Psychology, New York: CBS College Publishing Holt, Rinehart 

and Winston. 

Taylor, S.E. Peplau, L.A. & Sears, D.O. (2006). Social Psychology (12 th Ed.). New Delhi: Pearson 

Education. 

10(1346) 



Paper-IV: RESEARCH METHODS AND STATISTICS Time: 3 Hours 





Non-programmable calculators and statistical tables are allowed in the examination. 

UNIT-I 

Research Design: Criteria and Principles, Between Groups and Within Groups Designs: Single factor 

and Factorial. Quasi-experimental designs: Non equivalent comparison groups and Time series 

designs. 

UNIT-II 

Sampling: Basic Principles, Probability and Non-Probability sampling techniques. 

Data Collection Techniques: Case Study, Observation, Interview, Questionnaire. 

UNIT-III 

Analysis of Variance: Basic Concepts, One way ANOVA (Separate and Repeated measures), Two-way 

ANOVA (Separate groups), Analysis of Trends. 

Regression Prediction (bivariate). 

UNIT-IV 

Nonparametric statistics: Sign Test, Wilcoxon Signed Ranks Test, Mann-Whitney U-Test, Median Test, 

Kendall Coefficient of Concordance. 


Anastasi, A. (1980). Psychological Testing. London: McMillan. 

Broota, K.D. (1989). Experimental Design in Behavioural Research. New Delhi: Wiley Eastern. 

Kerlinger,F.N. (1973). Foundation of Behavioural Research. New York: Holt Rinehart and Winston. 

McGuigan, F.J. (1983). Experimental Psychology: Methods of research (4 th Ed.). New Jersey: Prentice 

Hall. 

Shaughnessy, J.J. and Zechmeister, E.B. (1997). Research Methods in Psychology.New York: Mc Graw 

Hill. 

Siegel, S. and Castellan, N.J. (1988). Nonparametric statistics for the behavioural sciences. Kogakusha: 

McGraw Hill. 

Singh, A.K. (1986). Tests, measurements and research methods in behavioural sciences. New Delhi: Tata 

McGraw Hill. 

Winer, B.J. (1971). Statistical principles and experimental design. Kogakusha: McGraw Hill. 

10(1347) 



Paper-V (i): PRACTICAL Time: 3 Hours 

Note: Any 10 practicals out of the following are to be conducted and reported during the semester. 

One practical will be allotted to a candidate during the examination and evaluation will be based on 

Practical Note Book, Performance during practical examination and Viva-voce 

1. Study of STM. 

2. Retroactive inhibition. 

3. Schedule of reinforcement (instrumental conditioning). 

4. Choice reaction time. 

5. Selective listening 

6. Reminiscence 

7. Comparison of any two methods of memory 

8. Problem solving. 

9. Set in thinking. 

10. Creativity test. 

11. Concept formation 

12. Galvanic skin response. 

13. Study of emotions (Facial expression). 

14. Zeigarnic effect. 

15. Measurement of motives. 

16. Projective test of personality. 

Paper-V (ii): PROFILING OF EQUIPMENTS Max. Marks: 50 

10(1348) 

Time: 1 Hour 

Candidate is required to prepare a profile of at least 16 equipments (8 Instruments and 8 

Tests), other than those included in Paper-V (i). Two equipment profiles will be allotted to a 

candidate during the examination and evaluation will be based on Profile Record, Report, and Vivavoce. 


M.A. (Semester-III) Max. Marks: 80 

Paper-I: PSYCHOPATHOLOGY Time: 3 Hours 





UNIT-I 

Psychopathology: Meaning, Criteria, Theoretical Approaches–Biological, Psychodynamic, Behavioural, 

Cognitive, and Sociocultural. Classification of Abnormal Behaviour: Meaning, Purpose. Classification 

Systems – DSM and ICD. 

UNIT-II 

Clinical Patterns, Symptoms, and causes of Anxiety-Based Disorders: GAD, Panic Disorder, Phobia, 

OCD, Conversion Disorder, Dissociative disorders, Post traumatic Stress Disorder. 

UNIT-III 

Clinical Patterns, Symptoms and causes: Schizophrenia, Delusional Disorders, Mood Disorders, 

Organic Mental Disorders. Substance related Disorder - Alcoholism. 

UNIT-IV 

Clinical Patterns, symptoms, and causes of Psychophysiological Disorders: CHD, Hypertension, 

Asthma, Peptic Ulcer. Sexual and Gender Identity Disorders. Childhood Disorders: Mental Retardation, 

Disruptive Behaviour Disorders, Anxiety Disorders. 


Adams, H.E. & Sutker, P.B. (2001). Comprehensive Handbook Of Psychopathology. NY: Kluwer 

Academic. 

APA’s (1996). Diagnostic and Statistical Manual-IV TR. New Delhi: Jaypee Brothers. 

Carson, R.C., Butcher, T.N., & Susan, M.(2001). Abnormal Psychology and Modern Life (11 th Ed.). New 

York: Harper Collins. 

ICD-10. Casebook: The many faces of mental disorders. New Delhi: Jaypee. 

Hales, R.E., Yudofsky, S.C. & Talbott, J.A. (1999). Textbook of Psychiatry Vol. I & II. Washington: 

American Psychiatric Press. 

Irwin, B.W. (1976). Clinical Methods in Psychology. NY: Willey Interscience. 

Kaplan, H.I. and Sedock, B.J. (1983) Modern Synopsis of Psychiatry. Baltimore: Williams and Witkins. 

Kolb. L.C. and Brodie, H.K.H. (1982). Modern Clinical Psychiatry. (10 th Ed.). London: Saunders. 

10(1349) 



Paper-II: INTELLIGENCE Time: 3 Hours 





UNIT-I 

Intelligence: Nature, Historical views, Neurological Foundation, Genetic Basis, Environmental 

Influences. Racial and Gender differences. 

UNIT-II 

Theories: Spearman, Thurstone, Guilford, Cattell, Horn, Carroll. 

UNIT-III 

Theories: Jensen, Dass, Eysenck, Sternberg, Gardner, Emotional Intelligence. 

UNIT-IV 

Measurement of Intelligence: Issues and approaches- Psychometric Tests, Biological measures- Brain 

size volume, EEG and Related measures, Reaction Time. 


Anastasi, A. (1988). Psychological testing (6thEd.). New York: McMillan. 

Cattell, R.B. (1987). Intelligence: Its Structure, Growth, and Action. North Holland: Amsterdam. 

Eysenck, H.J. (1982). A Model for Intelligence. New York: Springer-Verlag. 

Guilford, J.P. (1967). The nature of Human Intelligence. New York: McGraw Hill. 

Sternberg, R.J. (1982). Advances in the Psychology of Human Intelligence (Vol.1.).NJ: Erlbaum. 

Sternberg, R.J. (2003). Handbook of Human Intelligence. London: Cambridge University Press. 

Sternberg, R.J. (1990). Metaphors of Mind: Conceptions of the Nature of Intelligence. London: 

Cambridge University Press. 

Sternberg, R.J. & Berg, C.A. (1992). Intellectual Development. London: Cambridge University Press. 

Sternberg, R.J. & Grigorenko, E. (1997). Intelligence, Heredity, and Environment. London: Cambridge 


Wolman, B.B. (1985). Handbook of Intelligence: Theories, Measurements and Applications. New 

York: John Wiley & Sons. 

10(1350) 



PAPER-III: INDUSTRIAL-ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY (i) Time: 3 Hours 





UNIT-I 

Introduction: Nature, historical background, fields, and contemporary challenges. 

Behaviour in organizations: Consistency vs. individual differences; classical, contingency, and X-Y 

theory. 

UNIT-II 

Job analysis: Objectives, methods; Job evaluation: Importance, methods. 

Personnel selection: Setting personnel specifications and criteria, methods of assessment. 

Personnel training: Principles, types, methods, evaluation of training effectiveness. 

UNIT-III 

Job and work environment: Human factors in job design, job enrichment; 

work environment, Hawthorne studies. Accidents and safety. 

Human performance: Time and motion studies, principles of performance, performance evaluation 

and appraisal. 

UNIT-IV 

Work related attitudes: Job satisfaction- antecedents and consequences; organisational commitment- 

types, antecedents and consequences; burnout, turnover and absenteeism. Work motivation: Basic 

concepts, motivational practices and incentives, Theories- Two-factor, ERG, Equity. 


Blum, M. L. & Naylor, J. C. (1984). Industrial Psychology: Its theoretical and social foundations. New 

Delhi: CBS Publishers. 

Colquitt, J.A., LePine, J.A., & Wesson, M.J. (2011). Organizational Behaviour. New Delhi: Tata McGraw 

Hill. 

Gosh, P.K. & Gorpande, M.B. (1986). Industrial Psychology. New Delhi: Himalaya Publication. 

Luthans, F. (2006). Organizational Behaviour (11 th Ed.). N.Y.: McGraw Hill. 

McMormik, E.J. & Ilgen (1980). Industrial and organizational Psychology (8 th Ed.). N.J.: Prentice Hall. 

Miner, J.B. (1991). Industrial-Organizational Psychology. N.Y.: McGraw Hill. 

Mohanty, G. (1990). Industrial and Organizational Psychology. New Delhi: Oxford and IBH. 

10(1351) 



Paper-IV: PRINCIPLES AND APPLICATIONS OF GUIDANCE Time: 3 Hours 





UNIT-I 

Guidance: Basic concepts, need, areas, fundamental objectives and principles. 

Guidance Services: Individual analysis, counselling, occupational and educational information, 

placement and follow up. 

Role of teachers in school guidance; organizing a guidance programme. 

UNIT-II 

Assessment in guidance: Nature, need, psychological tests: Characteristics, types; Intelligence tests, 

personality inventories, basic and special aptitude tests, interest inventories, and achievement tests. 

School testing programme, case history, and guidance folder. 

UNIT-III 

Group guidance: Meaning, objectives, process, and techniques of group guidance. Vocational guidance: 

Meaning; need, process, theories of vocational choice: trait, factor, developmental, personality, 

sociological, and economic. 

UNIT-IV 

Educational guidance: Meaning, need, objectives, and functions. Guidance for gifted and slow learners. 

Personal guidance: Meaning, objectives and process. 

Guidance personnel: Roles, functions, skills, and training. 


Anastasi, A. & Urbina, S. (1997). Psychological Testing. New York: McMillan. 

Bernard, H.W. & Fullmer, D.W. (1977). Principles of Guidance. New York: Crowell. 

Crow, L.D. & Crow, A.V.B. (1961). Introduction to Guidance: Basic Principles and Practices. New 

Delhi: Eurasia. 

Gupta, S.K. (1985). Guidance and Counselling. Delhi: Mittal. 

Miller, L.A., Mclntire, S.A., & Lovler, R.L. (2011). Foundations of Psychological Testing. Los Angeles: 

Sage. 

Pietrofesa, J.J. (1980). Guidance: An Introduction. Chicago: Rand McNally. 

10(1352) 



Paper-V: LIFE SPAN HUMAN DEVELOPMENT (i) Time: 3 Hours 





UNIT-I 

Human Development: Nature, theories- psychoanalytic, behaviouristic, social learning, and 

sociocultural. 

Genetic and environmental foundations of development, heredity-environment relationship, and 

cultural influences. 

UNIT-II 

Methods of study: Systematic observation, interview, and case study; longitudinal and cross-sectional 

designs. Biological, cognitive, and socioemotional processes; periods of development and other 

developmental issues. 

UNIT-III 

Prenatal development: How life begins, major periods in prenatal development, prenatal 

environmental influences, maternal factors. 

Postnatal development: Adjustment to postnatal life, birth process, complications, and postpartum 

period. 

UNIT-IV 

Physical development: course of physical growth, development of brain, factors affecting physical 

growth. Motor development: development in early and middle childhood, hormonal influences and 

sex differences in motor development. Perceptual development. 


Berk, L.E. (2003). Child Development. New Delhi: Pearson Education. 

Crain, W. (1980). Theories of Development. New Jersey: Prentice Hall. 

Hetherington M.E. & Parke, R.D. (1993). Child Psychology: A Contemporary View Point. New York: Mc 

Graw-Hill. 

Hurlock, E.B. (1997). Child Development. New Delhi: Tata Mc Graw-Hill. 

Santrock, J.W. (2011). Life Span Development. New Delhi: Tata Mc Graw-Hill. 

Shaffer, D.R. (1993). Developmental Psychology: Childhood and Adolescence. NY: Brooks/Cole. 

Srivastava, A. K. (1998). Child Development: An Indian Perspective: New Delhi: NCERT. 

10(1353) 



Paper-VI: PSYCHOMETRICS (i) Time: 3 Hours 





UNIT-I 

Psychological measurement: Nature, General theory, and Levels of measurement. 

Modern Psychophysical Theory: Law of comparative judgment, Steven’s power law, and Signal 

detection theory. 

UNIT-II 

Psychological scaling: Nature, Methods – Pair comparisons, Rank order, Equal appearing interval, 

Fractionation. Multidimensional scaling: Methods and Applications. 

UNIT-III 

Psychological Tests: Nature, Characteristics, Types of test scores, Theory of test scores, Speed and 

power problems. Theory of measurement error: Domain sampling model, Model of parallel tests. 

UNIT-IV 

Reliability: Meaning, Classical test theory, Methods of estimate, Reliability of speed tests, Sources of 

unreliability. 

Validity: Meaning, Current views, Validation procedures, Factors affecting validity. 


Anastasi, A. (1988). Psychological Testing (6thEd.). New York: McMillan. 

Guilford, J.P. (1954) Psychometric Methods (2 nd Ed.) New York: McGraw-Hill. 

Gulliksen, H. (1950). The Theory of Mental Tests. NY: John Wiley. 


Sage. 

Nunnally, J. (1978). Psychometrics Theory (2 nd Ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill. 

Singh, A.K. (1986). Tests, Measurements and Research Methods in Behavioural Sciences. New Delhi: 

Tata McGraw-Hill. 

10(1354) 



Paper-VII: PERSONALITY (i) Time: 3 Hours 





UNIT- I 

Introduction: Nature, Conceptual History; Nomothetic and Ideographic approaches; Basic 

Assumptions about human nature. 

Genetic and environmental determinants of personality. 

UNIT- II 

Personality theory: Nature, components, criteria for theory. 

Psychoanalytic Theories: Sigmund Freud, Alfred Adler, Carl Jung. 

UNIT- II 

Psychoanalytic Theories-Neo Freudian: Erik Erikson, Erich Fromm, and Karen Horney. 

Henry Murray’s Personology. 

UNIT-III 

Phenomenological Perspective: Carl Rogers, Abraham Maslow’s Humanism, George Kelly’s Personal 

Constructs. 

Albert Bandura’s Social Cognitive perspective. 

UNIT-IV 

Indian Perspective: Jaina Psychology- Concept of self, conscious reality, mind and body interaction; 

Buddhist psychology- Thought, mind, consciousness, Western interpretation of Buddhist concepts; 

Transpersonal psychology in Bhagavad-Gita. 


Baughman, E.E. (1972). Personality: The psychological study of Individual. NJ: Prentice Hall. 

Hjelle, L.A. & Ziegler, D.J. (1992). Personality Theories: Basic Assumptions, Research, and Applications 

(3 rd Ed.). NY: McGraw-Hill. 

Hall G.S. & Lindzey, G. (1985). Theories of Personality (3 rd ed.) New Delhi: Wiley Eastern. 

Pervin, L.A. (1978). Personality Theory Assessment and Research. New York: John Wiley & Sons. 

Phares, E.J. (1991). Introduction to personality (3 rd ED.). NY: Harper Collin. 

Rao, K.R., Paranjpe, A.C. & Dalal, A.K. (2008). HB of Indian Psychology. Delhi: Foundation Books. 

10(1355) 



Paper-VIII: FUNDAMENTALS OF MILITARY PSYCHOLOGY Time: 3 Hours 





Unit-I 

Military Psychology: Nature, Scope, Historical perspective, Application, Developments, 

Contemporary issues and Emerging trends. 

Unit-II 

Selection, Allocation and Training: Psychological Assessment for Personnel selection- Situational 

Tests- Cognitive and Personality based assessment, Issues and Perspectives. Selection for special 

task, Pilot Selection. 

Need, types and methods of training. 

Unit-III 

Leadership in Military: Effective leadership, Leading small and large units, Leadership in peace 

and war, Leadership for change and stability, Leadership and subordination, Group cohesion and 

morale. 

Unit-IV 

Military as a unique organization: Structure and functional issues and future perspectives. Issues 

relating special operations, training and performance in special situations, futuristic warfare. 

Recommended books: 

1. Hall, R. & Mangelsdroff, A.D. (1991). Handbook of Military Psychology. USA: John Wiley & 

Sons. 

2. Kennedy, C.H. & Zillmer, E.A. (2006). Military Psychology: Clinical and Operational 

Applications. N.Y: Guilford Press. 

3. Ramachandran, K. (in press). Handbook of Military Psychology. Delhi: DIPR. 

4. Shalit, B.(1988). The Psychology of Conflict and Combat. N.Y: Praeger. 

10(1356) 



Paper-IX (i): PRACTICAL Time: 3 Hours 

Note: The candidate will conduct and report three practicals from each optional paper in semester- 

III. Practicals will be decided by the teacher teaching the paper. One practical will be allotted to a 

candidate during the examination and evaluation will be based on Practical Note Book (25 marks), 

Performance (25 marks) and Viva-voce (50 marks). 

Paper-IX (ii): PROFILING OF EQUIPMENTS Max. Marks: 50 

10(1357) 

Time: 1 Hour 

The candidate will prepare a profile of three measuring instruments from each optional paper, 

other than those covered in Practicals. Two instrument profiles will be allotted to a candidate during 

the examination and evaluation will be based on Profile Record (12 marks), Report (12 marks), and 

Viva-voce (26 marks). 


M.A. (Semester-IV) Max. Marks: 80 

Paper-I: CLINICAL PSYCHOLOGY Time: 3 Hours 





UNIT-I 

Clinical Psychology: Nature, Evolution, Professional Issues: Roles, Ethics, and Training. Current 

debates. 

UNIT-II 

Clinical Assessment: Case History, Clinical Interview, Psychological Tests – MMPI, Rorschach Inkblot 

Test, Wechsler Intelligence Scales. Neuropsychological Assessment. 

UNIT-III 

Clinical Intervention: Nature, Goals and course of Psychotherapy. Psychoanalysis, Hypnosis, 

Behaviour therapy, Biofeedback. 

UNIT-IV 

Clinical Intervention: Cognitive therapy, Cognitive-Behaviour Therapy, Client Centered Therapy, 

Family Therapy, Chemotherapy, ECT. 


Hales, R.E., Yudofsky, S.C. & Talbott, J.A. (1999). Textbook of Psychiatry Vol. I & II. Washington: 

American Psychiatric Press. 

Kendall. (1980). Modern Clinical Psychology. NY: Willey. 

Kolb. L.C. and Brodie, H.K.H. (1982). Modern Clinical Psychiatry. (10 th Ed.). London: Saunders. 

Korchin, S.J. (1975). Modern Clinical Psychology. NY:Basic Books. 

Pomerantz, A.M. (2008). Clinical Psychology: Science, Practice, and Culture. Los Angles: Sage. 

Richard, D.C.S. & Huprich, S.K. (2009). Clinical Psychology: Assessment, Treatment, and Research. NY: 


Wolberg, L.R. (1988). The Techniques of Psychotherapy (Vol. 1 & 2). London: Jason Aronson Inc. 

Wolman, B.B. (1965). Handbook of clinical Psychology, New York: Mc Graw Hill. 

10(1358) 



Paper-II: CREATIVITY Time: 3 Hours 





UNIT-I 

Creativity: Nature, Historical views. Theories: Psychodynamic, Humanistic, Developmental, 

Psychometric, Stage and Componential Process, Cognitive, Evolutionary, Topological, Systems. 

UNIT-II 

Factors Affecting Creativity: Genetic, Neurobiological, and Sociocultural. 

Assessment of Creativity: Projective- Inkblot, Word Association; Psychometric Batteries- Torrance, 

Guilford. 

UNIT-III 

Current research: Creativity and Intelligence, Creativity and Personality, Creativity and Motivation, 

Creativity and Culture. 

UNIT-IV 

Creativity in everyday life, creativity in organization and education, creativity in 

artwork, creativity in eminent people. Enhancing Creativity: 

Programs and Strategies. 


Anastasi, A. (1988). Psychological Testing (6 th Ed.). NY: McMillan. 

Kaufman, J.C. (2009).Creativity 101. NY: Springer. 

Kaufman, J.C. & Sternberg, R.J. (2010). The Cambridge Handbook of Creativity. NY: Cambridge 


Rickards, T., Runco, M.A. & Moger, S. (2009). The Routledge Companion to Creativity. London: 

Routledge. 

Runco, M.A. (2007). Creativity Theories and Themes: Research Development and Practice. NY: 


Sternberg, R.J. (1999). Handbook of Creativity. NY: Cambridge University Press. 

Torrance, E.P. (1965). Rewarding Creative Behaviour, NJ: Prentice Hall. 

10(1359) 



PAPER-III: INDUSTRIAL-ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY (ii) Time: 3 Hours 





UNIT-I 

Organisational structure: Basic concepts, types, classical and modern theory. Modern organisational 

designs. Organisational culture: Nature, types, creating, maintaining, and changing a culture. 

UNIT-II 

Communication: Basic communication process, formal and informal, Fayol’s, Barnard’s, and modern 

perspective, methods to improve communication. Decision making: 

Process, techniques, models – Economic Rationality, Social, Bounded Rationality. 

UNIT-III 

Group dynamics and teams: Types of groups, dynamics of informal and formal groups. Teams: 

Characteristics, types, team building, team effectiveness. 

Leadership: Nature, styles, role and activities, theories: Trait, Exchange, Contingency, and Path-Goal. 

UNIT-IV 

Organizational Conflict: Nature, causes, conflict resolution and management. 

Organizational change and development: Nature of change process, resistance, strategic planning, 

approaches to managing change. 


Colquitt, J.A., LePine, J.A., & Wesson, M.J. (2011). Organizational Behaviour. New Delhi: Tata McGraw- 

Hill. 

Luthans, F. (2006). Organizational Behaviour (11 th Ed.). NY: McGraw-Hill. 

McMormik, E.J. & Ilgen (1980). Industrial and Organizational Psychology (8 th Ed.). NJ: Prentice Hall. 

McShane, S.L., Glinow, M.A.V., & Sharma, R.R. (2011). Organizational Behaviour. New Delhi: Tata 

McGraw-Hill. 

Miner, J.B. (1991). Industrial-Organizational Psychology. NY: McGraw-Hill. 

Robbins, S.P. (1993). Organizational Behaviour: Concepts controversies, and applications (6 th Ed.). 

New Delhi: Prentice-Hall of India. 

10(1360) 



Paper-IV: PRINCIPLES AND APPLICATIONS OF COUNSELLING Time: 3 Hours 





UNIT-I 

Counselling: Need, principles, goals, emergence of counselling as a profession. 

Skills, training and traditional activities of counselors. 

Counselling process: Establishing structure, therapeutic environment, and strategy. 

UNIT-II 

Counselling techniques: Directive, non-directive, and eclectic. 

Assessment in counseling: Meaning, purpose, and types of assessment, psychological tests and nontest 

methods. Using assessment for treatment planning, monitoring treatment progress, for 

evaluation and accountability. 

UNIT-III 

Counseling and psychotherapies: Psychoanalytic, individual psychology, person centered, behavioural, 

rational emotive behaviour therapy, reality therapy, transactional analysis. Counselling in schools, 

organizations and mental health settings. 

UNIT-IV 

Counselling applications: Counselling for parents and children, counselling for special populations- 

substance abusers, AIDS patients, abuse victims, women, older adults, and differentially abled people. 

Ethical and legal issues in counselling practice. 


Gelso, C. J. & Fretz, B.R. (2000). Counselling Psychology (2 nd Ed.). London: Wadsworth. 

Nystul, M.S. (2001). Introduction to Counselling, New Mexico State University: Allyn and Bacon. 

Palmer, S. & McMohan, G. (1997). Handbook of Counselling Psychology, London: British Association 

for Counseling. 

Pietrofesa, J.J. et al. (1978). Counselling: Theory, Research, and Practice. Chicago: Rand McNally. 

Rao S.N. (2001). Counselling Psychology. New Delhi: Tata Mc Graw-Hill. 

Gibson, R.L. (2005). Introduction to Counselling and Guidance. New Delhi: Pearson Education. 

Shertzer, N. & Stone, S.C. (1971). Fundamentals of Counselling (2 nd Ed.). Boston: Houghton Mifflin. 

Whiston, S.C. (2009). Principles and Applications of Assessment in Counseling(3 rd Ed). NY: Cengage 

Learning. 

10(1361) 



Paper-V: LIFE SPAN HUMAN DEVELOPMENT (ii) Time: 3 Hours 





UNIT-I 

Cognitive development: Nature, approaches- Piaget, Vygotsky, Information processing. Language 

development: Behaviourist, Nativist, and interactionist perspective. 

Emotional development: Development of emotional expression, understanding and responding to other’s 

emotions, emergence of self-conscious and emotional self-regulation. 

UNIT-II 

Development of Self: Emergence of self, development of self-concept and self-esteem, constructing an 

identity, understanding others and social problem solving. Sex role development: 

Gender stereotypes and gender roles, gender identity and gender schema theory. 

UNIT-III 

Transition from childhood to adolescence: Hormonal changes and physical growth, sexual maturation, 

reactions to pubertal changes, identity crisis, stress, adolescent problems. Ecology of development: 

Impact of family, peers, school, and media on adolescence. 

UNIT-IV 

Problems of aging: Biological perspective; physical changes, habits and health. Family life adjustments, 

widowhood, remarriage, and cohabitation in old age. Psychological issues: 

Control vs. dependency, social support and interaction, problems of vocation and retirement. 


Bee, H. & Boyd, D. (2002). Life Span Development. Boston MA: Allyn & Bacon. 

Brodzinsky, D.M. Gormly, A.V. & Anibron, S.R. (1986). Life Span Human Development. New Delhi: CBS 

Publishers. 

Hurlock, E.B. (1997). Child Development. New Delhi: Tata Mc Graw-Hill. 

Laura E Berk, L.E. (2003). Development Through the Lifespan. New Delhi: Pearson Eduction. 

Newman, B.M. & Newman, P.R. (1975). Development Through Life: A Psychological Approach. New 

York: Wadsworth Publishing Company. 

Santrock, J.W. (1999). Lifespan Development. New York, MC Graw-Hill. 

Stewart, A.C., Perlmutter, M. & Friedman, S. (1988). Life Long Human Development. New York: John 

Willey & Sons. 

10(1362) 



Paper-VI: PSYCHOMETRICS (ii) Time: 3 Hours 





UNIT-I 

Test construction: Test plan and composing test items; Construction of power and speed tests; 

Construction of Homogeneous Personality Tests; Problems of scoring weights and scoring formulas. 

UNIT-II 

Construction of tests for special purposes: Tests for mastery learning, Tailored tests; Construction of 

attitude scales; Development of norms. 

UNIT-III 

Item response theory: Deterministic and probability models. 

Issues in Psychological Testing: Response biases and response sets, Test bias and use for minorities, 

Validity in clinical setting, Ethical issues. 

UNIT-IV 

Factor analysis: General concepts, assumptions, Methods – Centroid and Principal Components, 

Rotation of factors: Criteria, orthogonal and oblique approaches; Applications and major pitfalls of 

factor analysis. 


Anastasi, A. (1988). Psychological testing (6thEd.). New York: McMillan. 

Fruchter, B. (1954) Introduction to Factor Analysis. New York: Van Nostrand. 

Guilford, J.P. (1954) Psychometric Methods (2 nd Ed.) New York: McGraw-Hill. 

Harman, H.H. (1976). Modern Factor Analysis. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. 


Sage. 

Nunnally, J. (1978) Psychometrics Theory (2 nd Ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill. 

Singh, A.K. (1986). Tests, measurements and research methods in behavioural sciences. New Delhi: 

Tata McGraw-Hill. 

Torgerson, W.S. (1967) Theory and Methods of Scaling (2 nd Ed.). New York: 

John Wiley & Sons. 

10(1363) 



Paper-VII: PERSONALITY (ii) Time: 3 Hours 





UNIT-I 

Type vs. Trait Approach: Galen’s Theory of Temperament, Sheldon’s and Kretschmer’s Personality 

Typology. Fundamentals of Trait Approach: Lexical, Statistical, and Theoretical perspectives. 

Continuity, Change, and Coherence in personality. 

UNIT-I 

Allport’s Trait Theory. Cattell’s Theory: Basic concepts, Identification of Temperament, Ability, and 

Dynamic traits. Eysenck’s Theory: Structure, Biological basis, Physiological and behavioural correlates. 

UNIT-III 

Gray’s theory of arousability. Five-Factor model: Structure, scientific evidence, behavioural correlates, 

cross cultural perspective. Zuckerman’s alternative Five Factor Model. 

UNIT-IV 

Issues in Personality: Brain asymmetry, Field dependence, reflection impulsivity. Theoretical and 

Measurement issues; Principles of Personality Assessment; Self-report 

inventories, Projective techniques, Objective performance tests. 


Allport, G.W. (1961). Pattern and Growth in Personality. NY: Holt, Rinehart and Willston. 

Anastasi, A. (1980). Psychological testing. London : McMillon. 

Buss, D.M. and Cantor, N. (1989). Personality Psychology: Recent trends and emerging directions. 

New York: Springer-Verlag. 

Cattell, R.B. and Kline, P. (1977). The Scientific Analysis of Personality and Motivation, London: 


Eysenck, H.J. (1981). Model for personality. New York: Springer-Verlag. 

Hall G.S. and Lindzey, G. (1985). Theories of Personality (3 rd Ed.) New Delhi: Wiley Eastern. 

Hogan, R., Johanson, J., and Briggs, S. (1997). Handbook of Personality Psychology. New York: 


John, O.P., Robins, R.W. & Pervin, L.A. & (2008). HB of Personality: Theory and Research (3 rd Ed.). NY: 

Oxford Press. 

Larsen, R.J. & Buss, D.M. (2011). Personality Psychology: Domains of Knowledge about Human Nature. 

New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill. 

Phares, E.J. (1991). Introduction to personality (3 rd ED.). NY: Harper Collin. 

10(1364) 



Paper-VIII: ADVANCED MILITARY PSYCHOLOGY Time: 3 Hours 





Unit-I 

Mental Health issues in Military. Concept of Mental Health, Scope and issues in Military setup; Stress, 

Combat Stress, Coping with stress- Self Help, Debriefing, Group support. Substance Abuse and Self 

Defeating Behaviour: Prevention and intervention strategies. 

Unit-II 

Interpersonal relations, Organizational Culture, and Climate in Military Organisation. Camaraderie 

and military civilian relation in context of human values- cultural and social factors. 

Unit-III 

Psychological warfare: Concept, History and functions. Psychological operations: Low Intensity 

Conflict, Terrorism and insurgency. 

Unit-IV 

Man-machine-environment interface: Human factors, Human error, Safety. Cognitive, Personality, 

Extreme environment and perceptual deprivation factors in military performance. Vigilance, 

Complacency, Military hardiness and adjustment. 

Recommended books: 

1. Hall, R. & Mangelsdroff, A.D. (1991). Handbook of Military Psychology. USA: John Wiley & Sons. 

2. Kennedy, C.H. & Zillmer, E.A. (2006). Military Psychology: Clinical and Operational Applications. 

N.Y: Guilford Press. 

3. Ramachandran, K. (in press). Handbook of Military Psychology. Delhi: DIPR. 

4. Shalit, B.(1988). The Psychology of Conflict and Combat. N.Y: Praeger. 

10(1365) 



Paper-IX (i): PRACTICAL Time: 3 Hours 

Note: The candidate will conduct and report three practicals from each optional paper in semester- 

IV. Practicals will be decided by the teacher teaching the paper. One practical will be allotted to a 

candidate during the examination and evaluation will be based on Practical Note Book (25 marks), 

Performance (25 marks) and Viva-voce (50 marks). 

Paper-IX (ii): PROFILING OF EQUIPMENTS Max. Marks: 50 

10(1366) 

Time: 1 Hour 

The candidate will prepare a profile of three measuring instruments from each optional paper, 

other than those covered in Practicals. Two instrument profiles will be allotted to a candidate during 

the examination and evaluation will be based on Profile Record (12 marks), Report (12 marks), and 

Viva-voce (26 marks).

PDF compression, OCR, web optimization using a watermarked ...

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?